JP2023126015A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of optimizing management of the game machine for granting a large number of putout balls.SOLUTION: A difference in balls is a difference between a first count value counted based on game balls consumed in a game and a second count value counted based on prize balls, a specific value is a value preset based on a difference when at least the second count value is larger than the first count value, game control means can control the following games in a suppression mode in determination that a difference in balls reaches the specific value by ball difference determination means, and can perform notification after suppression regarding control in the suppression mode when a difference in balls reaches the specific value and control is performed in the suppression mode, and an informing mode is changed when a predetermined condition is satisfied in the notification after suppression.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines (generally referred to as "pachinko machines") and reel-type gaming machines (generally referred to as "pachislot machines").

Conventionally, a lottery is held to determine whether or not it is a jackpot based on the game ball entering the starting slot, and if the lottery result is a jackpot, the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the display device to generate a jackpot game. There are known gaming machines that let you play. Furthermore, many gaming machines have been proposed that control the machine to be more advantageous to the player than in normal situations after the end of a jackpot game (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2016-26097 Publication

Incidentally, in recent years, even when a large amount of balls are awarded to a cheater due to a new fraudulent act, it is difficult to distinguish it from a case where a large amount of balls are awarded to a player due to a bias in the probability of winning or losing. First, it may be difficult for gaming halls to urge cheaters to stop playing, creating a problem in which gaming machines are difficult to manage. Furthermore, due to bias in the probability of winning or losing, a large amount of balls may be awarded to legitimate players, and problems such as so-called "addiction" have also arisen.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can appropriately manage a gaming machine that has a large amount of balls issued. It is in.

Effective solutions to achieve the above objectives are presented below. In addition, the effects, etc. will be explained as necessary. Further, for ease of understanding, corresponding configurations and the like in the embodiments of the invention will be shown as appropriate, but the invention is not limited in any way.

In order to achieve the above object, in the invention according to claim 1,
A game board having a plurality of winning holes is provided, a symbol variation game is performed based on a ball entering a starting hole provided on the game board, and a predetermined winning game is executed when the result of the symbol variation game is a win. In gaming machines,
a prize ball awarding means for awarding a prize ball based on winnings in the entry prize slot;
difference ball determination means for determining whether or not the difference ball number for a predetermined period has reached a specific value;
a game control means for controlling the progress of the game;
a notification means for making a predetermined notification;
Prepare,
The difference ball is the difference between a first count value counted based on the game balls consumed in the game and a second count value counted based on the prize balls,
The specific value is a value preset based on a difference when at least the second count value is larger than the first count value,
The game control means controls subsequent games in a suppressed manner when the difference ball determining means determines that the difference ball has reached the specific value,
When the difference ball reaches the specific value and is controlled in the suppression mode, it is possible to perform post-suppression notification regarding the fact that the ball is controlled in the suppression mode,
The post-suppression notification is characterized in that the notification mode changes when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

In the above configuration, when the difference ball determining means determines that the difference ball has reached a specific value, the subsequent games are controlled in a suppressed manner, so that a large amount of balls will not be awarded in the subsequent games. Therefore, it is possible to prompt the player to stop playing, and to optimize the management of a gaming machine that has been given a large amount of balls. In addition, when the difference ball reaches a specific value and is controlled in the suppression mode, it is possible to execute a post-suppression notification that the ball is controlled in the suppression mode, and the post-suppression notification changes the notification mode when a predetermined condition is met. Therefore, after making it aware that the game is being controlled in the suppression mode, for example, by suppressing the notification mode, it is possible to prevent the post-suppression notification from interfering with surrounding players. (For example, see paragraphs 2724 to 2771, FIG. 143, etc.).

As described above, according to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can appropriately manage a gaming machine that has been given a large amount of balls.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine that is an embodiment of the present invention. It is a front view perspective view of a pachinko machine shown in a state where the upper side is tilted forward. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from the front. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. It is a perspective view showing a door frame, a main body frame, and an outer frame that constitute a pachinko machine in a state in which the hinges are rotated and opened. It is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine as seen from the front with the pachinko machine disassembled into its main components. It is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine as seen from the back with the pachinko machine disassembled into its main components. It is a front view of the Pachinko machine shown with the door frame removed. 9 is an exploded perspective view showing the game board separated from the main body frame in FIG. 8. FIG. It is a front view of the pachinko machine shown with the door frame and game board removed. 11 is a rear view of the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 10. FIG. FIG. 11 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine of FIG. 10, seen diagonally from the front. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame and the main body frame as seen from the front. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame and the main body frame as seen from the rear. FIG. 3 is a plan sectional view of the outer frame cut at the center in the vertical direction. It is a perspective view showing the lower part of an outer frame. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame as seen from the front with its main components disassembled. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame as seen from the rear, with the main components disassembled. FIG. 11 is a plan view of the pachinko machine of FIG. 10 cut at the vertical center. 20 is a sectional view taken along the line A--A in FIG. 19. FIG. 9 is a front view of main parts showing a firing unit, a foul unit, etc. in cross section in the front view of FIG. 8; FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame base unit of the main body frame, disassembled into its main components and viewed from the front. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame base unit of the main body frame disassembled into its main components and viewed from behind. (a) is a front view of a main body frame base in a main body frame base unit, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which a plurality of main body frame bases are stacked in a perspective view. (a) is a perspective view of the ball firing unit in the main body frame seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the ball firing unit in the main body frame seen from the back. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the ball firing unit disassembled and seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball firing unit exploded and seen from the back. (a) is a perspective view of the firing unit cover of the ball firing unit seen from the rear left, and (b) is an explanatory diagram of the ball firing unit showing only the firing unit cover in cross section when viewed from the front. FIG. 3 is a front view of the ball firing unit in which a firing subtraction sensor and a firing mallet are shown in broken lines. (a) is a perspective view of the foul unit in the main body frame seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the foul unit in the main body frame seen from the back. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the foul unit taken apart and seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the foul unit taken apart and seen from the back. (a) is an explanatory view showing the foul shutter in a closed state in a side cross section of the foul unit, and (b) is an explanatory view showing the foul shutter in an open state in a side cross section of the foul unit. (a) is a perspective view of the foul unit of the second embodiment seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the foul unit of the second embodiment seen from the back. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the foul unit of the second embodiment as seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the foul unit of the second embodiment as seen from the rear. (a) is an explanatory view showing the foul shutter in a closed state in a side cross section of the foul unit of the second embodiment, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the foul shutter in the open state in a side cross section of the foul unit of the second embodiment. FIG. (a) is a perspective view of the circulation ball path unit in the main body frame seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the circulation ball path unit in the main body frame seen from the back. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the circulation ball path unit as seen from the front. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the circulation ball path unit as seen from behind. (a) is a plan view showing only the ball meandering member and the ball removal shutter in the circulation ball path unit, and (b) is a perspective view seen from the front showing only the ball meandering member and the ball removal shutter in the circulation ball path unit. be. (a1) is an explanatory view showing the ball extracting shutter and the ball meandering member together with the ball catch tray in a side cross section in the closed position, and (a2) is an explanatory view showing only the portion of the ball extracting shutter in (a1) from the bottom. , (b1) is an explanatory view showing the ball extracting shutter and the ball meandering member together with the ball receiving tray in a side cross section in the open position, and (b2) is an explanatory view showing only the portion of the ball extracting shutter in (b1) from the bottom. be. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing a front cross section of the circulation ball path unit cut at the out ball sensor portion, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the front cross section of the circulation ball path unit cut at the safe ball sensor portion. It is a diagram. (a) is a front perspective view showing an enlarged view of the lower part of the main body frame together with the outer frame with the meandering cover of the circulation ball path unit removed; FIG. 3 is an enlarged perspective view of the lower part of the main body frame together with the outer frame when viewed from behind. It is a top view which shows the ball meandering member, the meandering cover, the ball removal shutter, and the gauge part in a circulating ball path unit. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing an enlarged main part of a back cross section cut at the out-ball sensor part in a state where the lid member of the ball dissolving mechanism is closed in the circulation ball path unit attached to the main body frame; (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the lid member in an open state in (a). (a) is an explanatory side cross-sectional view showing the iron ball with the ball meandering member and the ball removal tray in a state where the iron ball is magnetically attached to the ball removal shutter in the closed position, and (b) is an explanatory view showing the iron ball in the ball removal shutter in the open position. It is an explanatory side cross-sectional view showing the ball meandering member and the ball removal tray together with the ball in a state where the ball is magnetically attached, and (c) is an explanatory view showing the iron ball on the lower surface by sliding the ball removal shutter from the state of (b) to the closed position. It is an explanatory view showing a ball meandering member and a ball removal tray together with a side cross section in a state where they are magnetically attached. (a) is a perspective view of the ball lifting unit in the main body frame seen from the front left, (b) is a perspective view of the ball lifting unit in the main body frame seen from the front right, and (c) is a perspective view of the ball lifting unit in the main body frame. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the lifting unit seen from behind. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the ball lifting unit showing a state in which the ball motor base and the cassette pressing piece are opened and the ball cassette is removed. (a) is a plan view of the ball lifting unit shown without the Kuma cassette installed, and (b) is a plan view of the ball lifting unit shown together with the Kuma cassette with the Kuma motor base and cassette pressing piece opened. FIG. 3(c) is a plan view of the ball lifting unit shown in a state where the ball playing cassette is attached. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing how the door frame is closed when the Kuma cassette is incompletely locked, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing how the door frame moves from the state of (a) in the closing direction and a protrusion on the door frame is shown. FIG. 10C is an explanatory view showing a state in which the Kuma motor base is in contact with the tip of the Kuma motor base, and (c) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the door frame is closed and the Kuma cut is locked from the state in FIG. FIG. 3 is a front view showing an enlarged main part of the ball lifting unit attached to the main body frame with the ball cassette removed. (a) is a right side view showing the main parts of the ball lifting mechanism and the ball lifting mechanism in the ball lifting unit, (b) is a rear view showing the main parts of the ball lifting mechanism, and (c) is a right side view showing the main parts of the ball lifting mechanism. It is a top view of the main part of a lifting mechanism seen from arrow A of (b). It is an explanatory view showing the relationship between a lifting spiral shaft and polishing cloth in a ball lifting unit. (a) is an enlarged view of the parts of the lifting inlet sensor and the lifting outlet sensor, and is a perspective view of the ball lifting unit seen from the rear left, and (b) is a perspective view of the ball lifting unit located at the lifting entrance sensor. FIG. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing the front and rear parts of a ball sensor including a photosensor in a ball path. (a) is a perspective view of the Kuma cassette of the ball lifting unit seen from the front left, (b) is a perspective view of the Kuma cassette seen from the rear right, and (c) is a perspective view of the Kuma cassette cut at the center in the left-right direction. FIG. (a) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit in the main body frame seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit in the main body frame seen from the back. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit disassembled and seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit disassembled and seen from the back. It is a front sectional view of the ball sending unit cut at the site of the firing front sensor. It is a perspective view showing a state in which the main body frame is opened relative to the outer frame, and the back cover and frame board unit are opened. It is an explanatory view showing enlarged parts of the frame board unit in the outer frame and the main body frame. This is a reference photo showing the rear side of the main body frame with the frame board unit opened. It is an explanatory view showing various passages for game balls on the rear side of the main body frame from the back. It is an explanatory view schematically showing the flow of game balls in the main body frame. 1 is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration of a pachinko machine. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows launch permission processing. It is a flowchart which shows a holding ball subtraction process. It is a flowchart which shows the ball possession addition process by a foul ball. It is a flowchart which shows launch control processing. It is a time chart showing the operation of a firing solenoid and a ball feeding solenoid in a firing sequence. (a) is a flowchart showing a firing control process different from that in FIG. 67, and (b) is a flowchart showing a holding ball subtraction process in the case of the firing control process of (a). It is a flow chart showing prize ball processing. It is a flowchart which shows lifting motor operation processing. It is a table showing the relationship between the lifting inlet sensor, the lifting exit sensor, and the operation of the lifting motor. It is a graph showing the relationship between the firing operation of the game ball and the operation of the ball lifting unit. It is a graph showing the operation of the ball lifting mechanism in the ball lifting unit. (a) is a flowchart showing security processing, and (b) is a flowchart showing security processing in an embodiment different from (a). It is a table showing the relationship between a circulating ball shortage sensor, a circulating ball excess sensor, and error notification. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the orientation of a magnetic sensor that can detect lines of magnetic force from a magnet, (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the orientation of a magnetic sensor that cannot detect lines of magnetic force from a magnet, and (c) is an explanatory diagram showing the orientation of a magnetic sensor that cannot detect lines of magnetic force from a magnet. It is an explanatory diagram schematically showing a detection range by a magnetic sensor on a game board using a perspective view, and (d) is an explanatory diagram showing a positional relationship between a magnetic sensor and a magnetic body in which lines of magnetic force from a magnet cannot be detected. (e) is an explanatory diagram showing the positional relationship between a magnetic sensor and a magnetic body that can detect lines of magnetic force from the magnet, and (f) is an explanatory diagram showing the magnetic sensor and the holding part separately. It is a front view of a game board showing a transparent center accessory etc. as opaque. FIG. 79 is a perspective view of the game board in FIG. 78 viewed from the front right. FIG. 79 is a perspective view of the game board in FIG. 78 viewed from the front left. FIG. 79 is a perspective view of the game board of FIG. 78 viewed from behind. It is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into its main components and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into its main components and viewed from behind. It is a front view of the game board showing the inside of the game area where the game balls circulate by cutting the front unit parallel to the surface of the game panel. (a) is a front view of the lottery accessory in the center accessory, and (b) is a perspective view of the lottery accessory seen from above in front. It is a side sectional view which cut the lottery accessory in the center accessory at the center in the left-right direction. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing in cross section a state in which the game ball cannot be looped in the lottery accessory, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing in cross section a state in which the game ball can be looped in the lottery accessory. It is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls in a lottery accessory. It is a front view of the game board shown in a normal state. It is a front view of the game board shown in a state in which the back front elevation decoration unit of the back front performance unit is dropped from the standby position to the performance position from the normal state. It is a front view of the game board shown in a state in which the rear rear elevation decorative body of the rear rear production unit is moved from the retracted position to the appearance position from the normal state. From the normal state, the back and front lifting decoration unit of the back and front presentation unit is dropped from the standby position to the presentation position, and the rear and rear lifting decoration unit of the back and rear presentation unit is moved from the retracted position to the appearance position. It is a front view of a game board. 1 is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration of a pachinko machine. FIG. It is an explanatory view showing the center accessory of the first embodiment attached to the game panel by cutting it in the middle in the vertical direction and showing it together with the front component. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the decorative body of the center accessory from the front in a state where it is disassembled into a front decorative part and a rear decorative part, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the decorative body consisting of the front decorative part and the rear decorative part from the front. FIG. FIG. 95 is an explanatory view showing the center frame of the center accessory of FIG. 94 placed on a stand with its rear end facing down; 95 is an explanatory diagram showing, in partial cross section, a center accessory equipped with a center frame to which a decorative body different from that shown in FIG. 94 is attached. FIG. (a) is an explanatory diagram of the main part of the center accessory of the second embodiment seen from within the frame, (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in (a), and (c) is an explanatory diagram of the main part of the center accessory of the second embodiment. It is an explanatory view showing a state in which the center frame of the center accessory of (a) is placed on a stand with its rear end facing down. It is a front view showing the game board in which the center accessory of the third embodiment is provided, with the rear side of the game panel omitted. FIG. 100 is an exploded perspective view of the center accessory and game panel of FIG. 99 viewed from the front in an exploded state. It is an exploded perspective view of the center accessory of FIG. 99 seen from the front. (a) to (g) are explanatory diagrams showing various joining patterns between the first frame and the second frame in the center accessory of the third embodiment. (a) is a front view showing the main part of the game board provided with the side unit of the second embodiment, and (b) is a perspective view of (a) seen from the front. (a) is an exploded perspective view showing the side unit disassembled from the game panel in the game board of FIG. 103, (b) is an exploded perspective view showing the side unit of (a) exploded from the front; (c) is an exploded perspective view of the side unit seen from the back of (b), and (d) is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the game panel and the side unit in a longitudinal section. FIG. 105 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the side unit and the game panel in FIG. 104 in a cross section. FIG. 104 is an explanatory diagram showing a side unit having a different form from the side unit in FIG. 103 in a vertical section along with a game panel. (a) is an explanatory view showing a side unit with a different form from the side unit shown in FIG. 105 together with a game panel in a vertical cross section, and (b) is a main part of the LED board and board cover of the side unit in (a). FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing a perspective view. FIG. 108 is an explanatory diagram showing a side unit having a different form from the side unit shown in FIG. 107 together with a game panel in a vertical section. It is an explanatory view showing a side unit of a further different form in a longitudinal section along with a game panel. It is an explanatory view showing a side unit of a further different form in a longitudinal section along with a game panel. (a) is an explanatory view showing a side unit of a further different form together with a game panel in cross section, and (b) is an explanatory view showing (a) in longitudinal cross section. (a) is a front view showing the main part of the game board in which the side unit etc. of the third embodiment are provided, and (b) is an explanatory view showing an enlarged view of the out port in (a). , (c) is an explanatory diagram showing a longitudinal section of (b). (a) is an explanatory diagram showing an enlarged view of the exit part of the game board in which a side unit etc. having a finger rest in a different form from that shown in FIG. 112 is provided, and (b) is a longitudinal view of (a) FIG. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing a panel board of a game panel in which an opening to which a side unit is attached and an outlet are continuously connected. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which the non-contact surface part is provided behind the LED board, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which the non-contact surface part is provided in a different form from (a) to the rear of the LED board. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing an example, (c) is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which the non-contact surface portion is provided so as to cover the LED board, and (d) is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which the non-contact surface portion is provided over the entire circumference of the unit cover. FIG. It is an explanatory view showing a frame decoration member which can be attached to and detached from a door frame. It is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine when the door frame is opened and the frame decoration member is attached and detached during normal business hours. It is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine when the frame decoration member is removed while the door frame is opened in reuse confirmation state A, and the frame decoration member is attached while the next door frame is opened. It is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine when the frame decoration member is removed while the door frame is opened in reuse confirmation state B, and the frame decoration member is attached while the next door frame is opened. It is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine when the frame decoration member is attached and detached while the door frame is open in the reuse confirmation state A. It is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine when the frame decoration member is attached and detached while the door frame is open in reuse confirmation state B. It is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine when the frame decoration member is attached after determining that the frame decoration member is not connected at the determination timing. It is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine when the frame decoration member is removed while the door frame is opened in the error state and the reuse confirmation state A, and the frame decoration member is attached while the next door frame is opened. It is a time chart showing an example of the amount of balls to be paid based on the transition of the stop counter. This is a table showing clear conditions for "amount of balls to be paid out calculated before the start of the no-stop state" and "restriction on gaming during the no-go state". It is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine when the amount of balls put out reaches a specific value and the game is restricted. It is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine when the restriction on the game is canceled when the power is turned on again after the power is cut off. This is a specific example of performance when the amount of balls put out reaches a specific value at the timing when a game ball enters the jackpot hole during a jackpot game. This is a specific example of performance in the case where the amount of balls put out reaches a specific value at the timing when a game ball enters the general winning hole during the variable display of special symbols. This is the limit clear pattern table 4 that is selected when the limit clear pattern selection switch is set to "4". It is a time chart showing the behavior of a pachinko machine when a slight abnormality occurs during a normal state or a stopped state. It is a time chart showing the behavior of a pachinko machine when a severe abnormality occurs during a normal state. It is a time chart showing the behavior of a pachinko machine when a severe abnormality occurs during a stopped state. It is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine when a slight abnormality occurs during the stop preparation state. It is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine when a severe abnormality occurs during the stop preparation state. This is a specific example of performance when a slight abnormality occurs during a normal state or a stopped state. This is a specific example of performance when a severe abnormality occurs during a normal state or a discontinued state. This is a specific example of performance when a minor abnormality or a severe abnormality occurs during the termination preparation state. It is a time chart showing the transition of advance notice display after starting advance notice display. This is a modification of the restriction clear pattern table 4 when the power is turned on. It is a time chart showing that the output of the special external signal is started before the start of the termination preparation state and the termination state. It is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine when a similar state of stopping occurs after clearing the stopped state when the power is turned on. It is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine when the advance notice display and the progress impossible display are displayed during the standby state. It is a schematic perspective view which shows the back side of the side unit of yet another different form. 145 is an enlarged side view showing the vicinity of the magnetic sensor shown in FIG. 144. FIG. 145 is an enlarged plan view showing the vicinity of the spherical sensor shown in FIG. 144; FIG. It is a schematic perspective view which shows the back side of the starting port unit of a different form. 148 is an enlarged rear view of the vicinity of the second starting port sensor shown in FIG. 147. FIG. FIG. 7 is a schematic rear view showing another aspect of the main wiring. It is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine when the game board A1 is replaced with the game board A2 when the power is cut off. It is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine when the game board A1 is attached and detached when the power is cut off. It is an enlarged view of a frame control board. This is a table showing conditions for clearing the number of balls. 12 is a time chart showing the establishment of conditions for the occurrence of a counting permission state in which the number of balls held can be settled. It is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine when the counting button switch is operated. It is a time chart showing the behavior of a pachinko machine when it shifts to a ball-extracting state when the power is turned on. It is a time chart showing the behavior of a pachinko machine when it shifts to a ball-extracting state when the power is turned on. It is a figure in which a magnetic sensor is provided around a foul ball sensor. It is a time chart showing the behavior of a pachinko machine when magnetism is detected by a magnetic sensor. It is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine when various switches are operated when the power is turned on in a situation where no game board is attached.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
A pachinko machine 1 that is an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 7. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine that is an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine shown with the upper side tilted forward. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 5 is a perspective view showing the door frame, main body frame, and outer frame of the pachinko machine in an open state by rotating the hinges. FIG. 6 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine broken down into its main components and seen from the front, and FIG. 7 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine broken down into its main components and seen from the back.

The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment is used by being installed in an island facility of a game hall. In this pachinko machine 1, a large number (for example, 40 to 60) of game balls B are enclosed without being discharged to the outside or supplied from the outside, and by circulating inside, the player can play the game. This is a gaming machine that does not touch the ball B, so-called an enclosed gaming machine or a managed gaming machine. In this pachinko machine 1, the number of balls held by a player is converted into data and handled as ball holding data.

The game ball B enclosed in the pachinko machine 1 may be made of SUS304 as long as it has the same diameter (hereinafter also referred to as diameter D. Diameter D = 11 mm) as a game ball used in a conventional pachinko machine. It may be made of non-magnetic stainless steel such as SB, or it may be a conventional iron ball (SB). In addition, when the game ball B is made of stainless steel, it does not rust like a conventional iron ball even if it is enclosed in the pachinko machine 1 for a long period of time.

The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 that can be opened and closed from the front of the outer frame 2, and a door frame 3. A main body frame 4 that supports the main body frame 4 in an openable and closable manner and is attached to the outer frame 2 in an openable and closable manner, and a main body frame 4 that is detachably attached to the main body frame 4 from the front side and is visible from the player side through the door frame 3. A game board 5 having a game area 5a into which a game ball B is driven is provided.

[2. Outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be explained mainly with reference to FIGS. 8 to 16 and the like. FIG. 8 is a front view of the pachinko machine with the door frame removed. FIG. 9 is an exploded perspective view showing the game board separated from the main body frame in FIG. 8. 10 is a front view of the pachinko machine shown with the door frame and game board removed, FIG. 11 is a rear view of the pachinko machine of FIG. 10, and FIG. 12 is a front view of the pachinko machine of FIG. FIG. FIG. 13 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame and main frame as seen from the front in an exploded state, and FIG. 14 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame and the main body frame as seen from the back in an exploded state. FIG. 15 is a plan sectional view of the outer frame cut at the center in the vertical direction. FIG. 16 is a perspective view showing the lower part of the outer frame.

The outer frame 2 can be attached to an island facility of a game hall (not shown), and the main body frame 4 can be attached to the main frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed forward and can be attached and detached. The outer frame 2 includes an outer frame main body 10 that is entirely formed in a vertically elongated frame shape, an outer frame assembly fitting 20 to which the outer frame main body 10 is assembled, and an outer frame hinge that supports the main body frame 4 in an openable and closable manner. A mechanism 30, an outer frame locking fitting (not shown) for locking the body frame 4 in a closed state, a curtain plate 45 attached to the lower frame body 14 of the outer frame body 10, and a top surface of the curtain plate 45. A sliding plate 46 to be attached is provided.

The outer frame main body 10 of the outer frame 2 connects a left frame body 11 and a right frame body 12 that extend in the vertical direction and are spaced apart from each other in the left and right directions, and the upper ends of the left frame body 11 and the right frame body 12. The lower frame 14 connects the lower ends of the left frame 11 and the right frame 12 to each other. The left frame body 11 and the right frame body 12 are each formed from an extruded metal such as an aluminum alloy. The upper frame body 13 and the lower frame body 14 are made of wood. The left frame body 11, the right frame body 12, the upper frame body 13, and the lower frame body 14 have the same dimensions in the front-rear direction.

The outer frame assembly fittings 20 of the outer frame 2 include an upper left fitting connecting the left frame 11 and the upper frame 13, an upper right fitting connecting the right frame 12 and the upper frame 13, and a left upper fitting connecting the left frame 11 and the upper frame 13. It has a lower left metal fitting that connects the frame 11 and the lower frame 14, and a lower right metal fitting that connects the right frame 12 and the lower frame 14. The lower left metal fitting also serves as the outer frame lower hinge body 35.

The outer frame hinge mechanism 30 includes an upper outer frame hinge body 31 provided at the upper left end of the outer frame body 10 and a lower outer frame hinge body 35 provided at the lower left end of the outer frame body 10. ing.

The outer frame upper hinge body 31 of the outer frame hinge mechanism 30 is attached to the upper surface of the left end of the upper frame body 13, and its front end projects further forward than the outer frame body 10. The outer frame upper hinge body 31 has a bearing groove 31a that extends upwardly and downwardly and is open at one side in a part that protrudes forward from the outer frame main body 10, and a bearing groove 31a that extends forward from the outer frame main body 10. It has a locking member 32 that is provided on the lower surface of the portion projecting to the outside and can open and close the open portion of the bearing groove 31a.

The bearing groove 31a of the outer frame upper hinge body 31 pivotally supports the body frame hinge shaft 511a of the body frame upper hinge body 511 of the body frame 4 by inserting the body frame hinge shaft 511a of the body frame upper hinge body 511 from the released part. be able to. In a normal state, the lock member 32 of the outer frame upper hinge body 31 is located at a lock position in which the open portion of the bearing groove 31a is closed by the biasing force of an elastic piece (not shown). When the locking member 32 is moved to the release position against the biasing force of the elastic piece, the bearing groove 31a becomes open to the side, and the body frame hinge shaft 511a can be inserted into the bearing groove 31a from the side. , the main body frame hinge shaft 511a inserted into the bearing groove 31a can be removed from the bearing groove 31a.

The lower outer frame hinge body 35 of the outer frame hinge mechanism 30 is attached to the upper surface of the left end of the curtain plate 45 at a portion (upper portion) that overlaps with the lower frame body 14, and its front end protrudes further forward than the outer frame body 10. ing. The lower outer frame hinge body 35 has a hinge shaft 35a that projects upward at a portion that projects further forward than the outer frame main body 10. By inserting the hinge shaft 35a of the lower outer frame hinge body 35 into the outer frame shaft hole (not shown) of the lower body frame hinge body 512 in the body frame 4, the lower body frame hinge body 512 is rotatably supported. can do.

The outer frame hinge mechanism 30 has the main frame hinge shaft 511a of the main body frame upper hinge member 511 in the main body frame 4 pivotally supported by the bearing groove 31a of the outer frame upper hinge member 31, and the hinge shaft 35a of the outer frame lower hinge member 35. By inserting the main body frame 4 into the outer frame shaft hole of the main body frame lower hinge body 512, the main body frame 4 can be supported in an openable and closable manner.

Two outer frame locking fittings of the outer frame 2 are provided on the inner surface (left side surface) of the right frame body 12, vertically spaced apart from each other. The outer frame locking fitting can lock the main body frame 4 in a closed state with respect to the outer frame 2 so that it cannot be opened by locking the outer frame lock claws 784 of the lock unit 780 on the main body frame 4, respectively. .

The curtain plate 45 of the outer frame 2 is attached to the lower frame body 14, and its front end projects further forward than the lower frame body 14. The curtain plate 45 is made of synthetic resin. Two sliding plates 46 are provided on the upper surface of the curtain plate 45, spaced apart from each other in the left and right directions. The sliding plate 46 is a member with which the lower end surface of the main body frame 4 comes into contact when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. The sliding plate 46 is made of a low-friction material with low frictional resistance, and allows the main body frame 4 to slide easily, thereby facilitating opening and closing.

To explain the curtain plate 45 in more detail, the curtain plate 45 is a curtain formed to cover a portion of the upper end surface of the lower frame body 14 on the front side of the center in the front-rear direction and the front end side of the lower frame body 14. A plate body 45a, a hinge body cover portion 45b provided near the left end of the upper surface of the curtain body body 45a, and a rear wall portion 45c extending upward from the rear end of the hinge body cover portion 45b in a flat plate shape. It has a guide display section 45d provided on the upper surface of the curtain main body 45a.

The hinge body cover portion 45b of the curtain plate 45 is provided so as to cover the lower surface and side surfaces of the outer frame lower hinge body 35. As a result, when a player, a worker for maintenance, transportation, installation, etc. reaches out to the vicinity of the outer frame lower hinge body 35, the hand directly touches the outer frame lower hinge body 35 due to the hinge body cover portion 45b. The edges of the lower outer frame hinge body 35 can prevent injury.

Further, since the lower surface and side surfaces of the lower outer frame hinge body 35 are covered by the hinge body cover portion 45b, the lower outer frame hinge body 35 can be hidden from the player side, and the curtain plate 45 (curtain plate It is possible to enhance the sense of unity with the main body 45a) and improve the appearance.

The rear wall portion 45c of the curtain plate 45 is configured such that when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the rear surface of a lower main body frame hinge body 512 of the main body frame 4, which will be described later, comes into contact with the front surface of the rear wall portion 45c. It is set in. As a result, when the body frame 4 is closed against the outer frame 2, the body frame lower hinge body 512 comes into contact with the rear wall portion 45c, thereby restricting the body frame 4 from further hinge rotation toward the rear side. be able to.

As shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, the guide display section 45d of the curtain plate 45 is provided so as to protrude rearward from the rear side of the upper surface of the curtain plate main body 45a, and the left-hand sliding plate 45 is disposed in the left-right direction. It extends from the rear part to the rear part of the sliding plate 46 on the right side. In this guide display section 45d, an arrow pointing left near the left end and an arrow pointing right near the right end are displayed, and between the two arrows there is a message "!Fixed to this range. The words ``Nails and fixing fittings are prohibited from protruding!'' are displayed. These arrows and characters are engraved using a mold for injection molding the curtain plate 45.

The guide display section 45d is provided so as not to come into contact with the main body frame 4, which is provided so as to be openable and closable with respect to the outer frame 2. This guide display section 45d is for calling attention to the operator when installing the pachinko machine 1 on the island equipment of the game hall. Specifically, when fixing the lower frame body 14 of the outer frame 2 to the island equipment with mounting screws (not shown), the heads of the mounting screws are not guided within the range displayed on the guide display section 45d. This is to call attention not to protrude above the display section 45d. By following this warning and fixing the outer frame 2 with the mounting screws, when the main body frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2, the mounting screws will not come into contact with the main body frame 4, and the mounting screws will not touch the main body frame 4. There will be no interference.

According to this guide display section 45d, it is possible to prevent the mounting screws fixing the outer frame 2 from interfering with the main body frame 4, so that the main body frame 4 can be prevented from being damaged due to interference of the mounting screws. You can avoid putting it away. In addition, since the guide display section 45d serves as a mark for the amount of driving in of the mounting screws to fix the outer frame 2, there is no need to drive in the mounting screws while opening and closing the main body frame 4 so that the mounting screws do not interfere with each other. , work efficiency can be improved.

Furthermore, since the guide display section 45d is provided, when checking the fixing state of the outer frame 2 to the island equipment, by using the guide display section 45d as a guide, it is easy to visually check whether the mounting screws are in good condition or not. It can be confirmed.

In addition, since the guide display section 45d indicating the fixing range of the mounting screw is integrally molded with the curtain main body 45a, the curtain main body 45a can be easily attached to the lower frame 14 and assembled to the outer frame 2. The guide display section 45d can be provided in the frame 2, and the cost can be reduced compared to the case where the guide display section 45d is provided separately.

In the above embodiment, the guide display section 45d that protrudes rearward from the rear end of the curtain body 45a is shown as extending continuously in the left-right direction from the arrow at the left end to the arrow at the right end. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and only the portions indicated by the left and right arrows may protrude rearward from the rear end of the curtain body 45a.

Further, in the above embodiment, the guide display section 45d is engraved during injection molding of the curtain plate 45, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be pasted with a sticker, printed or painted. , the guide display section 45d may be provided.

Further, in the above embodiment, the guide display section 45d is provided on the curtain board 45, but the guide display section 45d is not limited to this, and may be provided on the lower frame body 14, the sliding board 46, etc. . When the guide display section 45d is provided on the lower frame body 14, it may be affixed with a sticker, stamped with ink, or stamped with a branding iron, for example. When the guide display portion 45d is provided on the sliding plate 46, the sliding plate 46 may be marked with a concave shape, for example.

[3. door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 1 to 3 and FIGS. 5 to 7. The door frame 3 is approximately the same size as the inside of the outer frame 2 and is formed into a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, and is attached so that the inside of the outer frame 2 can be opened and closed from the front via the main body frame 4. It is being The door frame 3 is provided so as to be openable and closable with respect to the main body frame 4, and has a door frame main body 100 having a game window 101 through which the game area 5a of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 faces forward when the door frame 3 is closed. , a transparent glass 120 that is removably attached to the rear side of the door frame body 100 and closes the game window 101, a number-of-balls display section 140 that displays the number of balls held by the player, and a game board 5. A handle 160 that is operated by the player to drive the game ball B into the area 5a, a cylindrical handle cover 170 that surrounds the outer periphery of the handle 160, and a counting button switch 180 that can be operated by the player. We are prepared.

In addition, the door frame 3 has a door frame curtain plate 190 extending from the lower end over the entire width in the left and right direction at a constant height on the front side of the door frame body 100, and a game window 101 on the front side of the door frame body 100. The shelf unit 200 is provided with a shelf unit 200 projecting forward at a portion between it and the door frame curtain plate 190, and a performance operation unit 250 which is provided at the center of the shelf unit 200 in the left-right direction and can be operated by a player. The ball count display section 140 and the counting button switch 180 are provided on the top surface of the shelf unit 200 (the top surface of the shelf section 201).

Furthermore, the door frame 3 includes a door frame top unit 300 provided above the game window 101 on the front surface of the door frame body 100, and a door frame top unit 300 provided on the left side of the game window 101 on the front surface of the door frame body 100. It includes a door frame left side unit 320 and a door frame right side unit 340 provided on the right side of the game window 101 on the front side of the door frame main body 100.

The door frame main body 100 has a door frame hinge mechanism 110 for attaching to the main body frame 4 so as to be openable and closable. The door frame hinge mechanism 110 includes a door frame upper hinge body 111 (see FIG. 6) provided at the upper left end of the door frame body 100 and a door frame lower hinge body provided at the lower left end of the door frame body 100. 112. The door frame upper hinge body 111 has a door frame upper hinge shaft 111a that projects upward. The door frame hinge mechanism 110 inserts a door frame upper hinge shaft 111a of a door frame upper hinge body 111 into a door frame upper shaft hole 511b of a main body frame upper hinge body 511, which will be described later, from below, and inserts the door frame lower hinge body 112 By inserting the door frame lower hinge shaft 112a into the door frame lower shaft hole 512b of the main body frame lower hinge body 512 (described later) from above, the door frame 3 can be supported so as to be openable and closable relative to the main body frame 4. .

Further, as shown in FIGS. 5 and 7, the door frame body 100 has a protrusion 102 that protrudes rearward from near the lower end on the rear surface. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, this protrusion 102 comes into contact so that its lower surface rides on a support step 501q of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame 4, which will be described later, and the door frame 3 is held up to some extent. It is something that can be lifted. According to this protrusion 102, the door frame 3 is lifted by closing it against the main body frame 4, so that the load of the door frame 3 is distributed between the protrusion 102 and the lower door frame hinge body 112. Can be dispersed. As a result, it is possible to avoid excessive loads from continuing to be applied to the hinges (the lower door frame hinge body 112 and the outer frame lower hinge body 35) that enable the door frame 3 to be opened and closed, thereby making the hinges less likely to be distorted. In addition, even if the hinge is distorted, the door frame 3 can be lifted by the protrusion 102, so the door frame 3 can be closed at an appropriate position relative to the main body frame 4. Although not shown in the drawings, the lower surface of the projection 102 has a plurality of ribs extending in the front-rear direction, and these ribs increase strength and rigidity.

The protrusion 102 has a guide surface 102a that is inclined so as to move to the left as it goes rearward. Although the details will be described later, the guide surface 102a of the protrusion 102 prevents the Kuma motor base 686 of the Kuma motor base 686 in the ball lifting unit 650 from locking when the door frame 3 is about to be closed relative to the main body frame 4. The front end of the motor base 686 comes into contact with the Kuma motor base 686 so that the Kuma motor base 686 can be moved (rotated) to the lock position.

The ball count display section 140 is composed of a 6-digit, 7-segment LED. The ball count display section 140 is provided on the upper surface of the shelf unit 200 on the right side of the center in the left-right direction and on the left side of the counting button switch 180.

The handle 160 is provided at the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame body 100, that is, near the right end between the game window 101 and the door frame curtain plate 190 on the front surface of the door frame body 100. The handle 160 is attached so that the player can rotate the handle 160 with the axis of rotation directed in the front-rear direction. The handle 160 is shaped like a steering wheel of an automobile, and includes a central hub portion 160a, a plurality of (three in this case) spoke portions 160b extending outward from the hub portion 160a, and spoke portions. It has an annular ring part 160c connecting the tips of the parts 160b to each other.

The ring portion 160c of the handle 160 is provided at a front portion slightly away from the front end of the cylindrical handle cover 170, and is provided so that the player cannot grip the ring portion 160c. Therefore, when the player rotates the handle 160, he or she mainly operates the handle 160 while gripping the hub portion 160a by passing the fingers between the spoke portions 160b. In this state, the player's finger is stuck into the cylinder of the handle cover 170.

The handle 160 includes a firing stop switch 161 that can be pressed and operated by the player, a handle touch sensor 162 that detects changes in the electrostatic capacitance of the handle 160, and a handle rotation sensor 163 that detects the rotation angle of the handle 160. (See Figure 63).

When the firing stop switch 161 is pressed by the player, the driving of the firing solenoid 553 is stopped by the frame control board 740. Therefore, when the player presses the firing stop switch 161 while rotating the handle 160, the firing of the game ball B can be temporarily stopped without returning to the rotating operation of the handle 160. After that, if you release the pressing operation on the firing stop switch 161 while keeping the rotating operation of the handle 160 as it is, you can play the game again with the driving strength before pressing the firing stopping switch 161 (the driving strength according to the rotating operation of the handle 160). Ball B can be hit into the game area 5a.

The handle touch sensor 162 detects static electricity that acts on the handle 160. When a player touches the handle 160, the handle touch sensor 162 detects the static electricity that acts on the player. ) is detected. When the handle 160 is rotated while the handle touch sensor 162 is detecting the player's contact, the detection by the handle rotation sensor 163 is accepted, and the firing solenoid is activated with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 160. The drive is controlled and the game ball B can be hit.

Therefore, even if the player tries to drive the game ball B into the game area 5a by rotating the handle 160 in some way without touching the handle 160, the handle touch sensor 162 does not detect the player's contact. Therefore, the firing solenoid 553 is not driven and the game ball B cannot be hit. As a result, it is possible to prevent a player from playing a game by rotating the handle 160 in a way different from the original method, and it is possible to reduce the load on the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. .

The handle rotation sensor 163 is a variable resistor, and when the handle 160 is rotated, the detection shaft rotates and the internal resistance changes according to the rotation angle of the detection shaft. Therefore, when the handle 160 is rotated to change the internal resistance of the handle rotation sensor 163, the driving force of the firing solenoid 553 in the ball firing unit 550 (described later) changes in accordance with the internal resistance, and the rotation angle of the handle 160 changes. The game ball B can be hit into the game area 5a with a force corresponding to the force.

The handle cover 170 extends rearward from a portion behind the annular portion of the handle 160 so that its diameter increases, and is formed into a conical tube shape. Openings 171 communicating with the inside are provided on the right circumferential surface and the lower circumferential surface of the outer circumferential surface of the handle cover 170. These openings 171 allow even if dirt, liquid, etc. enter the handle cover 170, they can be discharged downward.

The counting button switch 180 is provided on the upper surface of the shelf unit 200 at a position to the right of the center in the left-right direction. The counting button switch 180 will be described in detail later, but by pressing the button switch 180 when there are balls in hand, it is possible to send the balls to the game ball lending device 8 and settle the bill.

The door frame curtain plate 190 has a constant height, extends left and right with the same length as the width of the door frame body 100 in the left and right direction, and is attached to the lower end of the front surface of the door frame body 100. The door frame curtain plate 190 passes through the front and back in the center in the left and right direction, and has a duct grille 191 located in front of a bass reflex duct 501e of the main body frame 4, which will be described later. The duct grille 191 extends left and right in an elongated manner, and is partitioned by a plurality of vertical lattices. The duct grill 191 is for discharging air vibration (wind) caused by the drive of the main body frame speaker 503 forward from the bass reflex duct 501e of the main body frame 4, although the details will be described later.

The shelf unit 200 is provided at a portion between the game window 101 and the door frame curtain plate 190 on the front side of the door frame body 100. A spherical performance operation unit 250 is provided at the center of the shelf unit 200 in the left-right direction. The shelf unit 200 includes a shelf portion 201 that bulges forward in a shelf shape from the upper end along the lower end of the game window 101, and a speaker grill provided below the shelf portion 201 on the right side of the production operation unit 250. 203, a setting adjustment button 204 consisting of four push buttons arranged on the top surface of the shelf 201 and arranged in the front, back, left and right, and a pair of protrusions 205 provided spaced apart in the left and right. There is. In addition, the setting adjustment button 204 allows the volume to be adjusted by operating the front and rear push buttons among the four push buttons arranged in the front, rear, left, and right directions, and the light amount to be adjusted by operating the left and right push buttons. I have to.

The shelf portion 201 has a smooth upper surface. On the upper surface of the shelf section 201, on the right side of the center in the lateral direction, a counting button switch 180 is provided near the right end, and a ball count display section 140 is provided on the left side of the counting button switch 180. On the right side of the center in the direction, a setting adjustment button 204 is provided, and protrusions 205 are provided on both left and right sides near the rear end of the setting adjustment button 204.

The pair of protrusions 205 protrude higher than the setting adjustment button 204 and have rounded upper ends. The pair of protrusions 205 are provided substantially parallel to the rear side of the shelf 201. The pair of protrusions 205 can be conveniently used, for example, to lean a smartphone against the top surface of the shelf 201.

The speaker grill 203 is located in front of a main body frame speaker 503 in the main body frame 4, which will be described later, and is formed of punched metal having a plurality of through holes. The speaker grill 203 is provided symmetrically with the handle 160 and has the same size with the center of the door frame 3 as a border, and is formed to bulge forward like the handle cover 170.

The performance operation unit 250 is provided at the center of the shelf unit 200 in the left-right direction, and has a front end protruding further forward than the shelf unit 200 and an upper end protruding upwardly than the shelf unit 200. The entire performance operation unit 250 is formed into a spherical shape. The production operation unit 250 has a circular first production button 251 provided near the center on the top surface, and a circular second production button 252 provided so as to surround the first production button 251. are doing. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the first effect button 251 is formed in a cylindrical shape, and the second effect button 252 is formed in a cylindrical shape. The first performance button 251 and the second performance button 252 are provided on the same axis, and are inclined so that the axis thereof moves forward as it goes upward.

The first performance button 251 and the second performance button 252 are provided so that the entirety thereof moves upward (pops up) in accordance with the player participation type performance. The first effect button 251 can be pressed at all times, whereas the second effect button 252 can be pressed only when it pops up.

Although not shown, a vibrator (vibrating device) is provided inside the first effect button 251.

The door frame top unit 300 is a portion above the game window 101 on the front surface of the door frame main body 100, and both ends in the left and right direction are connected to the upper end portion of the door frame left side unit 320 and the upper end portion of the door frame right side unit 340. It is placed in between. The door frame top unit 300 protrudes forward like an eave. The door frame top unit 300 includes a semi-tubular door frame top decoration body 301 extending left and right along the front edge and having translucency. The door frame top decoration body 301 is curved in the front-rear direction so that the center in the left-right direction is positioned furthest forward in plan view.

Although not shown, the door frame top unit 300 includes a door frame top decoration board on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted to decorate the door frame top decoration body 301 with light emission, and sounds such as voice, music, and sound effects. A pair of door frame top speakers 303 that output power and are provided spaced apart on the left and right, and a pair of door frame top side speakers 304 that are provided on both left and right outer sides of the pair of door frame top speakers 303. There is. The pair of door frame top speakers 303 are full range speakers (or midrange speakers), and the pair of door frame top side speakers 304 are tweeters (high-pitched speakers).

The door frame left side unit 320 is a portion on the front side of the door frame body 100 on the left side of the game window 101, and extends up and down from near the upper end of the door frame body 100 to near the speaker grill 203 below the shelf portion 201 of the shelf unit 200. It has been established for a long time. The door frame left side unit 320 extends over the entire length in the vertical direction, and includes a door frame left side decoration body 321 in the shape of a semi-tube having translucency. The door frame left side decorative body 321 is curved toward the right near the lower end.

Although not shown, the door frame left side unit 320 has a door frame left side decorative board on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted to decorate the door frame left side decorative body 321 with light emission.

The door frame right side unit 340 is a portion on the front side of the door frame body 100 on the right side of the game window 101, and extends vertically from near the upper end of the door frame body 100 to the handle cover 170 below the shelf portion 201 of the shelf unit 200. It has been set up for a long time. The door frame right side unit 340 projects longer forward than the door frame left side unit 320, and is formed in a vertically long partition shape.

The door frame right side unit 340 is provided with a semi-tubular door frame right side decoration body 341 extending vertically along the front end and having translucency, and behind the door frame right side decoration body 341. A door frame right side left side decorative body (not shown) having translucent properties forming the left side surface, and a light transmitting plate provided behind the door frame right side decorative body 341 forming the right side surface. A door frame right side right side decoration body (not shown), a door frame right side decoration body 341, a door frame right side left side decoration body, and a plurality of door frame right side right side decoration bodies for luminescent decoration. and a door frame right side decorative board (not shown) on which LEDs are mounted. The door frame right side decoration body 341 is curved toward the left near the lower end.

Further, the door frame right side unit 340 has an opening 342 near its lower end that penetrates back and forth and through which the keyhole 782 of the lock unit 780 faces forward.

[3-1. Count button switch]
The counting button switch 180 is provided on the upper surface of the shelf unit 200 at a position to the right of the center in the left-right direction. By pressing the counting button switch 180 when there are balls in hand (number of balls in hand>0), the balls in hand can be sent to the game ball lending device 8 for payment. Although the details will be described later, the counting button switch 180 can send the balls one by one or by a predetermined number (for example, every 250 balls) depending on the pressing time. The number of balls held by the game ball lending device 8 is sent to the management server 9 via the communication network, and the IC card storing the number of balls held is ejected from the game ball lending device 8.

Here, the game ball lending device 8 is provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 in the island equipment of the game hall (also referred to as a sandbox). Although not shown in detail, the game ball lending device 8 includes an input slot for inserting cash, prepaid cards, etc., a card slot for inserting/ejecting an IC card, a ball lending button switch 8a, a return button switch, an input amount, etc. A display section for displaying the number of pitches counted, etc. is provided. In the game ball lending device 8, when the ball lending button switch 8a is pressed while cash or the like is inserted into the input slot, a predetermined number of game balls B are lent out within the range of the inserted amount. In this embodiment, the number of game balls B lent out is transmitted as digital data to the frame control board, and is also transmitted to the management server 9 via the communication network for management.

To explain the counting button switch 180 in detail, when the player "short presses" the counting button switch 180 (for example, one press time is less than 500 ms) while holding balls, one game ball B is removed from the balls held by the player. Count. If you press and hold the counting button switch 180 (for example, one press time is 500 ms or more), a count notification will be sent every predetermined period of time (for example, 300 ms) until the number of balls you have becomes less than 250. Count 250 game balls B at a time. If the number of balls in possession becomes 250 or less during long press, game balls B are counted one by one. In addition, if the counting button switch 180 is pressed for a long time (for example, one press time is 500 ms or more), the total number of balls held will be counted unconditionally even if the counting button switch 180 is not kept pressed. You can also do it.

When counting is performed by pressing the counting button switch 180, the number of balls displayed on the ball number display section 140 is subtracted and displayed, and the number of balls counted is displayed on the display section (not shown) of the game ball lending device 8. is displayed.

[4. Body frame]
The main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 will be explained in detail with reference to FIGS. 8 to 14, FIGS. 17 to 21, etc. FIG. 17 is an exploded perspective view of the main frame broken down into its main components and seen from the front, and FIG. 18 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame broken down into its main components seen from the back. FIG. 19 is a plan view of the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 10 cut at the vertical center. FIG. 20 is a sectional view taken along the line A--A in FIG. 19. FIG. 21 is a front view of main parts showing the firing unit, foul unit, etc. in cross section in the front view of FIG. 8.

The main body frame 4 is formed into a box frame shape with an open front, and a game board 5 is removably housed inside from the front. The main body frame 4 is attached to the frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island equipment of the game hall so that it can be opened and closed at the top and bottom of the front end on the left side of the front side, and the door frame 3 can be opened and closed so that the open front side is closed. Mounted as possible.

The main body frame 4 includes a frame-shaped main frame base unit 500 that is supported in an openable and closable manner relative to the outer frame 2, a ball firing unit 550 for driving the game ball B into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and a ball. A foul unit 570 for collecting the game ball B that was fired by the firing unit 550 but not hit into the game area 5a, and a game ball B ejected from the game board 5 and collected by the foul unit 570. A circulating ball path unit 600 for sending the game ball B to the ball firing unit 550 side, a ball lifting unit 650 for moving the game ball B upward from the downstream end of the circulating ball path unit 600, and a ball lifting unit 650. A ball feeding unit 700 that sends the lifted game balls B one by one to a ball firing unit 550 is provided.

The main body frame 4 also includes a ball receiving tray 720 for receiving game balls B ejected from the ball outlet 613p of the circulating ball path unit 600, and a frame control for controlling the ball firing unit 550, ball lifting unit 650, etc. It includes a frame board unit 730 having a board 740, and a lock unit 780 that locks between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 and between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4.

[4-1. Body frame base unit]
The main body frame base unit 500 in the main body frame 4 will be explained in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 22 to 24 and the like. FIG. 22 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame base unit of the main body frame disassembled into its main components and viewed from the front, and FIG. 23 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame base unit of the main body frame disassembled into its main components and viewed from the back. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view. FIG. 24(a) is a front view of a main body frame base in a main body frame base unit, and FIG. 24(b) is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which a plurality of main body frame bases are stacked in a perspective view.

The main body frame base unit 500 is supported to be openable and closable forward with respect to the outer frame 2, and is also capable of supporting the door frame 3 so that it can be opened and closed forward. The main body frame base unit 500 includes a ball firing unit 550, a foul unit 570, a circulating ball path unit 600, a ball lifting unit 650, a ball feeding unit 700, a ball receiving tray 720, a frame board unit 730, a locking unit 780, etc. installed.

The main body frame base unit 500 has a game board insertion part 502 which penetrates from the front and back into which the game board 5 is inserted from the front, and a base wall part 501b provided below the game board insertion part 502. The main body frame base 501 has a vertically elongated rectangular shape, and a side reinforcement plate 509 that reinforces the left side surface of the main body frame base 501.

Further, the main body frame base unit 500 includes a main body frame speaker 503 attached to the rear side of the base wall portion 501b of the main body frame base 501, and a main body frame speaker 503 that is attached to the base wall portion 501b so as to cover the main body frame speaker 503 from the rear, and the front side is open. The main body frame speaker box 504 is box-shaped, and the back cover 505 is provided so that the game board insertion part 502 in the main body frame base 501 can be opened and closed from the rear.

Furthermore, the main body frame base unit 500 includes a game board locking member 506 attached to the main body frame base 501, a door release switch 507 and a frame release switch 508 attached to the main body frame base 501, and a game board lock member 506 attached to the main body frame base 501. The main body frame hinge mechanism 510 is attached to the main body frame hinge mechanism 510.

The main body frame base 501 has a vertically elongated rectangular shape when viewed from the front. The main body frame base 501 is made of black opaque synthetic resin. The main body frame base 501 includes a frame-shaped frame 501a that has no left side, and a game board insert that penetrates back and forth within the frame of the frame 501a from near the top end downwards within a range of approximately 2/3 of the total height. 502, a base wall portion 501b provided on the lower side of the game board insertion portion 502, and a game board protruding upward (into the game board insertion portion 502) near the center in the left-right direction on the upper end surface of the base wall portion 501b. A panel regulating portion 501c, a main body frame speaker opening 501d that penetrates back and forth near the left end of the base wall 501b and through which the main body frame speaker 503 faces forward, and a horizontally elongated front and back near the lower end of the center of the base wall 501b in the left and right direction. A bass reflex duct 501e penetrating through the duct 501e is provided.

The main body frame base 501 also includes a tray insertion recess 501f that is recessed from the front side to the rear above the bass reflex duct 501e on the base wall 501b and into which the ball receiving tray 720 is inserted, and a tray insertion recess 501f on the base wall 501b. It is provided with a ball storage passage insertion opening 501g that penetrates forward and backward above the ball and into which the ball meandering member 613 and meandering cover 614 of the circulation ball path unit 600 are inserted.

The main body frame base 501 also includes a foul unit mounting part 501h and a ball firing unit mounting part 501i, which are arranged side by side above the ball storage passage insertion opening 501g on the front surface of the base wall part 501b, and the base wall part 501b. A ball lifting unit mounting part 501j provided on the right side of the ball launching unit mounting part 501i and a ball feeding unit provided at a portion behind the ball launching unit mounting part 501i on the rear surface of the base wall 501b. It penetrates the mounting part 501k, the circulation ball path unit mounting part 501l provided on the rear surface of the base wall part 501b, and the vicinity of the upper right corner of the base wall part 501b in the front and back, and the lock cylinder 781 of the lock unit 780 is inserted therethrough. A cylinder insertion port 501m is provided.

Furthermore, the main body frame base 501 protrudes from the left and right inner walls of the tray insertion recess 501f, and when the elastic claws 721 of the ball receiver tray 720 inserted into the tray insertion recess 501f are locked, the ball receiver is inserted into the main body frame base 501. A locking pawl 501n is provided to restrict forward movement of the tray 720. Further, the main body frame base 501 includes a vertically elongated opening 501o penetrating back and forth at the ball lifting unit attachment portion 501j.

The main body frame base 501 also includes a top cover 502a extending rearward from the upper end of the game board insertion portion 502, and a rear cover 502b extending downward from the rear end of the top cover 502a in a short flat plate shape. A left side cover 502c extends rearward from the left end of the game board insertion portion 502 and has an upper end connected to the top cover 502a, and a left side cover 502c extends rearward from the right end of the game board insertion portion 502 and has an upper end connected to the top cover 502a. A right side cover 502d that extends backward from the lower end of the game board insertion portion 502 is provided.

The main body frame base 501 also includes a plurality of ventilation holes 502f penetrating the rear cover 502b, a plurality of upper recesses 502g provided in the upper cover 502a and recessed downward, and a plurality of upper recesses 502g provided in the lower cover 502e. It includes a plurality of lower surface recesses 502h recessed downward, and a plurality of reinforcing ribs 502i provided on the lower surface of the upper surface cover 502a and the upper surface of the lower surface cover 502e, respectively.

Furthermore, the main body frame base 501 is provided above the ball firing unit attachment part 501i, and further includes an eaves part 501p for blocking light from entering the ball firing unit 550 from above. This eaves portion 501p can block external light from the firing subtraction sensor 554, which is a photosensor of the ball firing unit 550 attached to the ball firing unit mounting portion 501i. False detection can be prevented.

Further, the main body frame base 501 has a support step portion 501q provided at a portion between the tray insertion recess 501f and the opening 501o and slightly above the bottom surface of the tray insertion recess 501f, and a base wall portion 501b. It further includes a pair of support protrusions 501r that are vertically spaced apart near the right end of the rear surface and protrude rearward. The support step portion 501q has a surface (upper surface) facing upward. When the door frame 3 is closed against the main body frame 4, the support stepped portion 501q comes into contact with the protrusion 102 of the door frame 3 so as to ride on it, and can lift the door frame 3 to some extent. It supports part of the load. A locking hole into which the nylon latch 774 of the frame board unit 730 is locked is provided on the rear end surface of the support protrusion 501r.

The game board 5 is removably inserted into the game board insertion portion 502 of the main body frame base 501 from the front. The area behind the base wall 501b of the game board insertion section 502 is surrounded by a top cover 502a, a left side cover 502c, a right side cover 502d, and a bottom cover 502e.

The game board 5 is placed on the upper end surface of the base wall portion 501b. A door release switch 507, a ball firing unit 550, a foul unit 570, and a ball receiving tray 720 are attached to the front surface of the base wall portion 501b. Furthermore, a main body frame speaker 503, a main body frame speaker box 504, a frame release switch 508, a circulating ball path unit 600, a ball lifting unit 650, and a ball feeding unit 700 are attached to the rear surface of the base wall portion 501b.

The game board regulating section 501c is for regulating the movement of the game board 5 in the left-right direction and backward when the game board 5 is inserted into the game board insertion section 502. The main body frame speaker port 501d is formed in a grid shape as shown in the figure, and is provided so as to be located behind the speaker grill 203 of the door frame 3 when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4. It is being A main body frame speaker 503 is attached to the rear surface of the base wall portion 501b so as to close the main body frame speaker port 501d from the rear.

The bass reflex duct 501e is formed into a rectangular cylindrical shape that is long from side to side. Although details will be described later, the bass reflex duct 501e communicates with an enclosure 504a of the main body frame speaker 503, which is composed of a base wall portion 501b and a main body frame speaker box 504. This is to invert the phase and emit it forward. In this embodiment, the cylindrical bass reflex duct 501e makes it possible to resonate and amplify the low frequency range of the sound output from the main body frame speaker 503, thereby making it possible to produce a deeper bass sound. This bass reflex duct 501e is provided so as to be located behind the duct grille 191 of the door frame 3 with the door frame 3 closed with respect to the main body frame 4.

The tray insertion recess 501f can detachably support the ball receiving tray 720 from the front. The bottom wall of the tray insertion recess 501f is inclined so that the front end side is lower (see FIG. 20). Thereby, even if the game ball B spills into the tray insertion recess 501f in a state where the ball receiving tray 720 is not inserted into the tray insertion recess 501f, it can be ejected forward. Further, since the bottom wall of the tray insertion recess 501f is inclined so that the front end side is lower, the ball receiving tray 720 placed thereon can be easily slid forward.

The ball storage passage insertion opening 501g is provided so that the front portion of the ball meandering member 613 and the meandering cover 614 of the circulation ball path unit 600 attached to the rear surface of the base wall portion 501b penetrate and protrude forward. The foul unit mounting portion 501h is provided near the upper end of the base wall portion 501b and on the right side of the main body frame speaker port 501d. The ball firing unit attachment portion 501i is provided on the right side of the foul unit attachment portion 501h. The ball lifting unit mounting portion 501j is provided at a portion between the vicinity of the upper end and the vicinity of the lower end of the base wall portion 501b.

The ball feeding unit mounting portion 501k is provided on the rear surface of the base wall portion 501b so that the upper surface of the ball feeding unit 700 faces upward (into the game board insertion portion 502), and is configured to allow the ball feeding unit 700 to be attached and removed from above. It is set in. When the ball feeding unit 700 is attached to the ball feeding unit mounting portion 501k, the elastic claw 709b of the ball feeding unit 700 passes through the locking hole of the base wall portion 501b and faces forward on the right side of the ball firing unit 550. Become. In this state, the ball feeding unit 700 can be removed upward by pressing the elastic claw 709b backward to elastically deform it, and pinching and pulling up the knob 709a provided on the top surface of the ball feeding unit 700.

The circulation ball path unit mounting portion 501l is provided at a portion above a box extension portion 504c of the main body frame speaker box 504, which will be described later, in the left-right center portion of the rear surface of the base wall portion 501b. The cylinder insertion port 501m is provided near the upper end of the base wall portion 501b to the right of the ball lifting unit attachment portion 501j.

The top cover 502a extends to the rear of the game board 5 when the game board 5 is attached to the game board insertion portion 502. As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, this upper surface cover 502a is provided with two upper surface recesses 502g spaced apart from each other on the left and right sides. is omitted. With this configuration, the top cover 502a can be positioned upward by the amount of reinforcing ribs, compared to the case where a plurality of reinforcing ribs are arranged in a row in the left-right direction on the top surface of the top cover, and the game board insertion part The internal volume of 502 is secured. Furthermore, if a plurality of reinforcing ribs are provided on the upper surface of the upper cover 502a, some residue may be left behind during cleaning, which impairs the aesthetic appearance.However, in this embodiment, by eliminating the reinforcing ribs etc. It becomes possible to maintain the aesthetic appearance.

The upper surface of the upper surface cover 502a and the bottom surfaces of the two upper surface recesses 502g are inclined by about 2 degrees with respect to the horizontal plane so as to become lower toward the rear. Further, the pachinko machine 1 is normally installed so as to be tilted backward, and the angle thereof is generally about 0.75 degrees, so the pachinko machine 1 is tilted downward by about 2.75 degrees in total. Moreover, the width of the two upper surface recesses 502g becomes wider toward the rear.

By creating such a gentle slope, game balls B falling from above the pachinko machine 1 flow down the top surface of the top cover 502a or the top surface recess 502g and reach the island equipment provided below the pachinko machine 1. The ball falls onto the collection path of game ball B and is collected. Furthermore, falling objects such as metal powder and non-spherical objects such as screws stay on the top surface of the top cover 502a or in the top surface recess 502g. In order to achieve such an effect, it is desirable that the top surface of the top cover 502a be inclined within 15 degrees from the horizontal plane.

Since the top cover 502a is formed into a flat plate shape, the lower surfaces (back surfaces) of the two top recesses 502g recessed from above in the top cover 502a protrude downward from the bottom surface of the top cover 502a (Fig. 24 (see (b)). That is, the upper surface concave portion 502g is in the form of a convex portion projecting downward on the lower surface of the upper surface cover 502a. The end points of the two upper surface recesses 502g, that is, the front walls, are behind the abutment surface 502j, and the abutment surface 502j contacts the rear surface of the upper side of the game board 5 for positioning.

In other words, the back side (lower side) of the top cover 502a has the back sides of the two top recesses 502g. The back tips (front ends) of the two upper surface recesses 502g are abutting surfaces 502j, and are in contact with the rear surface of the upper side of the game board 5 to position the game board 5.

There are four reinforcing ribs 502i out of a plurality of reinforcing ribs 502i on the back side (lower surface side) of the top cover 502a, which together with the top recess 502g serve to reinforce the top cover 502a. By providing the reinforcing ribs 502i not on the upper surface of the upper cover 502a but on the inner lower surface of the upper cover 502a in this manner, it is possible to maintain the beauty of the upper surface (outer surface) of the upper cover 502a.

As shown in FIG. 23, a plurality of ribs 502k are provided at the front end of the upper surface of the upper cover 502a, but the upper part of these ribs 502k is covered by the frame 501a at the edge of the main body frame base 501. Moreover, since the upper part thereof is covered with the outer frame 2, metal powder and the like will not fall from above and will not affect the aesthetic appearance.

Further, although not shown, the upper surface of the upper cover 502a and the upper surface recess 502g are not provided with a gate for feeding molten resin during injection molding. This is to prevent the game balls B from flowing down the upper surface of the upper cover 502a and the upper surface recess 502g due to the unevenness caused by the gate.

Further, care is taken not to leave marks on the top surface of the top cover 502a or the top surface recess 502g from the ejector pin used to take out the body frame base 501, which has been similarly injection molded, from the mold. Normally, marks from the ejector pins are unlikely to interfere with the flow of the game ball B by properly treating the burrs, but when cleaning the top surface of the top cover 502a or the top surface recess 502g where metal powder has accumulated, etc. may damage the aesthetic appearance. For this reason, care has been taken not to leave any traces of the ejector pin.

The rear cover 502b of the main body frame base 501 is connected at both left and right ends to a left side cover 502c and a right side cover 502d, respectively. This rear cover 502b has a plurality of vertically long slit-shaped ventilation holes 502f arranged in rows in the left-right direction.

Further, the left side cover 502c of the main body frame base 501 has the same depth in the front-rear direction as the depth of the top cover 502a. The left side cover 502c is inclined so as to move to the right as it goes rearward in plan view. At the rear end of the left side cover 502c, two cover locking portions 502l for locking the back cover 505 are provided vertically apart from each other.

The right side cover 502d of the main body frame base 501 is inclined so as to move to the left as it goes rearward in plan view. The right side cover 502d has a portion below the rear cover 502b cut out from the rear end toward the front, and the rear end of the portion is located forward of the rear end of the top cover 502a. . In other words, the right side cover 502d is formed to have a lower depth shorter than the rear cover 502b. At the rear end of the right side cover 502d, below the rear cover 502b, a plurality of cover shaft supports 502m for supporting the back cover 505 in a hinge-rotatable manner are provided at intervals in the vertical direction. .

The lower surface cover 502e of the main body frame base 501 extends rearward from a portion that is one step higher than the lower end of the game board insertion portion 502 (the upper surface of the base wall portion 501b). The lower surface cover 502e is provided so as to exclude the portion above the circulation ball path unit attachment portion 501l, and the portion on the left side of the circulation ball path unit attachment portion 501l is rearward to the same position as the rear end of the left side cover 502c. The portion on the right side of the circulation ball path unit mounting portion 501l extends rearward to the same position as the rear end of the portion of the right side cover 502d that is formed to have a short depth. This lower surface cover 502e is inclined to become higher toward the rear.

The lower surface recessed portion 502h of the main body frame base 501 is recessed downward from the upper surface of the lower surface cover 502e. The lower surface recess 502h is open toward the front, and is formed so that the left and right widths become narrower toward the rear. Similar to the bottom cover 502e, the bottom surface of the bottom recess 502h is inclined to become higher toward the rear. Since the lower cover 502e is formed in a flat plate shape, the lower surface (back surface) of the lower recessed portion 502h recessed from above in the lower cover 502e protrudes downward from the lower surface of the lower cover 502e, as shown in FIG. 24(b). See. In other words, the lower surface recess 502h is in the form of a convex portion projecting downward on the lower surface of the lower cover 502e. A reinforcing rib 502i is provided inside the lower surface recess 502h.

The plurality of reinforcing ribs 502i are provided on the lower surface of the upper cover 502a and the bottom surface of the lower surface recess 502h, respectively. The top cover 502a is provided with four reinforcing ribs 502i, two of which extend forward from the two abutment surfaces 502j, and the remaining two from the two top recesses 502g. They are also provided on both the left and right sides. The reinforcing ribs 502i provided on both left and right outer sides of the upper surface recess 502g have their rear ends connected to the rear cover 502b, and extend forward shorter than the upper surface recess 502g.

Of the plurality of reinforcing ribs 502i, a total of four reinforcing ribs, two on both left and right outer sides of the upper surface recess 502g of the upper cover 502a and two provided in the two lower surface recesses 502h, function as the ribs. It is set in. More specifically, the main body frame base 501 of this embodiment is configured so that when it is placed on a workbench or the like with its front end facing down, it can be placed horizontally without wobbling. Moreover, the main body frame base 501 is formed so that it can be stored in a stacked manner, as shown in FIG. 24(b). At this time, the four reinforcing ribs 502i as ribs come into contact with the other side, thereby making it possible to avoid the overlapped body frame bases 501 from interlocking with each other. Thereby, it is possible to reduce the amount of time it takes to remove the parts (body frame base 501) due to their engagement with each other, and it is possible to improve the efficiency of the assembly work. Furthermore, since the body frame bases 501 can be stacked, it is possible to increase the number of packages and to reduce the size of the packaging box.

According to the main body frame base 501 of this embodiment, the upper surface of the upper surface cover 502a of the main body frame base 501, which protects the game board 5 housed in the main body frame 4 from above, is a gentle slope downward downward, so that pachinko Game balls B, metal powder, screws, etc. falling from above the machine 1 can be appropriately disposed of. Specifically, since the game ball B, which is spherical, can be allowed to fall under the pachinko machine 1 by flowing down the top surface of the top cover 502a, the game ball B can be collected as is and no trouble will occur. In addition, non-spherical metal powder, screws, etc. can be held on the top cover 502a without flowing down, so no trouble will occur.

Furthermore, no ventilation holes 502f are provided on the upper surface of the upper cover 502a. This prevents metal powder, screws, etc. from entering through the ventilation hole 502f, and does not adversely affect the electrical components of the game board 5.

Furthermore, the upper surface of the upper cover 502a molded by an injection molding machine is not provided with a gate for injecting molten resin into a mold during molding. As a result, the upper surface of the upper surface cover 502a does not have unevenness caused by the gate, so that the downward flow of the game ball B is not hindered.

Similarly, care is taken not to leave marks from the ejector pins when removing the injection-molded main body frame base 501 from the mold. Normally, if the ejector pin marks are properly treated to remove burrs, there is little chance that the game balls B will flow down. It may leave marks and spoil the aesthetic appearance. Therefore, by eliminating the ejector pin marks, the appearance can be easily restored by cleaning.

Further, this top cover 502a is integrally molded with the main body frame base 501. By molding in this manner, it is possible to save assembly man-hours and improve the strength of the entire main body frame base unit 500 (game board storage frame).

The top cover 502a not only protects the game board 5 housed inside, but also has a positioning part (abutment surface 502j) on the inside that contacts the game board 5 and positions the game board 5. ing. As a result, the positional relationship between the game board 5 and the top cover 502a is fixed, and the purpose of the game board storage frame (main body frame 4) of protecting the game board 5 can be achieved.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 18 and the like, the upper surface of the upper cover 502a is not provided with ribs for reinforcement.Thereby, the ribs do not make cleaning difficult, and maintenance becomes easier. Note that there are other members (for example, the frame 501a, the outer frame 2, etc.) to cover the upper surface of the upper surface cover 502a, and ribs may be provided in areas where foreign objects do not fall.

The side reinforcement plate 509 has a U-shape that is open to the right in plan view, and is attached to replace the open left side of the frame 501a in the main body frame base 501. ing. The side reinforcement plate 509 is formed of an extruded metal such as aluminum alloy. The side reinforcement plate 509 is provided with two left position regulating members 509a vertically spaced apart from each other. The left position regulating member 509a is for positioning the left side of the game board 5.

The main body frame speaker 503 is attached to the rear side of the base wall portion 501b so as to close the main body frame speaker port 501d of the main body frame base 501 from the rear. The main body frame speaker 503 is a cone-shaped speaker that mainly outputs bass sounds.

The main body frame speaker box 504 is formed in a box shape open to the front, and is attached to the rear side of the base wall portion 501b so as to cover the main body frame speaker 503 from the rear. The main body frame speaker box 504 forms an enclosure 504a of the main body frame speaker 503 by being attached to the base wall portion 501b.

The main body frame speaker box 504 includes a box main body part 504b located behind the main body frame speaker 503, a box extension part 504c connected to the lower end of the box main body part 504b and extending to the right in front view, and a box A frame substrate unit shaft support 504d is provided on the rear surface of the main body 504b. The box extension part 504c of the main body frame speaker box 504 extends to the right to near the right end of the main body frame base 501 so as to cover the rear of the bass reflex duct 501e, and a part of the box extension part 504c extends further rearward than the box main part 504b. It is extending.

The enclosure 504a is composed of a box main body part 504b and a box extension part 504c, and communicates with the outside through a bass reflex duct 501e. In other words, the bass reflex duct 501e, the main body frame speaker 503, and the main body frame speaker box 504 constitute a phase inversion type bass reflex speaker.

To be more specific, predetermined sounds are output from the main frame speaker 503 to the front and rear. Sound output forward from the main body frame speaker 503 is emitted to the front of the pachinko machine 1 through the main body frame speaker port 501d and the speaker grill 203.

On the other hand, the sound output rearward from the main body frame speaker 503 vibrates the air inside the main body frame speaker box 504 (enclosure 504a). Since this enclosure 504a is opened to the front (outside) by the cylindrical bass reflex duct 501e, it is discharged forward from the bass reflex duct 501e. At this time, since the bass reflex duct 501e is formed into a cylindrical shape with a predetermined length, the low frequency range is amplified by resonance due to air column vibration inside the duct 501e, and the bass is emitted forward with the phase reversed. Ru.

As a result, the sound output from the main body frame speaker 503 to the front and the sound output to the rear do not act to cancel each other out and attenuate, but act to resonate and amplify each other. Therefore, even if the diameter of the main body frame speaker 503 is small, it is possible to output a large sound with deep bass, allowing the player to hear sound with rich bass.

The box extension portion 504c of the main body frame speaker box 504 is formed so that its depth in the front-rear direction is longer than its vertical height, and its rear end protrudes slightly rearward than the rear end of the frame board unit 730. (See Figure 20). The box extension part 504c covers the lower part of the frame board unit 730 so that a gap is formed between the box extension part 504c and the frame board unit 730 (unit base 770 and power board box 772) when assembled on the main body frame 4. There is. Thereby, the various wirings connected to the frame board unit 730 are prevented from hanging down by the box extension portion 504c.

As shown in FIG. 20, the box extension portion 504c has an upper surface that slopes downwardly toward the rear. Thereby, garbage, game balls B, etc. that have fallen from above can be guided backward and discharged. Further, the box extension portion 504c is inclined such that the lower surface thereof becomes higher toward the rear. Thereby, when closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, the box extension portion 504c does not come into contact with the lower frame body 14 of the main body frame 4.

Further, as shown in FIG. 20, the box extension portion 504c is inclined such that the lower surface thereof becomes higher toward the rear. Thereby, when closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, even if the main body frame 4 is tilted, the main body frame 4 can be guided into the outer frame 2 by the lower surface of the box extension portion 504c.

The main body frame speaker box 504 is assembled to the main body frame 4 and is supported so as to be suspended from the rear end side of the tray insertion recess 501f in the main body frame base 501. As a result, the game balls B ejected from the circulation ball path unit 600 are received by the ball receiving tray 720, and a load (the weight of the plurality of game balls B) is applied from above to the tray insertion recess 501f via the ball receiving tray 720. ) will not deform the tray insertion recess 501f.

Further, the main body frame speaker box 504 is made of transparent synthetic resin, and the main body frame speaker 503 can be confirmed from the outside.

The back cover 505 is provided so as to be openable and closable with respect to the main body frame base 501 so as to cover the rear of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 when assembled to the pachinko machine 1. The back cover 505 is formed into an L-shape in plan view, with the right side of a flat plate bent forward. The back cover 505 has two locking claws 505a provided vertically apart from each other at the left end, and a plurality of shaft portions 505b arranged vertically in a row at the right end. The locking claw 505a is removably locked to a cover locking portion 502l on the main body frame base 501. The shaft portion 505b is pivotally supported by a cover shaft support 502m on the main body frame base 501. Thereby, the back cover 505 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4 so as to be openable and closable. The back cover 505 is provided with a plurality of ventilation holes, allowing heat from the game board 5 to escape to the outside. This back cover 505 is made of transparent synthetic resin.

When the back cover 505 is attempted to be closed on the main body frame unit 500 (main body frame base 501) after first closing a frame board unit 730 (described later) on the main body frame unit 500, the closed frame board unit 730 It is formed so that it is prevented from interfering with (contacting) and being closed. Further, the back cover 505 opens the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, and also attempts to close the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 while the back cover 505 is open with respect to the main body frame base 501. Then, it is formed so that it interferes with (contacts) the outer frame 2 and is prevented from being closed.

The game board locking member 506 is attached to the front surface of the main body frame base 501 (base wall portion 501b) so as to be rotatable around an axis extending in the front-rear direction. The game board locking member 506 can prevent the lower end of the game board 5 from moving forward by rotating the game board 5 to the lock position with the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion portion 502.

The door open switch 507 is for detecting opening/closing of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4. The door release switch 507 is attached below the cylinder insertion opening 501m in the base wall portion 501b of the main body frame base 501.

The frame opening switch 508 is for detecting opening/closing of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. The frame release switch 508 is attached below the door release switch 507 on the base wall portion 501b of the main body frame base 501.

The body frame hinge mechanism 510 includes a body frame upper hinge body 511 attached to the upper left side end of the body frame base 501 and a body frame lower hinge body 512 attached to the left side lower end of the body frame base 501.

The main body frame upper hinge body 511 is provided adjacent to the main body frame hinge shaft 511a that protrudes upward in a cylindrical shape and is inserted into the bearing groove 31a of the outer frame upper hinge body 31 in the outer frame 2, and the main body frame hinge shaft 511a. The door frame upper hinge shaft 111a of the door frame upper hinge body 111 in the door frame 3 is inserted from below into a door frame upper shaft hole 511b. The main body frame upper hinge body 511 has a flat plate-shaped portion that extends horizontally, and a portion that extends downward from the rear end of the horizontally extending portion. A horizontally extending portion of the main body frame upper hinge body 511 is provided with a main body frame hinge shaft 511a and a door frame upper shaft hole 511b. Further, the portion of the main body frame upper hinge body 511 extending downward is attached to the main body frame base 501.

The main body frame lower hinge body 512 has an outer frame shaft hole (not shown) into which the hinge shaft 35a of the outer frame lower hinge body 35 in the outer frame 2 is inserted from below, and a door frame lower hinge body 112 in the door frame 3. A door frame lower shaft hole 512b into which the door frame lower hinge shaft 112a is inserted from above. The main body frame lower hinge body 512 has a flat plate-shaped portion that extends horizontally, and a portion that extends upward from the rear end of the horizontally extending portion. An outer frame shaft hole and a door frame lower shaft hole 512b are provided in the horizontally extending portion of the main body frame lower hinge body 512. Further, the lower body frame hinge body 512 is attached to the body frame base 501 at a portion extending downward. Further, the downwardly extending portion of the main body frame lower hinge body 512 comes into contact with the rear wall portion 45c of the curtain plate 45 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. As a result, the main body frame 4 will not be hinged to rotate any further rearward.

The body frame hinge mechanism 510 inserts the body frame hinge shaft 511a of the body frame upper hinge body 511 into the bearing groove 31a of the outer frame upper hinge body 31 in the outer frame 2, and inserts the body frame hinge shaft 511a of the body frame upper hinge body 511 into the outer frame shaft of the body frame lower hinge body 512. By inserting the hinge shaft 35a of the lower outer frame hinge body 35 in the outer frame 2 into the hole, the main body frame 4 is supported so as to be openable and closable with respect to the outer frame 2.

Further, the main body frame hinge mechanism 510 inserts the door frame upper hinge shaft 111a of the door frame upper hinge body 111 in the door frame 3 from below into the door frame upper shaft hole 511b of the main body frame upper hinge body 511, and By inserting the lower door frame hinge shaft 112a of the lower door frame hinge body 112 in the door frame 3 from above into the lower door frame shaft hole 512b of the lower hinge body 512, the door frame 3 can be opened and closed with respect to the main body frame 4. Supported by

[4-2. Ball firing unit]
The ball firing unit 550 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 25 to 28 and the like. FIG. 25(a) is a perspective view of the ball firing unit in the main body frame seen from the front, and FIG. 25(b) is a perspective view of the ball firing unit in the main body frame seen from the back. FIG. 26(a) is an exploded perspective view of the ball firing unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 26(b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball firing unit as seen from the back. FIG. 27(a) is a perspective view of the firing unit cover of the ball firing unit seen from the rear left, and FIG. 27(b) is an explanatory diagram of the ball firing unit showing only the firing unit cover in cross section when viewed from the front. FIG. 28 is a front view of the ball firing unit showing the firing subtraction sensor and firing mallet in broken lines.

The ball firing unit 550 is for firing the game ball B into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and has a ball entrance 550a for receiving the game ball B sent from the ball sending unit 700, and a ball entrance 550a for receiving the game ball B sent from the ball sending unit 700, and a ball entrance 550a for receiving the game ball B sent from the ball sending unit 700, and a ball entrance 550a for receiving the game ball B sent from the ball sending unit 700, and It has a ball ejection port 550b for ejecting the game ball B to the outside, and a ball ejection port 550c for ejecting the game ball B. The ball firing unit 550 can hit the game ball B with a force corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 160 at the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3. The ball firing unit 550 is attached to the ball firing unit attachment part 501i provided below the opaque eaves part 501p on the right side of the center in the left-right direction at the upper part of the front surface of the base wall part 501b of the main body frame base 501. It will be done.

A ball entrance 550a of the ball firing unit 550 is provided on the rear surface, and has a square opening large enough to allow one game ball B to pass through. The ball inlet 550a is located in front of the ball outlet 702 of the ball feeding unit 700 when assembled to the main body frame 4, and communicates with the ball outlet 702. The ball launch port 550b opens obliquely at the left end of the upper surface so that the left end side is lower. This ball launch port 550b communicates with the upper part of the foul right opening 570b of the foul unit 570 when assembled to the main body frame 4. The ball discharge port 550c is open on the left side. This ball discharge port 550c communicates with the lower part of the foul right opening 570b of the foul unit 570 when assembled to the main body frame 4.

The ball firing unit 550 includes a flat unit base 551, a firing unit cover 552 attached to cover the front side of the unit base 551, and a unit so that a rotating shaft 553a protrudes forward from the unit base 551. A firing solenoid 553 attached to the rear side of the base 551, a firing subtraction sensor 554 capable of detecting whether or not the game ball B is fired, a firing mallet 555 attached to the rotating shaft 553a of the firing solenoid 553, and a firing A nut 556 that attaches the mallet 555 to the rotating shaft 553a of the firing solenoid 553, an annular spacer 557 inserted into the rotating shaft 553a of the firing solenoid 553, and two rubbers 558 that can come into contact with the firing mallet 555. , is equipped with.

A unit base 551 of the ball firing unit 550 is formed of a metal plate such as an iron plate. The unit base 551 is provided with a ball entrance 550a, which penetrates in a square manner from the center to the upper part when viewed from the front.

The firing unit cover 552 is formed by injection molding using transparent synthetic resin. The firing unit cover 552 includes a flat front plate 552a that is spaced apart from the front of the unit base 551, and a portion of the unit base 551 that is directly below the ball entrance 550a on the rear side of the front plate 552a. It includes a ball launcher 552b that is inclined so that the left end side is higher, and a detection port 552c that vertically penetrates the ball launcher 552b.

Further, the launch unit cover 552 has an upper wall portion of the launch pad that forms a gap through which the game ball B cannot pass between the launch unit cover 552 and the ball launch pad 552b at the upper right side of the ball launch pad 552b when viewed from the front on the rear side of the front plate 552a. 552d, and a sensor lower mounting part 552e and a sensor upper mounting part 552f that are provided on the rear side of the front plate 552a so as to sandwich the ball launch pad 552b and the launch pad upper wall 552d.

Furthermore, the firing unit cover 552 has a barrier part 552g which is provided in the firing direction of the game ball B on the ball launching pad 552b and whose upper end constitutes the lower end of the ball firing port 550b, and a barrier part 552g which is provided in the firing direction of the game ball B on the ball launching pad 552b, and a barrier part 552g whose upper end constitutes the lower end of the ball firing port 550b, and a barrier part 552g which is provided in the firing direction of the game ball B on the ball launching pad 552b, and a barrier part 552g whose upper end constitutes the lower end of the ball firing port 550b, and a barrier part 552g which is provided in the firing direction of the game ball B on the ball launching pad 552b. An ejection guide wall portion 552h extends downward from the left end of the launch pad 552b and then lowers toward the left, and an upper side of the lower sensor mounting portion 552e and a right side of the lower sensor mounting portion 552e. A window 552i that penetrates back and forth in the area, a wiring groove 552j that is recessed in the front surface of the front plate 552a and extends from the lower left to the upper right, and a bottom surface of the wiring groove 552j from the front end of the wiring groove 552j. A plurality of wiring locking portions 552k projecting in parallel.

A game ball B supplied through the ball entrance 550a is placed on the ball launching pad 552b. The upper surface of the ball launch pad 552b is inclined so that the left end is higher when viewed from the front. The ball launching pad 552b is recessed in a constant cross-sectional shape (trapezoidal shape) so as to narrow downward in the direction in which the upper surface is inclined. The length of the ball launching pad 552b in the inclination direction (launching direction) is approximately the same as the diameter of the game ball B, and only one game ball B is placed so as to be in contact with two trapezoidally concave sloped surfaces. It is designed to be In this embodiment, the ball launch pad 552b is inclined at an angle of about 27 degrees with respect to the horizontal.

The detection port 552c is provided at the bottom of the trapezoidal concave portion of the ball launch pad 552b. The launch pad upper wall portion 552d is provided above the inclined lower end side of the ball launch pad 552b. The upper wall portion 552d of the launch pad is provided to form a gap with the ball launch pad 552b through which the game ball B cannot pass, but through which the tip of the launch mallet 555 can pass. As a result, the game ball B supplied to the ball launch pad 552b comes into contact with the left end of the launch pad upper wall 552d, and is restricted from moving downstream (rightward in this case) in the direction of inclination of the ball launch pad 552b. The ball is placed on the ball launch pad 552b in a state in which the ball launches the ball.

When the game ball B is placed on the ball launcher 552b, the center of the game ball B is located slightly to the right of the center of the ball entrance 550a. Further, the length of the ball launching pad 552b is set to a length on which only one game ball B is placed. As a result, while the game ball B is placed on the ball launcher 552b, the fired game ball B may return, or the game ball B may be thrown from the ball feeding unit 700, and another game ball may be thrown. Even if the ball B is supplied to the ball launcher 552b, it will be bounced by the game ball B placed on the ball launcher 552b, and will not land on the ball launcher 552b but instead will end up on the ejection guide wall 552h side (foul unit 570 side). The ball is ejected and detected by the foul ball sensor 607. Therefore, even if the fired game ball B returns or is supplied from the ball feeding unit 700 while the game ball B is placed on the ball launcher 552b, the game ball B is sent to the foul unit 570. Since the game ball B is sent and added to the ball possession as a foul ball, it is possible to eliminate the error with the actual number of game balls B that have been fired.

A light emitting portion 554a and a light receiving portion 554b, which constitute the firing subtraction sensor 554, are attached to the lower sensor mounting portion 552e and the upper sensor mounting portion 552f, respectively. Since the firing subtraction sensor 554 (here, the light emitting part 554a) is mounted facing upward in the lower sensor mounting part 552e, there is a risk of false detection if dirt or dust adheres to the upper surface of the light emitting part 554a. Since it is installed diagonally, it is difficult for dirt to accumulate.

The barrier portion 552g is provided below the trajectory of the game ball B fired from the ball launch pad 552b at a portion farther left than the diameter of the game ball B from the ball launch pad 552b. The barrier portion 552g can be brought into contact with a game ball B having a weak driving force, and the contacted game ball B passes between the barrier portion 552g and the ball launching pad 552b and reaches the lower ejection guide wall portion 552h. The ball will flow upward and will not return to the ball launch pad 552b. Further, since the barrier portion 552g extends vertically, it is possible to prevent the game ball B from entering from the foul unit 570 side.

The discharge guide wall portion 552h forms a bulb discharge port 550c with the barrier portion 552g. The ejection guide wall portion 552h is inclined so that the left end side is lower, and guides the game balls B flowing down through the space between the ball launching pad 552b and the barrier portion 552g to the left, and discharges the balls at the left end. It can be discharged from the outlet 550c to the foul unit 570 side. As a result, the game ball B, which was hit by the firing mallet 555 on the ball launching platform 552b but was not launched from the ball launching port 550b, is guided by the ejection guide wall 552h and fouled from the ball ejecting port 550c. It is discharged to unit 570.

The window portion 552i is provided at a portion between the ball launch pad 552b and the lower sensor attachment portion 552e, and at a portion in front of the tip of the firing mallet 555 at the retreated position away from the hitting position. Since the firing subtraction sensor 554 (here, the light-emitting part 554a) is attached to the lower sensor mounting part 552e with the light-emitting part 554a facing upward, it is easy for dirt and dust to accumulate on the upper surface of the light-emitting part 554a. Although there is a risk of detection, the upper surface of the light emitting part 554a can be easily cleaned by inserting a cleaning tool such as a cotton swab through the window part 552i between the ball launcher 552b and the lower sensor mounting part 552e. I can do it.

In addition, since the tip of the firing mallet 555 comes into contact with the game ball B, if there is dust or the like attached to the tip of the firing mallet 555, there is a risk that the game ball B will not be launched properly. As shown in FIG. 28, since a window 552i is provided in front of the tip of the firing mallet 555 in the standby position, by inserting a cleaning tool such as a cotton swab through the window 552i, the tip of the firing mallet 555 can be easily removed. can be cleaned.

The firing solenoid 553 is constituted by a rotary solenoid having a rotating shaft 553a extending back and forth. Although details will be described later, the firing solenoid 553 performs a series of hardware operations based on a predetermined firing sequence in conjunction with the ball feeding solenoid 706, which will be described later.

The firing subtraction sensor 554 can detect the presence or absence of the game ball B on the ball launching pad 552b. The firing subtraction sensor 554 is composed of a light emitting part 554a that emits detection light and a light receiving part 554b that receives the detection light, and each of them is attached to a lower sensor mounting part 552e and an upper sensor mounting part 552f of the firing unit cover 552. and can be mounted on. The detection light emitted from the light emitting section 554a passes through a detection port 552c provided at the bottom of the ball launcher 552b and is received by the light receiving section 554b. At this time, if the game ball B is placed on the ball launcher 552b, the detection light is blocked by the game ball B, and the detection light is not received by the light receiving section 554b. Thereby, the presence or absence of the game ball B on the ball launch pad 552b can be detected.

The firing subtraction sensor 554, which will be described in detail later, is for detecting that the game ball B is fired from the ball launching pad 552b and subtracting one from the number of balls held by the player.

In this embodiment, the number of balls held by the player is subtracted by the OFF determination of the firing subtraction sensor 554, but since the number of balls held by the player changes depending on the operation of the firing subtraction sensor 554, the number of balls held by the player changes. One-to-one reliability is required for firing. By the way, in the normal passage judgment for game ball B, the light from the light emitting part in the light receiving part is non-detected, detected, detected, (so-called "011") at a predetermined time interval (for example, the interrupt cycle is 4 ms). This is determined by the switching from OFF to ON (game ball B is absent to present), but there may be a problem with the ball when feeding the game ball B to the ball launch platform 552b (launch rail) or the launch mallet 555 after the launch. There is a concern that the tip of the ball may cause false detection of objects other than the ball being fired.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, focusing on the fact that the game ball B is parked on the ball launch pad 552b, it is first determined whether or not there is a game ball B at the ball launch pad 552b, and the game ball When B runs out, it is determined that it has been fired. In other words, it is determined to be ON (game ball present) and then turned OFF (game ball absent = firing). Specifically, we set a threshold for recognizing ON and OFF (for example, ON threshold is 80 ms, OFF threshold is 80 ms), and when the ON threshold is exceeded, it is determined that "game ball is present", and from there, OFF is determined. When the threshold value is exceeded, it is recognized that game ball B has been fired ("no game ball"), and the number of balls held is subtracted. This makes it possible to prevent malfunctions due to chattering or noise of the game ball. Note that the above threshold value is preferably an integral multiple of the interrupt period (for example, 4 ms).

The firing mallet 555 is for hitting and firing the game ball B. The firing mallet 555 is attached to the rotating shaft 553a of the firing solenoid 553, and rotates (rotates) together with the rotating shaft 553a. The tip of the launching mallet 555 is provided so as to be able to come into contact with the game ball B placed on the ball launching pad 552b, passing between the ball launching pad 552b and the upper wall portion 552d of the launching pad.

By the way, in mass production of the ball firing unit 550, in order to ensure the firing accuracy of the game ball B, the insertion angle of the tip of the firing mallet 555, the mounting angle of the ball firing platform 552b (launching rail), and the installation angle of the ball firing unit 550 must be adjusted. After assembly, adjustments to the tip position of the firing hammer 555, etc. all required severe adjustments, making mass production difficult. Therefore, in this embodiment, the method for determining the firing accuracy is determined based on the conventional method of hitting the game ball B on the firing rail and the shape of the firing rail, so that only the contact between the firing mallet 555 and the game ball B is determined. Changed to guarantee. With this change, the accuracy of the tip of the firing mallet 555 alone is more important, so the tip of the firing mallet 555 is formed by sheet metal insert molding, and the game ball B at the tip of the firing mallet 555 is formed. The contact area is made larger than before. This makes it possible to ensure the stability of firing accuracy and also allow for some assembly errors, making it possible to mass-produce the ball firing unit 550.

The nut 556 is screwed onto the rotating shaft 553a of the firing solenoid 553. The rotating shaft 553a of the firing solenoid 553 is inserted into the spacer 557. The rotation shaft 553a of the firing solenoid 553 is inserted through the spacer 557 and the firing mallet 555 from the rear in this order, and the firing mallet 555 is attached by threading and tightening the nut 556 on the tip protruding forward from the firing mallet 555. It will be done.

The rubber 558 is attached to the unit base 551 so as to restrict the rotation range (rotation range) of the firing hammer 555.

According to the ball launch unit 550 of this embodiment, only one game ball B is placed on the ball launch platform 552b, and the game ball B is launched from the ball launch platform 552b by the launch subtraction sensor 554. Since the ball is detected, the firing of the game balls B can be reliably detected one by one.

Further, according to the ball firing unit 550, since the firing unit cover 552 is formed of transparent synthetic resin, the inside of the ball firing unit 550 can be checked from the front by opening the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4. can do. By making the firing unit cover 552 transparent, there is a risk that light may enter the interior and cause false detection in the firing subtraction sensor 554 consisting of a photosensor. In this state, light from the front is blocked by the door frame 3, light from the rear is blocked by the unit base 551 made of a metal plate, and light from above is blocked by the eaves portion 501p of the black opaque body frame base 501. Since it is blocked, no light enters the interior, and false detection due to light by the firing subtraction sensor 554 is prevented.

Furthermore, the pachinko machine 1 (recirculating game machine) disclosed in this embodiment is designed to subtract the number of balls held only after the firing is completed. For this reason, compared to the method used in conventional circulating game machines, which uses the ball feed as a trigger to subtract the number of balls held before firing, when settling a game, the number of game balls remaining on the firing rail without firing (balls already subtracted) are automatically shot blank as foul balls in order to be returned to the player, and there is no need to add up the balls held to make up the balance, and quick settlement processing can be performed.

Further, according to the ball firing unit 550, since the firing subtraction sensor 554 is installed diagonally, it is possible to prevent dirt, dust, etc. from getting on the detection surface of the firing subtraction sensor 554, and also to prevent dust, etc. from getting on the firing subtraction sensor 554. Even if dirt adheres to the detection surface, the detection surface can be easily cleaned by inserting a cleaning tool such as a cotton swab through the window 552i of the firing unit cover 552, and false detection (malfunction) due to adhesion of dust etc. can be easily avoided. It can be resolved.

Further, according to the ball firing unit 550, since the window 552i is also provided in a part where the tip of the firing mallet 555 can be cleaned, the tip of the firing mallet 555 can be cleaned by inserting a cleaning tool through the window 552i of the part. The tip of the game ball B can be easily cleaned, and variations in the firing of the game balls B due to adhesion of dust and the like can be eliminated.

[4-3. foul unit]
The foul unit 570 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 29 to 31. FIG. 29(a) is a perspective view of the foul unit in the main body frame seen from the front, and FIG. 29(b) is a perspective view of the foul unit in the main body frame seen from the back. FIG. 30(a) is an exploded perspective view of the foul unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 30(b) is an exploded perspective view of the foul unit as seen from the back. FIG. 31(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the foul shutter in a closed state in a side cross section of the foul unit, and FIG. 31(b) is an explanatory diagram showing the foul shutter in the open state in a side cross section of the foul unit.

The foul unit 570 is the game ball B, which was fired by the ball firing unit 550 and hit between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 on the game board 5, but was not hit into the game area 5a, and the ball firing unit 550. This is to recover game balls B, etc. that were fired by the player but did not reach the game board 5 (between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002) because the firing strength was too weak. The foul unit 570 communicates with the foul upper opening 570a that is open on the top surface, the foul right opening 570b that is open on the right side, and the foul upper opening 570a and the foul right opening 570b. It has a foul ball outlet 570c that opens toward the rear.

The foul unit 570 is attached to a foul unit attachment portion 501h provided at the middle portion in the left-right direction at the upper front surface of the base wall portion 501b of the main body frame base 501. When the foul unit 570 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the upper end thereof is approximately at the same height as the upper end of the base wall portion 501b, and the foul right opening 570b is connected to the ball launch port 550b and the ball discharge port 550c of the ball launch unit 550. Closed by. That is, in the assembled state on the main body frame 4, the foul right opening 570b communicates with the ball launch port 550b and the ball discharge port 550c. The foul upper opening 570a and the foul right opening 570b are formed by a unit base 572 and a front cover 573, which will be described later, and the ball discharge port 550c is formed in the unit base 572.

The foul unit 570 includes a foul shutter 571 that can be opened and closed to prevent the game ball B from passing through the foul upper opening 570a, a unit base 572 that is attached to the base wall 501b of the main body frame base 501, and a foul shutter 571 that is attached to the front side of the unit base 572. The attached front cover 573, the rear cover 574 attached to the rear side of the unit base 572 so as to cover the rear part of the foul shutter 571, and the spring 575 that biases the foul shutter 571 forward. We are prepared.

The foul shutter 571 is supported by a unit base 572 and a front cover 573 so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction. The foul shutter 571 includes a shutter part 571a that is long in the form of a horizontally long strip, two front protrusions 571b that protrude forward from both left and right ends of the shutter part 571a, and extending downward from the rear end of the shutter part 571a. It has a flat rear wall portion 571c that extends out.

The foul shutter 571 can close the foul upper opening 570a so that the game ball B cannot pass through using the shutter portion 571a. The two front protrusions 571b are provided so that their front ends protrude further forward than the front cover 573, and are provided so that the rear surface of the door frame main body 100 in the door frame 3 can come into contact with them. The front end of the spring 575 contacts the rear surface of the rear wall portion 571c.

The unit base 572 is formed in an L-shape that is long in the left and right directions and has a portion that extends downward near the right end. The unit base 572 has a shutter accommodating part 572a that extends left and right along the upper side and is recessed toward the rear, and a shutter accommodating part 572a that extends left and right below the shutter accommodating part 572a and has a right end extending downward. A ball guiding part 572b is concave toward the rear, a cylindrical part 572c extends rearward in a square tube shape from the lower end of the ball guiding part 572b, and a flat plate shape extends forward from the lower end of the ball guiding part 572b. It has a receiving part 572d.

The shutter accommodating portion 572a of the unit base 572 accommodates the foul shutter 571 and the spring 575 from the front. A portion of the unit base 572 extending from side to side of the ball guide portion 572b is inclined to be lower to the right. The cylindrical portion 572c of the unit base 572 is inclined downwardly toward the rear, and the opening at the rear end is a foul ball outlet 570c.

The receiving portion 572d of the unit base 572 is inclined so that the rear end side is lower. The right edge of this receiving portion 572d constitutes the lower edge of the fur right opening 570b. The right edge of the receiving part 572d constitutes the lower edge of the foul right opening 570b, and the lower part including the lower end of the foul right opening 570b communicates with the ball discharge port 550c in the ball firing unit 550. The game ball B that falls from the ball launcher 552b and is ejected from the ball discharge port 550c and passes through the foul right opening 570b flows down onto the receiver 572d and is guided backward by the receiver 572d. , the foul ball passes through the cylindrical portion 572c and is discharged rearward from the foul ball outlet 570c. In addition, when the foul shutter 571 is closed, the game ball B that is fired from the ball firing unit 550, passes through the foul right opening 570b, and comes into contact with the back surface (lower surface) of the foul shutter 571 hits the lower wall of the front cover 573. The ball is sent to the rear ball guide section 572b by the section 573c, passes behind the receiving section 572d, and is discharged from the foul ball outlet 570c via the cylindrical section 572c.

Further, the unit base 572 has a notch 572e that is recessed from the front near the right end of the bottom wall of the portion of the ball guide portion 572b that extends left and right. This notch 572e is formed in a size that does not impede the flow of the game balls B, and can discharge dirt and the like that have entered the ball guiding portion 572b from the foul upper opening 570a downward.

The front cover 573 includes an L-shaped flat front plate 573a that is long in the left and right directions and has a portion extending downward near the right end, and a left wall portion 573b extending rearward from the left edge of the front plate 573a. , a lower wall portion 573c extending from the lower end of the left wall portion 573b to the right along the lower edge of the front plate 573a and extending rearward, and from the right end of the lower wall portion 573c to the lower part of the front plate 573a. A hanging wall portion 573d extending downward and rearward along the left edge of the extending portion, and a right wall portion 573f extending rearward from the upper right end of the front plate 573a. We are prepared.

The upper end edge and the right end edge of the front plate 573a constitute the front end edges of the upper foul opening 570a and the right foul opening 570b. The upper right edge of the left wall portion 573b constitutes the left edge of the upper foul opening 570a, and the left edge of the upper end of the right wall portion 573f constitutes the right edge of the upper foul opening 570a. The lower edge of the right wall portion 573f constitutes the upper edge of the foul right opening 570b.

In the front cover 573, a lower wall portion 573c is located below the foul upper opening portion 570a. The lower wall portion 573c of this front cover 573 is gently sloped so as to be lowered to the left, and is also sloped so as to be lowered to the rear. As a result, the impact of the game ball B falling from above as a foul ball is not received properly, and the game ball B is delivered to the ball guide portion 572b of the unit base 572 provided at the rear while escaping the impact. be able to. Then, the game ball B delivered to the ball guide section 572b is discharged from the lower end of the right end of the ball guide section 572b, through the cylindrical section 572c, and backward from the foul ball outlet 570c.

Two springs 575 are provided spaced apart from each other in the left and right directions, and are arranged inside a box-shaped shutter accommodating portion 572a in the unit base 572. The front end of the spring 575 is in contact with the rear surface of the rear wall portion 571c of the foul shutter 571, and the rear end is in contact with the front surface of the rear wall of the shutter accommodating portion 572a. The spring 575 urges the foul shutter 571 forward.

This foul unit 570 is attached to the foul unit mounting portion 501h provided in the upper part of the front surface of the base wall portion 501b of the main body frame 4 near the center in the left-right direction when assembled to the pachinko machine 1. In this state, the ball firing unit 550 is attached to the right side of the foul unit 570 adjacent to it.

As shown in FIG. 21, the foul upper opening 570a of the foul unit 570 is located near the upper end of the base wall 501b, and is also located on the axis of the ball firing unit 550 in the firing direction of the game ball B. are doing. In other words, the foul upper opening 570a is provided at a portion between the lower end opening between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 on the game board 5 and the ball launch port 550b of the ball launch unit 550. .

On the other hand, the foul right opening 570b of the foul unit 570 communicates with the ball ejection port 550b of the ball ejection unit 550 at its upper portion and with the ball ejection port 550c of the ball ejection unit 550 at its lower portion. Therefore, in the region between the lower end opening between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 on the game board 5 and the ball launch port 550b of the ball launch unit 550, there is a foul upper opening 570a and a foul right opening. 570b is provided. As a result, the game ball B fired from the ball launch port 550b of the ball launch unit 550 enters the foul unit 570 from the foul right opening 570b, passes through the foul upper opening 570a, and then exits on the game board 5 through the foul upper opening 570a. It will enter between the rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002.

In the foul unit 570 of this embodiment, when the door frame 3 is opened forward with respect to the main body frame 4, the foul shutter 571 slides forward due to the biasing force of the spring 575, as shown in FIG. 34(a). However, the shutter portion 571a of the foul shutter 571 protrudes between the front surface of the unit base 572 and the front plate 573a of the front cover 573, and closes the foul upper opening 570a so that the game ball B cannot pass through. In other words, the foul shutter 571 is in the closed position. In this state, the stepped portion of the foul shutter 571 provided at the rear end of the forward protrusion 571b is in contact with the front cover 573 and will not slide forward any further.

When the game ball B is fired from the ball firing unit 550 with the foul shutter 571 in the closed position, the fired game ball B enters the foul unit 570 from the foul right opening 570b and then passes through the foul shutter. 571 and flows down inside the foul unit 570 without being ejected upward through the foul upper opening 570a. The game balls B flowing down inside the foul unit 570 are guided by the lower wall portion 573c, the ball guiding portion 572b, the cylindrical portion 572c, etc., and are supplied to the circulation ball path unit 600 from the foul ball outlet 570c on the rear side. Thereby, even if the game ball B is fired while the door frame 3 is open, the game ball B will not leak from the foul unit 570 to the outside.

Note that when the door frame 3 is opened relative to the main body frame 4, the door opening switch 507 is turned OFF, so the firing of the game ball B from the ball firing unit 550 may be stopped by turning the door opening switch 507 OFF. . Alternatively, when the door frame 3 is opened, instead of stopping the firing of the game ball B, the main control board 1310 may temporarily stop the game, and when the door frame 3 is closed, the game may be resumed.

Furthermore, when the main body frame 4 is opened relative to the outer frame 2 (frame release switch 508 is OFF), the door frame 3 is closed and the game balls B do not leak to the outside, so that the ball firing unit 550 does not leak out. The firing of the game ball B may not be stopped. Alternatively, when the main body frame 4 is opened, the same process as when the door frame 3 described above is opened may be performed.

When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the rear surface of the door frame 3 comes into contact with the front ends of the two front protrusions 571b of the foul shutter 571, and the foul shutter 571 resists the biasing force of the spring 575. is in a state where it has slid backward (see FIG. 34(b)). In this state, the shutter part 571a of the foul shutter 571 is located behind the front surface of the unit base 572, and the foul upper opening 570a is open so that the game ball B can pass through. In other words, the foul shutter 571 is in the open position.

When the game ball B is fired from the ball firing unit 550 with the foul shutter 571 in the open position, the fired game ball B enters the foul unit 570 from the foul right opening 570b and then hits the foul. The ball passes through the opening 570a and is launched upward toward the game board 5 (between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002). Then, the shot game ball B passes over the backflow prevention member 1007 provided at the upper end of the inner rail 1002, so that the game ball B is driven into the game area 5a.

Note that the game ball B that was fired from the ball firing unit 550 but did not cross the backflow prevention member 1007 at the upper end of the inner rail 1002 (the game ball B that was not hit into the gaming area) is between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail. 1002, enters the foul ball through the foul upper opening 570a, and is collected by the foul unit 570. The game ball B collected through the foul upper opening 570a is guided by the lower wall part 573c, the ball guiding part 572b, the cylindrical part 572c, etc., and flows into the circulation ball path unit 600 from the foul ball outlet 570c on the rear side. It is discharged (supplied).

Further, the foul unit 570 receives the game ball B discharged from the ball discharge port 550c of the ball firing unit 550 at the lower part of the foul right opening 570b. The game ball B that entered the foul unit 570 from the lower part of the foul right opening 570b flows down onto the receiving part 572d, is guided backward by the slope of the receiving part 572d, and flows from the foul ball outlet 570c to the circulating ball path unit 600. be discharged.

In this way, according to the foul unit 570, the game balls B that were fired from the ball firing unit 550 but were not hit into the game area 5a of the game board 5 are collected without leaking to the outside, and the circulating balls are The route unit 600 can be supplied. Although details will be described later, in the circulating ball path unit 600, the foul ball sensor 607 detects the game ball B supplied from the foul ball outlet 570c. When the foul ball sensor 607 detects the game ball B, one is added to the number of balls held by the player.

Further, in the foul unit 570, the unit base 572, front cover 573, etc. are transparently made of synthetic resin, so that the inside can be visually checked from the outside, making it easy to discover balls jammed inside.

[4-3a. Foul unit of second embodiment]
Next, the foul unit 570A of the second embodiment will be described in detail, mainly with reference to FIGS. 32 to 34. FIG. 32(a) is a perspective view of the foul unit of the second embodiment seen from the front, and FIG. 32(b) is a perspective view of the foul unit of the second embodiment seen from the back. FIG. 33(a) is an exploded perspective view of the foul unit of the second embodiment as seen from the front, and FIG. 33(b) is an exploded perspective view of the foul unit of the second embodiment as seen from the rear. be. FIG. 34(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the foul shutter in a closed side cross section of the foul unit of the second embodiment, and FIG. 34(b) is an explanatory diagram showing the foul shutter in a side cross section of the foul unit of the second embodiment with the foul shutter open. It is an explanatory diagram shown in a state.

The foul unit 570A is the game ball B, which was fired by the ball firing unit 550 and hit between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 on the game board 5, but was not hit into the game area 5a, and the ball firing unit 550. This is to recover game balls B, etc. that were fired by the player but did not reach the game board 5 (between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002) because the firing strength was too weak. The foul unit 570A communicates with the foul upper opening 570a that is open on the top surface, the foul right opening 570b that is open on the right side, the foul upper opening 570a, and the foul right opening 570b, and is in communication with the foul upper opening 570a and the foul right opening 570b. It has a foul ball outlet 570c that opens toward the rear.

The foul unit 570A is attached to a foul unit attachment portion 501h provided at the middle portion in the left-right direction at the upper front surface of the base wall portion 501b of the main body frame base 501. When the foul unit 570A is assembled to the main body frame 4, the upper end thereof is approximately at the same height as the upper end of the base wall portion 501b, and the foul right opening 570b is connected to the ball firing port 550b and the ball discharge port 550c of the ball firing unit 550. Closed by. That is, in the assembled state on the main body frame 4, the foul right opening 570b communicates with the ball launch port 550b and the ball discharge port 550c. The foul upper opening 570a and the foul right opening 570b are formed by a unit base 572 and a front cover 573, which will be described later, and the ball discharge port 550c is formed in the unit base 572.

The foul unit 570A includes a foul shutter 571 that can be opened and closed to prevent the game ball B from passing through the foul upper opening 570a, a unit base 572 attached to the base wall 501b of the main body frame base 501, and a foul shutter 571 attached to the front side of the unit base 572. The attached front cover 573, the rear cover 574 attached to the rear side of the unit base 572 so as to cover the rear part of the foul shutter 571, the spring 575 that biases the foul shutter 571 forward, and the unit A foul ball grounding plate 576 is provided between the base 572 and the front cover 573.

The foul shutter 571 is supported by a unit base 572 and a front cover 573 so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction. The foul shutter 571 includes a shutter part 571a that is long in the form of a horizontally long strip, two front protrusions 571b that protrude forward from both left and right ends of the shutter part 571a, and extending downward from the rear end of the shutter part 571a. It has a flat rear wall portion 571c that extends out.

The foul shutter 571 can close the foul upper opening 570a so that the game ball B cannot pass through using the shutter portion 571a. The two front protrusions 571b are provided so that their front ends protrude further forward than the front cover 573, and are provided so that the rear surface of the door frame main body 100 in the door frame 3 can come into contact with them. The front end of the spring 575 contacts the rear surface of the rear wall portion 571c.

The unit base 572 includes a flat T-shaped body portion 572f that is long in the left and right and has a portion that extends downward near the right end, and a body portion 572f that penetrates back and forth near the upper end of the body portion 572f and extends in the left and right. It has a shutter insertion opening 572g that extends out, and a plurality of rear support openings 572h that are provided along the lower edge on the left side of the downwardly extending portion of the main body portion 572f and penetrate back and forth. ing.

The unit base 572 is provided with a foul ball outlet 570c that penetrates back and forth and extends rearward in a rectangular tube shape near the lower end of the downwardly extending portion of the main body portion 572f. The cylindrical foul ball outlet 570c is inclined downwardly toward the rear.

The main body portion 572f is inclined such that the lower edge of the portion on the left side of the portion extending downward is lowered to the right. The shutter insertion opening 572g is provided in a size that allows the shutter portion 571a and the front protrusion portion 571b of the foul shutter 571 to be inserted therethrough. The plurality of rear support ports 572h are long in the left and right so that they are lowered to the right, and are arranged in a row along the inclined lower end edge of the main body portion 572f. The rear support opening 572h is provided so that the support piece 576a of the foul ball ground metal plate 576 is inserted with a gap therebetween.

The front cover 573 includes a flat T-shaped front plate 573a that is long in the left and right directions and has a portion extending downward near the right end, and a left wall portion 573b extending rearward from the left edge of the front plate 573a. A lower wall portion 573c extends from the lower end of the left wall portion 573b to the right along the lower edge of the front plate 573a and also extends rearward, and from the right end of the lower wall portion 573c to the lower part of the front plate 573a. A hanging wall portion 573d extends downward along the left edge of the portion extending to the front plate 573a, and a portion of the front plate 573a extending downward from the lower end of the hanging wall portion 573d. It includes a bottom wall portion 573e extending rightward and rearward along the lower edge, and a right wall portion 573f extending rearward from the upper right end of the front plate 573a.

The upper end edge and the right end edge of the front plate 573a constitute the front end edges of the upper foul opening 570a and the right foul opening 570b. The upper right edge of the left wall portion 573b constitutes the left edge of the upper foul opening 570a, and the left edge of the upper end of the right wall portion 573f constitutes the right edge of the upper foul opening 570a. The lower edge of the right wall portion 573f constitutes the upper edge of the foul right opening 570b, and the right edge of the bottom wall portion 573e constitutes the lower edge of the foul right opening 570b.

The front cover 573 has a lower wall portion 573c located below the foul upper opening 570a, and after guiding the game ball B flowing down through the foul upper opening 570a to the right, the lower wall portion 573c is guided along the hanging wall portion 573d. It can be made to flow down onto the bottom wall portion 573e. The bottom wall portion 573e is sloped so that a portion in front of the foul ball outlet 570c is lower toward the rear, and a portion on the right side thereof is sloped higher toward the right. Therefore, the game ball B that has flowed down to the bottom wall portion 573e is guided rearward and discharged rearward from the foul ball outlet 570c. Furthermore, since the right edge of the bottom wall portion 573e constitutes the lower edge of the foul right opening portion 570b, the game ball B that enters from the foul right opening portion 570b will flow down onto the bottom wall portion 573e. , the foul ball is guided by the bottom wall portion 573e and discharged rearward from the foul ball outlet 570c.

Further, the front cover 573 includes a plurality of front support openings 573g that are arranged in rows on the left and right along the lower wall portion 573c on the front plate 573a and penetrate through the front and back. The plurality of front support ports 573g are provided to face the rear support port 572h of the unit base 572. Further, the front support opening 573g is provided so that the support piece 576a of the foul ball ground metal plate 576 is inserted with a gap therebetween.

The rear cover 574 is formed into a box shape with an open front. Inside the rear cover 574, the rear part of the foul shutter 571 is inserted, and a spring 575 is arranged. The rear end of the spring 575 comes into contact with the front surface of the rear wall of the rear cover 574 .

Two springs 575 are provided spaced apart from each other on the left and right, and are arranged inside the box-shaped rear cover 574. The front end of the spring 575 is in contact with the rear surface of the rear wall portion 571c of the foul shutter 571, and the rear end is in contact with the front surface of the rear wall of the rear cover 574. The spring 575 urges the foul shutter 571 forward.

The foul ball ground metal plate 576 is formed of a metal plate such as an iron plate, and is finally connected to the ground of the game hall via a ground wire (not shown). The foul ball ground metal plate 576 is formed in the shape of a horizontally long strip, and a plurality of support pieces 576a extend outward from the front and rear long sides. The foul ball ground metal plate 576 is placed on the upper surface of the lower wall portion 573c of the front cover 573, and a plurality of support pieces 576a are connected to the rear support opening 572h of the unit base 572 and the front support opening 573g of the front cover 573. , and is inserted with some play.

As a result, the game ball B that has flowed down toward the lower wall portion 573c through the foul upper opening 570a is guided to the right in a state where the static electricity charged by contacting the foul ball ground metal plate 576 is removed. . At this time, since the support piece 576a is loosely fitted into the rear support port 572h and the front support port 573g, the foul ball ground metal plate 576 vibrates due to contact with the game ball B, and the vibration causes the foul ball ground metal plate 576 to vibrate. Dust and dirt on 576 are discharged to the outside through the gap between the loosely fitted rear support port 572h and front support port 573g. Note that this foul ball ground metal plate 576 also serves as reinforcement against the falling game ball B.

This foul unit 570A, when assembled in the pachinko machine 1, is attached to a foul unit mounting portion 501h provided at the upper part of the front surface of the base wall portion 501b of the main body frame 4 near the center in the left-right direction. In this state, the ball firing unit 550 is attached adjacent to the right side of the foul unit 570A.

Similarly to the foul unit 570 of the first embodiment, the foul upper opening 570a of the foul unit 570A is located near the upper end of the base wall 501b, and the ball firing direction of the game ball B in the ball firing unit 550 is is located on the axis of In other words, the foul upper opening 570a is provided at a portion between the lower end opening between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 on the game board 5 and the ball launch port 550b of the ball launch unit 550. .

On the other hand, the foul right opening 570b of the foul unit 570A communicates with the ball ejection port 550b of the ball ejection unit 550 at its upper portion and with the ball ejection port 550c of the ball ejection unit 550 at its lower portion. Therefore, in the region between the lower end opening between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 on the game board 5 and the ball launch port 550b of the ball launch unit 550, there is a foul upper opening 570a and a foul right opening. 570b is provided. As a result, the game ball B fired from the ball launch port 550b of the ball launch unit 550 enters the foul unit 570A from the foul right opening 570b, and then passes through the foul upper opening 570a and exits on the game board 5. It will enter between the rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002.

In the foul unit 570A of this embodiment, when the door frame 3 is opened forward relative to the main body frame 4, the foul shutter 571 slides forward due to the urging force of the spring 575, as shown in FIG. 34(a). However, the shutter portion 571a of the foul shutter 571 protrudes between the front surface of the unit base 572 and the front plate 573a of the front cover 573, and closes the foul upper opening 570a so that the game ball B cannot pass through. In other words, the foul shutter 571 is in the closed position. In this state, the rear wall portion 571c of the foul shutter 571 is in contact with the rear surface of the main body portion 572f of the unit base 572, and will not slide forward any further.

When the game ball B is fired from the ball firing unit 550 with the foul shutter 571 in the closed position, the fired game ball B enters the foul unit 570A from the foul right opening 570b and then passes through the foul shutter. 571 and flows down inside the foul unit 570A without being ejected upward through the foul upper opening 570a. The game balls B flowing down inside the foul unit 570A are guided by the lower wall part 573c (foul ball grounding plate 576), the hanging wall part 573d, the bottom wall part 573e, etc., and are circulated from the foul ball outlet 570c on the rear side. A route unit 600 is provided. Thereby, even if the game ball B is fired while the door frame 3 is open, the game ball B will not leak outside from the foul unit 570A.

Note that when the door frame 3 is opened relative to the main body frame 4, the door opening switch 507 is turned OFF, so the firing of the game ball B from the ball firing unit 550 may be stopped by turning the door opening switch 507 OFF. . Alternatively, when the door frame 3 is opened, instead of stopping the firing of the game ball B, the main control board 1310 may temporarily stop the game, and when the door frame 3 is closed, the game may be resumed.

Furthermore, when the main body frame 4 is opened relative to the outer frame 2 (frame release switch 508 is OFF), the door frame 3 is closed and the game balls B do not leak to the outside, so that the ball firing unit 550 does not leak out. The firing of the game ball B may not be stopped. Alternatively, when the main body frame 4 is opened, the same process as when the door frame 3 described above is opened may be performed.

When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the rear surface of the door frame 3 comes into contact with the front ends of the two front protrusions 571b of the foul shutter 571, and the foul shutter 571 resists the biasing force of the spring 575. is in a state where it has slid backward (see FIG. 34(b)). In this state, the shutter part 571a of the foul shutter 571 is located behind the front surface of the unit base 572, and the foul upper opening 570a is open so that the game ball B can pass through. In other words, the foul shutter 571 is in the open position.

When the game ball B is fired from the ball firing unit 550 with the foul shutter 571 in the open position, the fired game ball B enters the foul unit 570A from the foul right opening 570b and then hits the foul. The ball passes through the opening 570a and is launched upward toward the game board 5 (between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002). Then, when the game ball B that has been launched passes over the backflow prevention member 1007 provided at the upper end of the inner rail 1002, the game ball B is driven into the game area 5a.

Note that the game ball B that was fired from the ball firing unit 550 but did not cross the backflow prevention member 1007 at the upper end of the inner rail 1002 (the game ball B that was not hit into the gaming area) is between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail. 1002, enters from the foul upper opening 570a as a foul ball, and is collected by the foul unit 570A. The game ball B collected through the upper foul opening 570a flows down onto the foul ball ground metal plate 576 placed on the upper surface of the lower wall 573c, and static electricity is removed by the foul ball ground metal plate 576. At this time, since the foul ball ground metal plate 576 is loosely fitted, it vibrates when the game ball B comes into contact with it, and the vibration causes dust, dirt, etc. on the foul ball ground metal plate 576 to be removed from the rear support opening 572h and the front support. It is discharged to the outside of the foul unit 570A from the port 573g.

The game ball B that has flown down onto the foul ball ground metal plate 576 (lower wall portion 573c) is guided to the right by the inclination, flows down onto the bottom wall portion 573e along the hanging wall portion 573d, and flows down onto the bottom wall portion 573e. The foul ball is guided backward by the inclination and is discharged from the foul ball outlet 570c to the circulation ball path unit 600.

Further, in the foul unit 570A, the game ball B discharged from the ball discharge port 550c of the ball firing unit 550 is received at the lower part of the foul right opening 570b. The game ball B that entered the foul unit 570A from the lower part of the foul right opening 570b flows down onto the bottom wall 573e, is guided rearward by the slope of the bottom wall 573e, and passes from the foul ball outlet 570c to the circulating ball path unit. 600.

In this way, according to the foul unit 570A, the game balls B that have been fired from the ball firing unit 550 but have not been hit into the game area 5a of the game board 5 are collected without leaking to the outside, and the balls are circulated. The route unit 600 can be supplied. Although details will be described later, in the circulating ball path unit 600, the foul ball sensor 607 detects the game ball B supplied from the foul ball outlet 570c. When the foul ball sensor 607 detects the game ball B, one is added to the number of balls held by the player.

In addition, in the foul unit 570A, the unit base 572, front cover 573, rear cover 574, etc. are made of transparent synthetic resin, so the inside can be visually checked from the outside, allowing you to discover clogged balls inside. easy.

[4-3b. Foul unit of third embodiment]
Next, the foul unit 570 of the third embodiment will be described. The foul unit 570 of the third embodiment is different only in the opening/closing mechanism of the foul shutter 571, and the other configurations are the same as the foul unit 570 described above. Although not shown, the foul unit 570 of the third embodiment is provided with an electric actuator such as a motor or a solenoid for opening and closing the foul shutter 571.

In this embodiment, when the door open switch 507 is turned off by opening the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4, the fur shutter 571 is slid to the closed position by the electric actuator. Thereby, even if the game ball B is fired from the ball firing unit 550 with the door frame 3 open, the game ball B will not fly out from the foul upper opening 570a.

Then, when the door frame 3 is closed and the door open switch 507 is turned on, the foul shutter 571 is slid to the open position by the electric actuator, and the game ball B fired from the ball firing unit 550 is sent through the foul upper opening 570a. It becomes possible to drive through the game board 5 side.

Note that even when the frame opening switch 508 is turned off by opening the main body frame 4 relative to the outer frame 2, the foul shutter 571 may be slid to the closed position by the electric actuator. In this case, if the opening/closing process of the foul shutter 571 by the frame opening switch 508 is made the same as the opening/closing process by the door opening switch 507, the software configuration can be simplified.

Further, an open switch (not shown) that can detect both the opening of the door frame 3 and the opening of the main body frame 4 may be provided, and the foul shutter 571 may be opened and closed by an electric actuator, and the mechanism for opening and closing may be It can be made simple.

[4-4. Circulating sphere path unit]
The circulating sphere path unit 600 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 35 to 42 and the like. FIG. 35(a) is a perspective view of the circulation ball path unit in the main body frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 35(b) is a perspective view of the circulation ball path unit in the main body frame as seen from the back. FIG. 36 is an exploded perspective view of the circulation ball path unit disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 37 is an exploded perspective view of the circulation ball path unit exploded and seen from the back. FIG. 38(a) is a plan view showing only the ball meandering member and ball removal shutter in the circulation ball path unit, and FIG. 38(b) is a perspective view from the front showing only the ball meandering member and ball removal shutter in the circulation ball path unit. It is a diagram. FIG. 39 (a1) is an explanatory view showing the ball extracting shutter and the ball meandering member in the closed position together with the ball receiving tray in a side cross section, and (a2) is an explanatory view showing only the portion of the ball extracting shutter in (a1) from the bottom. , (b1) is an explanatory view showing the ball removal shutter in the open position and the ball meandering member together with the ball receiving tray in a side cross section, and (b2) is an explanatory view showing only the portion of the ball removal shutter in (b1) from the bottom. It is a diagram.

In addition, FIG. 40(a) is an explanatory diagram showing a front cross section of the circulating ball path unit cut at the out ball sensor location, and FIG. 40(b) is a front view of the circulating ball path unit cut at the safe ball sensor location It is an explanatory view shown in a cross section. FIG. 41(a) is an enlarged front perspective view showing the lower part of the main body frame together with the outer frame with the meandering cover of the circulation ball path unit removed, and FIG. 41(b) is a perspective view of the meandering cover of the circulation ball path unit. FIG. 3 is a perspective view from behind showing an enlarged view of the lower part of the main body frame together with the outer frame in a state where the main body frame is removed. FIG. 42 is a plan view showing a ball meandering member, a meandering cover, a ball removal shutter, and a gauge section in the circulation ball path unit.

The circulating ball path unit 600 stores a plurality of game balls B ejected from the game board 5 and game balls B collected by the foul unit 570, and also transfers the stored game balls B to the ball lifting unit 650. This is for sending the ball to the ball firing unit 550 side through the ball. The circulating ball path unit 600 is attached to a circulating ball path unit mounting portion 501l provided on the rear surface of the base wall portion 501b of the main body frame base 501.

The circulating ball path unit 600 includes an out ball socket 600a that is long on the left and right and opens upward, and a safe ball socket that is provided behind the out ball socket 600a and is long on the left and right and opens upward. 600b, a foul ball socket 600c that is open at the front, and a ball discharge port 600d that is open toward the right near the lower end. The out ball socket 600a and the safe ball socket 600b are formed so that the depth in the front and back direction is slightly wider than the diameter of the game ball B, and are formed so that a plurality of game balls B can pass through in the left and right direction. The foul ball socket 600c and the ball discharge port 600d are formed in a size that allows each game ball B to pass therethrough.

The game ball B (out ball) received at the out port of the game board 5 is received in the out ball receptacle 600a. The safe ball receptacle 600b receives game balls B (safe balls) that have been received in the winning holes such as the general winning hole, the starting hole, the big winning hole, etc. of the game board 5. The foul ball receptacle 600c receives the game ball B (foul ball) discharged from the foul ball outlet 570c of the foul unit 570. The ball discharge port 600d discharges the game ball B stored inside after being received by the out ball socket 600a, the safe ball socket 600b, and the foul ball socket 600c, and delivers it to the ball lifting unit 650. be.

The circulation ball path unit 600 also has an out ball passage 601 through which the game balls B received in the out ball socket 600a circulate, and a safe ball passage 602 through which the game balls B received in the safe ball socket 600b circulate. , the foul ball passage 603 through which the game ball B received in the foul ball receptacle 600c flows, and the downstream end of each of the out ball passage 601, the safe ball passage 602, and the foul ball passage 603. has a ball storage passage 604 which is a ball discharge port 600d.

Furthermore, the circulating ball path unit 600 includes an out ball sensor 605 that detects game balls B (out balls) flowing through the out ball path 601 one by one, and a ball sensor 605 that detects game balls B (out balls) flowing through the safe ball path 602. It has a safe ball sensor 606 that detects the safe balls one by one, and a foul ball sensor 607 that detects the game balls B (foul balls) flowing through the foul ball passage 603 one by one. The safe ball sensor 606 has the meaning of a sensor for all winning holes in conventional pachinko machines, and can be used to determine fraudulent winnings by comparing it with the total number of winnings from all winning holes.

The circulating ball path unit 600 includes a flat ball receiving front plate 610, a ball receiving front member 611 attached to the rear side of the ball receiving front plate 610, and a ball receiving front member 611 attached to the rear side of the ball receiving front member 611. A ball receiving rear member 612 is provided. A ball storage passage 604 is provided below the ball receiver front plate 610, the ball receiver front member 611, and the ball receiver rear member 612.

The circulating ball path unit 600 also includes a ball meandering member 613 that is provided below the ball receiver front plate 610, a ball receiver front member 611, and a ball receiver rear member 612 and is open upward. A meandering cover 614 covering the upper part, a ball removal shutter 615 for discharging game balls B from the ball meandering member 613, a magnet 616 attached to the ball removal shutter 615, and the rear of the ball receiving front member 611. It includes a circulation ball route relay board 617 attached to the side, and a gauge part 620 provided on the meandering cover 614.

The ball receiver front plate 610 extends left and right, and is provided with a foul ball receiver 600c that penetrates back and forth near the lower part of the center in the left and right direction.

The ball receiving front member 611 cooperates with the ball receiving front plate 610 to form an out ball receiving hole 600a on the upper surface. In the ball receiving front member 611, an out ball passage 601 and a foul ball passage 603 are formed to be open to the front, and when the ball receiving front plate 610 is attached, the front sides thereof are closed. The downstream end of the out ball passage 601 opens downward at the lower left end of the ball receiving front member 611. The opening at the downstream end of the out ball passage 601 is located in front of the opening at the downstream end of the safe ball passage 602. The foul ball passage 603 has a downstream end that opens downward at a portion of the ball receiving front member 611 that is lower right than the downstream end of the out ball passage 601 .

The ball receiving front member 611 has an out ball receiving plate portion 611a that is inclined downwardly toward the right from the middle of the vertical wall forming the left edge of the out ball receiving port 600a to near the center in the left and right direction. The vertical wall forming the right edge of the out ball socket 600a becomes lower toward the left from a portion below the top 611a of the out ball receiving plate part to near the bottom of the left edge of the out ball socket 600a. A crank portion 611c extends from the left end of the out ball receiving plate portion 611b toward the lower left with a width that allows game balls B to flow in a line, have.

The height between the right end of the upper out ball receiving plate part 611a and the lower part of the out ball receiving plate 611b is about twice the diameter of the game ball B, so that the height of the lower part of the out ball receiving plate 611b on the left side is formed so that it becomes lower toward the left. Thereby, the game balls B received in the out ball socket 600a can be arranged in one row.

An out-ball sensor 605 is attached to a vertically extending portion of the crank portion 611c directly below the downstream end of the out-ball receiving plate lower portion 611b.

In the ball receiving front member 611, an out ball passage 601 is formed by an upper out ball receiving plate portion 611a, a lower out ball receiving plate portion 611b, a crank portion 611c, and the like. Therefore, the out ball passage 601 is formed wide on the upstream side so that it can receive many game balls B, and the received game balls B are arranged in a line and sent to the downstream ball storage passage 604 (ball meandering member 613). I try to pass it on.

Further, in the ball receiving front member 611, the foul ball passage 603 is located below the out ball receiving plate upper portion 611a and below the out ball receiving plate lower portion 611b, and the foul ball passage 603 is located at a portion below the out ball receiving plate upper portion 611a and from a portion behind the foul ball receiving port 600c. The lower ball receiving plate 611b slopes downwardly toward the left to the right side of the left end, and then extends downward for a short length. In the ball receiving front member 611, a foul ball sensor 607 is attached to a portion extending leftward in the foul ball passage 603. This foul ball passage 603 is formed so that game balls B flow in a line, and the game balls B that have circulated through the foul ball passage 603 are transferred from the out ball passage 601 in the ball storage passage 604 (ball meandering member 613). It is delivered to a part downstream from the part to which it is delivered.

The ball receiver front member 611 is attached to the front edge of the upper out ball receiver plate 611a, the front edge of the lower out ball receiver plate 611b, and the front edge of the bottom wall that forms the foul ball passage 603 and extends left and right. A recessed portion 611d is provided with a size that does not impede the flow of game balls B. This recessed portion 611d allows dust, dirt, etc. in the out ball passage 601 and the foul ball passage 603 to be discharged to the outside.

Further, in the ball receiving front member 611, a circulation ball path relay board 617 is attached to a portion behind the foul ball passage 603 on the rear surface.

The rear ball receiver member 612 cooperates with the front ball receiver member 611 to form a safe ball socket 600b on the upper surface. A safe ball passage 602 is formed in the ball receiving rear member 612 in a state that is open to the front, and the front side of the safe ball passage 602 is closed by attaching the ball receiving front member 611. The downstream end of the safe ball passage 602 opens downward at the lower left end of the ball receiving rear member 612. The opening at the downstream end of the safe ball passage 602 is located behind the opening at the downstream end of the out ball passage 601. In other words, the opening at the downstream end of the out ball passage 601 and the opening at the downstream end of the safe ball passage 602 are lined up one after the other.

The ball receiving rear member 612 has a safe ball receiving plate upper portion 612a that is inclined downwardly toward the right from the middle of the vertical wall forming the left edge of the safe ball receiving port 600b to near the center in the left and right direction. , the vertical wall forming the right edge of the safe ball socket 600b becomes lower toward the left from a portion below the safe ball receiving plate upper part 612a to near the bottom of the left edge of the safe ball socket 600b. A lower part 612b of the safe ball receiving plate is inclined as shown in FIG. have.

The height between the right end of the upper safe ball receiving plate 612a and the lower safe ball receiving plate 612b is about twice the diameter of the game ball B, so that the height of the lower safe ball receiving plate 612b on the left side is formed so that it becomes lower toward the left. Thereby, the game balls B received in the safe ball socket 600b can be arranged in one row.

A safe ball sensor 606 is attached to a vertically extending portion of the crank portion 612c directly below the downstream end of the lower safe ball receiving plate 612b.

In the ball receiving rear member 612, a safe ball passage 602 is configured by an upper safe ball receiving plate portion 612a, a lower safe ball receiving plate portion 612b, a crank portion 612c, and the like. Therefore, the safe ball passage 602 is formed wide on the upstream side so as to be able to receive a large number of game balls B, and the received game balls B are arranged in a line to form the downstream ball storage passage 604 (ball meandering member 613). I try to hand it over to the most upstream section.

The ball receiving rear member 612 is provided with a recessed portion 612d at the front edge of the upper safe ball receiving plate portion 612a and the front edge of the lower safe ball receiving plate portion 612b, which is recessed in a size that does not impede the flow of the game ball B. . This recessed portion 612d allows dust, dirt, etc. within the safe bulb passage 602 to be discharged to the outside.

The ball meandering member 613 extends in the left-right direction so that the right end side is lower while meandering back and forth, and forms a ball storage passage 604 in which a large number of game balls B can be stored. As shown in FIG. 38 etc., the spherical meandering member 613 includes a first straight section 613a that is inclined downwardly toward the front with the rear end as an upstream end, and a downstream end (front end) of the first straight section 613a. ), the first folded part 613b bends to the right and then further lowers toward the rear. A second straight part 613c extends to a position near the rear end of the second straight part 613a, and a second straight part 613c bends to the right from the downstream end (rear end) of the second straight part 613c and then further bends forward to become lower. A second folded part 613d, a third straight part 613e extending forward from the downstream end (front end) of the second folded part 613d to the same position as the front end of the second straight part 613c, and a third straight part 613e. A third folded portion 613f bends to the right from the downstream end (front end) of the third folded portion 613e and then further lowers toward the rear; The fourth straight part 613g extends to the same position as the rear end of the third straight part 613e, and after bending to the right from the downstream end (rear end) of the fourth straight part 613g, it becomes further lower forward. A fourth folded portion 613h that is bent, and a fifth straight portion 613i that extends forward from the downstream end (front end) of the fourth folded portion 613h to the same position as the front end of the fourth straight portion 613g. , a first bent portion 613j that is bent lower to the right from the downstream end (front end) of the fifth straight portion 613i, and a first bent portion 613j that is bent lower to the right from the downstream end (right end) of the first bent portion 613j. The first transverse part 613k extends, the second bent part 613l bends downward from the downstream end (right end) of the first transverse part 613k, and the downstream end (rear end) of the second bent part 613l. The sixth straight part 613m extends to a position near the downstream end of the fifth straight part 613i so as to become lower rearward from the end), and the sixth straight part 613m lowers rightward from the downstream end (rear end) of the sixth straight part 613m. It includes a third bent portion 613n that is bent as shown in FIG. An opening at the downstream end of the second transverse portion 613o forms a ball discharge port 600d that opens to the right.

In the ball meandering member 613 (ball storage passage 604), the downstream end opening of the safe ball passage 602 is located above the rear end of the first straight part 613a, and the downstream end opening of the out ball passage 601 is located in front of it. The opening is located. Further, the opening at the downstream end of the foul ball passage 603 is located above the rear end of the second orthogonal portion 613c.

In addition, the ball meandering member 613 extends back and forth along the ball extraction port 613p vertically penetrating in the first transverse portion 613k and along both left and right edges of the ball extraction port 613p on the lower surface of the first transverse portion 613k. A pair of rail portions 613q projecting downward while supporting a pair of rail portions 613q, a supporting piece 613r projecting toward each other from the lower end of each of the pair of rail portions 613q, and side surfaces of the pair of rail portions 613q facing each other. A locking portion 613s provided in the game ball B and a plurality of slits 613t provided through the rolling surface (bottom surface) on which the game ball B rolls.

The ball outlet 613p of the ball meandering member 613 is opened and closed by a ball outlet shutter 615, the details of which will be described later. The pair of rail portions 613q extend rearward beyond the ball outlet 613p. A pair of rail parts 613q support the ball removal shutter 615 so that it can slide in the front and rear directions. The two support pieces 613r prevent the ball shutter 615 from falling. Further, the two support pieces 613r protrude from the respective rail portions 613q at the ball extraction opening 613p. Thereby, even if the load of the game ball B acts on the ball removal shutter 615 through the ball removal opening 613p, the ball removal shutter 615 can be sufficiently supported, and the ball removal shutter 615 is prevented from falling off. The locking portion 613s can hold the ball removal shutter 615 in the open position by locking the locking protrusion 615f of the ball removal shutter 615.

The slit 613t of the ball meandering member 613 has a size that does not impede the flow of the game balls B, and penetrates downward, allowing dirt, dust, etc. in the ball storage passage 604 to be discharged. The slit 613t provided at the folded portion or bent portion is provided on the outside of the curve.

Although the details will be described later, the ball meandering member 613 is provided with a circulating ball shortage sensor 621 and a circulating ball excess sensor 622 that can detect the circulating game balls B.

According to this ball meandering member 613, it is possible to form a ball storage passage 604 that meanders back and forth and extends in the left-right direction so as to become lower to the right. Moreover, the spherical meandering member 613 has a plurality of folded parts (first folded part 613b, second folded part 613d, third folded part 613f, fourth folded part 613h) and a plurality of bent parts (first folded part 613j, fourth folded part 613h). Since the second bent part 613l and the third bent part 613n are provided, the circulation speed of the game ball B can be suppressed at these parts, and the impact applied to the entrance side of the ball lifting unit 650 can be alleviated. I can do it.

The serpentine cover 614 is attached to the spherical serpentine member 613 so as to cover the open upper end of the spherical serpentine member 613. By attaching the meandering cover 614 to the ball meandering member 613, it prevents the game balls B from leaking from the ball meandering member 613 (ball storage passage 604) to the outside, or prevents game balls B that do not correspond to the ball storage passage 604 from entering the ball meandering member 613 (ball storage passage 604) from entering the game ball B or unauthorized use. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from being inserted or played.

The meandering cover 614 is formed so that the length of the portion extending back and forth at the left end is shorter toward the rear than the first straight portion 613a of the spherical meandering member 613. As a result, when the meandering cover 614 is attached to the ball meandering member 613, the rear part of the first straight section 613a of the ball meandering member 613 is opened upward, and the out ball passage 601 and the safe ball pass through that part. It becomes possible to communicate with the passage 602.

Furthermore, the meandering cover 614 has an opening 614a vertically penetrating the ball meandering member 613 at an upper part near the rear end of the second straight section 613c. The foul ball passage 603 can communicate with the ball storage passage 604 through this opening 614a.

The ball removal shutter 615 is for removing (discharging) the game balls B (circulating game balls) from the circulating ball path unit 600 etc., and is attached to the lower surface of the ball meandering member 613 so as to be slidable in the front and back direction. . The ball removal shutter 615 includes a flat door portion 615a that can close the ball removal port 613p, a knob portion 615b extending vertically and horizontally from the front edge of the door portion 615a, and a rear end of both left and right ends of the door portion 615a. a pair of rod portions 615c each extending rearward from the door portion 615a; a connecting portion 615e forming an opening portion 615d penetrating vertically by connecting the pair of rod portions 615c at the rear of the door portion 615a; A locking protrusion 615f bulges out from the outer surface between the connecting portion 615e and the rear end of the pair of rod portions 615c, and a hook portion mutually extending outward from the rear end of the pair of rod portions 615c. 615g, and a magnet support portion 615h projecting in a cylindrical shape from the lower surface of the door portion 615a.

The magnet support portion 615h of the ball extraction shutter 615 can support the cylindrical magnet 616 by inserting the cylindrical magnet 616 into the cylinder. The magnet support portion 615h is provided upstream of the opening portion 615d. This magnet support portion 615h has a portion protruding into the cylinder at the lower end and is open to the rear, and by inserting the magnet 616 from the rear, the downwardly protruding portion of the magnet 616 is located. However, the magnet 616 does not fall from the magnet support portion 615h.

When the ball removal shutter 615 is attached to the ball meandering member 613, the pair of rail portions 613q of the ball meandering member 613 are located on both left and right outer sides of the door portion 615a and the pair of rod portions 615c, and The lower surface of the first transverse portion 613k and the upper surface of the pair of support pieces 613r are located above and below the pair of rod portions 615c. Thereby, the ball removal shutter 615 is slidable in the front-rear direction between a closed position and an open position, which will be described later.

In the normal state, the ball extraction shutter 615 is in a closed position where the door portion 615a prevents the game ball B from passing through the ball extraction opening 613p, as shown in FIGS. 39(a1) and (a2). . In this state, the rear surface of the knob portion 615b is in contact with the front surface of the first transverse portion 613k, and the pair of locking protrusions 615f are in contact with the respective rear end surfaces of the pair of rail portions 613q. As a result, movement of the ball removal shutter 615 in the front-back direction is restricted and the ball removal shutter 615 is held at the closed position. Therefore, when the ball ejecting shutter 615 is in the closed position, the game balls B are not ejected from the ball ejecting port 613p to the ball receiving tray 720 below (see FIG. 20).

Further, when the ball extraction shutter 615 is in the closed position, the magnet support portion 615h (magnet 616) is located below near the upstream end of the ball extraction port 613p. Although the details will be described later, when an iron ball SB (see FIG. 44) flows through the ball storage passage 604, the iron ball SB is magnetically attached to the door portion 615a by the magnetic force of the magnet 616, causing ball clogging. Therefore, it becomes possible to detect the inclusion of the iron ball SB.

When the ball extraction shutter 615 is in the closed position, when the knob 615b is pinched and pulled forward, the locking protrusion 615f provided on the rod 615c comes into strong contact with the rear end surface of the rail 613q. At this time, the rod portion 615c is elastically deformed inward by the force applied to the locking projection 615f, the locking projection 615f moves toward the inner side of the rail portion 613q, and the ball extraction shutter 615 slides forward from the closed position. That will happen. When the locking projection 615f reaches the locking portion 613s, the locking projection 615f is locked to the locking portion 613s by the elastic force of the rod portion 615c, and at the same time The hook portion 615g is in a state close to the rear end surface of the rail portion 613q. This brings the ball removal shutter 615 into a state in which further forward sliding is restricted.

In this state, as shown in FIGS. 39(b1) and (b2), the opening 615d of the ball extraction shutter 615 is aligned with the ball extraction opening 613p, and the game ball B can pass through the ball extraction opening 613p. It becomes. In other words, the ball removal shutter 615 is in the open position. When the ball extraction shutter 615 is in the open position, the game balls B on the upstream side of the ball extraction port 613p in the ball storage passage 604 are discharged into the ball receiving tray 720 below through the ball extraction port 613p and the opening 615d. Ru. This makes it possible to pull out the circulating game balls B to the outside.

When the game balls B accumulate in the ball receiving tray 720 and become heavy, the ball receiving tray 720 is placed on the bottom wall of the tray insertion recess 501f, which is inclined so that the front end side is lower. It tries to slide forward, but the locking claw 501n prevents the forward sliding. In this state, when the locking claw 501n is released, the ball receiving tray 720 automatically slides forward due to the weight of the stored game balls B, and the ball receiving tray 720 can be easily removed from the tray insertion recess 501f. It can be taken out.

Note that when the ball shutter 615 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the rear surface of the door frame 3 is close to the front surface of the knob portion 615b, and even if the ball shutter 615 tries to slide forward for some reason, the knob will not move. The portion 615b contacts the door frame 3 and is prevented from sliding to the open position. This prevents the circulating game balls B from falling out without permission and preventing illegal game balls B from entering through the ball outlet 613p.

The magnet 616 is formed into a cylindrical shape that can be inserted into the magnet support portion 615h of the ball removal shutter 615. This magnet 616 is for attracting the iron ball SB. The magnet 616 uses a strong magnetic material such as a neodymium magnet.

By the way, in a game hall or the like, if the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment and a conventional pachinko machine in which players can touch game balls (iron balls SB) coexist, the pachinko machine of this embodiment When game balls B are replenished or replaced due to maintenance etc. in step 1, there is a risk that iron balls SB may be mixed in.

On the other hand, in this pachinko machine 1, if the iron ball SB gets mixed in, since the ball removal shutter 615 is provided with a magnet 616, when the iron ball SB flows through the ball storage passage 604, the ball removal shutter is in the closed position. On the upper surface of the door portion 615a at 615, the iron ball SB is magnetically attracted and stopped by the magnetic force of the magnet 616. At this time, since the magnet 616 with strong magnetic force is used, even if a large number of game balls B accumulate on the upstream side of the magnetically attached iron ball SB and a force to push it downstream acts, the door Iron ball SB never moves from the upper surface of 615a.

Then, when the ball firing unit 550 continues firing the game ball B while the iron ball SB is magnetically attached to the door 615a (magnet 616) of the ball extraction shutter 615 in the ball storage passage 604, The game balls B on the downstream side of the magnetically attached iron ball SB are sequentially consumed, and the consumed (launched) game balls B are sequentially supplied to the upstream side of the iron ball SB. Therefore, the detection of game balls B is turned OFF in the circulation ball shortage sensor 621 and lifting entrance sensor 653, etc., which are provided downstream of the ball removal shutter 615, and the detection of the game ball B is turned OFF. Detection of game balls B is turned ON in the ball excess sensor 622, out ball sensor 605, safe ball sensor 606, foul ball sensor 607, etc. Thereby, it is possible to detect and notify that ball clogging has occurred between the circulating ball shortage sensor 621 and the like and the circulating ball excess sensor 622 and the like. That is, it is possible to detect that the iron ball SB is magnetically attached to the door portion 615a.

When the iron ball SB is magnetically attached to the top surface of the door 615a of the ball removal shutter 615 by the magnetic force of the magnet 616, when the ball removal shutter 615 is slid from the closed position to the forward open position, the top surface of the door 615a The front end of the iron ball SB, which is magnetically attached to the iron ball SB, comes into contact with the front wall of the first transverse portion 613k, and only the iron ball SB is prevented from moving forward. Then, when the magnet 616 moves forward from the front wall of the first transverse portion 613k, the magnetic force acting on the iron ball SB becomes weaker, and the iron ball SB starts rolling toward the downstream side. At this time, since the opening 615d of the ball extraction shutter 615 is aligned with the ball extraction hole 613p and the game ball B can pass through the ball extraction hole 613p, the iron ball SB is inserted into the ball extraction hole 613p. The ball can be discharged into the ball receiving tray 720 below, and can be taken out from the ball storage passage 604.

The circulating ball path relay board 617 is attached to a portion behind the foul ball passage 603 on the rear surface of the front ball receiving member 611 and below the out ball receiving plate lower portion 611b of the rear ball receiving member 612. The circulating ball route relay board 617 is for relaying connections between the out ball sensor 605, the safe ball sensor 606, the foul ball sensor 607, the circulating ball shortage sensor 621, the circulating ball excess sensor 622, and the frame control board 740 described later. belongs to.

The gauge portion 620 indicates an appropriate amount area of a predetermined length with respect to the flow direction of the ball storage passage 604 in the ball meandering member 613. Here, a state in which the rear ends of the rows of game balls B stored in a line are placed on the gauge section 620 is defined as an appropriate amount. The gauge part 620 allows the user to visually check the appropriate amount of game balls B (circulating balls), and is formed of a partially colored transparent sticker. This gauge section 620 is attached to the top surface of the meandering cover 614. More specifically, it is attached to a portion of the spherical meandering member 613 on the upstream side of the first transverse portion 613k on the upper surface of the meandering cover 614. As shown in FIG. 42, on this gauge part 620, characters and symbols (arrows) indicating an appropriate range (appropriate amount area) of the storage amount of game balls B are written.

The gauge part 620 includes an upper gauge seal 620a that is attached to a portion above the third straight section 613e and the third folded section 613f of the ball meandering member 613, and a middle gauge that is attached to a portion above the fourth straight section 613g. It is composed of three seals: a seal 620b and a lower gauge seal 620c affixed to a portion above the fifth straight portion 613i and the first bent portion 613j.

The upper gauge seal 620a includes a line extending left and right near the center in the front-rear direction of the third orthogonal portion 613e, and a line along the passage with the tip of the arrow pointing toward the line on the downstream side (front side) of the line. An arrow whose bar portion extends to the downstream end of the third folded portion 613f, and the words “up to here” are written (displayed) on the right side of the arrow, downstream of the arrow portion.

The middle gauge seal 620b has a bar-shaped part that extends rearward (downstream) so as to continue with the bar part of the arrow shown on the upper gauge seal 620a, and a " "Appropriate range" are written.

The lower gauge seal 620c includes a line extending back and forth at the downstream end of the first bent portion 613j, and a fifth straight portion 613i extending along the passage with the tip of the arrow portion facing the line on the upstream side of the line. An arrow whose rod portion extends to the upstream end of the arrow and the words "From here" are written (displayed) on the right side of the arrow, upstream from the arrow portion.

When the gauge part 620 is viewed during maintenance etc., the game ball B is placed in the part of the gauge part 620 (appropriate amount area), that is, in the range from the line of the upper gauge seal 620a to the line of the lower gauge part 620c. If it cannot be seen, it can be seen that the number of game balls B is less than the appropriate amount. When replenishing the game balls B, game balls B are thrown in from the out port 1008 of the game board 5, or the out ball socket 600a or the safe ball socket 600b until the appropriate amount is reached.

On the other hand, when looking at the gauge part 620, if the game balls B are seen in all parts of the gauge part 620, that is, the part where the rear end of the row of game balls B is "up to here" (the line of the upper gauge seal 620a) ), it can be seen that there are too many game balls B than the appropriate amount. When there are too many game balls B, by pulling the ball removal shutter 615 forward and sliding it to the open position, the game balls B in the ball storage passage 604 are ejected from the ball removal port 613p to make an appropriate amount.

In this way, according to the gauge section 620 of the present embodiment, it is possible to determine at a glance whether or not the stored game balls B are appropriate (appropriate amount), and it is also possible to determine whether the stored game balls B are appropriate (appropriate amount) or not. The amount can be easily adjusted to an appropriate amount.

In the above embodiment, a sticker is attached to the meandering cover 614 as the gauge part 620, but an appropriate area may be colored in a different color from other parts, or the gauge part 620 may be colored in a different color from other parts. The parts may be molded in different colors, or the gauge part 620 may have colored lines drawn at the downstream end and upstream end of the appropriate amount area.

Further, in the above embodiment, the gauge part 620 is provided upstream of the ball removal shutter 615, but the invention is not limited to this, and as shown by the two-dot chain line in FIG. The downstream end of the gauge part 620 may be provided downstream of the ball removal shutter 615 and near the upstream of the circulating ball shortage sensor 621.

In the circulating ball path unit 600 of this embodiment, a ball receiving front plate 610, a ball receiving front member 611, a ball receiving rear member 612, a ball meandering member 613, and a meandering cover 614 are formed of transparent synthetic resin. . Therefore, it is possible to visually check the internal state from the outside.

The circulating ball path unit 600 is installed with an out ball sensor 605 and a foul ball sensor 607 sandwiched between a ball receiving front plate 610 and a ball receiving front member 611, and a safe ball sensor 606 It is attached while being sandwiched between a ball receiving front member 611 and a ball receiving rear member 612. The out ball sensor 605 and the safe ball sensor 606 are arranged in front and behind each other.

The out ball sensor 605, the safe ball sensor 606, the foul ball sensor 607, the circulating ball shortage sensor 621, and the circulating ball excess sensor 622 detect the game ball B in a non-contact manner by detecting a change in induced current, for example. It is.

The circulation ball path unit 600 is attached to the base wall portion 501b of the main body frame base 501 from the rear side. When the circulation ball path unit 600 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the out ball socket 600a and the safe ball socket 600b are at the same height as the top surface of the base wall portion 501b, and the rear end of the top surface of the base wall portion 501b. It is attached so that it touches the edge.

Further, the circulating ball path unit 600 is attached to the main body frame 4 in a state where the ball feeding unit 700 is located between it and the base wall portion 501b.

Further, when the circulation ball path unit 600 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the portions of the ball meandering member 613 and the meandering cover 614 on the front side of the center in the front-rear direction are inserted into the ball storage passage provided in the base wall portion 501b. It penetrates through the mouth 501g from the rear and projects forward. Thereby, when the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the game balls B in the ball meandering member 613 (ball storage passage 604) can be visually recognized from the front (outside).

Further, when the circulating ball path unit 600 is assembled to the main body frame 4 and the frame board unit 730 is opened to the rear, an out ball path 601, a safe ball path 602, a foul ball path 603, and a ball storage path are formed. The interior of each of the portions 604 on the rear side of the base wall portion 501b can be visually recognized from the rear. Thereby, when ball clogging occurs, by opening the frame substrate unit 730, the inside of the out ball passage 601, etc. can be checked, and the location where the ball clogging occurs can be easily identified.

In addition, when the circulating ball path unit 600 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the second transverse portion 613o of the ball meandering member 613 is located at a portion rearward of the base wall portion 501b and below the ball firing unit 550. It is located in That is, in the circulating ball path unit 600, the ball discharge port 600d opens toward the right at a position lower than the ball firing unit 550 at the rear of the base wall portion 501b. This ball discharge port 600d communicates with a ball lifting upper entrance passage 651 of a ball lifting unit 650, which will be described later.

The circulating ball path unit 600 of this embodiment includes a circulating ball shortage sensor 621 for detecting that the stored game balls B (circulating balls) are too few, and a circulating ball shortage sensor 621 for detecting that the stored game balls B (circulating balls) are too few. A circulating bulb excess sensor 622 is provided for detecting that there are too many circulating spheres (see FIG. 62).

The circulating ball shortage sensor 621 is provided downstream of the gauge section 620 in the ball storage passage 604. Note that the circulating ball shortage sensor 621 may be provided near the upstream of the ball removal shutter 615. The circulating ball excess sensor 622 is provided near the upstream end of the gauge section 620 in the ball storage passage 604. The circulating bulb deficiency sensor 621 and the circulating bulb excess sensor 622 are connected to the frame control board 740 via the circulating bulb route relay board 617.

Although the details will be described later, when there is an appropriate amount of game balls B, the circulating ball shortage sensor 621 detects the game balls B for a predetermined time (for example, 80 ms) or more, and the circulating ball excess sensor 622 detects the game balls B for a predetermined time (for example, 80 ms) or more. For example, it is not detected for more than 80ms). In a state where there are too few game balls B, neither the circulating ball shortage sensor 621 nor the circulating ball excess sensor 622 detects the game ball B for a predetermined period of time (for example, 80 ms) or more. On the other hand, in a state where there are too many game balls B, the circulating ball shortage sensor 621 and the circulating ball excess sensor 622 both detect the game balls B for a predetermined period of time (for example, 80 ms) or more. Note that if the circulating ball shortage sensor 621 does not detect the game ball B for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 80 ms) or more, and the circulating ball excess sensor 622 detects the game ball B for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 80 ms) or more, the circulating ball Ball clogging including the iron ball SB has occurred between the insufficient circulating ball sensor 621 and the circulating ball excessive sensor 622.

Here, the reason for the predetermined time k80ms as a threshold value for detecting the presence or absence of the game ball B will be explained. For example, on the circulation route R, the positions where sensors such as the circulation ball excess sensor 622, the circulation ball shortage sensor 621, the lifting entrance sensor 653, the lifting exit sensor 654, and the firing front sensor 704 are placed are It is placed at the stop position of the game ball B when the upper unit 650, ball feeding unit 700, etc. are stopped. This position is a position where the next game ball B is positioned every time one game ball B is sent. Therefore, the game ball B is detected here by determining whether or not it is detected for 80 ms or more. This is because the time it takes for the game ball B to be detected rolling on a slope with an inclination of about 5 degrees is about 50ms, so a margin is added to ensure that the game ball B is present at that position. I am trying to detect it with . In other words, this value of 80 ms is a practical value obtained through experiments.

In this way, the amount of game balls B, ball clogging, etc. are automatically determined and notified in the frame control board 740 by the combination of the detection states of game balls B by the circulating ball shortage sensor 621 and the circulating ball excess sensor 622. Is possible.

In addition, in the above-mentioned embodiment, although the circulation ball shortage sensor 621 and the circulation ball excess sensor 622 were provided, the circulation ball shortage sensor 621 is substituted with the lift entrance sensor mentioned later, and the circulation ball excess sensor 622 The out ball sensor 605, the safe ball sensor 606, and the foul ball sensor 607 may be used instead.

[4-4a. Ball jamming release mechanism]
Next, in the circulation ball path unit 600, a ball clogging mechanism 630 may be provided as shown in FIG. 43 to facilitate clogging of balls in the out ball sensor 605 and the safe ball sensor 606. FIG. 43(a) is an explanatory diagram showing an enlarged view of the main part of the rear cross-section taken at the out-ball sensor with the lid member of the ball dissolving mechanism closed in the circulating ball path unit attached to the main body frame. (b) is an explanatory view showing the lid member in an open state in (a).

The ball clogging release mechanism 630 includes a lid member 631 that can be opened and closed on the wall above the out ball sensor 605 and the safe ball sensor 606 in the ball receiving front member 611 and the ball receiving back member 612 in the circulating ball path unit 600. It is something. The lid member 631 is closed in a normal state, as shown in FIG. 43(a). The lid member 631 is held in a closed state by a locking claw (not shown).

This ball jam elimination mechanism 630 is designed to prevent ball jams from occurring in the out ball passage 601 or the safe ball passage 602, or when an illegal ball B' with a larger diameter than the game ball B is thrown as an act of fraud, causing the out ball sensor 605, etc. It is used to clear blocks when they are blocked.

For example, if an illegal ball B' with a larger diameter than the game ball B is thrown from the out port 1008 of the game board 5 and the out ball sensor 605 is blocked, the main body frame 4 opens relative to the outer frame 2. When the frame substrate unit 730 is opened above, the rear part of the circulation ball path unit 600 is exposed. In this embodiment, a gap is formed between the part of the circulation ball path unit 600 where the ball clogging release mechanism 630 is provided and the box main body part 504b of the main frame speaker box 504, into which a finger can be inserted. Therefore, the lid member 631 can be opened by releasing the locking claw of the lid member 631 through the gap and rotating the lid member 631 so that the lower end of the lid member 631 moves upward (see FIG. 43(b)). ).

By opening the lid member 631, a finger can be inserted into the upper part of the out ball sensor 605 in the out ball passage 601, thereby blocking the out ball sensor 605. Illegal ball B' can be easily taken out. In this way, the irregular ball B' can be easily taken out without removing the circulating ball path unit 600 screwed in using a screwdriver.

Note that even if the safe ball sensor 606 is blocked by the illegal ball B', the illegal ball B' can be removed by the same procedure as described above.

In the above, the mechanism 630 for eliminating ball jamming is provided with an openable and closable lid member 631, but for example, elastic claws may be provided on the ball receiving rear member 612 and the ball receiving front member 611, and the locking of the elastic claws may , the ball receiving rear member 612 and the ball receiving front member 611 may be made removable to the rear. In this case, under normal conditions, the frame substrate unit 730 is located behind the circulating ball path unit 600, and even if the elastic claws are loosened, the ball receiving rear member 612 and the ball receiving front member 611 will come off backward. Never. If the out-ball sensor 605 is blocked by the incorrect ball B', when the main body frame 4 is opened relative to the outer frame 2 and the frame board unit 730 is opened, the rear part of the circulating ball path unit 600 will appear. Therefore, by releasing the locking of the elastic claws that attach the ball receiving rear member 612 and the ball receiving front member 611, the ball receiving rear member 612 and the ball receiving front member 611 can be easily removed, and the out ball sensor The illegal ball B' blocking the ball 605 can be easily taken out.

Alternatively, as the ball clogging release mechanism 630, in the ball receiving front member 611 sandwiched between the ball receiving front plate 610 and the ball receiving rear member 612, the part above the out ball sensor 605 is slid upward and removed. It may be possible to do so. In this case, in a normal state, the game board 5 is located above the circulating ball path unit 600, and the slidable portion of the ball receiving front member 611 does not come off upward due to the action of gravity. If the out-ball sensor 605 is blocked by an illegal ball B', the door frame 3 is opened relative to the main body frame 4, and the game board 5 is removed from the main body frame 4. appears, so by sliding the slidable portion of the front ball receiving member 611 upward and removing it, the incorrect ball B' blocking the out ball sensor 605 can be easily taken out.

[4-4b. Ball-excluding shutter of second embodiment]
Next, in the circulation ball path unit 600, as shown in FIG. 44, a magnet 616 may be attached to a portion in front of the opening 615d in the ball removal shutter 615. FIG. 44(a) is an explanatory side cross-sectional view showing the iron ball with the ball meandering member and the ball removal tray in a state in which the iron ball is magnetically attached to the ball removal shutter in the closed position, and FIG. 44(b) is a side cross-sectional view of the ball removal shutter in the open position. It is an explanatory view showing a side cross section together with the ball meandering member and the ball removal tray in a state where the iron ball is magnetically attached to the iron ball, and (c) is an explanatory view showing the ball removal shutter from the state of (b) to the closed position and the lower surface. It is an explanatory view showing a ball meandering member and a ball removal tray together with a side cross section in a state where iron balls are magnetically attached. This ball removal shutter 615 is configured such that the rear end side of the outer circumferential surface of the magnet 616 supported by the magnet support portion 615h coincides with the inner circumferential surface on the front side of the opening portion 615d.

According to the ball removal shutter 615 of the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. When the ball removal shutter 615 is slid from the closed position to the forward open position, the front end of the iron ball SB magnetically attached to the upper surface of the door part 615a comes into contact with the front wall of the first transverse part 613k, and the iron ball SB forward movement is prevented. Then, when the ball removal shutter 615 slides further forward, the door portion 615a supporting the lower end of the iron ball SB disappears, and the iron ball SB moves downward into the opening 615d due to gravity. At this time, since the rear end side of the outer peripheral surface of the magnet 616 is aligned with the front inner surface of the opening 615d, the iron ball SB is in a state of being magnetically attached to the outer peripheral surface of the magnet 616 (FIG. 44(b) ).

Note that the iron ball SB tries to move from the outer circumferential surface of the magnet 616 to the pole side where the magnetic force is stronger (here, the lower end surface side), but when the ball removal shutter 615 is in the open position, the ball SB is located below the magnet 616. The upper end surface of the tray 720 is positioned so that the iron ball SB does not move below the magnet 616. Therefore, when the ball extraction shutter 615 is slid to the open position, the iron ball B is located at a portion that overlaps with the opening 615d, and the game ball B on the upstream side of the iron ball SB is in the opening 615d, that is, the ball extraction opening 613p. It is not discharged downward through.

After sliding the ball removal shutter 615 to the open position, when the ball removal shutter 615 is slid backward to the closed position, the door portion 615a prevents the game ball B on the upstream side of the iron ball SB from passing through the ball removal port 613p. While blocking the movement, the iron ball SB that was magnetized on the outer circumferential surface of the magnet 616 moves to the lower surface of the magnet 616, and the iron ball SB becomes magnetically attached to the lower surface of the magnet 616 (FIG. 44(c)) ). Thereafter, the ball receiving tray 720 is pulled out and removed from the tray insertion recess 501f, and the iron ball SB magnetically attached to the lower surface of the magnet 616 is removed.

In this way, when the iron ball SB is magnetically attached to the door 615a of the ball removal shutter 615 by the magnet 616, when the ball removal shutter 615 is slid back and forth, only the magnetically attached iron balls SB are stored. It can be taken out from the passage 604.

[4-5. Ball lifting unit]
The ball lifting unit 650 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 45 to 54 and the like. FIG. 45(a) is a perspective view of the ball lifting unit in the main frame as seen from the front left, FIG. 45(b) is a perspective view of the ball lifting unit in the main body frame as seen from the front right, and FIG. It is a perspective view of the ball lifting unit seen from behind. FIG. 46 is an exploded perspective view of the ball lifting unit showing a state in which the ball motor base and the cassette pressing piece are opened and the ball cassette is removed. FIG. 47(a) is a plan view of the ball lifting unit shown without the Kuma cassette installed, and FIG. 47(b) is a plan view of the ball lifting unit shown with the Kuma cassette in a state where the Kuma motor base and cassette pressing piece are opened. (c) is a plan view of the ball lifting unit shown in a state where the ball cassette is attached.

FIG. 48(a) is an explanatory diagram showing how the door frame is closed when the Kuma cassette is incompletely locked, and FIG. 48(b) is an explanatory diagram showing the door frame moving in the closing direction from the state of (a). It is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the protrusion of the door frame is in contact with the tip of the Kuma motor base, and (c) is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the door frame is closed and the Kuma cut is locked from the state in (b). It is a diagram. FIG. 49 is an enlarged front view showing the main parts of the ball lifting unit attached to the main body frame with the ball cassette removed. 50(a) is a right side view showing the main parts of the ball lifting mechanism and the ball lifting mechanism in the ball lifting unit, (b) is a rear view showing the main parts of the ball lifting mechanism, and (c) FIG. 2 is a plan view of the main parts of the ball lifting mechanism as seen from arrow A in FIG.

Furthermore, FIG. 51 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the lifting spiral shaft and the polishing cloth in the ball lifting unit. FIG. 52(a) is an enlarged view of the lifting inlet sensor and the lifting outlet sensor, and is a perspective view of the ball lifting unit seen from the rear left, and FIG. 52(b) is a perspective view of the ball lifting unit at the lifting entrance. FIG. 3 is a plan cross-sectional view taken at a sensor site. FIG. 53 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing the front and rear parts of a ball sensor consisting of a photosensor in a ball path. Fig. 54 (a) is a perspective view of the Kuma cassette of the ball lifting unit seen from the front left, (b) is a perspective view of the Kuma cassette seen from the rear right, and (c) is a perspective view of the Kuma cassette seen from the right rear. FIG.

The ball lifting unit 650 is for sending the game balls B discharged from the game board 5 and the foul unit 570 and distributed through the circulating ball path unit 600 to the ball firing unit 550 via the ball feeding unit 700. The ball lifting unit 650 is attached to the ball lifting unit mounting portion 501j provided on the rear surface of the base wall portion 501b of the main body frame base 501.

The ball lifting unit 650 includes a ball lifting mechanism 660 for lifting the game balls B, and a ball lifting entrance passage 651 that supplies the game balls B sent from the circulating ball path unit 600 to the ball lifting mechanism 660. A ball lifting upper exit passage 652 that supplies the game balls B lifted by the ball lifting mechanism 660 to the ball feeding unit 700, and a ball lifting upper entrance passage 651 are provided to allow the game balls B in circulation to be It is provided with a lifting entrance sensor 653 for detecting, and a lifting exit sensor 654 provided in the ball lifting exit passage 652 and detecting the circulating game balls B.

In addition, the ball lifting unit 650 has a ground plate 655 at the ball lifting upper entrance that is provided so as to be able to come into contact with the game ball B at the ball lifting upper entrance passage 651, and a ball lifting upper entrance grounding plate 655 that is provided so as to be able to come into contact with the game ball B at the ball lifting upper entrance passage 652. The ball lifting relay board 657, which relays the connection between the provided ball lifting outlet ground plate 656 and the frame control board 740, and the ball lifting unit 650 are lifted by the ball lifting mechanism 660. A ball polishing mechanism 680 for polishing the game balls B held therein.

First, the ball lifting mechanism 660 of the ball lifting unit 650 includes a lifting spiral shaft 661 that extends vertically and has a spiral lifting groove 661a on the outer peripheral surface, and a lifting spiral shaft 661 that is attached to the lower end of the lifting spiral shaft 661. a motor gear 663 that meshes with the shaft gear 662 and is rotatable around an axis perpendicular to the axis of the lifting spiral shaft 661; a lifting motor 664 for rotating the shaft gear 662; and a lifting motor index 665 having a sensing portion 665a cut out in a part of the circumferential direction extending from the lower end of the shaft gear 662 in the shape of a flange. , a lifting motor index sensor 666 capable of detecting a detection section 665a of the lifting motor index 665.

The ball lifting mechanism 660 also includes a motor base metal plate 667 to which a lifting motor 664 is attached and rotatably supports the motor gear 663, and a lifting spiral shaft to which one of the motor base metal plates 667 is attached. 661, and a lifting mechanism base 668 and a lifting mechanism cover 669, which are attached to the ball lifting unit mounting portion 501j of the base wall portion 501b of the main body frame base 501.

The lifting spiral shaft 661 is provided with a spiral lifting groove 661a on its outer circumferential surface at a depth capable of accommodating the game balls B in a row. The lifting spiral shaft 661 is designed to lift the game ball B by rotating clockwise when viewed from above in the axial direction (see FIG. 50(c)). An upper groove 661a is formed. The spiral pitch of the lifting groove 661a is longer near the upper and lower ends than between them. The lifting spiral shaft 661 is rotatably supported by a lifting mechanism base 668 and a lifting mechanism cover 669. The lifting spiral shaft 661 has a rotation axis inclined with respect to the vertical so that the upper end is located to the right of the lower end when viewed from the front. Thereby, the upper end side of the lifting spiral shaft 661 can be moved away from the ball feeding unit to the right, and the length of the ball lifting exit passage 652 is relatively increased, thereby increasing the storage amount of game balls B. becomes possible. In this embodiment, the rotation axis of the lifting spiral shaft 661 is inclined at an angle of 12 degrees with respect to the vertical.

Furthermore, the lifting spiral shaft 661 will be explained in detail. As shown in FIG. 51, this lifting spiral shaft 661 has a small diameter part 661b in which the bottom diameter (bottom diameter) of the lifting groove 661a is a bottom diameter D1, and a large diameter part having a bottom diameter D2 larger than the small diameter part 661b. 661c, and the large diameter portion 661c is provided at an intermediate portion in the axial direction overlapping with the polishing cloth 682 of the polishing cassette 681. Note that the lifting spiral shaft 661 is configured such that the diameter thereof gradually changes between the small diameter portion 661b and the large diameter portion 661c.

Further, the lifting spiral shaft 661 has a spiral pitch P2 at the large diameter portion 661c that is smaller than a spiral pitch P1 at the small diameter portion 661b. The smaller the pitch of the spiral, the slower the lifting speed of the game ball B becomes.

This lifting spiral shaft 661 is arranged so that a gap S1 smaller than the diameter D of the game ball B is formed between the large diameter portion 661c and the surface of the polishing cloth 682 in the ball polishing cassette 681.

By the way, in the lifting spiral shaft 661, if the diameter of the bottom of the lifting groove 661a is configured to be the bottom diameter D1 of the small diameter part 661b over the entire length, the bottom diameter D1 is smaller than the bottom diameter D2 of the large diameter part 661c. , the gap between the bottom of the lifting groove 661a and the polishing cloth 682 becomes larger. Therefore, even if you rotate the lifting spiral shaft 661 and try to polish the game ball B lifted by the lifting groove 661a with the polishing cloth 682, the gap with the polishing cloth 682 will become larger and the game ball B will move into the lifting groove. This will escape to the bottom side of the ball 661a, and the contact area of the game ball B with the polishing cloth 682 will become smaller, resulting in a decrease in polishing efficiency.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the bottom diameter D2 of the lifting groove 661a is set to the bottom diameter D1 of the small diameter portion 661b at a portion of the lifting spiral shaft 661 that overlaps with the polishing cloth 682 of the ball polishing cassette 681 in the axially intermediate portion. Since the large diameter portion 661c is larger than the above, the gap between the bottom of the lifting groove 661a and the surface of the polishing cloth 682 in the large diameter portion 661c can be made smaller than the gap in the small diameter portion 661b. Further, in this embodiment, the gap S1 from the large diameter portion 661c to the polishing cloth 682 is made smaller than the diameter D of the game ball B. For these reasons, in the large diameter portion 661c, the game ball B cannot escape to the bottom side of the lifting groove 661a, and the game ball B can be pressed against the polishing cloth 682 by the bottom of the lifting groove 661a. The polishing cloth 682 can be dented together with a polishing sponge 683 provided on the back side of the cloth 682. Thereby, the contact area of the polishing cloth 682 with respect to the game ball B can be increased, and the polishing efficiency of the game ball B can be increased.

Further, in the lifting spiral shaft 661 of this embodiment, the pitch P2 of the spiral in the large diameter portion 661c overlapping with the polishing cloth 682 is smaller than the pitch P1 of the spiral in the small diameter portion 661b. The lifting speed of the game ball B at 661c can be slowed down. Thereby, the contact time of the game ball B with the polishing cloth 682 can be increased, so that the game ball B can be polished more carefully.

Furthermore, since the lifting spiral shaft 661 of this embodiment has a diameter that gradually changes between the small diameter part 661b and the large diameter part 661c, the load applied when lifting the game ball B is reduced. It is possible to avoid a sudden change in the value, and it is possible to reduce the load in the lifting operation.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 50(b), the lifting spiral shaft 661 of this embodiment is inclined at an angle of 12 degrees with respect to the vertical, so that it crosses the polishing cloth 682 diagonally. Therefore, the entire width of the polishing cloth 682 can be used to polish the game ball B, and the polishing cloth 682 can be efficiently used for polishing.

Although the lifting spiral shaft 661 is shown as having a large diameter part 661c in the middle in the axial direction, the invention is not limited to this, and a small diameter part 661b is provided only on the lower end side, and the upper end thereof is The large diameter portion 661c may be provided up to the maximum diameter.

Shaft gear 662 is a spur gear (worm wheel gear). Motor gear 663 is a worm gear. As a result, even if the lifting spiral shaft 661 attempts to rotate due to the load acting due to the large number of game balls B being accommodated in the lifting groove 661a of the lifting spiral shaft 661, it will not mesh with the shaft gear 662. Rotation can be prevented by a motor gear 663 consisting of a worm gear. In addition, since the motor gear 663 is a worm gear, even if the lifting spiral shaft 661 attempts to rotate due to the inertia when the lifting motor 664 stops driving, the rotation can be immediately stopped, and the game ball B is overturned. Shoots can be prevented.

In this embodiment, the shaft gear 662 is made of POM (polyacetal resin), and the motor gear 663 is made of fiber-reinforced plastic containing polyamide carbon fiber. This makes the motor gear 663 made of a worm gear less likely to chip. Note that the motor gear 663 may be made of metal.

Lifting motor 664 is a DC motor. The lifting motor index 665 is integrally molded with the shaft gear 662 in the shape of a flange. The detection portion 665a of the lifting motor index 665 is provided so that an angle range of 45 degrees is cut out from the entire circumference. Lift motor index sensor 666 is a photo sensor. The lifting motor index sensor 666 is in a light-receiving state at a portion of the detection portion 665a of the lifting motor index 665, and is in a non-light-receiving state due to being shielded from light at portions other than the detection portion 665a. Thereby, it is possible to detect the rotational position of the lifting spiral shaft 661 via the lifting motor index 665.

Although details will be described later, the lifting spiral shaft 661 rotates once when the rotating shaft of the lifting motor 664 rotates 32 times due to the shaft gear 662 and the motor gear 663. Then, in the lifting motor index sensor 666, when the lifting motor 664 rotates 28 times after it is located at a part other than the detection part 665a and enters the non-light receiving state, it reaches the detection part 665a and enters the light receiving state. When the lifting motor 664 rotates four more times after this point, it moves away from the detection section 665a and enters a non-light receiving state. In this embodiment, the origin is the position where the lifting motor 664 has rotated twice after reaching the detection unit 665a and entering the light receiving state. That is, the center of the detection part 665a is set as the origin of rotation of the lifting spiral shaft 661.

The motor base metal plate 667 has the lifting motor 664 attached to it on its left end side in front view, and rotatably supports the right end of the motor gear 663 on its right end side. The motor base metal plate 667 has an upper end attached to a lifting mechanism base 668 and a lower end attached to a lifting mechanism cover 669.

The lifting mechanism base 668 accommodates the lifting spiral shaft 661 in cooperation with the lifting mechanism cover 669, and rotatably supports the lifting spiral shaft 661. The lifting mechanism base 668 has a ball opening 668a that is large enough to prevent the game ball B from passing through and passes through the lifting spiral shaft 661 from front to back so that the lifting spiral shaft 661 faces forward, and a ball opening 668a that is recessed from the front to the rear and has a ball opening on the bottom surface. It has a cassette mounting recess 668b with an open mouth 668a and capable of accommodating the rear end side of the ball polishing cassette 681. The ball opening 668a extends vertically with a width narrower than the diameter of the game ball B. This ball opening 668a is provided so that a part of the game ball B being lifted by the lifting spiral shaft 661 projects forward, and is a portion of the game ball B that projects further forward than the ball opening 668a. However, the game ball B is polished by coming into contact with the polishing cloth 682 of the ball polishing cassette 681 in the ball polishing mechanism 680 attached (installed) in the cassette attachment recess 668b.

A downstream portion of the ball lifting upper inlet passage 651 is provided in the lifting mechanism base 668 at a portion to the right of the lifting spiral shaft 661 in the front view near the lower end. The portion of the ball lifting inlet passage 651 provided on the lifting mechanism base 668 has an upstream end that opens rearward and slopes downward toward the lower end of the left lifting spiral shaft 661. There is. Further, a lifting inlet sensor 653 is attached to the lifting mechanism base 668 at a position to the right of the lower end of the lifting spiral shaft 661 when viewed from the front.

Further, the lifting mechanism base 668 is provided with an upstream portion of the ball lifting outlet passage 652 near the upper end. The portion of the ball lifting outlet passage 652 provided on the lifting mechanism base 668 is inclined downward from the front of the upper end of the lifting spiral shaft 661 to the left in front view, and then slopes downward to the rear. The downstream end is open toward the rear. The ball lifting exit passage 652 slopes downwardly toward the left from the rearward opening portion of the lifting mechanism base 668, and then slopes downwardly toward the front. It opens towards the front. This portion of the ball lifting exit passage 652 is formed by a lifting mechanism base 668 and a lifting mechanism cover 669 working together.

Further, a ball polishing motor base 686 to which a ball polishing motor 688 of a ball polishing mechanism 680 is attached is rotatably attached to the lifting mechanism base 668 about an axis extending vertically.

The lifting mechanism cover 669 accommodates the lifting spiral shaft 661 in cooperation with the lifting mechanism base 668 and rotatably supports the lifting spiral shaft 661. It is attached from the rear to the ball lifting unit attachment section 501j of the section 501b. A ball lifting relay board 657 is attached to the rear surface of the lifting mechanism cover 669.

The lifting mechanism cover 669 is provided with a portion on the upstream side of the portion of the ball lifting entrance passage 651 that is provided on the lifting mechanism base 668. The downstream end of the portion of the ball lifting inlet passage 651 provided in the lifting mechanism base 668 opens forward at the right side in front view near the lower end of the lifting spiral shaft 661, and opens toward the rear. After extending, it bends to the left and passes behind the lifting spiral shaft 661, and then extends diagonally forward, with its upstream end opening toward the left. This lifting mechanism cover 669 has a ball lifting upper inlet ground metal plate 655 that is provided behind the lower end of the lifting spiral shaft 661 so as to be able to come into contact with the game balls B flowing through the ball lifting upper entrance passage 651. installed.

Further, the lifting mechanism cover 669 is provided with a portion of the ball lifting outlet passage 652 that is downstream of the portion provided on the lifting mechanism base 668. The portion of the ball lifting exit passage 652 provided in the lifting mechanism cover 669 opens rearward at the upstream end, bends to the left in front view, extends leftward to the left end, and then bends forward. , the downstream end of the front end of the lifting mechanism cover 669 is open toward the front.

Further, a lifting exit sensor 654 is attached to the lifting mechanism cover 669 near the left end of a portion of the ball lifting exit passage 652 that extends to the left in front view. Further, in the lifting mechanism cover 669, there is a part of the lifting mechanism cover 669 that extends to the left in the ball lifting exit passage 652 and is located upstream of the lifting exit sensor 654. A ball lift upper exit ground metal plate 656 is attached so as to be able to come into contact with the ball B.

Furthermore, the lifting mechanism cover 669 has a support protrusion 669a that protrudes forward from the lift mechanism base 668 from a portion near the bottom of the center in the vertical direction at the right end, and a Ny latch that passes through the front surface of the support protrusion 669a. 694 is locked, and a locking hole 669b. When the ball lifting unit 650 is attached to the ball lifting unit attachment part 501j of the main body frame 4 from the rear, the support protrusion 669a passes through the opening 501o penetrating the base wall 501b to the front side of the base wall 501b. stand out.

Subsequently, the opening (inlet) at the upstream end of the ball lifting inlet passage 651 of the ball lifting unit 650 opens toward the left near the lower portion of the left side surface of the ball lifting unit 650. This opening is provided so as to face the ball discharge port 600d of the circulating ball path unit 600 when assembled to the main body frame 4. The ball lifting entrance passage 651 is sloped downward from the left end entrance to the right, and extends to the right of the lifting spiral shaft 661 so as to bypass the rear of the lifting spiral shaft 661. After that, it is folded back to the front side and extends to the left to near the lower end of the lifting spiral shaft 661. It is bent in a crank shape near the lifting spiral shaft 661 so as to go around to the front side of the lifting spiral shaft 661, and communicates with the lifting groove 661a of the lifting spiral shaft 661 at the front side near the lower end of the lifting spiral shaft 661. ing.

The ball lifting upper inlet passage 651 is provided such that the opening at the upstream end faces the ball discharge port 600d forming the opening at the downstream end of the ball storage passage 604 in the circulation ball path unit 600, and The game balls B that have circulated through the storage passage 604 are delivered and distributed.

In the ball lifting entrance passage 651, a lifting entrance sensor 653 is provided on the right side of the lifting spiral shaft 661, and a ball lifting entrance earth plate 655 is provided at the rear of the lifting spiral shaft 661. is installed.

The ball lifting outlet passage 652 has an upstream end near the upper end of the ball lifting unit 650 that communicates with the lifting groove 661 a on the front side near the upper end of the lifting spiral shaft 661 , and has an upstream end communicating with the lifting groove 661 a on the front side near the upper end of the lifting spiral shaft 661 . After extending to the rear end, it bends backward, extends to the same position as the rear end of the lifting spiral shaft 661, and then bends to the left. From there, it extends to the left near the left end of the ball lifting unit 650 and then bends forward, and the downstream end opens forward at the front of the ball lifting unit 650 (lifting mechanism cover 669). ing.

The ball lifting upper exit passage 652 is provided with an opening at the downstream end facing a ball supply port of a ball feeding unit, which will be described later, and can supply game balls B to the ball feeding unit 700.

The ball lifting exit passage 652 is provided with a lifting exit sensor 654 near the left end of a portion extending to the left near the rear end of the ball lifting unit 650, and on the upstream side (right side) thereof. A ball lifting upper outlet grounding plate 656 is attached to. Furthermore, in the bottom wall of the part of the ball lifting upper exit passage 652 where the ball lifting upper exit ground metal plate 656 is provided, there is provided an opening with a size that does not impede the circulation of the game balls B. , it is possible to discharge dust, dirt, etc. to the outside through the opening.

The lifting entrance sensor 653 detects the presence or absence of the game ball B to be lifted when the lifting spiral shaft 661 is rotated by the drive of the lifting motor 664 to lift the game ball B. Although details will be described later, when the game ball B is not detected by the lifting entrance sensor 653, the lifting motor 664 is not driven.

The lift exit sensor 654 detects the presence or absence of game balls B to be supplied to the ball feeding unit. Details will be described later, but while the lifting entrance sensor 653 is detecting the game ball B, the lifting exit sensor 654 is not detecting the game ball B, and a predetermined condition is satisfied (here, the firing By subtracting a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls B by the subtraction sensor 554, the lifting spiral shaft 661 is rotated by the drive of the lifting motor 664, and a predetermined number of game balls B are lifted.

The lifting entrance sensor 653 and the lifting exit sensor 654 are photosensors that have a light emitting part and a light receiving part, and when the light from the light emitting part is blocked by the game ball B, they can detect the presence or absence of the game ball B in a non-contact manner. It is something to detect.

Here, the relationship between the ball lifting entrance passage 651 and the ball lifting exit passage 652, and the lifting entrance sensor 653 and the lifting exit sensor 654 will be explained. Here, the relationship between the ball lifting entrance passage 651 and the lifting entrance sensor 653 will be explained, and the relationship between the ball lifting exit passage 652 and the lifting exit sensor 654 is also the same, so the description will be omitted. As shown in FIGS. 52 and 53, the portion of the ball lifting upper entrance passage 651 where the lifting entrance sensor 653 is provided is a V-shaped passage section 651a having a V-shaped cross section (inverted trapezoid shape narrowing downward). It is said that Note that the portion of the ball lifting upper entrance passage 651 other than the V-shaped passage portion 651a is a U-shaped passage portion 651b that is open upward and has a U-shaped cross section.

The same applies to the ball lifting outlet passage 652, and the part of the lifting outlet sensor 654 is a V-shaped passage part 652a having a V-shaped cross section (an inverted trapezoid shape narrowing downward), and the other parts are is a U-shaped passage portion 652b that is open upward and has a U-shaped cross section.

In other words, the V-shaped passage section 651a and the V-shaped passage section 652a each have a pair of inclined surfaces that the game ball B contacts and that are inclined so that the distance increases as they move upward. Further, the U-shaped passage portion 651b and the U-shaped passage portion 652b have a flat bottom surface that the game ball B touches and has a width larger than the diameter of the game ball B, and a pair of sides that are erected from both widthwise ends of the bottom surface. It has a wall surface. Note that the ball feeding passage 703 of the ball feeding unit 700, which is downstream of the ball lifting upper exit passage 652, is also formed in the same shape as the U-shaped passage portion 651b and the U-shaped passage portion 652b.

By the way, if the cross section of the passage in the area of the lifting entrance sensor 653 consisting of a photosensor is made into a U-shaped cross section open upward, the game balls B in circulation will come into contact with the side wall, so that the contact of the game balls B will be reduced. Due to this, scratches, dirt, etc. that occur on the side walls of the passage may obstruct the reception and emission of light by the photosensor, resulting in false detection. Further, in a passageway having a U-shaped cross section, the position of the game ball B in the width direction of the passageway is not constant and stable, so the detection position by the sensor is different, and there is a possibility that false detection may occur.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the part of the lifting inlet sensor 653 (lifting outlet sensor 654) is a V-shaped passage part 651a (V-shaped passage part 652a) having a V-shaped cross section. By holding the game ball B at two points by the parts on both diagonal sides, movement in the width direction of the passage can be restricted, and the position of the game ball B can be kept constant and stable with respect to the width direction of the passage. be able to. As a result, the game ball B does not come into contact with the side wall of the passage at the lifting entrance sensor 653 (lifting exit sensor 654), so it is possible to prevent scratches and dirt from coming into contact with the game ball B. It is possible to eliminate false detection and reliably detect game balls.

In the above, the V-shaped passage section 651a (V-shaped passage section 652a) having a V-shaped cross section (inverted trapezoidal shape) is shown as the shape of the passage that keeps the position of the game ball B constant and stable with respect to the sensor. A pair of protrusions may be provided at an interval narrower than the diameter of the game ball B and extend in the direction of flow of the game ball B.

The ball lifting upper inlet passage 651 is provided with a lifting spiral shaft 661 at the downstream end. Therefore, in the ball lifting entrance passage 651 upstream of the lifting spiral shaft 661, the game balls B are picked up one by one by the lifting groove 661a of the lifting spiral shaft 661, so they advance intermittently, and the ball lifting The game ball B stops at the entrance passage 651. On the other hand, a ball feeding unit 700, which will be described later, is provided at the downstream end of the ball lifting upper exit passage 652. Therefore, in the ball lifting upper exit passage 652 on the upstream side of the ball feeding unit 700, the game balls B intermittently advance one by one due to the ball feeding operation of the ball feeding unit 700. B stays.

In the ball lifting entrance passage 651 (ball lifting exit passage 652), as shown in FIG. part 651a (V-shaped passage part 652a), and the other part is a U-shaped passage part 651b (U-shaped passage part 652b) having a U-shaped cross section, so that a plurality of game balls B can be placed in the passage and stopped. Even if the game balls are placed on the downstream side, the ball pressure caused by the plurality of game balls B can be reduced.

To be more specific, as shown by the two-dot chain line in FIG. 53, in the V-shaped passage section 651a (V-shaped passage section 652a), a plurality of game balls B are lined up in a straight line (in a row on the axis of the passage), but in a U-shaped manner. In the passage section 651b (U-shaped passage section 652b), a plurality of game balls B are pushed downstream and lined up in a staggered manner so as to alternately contact the side walls on both sides, dispersing the ball pressure to the side walls. This makes it possible to reduce the ball pressure caused by the plurality of game balls B on the downstream side. Therefore, the parts (for example, the lifting spiral shaft 661, the ball feeding movable member 705 of the ball feeding unit 700, etc.) provided on the downstream side of the ball lifting upper inlet passage 651 (ball lifting upper exit passage 652) are prevented from stopping. It will not be damaged by the ball pressure of the plurality of (stored) game balls B, and there is no need to excessively reinforce the part against the ball pressure, and the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced. .

By the way, the detection of the game ball B at the prize opening, etc. is performed by checking the output from the ball sensor at every predetermined interrupt cycle (for example, 4ms), and whether the output is non-detected, detected, detected, or "011". ”), it is determined that the game ball B has been detected (ON). That is, when the output from the ball sensor is "011", it is determined to be ON, and when the output is other than "011", it is determined to be OFF. However, ball sensors installed in ball passages where a plurality of game balls B are parked, such as the ball lifting entrance passage 651 and the ball lifting exit passage 652 (here, the lifting entrance sensor 653 and the lifting entrance sensor 653 If the exit sensor 654) determines the presence or absence of the game ball B using the determination method described above, the ball sensor will only generate an OFF state when there is no game ball B in the ball path, and no game ball B will be in the ball path. When balls B are being supplied, many short-interval ONs occur, and when the game balls B stored in the ball passage are moving one by one (the game balls B are moving at the firing interval) In this case, many short-interval OFFs occur. Therefore, with the above-described determination method, it was not possible to accurately determine that there is no game ball B in the ball path.

In contrast, in this embodiment, thresholds are set for ON and OFF determinations (for example, an ON threshold of 200 ms and an OFF threshold of 200 ms), and if non-detection or detection continues beyond the threshold, ON or OFF is determined only occasionally. In other words, for example, when the output from the ball sensor is "01111...", it is determined to be ON, and when the output from the ball sensor is "10000...", it is determined to be OFF. Thereby, the presence or absence of a game ball B can be reliably detected (determined) in the ball path where a plurality of game balls B are parked.

The threshold for determining ON or OFF may be different depending on the type of ball path, the number of parked game balls B, etc., or the ON threshold and OFF threshold may be different. Also good. In this embodiment, the lifting entrance sensor 653 of the ball lifting entrance passage 651 has an ON threshold of 80 ms and an OFF threshold of 200 ms, for example. Further, the lifting exit sensor 654 of the ball lifting exit passage 652 has an ON threshold of 80 ms and an OFF threshold of 200 ms, for example. In addition, the firing front sensor 704 of the ball sending unit 700, which will be described later, has an ON threshold of 12 ms and an OFF threshold of 12 ms, for example. Further, as described above, the firing subtraction sensor 554 of the ball firing unit 550 has an ON threshold of 80 ms and an OFF threshold of 80 ms, for example.

If these above-mentioned threshold values are too small, a slight vibration or the like will cause false detection and cause control noise. Moreover, if the threshold value is too large than necessary, the state of the game ball B will be missed. Therefore, although the appropriate threshold value differs depending on the location where the ball sensor is installed, it is desirable that it is at least 10 ms or more and at most 300 ms or less. Furthermore, if the threshold value is determined to be a multiple (for example, 3 to 60 times) of the interrupt cycle (for example, 4 ms), the burden on the software can be reduced because only the number of interrupts is counted in terms of software control. Basically, the threshold value is short for the firing front sensor 704, which ensures that the game ball B stays at a fixed position, but for the case where the game ball B stays at almost a fixed position, but there is a certain range in the holding position (for example, at the lifting exit). In the sensor 654), the threshold value is made longer to provide some leeway. In the firing subtraction sensor 554, the game ball B stays (stays) at a fixed position, but the threshold value is set long to avoid false detection due to artificial vibration.

The ball lifting upper entrance ground metal plate 655 removes static electricity from the game balls B supplied from the circulation ball path unit 600 to the ball lifting upper entrance passage 651. The ball lift upper inlet ground metal plate 655 is provided upstream of the lift inlet sensor 653. As a result, the static electricity on the game ball B passing through the lifting entrance sensor 653 can be removed in advance, and static electricity from the game ball B can cause false detection in the lifting entrance sensor 653 or cause the frame control board 740 to malfunction. This can be avoided.

The ball lifting outlet ground metal plate 656 removes static electricity from the game ball B that is lifted by the ball lifting mechanism 660 and polished by the ball polishing mechanism 680. The ball lifting outlet ground metal plate 656 is provided upstream of the lifting outlet sensor 654. As a result, the static electricity on the game ball B passing through the lifting exit sensor 654 can be removed in advance, and the static electricity from the gaming ball B can prevent erroneous detection at the lifting exit sensor 654 or failure of the frame control board 740. This can be avoided.

The ball lifting relay board 657 is for relaying connections between the lifting entrance sensor 653, lifting exit sensor 654, lifting motor 664, lifting motor index sensor 666, ball motor 688, etc. and the frame control board 740. It is something. The ball lifting relay board 657 is attached to the rear side of the lifting mechanism cover 669.

The ball polishing mechanism 680 is attached to the front side of the ball lifting mechanism 660. The ball polishing mechanism 680 includes a box-shaped ball polishing cassette 681 having an elongated rectangular parallelepiped outer shape, an endless ring belt-shaped polishing cloth 682 whose part is exposed to the outside at the rear surface of the ball polishing cassette 681, and a polishing cloth 682 exposed to the outside at the polishing cloth 682. A ball polishing sponge 683 in the form of a sheet is provided between the rear surface of the ball polishing cassette 681 and the ball polishing sponge 683, and a ball polishing feed gear 684 is rotatably supported around an axis in the left and right direction at the lower part of the ball polishing cassette 681. and a ball polishing driven gear 685 that meshes with the ball polishing feed gear 684 with a polishing cloth 682 in between and is rotatably supported around an axis in the left and right direction.

Further, the ball polishing mechanism 680 includes a flat plate-shaped ball motor base 686 which extends vertically with a constant front and rear depth on the left side of the ball polishing cassette 681 and whose rear end side is rotatably attached to the lifting mechanism base 668. , a gear cover 687 attached to the left side of the Kuma motor base 686; a Kuma motor 688 attached to the left side of the gear cover 687 and having a rotating shaft protruding between the gear cover 687 and the Kuma motor base 686; A spur gear-shaped motor gear 689 attached to the rotating shaft of the ball-polishing motor 688, a spur gear-shaped large-diameter gear portion 690a that meshes with the motor gear 689, and a small-diameter spur gear that rotates integrally with the large-diameter gear portion 690a. A transmission gear 690 is rotatably supported between a Kuma motor base 686 and a gear cover 687, and a small diameter gear portion 690b of the transmission gear 690 meshes with the Kuma motor base. A transmission gear 691 in the form of a spur gear is rotatably supported between the gear cover 686 and the gear cover 687, and a rotational coupling portion 692 that rotates together with the transmission gear 691 and protrudes to the right through the ball motor base 686. It is equipped with.

Furthermore, the Kuma mechanism 680 is in contact with the front surface of the Kuma cassette 681, its left end side is locked to the front end of the Kuma motor base 686, and its right end side is attached to the front surface of the base wall portion 501b of the main body frame base 501. A flat cassette pressing piece 693, a nylatch 694 with the right end side of the cassette pressing piece 693 removably attached to the front surface (latching hole 669b) of the support protrusion 669a in the lifting mechanism cover 669, and a ball motor. A spring 695 biases the cassette pressing piece 693 rearward (toward the Kuma cassette 681 side) with respect to the base 686.

As shown in FIG. 54, the ball polishing cassette 681 of the ball polishing mechanism 680 is formed in the shape of a box with a hollow interior, and slits 681a through which the polishing cloth 682 can pass are provided at both upper and lower edges of the rear surface. The ball cassette 681 is detachably attached to the lifting mechanism base 668 of the ball lifting mechanism 660 from the front so as to close the ball opening 668a.

The ball cassette 681 also has a connecting hole 681b provided at the lower part of the left side surface and a positioning hole 681c provided in front of the connecting hole. The connecting hole 681b is for inserting a rotary connecting portion 692 protruding to the right from the ball polishing motor base 686, and the tip of the rotating connecting portion 692 inserted into the connecting hole 681b is connected to the ball polishing feed gear 684. be done. A positioning pin 686b (described later) of the Kuma motor base 686 is inserted into the positioning hole 681c, and by inserting the positioning pin 686b, the Kuma cassette 681 is positioned with respect to the ball lifting mechanism 660. At the same time, forward movement of the ball cassette 681 with respect to the ball lifting mechanism 660 is restricted (locked).

Furthermore, the polishing cassette 681 includes a plurality of rollers 681d around which the polishing cloth 682 is wound, and a flat tension spring 681e that presses the polishing cloth 682 against the roller 681d provided close to the upper slit 681a. It has . By pressing the polishing cloth 682 against the roller 681d, the tension spring 681e applies tension to the portion of the polishing cloth 682 that is exposed to the outside from the ball polishing cassette 681, and the polishing cloth 682 is applied to the outside of the rear surface. I try not to bend it.

The polishing cloth 682 is formed in the shape of an endless ring belt with a constant width on the left and right sides. As shown in FIGS. 50(a) and 54(c), the polishing cloth 682 is stored in the polishing cassette 681 in a meandering state, and a portion of the polishing cloth 682 is inserted through the upper and lower slits of the polishing cassette 681. is exposed at the rear of the rear surface of the Kuma cassette 681.

The polishing sponge 683 is provided between the rear surface of the polishing cassette 681 and the rearwardly exposed portion of the polishing cloth 682, and is attached to the rear surface of the polishing cassette 681. The inner surface of the polishing cloth 682 is in contact with the rear surface of the polishing sponge 683. This ball polishing sponge 683, when assembled in the ball lifting unit 650, elastically presses the polishing cloth 682 against the game ball B exposed forward from the ball polishing port 668a of the ball lifting mechanism 660. The polishing cloth 682 is brought into contact with the spherical surface of the game ball B over a wider range. Note that the ball polishing sponge 683 is attached to the ball polishing cassette 681 so as to be replaceable.

The ball grinding feed gear 684 is provided so that its axis coincides with the axis of the transmission gear 691 (rotary connection part 692) when the ball grinding cassette 681 is attached, and the left end of the rotation shaft is aligned with the axis of the transmission gear 691 (rotation connection part 692). The transmission gear 691 rotates integrally with the transmission gear 691.

The ball polishing driven gear 685 meshes with the ball polishing feed gear 684 so as to have a gap in which the polishing cloth 682 can fit, and as the ball polishing feed gear 684 rotates, it rotates in the opposite direction, and the ball polishing driven gear 685 and the ball polishing feed gear 684 rotate. It is possible to feed the polishing cloth 682 sandwiched between the two.

The Kuma motor base 686 extends vertically along the left side of the Kuma cassette 681, and its rear end side is rotatably attached to the lifting mechanism base 668 around an axis extending in the vertical direction. . Thereby, the Kuma motor base 686 can be rotated between a locked position parallel to the left side surface of the Kuma cassette 681 and a released position where the front end side is away from the Kuma cassette 681 to the left. The Kuma motor base 686 has a locking hole 686a extending from side to side at a portion above the center in the vertical direction on the front edge. A locking hook 693a provided at the left end of the cassette pressing piece 693 is inserted into the locking hole 686a and locked.

As shown in FIG. 46, in this Kuma motor base 686, a rotary connecting portion 692 protrudes to the right from a portion near the lower end of the right side surface and near the rear in the front-rear direction. The Kuma motor base 686 also has a positioning pin 686b that protrudes cylindrically to the right from a central portion in the front-rear direction near the lower end of the right side surface. The tip (right end) of the positioning pin 686b is formed into a conical shape. The positioning pin 686b is inserted into the positioning hole 681c of the ball cassette 681 to position the ball cassette 681 and restrict its forward movement.

To be more specific, the Kuma motor base 686 has rotated to the release position where the front end has moved to the left with respect to the front-rear direction, and the Kuma cassette 681 is installed in the cassette mounting recess 668b of the lifting mechanism base 668. In this state, when the Kuma motor base 686 is rotated so that its tip moves to the right and moved to the lock position, the positioning pin 686b is inserted into the positioning hole of the Kuma cassette 681 from a direction intersecting the front-rear direction. 681c, the ball polishing cassette 681 can be positioned, and the ball polishing cassette 681 can be prevented from moving forward from the cassette attachment recess 668b.

The Kuma motor base 686 is provided so that its tip side comes into contact with the protrusion 102 (guide surface 102a) of the door frame 3. As a result, although the details will be described later, when the door frame 3 is attempted to be closed with respect to the main body frame 4 when the Kuma motor base 686 is in a state other than the locked position, the guide surface 102a of the protrusion 102 , the Kuma motor base 686 rotates to the lock position, which prevents the user from forgetting to lock the cassette, and also prevents the cassette pressing piece 693 and the like from being caught between the door frame 3 and being damaged. It can be prevented.

The polishing motor 688 is controlled independently of the operation of the lifting motor 664, and is controlled so that the polishing cloth 682 moves 0.17 mm every time 1000 game balls B are fired.

The cassette pressing piece 693 extends left and right, and is provided at its left end with a hook-shaped locking hook portion 693a that is inserted into and locked in the locking hole 686a of the Kuma motor base 686. This cassette pressing piece 693 is urged by a spring 695 to rotate counterclockwise in plan view. In other words, the ball cassette 681 mounted in the cassette mounting recess 668b of the lifting mechanism base 668 is urged rearward. The right end of the cassette pressing piece 693 extends further to the right than the Kuma cassette 681, and the rear surface of the cassette pressing piece 693 is configured to be able to come into contact with the front surface of the support protrusion 669a of the lifting mechanism cover 669. A nylon latch 694 is provided near the right end of this cassette pressing piece 693.

When the right end of the cassette pressing piece 693 is brought into contact with the support protrusion 669a of the lifting mechanism cover 669 and the operation part 694a is pressed, the tip of the Ny latch 694 expands in diameter and engages the locking hole of the support protrusion 669a. 669b, the cassette pressing piece 693 can be locked immovably, and can be unlocked by pulling the operating part 694a toward you. To be more specific, the Nylatch 694 includes an operating section 694a consisting of a disc-shaped disc part and a rod-shaped part protruding from the center of the disc part, and a cylindrical part into which the rod-shaped part of the operating part 694a is slidably inserted. A flange part extending outward from the base end near the disc part of the cylindrical part, and a plurality of notches in the circumferential direction from the tip part on the opposite side of the flange part of the cylindrical part toward the flange part. and a cylindrical member (grommet) having a slit provided therein. This Nylatch 694 is such that when the operating portion 694a is pressed toward the support protrusion 669a with the cylindrical member inserted into the locking hole 669b of the support protrusion 669a, the rod-shaped portion slides inside the cylindrical portion toward the distal end side. Then, the diameter of the cylindrical portion divided by the plurality of slits is expanded so that the tip thereof is opened. Thereby, the cylindrical member does not come out from the locking hole 669b, and can be locked.

The ball lifting unit 650 of this embodiment is attached to the rear side of the base wall portion 501b of the main body frame base 501 in a state where it is assembled to the main body frame 4. When this ball lifting unit 650 is assembled to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4, the ball lifting unit 650 is installed in a state in which the ball cassette 681 of the ball lifting mechanism 680 is removed from the ball lifting mechanism 660 (see FIG. 47(a)). , is attached to the ball lifting unit attachment portion 501j provided on the rear surface of the base wall portion 501b. At this time, the ball motor base 686 and the support protrusion 669a protruding forward from the lifting mechanism base 668 are inserted into the base wall 501b through the opening 501o penetrating back and forth in the ball lifting unit attachment part 501j. protrude forward.

In this state, the ball opening 668a of the lifting mechanism base 668 of the ball lifting mechanism 660 is located in the opening 501o penetrating the ball lifting unit attachment part 501j on the rear surface of the base wall 501b, and the opening 501o The game ball B being lifted by the lifting spiral shaft 661 can be visually recognized from the front of the base wall portion 501b (body frame 4) through the ball opening 668a (see FIG. 49). Since the width of the ball opening 668a is narrower than the diameter of the game ball B, even if the ball playing cassette 681 is removed, the game ball B will not spill out. As a result, by opening the door frame 3 relative to the main body frame 4 and removing the ball cassette 681, it is possible to check the lifting spiral shaft 661 and the game ball B being lifted on the lifting spiral shaft 661 from the front. I can do it.

After attaching the ball lifting mechanism 660 side of the ball lifting unit 650 to the ball lifting unit attachment part 501j of the base wall 501b, pull the operating part 694a of the nylon latch 694 protruding forward from the base wall 501b to lock it. Release it, rotate the cassette pressing piece 693 to open it forward and to the left against the biasing force of the spring 695, and rotate the Kuma motor base 686 to the release position so that its tip side moves away from the Kuma cassette 681. This prevents the cassette pressing piece 693 and the ball motor base 686 from overlapping the front of the cassette mounting recess 668b of the lifting mechanism base 668. Then, from the front of the base wall portion 501b, with the exposed surface of the polishing cloth 682 facing rearward, the ball polishing cassette 681 is inserted into the cassette mounting recess in the lifting mechanism base 668 so as to close the ball polishing port 668a from the front. 668b (see FIGS. 46 and 47(b)).

In this state, the Kuma cassette 681 is moved rearward and its rear end is inserted into the cassette attachment recess 668b. Thereafter, the Kuma motor base 686 is rotated to the lock position so as to be parallel to the left side surface of the Kuma cassette 681, and the rotating connection part 692 and positioning pin 686b protruding from the right side surface of the Kuma motor base 686 are connected to the Kuma cassette. 681 into the connecting hole 681b and the positioning hole 681c, respectively. As a result, the rotating coupling portion 692 and the positioning pin 686b are inserted into the ball cassette 681 from a direction intersecting the front-rear direction, so that forward movement of the ball cassette 681 can be restricted.

When the Kuma motor base 686 is moved to the lock position, the cassette pressing piece 693 attached to the front end of the Kuma motor base 686 presses the Kuma cassette 681 rearward due to the biasing force of the spring 695, and the right end of the cassette pressing piece 693 is in contact with the support protrusion 669a of the lifting mechanism cover 669. In this state, when the operating portion 694a of the Nylatch 694 is pushed and locked into the locking hole 669b of the support protrusion 669a, the cassette pressing piece 693 is locked unrotatably, and the installation of the Kuma cassette 681 is completed.

When removing the Kuma cassette 681, the Kuma cassette 681 can be removed by pulling the operating portion 694a of the Ny latch 694 toward you to release the lock, and then performing the reverse procedure to the above.

By the way, if the Kuma cassette 681 is installed in an incomplete state, such as by forgetting to lock it with the Kuma motor base 686 or the cassette pressing piece 693, the Kuma cassette 681 may come off during the game, resulting in interruption of the game. This may cause the players to lose interest in the game.

In contrast, in this embodiment, even if the Kuma motor base 686 or the cassette pressing piece 693 forgets to lock, the Kuma cassette 681 is configured not to come off. Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 48(a), when the Kuma motor base 686 is not in the lock position and the cassette pressing piece 693 is not pressing the Kuma cassette 681 backward, the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4, the inclined guide surface 102a of the projection 102 on the door frame main body 100 of the door frame 3 comes into contact with the front end of the Kuma motor base 686 (FIG. 48(b) ).

At this time, the cassette pressing piece 693 attached to the front end of the Kuma motor base 686 does not remain in the state of protruding forward as shown in FIG. 46, but due to the biasing force of the spring 695 as shown in FIG. Since the cassette pressing piece 693 is moving close to the rear Kuma cassette 681, the cassette pressing piece 693 does not come into contact with the door frame 3 and rotate to the opposite side of the Kuma cassette 681, and the cassette pressing piece 693 and the door Frame 3 will not be damaged.

Then, when the door frame 3 moves further in the closing direction, the tip of the Kuma motor base 686 is pushed by the guide surface 102a and rotates toward the right lock position. As a result, the rotary connecting portion 692 protruding from the right side of the Kuma motor base 686 is inserted into the connecting hole 681b of the Kuma cassette 681, and the positioning pin 686b of the Kuma motor base 686 is inserted into the positioning hole of the Kuma cassette 681. 681c, and forward movement of the ball cassette 681 is restricted (locked). Further, the cassette pressing piece 693 is in a state of pressing the Kuma cassette 681 rearward due to the urging force of the spring 695 (see FIG. 48(c)). As a result, the Kuma cassette 681 is in a locked state and will not come off forward.

Although not shown in the drawings, a protrusion may be provided on the rear surface of the door frame 3 so that the operating portion 694a of the Nylatch 694 can be pressed rearward. Thereby, even if the cassette pressing piece 693 is forgotten to be locked by the nylon latch 694, it becomes possible to lock it, and it is possible to reliably prevent the ball cassette 681 from falling off (removal).

Further, in the above embodiment, the Kuma motor base 686 is moved to the lock position using the protrusion 102 of the door frame 3 to lock the Kuma cassette 681 in a non-detachable manner, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the ball firing unit 550 and the foul unit 570 are removably provided, and a locking means for locking the ball firing unit 550 and the like in a non-removable manner is provided, and the door frame 3 is locked when the locking means is incompletely locked. When closed against the main body frame 4, the protrusion 102 may come into contact with a locking means, so that the ball firing unit 550 and the like can be irremovably locked.

In the ball lifting unit 650 of this embodiment, when assembled to the main body frame 4, the opening at the upstream end of the ball lifting upper inlet passage 651 faces the ball discharge port 600d of the circulating ball path unit 600, and the ball lifting unit 650 has a meandering shape. The game balls B that have passed through the ball storage passage 604 are supplied. The game ball B supplied to the ball lifting entrance passage 651 comes into contact with the ball lifting upper entrance ground plate 655 to have static electricity removed, and is then detected by the lifting entrance sensor 653 and is connected to the lifting spiral shaft 661. Supplied at the bottom end. At this time, the game ball B is inserted into the ball polishing port 668a whose front end side penetrates forward, and the front end side of the game ball B comes into contact with the polishing cloth 682 of the ball polishing mechanism 680, and the vertically long ball polishing port 668a is inserted into the ball polishing port 668a. Movement in this direction is restricted.

In this state, when the lifting spiral shaft 661 is rotated in the direction of lifting the game ball B by the lifting motor 664, the game ball B is pushed from below by the lifting groove 661a and moves upward along the ball opening 668a. That will happen. At this time, the game ball B moves upward while rotating while contacting the vertically extending portion of the inner peripheral edge of the ball opening 668a and the lifting groove 661a. As a result, the portion of the game ball B that is in contact with the polishing cloth 682 on the front end side changes as the game ball B rises (rotates), making it possible to polish the entire surface of the game ball B evenly.

When the game ball B reaches the upper end of the lifting spiral shaft 661, it enters the ball lifting exit passage 652, contacts the ball lifting exit ground metal plate 656, and is detected by the lifting exit sensor 654. The ball is sent to the ball feeding unit from the downstream end of the ball lifting upper outlet passage 652. At this time, even if the game ball B is polished by the polishing cloth 682 and charged with static electricity by being lifted by the ball lifting mechanism 660, the ball lifting exit ground plate 656 located upstream of the lifting exit sensor 654 Due to the contact with the ball, static electricity is removed, and problems caused by the static electricity of the ball do not occur in the lifting exit sensor 654, the frame control board 740, etc.

On the other hand, in the ball polishing mechanism 680, when the ball polishing feed gear 684 is rotated clockwise in the right side view by the ball polishing motor 688 with the ball polishing cassette 681 attached, the polishing cloth 682 is exposed to the outside from the rear surface of the ball polishing cassette 681. The exposed portion passes through the slit on the lower side of the ball cassette 681 and is accommodated in the ball cassette 681. At this time, the part of the polishing cloth 682 that is exposed to the outside is pulled downward, so that the part of the polishing cloth 682 housed in the polishing cassette 681 is exposed from the outside through the slit on the upper side of the polishing cassette 681. It will be rolled out.

The polishing cloth 682 of the polishing mechanism 680 moves intermittently at a slow speed. In this embodiment, the polishing cloth 682 moves 0.17 mm every time 1000 game balls B are fired.

In this way, according to the ball lifting unit 650 of this embodiment, the game balls B discharged from the circulating ball path unit 600 can be supplied to the ball feeding unit 700 while polishing the game balls B.

[4-6. Ball feeding unit]
The ball feeding unit 700 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 55 to 57 and the like. FIG. 55(a) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit in the main body frame seen from the front, and FIG. 55(b) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit in the main body frame seen from the back. FIG. 56(a) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 56(b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 57 is a front cross-sectional view of the ball feeding unit cut at a site near the firing sensor.

The ball feeding unit 700 is for supplying the game balls B lifted by the ball lifting unit 650 one by one to the ball firing unit 550. The ball feeding unit 700 is attached to a ball feeding unit mounting portion 501k provided on the rear side of the base wall portion 501b of the main body frame base 501. The ball feeding unit 700 faces upward from the upper surface of the base wall 501b so as to be sandwiched between the base wall 501b and the circulation ball path unit 600, and is detachably attached upward.

The ball feeding unit 700 has a ball supply port 701 which is open at the rear and into which game balls B supplied from the ball lifting unit 650 can enter, and a ball supply port 701 which is open at the front and is connected to the ball launch pad 552b of the ball launch unit 550. A ball sending port 702 for throwing the game ball B, a ball feeding passage 703 that connects the ball feeding port 701 and the ball feeding port 702 and through which the game ball B can flow, and a game ball flowing through the ball feeding passage 703. A ball feeding movable member 705 for discharging the game balls B detected by the shooting front sensor 704 one by one from the ball delivery port 702; A ball sending solenoid 706 for sending the game ball B to the ball firing unit 550, and a ball sending relay board 707 that relays the connection between the ball sending solenoid 706, the firing front sensor 704, and the frame control board 740. We are prepared.

The ball feeding unit 700 also includes a transmission member 708 that transmits the forward and backward movement of the plunger in the ball feeding solenoid 706 to move the ball feeding movable member 705, and a box-shaped box that is open to the rear and includes a firing front sensor 704 and a ball sending sensor 704 inside. It includes a unit base 709 on which a feed solenoid 706 and the like are provided, and a flat unit cover 710 attached to close an opening at the rear end of the unit base 709.

The ball supply port 701 of the ball feeding unit 700 is provided to penetrate a unit cover 710 that constitutes the rear surface of the ball feeding unit 700, and is provided at an upper right portion from the center in a front view. The ball supply port 701 is formed in a size that allows the game balls B to pass through one by one.

The ball delivery port 702 is provided so as to penetrate the unit base 709 that forms the front side of the ball feeding unit 700 in the front and rear directions, and is provided at a position lower than the center in a front view. The ball delivery port 702 is formed in a size that allows the game balls B to pass through one by one.

The ball feeding passage 703 connects the ball feeding port 701 and the ball feeding port 702, and after extending downwardly to the left from the ball feeding port 701 to a portion above the ball feeding port 702, the ball feeding passage 703 connects the ball feeding port 701 and the ball feeding port 702. It extends downward to the location of the outlet 702 . A firing front sensor 704 is provided near the left end of a portion of the ball feeding path 703 that extends to the left. Further, a ball receiving portion 705a of the ball feeding movable member 705 is located in a portion of the ball feeding passage 703 that extends up and down behind the ball feeding port 702.

The firing front sensor 704 is provided near the left end of the ball feeding path 703 that extends downwardly to the left. That is, the firing front sensor 704 is provided immediately before the upstream side of the ball receiving portion 705a in the ball feeding movable member 705. This front-of-launch sensor 704 detects the game ball B in a non-contact manner, for example, by detecting a change in induced current.

In the ball feeding passage 703 in which the firing front sensor 704 is provided, the flow of game balls B remains, similar to the ball lifting upper entrance passage 651 and the ball lifting upper exit passage 652. Therefore, in the firing front sensor 704, like the lifting entrance sensor 653 and the lifting exit sensor 654, thresholds are set for ON and OFF judgments, and when non-detection or detection continues beyond the threshold, Only ON or OFF is determined, and the presence or absence of the game ball B can be reliably determined (detected). In addition, in the firing front sensor 704 of this embodiment, the ON threshold is set to 12 ms, and the OFF threshold is set to 12 ms, for example.

The ball feeding movable member 705 is movable by driving the ball feeding solenoid 706 to release the game balls B in the ball feeding passage 703 one by one from the ball sending port 702 and supply them to the ball firing unit 550. It is. The ball feeding movable member 705 is divided into a ball receiving part 705a which is open to the right and front and back, has a U-shape, the bottom wall of which is inclined toward the front, and which can accommodate only one game ball B, and a ball receiving part 705a. A shaft portion 705b extending leftward from the left end of the shaft, a bearing portion 705c that passes through the left end of the shaft portion 705b in the front and rear directions and into which the first shaft pin 710a of the unit cover 710 is inserted so as to be relatively rotatable; It has a movable gear part 705d that is coaxial with the part 705c and fan-shaped to the right, and a ball stop part 705e that forms the upper part of the U-shaped ball receiving part 705a.

The ball feeding solenoid 706 is for moving the ball feeding movable member 705 and supplying the game balls B in the ball feeding passage 703 one by one from the ball sending port 702 to the ball firing unit 550. The ball feed solenoid 706 is provided at the upper left corner in a front view between the unit base 709 and the unit cover 710, with the magnetic pole part that generates magnetic force when energized directed downward. Although details will be described later, the ball feed solenoid 706 performs a series of hardware operations in conjunction with the firing solenoid 553 based on a predetermined firing sequence.

The ball feeding relay board 707 is for relaying the connection between the firing front sensor 704 and the ball feeding solenoid 706 and the frame control board 740. The ball feeding relay board 707 is provided between the unit base 709 and the unit cover 710 to the right of the firing front sensor 704.

The transmission member 708 transmits the movement of the plunger of the ball feeding solenoid 706 so that the ball feeding movable member 705 moves. The transmission member 708 includes a sheet metal holding portion 708b to which a magnetically attachable sheet metal 708a is attached to the magnetic pole portion of the ball feeding solenoid 706, a rod portion 708c extending to the right from the sheet metal holding portion 708b, and a rod portion 708c. A bearing part 708d that penetrates back and forth at the right end of the unit cover 710 and into which the second shaft pin 710b of the unit cover 710 is inserted so as to be relatively rotatable; It has a drive gear part 708e that meshes with the movable gear part 705d of the member 705.

The unit base 709 is formed into a box shape that is open to the rear, and is provided with a ball outlet 702 penetrating the unit base 702 in the front and back at a lower central portion of the front surface. The unit base 709 cooperates with a unit cover 710 to form a ball feeding passage 703, and also includes a firing front sensor 704, a ball feeding movable member 705, a ball feeding solenoid 706, a ball feeding relay board 707, and a transmission member 708. , holds.

The unit base 709 has a knob portion 709a spaced apart from each other in the left-right direction on the upper surface and recessed downward, and an elastic claw 709b provided at the lower right corner of the front surface. The knob 709a is formed so that an operator can pinch it from above, and is used when removing the ball feeding unit 700 upward from the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4. The side surfaces of the knob portion 709a that are close to each other are formed in a dovetail shape, and the side surfaces of the knob portion 709a are inclined toward each other as they move downward. On the side surface of the knob portion 709a, a plurality of protrusions extending back and forth are provided vertically in line. When the ball feeding unit 700 is attached to the ball feeding unit mounting portion 501k of the main body frame base 501, the elastic claw 709b is locked in the locking hole of the ball feeding unit mounting portion 501k and cannot be removed upward. It is for the purpose of

When removing the ball feeding unit 700 from the main body frame base 501, the elastic claws 709b, which pass through the locking holes in the base wall 501b and face forward, are pressed rearward to elastically deform, and the elastic claws 709b, which are provided on the upper surface By pinching and pulling up the knob 709a, it can be removed upward from the ball feeding unit mounting portion 501k of the main body frame base 501.

The unit cover 710 is provided with a ball supply port 701 penetrating the unit cover 710 from the center to the upper right in a front view. The unit cover 710 cooperates with the unit base 709 to form a ball feeding passage 703, and also includes a firing front sensor 704, a ball feeding movable member 705, a ball feeding solenoid 706, a ball feeding relay board 707, and a transmission member 708. , holds. The unit cover 710 has a first shaft pin 710a and a second shaft pin 710b that protrude forward in a cylindrical shape near the lower left corner when viewed from the front. The first shaft pin 710a can rotatably (rotatably) support the ball feeding movable member 705 by inserting it into the bearing portion 705c of the ball feeding movable member 705. The second shaft pin 710b can rotatably (rotatably) support the transmission member 708 by being inserted into the bearing portion 708d of the transmission member 708.

In the assembled state of the ball feeding unit 700 of this embodiment, the first shaft pin 710a is inserted into the bearing portion 705c of the ball feeding movable member 705, and the second shaft pin 710b is inserted into the bearing portion 708d of the transmission member 708. is inserted, and the movable gear portion 705d of the ball feeding movable member 705 and the drive gear portion 708e of the transmission member 708 are meshed with each other. In this state, the ball receiving part 705a at the right end of the ball feeding movable member 705 is located in the part extending vertically behind the ball feeding port 702 in the ball feeding passage 703, and the ball is When the movable feeding member 705 rotates, the ball receiving portion 705a moves up and down in the vertically extending portion of the ball feeding path 703.

In the ball feeding unit 700, in a normal state, the ball feeding solenoid 706 is de-energized (OFF). Therefore, the sheet metal 708a of the transmission member 708 is separated downward from the magnetic pole portion of the ball feed solenoid 706 due to gravity. In this state, the lower surface of the ball receiving portion 705a of the ball feeding movable member 705 is in contact with the bottom wall at the downstream end of the ball feeding passage 703, and the front end opening of the ball receiving portion 705a is aligned with the ball sending port 702. , the right end opening of the ball receiving portion 705a does not align with the ball feeding passage 703. Therefore, the game ball B flowing toward the ball receiving part 705a from upstream will not come into contact with the ball stop part 705e at the U-shaped upper part of the ball receiving part 705a and be received by the ball receiving part 705a. On the other hand, the game ball B received by the ball receiving part 705a rolls forward due to the slope of the bottom wall of the ball receiving part 705a and is ejected from the ball delivery port 702 forward.

When the ball stopping portion 705e of the ball feeding movable member 705 is in contact with the game ball B to stop ball feeding, as shown in FIG. It is located on the axis connecting the center of sphere B. As a result, the ball pressure from the game balls B acting on the ball stop portion 705e can be received by the first shaft pin 710a, so that the ball pressure of the plurality of game balls B stored up to the ball feeding unit 700 , it is possible to prevent the ball feeding movable member 705 from rotating and falling toward the ball firing unit 550 side.

In addition, in a normal state, since the ball stopper 705e is located on the axis connecting the center of the first shaft pin 710a and the center of the game ball B that is stopped, it is possible to prevent bumps and vibrations from the surroundings. By acting, even if the game ball B in contact with the ball stopper 705e vibrates up and down, the ball feeding movable member 705 is moved so that the ball stopper 705e follows the vibration of the game ball B. It can be rotated around the first shaft pin 710a, and it is possible to prevent the ball from being stopped by the ball stop portion 705e. This prevents the game ball B, which has been unstopped by the ball stopper 705e due to a bump or the like, from being ejected to the foul unit 570 via the ball firing unit 550 and being added to the number of balls held as a foul ball. can do.

When the ball feed solenoid 706 is energized (ON) in this normal state, the sheet metal 708a of the transmission member 708 is attracted to the upper magnetic pole portion by the magnetic force generated in the magnetic pole portion of the ball feed solenoid 706, and the transmission member 708 is It will rotate clockwise around the bearing portion 708d. When the transmission member 708 rotates in the clockwise direction, the movable gear portion 705d of the ball feeding movable member 705, which is meshed with the drive gear portion 708e of the transmission member 708, causes the ball feeding movable member 705 to rotate around its bearing portion 705c. As a result, the ball receiving portion 705a moves upward.

When the ball receiving part 705a of the ball feeding movable member 705 moves upward, the front end opening of the ball receiving part 705a is not aligned with the ball feeding port 702, and the right end opening of the ball receiving part 705a is aligned with the ball feeding passage 703. The game ball B is received by the ball receiving portion 705a from the ball feeding passage 703. In this state, the right end opening of the ball receiving part 705a does not match the ball sending port 702, so the game ball B received by the ball receiving part 705a rolls forward and is ejected from the ball sending port 702. There isn't. In addition, since the ball receiving portion 705a is sized to accommodate only one game ball B, when one game ball B is received in the ball receiving portion 705a, the game ball B on the upstream side is placed in the ball receiving portion. 705a will not accept it.

Thereafter, when the ball feeding solenoid 706 is de-energized (turned off), the magnetic pole portion of the ball feeding solenoid 706 releases the attraction of the transmission member 708 to the sheet metal 708a. At this time, since the game ball B is received by the ball receiving part 705a of the ball sending movable member 705, the ball sending movable member 705 moves so that the ball receiving part 705a moves downward due to the weight of the game ball B. The transmission member 708 rotates clockwise around the bearing part 705c, and the transmission member 708 is rotated around the bearing part 708d via the drive gear part 708e that meshes with the movable gear part 705d of the ball feeding movable member 705. and rotate counterclockwise to return to normal state.

Then, when the ball feeding unit 700 returns to its normal state, the front end opening of the ball receiving portion 705a of the ball feeding movable member 705 coincides with the ball sending port 702, so that the game ball B received by the ball receiving portion 705a is The ball rolls forward and is ejected from the ball delivery port 702 to the ball launch unit 550.

In this way, according to the ball feeding unit 700 of this embodiment, the game balls B can be sent one by one to the ball firing unit 550 by turning on and off the ball feeding solenoid 706.

[4-7. Ball tray]
The ball receiving tray 720 in the main body frame 4 will be explained mainly with reference to FIGS. 6, 7, 20, and the like. The ball receiving tray 720 is provided below the circulating ball path unit 600, and is for receiving the game balls B discharged from the ball outlet 613p of the circulating ball path unit 600. The ball receiving tray 720 is formed in the shape of a container that is open upward, and the bottom wall is inclined so that it becomes lower toward the front.

The ball receiving tray 720 is attached by being inserted into the tray insertion recess 501f in the main body frame base 501 from the front. The ball receiving tray 720 has elastic claws 721 on both left and right walls, and when it is attached to the main body frame base 501, the elastic claws 721 are engaged with the locking claws 501n of the main body frame base 501, and the ball tray 720 is moved forward. It won't come off. When removing the ball receiving tray 720, the elastic claw 721 is elastically deformed to the inside of the ball receiving tray 720, thereby releasing the lock and allowing the ball receiving tray 720 to be pulled out forward.

When attaching the ball receiving tray 720 to the tray insertion recess 501f of the main body frame base 501, the ball receiving tray 720 is moved rearward from the front of the tray insertion recess 501f and inserted into the tray insertion recess 501f. At this time, since the front end of the locking claw 501n is inclined in an arrow-like shape, when the elastic claw 721 of the ball receiving tray 720 comes into contact with the locking claw 501n from the front, the elastic claw 721 is moved inward due to the arrow-shaped inclination. The ball receiving tray 720 can be elastically deformed to be inserted into the tray insertion recess 501f. Then, when the elastic claw 721 of the ball receiving tray 720 passes through the portion of the locking claw 501n and is no longer in contact with the locking claw 501n, the elastic claw 721 that had been elastically deformed returns to its original state, and the locking claw 501n returns to its original state. 501n, thereby preventing the ball receiving tray 720 from sliding forward.

Since this ball receiving tray 720 is placed on the bottom wall of the tray insertion recess 501f which is inclined so that the front end side is lower, the game balls B discharged from the ball outlet 613p of the circulation ball path unit 600 are stored. When it becomes heavy, it tries to slide forward due to the inclination of the bottom wall, but the sliding is prevented by the engagement between the elastic claw 721 and the locking claw 501n. When the elastic claw 721 is released from the locking claw 501n, the ball receiving tray 720 automatically slides forward due to the weight of the stored game balls B, and the ball receiving tray 720 is moved into the tray insertion recess 501f. It can be easily taken out.

Although not shown, the ball feeding unit 700 of this embodiment is attached to the ball feeding relay board 707 by penetrating the base wall 501b of the main body frame base 501 from the front while being attached to the main body frame 4. Since the wiring connector is connected, even if an attempt is made to remove the ball feeding unit upward from the ball feeding unit mounting portion 501k with the wiring connector connected, the wiring connector interferes and the ball cannot be removed.

In addition, when the ball feeding unit 700 is attached to the main body frame 4 and assembled into the pachinko machine 1, the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 is located above the ball feeding unit 700, and the ball feeding unit 700 comes out upward. Never. In addition, if the game board 5 is inserted from the front into the game board insertion part 502 with the ball transport unit 700 not fully inserted from above into the ball transport unit attachment part 501k of the main body frame 4, the upper part of the ball transport unit 700 is pressed downward by the game board 5 (game panel 1100) and can be completely inserted.

[4-8. Frame board unit]
The frame substrate unit 730 in the main body frame 4 will be explained mainly with reference to FIGS. 17 and 18, FIGS. 58 to 60, and the like. FIG. 58 is a perspective view showing a state in which the main body frame is opened relative to the outer frame, and the back cover and frame board unit are opened. FIG. 59 is an explanatory diagram showing enlarged portions of the frame board unit in the outer frame and the main body frame. FIG. 60 is a reference photograph showing the rear side of the main body frame with the frame board unit opened. Although the details will be described later, the frame control board 740 displays the number of balls held on the number of balls display section 140, performs payment processing by operating the counting button switch 180, a ball firing unit 550, a ball lifting unit 650, and a ball feeding unit. 700, etc., and management (monitoring) of the game balls B in the circulation ball path unit 600.

The frame substrate unit 730 is attached to the rear part of the base wall portion 501b of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500 so as to be openable and closable. The frame board unit 730 includes a frame control board 740, a power supply board 750, an interface board 760, and a game ball lending device connection terminal board 765.

The frame board unit 730 also includes a unit base 770 that is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500 so as to be openable and closable, and a frame control board box 771 that is attached to the rear side of the unit base 770 and accommodates the frame control board 740. , a power supply board box 772 that is installed between the frame control board box 771 and the unit base 770 and houses the power supply board 750, and an interface board that is installed on the unit base 770 on the left side of the frame control board box 771 when viewed from the front. 760 and a game ball lending device connection terminal board 765, an interface board box 773, and a nylon latch 774 for fixing the unit base 770 to the main body frame base unit 500 in an unopenable/closable manner. The Nylatch 774 has the same configuration as the above-mentioned Nylatch 694, and a detailed explanation of the structure will be omitted.

Although not shown, the frame control board 740 includes a ROM that stores various processing programs and commands, a RAM that temporarily stores data, a CPU that executes processing programs and commands, and the like. .

The frame control board 740 includes a RAM clear switch 741 for erasing information stored in the RAM, and a RAM clear switch 741 for erasing information stored in the RAM, and a RAM clear switch 741 for removing the enclosed game balls B from the ball outlet 613p of the circulating ball path unit 600. Clears the ball removal switch 742 used to remove balls to the ball receiving tray 720 and the number of balls held by the player stored in RAM, etc., and also clears the display on the number of balls held display section 140 on the door frame 3. A pitch count memory/display clear switch 743 is provided to perform the pitch count storage/display clear switch 743 (see FIG. 63).

The frame control board 740 is connected to a main control board 1310 provided on the game board 5 and described later through two-way communication, and a game ball lending device connection terminal board 765 is connected through two-way communication. The frame control board 740 is connected to the game ball lending device 8 via a game ball lending device connection terminal board 765.

The frame control board 740 is connected to the ball count display section 140 of the door frame 3, the firing stop switch 161, the handle touch sensor 162, the handle rotation sensor 163, and the counting button switch 180.

In addition, the frame control board 740 includes a door release switch 507 of the main body frame 4, a frame release switch 508, a firing solenoid 553, a firing subtraction sensor 554, an out ball sensor 605, a safe ball sensor 606, a foul ball sensor 607, and an insufficient circulating ball sensor. A sensor 621, a circulating ball excess sensor 622, a lifting entrance sensor 653, a lifting exit sensor 654, a lifting motor 664, a lifting motor index sensor 666, a ball motor 688, a firing front sensor 704, and a ball feeding solenoid 706 are connected. ing.

The power supply board 750 is for supplying power at a predetermined voltage to the frame control board 740, the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510, and the like. A power switch 751 is provided near the right end of the rear surface of the power supply board 750. This power switch 751 is exposed rearward from the power supply board box 772 so that it can be operated.

The interface board 760 is for relaying connections between the frame control board 740 and various relay boards provided on the door frame 3 side and the game board 5 side.

The game ball lending device connection terminal board 765 is for relaying the connection between the frame control board 740 and the game ball lending device 8.

The unit base 770 is elongated from side to side, and has a hinge shaft 770a at its left end that is pivotally supported by a frame board unit shaft support 504d provided on the rear surface of the main frame speaker box 504 of the main body frame base unit 500. At the same time, two nylatches 774 are attached to the right end with the operating section 774a facing rearward.

The unit base 770 has a rear part 770b extending to the right from the left end by a length of 1/4 of the total length in the left-right direction, and a connection part extending short forward from the right end of the rear part 770b. portion 770c, and a front portion 770d extending from the front end to the right end of the connecting portion 770c. As a result, the unit base 770 has a step in the front-rear direction between the rear surface portion 770b and the front surface portion 770d.

An interface board box 773 is detachably attached to the rear side of the rear surface portion 770b of the unit base 770. On the other hand, a power supply board box 772 is removably attached to the rear side of the front part 770d of the unit base 770, and a frame control board box 771 is removably attached to the rear side of the power supply board box 772.

In addition, the unit base 770 is provided with a power harness accommodating portion 770e that extends from side to side and is recessed from the back to the front above the portion where the frame control board box 771 and the power board box 772 are attached. There is. The power supply harness accommodating portion 770e has a wide portion near the left end near the hinge shaft 770a. The power harness accommodating portion 770e is provided with a guide rib, and can accommodate the bundled power harness PH (see FIG. 60). As a result, the power harness PH (power cord) does not get in the way during the assembly until the frame board unit 730 is attached to the main body frame base unit 500, and the efficiency of the assembly work can be improved.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 59, since a part of the rear of the power harness accommodating part 770e overlaps with a part of the lower end of the back cover 505, when the main body frame 4 etc. are being transported, the power harness Even when the PH is in a free state, the power supply harness PH can be prevented from popping out by coming into contact with the back cover 505, and damage caused by the power supply harness PH being popped out and accidentally caught can be prevented.

In the frame board unit 730 of this embodiment, in a normal state (in use), a hinge shaft 770a provided at the left end of the unit base 770 is pivotally supported by a frame board unit shaft support 504d of the main body frame base unit 500. At the same time, a nylatch 774 attached to the right end of the unit base 770 is attached to a support protrusion 501r provided on the rear surface of the base wall 501b of the main body frame base 501. In this state, the frame substrate unit 730 covers the rear of the circulating ball path unit 600 and the ball lifting unit 650 attached to the rear side of the base wall portion 501b, making it impossible to approach them.

In addition, in a normal state, as shown in FIG. It is located above. At this time, since the front part 770d and the power supply board box 772 are formed shorter vertically than the frame control board box 771, wiring etc. can be accommodated between the power supply board box 772 and the box extension part 504c. A space is formed.

Further, in a normal state, as shown in FIG. 59, the front end of the back cover 505 is located behind the upper knee latch 774, so that the operating portion 774a of the upper knee latch 774 cannot be pulled. Further, in a normal state, the lower part of the back cover 505 overlaps with the rear of the frame board unit 730. As a result, unless the back cover 505 is opened from the main body frame base 501, the back cover 505 will interfere with (contact) and the frame board unit 730 cannot be opened rearward (opening is prevented). It is composed of

Therefore, in a normal state, even if the frame board unit 730 attempts to hinge rearward due to the lock of the nylatch 774 being released for some reason, the lower part of the back cover 505 is positioned so as to overlap behind it. It is possible to prevent the frame substrate unit 730 from rotating through the hinge and opening from the main body frame base 501. As a result, when the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2 while the frame board unit 730 is opened from the main body frame base 501, the frame board unit 730 comes into contact with the outer frame 2 and the frame board unit 730 is damaged. This can be avoided.

When checking the circulating ball path unit 600, ball lifting unit 650, etc. on the rear side of the main body frame 4 from this normal state, first open the main body frame 4 forward with respect to the outer frame 2. . Then, when the back cover 505 is opened rearward from the main body frame base 501 and the operating part 774a of the Nylatch 774 is pulled rearward to release the lock, the attachment to the support protrusion 501r on the right end side of the unit base 770 is released. By rotating the hinge around the left end hinge shaft 770a, the frame substrate unit 730 can be opened rearward. By opening this frame board unit 730 rearward, the circulating ball path unit 600 and ball lifting unit 650 attached to the rear side of the base wall portion 501b will appear, making it possible to approach them (Fig. 58 and FIG. 60).

When the frame substrate unit 730 is opened rearward, as shown in FIG. 60, the main body frame base 501 is black and opaque, while the main body frame speaker box 504, circulating ball path unit 600, and ball lifting unit are 650, etc. are made of transparent members, and their interiors can be viewed (confirmed) from the outside.

In order to return the frame board unit 730 from the rearward open state to the normal state, the normal state can be returned by performing the reverse procedure to the above.

By the way, after opening the frame board unit 730 from the main body frame base 501, when returning to the normal state, if you first close the back cover 505 to the main body frame base 501, even if you try to close the frame board unit 730, The frame board unit 730 interferes with (contacts) the back cover 505 and cannot be closed. Furthermore, if you try to close the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 while the frame board unit 730 is open (the back cover 505 is open), the frame board unit 730 and the back cover 505 will close to the outer frame 2. It is prevented from interfering with (abutting) and closing. Thereby, it is possible to notify that the frame board unit 730 has been forgotten to close.

Furthermore, even if you forget to press (forget to lock) the operating part 774a of the Nylatch 774 after closing the frame board unit 730 against the main body frame base 501, when the back cover 505 is closed against the main body frame base 501, the back The lower right front end of the cover 505 abuts the operating portion 774a of the Nylatch 774 from the rear, and can press and lock the operating portion 774a.

[4-9. Lock unit]
The lock unit 780 in the main body frame 4 will be explained mainly with reference to FIGS. 6, 7, and the like. The lock unit 780 is attached from the rear along the right edge of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front. The lock unit 780 is for locking between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 and between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4.

The lock unit 780 includes a cylindrical lock cylinder 781 whose front end protrudes forward by penetrating the cylinder insertion opening 501m of the main body frame base 501 from the rear, a keyhole 782 provided in the front end surface of the lock cylinder 781, and a keyhole. The door frame lock claw 783, which unlocks the door frame 3 and main body frame 4 when the key corresponding to 782 is inserted and rotated in a predetermined direction, and the key corresponding to the key hole 782 are inserted. It has an outer frame lock claw 784 that unlocks the main body frame 4 and outer frame 2 when rotated in the determination direction.

[5. Brief explanation of the game board]
The game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 has the same board configuration as the game board 5 shown in FIG. 103, which will be described later, and will be briefly described here with reference to FIG. 8. The game board 5 has a general winning hole 2001, a first starting hole 2003, a second starting hole 2004, a big winning hole 2005, in which a privilege is given by accepting the game ball B, in a gaming area 5a into which the game ball B is driven. A prize opening such as the following is provided, and the player operates the handle 160 so that the game ball B is received in the prize opening and enjoys hitting the game ball B. The game board 5 is detachably attached to the game board insertion portion 502 of the main body frame 4 from the front side. The game board 5 is visible from the player side through the game window 101 of the door frame 3 when assembled to the pachinko machine 1, and is a game area where game balls B are driven when the player operates the handle 160. 5a.

The game board 5 includes a front component 1000 that defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a generally rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 to define the rear end of the game area 5a. It includes a plate-shaped game panel 1100, and a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) implanted in a predetermined gauge arrangement so as to be able to come into contact with the game balls B in the game area 5a on the front side of the game panel 1100. ing.

The front component 1000 of the game board 5 is entirely transparent. The front component 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, and has a substantially circular inner shape that penetrates in the front-rear direction, and the inner circumference of the inner shape defines the outer circumference of the game area 5a. The front component 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 that extends in an arc shape along the circumferential direction in a clockwise direction from the lower end on the left side from the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, passes the upper end of the center in the left-right direction in the front view, and extends to the diagonally upper right corner; An inner rail 1002 is arranged inside the front component 1000 along the rail 1001 and extends in an arc shape from the lower left-right center in the front view to the diagonally upper left in the front view, and the gaming area is on the right side of the lower end of the inner rail 1002 in the front view. The out guide part 1003 is formed at the lowest position of 5a and slopes downwardly toward the rear.

The front component 1000 also includes a lower right rail 1004 that is sloped linearly from the right end of the out guide section 1003 in front view to near the right side of the front component 1000 so that the right end side is slightly higher; The right rail 1005 extends from the right end of the front component 1000 along the right side of the front component 1000 to the bottom of the upper end of the outer rail 1001 and has an upper part curved inward to the front component 1000, and the upper end of the right rail 1005 and the outer rail. A stopper part 1006 is connected to the upper end of the outer rail 1001, and the game ball B that has rolled along the outer rail 1001 comes into contact with the stopper part 1006.

The front component 1000 is rotatably supported on the upper end of the inner rail 1002, and extends upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close the space between the front component 1000 and the outer rail 1001. The backflow prevention member can be rotated only between an open position in which the space between the backflow prevention member and the outer rail 1001 is opened by rotating in the circumferential direction, and is biased by a spring (not shown) to return to the closed position. 1007.

Further, the front component 1000 includes an out port 1008 that penetrates back and forth at the rear end of the out guide portion 1003 at the lower center of the frame in the left and right direction when viewed from the front. The game ball B received at the out port 1008 is ejected from the game board 5 downward (to the out ball receptacle 600a of the circulation ball path unit 600) at the rear of the game panel 1100 without being returned to the game area 5a.

The game board 5 is provided at the rear of the game panel 1100 and is connected to a main control board 1310 that controls the game content played by hitting a game ball B into the game area 5a, and a control signal from the main control board 1310. A function display unit 1400 is provided, which displays the game situation based on the game information, and is mounted on the upper left corner of the front component 1000 so as to be visible to the player.

In addition, the game board 5 is arranged with a peripheral control board 1510 provided behind the game panel 1100 and at the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front behind the game panel 1100, and is capable of displaying a predetermined effect image. It includes an effect display device 1600, a front unit 2000 attached to the front side of the game panel 1100, and a back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100.

The game board 5 (front unit 2000) has a plurality of general winning holes 2001 which are always open and capable of accepting game balls B shot into the game area 5a, and a plurality of general winning holes 2001 provided at predetermined positions within the game area 5a. A gate 2010, which is provided at a predetermined position in the gaming area 5a, through which the game ball B can pass; and a first starting port, which is provided at a predetermined position in the game area 5a, and through which a first special symbol and a second special symbol are drawn by receiving the game ball B. 2003 and the second starting port 2004, and a big prize that allows the acceptance of the game ball B according to the lottery result of the special symbol drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first starting port 2003 and the second starting port 2004. It has an opening 2005.

The first starting port 2003 is provided directly above the out port 1008 below a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 provided at the center of the gaming area 5a. The second starting port 2004 is provided in the attacker unit 2400, and opens and closes to accept the game ball B according to the lottery result of the normal symbol drawn when the game ball B passes through the gate 2010.

The big prize opening 2005 is provided in the attacker unit 2400 attached to the lower right corner in the gaming area 5a.

In addition, the game board 5 includes a general winning hole sensor 3001 that detects the game ball B received in the general winning hole 2001, a gate sensor 2011 that detects the game ball B passing through the gate 2010, and a first starting A first starting port sensor 2101 that detects the game ball B received in the opening 2003, a second starting port sensor 2401 that detects the game ball B accepted in the second starting port 2004, and a second starting port sensor 2401 that detects the game ball B accepted in the big winning port 2005. A big prize opening sensor 2402 that detects the game balls B that have been played is provided (see FIG. 63).

The game ball B received in the general winning hole 2001 is detected by the general winning hole sensor 3001 behind the game panel 1100, and then discharged from the game board 5 to the safe ball socket 600b in the circulation ball path unit 600 below. be done. The game ball B received in the first starting port 2003 is detected by the first starting port sensor 2101 at the rear of the game panel 1100, and then passes through the safe ball socket 600b in the circulating ball path unit 600 below from the game board 5. is discharged. The game ball B received in the second starting port 2004 is detected by the second starting port sensor 2401 at the rear of the game panel 1100, and is then detected by the safe ball socket 600b in the circulation ball path unit 600 downward from the game board 5. is discharged. The game ball B received in the big winning hole 2005 is detected by the big winning hole sensor 2402 behind the game panel 1100, and then discharged from the game board 5 to the safe ball socket 600b in the circulation ball path unit 600 below. be done.

The main control board 1310 controls the game using the game ball B in the game area 5a in the pachinko machine 1. The main control board 1310 is connected to the frame control board 740 provided in the main body frame 4 through two-way communication, and is connected to the peripheral control board 1510 in one direction only for output signals.

The main control board 1310 receives the detection signals of the game ball B from the general winning opening sensor 3001, the gate sensor 2011, the first starting opening sensor 2101, the second starting opening sensor 2401, the big winning opening sensor 2402, etc. In addition, the main control board 1310 outputs drive signals to the starting port solenoid 2412 for opening and closing the second starting port 2004, the attacker solenoid 2414 for opening and closing the big winning port 2005, and the like.

The main control board 1310 outputs a predetermined number (for example, 10) of prize ball commands when the game ball B accepted into the general winning hole 2001 is detected by the general winning hole sensor 3001. Since this is the same as a conventional pachinko machine, there is no need to change the software of the main control board 1310. When this prize ball command is received, the frame control board 740 interprets it as a ball possession addition signal. Further, when the game ball B received in the first starting port 2003 is detected by the first starting port sensor 2101, a predetermined number (for example, one) of prize ball commands are output. Further, when the game ball B received in the second starting port 2004 is detected by the second starting port sensor 2401, a predetermined number (for example, one) of prize ball commands are output. Further, when the game ball B accepted into the big winning hole 2005 is detected by the big winning hole sensor 2402, a predetermined number (for example, 10 or 13) of prize ball commands are output.

Further, the main control board 1310 outputs signals such as the normal symbol lottery result and the special symbol lottery result to the peripheral control board 1510.

The function display unit 1400 uses a plurality of LEDs based on a signal from the main control board 1310 to display the gaming status (gaming situation), the lottery results for normal symbols, the lottery results for special symbols, etc.

Although detailed illustrations are omitted, the functional display unit 1400 displays a status indicator consisting of three LEDs that display the gaming status and the lottery results of the normal symbols drawn by passing the game ball B at the gate 2010. It is equipped with a normal symbol display device consisting of two LEDs, and a normal pending display device consisting of two LEDs that displays the pending number of normal symbols to be drawn by passing the game ball B at the gate 2010.

In addition, the function display unit 1400 includes a first special symbol display device consisting of eight LEDs that display the lottery result of the first special symbol drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first starting port 2003, and A first special reservation number indicator consisting of two LEDs that displays the number of reservations related to the acceptance of game balls B into the opening 2003, and a second special symbol drawn by lottery according to the reception of game balls B into the second starting opening 2004. a second special symbol display device consisting of eight LEDs that displays the lottery results; and a second special reservation number display device consisting of two LEDs that displays the number of reservations related to the acceptance of game balls B into the second starting port 2004. It is equipped with.

Furthermore, the function display unit 1400 displays the number of repetitions (number of rounds) of the opening/closing pattern of the big prize opening 2005 when the lottery result of the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) is "hit" or the like. It is equipped with a round indicator consisting of two LEDs.

In this function display unit 1400, the number of reservations, symbols, etc. can be displayed by appropriately turning on, turning off, blinking, etc. the provided LED.

The peripheral control board 1510 is attached to the rear side of the effect display device 1600. The peripheral control board 1510 causes the effect display device 1600 to display an effect image, perform a light emitting effect, a movable effect, etc. based on a signal sent from the main control board 1310.

[6. Flow of game balls]
Next, the flow of game balls B in the pachinko machine 1 will be explained mainly with reference to FIGS. 61 and 62. FIG. 61 is an explanatory diagram showing various passages for game balls on the rear side of the main body frame from the back. FIG. 62 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing the flow of game balls in the main body frame.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, when the player is not operating the handle 160, as shown in FIG. It is stored in a region below the board 5. The circulation path R of the game balls B in the main body frame 4 is provided with a foul unit 570, a circulation ball path unit 600, a ball lifting unit 650, a ball feeding unit 700, and a ball firing unit 550 in order from the upstream side. The circulation route R includes an out ball passage 601, a safe ball passage 602, a foul ball passage 603, a ball storage passage 604, a ball lifting upper entrance passage 651, a ball lifting upper exit passage 652, and the like.

The plurality of sensors for detecting game balls B flowing through the circulation path R are, from the upstream side, a safe ball sensor 606, an out ball sensor 605, a foul ball sensor 607, a circulating ball excess sensor 622, and a circulating ball shortage sensor. 621, a lifting entrance sensor 653, a lifting exit sensor 654, a firing front sensor 704, and a firing subtraction sensor 554 are provided in this order. Based on the signals from these various sensors, various control processes described below are executed in the frame control board 740.

When the player is not operating the handle 160, the safe ball sensor 606, out ball sensor 605, foul ball sensor 607, and circulating ball excess sensor 622 are in the OFF (non-detection) state, indicating that there are too few circulating balls. The sensor 621, the lifting entrance sensor 653, the lifting exit sensor 654, the firing front sensor 704, and the firing subtraction sensor 554 are in an ON (detection) state.

In the circulation route R in the main body frame 4, a large number of game balls B are stored in a line. A large number of game balls B lined up in a row have their heads located on the ball launch pad 552b of the launch unit cover 552 in the ball launch unit 550, and the rear end located on the ball storage passage 604 of the circulating ball path unit 600. It is located within the range of the section 620 on the upstream side of the ball removal shutter 615.

In the circulation path R, the portion between the upper end of the lifting spiral shaft 661 in the ball lifting unit 650 and the lifting outlet sensor 654 is arranged with respect to the length of a predetermined number (for example, 5) of game balls B lined up. A specific number (for example, four) of game balls B smaller than a predetermined number are lined up. This is to secure a space to receive the lifted game ball B even if one game ball B is lifted when the lifting spiral shaft 661 is returned to its origin.

Further, in the circulation route R, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the positions between the ejection front sensor 704 and the lift exit sensor 654 are lined up. As a result, if the game ball B continues to be fired in the ball firing unit 550 even after the detection of the game ball B is turned OFF (non-detected) in the lifting exit sensor 654, the rotation of the lifting spiral shaft 661 It is possible to avoid running out of game balls B to be fired until the game balls B are lifted and replenished.

When the player operates the handle 160 to drive the firing solenoid 553 of the ball firing unit 550, the game ball B placed on the ball launching pad 552b of the firing unit cover 552 is fired, and the firing subtraction sensor At 554, the detection of the game ball B becomes non-detected (OFF). As a result, the number of balls held by the player is subtracted by one (balls held subtraction process to be described later). Thereafter, the ball feeding solenoid 706 of the ball feeding unit 700 is energized for a predetermined period of time, the ball receiving part 705a of the ball feeding movable member 705 moves up and down, and one game ball B is placed on the ball launching pad 552b. , the firing subtraction sensor 554 enters the detection (ON) state.

When game balls B are fired one by one by the player's operation of the handle 160, a plurality of game balls stored between the firing front sensor 704 and the upper end of the lifting spiral shaft 661 (ball lifting exit passage 652) are fired. The number of balls B decreases one by one, and eventually the lifting exit sensor 654 stops detecting the game ball B (OFF). When a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls B are launched after the lifting exit sensor 654 becomes non-detected, the lifting spiral shaft 661 is rotated by the lifting motor 664 of the ball lifting unit 650. starts, rotates three times, supplies three game balls B to the ball lifting exit passage 652, and then stops (lifting motor operation process to be described later).

When the lifting spiral shaft 661 is rotated by the lifting motor 664, the game ball B located at the downstream end of the ball lifting entrance passage 651 moves to the lower end side of the lifting spiral shaft 661 and is moved upward. . As a result, a large number of game balls B lined up in the ball lifting upper entrance passage 651 and the ball storage passage 604 will flow downstream, and the number of game balls B stored in the ball storage passage 604 will decrease.

The game ball B fired from the ball firing unit 550 and hit into the game area 5a of the game board 5 is sent to the out opening 1008 or the winning opening (general winning opening 2001, first starting opening 2003, second starting opening 2004, It is accepted in any of the big prize openings 2005). The game balls B received at the out port 1008 of the game board 5 are discharged downward from the game board 5 and delivered to the out ball receptacle 600a of the circulation ball path unit 600. The game ball B delivered to the out ball socket 600a passes through the out ball passage 601, is detected by the out ball sensor 605, and is sent to the ball storage path 604.

On the other hand, the game balls B received in the prize opening of the game board 5 are discharged downward from the game board 5 and delivered to the safe ball receptacle 600b of the circulation ball path unit 600. The game ball B delivered to the safe ball socket 600b passes through the safe ball passage 602, is detected by the safe ball sensor 606, and is sent to the ball storage passage 604.

When the game ball B is detected by the out ball sensor 605, the number of out balls is counted, and when the game ball B is detected by the safe ball sensor 606, the number of safe balls is counted. This makes it possible to accurately calculate the ball output rate of the game balls B. Note that the calculated ball payout rate is displayed on a display section (not shown) provided on the main control board 1310. This ball payout rate changes depending on the gaming status, so the ball payout rate within a predetermined period (for example, per unit time, per predetermined time, per day, etc.) Calculated as follows: (added number - number of safe pitches within a predetermined period) ÷ number of out pitches within a predetermined period = ball out rate within a predetermined period.

By the way, the game ball B that was not hit into the game area 5a of the game board 5 even though it was fired from the ball launch unit 550 (ball launch pad 552b) is collected as a foul ball by the foul unit 570 and then circulated. The foul ball is delivered to the foul ball socket 600c of the ball path unit 600. The game ball B delivered to the foul ball receptacle 600c flows through the foul ball passage 603, is detected by the foul ball sensor 607, and is sent to the ball storage passage 604. When the foul ball sensor 607 detects the game ball B, one is added to the number of balls held by the player (ball holding addition process described later).

In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the game balls B are enclosed without being discharged to the outside or supplied from the outside, and by circulating inside the game balls B, the player can play with the game balls B. Never touch it.

[7. Various control processing]
Next, various control processes in the frame control board 740 in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 63 to 76 and the like. FIG. 63 is a block diagram schematically showing the control configuration of the pachinko machine. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing firing permission processing. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the process of subtracting balls held, and FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing the process of adding balls held due to foul balls. FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing the firing control process. FIG. 68 is a time chart showing the operations of the firing solenoid and the ball feeding solenoid in the firing sequence. FIG. 69(a) is a flowchart showing a firing control process different from that in FIG. 67, and FIG. 69(b) is a flowchart showing a ball possession subtraction process in the case of the firing control process of FIG. 69(a).

Moreover, FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing prize ball processing. FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing the lifting motor operation process, FIG. 72 is a table showing the relationship between the lifting entrance sensor, lifting exit sensor, and the lifting motor operation, and FIG. It is a graph showing the relationship with the operation of the ball lifting unit. FIG. 74 is a graph showing the operation of the ball lifting mechanism in the ball lifting unit. FIG. 75(a) is a flowchart showing security processing, and FIG. 75(b) is a flowchart showing security processing in an embodiment different from that in FIG. 75(a). FIG. 76 is a table showing the relationship between the circulating ball shortage sensor, the circulating ball excess sensor, and error notification. Note that in FIG. 63, some electronic components such as sensors, solenoids, motors, LEDs, etc. connected to the main control board 1310, peripheral control board 1510, etc. are omitted.

As shown in FIG. 63, the main control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 includes a frame control board 740 attached to the main body frame 4, a main control board 1310 and a peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5, It consists of The frame control board 740 mainly controls the firing and circulation of game balls B, the number of balls held, and the like. The main control board 1310 mainly performs game control processing. The peripheral control board 1510 mainly performs control processing of effects.

The frame control board 740 includes a firing stop switch 161, a handle touch sensor 162, a handle rotation sensor 163, a counting button switch 180, a door opening switch 507, a frame opening switch 508, a firing subtraction sensor 554, an out ball sensor 605, and a safe ball sensor. 606, foul ball sensor 607, circulating ball shortage sensor 621, circulating ball excess sensor 622, lifting entrance sensor 653, lifting exit sensor 654, lifting motor index sensor 666, firing front sensor 704, RAM clear switch 741, ball removal Signals from the switch 742, pitch count memory/display clear switch 743, etc. are input.

Further, the frame control board 740 outputs signals to the ball count display section 140, the firing solenoid 553, the lifting motor 664, the ball motor 688, the ball feeding solenoid 706, and the like.

Further, the frame control board 740 receives signals from the game ball lending device 8 via the game ball lending device connection terminal board 765, and outputs signals. Further, the frame control board 740 receives signals from the main control board 1310 and outputs signals.

Signals from the general winning opening sensor 3001, gate sensor 2011, first starting opening sensor 2101, second starting opening sensor 2401, big winning opening sensor 2402, etc. are input to the main control board 1310. The main control board 1310 also outputs signals to the starting port solenoid 2412, the attacker solenoid 2414, the peripheral control board 1510, and the like.

Note that the game ball lending device 8 is provided outside the pachinko machine 1, and outputs a signal to the management server 9 via the communication network. Signals from the ball lending button switch 8a, return button switch, frame control board 740, etc. are input to the game ball lending device 8. Furthermore, the game ball lending device 8 outputs signals to the display section, frame control board 740, and the like.

[7-1. Launch permission processing]
The launch permission process will be explained with reference to FIG. 64. The firing permission process is a process for determining whether or not the game ball B should be fired. When the firing permission process is started, first in step S101, it is checked whether the player is touching the handle 160, and if the player is touching the handle 160 and the handle touch sensor 162 is ON (YES), , proceed to the next step S102. If the handle touch sensor 162 is OFF in step S101 (NO), the process proceeds to step S107, where the frame control firing permission signal is turned OFF and the process ends.

In step S102, it is confirmed whether or not the firing stop switch 161 is OFF. If the firing stop switch 161 is ON, the answer is YES and the process proceeds to the next step S103. On the other hand, if the firing stop switch 161 is OFF in step S102, the answer is NO and the process proceeds to step S107, where the frame control firing permission signal is turned OFF and the process ends.

In step S103, it is checked whether the frame control board 740 is connected to the game ball lending device 8 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 765, and if it is connected to the game ball lending device 8, If YES, the process advances to the next step S104. On the other hand, if the connection with the game ball lending device 8 is not confirmed in step S103, the answer is NO and the process proceeds to step S107, where the frame control firing permission signal is turned OFF and the process ends.

In step S104, the presence or absence (ON/OFF) of main control firing permission from the main control board 1310 is confirmed, and if there is main control firing permission, YES is determined and the process proceeds to the next step S105. On the other hand, in step S104, if there is no main control firing permission, the determination is NO and the process proceeds to step S107, where the frame control firing permission signal is turned OFF and the process ends.

Here, the conditions for the main control firing permission to be ON include "no fatal error such as a RAM error in the main control board 1310".

In addition to the conditions in steps S101 to S105 described above, the conditions for the frame control firing permission (frame control firing permission signal) to be ON include ``a fatal error such as a RAM error in the frame control board 740 has occurred. You may also include other conditions as necessary, such as "No."

In step S105, it is checked whether the number of balls held by the player is greater than 0, and if the number of balls held is greater than 0, the answer is YES and the process proceeds to the next step S106, where the frame control firing permission signal is turned ON. to end the process. On the other hand, in step S105, if the number of balls held is less than 0 (the number of balls held is 0), the answer is NO and the process proceeds to step S107, where the frame control firing permission signal is turned OFF and the process ends.

In this way, the firing permission process allows the firing of the game ball B, and when the player rotates the handle 160 in this state, the firing solenoid 553 is driven with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle. The game ball B is fired from the ball firing unit 550. When driving the firing solenoid 553, firing control processing to be described later is executed.

[7-2. Possession ball subtraction processing]
The ball possession subtraction process will be described with reference to FIG. 65. The ball possession subtraction process is a process for subtracting the number of balls held by the player by firing the game balls B. In the ball subtraction process, first, in step S111, it is determined whether the shooting subtraction sensor 554 of the ball shooting unit 550 has changed from an ON state to an OFF state. When the game ball B is placed on the ball launch pad 552b of the ball launch unit 550, the launch subtraction sensor 554 detects the game ball B and is in an ON state. From this state, when the firing solenoid 553 is driven and the firing mallet 555 hits the game ball B on the ball launching pad 552b and the game ball B is fired, the firing subtraction sensor 554 is not detected and becomes OFF.

Then, in step S111, when the game ball B is fired and the firing subtraction sensor 554 is turned from ON to OFF, the process proceeds to the next step S112 with YES, the number of balls held is subtracted by one, and the process ends.

On the other hand, in step S111, if the firing subtraction sensor 554 does not turn from ON to OFF but remains ON, the answer is NO and the process ends without subtracting the number of balls held.

In this manner, when the game ball B is fired from the ball firing unit 550 by the ball holding subtraction process, one ball is subtracted from the number of balls held by the player.

[7-3. Possession ball addition process]
The ball possession addition process due to fouls will be explained with reference to FIG. 66. When the game ball B is fired from the ball firing unit 550, the number of balls held by the player is subtracted by the ball possession subtraction process, but the fired game ball B was not hit into the game area 5a of the game board 5. In this case, no game is played using the game ball B, so if the number of balls held continues to be subtracted, the player's interest will be reduced. Therefore, in the ball possession addition process, game balls B (foul balls) that were not hit into the game area 5a are added to the number of balls held by the player.

In the ball possession addition process, in step S121, it is determined whether the foul ball sensor 607 of the circulation ball path unit 600 has changed from OFF to ON by detecting the game ball B (foul ball), and the foul ball sensor 607 detects the game ball B (foul ball). If it is turned on, the answer is YES and the process proceeds to the next step S122, where the number of balls held is incremented by one and the process ends.

On the other hand, in step S121, if the foul ball sensor 607 is not turned on but remains off, the answer is NO and the process ends without adding up the number of balls held.

In this way, by the ball possession addition process, if the game ball B is not hit into the game area 5a of the game board 5 even though it is fired from the ball firing unit 550, a foul ball is added to the number of balls held. This allows the player to avoid being at a disadvantage.

[7-4. Launch control processing]
The launch control process will be explained with reference to FIGS. 67 and 68. In the firing control process, after the frame control firing permission signal is turned ON in the firing permission process and the player rotates the handle 160, it is determined whether or not to actually fire the game ball B by driving the firing solenoid 553. It is something to do. In the launch control process, first, in step S131, it is determined whether frame control launch is permitted (ON/OFF). If frame control launch is permitted (ON), YES is determined and the process proceeds to step S132, where a launch permission signal is sent. Turn on and end the process. On the other hand, in step S131, if there is no frame control firing permission (OFF), the process proceeds to step S133, where the firing permission signal is turned OFF and the process ends.

Then, when the firing permission signal is turned ON, when firing the game ball B by the firing solenoid 553, as shown in FIG. , moves the ball receiving portion 705a of the ball feeding movable member 705 upward to receive the game ball B detected by the near-launch sensor 704. This first time t1 is set to a time sufficient for receiving the game ball B at the ball receiving portion 705a of the ball feeding movable member 705.

When a second time t2 (for example, 90 ms) shorter than the first time t1 has elapsed since the ball feed solenoid 706 was turned on, the firing solenoid 553 is turned on for a third time t3 (for example, 23 ms). The game ball B on the ball launch pad 552b is launched. Then, when the third time t3 has elapsed, the firing solenoid 553 is turned off. Note that the first time t1 is longer than the sum of the second time t2 and the third time t3.

Then, after the first time t1 has elapsed, the ball feeding solenoid 706 is turned off, and the game ball B received by the ball receiving section 705a is supplied to the ball launching pad 552b. This completes the firing sequence.

In addition, when the game balls B are fired continuously, after the first time t1 has elapsed, and further when the fourth time t4 (for example, 450.5 ms) has elapsed, the ball feeding solenoid 706 is activated again at the first time t1. It turns ON for a while and repeats the same operation as above.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, at the first time when the pachinko machine 1 is installed, the game ball B is not placed on the ball launch platform 552b, so in step S132 of the launch control process, "launch subtraction" is performed. "Sensor ON?" becomes NO, and in the subsequent step S136, the ball feeding solenoid 706 is turned on, and the game ball B is supplied to the ball launching pad 552b. After that, since the game ball B is always placed on the ball launch pad 552b, the game ball B can be launched at any time.

On the other hand, if the game ball B falls from the ball launch pad 552b due to a thump or vibration, the launch subtraction sensor 554 turns OFF, so it is assumed that the ball has been launched, and the number of balls held is subtracted by one through ball subtraction processing. However, since the fallen game ball B is collected by the foul unit 570 and detected by the foul ball sensor 607, the number of balls held is added by one through the ball addition process, and the number of balls held is returned to the number before falling. , the player will not be at a disadvantage.

Furthermore, when the game ball B fired from the ball launcher 552b returns to the ball launcher 552b, as described above, after the launch, the next game ball B is supplied by the ball feed solenoid 706 of the ball feeder unit 700. At the same time, since only one game ball B is placed on the ball launching pad 552b, either the returning game ball B or the next game ball B supplied from the ball feeding unit 700 is It falls and is collected by the foul unit 570. Therefore, in the same way as above, even if the number of balls you have is subtracted by firing, either the returned game ball B or the next game ball B becomes a foul ball and is added to the number of balls you have. The player can return to the number of balls he had before firing, and the player will not be at a disadvantage.

Note that if the number of balls held is "0" and the game ball B falls from the ball launcher 552b, the number of balls held cannot be subtracted in the ball possession subtraction process, so the fallen game ball B is considered to be fouled. The ball is considered to be a ball, and the number of balls in possession becomes "1" by the ball addition process. In such a case, a warning may be issued to have the game hall attendant resolve the discrepancy in the number of balls held.

In this embodiment, in the event of a shaking that causes the firing subtraction sensor 554 to turn off due to a thump or the like, the game ball B will definitely fall because the ball launching pad 552b is short. Therefore, even though the game ball B is placed on the ball launch pad 552b, the launch subtraction sensor 554 is turned OFF and there is no false detection in which the game ball B is deemed to have been launched.

By the way, it is conceivable that a power outage occurs (frame control board 740 and main control board 1310 receive a power outage signal) during the firing sequence as described above. For example, if a power failure occurs before the firing solenoid 553 is turned on (before excitation), the firing mallet 555 will not move, but depending on the timing of the operation of the ball feeding solenoid 706, the next game ball B may not be received by the ball receiving portion 705a. When the game ball B is released, the game ball B is supplied to the ball launcher 552b, is bounced by the game ball B placed earlier, and is collected by the foul unit 570. However, when receiving a power outage signal, the frame control board 740 and the like do not go to check each sensor, so they ignore the signal from the foul ball sensor 607. As a result, foul balls are not added to the number of balls held, so the accuracy of the number of balls held before the power outage is maintained.

In addition, if a power outage occurs while the firing solenoid 553 is being energized or has already been energized, the firing mallet 555 moves and the game ball B on the ball launching pad 552b is fired, but before the firing subtraction sensor 554 determines OFF ( Since the frame control board 740 stops checking the firing subtraction sensor 554 before the OFF threshold of 80 ms has elapsed, it is not considered that the firing has occurred. At the time when the firing solenoid 553 is energized, the game ball B is received by the ball receiving part 705a by the ball feeding solenoid 706, so after the game ball B is fired, the game ball B received by the ball receiving part 705a is The ball is supplied to the ball launcher 552b and becomes in a pre-launch state. On the other hand, even if the fired game ball B enters the winning hole of the game board 5, the main control board 1310 does not check the winning sensor, so the winning is invalidated and the number of balls held is added. Never. Therefore, even in this case, the accuracy of the number of balls held before the power outage is maintained.

[7-4a. Firing control processing and possession ball subtraction processing of second embodiment]
In the above embodiment, consistency in the number of balls held when the game balls B fall from the ball launch pad 552b is maintained by a hardware launch sequence, but as shown in FIG. 69, Consistency may be maintained by software. In this firing control process, first, in step S131, it is determined whether frame control firing is permitted (ON/OFF), and if frame control firing is permitted (ON), the determination is YES and the process proceeds to the next step S134. On the other hand, in step S131, if frame control firing is not permitted (OFF), the determination is NO and the process ends without driving the firing solenoid 553.

In step S134, it is determined whether or not the firing subtraction sensor 554 is ON, and if the firing subtraction sensor 554 is ON (game ball B is present on the ball launching platform 552b), YES is determined and the process proceeds to the next step S135, where the subtraction is performed. Determine whether the completion flag is ON. As shown in FIG. 69(b), when the number of balls in possession is subtracted by the ball possession subtraction process of the second embodiment, the subtraction completion flag is turned ON in step S113, and the subtraction is not performed. If so, the subtraction completion flag is turned OFF in step S114.

Therefore, in the normal pre-launch state, the game ball B is placed on the ball launcher 552b and the subtraction completion flag is OFF, so the determination in step S135 is NO, and the process advances to the next step S136 to launch the ball. The solenoid 553 is turned on, the game ball B is hit with a force corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 160, and the process is completed.

On the other hand, when the game ball B falls from the ball launching pad 552b due to a thump or the like, the number of balls held is subtracted by the ball subtraction process shown in FIG. 69(b), and the subtraction completion flag is turned ON. Therefore, YES is determined in step S135 of the launch control process, and the process proceeds to step S137.

In step S137, it is determined whether or not the firing front sensor 704 is ON, and if the firing front sensor 704 is not ON (game ball B is not detected), the determination is NO and the process proceeds to the next step S138. The error display indicating "out of shot balls" is turned ON, the process returns to step S137, and the process is repeated until the near-shot sensor 704 is turned ON. Note that the error display is displayed on the display screen of the effect display device, for example.

It should be noted that the error display may be displayed by providing a notification lamp and lighting it up, or by displaying an image on an effect display device. Alternatively, the error signal may be outputted to the hall computer (horcon) of the game hall via the game ball lending device 8, and a notification lamp provided on the game hall side may be turned on.

In this step S137, if the firing front sensor 704 detects the game ball B and is ON, the answer is YES and the process proceeds to the next step S139, where the ball feeding solenoid 706 is turned ON (energized) to move the ball feeding movable member 705. let As a result, the game ball B detected by the near-launch sensor 704 is delivered to the ball receiving portion 705a of the ball feeding movable member 705, and when the ball feeding solenoid 706 is turned off after a predetermined time, the ball B is transferred to the ball receiving portion 705a. The delivered game ball B is supplied to the ball launcher 552b. At this time, if there is a game ball B on the upstream side (ball lift upper exit passage 652) of the game ball B sent to the ball launch pad 552b by the ball sending movable member 705, the game ball B moves to the downstream side. Then, the firing front sensor 704 is turned on.

In step S139, if the ball feeding solenoid 706 is turned on, the process proceeds to the next step S140, where it is again determined whether or not the firing subtraction sensor 554 is ON. If the firing subtraction sensor 554 is not ON, the answer is NO and step S137 Return to , and repeat the above flow until the firing subtraction sensor 554 turns ON.

In step S140, if the firing subtraction sensor 554 is ON, the answer is YES and the process advances to the next step S141, where the "out of firing balls" error display is turned OFF, and the process advances to step S136 where the firing solenoid 553 is turned ON. Then, the game ball B is hit with a force corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 160, and the process ends.

In this way, by the firing control process, it is possible to fire the game ball B after confirming that the game ball B is placed on the ball firing platform 552b in the ball firing unit 550.

By the way, when the game ball B falls from the ball launching pad 552b, the number of balls held is subtracted by the ball holding subtraction process shown in FIG. Upon detection in step 607, ball possession addition processing is executed. As a result, the number of balls held is added up, so the number returns to the number of balls held before falling, and the player is not at a disadvantage.

In this way, the launch control process and the ball subtraction process of the second embodiment also make it possible to maintain consistency in the number of balls held when the game balls B fall from the ball launch pad 552b.

[7-5. Prize ball processing]
The prize ball processing will be explained with reference to FIG. 70 and the like. The prize ball processing is performed by receiving the game ball B into the winning holes such as the general winning hole 2001, the first starting hole 2003, the second starting hole 2004, the big winning hole 2005, etc. provided on the game board 5. A predetermined number of prize balls are awarded according to the winning opening, and the prize balls are added to the number of balls held by the player.

In the prize ball processing, when the game ball B is accepted into the prize opening on the game board 5, a signal (prize ball signal) output from the main control board 1310 is input to the frame control board 740, and the signal is input in step S141. Analyze the winning ball signal. The prize ball signal output from the main control board 1310 may be the number of prize balls or the type of winning hole in which the game ball B was accepted.

Then, when the prize ball signal is analyzed in step S141, in the subsequent step S142, the number of prize balls according to the analyzed prize ball signal is added to the number of balls held by the player, and the process ends.

In this manner, by the prize ball processing, the number of game balls B (number of prize balls) corresponding to the winning slot in which the game ball B has won on the game board 5 can be added to the number of waiting balls of the player.

[7-6. Lifting motor operation processing]
The lifting motor operation process will be explained with reference to FIGS. 71 to 74 and the like. In the lifting motor operation process, when the number of game balls B in the ball lifting upper exit passage 652 decreases due to the game balls B being fired by the ball firing unit 550, the lifting motor operation process lifts the game balls B in the ball lifting upper entrance passage 651. The ball is lifted up by the rotation of the lifting spiral shaft 661 of the upper unit 650 and supplied to the ball lifting outlet passage 652.

The lifting motor operation process first clears retry counter 1 in step S201, and proceeds to the next step S202. In step S202, it is determined whether or not the lifting motor index sensor 666 for detecting the lifting motor index 665 attached to the lower end of the lifting spiral shaft 661 in the ball lifting mechanism 660 of the ball lifting unit 650 is ON. to decide.

The lifting motor index 665 has a detection part 665a that is partially cut out in the circumferential direction of a disc-shaped (flange-shaped), and lifts by rotation of the lifting spiral shaft 661. When the detecting section 665a of the motor index 665 is located at the position of the lifting motor index sensor 666, the lifting motor index sensor 666 is turned on, and the lifting motor index sensor 666 is turned off at the section other than the detecting section 665a.

In step S202, if the lifting motor index sensor 666 is ON, the answer is YES and the process proceeds to the next step S203, where it is determined whether the lifting exit sensor 654 has been ON for 80 ms or more. In this step S203, if it is determined that the lifting exit sensor 654 is not ON for 80 ms or more (the lifting exit sensor 654 is OFF), the determination is NO and the process proceeds to the next step S204.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S203 that the lifting exit sensor 654 is ON for 80 ms or more, return to step S203 as YES, and until the lifting exit sensor 654 is not ON for 80 ms or more (the lifting exit sensor 654 is OFF). ) is repeated until In other words, the process is repeated until the last part of the row of a plurality of game balls B in the ball lifting exit passage 652 decreases due to the firing of the game balls B and becomes downstream of the lifting exit sensor 654. When 654 is turned off, the process advances to step S204.

In step S204, it is determined whether or not the lifting entrance sensor 653 is ON for 80 ms or more, and if it is determined that the lifting entrance sensor 653 is not ON for 80 ms or more (the lifting entrance sensor 653 is OFF), NO is determined and the step Proceeding to S205, an error display indicating "out of lifting entrance balls" is turned on, and the process returns to step S204. Thereby, it is possible to notify that the ball is out of order in the ball lift upper entrance passage 651 and to encourage the ball to be resolved.

If it is determined in step S204 that the lifting entrance sensor 653 has been ON for 80ms or more, the answer is YES and the process proceeds to the next step S206, where the error display indicating "lifting entrance ball out" is turned OFF, and then the following steps are performed. In S207, after 1800 ms have elapsed, the lifting motor 664 is started to operate, and the lifting spiral shaft 661 is rotated. As a result, lifting of the game ball B in the ball lifting entrance passage 651 is started. The lifting spiral shaft 661 discharges one game ball B when it rotates once.

Here, in other words, regarding the start of operation of the lifting motor 664, as shown in FIG. ON (continuously ON), and the firing front sensor 704 is ON for 80 ms or more (continuously ON), and game balls B are continuously fired at predetermined time intervals (here, 600ms) by operating the handle 160. Then, when the lifting exit sensor 654 turns OFF, the lifting motor 664 starts operating after a period of ts (here, 1800 ms) has elapsed, and the lifting motor 664 starts operating from the upper end of the lifting spiral shaft 661 to the ball lifting exit passage 652 side. The discharge of game balls B (lifting device ball discharge) starts.

In this embodiment, when three game balls B are fired after the lift exit sensor 654 is turned OFF, the lift motor 664 is activated and the rotation of the lift spiral shaft 661 is started. Note that the time interval at which the game balls B are discharged by the rotation of the lifting spiral shaft 661 is set to be shorter than the time interval at which the game balls B are continuously discharged. Thereby, the supply of game balls B to the ball firing unit 550 will not be unable to catch up with the firing of the game balls B.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 73, the ball motor 688 provided in the ball lifting unit 650 is controlled independently of the operation of the lifting motor 664, and every time 1000 game balls B are fired, The polishing cloth 682 is operated to move by 0.17 mm.

As shown in FIG. 72, this lifting motor 664 does not operate and is stopped unless the lifting entrance sensor 653 is ON and the lifting exit sensor 654 is OFF.

Returning to the explanation of the lifting motor operation process, when the operation of the lifting motor 664 is started in step S207, the retry counter 2 is cleared in the following step S208, and the lifting motor index 665 (lifting motor index 665 is cleared in the following step S209) It is determined whether the index sensor 666) has been turned ON again within 600 ms after being turned OFF.

In step S209, if it is determined that the lifting motor index 665 has been turned ON again within 600ms after being turned off (the lifting spiral shaft 661 is rotating), YES is determined and the process proceeds to the next step S210, and the lifting motor index 665 is turned ON again within 600 ms after being turned OFF. It is determined whether the sensor 654 has been ON for 80 ms or more, and if it has not been ON, the determination is NO and the process returns to step S208, where the operation of the lifting motor 664 is continued.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S210 that the lifting exit sensor 654 has been ON for 80 ms or more, the process proceeds to the next step S211 as YES, and at the third detection position of the detection unit 665a of the lifting motor index 665. The lifting motor 664 is stopped, the process returns to step S201, and the lifting motor operation process is repeated.

In other words, as shown in FIGS. 73 and 74, after the lifting exit sensor 654 is turned ON (continuously ON), the lifting motor index sensor 666 is turned off by the rotation of the lifting motor index 665 (the detection unit 665a detects the lifting motor index sensor 666). ON), the lifting motor 664 stops. At this time, the lifting spiral shaft 661 that rotates integrally with the lifting motor index 665 discharges one game ball B per rotation to the ball lifting outlet passage 652 (lifting device ball discharge). , three game balls B will be discharged from when the lifting outlet sensor 654 is turned ON until when the lifting motor 664 stops. In other words, when the lifting exit sensor 654 is turned ON, the three game balls B are discharged to the ball lifting exit passage 652 side, and the lifting motor 664 is stopped. As a result, a sufficient number of game balls B are stored in the ball lift upper exit passage 652. In addition, in order to smoothly execute the hoisting motor origin return process to be described later, the inside of the ball hoisting exit passage 652 is not filled with game balls B, but a predetermined number of balls are left empty.

In this lifting motor operation process, if it is determined in step S202 that the lifting motor index 665 is not ON (lifting motor index sensor 666 is OFF), the process proceeds to the next step S212 as NO, and the retry counter 1 is It is determined whether or not it is less than 3.

In step S212, if the retry counter 1 is less than 3, the answer is YES and the lifting motor origin return process in the next step S213 is executed, and "1" is added to the retry counter 1 in step S214, and the process returns to step S202. Return to

In the lifting motor origin return process in step S213, when the lifting motor index sensor 666 is OFF, the lifting motor 664 is operated to rotate the lifting motor index 665 together with the lifting spiral shaft 661, and the lifting motor When the index sensor 666 is in the OFF state, the detection unit 665a reaches the ON state, and then the lifting motor 664 rotates twice and stops, and the lifting motor 664 (lifting motor index 665) returns to the origin. to return to.

Specifically, the lifting motor index 665 (lifting spiral shaft 661) is configured to rotate once when the lifting motor 664 rotates 32 times, depending on the gear ratio of the shaft gear 662 and the motor gear 663. Since the length in the circumferential direction of the detection part 665a of the lifting motor index 665 is set to a length that allows the lifting motor 664 to rotate four times, the lifting motor cannot be started until the lifting motor index sensor 666 is turned on. The position where the motor 664 rotates twice and stops is located at the center of the detection section 665a. That is, the center of the detection part 665a in the lifting motor index 665 is set as the origin of the lifting motor 664 (lifting spiral shaft 661, lifting motor index 665) (see FIG. 74).

When the hoisting motor origin return process is executed, the hoisting spiral shaft 661 rotates approximately once, so one game ball B is discharged to the ball hoisting outlet passage 652; Since a predetermined number of spaces are provided for accommodating the game balls B, the ejection of the game balls B from the lifting spiral shaft 661 is not hindered, and the lifting motor 664 can be returned to the origin.

If it is determined in the above step S212 that the retry counter 1 is not less than 3, the answer is NO and the process proceeds to step S215, where the error display indicating "lifting ball gummy error" is turned on and the operation is stopped in the following step S216. . This operation stop cancellation condition can be canceled by turning on a power switch 751 provided on a power supply board 750 in the main body frame 4.

On the other hand, in the above step S209, if it is determined that the lifting motor index 665 has not been turned ON again within 600ms after being turned OFF (the lifting spiral shaft 661 is not rotating), it is determined that the lifting motor index 665 has been turned ON and the process proceeds to Step S217. It is determined whether or not the retry counter 2 is less than 3, and if it is determined that the retry counter 2 is not less than 3, the process proceeds to step S215 with a NO response, and an error display indicating "lifting ball gummy error" is turned on. Then, the operation is stopped in the following step S216.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S217 that the retry counter 2 is less than 3, the answer is YES and the ball jamming release process in the next step S218 is executed, and in the subsequent step S219, "1" is added to the retry counter 2. Then, the process returns to step S209.

The ball jam release process in step S218 is performed by stopping the lifting motor 664 without monitoring ON/OFF of the lifting exit sensor 654, and then rotating the lifting motor 664 in the reverse direction for a predetermined period of time (for example, 100 ms). After the elapse of time, the lifting motor 664 is stopped, and the lifting motor 664 is operated (normally rotated) again.

In this way, when the number of game balls B in the ball lifting exit passage 652 decreases by firing the game balls B through the lifting motor operation process, the lifting spiral shaft 661 is rotated by the operation of the lifting motor 664. Thus, the game balls B in the ball lifting upper entrance passage 651 can be lifted from the lower end, and can be discharged from the upper end and supplied to the ball lifting upper outlet passage 652.

It should be noted that the operating time of the lifting motor 664 and the number of discharged game balls B described above are merely examples, and may be set to an appropriate time or number.

[7-7. Security processing]
Security processing will be explained with reference to FIG. 75 and the like. Security processing is for monitoring the presence or absence of fraudulent activity. In the security process, as shown in FIG. 75(a), a contradiction counter is cleared in step S301, and the number of balls recovered within a predetermined time in the circulation ball path unit 600 is calculated in the following step S302. The number of recovered pitches is calculated by the sum of the number of out pitches, the number of safe pitches, and the number of foul pitches.

After calculating the number of recovered balls in step S302, the process proceeds to the next step S303, in which it is determined whether the number of fired balls determined by the firing subtraction sensor 554 and the number of recovered balls are the same, and if it is determined that they are the same, If YES, the process returns to step S302. On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of fired balls and the number of recovered balls are not the same, the answer is NO and the process proceeds to the next step S304, where "1" is added to the contradiction counter and the process proceeds to the subsequent step S305.

In step S305, it is determined whether or not the contradiction counter is larger than n (for example, 50). If it is determined that it is smaller than n, the answer is NO and the process returns to step S302. On the other hand, if it is determined that the contradiction counter is larger than n, the answer is YES and the process proceeds to the next step S306. After turning on the error display indicating that fraudulent activity is occurring, the game stop processing is performed in the subsequent step S307. Execute and end the process.

The error display in step S306 can be canceled by turning on the power switch 751 provided on the power supply board 750 in the main body frame 4.

Furthermore, the game stop processing in step S307 includes stopping the ball firing unit 550 from ejecting the game ball B, stopping the ball lifting unit 650 from lifting the game ball B (circulation stop), and stopping the game from being played on the main control board 1310 side. There are suspensions, etc.

The security process may be a process as shown in FIG. 75(b). In this security process, first, in step S311, a contradiction counter is cleared, and in subsequent step S312, it is determined whether the number of fired balls detected by the firing subtraction sensor 554 is equal to or greater than the number of foul balls determined by the foul ball sensor 607.

If it is determined in step S312 that the number of fired balls is greater than or equal to the number of foul balls, the determination is YES and the process returns to step S312. On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of fired balls is not equal to or greater than the number of foul balls, the process proceeds to the next step S313 with a NO, where "1" is added to the contradiction counter and the process proceeds to the subsequent step S314.

In step S314, it is determined whether or not the contradiction counter is larger than n (for example, 50). If it is determined that it is smaller than n, the answer is NO and the process returns to step S312. On the other hand, if it is determined that the contradiction counter is larger than n, the answer is YES and the process proceeds to the next step S315. After turning on the error display indicating that fraudulent activity is occurring, the game stop processing is performed in the subsequent step S316. Execute and end the process.

The error display in step S315 can be canceled by turning on the power switch 751 provided on the power supply board 750 in the main body frame 4.

Furthermore, the game stop processing in step S316 includes stopping the ball firing unit 550 from ejecting the game ball B, stopping the ball lifting unit 650 from lifting the game ball B (circulation stop), and stopping the game from being played on the main control board 1310 side. There are suspensions, etc.

In this way, it is possible to determine whether or not there is any fraudulent activity based on the number of fired balls, the number of game balls B ejected from the game board 5 (number of collected balls), the number of foul balls, and the like.

[7-8. Encapsulated ball amount detection processing]
The enclosed ball amount detection process will be explained with reference to FIG. 76 and the like. The enclosed ball amount detection process detects whether the amount of enclosed game balls B (number of balls) is an appropriate amount. In the enclosed ball amount detection process, it is determined whether or not the game balls B are in an appropriate amount by a combination of ON/OFF of the circulating ball shortage sensor 621 and ON/OFF of the circulating ball excess sensor 622. The circulating ball shortage sensor 621 and the circulating ball excess sensor 622 are turned ON when the detection of the game ball B continues for a predetermined period of time (for example, 80 ms) or more.

Specifically, in the ball storage passage 604 of the circulating ball path unit 600, which is on the upstream side of the ball lifting upper entrance passage 651 of the ball lifting unit 650, the rearmost part of the game balls B lined up in a row has an insufficient number of circulating balls. When located between the sensor 621 and the circulating bulb excess sensor 622, the circulating bulb deficiency sensor 621 is turned on and the circulating bulb excess sensor 622 is turned off. In such a combination, it is determined that the amount of game balls B is appropriate, and no related errors are reported.

On the other hand, if the rear end of the game balls B lined up in a row in the ball storage passage 604 is located downstream of the circulating ball shortage sensor 621, the circulating ball shortage sensor 621 is OFF and the circulating ball excess sensor 622 is turned off. It becomes OFF. In the case of such a combination, it is determined that the amount of game balls B is too small, and an error is notified to the effect that there are "too few game balls."

In addition, if the rear end of the game balls B lined up in a line in the ball storage passage 604 is located beyond the circulating ball shortage sensor 621 and the circulating ball excess sensor 622 and upstream of the circulating ball excess sensor 622, The circulating bulb shortage sensor 621 is turned on and the circulating bulb excess sensor 622 is turned on. In the case of such a combination, it is determined that the amount of game balls B is excessive, and an error is notified to the effect that there are "too many game balls."

By the way, depending on the environment (gaming hall) in which the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment is installed, it may be installed together with a pachinko machine that uses conventional iron balls SB as game balls. When game balls B are replenished or replaced due to maintenance or the like, there is a risk that iron balls SB may be mixed in. If iron balls SB are mixed into this pachinko machine 1, since a strong magnet 616 is provided in the ball removal shutter 615 of the ball storage passage 604 in the circulation path R, the iron balls SB mixed in will be moved by the magnet 616. It becomes magnetically attached and stops on the ball removal shutter 615.

When the ball firing unit 550 continues to fire the game balls B with the iron ball SB magnetically attached to the ball ejection shutter 615, the game balls B on the downstream side of the ball ejection shutter 615 in the ball storage passage 604 will be ejected. It is lifted up by the upper unit 650 and decreases, and eventually the circulating ball shortage sensor 621 turns OFF. On the other hand, the game balls B fired from the ball firing unit 550 are collected by the out ball socket 600a, the safe ball socket 600b, the foul unit 570, etc. of the circulation ball path unit 600, and are supplied to the upstream side of the ball storage passage 604. The balls accumulate on the upstream side of the ball removal shutter 615 (iron balls SB), and the circulating ball excess sensor 622 eventually turns on. In this way, in the case of a combination in which the circulating ball shortage sensor 621 is OFF and the circulating ball excess sensor 622 is ON, it is determined that the iron ball SB is magnetically attached to the ball removal shutter 615, and "iron ball mixed in" is detected. ” An error will be notified.

In addition, if ball clogging occurs between the circulation ball shortage sensor 621 and the circulation ball excess sensor 622 due to ball jamming, the same combination as above will occur, so an error indicating "iron balls mixed" will occur. be notified.

Further, the error may be notified by providing a notification lamp and lighting it up, or by displaying an image on the effect display device. Alternatively, the error signal may be outputted to the hall computer (horcon) of the game hall via the game ball lending device 8 to light up a notification lamp provided on the game hall side.

In this way, by the enclosed ball amount detection process, it is possible to appropriately manage the amount of enclosed game balls B, and it is also possible to detect the inclusion of iron balls SB.

[7-9. Ball removal process]
The ball removal process will be explained. The ball extraction process is executed when the ball extraction port 613p is opened by the ball extraction shutter 615 in the circulation ball path unit 600 and the game ball B is extracted into the ball receiving tray 720. The ball extraction process is performed by opening the door frame 3 relative to the main body frame 4, turning off the door opening switch 507, pulling the ball extraction shutter 615 toward you to open the ball extraction port 613p, and opening the ball extraction port 613p provided on the frame control board 740. This is executed by turning on the ball removal switch 742.

[7-9. Ball removal process]
The ball removal process will be explained. The ball extraction process is executed when the ball extraction port 613p is opened by the ball extraction shutter 615 in the circulation ball path unit 600 and the game ball B is extracted into the ball receiving tray 720. The ball extraction process is performed by opening the door frame 3 relative to the main body frame 4, turning off the door release switch 507, pulling the ball extraction shutter 615 toward you to open the ball extraction port 613p, and opening the ball extraction port 613p provided on the frame control board 740. This is executed by turning on the power with the bulb removal switch 742 turned on (by turning on the bulb removal switch 742 when the power is turned on).

In the ball extraction process, ON/OFF of the lifting inlet sensor 653 is disabled, the firing solenoid 553 in the ball firing unit 550 is repeatedly turned ON/OFF at predetermined time intervals, and the lifting motor 664 remains in operation. Become.

At this time, even if the game ball B is fired by turning on the firing solenoid 553, the foul shutter 571 is in the closed position because the door frame 3 is open, and the ball is not released from the foul unit 570 to the outside. The ball is sent to the circulating ball path unit 600 as a foul ball without being launched. During the ball extraction process, although the firing of game balls B is not stopped, the game is stopped and, for example, even if there is a starting prize, no game balls will be paid out, and the lottery or fluctuation regarding special symbols will not be paid out. The game is in a state where normal games cannot be played, such as no display. Further, during the ball extraction process, a special notification is made using the effect display device 1600, lamps, speakers, etc. In addition, if the bulb removal switch 742 is turned on when the power is turned on, RAM clear that initializes the RAM built in the main control board 1310 is not executed, and game-related information such as the gaming status when the power is turned off is not executed. maintain.

In this way, the enclosed game ball B can be removed by the ball removal process. In addition, when inserting the game ball B, insert it from the out port 1008 of the game board 5, or from the out ball socket 600a or safe ball socket 600b that opens upward after removing the game board 5 from the main body frame 4. It is possible to add (replenish).

[7-10. others]
Although the above embodiment has been described on the assumption that a stainless steel ball made of stainless steel is used as the game ball B used in the pachinko machine 1, the invention is not limited to this, and as in the past, An iron ball SB may be used as the game ball B. In addition, when using an iron ball as the game ball B, the magnet 616 in the circulation ball path unit 600 is abolished to allow the game ball B (iron ball SB) to flow through the ball storage passage 604, and the main body frame 4 and Passage sensors (ball sensors) for game balls B exclusively for stainless steel balls provided on both sides of the game board 5 are replaced with sensors capable of detecting iron balls SB. These changes make the pachinko machine 1 operable. Note that the optical ball sensor can be used as is without being replaced.

By the way, when iron ball SB is used as game ball B, fraud using magnet M becomes possible (so-called magnet goto), so fraud detection using a conventional magnetic sensor (magnetic sensor 1030) is required on the game board 5 side. Is required.

Below, the arrangement of magnetic sensors on a general game board will be explained with reference to FIG. 77 and the like. 77(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the orientation of a magnetic sensor that can detect lines of magnetic force from a magnet, (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the orientation of a magnetic sensor that cannot detect lines of magnetic force from a magnet, and (c) ) is an explanatory diagram schematically showing the detection range by the magnetic sensor on the game board in a perspective view, and (d) is an explanatory diagram showing the positional relationship between the magnetic sensor and the magnetic body in which lines of magnetic force from the magnet cannot be detected. (e) is an explanatory diagram showing the positional relationship between a magnetic sensor and a magnetic body that can detect lines of magnetic force from the magnet, and (f) is an explanatory diagram showing the magnetic sensor and the holding part separately. . Note that the arrangement example of the magnetic sensor described in FIG. 77 and the like can be adopted in the game board of each embodiment in this specification.

Generally, a plurality of magnetic sensors 1030 are provided in the pachinko machine 1, and are used to detect illegal magnetism (lines of magnetic force). As shown in FIG. 77(f), the magnetic sensor 1030 includes a sensor body 1031 for detecting magnetism, a sensor substrate 1032 whose surface is white on which the sensor body 1031 is mounted, and the sensor substrate 1032 and the sensor body 1031. A transparent sensor case 1033 covering the sensor case 1033 is provided. Although not shown, in addition to the sensor body 1031, the sensor board 1032 includes ICs, transistors, resistors, diodes, connectors, and the like. In this embodiment, the sensor main body 1031 uses a magnetic sensor using a GMR element.

The magnetic sensor 1030 is rectangular in plan view, and is formed in the shape of a rectangular parallelepiped with a height lower than the length of the short side of the rectangle, and one of the sides in the height direction is chamfered. In this magnetic sensor 1030, an internal sensor main body 1031 and a sensor substrate 1032 can be visually recognized from the outside through a transparent sensor case 1033.

The magnetic sensor 1030 is capable of detecting the passage of lines of magnetic force parallel to the longest long side of the rectangular parallelepiped. Therefore, when the orientation of the magnetic sensor 1030 and the positional relationship with the magnet M are as shown in FIG. can be detected.

On the other hand, when the orientation of the magnetic sensor 1030 and the positional relationship with the magnet M are as shown in FIG. Since the magnet M passes in the perpendicular direction), the magnetism (magnetic field lines) of the magnet M cannot be detected.

For this reason, this magnetic sensor 1030 has magnetic detection areas of the magnet M on one side and the other side in the long side direction centering on the magnetic sensor 1030, as shown by hatching in FIG. 77(c). Has DA. In other words, the magnetic sensor 1030 has a gourd-shaped detection area DA that is a combination of two spheres with a diameter of about 10 cm. Note that FIG. 77(c) is a diagram assuming that a magnetic sensor 1030 is placed near the first starting port 2003 of the game board 5 as a countermeasure against fraud.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77(d), when the magnetic body M1 is placed in parallel with the magnetic sensor 1030 that can detect the lines of magnetic force from the magnet M, the lines of magnetic force are attracted to the magnetic body M1, so that The lines of magnetic force passing through the magnetic sensor 1030 may decrease, and the magnetic sensor 1030 may no longer be able to detect the lines of magnetic force (magnetism) from the magnet M.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 77(e), when a magnetic body M2 is placed in series with a magnetic sensor 1030 that can detect magnetic lines of force from the magnet M, the lines of magnetic force are attracted by the magnetic body M2. The number of magnetic field lines passing through sensor 1030 can be increased. Thereby, the magnetism of a distant magnet M or a magnet M with weak magnetic force can be detected.

By the way, in conventional pachinko machines, the magnetic sensor is attached to the game board using screws made of magnetic material, so depending on the positional relationship between the magnetic sensor and the screw, magnetic lines of force from the magnet M may be used to commit fraudulent acts. However, there is a problem in that the number of lines of magnetic force passing through the magnetic sensor decreases due to being attracted to the screw with high magnetic permeability, making it impossible to detect the approach of the magnet M. In contrast, in this embodiment, the magnetic sensor 1030 is attached without using screws.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 77(f), the magnetic sensor 1030 is connected to the game machine (main body frame 4, game board 5 ) is attached to the frame. The holding portion 1035 is integrally formed with a member not shown. The holding portion 1035 includes a housing portion 1036 that can accommodate the magnetic sensor 1030 from one side, and an elastic claw 1037 that is engaged with the magnetic sensor 1030 housed in the housing portion 1036. Further, the holding portion 1035 has a protrusion 1038 that projects from the leg portion of the elastic claw 1037 into the housing portion. This holding portion 1035 is made of transparent synthetic resin.

In the holding part 1035 that holds the magnetic sensor 1030, when the magnetic sensor 1030 is inserted into the housing part from the outside, the elastic claws 1037 are elastically deformed in the direction away from the housing part 1036, and the magnetic sensor 1030 is housed in the housing part 1036. Then, the elastic claw 1037 returns and is locked to the end of the magnetic sensor 1030. At this time, the protrusion 1038 provided on the leg of the elastic claw 1037 is in contact with the magnetic sensor 1030, and the magnetic sensor 1030 is pressed against the inner surface of the housing part 1036 on the opposite side of the elastic claw 1037. There is.

By locking the elastic claws 1037, it is possible to prevent the magnetic sensor 1030 from moving in the direction of coming out of the housing portion 1036, and it is possible to prevent the magnetic sensor 1030 from falling off. Further, since the magnetic sensor 1030 is pressed into the housing part 1036 by the contact of the protrusion 1038, it is possible to prevent the magnetic sensor 1030 from wobbling within the housing part 10361.

In this way, since the holding part 1035 is made of a non-magnetic material, it is possible to avoid that the holding part 1035 attracts the lines of magnetic force from the magnet M when the magnet M is brought close to the gaming area 5a. It is possible to prevent the lines of magnetic force passing through the magnetic sensor 1030 from decreasing. Therefore, it is possible to easily detect the magnetism acting on the gaming area 5a, and fraud using the magnet M can be detected at an early stage. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can deter illegal acts and has a high deterrent effect against fraudulent acts.

In addition, the holding part 1035 made of a non-magnetic material can avoid attracting the magnetic lines of force from the magnet M and prevent the number of magnetic lines of force passing through the magnetic sensor 1030 from decreasing. The magnetic sensor 1030 makes it possible to effectively detect the magnetism acting on the gaming area 5a, and the number of magnetic sensors 1030 can be reduced compared to the past, thereby suppressing an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1. can.

Furthermore, by elastically deforming the elastic claws 1037 of the holding part 1035, the magnetic sensor 1030 can be easily attached to and removed from the holding part 1035. The magnetic sensor 1030 can be attached using the elastic claw 1037 without using screws, and the effort required to assemble the pachinko machine 1 can be made easier, thereby reducing the increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1. It can be suppressed.

Furthermore, since the magnetic sensor 1030 is urged (pressed) against the housing part 1036 by the protrusion 1038 of the holding part 1035, fine vibrations of the magnetic sensor 1030 due to the urging by the protrusion 1038 can be suppressed. It is possible to reduce disconnection of the connector connected to the magnetic sensor 1030 or occurrence of poor contact due to the vibration, and the magnetic sensor 1030 can be operated reliably.

By the way, in the case of a pachinko machine 1 that has a circulation route R in the main body frame 4 (gaming machine frame), if iron balls SB are used as game balls B, a fraudulent act (so-called magnet goto) may occur within the circulation route R due to the magnet M. This makes it possible to prevent unauthorized magnetism within the circulation path R (especially around the firing subtraction sensor 554, foul ball sensor 607, firing front sensor 704, etc. that are involved in adding/subtracting the number of balls held by the player). It is desirable to provide a magnetic sensor (magnetic sensor 1030) for detection. In this embodiment, the areas near the firing subtraction sensor 554 of the ball firing unit 550 are particularly susceptible to fraud, and specifically the game ball B on the ball firing platform 552b (launching rail) and the foul unit 570 This is the path from the ball to the foul ball sensor 607. Details of an embodiment regarding the arrangement of a magnetic sensor capable of detecting unauthorized magnetism within the circulation route R will be described later.

[8. Overall configuration of game board]
The overall configuration of the game board 5 in the pachinko machine 1 will be explained in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 78 to 84. FIG. 78 is a front view of the game board showing the transparent center accessory etc. as opaque. 79 is a perspective view of the game board in FIG. 78 as seen from the front right, FIG. 80 is a perspective view of the game board in FIG. 78 as seen from the front left, and FIG. 81 is a perspective view of the game board in FIG. 78 as seen from the back. It is a diagram. FIG. 82 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into its main components and viewed from the front, and FIG. 83 is an exploded perspective view of the game board exploded into its main components and viewed from the back. FIG. 84 is a front view of the game board showing the inside of the game area where the game balls circulate by cutting the front unit parallel to the surface of the game panel.

The game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 has a game area 5a into which a game ball B is driven by a player operating a handle 160. The gaming area 5a includes a general prize opening 2001, a regular prize opening 2002, and a first start, which grant a predetermined benefit to the player (for example, adding a predetermined number of balls to the player) by accepting or passing the game ball B. It is provided with an opening 2003, a second starting opening 2004, a big winning opening 2005, an accessory winning opening 2006, and a second V winning opening 2008. In this game board 5, the game balls B are placed in the general winning hole 2001, the normal winning hole 2002, the first starting hole 2003, the second starting hole 2004, the big winning hole 2005, the accessory winning hole 2006, etc. in the gaming area 5a. This is for playing a game in which the driving operation of the handle 160 and the distribution of the game balls B within the game area 5a are enjoyed so as to be accepted.

The game board 5 includes a front component 1000 that defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a generally rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 to define the rear end of the game area 5a. A plate-shaped game panel 1100, a plurality of magnetic sensors 1030 (see FIG. 93) that detect magnetism acting illegally within the game area 5a, and vibrations that detect vibrations acting on the game board 5 (pachinko machine 1). A sensor 1040 (see FIG. 93, etc.). A plurality of obstacle nails that come into contact with the game ball B are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a portion of the front surface of the game panel 1100 that is within the game area 5a.

The game board 5 also includes a board holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100, and a game board 1200 attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200, which is played by driving a game ball B into the game area 5a. A main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 93, etc.) for controlling the contents is provided.

The game board 5 also includes a function display unit 1400 that displays the game status based on control signals from the main control board 1310 and is attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 so as to be visible to the player, and a game panel. A peripheral control unit 1500 placed on the rear side of the game panel 1100, an effect display device 1600 placed at the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and a performance display device 1600 placed on the rear side of the game panel 1100. A panel relay board (not shown) that relays the connection between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, a table unit 2000 that is attached to the front of the gaming panel 1100, and a panel relay board that is attached to the rear of the gaming panel 1100. The apparatus further includes a back unit 3000 that can be used.

A production display device 1600 is provided on the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and a peripheral control unit 1500 is provided on the rear surface of the production display device 1600.

The table unit 2000 has a plurality of (three in this case) general prize openings 2001 which are always open and capable of accepting game balls B hit into the game area 5a, and which are provided at predetermined positions within the game area 5a. A normal prize opening 2002 is provided at the center of the horizontal direction below the center accessory 2500 and is always open to receive the game ball B. A first starting port 2003, a second starting port 2004 that allows receiving the game ball B according to the lottery result of the normal symbol drawn when the game ball B is accepted into the normal winning port 2002, and a first starting port. Game balls B can be accepted according to the lottery results of the first special symbol drawn by receiving the game ball B into the second starting port 2003 and the second special symbol drawn by receiving the game ball B into the second starting port 2004. It is equipped with a big winning hole 2005 or a prize winning hole 2006, and a first V winning hole 2007 and a second V winning hole 2008 that can accept the game ball B received in the prize winning hole 2006. . Furthermore, the game board 5 includes a plurality of magnetic sensors 1030 (see FIG. 93) that detect magnetic fields acting illegally within the game area 5a.

Further, the table unit 2000 is provided at the most downstream position in the gaming area 5a, and is always open to accept the gaming balls B, and discharges the accepted gaming balls B outside the gaming area 5a without returning them. The out port 2020 is provided upstream of the out port 2020 in the gaming area 5a, and is always open to accept the game ball B, and allows the received game ball B to be sent out of the gaming area 5a without being returned. Two sub-out ports 2021 for discharging the air are provided. Two out ports 2020 are provided on the left and right sides with the first starting port 2003 in between. Further, the two sub-out ports 2021 are provided at a portion to the left of the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction, and a portion to the right of the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction.

Further, the table unit 2000 includes a starting port unit 2100 that is installed directly above the lower end of the gaming area 5a at the center in the left-right direction within the gaming area 5a and has a first starting port 2003 and an out port 2020, and a starting port A side unit 2200 that is provided along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the unit 2100 when viewed from the front and has three general winning openings 2001 and one sub-out opening 2021; an attacker unit that has a side upper left unit 2300 provided slightly above the starting port unit 2100, a second starting port 2004, a big winning port 2005, and one sub-out port 2021 that is provided to the right of the starting port unit 2100. 2400, and a frame-shaped center accessory which is provided slightly above the approximate center in the front view in the game area 5a and has an accessory prize opening 2006, a first V prize opening 2007, and a second V prize opening 2008. 2500, and a normal winning opening unit 2600 which is provided above the right end of the attacker unit 2400 and has a normal winning opening 2002.

The center accessory 2500 includes a frame-shaped main body unit 2510 that has an accessory winning opening 2006 and a first V winning opening 2007, and a second V winning opening 2008 that is provided at the lower part of the frame of the main unit 2510. A lottery accessory 2550 having a.

The back unit 3000 includes a plurality of magnetic sensors 1030 that detect magnetism acting illegally within the gaming area 5a, a vibration sensor 1040 that detects vibration acting on the gaming board 5 (pachinko machine 1), and a panel in the gaming panel 1100. A back box 3010 is attached to the rear surface of the holder 1120 and has a box-like shape with an open front and a square opening 3010a on the back wall, and a production display device 1600 is detachably attached to the back wall of the back box 3010. and a back board unit 3040 that is placed behind the effect display device 1600 and attached to the back wall of the back box 3010.

In addition, the back unit 3000 includes a back ball guiding unit 3100 which is provided at the lower part near the front end inside the back box 3010 and through which the game balls B guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 circulate, and a back ball guide unit 3100 in which the game balls B guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 circulate; A back decoration unit 3200 provided after the guidance unit 3100, a back front presentation unit 3300 provided in the back box 3010 to the left and above of the back ball guidance unit 3100 near the front end, and A back and rear performance unit 3400 provided behind a back and front performance unit 3300 are provided.

[8-1. Front component]
The front component 1000 of the game board 5 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 82 and 83. The front component 1000 is entirely transparent. The front component 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, and has a substantially circular inner shape that penetrates in the front-rear direction, and the inner periphery of the inner shape defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a. The front component 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 that extends in an arc shape along the clockwise circumferential direction from a lower end on the left side from the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, passes the upper end of the center in the left-right direction as seen from the front, and extends to the diagonally upper right corner; The inner rail 1002 is arranged inside the front component 1000 along the outer rail 1001 and extends in an arc shape from the lower center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front to the diagonally upper left when viewed from the front, and the right side of the lower end of the inner rail 1002 when viewed from the front. An out guide portion 1003 is formed at the lowest position of the region 5a and slopes downwardly toward the rear.

The front component 1000 also includes a lower right rail 1004 that is sloped linearly from the right end of the out guide section 1003 in front view to near the right side of the front component 1000 so that the right end side is slightly higher; The right rail 1005 extends from the right end of the front component 1000 along the right side of the front component 1000 to the bottom of the upper end of the outer rail 1001 and has an upper part curved inward to the front component 1000, and the upper end of the right rail 1005 and the outer rail. A stopper part 1006 is connected to the upper end of the outer rail 1001, and the game ball B that has rolled along the outer rail 1001 comes into contact with the stopper part 1006.

The front component 1000 is rotatably supported by the upper end of the inner rail 1002, and extends upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close the space between the front component 1000 and the outer rail 1001. The backflow prevention member can be rotated only between an open position in which the space between the backflow prevention member and the outer rail 1001 is opened by rotating in the circumferential direction, and is biased by a spring (not shown) to return to the closed position. 1007.

Further, the front component 1000 includes an out port 1008 that penetrates back and forth at the rear end of the out guide portion 1003 at the lower center of the frame in the left and right direction when viewed from the front. This outlet 1008 is closed from the front by a starting port unit 2100.

In addition, the front component 1000 is located on the outside of the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in the vicinity of the lower end extending substantially perpendicularly, on the lower side of the out guide portion 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and on the outside of the right rail 1005. Each portion is provided with a security recess 1009 recessed from the front end to the rear. When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, this security recess 1009 protrudes rearward from the security cover (not shown) in the door frame 3. The protruding piece (not shown) is now inserted. As a result, the space between the security cover and the game board 5 (front component 1000) is in a complicatedly bent state due to the rear protrusion of the security cover and the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is attempted to enter the gaming area 5a from below the front surface between the security cover and the front component 1000, it will be blocked by the rear protrusion and the security recess 1009, and it will not be able to enter the gaming area 5a. It is possible to prevent unauthorized tools from entering.

Further, the front component 1000 includes a notch 1010 that is cut upward from the lower end at the lower left corner when viewed from the front. This notch 1010 matches the notch 1122 of the game panel 1100. When this notch 1010 is attached to the main frame of a pachinko machine of the type that pays out game balls to players, the cutout 1010 and the cutout 1122 are inserted into the lower normal payout passage of the lower full ball path unit and the lower part. The front end opening of the full tank dispensing passage faces forward to supply game balls to the upper tray and lower tray of the door frame.

Further, the front component 1000 includes a function display unit attachment part 1011 formed at the upper left corner when viewed from the front, to which the function display unit 1400 is attached, and a certificate stamp pasting part 1012 formed at the lower right corner. There is.

Further, the front component 1000 is formed substantially entirely transparent, so that the game panel 1100, back unit 3000, etc. arranged on the rear side can be viewed from the front.

[8-2. Game panel]
The game panel 1100 on the game board 5 will be explained in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 82 and 83. The game panel 1100 is attached to the rear surface of the front component 1000, and the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 are attached thereto. The game panel 1100 includes a flat panel plate 1110 whose outer circumference is slightly larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped front component 1000 and which is made of transparent synthetic resin, and which holds the outer circumference of the panel plate 1110. A frame-shaped panel holder 1120 is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface. A plurality of obstacle nails are planted on the front surface of the game panel 1100 in a predetermined gauge arrangement.

The panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100 is formed of a synthetic resin board such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, or methacrylic resin, or an inorganic board such as glass or metal. The thickness of this panel board 1110 is thinner than that of a wooden game panel, which is approximately 20 mm, and is sufficient to hold even if obstacle nails are planted in the front or the front unit 2000 is attached. The minimum possible thickness is approximately 10 mm. Note that in this embodiment, the panel board 1110 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin board.

The panel board 1110 is at its lowest position within the game area 5a, and a position corresponding to the outlet 1008 of the front component 1000 is recessed upward from the lower end. That is, in this embodiment, the outlet 1008 of the panel board 1110 is not formed in the shape of a hole but in the shape of a notch that is open downwardly in the panel board 1110. Note that the out port 1008 may be formed in the shape of a hole. In addition, a plurality of openings 1112 are formed in the panel board 1110, penetrating the front and back, and through which the front unit 2000 is attached. In this embodiment, the opening 1112 is formed in the shape of a hole, but it may be formed in the shape of a notch that is opened outward from the outer peripheral surface of the panel board 1110.

Although not shown, the panel board 1110 has a plurality of positioning holes formed in round holes and short elongated holes passing through the front and back, and the upper and lower edges thereof are spaced apart in the left-right direction. A plurality of engagement step portions formed with a thin plate thickness are provided. The positioning hole is for positioning the panel holder 1120 by inserting a protruding pin (not shown) of the panel holder 1120. The engagement stepped portion is configured to be removably attached to the panel holder 1120 by being engaged with an engagement claw (not shown) or an engagement piece (not shown) of the panel holder 1120. be.

In the panel board 1110, a large opening 1112 for attaching the center accessory 2500 is offset upward from the center when viewed from the front. As a result, the panel board 1110 has a frame shape, and when viewed from the front, the width perpendicular to the distribution direction of the game balls B (the circumferential direction of the frame shape) is the left side and the upper side of the center. The right side and lower side have a wide width that allows a plurality of game balls B to be lined up, and the upper side has a narrow width that does not allow a plurality of game balls B to line up.

The panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 is sized to include the panel board 1110, has a substantially rectangular outer shape, and is thicker than the panel board 1110 (in this embodiment, it is about 38 mm, the same thickness as the wooden game panel). It is formed. This is so that regardless of whether the game panel is made of wood or the game panel 1100 is made of transparent synthetic resin, it can be attached to the body frame 4 of the same pachinko machine 1 (gaming machine) to play the game.

This panel holder 1120 is made of transparent synthetic resin (for example, thermoplastic synthetic resin). This panel holder 1120 has a holding step (not shown) that is approximately the same size as the panel board 1110 and recessed from the front side to the rear side, and a holding step that is approximately the same size as the gaming area 5a. It is provided with a through hole 1121 penetrating in the front-rear direction.

Furthermore, the panel holder 1120 includes a notch 1122 that is cut upward from the lower end at the lower left corner when viewed from the front. This notch 1122 is formed to match the notch 1010 of the front component 1000. When this notch 1122 is attached to the main body frame of a pachinko machine of the type that pays out game balls to players, the cutout 1122 passes through the cutout 1010 and the cutout 1122 and connects to the lower normal payout passage of the lower full ball path unit. The front end opening of the full tank dispensing passage faces forward to supply game balls to the upper tray and lower tray of the door frame.

Further, the panel holder 1120 is formed with an out recess 1123 that extends upward from the lower end to a position corresponding to the out port 1008 and is recessed from the rear surface toward the front. The upper part of the out recess 1123 communicates with the out port 1008.

Although not shown, the panel holder 1120 also includes a plurality of protruding pins that protrude forward from the holding step and are respectively inserted into a plurality of positioning holes in the panel plate 1110, and a plurality of protruding pins arranged outside the holding step. The panel plate 1110 has three engagement claws that elastically engage with the engagement steps on the upper and lower left inclined parts of the panel plate 1110, and protrudes upward from the lower outer side of the holding step. A pair of engaging pieces that engage with two engaging step portions on the lower side, respectively. The panel holder 1120 is assembled by engaging the engagement step on the lower side of the panel plate 1110 with the engagement piece from diagonally above the front, and then moving the upper part of the panel plate 1110 rearward to tilt the upper and lower left sides. By elastically engaging the engagement step portion of the holding portion with the engagement pawl, the panel plate 1110 can be removably attached while being housed in the holding step portion. At this time, the protruding pin of the panel holder 1120 is inserted into the positioning hole of the panel plate 1110, and the panel plate 1110 is positioned at a predetermined position with respect to the panel holder 1120.

Since this game panel 1100 is formed transparent together with the front component 1000 attached to the front side, when assembled on the game board 5, it is possible to reduce the visibility of the boundary of the game area 5a, and the player It is possible to give a feeling of openness to the players, and it is possible to make the gaming area 5a appear larger (wider) to the player, although the actual size of the gaming area 5a does not change.

Furthermore, since the game panel 1100 is transparent together with the front component 1000, light from the performance display device 1600, front unit 2000, back unit 3000, etc. is reflected or refracted forward (towards the player). This makes it appear as if it is emitting light, and the overall decorativeness of the game board 5 can be further enhanced.

[8-3. Board holder]
The board holder 1200 in the game board 5 will be explained in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 82 and 83. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in the shape of a horizontally long box with an open top and front, and the bottom surface is inclined toward the center in the left-right direction. The substrate holder 1200 has a discharge portion 1201 cut out from the front end toward the rear at the center of the bottom surface in the left-right direction. When assembled to the game board 5, this board holder 1200 covers the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the back side of the game panel 1100 from below and from the rear side, and also covers the main control unit 1300 on the back side. A main control board box 1320 is attached.

When the board holder 1200 is assembled to the Pachinko machine 1, the ejection part 1201 is located directly above the out ball socket 600a and the safe ball socket 600b in the circulation ball path unit 600 of the main body frame 4. As a result, the game balls B discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 2020 and the sub-out port 2021 are discharged to the out ball socket 600a in the circulation ball path unit 600, and are received in the out ball socket 600a. As a result, the out ball passes through the out ball passage 601 and is detected (counted) one by one by the out ball sensor 605. On the other hand, the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 are accepted into winning openings such as the general winning opening 2001, the normal winning opening 2002, the first starting opening 2003, the second starting opening 2004, the big winning opening 2005, and the accessory winning opening 2006. The game balls B ejected downward from the circulation ball path unit 600 are ejected to the safe ball socket 600b, and are received by the safe ball socket 600b, circulate through the safe ball passage 602, and are collected by the safe ball sensor 606. detected (counted) one by one.

[8-4. Main control board unit]
The main control unit 1300 in the game board 5 will be explained mainly with reference to FIGS. 81 to 83 and the like. Main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of substrate holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 includes a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 93) that controls game content and the provision of benefits to players, etc., and a main control board that accommodates the main control board 1310 and is attached to the board holder 1200. box 1320.

The main control board box 1320 includes a board base 1330 that is attached to the board holder 1200 and has the main control board 1310 attached to the rear surface, and a board cover 1340 that is attached to the board base 1330 so as to cover the main control board 1310 from the rear. , is composed of. The substrate base 1330 and the substrate cover 1340 are made of transparent polycarbonate. The main control board 1310 is accommodated in an internal space formed by the board base 1330 and the board cover 1340. Since the board base 1330 and the board cover 1340 are made of transparent polycarbonate, it is possible to check the state of the front and back sides of the main control board 1310 (whether or not there has been unauthorized modification, or whether an unauthorized IC has been mounted). from the outside of the main control board box 1320.

Furthermore, the main control board box 1320 includes a plurality of sealing mechanisms 1350 corresponding to the board base 1330 and the board cover 1340, respectively. When the main control board box 1320 is closed using one sealing mechanism 1350, Next, in order to open the main control board box 1320, it is necessary to destroy the sealing mechanism 1350, and traces of opening and closing of the main control board box 1320 can be left behind. Therefore, by looking at the traces of opening and closing, it is possible to discover unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, thereby increasing deterrence against unauthorized acts on the main control board 1310.

The main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 is connected to the interface board 760, the out-ball sensor 605, the peripheral control board 1510, and the like. In addition, the main control board 1310 includes a function display unit 1400, a general winning opening sensor 3001, a normal winning opening sensor 3002, a first starting opening sensor 2101, a second starting opening sensor 2401, a big winning opening sensor 2402, and an accessory winning opening sensor. 2501, first V winning opening sensor 2502, second V winning opening sensor 2503, losing opening sensor 2504, starting opening solenoid 2412, attacker solenoid 2414, accessory winning opening solenoid 2516, first distribution solenoid 2534, second distribution It is connected to a solenoid 2544, a lottery loop solenoid 2558, a striking piece drive motor 2561, a gutter swinging drive motor 2564, a swinging piece solenoid 2565, a magnetic sensor 1030, a vibration sensor 1040, and the like.

The main control board 1310 also has a base monitor consisting of four 7-segment LEDs (not shown). The base monitor is visible from the rear through the transparent board cover 1340. This base monitor is installed in the circulation ball path unit 600 of the main body frame 4 after the game balls B fired by the ball firing unit 550 are ejected downward from the game board 5 after being hit into the game area 5a. It displays the number of game balls B counted by being detected by the out ball sensor 605. The base monitor of this embodiment displays the number of balls counted by the out ball sensor 605 after firing 100 shots (the number of balls that returned to the game hall side) as a percentage.

[8-5. Function display unit]
The function display unit 1400 on the game board 5 will be explained in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 78 and the like. The function display unit 1400 is attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 outside the gaming area 5a. The function display unit 1400 can be visually recognized from the front (player side) through the game window 101 of the door frame 3 when assembled in the pachinko machine 1. This function display unit 1400 uses a plurality of LEDs based on control signals from the main control board 1310 to display the gaming status (gaming situation), lottery results for normal symbols, lottery results for special symbols, etc. .

Although detailed illustrations are omitted, the function display unit 1400 includes a status indicator consisting of three LEDs that displays the gaming status, and a lottery result of the normal symbol drawn by receiving the game ball B into the normal winning slot 2002. It is equipped with a normal symbol display device consisting of two LEDs for displaying, and a normal reservation display device consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of reservations related to the acceptance of game balls B into the normal winning hole 2002.

In addition, the function display unit 1400 includes a first special symbol display device consisting of eight LEDs that display the lottery result of the first special symbol drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first starting port 2003, and A first special reservation number indicator consisting of two LEDs that displays the number of reservations related to the acceptance of game balls B into the opening 2003, and a second special symbol drawn by lottery according to the reception of game balls B into the second starting opening 2004. a second special symbol display device consisting of eight LEDs that displays the lottery results; and a second special reservation number display device consisting of two LEDs that displays the number of reservations related to the acceptance of game balls B into the second starting port 2004. It is equipped with.

Furthermore, the function display unit 1400 has five buttons that display the number of repetitions (number of rounds) of the opening/closing pattern of the big prize opening 2005 when the lottery result of the first special symbol or the lottery result of the second special symbol is a “win” or the like. It is equipped with a round indicator consisting of LED.

In this function display unit 1400, the number of reservations, symbols, etc. can be displayed by appropriately turning on, turning off, blinking, etc. the provided LED.

[8-6. Peripheral control unit]
The peripheral control unit 1500 in the game board 5 will be explained mainly with reference to FIG. 81 and the like. The peripheral control unit 1500 is provided behind the effect display device 1600 provided on the rear side of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. To be more specific, the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of a liquid crystal spacer 1610 to which the effect display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 (see FIG. 93) that controls the effects presented to the player based on control signals from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board accommodating the peripheral control board 1510. box 1520. The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control section 1511 for controlling light emitting effects, sound effects, movable effects, etc., and an effect display control section 1512 for controlling effect images.

The peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 is connected to the main control board 1310, the effect operation unit 250, various decorative boards on the door frame 3 side, the effect display device 1600, etc. (see FIG. 93). Although the details will be described later, the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of the effect display device 1600.

[8-7. Performance display device]
The effect display device 1600 on the game board 5 will be explained mainly with reference to FIGS. 82, 83, and the like. The effect display device 1600 is arranged at the center of the gaming area 5a when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the gaming panel 1100 via the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. The effect display device 1600 is attached to the front surface of a liquid crystal spacer 1610 attached to the rear wall of the back box 3010. Since the liquid crystal spacer 1610 is removable from the back box 3010, the effect display device 1600 can be attached to and removed from the back box 3010 via the liquid crystal spacer 1610. The performance display device 1600 can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the transparent game panel 1100 and the frame of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 when the game board 5 is assembled.

The effect display device 1600 is a 15-inch full-color liquid crystal display device with a white LED as a backlight, and is attached to the front of the liquid crystal spacer 1610 in a horizontally long state. The effect display device 1600 is connected to the peripheral control board 1510 and can display predetermined still images and moving images.

The effect display device 1600 is offset (eccentrically) so that its center is located lower right than the center of the liquid crystal spacer 1610 so that spaces are formed above and to the left of the liquid crystal spacer 1610. installed.

The liquid crystal spacer 1610 has the same size as a 19-inch liquid crystal display device and is formed into a transparent flat plate shape. The liquid crystal spacer 1610 includes two upper fixing pieces 1611 that protrude upward from the upper end surface and one lower fixing piece 1612 that protrudes downward from the lower end surface. This liquid crystal spacer 1610 is attached to two fixing grooves 3010c opened on the upper inner peripheral surface of an opening 3010a of the back box 3010, which will be described later, with the liquid crystal screen of the production display device 1600 facing forward. After inserting the two upper fixing pieces 1611 from diagonally rearward, move the lower fixing piece 1612 side forward, inserting the lower fixing piece 1612 into the opening of the lock slider 3020, and lock slider 3020 when viewed from the rear. It is attached to the back box 3010 by sliding it to the left.

[8-8. Overall structure of table unit]
The table unit 2000 on the game board 5 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 82 and 83. The table unit 2000 is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front, with its front end protruding forward beyond the front of the game panel 1100, and a portion of its rear end protruding into the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100. There is.

The table unit 2000 has a plurality of (three in this case) general winning openings 2001 that are always open to accept game balls B shot into the game area 5a, and a plurality of general winning holes 2001 provided at predetermined positions within the game area 5a. A normal prize opening 2002 which is always open so as to be able to accept the game ball B, and a first starting opening 2003 which is provided at a predetermined position in the game area 5a and is always open so as to be able to receive the game ball B. , a second starting port 2004 that can accept the game ball B according to the lottery result of the normal symbol drawn when the game ball B is accepted into the normal winning port 2002, and a game ball to the first starting port 2003. A grand prize opening 2005 or a winning slot that makes it possible to accept the game ball B according to the first special symbol drawn by receiving the game ball B or the second special symbol drawn by the reception of the game ball B to the second starting port 2004. It is provided with a material winning hole 2006, and a first V winning hole 2007 and a second V winning hole 2008 in which the game ball B received in the accessory winning hole 2006 can be received.

Further, the table unit 2000 further includes an out port 2020 and a sub-out port 2021 for discharging the game ball B hit into the game area 5a to the outside of the game area 5a. The out port 2020 and the sub out port 2021 are always open so that the game ball B can be received. Further, the out port 2020 is provided at the downstream end of the gaming area 5a.

The table unit 2000 also includes a first starting port sensor 2101 that detects the game ball B received in the first starting port 2003, and a second starting port sensor 2101 that detects the game ball B received in the second starting port 2004. 2401, a big winning hole sensor 2402 that detects the game ball B accepted in the big winning hole 2005, a first V winning hole sensor 2502 that detects the game ball B accepted in the first V winning hole 2007, A second V winning hole sensor 2503 that detects the game ball B accepted in the second V winning hole 2008, a losing hole sensor 2504 that detects the game ball B accepted in the losing hole 2009, and a second V winning hole sensor 2504 that acts within the gaming area 5a. A magnetic sensor 1030 that detects illegal magnetism is provided.

A plurality of (three in this case) general prize winning holes 2001 are arranged on the left side with respect to the center in the left-right direction in the lower part of the gaming area 5a. The normal winning hole 2002 is located near the right end in the gaming area 5a when viewed from the front and below the center in the vertical direction. The first starting port 2003 is arranged between the two out ports 2020 at the center in the left-right direction within the gaming area 5a. The second starting opening 2004 is arranged below the normal winning opening 2002 near the right end in the gaming area 5a. The big prize opening 2005 is arranged to the right of the first starting opening 2003 in the gaming area 5a. The accessory winning hole 2006 is arranged above the normal winning hole 2002 near the right end in the gaming area 5a.

The out ports 2020 are arranged below both left and right sides of the first starting port 2003 at the downstream end of the gaming area 5a. One of the sub-out ports 2021 is arranged to the left of the three general winning ports 2001, and the remaining one is arranged below the second starting port 2004.

The front unit 2000 includes a starting port unit 2100 that is installed directly above the lower end of the gaming area 5a at the center in the left-right direction within the gaming area 5a and has a first starting port 2003 and an out port 2020; A side unit 2200 that is provided along the inner rail 1002 on the left side when viewed from the front and has three general winning openings 2001 and one sub-out opening 2021, and a slightly upper side on the left side of the side unit 2200 when viewed from the front. and a side upper left unit 2300 provided in the upper left side unit 2300.

The front unit 2000 also includes an attacker unit 2400, which is provided on the right side of the starting opening unit 2100 and has a second starting opening 2004, a big winning opening 2005, and one sub-out opening 2021, and an attacker unit 2400 in the gaming area 5a. A frame-shaped center accessory 2500 is provided slightly above the center in front view, and has an accessory prize opening 2006, a first V prize opening 2007, a second V prize opening 2008, and a loss opening 2009. and a normal winning a prize unit 2600 which is provided above the attacker unit 2400 and has a normal winning a prize mouth 2002.

[8-8a. Starting port unit]
Next, the starting port unit 2100 of the front unit 2000 will be explained with reference mainly to FIGS. 78 to 80, FIG. 84, and the like. The starting port unit 2100 of the table unit 2000 is located directly above the out port 1008 near the lower end of the center in the left-right direction in the gaming area 5a, and is attached to the gaming panel 1100 from the front. The starting port unit 2100 includes a first starting port 2003 that is always open upward with a width that can accept only one game ball B, and a first starting port 2003 that is always open upward so as to accept only one game ball B, and a first starting port 2003 that is always open so as to be able to receive the game ball B. It has two outlet ports 2020 for discharging B to the outside of the game area 5a without returning it. Further, the starting port unit 2100 includes a first starting port sensor 2101 that detects the game ball B received in the first starting port 2003 (see FIG. 93).

Out port 2020 is provided at a lower position than first starting port 2003. The two out ports 2020 of the starting port unit 2100 are provided at symmetrical positions with the first starting port 2003 in between. The first starting port 2003 opens upward with a width that allows one game ball B to pass through. The out port 2020 opens upward with a width of two game balls B, and is provided at the lowest position within the game area 5a.

The starting port unit 2100 is provided so that the difference in height between the first starting port 2003 and the out port 2020 is smaller (lower) than the difference in height between the first starting port and the out port (out port 1008) in a conventional pachinko machine. ing. Thereby, it is possible to give the player the illusion that the first starting port 2003 is provided lower than the conventional first starting port, and it is possible to make the inside of the gaming area 5a appear relatively wider. .

The starting port unit 2100 has a starting port display section 2110 that is provided below the first starting port 2003 and can display a predetermined pattern. The starting port display section 2110 is composed of one 7-segment LED. This starting opening display section 2110 can display predetermined patterns (including numbers) according to the progress of the game. When the starting port unit 2100 is assembled on the game board 5, the starting port display section 2110 closes the out port 1008 from the front, making the out port 1008 invisible to the player. This allows the player to recognize that the out port 2020 is the lowest end of the gaming area 5a.

When the starting port unit 2100 is assembled to the game board 5, the first starting port 2003 is located directly below the central discharge part 2513a on the stage 2513 of the center accessory 2500, and the game discharged from the central discharge part 2513a. Ball B can be accepted with high probability. The game ball B received in the first starting port 2003 is detected by the first starting port sensor 2101, guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, and delivered to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000. and is discharged to the safe ball socket 600b of the circulating ball path unit 600 below.

The game ball B received at the out port 2020 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 and delivered to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, and then transferred from the back ball guiding unit 3100 to the circulating ball path unit below. 600 is discharged to the out ball socket 600a.

[8-8b. Side unit]
Next, the side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000 will be explained with reference mainly to FIGS. 78 to 80, FIG. 84, and the like. The side unit 2200 of the table unit 2000 extends along the inner rail 1002 to the left of the starting port unit 2100 in the gaming area 5a, and is attached to the gaming panel 1100 from the front. The side unit 2200 includes three general winning ports 2001 that are always open so that game balls B can be received, and one sub-out port 2021 that is always open so that game balls B can be received.

The three general winning ports 2001 of the side unit 2200 are arranged in an arc shape along the inner rail 1002, and are provided at higher positions toward the left. Each general winning hole 2001 opens with the size (width) of one game ball B. One sub-out opening 2021 is provided to the left of the leftmost general winning opening 2001. The sub-out port 2021 has an opening with a size (width) of one game ball B.

Further, the side unit 2200 has a shelf portion 2201 on the right side of the rightmost general prize opening 2001, which is inclined to become lower as it goes to the right. The shelf 2201 extends rightward to near the right end of the left outlet 2020 in the starting port unit 2100. That is, when the game ball B rolls on the shelf section 2201, it is received into the left outlet 2020.

When the side unit 2200 is assembled to the game board 5, three general winning holes 2001 and one sub-out hole 2021 protrude forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100. This side unit 2200 can guide the game ball B received in the general prize opening 2001 to the rear of the game panel 1100 and deliver it to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000. The game ball B delivered to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 is detected by the general winning hole sensor 3001 and then discharged downward.

Further, the side unit 2200 can guide the game ball B received in the sub-out port 2021 to the rear of the game panel 1100 and deliver it to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000. The game balls B delivered to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 are discharged to the safe ball socket 600b of the circulating ball path unit 600 below.

[8-8c. Side upper left unit]
Next, the upper left side unit 2300 of the table unit 2000 will be explained with reference mainly to FIGS. 78 to 80, FIG. 84, and the like. The side upper left unit 2300 of the table unit 2000 is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front so as to be in contact with the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the side unit 2200 within the game area 5a. The upper left side unit 2300 has a shelf 2301 that slopes lower to the right.

When the side upper left unit 2300 is assembled to the game board 5, the shelf portion 2301 protrudes forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100. The side upper left unit 2300 can guide the game ball B that has flown down the left side of the center accessory 2500 to the right side below the center accessory 2500 by means of the shelf section 2301.

[8-8d. Attacker unit]
Next, the attacker unit 2400 of the table unit 2000 will be explained with reference mainly to FIGS. 78 to 80, FIG. 84, and the like. The attacker unit 2400 of the table unit 2000 is located to the right of the starting port unit 2100, which is the lower right corner in the front view, in the game area 5a, and is attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100 from the front. This attacker unit 2400 includes a second starting opening 2004, a big winning opening 2005, and one sub-out opening 2021 (see FIG. 84, etc.).

In the attacker unit 2400, when viewed from the front, the second starting port 2004 is provided at the upper part to the right of the center in the left-right direction, and the big winning port 2005 is provided at a position lower than the second starting port 2004 on the left side of the center in the left-right direction. One sub-out port 2021 is provided below the second starting port 2004 and at a lower position than the big winning port 2005.

The attacker unit 2400 also includes a second starting hole sensor 2401 that detects the game ball B received in the second starting hole 2004, and a big winning hole sensor 2402 that detects the game ball B accepted in the big winning hole 2005. , and a magnetic sensor 1030 that detects unauthorized magnetism (see FIG. 93). Two big prize opening sensors 2402 are provided side by side.

Furthermore, the attacker unit 2400 has a dummy sensor 2403 at a position behind the sub-out port 2021 and visible from the front. Although this dummy sensor 2403 cannot detect the game ball B, it is formed in the same manner as a through sensor that detects the passage of the game ball B like the big prize opening sensor 2402. According to this configuration, the dummy sensor 2403 can be replaced with a sensor that can actually detect the game balls B, so it can be changed to either count out balls in the main body frame 4 or not count them. It is. Although the dummy sensor 2403 has the same configuration as the through sensor, it may also be a spacer that eliminates a step that would cause ball clogging at the relevant location.

The attacker unit 2400 opens and closes the second starting port door 2411 that can open and close the second starting port 2004, and the second starting port door 2411 according to the normal lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B in the normal winning hole 2002. A starting port solenoid 2412 that allows the player to open and close the winning port 2005, a winning port door 2413 that can open and close the winning port 2005, and a lottery is performed by receiving the game ball B into the first starting port 2003 or the second starting port 2004. It includes an attacker solenoid 2414 that opens and closes depending on the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result.

The second starting port 2004 of the attacker unit 2400 opens upward with a width slightly larger in the left and right direction than the diameter of the game ball B. The grand prize opening 2005 has a width in the left and right direction that is 4 to 6 times the diameter of the game ball B and opens upward. The second starting port door 2411 that allows the second starting port 2004 to be opened and closed is provided so as to be movable forward and backward, and is inclined so that the left end side is lower. The grand prize opening door 2413 that enables the grand prize opening 2005 to be opened and closed is provided so that it can move forward and backward in the front and back direction by rotating around an axis extending in the left and right direction, and is tilted so that the left end side is lower. are doing.

This second starting port door 2411 is provided so as to move in the front-rear direction. When the starting port solenoid 2412 is not energized, the second starting port door 2411 moves forward by projecting the plunger of the starting port solenoid 2412 due to the biasing force of the spring, and closes the second starting port 2004. There is. In addition, when the starting port solenoid 2412 is energized, the second starting port door 2411 moves rearward as the plunger of the starting port solenoid 2412 retreats against the urging force of the spring, and the second starting port door 2411 moves rearward. Open the mouth 2004.

The big winning opening door 2413 has a horizontally long flat plate shape, and is provided so as to move back and forth by rotating around an axis extending in the left and right direction and provided below the big winning opening sensor 2402. ing. The big winning opening door 2413 can open and close the big winning opening 2005 by moving the plunger of the attacker solenoid 2414 forward and backward. When the attacker solenoid 2414 is not energized, the big prize opening door 2413 moves forward by protruding the plunger of the attacker solenoid 2414 by the biasing force of the spring, thereby closing the big winning opening 2005. In addition, when the attacker solenoid 2414 is energized, the big prize opening door 2413 moves backward by retreating against the urging force of the spring, and opens the big winning opening 2005. do.

The attacker unit 2400 has a space formed at its upper end between the second starting opening 2004 and the big prize opening 2005 through which the game ball B can flow, and is inclined downwardly toward the left. and has an upper shelf section 2421 provided to cover the upper part thereof. The upper shelf portion 2421 extends in the left-right direction from the upper right end of the second starting opening 2004 to the upper left end of the big winning opening 2005.

The attacker unit 2400 is located above the second starting opening 2004 from the right end (right rail 1005) of the attacking unit 2400 to the left with an interval that allows one game ball B to pass through. 2004, a second shelf 2423 that slopes downward to the left from the left end of the second starting port 2004; The third shelf part is inclined to become lower towards the big prize opening 2005 on the left side from the part which has a gap between the second shelf part 2423 and the second shelf part 2423 on the left side and below thereof, through which the game ball B can pass. 2424, and a fourth shelf 2425 that is sloped downward from the left end of the big prize opening 2005 toward the left.

This attacker unit 2400 is configured such that when the game ball B enters the gap to the right of the first shelf 2422 and the gap between the second shelf 2423 and the third shelf 2424, it is received into the sub-out port 2021. , ejects the game ball B out of the game area 5a.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the attacker unit 2400 is located between the front wall and rear wall forming the space in a space between the upper shelf section 2421 and the big prize opening 2005 where the game balls B can flow to the left. A plurality of abutting portions each having a triangular shape in plan view protrude into the space so as to alternate from the wall in the left-right direction. These plurality of abutting parts can cause the game ball B rolling on the grand prize opening door 2413 to flow in a large zigzag shape in the front and back direction when the grand prize opening 2005 is in a closed state, and can cause the big winning The circulation time of game balls B circulating on the opening door 2413 is lengthened.

In the normal state of the attacker unit 2400, the starting port solenoid 2412 and the attacker solenoid 2414 are each de-energized (OFF). In this normal state, the plunger of the starting port solenoid 2412 projects forward due to the biasing force of a spring (not shown), and the second starting port door 2411 projects forward. In this state, the second starting port door 2411 is located above the second starting port 2004, and the second starting port door 2411 makes it impossible for the second starting port 2004 to receive the game ball B. ing. That is, the second starting port 2004 is closed by the second starting port door 2411.

In addition, in a normal state, the plunger of the attacker solenoid 2414 projects forward due to the biasing force of a spring (not shown), and the large prize opening door 2413 projects forward. In this state, the big winning hole door 2413 is located above the big winning hole 2005, and the game ball B cannot be accepted into the big winning hole 2005. In other words, the big winning opening 2005 is closed by the big winning opening door 2413.

In this normal state, when the game ball B flows down onto the first shelf section 2422, the game ball B rolls to the left due to the inclination of the first shelf section 2422, and the upper surface of the second starting port door 2411 and the After rolling on the second shelf 2423, it is released from the left end of the second shelf 2423 to the left. The game ball B released to the left from the second shelf 2423 falls onto the third shelf 2424 or the big prize opening door 2413 depending on its momentum, and rolls to the left due to their inclination. Note that when the game ball B released from the second shelf 2423 to the left comes into contact with the lower surface of the upper shelf 2421 and rebounds to the right, the gap between the second shelf 2423 and the third shelf 2424 may enter.

And, the game ball B rolling on the big winning opening door 2413 that closes the big winning opening 2005 is brought into contact with a plurality of abutting holes provided in the space between the upper shelf part 2421 and the big winning opening 2005. It comes into contact with the parts alternately, and rolls to the left while zigzagging in the front-back direction. The game ball B that rolled to the left on the big prize opening door 2413 rolls on the fourth shelf 2425 and is then released from the left end of the ball to the outside of the attacker unit 2400. Since the left end of the fourth shelf 2425 is located at a lower position than the first starting port 2003, the game ball B released from the fourth shelf 2425 to the left will be received by the out port 2020.

When the game ball B flows down onto the upper shelf section 2421, the attacker unit 2400 is guided to the left by the slope, and the attacker unit 2400 is It is emitted to the left. Since the left end of the upper shelf 2421 is provided at a higher position than the first starting port 2003, there is a possibility that the game ball B released from the upper shelf 2421 to the left may be received by the first starting port 2003. .

In this attacker unit 2400, when the game ball B flows down to the right of the first shelf section 2422, it enters the sub-out port 2021. Further, when the game ball B enters the gap between the second shelf section 2423 and the third shelf section 2424, it enters the sub-out port 2021. The game ball B that has entered the sub-out port 2021 is discharged onto the lower substrate holder 1200 through the back ball guidance unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 without being returned to the gaming area 5a, and is ejected onto the lower substrate holder 1200, and is returned to the out ball of the circulation ball path unit 600. It is delivered to the socket 600a. In this attacker unit 2400, the game balls B that have passed through the right side of the first shelf section 2422 and the game balls B that have passed through the gap between the second shelf section 2423 and the third shelf section 2424 are both connected to the sub-out port 2021. It is formed so as to enter into the sub-outlet 2021, and substantially two sub-out ports 2021 are provided.

In this normal state, when the starting port solenoid 2412 is energized (ON) in accordance with the normal lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B into the normal winning port 2002, the starting port solenoid 2412 is energized (ON). The plunger retreats and the second starting port door 2411 moves rearward. Then, by moving the second starting port door 2411 backward, the upper part of the second starting port 2004 becomes open, and the game ball B can be received into the second starting port 2004. In other words, the second starting port 2004 is in an open state.

When the second starting port 2004 is in an open state, when the game ball B is received in the second starting port 2004, it is detected by the second starting port sensor 2401 and then released from the attacker unit 2400 backward. The game ball B received by the second starting port 2004 and released backward from the attacker unit 2400 is delivered to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, and is transferred to the safe ball socket 600b of the lower circulation ball path unit 600. is discharged.

On the other hand, in a normal state, depending on the special lottery result (first special lottery result or second special lottery result) drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first starting port 2003 or the second starting port 2004, When the attacker solenoid 2414 is energized (ON), the plunger retreats against the biasing force of the spring, and the big prize opening door 2413 moves rearward. By moving the big winning hole door 2413 backward, the big winning hole 2005 becomes open upward, and the game ball B can be received into the big winning hole 2005. In other words, the big prize opening 2005 is in an open state.

When the big winning hole 2005 is in the open state, when the game ball B is accepted into the big winning hole 2005, it is detected by one of the two big winning hole sensors 2402 provided below, and then the attacker unit 2400 is released backwards. The game ball B received by the big prize opening 2005 and discharged backward from the attacker unit 2400 is delivered to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 and is sent to the safe ball socket 600b of the circulating ball path unit 600 below. be discharged.

In this way, according to the attacker unit 2400 of this embodiment, the game ball B received in the big winning hole 2005 is detected by either of the two big winning hole sensors 2402 and then released to the rear. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the game balls B from stagnation between the big winning hole 2005 and the big winning hole sensor 2402, and it is possible to accept many game balls B in a short time.

[8-8e. Center role]
Next, the center accessory 2500 in the table unit 2000 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 78 to 80, FIG. 84, FIG. 85 to FIG. 88, and the like. FIG. 85(a) is a front view of the lottery accessory in the center accessory, and FIG. 85(b) is a perspective view of the lottery accessory seen from above in front. FIG. 86 is a side sectional view of the lottery accessory in the center accessory, cut at the center in the left-right direction. FIG. 87(a) is an explanatory diagram showing in cross section a state in which the game ball cannot be looped in the lottery accessory, and FIG. 87(b) is an explanatory diagram showing in cross section the state in which the game ball can be looped in the lottery accessory. FIG. 88 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls in the lottery accessory.

The center accessory 2500 of the table unit 2000 is located above the starting port unit 2100 in the game area 5a, slightly above the center in front view, and is attached to the front of the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100. ing. The center accessory 2500 is formed into a transparent frame shape.

Although the details will be described later, the center accessory 2500 includes the first special symbol drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first starting port 2003 and the first special symbol drawn by receiving the game ball B into the second starting port 2004. 2. A prize winning hole 2006 that opens and closes to accept the game ball B according to the lottery result of the special symbol, and a second V winning hole 2008 that can accept only the game ball B that has been accepted into the prize winning hole 2006. , and a loss opening 2009 in which the game ball B which was not accepted into the second V winning opening 2008 after being accepted into the accessory winning opening 2006 is accepted.

The center accessory 2500 includes an accessory winning hole sensor 2501 that detects the game ball B received in the accessory winning hole 2006, and a first V winning hole that detects the game ball B received in the first V winning hole 2007. A sensor 2502, a second V winning hole sensor 2503 that detects the game ball B accepted in the second V winning hole 2008, and a losing hole sensor 2504 that detects the game ball B accepted in the losing hole 2009. ing.

The center accessory 2500 includes a main body unit 2510 formed in a frame shape, and a lottery accessory 2550 provided at the lower part of the frame of the main body unit 2510. The main unit 2510 has an accessory prize opening 2006 and a first V prize opening 2007. The lottery accessory 2550 has a second V winning opening 2008 and a losing opening 2009.

[8-8e-1. Main unit]
The main body unit 2510 of the center accessory 2500 will be explained in detail. The main unit 2510 has an accessory prize opening 2006. The main unit 2510 includes a transparent center frame 2511 attached to the front of the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110), a warp passage 2512 that can guide the game ball B from the outside of the center frame 2511 to the inside of the frame, A stage 2513 is provided at the lower side of the frame of the center frame 2511 and causes the game ball B flowing through the warp passage 2512 to roll in the left-right direction and then released into the game area 5a.

The center frame 2511 includes a frame-shaped insertion portion 2511a that is inserted into the opening 1112 of the panel board 1110 in the game panel 1100 and is provided along the inner peripheral surface of the opening 1112 and extends in the front-rear direction. A flat flange portion 2511b protrudes outward from the outer periphery of the front end of the insertion portion 2511a and comes into contact with the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, and a flat flange portion 2511b extends further forward than the flange portion 2511b and flows down the game area 5a. An inflow regulating portion 2511c that restricts the game ball B from flowing into the opening 1112 of the panel board 1110 in the game panel 1100, and a flat support portion 2511d protruding from the inner periphery of the front end of the insertion portion 2511a. have.

The insertion portion 2511a is provided so that its rear end coincides with the rear surface of the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100 when assembled to the game board 5. When the inflow regulating portion 2511c is assembled on the game board 5, the front end of the frame-shaped (ring-shaped) excluding the lower side protrudes forward from the front surface of the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100. As a result, when assembled on the game board 5, the inflow regulating portion 2511c prevents (restricts) the intrusion (inflow) of the game ball B from the outside of the center accessory 2500 (center frame 2511) into the inside of the frame. I can do it.

The thickness of the flange portion 2511b and the support portion 2511d is formed to be thinner than the thickness of the panel plate 1110 (1/4 to 1/5 of the thickness of the panel plate 1110). The flange portion 2511b and the support portion 2511d protrude from the insertion portion 2511a at the same position in the front-back direction.

A plurality of support portions 2511d are partially provided on the inner periphery of the insertion portion 2511a. Further, the support portion 2511d is also provided at a portion of the insertion portion 2511a where the flange portion 2511b does not protrude, and reinforces the insertion portion 2511a (center frame 2511). Further, the end side of the support portion 2511d protruding from the insertion portion 2511a is formed in a shape that follows the front shape of the insertion portion 2511a, or is formed in a straight line, so that the support portion 2511d is not noticeable. The amount of protrusion of the support portion 2511d from the insertion portion 2511a is within the range (1 mm to 10 mm) from the thickness of the support portion 2511d to the thickness of the panel board 1110. I try to make it less noticeable.

The warp passage 2512 is open at a portion on the left side of the inflow regulating portion 2511c when viewed from the front so that the game ball B in the game area 5a can enter. The warp passage 2512 can guide the entered game ball B to the stage 2513. A portion of the warp passage 2512 is formed by the center frame 2511.

Stage 2513 is attached to insertion portion 2511a in center frame 2511. The stage 2513 has a curved shape with a concave center side in the left-right direction, and is located at a position directly above the first starting port 2003 of the starting port unit 2100, that is, in a state where the center accessory 2500 is attached to the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100. It is formed in a wavy shape (W-shape) such that the approximate center position in the left and right direction is slightly higher than both left and right sides. This stage 2513 has a portion that is slightly higher than the left and right sides of the center in the left and right direction (center emitting portion 2513a), and a portion that is the lowest on both left and right sides (side emitting portions 2513b). The game ball B can be released into the game area 5a from these parts.

When the stage 2513 is assembled to the game board 5, a raised portion (center discharge portion 2513a) at the center in the left and right direction is located directly above the first starting port 2003 of the starting port unit 2100. As a result, when the game ball B is released from the central release part 2513a at the center of the stage 2513, it is received into the first starting port 2003 with an extremely high probability.

Further, the main body unit 2510 of the center accessory 2500 is provided at the upper right corner of the center frame 2511, and includes a guide passage group 2520 consisting of two passages through which the game balls B can flow. The guide passage group 2520 is for guiding the game ball B above the normal winning opening 2002 and the attacker unit 2400.

As shown in FIG. 84, the guide passage group 2520 is provided outside the frame of the inflow regulating portion 2511c of the center frame 2511, and includes a first guide passage 2521 whose upper entrance is provided at the stop portion 1006. , and a second guide passage 2522 whose upper entrance is provided adjacent to the left side of the entrance of the first guide passage 2521. The guide passage group 2520 (the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522) is formed of a colorless and transparent member, and the game balls B circulating inside can be visually recognized from the front.

The first guide passage 2521 extends vertically and briefly downward from the stop portion 1006 of the front component 1000 and then bends at right angles to the right. When approaching the right rail 1005, the first guide passage 2521 bends downward and runs along the right rail 1005. It extends to the left, bends to the left at around 3/4 of the height from the bottom of the game area 5a, and extends to the left at a gentle angle to lower the game ball. It bends downward at a position one distance to the left of B and extends to the height of the center of the gaming area 5a, then bends to the right and extends to the vicinity of the right rail 1005, and then bends downward so that the exit points downward. It is formed in an open shape.

The first guide passage 2521 is not bent in the front-rear direction, and guides the game ball B downward on substantially the same plane as the front surface of the game panel 1100. A prize winning opening 2006 is provided in the upper part of the first guide passage 2521 that extends to the left. Further, below the exit of the first guide passage 2521, a normal winning opening 2002 opens upward.

On the other hand, the second guide passage 2522 is a portion spaced leftward from the entrance of the first guide passage 2521, and has an entrance opening upward. The second guide passage 2522 extends substantially straight downward from the entrance at the upper end, bends backward at a position lower than the height of the part where the first guide passage 2521 first bends to the right, and then Bent downward at the rear side of the front surface of the panel 1100 and lined up with the first guide passage 2521 in the front-back direction, and the leftmost part of the first guide passage 2521 that extends downward and the left-right direction. extend downward so that they are approximately coincident with each other, bend to the right in a crank shape at the height of the center of the game area 5a, and then bend downward, and then to the lower right in the first guide passage 2521. After bending forward at a lower part than the extending part, the part extending to the right on the lower side of the first guide passage 2521 is on the same plane as the first guide passage 2521 in the front-rear direction. It is bent to the right so as to extend along the lower side, and then bent downward to be adjacent to the left side of the outlet of the first guide passage 2521, so that the outlet is formed in a shape that opens downward. .

In addition, the main unit 2510 is provided in the middle of one passage (here, the first guide passage 2521) of the guide passage group 2520, and the game ball B is connected to the first starting opening 2003 and the second starting opening 2004. A game ball B can be received in accordance with the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result when the game ball B is accepted and the game ball B accepted in the game ball B is accepted in the game ball B. A first sorting device 2530 that sorts to the chance opening 2531, a second sorting device 2540 that sorts the game balls B sorted to the chance opening 2531 by the first sorting device 2530 to the first V prize opening 2007, A lottery guide path 2545 that guides the game balls B that were not distributed to the first V prize opening 2007 by the two sorting device 2540 (the game balls B that were distributed to the second prize opening 2541) to the lottery accessory 2550. ing.

The accessory prize opening 2006 in the main body unit 2510 (center accessory 2500) is provided in a part extending to the left on the upper side of the first guide passage 2521, and extends from left to right over approximately the entire length of the part in the left and right direction. It extends upward and opens upward. The accessory prize opening door 2515 is formed in a plate shape that extends from front to back and left and right so that the left end is lower, and the accessory prize opening 2006 opens upward by moving back and forth. It can be opened and closed. The accessory prize opening door 2515 can close the accessory prize opening 2006 by moving forward, and when the accessory prize opening 2006 is closed, the part extending to the left in the first guide passage 2521 By forming the bottom surface of the guide passage 2521, the game balls B flowing from the upstream side can be guided to the exit side of the first guide passage 2521.

The accessory prize opening door 2515 opens the accessory prize opening 2006 by moving backward by the drive of the accessory prize winning opening solenoid 2516, and transfers the game ball B that has been distributed through the first guide passage 2521 to the accessory prize winning opening 2006. can be accepted. This prize winning port door 2515 closes the prize winning port 2006 when the prize winning port solenoid 2516 is OFF (when not energized), and closes the prize winning port 2006 when the prize winning port solenoid 2516 is ON (when energized). The prize opening 2006 is opened.

The first sorting device 2530 divides the game ball B into a chance opening 2531 and a first slot 2532 into which the game ball B received in the accessory winning opening 2006 and detected by the accessory winning opening sensor 2501 can enter. A sorting rotary body 2533 has a housing portion 2533a on its outer circumferential surface that is capable of accommodating only one item, and is rotatable around an axis in the front-rear direction, and a state in which the housing portion 2533a of the distribution rotary body 2533 faces to the right. A first distribution solenoid 2534 (see FIG. 93) for rotating the distribution rotating body 2533 between the upwardly facing state and the position facing upward is provided. The distribution rotary body 2533 is formed into a truncated cone shape with an outer circumferential surface narrowing toward the rear.

The chance opening 2531 of the first sorting device 2530 is provided on the downstream side of the sorting rotary body 2533 with respect to the flow of game balls B. B is allowed to enter and is provided on the right side of the distribution rotary body 2533. The chance opening 2531 is connected to a second sorting device 2540. The first slot 2532 is provided on the upstream side of the distribution rotary body 2533 with respect to the flow of game balls B, and allows game balls B that are not accommodated in the housing portion 2533a of the distribution rotation body 2533 to enter. , is provided above the distribution rotary body 2533. The first slot 2532 opens forward and guides the game ball B that has entered to the rear of the game panel 1100.

In the first distribution device 2530, when the first distribution solenoid 2534 is OFF (non-energized), the housing portion 2533a of the distribution rotary body 2533 faces to the right. In this state, when the game ball B received in the prize winning hole 2006 is detected by the prize winning hole sensor 2501 and flows down from above to the sorting rotary body 2533, it hits the outer peripheral surface of the sorting rotary body 2533. come into contact with The outer circumferential surface of the distribution rotary body 2533 is formed into a truncated cone shape that narrows backward, so the game ball B is guided backward by the slope of the outer circumferential surface and enters the first ski opening 2532. Become.

On the other hand, when the first distribution solenoid 2534 is ON (energized), the distribution rotating body 2533 rotates 90 degrees counterclockwise, so that the housing portion 2533a faces upward. In this state, when the game ball B received in the accessory winning hole 2006 is detected by the accessory winning hole sensor 2501 and flows down from above to the sorting rotary body 2533, only one ball B is stored in the storage section 2533a. . When the game ball B is accommodated in the housing part 2533a of the distribution rotary body 2533, when the game ball B further falls from above to the distribution rotation body 2533 from the accessory prize opening 2006 side, the game ball B is accommodated. After coming into contact with the game ball B housed in the portion 2533a, the ball enters the first slot 2532 at the rear. The game ball B that has entered the first slot 2532 is detected by a sensor, and then delivered to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, and from the back ball guiding unit 3100 to the safe ball of the circulating ball path unit 600 below. It is discharged to the socket 600b.

When the first distribution solenoid 2534 rotates the distribution rotary body 2533 90 degrees clockwise while the game ball B is accommodated in the accommodation section 2533a, and the accommodation section 2533a faces to the right, The game ball B accommodated in the accommodating portion 2533a rolls to the right from the accommodating portion 2533a and is received in the chance opening 2531. The game ball B received in the chance opening 2531 is sent to the next second sorting device 2540.

In this way, in the first sorting device 2530, the game balls B received in the accessory prize opening 2006 are placed either on the chance opening 2531 side (second sorting device 2540 side) or on the first prize opening 2532 side. It can be divided into two categories.

The second distribution device 2540 distributes the game balls B distributed to the chance opening 2531 in the first distribution device 2530 to either the second slot 2541 or the first V prize opening 2007. The second sorting device 2540 is provided at a height between the first sorting device 2530 and the exit of the guide passage group 2520 when viewed from the front. The second sorting device 2540 is provided behind the sorting rotating body 2533 of the first sorting device 2530.

The second sorting device 2540 is provided with a second slot in which the game balls B stored in the accommodating portion 2533a of the sorting rotating body 2533 in the first sorting device 2530 and sorted into the chance opening 2531 can enter. 2541 and the first V prize opening 2007, a distribution piece 2543 that enables opening and closing of the second scarf opening 2541 by moving back and forth in the front and rear directions, and a second distribution solenoid 2544 for moving the distribution piece 2543 forward and backward (Fig. 93).

The second slot opening 2541 opens upward at a position to the right of the distribution rotating body 2533, and game balls B distributed to the chance opening 2531 are supplied from above. The first V winning opening 2007 is provided adjacent to the right side of the second winning opening 2541, and opens upward. The sorting piece 2543 has a flat plate shape that slopes downwardly to the right, and closes the upper end opening of the second gap opening 2541 by protruding forward, thereby allowing the game ball B to enter the second gap opening 2541. It is possible to make it impossible to accept the game ball B, and to guide the game ball B that has come into contact with the upper surface to the right to receive it into the first V prize opening 2007.

In the second distribution device 2540, when the second distribution solenoid 2544 is OFF (non-energized), the distribution piece 2543 is moving forward, and the second gap opening 2541 is closed. In this state, when the game balls B sorted into the chance opening 2531 in the first sorting device 2530 flow down, they come into contact with the upper surface of the sorting piece 2543 and are guided to the right by the inclination of the sorting piece 2543. The winnings are accepted (distributed) into the first V prize opening 2007. The game ball B distributed to the first V winning hole 2007 is detected by the first V winning hole sensor 2502, and then delivered to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, and is sent downward from the back ball guiding unit 3100. is discharged to the safe ball socket 600b of the circulating ball path unit 600.

On the other hand, when the second distribution solenoid 2544 is ON (energized), the distribution piece 2543 retreats and the second gap opening 2541 is opened upward, so that game balls B to the second gap opening 2541 are The state is now ready for acceptance. In this state, when the game ball B distributed to the chance opening 2531 in the first distribution device 2530 flows down, the game ball B passes in front of the retracted distribution piece 2543 and passes through the second chance opening. It will be accepted (assigned) to 2541. Then, the game balls B distributed to the second slot 2541 are guided to the lottery accessory 2550 on the left side by the lottery guide path 2545.

In this way, in the second sorting device 2540, the game balls B accommodated in the accommodating portion 2533a of the sorting rotary body 2533 in the first sorting device 2530, that is, the game balls B sorted into the chance opening 2531, It can be distributed to either the second slot 2541 (lottery accessory 2550) side or the first V winning slot 2007 side.

The lottery guide path 2545 is provided with a lottery prize entry ball sensor 2546 that detects the circulation of game balls B. When the game ball B is detected by this lottery prize entering ball sensor 2546, the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 controls the production display device 1600, the main body frame speaker 503, the top center speaker, the top side speaker, and the game board 5. By controlling the LEDs and the like provided on the door frame 3, an effect is executed to enliven the lottery (sorting) of game balls B in the lottery accessories 2550. As a result, the game balls B are distributed to the second slot 2541 in the second distribution device 2540, thereby dispelling the player's disappointing feeling and increasing his expectations for the lottery accessory 2550.

[8-8e-2. Lottery accessories]
The lottery accessory 2550 in the center accessory 2500 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 85 to 88 and the like. The lottery accessory 2550 of the center accessory 2500 is provided at the lower part of the frame of the frame-shaped main unit 2510, and has a second V winning opening 2008 and a losing opening 2009. This lottery accessory 2550 is supplied with the game ball B accepted into the accessory prize opening 2006. In detail, game balls B are accepted into the prize winning opening 2006, distributed to the chance opening 2531 by the first sorting device 2530, and further distributed to the second prize opening 2541 by the second sorting device 2540. is supplied. In addition, the lottery accessory 2550 includes a second V winning opening sensor 2503 that detects the game ball B accepted in the second V winning opening 2008, and a losing opening sensor 2504 that detects the gaming ball B accepted in the losing opening 2009. It is equipped with.

The lottery accessory 2550 of the center accessory 2500 is supplied with game balls B that have been distributed to the second slot 2541 by the second sorting device 2540 and distributed through the lottery guide passage 2545, and are lowered toward the left. An inclined guideway 2551, a distribution unit 2552 that distributes the game balls B that have passed through the guideway 2551 to either the loop side or the non-loop side (losing port 2009 side), and the distribution unit 2552 to distribute the game balls B to the loop side. A hitting section 2553 is capable of hitting the game balls B distributed backwards, and the game balls B hit backwards by the hitting section 2553 are supplied, and the game balls B are tilted downwardly toward the front and are tilted in the vertical direction. A swinging gutter 2554 that can be reciprocated so as to swing around the axis of the swinging gutter 2554, and a game ball B guided by the swinging gutter 2554 rolls and lowers toward the guide path 2551 in front. A table 2555 that has a wide surface in the front and rear and left and right sides that is inclined to the top and has a second V winning opening 2008 near the downstream end, and between the second V winning opening 2008 and the swinging gutter 2554 in the table 2555. It has a pair of swinging pieces 2556 that are provided in and swingable around an axis in the vertical direction.

This lottery accessory 2550 will be described in detail later, but as long as the game ball B is distributed to the loop side by the distribution unit 2552, the game ball B released from the table 2555 where the second V prize opening 2008 is provided is The game ball B is supplied to the hitting section 2553 and can be looped between the hitting section 2553 and the table 2555.

The guide path 2551 of the lottery accessory 2550 extends along the right side of the lottery accessory 2550 from near the rear end to the front end so that the front becomes lower, and then extends along the front end of the lottery accessory 2550 to near the left end. It extends lower on the left side, and is formed in an L-shape in plan view. This guide path 2551 extends with a width slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball B. Game balls B are supplied from a lottery guide path 2545 to a portion of the guide path 2551 that extends in the front-rear direction along the right end side.

The distribution part 2552 of the lottery accessory 2550 is provided in a part near the downstream end (left end) of the part extending in the left-right direction of the guideway 2551. The distribution part 2552 is rotatably provided around a losing port 2009 that penetrates the guide path 2551 and opens upward, and an axis that extends in the front-rear direction near the left end of the losing port 2009. It includes a spring bridge-shaped distribution bridge 2557 that enables the cage loss opening 2009 to be opened and closed, and a lottery loop solenoid 2558 (see FIG. 93) for rotating the distribution bridge 2557. The guideway 2551 is divided into an upstream side and a downstream side with the failure port 2009 as a boundary.

The distribution bridge 2557 is formed into a horizontally long flat plate shape in a plan view, and the left side is supported so as to be rotatable around the longitudinal axis, and the right side is a free end. The distribution bridge 2557 has a loop position in which the right side approaches the right side of the loss opening 2009 and extends in the left-right direction and falls down (see FIG. 87(a)), and a loop position in which the right side approaches the right side of the loss opening 2009 and falls down (see FIG. It is provided so as to be rotatable between a non-loop position (see FIG. 87(b)) in which it extends in the direction and stands upright.

By being in the loop position, the distribution bridge 2557 is in a state where it bridges the taxiway 2551 which is divided into two into upstream and downstream sides by the failure port 2009, and the taxiway 2557 passes over the distribution bridge 2557. The game ball B can roll from the upstream side to the downstream side. In other words, the distribution bridge 2557 can close the loss port 2009 and become unable to accept the game ball B by being in the loop position state. On the other hand, the distribution bridge 2557 is in the non-loop position, so that the losing port 2009 is opened upward, and the game ball B that has rolled from upstream is transferred to the losing port 2009 without being passed to the downstream side. can be accepted. In this way, in the distribution section 2552, the game balls B can be distributed to either the loop side or the non-loop side using the distribution bridge 2557.

This distribution bridge 2557 is provided with a distribution display section 2557a formed in the shape of a flag and marked with an "X" on the side opposite to the rolling surface of the game ball B. This distribution display section 2557a becomes visible from the player side when the distribution bridge 2557 is in the non-loop position where the loss opening 2009 is opened. This allows the player to recognize that the game ball B cannot go to the downstream hitting section 2553 (cannot loop).

Further, the left end side of the distribution bridge 2557, which is rotatably supported, is provided to the left of the left end at the downstream end (front end side) of the table 2555. Therefore, since the game ball B released from the table 2555 to the guideway 2551 side is released to the right side of the distribution bridge 2557 in the non-loop position, the game ball B is released from the table 2555 in the non-loop position. , it does not go to the downstream side of the guideway 2551 which is divided into two (downstream side of the distribution bridge 2557), but is accepted into the open loss port 2009.

The hitting part 2553 of the lottery accessory 2550 is inclined so that the front end is lower than the downstream end of the guideway 2551 and becomes higher toward the rear, and the game balls B distributed to the loop side by the distribution part 2552 are supplied. a fan-shaped hitting piece 2560 that is provided at the downstream end of the climbing part 2559 and can hit the game ball B; and a hitting piece that rotates the hitting piece 2560 around an axis perpendicular to the climbing part 2559. A single drive motor 2561 (see FIG. 93) is provided.

The fan-shaped striking piece 2560 is rotated at a relatively high speed by a striking piece drive motor 2561. Therefore, the strength with which the game ball B is hit varies depending on the timing when the game ball B reaches the part where the hitting piece 2560 is provided and the timing of the rotational position of the hitting piece 2560. Therefore, if the game ball B is hit with some force, it will be able to get over the climbing part 2559 and go to the rear swinging gutter 2554. If the ball B is hit weakly, it will not be able to get over the climbing part 2559 and will go forward. Will be back. Thereby, the player can be made nervous and excited depending on whether the game ball B is hit strongly and goes to the swing gutter 2554 (table 2555) side, and the player can be entertained. In addition, since the game ball B will return if the hit by the hitting piece 2560 is weak, it is possible to lengthen the time until the game with the game ball B is confirmed, and to make the player feel like he has won. This makes it possible to entertain players and prevent them from losing interest.

In this lottery accessory 2550, the game ball B that has climbed over the climbing part 2559 is supplied between the hitting part 2553 and the swing gutter 2554, and the swing path is curved so that both left and right ends are high and the center is low. 2562, and a discharge port 2563 which is provided in the center of the swinging passage 2562 and discharges the game ball B into the swinging gutter 2554. A plurality of projections and depressions are provided near both the raised left and right ends of the swing path 2562, so that the rolling speed of the game ball B can be attenuated. This swing path 2562 is provided along the rear end side of the lottery accessory 2550, and is provided behind the table 2555. The game ball B supplied from the striking part 2553 to the swinging path 2562 rolls in the left and right direction similarly to the stage 2513, and then is released from the central release port 2563 to the swinging gutter 2554.

The swinging gutter 2554 of the lottery accessory 2550 is formed into a disk shape, and has a gutter-like recessed gutter portion 2554a extending from the center toward the outer periphery. The disk-shaped swing gutter 2554 has its rotation axis inclined so that the rear side is higher. The lottery accessory 2550 has a gutter swing drive motor 2564 (see FIG. 93) for reciprocating the swing gutter 2554 within a predetermined angle range. This swinging gutter 2554 is operated by a gutter swinging drive motor 2564 so that the tip of the gutter section 2554a moves in the left-right direction within a predetermined angle range with the tip of the gutter section 2554a facing the second V prize opening 2008 in the front. Rotate back and forth to face the target.

The swing gutter 2554 is provided at the rear end (upper end) of the table 2555 in the center in the left-right direction, and the game ball B released from the release port 2563 is delivered to the gutter portion 2554a. Since the swinging gutter 2554 rotates back and forth, the game ball B delivered to the gutter section 2554a is played within a fan-shaped range according to the rotating direction in which the tip of the gutter section 2554a on the table 2555 is facing. Ball B can be released. At this time, since the swinging gutter 2554 is rotating until the received game ball B rolls through the gutter portion 2554a and is released from the tip, the rotation creates an inertial force on the game ball B. will come into play. Therefore, the game ball B released from the tip of the gutter portion 2554a does not roll on the table 2555 straight in the direction in which the gutter portion 2554a faces, making it difficult to predict the rolling direction.

The table 2555 of the lottery accessory 2550 is inclined so that the front end side is lower, and the length of the front end side, which is the downstream end, in the left-right direction is shorter than the length of the rear end in the left-right direction. Further, the table 2555 is provided with a swing gutter 2554 at the upper end of the center in the left-right direction, and a second V winning opening 2008 is provided near the lower end of the center in the left-right direction. The table 2555 has a central groove 2555a extending from the swing gutter 2554 to the second V prize opening 2008 at the center in the left-right direction, and a recess 2555b that is recessed from the surrounding area near the lower end of the center in the left-right direction. are doing. The recessed portion 2555b is recessed in the shape of a pentagonal home base, and a second V winning hole 2008 is provided at the bottom thereof.

This table 2555 has a central groove 2555a that continues to the second V winning hole 2008, and a recess 2555b in which the second V winning hole 2008 is provided at the bottom. When ball B enters, it can be made to feel like it is accepted into the second V prize opening 2008, and the movement of game ball B rolling on the table 2555 can be enjoyed.

The front end side, which is the downstream end of the table 2555, is provided at a higher position than the front guideway 2551. Therefore, the game balls B flowing through the guide path 2551 are not supplied onto the table 2555 without passing through the hitting section 2553 and the swinging gutter 2554.

The swinging pieces 2556 of the lottery accessory 2550 are arranged in pairs symmetrically between the swinging gutter 2554 and the second V prize opening 2008 on the table 2555 at symmetrical positions with the center of the table 2555 in the left-right direction as a border. is provided. The swinging piece 2556 is formed in the shape of a droplet, with a circular base end facing forward and a sharp tip facing rearward, and is rotatable around the circular base end side. It is being

The lottery accessory 2550 includes a swinging piece solenoid 2565 that swings a pair of swinging pieces 2556 by reciprocating the swinging pieces 2556 within a predetermined angular range about an axis in the vertical direction. The pair of swinging pieces 2556 are provided so as to be rotated in opposite directions by one swinging piece solenoid 2565.

Since the pair of swing pieces 2556 are rotated by the swing piece solenoid 2565, the rotation speed is faster than when the swing pieces 2556 are rotated by a drive motor. Therefore, when the game ball B comes into contact with the rocking piece 2556 while the rocking piece 2556 is rocking and moving, the game ball B can be strongly bounced away. Therefore, depending on the direction of rotation of the swinging piece 2556, the game ball B in contact with the table 2555 can be sent to the center in the left-right direction or to both ends in the left-right direction, thereby changing the flow of the game balls B. can be granted.

When the sharp tips of the pair of rocking pieces 2556 are close to each other, the distance between the rocking pieces 2556 becomes narrower, and the rear facing surface of the rocking pieces 2556 faces forward. Accordingly, it is tilted away from the center in the left-right direction, and the pair of swinging pieces 2556 are in a state of being narrowed toward the rear. As a result, when the game ball B flowing down from the swinging gutter 2554 or the back of the table 2555 passes between the pair of swinging pieces 2556, there is a high possibility that it will be accepted into the second V prize opening 2008, When it comes into contact with the rearward facing surface of the swinging piece 2556, it is guided in a direction away from the center in the left-right direction due to its inclination, so the possibility of being accepted into the second V winning opening 2008 becomes low.

On the other hand, when the pair of rocking pieces 2556 are in a state where their pointed tips are moving away from each other (the state shown by the broken line in FIG. 88), the rearward facing surface of the rocking pieces 2556 is It is inclined so as to approach the center in the direction, and the pair of swinging pieces 2556 are in a state expanded rearward. As a result, when the game ball B flowing down from the back of the swinging gutter 2554 or the table 2555 comes into contact with the rearward facing surface of the pair of swinging pieces 2556, it is guided to the center in the left-right direction by the inclination of the swinging piece 2556. There is a possibility that it will be accepted into the 2V prize opening 2008.

Therefore, when the pair of rocking pieces 2556 are expanded rearward, the game ball B in contact with the rocking pieces 2556 is guided to the center in the left-right direction, so that the pair of rocking pieces 2556 moves backward. Compared to the closed state, there is a higher possibility that the game ball B flowing down from the rear will be accepted into the second V prize opening 2008. In other words, the probability of receiving the game ball B into the second V winning hole 2008 can be changed depending on the state of the pair of swinging pieces 2556.

The lottery accessory 2550 of this embodiment includes a transparent cover 2566 that covers the whole from above (see FIGS. 78 to 80, etc.). This cover 2566 can prevent the game balls B supplied through the lottery guide path 2545 from jumping out from the lottery accessory 2550, and can also prevent the game balls B from outside other than the lottery guide path 2545. can be prevented from being supplied (invading).

Next, the flow of game balls B in the lottery accessory 2550 will be explained. The lottery accessories 2550 include the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result (for example, "winning the accessory") when the game ball B is received in the first starting port 2003 or the second starting port 2004. Accordingly, one of the game balls B received in the accessory prize opening 2006 that opens and closes in a predetermined pattern is supplied to the vicinity upstream of the guide path 2551 through the lottery guide path 2545. The game ball B supplied near the upstream of the guideway 2551 rolls toward the left distribution section 2552 according to the inclination of the guideway 2551.

In the distribution section 2552, the distribution bridge 2557 is collapsed for a predetermined period of time and is in a loop position, and the game ball B that has rolled from the upstream side passes through the distribution bridge 2557 and reaches the downstream side. It will roll to the striking part 2553. Then, the game ball B supplied to the hitting section 2553 is hit backward by the rotating hitting piece 2560, so that it rolls up the climbing section 2559 extending backward.

At this time, since the hitting piece 2560 is formed in a fan shape and rotates at a relatively high speed, depending on the timing at which the game ball B contacts the rotational position of the hitting piece 2560, it may hit the game ball B strongly. The game ball B may come into contact with the game ball B, or it may come into contact with the game ball B in a grazing manner, and the force of the game ball B being hit backwards varies. Therefore, if the hit by the hitting piece 2560 is weak, the game ball B will not be able to climb up the climbing section 2559 which is higher towards the rear, and will return up the climbing section 2559, causing the game ball B to go back and forth on the climbing section 2559. Sometimes.

When the game ball B hit by the hitting piece 2560 climbs over the climbing section 2559, it enters the swinging passage 2562 provided at the rear, and moves left and right along the swinging passage 2562, which is lower in the center in the left-right direction. It will roll around. At this time, since a plurality of unevennesses are provided near both left and right ends of the swinging passage 2562, when the game ball B passes through the uneven portion, the rolling speed is attenuated by the impact of the unevenness. Thereby, the momentum of the game ball B that has been hit by the hitting piece 2560 and has climbed over the climbing section 2559 can be reduced.

The game ball B that has been rolled so as to swing from side to side in the swing path 2562 is finally released onto the table 2555 from the release port 2563 provided in the center via the swing gutter 2554. At this time, since the swinging gutter 2554 is swinging back and forth within a predetermined angle range by the gutter swinging drive motor 2564, the game ball B is released from the discharge port 2563 to the swinging gutter 2554. The game ball B will be released from the swing gutter 2554 in various directions depending on the timing of the swing gutter 2554 and the timing of the rotation position of the swing gutter 2554.

The game ball B released from the swinging gutter 2554 to the table 2555 rolls forward according to the inclination of the table 2555, and is released into the guide path 2551 from the front end side. At this time, since a pair of swinging pieces 2556 that are provided at left and right distances are swinging near the center of the table 2555 in the front-rear direction, the swinging pieces 2556 move the game ball B in contact with the swinging pieces 2556. You can flip it to change the rolling direction. In addition, since a second V winning hole 2008 is provided near the front end in the center of the table 2555 in the left and right direction, the game ball B rolling on the table 2555 can be received into the second V winning hole 2008. be.

The game ball B received in the second V winning hole 2008 is detected by the second V winning hole sensor 2503, and then transferred to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, and then sent to the lower circulation ball path. It is discharged to the safe ball socket 600b of the unit 600. When the game ball B is received in the second V winning hole 2008, a "jackpot game" is executed as an advantageous gaming state in which the big winning hole 2005 is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern. Therefore, when the game ball B is supplied to the lottery accessory 2550, it is possible to make the player nervous and excited depending on whether or not the game ball B is accepted into the second V prize opening 2008, and the player is entertained. It is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

If the game ball B released from the front end side of the table 2555 to the guide path 2551 is within a predetermined time, the distribution bridge 2557 of the distribution section 2552 is in the loop position, so the distribution bridge 2557 It will be supplied to the striking part 2553 through. Therefore, when the distribution bridge 2557 is in the loop position, unless the game ball B is accepted into the second V prize opening 2008, the game ball B cannot loop between the hitting section 2553 and the table 2555 any number of times. can. That is, when the distribution bridge 2557 is in the loop position, the second V prize opening 2008 has an opportunity to receive the game ball B any number of times. As a result, even if the game ball B rolling on the table 2555 is not accepted into the second V winning hole 2008, it can be accepted into the second V winning hole 2008 by passing through the distribution bridge 2557 at the loop position. Since the opportunity to do so occurs again, it is possible to continue to entertain the players.

Then, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the distribution bridge 2557 of the distribution section 2552 changes from the loop position to the raised non-loop position, and the loss opening 2009, which had been closed by the distribution bridge 2557, is opened upward. Ru. In this state, the game balls B released from the front edge of the table 2555 and the game balls B rolling on the guide path 2551 will be accepted into the losing port 2009, and the game balls B will not loop and win the lottery prize. The lottery at item 2550 ends. At this time, due to the upright distribution bridge 2557, the distribution display section 2557a shaped like a flag with an x mark stands up and becomes visible, so the distribution display section 2557a displays the game ball B to the player. It can be recognized that there is no loop.

The game ball B received in the losing port 2009 is detected by the losing port sensor 2504, and then delivered to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, and then transferred to the safe ball receiving unit of the lower circulating ball path unit 600. It is discharged to the port 600b.

In this way, according to the lottery accessory 2550 of this embodiment, the game ball B supplied from the accessory prize opening 2006 makes the player nervous and nervous depending on whether or not it is accepted into the second V prize opening 2008. It is possible to entertain the players. Furthermore, even if the game ball B is not accepted into the second V prize opening 2008, when the distribution bridge 2557 of the distribution section 2552 is in the loop position, the game ball B is transferred to the second V prize opening via the hitting section 2553 again. Since the money is sent to the swing gutter 2554 located upstream of the winning opening 2008 and looped, the player is given a chance to be accepted into the second V winning opening 2008 again, giving the player a sense of anticipation again. This makes it possible to entertain the players and prevent them from losing interest.

[8-8f. Normal winning unit]
Next, the normal winning a prize unit 2600 in the front unit 2000 will be explained with reference mainly to FIGS. 78 to 80, FIG. 84, etc. The normal winning hole unit 2600 has a normal winning hole 2002, and is provided near the left end in the gaming area 5a, below the center in the vertical direction. This normal winning opening unit 2600 is provided between the attacker unit 2400 and the guide passage group 2520 in the center accessory 2500, and is provided so that the normal winning opening 2002 is located directly below the exit of the first guiding passage 2521. It is being

The normal winning hole 2002 of the normal winning hole unit 2600 is always open so as to be able to receive the game ball B upward. The game ball B accepted into the normal winning hole 2002 is guided to the rear of the gaming panel 1100, and then delivered to the back ball guidance unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, and after being detected by the normal winning hole sensor 3002, it is sent downward. is discharged to the safe ball socket 600b of the circulating ball path unit 600.

[8-9. Flow of game balls within the gaming area]
Next, the flow of the game balls B within the game area 5a will be explained in detail, mainly with reference to FIG. 84 and the like. When assembled on the game board 5, the center accessory 2500 is provided approximately at the center of the game area 5a. Although not shown, in the game area 5a, in the left and right outer parts and lower part of the center accessory 2500, and in the part between the attacker unit 2400 and the guide passage group 2520 in the center accessory 2500, A plurality of obstacle nails are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement. Further, on the left side of the center accessory 2500 and above the side upper left unit 2300, a windmill (not shown) is provided which rotates when the game ball B comes into contact with it.

On the left side of the center accessory 2500, a plurality of obstacle nails are installed in a predetermined gauge arrangement between the center accessory 2500 and the inner rail 1002. On the left side of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a, the entrance of the warp passage 2512 opens slightly upward from the left in a portion below the vertical center of the inflow regulating portion 2511c of the center frame 2511. There is. A windmill is provided between the warp passage 2512 and the shelf 2301 of the upper left side unit 2300.

The game ball B hit to the left side of the center accessory 2500 enters the warp path 2512 with a certain probability. The game ball B that has entered the warp passage 2512 is supplied to the stage 2513 provided within the frame of the center accessory 2500, rolls on the stage 2513 in the left and right direction, and is released from the center release part 2513a or the side release part 2513b. It is discharged from somewhere to flow back into the gaming area 5a. Since the center release part 2513a of the stage 2513 is provided directly above the first starting port 2003 at the center in the left-right direction within the game area 5a, the game ball B released from the center release part 2513a has a high probability of reaching the first start port 2003. It is accepted into the starting port 2003. The game ball B released from the side release parts 2513b on both the left and right sides of the central release part 2513a is received into the first starting port 2003 with a certain probability.

After the game ball B received in the first starting port 2003 is detected by the first starting port sensor 2101 of the starting port unit 2100, it is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, and is guided to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000. The ball is delivered and discharged downward from the back ball guiding unit 3100. When a game ball B is detected by the first starting port sensor 2101, a privilege is given in which a predetermined number of game balls B are added to the number of balls held, and a state in which a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the first In a state in which the number of reserved special symbols is less than 4), a first special symbol lottery is executed that enables generation of an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player. Note that the first special symbol drawn is also referred to as the first special lottery result.

Game balls B released from the stage 2513 and not received in the first starting port 2003 are received in the out port 2020 and discharged outside the gaming area 5a. The game ball B received at the out port 2020 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 and delivered to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, and then transferred from the back ball guiding unit 3100 to the circulating ball path unit below. 600 is discharged to the out ball socket 600a.

If the game ball B that was hit to the left outside of the center accessory 2500 and did not enter the warp passage 2512 flows to the right of the center of the windmill, there is a high probability that the ball will be hit along the lower side of the center accessory 2500. It flows down to the right along several obstructing nails arranged diagonally. The game ball B that has passed on the right side of the center of the windmill may be accepted into the first starting port 2003 or the general winning port 2001 provided in the side unit 2200. Further, the game ball B that has circulated on the right side of the center of the windmill may be received by the sub-out port 2021 provided in the side unit 2200. Game balls B that are not accepted into the first starting opening 2003, the general winning opening 2001, and the sub-out opening 2021 are accepted into the out opening 2020 and are discharged outside the gaming area 5a.

The game ball B accepted into the general winning hole 2001 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 and then delivered to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, and is detected by the general winning hole sensor 3001 and then downward. is discharged to. When the game ball B is detected by the general winning hole sensor 3001, a privilege of adding a predetermined number of balls to the number of balls held is given.

On the other hand, when the air flows to the left of the center of the wind turbine, it flows down onto the shelf 2301 of the upper left side unit 2300, and flows down the shelf 2301 to the right. The game ball B that has circulated on the left side of the center of the windmill may be accepted into the general prize opening 2001 and the sub-out opening 2021 provided in the side unit 2200. The game ball B received in the sub-out port 2021 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, then delivered to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, and discharged downward from the back ball guiding unit 3100. The game balls B that are not accepted into the general winning opening 2001 and the sub-out opening 2021 are accepted into the out opening 2020 and are discharged outside the gaming area 5a.

Next, on the right side of the center accessory 2500, a guide passage group 2520, an accessory prize opening 2006, a normal prize opening 2002, a second starting opening 2004, a big prize opening 2005, and a sub-out opening 2021 are provided in order from the top. It is being A plurality of obstacle nails are installed between the guide passage group 2520 and the second starting port 2004, respectively.

In the game board 5 of this embodiment, the strength with which the game ball B enters above the part of the upper side of the inflow regulating part 2511c of the center frame 2511 in the center accessory 2500 that becomes lower toward the right from near the center in the left-right direction When the game ball B is hit in, the game ball B flows through either the first guide path 2521 or the second guide path 2522 of the guide path group 2520.

To explain in detail, the game ball B is hit with such force that it contacts the stop portion 1006 that protrudes inward from the outer rail 1001 that forms part of the periphery of the game area 5a (so-called right-handed hitting). ), the game ball B that has come into contact with the stopper 1006 enters the first guide path 2521. The game ball B that has entered the first guide passage 2521 rolls on the upper surface of the accessory prize opening door 2515 that closes the accessory prize opening 2006 in the middle of the first guide passage 2521, and then passes through the guide passage group. It is discharged from the right exit of the lower end of 2520 to the lower normal winning a prize mouth unit 2600 side.

On the other hand, when the game ball B hit above the center accessory 2500 enters the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 and circulates, it is twisted backward and lined up with the first guide passage 2521 in the front-back direction, and then forwards. It is twisted and released from the exit on the left side of the exit of the first guide passage 2521 to the lower normal winning a prize opening unit 2600 side.

Since the normal winning hole 2002 of the normal winning hole unit 2600 is provided directly below the exit of the first guide path 2521, the game ball B that has circulated through the first guide path 2521 has flown through the second guide path 2522. It has a higher possibility of being accepted into the normal winning hole 2002 than the game ball B that has been received.

The game ball B accepted into the normal winning opening 2002 is guided to the rear of the gaming panel 1100, is delivered to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, is detected by the normal winning opening sensor 3002, and is sent downward. is discharged to the safe ball socket 600b of the circulating ball path unit 600. When the game ball B is detected by the normal winning hole sensor 3002, you will be given the privilege of adding a predetermined number to the number of balls you have, and if the predetermined conditions are met (for example, the number of reserved normal symbols is less than 4). state), a normal symbol lottery is executed that allows the game ball B to be accepted into the second starting port 2004. Note that the drawn normal symbols are also referred to as normal lottery results.

After being hit right into the game area 5a and flowing through the guide path group 2520, the game ball B that is not accepted into the normal prize opening 2002 flows down onto the attacker unit 2400 while coming into contact with a plurality of obstacle nails. When the game ball B flows down to the upper shelf section 2421 of the attacker unit 2400, it is guided to the left and downward according to the slope of the upper shelf section 2421, and there is no chance of it being accepted into the second starting port 2004 or the big prize opening 2005, and the attacking unit It is discharged to the left from 2400. Note that the downstream end (left end) of the upper shelf section 2421 of the attacker unit 2400 is located above the first starting port 2003, so the game ball B that has circulated through the upper shelf section 2421 is received into the first starting port 2003. there is a possibility.

On the other hand, when the game ball B flows down to the first shelf 2422 of the attacker unit 2400, it rolls to the left due to the inclination, and rolls over the top surface of the second starting port door 2411 and the second shelf 2423. Then, it is released from the left end of the second shelf section 2423 to the left. Then, the game ball B released from the second shelf 2423 to the left falls onto the third shelf 2424 or the grand prize opening door 2413 depending on its momentum, and rolls to the left due to their inclination. After rolling on the fourth shelf 2425 from the big prize opening door 2413, it is released from the fourth shelf 2425 to the left outside the attacker unit 2400. The game ball B released from the fourth shelf section 2425 is received into the out port 2020.

Furthermore, when the game ball B flows down to the right side of the first shelf 2422 without flowing down to either the upper shelf 2421 or the first shelf 2422 of the attacker unit 2400, it is received in the sub-out port 2021. Further, even if the game ball B flows down onto the first shelf section 2422, when it enters the gap between the second shelf section 2423 and the third shelf section 2424, it will be received by the sub-out port 2021. The game ball B received in the sub-out port 2021 is delivered to the back ball guidance unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 without being returned to the gaming area 5a, and is sent to the out ball receptacle 600a of the lower circulation ball path unit 600. be discharged.

When the game ball B flows down to the first shelf section 2422 of the attacker unit 2400, the game ball B rolls on the second starting port door 2411. Therefore, by accepting the game ball B into the normal winning slot 2002, a "normal win" is drawn as a normal symbol (normal lottery result), and the second starting port door 2411 is moved back by the starting port solenoid 2412, and the second starting port door 2411 is moved back to the second starting port. When the game ball B flows (rolls) from the first shelf 2422 side at the timing when the game ball 2004 is opened, the game ball B is received into the second starting port 2004.

After the game ball B received in the second starting port 2004 is detected by the second starting port sensor 2401, it is transferred to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, and then downward from the back ball guiding unit 3100. is discharged to. When a game ball B is detected by the second starting port sensor 2401, a privilege of adding a predetermined number of balls to the number of balls B is given, and a state where a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the number of reserved second special symbols is 4), a second special symbol lottery is executed that enables the generation of an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player. Note that the second special symbol drawn by lottery is also referred to as a second special lottery result.

In addition, the game ball B that has flowed down to the first shelf 2422 of the attacker unit 2400 and rolled on the second starting opening door 2411 and the second shelf 2423 rolls on the big winning opening door 2413. Therefore, the first special symbol drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first starting port 2003 (first special lottery result), and the second special symbol drawn by receiving the game ball B into the second starting port 2004. (second special lottery result) (for example, when the drawn special symbol (special lottery result) is a "big hit", "medium hit", "small hit", etc.), the attacker solenoid 2414 activates the When the game ball B flows (rolls) from the second shelf 2423 side at the timing when the winning slot door 2413 is retreated and the big winning slot 2005 is open, the gaming ball B enters the big winning slot 2005. accepted.

The game ball B accepted into the big winning hole 2005 is detected by either of the two big winning hole sensors 2402 provided below, and then guided to the rear of the gaming panel 1100 and the back ball of the back unit 3000. After being delivered to the guidance unit 3100, it is discharged to the safe ball socket 600b of the circulating ball path unit 600 below. When the game ball B is detected by the big prize opening sensor 2402, a privilege of adding a predetermined number of balls to the number of balls held is given.

By the way, if the game ball B is received in the first starting port 2003 or the second starting port 2004 and a "yakubutsu hit" is drawn as the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the game ball B will be drawn in the middle of the first guide path 2521. The provided accessory prize opening 2006 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern, and the sorting rotary body 2533 of the first sorting device 2530 and the sorting piece 2543 of the second sorting device 2540 operate in a predetermined pattern. Therefore, when the "accessory prize" is drawn, the accessory prize opening 2006 opens and closes. It is possible to cause the game ball to hit right so that the game ball B flows through the first guide passage 2521 where the prize opening 2006 is provided.

In this embodiment, the "yakuza hit" has a higher probability of being drawn than the "jackpot", and the "yakuza hit" includes "first hit", "second hit", and "third hit". Three patterns are set, each with a winning prize, and in each pattern, the prize opening 2006 opens and closes roughly twice.

First, the opening and closing of the accessory prize opening 2006 in each "accessory prize" will be explained in detail. "First prize win" means that after a certain period of time (3000ms) has passed from the start of execution, the prize winning hole 2006 is open for a short time (80ms), and then closed for a short time (1252ms). After that, it becomes open again for a short time (80 ms) and then becomes closed, completing the process. "Second Accessory Prize Win" means that after a certain period of time (3000ms) has passed since the start of execution, the accessory prize opening 2006 will be in an open state for a short time (80ms), and then it will be in a closed state and "First Accessory Prize Winner" will be entered. After a longer time (5420 ms) has elapsed, the open state is reached for a longer time (9414 ms), and then the closed state is completed. In the case of "winning the third accessory", after a certain period of time (3000ms) has passed from the start of execution, the accessory prize opening 2006 will be open for a short time (80ms), and then it will be in the closed state. After a longer time (19366 ms) has elapsed, the open state is reached for a longer time (9404 ms), and then the closed state is completed.

The second opening state of the accessory prize opening 2006 in the "first prize winning" starts after the time from the start of execution to the completion of the "first prize winning". Further, the second opening state of the accessory prize opening 2006 in the "third prize win" is started after the time from the start of execution to the completion of the "second prize win".

In addition, in the second long open state in the "second role item hit" and "third role item hit", the open state (80 ms) is repeated 8 times at constant intervals (1252 ms). That is, the accessory prize opening 2006 opens and closes (opens) twice for the "first prize win" and nine times for the "second prize win" and "third prize win".

Next, the operation of the sorting rotary body 2533 of the first sorting device 2530 in the "accessory hit" is to rotate counterclockwise at the same time as the start of execution and direct the storage section 2533a upward for a predetermined period of time (3020 ms). When a predetermined period of time (4560 ms) has elapsed since the first accommodation state is achieved and the accommodation state is turned clockwise and the accommodation section 2533a is turned to the right, a longer time than the first time (13446 ms)2 After being in the accommodable state for the first time and being in the unaccommodable state for a short time (500 ms), it becomes the accommodable state for the third time (13446 ms), which is the same time as the second time, and then becomes the unaccommodable state.

The first accommodating state of the sorting rotating body 2533 ends in the middle of the first open state of the accessory prize winning opening 2006 in the "accessory winning" state, and becomes the unaccommodating state. Further, the sorting rotary body 2533 becomes ready for storage for the second time after the time from the start of execution to the time when the "first role item hit" is completed. Therefore, at the time of the "first hit", the control of the sorting rotary body 2533 is completed before the second accommodating state is reached, and the second and third accommodating states are not executed. This distributing rotary body 2533 is configured such that the second accommodating state is started before the second open state of the accessory winning hole 2006 in the "second winning prize", and the second open state is closed. After reaching the state, the state becomes uncontainable.

Further, the sorting rotary body 2533 becomes able to be accommodated for the third time after the time from the start of execution to the time when the "second role item hit" is completed. Therefore, at the time of the "second role item hit", the control of the distribution rotary body 2533 is completed before the third storing possible state is reached, and the third storing possible state is not executed. In other words, the sorting rotary body 2533 is in a state where it can be accommodated once when the "first role item" is hit, twice when the "second role item is hit", and three times when the "third role item is hit". Become. The third accommodating state of the distribution rotary body 2533 is started before the second open state of the accessory prize opening 2006 in the "third prize win", and the second open state ends. After that, it enters the closed state and becomes unaccommodating.

Next, the operation of the sorting piece 2543 of the second sorting device 2540 in "performing a role item" is the first closed state in which it projects forward at the same time as the start of execution and closes the second scarf opening 2541 for a predetermined period of time (3020 ms). (a state in which it can be distributed to the first V prize opening 2007), and then it is moved back and the second prize opening 2541 is in an open state (a state in which it can be distributed to the lottery accessory 2550) for a predetermined time ( After 23006 ms), the second closed state is reached (13446 ms), which is longer than the first open state, and then the open state is reached.

The first closed state of the distribution piece 2543 ends in the middle of the first open state of the accessory winning hole 2006 in the "accessory winning" state, and becomes the open state. In addition, the second sorting device 2540 starts the second closed state of the sorting piece 2543 from the middle of the second open state of the accessory prize opening 2006 in the "third prize winning", and After the opening state of the mouth 2006 changes from the second open state to the closed state, the distribution piece 2543 changes from the closed state to the open state. Therefore, in the second sorting device 2540, the second closing state of the sorting piece 2543 is executed only when the "third role item" is hit, and when the "first role item is hit" or the "second role item is hit" At this time, the second closing state of the distribution piece 2543 is not executed.

For this reason, in the "first prize winning", the opening and closing of the prize winning opening 2006 is executed twice in a short period of time, so the first guide passage 2521 is circulated by "right hit". There is a low possibility that the game ball B will be accepted into the accessory prize opening 2006. In addition, since the first open state of the accessory prize opening 2006 in the "second prize winning" and "third prize winning" is also short, the game ball B is accepted into the prize winning opening 2006. Unlikely. In addition, the time when the first accommodating state of the sorting rotary body 2533 in the first sorting device 2530 overlaps with the first open state of the prize winning opening 2006 in "winning a prize" Since the time is shorter than the time when the opening 2006 is opened for the first time, the game ball B received in the opening 2006 when the opening 2006 is open for the first time is stored in the distributing rotating body 2533. The possibility of being accommodated in section 2533a is even lower. Since the first accommodating state of the distributing rotary body 2533 and the first closed state of the distributing piece 2543 in the second distributing device 2540 are completed at the same time, the distributing rotary body 2533 At the time of the first accommodation possible state, the game balls B accommodated in the accommodation section 2533a are not distributed to the first V prize opening 2007 side.

On the other hand, since the second opening state of the prize winning hole 2006 in the "second prize win" and "third prize win" takes a long time, the game ball B passes through the first guide path 2521 and enters the prize winning hole. There is a high possibility that it will be accepted into the cash prize opening 2006. At this time, the sorting rotating body 2533 of the first sorting device 2530 is in a state where it can be accommodated before the accessory prize opening 2006 is in the open state, and then the accessory prize opening 2006 is changed from the open state to the closed state. Since the state becomes impossible to accommodate after this, there is a high possibility that the game ball B received in the accessory prize opening 2006 in the second open state will be accommodated in the accommodation section 2533a of the sorting rotary body 2533. .

In this way, in this example, the possibility that the game ball B will be accepted into the accessory prize opening 2006 in the first opening state of the accessory prize opening 2006 in the "second prize win" and "third prize win" is In addition to being low, there is a low possibility that the game ball B received in the accessory prize opening 2006 will be accommodated in the storage section 2533a of the sorting rotary body 2533 when the accessory prize opening 2006 is opened for the first time. Even though the level is still lower, at the same time as the execution of the per-accessory game state starts, the sorting rotary body 2533 is rotated counterclockwise to turn the storage section 2533a upward into a storage ready state, and the storage is continued for a predetermined period (3020 ms). After the portion 2533a is directed upward, it is rotated clockwise to bring the storage portion 2533a to the right and into an unaccommodable state. That is, although there is a low possibility that the distribution rotary body 2533 will distribute the game ball B to the chance opening 2531 side immediately after the start of the game state for winning the accessory, the distribution rotation body 2533 will distribute the game ball B to the chance opening 2531 side. The sorting operation by the sorting rotating body 2533 is shown in advance by executing the sorting operation.

Similarly, although it is unlikely that the distribution rotary body 2533 will distribute the game ball B to the chance opening 2531 side immediately after the start of the game state for winning the accessory, the second distribution will occur at the same time as the execution of the game state for winning the accessory starts. By protruding the distribution piece 2543 of the device 2540 forward and closing the second prize opening 2541, it becomes possible to distribute to the first V prize opening 2007, and after a predetermined time (3020 ms) has elapsed, it moves back and closes the second prize opening 2541. When 2541 is released, it is arranged to be distributed to lottery accessory 2550. That is, although there is a low possibility that the distribution piece 2543 will distribute the game ball B to the first V prize opening 2007 side immediately after the start of the winning role game state, the distribution piece 2543 will distribute the game ball B to the first V prize winning hole. The sorting operation by the sorting piece 2543 is shown in advance by executing the sorting operation toward the mouth 2007 side.

In this example, the distribution rotary body 2533 and the distribution piece 2543 are activated at the same time as the start of execution of the game state for winning a role object, that is, the effect at the start of the game state for winning a role object (the opening effect of the game state for winning a role object, for example, " Aim for the prize winning opening 2006, etc.), where the explanation of the game is performed in the game state of winning the prize. The mouth 2006 is opened for the first time. This reduces the possibility of the distribution rotary body 2533 distributing the game balls B to the chance opening 2531 side and the distribution piece 2543 distributing the game balls B to the second slot 2541 side. . In addition, there is no possibility or there is no possibility that the distribution rotary body 2533 will distribute the game balls B to the chance opening 2531 side and the distribution piece 2543 will distribute the game balls B to the second slot 2541 side. If it is low, the accessory prize opening 2006 may be opened for the first time at the same time as the distribution rotating body 2533 and the distribution piece 2543 operate.

Alternatively, only one of the distribution rotating body 2533 and the distribution piece 2543 may be operated in advance, and the other may not be operated in advance. That is, among the plurality of movable parts (distributing rotary body 2533, distributing piece 2543) that distribute the winning game balls B in the accessory prize opening 2006, some movable parts are operated in advance to show the distributing operation. , other movable parts may not be operated in advance. For example, the sorting piece 2543 that has a high possibility of causing the game ball B to enter the V winning hole (in this example, the first V winning hole 2007) by operating (high expectation of V winning) is not activated in advance. In advance, only the sorting rotary body 2533 that has a lower possibility of entering the V winning hole (second V winning hole 2008 in this example) than the sorting piece 2543 (lower expectation of V winning) You may also make it work. As a result, although it is possible to know in advance some of the destinations to which the game ball B that won the prize winning hole 2006 will be distributed, the other distribution destinations can be kept unknown, and the other distribution destinations are clear. When the game ball B is distributed, the number of destinations to which it is distributed increases, which can surprise the players and increase their expectations.It also makes it possible to draw attention to the game ball B that is distributed and enjoy its movement, thereby reducing the decrease in interest in the game. Can be suppressed.

In addition, by not operating the movable part (distributing piece 2543) with high expectation of winning V in advance, its existence is concealed and the player is made to think that the game ball B will enter the lottery accessory 2550. When the "Third Role Win" is executed, the movable part (distributing piece 2543) with a high expectation of winning V operates and moves the game ball B into the V winning opening (in this example, the first V winning opening 2007). By doing so, it is possible to provide a sense of surprise, and to increase the interest in the game by allowing the game ball B to enter an unexpected destination. In addition, the allocation to the first V prize opening 2007 side as the distribution destination is hidden, making it possible to make people think that there are only two distribution destinations: the first prize opening 2532 side and the lottery accessory 2550 side, and the "third prize winning" Even if the ``second winning object'' with a lower expectation of winning than V is executed and game balls B are distributed to the lottery accessory object 2550 side, the player is not disappointed.

Furthermore, in this example, the distribution rotary body 2533 is arranged in such a manner that it can be easily recognized by the player, whereas the distribution piece 2543 is shaped like a flat plate that moves forward and backward from the game board 5, and has an area on the front side. Since the area is narrow, it is difficult to notice the movement even if it is operating. Furthermore, it is difficult for the player to notice the passage on the first V prize opening 2007 side, which can be entered by the distribution piece 2543 protruding forward. Therefore, when the game ball B hits the third role object, the distribution piece 2543 operates and the behavior of the game ball B when it enters the first V prize opening 2007 becomes difficult to notice, and the game ball It is possible to give the player a feeling as if a 15R jackpot has been executed because a V prize suddenly occurs without making the player aware that B has entered the first V prize opening 2007.

In addition, by operating the distributing rotary body 2533 in advance during the opening performance of the game state for winning a prize, the distributing rotary body 2533 can be used in addition to the instructions in the opening performance, such as "Aim for the prize winning opening 2006." The operation of 2533 also allows the player to easily recognize the destination of the hit, that is, the position to aim at during the game state of winning the accessory.

When the "accessory prize" is drawn as described above and the accessory prize opening 2006 is in the open state, the game ball B that has flowed down the first guide passage 2521 is accepted into the accessory prize opening 2006. When the winning prize is received, it is detected by the accessory prize opening sensor 2501 and then sent to the first sorting device 2530. When the game ball B is detected by the accessory prize opening sensor 2501, a privilege such as adding a predetermined number of balls to the number of balls held is provided.

Among the "accessory prizes", in the "second prize winning", when the prize winning opening 2006 is in the open state for the second time, the sorting piece 2543 of the second distributing device 2540 is in the open state. When the minute rotating body 2533 rotates from the accommodating state to the unaccommodating state, the game balls B accommodated in the accommodating portion 2533a flow down to the second sorting device 2540 side through the chance opening 2531, It flows from the opening 2541 through the lottery guide path 2545, is detected by the lottery accessory entry sensor 2546, and is then sent to the lottery accessory 2550.

In the lottery accessory 2550, the distribution bridge 2557 in the non-loop position is in the loop position. For example, in response to the opening of the second skirting port 2541 due to the retreat of the distribution piece 2543 in the second distribution device 2540, the distribution bridge 2557 is placed in the loop position. Then, the game ball B sent from the second sorting device 2540 to the lottery accessory 2550 rolls to the left on the guide path 2551, passes through the sorting bridge 2557 at the loop position, and is sent to the hitting section 2553. Then, the game ball B sent to the striking section 2553 is supplied to the swinging gutter 2554 provided at the center rear end of the table 2555 by the striking of the striking piece 2560 rotating at high speed, and from the swinging gutter 2554. It will be released onto the table 2555.

The game ball B released onto the table 2555 rolls forward due to its inclination, and is accepted into the second V prize opening 2008 provided at the center front end of the table 2555 or from the front edge of the table 2555. Either it is released forward (to the guideway 2551) or it moves. When the game ball B is released forward from the front edge of the table 2555, if the distribution bridge 2557 is still in the loop position, the game ball B is supplied to the hitting section 2553 through the distribution bridge 2557. That will happen. Therefore, when the distribution bridge 2557 is in the loop position, until the game ball B is received into the second V prize opening 2008, the game ball B is sent to the hitting part 2553, the swing gutter 2554, the table 2555, and the guideway 2551. Loops in this order.

Then, the game ball B is accepted into the second V winning hole 2008, or the game ball B is received into the losing hole 2009, which is opened when the distribution bridge 2557 is in the non-loop position after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. , the lottery for winning the V prize with the lottery accessory 2550 ends.

The game ball B accepted into the second V winning hole 2008 is detected by the second V winning hole sensor 2503, and then passed through the back ball guidance unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 to the safe of the circulating ball path unit 600 below. The ball is discharged to the ball socket 600b. On the other hand, the game ball B received in the losing port 2009 is detected by the losing port sensor 2504, and then passes through the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 to the safe ball socket 600b of the lower circulation ball path unit 600. is discharged. When the game ball B is detected by the second V winning hole sensor 2503, a privilege is given in which the big winning hole 2005 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern.

By the way, in the "third winning prize", when the prize winning opening 2006 is open for the second time, the sorting piece 2543 of the second sorting device 2540 is in the closed state, so the sorting rotary body 2533 is not accommodated. When the game ball B is rotated from the possible state to the non-accommodating state, the game ball B accommodated in the accommodating portion 2533a passes through the chance opening 2531 and comes into contact with the upper surface of the distributing piece 2543 in the closed state of the second distributing device 2540. The player is guided to the right and enters (is accepted) into the first V prize opening 2007. After the game ball B that has entered the first V winning hole 2007 is detected by the first V winning hole sensor 2502, it is passed through the back ball guidance unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 to the safe ball receiver of the lower circulation ball path unit 600. It is discharged to the port 600b. When the game ball B is detected by the first V winning hole sensor 2502, a privilege is given in which the big winning hole 2005 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern.

In this embodiment, in the lottery of the special symbols of the first special symbol and the second special symbol in which the big prize opening 2005 and the accessory prize opening 2006 open and close to generate an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous, the first start While the opening 2003 is always open to accept the game ball B, when the second starting opening 2004 receives the game ball B into the normal winning opening 2002 and the normal lottery is "normal winning". Only the game balls B can be accepted in a predetermined pattern. Thereby, the first starting port 2003 has a higher possibility of receiving the game ball B than the second starting port 2004.

For this reason, under normal conditions, the player is asked to direct the game ball B so that it flows down the left side of the center accessory 2500 so that the game ball B is received in the first starting port 2003. It is possible to perform the driving operation of the game ball B, to show the movement of the game ball B guided by the plurality of obstacle nails, and to enjoy the original game of the pachinko machine 1 using the game ball B. It is possible to increase expectations for receiving the game ball B into the mouth 2003.

Then, by receiving the game ball B into the first starting port 2003, the lottery result of the first special symbol is a "hit" (for example, "small hit", "medium hit", "big hit", "accessory hit"). , etc.) is drawn, the grand prize opening 2005 or the accessory prize opening 2006 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern. It is possible to enjoy the driving operation of the game ball B aiming at the right side of the object 2500 (so-called "right-handed hitting"), and the feeling of anticipation for the acceptance of the game ball B into the grand prize opening 2005 or the accessory prize opening 2006. can be made to increase.

When hitting the game ball B to the right side of the center accessory 2500, a guide passage group 2520 consisting of a first guide passage 2521 and a second guide passage 2522 is provided on the right side of the center accessory 2500, and a variety of Since it has a flow path, it is possible to adjust the driving force of the game ball B so that the game ball B flows through the desired flow path, and it is possible to adjust the driving force of the game ball B so that the game ball B flows through the desired flow path. It can be fun to operate.

In addition, a normal winning slot 2002 is provided on the right side of the center accessory 2500, and a normal lottery is held in which when the game ball B is accepted into the normal winning slot 2002, the second starting slot 2004 can be accepted. Therefore, the player can be entertained depending on whether or not the game ball B hit on the right side passes through the normal winning hole 2002. The player can also be entertained depending on whether or not the game ball B is accepted in 2004. At this time, since the normal winning hole 2002 is provided directly below the exit of the first guide passage 2521 in the guide passage group 2520, it is possible to enjoy the driving operation of the game ball B aiming at the first guide passage 2521. I can do it.

Furthermore, in the accessory prize opening 2006, one game ball B that has been accepted and sorted by the first sorting device 2530 is placed in either the first V prize opening 2007 or the second slot 2541 in the second sorting device 2540. Since the game ball B is allocated to the first V prize opening 2007 or not, it is possible to make the player nervous and nervous. Even if the game ball B is sorted to the second slot 2541 in the second sorting device 2540, the game ball B is a lottery accessory provided conspicuously in the center of the lower part of the center accessory 2500. 2550, the lottery accessory 2550 can create a sense of expectation for the acceptance of the game ball B into the second V winning hole 2008. After that, depending on whether or not the game ball B rolling on the table 2555 of the lottery accessory 2550 is accepted into the second V prize opening 2008, the player can be made excited and excited again, and the player is entertained. It is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

When the game ball B is accepted into the first V winning hole 2007 or the second V winning hole 2008, or when the game ball B is received into the first starting hole 2003 and the second starting hole 2004, the first special When a "jackpot" is drawn as the symbol and the second special symbol, the jackpot 2005 of the attacker unit 2400 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern, giving an opportunity for many game balls B to be added to the number of balls you have. Therefore, it is possible to make the player perform a driving operation of the game ball B aiming at the right side of the center accessory 2500 so that the game ball B is accepted into the opening and closing grand prize opening 2005, thereby making it more enjoyable and interesting for the player. It is possible to suppress the decrease in .

[8-10. Overall configuration of back unit]
Next, the overall configuration of the back unit 3000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to FIGS. 82 and 83. The back unit 3000 includes a vibration sensor 1040 (see FIG. 93) that detects vibrations acting on the game board 5 (pachinko machine 1), and a game ball that has been accepted into the general prize opening 2001 and guided to the rear of the game panel 1100. A general winning hole sensor 3001 that detects the ball B, and a normal winning hole sensor 3002 that detects the game ball B accepted into the normal winning hole 2002 and guided to the rear of the game panel 1100. The general winning hole sensor 3001 and the normal winning hole sensor 3002 are provided in the back ball guiding unit 3100.

The back unit 3000 includes a back box 3010 that is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 and has a box-like shape with an open front and a square opening 3010a on the rear wall, and It is provided with a lock slider 3020 that is slidable in the left-right direction and for attaching and detaching the effect display device 1600, and a back board unit 3040 that is attached to the rear wall of the back box 3010 so as to be rotatable with a hinge.

The back board unit 3040 includes a board box 3041 that is L-shaped when viewed from the front and has a thin box shape in the front and back, and a panel relay board and a performance drive board (not shown) housed in the board box 3041. We are prepared. The substrate box 3041 has two shaft portions 3041a rotatably supported by the shaft support 3010f of the back box 3010 on the outer side of the L-shaped vertically extending portion. Further, the board box 3041 has a locking claw 3041b that is locked to the locking portion 3010g of the back box 3010 at the tip of the L-shaped portion extending left and right.

Furthermore, the back unit 3000 includes a back ball guiding unit 3100 which is provided at the lower part near the front end inside the back box 3010 and through which the game balls B guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 circulate, and a back ball guiding unit 3100 through which the game balls B guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 circulate; A back decoration unit 3200 provided after the guidance unit 3100, a back front presentation unit 3300 provided in the back box 3010 to the left and above of the back ball guidance unit 3100 near the front end, and A back and rear performance unit 3400 provided behind a back and front performance unit 3300 are provided.

The back ball guiding unit 3100 is attached to the front surface of the back decoration unit 3200. The back decoration unit 3200 is attached to the front surface of the rear wall of the back box 3010 via a mounting supporter (not shown). The left end side of the back front presentation unit 3300 is attached near the front end of the back box 3010, and the right end side is attached to the front surface of the right end side of the back back presentation unit 3400. The upper part of the rear effect unit 3400 is attached to the front of the rear wall of the rear box 3010 via an attachment supporter (not shown), and the lower part is attached to the rear decoration unit 3200.

The back decoration unit 3200, the back front effect unit 3300, and the back rear effect unit 3400 in the back unit 3000 are capable of showing predetermined movable effects and light emitting effects to the player according to the progress of the game.

[8-10a. Back box]
Next, the back box 3010 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to FIGS. 82, 83, and the like. The back box 3010 is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 (panel holder 1120), and the production unit is attached to the inside of the box, and the production display device 1600 and the back board unit 3040 are attached to the rear surface. It is. The back box 3010 is formed transparent. This allows the inside to be viewed from the outside even when assembled on the game board 5.

The back box 3010 is box-shaped with an open front and has an opening 3010a penetrating the rear wall in a square manner, and a mounting surface 3010b provided at the lower side of the opening 3010a on which the effect display device 1600 is placed. , two fixing grooves 3010c recessed upward from the inside of the frame on the upper side of the opening 3010a, and two fixing grooves 3010c provided on the lower side near the center in the left-right direction of the mounting surface 3010b, so that the lock slider 3020 can move left and right. A locking mechanism section 3010d that is slidably attached is provided.

The opening 3010a of the back box 3010 is formed in a rectangular shape with an aspect ratio of 3:4 when viewed from the front. The opening 3010a is formed to have approximately the same size in the left-right direction as the left-right direction of the rear wall of the back box 3010. Further, the opening 3010a is provided at a position where the vertical direction is offset (eccentric) upward with respect to the vertical center of the back box 3010. The opening 3010a is formed to have the same size as the liquid crystal spacer 1610 (19-inch liquid crystal display device).

The upper fixing piece 1611 of the liquid crystal spacer 1610 to which the effect display device 1600 is attached from below is inserted into the two fixing grooves 3010c of the back box 3010. Further, the lower fixing piece 1612 of the liquid crystal spacer 1610 to which the production display device 1600 is attached is inserted from the rear into the locking mechanism portion 3010d of the back box 3010 with the lock slider 3020 slid to the left in rear view. I can do it. When the lock slider 3020 is slid to the right in rear view with the lower fixing piece 1612 of the liquid crystal spacer 1610 inserted into the locking mechanism section 3010d, the lock slider 3020 prevents the lower fixing piece 1612 from moving backward. A liquid crystal spacer 1610 (effect display device 1600) can be attached.

Further, the back box 3010 includes a flat plate-shaped fixing piece portion 3010e extending outward from the front end. This fixed piece portion 3010e is attached to the game panel 1100 with the front surface in contact with the rear surface of the game panel 1100.

Furthermore, the back box 3010 has a pair of shaft supports 3010f that can rotatably support the shaft portion 3041a of the back board unit 3040 around an axis extending in the vertical direction, and a pair of shaft supports 3010f on the rear surface. is provided on the rear surface on the opposite side in the left-right direction, and includes a locking portion 3010g to which the locking claw 3041b of the back board unit 3040 is locked.

In the back box 3010, the back board unit 3040 can be attached to the rear side of the back box 3010 by straddling the opening 3010a (liquid crystal spacer 1610 and effect display device 1600) by means of a pair of shaft supports 3010f and a locking portion 3010g. When assembled into the game board 5, the L-shaped vertically extending portion of the back board unit 3040 is located to the left of the peripheral control unit 1500 when viewed from the rear. Further, an L-shaped portion of the back board unit 3040 extending left and right is located below the peripheral control unit 1500.

When the back box 3010 is assembled to the game board 5, the locking claws 3041b of the back board unit 3040 that are locked to the locking portions 3010g are released, and the locking claws 3041b are moved rearward about the shaft portion 3041a. By rotating the liquid crystal spacer 1610 so as to move it, the rear part of the liquid crystal spacer 1610 attached to the back box 3010 can be opened, and the liquid crystal spacer 1610, that is, the effect display can be opened without removing the back board unit 3040 from the back box 3010. Device 1600 can be attached and detached.

In addition, the back box 3010 has a plurality of functional holes including a set of two through holes arranged vertically or horizontally, which are provided on the surface facing the front and back direction excluding the fixed piece portion 3010e, and a pachinko machine. It has a functional surface facing in the front-rear direction that can be used when assembling the machine 1 (gaming board 5). The two through holes of the functional hole section have the same diameter. The functional hole is for attaching the production unit to the back box 3010 directly or via an attachment supporter.

[8-10b. Back ball guidance unit]
Next, the back ball guiding unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 will be explained mainly with reference to FIG. 82 and the like. The back ball guide unit 3100 is provided in the lower part of the back box 3010 near the front end, and is attached to the back box 3010 via the back decoration unit 3200. The back ball guiding unit 3100 includes a general winning hole sensor 3001 that detects the game ball B accepted in the general winning hole 2001, a normal winning hole sensor 3002 that detects the game ball B accepted in the normal winning hole 2002, and a game A plurality of magnetic sensors 1030 capable of detecting illegal magnetism acting within the region 5a are provided.

The back ball guiding unit 3100 has a general winning opening 2001, a normal winning opening 2002, a first starting opening 2003, a second starting opening 2004, a big winning opening 2005, a first V winning opening 2007, and a second V winning opening in the front unit 2000. 2008, the game ball B received in the loss port 2009 and the first slot port 2532 is received at the rear of the game panel 1100, and after being guided to the vicinity of the center in the left-right direction, the safe ball of the lower circulating ball path unit 600 is received. It can be discharged to the socket 600b. In addition, the back ball guiding unit 3100 receives the game ball B received at the out port 2020 and the sub out port 2021 in the front unit 2000 at the rear of the game panel 1100, guides it to the vicinity of the center in the left and right direction, and then downwards. can be discharged to the out ball socket 600a of the circulating ball path unit 600.

[8-10c. Back decoration unit]
Next, the back decoration unit 3200 in the back unit 3000 will be explained mainly with reference to FIGS. 82, 83, and the like. The back decoration unit 3200 is provided after the back ball guiding unit 3100 in the back box 3010, and is attached to the front surface of the rear wall of the back box 3010 via an attachment supporter. A vibration sensor 1040 is attached to the back decoration unit 3200. A back ball guiding unit 3100 is attached to the front surface of this back decoration unit 3200.

The back decoration unit 3200, when assembled on the game board 5, includes a back lower left decoration body 3210, a back lower right decoration body 3220, and a back lower left decoration body 3210 and a back lower right decoration body 3220, which decorate the rear parts of the left and right outer sides of the lottery accessory 2550 in the center accessory 2500. It includes a back lower left decorative board and a back lower right decorative board (not shown) on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted to decorate the left decorative body 3210 and the back lower right decorative body 3220 with light emission, respectively.

The back lower left decorative body 3210 and the back lower right decorative body 3220 are translucent, and have a plurality of projections and depressions resembling a miniature town on their upper surfaces. The back lower left decorative board and the back lower right decorative board are provided below the back lower left decorative body 3210 and the back lower right decorative body 3220, respectively, and a plurality of LEDs (full color LEDs) are mounted on the upper surface. . By appropriately emitting light from the LEDs mounted on the back lower left decorative board and the back lower right decorative board, the lower back left decorative body 3210 and the lower back right decorative body 3220 can be decorated with light.

[8-10d. Back-front production unit]
Next, the back and front presentation unit 3300 in the back unit 3000 will be explained mainly with reference to FIGS. 78 to 80, FIG. 82, and the like. The back and front production unit 3300 is provided to the left and above the back ball guiding unit 3100 near the front end inside the back box 3010, and the left end side is attached near the front end of the back box 3010, and the right end side is attached to the back and rear direction. It is attached to the right end side of the production unit 3400.

The back and front presentation unit 3300 includes a back and front left decorative body 3301 which is provided on the left end side and has a vertically long flat plate shape, and a back and front elevating decorative body which is provided on the right side of the back and front left decorative body 3301 so as to be movable up and down. unit 3310, and a back and front lifting mechanism 3350 for raising and lowering the back and front lifting decoration unit 3310.

The back-front left decorative body 3301 of the back-front presentation unit 3300 is provided with a magnetic sensor 1030 located at a lower position from the center in the vertical direction. The back front left decorative body 3301 extends vertically with substantially the same length as the total height inside the back box 3010, and has translucency. After the back front left decorative body 3301, there is provided a back front left decorative board (not shown) on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted. By appropriately causing the LEDs on the back front left decorative board to emit light, the back front left decorative body can be decorated with light.

The back and front lifting decoration unit 3310 is formed to be long in the left and right direction. The back and front lifting decoration unit 3310 includes a back and front lifting base 3311 which is a transparent flat plate that is long from side to side, and a back and front central decoration 3320 which is attached to the center of the front of the back and front lifting base 3311 and has a production count display section 3005. , a back front middle left decorative body 3330 attached to the left side of the back front central decorative body 3320 on the front surface of the back front lifting base 3311, and a back front center left decorative body 3330 attached to the right side of the back front central decorative body 3320 on the front side of the back front lifting base 3311. A back front middle right decorative body 3340 is attached.

The back front center decoration body 3320 includes a back front center decoration part 3321 formed into a three-dimensional predetermined shape, and a back front center decoration provided after the back front center decoration part 3321 and equipped with a plurality of LEDs. It has a base plate (not shown), and a front back center base 3323 that supports the back front center decorative board and the back front center decoration part 3321 from the rear and is attached to the back front lift base 3311. The back-front center decoration part 3321 has a part that three-dimensionally imitates a pine pattern, and a performance count display part 3005 consisting of four 7-segment displays is provided in this part. The effect count display section 3005 uses some of the plurality of LEDs mounted on the back front central decorative board.

The back front middle left decorative body 3330 includes a back front middle left decorative part 3331 which is formed in a relief shape imitating the head of a predetermined character and has translucency, and a back front middle left decorative part 3331. The back front middle left decorative board (not shown) provided at the rear and on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted, the back front middle left decorative board, and the back front middle left decorative part 3331 are supported from the rear, and the back front lifts and lowers. It has a back front middle left base 3333 attached to the base 3311. The back front center left decorative body 3330 can decorate the back front center left decorative portion 3331 with light emission by appropriately causing the LEDs on the back front center left decorative board to emit light.

The back front middle right decorative body 3340 includes a back front middle right decorative part 3341 which is formed in a relief shape imitating the head of a predetermined character and has translucency, and a back front middle right decorative part 3341. The back front middle right decorative board (not shown) provided at the rear and on which multiple LEDs are mounted, the back front middle right decorative board and the back front middle right decorative part 3341 are supported from the rear, and the back front lifts and lowers. It has a back front middle right base 3343 attached to the base 3311. The back front middle right decorative body 3340 can decorate the back front middle right decorative portion 3341 with light emission by appropriately causing the LEDs on the back front middle right decorative board to emit light.

The back front lifting mechanism 3350 includes a back front left lifting rail (not shown) which is provided after the back front left decorative body 3301 and supports the left end side of the back front lifting decoration unit 3310 so as to be able to rise and fall; A back front right lifting rail 3352 that supports the right end side of the front lifting decoration unit 3310 so as to be able to rise and fall; and a back side that is provided after the back front left decoration unit 3301 and is used to raise and lower the back front lifting decoration unit 3310. A front elevation drive unit (not shown) is provided. Although not shown, the back and front lifting mechanism 3350 includes a drop solenoid for dropping the back and front lifting decoration unit 3310 from the raised standby position, and a dropping solenoid for dropping the back and front lifting decoration unit 3310 downward. It has a back and front lift drive motor that raises it from the fallen performance position to the upper standby position.

The back and front lifting decoration unit 3310 of the back and front production unit 3300 is provided so as to be visible from the front through the frame of the center accessory 2500 when assembled on the game board 5. In a normal state, the back and front presentation unit 3300 is located at a standby position where the back and front lifting decoration unit 3310 is at the upper end of movement, and is prevented from falling downward by the locking claw. In a normal state, the back and front lifting decoration unit 3310 is located near the upper end of the display screen of the effect display device 1600, as shown in FIG. 78 and the like.

In addition, when the back and front lifting decoration unit 3310 of the back and front presentation unit 3300 is in the standby position which is a normal state, the back and rear lifting and lowering decoration unit 3310 of the back and front presentation unit 3400 at the retracted position is located behind it. This makes the back elevation decorative body 3410 invisible from the front.

The back and front effect unit 3300 can be changed from the normal state to a state in which the back and front elevating decoration unit 3310 can be dropped from the standby position to the lower effect position by moving the elevating slider to the lower end side using the back and front elevating drive motor. Become. Then, from this state, when the locking by the lock claw is released by the drop solenoid, the back and front lifting decoration unit 3310 freely falls toward the standby position. In the state where the back-front elevating decoration unit 3310 has fallen to the performance position, the back-front elevating decoration unit 3310 is located above the lottery accessory 2550 of the center accessory 2500 and slightly below the vertical center of the game area 5a. It is located nearby.

When the back and front elevating decoration unit 3310 falls to the production position, the back and rear elevating decoration 3410 at the retracted position of the back and rear production unit 3400 provided at the rear becomes visible from the front. Thereby, it is possible to surprise the player and also make the player think that something good will happen to him (an opportunity has arrived).

Note that a damper is provided at the lower part of the back and front lifting mechanism 3350 to absorb or alleviate the impact caused by the falling back and front lifting decoration unit 3310.

The back and front lifting decoration unit 3310 that has fallen to the production position rises to the upper standby position by upward movement of the lift slider by the back and front lift drive motor, and the locking claw is automatically locked to the standby position. The state will be restored.

This back-front production unit 3300 has a production count display section 3005 consisting of four 7-segment displays on the back-front lifting decoration unit 3310 (back-front center decoration body 3320). By executing a countdown display in which the displayed number decreases, it is possible to show the player a countdown effect in which the back and front elevating decoration unit 3310 falls. In addition, in the countdown effect, the back and rear elevation decorations 3410 may be moved to the lower appearance position without dropping the back and front elevation decoration unit 3310, or the back and front elevation decoration unit 3310 may be dropped and the back The rear elevation decorative body 3410 may be moved to a lower appearance position.

[8-10e. Behind-the-scenes production unit]
Next, the back and rear effect unit 3400 in the back unit 3000 will be explained mainly with reference to FIGS. 82, 83, and the like. The back and rear effect unit 3400 is provided after the back and front effect unit 3300 in the back box 3010, and the upper part is attached to the rear wall of the back box 3010 via an attachment supporter, and the lower part is connected to the back decoration unit 3200. installed on. The back and rear effect unit 3400 includes a back and rear lifting decorative body 3410 that is long in the left and right directions, and a back and rear lifting and lowering mechanism 3450 for raising and lowering the back and rear lifting and lowering decorations 3410.

The back elevation decoration body 3410 in the back rear effect unit 3400 is provided with a back elevation decoration part 3411 that is long and translucent in the left and right directions, and is provided after the back elevation decoration part 3411, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted. a rear rear elevating decorative board (not shown); a back elevating base (not shown) that supports the back elevating decorative board and the rear elevating decorative part from the rear and is raised and lowered by a rear rear elevating mechanism 3450; It is equipped with The rear rear elevation decoration part 3411 has a logo part 3411a which is provided over the entire length in the left and right direction and is made up of a predetermined logo, and is provided in a relief shape above the logo part 3411a and has a back front elevation decoration unit 3310. has a character section 3411b in which a plurality of different characters are arranged in rows on the left and right. By appropriately emitting light from the LEDs on the rear rear elevation decoration board, the rear rear elevation decoration portion 3411 can be decorated with light.

The rear lifting mechanism 3450 in the rear rear production unit 3400 includes a U-shaped rear rear base 3451 that is open downward, and a flat plate-shaped back that is provided on the front side of the upper side of the rear base 3451 and has translucent properties. It includes a rear fixed decorative part 3452 and a rear fixed decorative board 3453 provided between the rear fixed decorative part 3452 and the rear base 3451 and on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted. The rear fixed decoration part 3452 is formed to have approximately the same length in the left-right direction as the rear lifting decoration body 3410, and has a predetermined pattern on the front surface. By appropriately lighting the LEDs on the back fixed decorative board 3453, the back fixed decorative portion 3452 can be decorated with light.

Although not shown, the rear rear lifting mechanism 3450 includes a rear rear left rail that is provided on the left side of the rear rear base 3451 and supports the left end side of the rear rear lifting decorative body 3410 so as to be able to rise and lower; A rear right rail that is provided on the right side of the rear base 3451 and supports the right end of the rear rear elevating decorative body 3410 so that it can rise and fall; It has a rear elevation drive section for raising and lowering the.

The rear rear elevation drive unit has a rear rear elevation drive motor, and by driving the rear rear elevation drive motor, the rear elevation decoration body 3410 is moved between a retracted position, which is an upper moving end, and an appearance, which is a lower moving end. The back elevation decorative body 3410 can be raised and lowered between the retracted position and the emergent position, and can be stopped at any position between the retracted position and the emergent position.

In a normal state, the rear effect unit 3400 is in a retracted position where the rear elevation decorative body 3410 is at the upper end of movement. In this state, the rear rear lifting decorative body 3410 is located in front of the rear fixed decoration part 3452 of the rear lifting mechanism 3450. Therefore, the rear fixed decoration part 3452 is hidden from view from the front by the rear lifting decoration part 3410 in the retracted position.

This back and rear effect unit 3400 is provided after the back and front effect unit 3300 when assembled to the game board 5. Therefore, in a normal state, the back and front effect unit 3300 is located in front of the back and rear elevating decorative body 3410. The back front elevating decoration unit 3310 is located at the standby position, and is hidden by the back front elevating decoration unit 3310 so that it cannot be seen from the front.

When the back side effect unit 3400 moves the back side elevation decorative body 3410 from the normal state to the appearance position, which is the lower end of the movement, by driving the back side elevation drive motor of the back side elevation mechanism 3450, the back side of the standby position is moved. It is located below the front elevating decoration unit 3310 and slightly above the vertical center of the game area 5a. As a result, the back elevation decorative body 3410 becomes visible from the player side.

Note that even when the rear rear lifting decoration unit 3410 is moved downward from the retracted position, when the back front lifting decoration unit 3310 is in the standby position, the back front lifting decoration unit 3310 is placed in front of the back fixed decoration part 3452. , the rear fixed decoration part 3452 cannot be seen from the front. Therefore, when the rear rear elevating decoration unit 3410 is moved from the retracted position to the lower side (appearance position) and the back front elevating decoration unit 3310 is dropped from the standby position to the lower production position, the rear fixed decoration part 3452 is moved for the first time. becomes visible from the front. Thereby, a premium feeling can be imparted to the visibility of the back fixed decorative portion 3452.

When the back and front elevating decoration unit 3310 is dropped to the production position with the back and rear elevating decoration 3410 moved to the lower appearance position, the rear elevating and lowering decoration part 3411 of the back and rear elevating decoration 3410 is moved. In front of the logo part 3411a, the back front elevating decoration unit 3310 is located, and the logo part 3411a is hidden, and the character part 3411b, in which a plurality of characters are arranged in a row, is located in front of the back front elevating decoration unit. 3310, facing forward from above (see FIG. 92).

By reversing the back lifting drive motor of the back lifting mechanism 3450 with the rear lifting decoration 3410 moved to the appearance position, the rear lifting decoration 3410 can be raised and returned to the retracted position. can.

[8-11. Performance using game board]
Next, the performance by the game board 5 will be explained in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 89 to 92. FIG. 89 is a front view of the game board shown in its normal state. FIG. 90 is a front view of the game board shown in a state where the back front elevating decoration unit of the back front performance unit is dropped from the standby position to the performance position from the normal state. FIG. 91 is a front view of the game board shown in a state in which the back elevation decorative body of the back rear production unit is moved from the retracted position to the appearance position from the normal state. FIG. 92 shows that, from a normal state, the back and front lifting decoration unit of the back and front presentation unit is dropped from the standby position to the presentation position, and the back and rear lifting and lowering decoration unit of the back and rear presentation unit is moved from the retracted position to the appearance position. FIG. 3 is a front view of the game board shown in a closed state.

In the game board 5 of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 89 etc., the back unit 3000 provided at the rear, the display screen of the effect display device 1600, etc. are visible mainly through the frame of the center accessory 2500. It has become. This game board 5 passes through the frame of the center accessory 2500, and the lottery accessory 2550 and the back lower left decoration 3210 and back lower right decoration 3220 of the back decoration units 3200 provided on the left and right sides of the lottery accessory 2550 are passed through the frame of the center accessory 2500. The back-front left decorative body 3301 of the back-front presentation unit 3300 is provided so as to be visible at all times, and the back-front left decorative body 3301 of the back-front presentation unit 3300 is provided near the left side within the frame of the center accessory 2500.

In the normal state of the game board 5, the back and front lifting decoration unit 3310 of the back and front presentation unit 3300 in the back unit 3000 is moved to the standby position which is the upper moving end, and the back of the back and rear presentation unit 3400 is moved to the standby position which is the upper moving end. The rear elevating decorative body 3410 has moved to the retracted position, which is the upper end of movement. The back and front elevating decoration unit 3310, which has moved to the standby position, faces forward so that it can be visually recognized near the upper side within the frame of the center accessory 2500. The back and rear lifting decorations 3410 that are moving to the retracted position are located at the same height as the back and front lifting decorations unit 3310 in the standby position after the back and front lifting decorations unit 3310, and the back and rear lifting decorations 3410 It is hidden by unit 3310 and cannot be seen from the front.

In addition, in a normal state, the rear rear elevating decorative body 3410 in the retracted position is located in front of the rear fixed decoration part 3452 of the back and rear effect unit 3400, and further in front of the rear elevating decoration body 3410 in the standby position. A decoration unit 3310 is located there, and is hidden by them and cannot be seen from the front.

In this normal state, the back front lifting decoration unit 3310 has moved to the upper standby position, so the performance count display section 3005 provided on the back front lifting decoration unit 3310 (back front central decoration 3320) is , is located above the center of the display screen of the effect display device 1600, and is visible from the player's side without interfering with the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600.

The game board 5 of this embodiment can perform the effect as shown in FIG. 90 using the back and front effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000. This effect is performed in the normal state in which the back and front lifting decoration unit 3310 is moved to the upper standby position, and after the back and front lifting drive motor moves the lifting slider to the lower end side in the back and front lifting mechanism 3350, The falling solenoid releases the locking by the lock claw, and the back and front lifting decoration unit 3310 is allowed to fall freely to the production position. In the state where the back-front elevating decoration unit 3310 has fallen to the performance position, the back-front elevating decoration unit 3310 is located above the lottery accessory 2550 of the center accessory 2500 and slightly below the vertical center of the game area 5a. It is located close to the stage, and the vicinity of the vertical center of the display screen of the effect display device 1600 is hidden. Furthermore, when the back and front elevating decoration unit 3310 falls to the presentation position, the back and rear elevating decoration 3410 at the retracted position of the back and rear presentation unit 3400 becomes visible near the upper side within the frame of the center accessory 2500. As a result, the back and front lifting decoration unit 3310 falls freely, which can surprise the player and make the player think that something good will happen to him (an opportunity has arrived). can be set.

Next, the game board 5 can perform a performance as shown in FIG. 91 using the back performance unit 3400 of the back unit 3000. This effect is performed in the normal state in which the rear lifting decoration 3410 is moved to the upper retracted position, and the rear lifting decoration 3410 is moved to the lower end of the movement by the rear lifting drive motor of the rear lifting mechanism 3450. to set the state to the appearance position. As a result, the back and rear lifting decorations 3410, which had been invisible due to the back and front lifting decoration unit 3310, become visible, which can surprise the players and make them think that a chance has arrived, thereby increasing expectations for the game. It can make you feel better. In addition, when the rear rear elevating decorative body 3410 moves to the appearance position, it is located approximately at the vertical center of the display screen of the effect display device 1600, so that the display screen can be divided vertically by the rear rear elevating decorative body 3410. , it is possible to show the player a performance in which the performance image is physically divided into upper and lower parts.

In addition, as a performance using the rear performance unit 3400, the rear elevation decorative body 3410 can be moved to any height between the retracted position and the appearance position by the rear elevation drive motor. As a performance, the back elevation decorative body 3410 may be moved slightly downward from the retracted position or may be vibrated up and down.

Subsequently, the game board 5 can perform a performance as shown in FIG. 92 using both the back-front performance unit 3300 and the back-back performance unit 3400 of the back unit 3000. In this production, the back and front lifting decoration unit 3310 is dropped from the standby position to be at the presentation position, and the back and rear lifting decoration unit 3410 is moved downward from the retracted position to be at the appearance position. As a result, the display screen of the effect display device 1600 is covered by the back front elevating decorative body unit 3310 and the back rear elevating decorative body 3410, so that it is possible to give a strong impact to the player, and Since the rear fixed decoration part 3452 provided above the display screen, which was previously invisible, becomes visible, it is possible to give a premium feeling to the player, and an advantageous game that is advantageous to the player. It is possible to increase expectations for the occurrence of a state (for example, a jackpot game).

In this production, the back front lifting decoration unit 3310 and the back lifting decoration unit 3410 may be moved downward at the same time, or the back front lifting decoration unit 3310 may be dropped first and then the back lifting decoration unit 3410 can be moved downward. may be moved downward, or the back and rear lifting decoration unit 3410 may be moved downward first and then the back and front lifting decoration unit 3310 may be dropped.

Furthermore, since the game board 5 has a performance count display section 3005 provided on the back unit 3000 so as to be visible from the front at all times, a performance using the performance count display section 3005 can be executed. For example, a countdown display that decreases the number displayed on the production count display section 3005 moment by moment counts down the timing when the back front lifting decoration unit 3310 falls or the back rear lifting decoration unit 3410 moves downward. You may also let them do so. Alternatively, for example, by detecting the game ball B by the lottery accessory entering ball sensor 2546, a countdown may be made until the game ball B becomes unable to loop in the lottery accessory 2550.

Further, the performance count display section 3005 may display (suggest) the degree of expectation for the special symbol drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first starting port 2003 or the second starting port 2004 as a number. Alternatively, since the production count display section 3005 has four 7-segment displays, a production pattern is configured by a combination of the light emissions of each segment, and after the production pattern is variably displayed, it is stopped and displayed. In this way, the level of expectation may be suggested by the performance symbols that are stopped and displayed.

[9. Control configuration]
Next, a control configuration for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 63, 93, and the like. FIG. 93 is a block diagram schematically showing the control configuration of the pachinko machine. Note that in FIG. 93, some of the electronic components connected to the frame control board 740, such as sensors, solenoids, motors, and LEDs, are omitted.

The main control structure of the pachinko machine 1 is composed of a main control board 1310 and a peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5, and a frame control board 740 attached to the main body frame 4, as shown in the figure. Each control is shared. The main control board 1310 controls gaming operations (game progress). The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 that controls various effects during the game based on commands from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control unit 1511 that controls various effects during the game based on commands from the main control board 1310, and displays effect images on the effect display device 1600 based on commands from the peripheral control unit 1511. and an effect display control section 1512 that controls.

[9-1. Main control board]
Although detailed illustrations are omitted, the main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game is a main control board that is a microprocessor that includes a built-in ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, and RAM that temporarily stores data. MPU, a main control I/O port as an input/output device (I/O device), a main control input circuit into which detection signals from various detection switches are input, and a main control solenoid drive for driving various solenoids. The circuit, a RAM clear switch for completely erasing information stored in the RAM built into the main control MPU, a setting display for displaying set values and errors, and partitions formed on the game board 5. A base monitor for displaying the number of game balls B collected through the out port 2020 and sub-out port 2021 provided in the game area 5a. In addition to the built-in ROM and RAM, the main control MPU also includes a watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system), a function for preventing fraud, and the like.

The main control MPU includes its built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in RAM"), its built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in ROM"), etc. It also has a built-in watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as "WDT with built-in main control") that monitors its operation (system) and functions to prevent fraud.

Furthermore, the main control MPU has a built-in nonvolatile RAM. This non-volatile RAM stores in advance a unique ID code attached by the manufacturer of the main control MPU with a unique code (a code that exists only once in the world) for identifying the individual. This ID code once assigned is stored in a non-volatile RAM and cannot be rewritten even using an external device. The main control MPU is able to retrieve and refer to the ID code from the non-volatile RAM.

The main control MPU also has a built-in circuit that is forcibly reset by hardware when affected by electrical noise (hereinafter referred to as a "built-in reset circuit"). The built-in reset circuit monitors the contents of a predetermined register of the main control MPU, and if the register changes to an inconsistent content, it forcibly resets the main control MPU as being affected by electrical noise. This is a reset circuit. The forced reset by such a built-in reset circuit cannot be controlled and invalidated by a user program. Therefore, when the main control MPU is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit, the main control MPU is reset without executing the main control side power-off process described later, and then executes the main control side power-on process described later. I will do it. In this case, since the main control side power-off processing is not executed, a checksum (sum value) error in the main control built-in RAM will always occur as described later, so the contents of the main control built-in RAM will be completely erased ( clear). Note that even if the main control MPU is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit, the built-in reset circuit of the main control MPU will not output a reset signal to the frame control board 740. MPU) is restarted, and the frame control board 740 remains activated.

In addition, the main control MPU is a hardware random number circuit (hereinafter referred to as a "main control built-in hardware It has a built-in random number circuit. This hard random number circuit with built-in main control generates random numbers within a predetermined numerical range (in this embodiment, a numerical range from 0 as the minimum value to 65535 as the maximum value is preset), and The circuit is configured such that a predetermined value is not fixed (that is, the initial value is not fixed) and a different value is set each time the main control MPU is reset. Specifically, when the main control MPU is reset, the main control built-in hardware random number circuit first uses a clock signal (main Based on the clock signal output from a crystal oscillator (not shown, which is provided separately from the control MPU), other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another without duplication at high speed, and the values are within the predetermined numerical range. After extracting all the values, one value within the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and other values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU. Extract values one after another without duplication. The main control built-in hardware random number circuit repeatedly performs such a high-speed lottery, and the main control MPU uses the value extracted by the main control built-in hardware random number circuit at the time of acquiring the value from the main control built-in hardware random number circuit as a random number for jackpot determination. It is designed to be set as .

The main control input circuit is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting information in which detection signals from various sensors are input to its various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the main control input circuit is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset (not shown) is input. In other words, the main control input circuit outputs various signals based on the information from its various output terminals because the information based on the detection signals from the various sensors input to its various input terminals is not reset by the main control system reset. It is configured as a circuit that is

The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 includes a first starting port sensor 2101 that detects the game ball B received in the first starting port 2003, and a second starting port sensor 2101 that detects the game ball B received in the second starting port 2004. mouth sensor 2401, general winning hole sensor 3001 that detects the game ball B accepted in the general winning hole 2001, normal winning hole sensor 3002 that detects the game ball B accepted in the normal winning hole 2002, accepted in the big winning hole 2005. The big winning hole sensor 2402 detects the game ball B received in the prize winning hole 2006, the prize winning hole sensor 2501 detects the game ball B received in the prize winning hole 2006, and the game ball B accepted in the first V winning hole 2007. The first V winning hole sensor 2502 detects, the second V winning hole sensor 2503 detects the game ball B accepted in the second V winning hole 2008, and the losing hole sensor detects the game ball B accepted in the losing hole 2009. 2504, an out ball sensor 605 that detects the game ball B discharged from the game board 5, a safe ball sensor 606, a magnetic sensor 1030 that detects illegal magnetism in the game area 5a, and detects vibrations acting on the game board 5. Detection signals from the vibration sensor 1040 and the like are input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU via the main control input circuit.

Furthermore, when the detection signal from the door opening switch 507 and the detection signal from the frame opening switch 508 are respectively input to the main control board 1310 via the frame control board 740, they are input to the main control board 1310 via the main control input circuit. The signals are respectively input to input terminals of predetermined input ports of the control MPU.

Note that the respective detection signals from the out-ball sensor 605, the first starting port sensor 2101, and the second starting port sensor 2401 are directly input to the main control board 1310 without going through another board, and The signal is inputted to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU via a control input circuit. On the other hand, general winning hole sensor 3001, normal winning hole sensor 3002, big winning hole sensor 2402, accessory winning hole sensor 2501, first V winning hole sensor 2502, second V winning hole sensor 2503, losing hole sensor 2504 , the magnetic sensor 1030, and the vibration sensor 1040 are input to the main control board 1310 via the panel relay board, that is, indirectly, and are input to a predetermined signal of the main control MPU via the main control input circuit. It is being input to the input terminal of the input port.

Based on these detection signals, the main control MPU outputs a control signal from the output terminal of its predetermined output port to the main control solenoid drive circuit, thereby causing the start port solenoid 2412 and the attacker solenoid 2414 to be activated from the main control solenoid drive circuit. , the prize winning opening solenoid 2516, the first distribution solenoid 2534, the second distribution solenoid 2544, the lottery loop solenoid 2558, the striking piece drive motor 2561, the gutter swing drive motor 2564, and the swing piece solenoid 2565. The signal can be outputted via the panel relay board, that is, indirectly, or from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the status display, normal symbol display, normal hold display, and first special display of the function display unit 1400. The respective drive signals are sent to the symbol display, the first special reserved number display, the second special symbol display, the second special reserved number display, and the round display without going through another board, that is, directly. Output or do something. Further, the main control MPU outputs a drive signal to the setting change permission lamp of the setting change board by outputting a drive signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port based on these detection signals.

In addition, the main control MPU outputs various information regarding the game (gaming information) to the frame control board 740 by outputting various information regarding the game (gaming information) from the output terminal of its predetermined output port. By outputting a signal (power outage clear signal) from the output terminal of the predetermined output port, a signal (power outage clear signal) can be output to the power outage monitoring circuit, and the game ball B can be output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port. By outputting a launch permission signal that indicates that the launch of the game ball B is permitted, a launch enable signal that indicates that the launch of the game ball B is permitted is output to the frame control board 740. The logic of the launch permission signal that conveys permission for launch is set to launch permission logic when the launch is permitted, and launch stop logic (launch non-permission logic) which is the inverse of the launch permission logic when the launch is not permitted. is set to Note that the logic of the firing permission signal is that, as an initial value (default), the firing permission signal setting process in the main control side timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is started after the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1 (after the power is restored). Up to this point, the device is constructed of hardware including a main control output circuit with a reset function so as to be set to firing stop logic (launch non-permission logic) which is an inversion of the firing permission logic.

In addition, in this embodiment, the first starting opening sensor 2101, the second starting opening sensor 2401, the normal winning opening sensor 3002, the big winning opening sensor 2402, the accessory winning opening sensor 2501, the first V winning opening sensor 2502, the second Non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switches are used for the V winning hole sensor 2503, losing hole sensor 2504, out ball sensor 605, safe ball sensor 606, and foul ball sensor 607, whereas the general winning hole sensor 3001 uses a contact type ON/OFF mechanical switch. This is because the game ball B frequently enters the first starting port 2003, the second starting port 2004, and the normal winning port 2002, so the first starting port sensor 2101, the second starting port sensor 2401, and the normal winning port Detection of the game ball B by the mouth sensor 3002 also occurs frequently. For this reason, proximity switches with high durability and long life are used for the first starting port sensor 2101, the second starting port sensor 2401, and the normal winning port sensor 3002.

In addition, when an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player (such as a "jackpot" game) occurs, the big prize opening 2005 and the accessory prize opening 2006 are opened and the game ball B enters frequently, so that the big prize can be won. Detection of the game ball B by the mouth sensor 2402 and the accessory prize opening sensor 2501 also occurs frequently. For this reason, a proximity switch with high durability and a long life is used also for the big winning opening sensor 2402 and the accessory winning opening sensor 2501. In addition, since a large amount of the game balls B fired into the game area 5a are collected by the out port 2020 and sub-out port 2021 provided in the game area 5a sectioned on the game board 5, the game ball B is detected by the out ball sensor 605. Detection of B also occurs frequently. For this reason, a proximity switch with high durability and long life is used for the out-ball sensor 605 as well. On the other hand, in the general winning hole 2001 where the game ball B does not enter frequently, the detection by the general winning hole sensor 3001 does not occur frequently. For this reason, the general winning a prize opening sensor 3001 uses a mechanical switch whose life is shorter than that of a proximity switch. Incidentally, regardless of whether or not the game ball B frequently enters the general winning hole 2001, a highly durable and long-life proximity switch may be used.

In addition, the main control MPU transmits various information related to games (game information) and various commands related to awarding benefits to the frame control board 740, and receives various commands related to the status of the pachinko machine 1 from this frame control board 740. or receive it. Furthermore, the main control MPU transmits various commands related to control of game performance and various commands related to the status of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control I/O port. Note that, although a detailed explanation will be given later, when the main control MPU receives various commands related to the status of the pachinko machine 1 from the frame control board 740, it formats these various commands and sends them to the peripheral control unit 1511.

The main control board 1310 is supplied with various voltages from the power supply board 750 of the frame board unit 730, although detailed explanation will be given later. The power supply board 750 that supplies various voltages to the main control board 1310 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as a "capacitor") that serves as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is cut off. ). This capacitor allows the main control MPU to store various information in the RAM during power-off processing even when the power is turned off. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM when the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on. This RAM clear switch operation signal (detection signal) is also output to the frame control board 740.

Further, the main control board 1310 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. This power failure monitoring circuit monitors drops in various voltages supplied from the power supply board 750, and when these voltages become lower than the power failure warning voltage, outputs a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning. This power outage warning signal is input to the main control MPU via the main control I/O port, and is also output to the frame control board 740 and the like.

[9-2. Frame control board]
The frame control board 740 that controls the number of game balls B held by the player, etc. includes a RAM clear switch 741 for erasing information stored in the RAM, and a circulation ball path unit that circulates the enclosed game balls B. The ball removal switch 742 is used to remove the ball from the ball removal port 613p of the player 600 to the outside (ball receiving tray 720), clears the number of balls held by the player stored in RAM, etc., and clears the number of balls held by the player in the door frame 3. A pitch count memory/display clear switch 743 for clearing the display on the display unit 140 is provided.

[9-3. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 93, the peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control section 1511 that performs effect control based on commands from the main control board 1310, and an effect display device 1600 based on control data from this peripheral control section 1511. and an effect display control section 1512 that performs drawing control.

[9-3a. Peripheral control section]
The peripheral control unit 1511 that performs performance control on the peripheral control board 1510 includes a CPU, RAM, VDP, VRAM, sound source, SATA controller, various I/O interfaces, etc. on one semiconductor chip, although detailed illustration is omitted. An integrated peripheral control IC, a peripheral control ROM that stores various processing programs and commands, a sound source IC that performs high-quality performances, and sound information such as music, voices, and sound effects that are referenced by this sound source IC. It is equipped with a stored sound ROM.

The peripheral control IC has multiple parallel I/O ports, serial I/O ports, etc. integrated on one semiconductor chip, and when it receives various commands from the main control board 1310, it controls the peripherals based on these various commands. The CPU of the control IC sends game board side light emission data to the lamp drive board serial I/O for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to the color LEDs etc. provided on each decorative board of the game board 5. Game board side drive data for transmitting from the port to each decorative board of the game board 5 and for outputting drive signals to the drive motors that operate various presentation units provided on the game board 5 is sent to the game board decoration drive board. Door-side drive data to be sent from the serial I/O port to the drive motor or drive solenoid of the game board 5 or to output a drive signal to a vibrator, etc. provided on the door frame 3, and various decorations on the door frame 3. Serial I/O for frame decoration drive board uses door side light emission data for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to color LEDs etc. provided on the board, and door side driving light emission data consisting of In addition to sending control data (display commands) indicating the screen to be displayed on the effect display device 1600 from the serial I/O port for the display control unit to the effect display control unit 1512 from the port to the door frame 3 side. In addition, a control signal (sound command) for extracting sound information from the sound ROM is output to the sound source IC.

Detection signals from the first performance button 251 and second performance button 252 of the performance operation unit 250 provided on the door frame 3 are input to the peripheral control IC.

Further, the CPU of the peripheral control IC receives a signal (operation signal) from the production display control unit 1512 that indicates that the production display control unit 1512 is operating normally, and based on this operation signal, the production display control unit The operation of 1512 is monitored.

The sound source IC extracts sound information from the sound ROM based on control data (sound commands) from the CPU of the peripheral control IC, and outputs sound information from the top center speaker, top side speaker, etc. installed in the door frame 3, main body frame 4, etc. Control is performed so that sounds such as music and sound effects matching various performances are played from the main body frame speaker 503 of the main body frame 4. Note that the volume can be adjusted by rotating a volume adjustment switch that protrudes rearward from the peripheral control board box in which the peripheral control board 1510 is housed. In this embodiment, an acoustic signal as sound information (for example, a 2ch stereo signal, a 4ch stereo signal, By sending a 2.1ch surround signal, a 4.1ch surround signal, etc.), it is possible to present a more realistic sound effect (acoustic production) than before.

Note that the peripheral control unit 1511 includes an external WDT (watchdog timer) (not shown) in addition to a built-in WDT (watchdog timer) built into the CPU of the peripheral control IC. The built-in WDT and external WDT are used together to diagnose whether or not the own system is out of control.

The display commands output from the CPU of this peripheral control IC to the effect display control section 1512 are executed by a serial input/output port, and in this embodiment, the bit rate (size of data that can be transmitted per unit time) is 19.2 Bits per second (hereinafter referred to as "bps") is set. On the other hand, initial data, door frame side lighting and blinking commands, game board side lighting and blinking commands, movable body drive commands, etc. output from the CPU of the peripheral control IC to the game board 5 side are multiple serial input/outputs different from display commands. The bit rate is set to 250 kbps in this embodiment.

[9-3b. Performance display control section]
The effect display control unit 1512 controls the drawing of the effect display device 1600. Although detailed illustrations are omitted, the effect display control unit 1512 includes a display control MPU as a microprocessor, a display control ROM that stores various processing programs, various commands, and various data, and a VDP that displays and controls the effect display device 1600. (abbreviation for Video Display Processor), an image ROM that stores various data of the screen displayed on the effect display device 1600, and an image RAM to which the various data stored in this image ROM is transferred and copied. We are prepared.

This display control MPU has a built-in parallel I/O port, serial I/O port, etc., and controls the VDP based on control data (display commands) from the peripheral control unit 1511 to draw the effect display device 1600. is under control. Note that, if the display control MPU is operating normally, it outputs an operation signal to the peripheral control unit 1511 to notify that fact. Further, the display control MPU receives an execution signal from the VDP, and performs interrupt processing when the output of the execution signal is stopped every 16 ms.

In addition to various programs for generating screens to be drawn on the effect display device 1600, the display control ROM stores schedule data corresponding to control data (display commands) from the peripheral control unit 1511, and the control data (display commands). A plurality of corresponding non-resident area transfer schedule data etc. are stored. The schedule data is configured by chronologically arranging screen data that defines the configuration of the screen, and defines the order of the screens to be drawn on the effect display device 1600. The non-resident area transfer schedule data is configured by chronologically arranging non-resident area transfer data that defines the order in which various data stored in the image ROM are transferred to the non-resident area of the image RAM. In this non-resident area transfer data, the order in which various data are transferred from the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM is defined in advance for the screen data to be drawn on the effect display device 1600 as the schedule data progresses.

The display control MPU extracts the first screen data of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 from the display control ROM and outputs it to the VDP, and then extracts the screen data following the first screen data. It is extracted from the display control ROM and output to the VDP. In this way, the display control MPU extracts the screen data arranged chronologically in the schedule data from the display control ROM one by one starting from the first screen data and outputs the extracted screen data to the VDP.

When the screen data output from the display control MPU is input, the VDP extracts sprite data from the image RAM based on the input screen data, generates drawing data to be displayed on the effect display device 1600, and generates drawing data to be displayed on the effect display device 1600. The generated drawing data is output to the effect display device 1600. Further, when the effect display device 1600 does not accept screen data from the display control MPU, the VDP outputs an execution signal to the display control MPU to inform the effect. Note that the VDP uses a line buffer method. This "line buffer method" means that one line's worth of drawing data for drawing in the horizontal direction of the effect display device 1600 is held in a line buffer, and the one line's worth of drawing data held in this line buffer is transferred to the effect display device 1600. This is a method to output to.

The image ROM stores an extremely large amount of sprite data and has a large capacity. When the capacity of the image ROM increases, that is, when the number of sprites drawn on the effect display device 1600 increases, the access speed of the image ROM cannot be ignored, which affects the speed of drawing on the effect display device 1600. Therefore, in this embodiment, the sprite data stored in the image ROM is transferred and copied to the image RAM, which has a fast access speed, and the sprite data is extracted from this image RAM. Note that the sprite data is base data that is data before the sprite is developed into a bitmap format, and is stored in the image ROM in a compressed state.

Here, a "sprite" will be explained. A "sprite" is an image displayed as a unit on the effect display device 1600. For example, when displaying various people (characters) on the effect display device 1600, data for drawing each person is called a "sprite." As a result, when displaying a plurality of people on the effect display device 1600, a plurality of sprites are used. In addition to people, houses, mountains, roads, etc. that make up the background are also sprites, and the entire background can also be a single sprite. These sprites are drawn on the effect display device 1600 after setting the positions where they are arranged on the screen and the vertical relationship when the sprites overlap each other (hereinafter referred to as "sprite overlapping order").

Note that the sprite is constructed by pasting together a plurality of rectangular areas each having 64 pixels in the vertical and horizontal directions. The data for drawing this rectangular area is called a "sprite character." Small sprites can be expressed using one sprite character, while relatively large sprites such as people can be expressed using a total of 6 sprite characters arranged, for example, 2 horizontally x 3 vertically. can be expressed. In the case of a larger sprite such as a background, it can be expressed using a larger number of sprite characters. In this way, the number and arrangement of sprite characters can be arbitrarily specified for each sprite.

The effect display device 1600 sequentially performs main scanning to set the display state of each pixel in one direction along the pixels from left to right when viewed from the front, and repeats main scanning in a direction intersecting that one direction. It is driven by the sub-scanning to be performed. When the effect display device 1600 receives one line of drawing data output from the effect display control unit 1512, the effect display device 1600 sequentially draws one line from the left to the right when viewed from the front of the effect display device 1600 as a main scan. output to each pixel. When the output for one line is completed, the effect display device 1600 shifts to the line immediately below as a sub-scan, and similarly, when the drawing data for the next line is input, the drawing data for the next line is As main scanning, each of the pixels for one line is outputted sequentially from left to right when viewed from the front of the effect display device 1600.

[10. Game content]
The content of the game played by the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment will be explained with reference to FIG. 84 and the like. In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, when the player rotates the handle 160 arranged at the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3, the game balls B enclosed in the circulation path R are moved to the game board 5. The ball B passes between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 and is driven into the upper part of the game area 5a, and the game with the game ball B is started. The game ball B hit into the upper part of the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center accessory 2500 depending on the driving strength. The driving strength of the game ball B can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle 160, and the more clockwise the handle 160 is rotated, the stronger the ball can be hit. B, that is, game balls B can be hit at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

In addition, in the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails are planted at appropriate positions in a predetermined gauge arrangement on the front surface of the game panel 1100, and when the game ball B comes into contact with the obstacle nails, the game ball B The falling speed is suppressed, and various movements are given to the game ball B so that the movement can be enjoyed. Moreover, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nails, a windmill that rotates when the game ball B comes into contact with it is provided above the side upper left unit 2300 and to the left of the center accessory 2500.

The game ball B hit into the upper part of the center accessory 2500 enters the left side of the center accessory 2500 than the highest part of the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500 when viewed from the front. It flows between the rail 1002 and the center accessory 2500 while coming into contact with a plurality of obstacle nails. On the left side of the center accessory 2500, the entrance of the warp passage 2512 is always open so that the game ball B can be received.

The game ball B that has entered the warp passage 2512 is supplied to the stage 2513 provided within the frame of the center accessory 2500, rolls on the stage 2513 in the left and right direction, and is released from the center release part 2513a or the side release part 2513b. It is discharged from somewhere to flow back into the gaming area 5a. Since the center release part 2513a of the stage 2513 is provided directly above the first starting port 2003 at the center in the left-right direction within the game area 5a, the game ball B released from the center release part 2513a has a high probability of reaching the first start port 2003. It is accepted into the starting port 2003. The game ball B released from the side release parts 2513b on both the left and right sides of the central release part 2513a may be received into the first starting port 2003 with a certain degree of probability.

When game balls B are received in the first starting port 2003, a predetermined number (for example, 3) of game balls B are added to the number of balls held by the frame control board 740 via the main control board 1310, and the main In the control board 1310, the first special symbol (for example, "loss", "small hit", "accessory hit", "2R jackpot", "5R jackpot", "15R jackpot", "probability change (probability change) win") , "Time saving (time saving) win", "Variable time saving win", "Probable variable time saving winning", "Second jackpot", etc.). If the lottery result of the first special symbol drawn is other than "lose", an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous occurs. Then, the lottery result of the first special symbol drawn is suggested to the player over a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, also referred to as special variable time).

In this embodiment, from the start of the special lottery by receiving the game ball B to the first starting port 2003 until the lottery result of the first special symbol drawn is suggested (special variable time), the first starting When the game ball B is accepted into the mouth 2003, the suggestion of the lottery result of the first special symbol cannot be started, so the first special The start of suggesting the drawing result of the symbol is put on hold. The maximum number of reserved first special symbol lottery results is up to four for each of the first starting ports 2003, and for more than that, game balls B will not be accepted into the first starting port 2003. However, the lottery result of the first special symbol is not held and is discarded. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the gaming hall side due to the accumulation of reservations.

By the way, if the game ball B that has flown down to the left side of the center accessory 2500 does not enter the warp passage 2512, it will be moved to the center side in the left-right direction by the shelf 2301 of the upper left side unit 2300 or the obstacle nail, and There is a possibility that it will be accepted into the general prize opening 2001, the sub-out opening 2021, the first starting opening 2003 of the starting opening unit 2100, etc. Then, when the game balls B are received in the general winning hole 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls B are added to the number of balls held in the frame control board 740 via the main control board 1310.

On the other hand, when the game ball B hit into the upper part of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a enters the right side of the highest part of the inflow regulating part 2511c of the center frame 2511 in the center accessory 2500, the center It passes through either the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522 of the guide passage group 2520 of the accessory 2500. The game ball B that has entered the first guide passage 2521 rolls on the upper surface of the accessory prize opening door 2515 that closes the accessory prize opening 2006 on the way, and then moves above (directly above) the ordinary prize winning opening unit 2600. is released. On the other hand, the game ball B that has entered the second guide passage 2522 is released above the left side of the normal winning opening 2002. Therefore, when the game ball B enters the first guide path 2521, there is a possibility that it will be accepted into the accessory prize opening 2006.

The accessory prize opening 2006 is used when the lottery result of the special symbol drawn when the game ball B is accepted into the first starting opening 2003 or the second starting opening 2004 is a "small hit" or "accessory winning". , it opens and closes in a predetermined pattern and becomes ready to receive the game ball B. When the game balls B are accepted into the accessory prize opening 2006, a predetermined number (for example, 10 or 13) of game balls B are added to the number of balls held by the frame control board 740 via the main control board 1310. be done.

The game balls B received in the accessory prize opening 2006 are sent to the first sorting device 2530, and are sorted to either the chance opening 2531 or the first prize opening 2532 by the sorting rotary body 2533. The game balls B distributed to the first slot 2532 are discharged. The game balls B distributed to the chance opening 2531 are sent to the second distribution device 2540. The game balls B sent to the second sorting device 2540 are sorted into either the first V prize opening 2007 or the second prize opening 2541. When the game ball B is accepted into the first V winning hole 2007 by the sorting by the second sorting device 2540, a "jackpot" game is executed in which the big winning hole 2005 opens and closes in a predetermined opening/closing pattern.

When the game balls B are distributed to the second slot 2541 in the second distribution device 2540, they are sent to the lottery accessories 2550. During the time when the distribution bridge 2557 of the distribution section 2552 is moving to the loop position, the game ball B sent to the lottery accessory 2550 is placed between the table 2555 where the second V prize opening 2008 is provided and the game ball B sent to the lottery accessory 2550. It loops between the ball B and the hitting section 2553 that supplies the ball B to the table 2555. Then, when the game ball B is received in the second V winning hole 2008, a "jackpot" game is executed in which the big winning hole 2005 opens and closes in a predetermined opening and closing pattern.

On the other hand, when the predetermined time passes and the distribution bridge 2557 moves from the loop position to the non-loop position and the losing port 2009 is opened, game balls that are not accepted into the second V winning port 2008 of the table 2555 B is accepted into the loss port 2009. The game ball B received in the losing port 2009 is ejected.

Since the normal prize opening 2002 provided downstream of the guide passage group 2520 is provided directly below the exit of the first guide passage 2521, the game ball B that circulated through the first guide passage 2521 is It has a higher possibility of being accepted into the normal winning hole 2002 than the game ball B that circulated through the guide path 2522. The game ball B that is not accepted into the normal winning hole 2002 flows down to the attacker unit 2400.

When the game ball B is accepted into the normal winning hole 2002 and detected by the normal winning hole sensor 3002, a normal lottery is performed on the main control board 1310, and if the lottery result of the drawn normal symbol is "normal win" , the second starting port 2004, which is closed by the second starting port door 2411, remains open for a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.3 to 10 seconds), and the game ball B is not accepted into the second starting port 2004. It becomes possible.

In this embodiment, in the normal lottery that is performed when the game ball B is accepted into the normal winning hole 2002, a certain amount of time is set from the start of the normal lottery to the time when the lottery result of the normal symbol is indicated ( For example, 0.01 to 60 seconds (also commonly referred to as variable time). This suggestion of the lottery result of the normal symbol is displayed on the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5. The second starting port 2004 becomes open after the normal fluctuation time has elapsed.

In addition, if the game ball B is accepted into the normal winning slot 2002 after the game ball B is received into the normal winning slot 2002 until the drawing result of the normal symbol is suggested, the drawing result of the normal symbol is suggested. Therefore, the start of suggesting the lottery result of the normal symbol is suspended until the suggestion of the lottery result of the normal symbol ends. Further, the maximum number of holding lottery results for normal symbols is set to four, and for more than that, even if game balls B are accepted into the normal winning hole 2002, they are discarded without being held. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the gaming hall side due to the accumulation of reservations.

The game ball B that has flown down without being accepted into the normal prize opening 2002 flows down to either the upper shelf 2421, the first shelf 2422, or the right side of the first shelf 2422 in the attacker unit 2400. The game ball B flowing down to the upper shelf part 2421 is guided to the left and released to the left of the big prize opening 2005. Therefore, the game ball B that has flown down onto the upper shelf portion 2421 will not be accepted into the second starting opening 2004 and the big winning opening 2005.

The game ball B that has flowed down to the first shelf section 2422 of the attacker unit 2400 rolls to the left due to the inclination, and the second starting port door 2411, the second shelf section 2423, which closes the second starting port 2004, After rolling through the big winning opening door 2413 that closes the big winning opening 2005 and the fourth shelf 2425, it is released to the left. The game ball B released from the fourth shelf 2425 is received by the outlet 2020 and discharged. Therefore, when the game ball B flows down to the first shelf section 2422, there is a possibility that it will be accepted into the second start opening 2004 or the big prize opening 2005.

The game ball B that has flowed down to the right from the first shelf section 2422 of the attacker unit 2400 is received by the sub-out port 2021 and discharged. Although it is rare, when the game ball B that has flowed down to the first shelf 2422 enters the gap between the second shelf 2423 and the third shelf 2424, it is received by the sub-out port 2021 and ejected. .

When game balls B are received into the second starting port 2004 of the attacker unit 2400, a predetermined number (for example, one) of game balls B are added to the number of balls held by the frame control board 740 via the main control board 1310. At the same time, the main control board 1310 displays second special symbols (for example, "loss", "small hit", "accessory hit", "2R jackpot", "5R jackpot", "15R jackpot", "probability change"). A lottery will be held for ``change) win'', ``time saving (time reduction) win'', ``probable variable time saving win'', ``probable variable time saving win'', ``second jackpot'', etc.). If the lottery result of the second special symbol drawn is other than "lose", an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous occurs. Then, the lottery result of the second special symbol that has been drawn is obtained by the player over a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, also referred to as special variation time) that is longer than the special variation time of the lottery result of the first special symbol. suggested.

In this embodiment, the second starting port 2004 is opened during the period from the start of the special lottery by receiving the game ball B to the second starting port 2004 until the lottery result of the drawn second special symbol is suggested (special variable time). When the game ball B is received in the mouth 2004, it is not possible to start suggesting the lottery result of the second special symbol. The start of suggesting the drawing result of the symbol is put on hold. The number of reserved second special symbol lottery results is limited to four for each of the second starting ports 2004, and for more than that, game balls B will not be accepted into the second starting ports 2004. However, the lottery result of the second special symbol is not held and is discarded. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the gaming hall side due to the accumulation of reservations.

The special fluctuation time of the lottery result of the second special symbol drawn by receiving the game ball B into the second starting port 2004 is the special fluctuation time of the lottery result of the second special symbol drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first starting port 2003. It is set longer than the special variation time for lottery results. As a result, since the second special symbol lottery result takes longer to consume the reserved number, the number of game balls B accepted per unit time for the first starting port 2003 and the second starting port 2004 is the same. Also, the number of lottery results of the second special symbol executed using the second starting port 2004 is smaller. Therefore, in a normal state, even if you hit the game ball B to the right side of the center accessory 2500, there is a possibility that only the second starting hole 2004 will be accepted, and the lottery result of the second special symbol is executed less frequently. , it is possible to make the player actively perform a driving operation such that the game ball B flows on the left side of the center accessory 2500.

As mentioned above, when the game ball B is received in the first starting hole 2003 or the second starting hole 2004, the lottery result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol drawn by the game ball B is received in the big prize opening 2005 or the second special symbol. The accessory prize opening 2006 opens and closes in a predetermined opening and closing pattern, and becomes ready to accept the game ball B.

Then, in the attacker unit 2400, according to the lottery result of the first special symbol or the lottery result of the second special symbol, or acceptance of the game ball B into the first V prize opening 2007 or the second V prize opening 2008, etc. When the game ball B flows down at the timing when the big winning hole 2005 is ready to accept, the game ball B is accepted into the big winning hole 2005. When game balls B are accepted into the grand prize opening 2005, a predetermined number (for example, 10 or 13) of game balls B are added to the number of balls held in the frame control board 740 via the main control board 1310. Ru.

After the grand prize opening 2005 becomes open to accept the game balls B, a predetermined period of time (for example, 20 to 40 seconds) has elapsed, or a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls) have entered the grand prize opening 2005. When any of the conditions for acceptance of game ball B is satisfied, an opening/closing pattern (one opening/closing pattern is referred to as one round) that brings game ball B into a closed state where it cannot be accepted is repeated a predetermined number of times (predetermined number of rounds). . For example, a ``2R jackpot'' is repeated for 2 rounds, a ``5R jackpot'' is repeated for 5 rounds, and a ``15R jackpot'' is repeated for 15 rounds to generate an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player.

In addition, in "Jackpot", after the end of the jackpot game, you can change the probability that the first special symbol or the second special symbol such as "Jackpot" will be drawn ("probable winning"), or change the lottery result of the first special symbol. There is also a "win" that changes the display time of a performance image that suggests the lottery result of the second special symbol ("time-saving win").

If the lottery result of the first special symbol or the lottery result of the second special symbol (for example, the lottery result of the second special symbol) is a "second jackpot", the big prize opening 2005 or the accessory prize opening 2006 will be opened in a predetermined pattern. After the game ball B is made receivable, an ST (special time) is generated as an advantageous game state. This ST is to maintain a state of reliable variation or time saving for a predetermined specific number of variations.

In this way, by allowing the grand prize opening 2005 and the accessory prize opening 2006 to accept the game ball B when the prize winning opening 2005 and the accessory prize opening 2006 can accept the game ball B, many game balls B can be received. Since the number of balls can be added to the number of balls held, it is possible to entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

In this embodiment, the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600 suggest the lottery results of the first special symbol and the lottery results of the second special symbol. The function display unit 1400 is directly controlled by the main control board 1310 to suggest special symbol lottery results (the first special symbol lottery result and the second special symbol lottery result). The function display unit 1400 indicates the special symbol lottery result by flashing a plurality of LEDs for a predetermined period of time by repeatedly turning them on and off, and then suggests the special symbol lottery result by the combination of lit LEDs. .

On the other hand, the performance display device 1600 is indirectly controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, and suggests the lottery results of special symbols as a performance image. The performance image that suggests the lottery result of the special symbol on the performance display device 1600 is displayed in a state where three symbol rows each consisting of a plurality of symbols are displayed side by side in the left and right direction, and each symbol row is varied. The pattern rows are sequentially stopped and displayed, and each pattern row is stopped and displayed so that the patterns of the three stopped and displayed pattern rows are a combination corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol. If the lottery result of the special symbol is other than "lose", after the three symbol rows are stopped and each symbol is stopped and displayed, a confirmed image indicating the lottery result of the special symbol is displayed on the effect display device 1600. , an advantageous gaming state (for example, a "small win" game, a "big win" game, etc.) occurs according to the lottery result of the special symbol drawn.

In addition, the time (LED blinking time (special fluctuation time)) that suggests the lottery result of the special symbol on the function display unit 1400, and the time that suggests the lottery result of the special symbol (the symbol row fluctuates) on the performance display device 1600. (The time it takes for the final image to be displayed) is different from the time taken for the final image to be displayed, and the function display unit 1400 is set to a longer time.

In addition, on the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to displaying a performance image for suggesting the lottery result of the special symbol by the performance display device 1600, the performance operation unit in the door frame 3 A player participation type performance can be performed in which the first performance button 251 and the second performance button 252 in 250 are operated. In the player participation type performance, the first performance button 251 and the second performance button 252 can be popped up to make them stand out, and the player can enjoy the player participation type performance by operating the first performance button 251 and the second performance button 252. be able to.

In addition, in the peripheral control board 1510, each decorative board provided on the door frame 3, each decorative board provided on the game board 5, a performance display device 1600, a starting opening display section 2110, a performance count display section 3005, By appropriately using the back decoration unit 3200, the back front performance unit 3300, the back rear performance unit 3400, etc., it is possible to perform light emitting effects, display effects, movable effects, etc., and it is possible to enjoy the player with various effects. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the player's interest in the game from decreasing.

Furthermore, the peripheral control board 1510 allows the player to perform the correct operation when the player makes a mistake or does not perform the operation that should be performed in a player participation type performance in which the first performance button 251 or the second performance button 252 is operated. Inform the player so that he/she can do so.

According to this embodiment, a game ball B is driven into the game area 5a by a player, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the game ball B is accepted into the first starting port 2003 or the second starting port 2004 to be drawn by lottery. According to the lottery result of the special symbol, the accessory prize opening 2006 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern, and the game ball B received in the accessory prize opening 2006 passes through the first sorting device 2530 and the second sorting device 2540. is supplied to the guide path 2551 of the lottery accessory 2550 in the center accessory 2500, and the game ball B circulates toward the distribution section 2552 downstream. In this distribution section 2552, when the losing port 2009 that is open to the guideway 2551 is closed by the distribution bridge 2557, the game ball B is distributed to the hitting section 2553 as the first side, and the distribution bridge 2557 is rotated by the lottery loop solenoid 2558 to open the losing port 2009, the game ball B is sorted to the losing port 2009 (second side), and the distribution state of the game ball B is the distribution bridge. 2557 is shown by the distribution display section 2557a. Then, in the distribution section 2552, when the game ball B is distributed to the first side, it is supplied to the hitting section 2553. On the other hand, when the game balls B are distributed to the second side (losing port 2009) in the distribution section 2552, they are discharged from the lottery accessory 2550 without being supplied to the hitting section 2553.

The game ball B supplied from the distribution section 2552 to the hitting section 2553 is hit backward by the rotating hitting piece 2560 of the hitting section 2553, so that it climbs a climbing section 2559 that is higher toward the rear. It will be distributed (rolled) to. In this hitting section 2553, depending on the timing at which the game ball B is supplied and the timing at which the hitting piece 2560 hits the game ball B, the game ball B may be hit strongly or hardly hit at all, and the game ball B may be hit backward. Since the force of the game ball B being hit varies, if the force of the game ball B being hit is weak, the game ball B will not be able to climb the climbing part 2559 and will return to the hitting part 2553, causing the game ball B to You will be walking back and forth on the uphill section 2559. Then, when the game ball B is strongly hit by the hitting section 2553 and climbs over the climbing section 2559, it is supplied to the swinging gutter 2554 provided in the center in the left-right direction at the rear end of the table 2555, and from the swinging gutter 2554 to the table. Released at 2555. At this time, since the swinging gutter 2554 is reciprocating so as to swing around the axis in the vertical direction, the timing of supplying the game ball B and the timing of the rotation position of the swinging gutter 2554 As a result, game balls B are released onto the table 2555 from the gutter portion 2554a of the swing gutter 2554 in various directions.

The game ball B released from the swing gutter 2554 to the table 2555 rolls forward according to the inclination, and is released from the front end of the table 2555 to the guide path 2551. At this time, there is a possibility that the game ball B will be accepted into the second V prize opening 2008, which is provided on the central axis in the front-rear direction passing through the center of the swing gutter 2554 near the front end of the table 2555, and the swing When the game ball B comes into contact with the swinging piece 2556 that is provided symmetrically with respect to the central axis between the gutter 2554 and the second V winning opening 2008, the flow direction of the game ball B is changed to the second V prize opening 2008. The player moves toward the V winning hole 2008 or away from the second V winning hole 2008. When the game ball B is accepted into the second V winning hole 2008 of the table 2555, an advantageous gaming state (for example, a jackpot game) occurs. On the other hand, if the game ball B is not accepted into the second V prize opening 2008 and is discharged from the front end of the table 2555 to the guide path 2551 and then is distributed to one side by the distribution section 2552, the game ball B is 2553 to the swing gutter 2554. Therefore, as long as the game ball B is distributed to one side (the hitting section 2553) by the distribution section 2552, the guide path 2551, the distribution section 2552, the hitting section 2553, swing gutter 2554, and table 2555 in this order.

For this reason, when the accessory prize opening 2006 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern and the game balls B can be supplied to the lottery accessory 2550, by looking at the distribution display section 2557a of the distribution section 2552, you can The player can confirm whether or not the game ball B is distributed to the first side (hitting section 2553) in the division section 2552. As a result, when looking at the distribution display section 2557a, when the distribution section 2552 is in a state of distributing to the first side (the striking section 2553, and eventually the second V prize opening 2008), when the distribution section 2552 is in a state of distributing to the first side (the striking section 2553, and by extension, the second V prize opening 2008), an item is received in the accessory prize opening 2006. Whether or not the game ball B (here, the game ball B accommodated in the storage part 2533a of the distribution rotating body 2533 in the first distribution device 2530) is supplied to the lottery accessory 2550 (guidance path 2551). This can make players excited. Thereafter, when the game ball B accepted into the accessory prize opening 2006 is supplied to the lottery accessory 2550 (guidance path 2551), it is determined whether or not it is distributed to the first side (hitting section 2553 side) in the distribution section 2552. This can make the player nervous and nervous. Then, when the game ball B is distributed to the first side and supplied to the hitting section 2553, the game ball B goes back and forth on the climbing section 2559 depending on the timing when the game ball B is hit. The player can be entertained depending on whether or not B is hit with enough force to overcome the climbing section 2559. In addition, since the game ball B that has climbed over the climbing section 2559 is supplied to the swinging gutter 2554 that is rotating back and forth, the timing when the swinging gutter 2554 can release the game ball B toward the second V prize opening 2008 Then, just as the game ball B is supplied to the swing gutter 2554, depending on whether or not the game ball B is hit with enough force to overcome the climbing section 2559, it is possible to keep the player excited and entertained. can.

When the game ball B hit by the hitting part 2553 climbs over the climbing part 2559 and is supplied to the swing gutter 2554, the game ball B heads toward the second V prize opening 2008 from the swing gutter 2554 that is rotating back and forth. It is possible to make the player excited and nervous depending on whether or not the game is released. Even if the game ball B is released from this swinging gutter 2554 in a direction away from the central axis (second V winning port 2008), the pair of swinging pieces 2556 that are symmetrically provided with the central axis as a border swing. Depending on the movement situation, there is a possibility that the game ball B that has come into contact with the swinging piece 2556 will be moved toward the central axis and head toward the second V prize opening 2008, so the player will not be disappointed and the player It is possible to suppress a decline in interest by entertaining people. Then, depending on whether or not the game ball B is accepted into the second V winning hole 2008 provided near the downstream end of the table 2555, the player can be made nervous and nervous. Then, an advantageous gaming state (a jackpot game in which the jackpot opening 2005 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern) occurs, so that the player can be greatly entertained.

On the other hand, even if the game ball B is not accepted into the second V winning hole 2008, it is released from the downstream end of the table 2555 to the guide path 2551, so the distribution unit 2552 provided downstream of the guide path 2551 Depending on whether or not the game ball B is distributed to the first side (hitting section 2553) again, the player's expectations can be increased. Since the money is supplied to the swinging gutter 2554 upstream of the table 2555 via the climbing section 2559, the player will not be disappointed because the chance to be accepted into the second V prize opening 2008 will come again. At this time, when looking at the distribution display section 2557a of the distribution bridge 2557 and seeing that the distribution section 2552 is in a state of distributing to the first side (hitting section 2553), the game ball B is guided from the front end of the table 2555. It is also possible to make the player excited depending on whether the game is released to the path 2551 or not. Therefore, it is possible to make the player nervous and excited in various scenes in the lottery accessory 2550, which makes it difficult for the player to get bored, entertains the player, and suppresses a decrease in interest. , it is possible to provide one pachinko machine equipped with a lottery accessory 2550 that can entertain players.

In addition, the lottery accessory 2550 of the center accessory 2500 has a wide planar table 2555 in the front and back and left and right directions, and a guide path 2551 is provided in front of the front end of the table 2555, so that the lottery accessory 2550 can be used as a lottery accessory. Since the accessory 2550 is large, the main lottery accessory 2550 can make the pachinko machine 1 stand out, strongly attracting player's interest, and the game using the lottery accessory 2550 can be made more attractive. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing to players by increasing the expectations of the players, making it easy for them to select this pachinko machine 1 as a pachinko machine to play on.

Furthermore, since the second V winning hole 2008 is provided on the central axis in the left-right direction of the table 2555, which is inclined so that the rear end is higher, the second V winning hole 2008 can be made to stand out, and the player can It is possible to make it easier for the player to direct his/her line of sight toward the second V winning hole 2008, and to make it easier to create a sense of expectation for the acceptance of the game ball B into the second V winning hole 2008. The pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected.

In addition, a swing gutter 2554 is provided near the rear end on the central axis of the table 2555, which has a high rear end, and a pair of swing pieces 2556 are provided symmetrically with respect to the central axis. The visibility of the rear swinging gutter 2554 is not obstructed by the swinging piece 2556, and the player can see the second V prize opening 2008 provided on the table 2555, the pair of swinging pieces 2556, and the swinging gutter. 2554 can be clearly recognized. Therefore, since it becomes easier to recognize the rotational and rocking conditions of the pair of rocking pieces 2556 and the rocking gutter 2554, it becomes easier to predict the rolling path of the game ball B due to these movements, and the game is played as predicted. The movement of the game ball B can be enjoyed depending on whether the ball B rolls or not.

In addition, in the distribution section 2552, since a losing port 2009 communicating with the second side is provided in the guideway 2551, the distribution bridge 2557 can be rotated by the lottery loop solenoid 2558 from the state closed by the distribution bridge 2557. When the losing port 2009 is opened, the losing port 2009 is opened upward in the guideway 2551, so the losing port 2009 can be seen by the player, and the guideway 2551 can be opened. It is made to recognize that the game ball B that is playing is distributed to the second side (losing hole 2009), that is, it is not distributed to the first side (hitting section 2553, and by extension, second V winning hole 2008). It can be made easier. Therefore, when the conspicuous failure port 2009 is closed by the distribution bridge 2557, it can be easily recognized that the distribution is to the first side (the striking part 2553), and just by looking at the guideway 2551 It is possible to easily determine whether the information is to be distributed to

Furthermore, depending on the timing of hitting the game ball B by the hitting section 2553, the game ball B moves back and forth on the climbing section 2559, so the staying time of the game ball B in the lottery accessory 2550 can be gained (lengthened). This makes it possible to avoid disappointing the player due to the completion of the game on the lottery accessory 2550 in a short period of time, and to use the time earned by the climbing section 2559 to create an effect using an effect image or the like on the effect display device 1600. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can sufficiently show the game to the player and make the player more entertained.

Moreover, since the climbing part 2559 is provided between the hitting part 2553 and the swinging gutter 2554 (swinging passage 2562), even if the game ball B is strongly hit in the hitting part 2553, it will not climb the climbing part 2559. Since the momentum can be attenuated, and the momentum can be further attenuated by swinging in the left and right directions in the swinging passage 2562, the game ball B is supplied to the swinging gutter 2554 with great force. As a result, even though the swinging gutter 2554 rotates back and forth to change the release direction, the momentum of the game ball B causes the swinging gutter 2554 to move in a direction different from the releasing direction of the swinging gutter 2554. If the game ball B is released, causing discomfort to the player, or if the game ball B is violently released from the swinging gutter 2554 onto the table 2555, the staying time of the game ball B on the table 2555 (rolling (time) can be shortened or avoided. Therefore, it is possible for the player to enjoy the release of the game ball B from the swing gutter 2554 without causing discomfort to the player, and it is also possible to enjoy the movement of the game ball B rolling on the table 2555. be able to.

In addition, in a case where the player can select the timing at which the game balls B are supplied to the lottery accessory 2550 by driving the game balls B, the game balls B are distributed to the first side in the distribution display section 2557a. Since it is possible to perform the driving operation so that the game ball B is supplied at the timing of displaying that the game ball B is in a state where the game ball B is It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that allows players to enjoy the typing operation and suppresses a decrease in player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, when the loss port 2009 is opened, the distributing bridge 2557 stands upright from the guideway 2551 with its tip positioned above the base end, so the game ball B moves vigorously along the guideway 2551. Even if the game ball B is distributed and tries to jump over the loss opening 2009, it can be prevented from jumping over and entering the first side (hitting section 2553) by the upright distribution bridge 2557, and the game ball B can be securely It can be distributed to the loss port 2009 (second side).

Furthermore, when the loss port 2009 is opened, the distribution bridge 2557 stands upright from the guideway 2551 with its tip positioned above the base end, so the distribution bridge 2557 stands out from the players. At the same time, since the distribution display section 2557a provided on the distribution bridge 2557 becomes visible, the game ball B is also distributed to the second side by the distribution bridge 2557 (distribution display section 2557a). The state can be determined.

[11. Details of the center role on the game board]
Next, details of the center accessory 2500 provided on the game board 5 will be explained.

[11-1. Center accessory of first embodiment]
The center accessory 2500 of the first embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 94 to 97 and the like. FIG. 94 is an explanatory diagram showing the center accessory of the first embodiment attached to the game panel, cut in the middle in the vertical direction, and shown together with the front component. FIG. 95(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the decorative body in the center accessory disassembled into the front decorative part and the rear decorative part from the front, and FIG. 95(b) is the decorative body consisting of the front decorative part and the rear decorative part. It is an explanatory view showing it from the front. FIG. 96 is an explanatory diagram showing the center frame of the center accessory of FIG. 94 placed on a stand with its rear end facing down. FIG. 97 is an explanatory diagram showing, in partial cross section, a center accessory equipped with a center frame to which a decorative body different from that shown in FIG. 94 is attached.

The center accessory 2500 of the first embodiment is provided on the game board 5 of the first embodiment shown in FIGS. 78 to 83 and the like. This center accessory 2500 includes a transparent center frame 2511 attached to the front of the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110), and a warp passage 2512 that can guide game balls B from the outside of the center frame 2511 to the inside of the frame. and a stage 2513 which is provided at the lower side within the frame of the center frame 2511 and causes the game balls B flowing through the warp passage 2512 to roll in the left-right direction and then be released into the game area 5a.

Moreover, the center accessory 2500 further includes a decoration body 2570 attached to the center frame 2511 and decorated with a predetermined decoration.

The center frame 2511 includes a frame-shaped insertion portion 2511a that is inserted into the opening 1112 of the panel board 1110 in the game panel 1100 and is provided along the inner peripheral surface of the opening 1112 and extends in the front-rear direction. A flat flange portion 2511b protrudes outward from the outer periphery of the front end of the insertion portion 2511a and comes into contact with the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, and a flat flange portion 2511b extends further forward than the flange portion 2511b and flows down the game area 5a. An inflow regulating portion 2511c that restricts the game ball B from flowing into the opening 1112 of the panel board 1110 in the game panel 1100, and a flat support portion 2511d protruding from the inner periphery of the front end of the insertion portion 2511a. have.

The rear end of the center frame 2511 (insertion part 2511a) is provided so as to be located more forward than the rear end (rear surface) of the game panel 1100 (panel holder 1120). Note that the rear end of the center frame 2511 may not protrude rearward than the rear surface of the game panel 1100, or may protrude rearward than the rear surface of the game panel 1100.

As shown in FIG. 94, the decoration body 2570 includes a flat transparent front plate 2571 attached to the front end of the center frame 2511, a front decoration part 2572 attached to the front surface of the front plate, and a center frame 2511 (inserted). 2511a). In other words, the decorative body 2570 is provided so as to extend within the frame of the center frame 2511, and includes a rear decorative portion 2573 provided forward of the rear end of the center frame 2511, and a rear decorative portion 2573 provided in the rear decorative portion 2573. It has a front decoration part 2572 provided so as to overlap at least a part of the front side. The front decoration part 2572 and the rear decoration part 2573 have decorations that cooperate with each other.

The front plate 2571 is provided so that its rear surface abuts the front end surface of the inflow regulating portion 2511c. This front plate 2571 forms a ball passage 2517 through which game balls B can flow between it and the support portion 2511d.

As shown in FIG. 95, the front decoration part 2572 of the decoration body 2570 is decorated with a predetermined pattern (here, a pattern of a cloud-like pattern arranged around a demon's face). The front decoration part 2572 includes a transparent transparent part 2572a provided in the front part of the ball passage 2517, and a dot-shaped opaque part provided in the transparent part 2572a and forming part of a decorative pattern. and a plurality of dot portions 2572b (see FIG. 95(a)).

The transparent portion 2572a of the front decorative portion 2572 is formed to be colorless and transparent or colored and transparent. The transparent transparent portion 2572a is colored in the same color as the pattern so as to constitute a part of the pattern. In this embodiment, the transparent portion 2572a of the devil's face is colored and transparent, and the transparent portion 2572a of the cloud pattern is colorless and transparent.

Each dot portion 2572b of the front decoration portion 2572 is colored in the same color as the pattern. As shown in an enlarged view in FIG. 95(a), the plurality of dot portions 2572b are each formed in a circular shape, and the dot portions 2572b are arranged in a diagonal direction at an angle of 45 degrees above and below the horizontal at intervals equal to the diameter of the dot portions. It is set open.

The rear decoration part 2573 is attached to the rear side of the transparent support part 2511d in the center frame 2511. The rear decoration part 2573 is provided so as to extend within the frame of the frame-shaped insertion part 2511a in the center frame 2511. The rear decoration part 2573 is decorated with the same pattern as the front decoration part 2572 provided in the front, but in an opaque manner. In addition, when the game panel 1100 is a transparent member, the rear decoration part 2573 may be on the back surface of the game panel 1100. In this case, it has the effect of increasing the area for decoration.

The front decoration part 2572 and the rear decoration part 2573 are made by printing a decorative pattern on a transparent resin film. The front decoration part 2572 and the rear decoration part 2573 of this embodiment are formed into a film shape.

As shown in FIG. 95(b), when this decorative body 2570 is viewed from the front (front), the rear decorative part 2573 provided at the rear passes through the transparent transparent part 2572a of the decoration (picture) of the front decorative part 2572. Since the decoration (pattern) is visible, the pattern of the rear decoration part 2573 supplements the transparent part 2572a, so that the original pattern without the transparent part 2572a can be seen.

On the other hand, when the game ball B flows through the ball passage 2517 provided between the front decoration part 2572 and the rear decoration part 2573, the game ball B becomes visible through the transparent transmission part 2572a in the front decoration part 2572. As a result, it is possible to avoid giving the player a sense of distrust or anxiety due to the game ball B becoming invisible, even temporarily, and reducing the interest in playing the game using the game ball B. can be suppressed.

The decorative body 2570 of this embodiment is attached to the center frame 2511 at a location in front of the rear end of the insertion portion 2511a. That is, when the decorative body 2570 is attached to the center frame 2511, a part of the decorative body 2570 does not protrude rearward from the rear end of the center frame 2511. As a result, as shown in FIG. 96, when the decoration body 2570 is attached to the center frame 2511 and the rear end of the center frame 2511 is placed down on the stand TA, only the rear end surface of the insertion portion 2511a is placed on the stand TA. come into contact with (touch).

The center accessory 2500 of this embodiment includes, in addition to the decoration 2570, a symbol display 2518, a first sorting device 2530, a second sorting device 2540, a lottery accessory 2550, etc., although the details are omitted. It is attached to the frame 2511. The symbol display 2518 displays special symbols, fourth symbols, etc. drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first starting port 2003 or the second starting port 2004.

Although detailed illustrations are omitted, the solenoids such as the first distribution solenoid 2534 of the first distribution device 2530 and the second distribution solenoid 2544 of the second distribution device 2540 attached to the center frame 2511 , and is attached so that its metal case is located at the rear end. As a result, when the center frame 2511 (center accessory 2500) is placed with its rear end down on the stand TA, the durable metal case of the solenoid comes into contact with the stand TA, making it less likely to be damaged during assembly work, etc. be able to. At this time, a resin cover may be provided to cover the metal case of the solenoid.

Furthermore, although not shown, the center accessory 2500 is provided with wiring connected to an LED board, a relay board, a solenoid, and the like. The wiring is provided along the insertion portion 2511a of the center frame 2511 of the center accessory 2500, and is also provided so as to be hidden by the decoration of the decoration body 2570. This suppresses deterioration in appearance due to the wiring being visible to the player. Note that the insertion portion 2511a of the center frame 2511 may be formed into a double wall shape, and the wiring may be passed between the walls. In this case, it is desirable to use a flexible flat cable (FFC) as the wiring.

Note that in the above embodiment, the transparent portion 2572a and the dot portion 2572b may be reversed. Specifically, the transparent portion 2572a may be an opaque portion with a pattern, and the dot portion 2572b may be a transparent portion.

Further, in the above embodiment, the transmitting portion 2572a is shown as a transparent portion, but the transmitting portion 2572a is not limited to this, and may be a portion penetrating back and forth.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the front decoration part 2572 has a transparent part 2572a and a dot part 2572b as decorations (designs), and the rear decoration part 2573 has decorations (designs) that supplement the transparent part 2572a. Although a decorative body 2570 consisting of A decorative body 2570 may be provided in the.

Further, in the above embodiment, a pattern is printed on a transparent film as the decoration of the front decoration part 2572 and the rear decoration part 2573 that constitute the decoration body 2570, but the invention is not limited to this. A center accessory 2500 including a center frame 2511 to which a decorative body 2570A as shown in FIG. 97 is attached may be used. This decoration body 2570A includes a flat front decoration part 2572 attached to the front end of the inflow regulating part 2511c in the center frame 2511, and a frame-shaped insertion part 2511a attached behind the front decoration part 2572. A rear decoration part 2573 is formed three-dimensionally.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the front decoration part 2572 and the rear decoration part 2573 of the decoration body 2570A are decorated with three-dimensional shapes, respectively. The front decoration part 2572 and the rear decoration part 2573 are decorated with decorations that cooperate with each other. Furthermore, the front decorative portion 2572 and the rear decorative portion 2573 are provided so that at least a portion thereof overlaps when viewed from the front.

Decorative body 2570A (rear decorative part 2573) is provided forward of the rear end of center frame 2511. Therefore, when the decorative body 2570A is attached to the center frame 2511, a part of the decorative body 2570A does not protrude rearward from the rear end of the center frame 2511.

This decorative body 2570A may be molded from pre-colored resin, or may be painted or pasted with a sticker after molding. In addition, metallic pigments or plating may be used as the decoration of the decoration body 2570A, and the glittering decoration can strongly attract the attention of players, making the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing to players. can be provided.

Further, as the decoration body 2570A, a part of the rear decoration part 2573 may be made to protrude forward to the same position as the front decoration part 2572. Thereby, it becomes possible to easily create a sense of depth of the decorative body 2570A, and the decorative effect can be further enhanced.

According to the present embodiment, the transparent center frame 2511 attached to the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 has a rear decorative portion 2573 provided forward of the rear end of the center frame 2511, and a transparent center frame 2511 attached to the game panel 1100 of the game board 5. Since the decoration body 2570 is provided with the front decoration part 2572 which is provided so as to overlap at least a part of the front, the center frame 2511 is transparent, making it less noticeable and making the decoration body 2570 relatively conspicuous. In addition, since the front decoration part 2572 and the rear decoration part 2573 of the decoration body 2570 partially overlap, the boundary between the decoration of the front decoration part 2572 and the decoration of the rear decoration part 2573 can be made difficult to distinguish. This makes it possible to show the decorations by the front decoration part 2572 and the rear decoration part 2573 in good condition to the player. As a result, the front decorative part 2572 and the rear decorative part 2573 can form a decorative body 2570 with a high decorative effect, so that the decorative body 2570 can strongly attract the player's attention and prevent him from getting bored with it. Therefore, it is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can suppress a decline in player's interest.

Further, according to the present embodiment, a part of the front decoration part 2572 (the part in front of the ball passage 2517) constituting the decoration body 2570 is decorated with a transparent part 2572a and a plurality of dot parts 2572b. At the same time, a rear decoration part 2573 is provided at the rear of the area with a decoration that coordinates with the decoration of the front decoration part 2572 (decoration with the same pattern), so that the rear decoration part 2573 can be seen through the transparent transparent part 2572a. By supplementing the part of the transparent part 2572a, one good decoration (picture) can be shown as if the transparent part 2572a did not exist. can be entertained.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, as described above, since the decoration of the front part of the ball passage 2517 in the front decoration part 2572 is composed of the transparent part 2572a and the plurality of dot parts 2572b, the ball passage 2517 The game balls B circulating can be visually recognized from the front through the transparent part 2572a. As a result, when the game ball B is not flowing through the ball passage 2517, the decoration of the rear decoration part 2573 at the rear can be seen through the transparent part 2572a, allowing you to enjoy the good decoration by the front decoration part 2572 and the rear decoration part 2573. However, when the game balls B are flowing through the ball path 2517, the game balls B are made visible through the transparent portion 2572a and the game balls B are no longer visible, giving the player a sense of distrust and anxiety. This can be avoided, and the game with the game ball B can be enjoyed and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

Further, according to this embodiment, since the rear decoration part 2573 of the decoration body 2570 is provided in front of the rear end of the center frame 2511, the decoration body 2570 is attached to the center frame 2511. When placed on the stand TA with its rear end facing down, only the rear end surface of the insertion portion 2511a contacts the stand TA. Therefore, when assembling or disassembling the center frame 2511 by placing it on the stand TA with its rear end facing down, the center frame 2511 does not wobble and the pachinko machine 1 is easy to assemble. can do.

Further, according to this embodiment, since the rear decoration part 2573 of the decoration body 2570 is provided in front of the rear end of the center frame 2511, the decoration body 2570 is not projected rearward beyond the rear end of the center frame 2511. Therefore, it is possible to easily secure a space behind the center frame 2511 (gaming panel 1100). Therefore, it is possible to provide a large decorative body, a movable decorative body, etc. behind the center frame 2511, and it is possible to easily construct a pachinko machine 1 that can further entertain players.

Further, according to this embodiment, since the symbol display device 2518 for displaying special symbols is attached to the center frame 2511, the symbol display device 2518 can be attached to the game panel 1100 together with the center frame 2511. Therefore, compared to the case where the symbol display device 2518 is separately attached, the effort required to assemble the pachinko machine 1 can be saved.

Note that the decoration of the center frame 2511 (decoration body 2570, decoration body 2570A) may be coordinated with the decoration given to the game panel 1100.

[11-2. Center accessory of second embodiment]
The center accessory 2500 of the second embodiment will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 98 and the like. FIG. 98(a) is an explanatory diagram of the main part of the center accessory of the second embodiment viewed from within the frame, and FIG. 98(b) is a sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 98(a). ) is an explanatory diagram showing the center frame of the center accessory of (a) placed on a stand with its rear end facing down.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the center accessory 2500 of the second embodiment is a transparent frame-shaped center attached to the front of the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110), similar to the center accessory 2500 of the first embodiment. A frame 2511, a warp passage 2512 that can guide the game ball B from the outside of the center frame 2511 to the inside of the frame, and a game ball B that is provided at the lower side of the frame of the center frame 2511 and circulated through the warp passage 2512. A stage 2513 that rolls the ball in the left and right direction and then releases it into the game area 5a.

Moreover, the center accessory 2500 further includes a decorative body 2580 attached to the center frame 2511 and decorated with a predetermined decoration.

The center frame 2511 includes a frame-shaped insertion portion 2511a that is inserted into the opening 1112 of the panel board 1110 in the game panel 1100 and is provided along the inner peripheral surface of the opening 1112 and extends in the front-rear direction. A flat flange portion 2511b protrudes outward from the outer periphery of the front end of the insertion portion 2511a and comes into contact with the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, and a flat flange portion 2511b extends further forward than the flange portion 2511b and flows down the game area 5a. An inflow regulating portion 2511c that restricts the game ball B from flowing into the opening 1112 of the panel board 1110 in the game panel 1100, and a flat support portion 2511d protruding from the inner periphery of the front end of the insertion portion 2511a. have.

The rear end of the center frame 2511 (insertion part 2511a) is provided so as to be located more forward than the rear end (rear surface) of the game panel 1100 (panel holder 1120). Note that the rear end of the center frame 2511 may not protrude rearward than the rear surface of the game panel 1100, or may protrude rearward than the rear surface of the game panel 1100.

The decoration body 2580 includes a front decoration part 2581, a rear decoration part 2582, a transparent front cover 2583 that covers the front side of the rear decoration part 2582, and a transparent front cover 2583 that is provided on the rear side of the rear decoration part 2582 so that light enters from the side. A flat diffuser lens 2584 that can irradiate the diffused light forward; a transparent rear cover 2585 attached to the rear side of the front cover 2583 to cover the diffuser lens 2584 from behind; It has an LED board 2586 on which an LED 2586a that emits light is mounted.

The front decoration part 2581 is provided more forward than the rear decoration part 2582. The front decoration part 2581 is attached to the rear side of the transparent support part 2511d in the center frame 2511.

The rear decorative portion 2582 extends within the frame of the center frame 2511, and a portion thereof protrudes rearward beyond the rear end of the center frame 2511 (insertion portion 2511a).

The front decoration part 2581 and the rear decoration part 2582 are provided with decorations that cooperate with each other, and are provided so that at least a portion thereof overlaps when viewed from the front. Although illustration is omitted, the decoration of the front decoration part 2581 and the decoration of the rear decoration part 2582 are each decorated with a pattern of a corresponding part of one pattern, with the parts overlapping each other in front view as the border. .

The front decoration part 2581 and the rear decoration part 2582 are entirely formed to be opaque. That is, the front decoration part 2581 and the rear decoration part 2582 are constituted by opaque parts. Further, the front decoration part 2581 and the rear decoration part 2582 have translucency. Note that the front decoration part 2581 and the rear decoration part 2582 may be provided with a transparent part (transparent part) as a part of the decoration.

The front decoration part 2581 and the rear decoration part 2582 are made by printing a decorative pattern on a transparent resin film. The front decoration part 2581 and the rear decoration part 2582 of this embodiment are formed into a film shape.

The LED board 2586 is provided behind the front decoration part 2581. Thereby, the LED board 2586 and the wiring connected to the LED board 2586 are hidden from view from the front by the front decoration part 2581. The LED board 2586 can decorate the rear decoration part 2582 by emitting light by emitting light from the plurality of LEDs 2586a mounted thereon.

When the decorative body 2580 of this embodiment is attached to the center frame 2511, a portion thereof protrudes rearward from the rear end of the center frame 2511. As a result, as shown in FIG. 98(c), when the decoration body 2580 is attached to the center frame 2511 and placed on the stand TA with the rear end of the center frame 2511 facing down, the decoration body 2580 (the rear decoration part 2582)'s rear end abuts (touches) the stand TA, and a part of the rear end of the center frame 2511 abuts the stand TA.

The center accessory 2500 of this embodiment includes, in addition to the decoration 2580, a symbol display 2518, a first sorting device 2530, a second sorting device 2540, a lottery accessory 2550, etc. at the center, although the details are omitted. It is attached to the frame 2511. The symbol display 2518 displays special symbols, fourth symbols, etc. drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first starting port 2003 or the second starting port 2004.

Although detailed illustrations are omitted, the solenoids such as the first distribution solenoid 2534 of the first distribution device 2530 and the second distribution solenoid 2544 of the second distribution device 2540 attached to the center frame 2511 , and is attached so that its metal case is located at the rear end. As a result, when the center frame 2511 (center accessory 2500) is placed with its rear end down on the stand TA, the durable metal case of the solenoid comes into contact with the stand TA, making it less likely to be damaged during assembly work, etc. be able to. At this time, a resin cover may be provided to cover the metal case of the solenoid.

In the above embodiment, the insertion portion 2511a of the center frame 2511 may be formed into a double wall shape, and the wiring of the LED board 2586 may be passed between the walls. In this case, it is desirable to use a flexible flat cable (FFC) as the wiring.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, a pattern is printed on a transparent film as the decoration of the front decoration part 2581 and the rear decoration part 2582 constituting the decoration body 2580, but the invention is not limited to this. The front decorative portion 2581 and the rear decorative portion 2582 may be three-dimensionally shaped. Alternatively, the configuration of the decorative body 2570 shown in FIG. 95 may be applied to this embodiment.

According to this embodiment, a transparent center frame 2511 attached to the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 includes a rear decorative portion 2582 that partially protrudes rearward than the rear end of the center frame 2511, and a rear decorative portion Since the decoration body 2580 is provided with the front decoration part 2581 provided in front of the decoration body 2582, the center frame 2511 is transparent, making it difficult to stand out and making the decoration body 2580 relatively noticeable. At the same time, the front decoration part 2581 and the rear decoration part 2582 of the decoration body 2580 allow the player to see a deep decoration. At this time, since the rear decoration part 2582 and the front decoration part 2581 are decorated in a manner that cooperates with each other and are provided so that a portion of each part overlaps when viewed from the front, the Sometimes, it becomes possible to make the boundary between the decoration of the front decoration part 2581 and the decoration of the rear decoration part 2582 difficult to see, and the large decoration of the front decoration part 2581 and the rear decoration part 2582 can be shown to the player in good condition. The rear decoration part 2582 and the front decoration part 2581 can form a large and deep decoration body 2580 with a high decorative effect. Therefore, since the center frame 2511 can be provided with the decorative body 2580 having a high decorative effect, the decorative body 2580 can strongly attract the attention of the players and make it difficult for them to get bored, thereby suppressing a decline in the interest of the players. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can perform the following functions.

Further, according to the present embodiment, since the rear decoration part 2582 constituting the decoration body 2580 is extended within the frame of the center frame 2511, the rear decoration part 2582 extends into the game area on the front side of the game panel 1100. The player can enjoy the game with the game balls B in the game area 5a in a good condition without narrowing the area 5a or making it difficult to see the game balls B flowing down the game area 5a.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, since the rear decoration part 2582 constituting the decoration body 2580 is extended within the frame of the center frame 2511, the effect display device provided at the rear of the game panel 1100 1600, the back-front presentation unit 3300, the back-back presentation unit 3400, etc., the area around the presentation display device 1600 (display screen) is decorated, and the decoration body (movable decoration) of the back-front presentation unit 3300 and the back-back presentation unit 3400 is It is possible to provide a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 that can display and perform decorations (directions) with a higher decorative effect in cooperation with the player's body) and that can strongly attract the attention of players. .

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, the opaque portion of the decorative body 2580 makes it difficult to see the wiring of electronic components such as the LED board 2586 from the front, so the wiring can be hidden by the opaque portion. By being visible, deterioration in appearance can be prevented, and the decorative effect of the decoration body 2580 can be more easily exhibited.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, since the decoration body 2580 (front decoration part 2581) is provided in front of the LED board 2586, the LED board 2586 can be hidden by the decoration body 2580 (decoration). It is possible to avoid poor appearance due to the LED board 2586 being visible, and it is possible to more easily exhibit the decorative effect of the decoration body 2580.

Further, according to this embodiment, since the symbol display device 2518 for displaying special symbols is attached to the center frame 2511, the symbol display device 2518 can be attached to the game panel 1100 together with the center frame 2511. Therefore, compared to the case where the symbol display device 2518 is separately attached, the effort required to assemble the pachinko machine 1 can be saved.

Note that the decoration of the center frame 2511 (decoration body 2580) may be coordinated with the decoration applied to the game panel 1100.

[11-3. Center accessory of third embodiment]
Next, the center accessory 2500A of the third embodiment will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 99 to 102 and the like. FIG. 99 is a front view showing the game board provided with the center accessory of the third embodiment with the rear side of the game panel omitted. FIG. 100 is an exploded perspective view of the center accessory and game panel shown in FIG. 99 when viewed from the front. FIG. 101 is an exploded perspective view of the center accessory shown in FIG. 99, viewed from the front. FIGS. 102(a) to 102(g) are explanatory diagrams showing various joining patterns between the first frame and the second frame in the center accessory. In addition, below, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected about the same structure as said center accessory 2500, and detailed description is abbreviate|omitted.

As shown in FIG. 99, the center accessory 2500A of the third embodiment is located above the starting port unit 2100 in the gaming area 5a, slightly above the center in a front view, and is located above the gaming panel 1100. It is attached to the front. Note that the game panel 1100 of this embodiment is composed of a single plate material, as shown in FIG. 100.

The center accessory 2500A includes a transparent center frame 2700 formed in a frame shape, a warp passage 2512 that can guide the game ball B from the outside of the center frame 2700 to the inside of the frame, and a It is provided with a stage 2513 which is provided at the lower side and causes the game ball B that has passed through the warp passage 2512 to roll in the left-right direction and then is released into the game area 5a. Although details will be described later, the frame-shaped center frame 2700 is divided into a plurality of frames in the circumferential direction of the frame. Note that a decorative body 2570 shown in FIG. 95 or a decorative body 2580 shown in FIG. 98 may be provided in this embodiment. Further, the decoration of the center frame 2700 (decoration body 2570, decoration body 2570A, decoration body 2580) may be coordinated with the decoration applied to the game panel 1100.

Moreover, the center accessory 2500A has a connection holding part 2710 that connects adjacent frames of the plurality of frames that constitute the center frame 2700.

Furthermore, the center accessory 2500A includes a symbol display 2518 that displays the lottery result of a special symbol drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first starting port 2003 or the second starting port 2004, and the gate 2010 and the second starting port 2518. It has a second starting opening unit 2720 having an opening 2004, an attacker unit 2730 having a big winning opening 2005, and an accessory winning opening unit 2740 having an accessory winning opening 2006. ing.

[11-3a. Center frame]
The center frame 2700 in the center accessory 2500A of the third embodiment is provided corresponding to the edge of the opening 1112 formed in the game panel 1100, so that the game ball B flowing down the game area 5a is placed in the opening 1112. and a flange portion 2700b extending from the rear end of the inflow regulating portion 2700a in a direction parallel to the front surface of the gaming panel 1100.

The inflow regulating portion 2700a of the center frame 2700 projects forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100 when the center frame 2700 is attached to the game panel 1100.

The flange portion 2700b extends in a flat plate shape to the outside or inside of the frame depending on its circumferential location on the center frame 2700. A part of the rear surface of the flange portion 2700b is in contact with the front surface of the game panel 1100 when the center frame 2700 is attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100.

The center frame 2700 also includes a non-flange portion 2700c in which the flange portion 2700b does not extend from the rear end of the inflow regulating portion 2700a on at least one side of the outside and inside of the frame, and a non-flange portion 2700c that extends rearward beyond the flange portion 2700b. It has an insertion part (not shown) which is inserted into the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100. At this non-flange portion 2700c, the rear surface of the inflow regulating portion 2700a matches the rear surface of the flange portion 2700b. The insertion portion is provided in a portion of the entire circumference of the center frame 2700.

The frame-shaped center frame 2700 of this embodiment is divided into a plurality of parts in the circumferential direction. Specifically, the center frame 2700 is divided into five parts: a first frame 2701, a second frame 2702, a third frame 2703, a fourth frame 2704, and a fifth frame 2705. It is formed into a configuration. This center accessory 2500A has a connection holding part 2710 that connects adjacent frames.

The first frame 2701 constitutes an upper portion from the upper and lower middle of the upper side and the left side of the center frame 2700. The second frame 2702 is continuous with the lower end of the left side of the first frame 2701, and forms the lower side and lower side of the left side of the center frame 2700 from the upper and lower middle. The third frame 2703 constitutes the upper right side of the center frame 2700 so as to continue with the right end of the first frame 2701. The fourth frame 2704 continues from the lower end of the third frame 2703 and constitutes the middle portion of the right side of the center frame 2700. The fifth frame 2705 constitutes the lower part of the center frame 2700 so as to continue with the lower end of the fourth frame 2704 and the right end of the second frame 2702.

A warp passage 2512 and a stage 2513 are attached to the second frame 2702. A accessory prize opening unit 2740 is attached to the third frame 2703. A second starting port unit 2720 is attached to the fourth frame 2704. An attacker unit 2730 is attached to the fifth frame 2705.

Below, among the plurality of frames forming the center frame 2700, the first frame 2701 and the second frame 2702 will be representatively explained in detail.

First, the first frame 2701 of the center frame 2700 is formed transparent. This first frame 2701 is formed to constitute an upper side part and an upper part of the left side in the vertical direction in the center frame 2700 (center accessory 2500A).

The first frame 2701 is provided so as to correspond to the edge of the opening 1112 formed in the game panel 1100, and restricts the game ball B flowing down the game area 5a from flowing into the inside of the opening 1112. a flat first flange portion 2701b connected to the rear end of the first inflow regulating portion 2701a and extending along the front surface of the game panel 1100; The rear end of the portion 2701a includes a first non-flange portion 2701c in which the first flange portion 2701b is not provided on at least one of the outside and inside of the frame.

The first inflow regulating portion 2701a of the first frame 2701 is linearly inclined so that the right side becomes lower to the right from near the center in the left-right direction on the upper side, and the left side of that part becomes lower toward the left. It bends in multiple stages and transitions to the left side, with the lower end of the left side extending vertically downward.

One end of the connection holding part 2710 is attached to and detached from the part inside the frame near the right end of the first inflow regulating part 2701a and the part inside the frame at the part extending vertically downward at the lower left end. Mounted as possible.

The first flange portion 2701b is provided so as to extend toward both the outside and inside of the frame at a portion of the first inflow regulating portion 2701a that is linearly inclined to be lower to the right on the upper side. In addition, the first flange portion 2701b extends outward from the frame except for the vicinity of the left end at the portion of the first inflow regulating portion 2701a that is bent in multiple stages so as to become lower toward the left. Near the left end of the first inflow regulating portion 2701a (a portion above the vertically extending portion below the left end of the first inflow regulating portion 2701a), the first inflow regulating portion 2701a is provided so as to extend inside the frame.

The first flange portion 2701b is provided with a mounting hole at an appropriate position for mounting on the game panel 1100.

The first non-flange portion 2701c is provided only on the inside of the frame at the right end of the first inflow restriction portion 2701a, and is provided outside the frame at a portion extending vertically downward at the lower left end of the first inflow restriction portion 2701a. and inside.

Next, the second frame 2702 of the center frame 2700 is formed transparent. This second frame 2702 is formed to constitute a lower part of the left side in the vertical direction and a lower part of the center frame 2700 (center accessory 2500A). A warp passage 2512 and a stage 2513 are attached to the second frame 2702.

The second frame 2702 of the center frame 2700 is provided so as to correspond to the edge of the opening 1112 formed in the game panel 1100, and the game ball B flowing down the game area 5a flows into the inside of the opening 1112. a second inflow regulating part 2702a that regulates the movement of the player; a flat second flange part 2702b that is connected to the rear end of the second inflow regulating part 2702a and extends along the front surface of the game panel 1100; At the rear end of the second inflow regulating part 2702a, a second non-flange part 2702c is provided in which the second flange part 2702b is not provided on at least one of the outside and inside of the frame.

The second inflow regulating portion 2702a of the second frame 2702 is provided horizontally divided into a portion on the left side that extends vertically and a portion on the right end of the lower side, and is provided between these portions. Not yet. To be more specific, the second inflow regulating portion 2702a on the left side extends downward from the upper end of the left side along the left side, then moves to the lower side, and moves to the right (lower right) along the lower side so that the right end becomes lower. It is short and extended. Further, the second inflow regulating portion 2702a on the right side extends vertically along the right end of the lower side.

One end of the connection holding part 2710 is removably attached to the part inside the frame at the upper end of the second inflow regulating part 2702a on the left and the part on the right side (right side surface) of the second inflow regulating part 2702a on the right. mounted on.

The left second inflow regulating section 2702a is provided with an entrance of the warp passage 2512, and a stage 2513 is provided between the left and right second inflow regulating sections 2702a.

The second flange portion 2702b is provided so as to extend toward the inside of the frame at the vertically extending portion (the left side portion) of the second inflow restriction portion 2702a on the left side, and the second inflow restriction portion 2702b on the left side A portion of the portion 2702a that extends to the lower right along the lower side is provided so as to extend to both the outside and inside of the frame. This second flange portion 2702b is provided so as to extend largely to the outside of the frame at the lower side, and connects the two second inflow regulating portions 2702a that are separated into left and right sides by this portion.

The second flange portion 2702b is provided with an attachment hole at an appropriate position for attachment to the game panel 1100.

The second non-flange portion 2702c is provided on the outside of the frame at a portion extending vertically along the left side of the second inflow regulating portion 2702a on the left side, and on the right side (right side) in the second inflow regulating portion 2702a on the right side. (face).

This second frame 2702 extends further rearward than the second flange portion 2702b, and further includes a second insertion portion (not shown) that is inserted into the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100. The second insertion portion protrudes rearward from the second flange portion 2702b so as to connect the two left and right second inflow regulating portions 2702a. A stage 2513 is attached to this second insertion section.

Next, attaching the center frame 2700 to the game panel 1100 will be described using the first frame 2701 and the second frame 2702 as examples. The first frame 2701 and the second frame 2702 are attached to the game panel 1100 with attachment screws through attachment holes provided in the first flange portion 2701b and the second flange portion 2702b.

For example, between the first frame 2701 and the second frame 2702, as shown in FIG. 99 and FIG. 2702a are attached to the game panel 1100 so that they are adjacent to each other.

Specifically, the second inflow regulating part 2702a of the second frame 2702 is located to the right of the first inflow regulating part 2701a of the first frame 2701 so that the vertical position thereof slightly overlaps with that of the first inflow regulating part 2701a of the first frame 2701. Then, the first frame 2701 and the second frame 2702 are attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100. In other words, the right side of the first inflow regulating part 2701a where the first non-flange part 2701c is provided, and the left side of the second inflow regulating part 2702a where the second non-flange part 2702c is provided, They are installed so that they face each other. Thereby, the first non-flange portion 2701c and the second non-flange portion 2702c can bring the first inflow regulating portion 2701a and the second inflow regulating portion 2702a as close as possible.

By the way, in the center accessory 2500 of the first embodiment, which uses a center frame 2511 that is not divided in the circumferential direction of the frame, the game area 5a on the front side of the game panel 1100 may be changed due to a design change or the like. If it is desired to change the size, the center frame 2511 needs to be remade, which may increase the cost.

In contrast, the center frame 2700 of this embodiment is divided into a plurality of frames (here, five frames, first frame 2701 to fifth frame 2705) in the circumferential direction of the frame, so each frame is attached to the center frame 2700. By changing the position, the size of the gaming area 5a can be freely changed.

Specifically, for example, when increasing the area below the second frame 2702 in the game area 5a, as shown in FIG. Install it in the position you moved it to. Thereby, it is possible to cope with expansion and contraction of the game area 5a (opening 1112 of the game panel 1100) in the vertical direction.

Alternatively, when making the area to the left of the second frame 2702 in the gaming area 5a smaller, the second inflow regulating part 2702a of the second frame 2702 is smaller than the second inflow regulating part 2702a of the first frame 2701, as shown in FIG. 102(c). The second frame 2702 is attached to a position moved to the left from the state shown in FIG. 102(a) so that it is located to the left of the first inflow regulating portion 2701a. Thereby, it is possible to cope with expansion and contraction of the game area 5a (opening 1112 of the game panel 1100) in the left and right directions.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 102(d), the lower end of the first inflow regulating part 2701a of the first frame 2701 and the upper end of the second inflow regulating part 2702a of the second frame 2702 are placed in a state where they are opposed to each other. , they may be attached to the game panel 1100, facing each other. Thereby, the left and lower areas of the second frame 2702 in the gaming area 5a can be made smaller than in the state shown in FIG. 102(a). Further, in this case, the first frame 2701 and the second frame 2702 can be made to appear to be integrated by aligning the first inflow regulating portion 2701a and the second inflow regulating portion 2702a.

Further, as shown in FIG. 102(e), a gap C is formed between the first inflow regulating part 2701a of the first frame 2701 and the second inflow regulating part 2702a of the second frame 2702. Also good. At this time, it is desirable to make the gap C smaller than the diameter of the game ball B. In addition, if the gap C is larger than the diameter of the game ball B, an obstacle nail may be planted so that the game ball B does not pass through the gap C.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 102(f), second non-flange portions 2702c in which the second flange portion 2702b is not formed are provided on both left and right sides of the second inflow regulating portion 2702a of the second frame 2702. It's okay. As a result, the first non-flange portions 2701c are provided on both the left and right sides of the first inflow regulating portion 2701a, and the second non-flange portions 2702c are provided on both left and right sides of the second inflow regulating portion 2702a. The regulating portion 2701a and the second inflow regulating portion 2702a can be made as close as possible in the left-right direction. Therefore, the degree of freedom in arranging the second frame 2702 with respect to the first frame 2701 can be increased, and it is possible to accommodate game areas 5a of various sizes due to design changes or the like. In other words, it is possible to easily correspond to the expansion and contraction of the gaming area 5a (the opening 1112 of the gaming panel 1100) in the vertical and horizontal directions.

Further, as shown in FIG. 102(g), the first flange portion 2701b may be provided in the first frame 2701 up to the lower end of the first inflow regulating portion 2701a. Thereby, the rigidity of the first inflow regulating part 2701a can be increased due to the presence of the first flange part 2701b, so even if the game ball B comes into contact with the first inflow regulating part 2701a, it can be made difficult to be damaged.

In this center frame 2700, an allowance is provided between adjacent frames. Although no particular reference numerals are given, the margin section refers to a section that is movable relative to the ends of adjacent frames (a section at the end of the frame, as illustrated in FIG. 102). (surrounding parts). If there is a possibility that the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100 can be expanded or contracted in the left-right direction, at least two margin parts are required to allow the opening 1112 to move in the left-right direction. Similarly, if there is a possibility that the opening 1112 may be expanded or contracted in the vertical direction, at least two margins are required to allow vertical movement. Furthermore, if the opening 1112 has the possibility of expanding or contracting in the vertical, horizontal, and horizontal directions, it is necessary to have margins that allow it to move in at least two locations in the vertical direction and at least in two locations in the horizontal direction.

Specifically, in the vertical direction, there are two places at both ends of the second frame 2702, that is, between the first frame 2701 and the second frame 2702, and between the second frame 2702 and the fifth frame 2705. A margin is provided (see FIGS. 99 to 101). Additionally, there are margins in the left-right direction at both ends of the third frame 2703, that is, between the first frame 2701 and the third frame 2703 and between the third frame 2703 and the fourth frame 2704. It is provided. Although the margin in the vertical direction is shown in FIG. 102, the same applies to the margin in the left and right direction.

By the way, as an allowance in the left and right direction, for example, in a part between the first frame 2701 and the third frame 2703, the upper surface of the part extending left and right in the first inflow regulating part 2701a of the first frame 2701 is used for gaming. Since the balls B roll, when the first frame 2701 moves to the left and is attached, a gap is formed between the first frame 2701 and the third frame 2703, and this gap prevents the flow of the game balls B. There is a risk of being hindered. In such a case, the flow of the game balls B is not obstructed by providing a spacer or arranging obstructing nails in the margin portion. For this reason, it is more difficult to expand the game area 5a (opening 1112 of the game panel 1100) in the horizontal direction than to expand it in the vertical direction due to the flow of the game balls B, etc.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the frame-shaped center frame 2700 in the center accessory 2500A is divided into a plurality of frames such as the first frame 2701 and the second frame 2702 in the circumferential direction of the frame. Therefore, when you want to change the size of the gaming area 5a due to design changes, etc., you can change the mounting positions of the divided frames such as the first frame 2701 and the second frame 2702 without having to rebuild the entire center frame 2700. It is also possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 with a high degree of freedom in design.

Moreover, according to this embodiment, since the center frame 2700 in the center accessory 2500A is divided into a plurality of frames such as the first frame 2701 and the second frame 2702, the design of the center accessory 2500A is partially changed. When changing the model, the center accessory 2500A can be easily changed to the desired design by changing only the frame corresponding to the part to be changed, and the cost of changing the model can be suppressed. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can easily accommodate model changes.

Further, according to this embodiment, since the frame-shaped center frame 2700 is divided into a plurality of frames such as the first frame 2701 and the second frame 2702 in the circumferential direction of the frame, each By changing the mounting position of the frame, the size of the gaming area 5a can be easily changed without rebuilding the entire center frame 2700, so the cost of the Pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the frame-shaped center frame 2700 in the center accessory 2500A is divided into a plurality of frames such as the first frame 2701 and the second frame 2702 in the circumferential direction of the frame. When a malfunction occurs in the symbol display 2518, second starting port unit 2720, attacker unit 2730, etc. provided in the center accessory 2500A, the malfunction can be resolved without removing the entire center frame 2700 from the game panel 1100. It is only necessary to remove the frame in which the unit in which the problem occurred is installed, and the effort required for maintenance work can be reduced.

[11-3b. Connection holding part]
The connection holding part 2710 connects adjacent frames in each frame of the center frame 2700, which is divided into a plurality of frames such as a first frame 2701 and a second frame 2702 in the circumferential direction of the frame. It is something.

By the way, since the center frame 2700 of this embodiment is configured to be divided into a plurality of frames in the circumferential direction of the frame as described above, some of the frames may be separated during assembly, maintenance, etc. There is a risk of it falling and being damaged. In contrast, in this embodiment, a connection holding part 2710 is provided to connect adjacent frames. As shown in FIGS. 99 to 101, the connection holding portion 2710 is formed into a flexible linear (string-like) member. The length of the connection holding portion 2710 is preferably such that it does not reach the lower end of the game board 5 when the center frame 2700 is removed with the game board 5 in an upright position, from the viewpoint of fall protection.

The connection holding part 2710 of this embodiment uses a decorative ball chain. As a result, even if the connection holding part 2710 is visible, it can also serve as a decoration because it has decorative properties, so the appearance of the game board 5 as a whole does not deteriorate.

For example, between the first frame 2701 and the second frame 2702, the connection holding part 2710 has one end removably attached to the first inflow regulating part 2701a of the first frame 2701, and the other end. is detachably attached to the second inflow regulating portion 2702a of the second frame 2702. The attachment of the connection holding portion 2710 is similar between other frames.

In FIGS. 99 to 101, the first frame 2701 and the second frame 2702, the first frame 2701 and the third frame 2703, and the second frame 2702 and the fifth frame 2705 are connected. Although shown connected by a holding part 2710, the third frame 2703 and fourth frame 2704 and the fourth frame 2704 and fifth frame 2705 are also connected by a similar connection holding part 2710. has been done.

According to this connection holding part 2710, in a plurality of frames such as the first frame 2701 and the second frame 2702 that make up the center frame 2700, adjacent frames are connected to each other, so when attaching and detaching Even if one frame is removed, the removed frame will not fall onto a workbench, floor, etc., and damage to the frame due to falling can be prevented.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the connection holding part 2710 is shown as a part that also serves as a decoration, but it is not limited to this, and may be a part that does not also serve as a decoration. In this case, it is desirable to provide the connection holding portion 2710 at a location that is hidden behind the center frame 2700, decoration, etc. and is difficult to see from the front.

Further, in the above embodiment, the connection holding part 2710 is shown to be visible to the player, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be made completely invisible to the player in the normal state. In other words, if the connection holding part 2710 is provided in a part of the center frame 2700 that is not visible to the player, it will not be visible to the player during normal conditions such as playing a game.

Further, in the above embodiment, all adjacent frames are connected by the connection holding part 2710, but the invention is not limited to this. Frames that are not connected to each other do not need to be connected to adjacent frames by the connection holding part 2710. For example, since the first frame 2701 and the second frame 2702 have no movable parts, there is no need for maintenance, and since they are light in weight, there is no risk of damage even if they fall, so there is no need to connect them. On the contrary, the third frame 2703 to the fifth frame 2705 have movable parts and are heavy, which increases the need for connection. Therefore, the first frame 2701 and the second frame 2702 are simplified by not connecting them, and the third frame 2703 to the fifth frame 2705 are not connected to other frames but other strong frames on the back of the game board 5 (game panel 1100). It is desirable to connect it removably with other members.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, a plurality (number) of connection holding parts 2710 may be provided. In this case, it is desirable to bundle the plurality of connecting and holding parts 2710 in order to prevent the connecting and holding parts 2710 from getting entangled with the faulty nail or the like and bending the faulty nail during manufacturing or maintenance.

In addition, when a plurality of connection holding parts 2710 are provided and they are connected to a plurality of places on the back of the game board 5 (game panel 1100), it is possible to remove the mounting screws that attach the center frame 2700 to the game panel 1100. It becomes possible to maintain the posture of the center frame 2700 (each frame). Therefore, there is no need to support the center frame 2700 during manufacturing or maintenance, improving work efficiency.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the center frame 2700 is divided into a plurality of frames such as the first frame 2701 and the second frame 2702 in the circumferential direction of the frame, and the adjacent frames are are connected by the connection holding part 2710, so when the mounting screws attached to the game panel 1100 are removed during installation and removal work during assembly, maintenance, etc., part of the frame will come off from the game panel 1100 and fall. Even if an attempt is made to do so, since the frame is connected to other frames by the flexible string-like connection and holding part 2710, the connection and holding part 2710 acts like a lifeline, leaving the detached frame in a dangling state. As a result, the detached frame will not fall onto the workbench, floor, etc., and the frame will not be damaged.

Further, according to the present embodiment, since the connecting holding part 2710 is removably attached to the first inflow regulating part 2701a, the second inflow regulating part 2702a, etc., the attachment part of the connecting holding part 2710 is By removing the first frame 2701 and the like from the regulating portion 2701a and the like, the first frame 2701 and the like can be individually removed from the game panel 1100.

Further, according to the present embodiment, since adjacent frames are connected to each other by the flexible string-like connection holding part 2710, for example, if the first frame 2701 is Even if the position of the two frames 2702 is changed, the connection holding part 2710 deforms and follows the change, so that the change in position can be accommodated, and a pachinko machine 1 with a high degree of freedom in design can be provided.

In addition, as the connection holding part 2710, for example, as shown in FIG. When attaching the first frame 2701 and the second frame 2702 to the game panel 1100 so as to form a C, the first inflow regulating part 2701a and the second inflow regulating part 2702a are connected (connected) and held together. The portion 2710 may have a function as a regulating portion that prevents the game ball B from passing through the gap C.

[12. Details of the side unit on the game board]
Next, details of the side unit 2200 provided in the game board 5 will be explained. The side unit 2200 extends along the inner rail 1002 to the left of the starting port unit 2100 in the gaming area 5a, and is attached to the gaming panel 1100 from the front. The side unit 2200 includes three general winning ports 2001 that are always open so that game balls B can be received, and one sub-out port 2021 that is always open so that game balls B can be received.

Although detailed illustrations are omitted, the side unit 2200 forms a general winning opening 2001 and a sub-out opening 2021, has a U-shaped cross section, and extends short in the front and back direction, and is open upward and rearward in the left and right direction. A plurality of ball receivers arranged in a row, and a shelf 2201 that has the same length as the ball receivers and extends in a short frame shape in the front-rear direction and is provided to the right of the ball receiver at the right end in front view. , a flat front plate connecting the front ends of each of the plurality of ball receivers and shelf parts, and a flat plate-shaped front plate extending outward in the left-right direction from the rear end of each of the ball receivers and shelf part 2201 at the left end in front view. and a gutter portion extending rearward in the shape of a gutter from the rear end of each ball receiving portion.

Furthermore, the side unit 2200 has two positioning protrusions projecting rearward from the flange portion and two mounting holes penetrating the flange portion. The positioning protrusion is for positioning the side unit 2200 with respect to the panel board 1110 by being inserted into the positioning hole 1113 (see FIG. 104) of the panel board 1110 in the game panel 1100. The mounting hole is made by inserting a mounting screw from the front and tightening it into the mounting hole 1114 (see FIG. 104) of the panel board 1110 with the flange part in contact with the front surface of the panel board 1110. 2200 to the front of the panel board 1110.

When the side unit 2200 is assembled to the game board 5, a plurality of ball receivers, that is, three general winning holes 2001 and one sub-out hole 2021, protrude forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100. Further, the rear end of the gutter extending rearward from the ball receiving portion is located within the thickness of the panel board 1110 in the game panel 1100, and does not protrude rearward beyond the rear surface of the panel board 1110.

This side unit 2200 guides the game ball B received in the general prize opening 2001 (ball receiving part) to the rear of the game panel 1100 through the gutter part, and delivers it to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000. Then, the game ball B delivered to the back ball guide unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 is detected by the general prize winning hole sensor 3001 and then discharged downward. On the other hand, the game ball B received in the sub-out port 2021 is transferred to the back ball guide unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, and is discharged to the safe ball socket 600b of the circulation ball path unit 600 below, in the same manner as described above. .

This side unit 2200 has a flat front plate that connects the front ends of the plurality of ball receivers each having a U-shaped cross section and the front end of the shelf part 2201 having a frame-like cross section. It has higher rigidity than conventional side units in which a plurality of ball receivers protrude forward from the base plate. Therefore, when disassembling the pachinko machine 1 for recycling or the like, when the mounting screws that attach the side unit 2200 to the panel board 1110 are removed and the side unit 2200 is pulled forward, the rigidity of the side unit 2200 is increased. Therefore, the side unit 2200 does not bend. As a result, the positioning protrusion of the side unit 2200 is not tilted with respect to the positioning hole 1113 of the panel board 1110, and the side unit 2200 can be easily removed from the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110). It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can reduce disassembly work.

In addition, in the side unit 2200, a part of the front plate at the front end of the shelf 2201 protrudes upwardly from the shelf 2201, so when disassembling the Pachinko machine 1, an operator's fingers may not be able to protrude from the shelf. The side unit 2200 can be easily pulled forward by hooking it to the location where the side unit 2200 is located, making disassembly work easier.

In addition, when the side unit 2200 is assembled to the game board 5, the opening 1112 is blocked from the front by the flat base plate, so that foreign matter such as dust and dirt can leak into the opening 1112 from the rear side of the panel board 1110. It is possible to prevent the player from entering the game area 5a on the front side of the panel board 1110 through the board.

[12-1. Side unit of second embodiment]
Next, the side unit 2800 of the second embodiment will be described in detail, mainly with reference to FIGS. 103 to 105 and the like. FIG. 103(a) is a front view showing the main part of the game board provided with the side unit of the second embodiment, and FIG. 103(b) is a perspective view of FIG. 103(a) seen from the front. 104(a) is an exploded perspective view showing the side unit disassembled from the game panel in the game board of FIG. 103, and FIG. 104(b) is an exploded perspective view showing the side unit of FIG. 103 exploded from the front. , (c) is an exploded perspective view of the side unit seen from the back of (b), and (d) is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the game panel and the side unit in a longitudinal section. FIG. 105 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the side unit and the game panel in FIG. 104 in a cross section.

In the game board 5 provided with the side unit 2800 of this embodiment, parts having the same configuration as the game board 5 shown in FIG. 78 are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The side unit 2800 of the second embodiment extends along the inner rail 1002 to the left of the starting port unit 2100 in the game area 5a where the game ball B is driven by the player operating the handle 160. and is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front. The side unit 2800 is equipped with three general winning holes 2001 that are always open to receive game balls B.

As shown in FIG. 104 etc., the side unit 2800 includes a first component 2811 attached from the front to a flat panel board 1110 in which the obstacle nails are installed in the game panel 1100, and a first component 2811 attached to the rear side of the first component 2811. A second component 2812 is attached to the second component 2812. In the side unit 2800 of this embodiment, a second component member 2812 is attached to the rear side of a first component member 2811.

The first component 2811 of the side unit 2800 includes a flat base plate 2811a that can come into contact with the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110), and a base plate 2811a that projects forward from the base plate 2811a and is open at the upper and rear sides. It has a plurality of ball receiving parts 2811b forming a general winning hole 2001.

The base plate 2811a extends along the inner rail 1002 of the front component 1000. The three ball receiving portions 2811b are provided so as to be spaced apart from each other in the left and right directions, and the ball receiving portion 2811b on the right side is located further downward. The left end ball receiving portion 2811b has a front end surface parallel to the base plate 2811a up to the lower end. The remaining (center and right end) ball receiving portions 2811b are inclined so that the front end surface moves rearward toward the lower end.

In addition, the first component 2811 has two positioning protrusions 2811c that protrude rearward from the base plate 2811a, and a plurality of (three in this case) attachment points that penetrate the base plate 2811a and are attached to the game panel 1100. It has a hole 2811d and a plurality of mounting holes (not shown) provided on the rear end surface of the ball receiving portion 2811b (base plate 2811a) for mounting the second component 2812.

The two positioning protrusions 2811c are provided to be spaced apart from each other in the longitudinal direction of the base plate 2811a. The positioning protrusion 2811c is inserted into the positioning hole 1113 provided in the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100. In this embodiment, the two positioning protrusions 2811c have the same length.

The three attachment holes 2811d are provided in the vicinity of the positioning protrusion 2811c on the base plate 2811a and in the upper part of the base plate 2811a near the center in the left-right direction. These mounting holes 2811d have countersinks formed on the front side, and countersunk mounting screws (not shown) that are screwed into the mounting holes 1114 of the panel plate 1110 are inserted from the front. When attached to the front surface of the panel board 1110, the head of the mounting screw does not protrude further forward than the front surface of the base plate 2811a.

The mounting hole is into which a mounting screw inserted into a mounting hole (not shown) of the second component 2812, which will be described later, is screwed.

The second component 2812 is formed in the shape of a container open to the front, and receives the game ball B received in the general prize opening 2001 (ball receiving part 2811b) on the surface (board) of the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110). A ball passage 2812a that is caused to flow downward along the surface), a passage outlet 2812b that opens rearward at the downstream end of the ball passage 2812a, and a plurality of mounting holes (not shown) for attachment to the first component 2811. ) and has.

As shown in FIGS. 104(d) and 105, the second component 2812 of this embodiment is inserted into the opening 1112 of the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100, and the depth is the thickness of the panel board 1110. It is shaped to fit inside. Note that FIG. 104(d) shows a cut at the center ball receiving portion 2811b in the left-right direction.

The ball passage 2812a of the second component 2812 is formed along the inner rail 1002 of the front component 1000 and becomes lower toward the right along the surface of the panel board 1110. The passage outlet 2812b opens rearward at the right end of the second component 2812, which is the downstream end of the ball passage 2812a.

The attachment hole of the second component 2812 is provided at a location corresponding to the attachment hole of the first component 2811. The second component 2812 is attached to the first component 2811 from the rear by inserting a mounting screw into the mounting hole of the second component 2812 from the rear and screwing it into the mounting hole of the first component 2811. It will be done.

As shown in FIG. 105, the side unit 2800 of this embodiment includes a tributary portion 2801 (portion shown by light hatching in FIG. 105) that communicates with the general prize opening 2001 (ball receiving portion 2811b), and a tributary portion 2801 that It has a main stream portion 2802 (portion shown by dark shading in FIG. 105) which merges with the main stream portion 2802 and extends along the surface (board surface) of the panel board 1110 in the game panel 1100. The ball passage 2812a is composed of a plurality of tributary sections 2801 and a main stream section 2802.

The tributary portion 2801 extends rearward from a portion in front of the front surface of the panel board 1110 to a portion (thickness of the panel board 1110) behind the front surface of the panel board 1110 and above the main stream portion 2802. .

The main stream portion 2802 extends along the surface of the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100 and lowers to the right from near the left end of the base plate 2811a to near the right end. The length of the main stream portion 2802 is at least twice the diameter of the game ball B (in this embodiment, 8 to 10 times).

In the side unit 2800 of this embodiment, a second component 2812 is positioned behind the first component 2811, and a mounting screw is passed through the mounting hole of the second component 2812 from the rear of the second component 2812 to the first component. It can be assembled by screwing it into the mounting hole of 2811. As a result, a side unit 2800 is constructed in which the second component 2812 is attached to the first component 2811 from the rear side.

The ball passage 2812a of the second component 2812 is open to the front as shown in the figure, but when the first component 2811 is attached to the front side to construct the side unit 2800, the front end of the ball passage 2812a The side is closed by the base plate 2811a of the first component 2811, and the game ball B will not spill forward from the ball path 2812a. In other words, the first component 2811 and the second component 2812 constitute a ball passage 2812a. In other words, the ball passage 2812a is provided between the first component 2811 and the second component 2812.

This side unit 2800 moves the base plate 2811a from the front of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 so that the base plate 2811a of the first component 2811 closes the opening 1112 penetrating the panel plate 1110. 1110. At this time, the two positioning protrusions 2811c of the first component 2811 are inserted into the positioning holes 1113 of the panel board 1110. In this state, the attachment hole 2811d of the first component 2811 is aligned with the attachment hole 1114 of the panel board 1110.

Then, the side unit 2800 is attached to the front surface of the panel board 1110 by screwing a mounting screw into the mounting hole 1114 of the panel board 1110 from the front through the mounting hole 2811d of the first component 2811 and tightening it. At this time, since the mounting hole 2811d of the first component 2811 is provided near the positioning protrusion 2811c, the mounting screw cannot be screwed into the mounting hole 1114 of the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100 through the mounting hole 2811d. Therefore, the positioning protrusion 2811c can be strongly pressed against the panel plate 1110 side and inserted into the positioning hole 1113 reliably, and lifting up due to incomplete insertion of the positioning protrusion 2811c can be prevented.

When the side unit 2800 is attached to the front surface of the panel board 1110 (the game board 5 is assembled), the second component 2812 is located within the thickness of the panel board 1110 within the opening 1112 of the panel board 1110. and is located forward of the rear surface of the panel board 1110. In other words, when assembled on the game board 5, the side unit 2800 does not protrude rearward beyond the rear surface of the panel board 1110, making it possible to secure a wide space behind the panel board 1110.

In this embodiment, the side unit 2800 and the panel board 1110 are made of transparent synthetic resin, and the decoration of the production unit provided at the rear of the panel board 1110 can be visually recognized from the front through the side unit 2800 and the like. . Here, at the rear of the side unit 2800, a lower back effect unit 3500 having a lower back movable decorative body 3510 that can be raised and lowered as the game progresses is provided. This lower back movable decorative body 3510 has a standby position where most of the entirety is located below the frame of the center accessory 2500, and a standby position where it rises from the standby position and is located within the frame of the center accessory 2500. It is provided so that it can be raised and lowered between the application position and the application position. When the lower back movable decorative body 3510 is in the lowered standby position, it can be visually recognized from the front through the transparent side unit 2800 and the panel plate 1110.

In the side unit 2800, when the game ball B is received in the general winning hole 2001, it is guided to the ball path 2812a behind the front surface of the panel board 1110 by the ball receiving part 2811b forming the general winning hole 2001, and is guided to the ball path 2812a behind the front surface of the panel board 1110. After flowing down along the surface of the panel board 1110 by the passageway exit 2812b, it is delivered to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 provided at the rear. The game ball B delivered to the back ball guiding unit 3100 is discharged downward after being detected by the general winning hole sensor 3001.

In this embodiment, although detailed illustration is omitted, the passage outlet 2812b of the second component 2812 is provided below the lower back movable decorative body 3510 in the standby position. That is, the general winning hole sensor 3001 that detects the game ball B received in the general winning hole 2001 (ball receiving part 2811b) is provided below the lower back movable decorative body 3510 in the standby position. Therefore, the side unit 2800, the general winning a prize opening sensor 3001, etc. do not get in the way of the lower back movable decorative body 3510.

Further, in this embodiment, the side unit 2800 is not provided with the general winning hole sensor 3001, but the back unit 3000 (back ball guiding unit 3100) is provided with the general winning hole sensor 3001. In other words, the side unit 2800 has a wiring-free structure. In this way, electronic components such as various sensors such as ball sensors and magnetic sensors with wiring are provided on the back unit 3000 in contrast to various units attached from the front side of the panel board 1110 in the game panel 1100. When the mounting screws attached to the plate 1110 are removed and the unit is pulled forward, the unit will be connected to the wiring through the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110, making it impossible to cut the wiring or disconnect it from the connector. The unit can be removed forward from the panel board 1110 without worrying about wiring, and disassembly work can be performed efficiently.

According to the side unit 2800 of this embodiment, since the first component 2811 is provided with the flat base plate 2811a, the mounting screws can be attached to the game panel 1100 through the mounting holes 2811d penetrating the base plate 2811a. By screwing into the mounting hole 1114 of the panel board 1110 and attaching the first component 2811 to the front surface of the panel board 1110, the base plate 2811a can close the opening 1112 of the panel board 1110 from the front side. ) through the opening 1112, it becomes possible to hide the rear of the panel board 1110 (game panel 1100), and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) can be improved. On the other hand, since the second component 2812 is provided with a ball passage 2812a through which the game ball B flows down along the surface of the panel board 1110, the cross section of the ball passage 2812a is U-shaped. , the presence of the ball passage 2812a can increase the rigidity of the second component 2812. Since the base plate 2811a has a flat plate shape, the rigidity of the first component 2811 may be lowered, but the second component 2812, whose rigidity is increased by the ball passage 2812a, can be attached to the second component 2812 through its mounting hole. Since the side unit 2800 is formed by attaching from the rear side of the first component member 2811 using attachment screws, the rigidity of the side unit 2800 can be increased compared to conventional side units. Therefore, when disassembling the pachinko machine 1 for recycling or the like, it is necessary to remove the mounting screw screwed into the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100 through the mounting hole 2811d of the first component 2811 and pull the side unit 2800 forward. At times, since the side unit 2800 does not bend due to the increased rigidity of the side unit 2800, the positioning protrusion of the side unit 2800 (first component 2811) may be It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 in which the side unit 2811c does not tilt, the side unit 2800 can be easily removed from the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110), and the disassembly work when sorting can be reduced.

By the way, since the two positioning protrusions 2811c on the first component 2811 are provided so as to be separated from each other in the longitudinal direction of the first component 2811, when the first component 2811 is pulled forward during disassembly, The center of the first component 2811 is bent in a curved manner so as to move forward, and due to this bending, the respective positioning projections 2811c are moved so that the tips of the positioning projections 2811c, which are separated in the longitudinal direction, approach each other. There is a possibility that the positioning protrusion 2811c will not come out from the positioning hole 1113 of the panel board 1110 in the game panel 1100 due to the force acting on the positioning protrusion 2811c. However, in this embodiment, as described above, the second component 2812 is attached from the rear side of the first component 2811 to form the side unit 2800, and the rigidity of the side unit 2800 is increased. Even if the side unit 2800 is pulled forward, the side unit 2800 is not bent and the positioning projections 2811c separated in the longitudinal direction are not tilted, and the side unit 2800 can be easily removed from the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can reduce disassembly work when sorting.

Furthermore, since the plurality of ball receivers 2811b protrude forward from the front surface of the panel board 1110 in the game panel 1100, the side unit 2800 is pulled forward in order to be removed from the panel board 1110 during disassembly work of the pachinko machine 1. At this time, the ball receiving portion 2811b can be pinched and pulled, making it easier to remove the side unit 2800.

In addition, since the base plate 2811a of the first component 2811 closes the opening 1112 of the panel board 1110 in the game panel 1100 from the front, foreign matter such as dust and dirt can pass through the opening 1112 from the rear side of the panel board 1110. It is possible to prevent the player from entering the game area 5a on the front side of the panel board 1110.

Furthermore, since the second component 2812 is attached from the rear side of the first component 2811 with mounting screws through a mounting hole (not shown), the mounting screws that attach the second component 2812 from the front are difficult to see. This makes it possible to improve the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5).

Also, a ball that causes the game ball B that entered the ball receiving part 2811b (general winning hole 2001) to flow down along the surface of the panel board 1110 in the game panel 1100 between the first component 2811 and the second component 2812. Since the passage 2812a is provided so as to protrude into the opening 1112 of the panel board 1110, the game ball B that has entered the general winning hole 2001 can be directed backwards from the rear surface of the game panel 1100, as in the conventional side unit. Compared to the case where a ball passage is provided behind the rear surface of the game panel 1100 and the balls flow downward, the thickness of the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110) can be effectively used, This makes it easier to secure empty space. Therefore, it is possible to provide a performance device such as the lower back performance unit 3500 (lower back movable decorative body 3510) in the empty space, and it is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that is more appealing to players.

Furthermore, since the two positioning protrusions 2811c on the first component 2811 are provided so as to be separated from each other in the longitudinal direction of the first component 2811, when the side unit 2800 is attached to the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100, The side unit 2800 does not rotate along the surface of the panel board 1110, and the side unit 2800 can be reliably positioned at a desired position on the game panel 1100.

In the above embodiment, the game panel 1100 includes a panel board 1110 made of transparent resin, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the game panel 1100 may be made of wood. As a result, by making the game panel 1100 made of wood, the board thickness becomes thicker than that made of resin, so it is possible to make more effective use of the board thickness of the game panel 1100.

In addition, in the side unit 2800 described above, the ball passage 2812a is composed of a plurality of tributary sections 2801 communicating with each of the ball receiving sections 2812c, and a main stream section 2802 where the plurality of tributary sections 2801 merge. Although the embodiment shown in FIG.

Furthermore, although the side unit 2800 described above is not provided with a ball sensor for detecting the game ball B received in the ball receiving portion 2811b, the present invention is not limited to this, and the side unit 2800 may be provided with a ball sensor. Also good. When the side unit 2800 is provided with a ball sensor, it is desirable to provide the ball sensor within the thickness of the panel board 1110, or to provide the ball sensor below the rear production device (back lower production unit 3500). .

Further, although the side unit 2800 described above is shown without an LED board on the rear side, the present invention is not limited to this, and an LED for illumination decoration may be provided. When the side unit 2800 is provided with an LED board, a unit cover is provided that covers the LED board from the rear and whose front end surface abuts the rear surface of the side unit 2800 (second component 2812), and the unit cover and the side unit are in contact with each other. It is desirable to provide non-contact surface portions that are not in contact with each other in the contact surface portions that are in contact with each other. Thereby, the side unit 2800 can be decorated with light emission by the LEDs of the LED board, and the heat from the LEDs can be radiated to the outside through the non-contact surface portion.

[12-2. Modified example of side unit]
Next, various modifications of the side unit 2800 of the above embodiment will be described in detail.

[12-2a. Modification example 1 of side unit]
Next, a side unit 2800A having a different form from the side unit 2800 shown in FIG. 103 and the like described above will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 106 and the like. FIG. 106 is an explanatory diagram showing a side unit having a different form from the side unit shown in FIG. 103 in a vertical section along with a game panel. Here, the same components as those of the side unit 2800 described above will be described with the same reference numerals.

The side unit 2800A extends along the inner rail 1002 to the left of the starting port unit 2100 in the game area 5a where the game ball B is driven by the player operating the handle 160. It is equipped with a plurality (2 to 4) of general prize winning holes 2001 that are always open to receive prize money.

The side unit 2800A includes a first component 2811 attached from the front to a flat panel board 1110 on which the obstacle nails are installed in the game panel 1100, and a second component provided on the rear side of the first component 2811. It is composed of a member 2813.

The first component 2811 of the side unit 2800A includes a flat base plate 2811a that can come into contact with the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110), and a flat base plate 2811a that projects forward from the base plate 2811a and is open at the upper and rear sides. It has a plurality of ball receiving parts 2811b forming a general winning hole 2001. In addition, the first component 2811 has a plurality of positioning protrusions 2811c that protrude rearward from the base plate 2811a, and a plurality of mounting holes 2811d that penetrate the base plate 2811a and are used for attaching to the game panel 1100. (See Figure 104).

The base plate 2811a extends along the inner rail 1002 of the front component 1000. The plurality of positioning protrusions 2811c are provided to be spaced apart from each other in the longitudinal direction of the base plate 2811a. The positioning protrusion 2811c is inserted into the positioning hole 1113 provided in the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100. In this embodiment, each positioning protrusion 2811c has the same length. The plurality of attachment holes 2811d are provided in the vicinity of the positioning protrusion 2811c on the base plate 2811a and in the upper part of the base plate 2811a near the center in the left-right direction. These mounting holes 2811d have countersinks formed on the front side, and countersunk mounting screws (not shown) that are screwed into the mounting holes 1114 of the panel plate 1110 are inserted from the front. When attached to the front surface of the panel board 1110, the head of the mounting screw does not protrude further forward than the front surface of the base plate 2811a.

In this embodiment, a transparent decorative sticker 2803 is attached to the front surface of the base plate 2811a and the front surface of the ball receiving portion 2811b of the first component 2811.

The second component 2813 of the side unit 2800A is configured so that the game ball B that enters the ball receiving part 2811b (general winning port 2001) of the first component 2811 enters the ball entrance within the thickness of the panel board 1110 in the game panel 1100. A ball passage 2813a that can flow down along the plate surface of the panel plate 1110 in the opening 1112 penetrating the panel plate 1110 as shown in FIG. 2813b.

The second component 2813 may be configured by one member, or may be configured by combining a plurality of members.

As shown in the figure, the ball passage 2813a is placed near the lower end of the opening 1112 and bent backward, and then bent downward along the rear surface of the panel plate 1110, so that the downstream end is located below the opening 1112. It is extending to In other words, the ball passage 2813a is bent rearward at a portion lower than the lower back production unit 3500 (lower back movable decorative body 3510) provided at the rear. As a result, a sufficient space can be secured for the arrangement of the lower back production unit 3500, and the movable range (elevating range) of the lower back movable decorative body 3510 can be widened, and the lower back movable decorative body 3510 can be enlarged. I can do it.

The ball sensor 2813b is provided at a portion of the ball passage 2813a that extends along the rear surface of the panel board 1110. In other words, the ball sensor 2813b is provided in a lower part than the lower back production unit 3500 (lower back movable decorative body 3510) provided at the rear of the ball passage 2813a, and does not interfere with the lower back movable decorative body 3510. It won't happen.

The first component 2811 of the side unit 2800A moves the base plate 2811a from the front of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 so that the base plate 2811a closes the corresponding opening 1112 in the panel plate 1110. At the same time, the plurality of positioning protrusions 2811c protruding backward from the base plate 2811a are inserted into the positioning holes 1113 of the panel plate 1110, and the mounting screws are inserted into the panel through the mounting holes 2811d. It is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 by screwing it into the attachment hole 1114 of the plate 1110 and tightening it.

On the other hand, the second component 2813 of the side unit 2800A is attached to the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. Although not shown, when the second component 2813 is attached to the back unit 3000, a part of the ball passage 2813a (the part accommodated in the opening 1112 of the panel board 1110) is located in front of the back box 3010. protrudes to.

Then, when the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100, the part of the second component 2813 that protrudes forward from the back box 3010 is inserted into the opening 1112 of the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the rear. In the inserted state, the relevant part is located on the rear side of the first component 2811, and the side unit 2800A is constructed.

When this side unit 2800A is assembled to the game board 5, the rear surface of the portion of the second component 2813 that extends into the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 in the ball passage 2813a is moved rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110. It stands out. This protrusion amount TL is set to 1/2 or less of the diameter D of the game ball B.

By the way, when the game panel 1100 is formed by injection molding, the thickness of the part of the game area 5a where the obstacle nails are planted is determined by whether the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110) is made of wooden plywood or a resin board is cut. Therefore, the part of the second component 2813 along the surface of the panel plate 1110 in the ball passage 2813a cannot fit within the thickness of the panel plate 1110, and the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 There is a risk that it will protrude further back. If the amount of rearward protrusion of the second component 2813 is greater than the rear surface of the panel board 1110, a sufficient rear space cannot be secured. On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the protrusion amount TL from the rear surface of the panel board 1110 of the ball passage 2813a portion of the second component 2813 is set to 1/2 or less of the diameter D of the game ball B, the rearward A sufficient space can be secured, and a lower back effect unit 3500 (lower back movable decorative body 3510) of a desired size can be provided.

In the side unit 2800A, when the game ball B is received in the general winning hole 2001, the ball receiving part 2811b of the first component 2811 forming the general winning hole 2001 opens the ball path 2813a behind the front surface of the panel board 1110. and is delivered to the ball passage 2813a of the second component 2813. Then, the game ball B delivered to the ball passage 2813a of the second component 2813 first flows down along the surface of the panel board 1110 so as to be within the thickness of the panel board 1110, and flows down to the lower end of the opening 1112. In the vicinity, the liquid flows backward from the rear surface of the panel board 1110 and then flows downward along the rear surface of the panel board 1110. After that, the game ball B is detected by the ball sensor 2813b and then discharged downward from an outlet (not shown).

According to the side unit 2800A of this embodiment, the same effects as the side unit 2800 described above can be achieved.

Further, according to the side unit 2800A, since the second component 2813 provided with the ball sensor 2813b is attached to the back unit 3000 provided at the rear of the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110), the panel board The first component 2811 attached to the ball sensor 1110 is not provided with the ball sensor 2813b. Therefore, electronic components such as the ball sensor 2813b are integrated into the back unit 3000, and the wiring from the ball sensor 2813b is not extended from the game panel 1100 side. When assembling the back unit 3000 and the ball sensor 2813b, the wiring from the ball sensor 2813b does not get caught on an obstacle nail, etc., and cutting of the wiring due to the catching can be avoided, and the workability of the assembly work can be improved. .

Further, according to the side unit 2800A, when assembled to the game board 5, the opening 1112 of the panel board 1110 in the game panel 1100 is blocked from the front by the base plate 2811a of the first component 2811. It is possible to prevent foreign matter such as dust from entering the play area 5a on the front side of the panel board 1110 through the opening 1112 from the rear side.

Note that the side unit 2800A may have an independent ball passage 2813a for each ball receiving portion 2811b, or may have one ball passage downstream of the ball receiving portion 2811b, similar to the ball passage 2812a of the side unit 2800. 2813a may be provided to allow the game balls B that have entered each ball receiving portion 2811b to join together.

Further, in the side unit 2800A described above, the second component 2813 is attached to the back unit 3000, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the second component 2813 is attached to the rear side of the first component 2811. It is also good as something that can be done.

Further, in the above embodiment, the game panel 1100 includes a panel board 1110 made of transparent resin, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the game panel 1100 may be made of wood. As a result, by making the game panel 1100 made of wood, the board thickness becomes thicker than that made of resin, so it is possible to make more effective use of the board thickness of the game panel 1100.

[12-2b. Modification example 2 of side unit]
Next, a side unit 2800B having a different form from the above-described side unit 2800 and side unit 2800A will be described with reference mainly to FIG. 107. FIG. 107(a) is an explanatory view showing a side unit with a different form from the side unit shown in FIG. 105 in a longitudinal section along with a game panel, and FIG. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing a main part in a perspective view. Here, the same components as those of the side unit 2800 described above will be described with the same reference numerals.

The side unit 2800B extends along the inner rail 1002 to the left of the starting port unit 2100 in the game area 5a where the game ball B is driven by the player operating the handle 160, and the side unit 2800B extends along the inner rail 1002 to the left of the starting port unit 2100. It is equipped with a plurality (2 to 4) of general prize winning holes 2001 that are always open to receive prize money.

The side unit 2800B includes a unit main body 2810 that is attached from the front to the flat panel board 1110 on which the obstacle nails are planted in the game panel 1100, a unit cover 2820 that is attached from the rear side of the unit main body 2810, and a unit main body 2810. The LED board 2825 is provided between the unit cover 2820 and has a plurality of LEDs 2825a mounted thereon. The unit body 2810 and unit cover 2820 of the side unit 2800B are made of transparent synthetic resin.

Furthermore, the side unit 2800B includes a contact surface portion 2830 where the unit main body 2810 and the unit cover 2820 are in contact with each other, and a non-contact surface portion 2831 that is provided in a part of the contact surface portion 2830 and is not in contact with each other. ing.

The unit main body 2810 of the side unit 2800B includes a first component 2811 that is attached from the front to a flat panel board 1110 on which the obstacle nails are installed in the game panel 1100, and a second component that is attached to the first component 2811 from the rear side. It has two component members 2812 and a support frame portion 2814 that projects rearward in a frame shape along the outer peripheral edge of the unit cover 2820 and whose rear end surface abuts the front end surface of the unit cover 2820. In this embodiment, a second component 2812 is attached to the rear side of the first component 2811. Further, in this embodiment, the support frame portion 2814 protrudes from the rear surface of the second component 2812.

The first component 2811 of the unit main body 2810 includes a flat base plate 2811a that can come into contact with the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110), and a flat base plate 2811a that protrudes forward from the base plate 2811a and is open at the upper and rear sides. It has a plurality of ball receiving parts 2811b forming a general winning hole 2001. In addition, the first component 2811 includes a plurality of positioning protrusions 2811c projecting rearward from the base plate 2811a, a plurality of mounting holes 2811d passing through the base plate 2811a for attaching to the game panel 1100, and a base plate It has a plurality of attachment holes (not shown) provided on the rear end surface of the second component 2811a for attaching the second component 2812 (see FIG. 104).

The base plate 2811a extends along the inner rail 1002 of the front component 1000. The plurality of positioning protrusions 2811c are provided to be spaced apart from each other in the longitudinal direction of the base plate 2811a. The positioning protrusion 2811c is inserted into the positioning hole 1113 provided in the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100. In this embodiment, each positioning protrusion 2811c has the same length. The plurality of attachment holes 2811d are provided in the vicinity of the positioning protrusion 2811c on the base plate 2811a and in the upper part of the base plate 2811a near the center in the left-right direction. These mounting holes 2811d have countersinks formed on the front side, and countersunk mounting screws (not shown) that are screwed into the mounting holes 1114 of the panel plate 1110 are inserted from the front. When attached to the front surface of the panel board 1110, the head of the mounting screw does not protrude further forward than the front surface of the base plate 2811a.

In this embodiment, a transparent decorative sticker 2803 is attached to the front surface of the base plate 2811a and the front surface of the ball receiving portion 2811b of the first component 2811.

The second component 2812 is formed in the shape of a container open to the front, and receives the game ball B received in the general prize opening 2001 (ball receiving part 2811b) on the surface (board) of the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110). A ball passageway 2812a that is caused to flow downward along the surface of the ball passageway 2812a, a passageway outlet (not shown) that opens toward the rear at the downstream end of the ball passageway 2812a, and a plurality of mounting holes for attachment to the first component 2811. (not shown) and an attachment hole (not shown) provided on the rear surface for attaching the unit cover 2820.

A support frame portion 2814 whose rear end abuts the front end of the unit cover 2820 is provided on the rear side of the second component 2812. In other words, the second component 2812 has a support frame portion 2814 that projects rearward in a frame shape along the outer peripheral edge of the unit cover 2820 and whose rear end surface abuts the front end surface of the unit cover 2820. . The rear end surface of the support frame section 2814 comes into contact with the front end surface of a peripheral wall section 2820b, which will be described later, of the unit cover 2820 when assembled to the side unit 2800B. In other words, the rear end surface of the support frame section 2814 and the front end surface of the peripheral wall section 2820b constitute the contact surface section 2830.

The support frame portion 2814 (contact surface portion 2830) of the second component 2812 is provided above a passage outlet (not shown) that is the outlet of the ball passage 2812a. In other words, the passage outlet of the second component 2812 is provided at a location below the support frame portion 2814 (contact surface portion 2830).

In the unit body 2810, a second component 2812 is positioned behind the first component 2811, and a mounting screw is passed from the rear of the second component 2812 through the mounting hole of the second component 2812 to attach the first component 2811 to the attached component. It can be assembled by screwing into the hole. As a result, a unit main body 2810 is constructed in which the second component member 2812 is attached to the first component member 2811 from the rear side.

As shown in FIG. 107, the second component 2812 of this embodiment is inserted into the opening 1112 of the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100, and is formed so that its depth falls within the thickness of the panel board 1110. has been done.

The unit cover 2820 of the side unit 2800B is formed in the shape of a shallow container open to the front, and the LED board 2825 is housed inside. As shown in FIG. 107, this unit cover 2820 includes a flat plate-shaped cover part 2820a, a frame-shaped peripheral wall part 2820b protruding forward from the outer peripheral edge of the cover part 2820a, and a part of the peripheral wall part 2820b from the front end. It has a recessed notch 2820c. Note that the cover portion 2820a may be provided with a plurality of slits for ventilation.

Further, the unit cover 2820 protrudes forward from the front surface of the cover part 2820a to be shorter than the peripheral wall part 2820b, and has a plurality of boss parts 2820d for attaching the LED board 2825, and passes through the cover part 2820a, and is attached to the unit main body 2810. It has a plurality of mounting holes (not shown) into which mounting screws for mounting are inserted.

The cover portion 2820a of the unit cover 2820 is formed in a size that covers the LED board 2825 from the rear. The outer shape of the peripheral wall portion 2820b is the same as that of the support frame portion 2814 in the unit main body 2810. The front end surface of the peripheral wall section 2820b comes into contact with the rear end surface of the support frame section 2814 in the unit main body 2810 by assembling it into the side unit 2800B. In other words, the rear end surface of the support frame section 2814 and the front end surface of the peripheral wall section 2820b constitute the contact surface section 2830.

The cutout portions 2820c are provided on the upper side and the lower side of the peripheral wall portion 2820b. By assembling the notch portion 2820c into the side unit 2800B, a gap can be formed between the front end surface of the peripheral wall portion 2820b and the front end surface of the support frame portion 2814 in the unit main body 2810. That is, the notch 2820c forms a non-contact surface 2831 that does not contact each other in a part of the contact surface 2830 formed by the rear end surface of the support frame 2814 and the front end surface of the peripheral wall 2820b. This notch 2820c allows the inside of the container-shaped unit cover 2820 to be ventilated, and allows the heat from the LED board 2825 attached inside to be radiated to the outside, thereby preventing heat from being trapped in the unit cover 2820. do not have.

The LED board 2825 of the side unit 2800B is attached inside the unit cover 2820 with its rear surface in contact with the front end of the boss portion 2820d of the unit cover 2820. The plurality of LEDs 2825a mounted on the LED board 2825 are full-color LEDs, and by assembling them on the side unit 2800B, the side unit 2800B can be decorated with various luminous colors.

In this side unit 2800B, with the LED board 2825 attached to the boss portion 2820d inside the unit cover 2820, the front end surface of the peripheral wall portion 2820b of the unit cover 2820 is attached to the rear end surface of the support frame portion 2814 in the unit main body 2810. It can be assembled by bringing them into contact (contact) and screwing a mounting screw into the mounting hole of the second component 2812 of the unit body 2810 from the rear of the unit cover 2820 through the mounting hole of the unit cover 2820 and tightening.

To attach the side unit 2800B to the game panel 1100, first, from the front of the panel board 1110 in the game panel 1100, the base plate 2811a of the first component 2811 closes the opening 1112 passing through the panel board 1110. Then, the base plate 2811a is brought into contact with the front surface of the panel board 1110. At this time, the two positioning protrusions 2811c of the first component 2811 are inserted into the positioning holes 1113 of the panel board 1110. In this state, the attachment hole 2811d of the first component 2811 is aligned with the attachment hole 1114 of the panel board 1110.

Then, the side unit 2800B is attached to the front surface of the panel board 1110 by screwing a mounting screw into the mounting hole 1114 of the panel board 1110 from the front through the mounting hole 2811d of the first component 2811 and tightening it. At this time, since the mounting hole 2811d of the first component 2811 is provided near the positioning protrusion 2811c, the mounting screw cannot be screwed into the mounting hole 1114 of the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100 through the mounting hole 2811d. Therefore, the positioning protrusion 2811c can be strongly pressed against the panel plate 1110 side and inserted into the positioning hole 1113 reliably, and lifting up due to incomplete insertion of the positioning protrusion 2811c can be prevented.

In the side unit 2800B, the second component 2812 of the unit body 2810 is provided with a ball passage 2812a through which the game ball B flows down along the surface of the panel board 1110. Since the cross section of the ball passage 2812a in the second component 2812 is U-shaped, the rigidity of the second component 2812 can be increased due to the presence of the ball passage 2812a. Then, the second component 2812, whose rigidity is increased by the ball passage 2812a, is attached to the first component 2811, which may have low rigidity due to the flat base plate 2811a. Since the side unit 2800B is attached from the rear side of the side unit 2811, the rigidity of the side unit 2800B can be increased compared to the conventional side unit. Therefore, when disassembling the pachinko machine 1 for recycling or the like, when the mounting screws that attach the side unit 2800B to the panel board 1110 are removed and the side unit 2800B is pulled forward, the rigidity of the side unit 2800B is increased. , the side unit 2800B does not bend. As a result, the positioning protrusion 2811c of the side unit 2800B (first component 2811) does not tilt with respect to the positioning hole 1113 of the panel board 1110, and the side unit 2800B can be easily removed from the gaming panel 1100 (panel board 1110). It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 which can be removed and which can reduce disassembly work when sorting.

When the side unit 2800B is attached to the front surface of the panel board 1110 (the game board 5 is assembled), the second component 2812 of the unit body 2810 is within the thickness of the panel board 1110 within the opening 1112 of the panel board 1110. , and is located forward of the rear surface of the panel board 1110.

Furthermore, when the side unit 2800B of this embodiment is assembled to the game board 5, the unit cover 2820 protrudes rearward beyond the rear surface of the panel board 1110, and the notch 2820c (non-contact surface portion 2831) of the unit cover 2820 ) partially protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the panel board 1110. At this time, since the cutout portions 2820c (non-contact surface portions 2831) are provided on the upper and lower sides, the heat from the LED board 2825 is discharged upward by the upper cutout portion 2820c, while the external air is discharged from the lower cutout portion 2820c. can be taken inside. In addition, when assembled to the game board 5, the outer periphery of the portion of the unit body 2810 of the side unit 2800B that is inserted into the opening 1112 of the panel board 1110, that is, the outer periphery of the second component 2812 and the opening 1112. A gap is provided between the inner periphery and the inner periphery. These allow the heat from the LED board 2825 to be easily released to the outside through the cutout portion 2820c (non-contact surface portion 2831), allowing for efficient heat dissipation.

Further, in the side unit 2800B of this embodiment, when the LED board 2825 is attached to the unit cover 2820, the LED board 2825 is located behind the notch 2820c (non-contact surface part 2831). In other words, the LED board 2825 is provided so as not to overlap the cutout portion 2820c (non-contact surface portion 2831) in plan view. Thereby, even if dirt or dust enters into the unit cover 2820 through the notch 2820c, it can be made difficult to hit the LED board 2825, and the influence of the dust or dust can be prevented as much as possible. Further, since the notch 2820c is also provided on the lower side of the unit cover 2820, dust and dirt that have entered through the upper notch 2820c can be discharged downward from the lower notch 2820c.

Furthermore, when the side unit 2800B of this embodiment is assembled to the game board 5, the base plate 2811a of the first component 2811 closes the opening 1112 of the panel board 1110 in the game panel 1100 from the front, so the panel board It is possible to prevent foreign matter such as dust from entering the play area 5a on the front side of the panel board 1110 through the opening 1112 from the rear side of the panel board 1110.

Further, when the side unit 2800B is assembled to the game board 5, the unit cover 2820 attached to the rear side of the second component 2813 in the unit main body 2810 protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the panel board 1110. This amount of protrusion is set to 1/2 or less of the diameter D of the game ball B, similar to the side unit 2800A in FIG. 106.

By the way, when the game panel 1100 is formed by injection molding, the thickness of the part of the game area 5a where the obstacle nails are planted is determined by whether the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110) is made of wooden plywood or a resin board is cut. Therefore, parts of the unit body 2810 along the surface of the panel plate 1110 in the ball passage 2812a and the unit cover 2820 attached to the rear side of the unit body 2810 are There is a possibility that it will not fit within the board thickness and will protrude rearward beyond the rear surface of the panel board 1110. If the amount of rearward protrusion of the panel board 1110 in the side unit 2800B is larger than the rear surface, it becomes impossible to secure a sufficient rear space. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in the side unit 2800B, from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 in a portion extending within the thickness of the panel plate 1110 in the ball passage 2813a and extending along the surface of the panel plate 1110, Since the amount of protrusion is set to 1/2 or less of the diameter D of the game ball B, a sufficient rear space can be secured, and the lower back production unit 3500 (lower back movable decorative body 3510) of the desired size can be set. can be provided.

In the side unit 2800B, when the game ball B is received in the general winning opening 2001, it is guided to the ball passage 2812a behind the front surface of the panel board 1110 by the ball receiving part 2811b forming the general winning opening 2001, and the ball passage is After flowing down along the surface of the panel board 1110 by 2812a, it is delivered to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 provided at the rear from a passage exit (not shown). The game ball B delivered to the back ball guiding unit 3100 is discharged downward after being detected by the general winning hole sensor 3001.

Although detailed illustrations of the side unit 2800B of this embodiment are omitted, a passage outlet (not shown) of the second component 2812 in the unit main body 2810 is provided below the lower back movable decorative body 3510 in the standby position. . That is, the general winning hole sensor 3001 that detects the game ball B received in the general winning hole 2001 (ball receiving part 2811b) is provided below the lower back movable decorative body 3510 in the standby position. Therefore, the side unit 2800B, the general winning a prize opening sensor 3001, etc. do not get in the way of the lower back movable decorative body 3510.

Although detailed illustrations of the side unit 2800B of this embodiment are omitted, the unit main body 2810 is the same as the side unit 2800 of FIG. and a main stream section 2802 that merges with the tributary section 2801 and extends along the surface (board surface) of the panel board 1110 in the game panel 1100. The ball passage 2812a is composed of a plurality of tributary sections 2801 and a main stream section 2802.

According to the side unit 2800B of this embodiment, the same effects as the side unit 2800 described above can be achieved.

In addition, although the side unit 2800B described above is shown in which the notch 2820c (non-contact surface part 2831) is provided in the peripheral wall part 2820b of the unit cover 2820, the invention is not limited to this, and the peripheral wall part of the unit cover 2820 Instead of providing the cutout portion 2820c in the unit body 2820b, a cutout portion (non-contact surface portion 2831) may be provided in the support frame portion 2814 of the unit body 2810, which is cut forward from the rear end. Alternatively, a notch (non-contact surface) may be provided in both the peripheral wall 2820b of the unit cover 2820 and the support frame 2814 of the unit main body 2810.

Further, in the side unit 2800B described above, the unit body 2810 is provided with a frame-shaped support frame portion 2814 that protrudes rearward, and the rear end surface is used as the contact surface portion 2830. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the unit Instead of providing the support frame portion 2814 on the main body 2810, the front end of the unit cover 2820 (peripheral wall portion 2820b) may be brought into contact with the rear surface of the unit main body 2810, and the contact surface portion 2830 may be used as the abutting portion. As a result, since the support frame portion 2814 that protrudes rearward is not provided, the amount of protrusion rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 in the side unit 2800B can be reduced, and the empty space behind the panel plate 1110 can be further reduced. It becomes possible to secure widely.

Further, in the side unit 2800B described above, the LED board 2825 is attached to the unit cover 2820, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be attached to the side.

Further, in the above side unit 2800B, a diffusion lens portion made of a plurality of concave and convex portions that diffuses the light from the LED 2825a may be provided in front of the LED board 2825. This diffusion lens portion may be provided on the rear surface of the unit main body 2810 (second component member 2812), or may be provided on a member separate from the unit main body 2810.

Furthermore, in the side unit 2800B, the ball passage 2812a is composed of a plurality of tributary sections 2801 that communicate with the respective ball receiving sections 2811b, and a main section 2802 where the plurality of tributary sections 2801 merge. Although the embodiment shown in FIG.

Further, in the above embodiment, the game panel 1100 includes a panel board 1110 made of transparent resin, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the game panel 1100 may be made of wood. As a result, by making the game panel 1100 made of wood, the board thickness becomes thicker than that made of resin, so it is possible to make more effective use of the board thickness of the game panel 1100. By the way, if the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110) is transparent, light from the LED 2825a of the LED board 2825 enters into the panel board 1110 from the inner peripheral surface of the opening 1112 of the panel board 1110, and 1110, and the amount of light irradiated forward is reduced, which may weaken the presentation effect of the light emission. On the other hand, by making the game panel 1100 wooden (opaque), the light from the LED 2825a of the LED board 2825 does not enter the inside of the game panel 1100 from the inner peripheral surface of the opening 1112, and the opening Since the light can be reflected by the inner circumferential surface of the light source 1112, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the amount of light irradiated forward, and it is possible to make it easy to fully exhibit the effect of light emission.

[12-2c. Modification example 3 of side unit]
Next, a side unit 2800C having a different form from that described above will be described with reference mainly to FIG. 108 and the like. FIG. 108 is an explanatory diagram showing a side unit having a different form from the side unit shown in FIG. 107 in a vertical section along with a game panel. Here, the same components as those of the side unit 2800B described above will be described using the same reference numerals.

The side unit 2800C extends along the inner rail 1002 to the left of the starting port unit 2100 in the game area 5a where the game ball B is driven by the player operating the handle 160. It is equipped with a plurality (2 to 4) of general prize winning holes 2001 that are always open to receive prize money.

The side unit 2800C includes a unit main body 2810 that is attached from the front to the flat panel board 1110 on which the obstacle nails are planted in the game panel 1100, a unit cover 2820 that is attached from the rear side of the unit main body 2810, and a unit main body 2810. The LED board 2825 is provided between the unit cover 2820 and has a plurality of LEDs 2825a mounted thereon. The unit body 2810 and unit cover 2820 of the side unit 2800B are made of transparent synthetic resin.

The side unit 2800C also includes a contact surface portion 2830 where the unit body 2810 and the unit cover 2820 are in contact with each other, and a non-contact surface portion 2831 that is provided in a part of the contact surface portion 2830 and does not contact each other. ing.

The unit main body 2810 of the side unit 2800B includes a first component 2811 that is attached from the front to a flat panel board 1110 on which the obstacle nails are installed in the game panel 1100, and a second component that is attached to the first component 2811 from the rear side. a second component member 2812; a support frame portion 2814 that projects rearward in a frame shape along the outer peripheral edge of the unit cover 2820 and whose rear end surface abuts the front end surface of the unit cover 2820; a first component member 2811; It has a ball sensor 2815 (general winning hole sensor 3001) that is provided between the component 2812 and detects the game ball B received in the general winning hole 2001. In this embodiment, a second component 2812 is attached to the rear side of the first component 2811. Further, in this embodiment, the support frame portion 2814 protrudes from the rear surface of the second component 2812.

The first component 2811 of the unit main body 2810 includes a flat base plate 2811a that can come into contact with the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110), and a flat base plate 2811a that protrudes forward from the base plate 2811a and is open at the upper and rear sides. It has a plurality of ball receiving parts 2811b forming a general winning hole 2001. In addition, the first component 2811 includes a plurality of positioning protrusions 2811c projecting rearward from the base plate 2811a, a plurality of mounting holes 2811d passing through the base plate 2811a for attaching to the game panel 1100, and a base plate It has a plurality of attachment holes (not shown) provided on the rear end surface of the second component 2811a for attaching the second component 2812 (see FIG. 104).

The base plate 2811a extends along the inner rail 1002 of the front component 1000. The plurality of positioning protrusions 2811c are provided to be spaced apart from each other in the longitudinal direction of the base plate 2811a. The positioning protrusion 2811c is inserted into the positioning hole 1113 provided in the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100. In this embodiment, each positioning protrusion 2811c has the same length. The plurality of attachment holes 2811d are provided in the vicinity of the positioning protrusion 2811c on the base plate 2811a and in the upper part of the base plate 2811a near the center in the left-right direction. These mounting holes 2811d have countersinks formed on the front side, and countersunk mounting screws (not shown) that are screwed into the mounting holes 1114 of the panel plate 1110 are inserted from the front. When attached to the front surface of the panel board 1110, the head of the mounting screw does not protrude further forward than the front surface of the base plate 2811a.

In this embodiment, a transparent decorative sticker 2803 is attached to the front surface of the base plate 2811a and the front surface of the ball receiving portion 2811b of the first component 2811.

The second component 2812 is formed in the shape of a container open to the front, and receives the game ball B received in the general prize opening 2001 (ball receiving part 2811b) on the surface (board) of the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110). A ball passage 2812a that is caused to flow downward along the surface), a passage outlet 2812b that opens rearward at the downstream end of the ball passage 2812a, and a plurality of mounting holes (not shown) for attachment to the first component 2811. ) and an attachment hole (not shown) provided on the rear surface for attaching the unit cover 2820.

A support frame portion 2814 whose rear end abuts the front end of the unit cover 2820 is provided on the rear side of the second component 2812. In other words, the second component 2812 has a support frame portion 2814 that projects rearward in a frame shape along the outer peripheral edge of the unit cover 2820 and whose rear end surface abuts the front end surface of the unit cover 2820. . The rear end surface of the support frame section 2814 comes into contact with the front end surface of a peripheral wall section 2820b, which will be described later, of the unit cover 2820 when assembled to the side unit 2800C. In other words, the rear end surface of the support frame section 2814 and the front end surface of the peripheral wall section 2820b constitute the contact surface section 2830.

The support frame portion 2814 (contact surface portion 2830) of the second component 2812 is provided above the passage outlet 2812b of the ball passage 2812a and the ball sensor 2815. In other words, the passage outlet 2812b of the second component 2812 and the ball sensor 2815 are provided below the support frame portion 2814 (contact surface portion 2830). Thereby, the ball sensor 2815 is less likely to interfere with the illumination decoration by the LEDs 2825a of the LED board 2825.

In the unit body 2810, a second component 2812 is positioned behind the first component 2811, and a mounting screw is passed from the rear of the second component 2812 through the mounting hole of the second component 2812 to attach the first component 2811 to the attached component. It can be assembled by screwing into the hole. At this time, the ball sensor 2815 is placed and assembled at a predetermined position in the ball passage 2812a so as to be sandwiched between the first component 2811 and the second component 2812. As a result, a unit main body 2810 is constructed in which the second component member 2812 is attached to the first component member 2811 from the rear side.

As shown in FIG. 108, the second component 2812 of this embodiment is inserted into the opening 1112 of the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100, and is formed so that its depth falls within the thickness of the panel board 1110. has been done.

The unit cover 2820 of the side unit 2800C is formed in the shape of a shallow container open to the front, and the LED board 2825 is housed inside. This unit cover 2820 includes a flat plate-shaped cover part 2820a, a frame-shaped peripheral wall part 2820b protruding forward from the outer peripheral edge of the cover part 2820a, and a notch part 2820c recessed from the front end in a part of the peripheral wall part 2820b. ,have. Note that the cover portion 2820a may be provided with a plurality of slit holes for ventilation.

Further, the unit cover 2820 protrudes forward from the front surface of the cover part 2820a to be shorter than the peripheral wall part 2820b, and has a plurality of boss parts 2820d for attaching the LED board 2825, and passes through the cover part 2820a, and is attached to the unit main body 2810. It has a plurality of mounting holes (not shown) into which mounting screws for mounting are inserted.

The cover portion 2820a of the unit cover 2820 is formed in a size that covers the LED board 2825 from the rear. The outer shape of the peripheral wall portion 2820b is the same as that of the support frame portion 2814 in the unit main body 2810. The front end surface of the peripheral wall portion 2820b comes into contact with the rear end surface of the support frame portion 2814 in the unit body 2810 when assembled to the side unit 2800C. In other words, the rear end surface of the support frame section 2814 and the front end surface of the peripheral wall section 2820b constitute the contact surface section 2830.

The cutout portions 2820c are provided on the upper side and the lower side of the peripheral wall portion 2820b. By assembling the notch portion 2820c into the side unit 2800C, a gap can be formed between the front end surface of the peripheral wall portion 2820b and the front end surface of the support frame portion 2814 in the unit main body 2810. That is, the notch 2820c forms a non-contact surface 2831 that does not contact each other in a part of the contact surface 2830 formed by the rear end surface of the support frame 2814 and the front end surface of the peripheral wall 2820b. This notch 2820c allows the inside of the container-shaped unit cover 2820 to be ventilated, and allows the heat from the LED board 2825 attached inside to be radiated to the outside, thereby preventing heat from being trapped in the unit cover 2820. do not have.

The LED board 2825 of the side unit 2800C is attached inside the unit cover 2820 with its rear surface in contact with the front end of the boss portion 2820d of the unit cover 2820. The plurality of LEDs 2825a mounted on the LED board 2825 are full-color LEDs, and by assembling them in the side unit 2800C, the side unit 2800C can be decorated with various luminous colors.

In this side unit 2800C, with the LED board 2825 attached to the boss portion 2820d inside the unit cover 2820, the front end surface of the peripheral wall portion 2820b of the unit cover 2820 is attached to the rear end surface of the support frame portion 2814 in the unit main body 2810. It can be assembled by bringing them into contact (contact) and screwing a mounting screw into the mounting hole of the second component 2812 of the unit body 2810 from the rear of the unit cover 2820 through the mounting hole of the unit cover 2820 and tightening.

To attach the side unit 2800C to the game panel 1100, first, from the front of the panel board 1110 in the game panel 1100, the base plate 2811a of the first component 2811 closes the opening 1112 passing through the panel board 1110. Then, the base plate 2811a is brought into contact with the front surface of the panel board 1110. At this time, the two positioning protrusions 2811c of the first component 2811 are inserted into the positioning holes 1113 of the panel board 1110. In this state, the attachment hole 2811d of the first component 2811 is aligned with the attachment hole 1114 of the panel board 1110.

Then, the side unit 2800C is attached to the front surface of the panel board 1110 by screwing a mounting screw into the mounting hole 1114 of the panel board 1110 from the front through the mounting hole 2811d of the first component 2811 and tightening it. At this time, since the mounting hole 2811d of the first component 2811 is provided near the positioning protrusion 2811c, the mounting screw cannot be screwed into the mounting hole 1114 of the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100 through the mounting hole 2811d. Therefore, the positioning protrusion 2811c can be strongly pressed against the panel plate 1110 side and inserted into the positioning hole 1113 reliably, and lifting up due to incomplete insertion of the positioning protrusion 2811c can be prevented.

In the side unit 2800C, the second component 2812 of the unit main body 2810 is provided with a ball passage 2812a through which the game ball B flows down along the surface of the panel board 1110. Since the cross section of the ball passage 2812a in the second component 2812 is U-shaped, the rigidity of the second component 2812 can be increased due to the presence of the ball passage 2812a. Then, the second component 2812, whose rigidity is increased by the ball passage 2812a, is attached to the first component 2811, which may have low rigidity due to the flat base plate 2811a. Since the side unit 2800C is attached from the rear side of the side unit 2811, the rigidity of the side unit 2800C can be increased compared to the conventional side unit. Therefore, when disassembling the pachinko machine 1 for recycling or the like, when the mounting screws that attach the side unit 2800C to the panel board 1110 are removed and the side unit 2800C is pulled forward, the rigidity of the side unit 2800C is increased. , the side unit 2800C does not bend. As a result, the positioning protrusion 2811c of the side unit 2800C (first component 2811) does not tilt with respect to the positioning hole 1113 of the panel board 1110, and the side unit 2800C can be easily removed from the gaming panel 1100 (panel board 1110). It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 which can be removed and which can reduce disassembly work when sorting.

When the side unit 2800C is attached to the front surface of the panel board 1110 (the game board 5 is assembled), the second component 2812 of the unit body 2810 and the ball sensor 2815 are attached to the panel board within the opening 1112 of the panel board 1110. 1110, and is located forward of the rear surface of the panel board 1110.

Furthermore, when the side unit 2800C of this embodiment is assembled to the game board 5, the unit cover 2820 protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the panel board 1110, and the notch 2820c (non-contact surface portion 2831) of the unit cover 2820 ) partially protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the panel board 1110. At this time, since the cutout portions 2820c (non-contact surface portions 2831) are provided on the upper and lower sides, the heat from the LED board 2825 is discharged upward by the upper cutout portion 2820c, while the external air is discharged from the lower cutout portion 2820c. can be taken inside. In addition, when assembled to the game board 5, the outer periphery of the portion of the unit main body 2810 of the side unit 2800C that is inserted into the opening 1112 of the panel board 1110, that is, the outer periphery of the second component 2812 and the opening 1112. A gap is provided between the inner periphery and the inner periphery. These allow the heat from the LED board 2825 to be easily released to the outside through the cutout portion 2820c (non-contact surface portion 2831), allowing for efficient heat dissipation.

Further, in the side unit 2800C of this embodiment, when the LED board 2825 is attached to the unit cover 2820, the LED board 2825 is located behind the notch 2820c (non-contact surface part 2831). In other words, the LED board 2825 is provided so as not to overlap the cutout portion 2820c (non-contact surface portion 2831) in plan view. Thereby, even if dirt or dust enters into the unit cover 2820 through the notch 2820c, it can be made difficult to hit the LED board 2825, and the influence of the dust or dust can be prevented as much as possible. Further, since the notch 2820c is also provided on the lower side of the unit cover 2820, dust and dirt that have entered through the upper notch 2820c can be discharged downward from the lower notch 2820c.

Furthermore, when the side unit 2800C of this embodiment is assembled to the game board 5, the base plate 2811a of the first component 2811 closes the opening 1112 of the panel board 1110 in the game panel 1100 from the front, so the panel board It is possible to prevent foreign matter such as dust from entering the play area 5a on the front side of the panel board 1110 through the opening 1112 from the rear side of the panel board 1110.

Furthermore, when the side unit 2800C is assembled to the game board 5, the unit cover 2820 attached to the rear side of the second component 2813 in the unit main body 2810 protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the panel board 1110. This amount of protrusion is set to 1/2 or less of the diameter D of the game ball B, similar to the side unit 2800A in FIG. 106.

By the way, when the game panel 1100 is formed by injection molding, the thickness of the part of the game area 5a where the obstacle nails are planted is determined by whether the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110) is made of wooden plywood or a resin board is cut. Therefore, parts of the unit body 2810 along the surface of the panel plate 1110 in the ball passage 2812a and the unit cover 2820 attached to the rear side of the unit body 2810 are There is a possibility that it will not fit within the board thickness and will protrude rearward beyond the rear surface of the panel board 1110. If the amount of rearward protrusion of the panel board 1110 in the side unit 2800C is greater than the rear surface, it becomes impossible to secure a sufficient rear space. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in the side unit 2800C, from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 at a portion extending within the thickness of the panel plate 1110 in the ball passage 2813a and extending along the surface of the panel plate 1110. Since the amount of protrusion is set to 1/2 or less of the diameter D of the game ball B, a sufficient rear space can be secured, and the lower back production unit 3500 (lower back movable decorative body 3510) of the desired size can be set. can be provided.

In the side unit 2800C, when the game ball B is received in the general winning hole 2001, it is guided to the ball path 2812a behind the front surface of the panel board 1110 by the ball receiving part 2811b forming the general winning hole 2001, and the ball path 2812a flows down along the surface of the panel plate 1110 within the thickness of the panel plate 1110, is detected by the ball sensor 2815, and is discharged from the passage outlet 2812b that opens toward the rear.

Although detailed illustration of the side unit 2800C of this embodiment is omitted, the passage outlet 2812b of the second component 2812 in the unit main body 2810 is provided below the back lower movable decorative body 3510 in the standby position. In addition, a ball sensor 2815 (general winning hole sensor 3001) that detects the game ball B received in the general winning hole 2001 (ball receiving part 2811b) is located within the opening 1112 of the panel board 1110 in the game panel 1100 and inside the panel board It is provided within the plate thickness of 1110 mm. Therefore, the side unit 2800C, the ball sensor 2815, etc. do not get in the way of the lower back movable decorative body 3510.

Although detailed illustrations of the side unit 2800C of this embodiment are omitted, the unit main body 2810 is the same as the side unit 2800 of FIG. and a main stream section 2802 that merges with the tributary section 2801 and extends along the surface (board surface) of the panel board 1110 in the game panel 1100. The ball passage 2812a is composed of a plurality of tributary sections 2801 and a main stream section 2802.

According to the side unit 2800C of this embodiment, the same effects as the side unit 2800 described above can be achieved.

Although the side unit 2800C described above is shown in which the notch 2820c (non-contact surface portion 2831) is provided in the peripheral wall portion 2820b of the unit cover 2820, the present invention is not limited to this, and the peripheral wall portion of the unit cover 2820 Instead of providing the cutout portion 2820c in the unit body 2820b, a cutout portion (non-contact surface portion 2831) may be provided in the support frame portion 2814 of the unit body 2810, which is cut forward from the rear end. Alternatively, a notch (non-contact surface) may be provided in both the peripheral wall 2820b of the unit cover 2820 and the support frame 2814 of the unit main body 2810.

Further, in the side unit 2800C described above, the unit body 2810 is provided with a frame-shaped support frame portion 2814 that protrudes rearward, and the rear end surface is the contact surface portion 2830. However, the unit body 2810 is not limited to this. Instead of providing the support frame portion 2814 on the main body 2810, the front end of the unit cover 2820 (peripheral wall portion 2820b) may be brought into contact with the rear surface of the unit main body 2810, and the contact surface portion 2830 may be used as the abutting portion. As a result, since the support frame portion 2814 that protrudes rearward is not provided, the amount of protrusion rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 in the side unit 2800C can be reduced, and the empty space behind the panel plate 1110 can be further reduced. It becomes possible to secure widely.

Further, in the side unit 2800C described above, the LED board 2825 is attached to the unit cover 2820, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may also be attached to the side.

Further, in the above side unit 2800C, a diffusion lens portion made of a plurality of concave and convex portions that diffuses the light from the LED 2825a may be provided in front of the LED board 2825. This diffusion lens portion may be provided on the rear surface of the unit main body 2810 (second component member 2812), or may be provided on a member separate from the unit main body 2810.

Furthermore, in the side unit 2800C, the ball passage 2812a is composed of a plurality of tributary sections 2801 that communicate with the respective ball receiving sections 2811b, and a main stream section 2802 where the plurality of tributary sections 2801 merge. Although the embodiment shown in FIG.

Further, in the above embodiment, the game panel 1100 includes a panel board 1110 made of transparent resin, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the game panel 1100 may be made of wood. As a result, by making the game panel 1100 made of wood, the board thickness becomes thicker than that made of resin, so it is possible to make more effective use of the board thickness of the game panel 1100. By the way, if the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110) is transparent, light from the LED 2825a of the LED board 2825 enters into the panel board 1110 from the inner peripheral surface of the opening 1112 of the panel board 1110, and 1110, and the amount of light irradiated forward is reduced, which may weaken the presentation effect of the light emission. On the other hand, by making the game panel 1100 wooden (opaque), the light from the LED 2825a of the LED board 2825 does not enter the inside of the game panel 1100 from the inner peripheral surface of the opening 1112, and the opening Since the light can be reflected by the inner circumferential surface of the light source 1112, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the amount of light irradiated forward, and it is possible to make it easy to fully exhibit the effect of light emission.

[12-2d. Modification example 4 of side unit]
Next, a side unit 2800D having a different form from that described above will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 109 and the like. FIG. 109 is an explanatory diagram showing a side unit of a further different form in a vertical cross section together with a game panel. Here, the same components as the side unit 2800, side unit 2800B, and side unit 2800C described above will be described with the same reference numerals.

The side unit 2800D extends along the inner rail 1002 to the left of the starting port unit 2100 in the game area 5a where the game ball B is driven by the player operating the handle 160, and the side unit 2800D extends along the inner rail 1002 to the left of the starting port unit 2100. It is equipped with a plurality (2 to 4) of general prize winning holes 2001 that are always open to receive prize money.

The side unit 2800D includes a unit main body 2810A that is attached from the front to the flat panel board 1110 on which the obstacle nails are planted in the game panel 1100, a unit cover 2820 that is attached from the rear side of the unit main body 2810A, and a unit main body 2810A. The LED board 2825 is provided between the unit cover 2820 and has a plurality of LEDs 2825a mounted thereon. The unit body 2810A and unit cover 2820 of the side unit 2800D are made of transparent synthetic resin.

The side unit 2800D also includes a contact surface portion 2830 where the unit body 2810A and the unit cover 2820 are in contact with each other, and a non-contact surface portion 2831 that is provided in a part of the contact surface portion 2830 and does not contact each other. ing.

The unit main body 2810A of the side unit 2800D includes a first component 2811A that is attached from the front to the flat panel board 1110 on which the obstacle nails are planted in the game panel 1100, and a second component that is attached to the first component 2811A from the rear side. It has two component members 2812A, and a support frame portion 2814 that projects rearward in a frame shape along the outer peripheral edge of the unit cover 2820 and whose rear end surface abuts the front end surface of the unit cover 2820. In this embodiment, a second component 2812A is attached to the front side of the first component 2811A. Further, a support frame portion 2814 protrudes from the rear surface of the first component member 2811A.

The first component 2811A of the unit main body 2810A includes a flat base plate 2811a that can come into contact with the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110), and balls that penetrate through the base plate 2811a and allow game balls B to flow therethrough. It has a passage 2811e. The upstream end of the ball passage 2811e of the first component 2811A is located behind the ball receiving portion 2812c of the second component 2812A, which will be described later.

The first component 2811A also includes a plurality of positioning protrusions 2811c that protrude rearward from the base plate 2811a, a plurality of mounting holes 2811d that penetrate the base plate 2811a and are used for attaching to the game panel 1100, and a base plate 2811a and a plurality of mounting holes (not shown) for mounting the second component 2812A, and a plurality of mounting holes (not shown) provided on the rear surface for mounting the unit cover 2820. , (see Figure 104).

The base plate 2811a extends along the inner rail 1002 of the front component 1000. The plurality of positioning protrusions 2811c are provided to be spaced apart from each other in the longitudinal direction of the base plate 2811a. The positioning protrusion 2811c is inserted into the positioning hole 1113 provided in the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100. In this embodiment, each positioning protrusion 2811c has the same length. The plurality of attachment holes 2811d are provided in the vicinity of the positioning protrusion 2811c on the base plate 2811a and in the upper part of the base plate 2811a near the center in the left-right direction. These mounting holes 2811d have countersinks formed on the front side, and countersunk mounting screws (not shown) that are screwed into the mounting holes 1114 of the panel plate 1110 are inserted from the front. When attached to the front surface of the panel board 1110, the head of the mounting screw does not protrude further forward than the front surface of the base plate 2811a.

A support frame portion 2814 whose rear end abuts the front end of the unit cover 2820 is provided on the rear side of the first component 2811A. In other words, the first component 2811A includes a support frame portion 2814 that projects rearward in a frame shape along the outer peripheral edge of the unit cover 2820 and whose rear end surface abuts the front end surface of the unit cover 2820. . The support frame portion 2814 is provided at a location below the ball passage 2811e on the rear surface of the base plate 2811a. The rear end surface of the support frame section 2814 comes into contact with the front end surface of a peripheral wall section 2820b, which will be described later, of the unit cover 2820 when assembled to the side unit 2800D. In other words, the rear end surface of the support frame section 2814 and the front end surface of the peripheral wall section 2820b constitute the contact surface section 2830.

The second component 2812A has a plurality of ball receivers 2812c that extend short in the front-rear direction and are open at the top and rear, forming the general winning opening 2001, and the front ends of the plurality of ball receivers 2812c are connected to each other. It has a connecting flat front plate 2812d and a plurality of attachment holes (not shown) for attachment to the first component member 2811A. The ball receiving portion 2812c is located in front of the ball passage 2811e of the first component 2811A.

In this embodiment, a transparent decorative sticker 2803 is attached to the front surface of the front plate 2812d of the second component 2812A.

The unit main body 2810A is constructed by positioning the second component 2812A in front of the first component 2811A, and screwing a mounting screw into the mounting hole of the second component 2812A from the rear through the mounting hole of the first component 2811A. Can be assembled. As a result, a unit main body 2810A is constructed in which the second component 2812A is attached to the first component 2811A from the rear side. In this unit body 2810A, the ball receiving portion 2812c of the second component 2812A protrudes forward from the base plate 2811a of the first component 2811A.

As shown in FIG. 109, the first component 2811A of this embodiment is inserted into the opening 1112 of the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100, and is formed so that its depth falls within the thickness of the panel board 1110. has been done.

The unit cover 2820 of the side unit 2800D is formed in the shape of a shallow container open to the front, and the LED board 2825 is housed inside. This unit cover 2820 includes a flat plate-shaped cover part 2820a, a frame-shaped peripheral wall part 2820b protruding forward from the outer peripheral edge of the cover part 2820a, and a notch part 2820c recessed from the front end in a part of the peripheral wall part 2820b. ,have. Note that the cover portion 2820a may be provided with a plurality of slit holes for ventilation.

Further, the unit cover 2820 protrudes forward from the front surface of the cover portion 2820a to be shorter than the peripheral wall portion 2820b, and has a plurality of boss portions 2820d for attaching the LED board 2825, and passes through the cover portion 2820a and is connected to the unit main body 2810A. It has a plurality of mounting holes (not shown) into which mounting screws for mounting are inserted.

The cover portion 2820a of the unit cover 2820 is formed in a size that covers the LED board 2825 from the rear. The outer shape of the peripheral wall portion 2820b is the same as that of the support frame portion 2814 in the unit main body 2810A. The front end surface of the peripheral wall portion 2820b comes into contact with the rear end surface of the support frame portion 2814 in the unit main body 2810A when assembled to the side unit 2800D. In other words, the rear end surface of the support frame section 2814 and the front end surface of the peripheral wall section 2820b constitute the contact surface section 2830.

The cutout portions 2820c are provided on the upper side and the lower side of the peripheral wall portion 2820b. When the notch portion 2820c is assembled to the side unit 2800D, a gap can be formed between the front end surface of the peripheral wall portion 2820b and the front end surface of the support frame portion 2814 in the unit main body 2810A. That is, the notch 2820c forms a non-contact surface 2831 that does not contact each other in a part of the contact surface 2830 formed by the rear end surface of the support frame 2814 and the front end surface of the peripheral wall 2820b. This notch 2820c allows the inside of the container-shaped unit cover 2820 to be ventilated, and allows the heat from the LED board 2825 attached inside to be radiated to the outside, thereby preventing heat from being trapped in the unit cover 2820. do not have.

The LED board 2825 of the side unit 2800D is attached inside the unit cover 2820 with its rear surface in contact with the front end of the boss portion 2820d of the unit cover 2820. The plurality of LEDs 2825a mounted on the LED board 2825 are full-color LEDs, and by assembling them in the side unit 2800D, the side unit 2800D can be decorated with various luminous colors.

In this side unit 2800D, with the LED board 2825 attached to the boss portion 2820d inside the unit cover 2820, the front end surface of the peripheral wall portion 2820b of the unit cover 2820 is attached to the rear end surface of the support frame portion 2814 in the unit main body 2810A. It can be assembled by bringing them into contact (contact) and screwing a mounting screw into the mounting hole of the first component 2811A of the unit main body 2810A through the mounting hole of the unit cover 2820 from the rear of the unit cover 2820 and tightening.

To attach the side unit 2800D to the game panel 1100, first, from the front of the panel plate 1110 in the game panel 1100, the base plate 2811a of the first component 2811A closes the opening 1112 passing through the panel plate 1110. Then, the base plate 2811a is brought into contact with the front surface of the panel board 1110. At this time, the two positioning protrusions 2811c of the first component 2811A are inserted into the positioning holes 1113 of the panel board 1110. In this state, the attachment hole 2811d of the first component 2811A is aligned with the attachment hole 1114 of the panel board 1110.

Then, the side unit 2800D is attached to the front surface of the panel board 1110 by screwing a mounting screw into the mounting hole 1114 of the panel board 1110 from the front through the mounting hole 2811d of the first component 2811A and tightening it. At this time, since the mounting hole 2811d of the first component 2811A is provided near the positioning protrusion 2811c, the mounting screw cannot be screwed into the mounting hole 1114 of the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100 through the mounting hole 2811d. Therefore, the positioning protrusion 2811c can be strongly pressed against the panel plate 1110 side and inserted into the positioning hole 1113 reliably, and lifting up due to incomplete insertion of the positioning protrusion 2811c can be prevented.

In the side unit 2800D, by assembling the unit main body 2810A, the plurality of ball receiving portions 2812c of the second component 2812A have their front end side and rear end side connected to the front plate 2812d of the second component member 2812A and the first Since it is sandwiched between the base plate 2811a of the component 2811A and the base plate 2811a, the rigidity can be increased compared to the conventional side unit. Therefore, when disassembling the pachinko machine 1 for recycling or the like, when the mounting screws that attach the side unit 2800D to the panel board 1110 are removed and the side unit 2800D is pulled forward, the rigidity of the side unit 2800D is increased. , the side unit 2800D does not bend. As a result, the positioning protrusion 2811c of the side unit 2800D (first component 2811A) does not tilt with respect to the positioning hole 1113 of the panel board 1110, and the side unit 2800D can be easily removed from the gaming panel 1100 (panel board 1110). It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 which can be removed and which can reduce disassembly work when sorting.

When the side unit 2800D is attached to the front of the panel board 1110 (the game board 5 is assembled), the ball passage 2811e of the first component 2811A in the unit body 2810A and the unit cover 2820 (LED board 2825) are attached to the panel board 1110. It is located within the thickness of the panel board 1110 within the opening 1112 of the panel board 1110, and is located forward of the rear surface of the panel board 1110. As a result, since the LED board 2825 is provided within the thickness of the panel board 1110 in the game panel 1100, the inside thickness of the panel board 1110 is effectively utilized. This makes it easier to secure empty space. Therefore, it is possible to provide a part of the presentation device in the empty space, and it is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that is more appealing to players.

In addition, in the side unit 2800D of this embodiment, since the cutout portions 2820c (non-contact surface portions 2831) of the unit cover 2820 are provided on the upper and lower sides, the upper cutout portions 2820c allow heat from the LED board 2825 to be discharged upward. , external air can be taken into the interior from the lower notch 2820c. In addition, when assembled to the game board 5, there is a gap between the outer periphery of the part of the unit main body 2810 of the side unit 2800D inserted into the opening 1112 of the panel board 1110 and the inner periphery of the opening 1112. is provided. These allow the heat from the LED board 2825 to be easily released to the outside through the cutout portion 2820c (non-contact surface portion 2831), allowing for efficient heat dissipation.

Further, in the side unit 2800D of this embodiment, when the LED board 2825 is attached to the unit cover 2820, the LED board 2825 is located behind the notch 2820c (non-contact surface part 2831). In other words, the LED board 2825 is provided so as not to overlap the cutout portion 2820c (non-contact surface portion 2831) in plan view. Thereby, even if dirt or dust enters into the unit cover 2820 through the notch 2820c, it can be made difficult to hit the LED board 2825, and the influence of the dust or dust can be prevented as much as possible. Further, since the notch 2820c is also provided on the lower side of the unit cover 2820, dust and dirt that have entered through the upper notch 2820c can be discharged downward from the lower notch 2820c.

Furthermore, when the side unit 2800D of this embodiment is assembled to the game board 5, the notch 2820c of the unit cover 2820 is within the thickness of the panel board 1110 within the opening 1112 of the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100. 2820c, it is difficult for dust and dust to enter the unit cover 2820 from above through the notch 2820c.

In addition, when the side unit 2800D of this embodiment is assembled to the game board 5, there is a gap between the peripheral wall portion 2820b of the unit cover 2820 and the inner peripheral surface of the opening 1112 of the panel board 1110 in the game panel 1100. At the same time, the opening 1112 is closed from the front by the base plate 2811a of the first component 2811. As a result, the heat from the LED board 2825 inside the unit cover 2820 can be radiated toward the rear of the panel board 1110 through the gap between the notch 2820c and the inner peripheral surface of the opening 1112, and the panel board It is possible to prevent foreign matter such as dust from entering the play area 5a on the front side of the panel board 1110 through the opening 1112 from the rear side of the panel board 1110.

In the side unit 2800D, when the game ball B is received in the general winning hole 2001, it is sent to the ball passage 2811e of the first component 2811A at the rear by the ball receiving part 2812c of the second component 2812A forming the general winning hole 2001. After being guided and flowing backward through the thickness of the panel board 1110 through the ball passage 2811e, it is delivered to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 provided at the rear of the panel board 1110 (gaming panel 1100). The game ball B delivered to the back ball guiding unit 3100 is discharged downward after being detected by the general winning hole sensor 3001.

According to the side unit 2800D of this embodiment, the same effects as the side unit 2800 and the like described above can be achieved.

Although the side unit 2800D described above is shown in which the notch portion 2820c (non-contact surface portion 2831) is provided in the peripheral wall portion 2820b of the unit cover 2820, the present invention is not limited to this, and the peripheral wall portion of the unit cover 2820 Instead of providing the notch 2820c in the unit body 2820b, a notch (non-contact surface part 2831) cut out from the rear end to the front may be provided in the support frame part 2814 of the unit main body 2810A. Alternatively, a notch (non-contact surface) may be provided in both the peripheral wall 2820b of the unit cover 2820 and the support frame 2814 of the unit main body 2810A.

Further, in the side unit 2800D described above, the unit main body 2810A is provided with a frame-shaped support frame portion 2814 that protrudes rearward, and the rear end surface is the contact surface portion 2830. However, the unit body 2810A is not limited to this. Instead of providing the support frame portion 2814 on the main body 2810A, the front end of the unit cover 2820 (peripheral wall portion 2820b) may be brought into contact with the rear surface of the unit main body 2810A, and the abutting portion may be a contact surface portion 2830. As a result, since the support frame portion 2814 that protrudes rearward is not provided, the LED board 2825 can be positioned further forward, and a brighter light-emitting decoration (light-emitting effect) can be shown to the player.

Further, in the side unit 2800D described above, the LED board 2825 is attached to the unit cover 2820, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may also be attached to the side.

Further, in the side unit 2800D described above, a diffusion lens portion made of a plurality of concave and convex portions that diffuses the light from the LED 2825a may be provided in front of the LED board 2825. This diffusion lens portion may be provided on the rear surface of the unit main body 2810A (base plate 2811a of the first component member 2811A), or may be provided on a separate member from the unit main body 2810A.

Further, in the above embodiment, the game panel 1100 includes a panel board 1110 made of transparent resin, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the game panel 1100 may be made of wood. As a result, by making the game panel 1100 made of wood, the board thickness becomes thicker than that made of resin, so it is possible to make more effective use of the board thickness of the game panel 1100. By the way, if the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110) is transparent, light from the LED 2825a of the LED board 2825 enters into the panel board 1110 from the inner peripheral surface of the opening 1112 of the panel board 1110, and 1110, and the amount of light irradiated forward is reduced, which may weaken the presentation effect of the light emission. On the other hand, by making the game panel 1100 wooden (opaque), the light from the LED 2825a of the LED board 2825 does not enter the inside of the game panel 1100 from the inner peripheral surface of the opening 1112, and the opening Since the light can be reflected by the inner circumferential surface of the light source 1112, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the amount of light irradiated forward, and it is possible to make it easy to fully exhibit the effect of light emission.

[12-2e. Modification example 5 of side unit]
Next, a side unit 2800E having a different form from that described above will be described with reference mainly to FIG. 110 and the like. FIG. 110 is an explanatory diagram showing a side unit of a further different form along with a game panel in longitudinal section. Here, the same components as those of the side unit 2800D described above will be described with the same reference numerals.

The side unit 2800E extends along the inner rail 1002 to the left of the starting port unit 2100 in the game area 5a where the game ball B is driven by the player operating the handle 160, and the side unit 2800E extends along the inner rail 1002 to the left of the starting port unit 2100. It is equipped with a plurality (2 to 4) of general prize winning holes 2001 that are always open to receive prize money.

The side unit 2800E includes a unit main body 2810A that is attached from the front to the flat panel board 1110 on which the obstacle nails are planted in the game panel 1100, a unit cover 2820 that is attached from the rear side of the unit main body 2810A, and a unit main body 2810A. The LED board 2825 is provided between the unit cover 2820 and has a plurality of LEDs 2825a mounted thereon. The unit body 2810A and unit cover 2820 of the side unit 2800E are made of transparent synthetic resin.

The side unit 2800E also includes a contact surface portion 2830 where the unit body 2810A and the unit cover 2820 are in contact with each other, and a non-contact surface portion 2831 that is provided in a part of the contact surface portion 2830 and does not contact each other. ing.

The unit main body 2810A of the side unit 2800E includes a first component 2811A that is attached from the front to the flat panel board 1110 on which the obstacle nails are installed in the game panel 1100, and a second component that is attached to the first component 2811A from the rear side. It has two component members 2812A, and a support frame portion 2814 that projects rearward in a frame shape along the outer peripheral edge of the unit cover 2820 and whose rear end surface abuts the front end surface of the unit cover 2820. In this embodiment, a second component 2812A is attached to the front side of the first component 2811A. Further, a support frame portion 2814 protrudes from the rear surface of the first component member 2811A.

The first component 2811A of the unit main body 2810A includes a flat base plate 2811a that can come into contact with the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110), and a general prize opening that penetrates through the base plate 2811a and opens to the front. A ball passage 2811e in which the game ball B received in the ball receiving part 2001 (ball receiving part 2812c) flows down along the surface (board surface) of the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110), and a ball passage 2811e toward the rear at the downstream end of the ball passage 2811e. and an open passage outlet (not shown).

The first component 2811A also includes a plurality of positioning protrusions 2811c that protrude rearward from the base plate 2811a, a plurality of mounting holes 2811d that penetrate the base plate 2811a and are used for attaching to the game panel 1100, and a base plate 2811a and a plurality of mounting holes (not shown) for mounting the second component 2812A, and a plurality of mounting holes (not shown) provided on the rear surface for mounting the unit cover 2820. , (see Figure 104).

The base plate 2811a extends along the inner rail 1002 of the front component 1000. The plurality of positioning protrusions 2811c are provided to be spaced apart from each other in the longitudinal direction of the base plate 2811a. The positioning protrusion 2811c is inserted into the positioning hole 1113 provided in the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100. In this embodiment, each positioning protrusion 2811c has the same length. The plurality of attachment holes 2811d are provided in the vicinity of the positioning protrusion 2811c on the base plate 2811a and in the upper part of the base plate 2811a near the center in the left-right direction. These mounting holes 2811d have countersinks formed on the front side, and countersunk mounting screws (not shown) that are screwed into the mounting holes 1114 of the panel plate 1110 are inserted from the front. When attached to the front surface of the panel board 1110, the head of the mounting screw does not protrude further forward than the front surface of the base plate 2811a.

A support frame portion 2814 whose rear end abuts the front end of the unit cover 2820 is provided on the rear side of the first component 2811A. In other words, the first component 2811A includes a support frame portion 2814 that projects rearward in a frame shape along the outer peripheral edge of the unit cover 2820 and whose rear end surface abuts the front end surface of the unit cover 2820. . The support frame portion 2814 is provided on the rear surface of the base plate 2811a. The rear end surface of the support frame section 2814 comes into contact with the front end surface of a peripheral wall section 2820b, which will be described later, of the unit cover 2820 when assembled to the side unit 2800E. In other words, the rear end surface of the support frame section 2814 and the front end surface of the peripheral wall section 2820b constitute the contact surface section 2830.

The second component 2812A includes a plurality of ball receivers 2812c that extend short in the front-rear direction and are open at the top and rear, forming a general winning opening 2001, and the rear ends of the plurality of ball receivers 2812c. It has a flat rear plate 2812e that connects the components, and a plurality of attachment holes (not shown) for attachment to the first component 2811A.

In this embodiment, a transparent decorative sticker 2803 is attached to the front surface of the ball receiving portion 2812c of the second component 2812A and the front surface of the rear plate 2812e.

The unit main body 2810A is constructed by positioning the second component 2812A in front of the first component 2811A, and screwing a mounting screw into the mounting hole of the second component 2812A from the rear through the mounting hole of the first component 2811A. Can be assembled. As a result, a unit main body 2810A is constructed in which the second component 2812A is attached to the first component 2811A from the rear side. In this unit body 2810A, the ball receiving portion 2812c of the second component 2812A protrudes forward from the base plate 2811a of the first component 2811A.

The unit main body 2810A of the side unit 2800E is connected to the tributary part 2801 that communicates with the general prize opening 2001 (ball receiving part 2812c), and the surface of the panel board 1110 in the game panel 1100 (board surface) which merges with the tributary part 2801. and a main stream portion 2802 extending along. The ball passage 2811e is composed of a plurality of tributary sections 2801 and a main stream section 2802.

The tributary portion 2801 extends rearward from a portion in front of the front surface of the panel board 1110 to a portion (thickness of the panel board 1110) behind the front surface of the panel board 1110 and above the main stream portion 2802. .

The main stream portion 2802 extends along the surface of the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100 and lowers to the right from near the left end of the base plate 2811a to near the right end. The length of the main stream portion 2802 is at least twice the diameter of the game ball B (in this embodiment, 8 to 10 times).

In addition, in the assembled state in the unit main body 2810A, in the ball passage 2811e that is open to the front in the first component 2811A, the portion other than the rear of the ball receiving portion 2812c is covered by the rear plate 2812e of the second component 2812A. It is in a closed state, and the game ball B does not spill forward from the ball path 2811e. In other words, the first component 2811A and the second component 2812A constitute a ball passage 2811e. In other words, the ball passage 2811e is provided between the first component 2811A and the second component 2812A.

As shown in FIG. 110, the first component 2811A of this embodiment has a portion other than the base plate 2811a inserted into the opening 1112 of the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100, and the depth is the same as that of the panel board 1110. It is formed to fit within the board thickness of .

The unit cover 2820 of the side unit 2800E is formed in the shape of a shallow container open to the front, and the LED board 2825 is housed inside. This unit cover 2820 includes a flat plate-shaped cover part 2820a, a frame-shaped peripheral wall part 2820b protruding forward from the outer peripheral edge of the cover part 2820a, and a notch part 2820c recessed from the front end in a part of the peripheral wall part 2820b. ,have. Note that the cover portion 2820a may be provided with a plurality of slit holes for ventilation.

Further, the unit cover 2820 protrudes forward from the front surface of the cover portion 2820a to be shorter than the peripheral wall portion 2820b, and has a plurality of boss portions 2820d for attaching the LED board 2825, and passes through the cover portion 2820a and is connected to the unit main body 2810A. It has a plurality of mounting holes (not shown) into which mounting screws for mounting are inserted.

The cover portion 2820a of the unit cover 2820 is formed in a size that covers the LED board 2825 from the rear. The outer shape of the peripheral wall portion 2820b is the same as that of the support frame portion 2814 in the unit main body 2810A. The front end surface of the peripheral wall portion 2820b comes into contact with the rear end surface of the support frame portion 2814 in the unit main body 2810A by assembling it into the side unit 2800E. In other words, the rear end surface of the support frame section 2814 and the front end surface of the peripheral wall section 2820b constitute the contact surface section 2830.

The cutout portions 2820c are provided on the upper side and the lower side of the peripheral wall portion 2820b. When the notch portion 2820c is assembled to the side unit 2800D, a gap can be formed between the front end surface of the peripheral wall portion 2820b and the front end surface of the support frame portion 2814 in the unit main body 2810A. That is, the notch 2820c forms a non-contact surface 2831 that does not contact each other in a part of the contact surface 2830 formed by the rear end surface of the support frame 2814 and the front end surface of the peripheral wall 2820b. This notch 2820c allows the inside of the container-shaped unit cover 2820 to be ventilated, and allows the heat from the LED board 2825 attached inside to be radiated to the outside, thereby preventing heat from being trapped in the unit cover 2820. do not have.

The LED board 2825 of the side unit 2800E is attached inside the unit cover 2820 with its rear surface in contact with the front end of the boss portion 2820d of the unit cover 2820. The plurality of LEDs 2825a mounted on the LED board 2825 are full-color LEDs, and by assembling them in the side unit 2800E, the side unit 2800E can be decorated with various luminous colors.

In this side unit 2800E, with the LED board 2825 attached to the boss portion 2820d inside the unit cover 2820, the front end surface of the peripheral wall portion 2820b of the unit cover 2820 is attached to the rear end surface of the support frame portion 2814 in the unit main body 2810A. It can be assembled by bringing them into contact (contact) and screwing a mounting screw into the mounting hole of the first component 2811A of the unit main body 2810A through the mounting hole of the unit cover 2820 from the rear of the unit cover 2820 and tightening.

To attach the side unit 2800E to the game panel 1100, first, from the front of the panel plate 1110 in the game panel 1100, the base plate 2811a of the first component 2811A closes the opening 1112 passing through the panel plate 1110. Then, the base plate 2811a is brought into contact with the front surface of the panel board 1110. At this time, the two positioning protrusions 2811c of the first component 2811A are inserted into the positioning holes 1113 of the panel board 1110. In this state, the attachment hole 2811d of the first component 2811A is aligned with the attachment hole 1114 of the panel board 1110.

Then, the side unit 2800E is attached to the front surface of the panel board 1110 by screwing a mounting screw into the mounting hole 1114 of the panel board 1110 from the front through the mounting hole 2811d of the first component 2811A and tightening it. At this time, since the mounting hole 2811d of the first component 2811A is provided near the positioning protrusion 2811c, the mounting screw cannot be screwed into the mounting hole 1114 of the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100 through the mounting hole 2811d. Therefore, the positioning protrusion 2811c can be strongly pressed against the panel plate 1110 side and inserted into the positioning hole 1113 reliably, and lifting up due to incomplete insertion of the positioning protrusion 2811c can be prevented.

In the side unit 2800E, the first component 2811A is provided with a ball passage 2811e through which the game ball B flows down along the surface of the panel board 1110, and the cross section of the ball passage 2811e is U-shaped. Therefore, the presence of the ball passage 2811e increases the rigidity of the first component 2811A. On the other hand, the second component 2812A has a plurality of ball receiving parts 2812c protruding forward from a flat rear plate 2812e, so it is similar to a conventional side unit and has low rigidity. By assembling the first component member 2811A into the unit main body 2810A, the rigidity can be increased more than that of the conventional side unit. Therefore, when disassembling the pachinko machine 1 for recycling or the like, when the mounting screws that attach the side unit 2800E to the panel board 1110 are removed and the side unit 2800E is pulled forward, the rigidity of the side unit 2800E is increased. , the side unit 2800E does not bend. As a result, the positioning protrusion 2811c of the side unit 2800E (first component 2811A) does not tilt with respect to the positioning hole 1113 of the panel board 1110, and the side unit 2800E can be easily removed from the gaming panel 1100 (panel board 1110). It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 which can be removed and which can reduce disassembly work when sorting.

When the side unit 2800E is attached to the front surface of the panel board 1110 (with the game board 5 assembled), the first component 2811A of the unit body 2810A is within the thickness of the panel board 1110 within the opening 1112 of the panel board 1110. , and is located forward of the rear surface of the panel board 1110.

Further, in the side unit 2800E of this embodiment, when assembled to the game board 5, the unit cover 2820 protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the panel board 1110. At this time, since the cutout portions 2820c (non-contact surface portions 2831) are provided on the upper and lower sides, the heat from the LED board 2825 is discharged upward by the upper cutout portion 2820c, while the external air is discharged from the lower cutout portion 2820c. can be taken inside. In addition, when assembled to the game board 5, the outer periphery of the portion of the unit main body 2810A of the side unit 2800E that is inserted into the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110, that is, the outer periphery of the ball passage 2811e of the first component 2811A. A gap is provided between the opening 1112 and the inner periphery of the opening 1112. These allow the heat from the LED board 2825 to be easily released to the outside through the cutout portion 2820c (non-contact surface portion 2831), allowing for efficient heat dissipation.

Further, in the side unit 2800E of this embodiment, when the LED board 2825 is attached to the unit cover 2820, the LED board 2825 is located behind the notch 2820c (non-contact surface part 2831). In other words, the LED board 2825 is provided so as not to overlap the cutout portion 2820c (non-contact surface portion 2831) in plan view. Thereby, even if dirt or dust enters into the unit cover 2820 through the notch 2820c, it can be made difficult to hit the LED board 2825, and the influence of the dust or dust can be prevented as much as possible. Further, since the notch 2820c is also provided on the lower side of the unit cover 2820, dust and dirt that have entered through the upper notch 2820c can be discharged downward from the lower notch 2820c.

Furthermore, when the side unit 2800E of this embodiment is assembled to the game board 5, the notch 2820c of the unit cover 2820 is within the thickness of the panel board 1110 within the opening 1112 of the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100. 2820c, it is difficult for dust and dust to enter the unit cover 2820 from above through the notch 2820c.

In addition, when the side unit 2800E of this embodiment is assembled to the game board 5, there is a gap between the peripheral wall portion 2820b of the unit cover 2820 and the inner peripheral surface of the opening 1112 of the panel board 1110 in the game panel 1100. At the same time, the opening 1112 is closed from the front by the base plate 2811a of the first component 2811. As a result, the heat from the LED board 2825 inside the unit cover 2820 can be radiated toward the rear of the panel board 1110 through the gap between the notch 2820c and the inner peripheral surface of the opening 1112, and the panel board It is possible to prevent foreign matter such as dust from entering the play area 5a on the front side of the panel board 1110 through the opening 1112 from the rear side of the panel board 1110.

Furthermore, when the side unit 2800E is assembled to the game board 5, as shown in FIG. It protrudes forward from the front of the. Here, the ball passage 2811e protrudes forward by the thickness of the base plate 2811a of the first component 2811A. As a result, the amount of protrusion of the unit cover 2820 (LED board 2825) that protrudes backward from the rear surface of the panel board 1110 can be further reduced, so that a sufficient space can be secured behind the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110). It is possible to provide a lower back effect unit 3500 (lower back movable decorative body 3510) of a desired size.

Note that the amount of rearward protrusion from the panel board 1110 is set to 1/2 or less of the diameter D of the game ball B, similar to the side unit 2800A in FIG. 106.

By the way, when the game panel 1100 is formed by injection molding, the thickness of the part of the game area 5a where the obstacle nails are planted is determined by whether the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110) is made of wooden plywood or a resin board is cut. Therefore, the parts of the unit body 2810A along the surface of the panel plate 1110 in the ball passage 2811e and the unit cover 2820 attached to the rear side of the unit body 2810A are There is a possibility that it will not fit within the board thickness and will protrude rearward beyond the rear surface of the panel board 1110. If the amount of rearward protrusion of the panel board 1110 in the side unit 2800E is larger than the rear surface, it becomes impossible to secure a sufficient rear space. In contrast, in this embodiment, in the side unit 2800E, the amount of protrusion from the rear surface of the panel board 1110 is set to 1/2 or less of the diameter D of the game ball B, so that a sufficient rear space is secured. It is possible to provide a lower back effect unit 3500 (lower back movable decorative body 3510) of a desired size.

In the side unit 2800E, when the game ball B is received in the general winning hole 2001, it is guided to the rear ball passage 2811e by the ball receiving part 2812c forming the general winning hole 2001, and the ball B is guided to the rear ball passage 2811e by the ball passage 2811e. After flowing down along the surface of the panel board 1110 while passing through the thickness, it is delivered to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 provided at the rear from a passage exit (not shown). The game ball B delivered to the back ball guiding unit 3100 is discharged downward after being detected by the general winning hole sensor 3001.

Although detailed illustrations of the side unit 2800E of this embodiment are omitted, the passage outlet (not shown) of the first component 2811A in the unit main body 2810A is provided below the lower back movable decorative body 3510 in the standby position. . In other words, the general winning hole sensor 3001 that detects the game ball B received in the general winning hole 2001 (ball receiving part 2812c) is provided below the lower back movable decorative body 3510 in the standby position. Therefore, the side unit 2800E, the general winning hole sensor 3001, etc. do not get in the way of the lower back movable decorative body 3510.

According to the side unit 2800E of this embodiment, the same effects as the side unit 2800 and the like described above can be achieved.

In addition, although the side unit 2800E described above is shown in which the notch 2820c (non-contact surface part 2831) is provided in the peripheral wall part 2820b of the unit cover 2820, the invention is not limited to this, and the peripheral wall part of the unit cover 2820 Instead of providing the notch 2820c in the unit body 2820b, a notch (non-contact surface part 2831) cut out from the rear end to the front may be provided in the support frame part 2814 of the unit main body 2810A. Alternatively, a notch (non-contact surface) may be provided in both the peripheral wall 2820b of the unit cover 2820 and the support frame 2814 of the unit main body 2810A.

Further, in the side unit 2800E described above, the unit body 2810A is provided with a frame-shaped support frame portion 2814 that protrudes rearward, and the rear end surface is used as the contact surface portion 2830, but the unit body 2810A is not limited to this. Instead of providing the support frame portion 2814 on the main body 2810A, the front end of the unit cover 2820 (peripheral wall portion 2820b) may be brought into contact with the rear surface of the unit main body 2810A, and the abutting portion may be a contact surface portion 2830. As a result, since the support frame portion 2814 that protrudes rearward is not provided, the amount of protrusion rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 in the side unit 2800E can be reduced, and the empty space behind the panel plate 1110 can be further reduced. It becomes possible to secure widely.

Further, in the side unit 2800E described above, the LED board 2825 is attached to the unit cover 2820, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be attached to the side.

Further, in the side unit 2800E described above, a diffusion lens portion made of a plurality of concave and convex portions that diffuses the light from the LED 2825a may be provided in front of the LED board 2825. This diffusion lens portion may be provided on the rear surface of the unit main body 2810A (first component member 2811A), or may be provided on a separate member from the unit main body 2810A.

Furthermore, in the side unit 2800E, the ball passage 2811e is made up of a plurality of tributary sections 2801 communicating with the respective ball receiving sections 2812c, and a main stream section 2802 where the plurality of tributary sections 2801 merge. Although the embodiment shown in FIG.

Further, in the above embodiment, the game panel 1100 includes a panel board 1110 made of transparent resin, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the game panel 1100 may be made of wood. As a result, by making the game panel 1100 made of wood, the board thickness becomes thicker than that made of resin, so it is possible to make more effective use of the board thickness of the game panel 1100. By the way, if the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110) is transparent, light from the LED 2825a of the LED board 2825 enters into the panel board 1110 from the inner peripheral surface of the opening 1112 of the panel board 1110, and 1110, and the amount of light irradiated forward is reduced, which may weaken the presentation effect of the light emission. On the other hand, by making the game panel 1100 wooden (opaque), the light from the LED 2825a of the LED board 2825 does not enter the inside of the game panel 1100 from the inner peripheral surface of the opening 1112, and the opening Since the light can be reflected by the inner circumferential surface of the light source 1112, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the amount of light irradiated forward, and it is possible to make it easy to fully exhibit the effect of light emission.

[12-2f. Modification example 6 of side unit]
Next, a side unit 2800F having a further different form from the above will be described with reference mainly to FIG. 111 and the like. FIG. 111(a) is an explanatory view showing a side unit of a further different form together with a game panel in cross section, and FIG. 111(b) is an explanatory view showing (a) in longitudinal cross section. Here, the same components as those of the side unit 2800D described above will be described with the same reference numerals.

The side unit 2800F extends along the inner rail 1002 to the left of the starting port unit 2100 in the game area 5a where the game ball B is driven by the player operating the handle 160, and the side unit 2800F extends along the inner rail 1002 to the left of the starting port unit 2100. It is equipped with a plurality (2 to 4) of general prize winning holes 2001 that are always open to receive prize money.

The side unit 2800F includes a unit main body 2810A that is attached from the front to the flat panel board 1110 on which the obstacle nails are planted in the game panel 1100, a unit cover 2820 that is attached from the rear side of the unit main body 2810A, and a unit main body 2810A. The LED board 2825 is provided between the unit cover 2820 and has a plurality of LEDs 2825a mounted thereon. The unit body 2810A and unit cover 2820 of the side unit 2800F are made of transparent synthetic resin.

Furthermore, the side unit 2800F includes a contact surface portion 2830 where the unit main body 2810A and the unit cover 2820 are in contact with each other, and a non-contact surface portion 2831 that is provided in a part of the contact surface portion 2830 and is not in contact with each other. ing.

The unit main body 2810A of the side unit 2800F includes a first component 2811A that is attached from the front to the flat panel board 1110 in which the obstacle nails are installed in the game panel 1100, and a second component that is attached to the first component 2811A from the rear side. It has two component members 2812A, and a support frame portion 2814 that projects rearward in a frame shape along the outer peripheral edge of the unit cover 2820 and whose rear end surface abuts the front end surface of the unit cover 2820. In this embodiment, a second component 2812A is attached to the front side of the first component 2811A. Further, a support frame portion 2814 protrudes from the rear surface of the first component member 2811A.

The first component 2811A of the unit main body 2810A includes a flat base plate 2811a that can come into contact with the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110), and a general prize opening that penetrates through the base plate 2811a and opens to the front. A ball passage 2811e in which the game ball B received in the ball receiving part 2001 (ball receiving part 2812c) flows down along the surface (board surface) of the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110), and a ball passage 2811e toward the rear at the downstream end of the ball passage 2811e. and an open passage outlet (not shown).

The first component 2811A also includes a plurality of positioning protrusions 2811c that protrude rearward from the base plate 2811a, a plurality of mounting holes 2811d that penetrate the base plate 2811a and are used for attaching to the game panel 1100, and a base plate 2811a and a plurality of mounting holes (not shown) for mounting the second component 2812A, and a plurality of mounting holes (not shown) provided on the rear surface for mounting the unit cover 2820. , (see Figure 104).

The base plate 2811a extends along the inner rail 1002 of the front component 1000. Further, in the side unit 2800F, the ball passage 2811e of the first component 2811A is provided below the vertical center of the base plate 2811a.

The plurality of positioning protrusions 2811c are provided to be spaced apart from each other in the longitudinal direction of the base plate 2811a. The positioning protrusion 2811c is inserted into the positioning hole 1113 provided in the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100. In this embodiment, each positioning protrusion 2811c has the same length. The plurality of attachment holes 2811d are provided in the vicinity of the positioning protrusion 2811c on the base plate 2811a and in the upper part of the base plate 2811a near the center in the left-right direction. These mounting holes 2811d have countersinks formed on the front side, and countersunk mounting screws (not shown) that are screwed into the mounting holes 1114 of the panel plate 1110 are inserted from the front. When attached to the front surface of the panel board 1110, the head of the mounting screw does not protrude further forward than the front surface of the base plate 2811a.

A support frame portion 2814 whose rear end abuts the front end of the unit cover 2820 is provided on the rear side of the first component 2811A. In other words, the first component 2811A includes a support frame portion 2814 that projects rearward in a frame shape along the outer peripheral edge of the unit cover 2820 and whose rear end surface abuts the front end surface of the unit cover 2820. . The support frame portion 2814 is provided on the rear surface of the base plate 2811a above the ball passage 2811e. The rear end surface of the support frame section 2814 comes into contact with the front end surface of a peripheral wall section 2820b, which will be described later, of the unit cover 2820 when assembled to the side unit 2800F. In other words, the rear end surface of the support frame section 2814 and the front end surface of the peripheral wall section 2820b constitute the contact surface section 2830.

The second component 2812A has a plurality of ball receivers 2812c that extend short in the front-rear direction and are open at the upper and lower sides and form the general winning opening 2001, and the front ends of the plurality of ball receivers 2812c are connected to each other. A connecting flat plate-shaped front plate 2812d and a ball which is provided below the ball receiving part 2812c after the front plate 2812d and is open to the rear, through which game balls B received in the ball receiving part 2812c flow. It has a passage 2812f and a plurality of attachment holes (not shown) for attachment to the first component 2811A.

In this embodiment, a transparent decorative sticker 2803 is attached to the front surface of the front plate 2812d of the second component 2812A.

The unit main body 2810A is constructed by positioning the second component 2812A in front of the first component 2811A, and screwing a mounting screw into the mounting hole of the second component 2812A from the rear through the mounting hole of the first component 2811A. Can be assembled. As a result, a unit main body 2810A is constructed in which the second component 2812A is attached to the first component 2811A from the rear side. In this unit body 2810A, the ball receiving portion 2812c of the second component 2812A protrudes forward from the base plate 2811a of the first component 2811A.

The unit main body 2810A of the side unit 2800F merges with the tributary part 2801 (portion indicated by light shading in FIG. 111) that communicates with the general prize opening 2001 (ball receiving part 2812c) and the game panel. 1100, a main stream portion 2802 (portion shown by dark shading in FIG. 111) extending along the surface (plate surface) of the panel board 1110. The ball passage 2811e and the ball passage 2812f are composed of a plurality of tributary portions 2801 and a main stream portion 2802.

When viewed from the front, the tributary portion 2801 extends downward in front of the panel plate 1110 at the ball receiving portion 2812c at the center in the left-right direction and the ball receiving portion 2812c at the left end, and at the ball receiving portion 2812c at the right end, the ball receiving portion 2812c at the right end extends downward. It extends rearward from a portion in front of the plate 1110 to a portion within the thickness of the panel plate 1110.

The main stream portion 2802 extends from a portion below the ball receiving portion 2812c at the left end to a portion below the ball receiving portion 2812c at the center in the left-right direction in front of the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100. It extends along the horizontal direction, bends backward at the lower part of the ball receiving part 2812c at the center in the left-right direction, and extends into the thickness of the panel plate 1110. It extends along the plate surface of 1110 to a region behind the ball receiving portion 2812c at the right end. The length of the main stream portion 2802 is at least twice the diameter of the game ball B (in this embodiment, 8 to 15 times).

When assembled into the unit main body 2810A, the ball passage 2811e, which is open to the front in the first component 2811A, is closed by the ball passage 2812f and the rear surface of the second component 2812A. Further, the ball passage 2812f that is open to the rear in the second component 2812A is closed by the base plate 2811a and the ball passage 2811e of the first component 2811A. Thereby, the game ball B will not spill from the ball path 2811e and the ball path 2812f. That is, the first component 2811A and the second component 2812A constitute a ball passage 2811e and a ball passage 2812f. In other words, a ball passage 2811e and a ball passage 2812f are provided between the first component 2811A and the second component 2812A.

As shown in FIG. 111, the first component 2811A of this embodiment has a portion other than the base plate 2811a inserted into the opening 1112 of the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100, and the depth is the same as that of the panel board 1110. It is formed to fit within the board thickness of .

The unit cover 2820 of the side unit 2800F is formed in the shape of a shallow container open to the front, and the LED board 2825 is housed inside. This unit cover 2820 includes a flat plate-shaped cover part 2820a, a frame-shaped peripheral wall part 2820b protruding forward from the outer peripheral edge of the cover part 2820a, and a notch part 2820c recessed from the front end in a part of the peripheral wall part 2820b. ,have. Note that the cover portion 2820a may be provided with a plurality of slit holes for ventilation.

Further, the unit cover 2820 protrudes forward from the front surface of the cover portion 2820a to be shorter than the peripheral wall portion 2820b, and has a plurality of boss portions 2820d for attaching the LED board 2825, and passes through the cover portion 2820a and is connected to the unit main body 2810A. It has a plurality of mounting holes (not shown) into which mounting screws for mounting are inserted.

The cover portion 2820a of the unit cover 2820 is formed in a size that covers the LED board 2825 from the rear. The outer shape of the peripheral wall portion 2820b is the same as that of the support frame portion 2814 in the unit main body 2810A. The front end surface of the peripheral wall portion 2820b comes into contact with the rear end surface of the support frame portion 2814 in the unit body 2810A when assembled to the side unit 2800F. In other words, the rear end surface of the support frame section 2814 and the front end surface of the peripheral wall section 2820b constitute the contact surface section 2830.

The cutout portions 2820c are provided on the upper side and the lower side of the peripheral wall portion 2820b. When the notch portion 2820c is assembled to the side unit 2800D, a gap can be formed between the front end surface of the peripheral wall portion 2820b and the front end surface of the support frame portion 2814 in the unit main body 2810A. That is, the notch 2820c forms a non-contact surface 2831 that does not contact each other in a part of the contact surface 2830 formed by the rear end surface of the support frame 2814 and the front end surface of the peripheral wall 2820b. This notch 2820c allows the inside of the container-shaped unit cover 2820 to be ventilated, and allows the heat from the LED board 2825 attached inside to be radiated to the outside, thereby preventing heat from being trapped in the unit cover 2820. do not have.

The LED board 2825 of the side unit 2800F is attached inside the unit cover 2820 with its rear surface in contact with the front end of the boss portion 2820d of the unit cover 2820. The plurality of LEDs 2825a mounted on the LED board 2825 are full-color LEDs, and by assembling them on the side unit 2800F, the side unit 2800F can be decorated with various luminous colors.

In this side unit 2800F, with the LED board 2825 attached to the boss portion 2820d inside the unit cover 2820, the front end surface of the peripheral wall portion 2820b of the unit cover 2820 is attached to the rear end surface of the support frame portion 2814 in the unit main body 2810A. It can be assembled by bringing them into contact (contact) and screwing a mounting screw into the mounting hole of the first component 2811A of the unit main body 2810A through the mounting hole of the unit cover 2820 from the rear of the unit cover 2820 and tightening.

To attach the side unit 2800F to the game panel 1100, first, from the front of the panel board 1110 in the game panel 1100, the base plate 2811a of the first component 2811A closes the opening 1112 passing through the panel board 1110. Then, the base plate 2811a is brought into contact with the front surface of the panel board 1110. At this time, the two positioning protrusions 2811c of the first component 2811A are inserted into the positioning holes 1113 of the panel board 1110. In this state, the attachment hole 2811d of the first component 2811A is aligned with the attachment hole 1114 of the panel board 1110.

Then, the side unit 2800F is attached to the front surface of the panel board 1110 by screwing a mounting screw into the mounting hole 1114 of the panel board 1110 from the front through the mounting hole 2811d of the first component 2811A and tightening it. At this time, since the mounting hole 2811d of the first component 2811A is provided near the positioning protrusion 2811c, the mounting screw cannot be screwed into the mounting hole 1114 of the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100 through the mounting hole 2811d. Therefore, the positioning protrusion 2811c can be strongly pressed against the panel plate 1110 side and inserted into the positioning hole 1113 reliably, and lifting up due to incomplete insertion of the positioning protrusion 2811c can be prevented.

In the side unit 2800F, the first component 2811A is provided with a ball passage 2811e through which the game ball B flows down along the surface of the panel board 1110, and the cross section of the ball passage 2811e is U-shaped. Therefore, the presence of the ball passage 2811e increases the rigidity of the first component 2811A. On the other hand, the second component 2812A is also provided with a ball passage 2812f that allows the game ball B to flow down along the surface of the panel board 1110, and the cross section of the ball passage 2812f is U-shaped. The presence of the ball passage 2812f increases the rigidity of the second component 2812A. Thereby, since the side unit 2800F is constructed by combining the first component 2811A and the second component 2812A, which have increased rigidity, the rigidity can be increased compared to the conventional side unit. Therefore, when disassembling the pachinko machine 1 for recycling or the like, when the mounting screws that attach the side unit 2800F to the panel board 1110 are removed and the side unit 2800F is pulled forward, the rigidity of the side unit 2800F is increased. , the side unit 2800F does not bend. For this reason, the positioning protrusion 2811c of the side unit 2800F (first component 2811A) does not tilt with respect to the positioning hole 1113 of the panel board 1110, and the side unit 2800F does not tilt relative to the positioning hole 1113 of the panel board 1110. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can be easily removed and that can reduce disassembly work when sorting.

When the side unit 2800F is attached to the front of the panel board 1110 (the game board 5 is assembled), the ball passage 2811e of the first component 2811A in the unit main body 2810A and the unit cover 2820 (LED board 2825) are attached to the panel board 1110. It is located within the thickness of the panel board 1110 within the opening 1112 of the panel board 1110, and is located forward of the rear surface of the panel board 1110. In other words, when assembled on the game board 5, the side unit 2800 does not protrude rearward beyond the rear surface of the panel board 1110, making it possible to secure a wide space behind the panel board 1110.

In addition, in the side unit 2800F of this embodiment, since the cutout portions 2820c (non-contact surface portions 2831) of the unit cover 2820 are provided on the upper and lower sides, the upper cutout portions 2820c allow heat from the LED board 2825 to be discharged upward. , external air can be taken into the interior from the lower notch 2820c. In addition, when assembled to the game board 5, the outer periphery of the portion of the unit main body 2810A of the side unit 2800F that is inserted into the opening 1112 of the panel board 1110, that is, the outer periphery of the support frame portion 2814 of the first component 2811A. A gap is provided between the opening 1112 and the inner periphery of the opening 1112. These allow the heat from the LED board 2825 to be easily released to the outside through the cutout portion 2820c (non-contact surface portion 2831), allowing for efficient heat dissipation.

Further, in the side unit 2800F of this embodiment, when the LED board 2825 is attached to the unit cover 2820, the LED board 2825 is located behind the notch 2820c (non-contact surface part 2831). In other words, the LED board 2825 is provided so as not to overlap the cutout portion 2820c (non-contact surface portion 2831) in plan view. Thereby, even if dirt or dust enters into the unit cover 2820 through the notch 2820c, it can be made difficult to hit the LED board 2825, and the influence of the dust or dust can be prevented as much as possible. Further, since the notch 2820c is also provided on the lower side of the unit cover 2820, dust and dirt that have entered through the upper notch 2820c can be discharged downward from the lower notch 2820c.

Furthermore, when the side unit 2800F of this embodiment is assembled to the game board 5, the notch 2820c of the unit cover 2820 is within the thickness of the panel board 1110 within the opening 1112 of the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100. 2820c, it is difficult for dust and dust to enter the unit cover 2820 from above through the notch 2820c.

In addition, when the side unit 2800F of this embodiment is assembled to the game board 5, there is a gap between the peripheral wall portion 2820b of the unit cover 2820 and the inner peripheral surface of the opening 1112 of the panel board 1110 in the game panel 1100. At the same time, the opening 1112 is closed from the front by the base plate 2811a of the first component 2811. As a result, the heat from the LED board 2825 inside the unit cover 2820 can be radiated toward the rear of the panel board 1110 through the gap between the notch 2820c and the inner peripheral surface of the opening 1112, and the panel board It is possible to prevent foreign matter such as dust from entering the play area 5a on the front side of the panel board 1110 through the opening 1112 from the rear side of the panel board 1110.

Furthermore, when the side unit 2800F is assembled to the game board 5, as shown in FIG. The passage 2812f is provided in front of the front surface of the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100. As a result, the unit cover 2820 (LED board 2825) provided on the rear side of the base plate 2811a in the first component 2811A can be accommodated within the thickness of the panel plate 1110 within the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the panel plate 1110 from protruding further backward than the rear surface of the panel plate 1110. Therefore, a sufficient space can be secured behind the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110) in the side unit 2800F, and the lower back production unit 3500 (lower back movable decorative body 3510) of a desired size can be provided. .

In the side unit 2800F, when the game ball B is received in the general winning opening 2001, it flows down to the ball passage 2812f below by the ball receiving part 2812c forming the general winning opening 2001, and is sent to the front surface of the panel board 1110 by the ball passage 2812f. It flows down along the surface of the panel board 1110 in front of the panel board 1110, bends backward in the middle in a crank shape, flows down along the surface of the panel board 1110 within the thickness of the panel board 1110, and then flows through a passage (not shown). The ball is delivered from the exit to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 provided at the rear. The game ball B delivered to the back ball guiding unit 3100 is discharged downward after being detected by the general winning hole sensor 3001. On the other hand, if the game ball B flowing down toward the side unit 2800F is not accepted into the general prize opening 2001 (ball receiving part 2812c) of the side unit 2800F, the game ball B is It flows down to the outlet 1008 through the space between the two, and is discharged to the rear and below the game panel 1100 through the outlet 1008.

In the side unit 2800F of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 111(b), the passage outlet (not shown) of the first component 2811A in the unit main body 2810A is provided below the back lower movable decorative body 3510 in the standby position. ing. In other words, the general winning hole sensor 3001 that detects the game ball B received in the general winning hole 2001 (ball receiving part 2812c) is provided below the lower back movable decorative body 3510 in the standby position. Therefore, the side unit 2800F, the general winning hole sensor 3001, etc. do not get in the way of the lower back movable decorative body 3510.

According to the side unit 2800F of this embodiment, the same effects as the side unit 2800 and the like described above can be achieved.

In addition, although the side unit 2800F described above is shown in which the notch 2820c (non-contact surface part 2831) is provided in the peripheral wall part 2820b of the unit cover 2820, the invention is not limited to this, and the peripheral wall part of the unit cover 2820 Instead of providing the notch 2820c in the unit body 2820b, a notch (non-contact surface part 2831) cut out from the rear end to the front may be provided in the support frame part 2814 of the unit main body 2810A. Alternatively, a notch (non-contact surface) may be provided in both the peripheral wall 2820b of the unit cover 2820 and the support frame 2814 of the unit main body 2810A.

Furthermore, in the side unit 2800F described above, the unit main body 2810A is provided with a frame-shaped support frame portion 2814 that protrudes rearward, and the rear end surface is the contact surface portion 2830. However, the unit body 2810A is not limited to this. Instead of providing the support frame portion 2814 on the main body 2810A, the front end of the unit cover 2820 (peripheral wall portion 2820b) may be brought into contact with the rear surface of the unit main body 2810A, and the abutting portion may be a contact surface portion 2830. Thereby, since the support frame portion 2814 that protrudes rearward is not provided, the amount of rearward protrusion of the side unit 2800F can be reduced.

Further, in the side unit 2800F described above, the LED board 2825 is attached to the unit cover 2820, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be attached to the side.

Further, in the side unit 2800F described above, a diffusion lens portion made of a plurality of concave and convex portions that diffuses the light from the LED 2825a may be provided in front of the LED board 2825. This diffusion lens portion may be provided on the rear surface of the unit main body 2810A (first component member 2811A), or may be provided on a separate member from the unit main body 2810A.

Furthermore, in the side unit 2800F, the ball passage 2811e is composed of a plurality of tributary sections 2801 that communicate with the respective ball receiving sections 2812c, and a main stream section 2802 where the plurality of tributary sections 2801 merge. Although the embodiment shown in FIG.

Further, in the above embodiment, the game panel 1100 includes a panel board 1110 made of transparent resin, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the game panel 1100 may be made of wood. As a result, by making the game panel 1100 made of wood, the board thickness becomes thicker than that made of resin, so it is possible to make more effective use of the board thickness of the game panel 1100. By the way, if the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110) is transparent, light from the LED 2825a of the LED board 2825 enters into the panel board 1110 from the inner peripheral surface of the opening 1112 of the panel board 1110, and 1110, and the amount of light irradiated forward is reduced, which may weaken the presentation effect of the light emission. On the other hand, by making the game panel 1100 wooden (opaque), the light from the LED 2825a of the LED board 2825 does not enter the inside of the game panel 1100 from the inner peripheral surface of the opening 1112, and the opening Since the light can be reflected by the inner circumferential surface of the light source 1112, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the amount of light irradiated forward, and it is possible to make it easy to fully exhibit the effect of light emission.

[12-3. Side unit, etc. of third embodiment]
Next, a side unit 2800G of the third embodiment will be described with reference mainly to FIGS. 112, 114, and the like. FIG. 112(a) is a front view showing the main parts of the game board in which the side unit etc. of the third embodiment are provided, and FIG. 112(b) is an explanatory view showing an enlarged view of the out port in FIG. 112(a). (c) is an explanatory diagram showing a vertical section of (b). FIG. 113(a) is an explanatory diagram showing an enlarged view of the exit opening of the game board in which a side unit having a finger hook having a different form from that shown in FIG. 112 is provided, and FIG. FIG. FIG. 114 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing a panel board of a game panel in which an opening to which a side unit is attached and an outlet are continuously connected. Here, the same components as above will be described with the same reference numerals.

The side unit 2800G of the third embodiment extends along the inner rail 1002 to the left of the starting port unit 2100 in the game area 5a where the game ball B is driven by the player operating the handle 160. and is attached to the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110) from the front. The side unit 2800G is equipped with three general winning holes 2001 that are always open to receive game balls B.

In this embodiment, the game panel 1100 has an opening area 1101 passing through the panel board 1110 through which the game ball B can flow from the front side to the rear side of the panel board 1110. This opening area 1101 includes a normal opening area 1102 through which game balls B accepted into the general prize opening 2001 of the side unit 2800G can be distributed, and a specific opening area through which game balls B not accepted into the general winning opening 2001 can be distributed. 1103. The normal opening area 1102 is an opening 1112 where the side unit 2800G is attached, and the specific opening area 1103 is the outlet 1008. This outlet 1008 is formed in the panel plate 1110 in the shape of a notch that is open downward.

In the embodiments shown in FIG. 112 and FIG. 113, which will be described later, a normal opening area 1102 and a specific opening area 1103 that constitute an opening area 1101 are independent without being connected to each other. That is, the specific opening area 1103 is formed on the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100 separately from the normal opening area 1102. In other words, the out port 1008 is constituted by a specific opening area 1103 formed in the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100, separate from the normal opening area 1102 into which the side unit 2800G is fitted. As a result, in the panel board 1110, it is possible to reduce the width of the part that is opened outward from the outer peripheral surface in a notch shape, so that the strength of the panel board 1110 is reduced by forming the opening area 1101. can be suppressed.

This side unit 2800G has a finger hook portion 2816 whose outer edge partially overlaps the outlet 1008 (specific opening area 1103) passing through the panel plate 1110 when attached to the panel plate 1110. In other words, the side unit 2800G is attached to the panel board 1110 so that a part of the outer edge overlaps the outlet 1008 (specific opening area 1103).

Since the side unit 2800G is provided with a finger hook 2816, when disassembling the pachinko machine 1 for recycling or the like, there is no need to place a finger or a By inserting a tool or the like, the side unit 2800G can be pulled forward by hooking the finger or the like on the finger hook portion 2816. Thereby, the side unit 2800G can be easily removed from the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110), and the disassembly work when sorting can be reduced.

To further explain the side unit 2800G of this embodiment, the side unit 2800G, like the side unit 2800 shown in FIG. It is composed of a first component member 2811 that is attached, and a second component member 2812 that is attached to the first component member 2811 from the rear side. In the side unit 2800 of this embodiment, a second component member 2812 is attached to the rear side of a first component member 2811.

The first component 2811 of the side unit 2800G includes a flat base plate 2811a that can come into contact with the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110), and a base plate 2811a that projects forward from the base plate 2811a and has an open upper and rear side. It has a plurality of ball receiving parts 2811b forming a general winning hole 2001.

The base plate 2811a extends along the inner rail 1002 of the front component 1000. As shown in FIG. 112, the base plate 2811a of this embodiment has a right end extending to the right beyond the ball receiving portion 2811b at the right end so as to approach the starting port unit 2100. This base plate 2811a is provided so that a part of its outer edge overlaps with the outlet 1008 (specific opening area 1103). In other words, when attached to the panel board 1110, a part of the outer edge of the base plate 2811a is formed to protrude to the front of the outlet 1008 so as to overlap with the outlet 1008 (specific opening area 1103) when viewed from the front. ing. In this embodiment, a portion of the base plate 2811a that protrudes forward of the outlet 1008 is a finger hook portion 2816.

The outer edge of the base plate 2811a is sloped so that the front surface moves rearward toward the outer edge end. Therefore, the portion of the outlet 1008 on the outer edge of the base plate 2811a, that is, the front end surface of the finger hook 2816 is inclined toward the outlet 1008.

The three ball receiving portions 2811b are provided so as to be spaced apart from each other in the left and right directions, and the ball receiving portion 2811b on the right side is located further downward. The left end ball receiving portion 2811b has a front end surface parallel to the base plate 2811a up to the lower end. The remaining (center and right end) ball receiving portions 2811b are inclined so that the front end surface moves rearward toward the lower end.

In addition, the first component 2811 has two positioning protrusions 2811c that protrude rearward from the base plate 2811a, and a plurality of (three in this case) attachment points that penetrate the base plate 2811a and are attached to the game panel 1100. It has a hole 2811d and a plurality of mounting holes (not shown) provided on the rear end surface of the ball receiving portion 2811b (base plate 2811a) for mounting the second component 2812.

The two positioning protrusions 2811c are provided to be spaced apart from each other in the longitudinal direction of the base plate 2811a. Here, two positioning protrusions 2811c are provided at a location close to the outlet 1008 and a location far from the outlet 1008. The positioning protrusion 2811c is inserted into the positioning hole 1113 provided in the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100. In this embodiment, the two positioning protrusions 2811c have the same length.

The three attachment holes 2811d are provided in the vicinity of the positioning protrusion 2811c on the base plate 2811a and in the upper part of the base plate 2811a near the center in the left-right direction. These mounting holes 2811d have countersinks formed on the front side, and countersunk mounting screws (not shown) that are screwed into the mounting holes 1114 of the panel plate 1110 are inserted from the front. When attached to the front surface of the panel board 1110, the head of the mounting screw does not protrude further forward than the front surface of the base plate 2811a.

The mounting hole is into which a mounting screw inserted into a mounting hole (not shown) of the second component 2812, which will be described later, is screwed.

The second component 2812 is formed in the shape of a container open to the front, and receives the game ball B received in the general prize opening 2001 (ball receiving part 2811b) on the surface (board) of the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110). A ball passage 2812a that is caused to flow downward along the surface), a passage outlet 2812b that opens rearward at the downstream end of the ball passage 2812a, and a plurality of mounting holes (not shown) for attachment to the first component 2811. ) and has.

The second component 2812 of this embodiment is inserted (fitted) into the opening 1112 (normal opening area 1102) of the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100, and its depth is within the thickness of the panel board 1110. is formed.

The ball passage 2812a of the second component 2812 is formed along the inner rail 1002 of the front component 1000 and becomes lower toward the right along the surface of the panel board 1110. The passage outlet 2812b opens rearward at the right end of the second component 2812, which is the downstream end of the ball passage 2812a.

The attachment hole of the second component 2812 is provided at a location corresponding to the attachment hole of the first component 2811. The second component 2812 is attached to the first component 2811 from the rear by inserting a mounting screw into the mounting hole of the second component 2812 from the rear and screwing it into the mounting hole of the first component 2811. It will be done.

The side unit 2800G of this embodiment has a tributary part 2801 that communicates with the general prize opening 2001 (ball receiving part 2811b), and a surface (board surface) of the panel board 1110 in the game panel 1100 that merges with the tributary part 2801. and a main stream portion 2802 extending along. The ball passage 2812a is composed of a plurality of tributary sections 2801 and a main stream section 2802.

The tributary portion 2801 extends rearward from a portion in front of the front surface of the panel board 1110 to a portion (thickness of the panel board 1110) behind the front surface of the panel board 1110 and above the main stream portion 2802. .

The main stream portion 2802 extends along the surface of the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100 and lowers to the right from near the left end of the base plate 2811a to near the right end. The length of the main stream portion 2802 is at least twice the diameter of the game ball B (in this embodiment, 8 to 10 times).

In the side unit 2800G of this embodiment, a second component 2812 is positioned behind the first component 2811, and a mounting screw is passed through the mounting hole of the second component 2812 from the rear of the second component 2812 to the first component. It can be assembled by screwing it into the mounting hole of 2811. As a result, a side unit 2800G is constructed in which the second component 2812 is attached to the first component 2811 from the rear side.

The ball passage 2812a of the second component 2812 is open to the front, but when the first component 2811 is attached to the front side, the front end side of the ball passage 2812a is closed by the base plate 2811a of the first component 2811. In this state, the game ball B will not spill forward from the ball path 2812a. In other words, the first component 2811 and the second component 2812 constitute a ball passage 2812a. In other words, the ball passage 2812a is provided between the first component 2811 and the second component 2812.

This side unit 2800G closes the opening 1112 (normal opening area 1102 of the opening area 1101) where the base plate 2811a of the first component 2811 passes through the panel plate 1110 from the front of the panel plate 1110 in the game panel 1100. The base plate 2811a is brought into contact with the front surface of the panel board 1110 so as to At this time, the two positioning protrusions 2811c of the first component 2811 are inserted into the positioning holes 1113 of the panel board 1110. In this state, the attachment hole 2811d of the first component 2811 is aligned with the attachment hole 1114 of the panel board 1110.

Then, the side unit 2800G is attached to the front surface of the panel board 1110 by screwing a mounting screw into the mounting hole 1114 of the panel board 1110 from the front through the mounting hole 2811d of the first component 2811 and tightening it. At this time, since the mounting hole 2811d of the first component 2811 is provided near the positioning protrusion 2811c, the mounting screw cannot be screwed into the mounting hole 1114 of the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100 through the mounting hole 2811d. Therefore, the positioning protrusion 2811c can be strongly pressed against the panel plate 1110 side and inserted into the positioning hole 1113 reliably, and lifting up due to incomplete insertion of the positioning protrusion 2811c can be prevented.

When the side unit 2800G of this embodiment is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 (the game board 5 is assembled), the finger hook 2816 of the base plate 2811a of the first component 2811 is out. It protrudes forward of the mouth 1008 (specific opening area 1103 of the opening area 1101).

In addition, when the side unit 2800G is attached to the front surface of the panel board 1110 (the game board 5 is assembled), the second component 2812 is located within the thickness of the panel board 1110 within the opening 1112 of the panel board 1110. and is located forward of the rear surface of the panel board 1110. In other words, when assembled on the game board 5, the side unit 2800G does not protrude rearward beyond the rear surface of the panel board 1110, making it possible to secure a wide space behind the panel board 1110.

In the side unit 2800G, when the game ball B is received in the general winning opening 2001, it is guided to the ball passage 2812a behind the front surface of the panel board 1110 by the ball receiving part 2811b forming the general winning opening 2001, and is guided to the ball passage 2812a behind the front surface of the panel board 1110. After flowing down along the surface of the panel board 1110 by the passageway exit 2812b, it is delivered to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 provided at the rear. The game ball B delivered to the back ball guiding unit 3100 is discharged downward after being detected by the general winning hole sensor 3001.

In this embodiment, although detailed illustration is omitted, the passage outlet 2812b of the second component 2812 is provided below the lower back movable decorative body 3510 in the standby position. That is, the general winning hole sensor 3001 that detects the game ball B received in the general winning hole 2001 (ball receiving part 2811b) is provided below the lower back movable decorative body 3510 in the standby position. Therefore, the side unit 2800G, the general winning hole sensor 3001, etc. do not get in the way of the lower back movable decorative body 3510.

According to the side unit 2800G of this embodiment, the same effects as the side unit 2800 and the like described above can be achieved.

According to the side unit 2800G of this embodiment, since the second component 2812 is provided with the ball passage 2812a through which the game ball B flows down along the surface of the panel board 1110, a cross section of the part of the ball passage 2812a is provided. Since the second component 2812 has a U-shape, the presence of the ball passage 2812a can increase the rigidity of the second component 2812. Since the second component 2812, which has increased rigidity, is attached from the rear side of the first component 2811 to form the side unit 2800G, the rigidity of the side unit 2800 can be increased compared to the conventional side unit. I can do it. Therefore, when disassembling the pachinko machine 1 for recycling or the like, when the mounting screws that attach the side unit 2800G to the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100 are removed and the side unit 2800G is pulled forward, the rigidity of the side unit 2800 is increased. The side unit 2800 does not bend because it is held in place. As a result, the positioning protrusion 2811c of the side unit 2800G (first component 2811) does not tilt with respect to the positioning hole 1113 of the panel board 1110, and the side unit 2800G can be easily removed from the gaming panel 1100 (panel board 1110). It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 which can be removed and which can reduce disassembly work when sorting.

Furthermore, according to the side unit 2800G of this embodiment, since the finger hook portion 2816 that overlaps with the outlet 1008 of the panel board 1110 is provided on a part of the outer edge, the side unit With the mounting screws that attach the unit 2800G to the panel board 1110 removed, by inserting your finger or a tool into the out port 1008, you can hook your finger into the finger hook 2816 and pull the side unit 2800G forward. I can do it. Thereby, the side unit 2800G can be easily removed from the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110), and the disassembly work when sorting can be reduced.

Furthermore, in the side unit 2800G of this embodiment, the finger hook portion 2816 is provided so as to overlap with the out port 1008 (specific opening area 1103), and the out port 1008 has a size equal to or larger than two or more game balls B. Therefore, the operator's fingers or the like can be easily inserted into the outlet 1008, and the operator's fingers or the like can be easily hooked onto the finger hook portion 2816.

Furthermore, in the side unit 2800G, the finger hook 2816 of the base plate 2811a is made to protrude forward of the out port 1008 so as to overlap with the out port 1008, so that the game ball B flowing down the gaming area 5a passes through the out port 1008. When being ejected, the game ball B that has flowed down from above the out port 1008 along the surface of the panel board 1110 licks the front corner of the out port 1008 and enters the out port 1008, or It is possible to avoid the game ball B bouncing upward at the out guiding part 1003 in front of the out opening 1008 from coming into contact with the corner of the front end of the out opening 1008. In other words, the finger hook 2816 can protect the game ball B from coming into contact with the front end corner of the outlet 1008 on the panel board 1110. This can prevent the front end of the outlet 1008 from chipping.

Furthermore, in the side unit 2800G, the front surface of the finger hook 2816 on the base plate 2811a is inclined toward the outlet 1008, so that the outer edge has an obtuse angle. Therefore, in order to remove the side unit 2800G from the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 during the disassembly work of the pachinko machine 1, the finger hook 2816 (finger hook 2817), even if the fingers or the like touch the corner of the outer edge of the base plate 2811a, the angle is an obtuse angle, so compared to the case where the angle is a right angle. This makes it difficult to injure fingers or the like, and the side unit 2800G can be safely removed with fingers or the like.

In addition, in the side unit 2800G, since the front surface of the finger hook 2816 on the base plate 2811a is inclined toward the out port 1008, the game ball B flowing down to the out port 1008 along the front surface of the base plate 2811a can be smoothly controlled. The game ball B can be guided to the out port 1008 in a timely manner, and it is possible to suppress the game ball B from stagnation near the out port 1008. Furthermore, since the front surface of the finger hook 2816 is sloped, the front end of the finger hook 2816 has an obtuse angle, which makes the front corner less likely to chip.

In addition, when the side unit 2800G is assembled to the game board 5, the opening 1112 of the panel board 1110 in the game panel 1100 is blocked from the front by the base plate 2811a of the first component 2811, so that the back of the panel board 1110 is closed. It is possible to prevent foreign matter such as dust from entering the play area 5a on the front side of the panel board 1110 through the opening 1112 from the side.

By the way, since the side unit 2800G is provided with two positioning protrusions 2811c and each is inserted into the positioning hole 1113 of the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100, it is difficult to remove the side unit 2800G from the panel board 1110 during disassembly work. Furthermore, if the two positioning protrusions 2811c are attempted to be pulled out from the positioning holes 1113 at the same time, it is necessary to pull the side unit 2800G forward with a strong force, which may increase the burden on the operator. In contrast, in this embodiment, since the positioning protrusions 2811c are provided in a portion close to the outlet 1008 and a portion far away from the outlet 1008, the panel of the game panel 1100 is When removing the side unit 2800G from the plate 1110, the worker's finger or the like is hooked onto the finger hook 2816 on the outer edge of the base plate 2811a of the side unit 2800, which overlaps with the outlet 1008, and pulled forward. It becomes possible to apply a strong pulling force to the positioning protrusion 2811c close to 1008. As a result, during disassembly work, of the two positioning protrusions 2811c, the positioning protrusion 2811c closest to the outlet 1008 can be removed from the positioning hole 1113 first, and then the remaining position far from the outlet 1008 can be removed. Since it is only necessary to pull out the positioning projection 2811c from the positioning hole 1113, it is possible to pull out the positioning projection 2811c with a weaker force compared to the case where two positioning projections 2811c are pulled out at the same time, and the burden of the type of work can be reduced.

In addition, in the side unit 2800G described above, a flat plate-like part along the front surface of the panel board 1110 in the game panel 1100 is shown as the finger hook part 2816, but it is not limited to this, and a form as shown in FIG. It may also be used as a finger rest 2817.

When the side unit 2800G is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110, this finger hook portion 2817 overlaps with the outlet 1008 penetrating the panel plate 1110 in front view, and extends along the inner surface of the outlet 1008 to the panel plate 1110. It extends from the front surface of the panel plate 1110 to the rear side of the panel plate 1110. This finger hook portion 2817 is provided at the outer edge of the base plate 2811a of the first component 2811 of the side unit 2800G. Further, the front surface of the finger hook portion 2817 is inclined toward the outlet 1008.

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 113, the depth of the finger hook 2817 that overlaps with the outlet 1008 (specific opening area 1103) at the outer edge of the base plate 2811a of the side unit 2800G is increased, and the finger hook 2817 is inserted into the outlet 1008. The part has a certain thickness. Therefore, the size of the out port 1008 becomes smaller depending on the thickness of the finger hook 2817 (the passage volume for discharging the game ball B becomes smaller), but in this embodiment, the thickness of the finger hook 2817 is taken into account. , the size of the out port 1008 is increased (the passage volume for discharging the game ball B is increased). Thereby, the game balls B can be ejected from the outlet 1008 without any delay.

According to this finger hook portion 2817, the same effects as the finger hook portion 2816 described above can be achieved. Therefore, when disassembling the pachinko machine 1 for recycling or the like, by removing the mounting screws that attach the side unit 2800G to the panel board 1110, and inserting a finger or a tool into the outlet 1008, the finger hook can be removed. By hooking a finger or the like on 2817, the side unit 2800G can be pulled forward. Thereby, the side unit 2800G can be easily removed from the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110), and the disassembly work when sorting can be reduced.

Furthermore, since the finger hook portion 2817 is made to protrude rearward from the rear surface of the panel board 1110 along the inner surface of the outlet 1008, the inner surface of the outlet 1008 can be protected by the finger hook portion 2817. Furthermore, when using the wooden game panel 1100, the inner surface of the outlet 1008 where the wooden part is exposed can be hidden by the finger hook part 2817, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) can be improved.

Further, in the above embodiment, the side unit 2800G is provided with the finger hook 2816 and the finger hook 2817, but the invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIGS. 112 and 113, the game panel 1100 The starting port unit 2100 and the attacker unit 2400 attached to the front surface of the panel board 1110 may be provided with a finger hook 2816 and a finger hook 2817 whose outer edges partially overlap the out port 1008.

To be more specific, the starting port unit 2100 has a flat base plate 2103 that comes into contact with the front surface of the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100, and has a finger hook 2816 and a portion of the base plate 2103 that overlaps with the out port 1008. A finger hook 2817 is provided. Although not shown, the starting port unit 2100 has a plurality of positioning protrusions that protrude rearward from the base plate 2103 and are inserted into the positioning holes 1113 of the panel board 1110.

In addition, the attacker unit 2400 has a flat base plate 2431 that comes into contact with the front surface of the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100, and a finger hook 2816 and a finger hook are provided on the base plate 2431 at a portion that overlaps with the out port 1008. 2817 is provided. Although not shown, the attacker unit 2400 has a plurality of positioning protrusions that protrude rearward from the base plate 2431 and are inserted into the positioning holes 1113 of the panel board 1110.

These starting port unit 2100 and attacker unit 2400 can also provide the same effects as the side unit 2800G described above.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the opening 1112 blocked by the side unit 2800G and the outlet 1008 are not connected to each other but are provided separately in the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. 114, the opening 1112 and the outlet 1008 may be connected in a continuous manner. In other words, the panel board 1110 may have an opening area 1101 in which the normal opening area 1102 that is closed by the side unit 2800G and the specific opening area 1103 forming the outlet 1008 are connected. In other words, the out port 1008 is formed in the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100 so as to be continuous from the normal opening region 1102 into which the side unit 2800G is fitted, but is formed by the specific opening region 1103 into which the side unit 2800G is not fitted. It may be configured as follows.

Also in the embodiment shown in FIG. 114, in the side unit 2800G, a finger hook portion 2816 is provided so that a part of the base plate 2811a overlaps with the out port 1008 (specific opening area 1103), and the same effect as described above is achieved. In addition, since the specific opening area 1103 is formed on the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100 so as to be continuous from the normal opening area 1102, a cutting tool such as an end mill can be used to cut the panel board 1110. When the normal opening area 1102 and the specific opening area 1103 are formed by cutting, the normal opening area 1102 and the specific opening area 1103 can be continuously cut, and the cost of the panel board 1110 can be reduced.

Further, in the above embodiment, the finger hook portion 2816 (finger hook portion 2817) that overlaps with the out port 1008 is provided on the base plate 2811a (base plate 2103, base plate 2431) that contacts the front surface of the panel board 1110 in the game panel 1100. Although the above example shows the provision of a finger hook portion, the present invention is not limited to this, and a finger hook portion may be provided at a portion of the panel plate 1110 that is away from the plate surface in the front-rear direction (for example, the front plate 2812d that is away from the panel plate 1110 in the forward direction). 2816 (finger rest part 2817) may be provided.

Further, in the above embodiment, the game panel 1100 includes a panel board 1110 made of transparent resin, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the game panel 1100 may be made of wood. As a result, by making the game panel 1100 made of wood, the board thickness becomes thicker than that made of resin, so it is possible to make more effective use of the board thickness of the game panel 1100.

In addition, in the above-mentioned side unit 2800G, the ball passage 2812a is composed of a plurality of tributary sections 2801 that communicate with the respective ball receiving sections 2812c, and a main stream section 2802 where the plurality of tributary sections 2801 merge. Although the embodiment shown in FIG.

Furthermore, although the side unit 2800G described above is not provided with a ball sensor for detecting the game ball B received in the ball receiving portion 2811b, the present invention is not limited to this, and the side unit 2800G may be provided with a ball sensor. Also good. When the side unit 2800G is provided with a ball sensor, it is desirable to provide the ball sensor within the thickness of the panel board 1110, or to provide the ball sensor below the rear production device (back lower production unit 3500). .

Further, although the side unit 2800G described above is shown without an LED board on the rear side, the present invention is not limited to this, and an LED for illumination decoration may be provided. When the side unit 2800G is provided with an LED board, a unit cover is provided that covers the LED board from the rear and whose front end surface is in contact with the rear surface of the side unit 2800G (second component 2812), and the unit cover and the side unit are in contact with each other. It is desirable to provide non-contact surface portions that are not in contact with each other in the contact surface portions that are in contact with each other. Thereby, the side unit 2800G can be decorated with light emission by the LEDs of the LED board, and the heat from the LEDs can be radiated to the outside through the non-contact surface portion.

In the above embodiment, the side units 2800 (side unit 2800A, side unit 2800B, side unit 2800C, side unit 2800D, side unit 2800E, Side unit 2800F, side unit 2800G) are shown, but are not limited to these, starting port unit 2100, attacker unit 2400 (attacker unit 2730), normal winning port unit 2600, second starting port unit 2720, accessories. In the prize opening unit 2740, etc., the thickness of the panel board 1110 may be effectively utilized.

[12-4. Regarding the relationship between the LED board and the non-contact surface part in the side unit]
Next, the relationship between the LED board 2825 and the non-contact surface portion 2831 in the side units 2800B to 2800F in which the LED board 2825 is provided will be explained mainly with reference to FIG. 115 and the like. FIG. 115(a) is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which the non-contact surface portion is provided behind the LED board, and FIG. 115(b) is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which the non-contact surface portion is provided in a different form from that in (a). (c) is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which the non-contact surface portion is provided so as to cover the LED board, and (d) is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which the non-contact surface portion is provided over the entire circumference of the unit cover. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which 115(a) and (c) show the side unit 2800B of FIG. 107 as an example, and FIGS. 115(c) and (d) show the side unit 2800D of FIG. 109 as an example. Here, the same components as above will be described with the same reference numerals.

In the LED board 2825 shown in FIGS. 107 to 111, a resistor for limiting the current that drives the mounted LED 2825a is mounted on another board. Therefore, in the LED board 2825, the LED 2825a has the largest amount of heat. That is, in the LED board 2825, much heat is released from the front side where the LED 2825a is mounted. In the embodiment shown in FIGS. 107 to 111, a non-contact surface portion 2831 (cutout portion 2820c) is provided near the front surface of the LED board 2825, which generates a large amount of heat. Thereby, the heat from the LED board 2825 can be quickly radiated to the outside through the non-contact surface portion 2831 (notch portion 2820c), and no heat is trapped inside the unit cover 2820.

In the above embodiment, a resistor (current limiting resistor) is mounted on a separate board from the LED board 2825, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the resistor is mounted on the LED board. 2825 may be implemented. For example, a resistor may be mounted on the same surface of the LED board 2825 as the surface on which the LED 2825a is mounted. In this case, similarly to the embodiment shown in FIGS. 107 to 111, a non-contact surface portion 2831 (cutout portion 2820c) is provided on the side of the LED board 2825 close to the surface (here, the front surface) on which the LED 2825a and the resistor are mounted. It would be better to set it up.

Note that when mounting the LED 2825a and the resistor on the same surface of the LED board 2825, it is desirable that the LED 2825a and the resistor do not overlap in the vertical direction. This can prevent the heat emitted from the LED 2825a and the resistor from influencing each other.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 115, the LED 2825a and the resistor 2825b for limiting the current supplied to the LED 2825a may be mounted on different surfaces of the LED board 2825. In other words, in the LED board 2825, the resistor 2825b is mounted on the surface opposite to the surface on which the LED 2825a is mounted. In this case, since the resistor 2825b has a larger calorific value than the LED 2825a, as shown in FIG. A non-contact surface portion 2831 (notch portion 2820c) may be provided.

Specifically, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 115(a), the unit cover 2820 is arranged so that the non-contact surface portion 2831 (cutout portion 2820c) is located on the side closer to the resistor 2825b mounted on the rear surface of the LED 2825a. The boss portion 2820d is made to protrude forward and the LED board 2825 is positioned within the frame of the support frame portion 2814 of the unit main body 2810. Thereby, the heat from the LED board 2825 can be quickly radiated to the outside through the non-contact surface portion 2831 (notch portion 2820c), and no heat is trapped inside the unit cover 2820.

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 115(a), since the LED board 2825 is provided so as not to overlap the notch 2820c (non-contact surface part 2831) in plan view, the LED board 2825 is inserted into the unit cover 2820 through the notch 2820c. Even if dirt or dust enters the LED board 2825, it can be made difficult to touch the LED board 2825, and the influence of dust or dust can be prevented as much as possible. Further, since the notch 2820c is also provided on the lower side of the unit cover 2820, dust and dirt that have entered through the upper notch 2820c can be discharged downward from the lower notch 2820c.

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 115(a), the non-contact surface portion 2831 (cutout portion 2820c) is provided on the unit cover 2820 side, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be provided on the frame portion 2814) side, or may be provided on both the unit main body 2810 and the unit cover 2820.

Further, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 115(b), a plurality of boss portions 2814a protrude rearward from a portion within the frame of the support frame portion 2814 on the rear surface of the unit main body 2810, and to which the LED board 2825 is attached, and a frame-shaped support frame. It has a notch 2814b that is cut out from the rear end surface of the portion 2814 toward the front. In this embodiment, the unit cover 2820 has only a flat cover portion 2820a, but may have a peripheral wall portion 2820b as described above.

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 115(b), an LED 2825a is mounted on the front surface of the LED board 2825, and a resistor 2825b is mounted on the rear surface. , the notch 2814b is located behind the rear surface of the LED board 2825. In other words, the non-contact surface portion 2831 (cutout portion 2814b) is provided on the side of the LED board 2825 that is close to the surface (here, the rear surface) on which the resistor 2825b is mounted. Thereby, the heat from the LED board 2825 can be quickly radiated to the outside through the non-contact surface portion 2831 (notch portion 2814b), and no heat is trapped inside the unit cover 2820.

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 115(b), since the LED board 2825 is provided so as not to overlap the notch 2814b (non-contact surface part 2831) in plan view, the LED board 2825 is inserted into the unit cover 2820 through the notch 2814b. Even if dirt or dust enters the LED board 2825, it can be made difficult to touch the LED board 2825, and the influence of dust or dust can be prevented as much as possible. Further, since the notch 2814b is also provided on the lower side of the unit cover 2820, dust and dirt that have entered through the upper notch 2814b can be discharged downward from the lower notch 2814b.

Note that in the embodiment shown in FIG. 115(b), the non-contact surface portion 2831 (notch portion 2814b) is provided on the unit main body 2810 (support frame portion 2814) side, but the present invention is not limited to this. , may be provided on the unit cover 2820 side, or may be provided on both the unit main body 2810 and the unit cover 2820.

Further, in the above embodiment, the LED board 2825 is prevented from overlapping with the non-contact surface portion 2831 (notch portion 2814b, notch portion 2820c) in plan view, but the present invention is not limited to this. As shown in FIG. 115(c), the LED board 2825 may overlap the non-contact surface portion 2831 (cutout portion 2820c). Specifically, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 115(c), the support frame 2814 of the unit body 2810A and the unit cover 2820 attached to the support frame 2814 are connected to the opening of the panel board 1110 in the game panel 1100. 1112 and is provided within the thickness of the panel board 1110. In other words, a space formed by the unit body 2810A and the unit cover 2820 and in which the LED board 2825 is accommodated is provided within the thickness of the panel board 1110. As a result, even if the LED board 2825 and the non-contact surface part 2831 (cutout part 2820c) are provided so as to overlap, since the notch part 2820c is located within the thickness of the opening part 1112 of the panel board 1110, the panel board This makes it possible to reduce as much as possible the possibility that foreign matter such as dust and dirt from the outside of the unit cover 2820 enters the opening 1112 and then enters the unit cover 2820 through the notch 2820c. It is possible to make it difficult for foreign matter such as dust to get on the LED board 2825, and to prevent the influence of dust and dirt as much as possible.

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 115(c), since a non-contact surface portion 2831 (notch portion 2820c) is provided so as to cover the LED board 2825, heat from the LED 2825a mounted on the front surface of the LED board 2825, Both the heat from the resistor 2825b mounted on the rear surface can be efficiently radiated to the outside through the non-contact surface portion 2831, and no heat is trapped inside the unit cover 2820.

Although FIG. 115(c) shows that the LED 2825a and the resistor 2825b are mounted on different surfaces of the LED board 2825, the present invention is not limited to this. may be provided on the same surface of the LED board 2825.

Further, although FIG. 115(c) shows a unit cover 2820 provided with a notch 2820c as the non-contact surface portion 2831, the present invention is not limited to this, and the non-contact surface portion 2831 is 2814) side, or may be provided on both the unit main body 2810A and the unit cover 2820.

In the embodiment of FIG. 115(c), a part of the LED board 2825 is inserted into the non-contact surface part 2831 (cutout part 2820c) between the support frame part 2814 of the unit main body 2810A and the unit cover 2820. Alternatively, it may protrude outward as long as it does not block the opening of the non-contact surface portion 2831. By entering the LED board 2825 into the non-contact surface section 2831 or projecting it to the outside through the non-contact surface section 2831, the LED board 2825 is exposed to the outside air and the heat dissipation effect can be further enhanced.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the non-contact surface portion 2831 (cutout portion 2820c) is provided in a part of the contact surface portion 2830 between the unit main body 2810A (support frame portion 2814) and the unit cover 2820. The present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. 115(d), the non-contact surface portion 2831 may be provided over the entire circumference of the unit cover 2820. That is, a gap is provided over the entire circumference between the rear end surface of the support frame section 2814 in the unit main body 2810A and the front end surface of the peripheral wall section 2820b in the unit cover 2820. In this embodiment, the unit cover 2820 is attached to a boss portion 2814a that projects rearward from the rear surface of the unit main body 2810A.

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 115(d), a part of the LED board 2825 is placed inside the non-contact surface part 2831 (gap) between the support frame part 2814 of the unit main body 2810A and the peripheral wall part 2820b of the unit cover 2820. They are making them move in and out. Even in this case, the LED board 2825 does not block the opening of the non-contact surface portion 2831. According to this embodiment, the LED board 2825 can be more easily exposed to the outside air, and the heat dissipation effect can be further enhanced. Furthermore, from the viewpoint of preventing the intrusion of foreign substances such as dirt and dust, the usefulness of using the opening of the non-contact surface portion 2831 increases.

Although not shown in the drawings, the LED board 2825 described above prevents solder from adhering to unnecessary parts when mounting electronic components at least on the board surface on which the LED 2825a is mounted, and protects circuit patterns from oxidation and insulation. A light-colored (for example, white) solder resist is used as the solder resist applied for this purpose. Thereby, the light emitting efficiency can be increased by reflecting the light from the LED 2825a and the like by the brightly colored solder resist. Alternatively, when a full-color LED is used as the LED 2825a, the white solder resist allows the user to tune in to the color sense of the viewer with respect to various colors of emitted light, making it possible to present a natural light-emitting decoration.

On this LED board 2825, information (letters and symbols) such as the part number and mounting position of the electronic components to be mounted, the name of the LED board 2825, the mounting position, and the mounting direction are displayed in similar colors (for example, , yellow) and is applied by printing (for example, silk printing).

By the way, the packages of electronic components such as resistors and LED drivers mounted on LED boards are often molded with black resin, so if the LED board is installed near the player, Electronic components become conspicuous even when the LED is turned off, and there is a risk that the appearance of the gaming machine may be affected. On the other hand, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 115, the resistor 2825b is mounted on the rear surface of the LED board 2825, so the resistor 2825b can be hidden from the player and the appearance of the gaming machine can be improved. can.

Furthermore, in the embodiments shown in FIGS. 107 to 111, when the resistor 2825b is mounted on the front surface of the LED board 2825, it is desirable that the resistor 2825b is not noticeable to the player. In this embodiment, since a transparent decorative seal 2803 with a predetermined decoration is provided in front of the LED board 2825, the decorative seal 2803 can make the resistor 2825b less noticeable.

Alternatively, when mounting the resistor 2825b on the front surface of the LED board 2825, it is possible to make the resistor 2825b inconspicuous by providing a plate-shaped or sheet-shaped diffusion lens in front of the LED board 2825 to diffuse light. good. In addition, a plate-like or sheet-like decorative body with a partially non-transparent design is provided in front of the LED board 2825, and the design of the decorative body hides the resistor 2825b so that it does not become noticeable. Also good. Further, the resistor 2825b mounted on the front surface of the LED board 2825 may be colored with brightly colored paint or ink. These decorative stickers 2803, diffusion lenses, decorations, etc. may be used in combination as appropriate.

There are two types of game panels 1100: one made of wood that does not have translucency, and one made of resin that has translucency. In the case of wooden gaming panels, the opening 1112 is dark and tunnel-shaped, so there is a certain degree of outsideness. Light will be blocked, but if the opening 1112 is made of transparent resin with light-transmitting properties, you can see through the outside even if the opening 1112 has the same tunnel shape, so in order to improve the appearance as described above, When the above configuration is used in combination, the above-mentioned effects can be achieved when utilizing the thickness of the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110).

[13. Relationship between the present invention and the embodiments]
The projection 102 of the door frame main body 100 in the door frame 3 of this embodiment is the projection of the invention, and the ball firing unit 550 of the main body frame 4 of this embodiment is the ball firing means of the invention. The ball circulating unit 570, the ball circulating unit 600, the ball lifting unit 650, and the ball feeding unit 700 are the ball circulation means of the present invention, the ball cassette 681 in this embodiment is the attachment/detachment unit of the present invention, and the ball motor in this embodiment is The base 686 is the locking piece of the locking means of the present invention, the positioning pin 686b and the rotating connection part 692 in this embodiment are the insert body of the present invention, and the cassette pressing piece 693 in this embodiment is the pressing piece of the present invention. The nylatches 694 in this embodiment correspond to the fixing means of the present invention.

[14. Characteristic effects of this embodiment]
According to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the game balls B fired from the ball firing unit 550 that fires the game balls B to the game area 5a of the game board 5 are sent to the foul unit 570, the circulating ball path unit 600, and the ball firing unit 550. The upper unit 650 and the ball feeding unit 700 collect the balls and supply them to the ball firing unit 550, and the game balls B are fired from the ball firing unit 550 based on the player's ball holding data. In this pachinko machine 1 (so-called enclosed game machine, managed game machine), with the ball playing cassette 681 attached to the main body frame 4, the playing ball motor base 686 of the playing ball mechanism 680 in the ball lifting unit 650 is moved to the locked position. In this state, the positioning pin 686b and the rotary connecting portion 692 are inserted into the Kuma cassette 681 from a direction intersecting the front-rear direction, and the Kuma cassette 681 is pushed rearward by the cassette pressing piece 693 (spring 695). Ru. In this state, the pressing piece is fixed immovably by the locking means. As a result, even if the installation of the Kuma cassette 681 is incomplete, the installation of the Kuma cassette 681 can be made good by pressing backward, and the Kuma cassette 681 can be moved forward by the positioning pin 686b, etc. In addition to being able to prevent the ball from coming off, the nylon latch 694 allows the cassette pressing piece 693 to continue pressing the ball cassette 681, making it possible to prevent the ball cassette 681 from being removed. At this time, by looking at the position of the operating part 694a on the nylon latch 694, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the nylon latch 694 is immovably fixing the cassette pressing piece 693, which reduces the possibility of forgetting to lock the cassette pressing piece 693. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the ball cassette 681 from coming off without permission due to vibration or other reasons during a game, and it is also possible to avoid interrupting the game due to the ball cassette 681 coming off. It is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

In this state, when the door frame 3 is opened relative to the main body frame 4 for maintenance or the like, the cassette pressing piece 693 is pressing the Kuma cassette 681 backward, and the nylatch 694 makes the cassette pressing piece 693 immovable. Therefore, even when the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the pressing of the ball cassette 681 by the cassette pressing piece 693 is maintained, and it is possible to prevent the ball cassette 681 from immediately coming off forward. To remove the Kuma cassette 681, open the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 supporting the game board 5, operate the Nylatch 694 to make the cassette pressing piece 693 movable, and then remove the Kuma motor. When the base 686 is rotated and moved from the lock position to the release position, the positioning pin 686b and the like are separated from the Kuma cassette 681 and are attached to the main body frame 4 (cassette attachment recess 668b of the lifting mechanism base 668). The Kuma cassette 681 can be removed forward. As a result, by removing the ball polishing cassette 681 having the polishing cloth 682 for polishing the circulating game balls B, the inside of the ball lifting mechanism 660 of the ball lifting unit 650 provided behind it (lifting This makes it possible to check the spiral shaft 661, etc.), and improves workability in maintaining the pachinko machine 1.

When closing the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4, even if the Kuma motor base 686 is not in the locked position, when the door frame 3 is closed, the protrusion 102 of the door frame 3 will be attached to the Kuma motor base. By contacting the Kuma cassette 686, the Kuma motor base 686 rotates and moves to the lock position, and the positioning pin 686b etc. are inserted into the Kuma cassette 681 from a direction intersecting the front-rear direction, so you do not forget to lock it. This can prevent the Kuma cassette 681 from coming off during the game, and also prevent the Kuma motor base 686, cassette pressing piece 693, Kuma cassette 681, etc. from being damaged due to contact with the door frame 3. do not have.

Furthermore, if the door frame 3 is closed while the Kuma motor base 686 has not moved to the lock position, the protrusion 102 of the door frame 3 will come into contact with the Kuma motor base 686, causing the Kuma motor base 686 to rotate. At the same time, the cassette pressing piece 693 presses the Kuma cassette 681 backward due to the biasing force of the spring 695. Even if the installation is incomplete, the ball cassette 681 can be installed in a good condition, and the ball cassette 681 can be reliably prevented from coming off.

Furthermore, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the door frame 3 is lifted up by the protrusion 102 of the door frame 3, so that the door frame hinge mechanism 110 etc. that allows the door frame 3 to be opened and closed is It is possible to avoid continuing to apply an excessive load to the hinge, making it difficult for the hinge to be distorted, and even if the hinge is distorted, the door frame 3 can be lifted by the protrusion 102, so that the door frame 3 can be attached to the main body frame. 4, it can be closed in the proper position.

In addition, since the ball polishing cassette 681 has a polishing cloth 682 for polishing the circulating game balls B, if the polishing cloth 682 becomes dirty, the ball polishing cassette 681 can be removed and a clean polishing cloth 682 can be used. The ball playing cassette 681 can be replaced with a new ball cassette 681 having the following characteristics, and the circulating game balls B can be kept in a clean and good condition. Furthermore, by applying the above configuration to the ball cassette 681 (removable unit) that undergoes regular maintenance such as replacement, troubles associated with attaching and detaching the detachable unit during maintenance can be minimized.

[15. Regarding other features included in this embodiment]
[15-1. First technical feature]
The present specification has the following technical features different from those described above.

[15-1a. Background of the first technical feature]
As a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a game ball is fired into a gaming area by a ball firing means based on the player's held ball data, which is converted into data, and when the game ball is fired, the game ball is fired based on the held ball data. A system has been proposed in which the collected game balls are subtracted, and when the foul ball is collected by the foul ball collection means without being supplied to the game area even if the ball is fired from the ball firing means, the collected game ball is added to the held ball data. (For example, Patent Document A: Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2020-89489). According to the technology of Patent Document B, game balls can be circulated within the game machine, and the burden on the game hall where the game machine is installed can be reduced.

However, in the technology of Patent Document A, if the game ball fired by the ball firing means returns to the ball firing means for some reason, the game ball is not collected by the foul ball collecting means, so the game ball is determined based on the held ball data. The number of balls remains subtracted, and there is a risk that an error will occur between the number and the actual number of game balls fired into the game area, resulting in a disadvantage to the player.

Therefore, in view of the above-mentioned actual situation, the following means aims to provide a gaming machine that can eliminate the error between the actual number of game balls fired into the gaming area due to the fired game balls returning. .

[15-1b. Means for solving the first technical feature]
Means 1: In a gaming machine,
"A game board having a game area where games are played using game balls,
Ball firing means capable of supplying game balls to the game area of the game board;
foul ball collecting means for collecting game balls that are fired by the ball firing means but are not supplied to the gaming area;
a ball circulating means that collects the game balls fired by the ball firing means and supplies them again to the ball firing means;
A game machine comprising: a game ball which is caused to fire a game ball by the ball firing means based on ball holding data of a player converted into data,
The ball firing means includes:
It has a firing rail on which the game ball to be fired is placed, and the firing rail is long enough to place only one game ball,
When a game ball is newly supplied to the launch rail by the ball circulating means with a game ball placed on the launch rail, the game ball that was later supplied to the launch rail is returned to the foul ball recovery means. will be collected in
It is characterized by being something.

According to the configuration of means 1, there is a game board having a game area where games are played using game balls, a ball firing means capable of supplying game balls to the game area of the game board, and a ball firing means capable of supplying game balls to the game area even if the balls are fired by the ball firing means. A player who is provided with a foul ball collection means for collecting game balls that have not been supplied, and a ball circulation means for collecting game balls fired by a ball firing means and supplying them again to the ball firing means, and which is converted into data. A game machine in which a game ball is launched by a ball launcher based on ball holding data, the ball launcher has a launch rail on which a game ball to be launched is placed, and the launch rail is The length is such that only one game ball can be placed on it, and when a game ball is placed on the firing rail and a new game ball is supplied to the firing rail by the ball circulating means, the ball will be placed on the firing rail later. The supplied game balls are collected by the foul ball collection means (in the [Description of the Invention], chapters [4-2. Ball launch unit] and [7-4. Launch control processing] , FIG. 27, FIG. 68, etc.).

As a result, the ball circulation means collects the game balls ejected from the ball ejection means that ejects the game balls into the game area of the game board and supplies them to the ball ejection means. In a game machine (so-called enclosed type game machine, managed game machine) in which a game ball is launched from a ball launcher based on the number of balls (1 or more), the length of the launch rail in the ball launcher is is long enough to place only one ball, so if the fired game ball returns to the launch rail for some reason, if the next game ball is already placed on the launch rail, it will not return to the launch rail. It becomes possible to flip the returned game ball with the placed game ball and turn it into a foul ball. On the other hand, if the fired game ball returns before the next game ball is placed on the firing rail, the returned game ball will be placed on the firing rail, but it will not be supplied from the ball circulation means. The next game ball that is thrown returns and is bounced by the game ball placed on the launch rail, making it possible to make it a foul ball. Therefore, in the player's ball holding data, it is subtracted by being fired from the firing rail, but even if the fired game ball returns to the firing rail, only one game ball will be placed on the firing rail. Therefore, either the returned game ball or the next game ball becomes a foul ball and is collected by the foul ball collection means. The ball data can be returned to the state before firing, and the error with the actual number of game balls fired into the game area is eliminated so that the player does not suffer any disadvantage.

In addition, since the launch rail is long enough for only one game ball to be placed on it, there is a risk that it may fall off the launch rail due to vibrations, etc. If the ball falls, even if it is misidentified as being fired as a result of the fall and the ball possession data (number of balls held) is subtracted, the ball will be recovered by the foul ball recovery means and treated as a foul ball in the same manner as above. is added to the ball holding data and returned to the state before the fall. On the other hand, if a game ball falls from the launch rail and is collected by the foul ball collection means when there is no held ball data (the number of balls held is 0), it may not be added to the held ball data. However, an alarm may be issued to the gaming hall where the gaming machines are installed.

Further, the ball circulating means may supply one game ball to the shooting rail after the ball shooting means shoots the game ball. As a result, when a game ball is launched from the launch rail, one game ball is always supplied to the launch rail by the ball circulation means, so even if the launched game ball returns to the launch rail for some reason, the ball will not be returned to the launch rail. The game balls supplied to the firing rail by the circulation means can be bounced into foul balls, and it is possible to reliably provide a game machine that exhibits the above-mentioned effects.

In addition, as described above, when the ball circulating means supplies one game ball to the firing rail after the game ball firing operation, the ball firing means fires the game ball, and the ball circulating means fires the ball (launching rail). Since it is possible to perform a series of operations such as supplying game balls to Compared to the case where it is determined whether or not the game machine has returned to the launch rail (the case where the determination is made by writing a program), the load placed on the control of the game machine can be reduced.

Furthermore, when the gaming machine has ball holding data and the game ball on the launch rail changes from present to absent, the game ball is removed by a ball holding subtraction means that subtracts one game ball from the ball holding data and a foul collection means. The game apparatus may further include ball holding adding means for adding one game ball to the ball holding data when the ball is collected. As a result, when a player fires a game ball toward the playing area of the game board by the ball firing means in a state where the player has ball holding data (the number of balls held by the player is 1 or more), the held ball data is calculated by the holding ball subtraction means. By subtracting one game ball from the game ball and supplying the game ball to the game area, the player can enjoy playing games with the game ball. On the other hand, if the game ball fired by the ball firing means is not supplied to the gaming area, it is collected as a foul ball by the foul ball collecting means, and one game ball is added to the ball holding data by the ball holding means. Therefore, the player does not suffer any disadvantages due to the fact that the game balls are not supplied to the game area, and can continue to enjoy the game. If the fired game ball returns to the launch rail for some reason, the next game ball has already been placed on the launch rail since the launch rail is long enough to place only one game ball. If so, it would be possible for the game ball placed on the launch rail to bounce the returning game ball and make it a foul ball, and the returning game ball would be placed on the launch rail, thereby preventing ball circulation. It becomes possible for the next game ball supplied from the means to return and be bounced by the placed game ball, making it a foul ball.Since both become foul balls, the held ball data is added to the game ball data by the held ball addition means. By adding one ball, the held ball data can be returned to the state before firing, and the error with the actual number of game balls fired into the game area can be eliminated.

Further, the game balls that have fallen from the launch rail may be collected by the foul ball collection means. As a result, the game balls that have fallen from the launch rail are collected by the foul ball recovery means, so that the game balls that have been launched and returned, and the next game ball that has been supplied from the ball circulation means, are returned to the launch rail. When the ball is bounced by a game ball placed on it, it can be collected by a foul ball collecting means, so that it can be added to ball holding data as a foul ball, thereby reliably providing a game machine that achieves the above-mentioned effects. be able to.

In addition, as described above, when a game ball that has fallen from the launch rail is collected by the foul ball recovery means, even if the game ball falls from the launch rail due to vibration etc., it will be collected by the foul ball recovery means, and the foul ball will be recovered. The ball can be added to the ball holding data and returned to the state before it fell, so the player is not at a disadvantage.

Means 2: In the configuration of means 1,
“The said sphere circulation means,
The present invention is characterized in that one game ball is supplied to the shooting rail after the game ball shooting operation by the ball shooting means.

According to the structure of the means 2, the ball circulation means supplies one game ball to the shooting rail after the ball firing means launches the game ball (in [Detailed Description of the Invention], (Refer to the chapter [7-4. Launch control processing] and the descriptions in Figure 68, etc.).

As a result, when a game ball is launched from the launch rail, one game ball is always supplied to the launch rail by the ball circulation means, so even if the launched game ball returns to the launch rail for some reason, the ball will not be affected. It is possible to reliably provide a game machine that can bounce the game balls supplied to the firing rail by the circulation means and turn them into foul balls, thus achieving the above-mentioned effects.

In addition, since it is possible to perform a series of operations including the firing of game balls by the ball firing means and the supply of game balls to the ball firing means (launching rail) by the ball circulating means, for example, a game on the firing rail can be performed. Compared to the case where it is determined whether or not the fired game ball has returned to the firing rail based on the presence or absence of a ball, the operation of the ball firing means and the ball circulation means, etc. (when the determination is made by programming). Therefore, the load on controlling the gaming machine can be reduced.

Means 3: In the configuration of means 1 or 2,
"Ball holding subtraction means that subtracts one game ball from the ball holding data when the game ball on the launch rail changes from present to absent while the ball holding data is present;
ball holding adding means for adding one game ball to the ball holding data when a game ball is collected by the foul collecting means;
It is characterized by further comprising the following.

According to the structure of the means 3, the game machine includes a ball holding subtraction means that subtracts one game ball from the ball holding data when the game ball on the firing rail changes from presence to absence in a state where the game machine has ball holding data, and a foul ball holding data. The present invention further includes ball holding adding means for adding one game ball to ball holding data when a game ball is collected by the collecting means ([7] in [Description of the Invention]). -2. Ball possession subtraction process] and [7-3. Ball possession addition process], see descriptions in FIGS. 65 and 66, etc.).

As a result, when a player fires a game ball toward the playing area of the game board by the ball firing means in a state where the player has ball holding data (the number of balls held by the player is 1 or more), the held ball data is calculated by the holding ball subtraction means. By subtracting one game ball from the game ball and supplying the game ball to the game area, the player can enjoy playing games with the game ball. On the other hand, if the game ball fired by the ball firing means is not supplied to the gaming area, it is collected as a foul ball by the foul ball collecting means, and one game ball is added to the ball holding data by the ball holding means. Therefore, the player does not suffer any disadvantages due to the fact that the game balls are not supplied to the game area, and can continue to enjoy the game. If the fired game ball returns to the launch rail for some reason, the next game ball has already been placed on the launch rail since the launch rail is long enough to place only one game ball. If so, it would be possible for the game ball placed on the launch rail to bounce the returning game ball and make it a foul ball, and the returning game ball would be placed on the launch rail, thereby preventing ball circulation. It becomes possible for the next game ball supplied from the means to return and be bounced by the placed game ball, making it a foul ball.Since both become foul balls, the held ball data is added to the game ball data by the held ball addition means. By adding one ball, the held ball data can be returned to the state before firing, and the error with the actual number of game balls fired into the game area can be eliminated.

Means 4: In any one configuration from means 1 to means 3,
“The foul ball collecting means is
It is possible to collect game balls that have fallen from the launch rail.
It is characterized by being something.

According to the configuration of the means 4, it is possible to collect game balls that have fallen from the shooting rail by the foul ball collecting means. reference).

As a result, the game balls that have fallen from the launch rail are collected by the foul ball recovery means, so that the game balls that have been launched and returned, and the next game ball that has been supplied from the ball circulation means, are returned to the launch rail. When the ball is bounced by a game ball placed on it, it can be collected by a foul ball collecting means, so that it can be added to held ball data as a foul ball, thereby reliably providing a game machine that achieves the above-mentioned effects. be able to.

In addition, since the game balls that have fallen from the launch rail are collected by the foul ball collection means, even if the game balls fall from the launch rail due to vibrations, etc., they are collected by the foul ball collection means and the foul balls can be collected by the foul ball collection means. This can be added to the ball holding data to restore the state before the ball fell, and the player will not be at a disadvantage.

Furthermore, if a game ball falls from the launch rail and is collected by the foul ball collection means when there is no held ball data (the number of balls held is 0), it may not be added to the held ball data. However, an alarm may be issued to the gaming hall where the gaming machines are installed.

Means 5: In a gaming machine,
"A game board having a game area where games are played using game balls,
A ball firing means capable of supplying game balls to the game area of the game board and having a firing rail on which game balls to be fired are placed;
a foul ball recovery means for recovering game balls that are not supplied to the gaming area even if they are launched by the ball launcher and game balls that have fallen from the launch rail;
a ball circulating means that collects the game balls fired by the ball firing means and supplies them again to the ball firing means;
A game machine comprising: a game ball which is caused to fire a game ball by the ball firing means based on ball holding data of a player converted into data,
Ball holding subtraction means for subtracting one game ball from the ball holding data when a game ball on the launch rail changes from presence to absence while the ball holding data is present;
holding ball adding means for adding one game ball to the holding ball data when a game ball is collected by the foul collecting means;
further comprising;
The launch rail has a length that allows only one game ball to be placed thereon,
The ball circulating means supplies one game ball to the shooting rail after the ball shooting operation of the ball shooting means,
When a game ball is newly supplied to the launch rail by the ball circulation means with a game ball placed on the launch rail, the game ball that was later supplied to the launch rail is returned to the foul ball recovery means. will be collected in
It is characterized by being something.

According to the configuration of the means 5, the game board has a game board having a game area where games are played with game balls, and a firing rail on which the game balls can be supplied to the game area of the game board and the game balls to be fired are placed. A foul ball collection means that collects game balls that have been launched by the ball launcher but have not been supplied to the gaming area, and game balls that have fallen from the launch rail; A game machine comprising a ball circulating means for collecting game balls and supplying them again to the ball firing means, and causing the ball firing means to fire the game balls based on the player's held ball data converted into data. If there is ball holding data and the game ball on the launch rail changes from present to absent, the game ball is collected by the ball holding subtraction means that subtracts one game ball from the ball holding data and the foul collection means. and ball holding adding means for adding one game ball to the holding ball data, the launching rail is long enough to place only one game ball, and the ball circulation means is configured to add one game ball to the ball holding data. One game ball is supplied to the launch rail after the game ball is launched by the means, and when a new game ball is supplied to the launch rail by the ball circulating means with the game ball placed on the launch rail. In this case, the game balls that are later supplied to the firing rail are collected by the foul ball collection means.

As a result, the ball circulation means collects the game balls ejected from the ball ejection means that ejects the game balls into the game area of the game board and supplies them to the ball ejection means. In a game machine (so-called enclosed game machine, managed game machine) in which game balls are ejected from a ball launcher based on the number of balls (the number of balls held is 1 or more), there is data on the number of balls held by the player (the number of balls held). is 1 or more), when the ball firing means fires a game ball toward the game area of the game board, the held ball subtraction means subtracts one game ball from the held ball data, and the game ball is supplied to the playing area. By doing so, the player can enjoy playing games with game balls. On the other hand, if the game ball fired by the ball firing means is not supplied to the game area, it is collected as a foul ball by the foul ball collecting means, and one game ball is added to the ball holding data by the ball holding means. Therefore, the player does not suffer any disadvantages due to the fact that the game balls are not supplied to the game area, and can continue to enjoy the game.

If the launched game ball returns to the launch rail for some reason, since the launch rail is long enough to accommodate only one game ball, the ball circulating means has already placed the next game ball on the launch rail. If a ball is placed on the ball, the returned game ball is bounced by the game ball placed on the shooting rail and falls from the shooting rail, and is collected as a foul ball by the foul ball collecting means. On the other hand, if the fired game ball returns before the next game ball is placed on the firing rail by the ball circulating means, the returned game ball will be placed on the firing rail, but the ball will not be placed on the firing rail. The next game ball supplied from the circulation means is bounced by the game ball placed on the firing rail, falls from the firing rail, and is collected by the foul ball collecting means as a foul ball. Therefore, in the player's held ball data, one game ball is subtracted from the held ball data by the held ball subtraction means when the ball is fired from the shooting rail, but even if the shot game ball returns to the shooting rail, Since only one game ball is placed on the launch rail, either the returning game ball or the next game ball becomes a foul ball and is collected by the foul ball collecting means, so it is difficult to hold it. The ball adding means adds one game ball to the held ball data, and the held ball data can be returned to the state before firing, eliminating the error with the actual number of game balls fired into the game area and playing the game. No one will be disadvantaged.

In addition, once a game ball is launched from the launch rail, the ball circulating means always supplies one game ball to the launch rail, so even if the launched game ball returns to the launch rail for some reason, the ball will not be recirculated. It is possible to reliably provide a game machine that can bounce the game balls supplied to the launch rail into foul balls by the means and exhibit the above-mentioned effects.

Furthermore, the ball circulation means supplies one game ball to the launch rail after the game ball launch operation, and the ball circulation means launches the game ball and the ball circulation means supplies the ball to the launch rail. Since it is possible to perform a series of operations for supplying game balls, for example, based on the presence or absence of game balls on the launch rail, the operation of the ball launch means and the ball circulation means, etc., the game balls launched will be placed on the launch rail. Compared to the case where it is determined whether or not the game machine has returned (the case where the determination is made by writing a program), the load on the control of the gaming machine can be reduced.

Furthermore, since the launch rail is long enough to hold only one game ball, there is a risk that the game ball may fall from the launch rail due to vibrations, etc. is 1 or more), if a game ball falls from the launch rail due to vibration, etc., even if it is mistakenly recognized as being fired as a result of the fall and the ball possession data (number of balls held) is subtracted, the foul ball recovery means By collecting the ball, one game ball can be added to the ball holding data by the ball holding adding means as a foul ball, and the state before the fall can be restored, so that the player is not disadvantaged.

Furthermore, since the length of the launch rail is such that only one game ball can be placed on it, if there is no ball holding data (the number of balls held is 0), a game ball may fall from the launch rail and cause a foul ball. When the game balls are collected by the collecting means, the ball holding adding means may not add the game balls to the ball holding data, or an alarm may be issued to the gaming hall where the gaming machine is installed.

In this way, according to the above solution, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can eliminate the error between the actual number of game balls fired into the gaming area and the number of game balls fired, which is caused by the fired game balls returning.

[15-1c. Relationship between solution means of first technical feature and embodiment]
The ball firing unit 550 of the main body frame 4 in this embodiment is connected to the ball firing means of the above-mentioned solving means, and the ball firing platform 552b of the ball firing unit 550 in this embodiment is connected to the firing rail of the above-mentioned solving means, and the foul unit in this embodiment is 570 is the foul ball collecting means of the above-mentioned solution means, and the circulation ball path unit 600, ball lifting unit 650, and ball feeding unit 700 of this embodiment are the ball circulation means of the above-mentioned solution means, and the frame control board of this embodiment is The held ball subtraction process in 740 corresponds to the held ball subtraction means of the above solution means, and the held ball addition process in the frame control board 740 of this embodiment corresponds to the held ball addition means of the above solving means.

[15-1d. Characteristic effects of the first technical feature]
According to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the game balls B fired from the ball firing unit 550 that fires the game balls B to the game area 5a of the game board 5 are sent to the foul unit 570, the circulating ball path unit 600, and the ball firing unit 550. The upper unit 650 and the ball feeding unit 700 collect the ball and supply it to the ball firing unit 550, and the game ball B is fired from the ball firing unit 550 based on the player's ball holding data (the number of balls held is 1 or more). That's what I do. In this pachinko machine 1 (so-called enclosed game machine, managed game machine), when the player has ball holding data (the number of balls held is 1 or more), the ball firing unit 550 fires the game area of the game board 5. When the game ball B is fired toward the player 5a, one game ball B is subtracted from the held ball data by ball holding subtraction processing, and the game ball B is supplied to the game area 5a, so that the game ball B is sent to the player. You can enjoy playing games. On the other hand, if the game ball B fired by the ball firing unit 550 is not supplied to the game area 5a, it is collected by the foul unit 570 as a foul ball, and the game ball B is added to the held ball data by the held ball addition process. Since the game ball B is not supplied to the game area 5a, the player does not suffer any disadvantage and can continue to enjoy the game.

If the fired game ball B returns to the ball launch pad 552b for some reason, since the ball launch pad 552b has a length that can accommodate only one game ball B, the ball feeding unit 700 If the next game ball B is already placed on the ball launch pad 552b, the returned game ball B will be bounced by the game ball B placed on the ball launch pad 552b and will fall from the ball launch pad 552b. The ball is collected as a foul ball by the foul unit 570. On the other hand, if the fired game ball B is returned before the next game ball B is placed on the ball launch pad 552b by the ball feeding unit 700, the returned game ball B is placed on the ball launch pad 552b. However, the next game ball B supplied from the ball feeding unit 700 is bounced by the game ball B placed on the ball launcher 552b and falls from the ball launcher 552b, resulting in a foul ball. It is collected by foul unit 570 as follows. Therefore, in the player's held ball data, one game ball B is subtracted from the held ball data by the ball held subtraction process because it is fired from the ball launcher 552b, but the fired game ball B does not reach the launch rail. Even if it returns, only one game ball B will be placed on the ball launcher 552b, so either the returned game ball B or the next game ball B will become a foul ball and will be sent to the foul unit. 570, one game ball B is added to the held ball data by the ball held addition process, and the held ball data can be returned to the state before firing, and the game ball B fired into the gaming area 5a The player will not be disadvantaged by eliminating the error with the real number B.

In addition, when the game ball B is launched from the ball launcher 552b, the ball feeding unit 700 always supplies one game ball B to the ball launcher 552b, so that the launched game ball B may not be released due to some reason. To surely provide a pachinko machine 1 which can be bounced into a foul ball by a game ball B supplied to a ball launcher 552b by a ball feeding unit 700 even when returning to the stand 552b, and exhibits the above-mentioned effects. Can be done.

Further, after the ball sending unit 700 has launched the game ball B, one game ball B is supplied to the ball launcher 552b, so that the ball firing unit 550 can launch the game ball B, and the ball transport unit 700 can fire the game ball B. Since supplying the game ball B to the launch pad 552b is a series of operations, for example, based on the presence or absence of the game ball B on the ball launch pad 552b, the operations of the ball launch unit 550 and the ball feeding unit 700, etc. Compared to the case where it is determined whether or not the fired game ball B has returned to the ball launcher 552b (the case where the determination is made by writing a program), the load on the control of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced. can.

Furthermore, since the ball launching pad 552b is long enough to place only one game ball B, there is a risk that the game ball B may fall from the ball launching pad 552b due to vibrations, etc. If the game ball B falls from the ball launcher 552b due to vibration etc. in a certain state (the number of balls held is 1 or more), as a result of the fall, it will be mistakenly recognized as being fired, and the ball held data (number of balls held) will be subtracted. Even if the game ball B is collected by the foul unit 570, it is possible to add one game ball B to the held ball data as a foul ball through the held ball addition process and return it to the state before it fell, putting the player at a disadvantage. It won't happen.

In addition, if the game ball B falls from the ball launching pad 552b and is collected by the foul unit 570 in a state where there is no held ball data (the number of balls held is 0), the held ball data is added to the held ball data by the ball held addition process. The game ball B may not be added, or an alarm may be issued to the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

[15-2. Second technical feature]
The present specification has the following technical features different from those described above.

[15-2a. Background of the second technical feature]
As a game machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a main body frame that removably supports the game board, a ball circulation means provided on the main body frame for circulating game balls within the game machine, and a ball circulation means on the rear surface of the main body frame. A device including a board unit attached to a lower part than the game board has been proposed (for example, Patent Document B: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-188537). According to the technology of Patent Document B, the board unit having the control board for controlling the ball circulating means etc. is provided below the game board, so the depth direction of the game board can be utilized as much as possible. , it becomes possible to further differentiate the game machine from other gaming machines.

However, in the technology disclosed in Patent Document B, a part of the ball circulating means is located between the rear surface of the main body frame and the board unit, and it is difficult to check or maintain the part. However, there was a problem in that it was necessary to remove the board unit, which required time and effort for maintenance. To solve this problem, it is possible to improve maintainability by providing a rear unit such as a board unit that can be opened and closed with respect to the main body frame, but it is possible to eliminate the trouble of removing it and improve maintenance. Doing so may cause problems.

Therefore, in view of the above-mentioned circumstances, the following measures provide a gaming machine that can prevent forgetting to close the rear unit, which is provided on the rear side of the main body frame so that it can be opened and closed, during maintenance, etc. Take it as a challenge.

[15-2b. Means for solving the second technical feature]
Means 1: In a gaming machine,
``A main body frame that removably supports a game board having a game area where games are played using game balls from the front;
a back cover that is provided so as to be openable and closable rearward with respect to the main body frame so as to cover the game board supported by the main body frame from the rear;
a ball firing means provided on the main body frame and capable of supplying game balls to the game area;
a ball circulating means that collects the game balls fired by the ball firing means and supplies them again to the ball firing means;
A gaming machine, which causes the ball firing means to fire a game ball based on ball holding data of a player converted into data,
The main body frame further includes a rear unit that is provided in a region below the game board on the rear surface of the main body frame so as to be openable and closable to the rear,
The rear unit is provided so as to interfere with the back cover when attempting to close the back cover to the main body frame while it is open from the main body frame.
It is characterized by being something.

Here, the "rear unit" includes "a board unit having a frame control board for controlling the ball firing means, the ball circulating means, etc., a power supply board for supplying electric power, etc.", "the ball circulating means, etc." Examples include "a ball passage unit that forms part of a ball passage in", "a speaker unit having a speaker", and "a protective cover that protects the rear side of a board, passage member, etc.".

According to the configuration of means 1, there is a main body frame that removably supports a game board having a game area where games are played using game balls from the front, and a main body that covers the game board supported by the main body frame from the rear. A back cover that can be opened and closed backwards with respect to the frame, a ball firing means that is provided on the main body frame and that can supply game balls to the playing area, and a collection of game balls fired by the ball firing means. A game machine comprising a ball circulating means for supplying the balls to the ball firing means again, the game machine causing the ball firing means to fire game balls based on the player's ball holding data converted into data, The device further includes a rear unit that can be opened and closed backwards at a portion below the game board on the rear surface of the main body frame, and the rear unit closes the back cover to the main body frame while being opened from the main body frame. If you try to reference).

As a result, the ball circulation means collects the game balls ejected from the ball ejection means that ejects the game balls into the game area of the game board and supplies them to the ball ejection means. In a game machine (so-called enclosed type game machine, managed game machine) in which a game ball is fired from a ball firing means based on the number of balls (1 or more), a part below the game board on the rear surface of the main body frame. Since the rear unit is provided, by using a member provided at the rear of the game board in a conventional game machine as the rear unit of this configuration, the depth direction of the game board can be increased by the amount of the member. As a gaming machine that has a wide gaming board in the depth direction, it is possible to differentiate the gaming machine from other gaming machines, and it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is highly appealing to players. Since the rear unit can be opened and closed, by opening the rear unit to the rear, you can check the parts installed in front of the rear unit at the rear of the main body frame, the front side of the rear unit, etc. It is possible to carry out maintenance work, and the workability related to maintenance etc. can be improved. At this time, the rear unit and the back cover interfere with (contact) each other, so when performing maintenance etc., first open the back cover and then open the rear unit, and when the maintenance etc. are completed, , close the rear unit and then close the back cover. Therefore, if you try to close the back cover that covers the back of the game board while the rear unit is open with respect to the main body frame, the rear unit that is not closed will interfere with the back cover, which means that the rear unit that is not closed will interfere with the back cover. Since the back cover is prevented from being closed by the closed rear unit, it is possible to make the user aware that the rear unit is not closed, and it is possible to prevent forgetting to close it during maintenance or the like.

In addition, since the rear unit and the back cover interfere with each other, even if the rear unit tries to open from the main body frame due to vibration or other reasons during gaming, it will interfere with (be blocked by) the back cover. , it is possible to avoid the rear unit from opening wide, and it is possible to prevent the occurrence of problems due to the rear unit opening.

In addition, it is desirable that the rear unit be provided so that at least a part of the ball circulation means can be viewed from the rear by opening from the main body frame. As a result, by opening the rear unit relative to the main body frame, the part between the main body frame and the rear unit in the ball circulation means can be checked and maintained, and problems in the ball circulation means can be resolved. It can be made easier. Even if you forget to close the rear unit against the main body frame after maintenance, etc., when you try to close the back cover, the unclosed rear unit and back cover may interfere with (contact) and close. This prevents the rear unit from being closed, making it possible to notice that the rear unit is not closed, thereby preventing forgetting to close it during maintenance or the like.

In addition, the gaming machine is provided with a locking means that is movable between a locked position and a released position, and locks the rear unit so that it cannot be opened or closed when the rear unit is moved to the locked position with the rear unit closed relative to the main body frame. , the locking means is provided so as to move to the locking position when the back cover is closed relative to the main body frame in the released position and with the rear unit closed relative to the main body frame. It's okay. As a result, if the locking means is moved to the lock position with the rear unit closed relative to the main body frame, the rear unit can be locked so that it cannot be opened or closed. It is possible to prevent the rear unit from opening, and prevent problems caused by the rear unit opening. In addition, even if you forget to lock the rear unit with the locking means after closing the rear unit against the main body frame at the end of maintenance, etc., the locking means can be moved to the locking position and locked by closing the back cover. Therefore, forgetting to lock the lock can be prevented.

Furthermore, when a locking means as described above is provided, the locking means is designed to move between the locking position and the release position, so by checking the position of the locking means, it is possible to determine whether or not it is locked. It can be easily identified and it is possible to prevent forgetting to lock the lock.

Furthermore, the gaming machine further includes a frame-shaped outer frame that supports the main body frame so that the main body frame can be opened and closed forward, and the back cover has the main body frame open with respect to the outer frame, On the other hand, the main body frame may be provided so as to interfere with the outer frame when attempting to close the main body frame to the outer frame while the back cover is open. This allows you to check the rear side of the main frame by opening the main frame forward relative to the outer frame with the outer frame attached to the island equipment of the game hall, and in this state, open the back cover. This allows you to check the back side of the game board, and when you open the rear unit, you can check the parts between the main body frame and the rear unit, improving work efficiency such as checking and maintenance. be able to. When closing the main body frame against the outer frame, if you try to close the back cover without closing the rear unit, the back cover will interfere with (contact) the rear unit and you will not be able to close it. It can remind you if you forget to close the rear unit, and prevent you from forgetting to close the rear unit. Furthermore, if you try to close the body frame against the outer frame when the rear unit is closed and the back cover is open, or when both the rear unit and the back cover are open, the back cover may interfere with the outer frame. (contact) and are prevented from closing, it is possible to make the user aware that the back cover, etc. is open, and it is possible to prevent forgetting to close the back cover, etc.

Means 2: In the configuration of means 1,
"The rear unit is
By opening from the main body frame, at least a part of the ball circulation means is provided so as to be visible from the rear.
It is characterized by being something.

According to the configuration of means 2, the rear unit is provided so that at least a part of the bulb circulation means can be seen from the rear by opening from the main body frame ([Details of the Invention] ), see the description regarding the circulating ball path unit 600, the ball lifting unit 650, the frame board unit 730, etc.).

As a result, by opening the rear unit relative to the main body frame, it is possible to check and perform maintenance on the part between the main body frame and the rear unit in the ball circulation means, and to eliminate problems in the ball circulation means. It can be made easier. Even if you forget to close the rear unit against the main body frame after maintenance, etc., when you try to close the back cover, the unclosed rear unit and back cover may interfere with (contact) and close. This prevents the rear unit from being closed, making it possible to notice that the rear unit is not closed, thereby preventing forgetting to close it during maintenance or the like.

Means 3: In the configuration of means 1 or 2,
"a locking means that is movable between a lock position and a release position and that locks the rear unit so that it cannot be opened or closed when the rear unit is moved to the lock position with the rear unit closed relative to the main body frame; Furthermore, it is equipped with
The locking means is
When the back cover is closed with respect to the main body frame in the released position and with the rear unit closed with respect to the main body frame, the rear cover is moved to the lock position.
It is characterized by being something.

Here, the term "locking means" refers to "a device that is fixed by pushing the operating section into the locking position when the back cover comes into contact with it and expanding the diameter of the tip (for example, a Nylatch)", "a device that fixes the operating section by expanding the diameter of the tip (such as a Nylatch)" A device whose side is rotatably supported and has a lock piece that rotates from the release position to the locked position when the back cover comes into contact with the other end on the opposite side.” A device that has a pressing piece that presses the rear unit against the main body frame when the rear unit moves from the released position to the locked position when the back cover comes into contact with the unit. Examples include those that have a lock pin that is inserted into the rear unit or main body frame from a direction that intersects with the rear cover, and those that slide from the release position to the lock position when the back cover comes into contact with them.

According to the configuration of means 3, the gaming machine is movable between the lock position and the release position, and when the rear unit is moved to the lock position with the rear unit closed with respect to the main body frame, the rear unit cannot be opened or closed. The locking means moves to the locking position when the back cover is closed relative to the main body frame while the rear unit is in the released position and the rear unit is closed relative to the main body frame. (See the description regarding the back cover 505 and the nylon latch 774 in [Detailed Description of the Invention]).

As a result, if the locking means is moved to the lock position with the rear unit closed relative to the main body frame, the rear unit can be locked so that it cannot be opened or closed. It is possible to prevent the rear unit from opening, and prevent problems caused by the rear unit opening. In addition, even if you forget to lock the rear unit with the locking means after closing the rear unit against the main body frame at the end of maintenance, etc., the locking means can be moved to the locking position and locked by closing the back cover. Therefore, forgetting to lock the lock can be prevented.

In addition, since the locking means is designed to move between the locking position and the release position, it is possible to easily determine whether or not it is locked by checking the position of the locking means. This will prevent you from forgetting to do so.

Means 4: In any one configuration from means 1 to means 3,
"It further includes a frame-shaped outer frame that supports the main body frame so that it can be opened and closed forward,"
The back cover is
When the main body frame is open to the outer frame and the back cover is open to the main body frame, attempting to close the main body frame to the outer frame interferes with the outer frame. It is set up so that
It is characterized by being something.

According to the configuration of means 4, the gaming machine further includes a frame-shaped outer frame that supports the main body frame so that the main body frame can be opened and closed forward, and the back cover has the main body frame open with respect to the outer frame, In addition, when the back cover is open with respect to the main body frame and the main body frame is attempted to be closed to the outer frame, it is provided so as to interfere with the outer frame ([Detailed Description of the Invention] Now, refer to the description regarding the back cover 505).

This allows you to check the rear side of the main frame by opening the main frame forward relative to the outer frame with the outer frame attached to the island equipment of the game hall, and in this state, open the back cover. This allows you to check the back side of the game board, and when you open the rear unit, you can check the parts between the main body frame and the rear unit, improving work efficiency such as checking and maintenance. be able to. When closing the main body frame against the outer frame, if you try to close the back cover without closing the rear unit, the back cover will interfere with (contact) the rear unit and you will not be able to close it. It can remind you if you forget to close the rear unit, and prevent you from forgetting to close the rear unit. Furthermore, if you try to close the body frame against the outer frame when the rear unit is closed and the back cover is open, or when both the rear unit and the back cover are open, the back cover may interfere with the outer frame. (contact) and are prevented from closing, it is possible to make the user aware that the back cover, etc. is open, and it is possible to prevent forgetting to close the back cover, etc.

Means 5: In a gaming machine,
"A frame-shaped outer frame,
a main body frame that is supported so as to be openable and closable in the front with respect to the outer frame, and that supports a game board that can be detached from the front and has a game area where games are played using game balls;
a back cover that is provided so as to be openable and closable rearward with respect to the main body frame so as to cover the game board supported by the main body frame from the rear;
a ball firing means provided on the main body frame and capable of supplying game balls to the game area;
a ball circulating means that collects the game balls fired by the ball firing means and supplies them again to the ball firing means;
A gaming machine, which causes the ball firing means to fire a game ball based on ball holding data of a player converted into data,
A rear unit is provided in a region below the game board on the rear surface of the main body frame so as to be openable and closable to the rear, and when opened from the main body frame, at least a part of the ball circulating means becomes visible from the rear. ,
a locking means that is movable between a lock position and a release position, and locks the rear unit so that it cannot be opened or closed when the rear unit is moved to the lock position with the rear unit closed with respect to the main body frame;
Furthermore, it is equipped with
The rear unit is provided so as to interfere with the back cover when attempting to close the back cover to the main body frame while being opened from the main body frame,
The locking means is configured to move to the locking position when the back cover is closed with respect to the main body frame in the released position and with the rear unit closed with respect to the main body frame. has been
The back cover is configured such that when the main body frame is open to the outer frame and the back cover is open to the main body frame and the main body frame is attempted to be closed to the outer frame, the main body frame is opened to the outer frame. It is set up so as to interfere with the outer frame.”
It is characterized by being something.

According to the configuration of the means 5, a game board is detachably supported from the front and has a frame-shaped outer frame and a game board that is supported to be openable and closable in the front with respect to the outer frame and has a game area where games are played using game balls. a back cover that can be opened and closed backwards with respect to the main body frame so as to cover the game board supported by the main body frame from behind; A ball firing means capable of supplying game balls, and a ball circulating means that collects the game balls fired by the ball firing means and supplies them again to the ball firing means, and data on balls held by a player is converted into data. A game machine that fires game balls by a ball firing means based on the above, and is provided with a part below the game board on the rear surface of the main body frame that can be opened and closed backwards, and that can be opened and closed from the main body frame. At least a part of the ball circulation means is made visible from the rear in the rear unit, and the rear unit is movable between a lock position and a release position, and the rear unit is moved to the lock position while being closed with respect to the main body frame. and a locking means for locking the rear unit so that it cannot be opened or closed, so that when the rear unit is opened from the body frame and the back cover is attempted to be closed to the body frame, the rear unit interferes with the back cover. The locking means is provided so as to move to the locking position when the back cover is closed relative to the main body frame in the released position and with the rear unit closed relative to the main body frame. The main body frame is open to the outer frame, and if you try to close the main body frame to the outer frame with the back cover open to the main body frame, the back cover will interfere with the outer frame. It is provided in

As a result, the ball circulation means collects the game balls ejected from the ball ejection means that ejects the game balls into the game area of the game board and supplies them to the ball ejection means. In a game machine (so-called enclosed type game machine, managed game machine) in which game balls are fired from a ball firing means based on the number of balls (1 or more), a part below the game board on the rear surface of the main body frame. Since the rear unit is provided, by using a member provided at the rear of the game board in a conventional game machine as the rear unit of this configuration, the depth direction of the game board can be increased by the amount of the member. As a gaming machine that has a wide gaming board in the depth direction, it is possible to differentiate the gaming machine from other gaming machines, and it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is highly appealing to players. In this game machine, when the outer frame is attached to the island equipment of the game hall, you can open the main body frame forward relative to the outer frame to check the rear side of the main body frame. When opened, you can check the rear side of the game board, and when you open the rear unit, you can also see the area between the main body frame and the rear unit in the ball circulation means, and the front of the rear unit on the rear surface of the main body frame. The installed members, the front side of the rear unit, etc. can be checked and maintained, and the workability related to maintenance etc. can be improved.

When closing the main body frame against the outer frame, if you try to close the back cover without closing the rear unit, the back cover will interfere with (contact) the rear unit and you will not be able to close it. It can remind you if you forget to close the rear unit, and prevent you from forgetting to close the rear unit. Furthermore, if you try to close the body frame against the outer frame when the rear unit is closed and the back cover is open, or when both the rear unit and the back cover are open, the back cover may interfere with the outer frame. (contact) and are prevented from closing, it is possible to make the user aware that the back cover, etc. is open, and it is possible to prevent forgetting to close the back cover, etc. For this reason, it is possible to prevent forgetting to close the rear unit or back cover during maintenance or the like.

In addition, since the rear unit and the back cover are designed to interfere with (contact) each other, even if the rear unit tries to open from the main body frame due to vibration or other reasons during gaming, it will interfere with the back cover (will not be prevented). By doing so, it is possible to avoid the rear unit from opening wide, and it is possible to prevent problems caused by the rear unit opening.

Additionally, if the locking means is moved to the lock position with the rear unit closed against the main body frame, the rear unit can be locked so that it cannot be opened or closed, so the rear unit may open automatically due to vibration or other reasons. This can prevent problems caused by the rear unit opening. In addition, even if you forget to lock the rear unit with the locking means after closing the rear unit against the main body frame at the end of maintenance, etc., the locking means can be moved to the locking position and locked by closing the back cover. Therefore, forgetting to lock the lock can be prevented.

Furthermore, since the locking means is designed to move between the locking position and the release position, by checking the position of the locking means, it is possible to easily determine whether or not it is locked. This will prevent you from forgetting to do so.

As described above, according to the above solution, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which it is possible to prevent forgetting to close the rear unit, which is provided on the rear side of the main body frame so as to be openable and closable, during maintenance or the like. I can do it.

[15-2c. Relationship between solution means of second technical feature and embodiment]
The ball firing unit 550 of the main body frame 4 in this embodiment is the ball firing means of the above-mentioned solution, and the foul unit 570, circulation ball path unit 600, ball lifting unit 650, and ball feeding unit 700 in this embodiment are the above-mentioned solution. The frame substrate unit 730 in this embodiment is the rear unit of the solution, the nylatch 774 in this embodiment is the locking device of the solution, and the back cover 505 in this embodiment is the ball circulation means of the solution. They correspond to the back cover of .

[15-2d. Characteristic effects of the second technical feature]
According to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the game balls B fired from the ball firing unit 550 that fires the game balls B to the game area 5a of the game board 5 are sent to the foul unit 570, the circulating ball path unit 600, and the ball firing unit 550. The upper unit 650 and the ball feeding unit 700 collect the ball and supply it to the ball firing unit 550, and the game ball B is fired from the ball firing unit 550 based on the player's ball holding data (the number of balls held is 1 or more). In the pachinko machine 1 (so-called enclosed game machine, managed game machine), a frame board unit 730 as a rear unit is provided at a lower part of the rear surface of the main body frame 4 than the game board 5. By using the frame board unit 730 of this embodiment as the member provided at the rear of the game board in a conventional pachinko machine, the depth direction of the game board 5 can be increased by the amount of the member, and the depth direction As a pachinko machine 1 having a wide game board 5, it is possible to further differentiate the pachinko machine from other pachinko machines, and it is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing to players. In this pachinko machine 1, when the main body frame 4 is opened forward relative to the outer frame 2 with the outer frame 2 attached to the island equipment of the game hall, the rear side of the main body frame 4 can be confirmed. In this state, when the back cover 505 is opened, the rear side of the game board 5 can be checked, and when the frame board unit 730 is further opened, the main body frame speaker 503, the main body frame speaker box 504, and the circulation ball path unit 600 can be seen. , the front side of the ball lifting unit 650, the substrate unit 730, etc. can be checked and maintained, and workability related to maintenance etc. can be improved.

Then, when closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, if you try to close the back cover 505 without closing the frame board unit 730, the back cover 505 will interfere with (contact) the frame board unit 730 and close it. Therefore, it is possible to make the user aware of forgetting to close the frame board unit 730, and to prevent forgetting to close the frame board unit 730. Furthermore, if you try to close the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 with the frame board unit 730 closed and the back cover 505 open, or with both the frame board unit 730 and the back cover 505 open, Since the back cover 505 interferes with (contacts) the outer frame 2 and is prevented from closing, it is possible to make the user aware that the back cover 505 etc. are open, thereby preventing forgetting to close the back cover 505 etc. be able to. For this reason, it is possible to prevent forgetting to close the frame board unit 730 or the back cover 505 during maintenance or the like.

Furthermore, since the frame board unit 730 and the back cover 505 interfere with (contact) each other, even if the frame board unit 730 tries to open from the main body frame 4 due to vibration or other reasons during a game, the back cover By interfering with (blocking) the frame substrate unit 505, it is possible to prevent the frame substrate unit 730 from opening wide, and it is possible to prevent the occurrence of problems due to the frame substrate unit 730 opening.

Further, when the frame board unit 730 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, if the nylatch 774 as a locking means is pressed and moved to the lock position, the frame board unit 730 can be locked so that it cannot be opened or closed. It is possible to prevent the frame substrate unit 730 from opening by itself due to some reason such as vibration, and it is possible to prevent the occurrence of problems due to the frame substrate unit 730 opening. In addition, even if you forget to lock the Nylatch 774 after closing the frame board unit 730 with respect to the main body frame 4 at the end of maintenance, etc., by closing the back cover 505, the Nylatch 774 can be moved to the lock position and locked. This makes it possible to prevent forgetting to lock the lock.

Furthermore, since the Nylatch 774 as a locking means is designed to move between the locked position and the release position, it is easy to check whether the Nylatch 774 is locked or not by checking the position of the operating part 774a of the Nylatch 774. This can be used to prevent forgetting to lock the lock.

[15-3. Third technical feature]
The present specification has the following technical features different from those described above.

[15-3a. Background of the third technical feature]
In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a ball sensor having a detection hole is installed in a vertically extending part of a ball path through which game balls flow, and detects game balls flowing through the ball path. (For example, Patent Document C: Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2016-96868).

By the way, if a ball sensor having a detection hole as in Patent Document C is provided in a part of the ball passage where game balls flow in the left-right direction (or back-and-forth direction), the passage becomes narrow at the part of the detection hole. Therefore, there is a risk that the distribution speed of game balls may decrease or ball clogging may occur. Therefore, it is possible to use a photosensor that does not have a detection hole as a ball sensor, but if the inner circumference of the ball path is square, the game ball will be more likely to swing in the width direction of the ball path. Frequent contact with the side walls can cause them to become worn or scratched, making them prone to dirt, dust, etc., and these dirt can interfere with the photosensor's ability to receive and emit light, leading to false detections. be.

Therefore, in view of the above-mentioned actual situation, the following means aims to provide a gaming machine that can reduce false detection of gaming balls circulating in a ball path.

[15-3b. Means for solving the third technical feature]
Means 1: In a gaming machine,
"A game board having a game area where games are played using game balls,
Ball firing means capable of supplying game balls to the game area of the game board;
a ball circulating means that collects the game balls fired by the ball firing means and supplies them again to the ball firing means;
A gaming machine, which causes the ball firing means to fire a game ball based on ball holding data of a player converted into data,
The sphere circulation means is
A ball passageway where game balls are distributed,
It has a photosensor that detects game balls circulating in the ball path,
The ball passage is
At least the portion where the photosensor is provided is provided so as to touch at two points below the center of the game ball.
It is characterized by being something.

Here, the part in the ball path that "contacts at two points below the center of the game ball" is defined as "a part that has a pair of sloped surfaces that are inclined so that the distance increases as they move upward (the cross section is V ``shaped, inverted trapezoidal shape with a cross section that narrows downward, etc.'', and ``having a pair of protrusions extending in the distribution direction at an interval narrower than the diameter of the gaming machine.''

According to the structure of the means 1, there is a game board having a game area where games are played using game balls, a ball firing means capable of supplying game balls to the game area of the game board, and collecting the game balls fired by the ball firing means. A game machine comprising a ball circulating means for supplying the balls to the ball firing means again, the game machine causing the ball firing means to fire game balls based on the player's ball holding data converted into data, The ball circulation means includes a ball passage through which game balls circulate, and a photosensor that detects the game balls flowing through the ball passage, and the ball passage has at least a portion where the photosensor is provided. , is provided so as to touch at two points below the center of the game ball (in [Detailed Description of the Invention], chapter [4-5. Ball Lifting Unit], Fig. 52 and the description in FIG. 53, etc.).

As a result, the ball circulation means collects the game balls ejected from the ball ejection means that ejects the game balls into the game area of the game board and supplies them to the ball ejection means. In a game machine (so-called enclosed type game machine, managed game machine) in which a game ball is fired from a ball firing means based on the number of balls (1 or more), at least a portion of a photosensor in a ball path through which game balls circulate. Since the game balls are in contact with each other at two points below the center, the game balls will not swing in the width direction of the ball path at the photo sensor area, and the game balls will come into contact with the side walls of the ball path. It is possible to avoid generation of dirt such as dirt and dust due to abrasion or scratching of the side wall. Therefore, dirt such as dirt and dust in the ball passage can be reduced as much as possible, thereby preventing false detection from occurring due to dirt or the like obstructing the reception and emission of the photosensor. It is possible to provide a game machine that can reduce false detection of game balls circulating in a ball path.

In addition, since the game ball does not swing in the width direction of the ball path at least at the photo sensor location in the ball path, the positional relationship between the photo sensor and the game ball can be kept constant, and the To eliminate false detection and to reliably detect game balls circulating in a ball path.

In addition, a pair of sloped surfaces are provided in the ball path at least in the area where the photosensor is provided, and the game balls are in contact with each other, and the slopes are inclined so that the distance increases as they move upward. The first shaped passage section may have a first shape passage section. As a result, the game ball is brought into contact with a pair of inclined surfaces in the first shape passage section where the photosensor is provided in the ball passage, so compared to the case where the game ball is brought into contact with a pair of protrusions. As a result, it is possible to reduce wear and scratches on the contact area caused by the game ball, prevent the generation of dirt such as dirt and dust, and reduce erroneous detection of the game ball by the photo sensor.

In addition, as mentioned above, when the first shaped passage section is provided in the ball passageway, since a pair of inclined surfaces are provided in the first shaped passage part of the ball passageway, dirt such as dirt and dust is prevented by contact with the game balls. Even if dirt occurs, the sloped surface can guide the dirt below the contact area with the game ball, reducing the influence of dirt on the photosensor, and preventing dirt from adhering to the game ball. It can be avoided.

Further, the ball passage may have an opening that is provided upstream of the portion where the photosensor is provided and opens downward with a size that does not impede the flow of game balls. As a result, dirt such as dirt and dust in the ball passage can be discharged to the outside from the opening, reducing the influence of dirt on the photosensor, and preventing game balls caused by dirt on the photosensor. false positive detection can be reduced.

Furthermore, the ball passage is provided at least on the downstream side or upstream side of the portion where the photosensor is provided, and is in contact with the game ball and has a flat bottom surface having a width larger than the diameter of the game ball, and a flat bottom surface in the width direction of the bottom surface. The second shaped passage portion may have a pair of side wall surfaces standing up from both ends. As a result, at least one of the downstream side and the upstream side of the portion where the photosensor is provided in the ball passage is made into a second shape passage portion consisting of a flat bottom surface and a pair of side wall surfaces. When a plurality of game balls stop at the part, they are pushed by the game balls on the upstream side, so that the game balls are lined up from the downstream side so as to alternately contact the pair of side wall surfaces. In other words, when a plurality of game balls stop in the second shape passage, they are arranged in a staggered manner and are not lined up in a line on the axis of the ball passage. Therefore, a part of the ball pressure of the game balls to the downstream side can be released alternately to the side wall surfaces in contact with each other, so compared to the case where multiple game balls are lined up in a row on the axis, It is possible to reduce the ball pressure applied to the member in which the ball is stopped, making the member less likely to be damaged, and there is no need to excessively reinforce the member, thereby suppressing an increase in the cost of the gaming machine. can.

In addition, if the flow of game balls can be temporarily stopped in the part of the ball path where the photosensor is installed, if the detection time and non-detection time of the game ball by the photosensor exceeds a predetermined threshold, The presence or absence of a game ball may be determined at a portion of the ball path where the game ball stops. By the way, to detect a game ball in a prize opening, etc., check the output from the photosensor (ball sensor) at every predetermined interrupt cycle (for example, 4ms), and determine whether the output is non-detected, detected, detected, or (in other words) Then, when the result is "011", it is determined that a game ball has been detected (ON). That is, when the output from the photosensor is "011", it is determined to be ON, and when the output is other than "011", it is determined to be OFF. However, if the presence or absence of game balls is determined by the determination method described above in a photosensor installed in a part where the flow of game balls temporarily stops (stopping part), the photosensor will , when there are no game balls in the parking area, only OFF occurs, and when game balls are supplied to the parking area, ON occurs frequently at short intervals, and the game balls stored in the parking area are turned on one by one. If the ball is moving (the game ball is moving at the firing interval), many short-interval OFFs will occur. Therefore, with the above-described determination method, it has not been possible to accurately determine that there are no game balls in the parking area. On the other hand, the presence or absence of a game ball is determined when the detection time and non-detection time of the game ball by the photosensor exceed a predetermined threshold. In other words, thresholds are set for ON (present) determination and OFF (absent) determination, respectively, and only when non-detection or detection continues beyond the threshold, ON or OFF is determined. That is, for example, when the output from the photosensor is "01111...", it is determined to be ON, and when the output from the photosensor is "10000...", it is determined to be OFF. Thereby, the presence or absence of game balls can be reliably determined at the stop portion of the ball path where a plurality of game balls stop.

Means 2: In the configuration of means 1,
"The ball passage is
A first-shaped passage portion is provided at least in a portion where the photosensor is provided, and has a pair of sloped surfaces, each of which the game ball contacts, and which slopes so that the distance increases as it goes upward. , have'
It is characterized by being something.

According to the configuration of means 2, the ball passage is provided at least in the portion where the photosensor is provided, and the game ball is in contact with each of them, and the ball path is inclined so that the distance increases as it goes upward. The device has a first-shaped passage portion having a pair of inclined surfaces (in the [Detailed Description] (See the description regarding the V-shaped passage portion 652a of the passage 652).

As a result, the game ball is brought into contact with a pair of inclined surfaces in the first shape passage section where the photosensor is provided in the ball passage, so compared to the case where the game ball is brought into contact with a pair of protrusions. As a result, it is possible to reduce wear and scratches on the contact area caused by the game ball, prevent the generation of dirt such as dirt and dust, and reduce erroneous detection of the game ball by the photo sensor.

In addition, since a pair of sloped surfaces are provided in the first shape passage section of the ball path, even if dirt such as dirt or dust is generated due to contact with the game ball, the sloped surface directs the dirt to the area in contact with the game ball. This allows the ball to be guided further downward, thereby reducing the influence of dirt on the photosensor, and also preventing dirt from adhering to the game ball.

Means 3: In the configuration of means 1 or 2,
"The ball passage is
It is provided on the upstream side of the part where the photosensor is provided, and has an opening that opens downward and has a size that does not impede the flow of game balls.
It is characterized by being something.

According to the configuration of means 3, the ball passage has an opening that is provided upstream of the portion where the photosensor is provided and that opens downward and has a size that does not impede the flow of game balls. (Refer to the description regarding the ball lift upper inlet ground metal plate 655 and the ball lift upper exit earth plate metal 656 in [Detailed Description of the Invention]).

As a result, dirt such as dirt and dust in the ball passage can be discharged to the outside from the opening, reducing the influence of dirt on the photosensor, and preventing game balls caused by dirt on the photosensor. false positive detection can be reduced.

Means 4: In any one configuration from means 1 to means 3,
"The ball passage is
It is provided on at least one of the downstream side or upstream side of the part where the photosensor is provided, and has a flat bottom surface that is in contact with the game ball and has a width larger than the diameter of the game ball, and from both widthwise ends of the bottom surface. and a pair of upright side wall surfaces.
It is characterized by being something.

By the way, if the shape of the ball path is such that the game balls touch at two points below the center, the game balls will not swing in the width direction of the ball path, as described above, When the game balls stop, the plurality of game balls are lined up in a line on the axis of the ball path. Therefore, large ball pressure from the plurality of game balls will be applied to the member that holds the plurality of game balls, and there is a risk that the member will be easily damaged.In order to avoid damage, it is necessary to reinforce the member. Costs may increase.

According to the configuration of means 4, the ball passage is provided at least on one side of the downstream side or the upstream side of the portion where the photosensor is provided, and has a flat bottom surface that is in contact with the game ball and has a width larger than the diameter of the game ball. , a pair of side wall surfaces erected from both ends in the width direction of the bottom surface (in the [Detailed Description of the Invention]) (See the description regarding the U-shaped passage portion 651b of the inlet passage 651 and the U-shaped passage portion 652b of the ball lifting exit passage 652).

As a result, at least one of the downstream side and the upstream side of the portion where the photosensor is provided in the ball passage is made into a second shape passage portion consisting of a flat bottom surface and a pair of side wall surfaces. When a plurality of game balls stop at the part, they are pushed by the game balls on the upstream side, so that the game balls are lined up from the downstream side so as to alternately contact the pair of side wall surfaces. In other words, when a plurality of game balls stop in the second shape passage, they are arranged in a staggered manner and are not lined up in a line on the axis of the ball passage. Therefore, a part of the ball pressure of the game balls to the downstream side can be released alternately to the side wall surfaces in contact with each other, so compared to the case where multiple game balls are lined up in a row on the axis, It is possible to reduce the ball pressure applied to the member in which the ball is stopped, making the member less likely to be damaged, and there is no need to excessively reinforce the member, thereby suppressing an increase in the cost of the gaming machine. can.

Note that the second shaped passage portion may be provided only on the downstream side of the photosensor, may be provided only on the upstream side of the photosensor, or may be provided on both the downstream side and the upstream side of the photosensor. . In the case of a ball passage in which many game balls are parked downstream of the photosensor, it is desirable to provide the second shaped passage section at least downstream of the photosensor.

Means 5: In a gaming machine,
"A game board having a game area where games are played using game balls,
Ball firing means capable of supplying game balls to the game area of the game board;
a ball circulating means that collects the game balls fired by the ball firing means and supplies them again to the ball firing means;
A gaming machine, which causes the ball firing means to fire a game ball based on ball holding data of a player converted into data,
The sphere circulation means is
A ball passageway where game balls are distributed,
It has a photosensor that detects game balls circulating in the ball path,
The ball passage is
The photo sensor is provided in the area where the photo sensor is provided, and the game ball contacts each of the game balls at two points below the center of the game ball, and tilts so that the distance increases toward the top. a first shape passage having a pair of inclined surfaces;
an opening provided on the upstream side of the first shaped passage section and opening downward with a size that does not impede the flow of game balls;
A flat bottom surface is provided on at least one of the downstream side and the upstream side of the first shaped passage section, and is in contact with the game ball and has a width larger than the diameter of the game ball, and is erected from both widthwise ends of the bottom surface. a second-shaped passage having a pair of side wall surfaces that are
It is characterized by being something.

According to the structure of the means 5, there is a game board having a game area where games are played with game balls, a ball firing means capable of supplying game balls to the game area of the game board, and collecting the game balls fired by the ball firing means. A game machine comprising: a ball circulation means for supplying the ball to the ball firing means again, and causing the ball firing means to fire a game ball based on ball holding data of a player converted into data, The ball circulation means includes a ball path through which game balls circulate, and a photosensor that detects the game balls flowing through the ball path, and the ball path is provided at a location where the photosensor is provided. A first shape having a pair of inclined surfaces, each of which is in contact with the game ball at two points below the center of the game ball, and which is inclined so that the distance increases as it goes upward. a passage, an opening provided on the upstream side of the first shaped passage and opening downward with a size that does not impede the flow of game balls, and an opening on the downstream or upstream side of the first shaped passage. A second shape passage portion provided on at least one side and having a flat bottom surface that is in contact with the game ball and has a width larger than the diameter of the game ball, and a pair of side wall surfaces that are erected from both ends of the bottom surface in the width direction. .

As a result, the ball circulation means collects the game balls ejected from the ball ejection means that ejects the game balls into the game area of the game board and supplies them to the ball ejection means. In a game machine (so-called enclosed type game machine, managed game machine) in which a game ball is fired from a ball firing means based on the number of balls (1 or more), at least a portion of a photosensor in a ball path through which game balls circulate. is a first shaped passage having a pair of sloped surfaces that are inclined so that the distance increases as they move upward, and the game ball is brought into contact with the pair of sloped surfaces at two points below the center thereof. Therefore, the game ball does not swing in the width direction of the ball path at the photosensor area, and the game ball contacts the side wall of the ball path and wears or scratches the side wall, causing dirt such as dirt and dust. can be avoided from occurring. Therefore, dirt such as dirt and dust in the ball passage can be reduced as much as possible, thereby preventing false detection from occurring due to dirt or the like obstructing the reception and emission of the photosensor. It is possible to provide a game machine that can reduce false detection of game balls circulating in a ball path.

In addition, in the first shape passage section of the ball passage where the photosensor is provided, the game ball does not swing in the width direction of the ball passage, so the positional relationship between the photosensor and the game ball can be kept constant. , it is possible to reliably detect game balls circulating in a ball path by eliminating false detections due to discrepancies in the positional relationship.

In addition, since the game ball is brought into contact with a pair of inclined surfaces in the first shape passage section where the photosensor is provided, the game ball is brought into contact with a pair of ridges. It is possible to reduce abrasion and scratches on the contact area caused by this, prevent the generation of dirt such as dirt and dust, and reduce erroneous detection of game balls by the photosensor.

Furthermore, since a pair of sloped surfaces are provided in the first shape passage section of the ball path, even if dirt such as dirt or dust is generated due to contact with the game ball, the sloped surface will prevent the dirt from coming into contact with the game ball. The ball can be guided further downward than the ball, reducing the influence of dirt on the photosensor, and preventing dirt from adhering to the game ball.

In addition, since the opening is provided on the upstream side of the first shaped passage in the ball passage where the photosensor is provided, dirt such as dirt and dust in the ball passage can be discharged from the opening to the outside. Therefore, the influence of dirt on the photosensor can be reduced, and erroneous detection of game balls caused by dirt on the photosensor can be reduced.

Moreover, since at least one of the downstream side and the upstream side of the first shaped passage section in which at least the photosensor is provided in the spherical passage is a second shaped passage part consisting of a flat bottom surface and a pair of side wall surfaces. When a plurality of game balls stop in the two-shaped passage section, they are pushed by the game balls on the upstream side, so that the game balls are lined up so as to alternately contact the pair of side wall surfaces from the downstream side. In other words, when a plurality of game balls stop in the second shape passage, they are arranged in a staggered manner and are not lined up in a line on the axis of the ball passage. Therefore, a part of the ball pressure of the game balls to the downstream side can be released alternately to the side wall surfaces in contact with each other, so compared to the case where multiple game balls are lined up in a row on the axis, It is possible to reduce the ball pressure applied to the member that is stopping the ball, making the member less likely to be damaged, and there is no need to increase the strength and rigidity of the member more than necessary, thereby reducing the cost of the game machine. It can be suppressed.

In this way, according to the above solution, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can reduce false detection of game balls circulating in the ball path.

[15-3c. Relationship between solution means and embodiment of third technical feature]
The ball firing unit 550 of the main body frame 4 in this embodiment is the ball firing means of the above solution, and the foul unit 570, circulation ball path unit 600, ball lifting unit 650, and ball feeding unit 700 in this embodiment are the above solution. In the ball circulating means of the means, the ball lifting upper inlet passage 651, the ball lifting upper outlet passage 652 of the ball lifting unit 650 in this embodiment, and the ball feeding passage 703 of the ball feeding unit 700 are the ball circulation means of the above solution means, The V-shaped passage portion 651a and the V-shaped passage portion 652a in this embodiment are the first-shaped passage portion of the above solution, and the U-shaped passage portion 651b, the U-shaped passage portion 652b, and the ball feeding passage 703 in this embodiment are the above-described first shape passage portion. The portions where the ball lift upper inlet ground metal plate 655 and the ball lift upper outlet ground metal plate 656 in this embodiment are attached to the second shaped passage portion of the solving means correspond to the openings of the solution means, respectively.

[15-3d. Characteristic effects of the third technical feature]
Below, the effects of the ball lifting upper entrance passage 652 in the ball lifting unit 650 will be described as the ball passage, and the effects of the ball lifting upper entrance passage 651 will be described because similar effects are achieved in the ball lifting upper entrance passage 651. Description is omitted. According to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the game balls B fired from the ball firing unit 550 that fires the game balls B to the game area 5a of the game board 5 are sent to the foul unit 570, the circulating ball path unit 600, and the ball firing unit 550. The upper unit 650 and the ball feeding unit 700 collect the ball and supply it to the ball firing unit 550, and the game ball B is fired from the ball firing unit 550 based on the player's ball holding data (the number of balls held is 1 or more). In a pachinko machine 1 (so-called enclosed game machine, managed game machine), a lifting exit sensor 654 consisting of a photo sensor is installed in a ball lifting upper exit passage 652 of a ball lifting unit 650 through which game balls B circulate. The part is a V-shaped passage section 652a having a V-shaped cross section having a pair of inclined surfaces that are inclined so that the distance increases as the distance increases toward the top, and the pair of inclined surfaces allows the game ball B to be positioned below the center of the V-shaped passage section 652a. Since the contact is made at two points, the game ball B does not swing in the width direction of the ball lifting exit passage 652 at the position of the lifting exit sensor 654, and the game ball B does not touch the side wall of the ball lifting exit passage 652. It is possible to avoid generation of dirt such as dirt and dust due to abrasion or damage of the side wall due to contact. Therefore, dirt such as dirt and dust in the ball lifting exit passage 652 can be reduced as much as possible, so dirt etc. may obstruct reception and emission of the photosensor at the lifting exit sensor 654, resulting in false detection. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can prevent the occurrence of the error, and can reduce false detection of game balls B flowing through the ball lifting upper exit passage 652.

In addition, in the V-shaped passage section 652a in the ball lifting exit passage 652 where the lifting exit sensor 654 consisting of a photosensor is provided, the game ball B will not swing in the width direction of the ball lifting exit passage 652. The positional relationship between the lifting exit sensor 654 (photo sensor) and the game ball B can be made constant, eliminating false detections due to deviations in the positional relationship, and the game balls flowing through the ball lifting exit passage 652 can be kept constant. B can be reliably detected.

In addition, since the game ball B is brought into contact with a pair of inclined surfaces in the V-shaped passage section 652a where the lifting exit sensor 654 consisting of a photosensor is provided, the game ball B is brought into contact with a pair of protrusions. Compared to the case where the game ball B contacts the contact area with the game ball B, wear and damage can be reduced, and dirt such as dirt and dust can be prevented from being generated, thereby preventing the lifting exit sensor 654 from incorrectly detecting the game ball B. can be reduced.

Furthermore, since a pair of sloped surfaces are provided in the V-shaped passage portion 652a of the ball lifting upper exit passage 652, even if dirt such as dirt or dust is generated due to contact with the game ball B, the dirt is removed by the sloped surface. The game ball B can be guided below the contact area with the ball B, and the influence of dirt on the lift exit sensor 654 can be reduced, and the adhesion of dirt to the game ball B can be avoided.

Furthermore, an opening to which a ball lifting exit ground metal plate 656 is attached is provided on the upstream side of the V-shaped passage section 652a in the ball lifting exit passage 652 where a lifting exit sensor 654 consisting of a photosensor is provided. Therefore, dirt such as dirt and dust in the ball lifting exit passage 652 can be discharged to the outside from the opening, so that the influence of dirt on the lifting exit sensor 654 can be reduced. Erroneous detection of the game ball B due to dirt on the upper exit sensor 654 can be reduced.

In addition, at least one of the downstream side and the upstream side (here, both the upstream side and the downstream side) of the V-shaped passage section 652a where the lifting exit sensor 654 consisting of a photosensor in the ball lifting exit passage 652 is provided. Since the U-shaped passage section 652b and ball feeding passage 703 have a U-shaped cross section and are composed of a flat bottom surface and a pair of side wall surfaces, when a plurality of game balls B stop at the U-shaped passage section 652b and the ball feeding passage 703, By being pushed by the game balls B on the upstream side, the game balls B are lined up from the downstream side so as to alternately contact the pair of side wall surfaces. In other words, when a plurality of game balls B stop in the U-shaped passage 652b and the ball feeding passage 703, they are arranged in a staggered manner and are not lined up in a line on the axis of the ball lifting upper exit passage 652 and the ball feeding passage 703. Therefore, a part of the ball pressure of the game balls B toward the downstream side can be released alternately to the side wall surfaces in contact with each other, so compared to the case where multiple game balls are lined up in a row on the axis, It is possible to reduce the ball pressure applied to the ball feeding movable member 705 (ball stopping part 705e) of the ball feeding unit 700 that holds the ball B, making it difficult to damage the ball feeding movable member 705, and making it possible to prevent ball feeding. There is no need to excessively reinforce the movable member 705, and an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

[15-4. Fourth technical feature]
The present specification has the following technical features different from those described above.

[15-4a. Background of the fourth technical feature]
A game machine such as a pachinko machine has been proposed in which a ball sensor is installed in the ball path through which game balls flow, and the presence or absence of game balls in the ball path is determined by the detection of game balls by the ball sensor. (For example, Patent Document D: Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2015-188537). In the technique of Patent Document 1, two ball sensors are provided with an interval in the ball path, and the presence or absence of a game ball is determined by a combination of detection signals from the two ball sensors.

However, in the technology of Patent Document D, multiple ball sensors are provided to determine the presence or absence of game balls at a predetermined location in the ball path, which increases costs and increases the load on the control means involved in the determination. There was a problem with the increase in Therefore, it is conceivable to use a single ball sensor to determine the presence or absence of game balls, but in areas where the distribution of game balls temporarily stops (stopping parts), it is difficult to accurately determine the absence of game balls. was difficult.

Therefore, in view of the above-mentioned actual situation, the following solution method is a game that can reliably detect the presence or absence of game balls at the stop where the game balls are temporarily stopped in the passageway where the game balls are distributed. The challenge is to provide equipment.

[15-4b. Means for solving the fourth technical feature]
Means 1: In a gaming machine,
"A game board having a game area where games are played using game balls,
a ball firing means capable of supplying game balls to the game area of the game board;
a ball circulating means that collects the game balls fired by the ball firing means and supplies them again to the ball firing means;
control means capable of controlling the ball circulating means and the ball firing means;
A gaming machine, which causes the ball firing means to fire a game ball based on ball holding data of a player converted into data,
The ball firing means and the ball circulating means are
a stop section provided on a circulating ball path through which game balls circulate, and where the circulation of game balls can be temporarily stopped;
a ball sensor that detects a game ball stopping at the stopping part;
It has
The control means includes:
When the detection time and non-detection time of a game ball by the ball sensor exceed a predetermined threshold, the presence or absence of a game ball in the stopping section is determined and the ball circulating means is controlled.
It is characterized by being something.

Here, the "stopping section" includes "the launching rail (launching pad) in the ball launching means", "the ball feeding passage of the ball feeding unit that supplies game balls one by one to the ball launching means in the ball circulating means", and " "The ball lifting upper entrance passage and the ball lifting upper exit passage of the ball lifting unit that lifts the game balls in the ball circulating means," the "ball storage passage of the circulating ball path unit that stores the game balls in the ball circulating means," etc. Can be mentioned.

In addition, "ball sensors" include "photo sensors that have a light emitting part and a light receiving part", "dielectric sensors that detect changes in induced current", "contact sensors that detect contact with game balls", and "changes in magnetism". Examples include "magnetic sensor that detects changes in electrostatic capacitance" and "capacitance sensor that detects changes in electrostatic capacitance". When a plurality of stop portions are provided, the ball sensors provided in each stop portion may be of the same type or may be of different types.

By the way, conventionally, the detection of game balls in winning openings, etc., involves checking the output from a photosensor (ball sensor) at every predetermined interrupt cycle (for example, 4ms), and the output is determined as non-detected, detected, detected, or detected. (In other words, "011"), it is determined that a game ball has been detected (ON). That is, when the output from the photosensor is "011", it is determined to be ON, and when the output is other than "011", it is determined to be OFF. However, when a ball sensor is installed at a stationary part where the flow of game balls temporarily stops, if the presence or absence of game balls is determined by the conventional determination method as described above, the ball sensor will When there are no game balls in the station, only OFF occurs, and when game balls are supplied to the station, ON occurs frequently at short intervals, and the game balls stored in the station move one by one. (the game ball is moving at the firing interval), many short-interval OFFs occur. Therefore, with the conventional determination method, it has not been possible to accurately determine that there are no game balls in the parking area.

According to the structure of the means 1, there is a game board having a game area where games are played using game balls, a ball firing means capable of supplying game balls to the game area of the game board, and collecting the game balls fired by the ball firing means. and a control means capable of controlling the ball circulating means and the ball firing means, and a ball circulating means that supplies the balls to the ball firing means again based on the player's ball holding data converted into data. A game machine configured to fire game balls, wherein the ball firing means and the ball circulation means are provided on a circulation ball path through which game balls circulate, and are a stopping part where the circulation of game balls can be temporarily stopped. and a ball sensor that detects a game ball parked at the stop section, and the control means is configured to detect the game ball at the stop section when the detection time and non-detection time of the game ball by the ball sensor exceeds a predetermined threshold. This device controls the ball circulation means by determining the presence or absence of game balls in the device (in the [Detailed Description of the Invention], see the chapter [4-5. Ball lifting unit], Fig. 52, Fig. 53, etc.). (see description).

As a result, the ball circulation means collects the game balls ejected from the ball ejection means that ejects the game balls into the game area of the game board and supplies them to the ball ejection means. In a game machine (so-called enclosed type game machine, managed game machine) in which game balls are fired from a ball firing means based on the number of balls (1 or more), the game balls on the circulating ball path where the game balls circulate A ball sensor is provided at a stop that can be temporarily stopped, and when the detection time and non-detection time of a game ball by the ball sensor exceeds a predetermined threshold, the control means determines the presence or absence of a game ball at the stop and stops the ball. The circulation means are controlled. In other words, in the conventional determination, only the condition (threshold value) of the presence of a game ball (ON) is used to determine the presence or absence (ON/OFF) of a game ball. Thresholds are set for the determination of presence (present) and determination of off (absence), respectively, and ON or OFF is determined only when non-detection or detection continues beyond the threshold. That is, for example, when the output from the ball sensor is "01111...", it is determined to be ON, and when the output from the ball sensor is "10000...", it is determined to be OFF. Thereby, the presence or absence of game balls can be reliably determined at the stop portion of the ball path where a plurality of game balls stop.

In addition, since the ball circulating means is controlled by reliably determining the presence or absence of game balls in the parking area, balls may run out in the circulation ball path (staying area) and ball holding data (number of balls held) may be lost. The ball circulation means may be damaged or the ball may become clogged due to not being able to shoot the game ball even though the ball is present, or if more game balls are supplied when the holding part is full. This allows the player to continue enjoying the game.

Note that if the threshold value is too small, a slight vibration or the like will result in false detection, resulting in control noise. Moreover, if the threshold value is too large than necessary, the state of the game ball will be missed. Therefore, although the appropriate threshold value differs depending on the location where the ball sensor is installed, it is desirable that the threshold value is at least 10 ms at the minimum and at most 300 ms or less. Furthermore, if the threshold value is determined to be a multiple of the interrupt period, the burden on the software can be reduced since only the number of interrupts is counted in terms of software control.

Further, a plurality of stopping parts may be provided on the circulation ball path, and the control means may determine the presence or absence of game balls using the same threshold value or different threshold values depending on the stopping parts. As a result, the threshold value for determining the presence or absence of a game ball can be changed depending on the stopping part (ball sensor), so for example, the ball transport unit that supplies game balls to the ball firing means can For ball sensors in stationary areas such as passageways, the threshold value may be set small, or for ball sensors in stationary areas such as the ball lifting entrance passageway or ball lifting upper exit passageway of the ball lifting unit that lifts game balls to the ball feeding unit. Now it is possible to increase or change the threshold value. Therefore, by determining the presence or absence of game balls according to the distribution speed (stopping frequency) of game balls in the stopping section, the number of parked game balls, etc., the control by the control means can be performed efficiently. , the load on control can be reduced.

Furthermore, a plurality of stopping parts are provided on the circulating ball path, and the control means determines the presence and absence of game balls using the same threshold value or the presence and absence of game balls using different threshold values, depending on the stopping part. You may also let them do so. As a result, the threshold value for the presence of a game ball and the threshold value for the absence of a game ball can be made different depending on the stop portion (ball sensor), so that, for example, a ball firing means for firing a game ball can be used. For ball sensors at stopping parts such as launch rails, the threshold for the presence of game balls and the threshold for the absence of game balls are set to be the same. In the ball sensor of the stop part such as the upper exit passage, it becomes possible to make the threshold value for the presence of a game ball and the threshold value for the absence of a game ball to be different. Therefore, the threshold value for the presence of game balls and the threshold value for the absence of game balls may be made the same or different depending on the distribution speed (stopping frequency) of game balls in the stopping section, the number of parked game balls, etc. By making this determination, the control by the control means can be efficiently performed in accordance with the stop portion, and the load on the control can be reduced.

Further, at least a portion of the stop portion has a flat bottom surface that is in contact with the game ball and has a width larger than the diameter of the game ball, and a pair of side wall surfaces that are erected from both widthwise ends of the bottom surface. A passage portion may also be provided. As a result, a U-shaped path section consisting of a flat bottom surface and a pair of side walls is provided in at least a part of the parking section where the game balls temporarily stop, so a plurality of game balls can be held in the U-shaped path section. When the balls stop, they are pushed by the game balls on the upstream side, so that the game balls are lined up from the downstream side so as to alternately contact the pair of side wall surfaces. In other words, when a plurality of game balls stop in the U-shaped passage, they line up in a staggered manner, and the game balls do not line up in a line on the axis of the stop (path). Therefore, a part of the ball pressure of the game ball toward the downstream side can be alternately released to the side wall surface that is in contact with it, so that the ball pressure applied to the predetermined member that holds the game ball can be reduced. This makes it possible to make the member less likely to be damaged, and there is no need to excessively reinforce the member, making it possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the gaming machine.

Furthermore, a photosensor is included as a ball sensor, and at least the portion of the photosensor in the stop part has a pair of sloped surfaces that the game balls are in contact with and that are inclined so that the distance increases as they move upward. A V-shaped passage may also be provided. As a result, since the V-shaped passage section is provided in the part of the stop where the photosensor is provided, the game ball comes into contact with the pair of inclined surfaces of the V-shaped passage part, and the game ball is placed in the part of the photosensor. The balls do not swing in the width direction of the passageway (ball passageway) in the stop section, and this prevents dirt such as dirt and dust from being generated due to the game balls coming into contact with the sidewalls and abrasion or damage to the sidewalls. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to reduce dirt such as dirt and dust inside the parking part as much as possible, and it is possible to prevent erroneous detection caused by dirt etc. that obstruct the reception and emission of the photosensor. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can reduce false detection of game balls parked in a parking section.

In addition, as mentioned above, when a V-shaped passage is provided, at least at the photo sensor part in the stop part, the game ball will not swing in the width direction of the ball passage due to the pair of inclined surfaces of the V-shaped passage. The positional relationship between the photo sensor and the game ball can be made constant, and false detections due to deviations in the positional relationship can be eliminated, and the game ball can be reliably detected.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, when a V-shaped passage is provided, since the V-shaped passage has a pair of inclined surfaces, even if dirt such as dirt or dust is generated due to contact with game balls, the V-shaped passage will not be affected. The sloping surface allows dirt to be guided below the contact area with the game ball, reducing the influence of dirt on the photosensor and preventing dirt from adhering to the game ball. The V-shaped passage may have a pair of inclined surfaces, and may have a V-shaped cross section where the lower ends of the pair of inclined surfaces are connected, or the V-shaped passage may have a downward cross section. The passage may be in the shape of an inverted trapezoid that narrows.

Means 2: In the configuration of means 1,
“The said stop is
A plurality of them are provided on the circulation ball path,
The control means includes:
The presence or absence of a game ball is determined based on the same threshold value or a different threshold value depending on the stopping portion.
It is characterized by being something.

According to the configuration of means 2, a plurality of stopping parts are provided on the circulation ball path, and the control means determines the presence or absence of game balls using the same threshold value or different threshold values depending on the stopping parts. (See the description regarding the firing subtraction sensor 554, the lifting entrance sensor 653, the lifting exit sensor 654, the firing front sensor 704, etc. in [Detailed Description of the Invention]).

As a result, the threshold value for determining the presence or absence of a game ball can be changed depending on the stopping part (ball sensor), so for example, the ball transport unit that supplies game balls to the ball firing means can For ball sensors in stationary areas such as passageways, the threshold value may be set small, or for ball sensors in stationary areas such as the ball lifting entrance passageway or ball lifting upper exit passageway of the ball lifting unit that lifts game balls to the ball feeding unit. Now it is possible to increase or change the threshold value. Therefore, by determining the presence or absence of game balls according to the distribution speed (stopping frequency) of game balls in the stopping section, the number of parked game balls, etc., the control by the control means can be performed efficiently. , the load on control can be reduced.

Means 3: In the configuration of means 1 or 2,
“The said stop is
A plurality of them are provided on the circulation ball path,
The control means includes:
Depending on the stationary portion, the presence or absence of a game ball is determined using the same threshold value, or the presence or absence of a game ball is determined using a different threshold value.
It is characterized by being something.

According to the configuration of means 3, a plurality of stopping parts are provided on the circulation ball path, and the control means sets the presence and absence of game balls to the same threshold value or the presence and absence of game balls, depending on the stopping parts. (See the description regarding the firing subtraction sensor 554, lifting entrance sensor 653, lifting exit sensor 654, firing front sensor 704, etc. in [Detailed Description of the Invention]). ).

As a result, the threshold value for the presence of game balls and the threshold value for the absence of game balls can be made different depending on the stop portion (ball sensor), so that, for example, a ball firing means for firing game balls can be used. For ball sensors at stationary parts such as launch rails, the threshold for the presence of game balls and the threshold for the absence of game balls may be set to be the same, and the ball lift upper entrance passage of the ball lifting unit that lifts game balls or the ball lift In the ball sensor of the stop part such as the upper exit passage, it is possible to make the threshold value for the presence of a game ball and the threshold value for the absence of a game ball to be different. Therefore, the threshold value for the presence of game balls and the threshold value for the absence of game balls may be made the same or different depending on the distribution speed (stopping frequency) of game balls in the stopping section, the number of parked game balls, etc. By making this determination, the control by the control means can be efficiently performed in accordance with the stop portion, and the load on the control can be reduced.

Means 4: In any one configuration from means 1 to means 3,
“The said stop is
A U-shaped passage portion is provided at least in part, and has a flat bottom surface that the game ball contacts and has a width larger than the diameter of the game ball, and a pair of side wall surfaces that stand up from both ends of the bottom surface in the width direction. ing"
It is characterized by being something.

By the way, at the stopping section in the circulating ball route, the distribution of game balls is temporarily stopped by a predetermined member, so the more game balls are stopped at the stopping section, the more the game balls are stopped. There is a possibility that the ball pressure applied to a predetermined member increases, making the member more likely to be damaged, and if the member is reinforced to avoid damage, the cost may increase.

According to the configuration of the means 4, at least a part of the stop portion has a flat bottom surface that is in contact with the game ball and has a width larger than the diameter of the game ball, and a pair of side wall surfaces that are erected from both widthwise ends of the bottom surface. (In the [Embodiment], a U-shaped passage portion 651b of the ball-lifting upper entrance passage 651 and a U-shaped passage portion of the ball-lifting upper exit passage 652 are provided. (See description regarding section 652b).

As a result, a U-shaped path section consisting of a flat bottom surface and a pair of side walls is provided in at least a part of the stopping section where game balls temporarily stop, so a plurality of game balls can be held in the U-shaped path section. When the balls stop, they are pushed by the game balls on the upstream side, so that the game balls are lined up from the downstream side so as to alternately contact the pair of side wall surfaces. In other words, when a plurality of game balls stop in the U-shaped passage, they line up in a staggered manner, and the game balls do not line up in a line on the axis of the stop (path). Therefore, a part of the ball pressure of the game balls to the downstream side can be released alternately to the side wall surfaces in contact with each other, so it is possible to reduce the ball pressure applied to the predetermined member that holds the game balls in place. This makes it possible to make the member less likely to be damaged, and there is no need to excessively reinforce the member, making it possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the gaming machine.

Means 5: In any one configuration from means 1 to means 4,
“The spherical sensor is
Contains a photosensor,
The stop part is
A V-shaped passage section having a pair of inclined surfaces, each of which is in contact with a game ball, and which is inclined so that the distance increases as it goes upward, is provided at least at the portion of the photosensor.
It is characterized by being something.

By the way, when using a photosensor as a ball sensor, if the inner peripheral shape of the photosensor part in the stop part is square, the game ball will easily swing in the width direction of the stop part (ball path), so the game ball will frequently By contacting the side wall, the side surface may be worn or scratched, and dirt such as dirt and dust is likely to be generated, and there is a risk that such dirt may obstruct reception and emission of light by the photosensor, resulting in erroneous detection.

According to the configuration of means 5, a photo sensor is included as a ball sensor, and at least the photosensor part in the stop part is provided with a pair of game balls that are inclined so that the game balls are in contact with each other and the distance increases as they move upward. (In the [Detailed Description] (See the description regarding the passage section 652a, the lifting entrance sensor 653, the lifting exit sensor 654, etc.).

As a result, since the V-shaped passage section is provided in the part of the stop where the photosensor is provided, the game ball comes into contact with the pair of inclined surfaces of the V-shaped passage part, and the game ball is placed in the part of the photosensor. The balls do not swing in the width direction of the passageway (ball passageway) in the stop section, and this prevents dirt such as dirt and dust from being generated due to the game balls coming into contact with the sidewalls and abrasion or damage to the sidewalls. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to reduce dirt such as dirt and dust inside the parking part as much as possible, and it is possible to prevent erroneous detection caused by dirt etc. that obstruct the reception and emission of the photosensor. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can reduce false detection of game balls parked in a parking section.

In addition, at least at the photosensor portion of the stop section, the pair of inclined surfaces in the V-shaped passageway prevents the game ball from swinging in the width direction of the ball passageway, so the positional relationship between the photosensor and the game ball is kept constant. This makes it possible to eliminate false detections due to deviations in the positional relationship and to reliably detect game balls.

Furthermore, since the V-shaped passage has a pair of sloped surfaces, even if dirt such as dirt or dust is generated due to contact with the game ball, the sloped surface will remove the dirt from the area where the game ball comes in contact with the ball. The ball can be guided downward, thereby reducing the influence of dirt on the photosensor, and also preventing dirt from adhering to the game ball.

It should be noted that the V-shaped passage may be one having a pair of inclined surfaces, and may be a passage having a V-shaped cross section where the lower ends of the pair of inclined surfaces are connected, or the cross section may be downward. It may also be an inverted trapezoidal passageway that narrows down.

Means 6: In a gaming machine,
"A game board having a game area where games are played using game balls,
a ball firing means capable of supplying game balls to the game area of the game board;
a ball circulating means that collects the game balls fired by the ball firing means and supplies them again to the ball firing means;
control means capable of controlling the ball circulating means and the ball firing means;
A gaming machine, which causes the ball firing means to fire a game ball based on ball holding data of a player converted into data,
The ball firing means and the ball circulating means are
A plurality of stopping parts are provided on a circulation ball path through which game balls circulate and can temporarily stop the circulation of game balls;
A plurality of ball sensors including a photo sensor detect the game balls stopping at each of the stopping parts,
It has
The stop part is
A "V-shaped passage having a pair of inclined surfaces, each of which the game ball touches and which is inclined so that the distance increases as it goes upward" is provided at least at the photo sensor part, and "the game ball ``U-shaped passage section'' which has a flat bottom surface with a width larger than the diameter of the game ball, and a pair of side wall surfaces erected from both widthwise ends of the bottom surface, excluding the V-shaped passage section. It is installed in the part,
The control means includes:
When the detection time and non-detection time of a game ball by the ball sensor exceeds a predetermined threshold, the presence or absence of a game ball in the stopping section is determined and the ball circulating means is controlled, , the presence or absence of a game ball is determined by the same threshold value or the different threshold value. "is determined by the different threshold values."
It is characterized by

According to the structure of the means 6, there is a game board having a game area where games are played with game balls, a ball firing means capable of supplying game balls to the game area of the game board, and collecting the game balls fired by the ball firing means. and a control means capable of controlling the ball circulating means and the ball firing means, and a ball circulating means that supplies the balls to the ball firing means again based on the player's ball holding data converted into data. The game machine is configured to fire game balls, and the ball firing means and the ball circulation means are provided on a circulating ball path through which game balls circulate, and are equipped with a plurality of balls that can temporarily stop the circulation of game balls. It has a stopping part and a plurality of ball sensors including a photo sensor that detects the game ball stopped at each stopping part, and the stopping part has "a ball sensor that detects the game ball stopped at each stopping part and as it moves upwards A "V-shaped passage section having a pair of inclined surfaces that are inclined so as to widen the interval" is provided at least at the photosensor portion, and a "V-shaped passage section having a pair of inclined surfaces that are inclined so as to widen the interval is provided, and a "V-shaped passage section with a width larger than the diameter of the game ball and in which the game ball contacts A "U-shaped passage section" having a bottom surface and a pair of side wall surfaces erected from both ends of the bottom surface in the width direction is provided in the area other than the V-shaped passage section, and the control means is configured to control the game ball by a ball sensor. When the detection time and non-detection time exceed a predetermined threshold, it determines the presence or absence of game balls in the parking area and controls the ball circulation means, and further determines whether the ball circulation means is set to the same threshold or a different threshold depending on the parking area. In addition to "determining the presence or absence of a game ball by using the same threshold value depending on the stationary part," It is something.

As a result, the ball circulation means collects the game balls ejected from the ball ejection means that ejects the game balls into the game area of the game board and supplies them to the ball ejection means. In a game machine (so-called enclosed type game machine, managed game machine) in which game balls are fired from a ball firing means based on the number of balls (1 or more), the game balls on the circulating ball path where the game balls circulate A ball sensor is provided at a stop that can be temporarily stopped, and when the detection time and non-detection time of a game ball by the ball sensor exceeds a predetermined threshold, the control means determines the presence or absence of a game ball at the stop and stops the ball. The circulation means are controlled. In other words, in the conventional determination, only the condition (threshold value) of the presence of a game ball (ON) is used to determine the presence or absence (ON/OFF) of a game ball. Thresholds are set for the determination of presence (present) and determination of off (absence), respectively, and ON or OFF is determined only when non-detection or detection continues beyond the threshold. That is, for example, when the output from the ball sensor is "01111...", it is determined to be ON, and when the output from the ball sensor is "10000...", it is determined to be OFF. Thereby, the presence or absence of game balls can be reliably determined at the stop portion of the ball path where a plurality of game balls stop.

In addition, since the presence or absence of game balls in the parking area is reliably determined and the ball circulation means is controlled, balls may run out in the circulation ball path (staying area) and ball holding data (number of balls held) may be lost. It is possible that the game ball cannot be fired even though the ball is present, or that the ball circulation means is damaged or the ball becomes clogged due to further supply of game balls when the holding part is full. This allows the player to continue enjoying the game.

Furthermore, since the threshold value for determining the presence or absence of a game ball can be set differently depending on the stopping part (ball sensor), for example, the ball feeding passage of the ball feeding unit that supplies the game ball to the ball firing means can be changed. For ball sensors in stationary areas such as , the threshold value may be reduced, and for ball sensors in stationary areas such as the ball lifting entrance passage and ball lifting exit passage of the ball lifting unit that lifts game balls to the ball feeding unit, the threshold value may be reduced. It becomes possible to increase or change the threshold value. Therefore, by determining the presence or absence of game balls according to the distribution speed (stopping frequency) of game balls in the stopping section, the number of parked game balls, etc., the control by the control means can be performed efficiently. , the load on control can be reduced.

In addition, the threshold for the presence of a game ball and the threshold for the absence of a game ball may be different depending on the stop portion (ball sensor). For ball sensors at stationary parts such as launch rails, the threshold for the presence of a game ball and the threshold for the absence of a game ball may be set to be the same, and the ball lift entrance passage of the ball lifting unit that lifts the game ball or the ball lift In a ball sensor at a stop such as an exit passage, it is possible to set the threshold value for the presence of a game ball and the threshold value for the absence of a game ball to be different. Therefore, the threshold value for the presence of game balls and the threshold value for the absence of game balls may be made the same or different depending on the distribution speed (stopping frequency) of game balls in the stopping section, the number of parked game balls, etc. By making this determination, the control by the control means can be efficiently performed in accordance with the stop portion, and the load on the control can be reduced.

Furthermore, since the V-shaped passage section is provided in the part of the stop where the photosensor is provided, the game ball comes into contact with the pair of inclined surfaces of the V-shaped passage part, so that the game ball does not reach the part of the photosensor. To prevent the game balls from swinging in the width direction of the passageway (ball passageway) of the stopping part, and to avoid the generation of dirt such as dirt and dust due to the sidewalls being worn or damaged by the game balls coming into contact with the sidewalls. I can do it. Therefore, dirt such as dirt and dust in the parking area can be reduced as much as possible, and it is possible to prevent erroneous detection caused by dirt and the like obstructing the photo sensor's reception and emission. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can reduce false detection of game balls parked in a parking section.

In addition, since a U-shaped passage consisting of a flat bottom surface and a pair of side walls is provided in a part other than the V-shaped passage where the photosensor is provided in the stop section, multiple games can be played in the U-shaped passage. When the balls stop, they are pushed by the game balls on the upstream side, so that the game balls are lined up from the downstream side so as to alternately contact the pair of side wall surfaces. In other words, when a plurality of game balls stop in the U-shaped passage, they line up in a staggered manner, and the game balls do not line up in a line on the axis of the stop (path). Therefore, a part of the ball pressure of the game balls to the downstream side can be released alternately to the side wall surfaces in contact with each other, so it is possible to reduce the ball pressure applied to the predetermined member that holds the game balls in place. This makes it possible to make the member less likely to be damaged, and there is no need to excessively reinforce the member, making it possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the gaming machine.

Furthermore, since the game ball does not swing in the width direction of the ball path due to the pair of inclined surfaces of the V-shaped path at the photo sensor location in the stop section, the positional relationship between the photosensor and the game ball must be kept constant. This makes it possible to eliminate erroneous detections due to deviations in the positional relationship and to reliably detect game balls.

In addition, since the V-shaped passage has a pair of sloped surfaces, even if dirt such as dirt or dust is generated due to contact with the game ball, the sloped surface will move the dirt away from the area that comes in contact with the game ball. The ball can be guided downward, thereby reducing the influence of dirt on the photosensor and preventing dirt from adhering to the game ball. The V-shaped passage may have a pair of inclined surfaces, and may have a V-shaped cross section where the lower ends of the pair of inclined surfaces are connected, or the V-shaped passage may have a downward cross section. It may also be an inverted trapezoidal passageway that narrows down.

Note that if the threshold value is too small, a slight vibration or the like will cause a false detection and cause noise in control. Moreover, if the threshold value is too large than necessary, the state of the game ball will be missed. Therefore, an appropriate threshold value varies depending on the location where the ball sensor is installed, but is preferably at least 10 ms and at most 300 ms. Furthermore, if the threshold value is determined to be a multiple of the interrupt period, the burden on the software can be reduced since only the number of interrupts is counted in terms of software control.

In this way, according to the above-mentioned solution, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can reliably detect the presence or absence of game balls in the parking area where the game balls are temporarily stopped in the passageway through which the game balls circulate. can be provided.

[15-4c. Relationship between the means for solving the fourth technical feature and the embodiment]
The ball firing unit 550 of the main body frame 4 in this embodiment is the ball firing means of the above solution, and the foul unit 570, circulation ball path unit 600, ball lifting unit 650, and ball feeding unit 700 in this embodiment are the above solution. In the ball circulation means of the means, the circulation path R in this embodiment is the circulation ball path of the above-mentioned solution means, the ball launch pad 552b of the ball launch unit 550 in this embodiment, the ball storage passage 604 of the circulation ball path unit 600, and the ball The ball lifting inlet passage 651 and the ball lifting exit passage 652 in the lifting unit 650, and the ball feeding passage 703 of the ball feeding unit 700 are in the stop portion of the above-mentioned solution means, and the firing subtraction sensor 554 of the ball firing unit 550 in this embodiment , the circulating ball shortage sensor 621 and the circulating ball excess sensor 622 of the circulating ball path unit 600, the lifting inlet sensor 653 and the lifting exit sensor 654 in the ball lifting unit 650, and the firing front sensor 704 of the ball feeding unit 700 are the above-mentioned solving means. The firing subtraction sensor 554, the lifting entrance sensor 653, and the lifting exit sensor 654 in this embodiment correspond to the photo sensor of the above-mentioned solving means, respectively.

The ball launching pad 552b in this embodiment, the V-shaped passage part 651a of the ball-launching upper entrance passage 651, and the V-shaped passage part 652a of the ball-launching upper exit passage 652 are the same as the V-shaped passage part of the above solution. The storage passage 604, the U-shaped passage portion 651b of the ball lifting upper entrance passage 651, the U-shaped passage portion 652b of the ball lifting upper exit passage 652, and the ball feeding passage 703 are the same as the U-shaped passage portion of the above-mentioned solution means, and the frame in this embodiment is The control board 740 corresponds to the control means of the above solution.

[15-4d. Characteristic effects of the fourth technical feature]
Below, the operation and effect of the lifting entrance sensor 653 of the ball lifting entrance passage 651 in the ball lifting unit 650 as a stopping part where the circulation of the game ball B temporarily stops and the fixed position stop state is described, and the firing The subtraction sensor 554, the circulating ball shortage sensor 621, the circulating ball excess sensor 622, the lift exit sensor 654, the launch front sensor 704, etc. have similar effects, so their actions will be omitted unless particularly necessary. Description of effects will be omitted. According to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the game balls B fired from the ball firing unit 550 that fires the game balls B to the game area 5a of the game board 5 are sent to the foul unit 570, the circulating ball path unit 600, and the ball firing unit 550. The upper unit 650 and the ball feeding unit 700 collect the ball and supply it to the ball firing unit 550, and the game ball B is fired from the ball firing unit 550 based on the player's ball holding data (the number of balls held is 1 or more). In a pachinko machine 1 (so-called enclosed game machine, managed game machine), a ball lifting unit is provided as a stopping part where game balls B can be temporarily stopped on a circulation path R where game balls B circulate. A lifting entrance sensor 653 consisting of a photosensor is provided in the ball lifting entrance passage 651 of 650, and the frame control board 740 determines when the detection time and non-detection time of the game ball B by the lifting entrance sensor 653 exceeds a predetermined threshold. The drive of the lifting motor 664 is controlled by determining the presence or absence of the game ball B in the ball lifting entrance passage 651. In other words, in the conventional determination, the presence or absence (ON/OFF) of the game ball B is determined using only the condition (threshold value) of the presence (ON) of the game ball B, whereas the present embodiment In this method, threshold values are set for determining ON (present) and OFF (absent), respectively, and only when non-detection or detection continues beyond the threshold, ON or OFF is determined. That is, for example, when the output from the lifting entrance sensor 653 is "01111...", it is determined to be ON, and when the output is "10000...", it is determined to be OFF. Thereby, the presence or absence of a game ball B can be reliably determined in the ball lifting upper entrance passage 651 where a plurality of game balls B are parked.

In addition, since the presence or absence of the game ball B in the ball lifting entrance passage 651 is reliably determined and the drive of the lifting motor 664 is controlled, the circulation route R (here, the ball lifting entrance passage 651) If a ball runs out and the game ball B cannot be fired even though there is ball data (number of balls held), or if the ball launcher entrance passage 651 is full, more game balls B are supplied. By doing so, it is possible to avoid damage to the ball lifting unit 650, ball clogging, etc., and the player can continue to enjoy the game.

Furthermore, since the threshold value for determining the presence or absence of game balls B may be different depending on the stopping portion where the distribution of game balls B is temporarily stopped, game balls B are supplied to the ball firing unit 550. The firing front sensor 704 installed at a stopping part such as the ball feeding path 703 of the ball feeding unit 700 to reduce the threshold value, and the ball lifting unit 650 that lifts the game ball B to the ball feeding unit 700. It is possible to increase or change the threshold value in the lifting entrance sensor 653 and lifting exit sensor 654 provided in the stopping portions such as the lifting entrance passage 651 and the ball lifting exit passage 652. Therefore, by determining the presence or absence of game balls B according to the distribution speed (stopping frequency) of game balls B in the stopping section, the number of parked game balls B, etc., the control by the frame control board 740 can be efficiently performed. The control load can be reduced.

In addition, the threshold value for the presence of the game ball B and the threshold value for the absence of the game ball B may be different depending on the stopping portion where the distribution of the game ball B is temporarily stopped, so that, for example, The firing subtraction sensor 554 provided at a stop such as the ball launching pad 552b of the ball firing unit 550 that fires the game ball B sets the threshold value for the presence of the game ball B and the threshold value for the absence of the game ball to be the same, A lifting entrance sensor 653 and a lifting exit sensor 654 provided at a stop such as a ball lifting entrance passage 651 and a ball lifting exit passage 652 of a ball lifting unit 650 that lifts a game ball B are used to detect game balls. It is possible to make the threshold value for B present and the threshold value for game ball B absent different. Therefore, depending on the distribution speed (stopping frequency) of game balls B in the stopping section, the number of parked game balls B, etc., the threshold value for the presence of game balls B and the threshold value for the absence of game balls B may be the same or different. By making a determination such that the frame control board 740 controls the stop portion, the control by the frame control board 740 can be efficiently performed in accordance with the stop portion, and the load on the control can be reduced.

Furthermore, since the V-shaped passage section 651a is provided in the part of the ball lifting entrance passage 651 where the lifting entrance sensor 653 consisting of a photosensor is provided, the game ball B is placed on the pair of inclined surfaces of the V-shaped passage section 651a. Due to this contact, the game ball B will not swing in the width direction of the ball lift entrance passage 651 at the lifting entrance sensor 653, and the game ball B will not come into contact with the side wall and the side wall will be worn or damaged. By doing so, it is possible to avoid the generation of dirt such as dirt and dust. Therefore, dirt such as dirt and dust in the ball lifting entrance passage 651 can be reduced as much as possible. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can prevent detection from occurring and reduce false detection of game balls B that are stationary at a stationary part.

In addition, a U-shaped passage section 651b consisting of a flat bottom surface and a pair of side wall surfaces is provided in a portion of the ball lifting entrance passage 651 other than the V-shaped passage section 651a where the lifting entrance sensor 653 consisting of a photosensor is provided. Therefore, when a plurality of game balls B stop at the U-shaped passage section 651b, the game balls B from the downstream side alternately contact the pair of side wall surfaces by being pushed by the game balls B on the upstream side. They will be lined up like this. That is, when a plurality of game balls B stop in the U-shaped passage section 651b, they are lined up in a staggered manner, and the game balls B are not lined up in a line on the axis of the ball lift upper entrance passage 651. Therefore, part of the ball pressure of the game balls B toward the downstream side can be released alternately to the side wall surfaces in contact with each other, so that the ball pressure applied to the lifting spiral shaft 661 that holds the game balls B is reduced. This makes it possible to make the lifting spiral shaft 661 less likely to be damaged, and it is not necessary to excessively reinforce the lifting spiral shaft 661, thereby suppressing an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, at the location of the lifting entrance sensor 653 consisting of a photosensor in the ball lifting upper entrance passage 651, the game ball B is prevented from swinging in the width direction of the ball lifting upper entrance passage 651 due to the pair of inclined surfaces of the V-shaped passage section 651a. Therefore, the positional relationship between the lifting entrance sensor 653 and the game ball B can be made constant, and the game ball B can be detected reliably by eliminating false detections due to deviations in the positional relationship.

In addition, since the V-shaped passage section 651a of the ball lifting upper entrance passage 651 has a pair of sloped surfaces, even if dirt such as dirt or dust is generated due to contact with the game ball B, the sloped surface can be guided below the contact area with the game ball B, and the influence of dirt on the lifting entrance sensor 653 consisting of a photo sensor can be reduced, and the adhesion of dirt to the game ball B can be avoided. can be done. The V-shaped passage section 651a may have a pair of inclined surfaces, and may have a V-shaped cross section in which the lower ends of the pair of inclined surfaces are connected, or may have a V-shaped cross section. It may be an inverted trapezoidal passage that narrows downward.

[15-5. Fifth technical feature]
The present specification has the following technical features different from those described above.

[15-5a. Background of the fifth technical feature]
A gaming machine such as a pachinko machine that circulates a large number of game balls sealed inside during the game, and the player does not touch the game balls (so-called enclosed game machine, managed game machine) is known (for example, Patent Document X: Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2020-162850). In a game machine such as this Patent Document

Such so-called enclosed game machines are not currently widespread, and as they become more widespread, it is expected that they will be mixed with conventional pachinko machines in island facilities for conventional pachinko machines.

For this reason, so-called enclosed game machines are also placed in an environment where supplied balls flow above the back surface of the game machine and collected balls flow below the back surface of the game machine. As a result, game balls and metal powder generated from them, as well as screws that were forgotten to be collected during replacement work, fall from above.

Therefore, in view of the above-mentioned actual situation, the following means aims to provide a gaming machine that can appropriately handle objects falling from above the gaming machine.

[15-5b. Means for solving the fifth technical feature]
Means 1: In a gaming machine,
"In a gaming machine in which game balls are enclosed inside the gaming machine and games are played using the gaming balls that circulate inside the gaming machine,
The game machine houses a game board in a game machine frame, and the game machine frame includes a top cover that protects the game board from above and a rear cover that protects the game board from the rear.
The top surface of the top cover is spherical and has a gentle slope that allows game balls to flow backward, while non-spherical members can stay on the top surface of the top cover.

Here, ``a game machine in which game balls are enclosed in the game machine and games are played using the game balls that circulate inside the game machine'' refers to game machines called enclosed-type pachinko machines, circulation-type pachinko machines, and managed game machines. do.

Furthermore, examples of the "top cover" and "rear cover" include plate-shaped members made of synthetic resin. Regarding the "rear cover," it is desirable to be able to open and close it for maintenance purposes, but from a security standpoint, it is desirable that it cannot be opened and closed easily.

The gentle slope is at an angle of several degrees to about 15 degrees from the horizontal plane; angles deeper than that are not suitable because non-spherical screws, metal powder, etc. may slip off.

According to the configuration of means 1, in a gaming machine in which game balls are enclosed in the gaming machine and games are played using the gaming balls that circulate inside the gaming machine, the gaming machine houses a gaming board in a gaming machine frame, and The game machine frame includes a top cover that protects the game board from above and a rear cover that protects the game board from the rear. The upper surface cover has a gentle slope that can be retained on the upper surface (in the [Detailed Description of the Invention], the chapter [4-1. Main body frame base unit], the descriptions in FIGS. ).

With the above configuration, for example, game balls that have fallen from the ball supply path flow down the upper surface of the top cover, fall as they are, fall into the game ball collection path, and are collected, so no problem occurs. Also, since the slope is gentle, metal powder and screws do not flow down and remain on the top surface of the cover that protects them from the top surface. Therefore, foreign objects such as screws will not fall into the collection path and will not cause any inconvenience such as hindering the collection of game balls.

By creating a gentle slope as described above, falling objects can selectively flow down or stay there. In other words, objects falling from above the gaming machine can be appropriately disposed of.

In the embodiment of this means, the inclination of the upper surface of the cover that protects from the upper surface is 2.00 degrees from the horizontal plane, so that the so-called lying position (generally tilted backward at about 0.75 degrees) when the pachinko machine is installed is prevented. Taking this into account, the slope is 2.75 degrees.

Note that the protective cover of the gaming machine frame that houses the gaming board must have ventilation holes to dissipate heat from the gaming board that generates heat, but these ventilation holes are provided on the rear cover, but not on the top cover. desirable. By not providing ventilation holes in the top cover, it is possible to prevent metal powder from having an adverse effect on the electrical components of the game board. Furthermore, the irregularities caused by the ventilation holes do not impede the flow of the game ball.

Furthermore, when the top cover is molded using a resin injection molding machine, it is desirable that the top surface of the top cover not be provided with a so-called gate for injecting resin into a mold. This is because if a gate is provided, unevenness will occur, which may impede the flow of game balls.

Furthermore, when the top cover is molded using a resin injection molding machine, it is desirable not to provide ejector pin marks that are generated to extrude the molded product from the mold, similar to the gate. Naturally, even though there are few marks from the ejector pins, they may create unevenness, which may impede the flow of game balls, and metal powder may get in during cleaning, resulting in an unsightly appearance.

By maintaining the top surface of the top cover as smooth as possible in this way, the effect of the present invention, which is to properly dispose of objects falling from above the gaming machine, can be better exhibited.

Means 2: In the configuration of means 1,
A feature of the present invention is that "the upper surface of the upper cover is not provided with ventilation holes, but the rear cover is provided with ventilation holes."

According to the configuration of means 2, no ventilation holes are provided on the upper surface of the upper surface cover, but ventilation holes are provided on the rear surface cover. In other words, ventilation holes are essential for the protective cover of the game machine frame that houses the game board in order to dissipate heat from the game board that generates heat.The ventilation holes are provided in the rear cover, but they are not provided in the top cover. It is desirable that there is no such thing (see the description regarding the ventilation hole 502f in [Detailed Description of the Invention]).

With this configuration, by not providing a ventilation hole on the upper surface of the upper cover, it is possible to prevent falling metal powder from having an adverse effect on the electrical components of the game board. Furthermore, the irregularities caused by the ventilation holes do not impede the flow of the game ball.

Means 3: In the configuration of means 1 or 2,
The present invention is characterized in that "the top cover is made of resin, and no resin injection port is provided on the top surface of the top cover."

According to the configuration of means 3, the top cover is made of resin, and no resin injection port is provided on the top surface of the top cover (in the [Embodiment], the main body frame base 501 is made of resin). (See the description regarding the top cover 502a).

With this configuration, unevenness caused by the resin injection port (so-called gate) does not occur on the upper surface of the upper cover, so that it does not impede the flow of game balls.

Means 4: In any one configuration from means 1 to means 3,
The present invention is characterized in that "the upper surface cover is made of resin, and no ejector pin marks are provided on the upper surface of the upper surface cover."

According to the configuration of means 4, the top cover is made of resin, and no ejector pin marks are provided on the top surface of the top cover. ).

With this configuration, the smoothness of the upper surface of the upper cover is improved because there are no marks left by the ejector pin when extruding the molded product from the mold during injection molding. The marks of the ejector pins do not have such large irregularities, but by not providing the marks of the ejector pins, it does not impede the flow of the game ball. Also, when cleaning, there is no unevenness left by the ejector pin, so metal powder and the like do not get in, resulting in a good appearance.

Means 5: In any one configuration from means 1 to means 4,
"The gaming machine frame includes an outer frame fixed to the gaming facility island equipment, and a game board storage frame pivoted to the outer frame, and the top cover is molded integrally with the game board storage frame. It is characterized by "that".

According to the configuration of means 5, the gaming machine frame includes an outer frame fixed to the gaming facility island equipment and a game board storage frame pivotally supported by the outer frame, and the top cover is integrally molded with the game board storage frame. (See the description regarding the body frame base 501 in [Detailed Description of the Invention]).

With this configuration, it is possible to save assembly man-hours by integrally molding and to improve the strength of the entire game board storage frame (main body frame).

Means 6: In the configuration of any one of means 1 to 5,
The present invention is characterized in that the top cover has a positioning portion on the inside thereof that contacts the game board and performs positioning when the game board is accommodated in the game board storage frame.

According to the structure of the means 6, when the game board is housed in the game board storage frame, the top cover is provided with a positioning part on the inside that contacts the game board and performs positioning. (See the description regarding the abutment surface 502j in [Embodiment]).

With this configuration, the positional relationship between the game board and the top cover is firmly fixed, and the purpose of protecting the game board in the game board storage frame can be achieved.

In this way, according to the above solution, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can appropriately handle objects falling from above the gaming machine.

[15-5c. Relationship between the means for solving the fifth technical feature and the embodiment]
The main body frame 4 of the game board 5 of this embodiment serves as the game board storage frame of the above solution, the top cover 502a of the main body frame base 501 of this embodiment serves as the top cover of the above solution, and the rear cover 502b of this embodiment corresponds to the rear cover of the above-mentioned solution means, and the ventilation hole 502f in this embodiment corresponds to the ventilation hole of the above-mentioned solution means.

[15-5d. Characteristic effects of the fifth technical feature]
According to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the upper surface of the upper surface cover 502a of the main body frame base 501 that protects the game board 5 housed in the main body frame 4 from above is a gentle slope that slopes backward. Game balls B, metal powder, screws, etc. falling from above 1 can be appropriately disposed of. Specifically, since the game ball B, which is spherical, can be allowed to fall under the pachinko machine 1 by flowing down the top surface of the top cover 502a, the game ball B can be collected as is and no trouble will occur. In addition, non-spherical metal powder, screws, etc. can be held on the top cover 502a without flowing down, so no trouble will occur.

Furthermore, no ventilation holes 502f are provided on the upper surface of the upper cover 502a. This prevents metal powder, screws, etc. from entering through the ventilation hole 502f, and does not adversely affect the electrical components of the game board 5.

Furthermore, the upper surface of the upper cover 502a molded by an injection molding machine is not provided with a gate for injecting molten resin into a mold during molding. As a result, the upper surface of the upper surface cover 502a does not have unevenness caused by the gate, so that the downward flow of the game ball B is not hindered.

Similarly, care is taken not to leave marks from the ejector pins when removing the injection-molded main body frame base 501 from the mold. Normally, if the ejector pin marks are properly treated to remove burrs, there is little chance that the game balls B will flow down. It may leave marks and spoil the aesthetic appearance. Therefore, by eliminating the ejector pin marks, the appearance can be easily restored by cleaning.

Further, this top cover 502a is integrally molded with the main body frame base 501. By molding in this manner, it is possible to save assembly man-hours and improve the strength of the entire main body frame base unit 500 (game board storage frame).

The top cover 502a not only protects the game board 5 housed inside, but also has a positioning part (abutment surface 502j) on the inside that contacts the game board 5 and positions the game board 5. ing. As a result, the positional relationship between the game board 5 and the top cover 502a is fixed, and the purpose of the game board storage frame (main body frame 4) of protecting the game board 5 can be achieved.

Further, the upper surface of the upper surface cover 502a is not provided with ribs for reinforcement, so that the ribs do not make cleaning difficult, making maintenance easier. Note that there are other members (for example, the frame 501a, the outer frame 2, etc.) to cover the upper surface of the upper surface cover 502a, and ribs may be provided in areas where foreign objects do not fall.

[15-6. Sixth technical feature]
The present specification has the following technical features different from those described above.

[15-6a. Background of the sixth technical feature]
In recent years, the effective use of resources has become even more important due to environmental issues. From this perspective, development is underway to make more parts of gaming machines made of recyclable materials. On the other hand, the cycle for replacing machines at game halls (gaming parlors) where game machines are installed is becoming shorter, and the number of game machines being discarded or dismantled is on the rise. Therefore, the burden of disassembling and sorting gaming machines is increasing, and there is a desire to reduce this work as much as possible.

For example, in a conventional gaming machine as shown in Patent Document Y (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2017-018185), a side unit (ball entry unit) is provided with a plurality of general winning ports as ball entry ports in order to be disassembled. When attempting to remove the ball from the game panel by pulling it forward, the ball entering unit bends, causing the positioning protrusion inserted into the positioning hole of the game panel to tilt, making disassembly work time-consuming. Ta.

Therefore, in view of the above-mentioned circumstances, the following means aims to provide a gaming machine that can reduce the disassembly work required when sorting for recycling or the like.

[15-6b. Means for solving the sixth technical feature]
Means 1: In a gaming machine,
``In a game machine that has a plurality of ball entry ports into which game balls can enter, and a ball entry unit that is attached to the front of a game panel through which game balls can flow down,
The ball entry unit is
It has a positioning protrusion inserted into a positioning hole provided in the game panel, and a first mounting hole for attaching to the game panel, and an opening provided to penetrate the game panel from the front side. a first component attached to the game panel so as to close it;
a second component having a second mounting hole for attaching to the first component and being attached from the rear side of the first component;
It is characterized by having the following features:

Here, the term "ball entrance" refers to "a winning opening that grants a predetermined benefit by entering a game ball (for example, general winning opening, normal winning opening, starting winning opening (starting opening), big winning opening, "Input prize opening, V prize opening, etc.)" and "Output opening where game balls are ejected from the gaming machine without giving any benefits even if they enter and are not returned to the player."

Furthermore, the "ball entry port" may be provided in the first component or may be provided in the second component.

In addition, "gaming panels" include "those made of wooden plywood such as plywood" and "those made of a panel board cut from a transparent resin board and a panel holder that holds the outer periphery of the panel board. ”, “transparent resin injection molded”, etc.

According to the configuration of Means 1, in a gaming machine equipped with a ball entry unit that has a plurality of ball entry ports into which game balls can enter and is attached to the front surface of a game panel through which game balls can flow down, the ball entry unit is , has a positioning protrusion inserted into a positioning hole provided in the game panel, and a first mounting hole for attaching to the game panel, so as to close the opening provided to penetrate the game panel from the front side. a first component member that is attached to the game panel; and a second component member that has a second mounting hole for attaching to the first component member and is attached from the rear side of the first component member. (See the chapter [12-1. Side unit of second embodiment] in [Detailed Description of the Invention] and the descriptions in FIGS. 103 to 105, etc.).

As a result, the second component is attached to the first component, which is attached to the front surface of the game panel by the mounting screws via the first mounting hole, and the second component is attached to the front surface of the game panel by the mounting screws via the second mounting hole. It is possible to increase the rigidity of the ball entry unit configured of the first component and the second component. Therefore, when disassembling a game machine for recycling or the like, when you remove the mounting screw screwed into the game panel through the first mounting hole and pull the ball entry unit forward, the rigidity of the ball entry unit is increased. Since the ball entry unit does not bend due to the positioning of the ball entry unit, the positioning protrusion of the ball entry unit (first component) does not tilt relative to the positioning hole on the game panel, making it easy to remove the ball entry unit from the game panel. It is possible to provide a gaming machine that can be removed and the disassembly work required for sorting can be reduced.

In addition, since the second component is attached from the rear side of the first component with a mounting screw through the second mounting hole, the mounting screw that attaches the second component to the front can be made difficult to see. , it is possible to improve the appearance of the game machine.

Note that it is desirable to provide a first attachment hole for attaching the first component to the game panel in the vicinity of the positioning protrusion. As a result, by screwing the mounting screw into the gaming panel through the first mounting hole, the positioning protrusion can be strongly pressed against the gaming panel side and inserted securely into the positioning hole of the gaming panel. Lifting due to incomplete insertion can be prevented.

Further, the second component may be attached from the rear side of the first component so as to protrude into the opening. As a result, the second component, which is attached from the back side of the first component, protrudes into the opening of the game panel, so compared to the case where the second component is protruded to the front or rear surface of the game panel, The thickness of the game panel can be used effectively, and empty space in front and behind the game panel can be easily secured. Therefore, it is possible to provide a decoration, an LED board, a performance device such as a movable accessory in the empty space, and it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is more appealing to players.

Furthermore, the second component is attached from the rear side of the first component so as to protrude into the opening, and the game ball that enters the ball entrance is guided along the surface of the game panel between the second component and the first component. It is also possible to have a ball passageway for allowing the ball to flow down. As a result, since the second component is provided with a ball passage that allows the game balls to flow down along the surface of the game panel, the cross section of the ball passage is U-shaped, so the presence of the ball passage This makes it possible to increase the rigidity of the second component. Since the second component whose rigidity is increased by the ball passage is attached from the rear side of the first component to form the ball entering unit, the rigidity of the ball entering unit can be further increased, and as described above. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can reliably achieve the functions and effects that have been achieved.

Further, as described above, the second component attached from the back side of the first component is made to protrude into the opening of the game panel, and the ball entrance is provided between the first component and the second component. Since there is a ball path that allows the entered game balls to flow down along the surface of the game panel, the thickness of the game panel can be used more effectively than when the ball path is provided behind the back surface of the game panel. This makes it easier to secure empty space behind the game panel. Therefore, it is possible to provide a decoration, an LED board, a performance device such as a movable accessory in the empty space, and it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is more appealing to players.

Further, it is desirable that at least two positioning protrusions are provided so as to be spaced apart from each other in the longitudinal direction of the first component. As a result, since the plurality of positioning protrusions on the first component are provided so as to be spaced apart in the longitudinal direction of the first component, when the ball entry unit is attached to the game panel, the ball entry unit is attached to the game panel. The ball entering unit does not rotate along the surface, and the ball entering unit can be reliably positioned at a desired position on the game panel.

By the way, when a conventional ball entry unit with low rigidity is provided with multiple positioning protrusions spaced apart in the longitudinal direction, when the ball entry unit is pulled forward during disassembly work, the center of the ball entry unit moves forward. As a result, the positioning projections are bent in a curved shape, and due to this bending, a force is applied that tends to tilt the positioning projections so that the tips of the positioning projections that are separated in the longitudinal direction approach each other, and the game panel The positioning protrusion cannot be removed from the positioning hole. On the other hand, as described above, when the plurality of positioning protrusions on the first component are provided so as to be spaced apart from each other in the longitudinal direction of the first component, the second component is attached to the first component. This increases the rigidity of the ball entering unit, so even if the ball entering unit is pulled forward, the ball entering unit will not bend and the positioning protrusions separated in the longitudinal direction will not tilt, allowing entry from the game panel. It is possible to provide a game machine in which a ball unit can be easily removed and disassembly work required for sorting can be reduced.

Furthermore, it is preferable that the ball entrance be provided in the first component so as to protrude further forward than the front surface of the game panel. As a result, the multiple ball entry ports protrude forward from the front of the game panel, so when disassembling the game machine, when pulling the ball entry unit forward to remove it from the game panel, the ball entry ports are removed. It can be pinched and pulled, making it easier to remove the ball entry unit.

Further, the second component includes a plurality of ball entry ports that protrude forward from the front surface of the first component, and a flat front plate that connects the front ends of the plurality of ball entry ports. You can also do it. As a result, the second component member, which connects the front ends of the plurality of ball entry ports protruding forward by a flat front plate, is attached to the first component member that is attached to the front surface of the game panel through the first attachment hole. Since the ball entry unit is configured by being attached from the rear side of the ball entry unit, the rigidity can be increased compared to the conventional ball entry unit, and the same effects as described above can be achieved.

Further, the first component may include a flat base plate that can come into contact with the front surface of the game panel. As a result, since the first component is provided with a flat base plate, by attaching the first component to the front of the game panel through the first mounting hole, the base plate opens the opening of the game panel from the front side. The back of the game panel can be hidden by the base plate through the opening from the front side (player side), and the appearance of the game machine can be improved. In this case, since the base plate is flat, the rigidity of the first component may be lowered, but since the second component is attached from the rear of the first component, The rigidity of the ball entering unit due to the second component can be made higher than that of the conventional ball entering unit, and the same effects as described above can be achieved.

Means 2: In the configuration of means 1,
"The second component is attached from the rear side of the first component so as to protrude into the opening."
It is characterized by being something.

According to the configuration of means 2, the second component is attached from the rear side of the first component so as to protrude into the opening (in the [Detailed Description of the Invention], the second component is attached to the side unit 2800 regarding the second component 2812).

As a result, the second component, which is attached from the back side of the first component, protrudes into the opening of the game panel, so compared to the case where the second component is protruded to the front or rear surface of the game panel, The thickness of the game panel can be used effectively, and empty space in front and behind the game panel can be easily secured. Therefore, it is possible to provide a decoration, an LED board, a performance device such as a movable accessory in the empty space, and it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is more appealing to players.

Means 3: In the configuration of means 1 or 2,
"The second component is attached from the rear side of the first component so as to protrude into the opening, and is connected to the first component to prevent the game ball that has entered the ball entry hole. It has a ball path that causes the ball to flow down along the surface of the game panel.
It is characterized by being something.

According to the configuration of the means 3, the second component is attached from the rear side of the first component so as to protrude into the opening, and the second component is connected to the first component to prevent the ball from entering the ball entrance. It has a ball path that allows the ball to flow down along the surface of the game panel (see the description regarding the second component 2812 of the side unit 2800 in [Detailed Description of the Invention]).

As a result, since the second component is provided with a ball passage that allows the game balls to flow down along the surface of the game panel, the cross section of the ball passage is U-shaped, so the presence of the ball passage This makes it possible to increase the rigidity of the second component. Since the second component whose rigidity is increased by the ball passage is attached from the rear side of the first component to form the ball entering unit, the rigidity of the ball entering unit can be further increased, and as described above. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can reliably achieve the functions and effects that have been achieved.

Further, a second component member attached from the back side of the first component member is made to protrude into the opening of the game panel, and a game ball that enters the ball entry hole is provided between the first component member and the second component member. Since a ball path is provided that allows the ball to flow down along the surface of the game panel, the thickness of the game panel can be used more effectively than when the ball path is provided behind the rear surface of the game panel. It is possible to easily secure empty space behind the game panel. Therefore, it is possible to provide a decoration, an LED board, a performance device such as a movable accessory in the empty space, and it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is more appealing to players.

In addition, when providing a ball sensor that detects game balls circulating in the ball path, it is desirable to provide the ball sensor within the thickness of the game panel (inside the opening). Alternatively, it is desirable to provide the ball sensor below the performance device (movable accessory) provided at the rear. Due to these, the ball sensor does not interfere with the performance device, and it becomes possible to further increase the movable range of the movable accessory.

Means 4: In any one configuration from means 1 to means 3,
"At least two positioning protrusions are provided so as to be spaced apart from each other in the longitudinal direction of the first component."
It is characterized by being something.

According to the configuration of means 4, at least two positioning protrusions are provided so as to be spaced apart from each other in the longitudinal direction of the first component (in the [Detailed Description of the Invention], the positioning protrusions are provided on the side unit 2800 (See description regarding first component 2811).

As a result, since the plurality of positioning protrusions on the first component are provided so as to be spaced apart in the longitudinal direction of the first component, when the ball entry unit is attached to the game panel, the ball entry unit is attached to the game panel. The ball entering unit does not rotate along the surface, and the ball entering unit can be reliably positioned at a desired position on the game panel.

By the way, when a conventional ball entry unit with low rigidity is provided with multiple positioning protrusions spaced apart in the longitudinal direction, when the ball entry unit is pulled forward during disassembly work, the center of the ball entry unit moves forward. As a result, the positioning projections are bent in a curved shape, and due to this bending, a force is applied that tends to tilt the positioning projections so that the tips of the positioning projections that are separated in the longitudinal direction approach each other, and the game panel The positioning protrusion cannot be removed from the positioning hole. On the other hand, in this configuration, as mentioned above, the rigidity of the ball entering unit is increased by attaching the second component to the first component, so even if the ball entering unit is pulled forward. The positioning protrusions separated in the longitudinal direction do not tilt due to bending of the ball entry unit, and the ball entry unit can be easily removed from the game panel, reducing disassembly work when sorting. We can provide gaming machines.

Means 5: In any one configuration from means 1 to means 5,
"The ball entry hole is provided in the first component so as to protrude further forward than the front surface of the game panel."
It is characterized by being something.

According to the configuration of means 5, the ball entry port is provided in the first component so as to protrude forward from the front surface of the game panel (in the [Detailed Description of the Invention], the ball entry port (See the description regarding the first component 2811 of 2800).

As a result, the multiple ball entry ports protrude forward from the front of the game panel, so when disassembling the game machine, when pulling the ball entry unit forward to remove it from the game panel, the ball entry ports are removed. It can be pinched and pulled, making it easier to remove the ball entry unit.

Means 6: In the configuration of any one of means 1 to 5,
“The second component includes a plurality of ball entry ports that protrude forward from the front surface of the first component member, and a flat front plate that connects the front ends of the plurality of ball entry ports, have"
It is characterized by being something.

According to the configuration of means 6, the second component includes a plurality of ball entry ports that protrude forward from the front surface of the first component member, and a flat front plate that connects the front ends of the plurality of ball entry ports. (See the description regarding the second component 2812A of the side unit 2800D in [Detailed Description of the Invention]).

As a result, the second component member, which connects the front ends of the plurality of ball entry ports protruding forward by a flat front plate, is attached to the first component member that is attached to the front surface of the game panel through the first attachment hole. Since the ball entry unit is configured by being attached from the rear side of the ball entry unit, the rigidity can be increased compared to the conventional ball entry unit, and the same effects as described above can be achieved.

Means 7: In any one configuration from means 1 to means 6,
"The first component has a flat base plate that can come into contact with the front surface of the game panel."
It is characterized by being something.

According to the configuration of means 7, the first component has a flat base plate that can come into contact with the front surface of the game panel (in the [Detailed Description of the Invention], the first component includes a side unit 2800 (See the description regarding the first component 2811).

As a result, since the first component is provided with a flat base plate, by attaching the first component to the front of the game panel through the first mounting hole, the base plate opens the opening of the game panel from the front side. The back of the game panel can be hidden by the base plate through the opening from the front side (player side), and the appearance of the game machine can be improved. In this case, since the base plate is flat, the rigidity of the first component may be lowered, but since the second component is attached from the rear of the first component, The rigidity of the ball entering unit due to the second component can be made higher than that of the conventional ball entering unit, and the same effects as described above can be achieved.

Means 8: In a gaming machine,
``In a game machine that has a plurality of ball entry ports into which game balls can enter, and a ball entry unit that is attached to the front of a game panel through which game balls can flow down,
The ball entry unit is
It has a positioning protrusion inserted into a positioning hole provided in the game panel, and a first mounting hole for attaching to the game panel, and an opening provided to penetrate the game panel from the front side. a first component member attached to the game panel so as to close it;
a second component having a second mounting hole for attaching to the first component and being attached from the rear side of the first component;
Equipped with
The first component has a flat base plate through which the positioning protrusion protrudes, the first mounting hole passes through it, and can come into contact with the front surface of the game panel, and the positioning protrusion protrudes from the base plate. At least two are provided so as to be spaced apart from each other in the longitudinal direction of the base plate, and the ball entry ports are provided so as to protrude further forward than the front surface of the base plate,
The second component is attached from the rear side of the first component so as to protrude into the opening, and the second component is connected to the first component to hold the game ball that has entered the ball entry hole. It has a ball path that causes the ball to flow down along the surface of the game panel.
It is characterized by being something.

According to the configuration of means 8, in a gaming machine equipped with a ball entry unit that has a plurality of ball entry ports through which game balls can enter and is attached to the front surface of a game panel through which game balls can flow down, the ball entry unit is , has a positioning protrusion inserted into a positioning hole provided in the game panel, and a first mounting hole for attaching to the game panel, so as to close the opening provided to penetrate the game panel from the front side. a first component member that is attached to the game panel; and a second component member that has a second mounting hole for attaching to the first component member and is attached from the rear side of the first component member. The component has a flat base plate through which the positioning protrusion protrudes and the first mounting hole passes through and can come into contact with the front surface of the game panel, and the positioning protrusion is spaced apart in the longitudinal direction of the base plate. At least two ball entry holes are provided so as to project forward from the front surface of the base plate, and the second component is connected to the first component so as to project into the opening. It is attached from the rear side, and has a ball passage between it and the first component that allows the game balls that have entered the ball entrance to flow down along the surface of the game panel.

As a result, since the first component has a flat base plate, the first component can be attached to the front of the game panel by screwing the mounting screw into the gaming panel through the first mounting hole penetrating the base plate. By attaching it to the base plate, the opening of the game panel can be closed from the front side, and the back of the game panel can be hidden by the base plate through the opening from the front side (player side), improving the appearance of the game machine. be able to. On the other hand, since the second component is provided with a ball passage that allows the game balls to flow down along the surface of the game panel, the cross section of the ball passage is U-shaped, so the existence of the ball passage is This makes it possible to increase the rigidity of the second component. Since the base plate is flat, the rigidity of the first component may be lowered, but the second component, whose rigidity is increased by the ball passage, is attached by mounting screws through the second mounting hole. Since the ball entry unit is formed by attaching the first component from the rear side, the ball entry unit can have higher rigidity than conventional ball entry units. Therefore, when disassembling a game machine for recycling or the like, when you remove the mounting screw screwed into the game panel through the first mounting hole and pull the ball entry unit forward, the rigidity of the ball entry unit is increased. Since the ball entry unit does not bend due to the positioning of the ball entry unit, the positioning protrusion of the ball entry unit (first component) does not tilt relative to the positioning hole on the game panel, making it easy to remove the ball entry unit from the game panel. It is possible to provide a gaming machine that can be removed and the disassembly work required for sorting can be reduced.

By the way, since the plurality of positioning protrusions on the first component are provided so as to be spaced apart in the longitudinal direction of the first component, when the first component is pulled forward during disassembly, the first component The center of the locating protrusions bends in a curved manner to move forward, and this flexure creates a force that causes the respective locating protrusions to tilt so that the tips of the locating protrusions, which are separated in the longitudinal direction, approach each other. There is a possibility that the positioning protrusion may not come out from the positioning hole of the game panel. However, in this configuration, as described above, the second component is attached from the rear side of the first component to form the ball entry unit, and the ball entry unit has increased rigidity. Even if the unit is pulled forward, the ball entering unit will not bend and the positioning protrusions separated in the longitudinal direction will not tilt, and the ball entering unit can be easily removed from the game panel, making it easier to disassemble when sorting. It is possible to provide a gaming machine that can reduce the

Furthermore, since the multiple ball entry openings protrude forward from the front of the gaming panel, it is difficult to pinch the ball entry openings when pulling the ball entry unit forward to remove it from the gaming panel during disassembly of the gaming machine. This makes it easier to remove the ball entering unit.

In addition, since the second component is attached from the rear side of the first component with a mounting screw through the second mounting hole, the mounting screw that attaches the second component to the front can be made difficult to see. , it is possible to improve the appearance of the gaming machine.

Further, a ball passage is provided between the first component and the second component so as to cause the game ball that has entered the ball entrance to flow down along the surface of the game panel so as to project into the opening of the game panel. Therefore, when a game ball that enters the ball entrance is guided to the rear of the game panel and a ball passage is provided behind the rear of the game panel to cause the ball to flow downward, as in the case of a conventional ball entry unit. In comparison, the thickness of the game panel can be used effectively, and the empty space behind the game panel can be easily secured. Therefore, it is possible to provide a decoration, an LED board, a performance device such as a movable accessory in the empty space, and it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is more appealing to players.

Furthermore, since the plurality of positioning protrusions on the first component are provided so as to be spaced apart from each other in the longitudinal direction of the first component, when the ball entry unit is attached to the game panel, the ball entry unit is aligned with the surface of the game panel. The ball entering unit can be reliably positioned at a desired position on the game panel without rotating along the game panel.

In addition, if the first mounting hole for attaching the first component to the game panel is provided near the positioning protrusion, the positioning protrusion can be attached by screwing the mounting screw into the game panel through the first mounting hole. can be firmly inserted into the positioning hole of the game panel by strongly pressing it against the game panel side, and it is possible to prevent the positioning protrusion from lifting up due to incomplete insertion.

In this way, according to the above solution, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can reduce the disassembly work required when sorting for recycling or the like.

[15-6c. Relationship between the means for solving the sixth technical feature and the embodiment]
The panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100 in the game board 5 of this embodiment is the game panel of the above-mentioned solving means, and the opening 1112 of the panel board 1110 of this embodiment is the positioning hole of the above-mentioned solving means. 1113 is the positioning hole of the solution means, and the general winning hole 2001 in this embodiment, the ball receiving part 2811b of the first component 2811, and the ball receiving part 2812c of the second component 2812 are the ball entry holes of the solution means. In addition, the side unit 2800, side unit 2800B, side unit 2800C, side unit 2800D, side unit 2800E, side unit 2800F, and side unit 2800G in this embodiment correspond to the ball entering unit of the above solution, respectively.

In addition, the first component 2811 and the first component 2811A in this embodiment are the first component of the above-mentioned solution means, and the base plate 2811a in this embodiment is the base plate of the above-mentioned solution means. The protrusion 2811c is the positioning protrusion of the solution, the mounting hole 2811d in this embodiment is the first mounting hole of the solution, and the second component 2812 and the second component 2812A in this embodiment are the solution. In the second component, the ball passage 2812a and the ball passage 2812f in this embodiment are in the ball passage of the solution means, and the front plate 2812d in this embodiment is in the front plate of the solution means, in the second component in this embodiment. The mounting holes 2812 respectively correspond to the second mounting holes of the above solution.

[15-6d. Characteristic effects of the sixth technical feature]
Here, the side unit 2800 will be described as a representative feature of the side unit 2800, the side unit 2800B, the side unit 2800C, the side unit 2800D, the side unit 2800E, the side unit 2800F, and the side unit 2800G in this embodiment. According to this embodiment, in the side unit 2800 attached to the front surface of the panel board 1110 in the game panel 1100, the first component 2811 is provided with the flat base plate 2811a, so that the base plate 2811a is penetrated. By screwing a mounting screw into the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100 through the mounting hole 2811d and attaching the first component 2811 to the front surface of the panel board 1110, the opening 1112 of the panel board 1110 is closed from the front side by the base plate 2811a. This allows the rear member of the game panel 1100 to be hidden by the base plate 2811a through the opening 1112 from the front side (player side), and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved. On the other hand, since the second component 2812 is provided with a ball passage 2812a through which the game ball B flows down along the surface of the panel board 1110 in the game panel 1100, the cross section of the ball passage 2812a is U-shaped. Therefore, the presence of the ball passage 2812a can increase the rigidity of the second component 2812. Since the base plate 2811a has a flat plate shape, the rigidity of the first component 2811 may be lowered, but the second component 2812, whose rigidity is increased by the ball passage 2812a, can be attached to the second component 2812 through its mounting hole. Since the side unit 2800 is formed by attaching from the rear side of the first component member 2811 using attachment screws, the rigidity of the side unit 2800 can be increased compared to conventional side units. Therefore, when disassembling the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) for recycling or the like, when the mounting screws screwed into the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 are removed through the mounting holes 2811d and the side unit 2800 is pulled forward. , since the side unit 2800 does not bend due to its increased rigidity, the positioning protrusion 2811c of the first component 2811 of the side unit 2800 is aligned with the positioning hole 1113 of the panel plate 1110. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that does not tilt, allows the side unit 2800 to be easily removed from the panel board 1110, and reduces disassembly work when sorting.

By the way, in the side unit 2800, the plurality of positioning protrusions 2811c on the first component member 2811 are provided so as to be spaced apart from each other in the longitudinal direction of the first component member 2811. When pulled forward, the center of the first component 2811 moves forward and bends in a curved manner, and due to this bending, the tips of the positioning protrusions 2811c, which are separated in the longitudinal direction, approach each other. A force that tends to tilt each positioning protrusion 2811c acts, and there is a possibility that the positioning protrusion 2811c cannot be removed from the positioning hole 1113 of the panel board 1110 in the game panel 1100. However, in this embodiment, as described above, the second component 2812 is attached from the rear side of the first component 2811 to form the side unit 2800, and the rigidity of the side unit 2800 is increased. Even if the side unit 2800 is pulled forward, the side unit 2800 is not bent and the positioning projections 2811c separated in the longitudinal direction are not tilted, and the side unit 2800 can be easily removed from the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can reduce disassembly work when sorting.

Further, according to the side unit 2800, since the plurality of ball receivers 2811b (general winning openings 2001) are made to protrude forward from the front surface of the panel board 1110 in the game panel 1100, the panel board is When pulling the side unit 2800 forward to remove it from the side unit 1110, the ball receiver 2811b can be pinched and pulled, making it easier to remove the side unit 2800.

Furthermore, according to the side unit 2800, the second component 2812 is attached from the rear side of the first component 2811 with a mounting screw through its attachment hole, so that the second component 2812 is attached from the front. The screws can be made difficult to see, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved.

Further, according to the side unit 2800, the game ball B that has entered the ball receiving part 2811b (general winning hole 2001) between the first component 2811 and the second component 2812 is placed on the surface of the panel board 1110 in the game panel 1100. Since the ball path 2812a for allowing the balls to flow down is provided so as to protrude into the opening 1112 of the panel board 1110, the game ball B that has entered the general prize opening 2001 is transferred to the game panel 1100 like a conventional side unit. (The thickness of the panel board 1110 can be effectively used, compared to the case where the ball is guided backward from the rear surface of the panel board 1110 and a ball path is provided behind the rear surface of the game panel 1100 to allow the ball to flow downward.) , it is possible to easily secure empty space behind the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110). Therefore, it is possible to provide a performance device such as a decoration, an LED board, or a movable accessory (backside performance unit 3500) in the empty space, and it is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that is more appealing to players. can.

Further, according to the side unit 2800, since the plurality of positioning protrusions 2811c on the first component 2811 are provided so as to be spaced apart in the longitudinal direction of the first component 2811, the side unit 2800 can be attached to the panel of the game panel 1100. When attached to the plate 1110, the side unit 2800 does not rotate along the surface of the panel plate 1110, and the side unit 2800 can be reliably positioned at a desired position on the panel plate 1110.

Furthermore, according to the side unit 2800, the attachment hole 2811d for attaching to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 in the first component 2811 is provided near the positioning protrusion 2811c. By screwing the mounting screw into the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 and tightening it, the positioning protrusion 2811c can be strongly pressed against the panel plate 1110 side and can be inserted securely into the positioning hole 1113 of the panel plate 1110. It is possible to prevent the protrusion 2811c from rising due to incomplete insertion.

[15-7. Seventh technical feature]
The present specification has the following technical features different from those described above.

[15-7a. Background of the seventh technical feature]
In recent years, the effective use of resources has become even more important due to environmental issues. From this perspective, development is underway to make more parts of gaming machines made of recyclable materials. On the other hand, the cycle for replacing machines at game halls (gaming parlors) where game machines are installed is becoming shorter, and the number of game machines being discarded or dismantled is on the rise. Therefore, the burden of disassembling and sorting gaming machines is increasing, and there is a desire to reduce this work as much as possible.

For example, in a conventional gaming machine as shown in Patent Document Y (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2017-018185), a side unit (ball entry unit) is provided with a plurality of general winning ports as ball entry ports in order to be disassembled. When you try to remove it from the game panel by pulling it forward, the positioning protrusion of the ball entering unit is inserted into the positioning hole of the game panel, so the positioning protrusion is difficult to remove due to resistance from the inner surface of the positioning hole. However, there was a problem in that disassembly work was time-consuming.

Therefore, in view of the above-mentioned circumstances, the following means aims to provide a gaming machine that can reduce the disassembly work required when sorting for recycling or the like.

[15-7b. Means for solving the seventh technical feature]
Means 1: In a gaming machine,
``In a game machine that has a plurality of ball entry ports into which game balls can enter, and a ball entry unit that is attached to the front of a game panel through which game balls can flow down,
The game panel is
It has an opening area that allows game balls to flow from the front side to the rear side.
The ball entry unit is
It has a positioning protrusion that is inserted into a positioning hole provided in the game panel, and a mounting hole for attaching to the game panel, and allows the game ball that enters the ball entry hole in the opening area to flow. The outer edge of the ball entry unit is attached to the game panel so as to close the normal opening area from the front side, and the outer edge of the ball entry unit is placed in a specific opening area through which game balls that have not entered the ball entry hole can flow. It is attached to the game panel so that some parts overlap.
It is characterized by being something.

Here, the term "ball entrance" refers to "a winning opening that grants a predetermined benefit by entering a game ball (for example, general winning opening, normal winning opening, starting winning opening (starting opening), big winning opening, "Input prize opening, V prize opening, etc.)" and "Output opening where game balls are ejected from the gaming machine without giving any benefits even if they enter and are not returned to the player."

In addition, "gaming panels" include "those made of wooden plywood such as plywood" and "those made of a panel board cut from a transparent resin board and a panel holder that holds the outer periphery of the panel board. ”, “transparent resin injection molded”, etc.

Furthermore, the "opening area" includes "a hole-shaped area that penetrates the game panel and whose inner circumferential surface is connected all the way around", and "a hole that penetrates the game panel and is partially connected to the game panel". A cut-out type that is open to the side of the panel, etc. In addition, the "opening area" includes a normal opening area through which game balls that have entered the ball entrance can flow, and a specific opening area (outlet) through which game balls that have not entered the ball entrance can flow. , the specific aperture area may be connected to the normal aperture area, or the specific aperture area may be independent from the normal aperture area without being connected to the normal aperture area.

In addition, the ``ball entry unit'' includes a ``first component that is attached to the front of the game panel so as to close the normal opening area that penetrates the game panel from the front, and a component that is attached from the rear side of the first component. and a second component member, and the first component member or the second component member is provided with a ball entry hole." The game panel comprises at least a flat base plate attached to the front surface of the game panel, and a ball receiver projecting forward from the base plate and opening upward and rearward to form a ball entrance. At least a flat base plate attached to the front surface of the game panel so as to close the normal opening area penetrating the game panel from the front, and a ball entry hole penetrating the base plate. Examples include "things that are done".

Furthermore, the "part of the outer edge of the ball entry unit that overlaps with the ball ejection port" may be any part that overlaps with the ball ejection port when viewed from the front, and the outer edge of the part that constitutes the part may be the part of the game panel that overlaps with the ball ejection port. The outer edge may be in contact with the front surface of the game panel, or the outer edge may be separated from the surface of the game panel.

According to the configuration of means 1, in a gaming machine equipped with a ball entry unit that has a plurality of ball entry openings into which game balls can enter, and is attached to the front surface of a game panel through which game balls can flow down, the game panel includes: It has an opening area through which game balls can flow from the front side to the rear side, and the ball entry unit includes a positioning protrusion that is inserted into a positioning hole provided in the game panel, and a mounting device for attaching it to the game panel. It has a hole and is attached to the game panel so as to block from the front a normal opening area through which game balls that enter the ball entrance can flow through the opening area, and which prevents balls from entering the ball entrance within the opening area. It is attached to the game panel so that a part of the outer edge of the ball entry unit overlaps a specific opening area through which game balls can flow (in [Details for Carrying Out the Invention], [12-3. 112, FIG. 114, etc.).

As a result, by inserting the positioning protrusion of the ball entry unit into the positioning hole of the game panel from the front, and then screwing the mounting screw into the game panel through the mounting hole and tightening it, the ball entry unit can be attached to the front of the game panel. At the same time, the game ball that enters the ball entrance of the ball entry unit can be guided to the rear of the game panel through the normal opening area of the opening area of the game panel. At this time, since the normal opening area of the game panel is blocked from the front by the ball entry unit, the rear of the gaming panel can be hidden and difficult to see through the normal opening area, thereby improving the appearance of the gaming machine. I can do it. When this ball entering unit is attached to the front of the game panel, a part of the outer edge of the ball entering unit overlaps with a specific opening area of the opening area (in front view, a part of the outer edge is within the projection range of the specific opening area). (overlapping), a part of the outer edge protrudes toward the center of the specific opening area. When disassembling a game machine for recycling, etc., when removing the ball entry unit from the game panel, it is possible for the worker's fingers or tools to get caught in the part of the outer edge of the ball entry unit that overlaps with the specific opening area. Therefore, by hooking a finger or the like, the ball entering unit can be pulled forward with a strong force. Therefore, to provide a game machine in which the ball entering unit can be easily removed from the game panel against the resistance between the positioning hole and the positioning protrusion, and the disassembly work when sorting can be reduced. be able to.

Note that it is desirable to provide an attachment hole for attaching the ball entry unit to the game panel near the positioning protrusion. As a result, by screwing the mounting screw into the gaming panel through the mounting hole and tightening it, the positioning protrusion can be strongly pressed against the gaming panel side and inserted securely into the positioning hole of the gaming panel. Lifting due to incomplete insertion can be prevented.

Further, the front surface of the outer edge of the ball entry unit may be inclined toward the rear. Since the front surface of the outer edge of the ball entry unit is inclined backward, the outer edge has an obtuse angle. Therefore, in order to remove the ball entry unit from the game panel during disassembly work of the gaming machine, when the worker's finger or the like is hooked to the part of the outer edge of the ball entry unit that overlaps with the specific opening area, the operator's finger or the like may be attached to the corner of the outer edge. Even if the ball comes into contact with the ball, since the angle is obtuse, it is less likely to injure fingers, etc., compared to when the angle is a right angle, and the ball entry unit can be safely removed using fingers, etc. be able to.

In addition, as mentioned above, when the front surface of the outer edge is inclined, the angle of the outer edge of the ball entry unit becomes an obtuse angle. Even if the game ball rolls as if licking the outer edge to enter the area, the corners of the outer edge will not be chipped, and the durability of the ball entering unit can be improved.

Further, as described above, by tilting the outer edge of the ball entering unit backward, the game balls can be smoothly guided to the specific opening area, and it is possible to avoid the game balls from staying in the specific opening area.

Furthermore, it is desirable that the outer edge of the ball entry unit be transparent. As a result, since the outer edge of the ball entry unit is made transparent, even if a portion of the outer edge overlaps with the specific aperture area, it is possible to avoid the specific aperture area from looking smaller.

Further, it is desirable that the positioning protrusions be provided at a portion close to the specific opening area and a portion far from the specific opening area. As a result, since the two positioning protrusions are provided so as to be separated from each other, when the ball entering unit is attached to the game panel, the ball entering unit does not rotate along the surface of the game panel, and the ball entering unit can be reliably positioned at a desired position on the game panel.

By the way, if the ball entry unit is provided with two positioning protrusions and each is inserted into the positioning hole of the game panel, when removing the ball entry unit from the game panel during disassembly work, the two positioning protrusions must be If you try to pull it out from the positioning hole at the same time, it will be necessary to pull the ball entering unit forward with a strong force, which may increase the burden on the operator. On the other hand, as mentioned above, when positioning projections are provided in parts close to and far away from the specific opening area, one positioning projection is provided near the specific opening area, so recycling is possible. When removing the ball entry unit from the game panel during the disassembly work of the gaming machine, the operator hooks his or her finger onto the part of the outer edge of the ball entry unit that overlaps with the specific opening area and pulls it forward. It becomes possible to apply a strong pulling force to the positioning protrusion near the opening area. As a result, during disassembly work, of the two positioning protrusions, the one closest to the specific opening area can be removed from the positioning hole first, and then the remaining positioning protrusion far from the specific opening area can be removed. Since it is only necessary to pull it out from the positioning hole, it is possible to pull it out with a weaker force compared to the case where two positioning protrusions are pulled out at the same time, and the burden on the type of work can be reduced.

Further, a portion of the outer edge that overlaps with the specific opening area may be made to penetrate through the specific opening area and protrude rearward from the rear surface of the game panel. By the way, when disassembling a gaming machine, in order to remove the ball entry unit from the gaming panel, when the operator hooks his or her finger on the part of the outer edge that overlaps with the specific opening area and pulls it forward, the strength of the part becomes weaker. If it is weak, the outer edge may break and the ball entering unit may remain on the game panel side. On the other hand, as mentioned above, since the depth of the part of the outer edge of the ball entry unit that overlaps with the specific opening area is increased, a part of the outer edge (extension part) overlaps on the front of the game panel. Compared to the method, the size of the specific opening area (ball discharge port) is smaller (the passage volume for discharging game balls is smaller), or the size of the specific opening area (ball discharge port) is expanded in advance ( However, since the strength of this part can be increased, even if a worker's fingers are caught in the part and pulled forward, it will not break (breakage). ), and the ball entry unit can be reliably removed from the game panel.

In addition, as described above, if the part of the outer edge that overlaps with the specific opening area is made to penetrate the specific opening area and protrude rearward from the rear surface of the gaming panel, the area will cover the inner surface of the specific opening area and be protected from the player. It can be made difficult to see, and the appearance of the gaming machine can be improved.

Further, the ball entry unit may have a base plate having a protruding positioning projection, a mounting hole passing through it, and a flat plate shape that can come into contact with the front surface of the game panel and forming an outer edge. As a result, since the ball entry unit is provided with a flat base plate, by attaching the ball entry unit to the front of the game panel through the mounting hole, the base plate can close off the normal opening area of the game panel from the front side. This allows the back of the game panel to be hidden by the base plate through the normal opening area from the front side (player side), making it possible to improve the appearance of the game machine.

Means 2: In a gaming machine,
"In a game machine equipped with a game panel that allows game balls to flow down,
a ball entry unit having a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter;
and a ball discharge port into which game balls that have not entered the ball entry port can enter,
The ball insertion unit has a positioning protrusion that is inserted into a positioning hole provided in the game panel, and a mounting hole for attaching to the game panel, and is fitted into a normal opening area formed in the game panel. attached to the game panel so as to be matched with each other,
The ball ejection port is constituted by a specific opening area formed in the game panel apart from the normal opening area into which the ball entry unit is fitted,
An extension portion is formed on the outer edge of the ball-in unit,
The extending portion is formed so that at least a portion thereof overlaps an edge of the specific opening area when the positioning protrusion of the ball entry unit is inserted into the positioning hole of the game panel. Become"
It is characterized by being something.

Here, the ``normal opening area'' and the ``specific opening area'' are defined as ``a hole-like area that penetrates the game panel and whose inner peripheral surface is connected all the way around'' and ``a hole that penetrates the game panel and whose inner peripheral surface is connected all the way around.'' "Notch-shaped ones with a part open to the side of the game panel".

According to the configuration of means 2, in a game machine equipped with a game panel through which game balls can flow down, there is a ball entry unit having a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter, and a game ball that does not enter the ball entrance. The ball entry unit has a positioning protrusion that is inserted into a positioning hole provided in the game panel, and a mounting hole for attaching the ball to the game panel. The ball ejection port is attached to the gaming panel so as to be fitted into a normal opening area formed in the game panel, and the ball ejection port is fitted into a specific opening area formed in the gaming panel apart from the normal opening area into which the ball entry unit is fitted. An extension part is formed on the outer edge of the ball entry unit, and the extension part is configured such that at least a part of the extension part is in the specific opening when the positioning protrusion of the ball entry unit is inserted into the positioning hole of the game panel. It is formed so as to overlap the edge of the area (see the description of the embodiment shown in FIGS. 112 and 113 in [Detailed Description of the Invention]).

As a result, by inserting the positioning protrusion of the ball entry unit into the positioning hole of the game panel from the front, and then screwing the mounting screw into the game panel through the mounting hole and tightening it, the ball entry unit can be attached to the front of the game panel. At the same time, it is possible to guide the game ball that enters the ball entrance of the ball entry unit to the rear of the game panel through the normal opening area of the game panel. At this time, since the ball entering unit is attached to the game panel so as to fit into the normal opening area of the gaming panel, the rear of the gaming panel can be hidden and difficult to see through the normal opening area, and the gaming machine can be hidden. You can make it look better. When this ball entry unit is attached to the front of the game panel, the extension of the outer edge of the ball entry unit partially overlaps the edge of the specific opening area (in front view, the projection range of the specific opening area). (a part of the outer edge overlaps with the opening), so that a part of the extension part protrudes toward the center of the specific opening area. During disassembly work of the game machine for recycling, etc., when removing the ball entry unit from the game panel, the worker's Since it is possible to hook fingers, tools, etc., it is possible to pull the ball entry unit forward with strong force by hooking fingers, etc. Therefore, to provide a game machine in which the ball entering unit can be easily removed from the game panel against the resistance between the positioning hole and the positioning protrusion, and the disassembly work when sorting can be reduced. be able to.

In addition, since the ball ejection port (specific opening area) is formed in the game panel separately from the normal opening area, the strength of the gaming panel is increased compared to the case where the normal opening area and the specific opening area are connected. It is possible to suppress the decrease in .

Means 3: In a gaming machine,
"In a game machine equipped with a game panel that allows game balls to flow down,
a ball entry unit having a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter;
and a ball discharge port into which game balls that have not entered the ball entry port can enter,
The ball insertion unit has a positioning protrusion that is inserted into a positioning hole provided in the game panel, and a mounting hole for attaching to the game panel, and is inserted into a normal opening area formed in the game panel. attached to said game panel so as to be
The ball ejection port is formed in the game panel so as to be continuous from the normal opening area into which the ball entry unit is fitted, but is constituted by a specific opening area into which the ball entry unit is not fitted;
An extension portion is formed on the outer edge of the ball-in unit,
The extending portion is formed such that at least a portion thereof overlaps an edge of the specific opening area when the positioning protrusion of the ball entry unit is inserted into the positioning hole of the game panel. Become"
It is characterized by being something.

According to the configuration of means 3, in a game machine equipped with a game panel through which a game ball can flow down, there is a ball entry unit having a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter, and a game ball that does not enter the ball entrance. The ball entry unit has a positioning protrusion that is inserted into a positioning hole provided in the game panel, and a mounting hole for attaching to the game panel. The ball ejection port is attached to the game panel so as to be inserted into the normal opening area formed in the ball entry unit, and the ball ejection port is formed in the gaming panel so as to be continuous from the normal opening area in which the ball entry unit is fitted. It is composed of a specific opening area into which the ball unit is not fitted, and an extension part is formed on the outer edge of the ball entry unit, and the extension part is used for inserting the positioning protrusion of the ball entry unit into the positioning hole of the game panel. (See the description of the embodiment shown in FIG. 114 in [Detailed Description of the Invention]).

As a result, by inserting the positioning protrusion of the ball entry unit into the positioning hole of the game panel from the front, and then screwing the mounting screw into the game panel through the mounting hole and tightening it, the ball entry unit can be attached to the front of the game panel. At the same time, it is possible to guide the game ball that enters the ball entrance of the ball entry unit to the rear of the game panel through the normal opening area of the game panel. At this time, since the ball entering unit is attached to the game panel so as to fit into the normal opening area of the gaming panel, the rear of the gaming panel can be hidden and difficult to see through the normal opening area, and the gaming machine can be hidden. You can make it look better. When this ball entry unit is attached to the front of the game panel, the extension of the outer edge of the ball entry unit partially overlaps the edge of the specific opening area (in front view, the projection range of the specific opening area). (a part of the outer edge overlaps with the opening), so that a part of the extension part protrudes toward the center of the specific opening area. During disassembly work of the game machine for recycling, etc., when removing the ball entry unit from the game panel, the worker's Since it is possible to hook fingers, tools, etc., it is possible to pull the ball entry unit forward with strong force by hooking fingers, etc. Therefore, to provide a game machine in which the ball entering unit can be easily removed from the game panel against the resistance between the positioning hole and the positioning protrusion, and the disassembly work when sorting can be reduced. be able to.

In addition, since the ball outlet (specific opening area) is formed in the game panel so as to be continuous from the normal opening area, the normal opening area and specific opening area can be cut into the normal opening area and the specific opening area using a cutting tool such as an end mill on the gaming panel. When forming the regions, the normal opening region and the specific opening region can be cut continuously, and the cost of the game panel can be reduced.

Means 4: In any one configuration from means 1 to means 3,
"The ball entry unit is inclined such that the front surface of the outer edge faces rearward."
It is characterized by being something.

According to the configuration of means 4, the ball entry unit is inclined such that the front surface of the outer edge faces backward (in the [Detailed Description of the Invention], the base plate 2811a of the first component 2811, (See the description regarding the finger rest 2816 and the finger rest 2817).

As a result, since the front surface of the outer edge of the ball entry unit is inclined backward, the outer edge has an obtuse angle. Therefore, in order to remove the ball entry unit from the game panel during the disassembly work of the gaming machine, when the operator hooks his or her finger on the part of the outer edge (extension part) of the ball entry unit that overlaps with the specific opening area, the outer edge Even if a finger, etc. touches the corner of the ball, since the angle is obtuse, it is less likely to injure the finger, etc. compared to when the angle is a right angle. The unit can be safely removed.

In addition, as mentioned above, since the outer edge of the ball entry unit has an obtuse angle, the game ball has to lick the outer edge to enter the specific opening area, compared to a case where the angle is a right angle. Even if the game ball rolls, the corners of the outer edge will not be chipped, and the durability of the ball entering unit can be improved.

Furthermore, since the outer edge of the ball entering unit is inclined backward, the game balls can be guided smoothly to the specific opening area, and it is possible to avoid the game balls from getting stuck in the specific opening area.

Means 5: In any one configuration from means 1 to means 4,
"The outer edge of the ball entry unit is transparent."
It is characterized by

According to the configuration of means 5, the ball entry unit is characterized in that the outer edge is transparent (see the description regarding the base plate 2811a of the first component 2811 in [Detailed Description of the Invention]).

As a result, since the outer edge of the ball entry unit is made transparent, even if a portion of the outer edge overlaps with the specific aperture area, it is possible to avoid the specific aperture area from looking smaller.

Means 6: In the configuration of any one of means 1 to 5,
"The positioning protrusion is provided at a portion close to the specific opening area and a portion far from the specific opening area."
It is characterized by being something.

According to the configuration of means 6, the positioning protrusions are provided at a portion close to the specific opening area and a portion far from the specific opening area (in the [Detailed Description of the Invention]). , see the description regarding the positioning protrusion 2811c of the first component 2811).

As a result, since the two positioning protrusions are provided so as to be separated from each other, when the ball entering unit is attached to the game panel, the ball entering unit does not rotate along the surface of the game panel, and the ball entering unit can be reliably positioned at a desired position on the game panel.

By the way, if the ball entry unit is provided with two positioning protrusions and each is inserted into the positioning hole of the game panel, when removing the ball entry unit from the game panel during disassembly work, the two positioning protrusions must be If you try to pull it out from the positioning hole at the same time, it will be necessary to pull the ball entering unit forward with a strong force, which may increase the burden on the operator. In contrast, in this configuration, one positioning protrusion is provided near the specific opening area, so when removing the ball entering unit from the game panel during disassembly work of the gaming machine for recycling etc. A strong pulling force is applied to the positioning protrusion near the specific opening area by hooking the worker's fingers, etc. on the outer edge (extension part) of the part that overlaps with the specific opening area and pulling it forward. becomes possible. As a result, during disassembly work, of the two positioning protrusions, the one closest to the specific opening area can be removed from the positioning hole first, and then the remaining positioning protrusion far from the specific opening area can be removed. Since it is only necessary to pull it out from the positioning hole, it is possible to pull it out with a weaker force compared to the case where two positioning protrusions are pulled out at the same time, and the burden on the type of work can be reduced.

Means 7: In any one configuration from means 1 to means 6,
"A portion of the outer edge that overlaps with the specific opening area penetrates the specific opening area and protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the game panel."
It is characterized by being something.

According to the configuration of means 7, the portion of the outer edge that overlaps with the specific opening area penetrates through the specific opening area and protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the game panel (in [Detailed Description of the Invention], (See description regarding finger rest 2817).

By the way, when disassembling a gaming machine, in order to remove the ball entering unit from the gaming panel, when the operator hooks his or her finger on the part of the outer edge (extension part) that overlaps with the specific opening area and pulls it forward. If the strength of this part is weak, there is a risk that the outer edge will crack and the ball entering unit will remain on the game panel side. On the other hand, in this configuration, since the depth of the part of the outer edge of the ball entry unit that overlaps with the specific opening area is made longer, there is a method of partially overlapping the outer edge (extension part) at the front of the game panel. Compared to the above, the size of the specific opening area (ball discharge port) is smaller (the passage volume for discharging game balls is smaller), or the size of the specific opening area (ball discharge port) is expanded in advance (game However, since the strength of the part can be increased, even if the worker's finger is hooked to the part and pulled forward, it will not break (break). ), and the ball entry unit can be reliably removed from the game panel.

In addition, since the part of the outer edge that overlaps with the specific opening area penetrates through the specific opening area and protrudes backward from the rear surface of the game panel, the area covers the inner surface of the specific opening area and is difficult to see from the player. This makes it possible to improve the appearance of the gaming machine.

Means 8: In any one of the structures from means 1 to means 7,
"The ball entry unit has a base plate through which the positioning protrusion protrudes, the mounting hole passes through, and a flat base plate that can come into contact with the front surface of the game panel and forms the outer edge. ” is characterized by being something.

According to the configuration of means 8, the ball entry unit has a protruding positioning protrusion, a penetrating mounting hole, and a flat plate-shaped base plate forming an outer edge that can come into contact with the front surface of the game panel. (See the description regarding the base plate 2811a of the first component 2811 in [Detailed Description of the Invention]).

As a result, since the ball entry unit is provided with a flat base plate, by attaching the ball entry unit to the front of the game panel through the mounting hole, the base plate can close off the normal opening area of the game panel from the front side. This allows the back of the game panel to be hidden by the base plate through the normal opening area from the front side (player side), making it possible to improve the appearance of the game machine.

Means 9: In the configuration of any one of means 1 and means 4 to means 8,
"The specific opening area is provided so as to penetrate the game panel independently without being connected to the normal opening area."
It is characterized by being something.

According to the configuration of means 9, the specific opening area is provided so as to penetrate the game panel independently without being connected to the normal opening area (in the [Detailed Description of the Invention], the specific opening area is 112 and the description of the embodiment shown in FIG. 113).

As a result, in addition to achieving the same effects as above, the specific opening area is provided independently on the game panel without being connected to the normal opening area, so if the normal opening area and the specific opening area are connected, Compared to this, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the strength of the game panel.

Means 10: In the configuration of any one of means 1 and means 4 to means 8,
"The specific opening area is provided so as to be connected to the normal opening area."
It is characterized by being something.

According to the configuration of the means 10, the specific opening area is provided so as to be connected to the normal opening area (see the description of the embodiment shown in FIG. 114 in [Detailed Description of the Invention]).

As a result, in addition to producing the same effects as above, since the specific opening area is connected to the normal opening area, a cutting tool such as an end mill can be used to cut the opening area (normal opening area) into the game panel. When forming the normal opening area and the specific opening area, the normal opening area and the specific opening area can be continuously cut, and the cost of the game panel can be reduced.

Means 11: In a gaming machine,
"In a game machine that has a plurality of ball entry ports into which game balls can enter, and a ball entry unit that is attached to the front of a game panel through which game balls can flow down,
The game panel is
Game balls can flow from the front side to the rear side, and there is a normal opening area where game balls that have entered the ball entry port can flow, and game balls that have not entered the ball entry port can flow. a specific opening area, the specific opening area independently penetrating the game panel without being connected to the normal opening area, or the specific opening area is connected to the normal opening area; It has an opening area,
The ball entry unit is
A flat base plate that can come into contact with the front surface of the game panel, a positioning protrusion that protrudes from the base plate and is inserted into a positioning hole provided in the game panel, and a positioning projection that penetrates the base plate. It has an attachment hole for attachment to the game panel, and is attached to the game panel so as to close the normal opening area of the opening area from the front side, and the base plate is attached to the specific opening area of the opening area. attached to the game panel so that a portion of the transparent outer edge overlaps,
Further, the front surface of the outer edge of the base plate is inclined rearward, and the positioning protrusion is provided at a portion close to the ball ejection port and a portion far from the ball ejection port. ing"
It is characterized by being something.

According to the configuration of the means 11, in a gaming machine equipped with a ball entry unit that has a plurality of ball entry openings into which game balls can enter and is attached to the front surface of a game panel through which game balls can flow down, the game panel has the following features: Game balls can be distributed from the front side to the rear side, and there is a normal opening area where game balls that have entered the ball entrance can be distributed, and a specified area where game balls that have not entered the ball entrance can be distributed. The game panel consists of an opening area, and has an opening area in which the specific opening area passes through the game panel independently without being connected to the normal opening area, or the specific opening area is connected to the normal opening area. The ball entry unit includes a flat base plate that can come into contact with the front surface of the game panel, a positioning protrusion that protrudes from the base plate and is inserted into a positioning hole provided in the game panel, and a positioning protrusion that penetrates the base plate. It has a mounting hole for attaching it to the game panel, and is attached to the game panel so as to close the normal opening area from the front side. Furthermore, the front surface of the outer edge of the base plate is slanted toward the rear, and the positioning protrusion is attached to the part close to the ball ejection port and the part close to the ball ejection port. It is installed in a remote location.

As a result, the positioning protrusion protruding from the base plate of the ball entry unit is inserted into the positioning hole of the game panel from the front, and the base plate is brought into contact with the front surface of the game panel, and then penetrated through the base plate. By screwing the mounting screw into the game panel through the mounting hole provided and tightening it, the ball entry unit can be installed on the front of the game panel, and the game ball that enters the ball entry hole of the ball entry unit can be attached to the game panel. The player can be guided to the rear of the game panel through the normal opening area of the opening areas. At this time, since the normal opening area of the gaming panel is blocked from the front by the base plate of the ball entry unit, the rear of the gaming panel can be hidden and difficult to see through the normal opening area, improving the appearance of the gaming machine. You can make it better. When this ball entry unit is attached to the front of the game panel, a part of the transparent outer edge of the base plate of the ball entry unit overlaps with a specific opening area (in front view, the projection of the specific opening area Because a part of the outer edge overlaps the area, a part of the outer edge protrudes toward the center of the specific opening area. In addition, when disassembling a game machine for recycling, etc., when removing the ball entry unit from the game panel, it is possible for the worker's fingers or tools to be caught in the area on the outer edge of the base plate that overlaps with the specific opening area. Therefore, by hooking a finger or the like, the ball entering unit together with the base plate can be pulled forward with a strong force. Therefore, to provide a game machine in which the ball entering unit can be easily removed from the game panel against the resistance between the positioning hole and the positioning protrusion, and the disassembly work when sorting can be reduced. be able to.

By the way, if the ball entry unit is provided with two positioning protrusions and each is inserted into the positioning hole of the game panel, when removing the ball entry unit from the game panel during disassembly work, the two positioning protrusions must be If you try to pull it out from the positioning hole at the same time, it will be necessary to pull the ball entering unit forward with a strong force, which may increase the burden on the operator. On the other hand, in this configuration, the positioning protrusions are provided in the parts that are close to and the parts that are far from the specific opening area, so when disassembling the game machine for recycling etc., the ball entering unit can be removed from the game panel. At this time, a strong pulling force is applied to the positioning protrusion near the specific opening area by hooking the operator's finger or the like on the part of the outer edge of the ball entry unit that overlaps with the specific opening area and pulling it forward. becomes possible. As a result, during disassembly work, of the two positioning protrusions, the one closest to the specific opening area can be removed from the positioning hole first, and then the remaining positioning protrusion far from the specific opening area can be removed. Since it is only necessary to pull it out from the positioning hole, it is possible to pull it out with a weaker force compared to the case where two positioning protrusions are pulled out at the same time, and the burden on the type of work can be reduced.

Furthermore, since the front surface of the outer edge of the base plate of the ball entry unit is inclined rearward, the outer edge has an obtuse angle. Therefore, in order to remove the ball entry unit from the game panel during disassembly work of the gaming machine, when the worker's finger or the like is hooked to the part of the outer edge of the ball entry unit that overlaps with the specific opening area, the operator's finger or the like may be attached to the corner of the outer edge. Even if the ball comes into contact with the ball, since the angle is obtuse, it is less likely to injure fingers, etc., compared to when the angle is a right angle, and the ball entry unit can be safely removed using fingers, etc. be able to.

In addition, as mentioned above, since the outer edge of the ball entry unit has an obtuse angle, the game ball has to lick the outer edge to enter the specific opening area, compared to a case where the angle is a right angle. Even if the game ball rolls, the corners of the outer edge will not be chipped, and the durability of the ball entering unit can be improved.

Furthermore, since the front surface of the outer edge of the base plate of the ball entry unit is inclined rearward, the outer edge has an obtuse angle. Therefore, even if the game ball rolls, licking the outer edge in order to enter a specific opening area, the outer edge has an obtuse angle, so the outer edge will not be chipped, and the ball entry unit will be durable. can improve sex.

Furthermore, since the outer edge of the base plate in the ball entry unit is inclined backward, the game balls can be smoothly guided to the specific opening area, and it is possible to avoid the game balls from getting stuck in the specific opening area.

Furthermore, since the outer edge of the base plate in the ball entry unit is transparent, even if a portion of the outer edge overlaps with the specific aperture area, the size of the specific aperture area can be prevented from appearing small.

In addition, since the two positioning protrusions are spaced apart from each other, when the ball entry unit is attached to the game panel, the ball entry unit will not rotate along the surface of the game panel, and the ball entry unit will not rotate along the surface of the game panel. The game panel can be reliably positioned at a desired position.

Note that it is desirable to provide an attachment hole for attaching the ball entry unit to the game panel near the positioning protrusion. As a result, by screwing the mounting screw into the gaming panel through the mounting hole and tightening it, the positioning protrusion can be strongly pressed against the gaming panel side and inserted securely into the positioning hole of the gaming panel. Lifting due to incomplete insertion can be prevented.

In this way, according to the above solution, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can reduce the disassembly work required when sorting for recycling or the like.

[15-7c. Relationship between the means for solving the seventh technical feature and the embodiment]
The out port 1008 and the specific opening area 1103 in the game board 5 of this embodiment are the ball discharge port (specific opening area) of the above solution, and the opening area 1101 of the game panel 1100 of this embodiment is the opening area of the above solution. , the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100 in this embodiment is the game panel of the above solution, and the opening 1112 and the normal opening area 1102 of the panel board 1110 in this embodiment are the normal opening area of the above solution. The positioning hole 1113 in is the positioning hole of the above-mentioned solving means, the general winning hole 2001 in this embodiment, and the ball receiving part 2811b of the first component 2811 are in the ball entrance hole of the above-mentioned solving means, and the side in this embodiment is The unit 2800G corresponds to the ball entering unit of the above solution.

Further, the base plate 2811a in this embodiment is attached to the base plate (extension portion) of the solution means, the positioning protrusion 2811c in this embodiment is attached to the positioning protrusion of the solution means, and the mounting hole 2811d in this embodiment is attached to the above-mentioned solution means. They respectively correspond to the mounting holes of the solving means. Furthermore, the finger hook 2816 and the finger hook 2817 in this embodiment are attached to the outer edge (base plate, extension) of the ball entry unit (side unit 2800G) at the ball discharge port (out port 1008, specific opening area 1103) in the above solution. This corresponds to the area where some of the parts (installed parts) overlap.

[15-7d. Characteristic effects of the seventh technical feature]
According to this embodiment, the positioning protrusion 2811c protruding from the base plate 2811a of the side unit 2800G in the game board 5 is inserted from the front into the positioning hole 1113 of the panel board 1110 in the game panel 1100, and the base plate 2811a is The panel board of the game panel 1100 can be attached to the front surface of the game panel 1110 by screwing and tightening a mounting screw into the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100 through the mounting hole 2811d penetrating the base plate 2811a. The side unit 2800G can be attached to the front surface of the side unit 2800G, and the game ball B that has entered the ball receiving opening 2001 (ball receiving part 2811b) of the side unit 2800G can be placed in the opening 1112 (opening area 1101) of the panel board 1110. It can be guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 through the normal opening area 1102). At this time, since the opening 1112 of the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100 is blocked from the front by the base plate 2811a of the side unit 2800G, the rear of the game panel 1100 can be hidden and difficult to see through the opening 1112. This makes it possible to improve the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 (gaming board 5). When this side unit 2800G is attached to the front surface of the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100, a part of the transparent outer edge (finger hook portion 2816 and finger hook portion 2817) of the base plate 2811a of the side unit 2800G is attached to the outlet 1008. (The specific opening area 1103 of the opening area 1101) (part of the outer edge overlaps with the projection range of the out port 1008 in front view), the finger hook 2816 (finger hook 2817) protrudes toward the center of the outlet 1008. In disassembling the pachinko machine 1 for recycling or the like, when removing the side unit 2800G from the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, the finger hook 2816 (finger hook 2817), it is possible to hook the worker's fingers, tools, etc., and by hooking the fingers, etc., it is possible to pull the side unit 2800G forward with a strong force together with the base plate 2811a. Therefore, the side unit 2800G can be easily removed from the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100 against the resistance between the positioning hole 1113 and the positioning protrusion 2811c, and the disassembly work when sorting can be reduced. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that is possible.

By the way, since the side unit 2800G is provided with two positioning protrusions 2811c and each is inserted into the positioning hole 1113 of the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100, it is difficult to remove the side unit 2800G from the panel board 1110 during disassembly work. Furthermore, if the two positioning protrusions 2811c are attempted to be pulled out from the positioning holes 1113 at the same time, it is necessary to pull the side unit 2800G forward with a strong force, which may increase the burden on the operator. In contrast, in this embodiment, since the positioning protrusions 2811c are provided in a portion close to the outlet 1008 and a portion far away from the outlet 1008, the panel of the game panel 1100 is When removing the side unit 2800G from the plate 1110, hook the operator's fingers or the like on the finger hook 2816 (finger hook 2817) that overlaps with the outlet 1008 at the outer edge of the base plate 2811a of the side unit 2800 and move forward. By pulling it, it becomes possible to apply a strong pulling force to the positioning protrusion 2811c near the outlet 1008. As a result, during disassembly work, of the two positioning protrusions 2811c, the positioning protrusion 2811c closest to the outlet 1008 can be removed from the positioning hole 1113 first, and then the remaining position far from the outlet 1008 can be removed. Since it is only necessary to pull out the positioning projection 2811c from the positioning hole 1113, it is possible to pull out the positioning projection 2811c with a weaker force compared to the case where two positioning projections 2811c are pulled out at the same time, and the burden of the type of work can be reduced.

Further, since the front surface of the outer edge of the base plate 2811a of the side unit 2800G is inclined rearward, the angle of the outer edge is an obtuse angle. Therefore, in order to remove the side unit 2800G from the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 during the disassembly work of the pachinko machine 1, the finger hook 2816 (finger hook 2817), even if the fingers or the like touch the corner of the outer edge of the base plate 2811a, the angle is an obtuse angle, so compared to the case where the angle is a right angle. This makes it difficult to injure fingers or the like, and the side unit 2800G can be safely removed with fingers or the like.

In addition, as described above, since the outer edge corner of the base plate 2811a of the side unit 2800G is an obtuse angle, the game ball B enters the out port 1008 more easily than when the angle is a right angle. Even if the game ball B rolls so as to lick the outer edge of the base plate 2811a, the outer edge will not be chipped, and the durability of the side unit 2800G can be improved.

In addition, since the outer edge of the base plate 2811a in the side unit 2800G is inclined backward, the game ball B can be smoothly guided to the out port 1008, and the game ball B can be prevented from becoming stuck at the out port 1008. I can do it.

Furthermore, since the outer edge of the base plate 2811a in the side unit 2800G is transparent, even if a part of the outer edge overlaps with the outlet 1008 like the finger hook 2816 (finger hook 2817), the outer edge of the base plate 2811a of the side unit 2800G is transparent. It is possible to avoid the size from appearing small.

Furthermore, since the two positioning protrusions 2811c are provided so as to be separated from each other, when the side unit 2800G is attached to the panel board 1110 of the gaming panel 1100, the side unit 2800G does not rotate along the surface of the panel board 1110. Therefore, the side unit 2800G can be reliably positioned at a desired position on the panel board 1110.

In addition, since a mounting hole 2811d for mounting to the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100 in the side unit 2800G is provided near the positioning protrusion 2811c, a mounting screw can be inserted into the mounting hole 1110 of the panel board 1110 through the mounting hole 2811d. By screwing in and tightening, the positioning protrusion 2811c can be strongly pressed against the panel plate 1110 side and can be inserted reliably into the positioning hole 1113 of the panel plate 1110, thereby preventing the positioning protrusion 2811c from rising due to incomplete insertion. be able to.

By the way, in the disassembly work of the pachinko machine 1, in order to remove the side unit 2800G from the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100, the worker's finger or the like is hooked onto the part of the outer edge of the base plate 2811a that overlaps with the out port 1008, and the operator pulls the side unit 2800G forward. If the strength of the part concerned is weak when the side unit 2800G is pulled, there is a risk that the outer edge will break and the side unit 2800G will remain on the game panel 1100 side. On the other hand, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 113, since the depth of the finger hook 2817 that overlaps with the outlet 1008 at the outer edge of the base plate 2811a of the side unit 2800G is increased, the panel board of the game panel 1100 Compared to the method of overlapping a part of the outer edge (extension part) of the base plate 2811a on the front surface of the base plate 2810, the size of the specific opening area 1103 (out port 1008) is smaller (the passage volume for discharging the game ball B is smaller). Alternatively, the size of the specific opening area 1103 (out port 1008) is expanded in advance (the passage volume for discharging the game ball B is increased), but the strength of the finger hook 2817 Therefore, even if a worker's finger or the like is hooked on the finger hook portion 2817 and pulled forward, it will not break (damage) and the side unit 2800G can be securely removed from the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100. be able to.

Furthermore, the finger hook portion 2817 on the outer edge of the base plate 2811a of the side unit 2800G, which overlaps with the out port 1008, is made to penetrate the out port 1008 and protrude rearward from the rear surface of the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100. The finger hook portion 2817 can cover the inner surface of the outlet 1008 to make it difficult to see from the player, and the appearance of the Pachinko machine 1 can be improved.

[15-8. Eighth technical feature]
The present specification has the following technical features different from those described above.

[15-8a. Background of the eighth technical feature]
In recent years, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, as a means to create performances that can attract the attention of players, the production devices have been made larger, the movable area of the production devices has been widened, and production devices have been improved. They are also decorated with flashy light-emitting lights.

By the way, in a conventional gaming machine such as Patent Document Y (Japanese Patent Application Laid-open No. 2017-018185), a plurality of ball entrance openings (for example, general winning openings) are provided on the front surface of a gaming panel through which game balls flow down. A ball entering unit is installed. The game ball that enters the ball entrance of this ball entry unit is guided to the rear of the game panel, and is detected by a ball sensor in the ball guidance unit installed behind the game panel, and then discharged downward. be done. In order to decorate such a ball entering unit with light emission, it is necessary to provide an LED mounted on the rear side of the ball guiding unit provided at the rear of the ball entering unit, and an LED board must be provided. There is a problem in that the space behind the ball entry unit becomes narrow, making it difficult to secure a larger space for installing the production device.

Therefore, in view of the above-mentioned circumstances, the following measures aim to provide a gaming machine that can present more impactful performances by making it easier to secure space behind the ball entry unit. .

[15-8b. Measures for solving the eighth technical feature]
Means 1: In a gaming machine,
``In a game machine that has a plurality of ball entry ports into which game balls can enter, and a ball entry unit that is attached to the front of a game panel through which game balls can flow down,
The ball entry unit is
It has a positioning protrusion inserted into a positioning hole provided in the game panel, and a first mounting hole for attaching to the game panel, and an opening provided to penetrate the game panel from the front side. a first component attached to the game panel so as to close it;
A second structure that has a second mounting hole for attachment to the first component and is attached from the rear side of the first component so as to form a predetermined space in the opening with the first component. and,
An LED board on which LEDs are mounted is provided in the space formed by the first component and the second component.
It is characterized by being something.

Here, the term "ball entrance" refers to "a winning opening that grants a predetermined benefit by entering a game ball (for example, general winning opening, normal winning opening, starting winning opening (starting opening), big winning opening, "Input prize opening, V prize opening, etc.)" and "Output opening where game balls are ejected from the gaming machine without giving any benefits even if they enter and are not returned to the player."

In addition, "gaming panels" include "those made of wooden plywood such as plywood" and "those made of a panel board cut from a transparent resin board and a panel holder that holds the outer periphery of the panel board. ”, “transparent resin injection molded”, etc.

Furthermore, the "LED board" may be attached to the first component, or may be attached to the second component. Further, the "non-contact surface part" may be provided in the first component, the second component, or both the first component and the second component. You can leave it there.

According to the configuration of Means 1, in a gaming machine equipped with a ball entry unit that has a plurality of ball entry ports into which game balls can enter and is attached to the front surface of a game panel through which game balls can flow down, the ball entry unit is , has a positioning protrusion inserted into a positioning hole provided in the game panel, and a first mounting hole for attaching to the game panel, so as to close the opening provided to penetrate the game panel from the front side. The first component has a first component that is attached to the game panel, and a second mounting hole for attaching to the first component, and the first component is arranged such that the first component and the first component form a predetermined space in the opening. a second component that is attached from the rear side, and an LED board on which an LED is mounted is provided in a space formed by the first component and the second component. Embodiment], see the chapter [12-2b. Modification 2 of side unit] and the description in FIG. 107, etc.).

As a result, the second component is attached from the rear side of the first component through the second mounting hole with a mounting screw, and then the positioning protrusion of the first component is inserted into the positioning hole of the game panel from the front. Then, by screwing and tightening the mounting screw into the game panel through the first mounting hole, the ball entry unit can be installed in front of the game panel, and the first component penetrates the game panel. Since the opening can be blocked, it is difficult to see the back of the game panel through the opening, which improves the appearance of the game machine, and also prevents foreign objects such as dust from entering the game from the back of the game panel through the opening. This can prevent intrusion into the front side of the panel. The first component and the second component, which is attached from the rear side of the first component with a mounting screw through the second mounting hole, form a space within the opening of the game panel, and within the space. Since the LED board is provided on the board, the ball entering unit can be decorated with light by the LEDs of the LED board. At this time, since a space is formed in the opening of the game panel in which the LED board is installed, it is possible to fit the space and the LED board within the board thickness of the game panel, and it is possible to fit the space and the LED board within the thickness of the game panel. The amount of protrusion to the ball can be made as small as possible, and a wider space behind the ball entering unit can be secured. Therefore, it is possible to install a large performance device or a performance device with a wide movable area behind the ball entry unit, so it is possible to present a more impactful performance to the players and increase the appeal to the players. We can provide high quality gaming machines.

Note that it is desirable to provide a first attachment hole for attachment to the game panel in the ball entry unit near the positioning protrusion. As a result, by screwing the mounting screw into the gaming panel through the first mounting hole and tightening it, the positioning protrusion can be strongly pressed against the gaming panel side and inserted securely into the positioning hole of the gaming panel. Lifting up due to incomplete insertion of the protrusion can be prevented.

Further, it is preferable that the ball entry unit is provided with a non-contact surface portion that does not contact each other in a part of the contact surface portion where the first component and the second component contact each other. As a result, the LED board is provided in the space between the first component and the second component, and a part of the contact surface where the first component and the second component are in contact with each other is in contact with each other. Since the non-contact surface portion is provided, heat from the LED board can be radiated to the outside through the non-contact surface portion, and the influence of heat can be avoided.

Furthermore, when the non-contact surface section is provided as described above, since the front end side of the opening of the game panel is closed by the first component, the heat released from the non-contact surface section to the outside flows to the front side of the game panel. The heat can be radiated to the rear side of the game panel.

In addition, when providing a non-contact surface part as described above, the ball entry unit is formed so that a gap is provided between it and the inner periphery of the opening of the game panel, and the non-contact surface part is formed so that at least the upper contact It is desirable to provide it on the surface. As a result, a non-contact surface portion capable of dissipating heat from the LED board provided in the space formed by the first component and the second component to the outside is provided at least in the upper portion of the contact surface portion. Therefore, the heat from the LED board can be reliably radiated to the outside by the non-contact surface portion, and no heat is trapped in the space. At this time, a gap is provided between the outer periphery of the part of the ball entry unit inserted into the opening of the game panel and the inner periphery of the opening. In other words, since there is a gap between the non-contact surface and the inner periphery of the opening, the heat from the LED board can be reliably radiated from the non-contact surface to the gap, and the heat can be exhausted from the opening through the gap. can do.

Further, when providing the non-contact surface portion as described above, it is desirable to provide the LED board so as not to overlap the non-contact surface portion in plan view. As a result, even if foreign matter such as dirt enters the space where the LED board is provided through the non-contact surface portion, the LED board is hardly affected, and the influence of the foreign matter can be prevented as much as possible.

Furthermore, it is desirable that the gaming panel be opaque. As a result, since the gaming panel is made opaque, the light from the LEDs on the LED board does not enter into the gaming panel from the inner circumferential surface of the opening of the gaming panel, but is reflected by the inner circumferential surface of the opening. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the amount of light emitted to the front, and it is possible to make it easier to fully exhibit the effect of light emission from the LED.

In addition, when providing the non-contact surface portion as described above, the non-contact surface portion may be provided at the rear of the rear surface of the game panel. As a result, the heat from the LED board provided in the space between the first component and the second component can be reliably radiated to the rear of the gaming panel through the non-contact surface. The effects of heat can be avoided.

Further, the first component may include a flat base plate through which a positioning projection protrudes, a mounting hole passes through, and can come into contact with the front surface of the game panel. As a result, since the ball entry unit has a flat base plate, by attaching the ball entry unit to the front of the game panel through the mounting hole, the base plate can close the opening of the game panel from the front side. , it becomes possible to hide the rear part of the game panel by the base plate through the opening from the front side (player side), and the appearance of the game machine can be improved.

In addition, as described above, when the first component has a base plate, the base plate of the ball entry unit can close the opening of the game panel from the front side, so that the first component and the second component can be connected to each other. The heat from the LED board installed in the space between the LED boards can be radiated to the back side of the game panel through the non-contact surface part, and foreign matter such as dust can be removed from the back side of the game panel. can be prevented from entering the front side of the game panel through the opening.

Means 2: In the configuration of means 1,
“The aforementioned ball entry unit is
A non-contact surface portion that is not in contact with each other is provided at a part of the contact surface portion where the first component and the second component are in contact with each other.
It is characterized by being something.

According to the configuration of Means 2, the ball entering unit is provided with a non-contact surface portion that is not in contact with each other on a part of the contact surface portion where the first component and the second component are in contact with each other ([Invention (For details on the side unit 2800B, the contact surface section 2830, and the non-contact surface section 2831).

As a result, the LED board is provided in the space between the first component and the second component, and a part of the contact surface where the first component and the second component are in contact with each other is in contact with each other. Since the non-contact surface portion is provided, heat from the LED board can be radiated to the outside through the non-contact surface portion, and the influence of heat can be avoided.

In addition, since the front end side of the opening of the game panel is closed by the first component, the heat released from the non-contact surface part to the outside does not flow to the front side of the game panel, but is radiated to the rear side of the game panel. can be done.

Means 3: In the configuration of means 2,
"The ball entry unit is formed so that a gap is provided between it and the inner periphery of the opening of the game panel,
The non-contact surface portion is provided at least on the upper contact surface portion.”
It is characterized by being something.

According to the configuration of means 3, the ball entry unit is formed so that a gap is provided between it and the inner periphery of the opening of the game panel, and the non-contact surface portion is provided at least on the upper contact surface portion. (See the description regarding the side unit 2800B and the non-contact surface portion 2831 in [Detailed Description of the Invention]).

As a result, a non-contact surface portion capable of dissipating heat from the LED board provided in the space formed by the first component and the second component to the outside is provided at least in the upper portion of the contact surface portion. Therefore, the heat from the LED board can be reliably radiated to the outside by the non-contact surface portion, and no heat is trapped in the space. At this time, a gap is provided between the outer periphery of the part of the ball entry unit inserted into the opening of the game panel and the inner periphery of the opening. In other words, since there is a gap between the non-contact surface and the inner periphery of the opening, the heat from the LED board can be reliably radiated from the non-contact surface to the gap, and the heat can be exhausted from the opening through the gap. can do.

Means 4: In the configuration of means 2 or 3,
“The LED board is provided so as not to overlap the non-contact surface portion in plan view.”
It is characterized by being something.

According to the configuration of means 4, the LED board is provided so as not to overlap the non-contact surface portion in plan view (in [Detailed Description of the Invention], the description regarding the LED board 2825 and the non-contact surface portion 2831 ).

As a result, even if foreign matter such as dirt enters the space where the LED board is provided through the non-contact surface portion, the LED board is hardly affected, and the influence of the foreign matter can be prevented as much as possible.

Means 5: In any one configuration from means 1 to means 4,
"The gaming panel is opaque"
It is characterized by

By the way, if the game panel is transparent, the light from the LED board enters the inside of the game panel from the inner peripheral surface of the opening of the game panel and is diffused, reducing the amount of light irradiated forward. As a result, the lighting effects of the LEDs may be weakened.

According to the configuration of means 5, the game panel is made opaque (see the description regarding the game panel 1100 in [Detailed Description of the Invention]).

As a result, since the gaming panel is made opaque, the light from the LEDs on the LED board does not enter into the gaming panel from the inner circumferential surface of the opening of the gaming panel, but is reflected by the inner circumferential surface of the opening. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the amount of light emitted to the front, and it is possible to make it easier to fully exhibit the effect of light emission from the LED.

Means 6: In the configuration of any one of means 2 to 5,
"The non-contact surface portion is provided behind the rear surface of the game panel."
It is characterized by being something.

According to the configuration of means 6, the non-contact surface portion is provided behind the rear surface of the game panel (see the description regarding the side unit 2800B in [Detailed Description of the Invention]).

As a result, the heat from the LED board provided in the space between the first component and the second component can be reliably radiated to the rear of the gaming panel through the non-contact surface. The effects of heat can be avoided.

Means 7: In any one configuration from means 1 to means 6,
"The first component has a flat base plate through which the positioning protrusion protrudes, the mounting hole passes through, and can come into contact with the front surface of the game panel."
It is characterized by being something.

According to the configuration of means 7, the first component has a protruding positioning projection, a mounting hole passing through it, and a flat base plate that can come into contact with the front surface of the game panel. (See the description regarding the unit main body 2810 of the side unit 2800B in [Detailed Description of the Invention]).

As a result, since the ball entry unit has a flat base plate, by attaching the ball entry unit to the front of the game panel through the mounting hole, the base plate can close the opening of the game panel from the front side. , it becomes possible to hide the rear part of the game panel by the base plate through the opening from the front side (player side), and the appearance of the game machine can be improved.

In addition, since the opening of the game panel can be closed from the front side with the base plate of the ball entry unit, the heat from the LED board installed in the space between the first component and the second component can be prevented. Heat can be radiated to the rear side of the game panel through the contact surface part, and it is also possible to prevent foreign matter such as dust from entering the front side of the game panel through the opening of the game panel from the rear side of the game panel. .

Means 8: In a gaming machine,
``In a game machine that has a plurality of ball entry ports into which game balls can enter, and a ball entry unit that is attached to the front of a game panel through which game balls can flow down,
The ball entry unit is
It has a positioning protrusion inserted into a positioning hole provided in the game panel, and a first mounting hole for attaching to the game panel, and an opening provided to penetrate the game panel from the front side. a first component attached to the game panel so as to close it;
A second structure that has a second mounting hole for attachment to the first component and is attached from the rear side of the first component so as to form a predetermined space in the opening with the first component. Department and
and is formed so that a gap is provided between it and the inner periphery of the opening of the game panel,
A non-contact surface portion that is not in contact with each other is provided at least on an upper side of a contact surface portion where the first component and the second component contact each other,
An LED board on which LEDs are mounted is provided in the space formed by the first constituent part and the second constituent part so as not to overlap the non-contact surface part in plan view.
It is characterized by being something.

According to the configuration of means 8, in a gaming machine equipped with a ball entry unit that has a plurality of ball entry ports through which game balls can enter and is attached to the front surface of a game panel through which game balls can flow down, the ball entry unit is , has a positioning protrusion inserted into a positioning hole provided in the game panel, and a first mounting hole for attaching to the game panel, so as to close the opening provided to penetrate the game panel from the front side. The first component has a first component that is attached to the game panel, and a second mounting hole for attaching to the first component, and the first component is arranged such that the first component and the first component form a predetermined space in the opening. and a second component that is attached from the rear side, and is formed so that a gap is provided between the inner periphery of the opening of the game panel, and the first component and the second component are attached to each other. A non-contact surface portion that is not in contact with each other is provided at least on the upper side of the contact surface portion, and an LED is installed in the space formed by the first component and the second component so as not to overlap the non-contact surface portion in plan view. It is equipped with an LED board on which is mounted.

This allows the second component to be attached from the rear side of the first component through the second mounting hole with the mounting screw, and then the positioning protrusion protruding from the flat base plate of the first component to the front. After inserting it into the positioning hole of the gaming panel, screw the mounting screw into the gaming panel through the first mounting hole and tighten it so that the base plate contacts the front of the gaming panel. In addition to being able to mount the ball entry unit, the opening penetrating the gaming panel can be blocked by the base plate of the first component, making it difficult to see the rear of the gaming panel through the opening, making it easier to see the gaming machine. Not only can the appearance be improved, but also foreign matter such as dirt can be prevented from entering the front side of the game panel through the opening from the rear side of the game panel. The first component and the second component, which is attached from the rear side of the first component with a mounting screw through the second mounting hole, form a space within the opening of the game panel, and within the space. Since the LED board is provided on the board, the ball entering unit can be decorated with light by the LEDs of the LED board. At this time, since a space is formed in the opening of the game panel in which the LED board is installed, it is possible to fit the space and the LED board within the board thickness of the game panel, and it is possible to fit the space and the LED board within the thickness of the game panel. The amount of protrusion to the ball can be made as small as possible, and a wider space behind the ball entering unit can be secured. Therefore, it is possible to install a large performance device or a performance device with a wide movable area behind the ball entry unit, so it is possible to present a more impactful performance to the players and increase the appeal to the players. We can provide high quality gaming machines.

Further, an LED board is provided in the space between the first component and the second component, and at least in an upper part of the contact surface where the first component and the second component are in contact with each other. Since the non-contact surface portions that are not in contact with each other are provided, the heat from the LED board can be radiated to the outside through the non-contact surface portions, and the influence of heat can be avoided. At this time, a gap is provided between the outer periphery of the part of the ball entry unit inserted into the opening of the game panel and the inner periphery of the opening. In other words, since a gap is provided between the non-contact surface and the inner periphery of the opening, heat from the LED board can be reliably radiated from the non-contact surface to the gap. Since the front end side of the opening of the game panel is closed by the base plate of the first component, the heat released from the non-contact surface part to the gap does not flow to the front side of the game panel through the gap. It can be guided to the rear side of the game panel, and the heat from the LED board can be reliably radiated.

In addition, since the LED board is installed so that it does not overlap with the non-contact surface part in plan view, even if foreign matter such as dirt enters the space where the LED board is installed through the non-contact surface part, the LED board It is possible to prevent the influence of foreign objects as much as possible.

Furthermore, since the gaming panel is made opaque, the light from the LEDs on the LED board does not enter into the gaming panel from the inner circumferential surface of the opening of the gaming panel, and can be reflected by the inner circumferential surface of the opening. Since this becomes possible, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the amount of light emitted to the front, and it is possible to make it easier to fully exhibit the effect of light emission from the LED.

In addition, since the opening of the game panel is closed from the front side by the base plate of the ball entry unit, the heat from the LED board installed in the space between the first component and the second component is Heat can be radiated to the back side of the game panel through the non-contact surface part, and it is also possible to prevent foreign matter such as dust from entering the front side of the game panel through the opening of the game panel from the back side of the game panel. can.

In addition, in the first component of the ball entry unit, it is desirable to provide a first mounting hole penetrating the base plate for mounting on the game panel near the positioning protrusion. As a result, by screwing the mounting screw into the gaming panel through the first mounting hole and tightening it, the positioning protrusion can be strongly pressed against the gaming panel side and inserted securely into the positioning hole of the gaming panel. Lifting up due to incomplete insertion of the protrusion can be prevented.

In this way, according to the above solution, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can present more impactful performances by making it easier to secure the space behind the ball entry unit.

[15-8c. Relationship between the means for solving the eighth technical feature and the embodiment]
The panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100 in the game board 5 of this embodiment is the game panel of the above-mentioned solving means, and the opening 1112 of the panel board 1110 of this embodiment is the positioning hole of the above-mentioned solving means. 1113 is the positioning hole of the above solving means, the general prize opening 2001 in this embodiment, the ball receiving part 2811b of the first component 2811 is the ball entrance of the above solving means, the side unit 2800B in this embodiment, the side The unit 2800C, the side unit 2800D, the side unit 2800E, and the side unit 2800F each correspond to the ball entering unit of the above solution.

Further, the unit main body 2810 and the unit main body 2810A in this embodiment are the first component of the above-mentioned solving means, the base plate 2811a in this embodiment is the base plate of the above-mentioned solving means, and the positioning protrusion 2811c in this embodiment is the above-mentioned The mounting hole 2811d in this embodiment is attached to the positioning protrusion of the solution means, the unit cover 2820 in this embodiment is attached to the second component of the solution means, and the LED board 2825 in this embodiment is attached to the mounting hole of the solution means. Each corresponds to the LED board of the above-mentioned solution means. Furthermore, the contact surface portion 2830 (the portion where the support frame portion 2814 and the unit cover 2820 are in contact) in this embodiment is the contact surface portion of the above solution, and the non-contact surface portion 2831 (the notch portion of the support frame portion 2814) in this embodiment. The cutout portion 2814b and the cutout portion 2820c of the unit cover 2820 correspond to the non-contact surface portions of the solution described above, respectively.

[15-8d. Eighth characteristic effects of technical features]
Here, the characteristics of the side unit 2800B, the side unit 2800C, the side unit 2800D, the side unit 2800E, and the side unit 2800F in this embodiment will be described as a representative of the side unit 2800B. According to this embodiment, in the side unit 2800B that is attached to the front surface of the panel board 1110 in the game panel 1100, the unit cover 2820 is attached from the rear side of the unit body 2810 with attachment screws through the attachment hole, and then After inserting the positioning protrusion 2811c protruding from the flat base plate 2811a of the first component 2811 of 2810 into the positioning hole 1113 of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front, the base plate 2811a is inserted into the panel plate 1110. By screwing and tightening the mounting screws into the panel plate 1110 through the mounting holes 2811d so as to make contact with the front surface of the panel plate 1110, the side unit 2800B can be attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and the base plate 2811a can also attach the side unit 2800B to the panel plate 1110. Since the opening 1112 penetrating the gaming panel 1100 can be blocked, the rear of the game panel 1100 can be made difficult to see through the opening 1112, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved. It is possible to prevent foreign matter such as dust from entering the front side of the panel board 1110 (game area 5a) through the opening 1112 from the rear side of the board 1110. A space is formed in the opening 1112 of the panel board 1110 by the unit body 2810 and the unit cover 2820, which is attached from the rear side of the unit body 2810 with a mounting screw through the mounting hole. Since the board 2825 is provided, the side unit 2800B can be decorated with light by the LEDs 2825a of the LED board 2825. At this time, since a space in which the LED board 2825 is provided is formed in the opening 1112 of the panel board 1110 in the game panel 1100, it is possible to fit the space and the LED board 2825 within the thickness of the panel board 1110. This makes it possible to reduce the amount of rearward protrusion of the panel plate 1110 from the rear surface as much as possible, and to secure a wider space behind the side unit 2800B. Therefore, it is possible to provide a large performance device, a performance device with a wide movable area, etc. behind the side unit 2800B, so it is possible to present a more impactful performance to the players, and increase the appeal to the players. It is possible to provide an expensive pachinko machine 1.

Further, an LED board 2825 is provided in the space between the unit body 2810 and the unit cover 2820 in the side unit 2800B, and at least the upper portion of the contact surface portion 2830 where the unit body 2810 and the unit cover 2820 are in contact with each other. Since the non-contact surface portions 2831 (cutout portions 2820c) that are not in contact with each other are provided, the heat from the LED board 2825 can be radiated to the outside through the non-contact surface portions 2831, and the influence of heat can be avoided. can. At this time, a gap is provided between the outer periphery of the portion of the side unit 2800B inserted into the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 and the inner periphery of the opening 1112. That is, since a gap is provided between the non-contact surface portion 2831 and the inner periphery of the opening 1112, the heat from the LED board 2825 can be reliably radiated from the non-contact surface portion 2831 to the gap. Since the front end side of the opening 1112 of the panel board 1110 in the game panel 1100 is closed by the base plate 2811a of the first component 2811 in the unit main body 2810, the heat released from the non-contact surface part 2831 into the gap is Through the gap, the heat can be guided to the rear side of the panel board 1110 without flowing to the front side of the panel board 1110, and the heat from the LED board 2825 can be reliably radiated.

In addition, since the LED board 2825 is provided so as not to overlap the non-contact surface portion 2831 in a plan view, foreign matter such as dust may enter the space where the LED board 2825 is provided through the non-contact surface portion 2831. Also, it is possible to make it difficult for the LED board 2825 to come into contact with the LED board 2825, and the influence of foreign matter can be prevented as much as possible.

Furthermore, when the gaming panel 1100 is made opaque, the light from the LED 2825a of the LED board 2825 does not enter into the gaming panel 1100 from the inner circumferential surface of the opening 1112 of the gaming panel 1100. Since it is possible to reflect the light, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the amount of light irradiated forward, and it is possible to make it easy to fully exhibit the effect of the light emitted by the LED 2825a.

In addition, since the base plate 2811a of the first component 2811 in the side unit 2800B closes the opening 1112 of the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front side, the space between the unit main body 2810 and the unit cover 2820 The heat from the LED board 2825 provided on the panel board 2825 can be radiated to the rear side of the panel board 1110 through the non-contact surface part 2831, and foreign matter such as dust and dirt can be removed from the rear side of the panel board 1110. can be prevented from entering the front side of the panel board 1110 through the opening 1112 of the panel board 1110.

In addition, in the side unit 2800B, in the first component 2811 of the unit body 2810, a mounting hole 2811d passing through the base plate 2811a for mounting to the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100 is provided near the positioning protrusion 2811c. Therefore, by screwing the mounting screw into the panel board 1110 of the gaming panel 1100 through the mounting hole 2811d and tightening it, the positioning protrusion 2811c is strongly pressed against the panel board 1110 side and securely attached to the positioning hole 1113 of the panel board 1110. This can prevent the positioning protrusion 2811c from rising due to incomplete insertion.

[15-9. Ninth technical feature]
The present specification has the following technical features different from those described above.

[15-9a. Background of Ninth Technical Features]
In recent years, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, as a means to create performances that can attract the attention of players, the production devices have been made larger, the range of movement of the production devices has been widened, and production devices have been improved. They are also decorated with flashy light-emitting lights.

As this type of gaming machine, for example, a conventional gaming machine such as Patent Document Y (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2017-018185) has a plurality of ball entry openings (for example, A known ball entry unit has a ball entry unit (general winning opening) and a ball guidance unit that detects the game ball that has entered the ball entry port of the ball entry unit at the rear of the game panel and discharges it downward. It is being

However, in the technology of Patent Document Y, since the ball guiding unit is provided behind the game panel, the space behind the ball entering unit becomes narrow due to the presence of the ball guiding unit, and the space for installing the production device becomes narrower. could not be secured more widely.

Therefore, in view of the above-mentioned circumstances, the following measures aim to provide a gaming machine that can present more impactful performances by making it easier to secure space behind the ball entry unit. .

[15-9b. Means for solving the ninth technical feature]
Means 1: In a gaming machine,
"In a game machine that has a plurality of ball entry ports into which game balls can enter, and a ball entry unit that is attached to the front surface of a game board through which game balls can flow down,
The ball entry unit is
It has a positioning protrusion inserted into a positioning hole provided in the game board, and a mounting hole for attaching to the game board, so as to close an opening provided through the game board from the front side. a first component attached to the game board;
The first component is provided on the rear side of the first component, and the game ball that enters the ball entry hole is guided along the surface of the game board within the opening so that the ball that enters the ball entry hole is within the thickness of the game board. a second component having a ball passageway capable of flowing down;
It is characterized by having the following.

Here, the term "ball entrance" refers to "a winning opening that grants a predetermined benefit by entering a game ball (for example, general winning opening, normal winning opening, starting winning opening (starting opening), big winning opening, "Input prize opening, V prize opening, etc.)" and "Output opening where game balls are ejected from the gaming machine without giving any benefits even if they enter and are not returned to the player."

In addition, ``game boards'' are those on which obstacle nails are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement, ``those made of wooden plywood such as plywood,'' and ``those made of panel boards cut from transparent resin boards.'' Examples include "things made by injection molding of transparent resin", etc.

Further, the "ball passage" may extend so that the entirety extends within the thickness of the game board, or may extend so that a part thereof extends within the thickness of the game board.

According to the configuration of means 1, in a gaming machine equipped with a ball entry unit that has a plurality of ball entry openings into which game balls can enter and whose front surface is attached to the front surface of a game board through which game balls can flow down, the ball entry unit is , has a positioning protrusion inserted into a positioning hole provided in the game board, and a mounting hole for attaching to the game board, and is designed to close the opening provided through the game board from the front side. A first component is attached to the board, and a first component is provided on the rear side of the first component. and a second component having a ball passageway that allows the ball to flow down along the plate surface. , see the descriptions in FIGS. 103 to 108, etc.).

As a result, by inserting the positioning protrusion of the first component into the positioning hole of the game panel from the front, and then screwing the mounting screw into the game board through the mounting hole and tightening it, the first component can be attached to the front of the game board. In addition to being able to attach the component (ball entry unit), the first component can close the opening that passes through the game board, making it difficult to see the back of the game board through the opening, and improving the game machine. In addition to improving the appearance of the game board, it is also possible to prevent foreign matter such as dust from entering the front side of the game board through the opening from the back side of the game board. A ball passage extending along the surface of the game board within the opening is provided in the second component provided on the rear side of the first component so as to extend within the thickness of the game board. Because of this, the ball path allows the game ball that enters the ball entrance to flow down within the thickness of the game board. The amount of rearward protrusion of the unit from the rear surface of the game board can be made as small as possible, and a wider space behind the ball entry unit can be secured. Therefore, it is possible to install a large performance device or a performance device with a wide movable area (movable accessory) behind the ball entry unit, so it is possible to present a more impactful performance to the player, and the game It is possible to provide a gaming machine that is highly appealing to players.

Note that it is desirable to provide an attachment hole for attachment to the game board in the first component of the ball entry unit near the positioning protrusion. As a result, by screwing the mounting screw into the game board through the mounting hole and tightening it, the positioning protrusion can be strongly pressed against the game board side and inserted securely into the positioning hole of the game board. Lifting due to incomplete insertion can be prevented.

Further, at least the portion in front of the movable accessory in the ball path may be provided so as to extend within the thickness of the game board. As a result, the front part of the movable accessory as a performance device in the ball path is placed within the thickness of the game board, so there is sufficient space in the front and back direction of the part where the movable accessory is installed. It is possible to provide a game machine which can secure the same performance, widen the movable range of movable accessories, and present a more impactful performance to the player.

In addition, as mentioned above, when the front part of the movable accessory in the ball path is provided so as to extend within the thickness of the game board, as described above, the movable accessory is provided on the back side of the game board. This makes it possible to secure sufficient space in the front and rear direction of the part where the ball is placed, for example, by placing a decoration between the ball entering unit and the movable accessory, and by using the decoration to move the movable accessory in the lowered position. It can be hidden so that it is difficult for players to see. Thereby, the player can be shown a performance in which the movable accessory appears when the movable accessory is raised from a lowered position, and a game machine capable of giving a strong impact to the player and entertaining him is provided. be able to.

Furthermore, a ball sensor for detecting a game ball flowing down the ball path may be provided at a location below the movable accessory provided at the rear of the ball path. As a result, the ball sensor that detects the game ball that enters the ball entrance is located below the movable accessory installed at the rear, so the ball sensor does not interfere with the movable accessory. Therefore, the movable accessory can fully exhibit the desired performance effect.

In addition, the ball passage has a tributary part that communicates with the ball entrance and extends rearward, and a main part that merges with the tributary part and extends downward along the board surface of the game board. It may be made to have. As a result, the respective tributaries communicating at each ball entry port are made to merge with the main flow part and flow down, so there is no need to provide ball passages for each of the plurality of ball entry ports. The balls can be discharged all at once through one ball passage, and the space behind the ball entry unit can be easily secured.

Further, the second component may be attached to the rear side of the first component. Thereby, since the second component is attached to the rear side of the first component, the rigidity of the first component can be increased by the second component. To be more specific, for example, when disassembling a game machine for recycling, etc., when pulling the first component forward to remove it from the game board, if the first component has low rigidity, the first component may bend. As a result of the bending, the positioning protrusion inserted into the positioning hole of the game board is tilted, making it difficult to remove from the positioning hole, and there is a possibility that disassembly work will be time consuming. On the other hand, when the second component is attached to the rear side of the first component, a ball passage is provided in the second component, and the ball passage has a U-shaped cross section. Since the rigidity of the second component is increased by the presence of the ball passage, the rigidity of the first component (ball entry unit) can be increased by attaching the second component. Therefore, when the ball entry unit is pulled forward during disassembly work of the gaming machine for recycling, etc., the first component from which the positioning protrusion protrudes will not bend due to the increased rigidity of the ball entry unit. Therefore, the positioning protrusion does not tilt with respect to the positioning hole on the game board, and the ball entering unit can be easily removed from the game board, reducing the disassembly work required when sorting the game machine. can be provided.

Furthermore, the second component may be attached to a back member provided at the rear of the game board. As a result, since the second component of the ball entry unit is attached to the back member at the rear of the game board, the ball passage extends downward from the opening penetrating the game board at the rear side of the game board. becomes possible. To be more specific, when the second component is attached to the first component, the first component closes the opening of the game board from the front side, so the second component where the ball passage is provided is placed closer than the opening. It is necessary to make the ball passage small, and it becomes difficult to extend a part of the ball passage below the opening on the rear side of the game board. On the other hand, if the second component is attached to the back member provided at the rear of the game board, a part of the ball passage can be extended below the opening on the rear side of the game board. be able to. Therefore, since it is possible to extend the ball path to the lower end of the game board, the falling height of the game balls ejected downward can be lowered, and the impact caused by the ejected game balls can be reduced. can. In addition, since a part of the ball passage can be made to extend downward from the opening on the rear side of the game board, it is necessary to extend the opening that passes through the game board downward to the bottom end of the game board. Therefore, the strength of the game board will not decrease.

In addition, as described above, if the second component of the ball entry unit is attached to the back member behind the game board, if a ball sensor is installed in the ball path, electronic components such as the ball sensor will be attached to the back side of the game board. Since the electronic components can be assembled on the back side of the board, there is no need to provide electronic parts such as a ball sensor on the game board side. Therefore, when assembling or disassembling a game machine, the wires of electronic components do not extend from the game board side, so the wires may get caught on obstacles such as nails and get in the way of work or break. There's nothing to do.

Means 2: In the configuration of means 1,
"The second component is provided so that at least the front part of the movable accessory in the ball path is within the thickness of the game board."
It is characterized by being something.

According to the configuration of means 2, the second component is provided so that at least the front part of the movable accessory in the ball path is within the thickness of the game board ([For carrying out the invention] (see the description regarding the ball passage 2812a of the second component 2812).

As a result, the front part of the movable accessory as a performance device in the ball path is placed within the thickness of the game board, so there is sufficient space in the front and back direction of the part where the movable accessory is installed. It is possible to provide a game machine which can secure the same performance, widen the movable range of movable accessories, and present a more impactful performance to the player.

In addition, as mentioned above, it is possible to secure sufficient space in the front and back direction of the part where the movable accessory is provided on the back side of the game board, so for example, the space between the ball entering unit and the movable accessory can be secured. By arranging a decoration between them, the movable accessory in the lowered position can be hidden from the player's view by the decoration. Thereby, the player can be shown a performance in which the movable accessory appears when the movable accessory is raised from a lowered position, and a game machine capable of giving a strong impact to the player and entertaining him is provided. be able to.

Means 3: In the configuration of means 1 or 2,
"The second component is provided with a ball sensor that detects game balls flowing down the ball path in a lower part of the ball path than the movable accessory provided at the rear."
It is characterized by being something.

According to the configuration of means 3, the second component is provided with a ball sensor for detecting game balls flowing down the ball path at a lower part of the ball path than the movable accessory provided at the rear. (See the description regarding the ball sensor 2813b in [Detailed Description of the Invention]).

As a result, the ball sensor that detects the game ball that enters the ball entrance is located below the movable accessory installed at the rear, so the ball sensor does not interfere with the movable accessory. Therefore, the movable accessory can fully exhibit the desired performance effect.

Means 4: In any one configuration from means 1 to means 3,
"The ball passage has a tributary part that communicates with the ball entry hole and extends rearward, and a main part that merges with the tributary part and extends downward along the board surface of the game board. and has.”
It is characterized by being something.

According to the configuration of means 4, the ball passage has a tributary part that communicates with the ball entrance and extends rearward, and a tributary part that merges with the tributary part and extends downward along the board surface of the game board. (See the description regarding the tributary portion 2801 and the main stream portion 2802 in the ball passage 2812a in [Detailed Description of the Invention]).

As a result, the respective tributaries communicating at each ball entry port are made to merge with the main flow part and flow down, so there is no need to provide ball passages for each of the plurality of ball entry ports. The balls can be discharged all at once through one ball passage, and the space behind the ball entry unit can be easily secured.

Means 5: In any one configuration from means 1 to means 4,
"The second component is attached to the rear side of the first component."
It is characterized by being something.

According to the configuration of means 5, the second component is attached to the rear side of the first component (in the [Detailed Description], the second component 2812 of the side unit 2800 is attached to the rear side of the first component). (see description).

Thereby, since the second component is attached to the rear side of the first component, the rigidity of the first component can be increased by the second component. To be more specific, for example, when disassembling a game machine for recycling, etc., when pulling the first component forward to remove it from the game board, if the first component has low rigidity, the first component may bend. As a result of the bending, the positioning protrusion inserted into the positioning hole of the game board is tilted, making it difficult to remove from the positioning hole, and there is a possibility that disassembly work will be time consuming. On the other hand, in the present means, the second component is provided with a ball passage, and since the ball passage has a U-shaped cross section, the rigidity of the second component is equal to that of the ball passage. By attaching this second component, the rigidity of the first component (ball entry unit) can be increased. Therefore, when the ball entry unit is pulled forward during disassembly work of the gaming machine for recycling, etc., the first component from which the positioning protrusion protrudes will not bend due to the increased rigidity of the ball entry unit. Therefore, the positioning protrusion does not tilt with respect to the positioning hole on the game board, and the ball entering unit can be easily removed from the game board, reducing the disassembly work required when sorting the game machine. can be provided.

Means 6: In any one configuration from means 1 to means 4,
"The second component is attached to a back member provided at the rear of the game board."
It is characterized by being something.

Here, examples of the "back member" include "back decoration", "back unit", "back box", and the like.

According to the configuration of means 6, the second component is attached to the back member provided at the rear of the game board (in the [Detailed Description of the Invention], the second component of the side unit 2800A (See description regarding component 2813).

As a result, since the second component of the ball entry unit is attached to the back member at the rear of the game board, the ball passage extends downward from the opening penetrating the game board at the rear side of the game board. becomes possible. To be more specific, when the second component is attached to the first component, the first component closes the opening of the game board from the front side, so the second component where the ball passage is provided is placed closer than the opening. It is necessary to make the ball passage small, and it becomes difficult to extend a part of the ball passage below the opening on the rear side of the game board. On the other hand, in this method, since the second component is attached to the back surface member at the rear of the game board, a part of the ball passage is made to extend downward from the opening on the rear side of the game board. be able to. Therefore, since it is possible to extend the ball path to the lower end of the game board, the falling height of the game balls ejected downward can be lowered, and the impact caused by the ejected game balls can be reduced. can. In addition, since a part of the ball passage can be made to extend downward from the opening on the rear side of the game board, it is necessary to extend the opening that passes through the game board downward to the bottom end of the game board. Therefore, the strength of the game board will not decrease.

In addition, since the second component of the ball entry unit is attached to the back surface member behind the game board, if a ball sensor is installed in the ball path, electronic components such as the ball sensor will be attached to the back surface member behind the game board. Therefore, the electronic components can be assembled on the back member side, and there is no need to provide electronic components such as a ball sensor on the game board side. Therefore, when assembling or disassembling a game machine, the wires of electronic components do not extend from the game board side, so the wires may get caught on obstacles such as nails and get in the way of work or break. There's nothing to do.

Means 7: In a gaming machine,
"In a game machine that has a plurality of ball entry ports into which game balls can enter, and a ball entry unit that is attached to the front surface of a game board through which game balls can flow down,
The ball entry unit is
It has a positioning protrusion inserted into a positioning hole provided in the game board, and a mounting hole for attaching to the game board, so as to close an opening provided through the game board from the front side. a first component attached to the game board;
The first component is provided on the rear side of the first component, and the game ball that enters the ball entry hole is guided along the surface of the game board within the opening so that the ball that enters the ball entry hole is within the thickness of the game board. a second component having a ball passageway capable of flowing down;
Equipped with
The second component is attached to the rear side of the first component or to a back member provided at the rear of the game board, and the ball passage is provided in a portion below the movable accessory. A ball sensor is installed to detect falling game balls.
The ball passage has a tributary part that communicates with the ball entry hole and extends rearward, and a main part that merges with the tributary part and extends downward along the board surface of the game board. , and is provided so that at least the front part of the movable accessory is within the thickness of the game board.
It is characterized by being something.

According to the configuration of means 7, in a gaming machine equipped with a ball entry unit that has a plurality of ball entry ports into which game balls can enter and whose front surface is attached to the front surface of a game board through which game balls can flow down, the ball entry unit is , has a positioning protrusion inserted into a positioning hole provided in the game board, and a mounting hole for attaching to the game board, and is designed to close the opening provided through the game board from the front side. A first component is attached to the board, and a first component is provided on the rear side of the first component. a second component having a ball path that allows the ball to flow down along the board surface, the second component being attached to a back member provided at the rear side of the first component or at the rear of the game board. At the same time, a ball sensor is installed below the movable accessory to detect the game balls flowing down the ball path, and the ball path communicates with the ball entrance and extends rearward. It has a tributary part that extends out, and a main part that merges with the tributary part and extends downward along the board surface of the game board, and at least the front part of the movable accessory is located on the board of the game board. It is provided so as to extend within the thickness.

As a result, by inserting the positioning protrusion of the first component into the positioning hole of the game panel from the front, and then screwing the mounting screw into the game board through the mounting hole and tightening it, the first component can be attached to the front of the game board. In addition to being able to attach the component (ball entry unit), the first component can close the opening that passes through the game board, making it difficult to see the back of the game board through the opening, and improving the game machine. In addition to improving the appearance of the game board, it is also possible to prevent foreign matter such as dust from entering the front side of the game board through the opening from the back side of the game board. A ball passage extending along the surface of the game board within the opening is provided in the second component provided on the rear side of the first component so as to extend within the thickness of the game board. Because of this, the ball path allows the game ball that enters the ball entrance to flow down within the thickness of the game board. The amount of rearward protrusion of the unit from the rear surface of the game board can be made as small as possible, and a wider space behind the ball entry unit can be secured. Therefore, it is possible to install a large performance device or a performance device with a wide movable area (movable accessory) behind the ball entry unit, so it is possible to present a more impactful performance to the player, and the game It is possible to provide a gaming machine that is highly appealing to players.

In addition, the front part of the movable accessory that serves as a performance device in the ball path is placed within the thickness of the game board, so there is sufficient space in the front and back direction of the part where the movable accessory is installed. It is possible to provide a game machine in which the movable accessory can be secured, the range of movement of a movable accessory can be made wider, and a performance with a higher impact can be shown to a player.

In addition, as mentioned above, it is possible to secure sufficient space in the front and back direction of the part where the movable accessory is provided on the back side of the game board, so for example, the space between the ball entering unit and the movable accessory can be secured. By arranging a decoration between them, the movable accessory in the lowered position can be hidden from the player's view by the decoration. Thereby, the player can be shown a performance in which the movable accessory appears when the movable accessory is raised from a lowered position, and a game machine capable of giving a strong impact to the player and entertaining him is provided. be able to.

Furthermore, the ball sensor that detects the game ball that enters the ball entrance is located below the movable accessory installed at the rear, so the ball sensor will not interfere with the movable accessory. Therefore, the movable accessory can fully exhibit the desired performance effect.

In addition, since the tributaries that communicate at each ball entry port are made to merge with the main stream and flow down, there is no need to provide ball passages for each of the multiple ball entry ports. The balls can be discharged all at once through one ball passage, and the space behind the ball entry unit can be easily secured.

Further, by attaching the second component to the rear side of the first component, the rigidity of the first component can be increased by the second component. To be more specific, for example, when disassembling a game machine for recycling, etc., when pulling the first component forward to remove it from the game board, if the first component has low rigidity, the first component may bend. As a result of the bending, the positioning protrusion inserted into the positioning hole of the game board is tilted, making it difficult to remove from the positioning hole, and there is a possibility that disassembly work will be time consuming. On the other hand, when the second component is attached to the rear side of the first component, a ball passage is provided in the second component, and the ball passage has a U-shaped cross section. Since the rigidity of the second component is increased by the presence of the ball passage, the rigidity of the first component (ball entry unit) can be increased by attaching the second component. Therefore, when the ball entry unit is pulled forward during disassembly work of the gaming machine for recycling, etc., the first component from which the positioning protrusion protrudes will not bend due to the increased rigidity of the ball entry unit. Therefore, the positioning protrusion does not tilt with respect to the positioning hole on the game board, and the ball entering unit can be easily removed from the game board, reducing the disassembly work required when sorting the game machine. can be provided.

Furthermore, by attaching the second component of the ball entry unit to the back surface member at the rear of the game board, the ball passage can be extended downward from the opening penetrating the game board at the rear side of the game board. becomes possible. To be more specific, when the second component is attached to the first component, the first component closes the opening of the game board from the front side, so the second component where the ball passage is provided is placed closer than the opening. It is necessary to make the ball passage small, and it becomes difficult to extend a part of the ball passage below the opening on the rear side of the game board. On the other hand, if the second component is attached to the back member provided at the rear of the game board, a part of the ball passage can be extended below the opening on the rear side of the game board. be able to. Therefore, since it is possible to extend the ball path to the lower end of the game board, the falling height of the game balls ejected downward can be lowered, and the impact caused by the ejected game balls can be reduced. can. In addition, since a part of the ball passage can be made to extend downward from the opening on the rear side of the game board, it is necessary to extend the opening that passes through the game board downward to the bottom end of the game board. Therefore, the strength of the game board will not decrease.

In addition, if the second component of the ball entry unit is attached to the back surface member at the rear of the game board, electronic components such as the ball sensor installed in the ball path will be installed at the back surface member side behind the game board. Therefore, electronic components can be assembled on the back member side, and there is no need to provide electronic components such as a ball sensor on the game board side. Therefore, when assembling or disassembling a game machine, the wires of electronic components do not extend from the game board side, so the wires may get caught on obstacles such as nails and get in the way of work or break. There's nothing to do.

Note that it is desirable to provide an attachment hole for attachment to the game board in the first component of the ball entry unit near the positioning protrusion. As a result, by screwing the mounting screw into the game board through the mounting hole and tightening it, the positioning protrusion can be strongly pressed against the game board side and inserted securely into the positioning hole of the game board. Lifting due to incomplete insertion can be prevented.

In this way, according to the above solution, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can present more impactful performances by making it easier to secure the space behind the ball entry unit.

[15-9c. Relationship between the means for solving the ninth technical feature and the embodiment]
The panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100 in the game board 5 of this embodiment is the game board of the above-mentioned solving means, and the opening 1112 of the panel board 1110 of this embodiment is the positioning hole of the above-mentioned solving means. 1113 is the positioning hole of the above solving means, the general winning hole 2001 in this embodiment, and the ball receiving part 2811b of the first component 2811 is the ball entrance of the above solving means, the side unit 2800 in this embodiment, the side The unit 2800A, the side unit 2800B, the side unit 2800C, and the side unit 2800G each correspond to the ball entering unit of the above solution.

Further, the first component 2811 of the unit main body 2810 in this embodiment is attached to the first component of the solution means, and the positioning protrusion 2811c in this embodiment is attached to the attachment hole in the embodiment. 2811d is attached to the mounting hole of the solution, the second component 2812 and the second component 2813 in this embodiment are attached to the second component of the solution, and the ball passage 2812a and the ball passage 2813a in this embodiment are attached to the solution. The ball sensor 2813b and the ball sensor 2815 in this embodiment are attached to the ball sensor of the solution means, and the back unit 3000 (back box 3010) in this embodiment is attached to the back member of the solution solution in the ball passage of the solution means. The underside effect unit 3500 corresponds to the movable accessory of the above solution.

[15-9d. Ninth Characteristic Effects of Technical Features]
Here, the characteristics of the side unit 2800, the side unit 2800A, the side unit 2800B, the side unit 2800C, and the side unit 2800G in this embodiment will be described as a representative example of the side unit 2800. According to this embodiment, in the game board 5, the positioning protrusion 2811c of the first component 2811 of the side unit 2800 is inserted from the front into the positioning hole 1113 of the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100, and then the mounting hole 2811d By screwing and tightening the mounting screws into the panel plate 1110 through Since the opening 1112 can be closed, the rear of the panel board 1110 can be made difficult to see through the opening 1112, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved. It is possible to prevent foreign matter such as dust and dirt from entering the front side of the panel board 1110 (game area 5a) through the opening 1112. Then, a second component 2812 provided on the rear side of the first component 2811 is provided so as to extend along the surface of the panel board 1110 within the opening 1112 so as to extend within the thickness of the panel board 1110. Since the ball passage 2812a is provided, the game ball B that has entered the ball receiving part 2811b (general prize opening 2001) can be caused to flow down by the ball passage 2812a so as to fall within the thickness of the panel board 1110. Therefore, by utilizing the thickness of the panel plate 1110, the amount of rearward protrusion of the panel plate 1110 from the rear surface of the side unit 2800 can be made as small as possible, and the space behind the side unit 2800 can be reduced. can be secured more widely. Therefore, it is possible to provide a large performance device such as the back side performance unit 3500 or a performance device with a wide movable area behind the side unit 2800, so that it is possible to present a more impactful performance to the player. Therefore, it is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing to players.

In addition, since the part in front of the lower back production unit 3500 in the ball passage 2812a is arranged to extend within the thickness of the panel board 1110, the space in the front and back direction of the part where the lower back production unit 3500 is provided is reduced. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can sufficiently secure the performance, widen the movable range of the back-bottom performance unit 3500, and show a more impactful performance to the player.

Further, as described above, since it is possible to secure sufficient space in the front and back direction of the part where the back lower production unit 3500 is provided on the rear side of the panel board 1110, for example, the side unit 2800 and the back lower By arranging a decoration between the production unit 3500 and the decoration, the lower back movable decoration 3510 in the lowered position can be hidden from the player's view. As a result, when the lower back movable decorative body 3510 is raised from the lowered position, the player can be shown an effect in which the lower back movable decorative body 3510 appears, giving a strong impact to the players and making them entertained. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that is possible.

In addition, in the side unit 2800, each tributary part 2801 communicating in each ball receiving part 2811b is made to join the main stream part 2802 and flow down, so that each of the plurality of ball receiving parts 2811b is There is no need to provide the ball passage 2812a, and the balls can be discharged all at once through one ball passage 2812a, and the space behind the side unit 2800 can be easily secured.

Furthermore, in the side unit 2800A, a ball sensor 2813b that detects the game ball B that has entered the ball receiving part 2811b (general prize opening 2001) is provided in a lower part than the back lower production unit 3500 provided at the rear. Therefore, the ball sensor 2813b does not interfere with the lower back effect unit 3500, and the lower back effect unit 3500 can fully exhibit the desired effect.

Further, when the second component 2812 is attached to the rear side of the first component 2811 like the side unit 2800, the rigidity of the first component 2811 can be increased by the second component 2812. To be more specific, when the first component 2811 is pulled forward and removed from the panel board 1110 during disassembly work of the pachinko machine 1 for recycling or the like, if the first component 2811 has low rigidity, the first component 2811 is bent, and due to the bending, the positioning protrusion 2811c inserted into the positioning hole 1113 of the panel board 1110 is tilted, making it difficult to remove from the positioning hole 1113, and there is a possibility that disassembly work will be time-consuming. On the other hand, when the second component 2812 is attached to the rear side of the first component 2811, a ball passage 2812a is provided in the second component 2812, and the ball passage 2812a has a cross section that is similar to that of the ball passage 2812a. Since the second component 2812 is shaped like a letter, the rigidity of the second component 2812 is increased by the presence of the ball passage 2812a, so by installing the second component 2812, the first component 2811 (side unit 2800) is Rigidity can be increased. Therefore, when the side unit 2800 is pulled forward during disassembly work of the pachinko machine 1 for recycling or the like, the first component 2811 from which the positioning protrusion 2811c protrudes is bent due to the increased rigidity of the side unit 2800. Therefore, the positioning protrusion 2811c does not tilt with respect to the positioning hole 1113 of the panel board 1110, and the side unit 2800 can be easily removed from the panel board 1110, reducing the disassembly work when sorting. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can perform the following functions.

Furthermore, in the side unit 2800A, since the second component 2813 is attached to a back member such as the back unit 3000 behind the panel board 1110, the ball passage 2813a is placed on the back side of the panel board 1110 and the panel board 1110 is It becomes possible to extend downward from the opening 1112 passing through. To be more specific, when the second component 2812 is attached to the first component 2811, the first component 2811 closes the opening 1112 of the panel board 1110 from the front side. It is necessary to make the second component 2812 smaller than the opening 1112, making it difficult to extend a portion of the ball passage 2812a below the opening 1112 on the rear side of the panel plate 1110. On the other hand, in the side unit 2800A, since the second component 2813 is attached to a back member such as the back unit 3000 provided behind the panel board 1110, a part of the ball passage 2813a is attached to the panel board 1110. It can be made to extend below the opening 1112 on the rear side of the opening 1110 . Therefore, since it is possible to extend the ball passage 2813a to the lower end of the panel board 1110, the falling height of the game ball B discharged downward can be reduced, and the impact caused by the discharged game ball B can be reduced. can be reduced. Further, since a part of the ball passage 2813a can be made to extend downward from the opening 1112 on the rear side of the panel plate 1110, the opening 1112 penetrating the panel plate 1110 can be There is no need to extend it downward to the lower end of the panel board 1110, and the strength of the panel board 1110 will not be reduced.

In addition, in the side unit 2800A, since the second component 2813 is attached to a back member such as the back unit 3000 behind the panel board 1110, electronic components such as the ball sensor 2813b provided in the ball passage 2813a is provided on the back side of the panel board 1110, and electronic components can be gathered on the back side, and there is no need to provide electronic components such as the ball sensor 2813b on the panel board 1110 side. Therefore, during assembly or disassembly work of the pachinko machine 1, since the wiring of electronic components does not extend from the panel board 1110 side, the wiring may get caught on a member such as a nail and become a hindrance to the work or be cut. It never gets put away.

Furthermore, in the side unit 2800, a mounting hole 2811d for mounting to the panel plate 1110 in the first component 2811 is provided near the positioning protrusion 2811c. By screwing and tightening, the positioning protrusion 2811c can be strongly pressed against the panel plate 1110 side and can be inserted securely into the positioning hole 1113 of the panel plate 1110, thereby preventing the positioning protrusion 2811c from rising due to incomplete insertion. I can do it.

[15-10. Tenth technical feature]
The present specification has the following technical features different from those described above.

[15-10a. Background of the tenth technical feature]
As a game machine such as a pachinko machine, the center accessory is attached from the front to the opening of the game panel where the game area where the game ball can flow is formed, and has a decorative body with a predetermined decoration. A device equipped with the above is known (for example, Patent Document Z: Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2017-074434). In the technique of Patent Document Z, the appearance of the gaming machine is improved by the decoration provided on the center accessory.

However, in the technique of Patent Document Z, since the flat plate-shaped decoration is provided near the front end of the center accessory, the sense of depth is poor even if the decoration is decorated in relief, and some players may There was a risk that players would get tired of watching the game and lose interest in it.

Therefore, in view of the above-mentioned circumstances, the following means aims to provide a gaming machine that can suppress a decrease in player's interest by providing a decorative body with a higher decorative effect.

[15-10b. Means for solving the tenth technical feature]
Means 1: In a gaming machine,
"In a game machine equipped with a game board having a game panel that forms a game area through which game balls can flow,
The game board is
a frame-shaped center frame that is attached from the front to an opening formed in the game panel;
a decorative body attached to the center frame and decorated with a predetermined decoration;
Equipped with
The decorative body is
a rear decoration part extending within the frame of the center frame and partially protruding rearward from the rear end of the center frame; and a front decoration part provided ahead of the rear decoration part; has
The rear decoration part and the front decoration part are decorated with mutually coordinated decorations."
It is characterized by being something.

Here, the term "gaming panel" includes "an opaque panel such as plywood (plywood)," "a panel board made of transparent resin," and "a panel board made of transparent resin and a frame that holds the outer edge of the panel board." A type of panel holder, etc.

In addition, the ``center frame'' includes a ``flat plate-shaped flange that can come into contact with the front of the game panel, and a game ball that extends forward from the flange so that the game ball flowing down the game area can be placed inside the opening of the game panel. ``An inflow regulating part that restricts inflow,'' and ``An insertion part that is inserted into the opening of the game panel and is provided along the inner peripheral surface of the opening, and a front end of the insertion part. A flat flange part that extends from the flange part in a direction along the surface of the game panel and can come into contact with the front surface of the game panel, and a flat flange part that extends forward from the flange part so that the game ball flowing down the game area can be connected to the opening of the game panel. and an inflow regulating section that regulates the inflow into the interior of the facility.

In addition, "decoration objects" include "decorations made from patterns such as printing or painting," "decorations with three-dimensional shapes," and "decorations with metallic luster such as plating." "Items with decorations that have

Furthermore, "decoration bodies" include "things that are decorated with light emitted from the LEDs mounted on the LED board" and "electronic components installed at the rear (for example, LED boards, relay boards, ball sensors, magnetic Those that have an opaque part to make it difficult to see the wiring of sensors, indicators (displays with special designs), solenoids, etc. from the front, and those that protrude rearward beyond the rear end of the center frame. Those having electronic components (for example, LED boards, relay boards, ball sensors, magnetic sensors, displays (displays with special designs), solenoids, etc.).

In addition, "decorations that cooperate with each other" include "decorations in which the decorations on the front decoration part and the decorations on the back decoration part form one decoration (picture)", and "the decorations on the front decoration part and the decorations on the back decoration part". ``Decoration with a pattern (figure) in which the decorations on the front and back decorations are continuous with each other'', ``The decoration on the front decoration or the decoration on the back decoration complements (emphasizes) the decoration on the back decoration or the decoration on the front decoration. "Decorations such as", etc.

According to the configuration of means 1, in a game machine equipped with a game board having a game panel in which a game area through which a game ball can flow down is formed, the game board is a frame that is attached from the front to an opening formed in the game panel. It includes a shaped center frame, and a decorative body attached to the center frame and decorated with a predetermined decoration. It has a rear decoration part that protrudes backward from the end, and a front decoration part provided in front of the rear decoration part, and the rear decoration part and the front decoration part have decorations that cooperate with each other. This is what is being done. (In [Details for Carrying Out the Invention], refer to the chapter [11-2. Center accessory of the second embodiment] and the description in FIG. 98, etc.)

As a result, the center frame attached to the game panel of the game board has a rear decorative part that partially protrudes backward from the rear end of the center frame, and a front decorative part that is provided in front of the rear decorative part. Since the decorative body is provided, the front decorative part and the rear decorative part of the decorative body can show the player a deep decoration. At this time, since the back decoration part and the front decoration part are decorated with mutually coordinated decorations, it is possible to show the large decoration to the player, and the back decoration part and the front decoration part are large and deep. A decorative body with a high decorative effect can be constructed. Therefore, since the center frame can be provided with a highly effective decoration, the decoration can strongly attract the attention of the players and make it difficult for them to get bored, thereby suppressing a decline in the player's interest. It is possible to provide a gaming machine that is possible.

In addition, since the rear decoration part that constitutes the decoration body is extended within the frame of the center frame, the rear decoration part may narrow the playing area on the front of the game panel, and the game balls may flow down the playing area. The player can enjoy the game with the game balls in the game area in a good condition without making it difficult to see.

Furthermore, since the rear decoration part constituting the decoration body is extended within the frame of the center frame, if a performance display device, movable decoration body, decoration body, etc. are provided behind the game panel. , the rear decoration section can decorate the area around the presentation display device (display screen), and cooperate with the decoration body (movable decoration body) to display decoration (performance) with a higher decorative effect; It is possible to provide a highly appealing gaming machine that can strongly attract the attention of players.

Note that it is desirable to provide the front decorative portion and the rear decorative portion so that at least a portion thereof overlaps in a front view. As a result, the front decoration part and the rear decoration part, which are decorated in coordination with each other, are provided so that they partially overlap when viewed from the front, so when viewed from the front (front), the front decoration part It is possible to make the boundary between the decoration of the front decoration part and the decoration of the rear decoration part difficult to discern, and the large decoration made up of the front decoration part and the rear decoration part can be shown to the player in a better condition, and the decorative effect of the decoration body can be improved. can be further increased.

Furthermore, it is desirable that the center frame be transparent. As a result, since the center frame is transparent, the center frame can be difficult to see and stand out from the player, and the decorations (front decoration part and rear decoration part) can be relatively noticeable. The decorative effect of the decorative body can be further enhanced.

Furthermore, the decorative body may have an opaque portion that makes it difficult to see the wiring of electronic components attached to the center frame from the front. As a result, since the opaque part of the decoration makes it difficult to see the wiring of electronic components from the front, the opaque part can hide the wiring, preventing deterioration in appearance due to the wiring being visible. , it is possible to more easily exhibit the decorative effect of the decorative body.

Further, the decorative body may be provided in front of the LED board on which the LEDs are mounted. As a result, since the decorative body is provided in front of the LED board, the LED board can be hidden by the decorative body (decoration), so it is possible to avoid unsightly appearance due to the LED board being visible. Therefore, the decorative effect of the decorative body can be more easily exhibited.

Furthermore, a display device may be attached to the center frame that can display the lottery result of the special symbol drawn by the game ball starting to enter the game area. As a result, the display device for displaying special symbols is attached to the center frame, so the display device can be attached to the game panel together with the center frame, and it is also possible to attach the display device separately. In comparison, the effort required to assemble the gaming machine can be saved.

Means 2: In the configuration of means 1,
"The front decoration part and the rear decoration part are provided so that at least a portion thereof overlaps when viewed from the front."
It is characterized by being something.

According to the configuration of means 2, the front decoration part and the rear decoration part are provided so that at least a part thereof overlaps in a front view. (See the description regarding the decorative body 2580 in [Detailed Description of the Invention])

As a result, the front decoration part and the rear decoration part, which are decorated in coordination with each other, are provided so that they partially overlap when viewed from the front, so when viewed from the front (front), the front decoration part It is possible to make the boundary between the decoration of the front decoration part and the decoration of the rear decoration part difficult to discern, and the large decoration made up of the front decoration part and the rear decoration part can be shown to the player in a better condition, and the decorative effect of the decoration body can be improved. can be further increased.

Means 3: In the configuration of means 1 and means 2,
The present invention is characterized in that "the center frame is transparent."

According to the configuration of means 3, the center frame is formed transparently. In other words, the center frame is formed from a transparent member. (See the description regarding the center frame 2511 in [Detailed Description of the Invention])

As a result, since the center frame is transparent, the center frame can be difficult to see and stand out from the player, and the decorations (front decoration part and rear decoration part) can be relatively noticeable. The decorative effect of the decorative body can be further enhanced.

In addition, since the center frame is transparent, when the game panel is made transparent and decorations or performance display devices are installed behind the game panel, the center frame becomes less noticeable and can be seen through the transparent game panel. It is possible to provide a game machine in which decorations, performance images, etc. can be made more conspicuous, and players can be more entertained.

Means 4: In any one configuration from means 1 to means 3,
"The decorative body is
It has an opaque part that makes it difficult to see the wiring of electronic components attached to the center frame from the front.
It is characterized by being something.

Here, "electronic components" include "LED board", "relay board", "ball sensor that detects game balls", "magnetic sensor", "display device for displaying special symbols", "variable winning prize" Examples include "a solenoid for opening and closing a mouth", "a solenoid or a drive motor for moving a movable ornament", and the like.

According to the configuration of means 4, the decorative body has an opaque portion that makes it difficult to see the wiring of electronic components attached to the center frame from the front. (See the description regarding the decorative body 2580 in [Detailed Description of the Invention])

As a result, since the opaque part of the decoration makes it difficult to see the wiring of electronic components from the front, the opaque part can hide the wiring, preventing deterioration in appearance due to the wiring being visible. , it is possible to more easily exhibit the decorative effect of the decorative body.

Means 5: In any one configuration from means 1 to means 4,
"The decorative body is
It is provided in front of the LED board on which the LED is mounted.
It is characterized by being something.

According to the configuration of means 5, the decorative body is provided in front of the LED board on which the LEDs are mounted. (See the description regarding the LED board 2586 of the decorative body 2580 in [Detailed Description of the Invention])

As a result, since the decorative body is provided in front of the LED board, the LED board can be hidden by the decorative body (decoration), so it is possible to avoid unsightly appearance due to the LED board being visible. Therefore, the decorative effect of the decorative body can be more easily exhibited.

In addition, if the decoration is illuminated with light from the LEDs mounted on the LED board, the decoration can be decorated with light by the LED board, making the decoration look bright and beautiful. It is possible to entertain people and suppress a decline in interest.

Means 6: In the configuration of any one of means 1 to 5,
"In the center frame,
A display device is installed that can display the lottery result of the special symbol drawn by the starting ball entered by the game ball in the gaming area.
It is characterized by being something.

According to the structure of the means 6, a display device capable of displaying the lottery result of the special symbol drawn by the start of the game ball in the game area is attached to the center frame. (See the description regarding the symbol display 2518 in [Description of the Invention])

As a result, the display device for displaying special symbols is attached to the center frame, so the display device can be attached to the game panel together with the center frame, and it is also possible to attach the display device separately. In comparison, the effort required to assemble the gaming machine can be saved.

Means 7: In a gaming machine,
"In a game machine equipped with a game board having a game panel that forms a game area through which game balls can flow,
The game board is
A display device capable of displaying the lottery result of a special symbol drawn by a starting ball entered by a game ball in the game area is attached, and a frame-shaped transparent display device is attached from the front to an opening formed in the game panel. center frame and
It is attached to the center frame, has a predetermined decoration, has an opaque part that makes it difficult to see the wiring of electronic components attached to the center frame from the front, and has an LED mounted thereon. a decorative body provided in front of the LED board;
Equipped with
The decorative body is
a rear decoration part extending within the frame of the center frame and partially protruding rearward from the rear end of the center frame; and a front decoration part provided ahead of the rear decoration part; has
The rear decoration part and the front decoration part are provided with decorations that cooperate with each other, and are provided so that at least a portion thereof overlaps when viewed from the front.
It is characterized by being something.

According to the configuration of means 7, in a gaming machine that is equipped with a gaming board having a gaming panel in which a gaming area is formed into which a gaming ball can fall, the gaming board is configured such that the gaming board is configured to prevent a starting ball from entering the gaming area within the gaming area. A display device that can display the lottery results of special symbols drawn by is attached to the frame-shaped transparent center frame that is attached from the front to the opening formed in the game panel, and a display device that is attached to the center frame. It has a predetermined decoration and an opaque part that makes it difficult to see the wiring of electronic components attached to the center frame from the front. a decorative body, the decorative body includes a rear decorative part extending within the frame of the center frame and partially protruding rearward beyond the rear end of the center frame; A front decoration part is provided, and the rear decoration part and the front decoration part are provided with decorations that cooperate with each other, and are provided so that at least a portion thereof overlaps when viewed from the front. It is something.

As a result, the transparent center frame attached to the game panel of the game board has a rear decoration part that partially protrudes backward from the rear end of the center frame, and a front decoration part that is provided in front of the rear decoration part. Since the decoration is made up of a decorative part, the center frame is transparent, making it less noticeable and making the decoration stand out relatively. It is possible to show the player a decoration with depth. At this time, since the rear decoration part and the front decoration part are decorated in a manner that cooperates with each other, and are provided so that a portion of each part overlaps when viewed from the front, when viewed from the front (front), It is possible to make the boundary between the decoration of the front decoration part and the decoration of the rear decoration part difficult to distinguish, and the large decoration made up of the front decoration part and the rear decoration part can be shown to the player in good condition. The front decoration part and the front decoration part can constitute a large and deep decorative body with a high decorative effect. Therefore, since the center frame can be provided with a highly effective decoration, the decoration can strongly attract the attention of the players and make it difficult for them to get bored, thereby suppressing a decline in the player's interest. It is possible to provide a gaming machine that is possible.

In addition, since the rear decoration part that constitutes the decoration body is extended within the frame of the center frame, the rear decoration part may narrow the playing area on the front of the game panel, and the game balls may flow down the playing area. The player can enjoy the game with the game balls in the game area in a good condition without making it difficult to see.

Furthermore, since the rear decoration part constituting the decoration body is extended within the frame of the center frame, if a performance display device, movable decoration body, decoration body, etc. are provided behind the game panel. , the rear decoration section can decorate the area around the presentation display device (display screen), and cooperate with the decoration body (movable decoration body) to display decoration (performance) with a higher decorative effect; It is possible to provide a highly appealing gaming machine that can strongly attract the attention of players.

In addition, since the opaque part of the decorative body makes it difficult to see the wiring of electronic components from the front, the opaque part can hide the wiring, preventing deterioration in appearance due to the wiring being visible. The decorative effect of the decorative body can be more easily exerted.

Furthermore, since the decorative body is provided in front of the LED board, the LED board can be hidden by the decorative body (decoration), so it is possible to avoid the unsightly appearance caused by the LED board being visible. , it is possible to more easily exhibit the decorative effect of the decorative body.

In addition, since the display device for displaying special symbols is attached to the center frame, the display device can be attached to the game panel together with the center frame, compared to the case where the display device is attached separately. As a result, the effort required to assemble the gaming machine can be saved.

In this way, according to the above-mentioned solution, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can suppress a decrease in player's interest by providing a decorative body with a higher decorative effect.

[15-10c. Relationship between the means for solving the tenth technical feature and the embodiment]
The game panel 1100 consisting of the panel board 1110 and the panel holder 1120 in the game board 5 of this embodiment is the game panel of the above solution, and the opening 1112 of the panel board 1110 of this embodiment is the opening of the game panel of the above solution. In addition, the center frame 2511 of the center accessory 2500 in this embodiment is the center frame of the above-mentioned solution, the pattern display 2518 in this embodiment is the display of the above-mentioned solution, and the decoration body 2580 in this embodiment is the above-mentioned solution. In the decoration of the means, the front decoration part 2581 in this embodiment is the front decoration part of the solution means, the rear decoration part 2582 in this embodiment is the rear decoration part of the solution means, and the LED board 2586 in this embodiment is Each corresponds to the LED board of the above solution.

[15-10d. Characteristic effects of the tenth technical features]
According to this embodiment, a transparent center frame 2511 attached to the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 includes a rear decorative portion 2582 that partially protrudes rearward than the rear end of the center frame 2511, and a rear decorative portion Since the decoration body 2580 is provided with the front decoration part 2581 provided in front of the decoration body 2582, the center frame 2511 is transparent, making it difficult to stand out and making the decoration body 2580 relatively noticeable. At the same time, the front decoration part 2581 and the rear decoration part 2582 of the decoration body 2580 allow the player to see a deep decoration. At this time, since the rear decoration part 2582 and the front decoration part 2581 are decorated in a manner that cooperates with each other and are provided so that a portion of each part overlaps when viewed from the front, the Sometimes, it becomes possible to make the boundary between the decoration of the front decoration part 2581 and the decoration of the rear decoration part 2582 difficult to see, and the large decoration of the front decoration part 2581 and the rear decoration part 2582 can be shown to the player in good condition. The rear decoration part 2582 and the front decoration part 2581 can form a large and deep decoration body 2580 with a high decorative effect. Therefore, since the center frame 2511 can be provided with the decorative body 2580 having a high decorative effect, the decorative body 2580 can strongly attract the attention of the players and make it difficult for them to get bored, thereby suppressing a decline in the interest of the players. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can perform the following functions.

Further, according to the present embodiment, since the rear decoration part 2582 constituting the decoration body 2580 is extended within the frame of the center frame 2511, the rear decoration part 2582 extends into the game area on the front side of the game panel 1100. The player can enjoy the game with the game balls B in the game area 5a in a good condition without narrowing the area 5a or making it difficult to see the game balls B flowing down the game area 5a.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, since the rear decoration part 2582 constituting the decoration body 2580 is extended within the frame of the center frame 2511, the effect display device provided at the rear of the game panel 1100 1600, the back-front presentation unit 3300, the back-back presentation unit 3400, etc., the area around the presentation display device 1600 (display screen) is decorated, and the decoration body (movable decoration) of the back-front presentation unit 3300 and the back-back presentation unit 3400 is It is possible to provide a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 that can display and perform decorations (directions) with a higher decorative effect in cooperation with the player's body) and that can strongly attract the attention of players. .

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, the opaque portion of the decorative body 2580 makes it difficult to see the wiring of electronic components such as the LED board 2586 from the front, so the wiring can be hidden by the opaque portion. By being visible, deterioration in appearance can be prevented, and the decorative effect of the decoration body 2580 can be more easily exhibited.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, since the decoration body 2580 (front decoration part 2581) is provided in front of the LED board 2586, the LED board 2586 can be hidden by the decoration body 2580 (decoration). It is possible to avoid poor appearance due to the LED board 2586 being visible, and it is possible to more easily exhibit the decorative effect of the decoration body 2580.

Further, according to this embodiment, since the symbol display device 2518 for displaying special symbols is attached to the center frame 2511, the symbol display device 2518 can be attached to the game panel 1100 together with the center frame 2511. Therefore, compared to the case where the symbol display device 2518 is separately attached, the effort required to assemble the pachinko machine 1 can be saved.

[15-11. Eleventh technical feature]
The present specification has the following technical features different from those described above.

[15-11a. Eleventh Background of Technical Features]
As a game machine such as a pachinko machine, the center accessory is attached from the front to the opening of the game panel where the game area where the game ball can flow is formed, and has a decorative body with a predetermined decoration. A device equipped with the above is known (for example, Patent Document Z: Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2017-074434). In the technique disclosed in Patent Document Z, the appearance of the gaming machine is improved by the decorative body provided on the center accessory.

However, in the technique of Patent Document Z, since the flat plate-shaped decoration is provided near the front end of the center accessory, the sense of depth is poor even if the decoration is decorated in relief, and some players may There was a risk that players would get tired of watching the game and lose interest in it.

On the other hand, it is possible to increase the decorativeness by providing the center accessory with a three-dimensional decorative body formed in the front and back direction, but the rear end of the decorative body is located at the rear of the center accessory (center frame). If it protrudes, the protruding portion tends to get in the way during the manufacture of the game machine, making it difficult to handle (handling), which may increase manufacturing costs.

Therefore, in view of the above-mentioned circumstances, the following means aims to provide a gaming machine that can maintain decorativeness and improve handling during manufacturing.

[15-11b. Eleventh technical feature solution]
Means 1: In a gaming machine,
"In a game machine equipped with a game board having a game panel that forms a game area through which game balls can flow,
The game board is
a frame-shaped center frame that is attached from the front to an opening formed in the game panel;
a decorative body attached to the center frame and decorated with a predetermined decoration;
Equipped with
The decorative body is
a rear decorative portion extending within the frame of the center frame and provided forward of the rear end of the center frame;
and a front decoration part provided so as to overlap at least a part of the front part of the rear decoration part.

Here, the term "gaming panel" includes "an opaque panel such as plywood (plywood)," "a panel board made of transparent resin," and "a panel board made of transparent resin and a frame that holds the outer edge of the panel board." A type of panel holder, etc.

In addition, the ``center frame'' includes a ``flat plate-shaped flange that can come into contact with the front of the game panel, and a game ball that extends forward from the flange so that the game ball flowing down the game area can be placed inside the opening of the game panel. ``An inflow regulating part that restricts inflow,'' and ``An insertion part that is inserted into the opening of the game panel and is provided along the inner peripheral surface of the opening, and a front end of the insertion part. A flat flange part that extends from the flange part in a direction along the surface of the game panel and can come into contact with the front surface of the game panel, and a flat flange part that extends forward from the flange part so that the game ball flowing down the game area can be connected to the opening of the game panel. and an inflow regulating section that regulates the inflow into the interior of the facility.

In addition, "decoration objects" include "decorations made from patterns such as printing or painting," "decorations with three-dimensional shapes," and "decorations with metallic luster such as plating." "Items with decorations that have

Furthermore, "decoration bodies" include "things that are decorated with light emitted from the LEDs mounted on the LED board" and "electronic components installed at the rear (for example, LED boards, relay boards, ball sensors, magnetic Those that have an opaque part to make it difficult to see the wiring of sensors, indicators (displays with special designs), solenoids, etc. from the front, and those that protrude rearward beyond the rear end of the center frame. Those having electronic components (for example, LED boards, relay boards, ball sensors, magnetic sensors, displays (displays with special designs), solenoids, etc.).

In addition, the relationship between the rear decoration part and the front decoration part that make up the decorative body is that ``the back decoration part has a decoration that coordinates with the decoration of the front decoration part'', and ``the back decoration part has decorations that coordinate with the decorations on the front decoration part''. "The same decoration is applied to the front decoration part so as to coordinate with the decoration on the front decoration part." The decoration (front decoration) has a transparent part that allows the decoration (rear decoration) on the rear rear decoration to be visible.'' A transparent part where the decoration (rear decoration) is visible, and a plurality of dot parts provided in the transparent part and decorated with a part of the front decoration.'', etc. can be mentioned.

According to the configuration of means 1, in a game machine equipped with a game board having a game panel in which a game area through which a game ball can flow down is formed, the game board is a frame that is attached from the front to an opening formed in the game panel. It includes a shaped center frame, and a decorative body attached to the center frame and decorated with a predetermined decoration, the decorative body extending within the frame of the center frame and extending beyond the rear end of the center frame. It has a rear decoration part provided at the front, and a front decoration part provided so as to overlap at least a part of the front part of the rear decoration part. (In [Details for Carrying Out the Invention], refer to the chapter [11-1. Center accessory of the first embodiment] and the descriptions in FIGS. 94 to 97, etc.)

As a result, the center frame attached to the game panel of the game board is provided with a rear decoration section provided in front of the rear end of the center frame, and a rear decoration section provided so as to overlap with at least a part of the front side of the rear decoration section. Since the decoration body is provided with a front decoration part that has a front decoration part, a deep decoration can be shown to the player by the front decoration part and the back decoration part of the decoration body. At this time, since a part of the back decoration part and the front decoration part overlap, the boundary between the decoration of the front decoration part and the decoration of the back decoration part is difficult to distinguish when viewed from the front (front). This allows the player to see a large decoration made up of the front decoration part and the rear decoration part, and allows the back decoration part and the front decoration part to form a large, deep decoration with a high decorative effect. can. Therefore, since the center frame can be provided with a highly effective decoration, the decoration can strongly attract the attention of the players and make it difficult for them to get bored, thereby suppressing a decline in the player's interest. It is possible to provide a gaming machine that is possible.

In addition, the rear decoration part is provided forward of the rear end of the center frame, and by protruding backward from the center frame, there is no part that would get in the way during the manufacturing of the gaming machine. It is possible to improve handling (handling efficiency), and by improving workability, it is possible to suppress an increase in manufacturing costs. Specifically, for example, when the center frame is placed with its rear end side down on a workbench or the like, the center frame will not wobble. Alternatively, when moving the center frame during assembly work, transportation work, etc., because a part of the decorative body does not protrude rearward from the rear end of the center frame, the part protruding from the center frame may come into contact with other parts, etc. There is no risk of damage or damage due to contact. For this reason, it is not necessary to work with extreme caution, and work efficiency can be improved.

Furthermore, since the rear decoration part that makes up the decoration body extends into the frame of the center frame, the rear decoration part narrows the playing area on the front of the game panel and prevents game balls from flowing down the playing area. The player can enjoy the game with the game balls in the game area in a good condition without making it difficult to see.

In addition, since the rear decoration part that constitutes the decoration body is extended within the frame of the center frame, if a performance display device, movable decoration body, decoration body, etc. is provided behind the game panel. , the rear decoration section can decorate the area around the presentation display device (display screen), and cooperate with the decoration body (movable decoration body) to display decoration (performance) with a higher decorative effect; It is possible to provide a highly appealing gaming machine that can strongly attract the attention of players.

Note that it is desirable that the rear decoration part be decorated with a decoration that coordinates with the decoration of the front decoration part. As a result, since the rear decoration part is decorated with decorations that coordinate with the decorations on the front decoration part, the decorations in the rear decoration part and the decorations in the front decoration part can make one large decoration appear to the player. The decorative effect of the decorative body can be further enhanced.

It is also desirable that the center frame be transparent. As a result, since the center frame is transparent, the center frame can be difficult to see and stand out from the player, and the decorations (front decoration part and rear decoration part) can be relatively noticeable. The decorative effect of the decorative body can be further enhanced.

Further, the decorative body may have an opaque portion that makes it difficult to see the wiring of electronic components attached to the center frame from the front. As a result, since the opaque part of the decoration makes it difficult to see the wiring of electronic components from the front, the opaque part can hide the wiring, preventing deterioration in appearance due to the wiring being visible. , it is possible to more easily exhibit the decorative effect of the decorative body.

Further, the rear decoration part has a rear decoration that is the same as the front decoration part of the front decoration part that overlaps with the front part of the front decoration part when viewed from the front, and the front decoration part has a rear decoration part that overlaps with the front decoration part of the front decoration part. A transparent part is provided in the front part of the ball passage through which game balls circulate, which is provided in a part between the rear decoration part and the ball passage, so that the game balls flowing through the rear decoration and the ball passage can be seen from the front. You can also do it. As a result, when a game ball is not flowing through the ball passage provided between the front decoration part and the rear decoration part, the transparent part provided in the front part of the ball passage in the front decoration of the front decoration part Through this, the rear decoration of the rear decoration section provided at the rear can be visually recognized. In this case, since the rear decoration of the rear decoration is the same as the front decoration of the front decoration, the rear decoration of the rear decoration supplements the transparent part of the front decoration of the front decoration, so that the front decoration of the front decoration Since the decoration has no transparent part, the original decoration can be shown to the player, and the decorative effect of the decoration can be surely exhibited. On the other hand, when the game ball is flowing through the ball path provided between the front decoration part and the back decoration part, the game ball can be seen through the transparent part of the front decoration of the front decoration part, so the temporary In any case, it is possible to avoid giving the player a sense of distrust or anxiety due to the game ball becoming invisible, and it is possible to enjoy the game using the game ball and suppress a drop in interest.

In addition, as described above, when providing a transparent part in the front part of the ball passage in the front decoration of the front decoration part and applying the same rear decoration as the front decoration to the rear decoration part behind the transmission part, the front decoration part Alternatively, the transparent portion may include a plurality of decorated dots that are smaller in size than the game ball and constitute part of the front decoration. As a result, the decoration of the rear decoration part that can be seen through the transparent part of the front decoration of the front decoration part is blocked by the game balls flowing through the ball passage provided between the front decoration part and the rear decoration part. Even if it disappears, the decoration of the plurality of dots provided in the transparent part in front of the game ball can be seen, which makes the game ball in the ball path visible to the player and makes the decoration look bad. This can be avoided, and the decorative effect of the decorative body can be fully exhibited.

Further, the decorative body may be provided in front of the LED board on which the LEDs are mounted. As a result, since the decorative body is provided in front of the LED board, the LED board can be hidden by the decorative body (decoration), so it is possible to avoid unsightly appearance due to the LED board being visible. Therefore, the decorative effect of the decorative body can be more easily exhibited.

Furthermore, a display device may be attached to the center frame that can display the lottery result of the special symbol drawn by the game ball starting to enter the game area. As a result, the display device for displaying special symbols is attached to the center frame, so the display device can be attached to the game panel together with the center frame, and it is also possible to attach the display device separately. In comparison, the effort required to assemble the gaming machine can be saved.

Means 2: In the configuration of means 1,
"The rear decoration part is decorated with a decoration that cooperates with the decoration of the front decoration part."
It is characterized by being something.

Here, "cooperating decorations" include "decorations in which the decorations on the front decoration part and the decorations on the rear decoration part form one decoration (picture)", "the decorations on the front decoration part and the decorations on the back decoration part" ``Decoration with a pattern (figure) in which the decorations on the front and back decorations are continuous with each other'', ``The decoration on the front decoration or the decoration on the back decoration complements (emphasizes) the decoration on the back decoration or the decoration on the front decoration. "Decorations such as", etc.

According to the configuration of means 2, the rear decoration part is decorated with a decoration that cooperates with the decoration of the front decoration part. (See the description regarding the decorative body 2570 and the decorative body 2570A in [Detailed Description of the Invention])

As a result, since the rear decoration part is decorated with decorations that coordinate with the decorations on the front decoration part, the decorations in the rear decoration part and the decorations in the front decoration part can make one large decoration appear to the player. The decorative effect of the decorative body can be further enhanced.

Means 3: In the configuration of means 1 or 2,
"The center frame is transparent."
It is characterized by being something.

According to the configuration of means 3, the center frame is formed transparently. In other words, the center frame is formed from a transparent member. (See the description regarding the center frame 2511 in [Detailed Description of the Invention])

As a result, since the center frame is transparent, the center frame can be difficult to see and stand out from the player, and the decorations (front decoration part and rear decoration part) can be relatively noticeable. The decorative effect of the decorative body can be further enhanced.

In addition, since the center frame is transparent, when the game panel is made transparent and decorations or performance display devices are installed behind the game panel, the center frame becomes less noticeable and can be seen through the transparent game panel. It is possible to provide a game machine in which decorations, performance images, etc. can be made more conspicuous, and players can be more entertained.

Means 4: In any one configuration from means 1 to means 3,
“The decorative body is
It has an opaque part that makes it difficult to see the wiring of electronic components attached to the center frame from the front.
It is characterized by being something.

Here, "electronic components" include "LED board", "relay board", "ball sensor that detects game balls", "magnetic sensor", "display device for displaying special symbols", "variable winning prize" Examples include "a solenoid for opening and closing a mouth", "a solenoid or a drive motor for moving a movable ornament", and the like.

According to the configuration of means 4, the decorative body has an opaque portion that makes it difficult to see the wiring of electronic components attached to the center frame from the front. (See the description regarding the decorative body 2570 and the decorative body 2570A in [Detailed Description of the Invention])

As a result, since the opaque part of the decoration makes it difficult to see the wiring of electronic components from the front, the opaque part can hide the wiring, preventing deterioration in appearance due to the wiring being visible. , it is possible to more easily exhibit the decorative effect of the decorative body.

Means 5: In any one configuration from means 1 to means 4,
“The rear decoration portion is provided with a rear decoration that is the same as a portion of the front decoration of the front decoration portion that overlaps the front when viewed from the front,
The front decoration part includes the rear decoration and the back decoration in a part of the front decoration in front of a ball passage through which game balls circulate, which is provided in at least a part of the front decoration between the front decoration part and the rear decoration part. It has a transparent part that allows game balls circulating in the ball path to be seen from the front.
It is characterized by being something.

Here, examples of the "transparent part" include "colorless and transparent part", "colored transparent part", "through-hole part", and the like.

According to the configuration of the means 5, the rear decoration is provided with the same rear decoration as the part of the front decoration that overlaps the front of the front decoration when viewed from the front, and the front decoration has the same decoration as the front decoration of the front decoration. A part in front of the ball passage through which game balls are distributed, which is provided at least in a part between the front decoration part and the rear decoration part, so that the game balls flowing through the rear decoration and the ball passage can be seen from the front. It has a transparent part. (See the description regarding the decorative body 2570 in [Detailed Description of the Invention])

As a result, when a game ball is not flowing through the ball passage provided between the front decoration part and the rear decoration part, the transparent part provided in the front part of the ball passage in the front decoration of the front decoration part Through this, the rear decoration of the rear decoration section provided at the rear can be visually recognized. In this case, since the rear decoration of the rear decoration is the same as the front decoration of the front decoration, the rear decoration of the rear decoration supplements the transparent part of the front decoration of the front decoration, so that the front decoration of the front decoration Since the decoration has no transparent part, the original decoration can be shown to the player, and the decorative effect of the decoration can be surely exhibited.

On the other hand, when the game ball is flowing through the ball path provided between the front decoration part and the back decoration part, the game ball can be seen through the transparent part of the front decoration of the front decoration part, so the temporary In any case, it is possible to avoid giving the player a sense of distrust or anxiety due to the game ball becoming invisible, and it is possible to enjoy the game using the game ball and suppress a drop in interest.

Means 6: In the configuration of means 5,
"The front decoration part is
It has a plurality of dots provided in the transparent part and decorated with a size smaller than the game ball and forming a part of the front decoration.
It is characterized by being something.

According to the configuration of means 6, the front decoration part has a plurality of dot parts provided in the transparent part and decorated with a size smaller than the game ball and forming a part of the front decoration. It is something. (See the description regarding the decorative body 2570 in [Detailed Description of the Invention])

As a result, the decoration of the rear decoration part that can be seen through the transparent part of the front decoration of the front decoration part is blocked by the game balls flowing through the ball passage provided between the front decoration part and the rear decoration part. Even if it disappears, the decoration of the plurality of dots provided in the transparent part in front of the game ball can be seen, which makes the game ball in the ball path visible to the player and makes the decoration look bad. This can be avoided, and the decorative effect of the decorative body can be fully exhibited.

Means 7: In a gaming machine,
"In a game machine equipped with a game board having a game panel that forms a game area through which game balls can flow,
The game board is
a frame-shaped transparent center frame that is attached from the front to an opening formed in the game panel;
a decorative body that is attached to the center frame and has a predetermined decoration, and has an opaque part that makes wiring of electronic components attached to the center frame difficult to see from the front;
Equipped with
The decorative body is
a rear decorative portion extending within the frame of the center frame and provided forward of the rear end of the center frame;
a front decoration part provided so as to overlap with the front of at least a part of the rear decoration part,
The rear decoration part is provided with a rear decoration that cooperates with the front decoration of the front decoration part and is the same as a part of the front decoration of the front decoration part that overlaps the front in front view,
The front decoration part includes the rear decoration and the back decoration in a part of the front decoration in front of a ball passage through which game balls circulate, which is provided in at least a part of the front decoration between the front decoration part and the rear decoration part. A transparent part that allows the game balls circulating in the ball path to be seen from the front, and a decoration that is provided in the transparent part and that is smaller in size than the game balls and that constitutes a part of the front decoration. It has multiple dot parts, and
It is characterized by being something.

According to the configuration of means 7, in a game machine equipped with a game board having a game panel in which a game area into which a game ball can flow is formed, the game board is a frame that is attached from the front to an opening formed in the game panel. It has a transparent center frame, which is attached to the center frame and is decorated with a predetermined decoration, and an opaque part that makes it difficult to see the wiring of electronic components attached to the center frame from the front. a decorative body, the decorative body extends within the frame of the center frame, and includes a rear decorative part provided forward of the rear end of the center frame, and a rear decorative part provided in front of at least a portion of the rear decorative part. and a front decoration part provided so as to overlap with each other, and the rear decoration part has a decoration that cooperates with the front decoration of the front decoration part and is the same as the part of the front decoration of the front decoration part that overlaps with the front part of the front decoration part when viewed from the front. A rear decoration is applied, and the front decoration part has a part in front of the ball passage through which the game balls circulate, which is provided in at least a part of the front decoration between the front decoration part and the rear decoration part. A transparent part that allows the game balls flowing through the rear decoration and ball path to be seen from the front, and a decoration that is smaller in size than the game balls and forms part of the front decoration, which is provided in the transparent part. It has a plurality of dot parts.

As a result, the transparent center frame attached to the game panel of the game board is provided with a rear decoration section provided forward of the rear end of the center frame and a rear decoration section provided so as to overlap with at least a portion of the front side of the rear decoration section. Because the center frame is transparent, it is less noticeable and the decoration is relatively conspicuous, and the front decoration and the rear of the decoration are The decoration part allows the player to see a deep decoration. At this time, since the rear decoration part and the front decoration part are decorated in a manner that cooperates with each other, and are provided so that a portion of each part overlaps when viewed from the front, when viewed from the front (front), It is possible to make the boundary between the decoration of the front decoration part and the decoration of the rear decoration part difficult to distinguish, and the large decoration made up of the front decoration part and the rear decoration part can be shown to the player in good condition. The front decoration part and the front decoration part can constitute a large and deep decorative body with a high decorative effect. Therefore, since the center frame can be provided with a highly effective decoration, the decoration can strongly attract the attention of the players and make it difficult for them to get bored, thereby suppressing a decline in the player's interest. It is possible to provide a gaming machine that is possible.

In addition, the rear decoration part is provided with a rear decoration that is the same as the part of the front decoration that overlaps the front of the front decoration part when viewed from the front, and the front decoration part is provided with at least the front decoration part and the rear decoration part of the front decoration. In the front part of the ball passage through which game balls circulate, which is provided in a part between There is a plurality of decorated dots that are smaller in size than the game ball and constitute a part of the front decoration, so that there is no space between the front decoration part and the back decoration part. When the game balls are not flowing through the ball passage provided, the rear decoration of the rear decoration part provided at the rear is passed through the transparent part provided in the front part of the ball passage in the front decoration of the front decoration part. can be visually recognized. In this case, since the rear decoration of the rear decoration is the same as the front decoration of the front decoration, the rear decoration of the rear decoration supplements the transparent part of the front decoration of the front decoration, so that the front decoration of the front decoration Since the decoration has no transparent part, the original decoration can be shown to the player, and the decorative effect of the decoration can be surely exhibited.

On the other hand, when the game ball is flowing through the ball path provided between the front decoration part and the back decoration part, the game ball can be seen through the transparent part of the front decoration of the front decoration part, so the temporary In any case, it is possible to avoid giving the player a sense of distrust or anxiety due to the game ball becoming invisible, and it is possible to enjoy the game using the game ball and suppress a drop in interest. At this time, since a plurality of dots forming part of the front decoration are provided in the transparent part, the decoration of the rear decoration part that can be seen through the transparent part of the front decoration of the front decoration part is different from the front decoration part and the rear decoration part. The decoration of the plurality of dots provided in the transparent part in front of the game ball can be seen even if the ball passage provided between the decoration part and the game ball is obstructed by the game ball flowing through the ball path. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the decoration from becoming unsightly while allowing the player to visually recognize the game balls in the ball path, and it is possible to fully exhibit the decorative effect of the decoration.

In addition, the rear decoration part is provided forward of the rear end of the center frame, and by protruding backward from the center frame, there is no part that would get in the way during the manufacturing of the gaming machine. It is possible to improve handling (handling efficiency), and by improving workability, it is possible to suppress an increase in manufacturing costs. Specifically, for example, when the center frame is placed with its rear end side down on a workbench or the like, the center frame will not wobble. Alternatively, when moving the center frame during assembly work, transportation work, etc., because a part of the decorative body does not protrude rearward from the rear end of the center frame, the part protruding from the center frame may come into contact with other parts, etc. There is no risk of damage or damage due to contact. For this reason, it is not necessary to work with extreme caution, and work efficiency can be improved.

In addition, since the rear decoration part that constitutes the decoration body is extended within the frame of the center frame, the rear decoration part may narrow the playing area on the front of the game panel, and the game balls may flow down the playing area. The player can enjoy the game with the game balls in the game area in a good condition without making it difficult to see.

Furthermore, since the rear decoration part constituting the decoration body is extended within the frame of the center frame, if a performance display device, movable decoration body, decoration body, etc. are provided behind the game panel. , the rear decoration section can decorate the area around the presentation display device (display screen), and cooperate with the decoration body (movable decoration body) to display decoration (performance) with a higher decorative effect; It is possible to provide a highly appealing gaming machine that can strongly attract the attention of players.

In addition, since the opaque part of the decorative body makes it difficult to see the wiring of electronic components from the front, the opaque part can hide the wiring, preventing deterioration in appearance due to the wiring being visible. The decorative effect of the decorative body can be more easily exerted.

In this way, according to the above solution, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can maintain decorativeness and improve handling during manufacturing.

[15-11c. Relationship between the means for solving the eleventh technical feature and the embodiment]
The game panel 1100 consisting of the panel board 1110 and the panel holder 1120 in the game board 5 of this embodiment is the game panel of the above solution, and the opening 1112 of the panel board 1110 of this embodiment is the opening of the game panel of the above solution. In addition, the center frame 2511 of the center accessory 2500 in this embodiment is the center frame of the above-mentioned solution means, the ball passage 2517 in this embodiment is the ball passage of the above-mentioned solution means, and the decoration body 2570 and decoration body 2570A in this embodiment. The front decoration part 2572 in this embodiment is attached to the front decoration part of the solution means, the transparent part 2572a in this embodiment is attached to the transparent part of the solution means, and the dot part 2572b in this embodiment is attached to the decoration body of the above solution means. corresponds to the dot portion of the solution described above, and the rear decoration portion 2573 in this embodiment corresponds to the rear decoration portion of the solution described above.

[15-11d. Eleventh Characteristic Effects of Technical Features]
According to the present embodiment, the transparent center frame 2511 attached to the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 has a rear decorative portion 2573 provided forward of the rear end of the center frame 2511, and a transparent center frame 2511 attached to the game panel 1100 of the game board 5. Since the decoration body 2570 (decoration body 2570A) consisting of the front decoration part 2572 provided so as to overlap at least a part of the front side is provided, since the center frame 2511 is transparent, it is less noticeable and relatively The decoration body 2570 (decoration body 2570A) can be made to stand out, and the front decoration part 2572 and the rear decoration part 2573 of the decoration body 2570 (decoration body 2570A) can show the deep decoration to the player. At this time, since the rear decoration part 2573 and the front decoration part 2572 are decorated in a manner that cooperates with each other, and are provided so that a portion of each part overlaps when viewed from the front, when viewed from the front (front), Sometimes, it becomes possible to make the boundary between the decoration of the front decoration part 2572 and the decoration of the rear decoration part 2573 difficult to see, and the large decoration of the front decoration part 2572 and the rear decoration part 2573 can be shown to the player in good condition. The rear decorative portion 2573 and the front decorative portion 2572 can constitute a large, deep decorative body 2570 (decorative body 2570A) with a high decorative effect. Therefore, since the decoration body 2570 (decoration body 2570A) having a high decorative effect can be provided on the center frame 2511, the decoration body 2570 (decoration body 2570A) can strongly attract the player's attention and prevent him from getting bored with it. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can suppress a decline in player's interest.

According to the present embodiment, in the decoration body 2570, the rear decoration part 2573 has the same decoration (rear decoration) as the part that overlaps the front part of the decoration (front decoration) of the front decoration part 2572 when viewed from the front. The front decoration part 2572 has a front part of the ball passage 2517 through which the game ball B, which is provided at least in a part between the front decoration part 2572 and the rear decoration part 2573 in the decoration of the front decoration part 2572, is provided. The part includes a transparent part 2572a that allows the decoration of the rear decorative part 2573 and the game ball B flowing through the ball passage 2517 to be seen from the front, and a transparent part 2572a that is provided in the transparent part 2572a and has a size smaller than the game ball B. Since it has a plurality of decorated dots 2572b that constitute a part of the decoration of the front decoration part 2572, it is provided between the front decoration part 2572 and the rear decoration part 2573. When the game ball B is not flowing through the ball passage 2517, the ball B passes through the transparent part 2572a provided in the front part of the ball passage 2517 in the decoration of the front decoration part 2572, and passes through the rear decoration part 2573 provided at the rear. The decorations can be seen. At this time, since the decoration of the rear decoration part 2573 is the same as the decoration of the front decoration part 2572, the decoration of the rear decoration part 2573 supplements the transparent part 2572a in the decoration of the front decoration part 2572, so that the decoration of the front decoration part 2573 Since there is no transparent part 2572a in the decoration, the original decoration can be seen by the player, and the decoration effect of the decoration body 2570 can be reliably exhibited.

On the other hand, when the game ball B is flowing through the ball passage 2517 provided between the front decoration part 2572 and the rear decoration part 2573, the game ball B can be seen through the transparent part 2572a of the decoration of the front decoration part 2572. Therefore, it is possible to avoid giving the player a sense of distrust or anxiety due to the game ball B becoming invisible even temporarily, and it is possible to make the game with the game ball B more enjoyable and more interesting. The decrease can be suppressed. At this time, since the transparent part 2572a is provided with a plurality of dot parts 2572b that constitute part of the decoration of the front decoration part 2572, the rear decoration part 2573 that can be seen through the transparent part 2572a in the decoration of the front decoration part 2572 is Even if the decoration is blocked and invisible by the game ball B flowing through the ball passage 2517 provided between the front decoration part 2572 and the rear decoration part 2573, the transparent part 2572a in front of the game ball B By making the decoration of the plurality of dot portions 2572b provided in the ball visible, it is possible to prevent the decoration body 2570 from becoming unsightly while allowing the player to visually recognize the game ball B in the ball path 2517. The decorative effect of the decorative body 2570 can be fully exhibited.

Further, according to the present embodiment, in the decorative body 2570 (decorative body 2570A), the rear decorative part 2573 is provided in front of the rear end of the center frame 2511, and by protruding backward from the center frame 2511, Since there are no parts that would get in the way during the manufacturing of 1, it is possible to improve handling during manufacturing, and by improving workability, the increase in manufacturing costs can be suppressed. can be done. Specifically, for example, when the center frame 2511 is placed on the workbench TA or the like with its rear end facing down, the center frame 2511 will not wobble. Alternatively, when moving the center frame 2511 during assembly work, transportation work, etc., since a part of the decoration body 2570 (decoration body 2570A) does not protrude rearward from the rear end of the center frame 2511, it may protrude from the center frame 2511. There is no risk of damage or damage due to contact with other parts. For this reason, it is not necessary to work with extreme caution, and work efficiency can be improved.

Further, according to the present embodiment, since the rear decoration part 2573 constituting the decoration body 2570 (decoration body 2570A) is extended within the frame of the center frame 2511, the rear decoration part 2573 can be used to cover the game panel 1100. It does not narrow the game area 5a in front of the game area 5a or make it difficult to see the game balls B flowing down the game area 5a, and allows players to enjoy playing games with the game balls B in the game area 5a in good condition. You can do it.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, since the rear decoration part 2573 constituting the decoration body 2570 (decoration body 2570A) is extended within the frame of the center frame 2511, it is not provided at the rear of the game panel 1100. For the effect display device 1600, back-front effect unit 3300, back-rear effect unit 3400, etc., the surroundings of the effect display device 1600 (display screen) can be decorated, or the back-front effect unit 3300, the back-rear effect unit 3400, etc. To provide a pachinko machine 1 with high appeal that can display and perform decorations (directions) with higher decorative effects in cooperation with a decoration body (movable decoration body), and can strongly attract the attention of players. can be provided.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the opaque portion of the decoration body 2570 (decoration body 2570A) makes it difficult to see the wiring of electronic components such as an LED board from the front, so the wiring can be hidden by the opaque portion. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the appearance from deteriorating due to the wiring being visible, and it is possible to more easily exhibit the decorative effect of the decoration body 2570 (decoration body 2570A).

[15-12. Twelfth technical feature]
The present specification has the following technical features different from those described above.

[15-12a. Background of the twelfth technical characteristics]
As a game machine such as a pachinko machine, it is attached from the front to the opening of the game panel that forms the game area where game balls can flow down, and prevents the game balls flowing down the game area from flowing into the opening of the game panel. A device is known that includes a center accessory as an inflow regulating section (for example, Patent Document Z: Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2017-074434). According to the technique disclosed in Patent Document Z, it is possible to divide the gaming area into desired sizes using the center accessory.

However, in the technology of Patent Document Z, if the size of the opening of the game panel differs depending on the model of the game machine, it is necessary to separately manufacture the center accessory (inflow regulation part), and it is not possible to reuse the inflow regulation part. It was difficult.

Therefore, in view of the above-mentioned circumstances, the following means aims to provide a gaming machine in which the inflow regulating section can be used even if the opening of the gaming panel differs depending on the model.

[15-12b. Means for solving the twelfth technical feature]
Means 1: In a gaming machine,
"In a game machine equipped with a game board that has a game area where game balls can fall,
The game board is
a game panel in which the game area is formed on the front side;
an inflow regulating part that is provided corresponding to the edge of the opening formed in the gaming panel and restricts the gaming balls flowing down the gaming area from flowing into the opening;
Equipped with
The inflow regulating section has at least a first inflow regulating section and a second inflow regulating section,
The first inflow regulating section and the second inflow regulating section are each formed with a flange section along the front surface of the game panel, and the flange section is formed on at least one of the respective ends. A non-flange portion is formed so that an end portion of the first inflow restriction portion and an end portion of the second inflow restriction portion are adjacent to each other on the front surface of the game panel by a mounting portion provided on the flange portion. be installed in
It is characterized by being something.

Here, the term "gaming panel" includes "an opaque panel such as plywood (plywood)," "a panel board made of transparent resin," and "a panel board made of transparent resin and a frame that holds the outer edge of the panel board." A type of panel holder, etc.

In addition, the "flange part" refers to "a part that extends outward from the opening in the game panel with the inflow regulating part as the boundary" and "a part that extends in the direction of the inside of the opening in the gaming panel with the inflow regulating part as the border". Examples include "extending" and "extending to both the outside and inside of the opening in the game panel with the inflow regulating section as the boundary."

In addition, the "non-flange part" may be provided on the side facing the center of the gaming panel in the inflow regulating part, or it may be provided on the side facing the center of the gaming panel in the inflow regulating part, or facing outward from the center of the gaming panel in the inflow regulating part. It may be provided on the side surface, or may be provided on both side surfaces of the inflow regulating section.

Furthermore, the configuration in which "the end of the first inflow regulating part and the end of the second inflow regulating part are attached so as to be adjacent to each other" means "the end face of the end of the first inflow regulating part and the end of the second inflow regulating part are attached so that they are adjacent to each other". The inner side surface of the end of the first inflow regulating section and the outer side surface of the end of the second inflow regulating section are mounted so that they face each other. "It is installed so that the outer side of the end of the first inflow regulating part and the inner side of the end of the second inflow regulating part face each other," etc. . Furthermore, the end portion of the first inflow regulating portion and the end portion of the second inflow regulating portion may be in contact with each other or may be separated from each other.

According to the configuration of means 1, in a game machine equipped with a game board having a game area through which a game ball can flow down, the game board includes a game panel in which the game area is formed on the front side, and an opening formed in the game panel. an inflow regulation part that is provided corresponding to the edge of the opening and regulates the game balls flowing down the gaming area from flowing into the opening, and the inflow regulation part includes a first inflow regulation part and a second inflow regulation part. The first inflow regulating part and the second inflow regulating part each have a flange part formed along the front surface of the game panel, and at least one end of each has a flange part. A non-flange part is formed in which the flange part is not formed, and the end part of the first inflow regulating part and the end part of the second inflow regulating part are adjacent to each other on the front surface of the game panel by means of the mounting part provided on the flange part. It can be installed on. (In [Details for Carrying Out the Invention], refer to the chapter [11-3. Center accessory of third embodiment] and the descriptions in FIGS. 99 to 102, etc.)

As a result, at least the first inflow regulating section is provided corresponding to the edge of the opening of the gaming panel in which the gaming area is formed on the front side, and regulating the inflow of the game ball into the opening. and a second inflow regulating part, and the end of the first inflow regulating part and the end of the second inflow regulating part are adjacent to each other on the front side of the game panel via the attachment part of the flange part provided respectively. Since they are installed so that they fit together, by appropriately selecting the relationship between the mounting positions of the first inflow restriction part and the second inflow restriction part with respect to the game panel, various changes can be made without having to manufacture a new inflow restriction part. It can be attached to a game panel having an opening of different size and shape, and the inflow regulating part can be used even if the model is different.

To be more specific, for example, by attaching the end portion of the first inflow regulating portion and the end portion of the second inflow regulating portion so as to be separated from each other, it is possible to accommodate a game panel with a large opening. In this case, it is desirable that the gap between the end of the first inflow regulating part and the end of the second inflow regulating part be made large enough that the game ball cannot pass through, but it should be large enough that the game ball can pass through. In this case, the game ball may be made impossible to pass by planting an obstacle nail.

Alternatively, by attaching the end of the first inflow regulating part and the end of the second inflow regulating part so that their respective side surfaces face each other, it is possible to accommodate a game panel with a small opening. At this time, since a non-flange part is provided at at least one end of the first inflow regulating part and the second inflow regulating part, the side surface of the end of the first inflow regulating part and the end of the second inflow regulating part Since it is possible to bring the side surfaces of the parts as close as possible to each other, the degree of freedom in arrangement of the first inflow regulating part and the second inflow regulating part can be increased, and the game panel has openings of various sizes. It can be made easier to deal with.

Additionally, as mentioned above, it is possible to accommodate gaming panels with openings of various sizes, so if you want to change the size of the gaming area due to design changes, etc., the first inflow regulating section and the second inflow regulating section By changing the relationship of the mounting position with the inflow regulating part, the size of the gaming area can be easily changed, and the degree of freedom in designing the gaming machine can be increased. Therefore, there is no need to newly manufacture an inflow regulating section to match the changing size of the game area, and an increase in the cost of the game machine can be suppressed.

In addition, the game board includes a plurality of frames from the first frame in which the first inflow regulating section is provided to the nth frame in which the nth inflow regulating section (n is an integer of 2 or more) is provided, and at least one frame. The gaming machine may further include a connecting holding part that prevents the two frames from falling from the gaming panel. Thereby, since the inflow regulating section is constituted by a plurality of frames, the same effects as described above can be achieved by appropriately setting the mounting position of each frame with respect to the game panel. In addition, since the inflow regulating section is constituted by a plurality of frames, if a malfunction occurs in some of the frames, only that frame needs to be replaced, and maintenance costs can be reduced. Furthermore, since the connecting holding portion is provided, it is possible to avoid damage or damage to the frame caused by falling from the gaming panel during assembly or maintenance of the gaming machine.

Moreover, as mentioned above, when providing a connection holding part, it is desirable that a connection holding part shall be formed in the string shape which has flexibility. As a result, since the connecting holding part is made into a string-like flexible part, for example, the relationship between the mounting positions of the first inflow regulating part (first frame) and the second inflow regulating part (second frame) Even if the frame is changed, it can be followed by the flexible deformation of the connection holding part, and it is possible to accommodate the size and shape of the opening of the game panel while preventing the frame from falling from the game panel.

In addition, as mentioned above, if a flexible string-like connecting and holding part is provided, when the frame is about to come off from the game panel, the connecting and holding part tries to flex and deform, creating resistance and immediately stopping the game. This can prevent it from coming off the panel. When the frame comes off from the game panel, the connecting holding section flexibly deforms, reducing the falling speed and absorbing the impact, thereby preventing damage to the frame. .

Furthermore, as described above, when providing a connection holding part, it is desirable that adjacent frames be connected by the connection holding part. This makes it easier to handle multiple frames as one unit, compared to the case where one end of the connection holding part is connected to a game panel or other components, and improves work efficiency during manufacturing of game machines. can be improved.

Moreover, as mentioned above, when providing the connection holding part, it is desirable to provide the connection holding part removably with respect to the frame. As a result, for example, when attaching multiple frames to the game panel in sequence or removing some of the frames from the game panel for maintenance etc., the connection holding part can be left in a detached state or in an attached state. By doing so, it is possible to improve the handling and handling of the frame, and the work efficiency can be improved.

Also, as mentioned above, if the connecting holder is made removable, it is possible to keep the frame connected by the connecting holder until it is attached to the game panel, and then remove the connecting holder once the frame is attached to the game panel. Therefore, it is possible to avoid poor appearance due to the presence of the connection holding portion.

Furthermore, when a plurality of frames are provided as described above, the game board may further include an electronic component attached to at least one frame. As a result, electronic components are attached to at least one frame, and as the weight of the frame to which electronic components are attached increases, the frame may come off from the gaming panel during assembly work of the gaming machine, etc., and fall. Then, the frame is likely to be damaged due to its weight, but since the connecting and holding part is provided to prevent the frame from falling, the frame will not fall onto a workbench, floor, etc. and be damaged. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can reliably bring out the effects of the electronic components attached to the frame.

Means 2: In the configuration of means 1,
“The game board is
a plurality of frames from a first frame in which the first inflow regulation section is provided to an nth frame in which an nth inflow regulation section (n is an integer of two or more) is provided;
The invention is characterized in that it further includes a connecting and holding part that prevents at least one of the frames from falling from the game panel.

Here, the number "n" of multiple frames is preferably within the range of 2 to 6. This is because if the number of frames is greater than this range, it will take time and effort to attach the frames during manufacturing of the gaming machine, which may increase costs. Electronic components such as LED boards may be attached to some of the frames among the plurality of frames.

Further, examples of the "connecting and holding part" include "a flexible string-like member", "a flexible band-like member", and the like. In addition, "connection holding parts" include "things that connect adjacent frames," "things that connect frames and other members," and "things that connect frames and game panels." , etc. Furthermore, the "connection holding part" may or may not have decorative properties. Further, it is desirable that the "connection holding part" has a length that does not allow the frame to come into contact with the stand, floor, etc. when the frame detaches from the game panel and falls while the game board is in an upright position.

According to the configuration of means 2, the game board has a plurality of frames from the first frame in which the first inflow regulating part is provided to the nth frame in which the nth inflow regulating part (n is an integer of 2 or more) is provided. The game device further includes a frame and a connecting holding portion that prevents at least one frame from falling from the game panel. (See the description regarding the center frame 2700 and the connection holding part 2710 in [Detailed Description of the Invention])

Thereby, since the inflow regulating section is constituted by a plurality of frames, the same effects as described above can be achieved by appropriately setting the mounting position of each frame with respect to the game panel. In addition, since the inflow regulating section is constituted by a plurality of frames, if a malfunction occurs in some of the frames, only that frame needs to be replaced, and maintenance costs can be reduced. Furthermore, since the connecting holding portion is provided, it is possible to avoid damage or damage to the frame caused by falling from the gaming panel during assembly or maintenance of the gaming machine.

Means 3: In the configuration of means 2,
“The connection holding part is
It is characterized by being "formed in the shape of a flexible string."

According to the structure of means 3, the connection holding part is formed in the shape of a flexible string. (See the description regarding the connection holding part 2710 in [Detailed Description of the Invention])

As a result, since the connecting holding part is made into a string-like flexible part, for example, the relationship between the mounting positions of the first inflow regulating part (first frame) and the second inflow regulating part (second frame) Even if the frame is changed, it can be followed by the flexible deformation of the connection holding part, and it is possible to accommodate the size and shape of the opening of the game panel while preventing the frame from falling from the game panel.

In addition, since the connecting holding part is in the form of a flexible string, when the frame tries to come off from the game panel, the connecting holding part will flex and deform, creating resistance and preventing it from immediately coming off from the game panel. can be suppressed. When the frame comes off from the game panel, the connecting holding section flexibly deforms, reducing the falling speed and absorbing the impact, thereby preventing damage to the frame. .

Means 4: In the configuration of means 2 or 3,
“The connection holding part is
It is characterized in that the adjacent frames are connected to each other.

According to the configuration of means 4, the connection holding portion connects adjacent frames. (See the description regarding the connection holding part 2710 in [Detailed Description of the Invention])

This makes it easier to handle multiple frames as one unit, compared to the case where one end of the connection holding part is connected to a game panel or other components, and improves work efficiency during manufacturing of game machines. can be improved.

Means 5: In the configuration of any one of means 2 to 4,
"The connection holding part is
The device is characterized in that the device is removably attached to the frame.

According to the structure of the means 5, the connection holding part is provided to be detachable from the frame. (See the description regarding the connection holding part 2710 in [Detailed Description of the Invention])

As a result, for example, when attaching multiple frames to the game panel in sequence or removing some of the frames from the game panel for maintenance etc., the connection holding part can be left in a detached state or in an attached state. By doing so, it is possible to improve the handling and handling of the frame, and the work efficiency can be improved.

In addition, since the connecting holder is removable, it is possible to keep the frame connected by the connecting holder until it is attached to the game panel, and then remove the connecting holder once the frame is attached to the game panel. It is possible to avoid the appearance from becoming unsightly due to the presence of the part.

Means 6: In the configuration of any one of means 2 to 5,
“The game board is
an electronic component attached to at least one of the frames;
It is characterized by the fact that it has the following characteristics:

Here, "electronic components" include "LED board", "relay board", "ball sensor", "magnetic sensor", "indicator (display with special design)", "solenoid", "motor", etc.

According to the configuration of means 6, the game board further comprises an electronic component attached to at least one frame. (See the description regarding the pattern display 2518 and the center frame 2700 in [Detailed Description of the Invention])

As a result, electronic components are attached to at least one frame, and as the weight of the frame to which electronic components are attached increases, the frame may come off from the gaming panel during assembly work of the gaming machine, etc., and fall. Then, the frame is likely to be damaged due to its weight, but since the connecting and holding part is provided to prevent the frame from falling, the frame will not fall onto a workbench, floor, etc. and be damaged. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can reliably bring out the effects of the electronic components attached to the frame.

Means 7: In a gaming machine,
"In a game machine equipped with a game board that has a game area where game balls can fall,
The game board is
a game panel in which the game area is formed on the front side;
a first inflow regulating part to an nth inflow regulating part provided corresponding to an edge of an opening formed in the gaming panel, regulating the game balls flowing down the gaming area from flowing into the opening; (n is an integer of two or more);
a plurality of frames from a first frame in which the first inflow regulation part is provided to an nth frame in which an nth inflow regulation part (n is an integer of two or more) is provided;
a connecting holding part that prevents at least one frame from falling from the game panel;
an electronic component attached to at least one of the frames;
Equipped with
The inflow regulation department is
The m-th inflow regulating section (m is an integer between 1 and n-1) and the (m+1)th inflow regulating section are each formed with a flange section along the front surface of the game panel, and A non-flange portion in which the flange portion is not formed is formed on at least one of each end portion, and the end of the m-th inflow regulating portion is attached to the front surface of the game panel by a mounting portion provided on the flange portion. and an end of the (m+1)th inflow regulating section are attached so that they are adjacent to each other,
The connection holding part is
It is formed into a flexible string shape, connects the adjacent frames, and is detachably attached to the frames.
It is characterized by being something.

According to the configuration of means 7, in a game machine equipped with a game board having a game area through which a game ball can flow down, the game board includes a game panel in which the game area is formed on the front side, and an opening formed in the game panel. is provided corresponding to the edge of the opening, and regulates the game balls flowing down the gaming area from flowing into the inside of the opening, and extends from the first inflow regulating part to the nth inflow regulating part (n is an integer of 2 or more). a plurality of frames from the first frame in which the first inflow regulation part is provided to the nth frame in which the nth inflow regulation part (n is an integer of two or more) is provided; The inflow regulating section includes a connecting holding section that prevents two frames from falling from the game panel, and an electronic component attached to at least one frame, and the inflow regulating section is an m-th inflow regulating section (m is 1 to n- The (integer up to 1) and the (m+1)th inflow regulating section are each formed with a flange portion along the front surface of the game panel, and a flange portion is formed on at least one of the respective ends. A non-flange part is formed, and the end part of the mth inflow regulating part and the end part of the (m+1)th inflow regulating part are attached to the front surface of the game panel by the mounting part provided on the flange part so that they are adjacent to each other. The connecting and holding part is formed in the shape of a flexible string, connects adjacent frames, and is provided so as to be detachable from the frame.

As a result, at least the first inflow regulating section is provided corresponding to the edge of the opening of the gaming panel in which the gaming area is formed on the front side, and regulating the inflow of the game ball into the opening. to the n-th inflow regulating part (n is an integer of two or more), and the m-th inflow regulating part (m is from 1 to Since the end of the (integer up to n-1) and the end of the (m+1)th inflow regulating section are installed adjacent to each other, the mth inflow regulating section and the (m+1)th inflow regulating section to the game panel are By appropriately selecting the relationship between the installation position and the restriction part, it is possible to install it on game panels with openings of various sizes and shapes without having to manufacture a new inflow restriction part, and even if the model is different, the inflow restriction part can be installed. The regulation section can be reused.

In the following description, m is assumed to be 1. For example, by installing the end of the first inflow regulating part and the end of the second inflow regulating part so as to be separated from each other, it is possible to accommodate a game panel with a large opening. can. In this case, it is desirable that the gap between the end of the first inflow regulating part and the end of the second inflow regulating part be made large enough that the game ball cannot pass through, but it should be large enough that the game ball can pass through. In this case, the game ball may be made impossible to pass by planting an obstacle nail.

Alternatively, by attaching the end of the first inflow regulating part and the end of the second inflow regulating part so that their respective side surfaces face each other, it is possible to accommodate a game panel with a small opening. At this time, since a non-flange part is provided at at least one end of the first inflow regulating part and the second inflow regulating part, the side surface of the end of the first inflow regulating part and the end of the second inflow regulating part Since it is possible to bring the side surfaces of the parts as close as possible to each other, the degree of freedom in arrangement of the first inflow regulating part and the second inflow regulating part can be increased, and the game panel has openings of various sizes. It can be made easier to deal with.

Additionally, as mentioned above, it is possible to accommodate gaming panels with openings of various sizes, so if you want to change the size of the gaming area due to design changes, etc., the first inflow regulating section and the second inflow regulating section By changing the relationship of the mounting position with the inflow regulating part, the size of the gaming area can be easily changed, and the degree of freedom in designing the gaming machine can be increased. Therefore, there is no need to newly manufacture an inflow regulating section to match the changing size of the game area, and an increase in the cost of the game machine can be suppressed.

Furthermore, since the inflow regulating section is constituted by a plurality of frames, the same effects as described above can be achieved by appropriately setting the mounting position of each frame with respect to the game panel. In addition, since the inflow regulating section is constituted by a plurality of frames, if a malfunction occurs in some of the frames, only that frame needs to be replaced, and maintenance costs can be reduced. Furthermore, since the connecting holding portion is provided, it is possible to avoid damage or damage to the frame caused by falling from the gaming panel during assembly or maintenance of the gaming machine.

In addition, since the connecting and holding part is made of a string-like flexible part, for example, the relationship between the mounting positions of the first inflow regulating part (first frame) and the second inflow regulating part (second frame) can be changed. Even if the change is made, the connecting holding part can follow the change by being flexibly deformed, and can accommodate the size, shape, etc. of the opening of the game panel while preventing the frame from falling from the game panel.

In addition, since a flexible string-like connecting and holding part is provided, when the frame tries to come off from the game panel, the connecting and holding part tries to flex and deform, creating resistance and causing it to immediately come off from the game panel. This can be suppressed. When the frame comes off from the game panel, the connecting holding section flexibly deforms, reducing the falling speed and absorbing the impact, thereby preventing damage to the frame. .

Furthermore, since adjacent frames are connected by the connecting holding part, it is easier to connect multiple frames as one unit compared to connecting one end of the connecting holding part to a game panel or other member. It can be made easier to handle, and workability during manufacturing of gaming machines can be improved.

In addition, since the connecting and holding parts are removably attached to the frame, for example, when attaching multiple frames to the game panel in sequence or removing some frames from the game panel for maintenance etc. By removing or attaching the connection holding portion, the frame can be easily maneuvered and handled, and work efficiency can be improved.

In addition, since the connecting holder is removable, it is possible to keep the frame connected by the connecting holder until it is attached to the game panel, and then remove the connecting holder once the frame is attached to the game panel. It is possible to avoid poor appearance due to the presence of the holding portion.

Furthermore, electronic components are attached to at least one frame, and the weight of the frame to which the electronic components are attached increases, so if the frame detaches from the gaming panel and falls during assembly work of the gaming machine, etc. Although the frame is likely to be damaged due to its weight, since a connecting and holding portion is provided to prevent the frame from falling, the frame will not fall onto a workbench, floor, etc. and be damaged. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can reliably bring out the effects of the electronic components attached to the frame.

In this way, according to the above solution, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the inflow regulating section can be used even if the opening of the gaming panel differs depending on the model.

[15-12c. Relationship between the means for solving the twelfth technical feature and the embodiment]
The game panel 1100 (see FIG. 100) in the game board 5 of this embodiment is the same as the game panel of the above solution, and the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100 of this embodiment is the same as the opening of the game panel of the above solution. The symbol display 2518, the second starting opening unit 2720, the attacker unit 2730, and the accessory winning opening unit 2740 in this embodiment are the electronic components of the above solving means, and the inflow regulating part 2700a of the center frame 2700 in the center accessory 2500A in this embodiment. The flange portion 2700b of the center frame 2700, the first flange portion 2701b of the first frame 2701, and the second flange portion 2702b of the second frame 2702 in this embodiment are the flange portions of the above solution. In this embodiment, the non-flange portion 2700c of the center frame 2700, the first non-flange portion 2701c of the first frame 2701, and the second non-flange portion 2702c of the second frame 2702 correspond to the non-flange portion of the above solution, respectively. are doing.

In addition, the first frame 2701, second frame 2702, third frame 2703, fourth frame 2704, and fifth frame 2705 in this embodiment are the frames of the above solution, and the first inflow regulating portion 2701a in this embodiment is the above-mentioned frame. The second inflow regulating part 2702a in this embodiment is attached to the first inflow regulating part of the solving means, and the second inflow regulating part 2702a of the above solution is provided with flanges such as the first flange part 2701b and the second flange part 2702b in this embodiment. The attachment hole provided in the portion 2700b corresponds to the attachment portion of the above-mentioned solving means, and the connection holding portion 2710 in this embodiment corresponds to the connection holding portion of the above-mentioned solving means.

[15-12d. Characteristic effects of the twelfth technical feature]
According to this embodiment, in the center frame 2700 of the center accessory 2500A of the game board 5, the game ball is provided corresponding to the edge of the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100 in which the game area 5a is formed on the front side. The inflow regulating part 2700a that regulates the inflow of B into the inside of the opening 1112 is constituted by at least a plurality of first inflow regulating parts 2701a and second inflow regulating parts 2702a, and a flange part 2700b ( Attach to the front surface of the game panel 1100 via the attachment parts of the first flange part 2701b and the second flange part 2702b) so that the end of the first inflow regulation part 2701a and the end of the second inflow regulation part 2702a are adjacent to each other. Therefore, the inflow regulating part 2700a (center frame 2700) can be newly manufactured by appropriately selecting the relationship between the mounting positions of the first inflow regulating part 2701a and the second inflow regulating part 2702a with respect to the game panel 1100. Even if there is no one, it can be attached to the game panel 1100 having openings 1112 of various sizes and shapes, and the inflow regulating part 2700a (center frame 2700) can be used even if the model is different.

Specifically, for example, by attaching the end of the first inflow regulating part 2701a and the end of the second inflow regulating part 2702a so as to be separated from each other, it is possible to accommodate the game panel 1100 having a large opening 1112. . In this case, it is desirable that the gap C between the end of the first inflow regulating part 2701a and the end of the second inflow regulating part 2702a is made large enough to prevent the game ball B from passing through. If the size is possible, an obstacle nail may be planted to make it impossible for the game ball B to pass through.

Alternatively, by attaching the end of the first inflow regulating part 2701a and the end of the second inflow regulating part 2702a so that their respective side faces face each other, it is possible to accommodate the game panel 1100 with a small opening 1112. can. At this time, since a non-flange portion 2700c (first non-flange portion 2701c or second non-flange portion 2702c) is provided at at least one end of the first inflow restriction portion 2701a and the second inflow restriction portion 2702a, Since it is possible to bring the side surface of the end of the first inflow regulating section 2701a and the side surface of the end of the second inflow regulating section 2702a as close as possible, the first inflow regulating section 2701a (first frame 2701) The degree of freedom in arrangement of the second inflow regulating portion 2702a (second frame 2702) can be increased, and it is possible to easily accommodate game panels 1100 having openings 1112 of various sizes.

Furthermore, as described above, since it is possible to accommodate game panels 1100 having openings 1112 of various sizes, when it is desired to change the size of the game area 5a due to design changes, etc., the first inflow regulation By changing the relationship between the mounting positions of the portion 2701a (first frame 2701) and the second inflow regulating portion 2702a (second frame 2702), the size of the gaming area 5a can be easily changed, and the pachinko machine 1. The degree of freedom in design can be increased. Therefore, there is no need to newly manufacture the inflow regulating section 2700a (center frame 2700) to match the changing size of the game area 5a, and an increase in the cost of the Pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

Furthermore, since the inflow regulating section 2700a (center frame 2700) is composed of a plurality of frames such as the first frame 2701 to the fifth frame 2705, by appropriately setting the mounting position of each frame with respect to the game panel 1100, The same effects as above can be achieved. In addition, since the inflow regulating section 2700a is composed of a plurality of frames, if a malfunction occurs in some of the frames, only that frame needs to be replaced, and maintenance costs can be reduced. Furthermore, since the connection holding part 2710 is provided, it is possible to avoid damage or damage to the frame caused by falling from the game panel 1100 during assembly or maintenance of the pachinko machine 1.

In addition, since the connecting and holding part 2710 is made of a flexible string-like member, for example, the first inflow regulating part 2701a (first frame 2701) and the second inflow regulating part 2702a (second frame 2702) Even if the relationship of the mounting positions is changed, the connection holding part 2710 can follow the change by being flexibly deformed, and while preventing the frame from falling from the game panel 1100, the size of the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100 can be changed. It can correspond to shapes etc.

In addition, since the flexible string-like connection holding part 2710 is provided, when a frame such as the first frame 2701 is about to come off from the game panel 1100, the connection holding part 2710 is prevented from being flexibly deformed. This creates resistance and can prevent it from immediately coming off the game panel 1100. When the frame comes off from the game panel 1100, the connection holding part 2710 flexibly deforms, thereby reducing the falling speed and absorbing the impact, thereby preventing damage to the frame. Can be done.

Furthermore, since the connecting holding part 2710 connects adjacent frames such as the first frame 2701 and the second frame 2702, one end of the connecting holding part 2710 is connected to the game panel 1100 or other members. Compared to the case where the frames are connected to each other, it is easier to handle a plurality of frames as a unit, and workability during manufacturing of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved.

In addition, since the connection holding part 2710 is provided to be detachable from the frame, for example, a plurality of frames can be attached to the game panel 1100 in order, or some frames can be removed from the game panel for maintenance etc. At this time, by removing or attaching the connection holding portion 2710, the handling and handling of the frame can be improved, and work efficiency can be improved.

In addition, since the connection holding part 2710 is made detachable, the connection holding part 2710 can be connected until the frame is attached to the game panel 1100, and the connection holding part 2710 can be removed once the frame is attached to the game panel 1100. This makes it possible to avoid poor appearance due to the presence of the connection holding portion 2710.

Furthermore, electronic components such as the symbol display 2518 are attached to at least one frame, and the weight of the frame to which the electronic components are attached increases. If the frame detaches from the game panel 1100 and falls, the frame is likely to be damaged due to its weight, but since the connecting and holding part 2710 is provided to prevent the frame from falling, the frame will not fall onto the workbench, floor, etc. It will not be damaged. Therefore, it is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can reliably bring out the effects of the electronic components attached to the frame.

[About the ID code of frame decoration components]
In this embodiment, the game board 5 that allows the game area 5a to be seen from the front is attached to the main body frame 4, but the game board 5 is attached to the door frame 3 as a frame decoration member on the front side of the door frame main body 100. The door frame top unit 300 provided above the game window 101 in the door frame body 100, the door frame right side unit 340 provided on the right side of the game window 101 on the front side of the door frame main body 100, and the center of the shelf unit 200 in the left-right direction A production operation unit 250 (operation device) that is provided in and can be operated by a player is attached. FIG. 116 is an explanatory diagram showing a frame decoration member that is detachable from the door frame.

As shown in FIG. 116, the game board 5, door frame top unit 300, door frame right side unit 340, and production operation unit 250 can be attached and detached while the pachinko machine 1 is attached to the island equipment of the game hall. It is possible to install a predetermined game board 5, door frame top unit 300, door frame right side unit 340, and performance operation unit 250 as a set for each model series as one group. It is now possible. In other words, when changing to a new model series, the pachinko machine 1 is attached to the island equipment of the game hall, and the game board 5, door frame top unit 300, and door frame top unit 300 corresponding to the previous model series are installed. After removing the door frame right side unit 340 and production operation unit 250, the game board 5, door frame top unit 300, door frame right side unit 340, and production operation unit 250 corresponding to the new model series will be installed. . With this configuration, when changing the model, if you want to update not only the gaming experience but also the appearance of the gaming machine, you can reduce the cost of changing the main body frame 4 and door frame 3, and efficiently improve the gaming experience and gaming machine appearance. You can completely change the appearance.

Note that the door frame right side unit 340 of this example is integrally formed with the door frame top unit 300, and for the door frame 3, the door frame top unit 300 and the door frame right side unit 340 are integrally formed. I try to put it on and take it off. In this regard, the door frame right side unit 340 may be made separate from the door frame top unit 300 and may be separately attachable to and detachable from the door frame 3. Regarding the door frame right side unit 340, in addition to renewing the appearance of the gaming machine, the protrusion of the side part acts as a barrier between players who are away from their seats, which is a problem for players who are concerned about the line of sight of those around them. In addition to reducing the player's feeling of discomfort, the protrusion of the upper and side portions creates a space unique to the player.

A peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5 is electrically connected to a door frame top relay board (not shown) attached to the door frame top unit 300. The door frame top relay board is a door frame top decoration board on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted to decorate the door frame top decoration body 301 of the door frame top unit 300 with light emission, and a door frame top relay board of the door frame right side unit 340. For relaying connections with the side decoration body 341, the right side left side decoration body of the door frame, and the right side decoration board of the door frame on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted to decorate the right side decoration body of the door frame with light emission. It is something. Thereby, the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 can control the light emission of various LEDs mounted on the door frame top decorative board and the door frame right side decorative board, for example, via the door frame top relay board. can.

Further, the peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5 is electrically connected to the operation section relay board (not shown) attached to the performance operation unit 250. The operation unit relay board relays connection to an operation unit decoration board (not shown) on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted to decorate the first effect button 251 and second effect button 252 of the effect operation unit 250 with light emission. It is for the purpose of Thereby, the peripheral control section 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 can control, for example, the light emission of various LEDs mounted on the operation section decoration board via the operation section relay board.

The door frame top relay board attached to the door frame top unit 300 and the operation part relay board attached to the production operation unit 250 have a unique code (only one in the world) to identify the model series. A unique ID code, which is special information with a non-existent code, is stored in advance. This ID code is unique to each model series and cannot be rewritten even with an external device. The peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 can take out and refer to the ID code from the door frame top relay board and the operation unit relay board. Further, the RAM built into the peripheral control unit 1511 stores a table for referring to ID codes attached to the door frame top relay board and the operation unit relay board. The ID code stored in this table matches the ID code of the door frame top relay board attached to the door frame top unit 300 whose model series matches the game board 5. The ID codes match the ID codes of the operation section relay board attached to the performance operation unit 250.

When the power is turned on, the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 matches the ID code stored in the reference table with the ID code of the door frame top relay board attached to the door frame top unit 300. and whether or not the ID code stored in the reference table matches the ID code of the operation relay board attached to the production operation unit 250 within a predetermined judgment period. It is determined that Here, if the door frame top unit 300 and door frame right side unit 340 of the same model series (in a regular relationship) are attached to the game board 5, they are stored in the reference table. The ID code of the door frame top relay board attached to the door frame top unit 300 matches, but the model series of the game board 5 does not match (there is no regular relationship). ) When the door frame top unit 300 and the door frame right side unit 340 are attached, their respective ID codes will not match. Similarly, if a performance operation unit 250 whose model series matches (regular relationship) is attached to the game board 5, the ID code stored in the reference table and the performance operation unit 250 are attached to the game board 5. The ID code of the operation unit relay board attached to the game board 250 matches, but on the other hand, the production operation unit 250 whose model series does not match (there is no official relationship) is attached to the game board 5. In this case, the ID code stored in the reference table and the ID code of the operation section relay board attached to the production operation unit 250 do not match.

Here, in this example, the following power-on patterns A to C are provided as modes of power-on operation. Power-on pattern A is a case where the power switch 751 is operated without turning on the RAM clear switch 743, and the RAM clear that initializes the RAM built in the main control board 1310 is not executed, and information regarding the game is initialized. It will never change. Power-on pattern B is a case where the power switch 751 is operated while the RAM clear switch 743 is turned ON, and RAM clear is executed and information regarding the game is initialized. Power-on pattern C is a case where the RAM clear switch 743 is not turned on, but the power switch 751 is operated while the ball removal switch 742 is turned on, and the above-mentioned ball removal process is executed. In such a power-on pattern C, although the ram clear is not executed and the information regarding the game is not initialized, the progress of the game is stopped during the ball extraction process. The determination of whether the above ID codes match is executed when the power is turned on using power-on patterns A and B, but it is not executed when the power is turned on using power-on pattern C. ing. In other words, when the power is turned on in power-on pattern C, the progress of the game is stopped during the ball extraction process, and there is no need to execute the light-emitting effect using the frame decoration member, so the ID codes match. The system does not check whether or not the member is the one that is present.

In addition, if only the ID code of the door frame top unit 300 does not match the game board 5, the effect display device 1600 is used to display the door frame top unit 300 and the door frame right side whose model series do not match. Execute error notification pattern 1 (for example, display of "Please check the type of door frame top unit") to notify that the unit 340 is installed. In addition, if only the ID code of the production operation unit 250 does not match the game board 5, the production display device 1600 is used to display that the production operation unit 250 whose model series does not match is installed. Error notification pattern 2 (for example, display of "Please check the type of production operation unit") is executed. Furthermore, if the ID code of the door frame top unit 300 and the ID code of the effect operation unit 250 do not match for the game board 5, the effect display device 1600 is used to identify the model series. Error notification pattern 3 (for example, "Door frame top unit and door "Please check the type of frame right side unit and production operation unit" display).

On the other hand, when the door frame top unit 300 and the production operation unit 250 are not attached to the door frame 3, when the power is turned on, the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 is connected to the door frame top relay board and the operation unit relay. It is not possible to take out the ID code from the board and refer to it. In such a case, when the power is turned on, the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 uses the ID code stored in the reference table and the ID code of the door frame top relay board attached to the door frame top unit 300. , and whether the ID code stored in the reference table and the ID code of the operation relay board attached to the production operation unit 250 match. At this time, the ID code is not input to the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510, and the ID code cannot be confirmed. Specifically, when the power is turned on, the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 detects an unconnected state if the ID code is not input from the door frame top relay board or the operation unit relay board after a predetermined determination period. It is determined that the state is the same.

In addition, if only the ID code of the door frame top unit 300 cannot be confirmed (unobtained) with respect to the game board 5, the production operation unit 250 and the door frame right side unit 340 can be attached using the production display device 1600. Execute error notification pattern 4 (for example, display of "Please check the connection of the door frame top unit and door frame right side unit") to notify that the door frame is not connected. In addition, if only the ID code of the production operation unit 250 cannot be confirmed (unobtained) for the game board 5, the production display device 1600 is used to notify that the production operation unit 250 is not installed. Execute notification pattern 5 (for example, display of "Please check the connection of the production operation unit"). In addition, if neither the ID code of the door frame top unit 300 nor the ID code of the production operation unit 250 can be confirmed (obtained) for the game board 5, the door frame Error notification pattern 6 to notify that the top unit 300, the door frame right side unit 340, and the production operation unit 250 are not attached (for example, "Connection of the door frame top unit, door frame right side unit, and production operation unit") "Please check" display).

Here, regarding the game board 5, do the ID code of the door frame top relay board attached to the door frame top unit 300 and the ID code of the operation part relay board attached to the production operation unit 250 match? Regardless of whether or not the various LEDs mounted on the light emitting board of the game board 5 can be controlled to emit light during the execution of a normal performance (a fluctuating performance or a non-fluctuating performance). Similarly, regarding the game board 5, even if there are parts whose ID codes cannot be confirmed among the door frame top unit 300, door frame right side unit 340, and production operation unit 250, normal production (changing When performing a performance or a non-changing performance, various LEDs mounted on the light emitting board of the game board 5 can be controlled to emit light.

Furthermore, regarding the door frame top unit 300 and the door frame right side unit 340, the ID code stored in the reference table and the ID code of the door frame top relay board attached to the door frame top unit 300 match. In this case, during the execution of normal effects (effects that are changing or effects that are not changing), for example, the door frame top decoration board of the door frame top unit 300, The various LEDs mounted on the door frame right side decorative board of the door frame right side unit 340 can be controlled to emit light, but if they do not match, the model series do not match (regular relationship). ) The various LEDs mounted on the light emitting boards of the door frame top unit 300 and the door frame right side unit 340 are not controlled to emit light, and the various LEDs are turned off. In addition, if the door frame top unit 300 and the door frame right side unit 340 are not installed and the ID code of the door frame top relay board cannot be confirmed, the door frame top unit 300 and the door frame right side unit 340 There is no need to control the light emission of the various LEDs mounted on the light emitting board.

Similarly, regarding the production operation unit 250, if the ID code stored in the reference table and the ID code of the operation relay board attached to the production operation unit 250 match, the normal production is performed. When executing (a fluctuating effect or a non-fluctuating effect), for example, various LEDs mounted on the front decoration board 321 and the rear decoration board 322 can be controlled to emit light via the operation unit relay board. On the other hand, if they do not match, the various LEDs mounted on the light emitting board of the production operation unit 250 whose series does not match (there is no regular relationship) are not controlled to emit light, and the various The LED will turn off. Further, when the effect operation unit 250 is not attached and the ID code of the operation section relay board cannot be confirmed, the various LEDs mounted on the light emitting board of the effect operation unit 250 are not controlled to emit light.

In addition, when a predetermined execution condition is met, when controlling the light emission of various LEDs mounted on the light emitting board of the game board 5, the door frame top unit 300 and the door frame right side are used as members located around the game board 5. The various LEDs mounted on the light-emitting board of the side unit 340 and the various LEDs mounted on the light-emitting board of the production operation unit 250 cooperate to perform light emission control. Thereby, it is possible to execute an integrated light emitting effect using not only the game board 5 but also the door frame top unit 300, the door frame right side unit 340, and the effect operation unit 250. However, among the door frame top unit 300, door frame right side unit 340, and production operation unit 250, for the parts whose ID codes do not match with the game board 5, the various ID codes mounted on the light emitting boards of the non-matching parts Since the LEDs are not controlled to emit light, it is not possible to participate in the light emitting performance. Similarly, among the door frame top unit 300, door frame right side unit 340, and production operation unit 250, parts that are not attached to the door frame 3 and whose ID codes cannot be confirmed are the parts whose ID codes cannot be confirmed. Since the various LEDs mounted on the light emitting board are not controlled to emit light, it is not possible to participate in the light emitting performance.

As mentioned above, when the predetermined execution conditions are satisfied, when controlling the light emission of various LEDs mounted on the light emitting board of the game board 5, the door frame top unit is used as a member located around the game board 5. The various LEDs mounted on the light emitting board of the door frame right side unit 300 and the door frame right side unit 340 and the various LEDs mounted on the light emitting board of the production operation unit 250 work together to control the light emission. The light emission control of the various LEDs mounted on the light emitting board of the frame 3 can also be performed cooperatively. Thereby, an integrated light emitting effect can be performed using not only the game board 5, the door frame top unit 300, the door frame right side unit 340, and the effect operation unit 250, but also the door frame 3.

[About checking the operation of frame decoration parts (reusable products)]
In recent years, as the performance of gaming machines has improved, if new parts are constantly procured to manufacture the gaming machines, there is a risk that the manufacturing costs of the gaming machines will become high. In order to suppress such cost increases, it is conceivable to reuse some or all of the specific decorative parts that are part of the game machine (including drive-related, light-emitting-related, etc.) parts. For example, the game board 5 can be easily attached to and detached from the door frame 3, but the above-mentioned frame decoration member can also be easily attached to and detached from the door frame 3, It can be used as a reusable part. By the way, for such parts that can be reused, it is necessary to determine whether or not they are working properly during inspections at the shipping source, so the operating status of the parts that can be reused must be checked individually. It is necessary to check. However, when removing and attaching parts that can be reused, there are cases where it is necessary to temporarily remove the game board 5 from the door frame 3 because reusable parts are attached to the game board 5. , after removing and installing reusable parts, if the operating status of the reusable parts can be checked only when the power is turned off and then turned on again, then the reusable parts are installed and removed. Since it is necessary to remove the game board 5 and turn off the power each time, it becomes time-consuming to check the operating state of parts that can be reused. In this regard, this example eliminates the trouble of removing the game board 5 and turning off the power, improving the efficiency of checking the operating status of parts that can be reused, and creating a highly convenient pachinko machine. 1 will be provided.

Although the frame decoration member described above is a specific decorative part that is a part of the pachinko machine 1, it is not a part attached to the game board 5 but a part attached to the door frame 3. Therefore, the frame decoration member can be attached to and removed from the door frame 3 without removing the game board 5 from the door frame 3, with the game board 5 still attached to the door frame 3. ing. In addition, the door frame top unit 300, door frame right side unit 340, and production operation unit 250, which are used as frame decoration members, can be attached and detached using tool-less locking parts in order to ease the installation work for hall managers. The mounting structure will be adopted. As a tool-less locking part, for example, a hand screw with a hand knob on the head, a well-known snap lock (not shown) that can be attached and detached with one-touch operation of moving the lever up or down, or a rotation of the lever. An example is the well-known crescent lock that can be attached and detached. In this way, the frame decoration member can be easily attached to and removed from the door frame 3, and it does not take much effort to check the operating state of the frame decoration member.

Moreover, the frame decoration member can be attached or detached even before the power is turned on or after the power is turned on. However, when the power is turned on and the power is turned off, the frame decoration member is removed and removed, and the power is turned on again to check the operating state of the removed frame decoration member. This results in a time-consuming process. Therefore, in this example, if a specific operation is performed before attaching or removing the frame decoration member while the power is on, the frame decoration After a member is attached or detached, a transition is made to a special state (reuse confirmation state) in which it is possible to check the operating state of the detached frame decoration member. In addition, in the power-on state, whether or not the reuse permission switch has been operated as a specific operation is monitored, and the determination timing is determined when a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed after the power is turned on. It is determined whether or not the reuse permission switch was previously turned on. Specifically, the operation information of the reuse permission switch is referred to at the determination timing when a predetermined period of time has passed after the power is turned on, and if the operation information is "operated" (for example, before the determination timing or at the determination timing (e.g., when the reuse permission switch is turned on at the same time), a reuse confirmation state is started, and in the reuse confirmation state, the frame decoration member is removed and attached, and the operating state of the removed frame decoration member is confirmed. is possible. On the other hand, when the operation information of the reuse permission switch is referred to at the determination timing when a predetermined period has elapsed after the power is turned on, and the operation information is "no operation" (for example, the reuse permission switch is turned ON after the determination timing). If the reuse confirmation state is not started and the frame decoration member is removed in the normal state, the operating state of the removed frame decoration member cannot be confirmed. I have to. Note that, in order to notify the operator that an ON operation of the reuse permission switch can be accepted until a predetermined period has elapsed after the power is turned on, an external notification may be made to that effect.

Here, in this example, the following power-on patterns A to C are provided as modes of power-on operation. Power-on pattern A is a case where the power switch 751 is operated without turning on the RAM clear switch 743, and the RAM clear that initializes the RAM built in the main control board 1310 is not executed, and the information regarding the game is initialized. It never changes. Power-on pattern B is a case where the power switch 751 is operated while the RAM clear switch 743 is turned ON, and RAM clear is executed and information regarding the game is initialized. Power-on pattern C is a case where the RAM clear switch 743 is not turned on, but the power switch 751 is operated while the ball removal switch 742 is turned on, and the above-mentioned ball removal process is executed. In such a power-on pattern C, although the ram clear is not executed and the information regarding the game is not initialized, the progress of the game is stopped during the ball extraction process. At the above-mentioned judgment timing, the judgment as to whether or not the reuse permission switch was turned on before the judgment timing is executed when the power is turned on in power-on patterns A and B, but in the case of power-on pattern C. This prevents it from running when the power is turned on. That is, when the power is turned on according to the power-on pattern C, only the bulb removal process is executed, and the reuse checking state is not started, so that the operating state of the frame decoration member cannot be checked.

To explain the above-mentioned specific operations in detail, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, there are operation parts that the player cannot touch (buttons that enable switching between the ON state and the OFF state, and keys that can be inserted). A reuse permission switch is provided on the main control board 1310 as a key switch that enables switching between an ON state and an OFF state. Furthermore, before the determination timing when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the power is turned on, each time the reuse permission switch is turned ON, the main control board 1310 inputs the reuse permission switch operation information to the main control board 1310, and the main control board 1310 operates the reuse permission switch. It remembers the number of times information has been entered. Then, at a determination timing when a predetermined period of time has passed after the power is turned on, the main control board 1310 refers to the memory of the number of inputs of the operation information of the reuse permission switch, and the memory of the number of inputs of the referenced operation information is "1 time". (For example, when the reuse permission switch is turned ON once before the judgment timing or at the same time as the judgment timing), the reuse confirmation state A is started and the memory of the number of inputs of operation information is "2 or more times". ” (for example, when the reuse permission switch is turned on twice before the determination timing or at the same time as the determination timing), the reuse confirmation state B is started. These reuse confirmation states may be terminated when a certain period of time has elapsed; It is preferable that the process be terminated arbitrarily by operating the same operation panel as . Thereby, the period during which the reuse confirmation state occurs can be set arbitrarily, and it is possible to improve convenience when an operator attaches and detaches the frame decoration member and confirms the operating state of the attached and detached frame decoration member. Note that in this example, whether to start reuse confirmation state A or reuse confirmation state B is determined by the number of inputs of operation information of the reuse permission switch, but it may be determined by another operation mode. Good too.

Further, the peripheral control board 1510 monitors whether or not it is electrically connected to frame decoration members such as the door frame top unit 300, the door frame right side unit 340, and the door frame right side unit 340. In this example, each of the frame decoration members is connected to the main body frame 4 and door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 using a drawer connector. If the electrical connection by the drawer connector is cut off, the frame decoration member is detached from the pachinko machine 1 or displaced, and the peripheral control board 1510 indicates that the frame decoration member is not connected. We judge that it is. That is, for example, when the worker removes the frame decoration member in the power-on state, the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the frame decoration member is not connected, and when the frame decoration member is reattached. It is determined that the frame decoration member is connected to the peripheral control board 1510. Note that, unlike this example, a detection switch is provided to detect whether each of the frame decoration members is located at a normal position, and when the detection switch connected to the peripheral control board 1510 by wiring is OFF. In this case, the frame decoration member is detached from the pachinko machine 1 or displaced, and the peripheral control board 1510 may determine that the frame decoration member is not connected.

Below, first, the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with a focus on the operating state of the frame decoration member when the door frame 3 is opened and the frame decoration member is attached and detached during normal business hours. Normal business hours are when the reuse permission switch is not operated before the determination timing when a predetermined period of time has passed after the power is turned on, and the frame decoration member is removed and removed in the normal state, not in the reuse confirmation state. I am planning to do so. Subsequently, the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with a focus on the operating state of the frame decoration member when the door frame 3 is opened and the frame decoration member is attached and detached in the reuse confirmation state. The reuse confirmation state is a case in which the reuse permission switch is operated before the determination timing when a predetermined period of time has passed after the power is turned on, and the frame decoration member is removed and attached after transitioning to the reuse confirmation state. It is said that

(Removal and attachment of frame decoration members during normal business hours)
FIG. 117 is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 when the door frame 3 is opened and the frame decoration member is attached and detached during normal business hours. First, a case will be described in which the reuse permission switch is not operated before a predetermined determination timing, so that the frame decoration member is attached and detached in the normal state without transitioning from the normal state to the reuse confirmation state. In addition, regarding the installation and removal of frame decoration members during normal business hours, if a malfunction (abnormality, failure, etc.) occurs with the frame decoration member, such as when the LED of the frame decoration member stops emitting light, open the door frame 3 and remove the frame decoration. After removing the member, it is assumed that the door frame 3 is temporarily closed with the frame decoration member left unconnected, and then the door frame 3 is opened again and the same frame decoration member or another frame decoration member is attached. There is.

As shown in FIG. 117, first, after the power is turned on at timing ts, power-on processing is performed on the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, and the gaming state on the main control board 1510 side is controlled to the normal state. , the period in which the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side can be played. In other words, in the normal state after the power is turned on, when the player operates the handle 160, the game ball can be launched into the game area 5a, and when a starting prize is won, the variable display of special symbols can be started. A normal game can be played in which a jackpot game can be started when the variable display of special symbols is stopped and displayed at a winning symbol. In addition, in the normal state, the period in which the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side can be played continues regardless of whether or not the frame decoration member is removed at timing t2, etc., which will be described later. . Further, the peripheral control board 1510 monitors whether or not it is electrically connected to frame decoration members such as the door frame top unit 300, the door frame right side unit 340, and the production operation unit 250, but at timing ts. After the power is turned on, it is determined that the frame decoration member is not removed and the frame decoration member is connected until timing tx, which will be described later, arrives.

In addition, the peripheral control board 1510 also controls LEDs inside the frame decoration (lamp A) mounted on various decorative boards of the frame decoration member, and LEDs outside the frame decoration (lamp B) mounted on various decorative boards other than the frame decoration member. ), the liquid crystal display device 1600, speakers, etc. are controlled, but the components whose operations are instructed by the peripheral control board 1510 are configured to perform normal operations after the power is turned on at timing ts. ing. In addition, the lamp B includes, as components other than the frame decoration members, an outside-frame decoration LED 1 mounted on various decorative boards of some members, and an outside-frame decoration LED 1 mounted on various decorative boards of other members. The LEDs 1 and 2 can be classified into LEDs 1 and 2, and the LED 1 outside the frame decoration performs its normal operation regardless of whether the door frame 3 is opened or whether the frame decoration member is attached. Here, in the normal operation, when the variable display of the special symbol is not being executed, the operation corresponding to the standby effect (for example, demonstration effect) in a state of waiting for the variable display of the special symbol to start is performed. When the variable display of the special symbol is executed, the peripheral control board 1510 executes the operation corresponding to the variable effect (the effect based on the variable pattern) based on receiving the variable pattern command. I have to. For example, when the peripheral control board 1510 receives a variable pattern command, the effect display device 1600 executes an effect display (for example, a reach effect) including a variable display of decorative symbols, In lamp B (LED 1 outside the frame decoration) and lamp B (LED 2 outside the frame decoration), the LEDs are made to light up or blink in conjunction with the effect display executed by the effect display device 1600, and from the speaker, the effect display device Sound is output in conjunction with the effect display executed in step 1600.

Furthermore, for the members for which the peripheral control board 1510 instructs the operation, the normal operation is executed after the power is turned on at timing ts, but for such members, the setting adjustment button 204 is operated. The volume and amount of light change accordingly. Specifically, when the setting adjustment button 204 is operated, the operation is accepted and the volume and light intensity are adjusted internally, so that the volume and light intensity are reflected in the current volume and light intensity. However, among the members whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510, for lamp B (LED 1 outside the frame decoration), the light intensity of the LED is constant, and the volume and light intensity do not change even if the setting adjustment button 204 is operated. That's what I do.

Furthermore, it is possible to output predetermined signals to the hall computer from the external terminal board, and by receiving these signals at the hall computer, the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 can be grasped on the hall side as well. ing. Here, since the door frame 3 is in a closed state, the door frame open signal described later is not outputted, and since the state is in a normal state, which is not the reuse confirmation state described later, the reuse confirmation signal described later is not output. do not have.

Then, at timing tz1, when a predetermined period has elapsed after the power is turned on at timing ts, a determination timing is provided to determine whether or not the reuse permission switch was operated before timing tz1. That is, at the determination timing, it is determined whether or not the reuse permission switch was operated between timing ts and timing tz1. Here, since the reuse permission switch is not operated before timing tz1, there is no transition to the reuse confirmation state at timing tz1, and the normal state continues thereafter. It is also assumed that the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 does not change before and after timing tz1. For example, the members whose operations are instructed by the peripheral control board 1510 continue to perform normal operations even after timing tz1.

Then, even if the reuse permission switch is operated at timing tz2 after it is determined that the reuse permission switch is not operated at timing tz1, the normal state does not change to the reuse confirmation state, and the normal state does not change after that. continues. In other words, the operation of the reuse permission switch at timing tz2 is treated as invalid. It is also assumed that the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 does not change before and after timing tz2. For example, the members whose operations are instructed by the peripheral control board 1510 continue to perform normal operations even after timing tz2.

Next, at timing t1, when the door frame 3 is opened in the normal state, an open switch signal for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the door frame 3 is opened. A door frame opening command to convey the opening of No. 3 is output to the peripheral control board 1510. At this time, after the power is turned on at timing ts, the members to which the peripheral control board 1510 is instructed to operate perform normal operations, but at timing t1, the peripheral control board 1510 Based on receiving the release command, the release operation is performed.

Specifically, when the peripheral control board 1510 receives a door frame opening command, lamp A (LED inside the frame decoration) and lamp B (LED 2 outside the frame decoration) emit light in a single color and with strong brightness when the door frame is opened. The LED lights up or flashes, and the effect display device 1600 displays the message "The door frame is open" as an indication when the door is opened, and the speaker outputs the opening sound as "Door frame opens. is now open.'' is output. However, among the members whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510, the lamp B (LED 1 outside the frame decoration) continues to operate normally without performing the operation when opening.

Furthermore, when the door frame 3 is opened in the normal state at timing t1, the members whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510, except for the lamp B (LED 1 outside the frame decoration), operate when the door frame 3 is opened. However, in the open operation, the amount of light from the LEDs, etc. is kept constant, and the volume from the speakers is kept constant. Therefore, even if the setting adjustment button 204 is operated, the volume and light amount of the member performing the opening operation will not change. Specifically, when the setting adjustment button 204 is operated, it is possible to accept the operation and adjust the volume and light intensity internally, but it is ensured that the operation is not reflected in the volume and light intensity during execution. ing. Such internally adjusted volume and light intensity will be reflected in the running volume and light intensity based on the internally adjusted volume and light intensity when normal operation is restored. That will happen. Note that the effect display device 1600 may be configured such that the amount of light changes when the setting adjustment button 204 is operated.

Furthermore, when the door frame 3 is opened in the normal state at timing t1, the external terminal board outputs a door frame open signal to the hall computer, and the door frame 3 is opened on the hall side. This makes it possible to understand that something has happened. Regarding such a door frame opening signal, output to the hall computer is finished when a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after the door frame 3 is closed at timing t2, which will be described later. Thereby, even if the opening/closing time of the door frame 3 is short, it is possible to easily notice that the door frame 3 has been opened on the hall side.

Next, if the frame decoration member is removed in the normal state at timing tx after the door frame 3 is opened, the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the frame decoration member is not connected. At this time, after opening the door frame 3 at timing t1, the members for which the peripheral control board 1510 has instructed to operate perform the opening operation, but at timing tx, the frame decoration member is After removal, although it is possible to execute the operation when the frame decoration is not connected for the members for which the peripheral control board 1510 has given operation instructions, the operation when the frame decoration is not connected is given priority over the operation when the frame decoration is disconnected. is performing the following actions. The operation when the frame decoration is not connected is performed after the door frame 3 is closed and the operation when opening is completed. In this way, if the peripheral control board 1510 gives priority to the operation of the members for which the peripheral control board 1510 instructs the operation when the frame decoration is not connected, the opening of the door frame 3 will not be notified to the outside and the hall manager will not be aware of it. Although there is a possibility that an illegal act may be performed on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, such a situation can be prevented from occurring by giving priority to the opening operation. Note that in the normal state, the period in which the game (main game) can be played on the main control board 1310 side continues regardless of whether or not the frame decoration member is removed at timing t2.

However, among the members that the peripheral control board 1510 instructs to operate, the effect display device 1600 executes the operation when the frame decoration is not connected in addition to the operation when the frame decoration is not connected. Specifically, the production display device 1600 not only displays the message "The door frame is open" when the door is opened, but also displays the message "The frame decoration member is not connected" when the frame decoration is not connected. ” message is displayed. That is, in the normal state, the frame decoration member is not allowed to be removed without performing the operation when the frame decoration is not connected. Further, regarding lamp A (LED inside the frame decoration), since the frame decoration member has been removed, the LED will not turn on or blink after that.

Next, after removing the frame decoration member, if the door frame 3 is closed in the normal state at timing t2, the signal of the closing switch for detecting the closing of the door frame 3 is sent to the main controller of the main control board 1310. A door frame closing command is input to the control MPU 1310a and outputted to the peripheral control board 1510 to notify the closing of the door frame 3. At this time, after the frame decoration member is removed at timing tx, for the members whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510, the operation when opening is performed with priority over the operation when the frame decoration is not connected. However, at timing t2, based on the peripheral control board 1510 receiving the door frame closing command, the operation at the time of opening ends and the operation at the time when the frame decoration is not connected is executed.

Specifically, when the peripheral control board 1510 receives a door frame closing command, lamp B (LED 2 outside the frame decoration) emits light in a single color (a different color from the color emitted when the frame decoration is open) when the frame decoration is not connected. ), the LED lights up or blinks with strong brightness, and the effect display device 1600 displays the message "Frame decoration member is not connected" as a display when the frame decoration is not connected. is designed to output a sound saying "The frame decoration member is not connected" as the frame decoration disconnection notification sound. However, among the members whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510, the lamp B (LED 1 outside the frame decoration) continues to operate normally without performing the operation when the frame decoration is not connected. Furthermore, among the members whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510, lamp B (LED 2 outside the frame decoration) emits light during closing for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) after receiving the door frame closing command. After the predetermined period has elapsed, the light emission when the frame decoration is not connected is executed. As a result, even if the opening/closing time of the door frame 3 is short, by emitting light at the time of closing, it is possible to make it easier for the hall side to notice that the door frame 3 has been opened.

Furthermore, at timing t2, when the door frame 3 is closed in the normal state, the members whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510 are not connected to the frame decoration except for the lamp B (LED 1 outside the frame decoration). In the operation when the frame decoration is not connected, the amount of light from the LED and the like is kept constant, and the volume from the speaker is kept constant. Therefore, even if the setting adjustment button 204 is operated, the volume or light amount of the member that is performing the operation when the frame decoration is not connected does not change. Specifically, when the setting adjustment button 204 is operated, it is possible to accept the operation and adjust the volume and light intensity internally, but it is ensured that the operation is not reflected in the volume and light intensity during execution. ing. Such internally adjusted volume and light intensity will be reflected in the running volume and light intensity based on the internally adjusted volume and light intensity when normal operation is restored. That will happen. Note that the effect display device 1600 may be configured such that the amount of light changes when the setting adjustment button 204 is operated.

Next, when the door frame 3 is opened again in the normal state to attach the frame decoration member at timing t3, the behavior is almost the same as when the door frame 3 is opened in the normal state at timing t1. It shows. In other words, when the door frame 3 is opened again in a situation where the frame decoration member has been removed, the members whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510 will be opened with priority over the operation when the frame decoration is not connected. Running the action at the time. However, for lamp A (LED inside the frame decoration), since the frame decoration member has been removed, the opening operation is not performed. Furthermore, among the members to which the peripheral control board 1510 instructs the operation, the effect display device 1600 executes the operation when the frame decoration is not connected in addition to the operation when the frame decoration is not connected.

Next, when the frame decoration member is attached again in the normal state at timing ty after the door frame 3 is opened, the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the frame decoration member is connected. At this time, after opening the door frame 3 at timing t2, the members for which the peripheral control board 1510 has instructed to operate perform the opening operation, but at timing ty, the frame decoration member is Even after attachment, the members whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510 continue to operate when opened. However, among the members that the peripheral control board 1510 instructs to operate, for the effect display device 1600, at timing ty, even after the frame decoration member is attached, in addition to the operation when the frame decoration is not connected, in addition to the operation when the frame decoration is not connected. It continues to operate. In addition, after the door frame 3 is closed at timing t4, which will be described later, after the frame decoration member is attached, the opening operation is completed, but the operation does not return to the normal operation, and the frame decoration is not connected. It continues to operate over time. As a result, if the frame decoration member is removed under normal conditions, even if the frame decoration member is attached again, traces of the frame decoration member being disconnected can be left behind, and it is possible to remove the frame decoration member by attaching and detaching it. It is possible to prevent illegal acts from being carried out.

Also, at timing ty, if the frame decoration member is attached in the normal state, electricity supply to lamp A (LED in the frame decoration) has started by attaching the frame decoration member, but after that The light does not turn on or flash, and remains in an off state. As a result, if the frame decoration member is removed under normal conditions, even if the frame decoration member is attached again, traces of the frame decoration member being disconnected can be left behind, and it is possible to remove the frame decoration member by attaching and detaching it. It is possible to prevent illegal acts from being carried out. In addition, in this example, the reuse permission switch is not operated before the determination timing of timing tz1, and the state remains in the normal state and does not shift to the reuse confirmation state after timing tz1. Even if a frame decoration member is attached (removed) in , it is impossible to check the operational state of the attached (removed) frame decoration member. That is, in the normal state, the movement of the frame decoration member by attaching the frame decoration member is not permitted.

Next, after attaching the frame decoration member, if the door frame 3 is closed in the normal state at timing t4, the signal of the closing switch for detecting the closing of the door frame 3 is sent to the main controller of the main control board 1310. A door frame closing command is input to the control MPU 1310a and outputted to the peripheral control board 1510 to notify the closing of the door frame 3. At this time, after the frame decoration member is attached at timing ty, the members for which the peripheral control board 1510 is instructed to operate perform the opening operation, but at timing t4, the peripheral control board 1510 Upon receiving the door frame closing command, the opening operation is completed and the normal operation is executed. However, among the members whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510, lamp B (LED 2 outside the frame decoration) emits light during closing for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) after receiving the door frame closing command. After the predetermined period has elapsed, normal light emission is performed. Thereby, even if the opening/closing time of the door frame 3 is short, by emitting light at the time of closing, it is possible to make it easier for the hall side to notice that the door frame 3 has been opened.

Further, as described above in detail, after the frame decoration member is attached and the door frame 3 is closed at timing t4, the opening operation is completed, but the operation does not return to the normal operation. The operation continues when the frame decoration is not connected. Furthermore, when the frame decoration member is attached in the normal state at timing ty, the lamp A (LED in the frame decoration) is turned off, but at timing t4, the door frame 3 is closed. Even after the lights are turned off, the lights remain off. In such a case, unless the power is turned on again, the light will not be released from the off state and will not turn on, making it time-consuming to check the operating status of the removed frame decoration member. ing.

(Removal and attachment of frame decoration member in reuse confirmation state A, Part 1)
FIG. 118 is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 when the frame decoration member is removed while the door frame 3 is being opened in the reuse confirmation state A, and the frame decoration member is attached while the door frame 3 is being opened next. . First, a case will be described in which the frame decoration member is attached and detached after transitioning from the normal state to the reuse confirmation state A by operating the reuse permission switch before a predetermined determination timing. Regarding the attachment and detachment of frame decoration members in reuse confirmation state A, when checking the operational status of multiple frame decoration members used as parts that can be reused, the door frame 3 is opened and the frame decoration members are removed. Later, the door frame 3 is temporarily closed with the frame decoration member not connected, and the door frame 3 is opened again and another frame decoration member is attached, or the same frame decoration member is reinstalled for reconfirmation. It is assumed that the

As shown in FIG. 118, after the power is turned on at timing ts, the same behavior as when the power is turned on at timing ts shown in FIG. 117 is shown. For example, after turning on the power at timing ts, the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 are powered on, the gaming state on the main control board 1510 side is controlled to the normal state, and the main control board 1310 side is controlled to the normal state. This is the period in which the game (main game) can be played. In other words, in the normal state after the power is turned on, when the player operates the handle 160, the game ball can be launched into the game area 5a, and when a starting prize is won, the variable display of special symbols can be started. A normal game can be played in which a jackpot game can be started when the variable display of special symbols is stopped and displayed at a winning symbol. Further, the peripheral control board 1510 monitors whether or not it is electrically connected to frame decoration members such as the door frame top unit 300, the door frame right side unit 340, and the production operation unit 250, but at timing ts. After the power is turned on, it is determined that the frame decoration member is not removed and the frame decoration member is connected until timing tx, which will be described later, arrives. Furthermore, the members for which the peripheral control board 1510 instructs to operate perform normal operations after the power is turned on at timing ts.

Then, at timing tz1, when a predetermined period has elapsed after the power is turned on at timing ts, a determination timing is provided to determine whether or not the reuse permission switch was operated before timing tz1. That is, at the determination timing, it is determined whether the reuse permission switch is operated between timing ts and timing tz1. Here, by operating the reuse permission switch at timing tx3, which is earlier than timing tz1, the normal state is shifted to the reuse confirmation state A at timing tz1. Note that after the main control board 1310 shifts to the reuse confirmation state A at timing tz1, there is a period in which it is impossible to proceed with the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side. In other words, in the reuse confirmation state A, even if the player operates the handle 160, the game ball cannot be launched into the game area 5a, and even if there is a starting prize, the changing display of the special symbol cannot be started. The player is unable to play normal games. Thereby, in the reuse confirmation state A, it is possible to prevent the attachment/detachment of the frame decoration member and the confirmation of the operating state of the frame decoration member from being hindered by normal playing of the game. In addition, in the reuse confirmation state A, it is impossible to proceed with the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side until the reuse permission switch is operated again at timing tz4, which will be described later, to end the reuse confirmation state A. It is assumed that the period will continue.

Further, after shifting to the reuse confirmation state A at timing tz1, the operation at the time of reuse confirmation is executed using some of the members whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510. Specifically, after transitioning to the reuse confirmation state A at timing tz1, the effect display device 1600 displays a message "You can check the operation of the frame decoration member" as a display when confirming reuse. Then, the speaker outputs a sound saying "You can check the operation of the frame decoration member" as a reuse confirmation sound. On the other hand, among the members that the peripheral control board 1510 instructs to operate, lamp A (LED inside the frame decoration), lamp B (LED 1 outside the frame decoration), and lamp B (LED 2 outside the frame decoration) performs the operation when confirming reuse. It continues to operate normally without any problems. In this way, after transitioning to the reuse confirmation state A at timing tz1, only some of the members to which the peripheral control board 1510 has given operation instructions are performing the operations at the time of reuse confirmation. The transition to confirmation state A is caused by the operator operating the reuse permission switch, and there is no need to notify the outside in an easy-to-understand manner. For lamp B (LED1 outside the frame decoration) and lamp B (LED2 outside the frame decoration), the operation at the time of reuse confirmation is not performed. Moreover, such an operation at the time of reuse confirmation is assumed to continue until the reuse permission switch is operated again at timing tz4, which will be described later, and the reuse confirmation state A is ended.

Furthermore, after transitioning to the reuse confirmation state A at timing tz1, some of the members for which the peripheral control board 1510 has given operation instructions execute the operations at the time of reuse confirmation; Regarding the members, the amount of light from LEDs and the like is kept constant, and the volume from the speakers is kept constant. Therefore, even if the setting adjustment button 204 is operated, the volume and light intensity of the member that is performing the operation during reuse confirmation will not change. Specifically, when the setting adjustment button 204 is operated, it is possible to accept the operation and adjust the volume and light intensity internally, but it is configured so that the operation is not reflected in the volume and light intensity during execution. ing. Regarding such internally adjusted volume and light intensity, by operating the reuse permission switch again at timing tz4, which will be described later, when the reuse confirmation state A changes to the normal state and returns to normal operation. Based on the internally adjusted volume and light intensity, the volume and light intensity during execution will be reflected. On the other hand, for lamp A (LED inside the frame decoration) and lamp B (LED 2 outside the frame decoration), which are members that continue to operate normally even after transitioning to reuse confirmation state A at timing tz1, the setting adjustment button is pressed. Although it is assumed that the light intensity changes by operating the setting adjustment button 204, for lamp B (LED1 outside the frame decoration), the light intensity of the LED is kept constant, so that even if the setting adjustment button 204 is operated, the light intensity does not change. I have to. In this way, in this example, since the member that makes the light amount of the LED constant is provided, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the light amount is changing with respect to a member that does not make the light amount of the LED constant. can. Note that the effect display device 1600 may be configured such that the amount of light changes when the setting adjustment button 204 is operated.

In addition, after transitioning to reuse confirmation state A at timing tz1, the external terminal board outputs a reuse confirmation signal to the hall computer, and the hall side informs that the transition to reuse confirmation state A has occurred. I'm trying to make it easier to understand. Regarding such a reuse confirmation signal, output to the hall computer is ended when the reuse permission switch is operated again at timing tz4, which will be described later, to end the reuse confirmation state A. Note that the output of the reuse confirmation signal to the hall computer may be terminated when a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after the reuse confirmation state A is terminated. Thereby, even if the transition period to reuse confirmation state A is short, it is possible to make it easier for the hall side to notice that the transition to reuse confirmation state A has occurred.

Next, at timing t1, when the door frame 3 is opened in the reuse confirmation state A, an open switch signal for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, A door frame open command to notify the opening of the door frame 3 is output to the peripheral control board 1510. It is assumed that the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 does not change before and after timing t1. For example, among the members whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510, the members that are performing the normal operation are configured to continue the normal operation even after timing t1, and when the reuse is confirmed Regarding the members that are performing the operation, even after the timing t1, the operation at the time of reuse confirmation is continued. In other words, when the door frame 3 is opened in the reuse confirmation state A, the peripheral control board 1510 receives the door frame opening command, but for the members for which the peripheral control board 1510 is instructing the operation, the operation at the time of opening is not performed. It is assumed that it is never executed and does not change before or after timing t1. Thereby, in the reuse confirmation state A, it is possible to prevent attachment and detachment of the frame decoration member and confirmation of the operating state of the frame decoration member from being hindered by execution of the opening operation.

Furthermore, when the door frame 3 is opened in the reuse confirmation state A at timing t1, the external terminal board outputs a door frame release signal to the hall computer, and the door frame 3 is opened on the hall side. We are making it possible to know that there has been a release. Regarding such a door frame opening signal, output to the hall computer is finished when a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after the door frame 3 is closed at timing t2, which will be described later. Thereby, even if the opening/closing time of the door frame 3 is short, it is possible to easily notice that the door frame 3 has been opened on the hall side.

Next, after opening the door frame 3, if the frame decoration member is removed in the reuse confirmation state A at timing tx, the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the frame decoration member is not connected. . It is assumed that the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 does not change before and after the timing tx. For example, among the members whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510, the members that are performing the normal operation are configured to continue the normal operation even after the timing tx, and when confirming reuse, Regarding the members that are performing the operation, even after the timing tx, the operation at the time of reuse confirmation is continued. In addition, when the frame decoration member is removed in reuse confirmation state A, the operation for the member for which the peripheral control board 1510 has been instructed to operate even though the frame decoration member has been removed, is performed in the operation when the frame decoration is not connected. It is assumed that the timing does not change before and after the timing tx. That is, in the reuse confirmation state A, the frame decoration member is allowed to be removed without performing the operation when the frame decoration is not connected. As a result, in the reuse confirmation state A, it is possible to prevent the attachment/detachment of the frame decoration member and the confirmation of the operating state of the frame decoration member from being hindered by the execution of the operation when the frame decoration is not connected. .

Note that the behavior of Pachinko machine 1 does not change before and after timing tx, but regarding lamp A (LED inside the frame decoration), since the frame decoration member has been removed, the LED lights up or flashes after that. It has never happened before.

Next, after removing the frame decoration member, if the door frame 3 is closed in the reuse confirmation state A at timing t2, a signal from the closing switch for detecting the closing of the door frame 3 is sent to the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a outputs a door frame closing command to the peripheral control board 1510 to notify the closing of the door frame 3. It is assumed that the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 does not change before and after timing t2. For example, among the members whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510, the members that are performing the normal operation are configured to continue the normal operation even after timing t2, and when checking the reuse, Regarding the members that are performing the operation, even after timing t2, the operation at the time of reuse confirmation is continued. In other words, when the door frame 3 is closed in the reuse confirmation state A, the peripheral control board 1510 receives the door frame closing command, but for the members for which the peripheral control board 1510 is instructing the operation, the operation at the time of closing is not performed. It is assumed that it is never executed and does not change before or after timing t2. Thereby, in the reuse confirmation state A, it is possible to prevent the attachment/detachment of the frame decoration member and confirmation of the operating state of the frame decoration member from being hindered by execution of the closing operation.

Next, at timing t3, if the door frame 3 is opened again to attach the frame decoration member in the reuse confirmation state A, then at timing t1, the door frame 3 is opened again in the reuse confirmation state A. They show almost the same behavior. In other words, when the door frame 3 is opened again in a situation where the frame decoration member has been removed, the member whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510 does not perform the operation at the time of opening, and the timing t3 It is assumed that there is no change before and after. For example, among the members whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510, the members that are performing the normal operation are configured to continue the normal operation even after timing t3, and when checking the reuse, Regarding the members that are performing the operation, even after timing t3, the operation at the time of reuse confirmation is continued.

Next, when the frame decoration member is attached again in the reuse confirmation state A at timing ty after the door frame 3 is opened, the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the frame decoration member is connected. It is assumed that the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 does not change before and after timing ty. For example, among the members whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510, the members that are performing the normal operation are configured to continue the normal operation even after timing ty, and Regarding the members that are performing the operation, even after the timing ty, the operation at the time of reuse confirmation is continued.

Also, at timing ty, if a frame decoration member is attached in reuse confirmation state A, electricity supply will be started for lamp A (LED in the frame decoration) by attaching the frame decoration member. and is performing normal operations. As mentioned above in detail, in normal operation, when the variable display of special symbols is not being executed, it supports standby production (for example, demonstration production) in a state of waiting for the variable display of special symbols to start. When the variable display of the special symbol is being executed, the peripheral control board 1510 executes the operation corresponding to the variable effect (the effect based on the variable pattern) based on receiving the variable pattern command. I'm trying to execute it. For example, when the peripheral control board 1510 receives a variable pattern command, the LED in lamp A (LED in the frame decoration) lights up or flashes in conjunction with the effect display executed by the effect display device 1600. . However, when the frame decoration member is installed, there may be problems such as a situation where the wiring to lamp A (LED inside the frame decoration) is disconnected and electricity is not supplied, or a situation where lamp A (LED inside the frame decoration) itself is broken. When this occurs, normal operations are not performed and the LEDs do not light up or blink.

In this example, if the reuse permission switch is not operated before the judgment timing of timing tz1, the frame decoration member is removed and then reattached without changing to the reuse confirmation state in the normal state. However, if the reuse permission switch is operated once before the judgment timing of timing tz1, the light will not turn on or blink after that, and the light will go out. After the frame decoration member is removed in the reuse confirmation state A, the frame decoration member is reattached at timing ty to perform normal operation. That is, in the reuse confirmation state A, the operation of the frame decoration member is allowed by attaching the frame decoration member. Then, on the condition that the reuse permission switch is operated once before the judgment timing of timing tz1, the state shifts to reuse confirmation state A. ), the operating state of the attached (detachable) frame decoration member can be checked.

In addition, in this example, during the period from timing tx to timing ty, that is, during the period when the frame decoration member is being removed for attachment and detachment in the reuse confirmation state A, the lamp A (LED inside the frame decoration) is , the LED does not light up or blink. However, during such a period, when the setting adjustment button 204 is operated, although it is possible to accept the operation and adjust the volume and light intensity internally, it is not reflected in the light intensity for lamp A (LED inside the frame decoration). It is in a state where it will never happen. Regarding such internally adjusted volume and light amount, when the frame decoration member is reattached at timing ty, which will be described later, the internally adjusted light amount will be changed when the LED can be turned on or blinked. This will be reflected in the amount of light for lamp A (LED inside the frame decoration) based on this. In this way, in this example, when the frame decoration member is reattached at timing ty, which will be described later, the internally adjusted light amount is not reset and returned to the initial state; Since the light intensity is reflected as is, it is possible to easily determine whether the light intensity of the attached (removed) frame decoration member relative to lamp A (LED inside the frame decoration) is changing normally. . Note that regardless of whether or not the frame decoration member is being removed, the light intensity of the LED is constant for lamp B (LED 1 outside the frame decoration), and the light intensity changes even if the setting adjustment button 204 is operated. I try not to let that happen. Therefore, when the frame decoration member is reattached at timing ty, the amount of light for lamp A (LED inside the frame decoration) of the frame decoration member changes normally compared to lamp B (LED 1 outside the frame decoration). It is possible to easily determine whether the

Regarding the lamp A (LED in the frame decoration) mentioned above, it is an LED in the frame decoration mounted on various decorative boards of the frame decoration member, and is provided in the frame decoration member. In addition to the lamp A (LED inside the frame), an inside LED 2 (lamp A') mounted on various decorative substrates of the frame decoration member may be provided. Regarding the lamp A' (LED 2 in the frame decoration), the light intensity of the LED is kept constant so that the volume and light intensity do not change even if the setting adjustment button 204 is operated. As a result, since lamp A' (LED2 inside the frame decoration) is provided on the frame decoration member like lamp A (LED inside the frame decoration), when the frame decoration member is reattached at timing ty, Compared to the lamp A' (LED2 inside the frame decoration) of the decorative member, the light amount for the lamp A (LED inside the frame decoration) of the frame decoration member is the light amount that is internally adjusted during the period when the frame decoration member is removed. It can be easily determined whether or not it is changing normally.

Next, after attaching the frame decoration member, if the door frame 3 is closed in the reuse confirmation state A at timing t4, the door frame 3 is closed in the reuse confirmation state A at timing t2. They show almost the same behavior. In other words, when the door frame 3 is closed after the frame decoration member is attached, the members whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510 do not perform the closing operation, and the door frame 3 is closed before or after timing t4. It is assumed that it does not change. For example, among the members whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510, the members that are performing the normal operation are configured to continue the normal operation even after timing t4, and when the reuse is confirmed, Regarding the members that are performing the operation, even after timing t4, the operation at the time of reuse confirmation is continued.

Next, after closing the door frame 3, when the reuse permission switch is operated again at timing tz4, the reuse confirmation state A is ended and the state is shifted to the normal state. Here, the normal state is the same as the normal state after the power is turned on at timing ts. In other words, after the main control board 1310 shifts to the normal state at timing tz4, it is a period in which the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side can proceed. Furthermore, the members whose operations are instructed by the peripheral control board 1510 execute their normal operations after shifting to the normal state at timing tz4. As described above, in this example, after the frame decoration member, which is a part that can be reused, is removed and the operating state of the frame decoration member is confirmed, it is possible to return from the reuse confirmation state A to the normal state again. Therefore, after checking the operating state of the frame decoration member, it is possible to check whether the game (main game) is proceeding normally or not.

In this example, after removing the frame decoration member in reuse confirmation state A, the frame decoration member is reattached at timing ty, so that lamp A (LED inside the frame decoration) performs normal operation. However, at timing ty, when the frame decoration member is attached again, the normal operation is not executed, and by operating the operation permission switch after attaching the frame decoration member, lamp A (LED inside the frame decoration) is activated. ) may be configured to perform normal operations. The operation permission switch is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 and is a working operation part that the player cannot touch (a button that allows switching between the ON and OFF states, or a button that allows you to switch between the ON and OFF states, or a button that allows you to switch between the ON and OFF states by inserting a key). The main control board 1310 is provided as a key switch (such as a key switch that enables switching between the OFF state and the OFF state). Furthermore, at timing ty, after reattaching the frame decoration member and before operating the operation permission switch, lamp A (LED inside the frame decoration) is activated as a standby operation, for example, when the LED lights up. It is set as a state or a state where the light is turned off. Thereby, the hall manager can arbitrarily start checking the operating state of the frame decoration member by operating the operation permission switch, thereby improving convenience.

The above-mentioned operation permission switch is provided separately from the reuse permission switch, but the reuse permission switch may also serve as the operation permission switch. In other words, at timing ty, when the frame decoration member is attached again, the normal operation is not executed, but by operating the reuse permission switch after attaching the frame decoration member, lamp A (LED inside the frame decoration) is turned on. Ordinary operations may be performed. Further, the reuse permission switch may be configured so that one option can be selected from multiple options, and the option for starting the reuse confirmation state and the lamp A (LED inside the frame decoration) are normally and an option for executing the operation at the time.

In addition, in this example, after removing the frame decoration member in the reuse confirmation state A, at timing ty, the frame decoration member is reattached while the door frame 3 is open, so that the lamp A (LED inside the frame decoration) is turned on. The normal operation is executed, but when the frame decoration member is attached again while the door frame 3 is open at timing ty, the normal operation is not executed, and at timing t2, when the door frame 3 is opened, the normal operation is executed. By closing the door frame 3, the lamp A (the LED inside the frame decoration) may perform its normal operation. At this time, at timing ty, the lamp A (LED inside the frame decoration) is on standby after the frame decoration member is reattached while the door frame 3 is open and before the door frame 3 is closed. For example, the LED is turned on or off. As a result, the hall manager can arbitrarily start checking the operating state of the frame decoration member by closing the door frame 3, thereby improving convenience.

Furthermore, in this example, at timing tz4, it is impossible to proceed with the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side before the reuse permission switch is operated again to end the reuse confirmation state. When the reuse permission switch is operated again at timing tz4 to end the reuse confirmation state, the period is set such that the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side can proceed. Even before the reuse permission switch is operated again to end the reuse confirmation state, the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side can be advanced by operating the game permission switch. It may be possible to shift to a possible period. The game permission switch is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 and is a working operation part that the player cannot touch (a button that allows switching between the ON and OFF states, or a button that allows you to switch between the ON and OFF states, or a button that allows you to switch between the ON and OFF states by inserting a key). The main control board 1310 is provided as a key switch (such as a key switch that enables switching between the OFF state and the OFF state). As a result, during a period in which the game (main game) can be progressed on the main control board 1310 side, when the handle 160 is operated, the game ball can be launched into the game area 5a, and when a starting prize is generated. In this case, the fluctuating display of the special symbols can be started by performing a lottery, and when the fluctuating display of the special symbols stops and is displayed at the winning symbol, the jackpot game can be started. ) can be started at will by the hall manager by operating the game permission switch, improving convenience.

The game permission switch described above is provided separately from the reuse permission switch, but the reuse permission switch may also serve as the function of the game permission switch. In other words, by operating the reuse permission switch at a timing before ending the reuse confirmation state by operating the reuse permission switch again, it is possible to proceed with the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side. It may be possible to shift to a certain period. Further, the reuse permission switch may be configured so that one option can be selected from a plurality of options, including an option for starting the reuse confirmation state and an option for starting a game (main It may also be configured to have an option for transitioning to a period in which it is possible to proceed with the game (gaming).

In the above example, if the number of inputs of the operation information of the reuse permission switch is "1 time" at the predetermined judgment timing after the power is turned on (for example, the reuse permission switch is input once before the judgment timing or at the same time as the judgment timing) When the ON operation is performed, etc.), the normal state shifts to the reuse confirmation state A, and the frame decoration member is attached and detached in the reuse confirmation state A, but the memory of the number of inputs of the operation information of the reuse permission switch is " 2 or more times (for example, when the reuse permission switch is turned on twice before the judgment timing or at the same time as the judgment timing), the normal state shifts to reuse confirmation state B, and the reuse confirmation state At B, the frame decoration member can be attached and detached. Here, in the reuse confirmation state A, it is a period in which it is impossible to proceed with the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side, but in the reuse confirmation state B, it is impossible to proceed with the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side. ) is the period during which it is possible to proceed. Further, in the reuse confirmation state B, the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 in the reuse confirmation state A is the same as that of the pachinko machine 1 in other respects. For example, even if the reuse confirmation state B is entered at the judgment timing tz1, with the condition that the number of inputs of the operation information of the reuse permission switch is "2 or more", the reuse confirmation state When the frame decoration member is attached (removed) in step B, it is possible to check the operating state of the attached (removed) frame decoration member.

FIG. 119 is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 when the frame decoration member is removed while the door frame 3 is being opened and the frame decoration member is attached while the door frame 3 is being opened in the reuse confirmation state B. . Here, the points that are different from reuse confirmation state A are mainly described.

As shown in FIG. 119, after the power is turned on at timing ts, the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 are powered on, and the gaming state on the main control board 1510 side is controlled to the normal state. This is a period in which the game (main game) on the control board 1310 side can be played. Then, at timing tz1, when a predetermined period has elapsed after the power is turned on at timing ts, a determination timing is provided to determine whether or not the reuse permission switch was operated before timing tz1. Regarding timing, the number of times the reuse permission switch is operated between timing ts and timing tz1 is also determined. Here, by operating the reuse permission switch twice before timing tz1, the normal state is shifted to reuse confirmation state B at timing tz1. The reuse confirmation state A is a period in which the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side can be played. That is, in the reuse confirmation state A, when the player operates the handle 160, the game ball can be launched into the game area 5a, and when a starting prize is won, the variable display of special symbols can be started. A normal game can be played in which a jackpot game can be started when the variable display of special symbols is stopped and displayed at a winning symbol. In addition, in the reuse confirmation state A, there is a period during which the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side can be played until the reuse permission switch is operated again at timing tz4 to end the reuse confirmation state A. It is assumed that this will continue.

In addition, if the reuse permission switch is operated twice before the judgment timing of timing tz1, the state shifts to reuse confirmation state B, and after removing the frame decoration member in the reuse confirmation state B, the frame decoration member is removed at timing ty. By attaching the frame decoration member again, normal operation is performed. That is, in the reuse confirmation state B, the operation of the frame decoration member is allowed by attaching the frame decoration member. Then, on the condition that the reuse permission switch is operated twice before the judgment timing of timing tz1, the state shifts to reuse confirmation state B. ), the operating state of the attached (detachable) frame decoration member can be confirmed.

In this example, if the reuse permission switch is operated twice before the determination timing of timing tz1, the state shifts to reuse confirmation state B, but the reuse confirmation state B is not changed on the main control board 1310 side. This is the period during which the game (main game) can be played. Therefore, in the reuse confirmation state B, it is possible to confirm whether the game (main game) is proceeding normally or not. In other words, in reuse confirmation state B, it is possible to check the operating status of the frame decoration member as a part that can be reused while attaching and detaching it, but does the game (main game) proceed normally? Confirmation of whether or not the pachinko machine 1 is working properly can be done at the same time without waiting for the reuse confirmation state B to return to the normal state. Efficiency can be improved.

(Removal and attachment of frame decoration member in reuse confirmation state A, Part 2)
FIG. 120 is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 when the frame decoration member is attached and detached while the door frame 3 is open in the reuse confirmation state A. First, a case will be described in which the frame decoration member is attached and detached after transitioning from the normal state to the reuse confirmation state A by operating the reuse permission switch before a predetermined determination timing. Regarding the attachment and detachment of frame decoration members, when checking the operating status of multiple frame decoration members used as reusable parts, after opening the door frame 3 and removing the frame decoration members, It is assumed that another frame decoration member will be attached without closing the frame, or the same frame decoration member will be reattached for reconfirmation.

As shown in FIG. 120, after the power is turned on at timing ts, the frame decoration member is removed in the reuse confirmation state A at timing tx after a predetermined operation. After the power is turned on at timing ts shown in 118, at timing tx, the same behavior as in the reuse confirmation state A until the frame decoration member is removed is shown. In other words, after turning on the power at timing ts, the reuse permission switch is operated at timing tz3, the normal state changes to reuse confirmation state A at timing tz1, and the reuse confirmation state changes to reuse confirmation state at timing t1. The same work as shown in FIG. 118 is performed in that the door frame 3 is opened at time A and the frame decoration member is removed at timing tx in the reuse confirmation state A, and the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 is as follows. It shows the same behavior.

In this example, after opening the door frame 3, the frame decoration member is removed in the reuse confirmation state A at timing tx, but the door frame 3 is not closed after the frame decoration member is removed, and the door frame 3 is not closed. While the frame 3 is being opened, the frame decoration member is attached again at timing ty. In this way, when the frame decoration member is attached again in the reuse confirmation state A at timing ty while the door frame 3 is being opened, the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the frame decoration member is connected. There is.

Then, while the door frame 3 is being opened, if a frame decoration member is attached in the reuse confirmation state A at timing ty, lamp A (LED in the frame decoration) will be turned off by attaching the frame decoration member. supply has started and normal operation is being performed. As mentioned above in detail, in normal operation, when the variable display of special symbols is not being executed, it supports standby production (for example, demonstration production) in a state of waiting for the variable display of special symbols to start. When the variable display of the special symbol is being executed, the peripheral control board 1510 executes the operation corresponding to the variable effect (the effect based on the variable pattern) based on receiving the variable pattern command. I'm trying to execute it. For example, when the peripheral control board 1510 receives a variable pattern command, the LED in lamp A (LED in the frame decoration) lights up or flashes in conjunction with the effect display executed by the effect display device 1600. . However, when the frame decoration member is installed, there may be problems such as a situation where the wiring to lamp A (LED inside the frame decoration) is disconnected and electricity is not supplied, or a situation where lamp A (LED inside the frame decoration) itself is broken. When this occurs, normal operations are not performed and the LEDs do not light up or blink.

It is assumed that the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 does not change before and after timing ty. For example, among the members whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510, the members that are performing the normal operation are configured to continue the normal operation even after timing ty, and Regarding the members that are performing the operation, even after the timing ty, the operation at the time of reuse confirmation is continued.

In this example, if the reuse permission switch is not operated before the judgment timing of timing tz1, the normal state will not change to the reuse confirmation state, and even if the frame decoration member is attached again, the light will not turn on or off after that. Although the light did not flash and remained off, if the reuse permission switch was operated once before the judgment timing tz1, the state changes to reuse confirmation state A and the frame decoration member must be attached again. So, the normal operation is executed. That is, in the reuse confirmation state A, the operation of the frame decoration member is allowed by attaching the frame decoration member. Then, on the condition that the reuse permission switch is operated once before the judgment timing of timing tz1, the state shifts to reuse confirmation state A. ), the operating status of the attached (demounted) frame decoration member can be checked. In addition, in this example, while the door frame 3 is being opened, at timing tx, the frame decoration member is removed in the reuse confirmation state A, and while the door frame 3 is being opened, at timing ty, the frame decoration member is removed again. Even when a frame decoration member is attached, it is possible to check the operating status of the attached (removed) frame decoration member. In other words, after the frame decoration member is removed in the reuse confirmation state A at timing tx, the door frame 3 is not necessarily closed and opened again until the frame decoration member is reinstalled at timing ty. No need to do any work. In this way, even if the frame decoration member is attached and detached in the reuse confirmation state A during one opening of the door frame 3, it is possible to check the operating state of the detached frame decoration member. It is possible to improve efficiency in checking the operating states of a plurality of frame decoration members.

In addition, in this example, during the period from timing tx to timing ty, that is, during the period when the frame decoration member is being removed for attachment and detachment in the reuse confirmation state A, the lamp A (LED inside the frame decoration) is , the LED does not light up or blink. However, during such a period, when the setting adjustment button 204 is operated, although it is possible to accept the operation and adjust the volume and light intensity internally, it is not reflected in the light intensity for lamp A (LED inside the frame decoration). It is in a state where it will never happen. Regarding such internally adjusted volume and light amount, when the frame decoration member is reattached at timing ty, which will be described later, the internally adjusted light amount will be changed when the LED can be turned on or blinked. This will be reflected in the amount of light for lamp A (LED inside the frame decoration) based on this. In this way, in this example, when the frame decoration member is reattached at timing ty, which will be described later, the internally adjusted light amount is not reset and returned to the initial state; Since the light intensity is reflected as is, it is possible to easily determine whether the light intensity of the attached (removed) frame decoration member relative to lamp A (LED inside the frame decoration) is changing normally. . Note that regardless of whether or not the frame decoration member is being removed, the light intensity of the LED is constant for lamp B (LED 1 outside the frame decoration), and the light intensity changes even if the setting adjustment button 204 is operated. I try not to let that happen. Therefore, when the frame decoration member is reattached at timing ty, the amount of light for lamp A (LED inside the frame decoration) of the frame decoration member changes normally compared to lamp B (LED 1 outside the frame decoration). It is possible to easily determine whether the

Next, after attaching the frame decoration member, if the door frame 3 is closed in the reuse confirmation state A at timing t2, a signal from the closing switch for detecting the closing of the door frame 3 is sent to the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a outputs a door frame closing command to the peripheral control board 1510 to notify the closing of the door frame 3. It is assumed that the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 does not change before and after timing t2. For example, among the members whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510, the members that are performing the normal operation are configured to continue the normal operation even after timing t2, and when checking the reuse, Regarding the members that are performing the operation, even after timing t2, the operation at the time of reuse confirmation is continued. In other words, when the door frame 3 is closed in the reuse confirmation state A, the peripheral control board 1510 receives the door frame closing command, but for the members for which the peripheral control board 1510 is instructing the operation, the operation at the time of closing is not performed. It is assumed that it is never executed and does not change before or after timing t2. Thereby, in the reuse confirmation state A, it is possible to prevent the attachment/detachment of the frame decoration member and confirmation of the operating state of the frame decoration member from being hindered by execution of the closing operation.

Next, after the door frame 3 is opened again, if the door frame 3 is to be attached to and removed from another frame decoration member while the door frame 3 is being opened, the period from timing t1 to timing t2 described above will be repeated. That is, at timing t1', the door frame 3 is opened, at timing tx', a frame decoration member is removed, at timing ty', another frame decoration member is attached, and at timing t2', a frame decoration member is attached. , in that the door frame 3 is closed, the same operation as in the period from timing t1 to timing t2 described above is performed, and the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 is the same.

Next, after closing the door frame 3, when the reuse permission switch is operated again at timing tz4, the reuse confirmation state A is ended and the state is shifted to the normal state. Here, the normal state is the same as the normal state after the power is turned on at timing ts. In other words, after the main control board 1310 shifts to the normal state at timing tz4, it is a period in which the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side can proceed. Furthermore, the members whose operations are instructed by the peripheral control board 1510 execute their normal operations after shifting to the normal state at timing tz4. As described above, in this example, after the frame decoration member, which is a part that can be reused, is removed and the operating state of the frame decoration member is confirmed, it is possible to return from the reuse confirmation state A to the normal state again. Therefore, after checking the operating state of the frame decoration member, it is possible to check whether the game (main game) is proceeding normally or not.

In the above example, if the number of inputs of the operation information of the reuse permission switch is "1 time" at the predetermined judgment timing after the power is turned on (for example, the reuse permission switch is input once before the judgment timing or at the same time as the judgment timing) When the ON operation is performed, etc.), the normal state shifts to the reuse confirmation state A, and the frame decoration member is attached and removed in the reuse confirmation state A, but the memory of the number of inputs of the operation information of the reuse permission switch is " 2 or more times (for example, when the reuse permission switch is turned on twice before the judgment timing or at the same time as the judgment timing), the normal state shifts to reuse confirmation state B, and the reuse confirmation state At B, the frame decoration member can be attached and detached. Here, in the reuse confirmation state A, it is a period in which it is impossible to proceed with the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side, but in the reuse confirmation state B, it is impossible to proceed with the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side. ) is the period during which it is possible to proceed. Moreover, regarding the reuse confirmation state B, the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 is the same as that of the pachinko machine 1 in the reuse confirmation state A in other respects. For example, if the reuse permission switch is operated twice before the judgment timing tz1, and the transition is made to the reuse confirmation state B, the frame decoration member is attached (or detached) in the reuse confirmation state B. ), it is possible to check the operational status of the attached (demounted) frame decoration member.

FIG. 121 is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 when the frame decoration member is attached and detached while the door frame 3 is open in the reuse confirmation state B. Here, the points that are different from reuse confirmation state A are mainly described.

As shown in FIG. 121, after the power is turned on at timing ts, the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 are powered on, and the gaming state on the main control board 1510 side is controlled to the normal state. This is a period in which the game (main game) on the control board 1310 side can be played. Then, at timing tz1, when a predetermined period has elapsed after the power is turned on at timing ts, a determination timing is provided to determine whether or not the reuse permission switch was operated before timing tz1. Regarding timing, the number of times the reuse permission switch is operated between timing ts and timing tz1 is also determined. Here, by operating the reuse permission switch twice before timing tz1, the normal state is shifted to reuse confirmation state B at timing tz1. The reuse confirmation state B is a period in which the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side can be played. That is, in the reuse confirmation state B, when the player operates the handle 160, the game ball can be launched into the game area 5a, and when a starting prize is won, the variable display of special symbols can be started. A normal game can be played in which a jackpot game can be started when the variable display of special symbols is stopped and displayed at a winning symbol. In addition, in the reuse confirmation state B, there is a period during which the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side can be progressed until the reuse permission switch is operated again at timing tz4 to end the reuse confirmation state B. is expected to continue.

In addition, if the reuse permission switch is operated twice before the judgment timing of timing tz1, the state shifts to reuse confirmation state B, and after removing the frame decoration member in the reuse confirmation state B, the frame decoration member is removed at timing ty. By attaching the frame decoration member again, normal operation is performed. That is, in the reuse confirmation state B, the frame decoration member is allowed to operate by attaching the frame decoration member. Then, on the condition that the reuse permission switch is operated twice before the judgment timing of timing tz1, the state shifts to reuse confirmation state B. ), it is possible to check the operational status of the attached (removed) frame decoration member.

In this example, if the reuse permission switch is operated twice before the determination timing of timing tz1, the state shifts to reuse confirmation state B, but the reuse confirmation state B can be changed on the main control board 1310 side. This is the period during which the game (main game) can be played. Therefore, in the reuse confirmation state B, it is possible to confirm whether the game (main game) is proceeding normally or not. In other words, in reuse confirmation state B, it is possible to check the operating state of the frame decoration member as a part that can be reused while removing and attaching it, but does the game (main game) proceed normally? Confirmations such as whether the pachinko machine 1 Efficiency can be improved.

(Regarding the attachment of the frame decoration member when the frame decoration member is not connected at the judgment timing)
FIG. 122 is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 when the frame decoration member is attached after it is determined at the determination timing that the frame decoration member is not connected. In the above, when the reuse permission switch is operated before the predetermined judgment timing, and it is judged at the predetermined judgment timing that the frame decoration member is connected, the normal state shifts to the reuse confirmation state A. , when the frame decoration member is attached (demounted) in the reuse confirmation state A, it is possible to confirm the operating state of the attached (detachd) frame decoration member. On the other hand, even if the reuse permission switch is operated before the predetermined determination timing, if it is determined that the frame decoration member is not connected at the predetermined determination timing, the state shifts from the normal state to the reuse confirmation state A. Never. Even if a frame decoration member is subsequently attached, the LED does not light up or blink, making it impossible to confirm the operating state of the attached (detachable) frame decoration member. Such specific examples will be explained below.

As shown in FIG. 122, after the power is turned on at timing ts, the behavior is approximately the same as when the power is turned on at timing ts shown in FIG. 117. For example, after turning on the power at timing ts, the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 are powered on, the gaming state on the main control board 1510 side is controlled to the normal state, and the main control board 1310 side is controlled to the normal state. This is the period during which the game (main game) can be played. In other words, in the normal state after the power is turned on, when the player operates the handle 160, the game ball can be launched into the game area 5a, and when a starting prize is won, the variable display of special symbols can be started. A normal game can be played in which a jackpot game can be started when the variable display of special symbols is stopped and displayed at a winning symbol. In addition, the peripheral control board 1510 monitors whether or not it is electrically connected to the production operation unit 250 and the frame decoration members such as the production operation unit 250, but after the power is turned on at timing ts, as will be described later. Until timing tx arrives, it is determined that the frame decoration member is not connected. That is, regarding lamp A (LED in the frame decoration), since the frame decoration member is not connected, the LED does not light up or blink. Furthermore, the members for which the peripheral control board 1510 instructs to operate perform normal operations after the power is turned on at timing ts.

Then, at timing tz1, when a predetermined period has elapsed after the power is turned on at timing ts, a determination timing is provided to determine whether or not the reuse permission switch was operated before timing tz1. At the timing, it is also determined whether the frame decoration member is unconnected. Then, in a situation where the reuse permission switch is operated before timing tz1, if it is determined at the determination timing that the frame decoration member is connected, the state shifts from the normal state to the reuse confirmation state A. If it is determined at the determination timing that the frame decoration member is not connected, the normal state does not shift to the reuse confirmation state A, and the normal state continues thereafter. In addition, in the normal state, the period in which the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side can be progressed continues regardless of whether or not the frame decoration member is disconnected at timing tz1 etc. There is.

Further, after determining that the frame decoration member is not connected at timing tz1, the peripheral control board 1510 executes the operation when reuse confirmation is not activated using some of the members for which operation is instructed. ing. Specifically, after determining that the frame decoration member is not connected at timing tz1, the effect display device 1600 displays "Operation confirmation of the frame decoration member cannot be performed" as a display when reuse confirmation is not activated. A message is displayed, and the speaker outputs a voice saying ``The operation of the frame decoration member cannot be confirmed'' as a reuse confirmation non-operation sound. On the other hand, among the members that the peripheral control board 1510 instructs to operate, lamp A (LED inside the frame decoration), lamp B (LED 1 outside the frame decoration), and lamp B (LED 2 outside the frame decoration) operate when reuse confirmation is not activated. Continues normal operation without executing. In this way, after it is determined at timing tz1 that the frame decoration member is not connected, only some of the members to which the peripheral control board 1510 has been instructed to operate perform the operations when reuse confirmation is not activated. However, the fact that the frame decoration member was determined to be unconnected at timing tz1 was caused by the worker operating the reuse permission switch, and it is necessary to notify the outside in an easily recognizable manner. Therefore, the operation when reuse confirmation is not confirmed is not performed for lamp A (LED inside the frame decoration), lamp B (LED 1 outside the frame decoration), and lamp B (LED 2 outside the frame decoration). In addition, regarding the operation when such reuse confirmation is not activated, it depends on whether or not the frame decoration member was attached after determining that the frame decoration member was not connected at timing tz1, and whether or not the door frame 3 was opened and closed. Regardless, it will continue.

Furthermore, after determining that the frame decoration member is not connected at timing tz1, for some of the members whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510, the operation when the reuse confirmation is not activated is executed. However, for such members, the amount of light from LEDs and the like is constant, and the volume from the speakers is constant. Therefore, even if the setting adjustment button 204 is operated, the volume or light amount of the member that is performing the operation when the reuse confirmation is not activated does not change. Specifically, when the setting adjustment button 204 is operated, it is possible to accept the operation and adjust the volume and light intensity internally, but it is ensured that the operation is not reflected in the volume and light intensity during execution. ing. On the other hand, even after determining that the frame decoration member is not connected at timing tz1, the setting adjustment button 204 must be operated for lamp B (LED2 outside the frame decoration) as a member that is performing normal operation. However, for lamp B (LED 1 outside the frame decoration), the light amount of the LED is kept constant so that the light amount does not change even if the setting adjustment button 204 is operated. In this way, in this example, since the member that makes the light amount of the LED constant is provided, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the light amount is changing with respect to a member that does not make the light amount of the LED constant. can. Note that the effect display device 1600 may be configured such that the amount of light changes when the setting adjustment button 204 is operated.

Further, after determining that the frame decoration member is not connected at timing tz1, the external terminal board does not output a reuse confirmation signal to the hall computer.

Next, at timing t1, when the door frame 3 is opened in the normal state, an open switch signal for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the door frame 3 is opened. A door frame opening command to convey the opening of No. 3 is output to the peripheral control board 1510. It is assumed that the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 does not change before and after timing t1. For example, among the members whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510, the members that are performing the normal operation are configured to continue the normal operation even after timing t1, and the reuse confirmation is not activated. Regarding the members performing the operation at the time, the operation at the time when the reuse confirmation is not activated continues even after the timing t1. In other words, when the door frame 3 is opened in the normal state after determining that the frame decoration member is not connected, although the peripheral control board 1510 receives the door frame opening command, the peripheral control board 1510 does not issue an operation instruction. It is assumed that the members that do not perform the opening operation and do not change before or after timing t1. As a result, in the normal state after determining that the frame decoration member is unconnected, confirmation of whether the game (main game) is proceeding normally or not is obstructed by the execution of the opening operation. It is possible to prevent this from happening.

Furthermore, when the door frame 3 is opened in the normal state at timing t1, the external terminal board outputs a door frame open signal to the hall computer, and the door frame 3 is opened on the hall side. This makes it possible to understand that something has happened. Regarding such a door frame opening signal, output to the hall computer is finished when a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after the door frame 3 is closed at timing t2, which will be described later. Thereby, even if the opening/closing time of the door frame 3 is short, it is possible to easily notice that the door frame 3 has been opened on the hall side.

Next, if the frame decoration member is attached in the normal state at timing ty after the door frame 3 is opened, the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the frame decoration member is connected. It is assumed that the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 does not change before and after timing ty. For example, among the members whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510, the members that are performing the normal operation are configured to continue the normal operation even after timing ty, and the reuse confirmation is not activated. Even after timing ty, the members performing the operation at the time continue to perform the operation at the time when the reuse confirmation was not activated.

Also, at timing ty, if the frame decoration member is attached in the normal state, electricity supply to lamp A (LED in the frame decoration) has started by attaching the frame decoration member, but after that The light does not turn on or blink, and remains in an off state. As a result, even if the frame decoration member is attached in the normal state after determining that the frame decoration member is unconnected, traces of the frame decoration member being unconnected can be left behind, making it easy to attach and detach the frame decoration member. It is possible to prevent illegal acts using the information. In addition, when the frame decoration member is installed, if the LED lights up or blinks regarding lamp A (LED inside the frame decoration), an operator who wants to check whether the game (main game) is proceeding normally or not. For some, that confirmation may be hindered. In this regard, in this example, if the reuse permission switch is operated before the judgment timing of timing tz1 and the frame decoration member is disconnected at that judgment timing, even if the frame decoration member is attached afterwards. As for the lamp A (the LED inside the frame decoration), the LED does not light up or blink, and it is possible to prevent such confirmation from being obstructed. On the other hand, if the reuse permission switch is operated before the judgment timing of timing tz1 and the frame decoration member is connected at that judgment timing, when the frame decoration member is attached afterwards, the lamp A (frame decoration Regarding the LED inside the decoration, the LED lights up or blinks. Therefore, depending on whether the operator wants to check the operating status of the frame decoration member as a part that can be reused, or whether he only wants to check whether the game (main game) is progressing normally, the operator can It is possible to choose.

Next, after attaching the frame decoration member, if the door frame 3 is closed in the normal state at timing t2, the signal of the closing switch for detecting the closing of the door frame 3 is sent to the main controller of the main control board 1310. A door frame closing command is input to the control MPU 1310a and outputted to the peripheral control board 1510 to notify the closing of the door frame 3. It is assumed that the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 does not change before and after timing t2. For example, among the members whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510, the members that are performing the normal operation are configured to continue the normal operation even after timing t2, and the reuse confirmation is not activated. Regarding the members that are performing the operation at the time, even after timing t2, they continue to operate at the time when the reuse confirmation is not activated. In other words, when the door frame 3 is closed in the normal state after determining that the frame decoration member is not connected, although the peripheral control board 1510 receives the door frame closing command, the peripheral control board 1510 does not issue an operation instruction. It is assumed that the members that do not perform the closing operation and do not change before and after timing t2. As a result, in the normal state after determining that the frame decoration member is unconnected, confirmation such as whether the game (main game) is progressing normally is hindered by the execution of the closing operation. It is possible to prevent this from happening.

Next, when the door frame 3 is opened again in the normal state to remove the frame decoration member at timing t3, the behavior is almost the same as when the door frame 3 is opened in the normal state at timing t1. It shows. In other words, when the door frame 3 is opened again in a situation where the frame decoration member is attached, the member whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510 does not perform the operation at the time of opening, and the timing t3 It is assumed that there is no change before and after. For example, among the members whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510, the members that are performing the normal operation are configured to continue the normal operation even after timing t3, and the reuse confirmation is not activated. Regarding the members performing the operation at the time, even after the timing t3, the member continues to perform the operation at the time when the reuse confirmation is not activated.

Next, when the frame decoration member is removed again in the normal state at timing tx after the door frame 3 is opened, the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the frame decoration member is not connected. It is assumed that the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 does not change before and after the timing tx. In other words, when the frame decoration member is removed again after the door frame 3 is opened, the members for which the peripheral control board 1510 is instructed to operate do not perform the operation when the frame decoration is not connected, and the timing It is assumed that there is no change before and after tx. For example, among the members whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510, the members that are performing the normal operation are configured to continue the normal operation even after the timing tx, and the reuse confirmation is confirmed that the member is not operating. Regarding the members that are performing the operation at the time, even after the timing tx, they continue to perform the operation at the time when the reuse confirmation was not performed.

Note that the behavior of Pachinko machine 1 does not change before and after timing tx, but regarding lamp A (LED inside the frame decoration), since the frame decoration member has been removed, the LED lights up or flashes after that. It has never happened before.

Next, after removing the frame decoration member, when the door frame 3 is closed in the normal state at timing t4, the behavior is approximately the same as when the door frame 3 is closed in the normal state at timing t2. It shows. In other words, when the door frame 3 is closed after removing the frame decoration member, the members for which the peripheral control board 1510 has been instructed to operate do not perform the closing operation, but before and after timing t4. It is assumed that it does not change. For example, among the members whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510, the members that are performing the normal operation are configured to continue the normal operation even after timing t4, and the reuse confirmation is confirmed that the member is not operating. Regarding the members performing the operation at the time, even after timing t4, the operation at the time when the reuse confirmation is not performed continues.

In this example, after determining that the frame decoration member is not connected at timing tz1, the peripheral control board 1510 uses some of the members for which the operation is instructed to perform the operation when the reuse confirmation is not activated. However, such an operation when the reuse confirmation is not activated is assumed to continue regardless of whether a frame decoration member is subsequently attached or whether the door frame 3 is opened or closed. As a result, even if the frame decoration member is attached after determining that the frame decoration member is not connected at timing tz1, traces of the frame decoration member being unconnected can be left behind, and it is possible to attach and detach the frame decoration member. It is possible to prevent all kinds of fraudulent acts from being carried out. In addition, as explained earlier, in a situation where the frame decoration member is connected, if it is determined that the reuse permission switch is not operated at timing tz1, if the frame decoration member is subsequently removed, the peripheral control Regarding the members for which the board 1510 gives operation instructions, the operation is performed when the frame decoration is not connected, but in this example, in a situation where the frame decoration member is not connected, the reuse permission switch is activated at timing tz1. If it is determined that the frame decoration member is being operated, even if the frame decoration member is subsequently removed, the operation of the member whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510 is not executed when the frame decoration is not connected. As a result, in the normal state after it is determined that the frame decoration member is not connected, it is necessary to check whether the game (main game) is proceeding normally or not, and the operation when the frame decoration member is not connected is executed. can be prevented from being inhibited by In addition, in this example, the purpose of the operation when reuse confirmation is not activated is to convey that it is not possible to check the operation of the frame decoration member, and it is different from the operation when the frame decoration is not connected, which was explained earlier. However, these operations may be made common.

(Regarding confirmation of error light emission when frame decoration member is removed in reuse confirmation state A)
FIG. 123 is a timing diagram showing the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 when the frame decoration member is removed while the door frame 3 is being opened in the error state and the reuse confirmation state A, and the frame decoration member is attached while the door frame 3 is being opened next. It is a chart. In the above, when the reuse permission switch is operated before the predetermined determination timing, the normal state shifts to the reuse confirmation state A, and when the frame decoration member is attached (detachd) in the reuse confirmation state A, This makes it possible to check the operating status of the attached (detachable) frame decoration member. On the other hand, if an abnormality is detected, such as by detecting magnetism, vibration, or radio waves, the pachinko machine 1 shifts to an error state. In such an error state, the LED of the frame decoration member emits an error light, but in order to check the operating status of the frame decoration member, it is also necessary to check whether the LED of the frame decoration member normally emits an error light. Confirmation is required. In this regard, in this example, if the reuse confirmation state A and the error state occur at the same time, when the frame decoration member is attached (removed) in that state, the attached (removed) It is possible to confirm that the LED of the frame decoration member emits an error light. Such specific examples will be explained below.

In this example, the error detection unit is configured to detect magnetism using a magnetic sensor that detects the magnetism applied to the pachinko machine 1 by bringing a magnet close to the pachinko machine 1, or when the pachinko machine 1 is shaken or hit. A vibration sensor detects the vibrations applied to the pachinko machine 1 by a vibration sensor, and a radio sensor detects the radio waves applied to the pachinko machine 1 when illegal radio waves are irradiated to the pachinko machine 1. It has a configuration that detects. After the power is turned on at timing ts, the main control board 1310 monitors whether magnetism, vibration, or radio waves for the pachinko machine 1 are detected.

As shown in FIG. 123, after the power is turned on at timing ts, the same behavior as when the power is turned on at timing ts shown in FIG. 117 is shown. For example, after turning on the power at timing ts, the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 are powered on, the gaming state on the main control board 1510 side is controlled to the normal state, and the main control board 1310 side is controlled to the normal state. This is the period during which the game (main game) can be played. In other words, in the normal state after the power is turned on, when the player operates the handle 160, the game ball can be launched into the game area 5a, and when a starting prize is won, the variable display of special symbols can be started. A normal game can be played in which a jackpot game can be started when the variable display of special symbols is stopped and displayed at a winning symbol. Further, the peripheral control board 1510 monitors whether or not it is electrically connected to frame decoration members such as the door frame top unit 300, the door frame right side unit 340, and the production operation unit 250, but at timing ts. After the power is turned on, it is determined that the frame decoration member is not removed and the frame decoration member is connected until timing tx, which will be described later, arrives. Furthermore, the members for which the peripheral control board 1510 instructs to operate perform normal operations after the power is turned on at timing ts.

After the power is turned on at timing ts, at timing t0, signals from a magnetic sensor for detecting magnetism, a vibration sensor for detecting vibration, and a radio wave sensor for detecting radio waves are sent to the main control board 1310. When input to the main control MPU 1310a, the main control board 1310 detects an abnormality in magnetism, vibration, or radio waves, and sends an abnormality notification command to the peripheral control board to notify execution of abnormality notification based on the occurrence of the abnormality. It is outputting towards 1510. At this time, after the power is turned on at timing ts, the members for which the peripheral control board 1510 instructs to operate are performing normal operations, but at timing t0, the peripheral control board 1510 notifies the abnormality. An error condition occurs based on receiving the command. In an error state, the peripheral control board 1510 does not perform normal operation, but performs an error operation. In addition, the main control board 1310 controls the gaming state to the normal state even after transmitting the abnormality notification command to the peripheral control board 1510 at timing t0, as in the state where no abnormality has occurred. This is the period during which the game (main game) can be played.

Specifically, when the peripheral control board 1510 receives an abnormality notification command, lamp A (LED inside the frame decoration) and lamp B (LED 2 outside the frame decoration) emit error light with a single color and high brightness. It lights up or blinks, and the effect display device 1600 displays messages such as "A magnetic error has occurred," "A vibration error has occurred," or "A radio wave error has occurred." Then, the speaker outputs error sounds such as "A magnetic error has occurred," "A vibration error has occurred," and "A radio wave error has occurred." In addition, in this example, by making the actions corresponding to the abnormality notification different, such as displaying a message, different LED light emission color, or different notification sound, depending on the case where magnetism, vibration, or radio waves are detected, It is possible to determine whether vibration or radio waves are detected. However, among the members whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510, the lamp B (the LED 1 outside the frame decoration) continues to operate normally without performing an error operation.

Furthermore, when an abnormality is detected at timing t0, the members whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510 execute the operation at the time of error, except for lamp B (LED 1 outside the frame decoration). However, in the operation at the time of an error, the amount of light from the LED and the like is kept constant, and the volume from the speaker is kept constant. Therefore, even if the setting adjustment button 204 is operated, the volume or light amount of the member that is performing the error operation will not change. Specifically, when the setting adjustment button 204 is operated, it is possible to accept the operation and adjust the volume and light intensity internally, but it is ensured that the operation is not reflected in the volume and light intensity during execution. ing. Such internally adjusted volume and light intensity will be reflected in the running volume and light intensity based on the internally adjusted volume and light intensity when normal operation is restored. It happens. Note that the effect display device 1600 may be configured such that the amount of light changes when the setting adjustment button 204 is operated.

Furthermore, if an abnormality is detected at timing t0, an error signal is output from the external terminal board to the hall computer, so that the hall side can know that an abnormality has been detected. .

Next, at timing tz1, when a predetermined period has elapsed after the power was turned on at timing ts, a determination timing is provided for determining whether or not the reuse permission switch was operated before timing tz1. That is, at the determination timing, it is determined whether the reuse permission switch is operated between timing ts and timing tz1. Here, by operating the reuse permission switch at timing tx3, which is earlier than timing tz1, the normal state is shifted to the reuse confirmation state A at timing tz1. Note that after the main control board 1310 shifts to the reuse confirmation state A at timing tz1, there is a period in which it is impossible to proceed with the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side. In other words, in the reuse confirmation state A, even if the player operates the handle 160, the game ball cannot be launched into the game area 5a, and even if there is a starting prize, the changing display of the special symbol cannot be started. This makes it impossible to play normal games. Thereby, in the reuse confirmation state A, it is possible to prevent the attachment/detachment of the frame decoration member and the confirmation of the operating state of the frame decoration member from being hindered by normal playing of the game. In addition, in the reuse confirmation state A, it is impossible to proceed with the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side until the reuse permission switch is operated again at timing tz4, which will be described later, to end the reuse confirmation state A. It is assumed that the period will continue.

Further, after shifting to the reuse confirmation state A at timing tz1, the operation at the time of reuse confirmation is executed using some of the members whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510. Specifically, after transitioning to the reuse confirmation state A at timing tz1, the production display device 1600 displays an error message saying "You can check the operation of the frame decoration member" as a display when confirming reuse. I am trying to add it to and display it. The speaker outputs a sound saying "You can check the operation of the frame decoration member" as a reuse confirmation sound. On the other hand, among the members that the peripheral control board 1510 instructs to operate, lamp A (LED inside the frame decoration), lamp B (LED 2 outside the frame decoration), and the speaker continue to operate in the event of an error. Moreover, such an operation at the time of reuse confirmation is assumed to continue until the reuse permission switch is operated again at timing tz4, which will be described later, and the reuse confirmation state A is ended.

In addition, after transitioning to reuse confirmation state A at timing tz1, the external terminal board outputs a reuse confirmation signal to the hall computer, and the hall side informs that the transition to reuse confirmation state A has occurred. I'm trying to make it easier to understand. Regarding such a reuse confirmation signal, output to the hall computer is ended when the reuse permission switch is operated again at timing tz4, which will be described later, to end the reuse confirmation state A. Note that the output of the reuse confirmation signal to the hall computer may be terminated when a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after the reuse confirmation state A is terminated. Thereby, even if the transition period to reuse confirmation state A is short, it is possible to make it easier for the hall side to notice that the transition to reuse confirmation state A has occurred.

Next, at timing t1, when the door frame 3 is opened in the reuse confirmation state A, an open switch signal for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, A door frame opening command to notify the opening of the door frame 3 is output to the peripheral control board 1510. It is assumed that the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 does not change before and after timing t1. For example, among the members whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510, the member that is performing the operation at the time of error is configured to continue the operation at the time of error even after timing t1, and when confirming reuse, Regarding the members that are performing the operation, even after the timing t1, the operation at the time of reuse confirmation is continued. In other words, when the door frame 3 is opened in the reuse confirmation state A, the peripheral control board 1510 receives the door frame opening command, but for the members for which the peripheral control board 1510 is instructing the operation, the operation at the time of opening is not performed. It is assumed that it is never executed and does not change before or after timing t1. Thereby, in the reuse confirmation state A, it is possible to prevent attachment and detachment of the frame decoration member and confirmation of the operating state of the frame decoration member from being hindered by execution of the opening operation.

Furthermore, when the door frame 3 is opened in the reuse confirmation state A at timing t1, the external terminal board outputs a door frame release signal to the hall computer, and the door frame 3 is opened on the hall side. We are making it possible to know that there has been a release. Regarding such a door frame opening signal, output to the hall computer is finished when a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after the door frame 3 is closed at timing t2, which will be described later. Thereby, even if the opening/closing time of the door frame 3 is short, it is possible to easily notice that the door frame 3 has been opened on the hall side.

Next, after opening the door frame 3, if the frame decoration member is removed in the reuse confirmation state A at timing tx, the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the frame decoration member is not connected. . It is assumed that the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 does not change before and after the timing tx. For example, among the members whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510, the member that is performing the operation at the time of error is configured to continue the operation at the time of error even after timing tx, and when confirming reuse, Regarding the members that are performing the operation, even after the timing tx, the operation at the time of reuse confirmation continues. In addition, when the frame decoration member is removed in reuse confirmation state A, the operation of the member for which the peripheral control board 1510 has been instructed to operate even though the frame decoration member has been removed, is performed in the operation when the frame decoration is not connected. It is assumed that no change occurs before or after timing t1. That is, in the reuse confirmation state A, the frame decoration member is allowed to be removed without performing the operation when the frame decoration is not connected. As a result, in the reuse confirmation state A, it is possible to prevent the attachment/detachment of the frame decoration member and the confirmation of the operating state of the frame decoration member from being hindered by the execution of the operation when the frame decoration is not connected. .

Note that the behavior of Pachinko machine 1 does not change before and after timing tx, but regarding lamp A (LED inside the frame decoration), since the frame decoration member has been removed, the LED lights up or flashes after that. It has never happened before.

Next, after removing the frame decoration member, if the door frame 3 is closed in the reuse confirmation state A at timing t2, a signal from the closing switch for detecting the closing of the door frame 3 is sent to the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a outputs a door frame closing command to the peripheral control board 1510 to notify the closing of the door frame 3. It is assumed that the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 does not change before and after timing t2. For example, among the members to which the peripheral control board 1510 instructs the operation, the member that is performing the operation at the time of error is configured to continue the operation at the time of error even after timing t2, and when confirming reuse, Regarding the members that are performing the operation, even after timing t2, the operation at the time of reuse confirmation is continued. In other words, when the door frame 3 is closed in the reuse confirmation state A, the peripheral control board 1510 receives the door frame closing command, but for the members for which the peripheral control board 1510 is instructing the operation, the operation at the time of closing is not performed. It is assumed that it is not executed and does not change before or after timing t2. Thereby, in the reuse confirmation state A, it is possible to prevent the attachment/detachment of the frame decoration member and the confirmation of the operating state of the frame decoration member from being hindered by execution of the operation at the time of closing.

Next, at timing t3, if the door frame 3 is opened again to attach the frame decoration member in the reuse confirmation state A, then at timing t1, the door frame 3 is opened again in the reuse confirmation state A. They show almost the same behavior. In other words, when the door frame 3 is opened again in a situation where the frame decoration member has been removed, the member whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510 does not perform the operation at the time of opening, and the timing t3 It is assumed that there is no change before and after. For example, among the members whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510, the member that is performing the operation at the time of error is configured to continue the operation at the time of error even after timing t3, and when confirming reuse, Regarding the members that are performing the operation, even after timing t3, the operation at the time of reuse confirmation is continued.

Next, when the frame decoration member is attached again in the reuse confirmation state A at timing ty after the door frame 3 is opened, the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the frame decoration member is connected. It is assumed that the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 does not change before and after timing ty. For example, among the members whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510, the member that is performing the operation at the time of error is configured to continue the operation at the time of error even after timing ty, and when confirming reuse, Regarding the members that are performing the operation, even after the timing ty, the operation at the time of reuse confirmation is continued.

Also, at timing ty, if a frame decoration member is attached in reuse confirmation state A, electricity supply will be started for lamp A (LED in the frame decoration) by attaching the frame decoration member. However, the operation is not the normal operation, but the error operation. As described above in detail, in the operation of the lamp A (the LED in the frame decoration) in the event of an error, the LED lights up or flashes in a single color with strong brightness as error light emission. However, when the frame decoration member is installed, there may be problems such as a situation where the wiring to lamp A (LED inside the frame decoration) is disconnected and electricity is not supplied, or a situation where lamp A (LED inside the frame decoration) itself is broken. If this occurs, the error operation will not be performed and the LED will not turn on or blink.

In this example, if the reuse permission switch is operated before the determination timing tz1, the state shifts to the reuse confirmation state A, and if the frame decoration member emits an error light in the reuse confirmation state A, After the frame decoration member is removed, the frame decoration member is reattached at timing ty to restart the operation at the time of error. That is, in the reuse confirmation state A, by attaching the frame decoration member, it is possible to restart the operation at the time of error with respect to the frame decoration member. Then, on the condition that the reuse permission switch is operated before the judgment timing of timing tz1, the state shifts to reuse confirmation state A. However, when the frame decoration member is attached (removed) in reuse confirmation state A, , it is possible to check whether the attached (removed) frame decoration member normally emits error light.

Next, after attaching the frame decoration member, if the door frame 3 is closed in the reuse confirmation state A at timing t4, the door frame 3 is closed in the reuse confirmation state A at timing t2. They show almost the same behavior. In other words, when the door frame 3 is closed after the frame decoration member is attached, the members whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510 do not perform the closing operation, and the operation is performed before or after timing t4. It is assumed that it does not change. For example, among the members whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510, the member that is performing the operation at the time of error is configured to continue the operation at the time of error even after timing t4, and when confirming reuse, Regarding the members that are performing the operation, even after timing t4, the operation at the time of reuse confirmation is continued.

Next, when the reuse permission switch is operated again at timing tz4 after closing the door frame 3, the reuse confirmation state A is ended and the state is shifted to the normal state. Here, the normal state is the same as the normal state before shifting to the reuse confirmation state A at timing t1. In other words, after the main control board 1310 shifts to the normal state at timing tz4, it is a period in which the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side can proceed. Furthermore, for the members for which the peripheral control board 1510 has given operation instructions, the error operation based on the error state is executed after transitioning to the normal state at timing tz4. In this way, in this example, after the frame decoration member, which is a part that can be reused, is attached and removed and the operating state of the frame decoration member is confirmed, it is possible to return from the reuse confirmation state A to the normal state again. Therefore, after checking the operating state of the frame decoration member, it is possible to check whether the game (main game) is proceeding normally or not.

In this example, after removing the frame decoration member in the reuse confirmation state A, by reattaching the frame decoration member at timing ty, lamp A (LED inside the frame decoration) executes the operation at the time of error. However, at timing ty, when the frame decoration member is attached again, the operation at the time of error is not executed, and by operating the operation permission switch after attaching the frame decoration member, lamp A (LED inside the frame decoration ) may be configured to perform actions in the event of an error. The operation permission switch is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 and is a working operation part that the player cannot touch (a button that allows switching between the ON and OFF states, or a button that allows you to switch between the ON and OFF states, or a button that allows you to switch between the ON and OFF states by inserting a key). The main control board 1310 is provided as a key switch (such as a key switch that enables switching between the OFF state and the OFF state). Furthermore, at timing ty, after reattaching the frame decoration member and before operating the operation permission switch, lamp A (LED inside the frame decoration) is activated as a standby operation, for example, when the LED lights up. The light is turned off or the light is turned off. Thereby, the hall manager can arbitrarily start checking the operating state of the frame decoration member by operating the operation permission switch, thereby improving convenience.

The above-mentioned operation permission switch is provided separately from the reuse permission switch, but the reuse permission switch may also serve as the operation permission switch. In other words, at timing ty, when the frame decoration member is attached again, the operation at the time of error is not executed, and by operating the reuse permission switch after attaching the frame decoration member, lamp A (LED inside the frame decoration) is turned on. It may also be possible to perform an action in the event of an error. In addition, the reuse permission switch may be configured so that one option can be selected from multiple options, and the option for starting the reuse confirmation state and the lamp A (LED inside the frame decoration) and an option for executing the operation at the time.

In addition, in this example, after removing the frame decoration member in the reuse confirmation state A, at timing ty, the frame decoration member is reattached while the door frame 3 is open, so that the lamp A (LED inside the frame decoration) is turned on. The operation at the time of error is executed, but when the frame decoration member is attached again while the door frame 3 is open at timing ty, the operation at the time of error is not executed, and at timing t2, the operation at the time of error is executed. By closing the door frame 3, the lamp A (LED in the frame decoration) may perform an operation in the event of an error. At this time, at timing ty, the lamp A (LED inside the frame decoration) is on standby after the frame decoration member is reattached while the door frame 3 is open and before the door frame 3 is closed. For example, the LED is turned on or off. As a result, the hall manager can arbitrarily start checking the operating state of the frame decoration member by closing the door frame 3, thereby improving convenience.

Furthermore, in this example, at timing tz4, it is impossible to proceed with the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side before the reuse permission switch is operated again to end the reuse confirmation state. When the reuse permission switch is operated again at timing tz4 to end the reuse confirmation state, the period is set such that the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side can proceed. Even before the reuse permission switch is operated again to end the reuse confirmation state, the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side can be advanced by operating the game permission switch. It may be possible to shift to a possible period. The game permission switch is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 and is a working operation part that the player cannot touch (a button that allows switching between the ON and OFF states, or a button that allows you to switch between the ON and OFF states, or a button that allows you to switch between the ON and OFF states by inserting a key). The main control board 1310 is provided as a key switch (such as a key switch that enables switching between the OFF state and the OFF state). As a result, during the period in which the game (main game) can be progressed on the main control board 1310 side, when the handle 160 is operated, the game ball can be launched into the game area 5a, and when a starting prize is generated. In addition, it is possible to perform a lottery and start the fluctuating display of the special symbol, and when the fluctuating display of the special symbol stops and is displayed at the winning symbol, the jackpot game can be started, so the game can be played normally (main game ) can be started at will by the hall manager by operating the game permission switch, improving convenience.

The game permission switch described above is provided separately from the reuse permission switch, but the reuse permission switch may also serve as the function of the game permission switch. In other words, by operating the reuse permission switch at a timing before ending the reuse confirmation state by operating the reuse permission switch again, it is possible to proceed with the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side. It may also be possible to shift to a certain period. Further, the reuse permission switch may be configured so that one option can be selected from a plurality of options, including an option for starting the reuse confirmation state and an option for starting a game (main It may also be configured to include an option for transitioning to a period in which the game (gaming) can proceed.

[Setting change and confirmation display of setting values]
In the following example, a pachinko machine 1 of the fourth embodiment will be described in which a setting function is added to the pachinko machine 1 of each of the above-described embodiments. The pachinko machine 1 of this example has a setting value regarding the probability of winning or losing, and by performing a predetermined operation such as when turning on the power, the setting value can be changed or a confirmation display of the setting value can be performed. It makes it possible.

First, the main control board 1310 is connected to the frame control board 740 provided in the main body frame 4 through bidirectional communication, and is connected to the peripheral control board 1510 in one direction only for output signals. There is. In addition, the main control board 1310 receives the detection signals of the game ball B from the general winning opening sensor 3001, the gate sensor 2011, the first starting opening sensor 2101, the second starting opening sensor 2401, the big winning opening sensor 2402, etc. Ru. In addition, the main control board 1310 outputs drive signals to the starting port solenoid 2412 for opening and closing the second starting port 2004, the attacker solenoid 2414 for opening and closing the big winning port 2005, and the like.

The main control board 1310 also includes a setting key switch having a setting key cylinder into which a setting key is inserted and rotated, a setting change permission lamp that can emit light in a single color (for example, red), and a setting change permission lamp with a decimal point. A setting display consisting of a single 7-segment LED display (so-called dotted) (one 7-segment LED) is arranged. Note that it is possible to display the setting values of the pachinko machine 1 on the setting display.

For setting key switches, the setting key is located at the position where the setting key is ready to be inserted into the insertion port formed on the front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch (for example, the position where the longitudinal direction of the rectangular insertion port is along the vertical direction). position), the setting key switch is turned OFF as the initial position. When the setting key cylinder is in the initial position, the metal setting key can be inserted into the insertion port, and the metal setting key can be removed from the insertion port. In this embodiment, the back cover 640 covering the rear side of the game board 5 has been removed from the pachinko machine 1 for some reason, and the setting key is inserted into the insertion slot when inserted into the outer frame 2. On the other hand, even if the main body frame 4 is closed, the setting keys will not interfere with the members of other pachinko machines (or the members of the island equipment of the game hall) installed in a row opposite to the island equipment of the game hall. The distance dimension in the depth direction of the setting key switch is adopted to prevent damage.

In addition, the setting key switch can be turned on by turning the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position and turning it on, and this setting key ON signal is sent to the main control board. It is input to the main control MPU 1310. Also, the setting key cylinder is rotated counterclockwise so that the setting key switch returns from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key was turned ON to the original position, which is the initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch was turned OFF). The setting key switch can be turned OFF by rotating the setting key switch by 60 degrees in the direction and turning it OFF. This OFF signal is input to the main control MPU of the main control board 1310.

Next, the setting key switches and setting display of the main control board 1310 will be briefly explained. Here, first, a case will be described in which the setting value is changed, and a case in which the current setting value is displayed for confirmation will be described. The setting key is an important key that allows you to check the current setting values in addition to changing the setting values, so only a limited number of people, including the game hall manager, should possess it. Permitted and limited to 2-3 people.

First, when changing the setting values, when turning on the power to the pachinko machine 1 or when the power is restored after a power outage (instantaneous power outage), the outer frame 2 must be changed. The main body frame 4 is opened, the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch of the main control board 1310, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to be turned on. ``Predetermined setting value change permission conditions'' must be satisfied, that is, the setting key switch is turned on and the press operation part of the RAM clear switch 741 of the frame control board 740 is operated. In other words, the person who actually changes the settings should first check that the power is not turned on to the pachinko machine 1 (the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off), and then change the settings to the outer frame 2. Open the main body frame 4, then insert the metal setting key into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch, turn it 60 degrees clockwise, and turn it on to turn the setting key on. The user turns on the setting key of the switch, and then operates the power switch 751 while operating the press operation part of the RAM clear switch 741 to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1.

A person who changes the settings should first check that the power to the pachinko machine 1 is not turned on (the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off), and then move the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2. Open the setting key, then insert the metal setting key into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch, turn the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise, and turn on the setting key. Turn on the switch with the setting key. Next, while operating the press operation part of the RAM clear switch 741, the power switch 751 is operated to turn on the power of the Pachinko machine 1. As a result, ON signals of the RAM clear switch 741 and the setting key are input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU stores the current setting values (set values 1 to 6 at the time the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch is turned on) stored in a specific area of its built-in RAM. value) is displayed on the setting display, and the setting change permission lamp is switched from off to on.

When a person who changes the setting value presses the push operation section of the RAM clear switch 741 on the frame control board 740, a detection signal from the RAM clear switch 741 is transmitted from the frame control board 740 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. is input to. Every time a person changing the setting value presses the press operation part of the RAM clear switch 741, the main control MPU 1310a increases the current setting value by 1 based on the detection signal from the RAM clear switch 741. When the maximum value, set value 6, is reached, control is performed to return to the initial value, set value 1, increase the value by 1 again, and display the set value on the setting display.

When determining the setting value, the person who changes the setting value must move the setting key switch from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key was turned on to the original position (in other words, when the setting key switch is turned OFF). Rotate the setting key 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it to the rotational position of the cylinder and turn it off. This setting key OFF signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a stores the set values determined by changing the settings in a specific area of the RAM built into the main control MPU, and changes the setting display from a state where the set values are displayed to a state where they are not displayed. to switch the setting change permission lamp from lit to off.

The person who changes the setting value should remove the metal setting key from the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch, close the main body frame 4 against the outer frame 2, and change the setting value. Complete the task.

Next, if you want to display the currently set setting values, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1 or when the power is restored after a power outage (instantaneous power outage), The main body frame 4 is opened to the outer frame 2, the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to turn it on. As a result, the "predetermined setting value display permission condition" must be satisfied, that is, the setting key switch is turned on and the press operation part of the RAM clear switch 741 is not operated. In other words, the person who actually displays the currently set setting values must first confirm that the power to Pachinko machine 1 is not turned on (the power to Pachinko machine 1 is cut off), and then Open the main body frame 4 from the frame 2, then insert the metal setting key into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch and turn it 60 degrees clockwise to turn it on. By doing so, the setting key switch is turned ON, and then the power switch 751 is operated to power on the pachinko machine 1 without operating the press operation part of the RAM clear switch 741.

A person who wants to check and display the currently set setting values must first check that the power to the Pachinko machine 1 is not turned on (the power to the Pachinko machine 1 is cut off), and then Then, insert the metal setting key into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch, turn the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise, and turn it on. By doing so, the setting key switch is turned on. Subsequently, without operating the push operation part of the RAM clear switch 741, the power switch 751 is operated to turn on the power to the Pachinko machine 1. As a result, a setting key ON signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU stores the current setting values (set values 1 to 6 at the time the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch is turned on) stored in a specific area of its built-in RAM. value) is displayed on the setting display. At this time, the setting change permission lamp remains off, and even if the person who wants to confirm and display the currently set setting value presses the press operation part of the RAM clear switch 741, this press operation will be supported. The setting value will not be changed at all, nor will the contents displayed on the setting display be changed.

When the person who performs the confirmation display of the currently set setting values completes the confirmation of the currently set setting values, the setting key switch is moved from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key was turned on to the initial position, which is the original position. (That is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key switch is turned OFF) is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF. This setting key OFF signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. As a result, the main control MPU switches from a state in which the setting value is displayed on the setting display to a state in which it is not displayed.

The person who confirms and displays the currently set setting values removes the metal setting key from the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch, closes the main body frame 4 against the outer frame 2, Completes the confirmation display of the currently set setting values.

As mentioned above, the "predetermined setting value change permission conditions" are, as described above, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1 or when the power is restored after a power outage (instantaneous power outage). The main body frame 4 is opened to the outer frame 2, the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to turn it on. As a result, it is necessary that the setting key is turned ON and the press operation section of the RAM clear switch 741 is operated, whereas the "predetermined setting value display permission condition" is as described above. When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1 or when the power is restored after a power outage (instantaneous power outage), the main body frame 4 is opened to the outer frame 2, and the setting key switch is pressed. The setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the cylinder, the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise, and the setting key is turned on, and the pressing operation part of the RAM clear switch 741 is turned on. Must not be manipulated. In this way, the "predetermined setting value change permission conditions" and the "predetermined setting value display permission conditions" are the conditions that apply when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1 or after a power outage (instantaneous power outage that occurs momentarily). When the power is restored, the main body frame 4 is opened to the outer frame 2, and the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion slot of the setting key switch, and the setting key cylinder is turned clockwise. There is a common requirement in that the setting key is turned on by turning it 60 degrees and turning it on. In contrast to the requirement that the press operation part of the RAM clear switch 741 be operated when the power is restored after a power outage (instantaneous power outage), "Set value display permission conditions" includes "The push operation part of the RAM clear switch 741 is operated when the power is turned on to the Pachinko machine 1 or when the power is restored after a power outage (instantaneous power outage). The difference is that the requirement is that the

Here, to briefly explain the setting value, the "setting value" in this example is a value that can change the probability that the lottery result of the first special symbol and the lottery result of the second special symbol described above will be a jackpot. The probability (degree of advantage) that is advantageous to the player (that is, the number of game balls that the player can acquire) can be set in advance. In this embodiment, the setting values include setting value 1 (jackpot probability is 1/319), setting value 2 (jackpot probability is 1/310), setting value 3 (jackpot probability is 1/300), and setting value 4 (jackpot probability is 1/300). The probability is 1/290), the setting value 5 (the jackpot probability is 1/280), and the setting value 6 (the jackpot probability is 1/270) are prepared in advance, and the player can move from setting value 1 to setting value 6. The probability (degree of advantage) that it will be advantageous is set in advance. The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 selects various tables (for example, a jackpot judgment table that defines the ratio of jackpot judgment values indicating winning a jackpot) that are associated with set values and used in various lottery judgments. or select various tables used for various distribution rates that are associated with set values (for example, distribution tables that specify distribution times, blocks that manage the drive of electrical drive sources such as motors and solenoids, etc.). do. In various tables used in various lottery determinations that are associated with set values, various determination values are allocated at predetermined ratios. In addition, the various tables used in various lottery determinations are set so that at least some of the values are different from each other, and the various tables used for various allocation rates are set so that at least some of the values are different from each other. In some cases, the values may differ based on the relationship between the table corresponding to the block that manages the drive of one electrical drive source and the table corresponding to the block that manages the drive of the other electrical drive source. Some are set to . In addition, the above-mentioned setting values are six setting values (integers) ranging from setting value 1 to setting value 6, but they may be in a smaller range than this, or they may be in a larger range. It may be something. For example, there may be four setting values (integers) ranging from setting value 1 to setting value 4, or eight setting values (integers) ranging from setting value 1 to setting value 8.

In this example, setting values 1 to 6 are prepared in advance as setting values, and the jackpot probability is set to be different for each setting value, but although it is possible to set multiple setting values, all of the setting values It is possible to set the numbers so that they are the same (the jackpot probability is the same). For example, while six setting values can be set, the settings can be made in one step so that all the setting values become the setting value 1. In this way, if all set values are set value 1, a state in which the set values can be changed occurs in the setting change state, and even if the set values are switched, the setting values will change from set value 1 to set value 1. 1, and the set value remains unchanged. Further, even if the setting value is confirmed in the setting confirmation state, the setting value 1 will always be confirmed. Here, there are pachinko machines 1 that require changing the setting value (changing the jackpot probability) and pachinko machines 1 that do not require changing the setting value (changing the jackpot probability). By making it possible to make all set values the same, the control program can be shared and used regardless of whether or not the set values need to be changed. In addition, for Pachinko machine 1 that does not require changing the setting values (changing the jackpot probability), it is possible to set only one setting value instead of six setting values while leaving the configuration of the setting key switch etc. In this case, the setting may be achieved in one step.

In addition, while changing the setting value or displaying the setting value confirmation, the main control board 1310 is in a state where the game cannot be played, for example, when the game ball B enters various ball entry ports such as the first starting port 2003. Even if it does, the control is such that the fluctuating display of symbols does not start. In addition, the frame control board 740 may be in a state in which the circulation of game balls cannot be performed, for example, a state in which the game ball B is not ejected from the ball firing unit 550 even if the handle 160 is operated, or a state in which the game ball B is not ejected from the ball firing unit 550 even if the handle 160 is operated, or a state in which the counting button switch 180 is operated. Various controls such as processing, ball firing unit 550, ball lifting unit 650, ball feeding unit 700, etc. are stopped, and control is made such that management (monitoring) of game balls B in circulation ball path unit 600 is not performed. . As a result, if a game or ball circulation progresses while changing the setting value or displaying the setting value confirmation, work related to the setting value may be hindered, but by stopping the game or ball circulation, It is possible to prevent such situations from occurring. After that, when the setting value change and setting value confirmation display are finished and the setting value is no longer displayed on the setting display, the state is such that the game or ball circulation can be performed, for example, by operating the handle 160. By doing so, a state in which the game ball B is launched from the ball firing unit 550, a state in which the fluctuating display of symbols is started when the game ball B enters various entry ports such as the first starting port 2003, and counting. By operating the button switch 180, various controls such as the payment process, the ball firing unit 550, the ball lifting unit 650, the ball feeding unit 700, etc. are started, and the game balls B in the circulation ball path unit 600 are managed (monitored). It will be controlled according to the state.

However, while changing the setting value or displaying the setting value confirmation, the state in which the ball circulation can be performed, for example, the state in which the game ball B is fired from the ball firing unit 550 by operating the handle 160, or the state in which the game ball B is ejected from the ball firing unit 550 by operating the handle 160, By operating the button switch 180, various controls such as the payment process, the ball firing unit 550, the ball lifting unit 650, the ball feeding unit 700, etc. are started, and the game balls B in the circulation ball path unit 600 are managed (monitored). The state may be controlled. As a result, the game can be started quickly after changing the settings and displaying the settings for confirmation.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, in addition to displaying the setting values, the setting display also allows the main control MPU to check the contents of its own built-in RAM when power is restored to determine whether there is an abnormality. If it is determined that there is an abnormality, or if the power-off processing on the main control side has not completed normally when the power is turned off, there is an abnormality in the contents stored in the internal RAM (or if the (This is not possible), and an error message will be displayed to inform you of this. In this embodiment, the main control MPU 1310a displays the alphabet E on the setting display as an error display.

In addition to the setting display, the main control board 1310 is also provided with a base monitor consisting of six 7-segment LED displays with decimal points (so-called dots) connected in a row. Here, while the setting display is capable of displaying the setting values of the pachinko machine 1, the base monitor displays the number of payouts for the number of balls entered (the number of prizes for the number of balls entered), which will be described in detail later. It is possible to display the calculation result of the ratio of the number of balls), but only the base monitor is provided, and the function to display the setting value of Pachinko machine 1 and the calculation result of the ratio of the number of balls put out to the number of balls entered. It may also be configured to have the function of displaying . In such a case, the base monitor may display the settings of the pachinko machine 1 in a state in which the setting values can be changed (change permission state) or in a state in which confirmation of the setting values is displayed (confirmation display state). In contrast to displaying the set value, the calculation result of the ratio of the number of balls paid out to the number of balls entered is displayed in a state excluding the change permission state and confirmation display state. Thereby, the number of parts can be reduced and costs can be reduced.

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the RAM clear switch 741 is provided on the frame control board 740, and the operation-related parts regarding setting values (setting key switch, setting display, RAM clear switch 741) are provided on the frame control board 740. The main control board 1310 is arranged in a distributed manner. By doing this, in order to change the setting value, it is necessary to operate multiple operation parts installed at different positions, compared to the case where the operation related parts related to the setting value are arranged on one board. This makes it difficult to make unauthorized changes to settings, etc., and is effective in preventing fraud. Note that the RAM clear switch 741 may be provided not on the frame control board 740 but in the main control board 1310 where setting key switches and setting displays are provided; in this case, if they are arranged in a distributed manner, Although it is less effective as a countermeasure against fraud, the arrangement makes it easier to recognize various operation parts and confirmation parts at a glance, which improves operational efficiency when setting and checking setting values.

[Base monitor management]
Next, the base monitor of the pachinko machine 1 of the fourth embodiment will be explained. In the other embodiments described above, the base monitor (four 7-segment LED ), the base monitor of the fourth embodiment counts the number of balls entered and the number of balls paid out (number of prize balls) that increase as the game progresses, and calculates the base value (ratio of number of balls paid out to number of balls entered). ) shall be displayed. Note that the basic configuration of the base monitor, such as having four 7-segment LEDs, is common to other embodiments.

A game area 5a defined on the game board 5 is provided with a plurality of ball entrances into which the game balls B can enter. Among the plurality of ball entry holes, the winning hole that pays out prize balls (assigns the number of prize balls) by entering the ball is always open so as to be able to receive the game ball B hit into the game area 5a. A plurality of (three in this case) general winning holes 2001, a normal winning hole 2002 which is provided at a predetermined position in the gaming area 5a and is always open to accept the gaming ball B, and the gaming area 5a. A first starting port 2003 is provided at a predetermined position in the interior and is always open to accept the game ball B, and a normal symbol lottery result is drawn when the game ball B is accepted into the normal winning port 2002. A second starting port 2004 that can accept the game ball B accordingly, and a first special symbol drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first starting port 2003 or a game ball B into the second starting port 2004. It is provided with a grand prize opening 2005 and a prize winning opening 2006 that can accept game balls B according to a second special symbol drawn by lottery upon acceptance. In addition, the game ball B that entered the general winning hole 2001, the normal winning hole 2002, the first starting hole 2003, the second starting hole 2004, the big winning hole 2005, and the accessory winning hole 2006, the general winning hole sensor 3001, It is detected by the normal winning opening sensor 3002, the first starting opening sensor 2101, the second starting opening sensor 2401, the big winning opening sensor 2402, and the accessory winning opening sensor 2501.

In addition, among the plurality of ball entry ports, an exit port for collecting game balls B that did not enter the winning hole is provided at the most downstream position in the gaming area 5a, and is always ready to receive game balls B. There is an out port 2020 that is open and discharges the received game ball B out of the gaming area 5a without returning it, and is provided upstream of the out port 2020 in the gaming area 5a, so that the game ball B can be received. It is provided with two sub-out ports 2021 which are always open and discharge the received game balls B out of the game area 5a without returning them.

Then, among the plurality of ball entry ports, the game balls B discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 2020 and the sub-out port 2021 are discharged to the out ball socket 600a in the circulation ball path unit 600, By being received by the out ball socket 600a, the out ball passes through the out ball passage 601 and is detected (counted) one by one by the out ball sensor 605. On the other hand, the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 are accepted into winning openings such as the general winning opening 2001, the normal winning opening 2002, the first starting opening 2003, the second starting opening 2004, the big winning opening 2005, and the accessory winning opening 2006. The game ball B discharged downward is discharged to the safe ball socket 600b in the circulation ball path unit 600, and is received by the safe ball socket 600b, flows through the safe ball passage 602, and is collected by the safe ball sensor 606. detected (counted) one by one.

The main control MPU is configured to control the number of game balls B that have entered the ball entry openings (winning openings, out openings) provided in the gaming area 5a that is sectioned on the gaming board 5 (the number of entering balls), that is, the number of balls that have entered the gaming area 5a. The number of game balls B discharged from the ball is counted. Specifically, the number of game balls B that entered the winning hole, which is the target for paying out prize balls by entering, is the number of game balls B detected by the safe ball sensor 606 and the number of game balls B that entered the winning hole. As the number of game balls B that entered the out port to collect the game balls B that did not hit, the total number of game balls B detected by the out ball sensor 605 is counted as the number of balls that entered. There is.

In addition, the main control MPU counts the number of game balls B (hereinafter referred to as the number of payouts) that are paid out (given) as prize balls by entering the winning hole. Specifically, a predetermined number of game balls B (for example, 3 game balls B for entering the first starting port 2003 or the second starting port 2004) correspond to the winning hole from which the prize ball is paid out by entering the ball. It is predetermined in advance to pay out a certain number of game balls B, and when the ball is detected by the detection sensor corresponding to the winning hole that is the target for paying out the prize ball by entering the ball, the number of balls of the predetermined number of game balls B is determined. , is counted as the number of payouts. For example, when a game ball B enters the general winning hole 2001, ten game balls B are paid out, and when a game ball B enters the normal winning hole 2002, one game ball B is paid out and the first game ball B is paid out. When the game ball B enters the starting hole 2003 or the second starting hole 2004, three game balls B are paid out, and when the game ball B enters the big winning hole 2005 or the accessory winning hole 2006, ten game balls B are paid out. of game balls B are paid out, and the number of game balls B paid out as prize balls is counted as the number of paid out balls. In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, since actual balls are not paid out, the number of game balls B paid out (given) as prize balls is added to the number of balls held by the player. It is said that

Then, the main control MPU calculates the ratio of the number of balls put out to the number of balls entered, stores the calculation result as a base value in a specific area of the built-in RAM, and displays it on the base monitor. An example of a calculation formula for the ratio of the number of balls put out to the number of balls entered is "base value=(number of balls put out/number of balls entered)×100". For example, if the ratio of the number of balls paid out to the number of balls entered is too high, there is a possibility that balls are entering only the winning holes where prize balls are paid out by entering the ball. By monitoring the information displayed on the base monitor, it is possible to determine whether or not a ball is being entered into the winning slot due to fraudulent activity.

In addition, in this example, among the plurality of game states, only in the low probability non-time saving state, the number of game balls B that entered the ball entry opening (winning opening, out opening) (number of entering balls), The number of game balls B paid out as prize balls (number of paid out balls) is counted and reflected on the display on the base monitor. Here, in the low-probability time-saving state (time-saving state) and the high-probability time-saving state (probability variable state), since balls frequently enter the second starting port 2004, the number of game balls B paid out as prize balls also increases. , the ratio of the number of balls put out to the number of balls entered tends to be high. In other words, whether the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered will increase or not depends on the period of time in the low probability time saving state (time saving state) or the high probability time saving state (probability variable state). By excluding the period, the ratio of the number of balls paid out to the number of balls entered can be kept within a certain range, provided there is no fraudulent activity.

In addition, the base monitor displays the ratio of the number of balls paid out to the number of balls entered, but the number of game balls B that entered the ball entry opening (winning opening, out opening) (number of entering balls) and the number of winning balls. It may also be possible to display the number of game balls B paid out as balls (the number of balls paid out).

Regarding the base monitor, the main control MPU calculates the ratio of the number of balls paid out to the number of balls entered, and the calculation result is stored in a specific area of the built-in RAM and displayed on the base monitor. There is. Furthermore, the information stored in the specific area of the RAM (the ratio of the number of balls paid out to the number of balls entered) is not cleared even if the RAM clear switch 741 is operated when the power is turned on. However, regarding the ratio of the number of balls paid out to the number of balls entered, each time the number of game balls B that entered the ball entry hole (winning hole, out hole) (number of balls entered) reaches 60,000 balls, a new ball is input. The ratio of the number of payouts to the number of pitches is calculated, and the calculation result of the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of pitches that have become old is stored as a history up to a predetermined number of calculation results. In the specifications of such a base monitor, for example, from the time of calculating the ratio of the number of newly paid out balls to the number of newly entered balls, at least the number of game balls B that entered the ball entry opening (winning opening, out opening) (entering Until the number of pitches (number of pitches) reaches 1000 pitches, execution of the display regarding the ratio of the number of payouts to the new number of balls entered may be restricted. This is because immediately after calculating the ratio of the number of paid out balls to the number of newly entered balls, the situation where balls enter the winning hole which is the target of paying out prize balls due to entering balls continues, and the ratio of the number of entered balls to the number of entered balls continues to be higher than the standard value. The ratio of the number of paid out balls becomes high, or the situation where the ball continues to not enter the winning hole where the prize ball is to be paid out due to the ball entering, the ratio of the number of paid out to the number of entered balls becomes lower than the standard value, etc. Bias is more likely to occur. Therefore, immediately after calculating the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered, the information obtained from the base monitor information command is judged to be unreliable, and the display regarding the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered is judged to be unreliable. It is sufficient to decide not to execute it.

In addition, in this example, the game balls B collected in the out port 2020 and the sub-out port 2021 are detected (counted) by the out ball sensor 605 provided on the main body frame 4 side, and are detected (counted) in the general winning port 2001 and the normal winning port. 2002, for the game ball B that enters the winning openings such as the first starting opening 2003, the second starting opening 2004, the big winning opening 2005, and the accessory winning opening 2006, a safe ball sensor installed on the main body frame 4 side 606, but these sensors may be provided on the game board 5 side. In addition, a passage is formed so that the game balls B collected at the out port 2020 and the sub-out port 2021 and the game balls B that have entered the various winning ports merge, and one sensor is provided on the passage. Then, the number of game balls B that have entered the ball entry port (winning port, out port) may be counted by detection by the one sensor.

Further, in this example, the base monitor is arranged on the main control board 1310, but it may be arranged on the frame control board 740. In such a case, the ratio of the number of balls paid out to the number of balls entered is calculated on the main control board 1310 side, and the calculation result is displayed on the base monitor via the frame control board 740, but another method may be used. May be used. For example, at a predetermined timing, the main control board 1310 sends a command regarding the number of balls entered and the number of balls paid out to the frame control board 740, and the frame control board 740 calculates the ratio of the number of balls paid out to the number of balls entered. , the calculation results may be displayed on the base monitor. In this way, by taking part of the control related to the base monitor on the frame control board 740 side, the control burden on the main control board 1310 side can be reduced.

In addition, in this example, the number of balls (entering ball number) of game balls B that entered the ball entry opening (winning opening, out opening) is calculated using the out ball sensor 605 and the safe ball sensor 606. Another configuration may be used to calculate the number of game balls B that have entered the ball entry opening (winning opening, out opening) (number of entering balls). For example, when calculating the ratio of the number of balls fired to the number of balls entered on the frame control board 740 side, the number of game balls fired into the game area 5a is calculated based on the detection result of the firing subtraction sensor 554 in the ball firing unit 550. Calculate this value (the number of game balls fired into the game area 5a) and replace it with "the number of game balls B that entered the ball entrance (winning hole, out hole) (number of balls entering)". You may also do so. Note that the "number of game balls fired into the game area" here preferably excludes the number of balls treated as foul balls as described above. In this case, the calculation of the base value on the frame control board 740 side can be exemplified by "base value = (number of payouts ÷ number of game balls fired into the game area) x 100)". In this way, the control burden on the main control board 1310 can be reduced by having the frame control board 740 take charge of part of the control related to the base monitor.

[New style of gaming management]
In recent years, even if a large amount of balls are awarded to a fraudulent person due to a new fraudulent act, it is difficult to distinguish from a case where a large amount of balls are awarded to a player due to the bias in the probability of winning or losing. In some cases, it is difficult for gaming halls to urge cheaters to stop playing, creating a problem in which gaming machines are difficult to manage. Furthermore, due to bias in the probability of winning or losing, a large amount of balls may be awarded to legitimate players, and problems such as so-called "addiction" have also arisen. Therefore, as an embodiment to solve these problems, the aim is to optimize the management of gaming machines that have been given a large amount of balls. A new game control that newly extracts the amount of balls put out and reflects it in the game progress will be explained below. For convenience of explanation, the pachinko machine 1 of the fourth embodiment will be explained below.

(Extraction of ball output amount for a predetermined period)
The pachinko machine 1 of this example allows the main control board 1310 to calculate and derive the following two types of ball output amount A and ball output amount B as the ball output amount (difference ball amount) for a predetermined period.

First, the main control MPU counts the number of game balls B (shot number) that are fired into the game area 5a by operating the handle 160. Specifically, when the game ball B is fired into the game area 5a by operating the handle 160, the firing subtraction sensor 554 detects that the game ball B is fired from the ball launch pad 552b; The number of game balls B (excluding the number of balls treated as foul balls) is counted as the "number of shots" for calculating the ball output amounts A and B. Note that the number of shots may be counted by another method, for example, a sensor other than the shot subtraction sensor 554 may be installed to detect and count the game balls that have entered the game area 5a.

The main control MPU also counts the number of game balls B (the number of paid out balls) that are paid out (given) as prize balls by entering the winning hole. Specifically, a predetermined number of game balls B (for example, balls entering the first starting port 2003 or the second starting port 2004 It is predetermined in advance to pay out (give) a prize ball (e.g. 3 balls to The number of game balls B is counted as the "number of payouts (number of awards)" for calculating the ball amounts A and B. For example, when a game ball B enters the general winning hole 2001, 15 game balls B are paid out, and when a game ball B enters the normal winning hole 2002, one game ball B is paid out and the first game ball B is paid out. When the game ball B enters the starting hole 2003 or the second starting hole 2004, three game balls B are paid out, and when the game ball B enters the big winning hole 2005 or the accessory winning hole 2006, 15 game balls B are paid out. The game ball B is paid out, and the number of game balls B paid out as prize balls is counted as the number of paid out balls for calculation of the ball amounts A and B. In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, since actual balls are not paid out, the number of game balls B given as the number of prize balls is counted as the number of paid out balls for calculating the ball amounts A and B. .

In addition to the normal number of balls held by the player (the number of balls displayed on the number of balls display section 140) that can be settled by the player by operating the counting button switch 180, the main control MPU also performs a predetermined clearing condition described below. The difference between the number of shots and the number of payouts is calculated within the period until this is established, and the calculation result can be stored and stored in the "stopping counter" as a value for calculating the amount of balls A and B. . The value of the stop counter is stored in a specific area of built-in RAM. Note that the formula for calculating the difference between the number of shots and the number of payouts is "value of stopping counter = number of payouts - number of shots." For example, if the value of the stoppage counter becomes too large, it can be understood that a large amount of balls are being awarded from the pachinko machine 1, regardless of whether or not there has been a change of players. In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the number of balls normally held by player A is subtracted by firing the game ball B, and the number of balls normally held by player A is added by paying out the prize ball. It manages increases and decreases in the number of balls that person A normally has (the number of balls that person A has that is displayed on the number of balls display section 140), but as mentioned above, the value of the stop counter is different from the number of balls that person A normally has. It is stored separately in a specific area of RAM and managed by the main control MPU. The value of this stop counter is also subtracted by the firing of the game ball B and added by the payout of the prize ball, and in this respect, it is similar to the process that normally manages the increase/decrease in the number of balls held. ing. However, the value of the stop counter cannot be settled by the player by operating the counting button switch 180, and in this point it is greatly different from the normal number of balls held. Below, the ball amounts A and B calculated using the value of the stop counter will be explained.

The payout amount A is the value at the time when the counter for discontinuation reaches the maximum value within the period until the predetermined clearing condition described below is met, and the value for discontinuing within the period until the predetermined clearing condition described below is met. This is the difference from the value when the counter reaches its lowest value. In other words, the main control MPU memorizes the changes in the counter for stopping, calculates the difference between the maximum value and the minimum value of the counter for stopping, and updates the calculation result as the ball output amount A from time to time. It is stored in a specific area of RAM. The ball output amount A is cleared when a predetermined clearing condition described later is satisfied, and is returned to the initial value of 0. Note that the clear conditions described below do not include "settlement of balls held (operation of counting button switch 180)", and even if player B starts playing after player A has settled, the clear conditions also apply. As long as this is not true, the amount A of balls played by both players A and B during the course of the game is stored (maintained) in an accumulated manner. As a result, not only can one gaming machine issue an unexpectedly large amount of balls to one player, but also one gaming machine may issue an unexpectedly large amount of balls to multiple players. It is also possible to understand if the

The payout amount B is the difference between a predetermined initial value of 0 and the value at the time when the stop counter reaches its maximum value within a period until a predetermined clearing condition described later is satisfied. In other words, the main control MPU memorizes the changes in the abort counter, and calculates the difference between the values at the time when the abort counter reaches its maximum value (i.e., the difference greater than or equal to 0), starting from the initial value of 0. ), and the calculation result is updated as needed as the ball output amount B and stored in a specific area of the built-in RAM. The ball output amount B is cleared when a predetermined clearing condition described later is satisfied, and is returned to the initial value of 0. Note that the clear conditions described below do not include "settlement of balls held (operation of the counting button switch 180)", and even if player B starts playing after player A has settled, the clear conditions also apply. As long as this is not true, the amount B of balls played by both players A and B during the course of the game is stored (maintained) in an accumulated manner. As a result, not only can one gaming machine issue an unexpectedly large amount of balls to one player, but also one gaming machine may issue an unexpectedly large amount of balls to multiple players. It is also possible to understand if the

FIG. 124 is a time chart showing an example of the amount of balls to be paid out based on the change in the stop counter. Here, a specific example will be described in which the stoppage counter starts from an initial value of 0, and as the game is played, the stoppage counter repeatedly increases and decreases.

As shown in FIG. 124, the stop counter starts from the initial value of 0, then decreases from the initial value of 0 to -2000, increases to 3000, decreases to -4000, and reaches 2000. The number increases, decreases to -500, increases to 4000, and decreases to 2500. In such a case, regarding the amount of balls to be put out A, 8000 is calculated and stored as the difference between 4000 when the number of stopping counters reaches the maximum and -4000 when the number of stopping counters becomes the lowest. Retained. On the other hand, the ball output amount B is calculated and stored as 4000, starting from 0, which is the initial value of the stopping counter, and assuming 4000 at the time when the stopping counter reaches its maximum value. Note that the maximum value of the difference between the ball output amounts A and B is stored and held, and the stored and held ball output amounts A and B are updated by newly calculating the maximum value of the difference.

In this example, the main control board 1310 calculates two types of ball output A and B as the ball output, but which one to adopt depends on the hall's management style. It is structured so that you can choose freely. Specifically, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, the main control board 1310), an operation switch A that can be operated by the hall manager is provided, and by operating the operation switch A, the amount of balls to be paid can be changed. Either A or the ball output amount B is selected. On the other hand, regarding the amount of balls to be dispensed, considering the control burden on the main control board 1310, only one of the amount of balls to be dispensed A and the amount of balls to be dispensed B may be adopted and mounted. In addition, the operation of the operation switch A when selecting either the ball output amount A or the ball output amount B may be determined only when the power is turned on and reflect which one is selected, or It is also possible to make a determination later and reflect which one is selected (in real time).

In addition, when calculating the base value mentioned above, the ratio of the number of balls paid out to the number of balls entered is calculated, whereas when calculating the amount of balls released, the difference between the number of balls fired and the number of balls paid out is calculated. , these calculation programs are executed by separate programs in the main control MPU. As a result, even if the calculation of the base value is not performed normally, it will not affect the calculation of the ball output amount, and the base value and ball output amount can be initialized, including the predetermined clearing conditions described later. It is also possible to easily control processes related to the above separately. In addition, it is now easier to rewrite the calculation program for the ball output amount for each model, and for example, it is now possible to easily change which of ball output amount A or ball output amount B to use for each model. Become.

Furthermore, although the above-mentioned base value is displayed on the base monitor, unlike the base value, it is desirable that the ball amount not be displayed at all times from the viewpoint of fraud prevention. However, when the hall manager performs a predetermined operation (for example, when a special switch is operated to turn on the power), the amount of balls to be paid out is displayed on a predetermined display (for example, on the performance display device 1600 or on the back of the gaming machine). It may also be displayed on a dedicated display device installed in the

Further, in this example, the amount of balls to be dispensed is calculated on the main control board 1310 side, but another method may be used. For example, a stop counter is provided on the frame control board 740 side, and a command regarding the number of shots and the number of payouts is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the frame control board 740 at a predetermined timing. A counter for stopping the game may be managed, and the amount of balls to be put out may be calculated from an increase or decrease in the counter for stopping the game. Further, a stop counter is provided on the main control board 1310 side, and a command related to the stop counter is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the frame control board 740 at a predetermined timing. The amount of balls put out may be calculated from the increase/decrease in the counter for stopping. Further, from the viewpoint of reducing the control burden, the amount of balls to be put out is calculated on the main control board 1310 side, whereas the base value mentioned above may be calculated on the frame control board 740 side. . Further, from the viewpoint of reducing the control burden, the normal number of balls held and the management of the stop counter may be calculated separately on the main control board 1310 side and the frame control board 740 side.

In addition, the amount of balls put out is calculated using a counter for stopping, which is the difference between the number of shots and the number of payouts. Then, the amount of balls put out may be calculated by storing the "difference between the number of balls entered and the number of balls put out" in a stopping counter. In other words, the "number of balls fired" for calculating the ball output amounts A and B should be replaced with "the number of game balls B that entered the ball entrance (input hole, out hole) (number of balls entered)". You can also do this. In this case, the value of the stopping counter can be exemplified by "value of stopping counter=number of balls put out - number of balls entered". In this way, the main control board 1310 can share some of the base monitor-related controls by using the number of pitches used as the base value described above as the value stored in the stop counter. The control burden on the control board 1310 side can be reduced. In addition, in the pachinko machine 1, the game ball fired into the game area 5a by operating the handle 160 enters the ball entry opening (winning opening, out opening) and is ejected to the outside. and the number of balls entering the ball should show approximately the same value, and as a result, regardless of whether the number of balls fired or the number of balls entering the ball is used, the amount of balls coming out will show approximately the same value.

(gaming restrictions)
The pachinko machine 1 of this example executes one of the following three types of restriction patterns when the above-mentioned ball output amount (ball output amount A, B) reaches a specific value, and the main control board 1310 stops the game. This makes it possible to restrict gaming. Furthermore, when the amount of balls put out reaches a certain value, restrictions on subsequent games are executed, but the game status (high probability status, time saving status, information on the number of stored reservations, information on fluctuating symbols) ) and other game-related information is retained without being cleared. As will be described in detail later, the system is configured so that it is possible to select whether to maintain or clear the information regarding the game when the power is turned on again after being turned off.

First, the specific value is configured such that one of predetermined values of 50,000 shots, 80,000 shots, and 100,000 shots can be selected. Specifically, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, the main control board 1310), an operation switch B that can be operated by the hall manager is provided, and by operating the operation switch B, 50,000 shots, Either 80,000 shots or 100,000 shots is to be selected. Here, the lower the specific value is selected, the more likely the game will be restricted, and the higher the specific value is selected, the lower the possibility that the game will be restricted. Note that, from the viewpoint of reducing the capacity of the ROM that stores various processing programs, only one of the specific values may be adopted. Further, the specific value to be selected may be commonly used for the ball amounts A and B, or may be separately selectable for the ball amounts A and B. Furthermore, regarding the operation of operation switch B when selecting one of a plurality of specific values, it may be determined only when the power is turned on to reflect which one is selected, or it may be determined at any time after the power is turned on. It may be possible to reflect which one is selected at any time (in real time).

Furthermore, regarding the restriction patterns, the player is configured to be able to select any one of restriction patterns 1 to 3, which have different restrictions on games. Specifically, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, the main control board 1310), an operation switch C that can be operated by the hall manager is provided, and by operating the operation switch C, the restriction pattern 1 can be changed. - 3 must be selected. Note that as for the restriction pattern, only one of restriction patterns 1 to 3 may be adopted from the viewpoint of reducing the capacity of the ROM that stores various processing programs. Furthermore, the operation of the operation switch C when selecting one of a plurality of restriction patterns may be determined only when the power is turned on to reflect which one is selected, or it may be determined at any time after the power is turned on. It may be possible to reflect which one is selected at any time (in real time).

Restriction pattern 1 is a pattern in which, when the amount of balls put out reaches a specific value, a termination state with "stopping the game" is performed. In the case of "game stop", when the player operates the handle 160, the game ball can be launched into the game area 5a, but even if there is a starting prize, the game ball will not be paid out and the special symbol will not be paid out. It is not possible to start the variable display and the normal game cannot be played. In other words, although the firing of game balls is permitted, the game (main game) currently being executed on the main control board 1310 side is forcibly stopped and the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side continues. It becomes impossible to do so.

Restriction pattern 2 is a pattern in which, when the amount of balls put out reaches a specific value, a discontinuing state with "stopping firing" is performed. In the case of "stopping the firing", when the player operates the handle 160, the game ball cannot be fired into the gaming area 5a. However, if there is a starting prize, the game ball will be paid out, the variable display of special symbols can be started, and a normal game can be played. In other words, since the firing of game balls is not permitted, there is no starting prize in the first place, and although it is allowed to proceed with the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side that is being executed, after that, the main The game (main game) on the control board 1310 side cannot be played. The specific situation of "stopping firing" is a state in which the frame control board 740 is unable to circulate the game balls, for example, the game ball B is not fired from the ball firing unit 550 even if the handle 160 is operated. To control the state and various controls of the ball firing unit 550, ball lifting unit 650, ball feeding unit 700, etc. to a state where the management (monitoring) of the game ball B in the circulating ball path unit 600 is not performed. can be exemplified.

Restriction pattern 3 is a pattern in which, when the amount of balls put out reaches a specific value, a stoppage state that involves both "stopping the game" and "stopping firing" is performed. In the case of "game stop" and "launch stop", when the player operates the handle 160, not only will the game ball not be able to be launched into the gaming area 5a, but even if there is a starting prize, the game ball will not be able to be fired. There is no payout, and the variable display of special symbols cannot be started, making it impossible to play a normal game. In other words, the firing of game balls is not permitted, and the currently running game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side is forcibly stopped, and the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side is allowed to proceed. It becomes impossible to do so.

In this example, in any of restriction patterns 1 to 3, payment processing by operating the count button switch 180 is made executable (permissible) without being disabled. As a result, even if the player is unable to continue playing due to any of the restriction patterns 1 to 3, the payment process can be executed by operating the count button switch 180, which may confuse the player. This can be prevented. However, in consideration of the possibility that a large amount of balls are given to a fraudulent person due to fraudulent activities, etc., in any of the restriction patterns 1 to 3, payment processing by operating the counting button switch 180 is also not possible. You may also leave it as . In such a case, after it is confirmed that there is no fraudulent activity, the hall administrator can activate the counting button switch 180 by performing a predetermined operation (for example, operating the preliminary counting button switch provided on the frame control board 740). One idea is to make it possible to do so (make the payment process executable).

Further, while any of the above-mentioned restriction patterns 1 to 3 is applied, the state is forcibly continued as a "stopped state" until a clearing condition, which will be described later, is satisfied. Clear conditions to be described later exclude those that are satisfied by some operation on the player's side, and cannot be canceled by the player. As described above, even if the player is allowed to operate the count button switch 180 to execute the settlement process in the canceled state, the count button switch 180 may be operated and the settlement process is executed. The aborted state continues even after execution. In addition, if the stopped state continues after the payment process has been executed, in order to prevent a new player from starting the game, the new player's normal number of balls will be added or the number of game balls will be added to the new player's normal number of balls. It is preferable to disable data transfer from the lending device 8. Furthermore, in such a case, the display mode of the ball count display section 140 is controlled to be in an unacceptable mode corresponding to the discontinued state, such as "EEEE", so that new players are informed that they cannot start playing. It might be a good idea to let them know.

In this example, when the amount of balls put out reaches a specific value, a suspension state is generated in which the game is restricted based on one of restriction patterns 1 to 3, so that a large amount of balls put out due to fraudulent activity etc. It will not be given to a fraudster and can prevent fraud. In addition, a large amount of balls will not be awarded to regular players due to bias in the probability of winning or losing, and problems such as so-called "addiction" can be prevented from occurring. Thereby, it is possible to appropriately manage a gaming machine that has given out a large amount of balls.

In addition, in this example, the restrictions on games that are restricted in the stopped state include "stopping the game," "stopping firing," and patterns in which both "stopping the game" and "stopping firing." The method is not limited to these methods as long as the content of the restriction makes it difficult to increase the number of balls after the amount reaches a specific value. For example, another restriction is that the time required for the fluctuating display of all special symbols that starts after the amount of balls put out reaches a certain value (fluctuation time) is made long, and even if there is a starting prize, the special symbols It may take some time for the results of the variable display to be displayed, and the progress of the game may be restricted. In addition, in a gaming machine that controls the gaming state to be either a low probability state or a high probability state where the probability of winning is higher than the low probability state, regardless of whether or not there is a winning that should be made into the high probability state. After the amount of balls to be put out reaches a specific value, the game may be forcibly controlled only to a low probability state, and the progress of the game may be restricted. In these cases, it will take longer to win than before the game was restricted, so it will be difficult to increase the amount of balls you can get from then on, which may reduce your desire to continue playing. can. In addition, after the amount of balls put out reaches a specific value, the game is not stopped or the firing is stopped, but a special notification corresponding to the amount of balls put out reaches a specific value is sent to the production display device 1600 or other devices. This may be performed using a presentation device. In such a case, the progress of the performance will be hindered by the special notification, and the player's desire to continue playing the game can be reduced. In addition, when performing special notification, it is preferable to display a special image on the entire screen of the effect display device 1600 so that the conventional effect display cannot be seen at all. As a result, the player's desire to continue playing can be more effectively reduced.

Furthermore, in this example, even if the above-mentioned amount of balls to be put out reaches a specific value, the information on the amount of balls to be put out is not erased but is stored and retained until a clearing condition, which will be described later, is satisfied. In addition, after the amount of balls put out reaches a certain value, updating of the amount of balls A and B (updating the counter for stopping) may be forcibly stopped, or the calculation may be continued without stopping. You can also do it. In addition, for example, if the updating of the ball output amounts A and B (updating of the counter for stopping the ball) is continued without stopping, the game balls may be lost due to some malfunction or fraud when the above-mentioned "stopping of firing" is not performed. It is conceivable that the shot was fired and the stoppage counter started to decrease. In such a case, there is a possibility that the stop counter will fall below a specific value, but taking these into consideration, once the amount of balls put out reaches the specific value, the stop counter will decrease from then on. Even if this occurs, it is preferable to continue the aborted state without terminating it.

(Clearing restrictions on ball output and gaming)
The pachinko machine 1 of this example is configured to generate a stopped state when the amount of balls put out reaches a specific value, but the "ball amount calculated before the stopped state starts" and the "stopped state" Regarding the "restrictions on games during play", when the power is turned on again after being turned off, the game hall side can select whether to maintain or clear it.

First, the following five types of power-on patterns are provided as modes of power-on operation. Power-on pattern 1 is a case in which the RAM clear switch 741 and setting key switch are not turned on when the power is turned on (when operating the power switch 751), and the power is turned off without changing the settings or displaying confirmation. The current gaming state (gaming information) is maintained without being initialized.

Power-on pattern 2 is a case in which the RAM clear switch 741 is turned on and the setting key switch is not turned on when the power is turned on, and the setting value is not changed or a confirmation display is performed, but the main control board 1310 A RAM clear is executed to initialize the built-in RAM, and the gaming state at the time of power interruption is initialized. However, information regarding setting values is not initialized by RAM clear.

Power-on pattern 3 is a case where the RAM clear switch 741 is turned on and the setting key switch is turned on when the power is turned on. A RAM clear is executed to initialize the RAM, and the gaming state at the time of power cut-off is initialized. However, information regarding setting values is not initialized by RAM clear.

Power-on pattern 4 is a case where the setting key switch is turned on without turning on the RAM clear switch 741 when the power is turned on, and after the setting value confirmation display is performed, the gaming state at the time of power-off is returned to the initial state. It is maintained without being changed.

Power-on pattern 5 is the same as power-on pattern 1 in that the RAM clear switch 741 and setting key switch are not turned ON when the power is turned on, but the power-on pattern 5 is the same as power-on pattern 1 in that the RAM clear switch 741 and setting key switch are not turned on. This is a case of ON operation, and the gaming state (gaming information) at the time of power cut-off is maintained without changing the setting value or displaying confirmation. Here, when the ball extraction switch 742 is turned on, the ball extraction process described above is executed and the enclosed game ball B is transferred from the ball extraction port 613p of the circulation ball path unit 600 to the outside (ball receiving tray 720). It can be pulled out. Furthermore, when the power is turned on, if the RAM clear switch 741 or the setting key switch is turned on, and the bulb removal switch 742 is also turned on, the settings will be changed, the confirmation display will be displayed, and the RAM will be cleared. The above-mentioned ball removal process is executed preferentially.

In this way, among power-on patterns 1 to 5, power-on patterns 2 and 3 initialize the gaming state when the power is turned off by turning on the RAM clear switch 741 when the power is turned on. , power-on patterns 1, 4, and 5, the gaming state at the time of power-off is maintained by not turning on the RAM clear switch 741 when the power is turned on. Note that the game state at the time of power cut-off includes game states such as a high probability state, a time saving state, and a winning game state, as well as the presence or absence of a variable display of special symbols being executed, the presence or absence of a hold, and the like. When the power is turned on using power-on patterns 2 and 3, the gaming state at the time of power-off is not restored; however, when the power is turned on using power-on patterns 1, 4, and 5, the gaming state at the time of power-off is restored. He will be returning.

FIG. 125 is a table showing the clear conditions for "ball payout amount calculated before the start of the stopped state" and "restriction on gaming during the stopped state". In this example, the configuration is such that one of the restricted clear pattern tables 1 to 3 having different clearing conditions can be selected. Specifically, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, the main control board 1310), a limit clear pattern selection switch that can be operated by the hall manager is provided, and by operating the limit clear pattern selection switch, , one of the limit clear pattern tables 1 to 3 is selected. As for the limit clear pattern table, only one of the limit clear pattern tables 1 to 3 may be used from the viewpoint of reducing the capacity of the ROM that stores various processing programs. Furthermore, the operation of the limit clear pattern selection switch when selecting limit clear pattern tables 1 to 3 may be determined only when the power is turned on to reflect which one is selected, or may be operated at any time after the power is turned on. It may be possible to determine which one is selected and reflect it at any time (in real time). In addition, the "ball output amount" in FIG. 125 includes the "value of the counter for stopping the game", and in this example, when the amount of balls played is maintained, the value of the counter for stopping the game is also maintained. When the amount of balls put out is cleared, the value of the stop counter is also cleared.

FIG. 125(A) shows the limit clear pattern table 1 that is selected when the limit clear pattern selection switch is set to "1". In power-on pattern 1, when the power is turned on, the gaming state at the time of power-off is maintained, but the "amount of balls put out before the no-stop state starts or after the no-go state" and "the no-stop state "Restrictions on indoor games" are also maintained. If such a stopped state is maintained, a state will be maintained in which the game (main game) cannot be progressed on the main control board 1310 side. In addition, as a form of notification to the outside, the LEDs mounted on the game board 5 and various decorative boards of the door frame 3 are made to emit blue light from the time the power is turned on until a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and from the speakers. A sound saying "The amount of balls put out and the stopped state are maintained." is outputted, and a message image saying "The amount of balls put out and the stopped state are maintained" is also displayed on the effect display device 1600. There is.

Power-on pattern 2 clears (initializes) the gaming state at the time of power-off when the power is turned on, but "the amount of balls that come out before or after the stopped state starts" Also, the "restrictions on gaming during the stopped state" have been cleared (initialized). Specifically, when the game is restricted by the above-mentioned restriction pattern 1, the game is "stopped", but when the stopped state is cleared, the "game stop" is canceled and the game is stopped by the restriction pattern 2. If the game is restricted by , it is "stopped", but when the stopped state is cleared, "stopped firing" is canceled, and if the game is restricted by restriction pattern 3, , "game stop" and "fire stop" have been stopped, but when the stopped state is cleared, "game stop" and "fire stop" are canceled, and in either case, the main control board 1310 side It is now possible to restart the game (main game). In addition, as a form of notification to the outside, the LEDs mounted on the game board 5 and various decorative boards of the door frame 3 are made to emit red light from the time the power is turned on until a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and the speaker A voice saying "The amount of balls put out and the stopped state have been cleared." is output, and a message image saying "The amount of balls put out and the stopped state have been cleared" is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

In power-on pattern 3, when the power is turned on, the gaming state at the time of power-off is cleared (initialized), but "the amount of balls played before or after the stoppage state starts" Also, the "restrictions on gaming during the stopped state" have been cleared (initialized). In addition, as a form of notification to the outside, the LEDs mounted on the game board 5 and various decorative boards of the door frame 3 are made to emit red light from the time the power is turned on until a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and the speaker A voice saying "The amount of balls put out and the stopped state have been cleared." is output, and a message image saying "The amount of balls put out and the stopped state have been cleared" is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

In power-on pattern 4, when the power is turned on, the gaming state at the time of power-off is maintained, but "the amount of balls put out before the no-stop state starts or after the no-go state starts" and "the game state when the no-stop state starts" "Restrictions on indoor games" are also maintained. In addition, as a form of notification to the outside, the LEDs mounted on the game board 5 and various decorative boards of the door frame 3 are made to emit blue light from the time the power is turned on until a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and from the speakers. A sound saying "The amount of balls put out and the stopped state have been cleared." is outputted, and a message image saying "The amount of balls put out and the stopped state have been cleared" is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

In power-on pattern 5, when the power is turned on, the gaming state at the time of power-off is maintained, but "the amount of balls put out before the no-stop state starts or after the no-go state starts" and "the no-stop state "Restrictions on indoor games" are also maintained. In addition, as a form of notification to the outside, the LEDs mounted on the game board 5 and various decorative boards of the door frame 3 are made to emit blue light from the time the power is turned on until a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and from the speakers. A voice saying "The amount of balls put out and the stopped state are maintained." is outputted, and a message image is displayed on the effect display device 1600 saying "The amount of balls put out and the stopped state are maintained." There is.

In this way, in the limit clear pattern table 1, when the power is turned on, only when the gaming state at power-off is cleared (initialized) as in power-on patterns 2 and 3, "before the discontinued state starts, , the amount of balls issued since the start of the stopped state" and "restrictions on gaming during the stopped state" have been cleared (initialized). On the other hand, when the power is turned on, if the gaming state at the time of power-off is maintained as in power-on patterns 1, 4, and 5, it is possible to ``Amount of balls'' and ``Restrictions on games during a stopped state'' are maintained. According to this, not only the gaming state at the time of power cut, but also the amount of balls put out and the stopped state are cleared all at once, so it is possible to avoid operational errors by the hall manager in deciding whether to clear the amount of balls put out and the stopped state. This can be made less likely to occur.

FIG. 125(B) shows the limit clear pattern table 2 that is selected when the limit clear pattern selection switch is set to "2". Among the power-on patterns 1-5, power-on patterns 2-5 are the same as those in the restriction clear pattern table 1, so the description thereof will be omitted.

In power-on pattern 1, when the power is turned on, the gaming state at the time of power-off is maintained, but "the amount of balls put out before the no-stop state starts or after the no-go state starts" and "the no-stop state "Restrictions on games inside" have been cleared (initialized). In addition, as a form of notification to the outside, the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5 and door frame 3 are made to emit yellow light from the time the power is turned on until a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and the speaker A sound saying "The amount of balls put out and the stopped state have been cleared." is outputted, and a message image saying "The amount of balls put out and the stopped state have been cleared" is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

In this way, power-on pattern 1 is the same as power-on pattern 4 in that when the power is turned on, the gaming state at the time of power-off is maintained. This pattern differs from power-on pattern 4 in that it clears (initializes) the amount of balls put out after the game has started and the restrictions on games during the stopped state. In other words, in the limit clear pattern table 2, when the power is turned on, if the game state at the time of the power cut is maintained, as in the power-on pattern 1, "before the stopped state starts or after the stopped state starts" Either clear (initialize) the "Amount of balls put out" and "Restrictions on games during the stopped state", or clear (initialize) "Restrictions on games during the stopped state," or The hall manager can select whether to maintain the "ball quantity" and "restrictions on games during the stopped state." In addition, power-on pattern 1 does not require the RAM clear switch 741 and setting key switch to be turned ON when the power is turned on. The hall manager can easily clear (initialize) the amount of balls and the restriction on play during the stopped state.

FIG. 125(C) shows the limit clear pattern table 3 that is selected when the limit clear pattern selection switch is set to "3". Among the power-on patterns 1 to 5, power-on patterns 1 and 3 to 5 are the same as those in the restriction clear pattern table 1, and therefore the description thereof will be omitted.

Power-on pattern 2 clears (initializes) the gaming state at the time of power-off when the power is turned on, but "the amount of balls that come out before or after the stopped state starts" and ``restrictions on gaming while suspended'' remain in place. In addition, as a form of notification to the outside, the LEDs mounted on the game board 5 and various decorative boards of the door frame 3 are made to emit blue light from the time the power is turned on until a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and from the speakers. A voice saying "The amount of balls put out and the stopped state are maintained." is outputted, and a message image is displayed on the effect display device 1600 saying "The amount of balls put out and the stopped state are maintained." There is.

In this way, power-on pattern 2 is the same as power-on pattern 3 in that, when the power is turned on, the game state at the time of power-off is cleared (initialized), This pattern differs from power-on pattern 3 in that it maintains "the amount of balls put out after the start of the stopped state" and "restrictions on gaming during the stopped state". In other words, in the limit clear pattern table 3, when the power is turned on, if the gaming state at power-off is cleared (initialized), as in power-on pattern 2, "before the stopped state starts or when the stopped state is Either maintain the amount of balls put out after the game has started and the limit on games during the game stoppage, or, as in power-on pattern 3, The hall manager can select whether to clear (initialize) the "ball quantity" and "restrictions on games during a stopped state." In addition, only when the power is turned on in power-on pattern 3, the "amount of balls played before the stopped state starts or after the stopped state starts" and "restrictions on games during the stopped state" are cleared (initialization ), and for power-on pattern 3, it is necessary to turn on both the RAM clear switch 741 and the setting key switch when the power is turned on. Clearing (initialization) of the amount of balls put out after the start of the no-stop state and the restrictions on games during the no-go state can be carried out under the strict control of the hall manager.

In addition, in this example, the amount of balls to be dispensed can be cleared (initialized) by turning on the power in a predetermined power-on pattern, but as another example, it is possible to clear (initialize) the amount of balls put out in a unit time (for example, 3 hours). It may be possible to clear (initialize) each time. According to this, if the amount of balls put out is not cleared (initialized) every unit time (for example, 3 hours), the amount of balls put out will depend on whether the amount of balls put out reaches a certain value or not. The amount of balls put out will affect the next player, but by clearing (initializing) the amount of balls put out every unit time (for example, 3 hours), the amount of balls put out will affect the next player. The amount of balls put out can be made less likely to affect the next player.

(Details of gaming restrictions)
In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when the amount of balls put out reaches a specific value, the main control board 1310 starts a termination state in which the game is restricted, and the details thereof will be explained below.

FIG. 126 is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine when the amount of balls put out reaches a specific value and the game is restricted. Here, at timing t1, when it is determined that the amount of balls put out reaches a specific value due to the payout of the prize ball based on the ball entering the winning hole, it is determined that the stop flag is turned ON, and the state shifts to the stop state. It explains the case when Further, when the amount of balls put out reaches a specific value, a restriction pattern 3 is selected in which both "stopping the game" and "stopping firing" are performed as a restriction on the game in the stopped state. In addition, after transitioning to the stopped state, when the power is turned on again after being turned off, the power-on pattern maintains the gaming state at the time the power was cut off, and also maintains the amount of balls put out and the stopped state. Selected.

As shown in FIG. 126, before timing t1, the gaming state on the main control board 1310 side is controlled to the normal state (non-stopped state), and the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side is controlled. This is a period in which it is possible to proceed. In other words, in a normal state that is not a stopped state, when there is a starting prize, the variable display of the special symbol can be started, and when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped and displayed at the winning symbol, the jackpot game can be started. You can play normal games.

In addition, the effect display device 1600, lamp A (LED mounted on various decorative boards of the frame decoration member), lamp B (LED mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5), lamp C (function display unit 1400), lamp B (LED mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5), The normal operation of the LED (LED mounted on the light emitting board), the speaker, and the movable body is performed before timing t1. Note that while the lamp C is controlled by the main control board 1310, the other members are controlled by the peripheral control board 1510. Here, regarding the lamp C, a plurality of LEDs in the function display unit 1400 are made to light up or blink as the game progresses. On the other hand, for the members whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510, when the variable display of the special symbol is not executed, a standby effect (for example, a demonstration When the variable display of the special symbol is being executed, the peripheral control board 1510 executes the operation corresponding to the variable display (effect based on the variable pattern) based on the receipt of the variable pattern command. The corresponding action is executed. For example, when the peripheral control board 1510 receives a variable pattern command, the effect display device 1600 executes an effect display (for example, a reach effect) including a variable display of decorative symbols, and the effect display device 1600 executes an effect display (for example, a reach effect), etc. The LED lights up or flashes in conjunction with the performance display executed by the performance display device 1600, and the speaker outputs audio in conjunction with the performance display performed by the performance display device 1600. A predetermined operation is performed in conjunction with the effect display executed by the effect display device 1600.

Furthermore, it is possible to output predetermined signals to the hall computer from the external terminal board, and by receiving these signals at the hall computer, the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 can be grasped on the hall side as well. ing. For example, when there is a starting winning, when the variable display of special symbols stops displaying at a winning symbol and a jackpot game is being executed, when an abnormality is detected, the corresponding signals are output. .

Further, before the timing t1, when the player operates the handle 160, it is possible to shoot the game ball to the game area 5a.

In addition, the base monitor shows the number of game balls B that entered the ball entrance (input hole, out hole) (number of balls entered), and the number of game balls B that were paid out as prize balls (number of paid out balls). is counted, the ratio of the number of balls put out to the number of balls entered is calculated, and the calculation result is displayed as a base value, but such calculations can be performed before timing t1.

In addition, before timing t1, when a ball entering the winning hole is detected, it is possible to pay out a predetermined number of game balls as prize balls, and the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls is This makes it possible for the number of balls held by the player to be added up and the counter for stopping the game to be updated.

Next, at timing tx before timing t1, when the main control board 1310 detects a ball entering the winning hole, the peripheral control board 1510 uses some members such as the effect display device 1600 to Executing the action at the time of advance notice. Here, regarding the ball entering the winning hole at timing tx, it is one ball entering before the ball entering the winning hole at timing t1, and based on the ball entering the winning hole at timing tx. Even if the prize balls are paid out (the number of prize balls is given), the amount of balls put out does not reach the specific value, but when the prize balls are paid out based on the ball entering the prize opening at timing t1 (the number of prize balls is given). ), the amount of balls that come out will reach a certain value.

The operation at the time of advance notification is executed using the effect display device 1600 and the lamp B. Specifically, the performance display device 1600 is configured to display a message "Remaining until game limit + XX shots" as a prior notice display, and the LED is flashed on lamp B as a prior notice light emission. ing. This allows the player to understand that the game will be restricted in the near future. In addition, since only some components such as the effect display device 1600 are used for the operation at the time of advance notification, the variable effect based on the winning can be executed, and the interest in the variable effect is lost. Never.

In this example, the operation at the time of advance notification is executed when the ball enters the winning hole one ball before the ball enters the winning hole at timing t1. The operation at the time of advance notification may be executed at any timing, such as starting from the previous five pitches, as long as it is before the specific value is reached. Further, before the ball enters the winning hole at timing t1, the operation at the time of advance notification may be executed every time the ball enters a predetermined number of times or a special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. In addition, as another example of the operation at the time of advance notification, "remaining game limit + 〇〇 rounds" is displayed based on the amount of balls put out at that time for a certain period of time after the power is turned on or at any time after the power is turned on. , the player may be made aware of the approximate time until the game is stopped.

Next, at timing t1, it is determined that the amount of balls put out will reach a specific value by paying out the prize balls based on the ball entering the winning hole, but the main control board 1310 detects the ball entering the winning hole. Sometimes, the stoppage flag is turned ON and the game shifts to a "stoppage state" in which restriction pattern 3 is applied, which involves both "stopping the game" and "stopping firing." In the stopped state, it is impossible to shoot the game ball, and the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side cannot be progressed. In other words, in the stopped state, no variable display of special symbols or a jackpot game is executed, and even if there is a starting prize, no new variable display of special symbols is started.

In addition, regarding the effect display device 1600, lamps A to C, speakers, and movable bodies, the operation at the time when progress is not possible is executed after a predetermined time has elapsed from timing t1. Specifically, the effect display device 1600 displays the message "Game Restricted" as an indication that progress is not possible, and the lamps A and B light up or blink in a single color to indicate that progress is not possible. , and the speaker outputs a sound saying ``Since the daily ball limit has been reached, the game is being restricted'' as a sound indicating that the game is unable to proceed.

In addition, in the lamp C, the function display unit 1400 includes a status display, a normal symbol display, a normal reservation display, a first special symbol display, a first special reservation number display, a second special symbol display, and a second special symbol display. It is equipped with a special reservation number display, a round display, etc., and all of their LEDs are lit. However, as another example, the function display unit 1400 may be provided with an LED dedicated to discontinuation notification, and in the discontinuation state, the LED dedicated to discontinuation notification is turned on, and the other LEDs are turned off.

Further, the movable body is placed in an inoperable state in which it does not move after a predetermined time has elapsed from timing t1. For example, if the movable body is in operation before a predetermined time elapses from timing t1, the movable body is forcibly stopped mid-operation when the predetermined time elapses from timing t1. However, as another example, the movable body may be stopped after returning the movable body that is not in the initial position to the initial position after a predetermined time has elapsed from the timing t1. As a result, even if the movable body is located in front of the display area of the effect display device 1600 when a predetermined time has elapsed from timing t1, the movable body returns to the initial position after a predetermined time has elapsed from timing t1. This makes it difficult to overlook the progress-impossible display being executed on the effect display device 1600.

In this example, at timing t1, the state shifts to the stopped state, but the effect display device 1600, lamps A to C, speakers, and movable objects are unable to proceed after a predetermined time has elapsed from timing t1. Running the action at the time. This means that if a ball enters the winning slot at timing t1, the prize ball will be paid out based on the ball that entered the winning slot after that, but if a predetermined period of time has passed from timing t1. Later, by performing the action when progress is not possible, it is possible to wait for the prize ball to be paid out based on the ball entering the prize opening, and then execute the action when progress is not possible, thereby preventing a feeling of discomfort from occurring. be able to. However, the effect display device 1600, lamps A to C, speakers, and movable bodies may perform operations when progress is not possible from timing t1.

Furthermore, at timing t1, the external terminal board shifts to a halted state and outputs a security signal. This security signal is output when an abnormality is detected, a setting value is changed, or a setting value confirmation display is in progress.The same security signal is also output when the system transitions to the aborted state. . In other words, in the discontinued state, a forced output state is set in which a security signal is forcibly output even though an abnormality is not detected, a set value is not changed, or a set value confirmation display is not in progress. As a result, in the no-play state, a security signal is output to the hall computer, so that the hole side can know that the game has shifted to the no-play state.

In addition, in this example, at the time of timing t1, the state shifts to the discontinued state and the security signal is output. The security signal that is currently being output is not terminated and a new security signal is output, but the security signal that is currently being output is continued to be output. This prevents the hall side from misperceiving that abnormality detection has ended.

In addition, in this example, the external terminal board outputs various signals to the hall computer, in addition to the security signal, to inform the game status, ball entry into the winning hole, payout of the prize ball, etc. If such various signals are being output at timing t1, the security signal is output after the various signals being output are finished. Thereby, the hole side can reliably grasp that the state has shifted to the stopped state.

Furthermore, after shifting to the stoppage state at timing t1, when the player operates the handle 160, it is impossible to shoot the game ball into the game area 5a. However, in this example, when the amount of balls put out reaches a specific value, restriction pattern 3 is selected, which both "stops the game" and "stops firing", and the amount of balls put out reaches the specific value. If the limit pattern 1 is selected that only "stops the game" and does not "stop firing" when the player reaches the stop state, when the player operates the handle 160 , it becomes possible to shoot the game ball to the game area 5a.

In addition, at timing t1, after transitioning to the stopped state, the number of game balls B that entered the ball entrance (input hole, out hole) (number of balls entered) and the game balls paid out as prize balls. B's number of pitches (number of payouts) is not counted. In other words, it is made impossible to calculate the ratio of the number of balls put out to the number of balls entered, and the calculation is made so that it is not reflected in the base value displayed on the base monitor. However, the number of game balls B that entered the ball entrance (input hole, out hole) (number of balls entered) is subject to counting, and by calculating the ratio of the number of balls paid out to the number of balls entered, It may also be reflected in the base value displayed on the base monitor.

In addition, after transitioning to the stopped state at timing t1, it is possible to pay out a predetermined number of game balls as prize balls for those whose entry into the winning slot is detected before timing t1. , the number of game balls paid out as prize balls can be added to the number of balls held by the player. Thereby, the player can obtain prize balls for the number of game balls until the amount of balls put out reaches a specific value. On the other hand, at timing t1, if a ball is detected entering the winning hole after transitioning to the stop state, the predetermined number of game balls will not be paid out as prize balls, and the number of balls held by the player will not be paid out. There's nothing to add. However, at timing t1, after transitioning to the stop state, the configuration may be such that the ball entering the winning hole is not detected, and even if the ball entering the winning hole is not detected in the first place, the same applies to the winning hole. Even if a ball enters the ball, a predetermined number of game balls are not paid out as prize balls and are not added to the number of balls held by the player.

In addition, in this example, when the ball entering the winning hole is detected at timing t1, the prize ball based on the ball entering the winning hole has not been paid out, but the ball entering the winning hole is detected. Although it is determined that the amount of balls put out reaches a specific value by paying out the prize balls based on the above, and the state is shifted to a stoppage state, another method may be adopted. For example, at timing t1, when a ball entering the winning hole is detected, the payout of the prize ball based on the ball entering the winning hole is completed and the amount of balls put out reaches a specific value without shifting to the stop state. When the time limit is reached, the state may be changed to a halt state. As a result, it is possible to wait until the payout of the prize balls based on the ball entering the winning hole is completed and the amount of balls put out reaches a specific value, and then shift to the stop state, which prevents discomfort from occurring. can.

Further, in this example, after transitioning to the stop state at timing t1, no abnormality determination is made as to whether or not an abnormality such as magnetism or vibration is detected. In other words, even if an abnormality is detected after transitioning to the discontinued state, since abnormality determination is not performed, abnormality notification to notify the outside that an abnormality has occurred is not performed. In this way, after transitioning to a halted state, the action when progress is not possible corresponding to the halted state is executed with priority over abnormal notifications, thereby informing players and hall managers that the transition to a halted state will occur. It is possible to make sure that the person is aware of the fact that he/she has done so. However, it may be configured so that abnormalities such as magnetism and vibration are not detected after transitioning to the stop state at timing t1, and even if an abnormality is not detected in the first place, even if an abnormality occurs, There is no abnormality notification to notify the outside that the abnormality has occurred.

Next, after transitioning to the discontinued state, the power is turned off at timing t2, and then turned on again at timing t3. In this example, after transitioning to the stopped state, when the power is turned on again after the power is cut off, the power-on pattern is to maintain the gaming state at the time of the power cut, as well as maintain the amount of balls put out and the stopped state. Selecting a pattern. Therefore, at timing t3, after the power is turned on again, the normal state (non-discontinued state) is not returned, and the discontinued state is maintained as at timings t1 to t2.

Furthermore, the mode of the stopped state remains the same as the stopped state at timings t1 to t2. In other words, at timing t3, after the power is turned on again, the stopped state is maintained, so for example, the period is set such that it is impossible to proceed with the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side, and the performance display is The device 1600, lamps A to C, speakers, and movable bodies are performing operations when progress is not possible. As a result, when the power is turned on again after being turned off, it is possible to make the players and the hall manager aware that the game has returned to the suspended state. In this example, although not shown, before executing the operation when progress is not possible, the speaker outputs a voice saying "The amount of balls put out and the stopped state are maintained." At the same time, the production display device 1600 The system temporarily displays a message image that says, ``The amount of balls put out and the stopped state are maintained.'' Further, regarding the lamps A to C, when the power is turned on again, the LEDs are arranged to emit light in a color corresponding to the selected power-on pattern. In addition, there is a period during which the speaker outputs a voice saying "The amount of balls put out and the stopped state are maintained." and a message image saying "The amount of balls put out and the stopped state are maintained" is displayed on the production display device 1600. may be omitted.

Furthermore, at timing t3, after the power is turned on again, the effect display device 1600 displays a message saying "gaming is being restricted" as an indication that progress is not possible, but the stopped state at timings t1 to t2 is different. , the message content may be changed. In addition, at the same time as or prior to displaying the message "Games are being restricted," the message "The amount of balls put out and the stopped state are maintained" is displayed, and if the power is turned on the next business day, etc. In this case, it is possible to make the hall manager aware that the play is a continuation from the previous day, and to prevent the hall manager from becoming confused in a situation where the play is suddenly canceled.

Furthermore, when the power is turned on normally, instead of being turned on again after the power has been cut off in a halted state, the speaker outputs a normal power-on sound. However, in this example, after the power is turned on again at timing t3, the speaker outputs a voice saying "The amount of balls put out and the stopped state are maintained." However, the normal power-on sound is output. is not output. In this way, if the machine returns to the stopped state when the power is turned on again, the speaker outputs a voice saying "The ball output amount and the stopped state are maintained," with priority over the normal power-on sound. This allows the players and the hall manager to reliably recognize that the game has returned to the suspended state.

In addition, when turning on the power normally, instead of turning it on again after turning off the power in a stopped state, the movable body will check whether it operates normally or not, and perform initial movements to adjust it to its initial position. ing. However, in this example, after the power is turned on again at timing t3, the movable body has stopped operating and has not performed its initial operation. In this way, when the movable body returns to the stopped state when the power is turned on again, the movable body does not perform the initial operation, so that it can be recognized that the state has not been returned to the normal state (non-stopped state). However, at timing t3, after the power is turned on again, the movable body may perform its initial operation.

FIG. 127 is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine when the gaming restriction is canceled when the power is turned on again after being turned off. In the above explanation, after the amount of balls put out reaches a certain value and the state changes to the stopped state, when the power is turned off and then turned on again, the gaming state at the time of the power cut is maintained, and the amount of balls put out and the stopped state are maintained. However, in this example, when the power is turned on again after the power is shut off, the game state at the time of the power shutoff is cleared (initialized), and the amount of balls put out and the stopped state are cleared (initialized). Specifically, after transitioning to the stopped state, when the power is turned on again after being turned off, the power-on pattern clears (initializes) the gaming state at the time of power cutoff, and also clears the amount of balls to be played and the stopped state ( The power-on pattern that will be used (initialization) is selected. Here, since the explanation is the same as above until the power is turned off at timing t2, the explanation will be given after the power is turned on again at timing t3.

As shown in FIG. 127, after the power is turned off in the stopped state, the power is turned on again at timing t3, but when the power is turned on again after the power is turned off, the game state at the time of the power cut is changed as the power-on pattern. At the same time, a power-on pattern is selected that clears (initializes) the amount of balls put out and the stoppage state. Therefore, at timing t3, after the power is turned on again, the abort flag turns OFF and the abort state is not maintained, but before returning to the normal state (non-abort state), the normal state It is controlled to be in a return waiting state in which it waits for a return to (a state that is not a suspended state). The return waiting state is a period in which it is impossible to proceed with the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side. In other words, in the stopped state, no variable display of special symbols or a jackpot game is executed, and even if there is a starting prize, no new variable display of special symbols is started.

Furthermore, the effect display device 1600, lamps A to C, speakers, and movable bodies are performing the return operation at timing t3. Specifically, the performance display device 1600 displays the message "The amount of balls put out and the stopped state have been cleared" as a return display, and the lamps A to C display the power again as a return light. The LED will emit light in a color that corresponds to the power-on pattern selected at the time, and the speaker will output a voice that says, "The amount of balls put out and the stopped state have been cleared." There is.

Furthermore, at timing t3, the movable body is placed in an inoperable state in which it does not move.

Further, the external terminal board outputs a security signal at timing t3, as in the case of transitioning to the halted state. In other words, in the recovery waiting state, a forced output state is set in which a security signal is forcibly output even though no abnormality is being detected, setting values are being changed, or setting values are not being displayed for confirmation. Thereby, in the return waiting state, a security signal is output to the hall computer, and the hall side can grasp the possibility that the halted state will be canceled.

Further, after transitioning to the return waiting state at timing t3, when the player operates the handle 160, it is impossible to shoot the game ball into the game area 5a. As mentioned above in detail, if the restriction pattern 1 is selected, which only "stops the game" and does not "stop firing" when the amount of balls put out reaches a certain value, the game will be stopped. After the transition, when the player operates the handle 160, it is possible to shoot the game ball to the game area 5a, but even in such a case, at timing t3, the game ball enters the return waiting state. After the transition, when the player operates the handle 160, it is impossible to shoot the game ball into the game area 5a.

In addition, at timing t3, after transitioning to the return waiting state, the number of game balls B that entered the ball entrance (input hole, out hole) (number of balls entered) and the number of game balls paid out as prize balls are calculated. The number of pitches (number of payouts) of pitch B is not counted. In other words, it is made impossible to calculate the ratio of the number of balls put out to the number of balls entered, and the calculation is made so that it is not reflected in the base value displayed on the base monitor.

In addition, after transitioning to the return waiting state at timing t3, even if a ball entering the winning hole is detected, the predetermined number of game balls will not be paid out as prize balls, and the number of balls held by the player will not be paid out. There is no need to add to that. However, after transitioning to the return waiting state at timing t3, the configuration may be such that the ball entering the winning hole is not detected, and even if the ball entering the winning hole is not detected in the first place, the winning Even if a ball enters the mouth, a predetermined number of game balls are not paid out as prize balls and are not added to the number of balls held by the player.

Next, at timing t4 after a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed from timing t3, the return waiting state is ended and the gaming state on the main control board 1310 side is shifted to the normal state (non-discontinued state). ing. Here, the mode of the normal state (state not in the discontinued state) is the same as the normal state (state not in the discontinued state) before timing t1, and restrictions on the game in the discontinued state are lifted. Note that the timing for ending the return waiting state is not limited to the elapse of a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) from timing t3, and may be triggered by the hall manager performing a predetermined restart operation. For example, if the power-on operation at timing t3 is power-on pattern 3, the restart operation may be performed counterclockwise to return the setting key switch to the initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch OFF). For example, the OFF operation may be performed by rotating 60 degrees toward the direction.

Note that at timing t4, after returning to the normal state (non-stopped state), the lamps A to C perform initial light emission when the power is turned on. Note that the lamps A to C perform the initial light emission when the power is turned on, not only when the power is turned on again after the power is cut off in the halted state, but also when the power is turned on normally.

Further, at timing t4, after returning to the normal state (non-stopped state), the speaker outputs the normal power-on sound. Note that the speaker outputs the normal power-on sound in the same way when the power is turned on normally, not when the power is turned on again after being cut off in the halted state.

Furthermore, at timing t4, after the movable body returns to the normal state (not the stopped state), it is checked whether the movable body operates normally or not, and initial motion is performed to adjust the movable body to the initial position. ing. Note that the initial operation of the movable body is performed in the same way when the power is turned on normally, not when the power is turned on again after the power is cut off in the stopped state. However, for the movable body, the initial operation may be performed at timing t3 before returning to the normal state (non-stopped state). As a result, the initial movement of the movable object can be completed before returning to the normal state (non-stop state), and immediately after returning, the movement corresponding to the fluctuating performance (the performance based on the fluctuation pattern) can be started. It can be carried out.

In addition, the external terminal board outputs a security signal at timing t3 in the return waiting state, but it returns to the normal state (non-discontinued state) until a predetermined time elapses from timing t4. Although it has recovered, it continues to output security signals. As a result, even if the return waiting state ends in a short time, the security signal continues to be output to the hall computer, so the hall side can grasp the possibility that the suspended state will be canceled.

In this example, after the power is turned off in the aborted state, the power is turned on again at timing t3, but when the power is turned on again after the power is cut off, it is controlled to the return waiting state and then returned to the normal state (the aborted state). state). However, as another example, when the power is turned on again after being turned off, the control may be made to return to the normal state (non-discontinued state) without being controlled to the return waiting state. Thereby, when the power is turned on again after being turned off, the game can be started immediately after the power is turned off.

(Example of production when the amount of balls delivered reaches a certain value during a jackpot game or during a special symbol fluctuation display)
In this example, when the amount of balls put out reaches a specific value, the game is restricted. Of the amount of balls put out, the amount A of balls put out is the difference between the value at the time when the stoppage counter becomes the largest and the value when the stoppage counter becomes the smallest, and the payout amount B is the difference between the predetermined initial value of 0 and the value at the time when the number of balls in possession is the highest, and in both cases, the value at the time when the number of balls held is the highest is involved. ing. When a game ball enters the jackpot 2005 during a jackpot game, or when a special symbol is displayed in a variable or non-variable manner, a jackpot other than the jackpot 2005 (general jackpot 2001, normal jackpot 2002) , the first starting port 2003, and the second starting port 2004), the number of payouts increases due to the payout of the prize balls, and the stop counter increases, so at the timing when these balls enter, It is determined that the amount of balls to be played reaches a specific value, and the game is restricted. Here, first, we will explain a specific production example when the amount of balls put out reaches a specific value at the timing when a game ball enters the big winning hole 2005 during a jackpot game, and then we will explain a specific example of the production when the amount of balls put out reaches a specific value at the timing when a game ball enters the big winning hole 2005 during a jackpot game. Next, a specific example of performance will be described in the case where the amount of balls put out reaches a specific value at the timing when a game ball enters the general winning hole 2001.

FIG. 128 is a specific example of performance when the ball amount reaches a specific value at the timing when a game ball enters the jackpot hole during a jackpot game. In this example, 80000 is set as the above-mentioned "specific value", and restriction pattern 1 or restriction pattern 3 is selected as the above-mentioned "restriction pattern". In other words, if restriction pattern 1 is set, the game will be stopped when the amount of balls put out reaches a specific value (80,000 shots), and if restriction pattern 3 is set, the amount of balls put out will be stopped. When the number reaches a specific value (80,000 shots), the game enters a discontinued state with "stopping the game" and "stopping firing." In addition, in this example, when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes a jackpot, a 10-round jackpot game is given that opens and closes the big prize opening 2005 and the accessory prize opening 2006, and after the jackpot game ends, a high probability state is entered. shall be granted.

As shown in FIG. 128(A), the effect display device 1600 executes a variable effect (effect based on a variable pattern) corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol, and displays the variation of the decorative pattern in the central area of the effect display device 1600. Displaying. Here, during the "consecutive game mode" in which the high probability state continues depending on the lottery result of the special symbol or by accepting the game ball B into the first V winning hole 2007 or the second V winning hole 2008, etc. When the lottery result of the special symbol becomes a hit, "777" is displayed as a stop symbol of the decorative symbol in the central area of the effect display device 1600. In addition, in the upper right area of the performance display device 1600, a variable display of the second decorative pattern is performed, and when the lottery result of the special pattern becomes a hit, "〇" is displayed as the stop pattern of the second decorative pattern. are doing. Further, in the lower left area of the effect display device 1600, a hold display is displayed for the amount of time when a game ball enters the first starting port 2003 or the second starting port 2004, but the variable display of the special symbol is on standby. In addition, in the lower right area of the effect display device 1600, a message indicating that the “consecutive game mode” is in effect is displayed, and a gaming area 5a on the right side of the effect display device 1600 is displayed during the jackpot game. A ``hit right'' arrow is displayed that instructs the player to aim for the game ball to enter the big winning hole 2005 provided in the game.

As shown in FIG. 128(B), at the start of the jackpot game, the message "Special bonus! Aim for V!" is displayed in the center area of the effect display device 1600, and during the jackpot game, the jackpot 2005 and the winning At the same time as starting the opening/closing of the prize opening 2006, it is communicated that the player should aim for the game ball to enter the first V winning opening 2007 and the second V winning opening 2008 during the jackpot game.

As shown in FIG. 128(C), during the execution of the jackpot game, the current number of rounds is displayed in the upper left area of the effect display device 1600, and the “long game mode” is displayed in the center area of the effect display device 1600. The total number of prize balls paid out when game balls enter the big winning hole 2005 is displayed inside. Here, "3R" is displayed as the current number of rounds, and "18,000 shots GET" is displayed as the total number of prize balls.

In this example, before the amount of balls put out reaches a specific value on the main control board 1310 side and the game is restricted, the number of balls remaining until the amount of balls put out reaches a specific value is determined on the main control board 1310 side. When a game ball enters the grand prize opening 2005 where the remaining number of balls reaches "+1500 shots," the advance flag is turned ON, and the ON information of the advance flag is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. I'm trying to send it to the side. Then, on the peripheral control board 1510 side, upon receiving the ON information of the pre-flag, the operation at the time of pre-notification continues until the amount of balls put out reaches a specific value (until the number of remaining balls reaches 0). is running. Note that the calculation of the amount of balls to be put out is calculated based on a stop counter that is the difference between the number of shots and the number of payouts on the main control board 1310 side. In other words, regarding the number of balls remaining until the amount of balls put out reaches a specific value, the number of remaining balls increases as the number of balls fired increases, and the number of remaining balls decreases as the number of payouts increases. In addition, regarding the operation at the time of advance notification, a predetermined value before the amount of balls released reaches a specific value (in this example, the number of remaining balls until the amount of balls released reaches a specific value is 1500, that is, After the amount of balls put out reaches 78,500 shots, the game is continuously executed until the amount of balls put out reaches a specific value, so that the player does not miss the information regarding the restrictions on the game.

In addition, in this example, once advance notice is given, even if the number of balls remaining until the ball output reaches a specific value exceeds a predetermined value (1500 shots remaining), The notification does not end and continues until the amount of balls put out reaches a certain value. Specifically, after the pre-flag ON information is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 side, only the number of balls fired increases, and the remaining number of balls until the ball output reaches a specific value is a predetermined value ( Even if the number of shots remaining exceeds 1,500, the main control board 1310 side does not turn off the advance flag but keeps it on. As a result, if the number of balls remaining until the ball output reaches a certain value reaches a state of 1500 shots, the number of remaining balls exceeds 1500 shots, and then the number of remaining balls reaches 1500 shots again. etc., the pre-flag switching does not occur frequently on the main control board 1310 side, and the ON information of the pre-flag is suppressed from being sent to the peripheral control board 1510 many times, reducing the control burden and control complexity. can be avoided.

As shown in FIG. 128(D), when a game ball enters the jackpot 2005 during a jackpot game, the remaining number of balls until the ball output reaches a specific value becomes "+1500 shots". , in the upper area of the performance display device 1600, as an operation at the time of advance notice, a advance notice display indicating the number of balls remaining until the amount of balls to be played reaches a specific value, ``Remaining until game limit + 1500 shots'' is displayed. There is. Here, the final "10R" is displayed as the current number of rounds, and "18,800 shots GET" is displayed as the total number of prize balls. Continuing from before displaying the advance notice display, the performance display device 1600 displays the current number of rounds in the upper left area, and the game ball entered into the big prize opening 2005 during the "continuous game mode" in the upper area. The total number of prize balls paid out by hitting the ball, the second decorative stop symbol in the upper right area, and the "Right hit" arrow in the lower right area are displayed, but it shows "+1500 shots remaining until the game limit". Although the advance notice display is displayed so as to overlap with the background image, it is displayed so as not to overlap with the important information display regarding the jackpot game being executed. Specifically, in this example, the ``current number of rounds'', ``total number of prize balls'', and ``right-handed hit'' arrow are important information displays that should be made known to the player, so these items are not displayed. The advance notice display is displayed in a position that does not overlap with the information display. Furthermore, regarding these information displays, as long as they do not overlap and become invisible to the player and the content of the information display can be recognized, the advance notice display should overlap at least part of the information display. You can. Thereby, the information display regarding the jackpot game being executed is not missed, and the game during the jackpot game can be played smoothly. Regarding the movable body, it is possible to move towards the front of the effect display device 1600 during the jackpot game, but when the advance notice display "+1500 shots remaining until the game limit" is displayed, the movable body cannot move towards the front of the effect display device 1600. The movable body may be moved toward the target. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing during the jackpot game.

As shown in FIG. 128(E), at the end of the jackpot game, the message "Continue consecutive winnings mode! (10th time)" is displayed in the center area of the effect display device 1600, and after the jackpot game ends, the high probability It is conveying that the situation will continue (that the "consecutive game mode" will continue). Here, even at the end of the jackpot game, a prior notice display saying "+1500 shots remaining until the game limit" is displayed, just like during the jackpot game. Furthermore, since the display of this message "Successive game mode continues! (10th time)" is an important information display that should be made known to the player, a prior notice display is displayed in a position that does not overlap with such information display. It looks like this. Furthermore, with regard to these information displays, the advance notice display should overlap at least part of the information display, as long as the contents of the information display can be recognized rather than all of them overlapping and becoming invisible to the player. It's okay.

As shown in FIG. 128(F), when a variable effect corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol (effect based on a variable pattern) is executed again during the "continuous winning mode", in the central area of the effect display device 1600, Decorative designs are displayed in a variable manner. Further, in the upper right area of the effect display device 1600, a second decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner. In addition, in the lower left area of the performance display device 1600, four pending displays are displayed, and it is possible to change the mode of the pending display with a high probability of winning. Furthermore, while the decorative patterns are being displayed in a variable manner, the volume and light intensity can be adjusted by operating the setting adjustment button 204. An image is displayed that corresponds to the volume and amount of light inside. Note that the image corresponding to the volume and light intensity being adjusted is started to be displayed by operating the setting adjustment button 204, and is erased after a certain period of time has elapsed from the start of display.

In addition, while the decorative symbols are being displayed in a variable manner during the "continuous game mode", a prior notice display stating "+1,500 shots remaining until the game limit" is displayed, as is the case during the jackpot game. The effect display device 1600 includes a fluctuating display of decorative symbols in the center area, a fluctuating display of the second decorative symbol in the upper right area, a message of "Continuous Shot Mode" and an arrow of "Right Hit" in the lower right area, and a fluctuating display of the second decorative symbol in the lower right area. A pending display is displayed on the screen, and images corresponding to the volume and light intensity are displayed on the left area, but the advance notice display that says "+1500 shots remaining until the game limit" is displayed overlapping the background image, but while these are being executed. It is displayed so that it does not overlap with important information displays regarding variable games, etc. Specifically, in this example, "fluctuating display of decorative symbols", "fluctuating display of second decorative symbols", "message of 'consecutive shot mode'", "arrow of 'hit right'", "pending display", Since the "image corresponding to the volume and light intensity" is an important information display that should be recognized by the player, a prior notice display is displayed at a position that does not overlap with these information displays. Furthermore, regarding these information displays, as long as they do not overlap and become invisible to the player and the content of the information display can be recognized, the advance notice display should overlap at least part of the information display. It's okay. Thereby, the information display regarding the variable game being executed is not missed, and the game during the variable game can be played smoothly. Regarding the movable body, it is possible to move it toward the front of the effect display device 1600 during a variable game, but when the advance notice display "+1500 shots remaining until the game limit" is displayed, the movable body can move toward the front of the effect display device 1600. The movable body may be moved toward the target. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing during the variable game.

As shown in FIG. 128(G), when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes a hit again during the "continuous winning mode", "777" is displayed as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol in the central area of the performance display device 1600. it's shown. Here too, the advance notice display "+1500 shots remaining until the game limit" is displayed overlapping the background image, but it is also displayed as "777" which is a stop symbol of the decorative symbol (a type of important information display). are displayed so as not to overlap, so that the player can visually recognize the display of "777", which is the stop symbol of the decorative symbols.

As shown in FIG. 128(H), when starting the jackpot game again, the message "Special bonus! Aim for V!" is displayed in the center area of the effect display device 1600, and during the jackpot game, the big winning opening 2005 is displayed. At the same time, it is communicated that the player should aim for the game ball to enter the first V winning hole 2007 and the second V winning hole 2008 during the jackpot game. At this point, the advance notification display "+1500 shots remaining until the game limit" is displayed, just like during the previous jackpot game. Here too, the advance notice display "+1500 shots remaining until the game limit" is displayed overlapping the background image, but the message "Special bonus! Aim for V!" (a type of important information display) They are displayed so that they do not overlap, making the message ``Special Bonus! Aim for V!'' visible to the player.

As shown in FIG. 128(I), during the execution of the jackpot game, the current number of rounds is displayed in the upper left area of the effect display device 1600, and the “long game mode” is displayed in the center area of the effect display device 1600. The total number of prize balls paid out when game balls enter the big winning hole 2005 is displayed inside. Here, "10R" is displayed as the current number of rounds, and "19900 shots GET" is displayed as the total number of prize balls. At this point, due to the payout of prize balls during the jackpot game, the number of remaining balls until the amount of balls to be put out reaches a specific value is reduced, and a prior notice display is displayed that says ``Remaining until game limit + 10 shots''.

In this example, before the amount of balls put out reaches a certain value and the game is restricted, the number of balls remaining until the amount of balls put out reaches a certain value is monitored. If the remaining number of balls becomes "+0 shots" due to the payout of prize balls based on the game balls entering the mouth 2005, the stop flag is turned ON when the amount of balls put out reaches a specific value, and a predetermined number of shots is set. Until the clearing condition is met, the game enters a stopped state and performs the actions when progress is not possible. Then, when the state shifts to the stopped state, the jackpot game in progress is stopped (interrupted) to forcibly close the jackpot opening 2005, and no more game balls enter the jackpot opening 2005. Without having to do so, restrictions on gaming have begun.

As shown in FIG. 128 (J), due to the payout of prize balls based on the game ball entering the big winning hole 2005 during the jackpot game, the number of remaining balls until the amount of balls to be put out reaches a specific value is "+0". At the time when the game reaches a certain value (when transitioning to a stopped state), the upper area of the performance display device 1600 displays a ``gaming limit'' indicating the number of balls remaining until the amount of balls to be played reaches a specific value. A pre-announcement message "Remaining +0 shots" is displayed for a predetermined period of time (5 seconds in this example). Here, "10R" is displayed as the current number of rounds, and "19915 GET" is displayed as the total number of prize balls. Then, when a predetermined period of time (5 seconds in this example) has elapsed since the advance notification display "+0 shots left until game limit" is displayed, an image corresponding to the stopped state shown in FIG. 128(K) is displayed.

In this example, the amount of prize balls paid out when a game ball enters the big prize opening 2005 is reflected in the total number of prize balls displayed on the effect display device 1600 and the contents of the advance notice display. However, regarding the total number of prize balls and the contents of the advance notice display, the number of prize balls is not the point at which the game ball enters the grand prize opening 2005 when the ball amount reaches a certain value, but the amount of the prize ball is the total amount. The display continues until a predetermined period of time (5 seconds in this example) has elapsed after being reflected in the number of prize balls and the contents of the advance notice display. This prevents the player from missing information regarding whether or not the amount of balls put out has reached a specific value, and it is possible to ensure that the player is aware of the reason why the discontinued state starts thereafter. In addition, just before the number of balls remaining until the amount of balls to be dispensed reaches a certain value becomes "+0 shots", an advance notice is displayed saying "+10 shots remaining until the game limit", but when the number of balls remaining until the amount of balls to be played reaches a certain value is "+10 shots", Regarding the prize balls (15 in this example) that are paid out when game balls enter, even if the number of prize balls exceeds the remaining number of balls until reaching a specific value, the excess prize balls ( In this example, 5 pieces) are paid out. As a result, even though game balls have entered the big prize opening 2005, the prize balls will not be paid out in proportion to the number of prize balls exceeding a specific value, making it difficult for players to be dissatisfied. I can do it. However, if it is important to monitor the amount of balls put out from the perspective of fraud prevention, if the number of prize balls exceeds a specific value, the excess number of prize balls may not be paid out.

In the above, regarding the total number of prize balls and the contents of the advance notice display, the amount of prize balls is reflected in the total number of prize balls and the contents of the advance notice display, not when the amount of balls played reaches a specific value. Although the display is continued until the game is stopped, it may be ended when the amount of balls put out reaches a specific value, and an image corresponding to the stopped state may be displayed. In other words, the image shown in FIG. 128(J) may not be displayed, and the process may proceed to the image shown in FIG. 128(K), which will be described later. As a result, when the amount of balls put out reaches a certain value, the state shifts to the stopped state, but at the same time, by displaying an image corresponding to the stopped state, it is possible to immediately understand that the state has shifted to the stopped state. can.

In addition, when the amount of balls put out reaches a certain value, the game shifts to a stopped state and the game is restricted, so an image corresponding to the stopped state is displayed to prevent players from accidentally firing game balls. It is preferable that the "right hit" arrow that promotes the firing of the game ball after the game ball is fired is not visible to the player, and in this example, it is erased. In addition, under other circumstances, when the display promoting the firing of game balls is displayed (e.g. hitting right, hitting left, aiming for the V! display, etc.), the amount of balls thrown out reaches a certain value. In this case, the display promoting the firing of the game ball is made invisible to the player (erased) at that point.

As shown in FIG. 128(K), when the amount of balls put out reaches a specific value and the game is restricted, the effect display device 1600 displays an image corresponding to the stopped state. The images corresponding to the stopped state include the message ``Playing Restricted'', along with the message ``Playing has been restricted because the daily limit of 80,000 balls has been reached.'', ``Please call the staff.'', and ``Please call the staff.''. The checkout button is valid.'' is displayed. Note that the payment button here refers to the count button switch 180 for executing payment processing. In addition, before the amount of balls to be put out reaches a specific value, the effect display device 1600 displays the current number of rounds, the stop symbol of the second decorative symbol, the total number of prize balls, and a prior notice display. , information regarding such games should not be displayed (made invisible) and the message displayed on the blacked-out screen when the message "Playing Restrictions" is displayed after the amount of balls put out reaches a certain value. I am trying to display it. This makes it possible to understand that the amount of balls put out has reached a specific value and the gaming restriction has been implemented, and it can also be understood that the gaming restriction cannot be lifted without the operation of the hall manager. . Furthermore, the player can understand that the number of balls held by the player can be calculated by operating the counting button switch 180.

In the above example, the effect display device 1600 displays the current number of rounds, the stop symbol of the second decorative symbol, the total number of prize balls, and a prior notice display before the amount of balls to be put out reaches a specific value. However, information regarding such games is executed in such a way that all information becomes unrecognizable when the amount of balls put out reaches a certain value. However, when the amount of balls put out reaches a specific value, some of the information regarding the game may be made unrecognizable, and other information may be made recognizable. For example, the total number of prize balls and the advance notice display are information on whether or not to restrict the game, so they are made unrecognizable, and the current number of rounds and the stop symbol of the second decorative symbol are made unrecognizable. may be made recognizable. Thereby, it is possible to understand under what circumstances the amount of balls put out reaches the specific value even after the amount of balls put out reaches the specific value.

In this example, in order to satisfy a predetermined clearing condition for ending the halted state, it is necessary to turn on the power again in a predetermined power-on pattern after turning off the power. Here, when the power-on pattern is selected as the power-on pattern when the power is turned on, a power-on pattern that maintains the gaming state at the time of power-off, and also maintains the amount of balls put out and the stopped state (in this example, in the limit clear pattern table 1) is selected. When selecting power-on patterns 1, 4, and 5, power-on patterns 4 and 5 in limit clear pattern table 2, and power-on patterns 1, 4, and 5 in limit clear pattern table 3), clear the gaming state at power-off. (initialization) and also clears (initializes) the amount of balls put out and the stopped state (in this example, power-on patterns 2 and 3 in limit clear pattern table 1, limit clear pattern table 2 When power-on patterns 2 and 3 are selected, and power-on pattern 3 in limit clear pattern table 3 is selected), the power is turned on to maintain the gaming state at the time of power-off, and to clear (initialize) the amount of balls put out and the stopped state. A case where a pattern is selected (in this example, a case where power-on pattern 1 in limit clear pattern table 2 and power-on pattern 2 in limit clear pattern table 3 is selected) will be described.

First, after transitioning to the stopped state, when the power is turned off and turned on again, if you select a power-on pattern that maintains the gaming state at the time of the power cut and also maintains the amount of balls put out and the stopped state, the stopped state 128(K) is displayed again on the effect display device 1600. In this example, although not shown, before displaying the image shown in FIG. The display device 1600 is configured to temporarily display a message image saying, "The amount of balls put out and the stopped state are maintained." Here, the period dedicated to displaying the message image "The amount of balls put out and the stopped state are maintained" may be omitted on the production display device 1600, but the period of time dedicated to displaying the message image "The amount of balls put out and the stopped state are maintained" may be omitted. In order to make the administrator aware of this, the dedicated period is omitted, but a message image is displayed on the effect display device 1600 along with the image shown in FIG. may also be displayed.

In addition, after transitioning to the stopped state, when the power is turned off and turned on again, a power-on pattern is created that clears (initializes) the gaming state at the time the power was cut off, as well as clears (initializes) the amount of balls put out and the stopped state. When selected, the amount of balls put out and the no-stop state are cleared (initialized), and the restrictions on the game due to the no-go state are lifted. Here, when clearing (initializing) the amount of balls put out and the state of stopping, all information such as the stopping counter, the number of payouts, the number of shots, etc. that are involved in calculating the amount of balls put out are cleared (initialized). In addition, information regarding the remaining jackpot games when interrupted at the time of transitioning to the canceled state, and information regarding the "consecutive game mode" (high probability state) after the jackpot game, after transitioning to the canceled state, or when the power is cut off. However, when the power is turned on again after being shut off, information regarding the remaining jackpot games at the time of such interruption and information regarding the "consecutive game mode" (high probability state) after the jackpot game is lost. Therefore, it is assumed that the process starts in a low probability state. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 128(L), the effect display device 1600 displays an initial image in which the decorative pattern is stopped at the initial pattern.

On the other hand, if you select a power-on pattern that maintains the gaming state at the time of power interruption and clears (initializes) the amount of balls played and the stopped state when the power is turned back on after the power is turned off after entering the stopped state. By clearing (initializing) the amount of balls put out and the no-stop state, the restrictions on the game due to the no-go state are lifted. In addition, information regarding the remaining jackpot games when interrupted at the time of transitioning to the canceled state, and information regarding the "consecutive game mode" (high probability state) after the jackpot game, after transitioning to the canceled state, or when the power is cut off. However, even when the power is turned off and turned on again, information about the remaining jackpot games at the time of interruption and information about the "consecutive game mode" (high probability state) after a jackpot game can be maintained. , the game is restarted in the state it was in when it was interrupted. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 128 (L'), the effect display device 1600 returns to display an image related to the "consecutive game mode" (high probability state), which is the ending period when the final round of the jackpot game has ended. I try to do that. Furthermore, if you select a power-on pattern that clears (initializes) the amount of balls put out and the stopped state, a special message indicating that the game will be returned to the previous game will be displayed before returning to the game after turning the power on again after turning off the power. A return notification (an image or sound indicating that the state will be returned to the state before the game restriction) may be provided. This special return notification corresponds to the return display, return light emission, and return sound in the return waiting state from timing t3 to timing t4 in FIG. For example, outputting a voice saying, "It has been cleared." or displaying a message image on the production display device 1600, saying, "The ball amount and the stoppage status have been cleared."

FIG. 129 is a specific example of performance in the case where the amount of balls to be put out reaches a specific value at the timing when a game ball enters the general winning hole during the variable display of special symbols. In this example, 80000 is set as the above-mentioned "specific value", and restriction pattern 1 or restriction pattern 3 is selected as the above-mentioned "restriction pattern". In other words, if restriction pattern 1 is set, the game will be stopped when the amount of balls put out reaches a specific value (80,000 shots), and if restriction pattern 3 is set, the amount of balls put out will be stopped. When the number reaches a specific value (80,000 shots), the game enters a discontinued state with "stopping the game" and "stopping firing."

As shown in FIG. 129(A), the effect display device 1600 executes a variable effect (effect based on a variable pattern) corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol, and displays the change of the decorative pattern in the central area of the effect display device 1600. Displaying. Here, during the "consecutive game mode" in which the high probability state continues depending on the lottery result of the special symbol or by accepting the game ball B into the first V winning hole 2007 or the second V winning hole 2008, etc. When the lottery result of the special symbol becomes a hit, "777" is displayed as a stop symbol of the decorative symbol in the central area of the effect display device 1600. In addition, in the upper right area of the performance display device 1600, a variable display of the second decorative pattern is performed, and when the lottery result of the special pattern becomes a hit, "〇" is displayed as the stop pattern of the second decorative pattern. are doing. Further, in the lower left area of the effect display device 1600, a hold display is displayed for the amount of time when a game ball enters the first starting port 2003 or the second starting port 2004, but the variable display of the special symbol is on standby. In addition, in the lower right area of the effect display device 1600, a message indicating that the “consecutive game mode” is in effect is displayed, and a gaming area 5a on the right side of the effect display device 1600 is displayed during the jackpot game. A ``hit right'' arrow is displayed that instructs the player to aim for the game ball to enter the big winning hole 2005 provided in the game.

As shown in FIG. 129(B), at the start of the jackpot game, the message "Special bonus! Aim for V!" is displayed in the center area of the effect display device 1600, and during the jackpot game, the jackpot 2005 and the winning At the same time as starting the opening/closing of the prize opening 2006, it is communicated that the player should aim for the game ball to enter the first V winning opening 2007 and the second V winning opening 2008 during the jackpot game.

As shown in FIG. 129(C), during the execution of the jackpot game, the current number of rounds is displayed in the upper left area of the effect display device 1600, and the “long game mode” is displayed in the center area of the effect display device 1600. The total number of prize balls paid out when game balls enter the big winning hole 2005 is displayed inside. Here, "3R" is displayed as the current number of rounds, and "17,500 shots GET" is displayed as the total number of prize balls.

In this example, before the amount of balls put out reaches a specific value on the main control board 1310 side and the game is restricted, the number of remaining balls until the amount of balls put out reaches a specific value is determined on the main control board 1310 side. When a game ball enters the grand prize opening 2005 with the remaining number of balls reaching "+1500 shots," the advance flag is turned ON, and the ON information of the advance flag is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. I'm trying to send it to the side. Then, on the peripheral control board 1510 side, upon receiving the ON information of the pre-flag, the operation at the time of the pre-notification continues to be executed until the amount of balls to be put out reaches a specific value. Note that the calculation of the amount of balls to be put out is calculated based on a stop counter that is the difference between the number of shots and the number of payouts on the main control board 1310 side. In other words, regarding the number of balls remaining until the amount of balls put out reaches a specific value, the number of remaining balls increases as the number of balls fired increases, and the number of remaining balls decreases as the number of payouts increases. In addition, regarding the operation at the time of advance notification, a predetermined value before the amount of balls output reaches a specific value (in this example, the number of remaining balls until the amount of balls output reaches a specific value is 1500, that is, After the amount of balls put out reaches 78,500 shots, the game is continuously executed until the amount of balls put out reaches a specific value, so that the player does not miss the information regarding the restrictions on the game.

In addition, in this example, once advance notice is given, even if the remaining number of balls until the ball output reaches a specific value is less than a predetermined value (1500 shots remaining), The notification does not end and continues until the amount of balls put out reaches a certain value. Specifically, after the pre-flag ON information is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 side, only the number of balls fired increases, and the remaining number of balls until the ball output reaches a specific value is a predetermined value ( Even if the number of shots remaining is less than 1,500 shots, the main control board 1310 side does not turn off the advance flag but keeps it on. As a result, if the number of balls remaining until the ball output reaches a certain value reaches a state of 1500 shots, the number of remaining balls falls below 1500 shots, and then the number of remaining balls reaches 1500 shots again. etc., the pre-flag switching does not occur frequently on the main control board 1310 side, and the ON information of the pre-flag is suppressed from being sent to the peripheral control board 1510 many times, reducing the control burden and control complexity. can be avoided.

As shown in FIG. 129(D), when a game ball enters the jackpot 2005 during a jackpot game, the remaining number of balls until the ball output reaches a specific value becomes "+1500 shots". , in the upper area of the performance display device 1600, as an operation at the time of advance notice, a advance notice display indicating the number of balls remaining until the amount of balls to be played reaches a specific value, ``Remaining until game limit + 1500 shots'' is displayed. There is. Here, the final "10R" is displayed as the current number of rounds, and "18,800 shots GET" is displayed as the total number of prize balls. Continuing from before displaying the advance notice display, the performance display device 1600 displays the current number of rounds in the upper left area, and the game ball entered into the big prize opening 2005 during the "continuous game mode" in the upper area. The total number of prize balls paid out by hitting the ball, the second decorative stop symbol in the upper right area, and the "Right hit" arrow in the lower right area are displayed, but it shows "+1500 shots remaining until the game limit". Although the advance notice display is displayed so as to overlap with the background image, it is displayed so as not to overlap with the important information display regarding the jackpot game being executed. Specifically, in this example, the ``current number of rounds'', ``total number of prize balls'', and ``right-handed hit'' arrow are important information displays that should be made known to the player, so these items are not displayed. The advance notice display is displayed in a position that does not overlap with the information display. Furthermore, regarding these information displays, as long as they do not overlap and become invisible to the player and the content of the information display can be recognized, the advance notice display should overlap at least part of the information display. You can. Thereby, the information display regarding the jackpot game being executed is not missed, and the game during the jackpot game can be played smoothly. Regarding the movable body, it is possible to move towards the front of the effect display device 1600 during the jackpot game, but when the advance notice display "+1500 shots remaining until the game limit" is displayed, the movable body cannot move towards the front of the effect display device 1600. The movable body may be moved toward the target. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing during the jackpot game.

As shown in FIG. 129(E), at the end of the jackpot game, the message "Continue consecutive winnings mode! (10th time)" is displayed in the center area of the effect display device 1600, and after the jackpot game ends, the high probability It is conveying that the situation will continue (that the "consecutive game mode" will continue). Here, even at the end of the jackpot game, a prior notice display saying "+1500 shots remaining until the game limit" is displayed, just like during the jackpot game. Furthermore, since the display of this message "Successive game mode continues! (10th time)" is an important information display that should be made known to the player, a prior notice display is displayed in a position that does not overlap with such information display. It looks like this. Furthermore, regarding these information displays, as long as they do not overlap and become invisible to the player and the content of the information display can be recognized, the advance notice display should overlap at least part of the information display. You can.

As shown in FIG. 129(F), when a variable effect corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol (effect based on a variable pattern) is executed again during the "continuous winning mode", in the central area of the effect display device 1600, Decorative designs are displayed in a variable manner. Further, in the upper right area of the effect display device 1600, a second decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner. In addition, in the lower left area of the performance display device 1600, four pending displays are displayed, and it is possible to change the mode of the pending display with a high probability of winning. Furthermore, while the decorative patterns are being displayed in a variable manner, the volume and light intensity can be adjusted by operating the setting adjustment button 204. An image is displayed that corresponds to the volume and amount of light inside. Note that the image corresponding to the volume and light intensity being adjusted is started to be displayed by operating the setting adjustment button 204, and is erased after a certain period of time has elapsed from the start of display.

In addition, while the decorative symbols are being displayed in a variable manner during the "continuous game mode", a prior notice is displayed that says "+10 shots left until the game limit", just like during the jackpot game. The effect display device 1600 includes a fluctuating display of decorative symbols in the center area, a fluctuating display of the second decorative symbol in the upper right area, a message of "Continuous Shot Mode" and an arrow of "Right Hit" in the lower right area, and a fluctuating display of the second decorative symbol in the lower right area. A pending display is displayed on the screen, and images corresponding to the volume and light intensity are displayed on the left area, but the advance notice display of ``10 shots remaining until the game limit'' is displayed overlapping the background image, but while these are being executed. It is displayed so as not to overlap with important information displays regarding variable games, etc. Specifically, in this example, "fluctuating display of decorative symbols", "fluctuating display of second decorative symbols", "message of 'consecutive shot mode'", "arrow of 'hit right'", "pending display", Since the "image corresponding to the volume and light intensity" is an important information display that should be recognized by the player, a prior notice display is displayed at a position that does not overlap with these information displays. Furthermore, regarding these information displays, as long as they do not overlap and become invisible to the player and the content of the information display can be recognized, the advance notice display should overlap at least part of the information display. You can. Thereby, the information display regarding the variable game being executed is not missed, and the game during the variable game can be played smoothly. Regarding the movable body, it is possible to move towards the front of the effect display device 1600 during variable play, but when the advance notice display "Remaining + 10 shots until game limit" is displayed, the movable body may The movable body may be moved toward the target. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing during the variable game.

In this example, before the amount of balls put out reaches a specific value and the game is restricted, the number of remaining balls until the amount of balls put out reaches a certain value is monitored, but while the special symbols are being displayed as fluctuations. When the number of remaining balls becomes "+0 shots" due to the payout of the prize balls based on the game balls entering the general winning hole 2001, the stop flag is turned ON when the amount of balls to be put out reaches a specific value, Until a predetermined clearing condition is met, the process transitions to a stopped state and performs the operation when progress is not possible. Then, when the state shifts to the stopped state, the measurement of the variable time is stopped (interrupted) so that the variable display of the special symbol being executed does not progress, the game is forcibly stopped, and the game is restricted. are doing. Here, a description will be given of the function display unit 1400 when measuring the variable time is stopped (interrupted) so that the variable display of the special symbol being executed does not proceed. In the function display unit 1400, the LED on the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display continues to blink (control mode during variable display) (the variable time is not measured, so it continues to blink until the clearing condition is met). continue). However, in the function display unit 1400, the LEDs in the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display may not be blinking, but may be all on or all off. In this case, not only the LED of the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display, but also the other LEDs in the function display unit 1400 (status display, normal symbol display, normal reservation display, first special reservation number The LEDs on the display, the second special reservation number display, the round display, etc. are also turned on, all on, and all off. Furthermore, when the function display unit 1400 is provided with an LED dedicated to discontinuation notification, the LED dedicated to discontinuation notification may be turned on, and the other LEDs may be turned off. Note that the remaining variation time when the measurement of the variation time is stopped (interrupted) is stored in the RAM built in the main control board 1310.

As shown in FIG. 129 (G), due to the payout of prize balls based on the game balls entering the general winning hole 2001 during the variable display of special symbols, the number of remaining balls until the amount of balls to be put out reaches a specific value. When the number of balls reaches "+0 shots", the upper area of the performance display device 1600 displays "+0 shots remaining until the game limit" as an action at the time of advance notification, which tells the number of balls remaining until the amount of balls to be released reaches a specific value. This advance notice is displayed for a predetermined period of time (5 seconds in this example). Here, just before the remaining number of balls until the ball output reaches a certain value becomes "+0 shots", the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner and the second decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner, but the ball output amount is When the number of balls remaining until reaching a specific value reaches "+0 shots", the fluctuating display of that decorative symbol is forcibly stopped with a predetermined stop symbol (in this example, "767"), and the second The fluctuating display of decorative symbols is forcibly stopped at a predetermined stop symbol (in this example, an "x"). Then, when a predetermined period of time (5 seconds in this example) has elapsed since the advance notification display "+0 shots left until game limit" is displayed, an image corresponding to the stopped state shown in FIG. 129(H) is displayed.

In this example, the amount of prize balls paid out when game balls enter the general winning hole 2001 is reflected in the content of the advance notice display displayed on the effect display device 1600. Regarding the content, it is not the time when the game ball enters the general winning hole 2001 when the amount of balls to be played reaches a specific value, but the time after the amount of the prize ball is reflected in the content of the advance notice display (a predetermined period of time) The display continues until 5 seconds (in the example, 5 seconds) have elapsed. This prevents the player from overlooking information regarding whether or not the amount of balls put out has reached a specific value, and the player can surely be made aware of the reason why the discontinuation state starts thereafter. In addition, just before the number of balls remaining until the amount of balls to be dispensed reaches a certain value becomes "+0 shots", an advance notice is displayed that says "+10 shots remaining until the game limit", but the general winning slot 2001 Regarding the prize balls (15 in this example) that are paid out when game balls enter, even if the number of prize balls exceeds the remaining number of balls until reaching a specific value, the excess prize balls ( In this example, 5 pieces) are paid out. As a result, even though game balls have entered the general winning hole 2001, the prize balls will not be paid out in proportion to the number of prize balls exceeding a specific value, making it difficult for players to be dissatisfied. Can be done. However, if it is important to monitor the amount of balls put out from the perspective of fraud prevention, if the number of prize balls exceeds a specific value, the excess number of prize balls may not be paid out.

In the above, the contents of the advance notice display are not displayed when the amount of balls played reaches a certain value, but are displayed continuously until the amount of prize balls is reflected in the contents of the advance notice display. However, when the amount of balls put out reaches a specific value, the game may end, and an image corresponding to the stopped state may be displayed. In other words, the image shown in FIG. 129(G) may not be displayed, and the process may proceed to the image shown in FIG. 129(H), which will be described later. As a result, when the amount of balls put out reaches a certain value, the state shifts to the stopped state, but at the same time, by displaying an image corresponding to the stopped state, it is possible to immediately understand that the state has shifted to the stopped state. can.

In addition, when the amount of balls put out reaches a certain value, the game shifts to a stopped state and the game is restricted, so an image corresponding to the stopped state is displayed to prevent players from accidentally firing game balls. It is preferable that the "right hit" arrow that promotes the firing of the game ball after the ball is fired is not visible to the player, and in this example, it is erased. In addition, under other circumstances, when a display promoting the firing of game balls is displayed (for example, a right-handed display, a left-handed display, a "Aim for V!" display, etc.), the amount of balls thrown out reaches a certain value. In this case, the display promoting the firing of the game ball is made invisible to the player (erased) at that point.

As shown in FIG. 129(H), when the amount of balls put out reaches a specific value and the game is restricted, the effect display device 1600 displays an image corresponding to the stopped state. Images corresponding to the stopped state include the message ``Playing Restricted'', along with the message ``We have reached the daily limit of 80,000 balls, so playing is restricted.'', ``Please call the staff.'', and ``Please call the staff.'' The checkout button is valid.'' is displayed. Note that the payment button here refers to the count button switch 180 for executing payment processing. Furthermore, when the amount of balls put out reaches a specific value, the effect display device 1600 displays a stop symbol of the decorative symbol, a stop symbol of the second decorative symbol, a pending display, and a prior notice display. Regarding the information, when the message "Playing Restriction" is displayed after the amount of balls put out reaches a certain value, it will not be displayed (made invisible) and the message will be displayed on the darkened screen. There is. This makes it possible to understand that the amount of balls put out has reached a specific value and the gaming restriction has been implemented, and it can also be understood that the gaming restriction cannot be lifted without the operation of the hall manager. . Furthermore, the player can understand that the number of balls held by the player can be calculated by operating the counting button switch 180.

In the above, the effect display device 1600 displays the stop symbol of the decorative symbol, the stop symbol of the second decorative symbol, the hold display, and the advance notice display before the amount of balls to be dispensed reaches a specific value. Information regarding such games is executed in such a way that all information becomes unrecognizable when the amount of balls put out reaches a specific value. However, when the amount of balls put out reaches a specific value, some of the information related to the game may be made unrecognizable, and other information may be made recognizable. For example, the advance notice display is information on whether or not to restrict the game, so it is made unrecognizable, and the stop symbol of the decorative symbol, the stop symbol of the second decorative symbol, and the hold display are made to be unrecognizable. It may also be made recognizable. This makes it possible to understand under what circumstances the amount of balls put out reaches the specific value even after the amount of balls put out reaches the specific value.

Here, if the game ball enters the general winning hole 2001 while the special symbol is being displayed and the amount of balls put out reaches a specific value, the game ball enters the big winning hole 2005 during the jackpot game. As a result, the same actions as when the amount of balls put out reaches a specific value are performed, and an image corresponding to the stopped state is displayed. In this way, when the amount of balls played reaches a certain value and the game is restricted, regardless of the trigger, a common notification is made, indicating that the state has transitioned to a discontinued state. can be clearly understood.

In this example, in order to satisfy a predetermined clearing condition for ending the halted state, it is necessary to turn on the power again in a predetermined power-on pattern after turning off the power. Here, when the power-on pattern is selected as the power-on pattern when the power is turned on, a power-on pattern that maintains the gaming state at the time of power-off, and also maintains the amount of balls put out and the stopped state (in this example, in the limit clear pattern table 1) is selected. (When selecting power-on patterns 1, 4, 5, power-on patterns 4, 5 in limit clear pattern table 2, power-on patterns 1, 4, 5 in limit clear pattern table 3), clear the gaming state at power-off. (initialization) and also clears (initializes) the amount of balls put out and the stopped state (in this example, power-on patterns 2 and 3 in limit clear pattern table 1, limit clear pattern table 2 When power-on patterns 2 and 3 are selected, and power-on pattern 3 in limit clear pattern table 3 is selected), the power is turned on to maintain the gaming state at the time of power shutoff and clear (initialize) the amount of balls put out and the stopped state. A case where a pattern is selected (in this example, a case where power-on pattern 1 in the limit clear pattern table 2 and power-on pattern 2 in the limit clear pattern table 3 is selected) will be described.

First, after transitioning to the stopped state, when the power is turned off and turned on again, if you select a power-on pattern that maintains the gaming state at the time of the power cut and also maintains the amount of balls put out and the stopped state, the stopped state 129 (H) is displayed again on the effect display device 1600.

In addition, after transitioning to the stopped state, when the power is turned on again after being turned off, the power-on pattern is set to clear (initialize) the gaming state at the time of the power cut, as well as clear (initialize) the amount of balls put out and the stopped state. When selected, the amount of balls put out and the no-stop state are cleared (initialized), and the restrictions on the game due to the no-go state are lifted. Here, when clearing (initializing) the amount of balls put out and the stopping state, all information such as the stopping counter, the number of payouts, the number of shots, etc. that are involved in calculating the amount of balls put out are cleared (initialized). In addition, information regarding the remaining variable time when the suspension is interrupted at the time of transitioning to the discontinued state, information regarding "consecutive play mode" (high probability state), and information regarding suspension, after transitioning to the discontinued state, or when the power is cut off. However, when the power is turned off and then turned on again, information about the remaining variable time after such an interruption, information about "consecutive shooting mode" (high probability state), and information about holds are lost. Therefore, it is assumed that the process starts in a low probability state with no reservations. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 129(I), the effect display device 1600 displays an initial image in which there is no pending display and the decorative pattern is stopped at the initial pattern.

On the other hand, if you select a power-on pattern that maintains the gaming state at the time of power interruption and clears (initializes) the amount of balls played and the stopped state when the power is turned back on after the power is turned off after the state has changed to the stopped state. By clearing (initializing) the amount of balls put out and the no-stop state, the restrictions on the game due to the no-go state are lifted. In addition, information regarding the remaining variable time when the suspension is interrupted at the time of transitioning to the discontinued state, information regarding "consecutive play mode" (high probability state), and information regarding suspension, after transitioning to the discontinued state, or when the power is cut off. However, even when the power is turned on again after being turned off, information on the remaining variable time after such an interruption, information on "consecutive shooting mode" (high probability state), and information on holds are maintained. By doing so, it is assumed that the process is resumed in a high probability state, with a hold, and in the middle of the previous fluctuation. In other words, the remaining variation time when the measurement of variation time is stopped (interrupted) at the time of transition to the aborted state is stored in the RAM built in the main control board 1310, but when the power is turned on again Afterwards, the variable display of the decorative pattern and the variable display of the second decorative pattern are executed for the remaining variable time. For this reason, as shown in FIG. 129 (I'), the effect display device 1600 returns to display the image related to the "consecutive game mode" (high probability state), and displays a variable display of the decorative pattern based on the information regarding the hold. and the variable display of the second decorative pattern is restarted. In addition, if you select a power-on pattern that clears (initializes) the amount of balls put out and the stopped state, you will be asked to return to the state in the middle of the previous game before returning to various effect displays after turning the power on again after turning off the power. A special return notification (an image and sound indicating that the game will return to the state before the game restriction) may be made.

In addition, in the above, when the amount of balls put out during a jackpot game reaches a specific value, the stop state occurs immediately, but as another example, if the amount of balls put out reaches a specific value during a jackpot game Furthermore, the start timing of the stopped state may be delayed until the end of the jackpot game. That is, if the amount of balls to be put out reaches a specific value during a plurality of rounds in a jackpot game, the jackpot game may be continued until the final round ends. In such a case, even after the amount of balls put out reaches a specific value, the amount of balls put out increases due to the payout of prize balls, but such an increase in the amount of balls put out is allowed. Further, after waiting for the end of the jackpot game, the game enters an aborted state with "stopping the game" and "stopping firing." As a result, the game is not restricted during the jackpot game, and there is no disadvantage in acquiring prize balls, so that it is possible to prevent the player from becoming dissatisfied.

Furthermore, in the fourth embodiment described above, explanation will be given on a type of gaming machine (so-called enclosed gaming machine, managed gaming machine) that recycles game balls without paying out prize balls as real balls outside the gaming machine. However, the above-mentioned "technology that generates a stopped state based on the amount of balls put out (balls put out amount A, B)" is not limited to these types of gaming machines, but also applies to conventional gaming machines (as a real ball outside the gaming machine). The present invention may also be applied to a type of gaming machine that pays out prize balls. Further, when applied to a conventional type of gaming machine, it is preferable that the timing of occurrence of a discontinued state and game control during a discontinued state are as follows.

That is, the conventional type of gaming machine has a payout control board in place of the frame control board 740, and the payout control board controls the gaming machine by using the game balls stored in the ball tank on the back side of the gaming machine as prize balls. Generally, it is possible to control the dispensing device that dispenses to the outside. Then, the prize balls paid out to the ball tray on the front side of the gaming machine are awarded to the player in the form of real balls, but in the case of this configuration, the game balls enter the various prize openings and the prize balls are awarded to the player. There is a longer time lag before the balls are paid out than in a type of gaming machine that recycles the game balls. In particular, during a jackpot game, a situation may occur in which multiple game balls enter the jackpot 2005 and many of the winning balls are stored as unpaid, and in such a case, the above-mentioned stopped state There is a possibility that many prize balls may remain unpaid and stored even after the start of the game. In such a case, as in the fourth embodiment described above, the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side is stopped with the start of the stopped state, and at the same time, the payout process on the payout control board is stopped. If the ball is also stopped, there is a risk that the player may not be able to obtain the profits that the player should have earned (prize balls that are stored as unpaid). Therefore, when applying the "technology for generating a stop state based on the amount of balls put out (amounts A and B of balls put out)" to a conventional type gaming machine, the following two patterns of control methods can be considered.

First, in the first pattern, the "number of payouts" to be calculated by the stop counter is the number actually paid out. Specifically, a ball sensor is provided to detect the number of game balls sent out by the payout device toward the ball tray, and the detection result of the ball sensor is reflected in the "number of payouts." As a result, the number of unpaid prize balls can be reduced compared to calculating the stoppage counter based on the prize ball information on the main control board 1310.

Moreover, as a second pattern, even if the game is stopped in a stopped state, only the "payout of unpaid prize balls" continues. Then, the game is completely stopped when there are no more unpaid prize balls. Note that the second pattern may be used in combination with the first pattern.

(Addition of limit clear pattern table 4)
In the above, limit clear pattern tables 1 to 3 are provided as limit clear pattern tables with different clearing conditions of "ball payout amount calculated before the start of the stopped state" and "restriction on games during the stopped state". However, a restriction clear pattern table 4 may be provided separately from this. Even in such a case, one of the limit clear pattern tables 1 to 4 is selected by operating the limit clear pattern selection switch that can be operated by the hall manager. However, as for the limit clear pattern table, only the limit clear pattern table 4 may be used from the viewpoint of reducing the capacity of the ROM that stores various processing programs.

FIG. 130 shows the limit clear pattern table 4 that is selected when the limit clear pattern selection switch is set to "4". When this restriction clear pattern table 4 is selected, the game hall side can select whether to maintain or clear the "restrictions on games in the stopped state" when the power is turned on again after being turned off. However, the "ball output amount calculated before the start of the stopped state" must be cleared when the power is turned on again after being turned off.

In power-on pattern 1, when the power is turned on, the gaming state at the time of power-off is maintained, but the "amount of balls played before and after the start of the stoppage state" is cleared. (initialization), but on the other hand, the "restrictions on gaming during the suspended state" are maintained. In addition, as a form of notification to the outside, the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5 and door frame 3 are made to emit green light from the time the power is turned on until a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and the speaker A voice saying "The amount of balls put out has been cleared. The stopped state is maintained." is outputted, and the production display device 1600 displays "The amount of balls put out has been cleared. The stopped state is maintained." A message image is displayed (corresponding to clear notification 1, which will be described later, and progress not possible notification). Further, in addition to these notifications, a clearing method notification indicating a method for clearing the suspended state may be added to the hall manager.

Power-on pattern 2 clears (initializes) the gaming state at the time of power-off when the power is turned on, but "the amount of balls that come out before or after the stopped state starts" Also, the "restrictions on gaming during the stopped state" have been cleared (initialized). Specifically, when the game is restricted by the above-mentioned restriction pattern 1, the game is "stopped", but when the stopped state is cleared, the "game stop" is canceled and the game is stopped by the restriction pattern 2. If the game is restricted by , it is "stopped", but when the stopped state is cleared, "stopped firing" is canceled, and if the game is restricted by restriction pattern 3, , "game stop" and "fire stop" have been stopped, but when the stopped state is cleared, "game stop" and "fire stop" are canceled, and in either case, the main control board 1310 side It is now possible to restart the game (main game). In addition, as a form of notification to the outside, the LEDs mounted on the game board 5 and various decorative boards of the door frame 3 are made to emit red light from the time the power is turned on until a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and the speaker A voice saying "The amount of balls put out and the stopped state have been cleared." is outputted, and a message image is displayed on the effect display device 1600 saying "The amount of balls put out and the stopped state have been cleared." (Equivalent to clear notification 2 described later).

In power-on pattern 3, when the power is turned on, the gaming state at the time of power-off is cleared (initialized), but "the amount of balls played before or after the no-stop state starts" Also, the "restrictions on gaming during the stopped state" have been cleared (initialized). In addition, as a form of notification to the outside, the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5 and door frame 3 are made to emit red light from the time the power is turned on until a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and from the speakers. A sound saying "The amount of balls put out and the stopped state have been cleared." is outputted, and a message image is displayed on the effect display device 1600 saying "The amount of balls put out and the stopped state have been cleared." . (Equivalent to clear notification 2 described later).

In power-on pattern 4, when the power is turned on, the gaming state at power-off is maintained, but the "amount of balls put out before the stoppage state starts and after the stoppage state starts" is cleared. (initialization), but on the other hand, the "restrictions on gaming during the suspended state" are maintained. In addition, as a form of notification to the outside, the LEDs mounted on the game board 5 and various decorative boards of the door frame 3 are made to emit blue light from the time the power is turned on until a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and from the speakers. A voice saying "The amount of balls put out has been cleared. The stopped state is maintained." is outputted, and the production display device 1600 displays "The amount of balls put out has been cleared. The stopped state is maintained." A message image is displayed (corresponding to clear notification 1, which will be described later, and a game-disabled notification). Further, in addition to these notifications, a clearing method notification indicating a method for clearing the suspended state may be added to the hall manager.

In power-on pattern 5, when the power is turned on, the gaming state at the time of power-off is maintained, but the "amount of balls put out before the no-stop state starts or after the no-go state" and "the no-stop state "Restrictions on indoor games" are also maintained. In addition, as a form of notification to the outside, the LEDs mounted on the game board 5 and various decorative boards of the door frame 3 are made to emit blue light from the time the power is turned on until a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and from the speakers. An audio message saying "The amount of balls put out and the stopped state are maintained." is outputted, and a message image is displayed on the effect display device 1600 saying "The amount of balls put out and the stopped state are maintained." ing.

In this way, in the limit clear pattern table 4, when the power is turned on, the gaming state at power-off is maintained as in power-on patterns 1 and 4, or the gaming state at power-off is maintained as in power-on patterns 2 and 3. Regardless of whether clear (initialize) the state is selected, clear (initialize) "the amount of balls issued before the stopped state starts or after the stopped state starts" )are doing. This prevents the hall manager from forgetting to clear the amount of balls put out when the power is turned on, such as when the store opens, and prevents the situation where the amount of balls put out reaches a certain value immediately after the store opens and the hall is stopped. be able to. In addition, if power-on pattern 5 is selected when the power is turned on, the above-mentioned ball extraction process is only executed and the game does not start. The amount of balls released since the state started is maintained without being cleared (initialized).

In addition, in the limit clear pattern table 4, when the power is turned on, only when the gaming state at power-off is cleared (initialized) as in power-on patterns 2 and 3, the "restrictions on gaming during the suspended state" is cleared. (initialized). On the other hand, when the power is turned on, if the gaming state at power-off is maintained as in power-on patterns 1 and 4, the "restriction on gaming during the stopped state" is maintained. In other words, regarding the "restriction on gaming during the halted state", when the power is turned on again after being turned off, it is possible for the gaming hall to select whether to maintain or clear the restriction. For example, if a game has already been suspended and you want to cancel the gaming restrictions, all you have to do is turn off the power, then perform the power-on operation to clear the ``gaming restrictions while the game is suspended'', and the game can be canceled. If you want to maintain the restrictions, all you have to do is turn off the power and then perform an operation when turning on the power so as to maintain the "restrictions on games in the suspended state." Furthermore, if power-on pattern 5 is selected when the power is turned on, the above-mentioned ball extraction process is only executed and the game does not start, so the "restriction on gaming in the stopped state" is cleared. It is maintained without (initialization).

(Notification regarding the amount of balls released when an abnormality is detected)
In this example, it is possible to detect an abnormality such as magnetism or vibration while the power is turned on, and it is determined whether or not an abnormality is detected. Further, depending on the type of abnormality, the progress of the game is stopped when the abnormality is detected, and the game cannot be restarted unless the power is turned on again. However, when the power is turned on again, for example, as is clear from the limit clear pattern table 4, depending on the mode of operation at power-on, the This will result in clearing (initializing) the amount of balls to be played and the restrictions on gaming during the stopped state. For this reason, by intentionally generating an abnormality at the stage before the ball output approaches a certain value and transitioning to the stopped state, or during the stopped state, the hall manager is forced to turn on the power again. There is a possibility that new fraud may be carried out in an attempt to clear (initialize) the amount of balls played before the game is stopped or after the game is stopped, or the restrictions on gaming during the game are stopped. In this example, in order to prevent new fraud such as this, when an abnormality is detected, we will display information such as ``the amount of balls played before the stopped state started or after the stopped state started'' and ``the amount of balls played during the stopped state.'' A case in which notification regarding "restrictions" is executed will be described below.

In addition, in this example, an abnormality judgment is made to determine whether or not an abnormality is detected while the power is turned on, but the type of abnormality detected is whether it is a mild abnormality or a severe abnormality. ing. Further, detection of a slight abnormality includes the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4, the state in which a frame decoration member is removed, and the like. If a slight abnormality is detected, the progress of the game is not stopped. In addition, when a minor abnormality is detected, an abnormality notification is executed to notify the outside that a minor abnormality has occurred, but an error termination condition such as a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) has passed is met. By doing so, the abnormality notification is terminated. In other words, if a slight abnormality is detected, there is a possibility that the main body frame 4 was opened relative to the outer frame 2 due to an unauthorized act, but the main body frame 4 was opened relative to the outer frame 2. Since it is easy to confirm whether or not there is a problem, the abnormality notification is ended at a predetermined timing.

On the other hand, detection of severe abnormality includes detection of magnetism, vibration, and radio waves for the pachinko machine 1. The pachinko machine 1 of this example is equipped with a magnetic sensor for detecting magnetism, a vibration sensor for detecting vibration, and a radio wave sensor for detecting unauthorized radio waves. , making it possible to detect radio waves. If a serious abnormality is detected, it is highly likely that the magnetism, vibration, or radio waves were applied due to fraudulent activity rather than the work of the hall manager, so the progress of the game is stopped. . In addition, when a severe abnormality is detected, an abnormality notification is executed to notify the outside that a severe abnormality has occurred, but even if a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed, the abnormality notification is not performed. It never ends. Therefore, if a serious abnormality occurs, the hall manager must turn off the power to end the abnormality notification, and then turn the power back on to resume the game. I have to.

Regarding abnormality notification, not only the members on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 such as the performance display device 1600 but also the members on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 such as the back side of the main body frame 4 and the back side of the game board 5 are used. and is running. Thereby, for example, even if the hall manager is working on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, it is possible to know that an abnormality has occurred.

131 to 133 are time charts showing the behavior of the pachinko machine when a slight abnormality or a severe abnormality occurs. In this example, the behavior of a pachinko machine when a slight abnormality occurs during a normal state or a stopped state, the behavior of a pachinko machine when a severe abnormality occurs during a normal state, and the behavior of a pachinko machine when a severe abnormality occurs during a stopped state. The behavior of the pachinko machine in this case will be explained in order. In addition, the normal state is a state where the amount of balls put out is not a stopped state before it reaches a specific value, and when a special symbol is being displayed as a fluctuation, a jackpot game is being executed, or a special symbol is being displayed as a fluctuation or a jackpot game is being executed. It may be in either the standby state or the standby state.

Also, at timing t1, when it is determined that the amount of balls put out will reach a specific value due to the payout of the prize ball based on the ball entering the winning hole, it is determined that the stop flag is turned ON, and the system shifts to the stop state. The case has already been explained using FIG. 126. In other words, regarding the behavior of a pachinko machine in a state where it is not in a stopped state (normal state) before the amount of balls put out reaches a certain value, or in a state in which it is not in a stopped state, but no minor abnormality or severe abnormality has occurred, Since this has already been explained, the explanation is omitted here. However, in FIG. 126, after transitioning to the stopped state at timing t1, no abnormality determination is made as to whether or not an abnormality such as magnetism or vibration is detected, but in this example, even during the stopped state It is assumed that an abnormality determination is made and an abnormality notification is executed to notify the outside that an abnormality has occurred.

Further, in this example, when the amount of balls put out reaches a specific value, a restriction pattern 3 is selected in which both "stopping the game" and "stopping firing" are performed as restrictions on the game in the stopped state. In addition, when the power is turned on again after being turned off, the limit clear pattern table 4 is used as the limit clear pattern table, and the power on pattern is a power on pattern that clears the amount of balls put out but maintains the stopped state. The case where patterns 1 and 4 are selected and the case where power-on patterns 2 and 3, which clear the ball output amount and the stopped state, are selected are explained.

FIG. 131 is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine when a slight abnormality occurs during the normal state or the stopped state.

First, before timing t1 at which the state shifts to the discontinued state, control is performed to a normal state (a state that is not a discontinued state). The behavior in the normal state (non-stopped state) is as described above.

Here, a case will be described in which a slight abnormality is detected at timing tx in a normal state (non-stopped state). When a slight abnormality is detected, an abnormality notification is executed to notify the outside that the abnormality has occurred, and the effect display device 1600 and lamp A (LED mounted on various decorative boards of the frame decoration member) are used. , lamp B (LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5), speakers, and external terminal boards perform operations at the time of error occurrence as an abnormality notification. On the other hand, with respect to aspects other than the execution of abnormality notification, such as the progress of the game, there has been no change from the situation in which a slight abnormality was not detected before timing tx, and the behavior is in the normal state (non-discontinued state). shall be maintained.

Specifically, regarding the effect display device 1600, lamp A (LED mounted on various decorative boards of the frame decoration member), lamp B (LED mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5), and the speaker, At timing tx, the operation at the time of error occurrence is executed. For example, if the opening of the main body frame 4 relative to the outer frame 2 is detected as a minor abnormality, the effect display device 1600 displays the message "Door opening error" as error display A, and also displays the current situation. Display A displays the message "Remaining until game limit + XX balls" to indicate the remaining amount of balls to be played until the game is limited (remaining amount of balls to be played until the amount of balls to be played reaches a certain value). I try to do that. Specifically, the advance notice display is executed after the remaining number of balls to be dispensed reaches a certain value of 5000 balls, but even if the advance notice display is not being executed. For example, if a slight abnormality is detected when the number of balls put out until the number of balls put out reaches a specific value is 50,000, the effect display device 1600 displays the current status display A as "Remaining until the game limit." The message "+50,000 shots" is displayed. Although the current status display A shows the amount of balls remaining until the amount of balls put out reaches a specific value, it may also show the amount of balls put out at that point.

As mentioned above, if a slight abnormality is detected during the normal state (not the stopped state), the effect display device 1600 displays not only the error display A but also the current situation display A, and the game is stopped. It shows the remaining amount of balls to be played until the limit is reached (the remaining amount of balls to be played until the amount of balls to be played reaches a specific value). At this time, if the power is turned off, the detection of a slight abnormality is resolved, but when the power is turned on again according to the power-on patterns 1 to 4 in the limit clear pattern table 4, the amount of balls put out is cleared. In this regard, in this example, the hall manager can determine whether or not to turn on the power again after grasping the remaining amount of balls to be played before the game is restricted.

In addition, before the timing t1 of transitioning to the stop state, the peripheral control board 1510 uses some components such as the effect display device 1600 to give advance notice to notify that the amount of balls to be put out has approached a specific value. It makes the operation of time executable. Specifically, the effect display device 1600 displays a message "Remaining until game limit + XX shots" in a specific display area as a prior notice display. This specific display area is set as a part of the display area in the performance display device 1600, and is a display area used to display when the ball amount approaches a specific value. This is a fixed area that does not change even in the gaming state. If a slight abnormality is detected during execution of such advance notice display, the effect display device 1600 may display the same data as the advance notice display as the current situation display A. good. In addition, when displaying the current status display A by reusing the advance notice display, it is configured to be displayed on a layer higher (on the front side) than the layer displaying other effect images, and in this example, The current status display A is displayed as the topmost layer, and the display is controlled so that it can be reliably and continuously recognized during the execution of abnormality notification. This can prevent the current situation display A from becoming unrecognizable.

Further, in this example, regarding the start operation at the time of advance notice (operation at the time of start of advance notice), in addition to the advance notice display using the effect display device 1600, lamp B (mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5) The LED flashes for a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds) as a pre-notification light emission. This makes it easier to recognize that the amount of balls put out has approached a specific value.

In addition, in this example, the advance notification display is executed after the remaining amount of balls to be played before reaching a specific value reaches 5000 balls, but the advance notification display will be described in detail later. However, the game ends when the remaining number of balls exceeds 5,000. Further, the advance notification display cannot be deleted after a predetermined time has elapsed or by an administrator's operation. On the other hand, if a minor abnormality occurs or a severe abnormality (described later) occurs, current situation display A is executed. Even if it changes, it never ends. Further, the current status display A can be erased, for example, when a predetermined time period until the error display A is ended or when an administrator operation is performed to resolve the abnormality. This prevents it from becoming impossible to determine whether the display is a prior notice display or a current status display A.

In addition, in this example, the current situation display A is executed on the performance display device 1600, but it is not displayed on the front side of the pachinko machine 1, but on the back side of the main body frame 4, the back side of the game board 5, etc. A display member on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 may be used to indicate the remaining amount of balls to be played until the amount of balls to be played reaches a specific value. In addition, even when the current situation display A is executed on the effect display device 1600, the current situation display A may display the remaining amount of balls to be played until the amount of balls to be played reaches a specific value, or depending on the amount of balls to be played. (For example, if the remaining amount of balls to be played is between 0 and 5000, an A is displayed). As a result, only the hall manager can check the current status display A, and it is possible to prevent fraud in which an attempt is made to know the amount of balls put out by intentionally causing an abnormality.

In addition, in this example, when a slight abnormality occurs or when a severe abnormality described later occurs, the current situation display A is executed on the effect display device 1600. When a frequently occurring work abnormality (error) occurs, such as when the top tray of a game machine (a type of game machine that pays out prize balls as real balls outside the machine) becomes full, the performance display device 1600 The current status display A is not executed. This can prevent the current status display A from being displayed frequently.

In addition, in this example, when a slight abnormality occurs or when a severe abnormality described later occurs, the current status display A is executed on the effect display device 1600. For example, when a ram error occurs, In this case, the current situation display A is executed on the effect display device 1600 on the assumption that a severe abnormality has occurred. However, if a ram error occurs, there is a possibility that the memory itself regarding the amount of balls put out is abnormal, so the current situation display A may not be executed on the effect display device 1600.

Furthermore, at timing tx, for lamps A and B, the LED lights up or flashes in a single color as an error light emission, and the speaker outputs a voice saying "Door opening error" as an error sound. That's what I do.

Furthermore, the external terminal board outputs a security signal at timing tx. Thereby, when a slight abnormality is detected, a security signal is output to the hall computer, and the hall side can understand that a slight abnormality has occurred.

Further, in this example, the abnormality notification is started at the timing tx, but the abnormality notification is ended after a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed. In other words, regarding the effect display device 1600, lamp A (LED mounted on various decorative boards of the frame decoration member), lamp B (LED mounted on various decorative boards of game board 5), speakers, and external terminal board. , to return to normal operation. However, if it is detected that a minor abnormality, such as the closing of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, has been resolved before the predetermined period of time has elapsed, the abnormality notification is terminated at that point.

Next, at timing t1, it is determined that the amount of balls put out will reach a specific value by paying out the prize balls based on the ball entering the winning hole, but the main control board 1310 detects the ball entering the winning hole. Sometimes, the stoppage flag is turned on and the game shifts to a "stoppage state" in which restriction pattern 3, which both "stops the game" and "stops shooting", is applied. The behavior in the stopped state is as described above.

Here, a case will be described in which a slight abnormality is detected at timing ty during the aborted state. When a slight abnormality is detected, an abnormality notification is executed to notify the outside that the abnormality has occurred, and the effect display device 1600 executes the operation at the time of error occurrence as the abnormality notification. On the other hand, other than the execution of abnormality notifications, such as disabling the progress of the game, there is no change from the situation where no minor abnormality was detected before timing ty, and the behavior of the discontinued state is maintained. It is assumed that

Specifically, the effect display device 1600 executes the operation at the time of error occurrence at timing tx. For example, if the opening of the main body frame 4 relative to the outer frame 2 is detected as a minor abnormality, the effect display device 1600 displays the message "Door opening error" as error display A, and also displays the current situation. As display B, a message "Playing limit has been reached" is displayed to indicate that the game has already entered the stopped state and the game is restricted (after the amount of balls put out reaches a certain value). That's what I do.

As described above, if a slight abnormality is detected during the stopped state, the effect display device 1600 displays not only the error display A but also the current status display B, and the game has already entered the stopped state. This indicates that the number of balls is limited (after the amount of balls put out reaches a certain value). At this time, when the power is turned on again, the detection of the slight abnormality is resolved, but when the power is turned on again with power-on patterns 1 and 4 in the restriction clear pattern table 4, the restrictions on the game in the suspended state are maintained. On the other hand, when the power is turned on again in power-on patterns 2 and 3, the restrictions on the game during the halted state are cleared. In this regard, in this example, after the hall manager understands that the game has already been suspended and the game has been restricted, it is necessary to use either power-on pattern to determine whether the power can be turned on again. Can be done.

In this example, only the effect display device 1600 is used to notify the abnormality, and for members other than the effect display device 1600, the operation when progress is impossible is performed with priority. Thereby, even if a slight abnormality is detected during the suspended state, it is possible to easily understand that the game has already shifted to the suspended state and the game is restricted.

In addition, in this example, if a slight abnormality occurs during the aborted state or if a severe abnormality described later occurs, the current status display B is executed. , even if the amount of balls put out changes after that, it will not end. Furthermore, the current status display B can be erased, for example, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed until the error display A is ended, or when the administrator operates to resolve the abnormality. This can prevent the current status display B from being displayed more than necessary.

In addition, in this example, when a slight abnormality occurs during the stopped state or when a severe abnormality described below occurs, the current situation display B is executed on the effect display device 1600. For example, If a frequently occurring operational abnormality (error) occurs, such as the upper tray becoming full in a conventional type of gaming machine (a gaming machine that pays out prize balls as real balls outside the gaming machine), The current situation display B is not executed on the effect display device 1600. This can prevent the current status display B from being displayed frequently.

In addition, in this example, when a slight abnormality occurs during the halted state or when a severe abnormality described later occurs, the current situation display B is executed on the effect display device 1600. For example, Even when a ram error occurs, current situation display B is executed on the effect display device 1600, assuming that a severe abnormality has occurred. However, if a ram error occurs, there is a possibility that the memory itself regarding the discontinuation state is abnormal, so the current situation display B may not be executed on the effect display device 1600.

Also, regarding the speaker, after a predetermined period of time has passed from timing t1, the operation is performed when progress is not possible, and the sound for when progress is not possible is ``The daily ball limit has been reached, so the game is restricted.'' The sound is output. However, such a sound for preventing progress may end when a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the start of output. As a result, the sound for preventing progress does not continue to be outputted after transitioning to the stop state, and it is possible to prevent players from playing with other pachinko machines 1 from being disturbed.

In addition, the external terminal board is set to a forced output state in which a security signal is forcibly output from timing t1 when it shifts to the discontinued state, but if a slight abnormality is detected at timing tx, The security signal that is currently being output is not terminated and a new security signal is output, but the security signal that is currently being output is continued to be output. This prevents the hole side from misperceiving that the no-play state has ended.

Further, in this example, the abnormality notification is started at timing ty, but the abnormality notification is ended after a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed. In other words, the effect display device 1600 is returned to the operation when progress is not possible. However, if it is detected that a minor abnormality, such as the closing of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, has been resolved before the predetermined period of time has elapsed, the abnormality notification is terminated at that point.

Next, after transitioning to the discontinued state, the power is cut off at timing t2, and then the power is turned on again at timing t3. In this example, when the power is turned on again, the limit clear pattern table 4 is used as the limit clear pattern table.

First, a case will be described in which the power is turned on again at timing t3, and the power-on patterns 2 and 3, which clear the ball output amount and the stopped state, are selected as the power-on patterns. When power-on patterns 2 and 3 are selected, the gaming state at the time of power-off is cleared (initialized), but if the ``Amount of balls to be played'' and ``Restrictions on gaming during a stopped state'' have also been cleared (initialized). For this reason, regardless of whether power-on patterns 2 or 3 are selected, by clearing the "restriction on gaming during the suspended state", the game is controlled to be in the normal state (not in the suspended state). In other words, it is possible to restart the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side. The behavior in the normal state (non-stopped state) is as described above.

Regarding the effect display device 1600, lamp A (LED mounted on various decorative boards of the frame decoration member), lamp B (LED mounted on various decorative boards of game board 5), and speakers, at timing t3. , clear notification 2 is being executed. For example, in addition to displaying a predetermined combination of decorative symbols as an initial display, the effect display device 1600 displays a message such as "Limit Cleared" as a clear notification 2 to indicate that the amount of balls put out and the stopped state have been cleared. I am trying to display a message saying ``I have done this.'' This allows the hall manager to confirm that the amount of balls put out and the stopped state have been cleared when the power is turned on again. However, regarding clear notification 2, if the stopped state is not in the stopped state when the power is cut off, there is no need to notify that the stopped state has been cleared, and it is not necessary to notify that the amount of balls put out has been cleared or the amount of balls put out at the time of clearing. You may also be notified.

Further, in the lamps A and B, at timing t3, the LED lights or blinks in red as a clear notification 2.

Furthermore, at timing t3, the speaker outputs a voice saying "Restriction has been cleared" as a clear notification 2 to indicate that the amount of balls to be played and the stopped state have been cleared.

Further, in this example, the clear notification 2 is started at timing t3, but the clear notification 2 is ended after a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed. In other words, the performance display device 1600, lamp A (LED mounted on various decorative boards of the frame decoration member), lamp B (LED mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5), and speakers are I'm trying to get it back up and running. However, the normal operation may be started before the clear notification 2 ends. Further, the clear notification 2 displayed on the effect display device 1600 may be continuously displayed even after a predetermined period has elapsed. The clear notification 2 may be erased by an administrator operation. As a result, unless the clear notification 2 is deleted by the administrator's operation, the clear notification 2 remains displayed, making it difficult to commit fraudulent acts.

Next, at timing t3', the power is turned on again, but when power-on patterns 1 and 4 are selected, which clear the amount of balls put out but maintain the stopped state. I will explain about it. When power-on patterns 1 and 4 are selected, the gaming state at the time of power-off is maintained, but the amount of balls put out before or after the stopped state starts. has been cleared (initialized), while "restrictions on gaming during suspension" is maintained. Therefore, regardless of whether power-on patterns 1 or 4 are selected, the behavior of the suspended state is maintained by maintaining the "restriction on gaming during the suspended state". In other words, it is impossible to restart the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side. The behavior in the stopped state is as described above.

Regarding the effect display device 1600, lamp A (LED mounted on various decorative boards of the frame decoration member), lamp B (LED mounted on various decorative boards of game board 5), and speakers, at timing t3' So, clear notification 1 is executed. For example, the effect display device 1600 displays, as clear notification 1, a message "The amount of balls put out has been cleared" to indicate that the amount of balls put out has been cleared. This allows the hall manager to confirm that the ball amount has been cleared when the power is turned on again. However, regarding clear notification 1, when the state was stopped when the power was cut off, it may be possible to notify that the state was maintained, and not only that the amount of balls put out was cleared, but also that the amount of balls put out at the time of clearing. The amount may be notified.

Further, in the lamps A and B, at timing t3', the LED lights or blinks in green as clear notification 1.

Further, at timing t3', the speaker outputs a voice message "The amount of balls to be played has been cleared" as a clear notification 1 to indicate that the amount of balls to be played has been cleared.

Further, in this example, clear notification 1 is started at timing t3, but clear notification 1 is ended after a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed. In other words, the effect display device 1600, lamp A (LED mounted on various decorative boards of the frame decoration member), lamp B (LED mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5), and speakers will be disabled when progress is not possible. I'm trying to revert to the behavior. However, the operation when progress is not possible may be started before the clear notification 1 ends.

Specifically, the effect display device 1600 displays a message "Game Restricted" as a progress impossibility notification (progress impossibility display). In addition to this, the effect display device 1600 displays a message as a clearing method notification (clearing method display) to show the hall manager how to clear the stopped state, ``If you clear the ram, it will return to the normal state.'' I have to. This allows the hall manager to understand that the halted state cannot be cleared unless the power-on patterns 2 and 3 that involve ram clear are selected when the power is turned on again.

In addition, regarding the speaker, when executing the action when progress is not possible, a sound is output as a progress notification (sound for progress not being possible) saying, ``Playing is being restricted because the daily ball limit has been reached.'' ing. However, as mentioned above, such sounds for preventing progress may be terminated after a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the start of output. Even if the output of the warning sound is finished, if the power is turned on again at timing t3', the warning sound may be output again. In such a case, the output of the sound indicating that the vehicle cannot proceed is terminated after a predetermined period of time has elapsed from timing t3'. As a result, when the power is turned on again, the sound indicating that no progress is possible is output again, so that it can be easily understood that the stopped state has not been cleared and the game is restricted.

In addition, in this example, if power-on patterns 1 and 4 are selected when the power is turned on again, the amount of balls put out will be cleared but the stopped state will be maintained, so after clearing notification 1 is finished, no progress notification or clearing will occur. A method notification is being executed, and clear notification 1 is being executed with priority over progress impossible notifications and clear method notifications. This allows the hall manager to confirm that the ball amount has been cleared when the power is turned on again. In addition, as another example, the progress impossible notification or clear method notification may be executed in parallel with the clear notification 1, or the clear notification 1 and the progress impossible notification or clear method notification may be alternately executed. good. In addition, when executing the progress impossible notification or clear method notification in parallel with clear notification 1, clear notification 1 is executed for some of the multiple parts, and the progress impossible notification or clear method notification is executed for the remaining parts. Alternatively, the clear notification 1 may be executed in some areas, and the progress impossible notification or the clear method notification may be executed in the remaining areas, even though the same member is used. Further, even if a progress impossibility notification or a clearing method notification is executed in parallel with clear notification 1, clear notification 1 may end when a predetermined period of time (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed. Further, the clearing method notification may also be terminated after a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed.

FIG. 132 is a time chart showing the behavior of a pachinko machine when a severe abnormality occurs during a normal state.

First, before the timing tx at which a severe abnormality is detected, control is performed to a normal state (a state that is not a discontinued state). The behavior in the normal state (non-stopped state) is as described above.

Here, a case will be described in which a severe abnormality is detected at timing tx in a normal state (a state that is not a discontinued state). If a severe abnormality is detected, it is impossible to shoot game balls, and it is impossible to proceed with the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side. That is, when a severe abnormality occurs, the variable display of special symbols and the jackpot game are not executed, and even if there is a starting prize, the variable display of the special symbols is not newly started.

In addition, when a serious abnormality is detected, an abnormality notification is executed to notify the outside that the abnormality has occurred, and the production display device 1600, lamps A to C, speakers, movable bodies, and external terminal boards are , As an abnormality notification, the operation at the time of error occurrence is executed.

Specifically, regarding the effect display device 1600, lamp A (LED mounted on various decorative boards of the frame decoration member), lamp B (LED mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5), and the speaker, At timing tx, the operation at the time of error occurrence is executed. For example, when magnetism is detected as a severe abnormality, the effect display device 1600 displays the message "Magnetic Abnormality" as error display B, and also displays the current status display A until the game is restricted. The message ``Remaining until game limit + 〇〇 rounds'' is displayed to indicate the remaining amount of balls to be played (the remaining amount of balls to be played until the number of balls to be played reaches a certain value).

As described above, if a severe abnormality is detected during the normal state (not the stopped state), the effect display device 1600 displays not only the error display B but also the current status display A, and the game is stopped. It shows the remaining amount of balls to be played until the limit is reached (the remaining amount of balls to be played until the amount of balls to be played reaches a specific value). At this time, if the power is turned off, the detection of the severe abnormality is resolved, but when the power is turned on again according to the power-on patterns 1 to 4 in the limit clear pattern table 4, the amount of balls put out is cleared. In this regard, in this example, the hall manager can determine whether or not to turn on the power again after grasping the remaining amount of balls to be played before the game is restricted.

In addition, before shifting to the stop state, the peripheral control board 1510 uses some components such as the effect display device 1600 to notify that the amount of balls to be put out has approached a specific value. Makes the action executable. Specifically, the effect display device 1600 displays a message "Remaining until game limit + XX shots" in a specific display area as a prior notice display. This specific display area is set as a part of the display area in the effect display device 1600, and is a display area used to display when the ball amount approaches a specific value. This is a fixed area that does not change even in the gaming state. If a severe abnormality is detected during execution of such advance notice display, the effect display device 1600 may display the same data as the advance notice display as the current status display A. good. In addition, when displaying the current status display A by utilizing the advance notice display, it is configured to be displayed on a layer higher (on the front side) than the layer displaying other effect images, and in this example, The current status display A is displayed as the top layer, and the display is controlled so that it can be reliably and continuously recognized during the execution of abnormality notification. This can prevent the current situation display A from becoming unrecognizable.

Further, in the lamps A and B, the LED lights or blinks in a single color as error light emission at timing tx.

In addition, in the lamp C, the function display unit 1400 includes a status display, a normal symbol display, a normal reservation display, a first special symbol display, a first special reservation number display, a second special symbol display, and a second special symbol display. It is equipped with a special reservation number display, a round display, etc., and all of their LEDs are lit. However, as another example, the function display unit 1400 may be provided with an LED dedicated to abnormality notification, and when a severe abnormality is detected, the LED dedicated to the abnormality notification is turned on and the other LEDs are turned off. You may also do so.

Further, the speaker outputs a sound saying "A magnetic abnormality has occurred" as an error sound.

Furthermore, the movable body is placed in an inoperable state in which it does not operate at the timing tx. For example, if the movable body is in operation at timing tx, the movable body is forcibly stopped in the middle of the operation. However, as another example, the movable body may be stopped after the movable body that is not at the initial position is returned to the initial position after the timing tx. As a result, even if the movable body is located in front of the display area of the effect display device 1600 at the timing tx, the movable body returns to the initial position after the timing tx, and the effect display device 1600 executes This makes it difficult to overlook the error display B and current status display A that are being displayed.

Furthermore, the external terminal board outputs a security signal at timing tx. As a result, when a severe abnormality is detected, a security signal is output to the hall computer, and the hall can understand that a severe abnormality has occurred.

Further, if a severe abnormality is detected at timing tx, when the player operates the handle 160, it is impossible to shoot the game ball into the game area 5a.

In addition, if a severe abnormality is detected at timing tx, the number of game balls B that entered the ball entrance (input opening, out opening) (number of balls entered) and the number of balls that are paid out as prize balls will be calculated. The number of game balls B (number of payouts) is not counted. In other words, it is made impossible to calculate the ratio of the number of balls paid out to the number of balls entered, and the calculation is made so that it is not reflected in the base value displayed on the base monitor. However, the number of game balls B that entered the ball entrance (input hole, out hole) (number of balls entered) is subject to counting, and by calculating the ratio of the number of balls paid out to the number of balls entered, It may also be reflected in the base value displayed on the base monitor.

In addition, if a severe abnormality is detected at timing tx, a predetermined number of game balls will be paid out as prize balls for those whose entry into the winning slot was detected before timing tx. This makes it possible to add the number of game balls paid out as prize balls to the number of balls held by the player. Thereby, the player can obtain prize balls for the number of game balls until the amount of balls put out reaches a specific value. On the other hand, at timing tx, if a ball is detected entering the winning hole after a severe abnormality is detected, the predetermined number of game balls will not be paid out as prize balls, and the number of balls held by the player will be reduced. There is no need to add to that. However, if a severe abnormality is detected at timing tx, the configuration may be such that the ball entering the winning hole is not detected. Similarly, if the ball entering the winning hole is not detected in the first place, Even if a ball enters a winning hole, a predetermined number of game balls are not paid out as prize balls and are not added to the number of balls held by the player.

In addition, if a severe abnormality is detected at timing tx, the operation at the time of error occurrence is executed as an abnormality notification, but after that, at timing ty, another severe abnormality is detected. In such cases, the operation at the time of the error is not changed and continues execution. However, after a severe abnormality is detected at timing tx, another severe abnormality may not be detected.

Further, in this example, although the abnormality notification is started at timing tx, the abnormality notification is not ended even if a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed. Therefore, if a serious abnormality occurs, the hall manager must turn off the power to end the abnormality notification, and then turn the power back on to resume the game. I have to.

Next, after detecting a severe abnormality during a normal state (a state that is not aborted), the power is turned off at timing t2 to end the abnormality notification, and then at timing t3, the power is turned off. It is being reintroduced. In this example, when the power is turned on again, the limit clear pattern table 4 is used as the limit clear pattern table.

First, a case will be described in which the power is turned on again at timing t3, and the power-on patterns 2 and 3, which clear the ball output amount and the stopped state, are selected as the power-on patterns. When power-on patterns 2 and 3 are selected, the gaming state at the time of power-off is cleared (initialized), but if the ``Amount of balls to be played'' and ``Restrictions on gaming during a stopped state'' have also been cleared (initialized). In this example, when the power is turned off at timing t2, the state is not in the aborted state in the first place, so when the power is turned on again at the subsequent timing t3, it is determined whether or not power-on patterns 2 and 3 are selected. Regardless of the situation, control is maintained in the normal state (non-discontinued state). In other words, it is possible to restart the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side. The behavior in the normal state (non-stopped state) is as described above.

Regarding the effect display device 1600, lamp A (LED mounted on various decorative boards of the frame decoration member), lamp B (LED mounted on various decorative boards of game board 5), and speakers, at timing t3. , clear notification 2 is being executed. For example, in addition to displaying a predetermined combination of decorative symbols as an initial display, the effect display device 1600 displays a message such as "Limit Cleared" as a clear notification 2 to indicate that the amount of balls put out and the stopped state have been cleared. I am trying to display a message saying ``I have done this.'' This allows the hall manager to confirm that the amount of balls put out and the stopped state have been cleared when the power is turned on again. However, regarding clear notification 2, since it is not in the stopped state when the power is cut off, there is no need to notify that the stopped state has been cleared, and it is not necessary to notify that the amount of balls put out has been cleared or the amount of balls put out at the time of clearing. You may also be notified.

Further, in the lamps A and B, at timing t3, the LED lights or blinks in red as a clear notification 2.

Further, at timing t3, the speaker outputs a voice saying "Limit has been cleared" as a clear notification 2 to indicate that the ball output amount and the stopped state have been cleared.

Further, in this example, the clear notification 2 is started at timing t3, but the clear notification 2 is ended after a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed. In other words, regarding the effect display device 1600, lamp A (LED mounted on various decorative boards of the frame decoration member), lamp B (LED mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5), and speakers, the I'm trying to get it back up and running. However, the normal operation may be started before the clear notification 2 ends. Further, the clear notification 2 displayed on the effect display device 1600 may be continuously displayed even after a predetermined period has elapsed. The clear notification 2 may be erased by an administrator operation. As a result, unless the clear notification 2 is deleted by the administrator's operation, the clear notification 2 remains displayed, making it difficult to commit fraudulent acts.

Next, at timing t3', the power is turned on again, but when power-on patterns 1 and 4 are selected, which clear the amount of balls put out but maintain the stopped state. I will explain about it. When power-on patterns 1 and 4 are selected, the gaming state at the time of power-off is maintained, but the amount of balls put out before or after the stopped state starts. has been cleared (initialized), while "restrictions on gaming during suspension" is maintained. In this example, when the power is turned off at timing t2, it is not in the aborted state in the first place, so when the power is turned on again at the subsequent timing t3, whether or not power-on patterns 1 and 4 are selected is determined. Regardless of the situation, control is maintained in the normal state (non-discontinued state). In other words, it is possible to restart the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side. The behavior in the normal state (non-stopped state) is as described above.

Regarding the effect display device 1600, lamp A (LED mounted on various decorative boards of the frame decoration member), lamp B (LED mounted on various decorative boards of game board 5), and speakers, at timing t3' So, clear notification 1 is executed. For example, the effect display device 1600 displays, as clear notification 1, a message "The amount of balls put out has been cleared" to indicate that the amount of balls put out has been cleared. This allows the hall manager to confirm that the ball amount has been cleared when the power is turned on again. However, regarding clear notification 1, when the state was stopped when the power was cut off, it may be possible to notify that the state was maintained, and not only that the amount of balls put out was cleared, but also that the amount of balls put out at the time of clearing. The amount may be notified.

Further, in the lamps A and B, at timing t3', the LED lights or blinks in green as clear notification 1.

Further, at timing t3', the speaker outputs a voice message "The amount of balls to be played has been cleared" as a clear notification 1 to indicate that the amount of balls to be played has been cleared.

Further, in this example, clear notification 1 is started at timing t3, but clear notification 1 is ended after a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed. In other words, the performance display device 1600, lamp A (LED mounted on various decorative boards of the frame decoration member), lamp B (LED mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5), and speakers are I'm trying to get it back up and running. However, the normal operation may be started before the clear notification 1 ends.

FIG. 133 is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine when a severe abnormality occurs during the stopped state.

First, before the timing tx at which a severe abnormality is detected, the control is stopped. The behavior in the stopped state is as described above.

Here, a case will be described in which a severe abnormality is detected at timing tx during the aborted state. When a severe abnormality is detected, abnormality notification is executed to notify the outside that the abnormality has occurred, and the effect display device 1600 executes the operation at the time of error occurrence as the abnormality notification. On the other hand, with respect to aspects other than the execution of abnormality notifications, such as making it impossible to proceed with the game, there is no change from the situation where no serious abnormality was detected before timing tx, and the behavior of the discontinued state is maintained. It is assumed that

Specifically, the effect display device 1600 executes the operation at the time of error occurrence at timing tx. For example, if magnetism is detected as a severe abnormality, the production display device 1600 will display the message "Magnetic Abnormality" as error display B, and will also display the current status display B, indicating that the state has already been stopped. A message ``Playing limit has been reached'' is displayed to indicate that the game is being restricted (after the amount of balls put out reaches a specific value).

As mentioned above, if a severe abnormality is detected during the stopped state, the effect display device 1600 displays not only the error display B but also the current status display B, and the game has already entered the stopped state. This indicates that the amount is limited (after the amount of balls released reaches a certain value). At this time, when the power is turned on again, the detection of the severe abnormality is resolved, but when the power is turned on again using power-on patterns 1 and 4 in the restriction clear pattern table 4, the restrictions on the game in the suspended state are maintained. On the other hand, when the power is turned on again in power-on patterns 2 and 3, the restrictions on the game during the halted state are cleared. In this regard, in this example, after the hall manager understands that the game has already been suspended and the game has been restricted, it is necessary to use either power-on pattern to determine whether or not the power can be turned on again. I can do it.

Further, in this example, only the effect display device 1600 is used to notify the abnormality, and for members other than the effect display device 1600, the operation when progress is impossible is performed with priority. As a result, even if a serious abnormality is detected during the suspended state, it is possible to easily understand that the game has already shifted to the suspended state and the game is restricted.

In addition, the external terminal board is set to a forced output state in which a security signal is forcibly output from timing t1 when it shifts to the discontinued state, but if a severe abnormality is detected at timing tx, The security signal that is currently being output is not terminated and a new security signal is output, but the security signal that is currently being output is continued to be output. This prevents the hole side from misperceiving that the no-play state has ended.

Further, in this example, although the abnormality notification is started at the timing tx, the abnormality notification is not ended even if a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed. Therefore, if a serious abnormality occurs, the hall manager must turn off the power to end the abnormality notification, and then turn the power back on to resume playing. I have to.

Next, after a severe abnormality is detected during the aborted state, the power is turned off at timing t2 to end the abnormality notification, and then the power is turned on again at timing t3. In this example, when the power is turned on again, the limit clear pattern table 4 is used as the limit clear pattern table.

First, a case will be described in which the power is turned on again at timing t3, and the power-on patterns 2 and 3, which clear the ball output amount and the stopped state, are selected as the power-on patterns. When power-on patterns 2 and 3 are selected, the gaming state at the time of power-off is cleared (initialized), but if the ``Amount of balls to be played'' and ``Restrictions on gaming during a stopped state'' have also been cleared (initialized). For this reason, regardless of whether power-on patterns 2 or 3 are selected, by clearing the "restriction on gaming during the suspended state", the game is controlled to be in the normal state (not in the suspended state). In other words, it is possible to restart the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side. The behavior in the normal state (non-stopped state) is as described above.

As for the effect display device 1600, lamp A (LED mounted on various decorative boards of the frame decoration member), lamp B (LED mounted on various decorative boards of game board 5), and speakers, at timing t3. , clear notification 2 is being executed. For example, in addition to displaying a predetermined combination of decorative symbols as an initial display, the effect display device 1600 displays a message such as "Limit Cleared" as a clear notification 2 to indicate that the amount of balls to be played and the stopped state have been cleared. I am trying to display a message saying ``I have done this.'' This allows the hall manager to confirm that the amount of balls put out and the stopped state have been cleared when the power is turned on again. However, regarding clear notification 2, when the power is not in the stopped state when the power is cut off, there is no need to notify that the stopped state has been cleared, and it is not necessary to notify that the amount of balls put out has been cleared or the amount of balls put out at the time of clearing. You may also be notified.

Further, in the lamps A and B, at timing t3, the LED lights or blinks in red as a clear notification 2.

Furthermore, at timing t3, the speaker outputs a voice saying "Restriction has been cleared" as a clear notification 2 to indicate that the amount of balls to be played and the stopped state have been cleared.

Further, in this example, the clear notification 2 is started at timing t3, but the clear notification 2 is ended after a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed. In other words, the performance display device 1600, lamp A (LED mounted on various decorative boards of the frame decoration member), lamp B (LED mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5), and speakers are I'm trying to get it back up and running. However, the clear notification 2 displayed on the effect display device 1600 may be continuously displayed even after a predetermined period of time has passed. Further, such a clear notification 2 may be erased by an administrator operation. As a result, unless the clear notification 2 is deleted by the administrator's operation, the clear notification 2 remains displayed, making it difficult to commit fraudulent acts.

Next, at timing t3', the power is turned on again, but when power-on patterns 1 and 4 are selected, which clear the amount of balls put out but maintain the stopped state. I will explain about it. When power-on patterns 1 and 4 are selected, the gaming state at the time of power-off is maintained, but the amount of balls put out before or after the stopped state starts. has been cleared (initialized), while "restrictions on gaming during suspension" is maintained. Therefore, regardless of whether power-on patterns 1 or 4 are selected, the behavior of the suspended state is maintained by maintaining the "restriction on gaming during the suspended state". In other words, it is impossible to restart the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side. The behavior in the stopped state is as described above.

Regarding the effect display device 1600, lamp A (LED mounted on various decorative boards of the frame decoration member), lamp B (LED mounted on various decorative boards of game board 5), and speakers, at timing t3' So, clear notification 1 is executed. For example, the effect display device 1600 displays, as clear notification 1, a message "The amount of balls put out has been cleared" to indicate that the amount of balls put out has been cleared. This allows the hall manager to confirm that the ball amount has been cleared when the power is turned on again. However, regarding clear notification 1, when the state was stopped when the power was cut off, it may be possible to notify that the state was maintained, and not only that the amount of balls put out was cleared, but also that the amount of balls put out at the time of clearing. The amount may be notified.

Further, in the lamps A and B, at timing t3', the LED lights or blinks in green as clear notification 1.

Further, at timing t3', the speaker outputs a voice message "The amount of balls to be played has been cleared" as a clear notification 1 to indicate that the amount of balls to be played has been cleared.

Further, in this example, clear notification 1 is started at timing t3, but clear notification 1 is ended after a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed. In other words, the effect display device 1600, lamp A (LED mounted on various decorative boards of the frame decoration member), lamp B (LED mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5), and speakers will be disabled when progress is not possible. I'm trying to revert to the behavior. However, the operation when progress is not possible may be started before the clear notification 1 ends.

Specifically, the effect display device 1600 displays a message "Game Restricted" as a progress impossibility notification (progress impossibility display). In addition to this, the effect display device 1600 displays a message as a clearing method notification (clearing method display) to show the hall manager how to clear the stopped state, ``If you clear the ram, it will return to the normal state.'' I have to. This allows the hall manager to understand that the halted state cannot be cleared unless the power-on patterns 2 and 3 that involve ram clear are selected when the power is turned on again.

In addition, regarding the speaker, when executing the action when progress is not possible, a sound is output as a progress notification (sound for progress not being possible) that says ``The daily ball limit has been reached, so the game is being restricted.'' ing. However, as mentioned above, such sounds for preventing progress may be terminated after a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the start of output. Even if the output of the warning sound is finished, if the power is turned on again at timing t3', the warning sound may be output again. In such a case, the output of the sound indicating that the vehicle cannot proceed is terminated after a predetermined period of time has elapsed from timing t3'. As a result, when the power is turned on again, the sound indicating that no progress is possible is output again, so that it can be easily understood that the stopped state has not been cleared and the game is restricted.

In addition, in this example, if power-on patterns 1 and 4 are selected when the power is turned on again, the amount of balls put out will be cleared but the stopped state will be maintained, so after clearing notification 1 is finished, the notification that progress cannot be made or the clearing A method notification is being executed, and clear notification 1 is being executed with priority over progress impossible notifications and clear method notifications. This allows the hall manager to confirm that the ball amount has been cleared when the power is turned on again. In addition, as another example, the progress impossible notification and the clear method notification may be executed in parallel with the clear notification 1, or the clear notification 1 and the progress impossible notification and the clear method notification may be alternately executed. good. In addition, when executing the progress impossible notification or clear method notification in parallel with clear notification 1, clear notification 1 is executed for some of the multiple parts, and the progress impossible notification or clear method notification is executed for the remaining parts. Alternatively, the clear notification 1 may be executed in some areas, and the progress impossible notification or clear method notification may be executed in the remaining areas, even though the same member is used. Further, even if a progress impossibility notification or a clearing method notification is executed in parallel with clear notification 1, clear notification 1 may end when a predetermined period of time (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed.

(When a stop preparation state is established: Notification regarding the amount of balls put out when an abnormality is detected during the stop preparation state)
In the above, when the amount of balls put out reaches a specific value, the main control board 1310 stops the game and limits the game, but the amount of balls put out reaches a specific value during a jackpot game (winning game). In this case, the system may be configured such that the state is not stopped until the jackpot game ends, and the state is shifted to the stopped state when the jackpot game ends. For example, when the amount of balls put out reaches a specific value in a round in the middle of a jackpot game, the state is not stopped immediately, but the state is shifted to the stop state when the last round in the jackpot game ends. In other words, when the amount of balls put out reaches a specific value during a jackpot game, it is possible to obtain more balls than the specific value. In this way, the player's dissatisfaction can be alleviated by not ending the jackpot game when the amount of balls put out reaches a specific value during the jackpot game.

In this example, when the amount of balls put out reaches a specific value during a jackpot game, the game shifts to a stop preparation state, and although it is determined that the game will shift to a stop state, the jackpot game is continued. Similarly to the termination state, the termination preparation state is configured so that it can be selected whether to maintain or clear it when the power is turned on again after being turned off.

Specifically, in the restriction clear pattern table 4, when the power is turned on, only when the gaming state at the time of power-off is cleared (initialized) as in power-on patterns 2 and 3, "Restrictions on gaming in the suspended state" ” has been cleared (initialized), but the abort preparation state has also been cleared (initialized). On the other hand, when the power is turned on, if the gaming state at power-off is maintained as in power-on patterns 1 and 4, the "restriction on gaming during the discontinued state" is maintained, but the "restriction on gaming during the discontinued state" is also maintained. , is maintained. In other words, as with the termination state, it is possible to select whether to maintain or clear the termination preparation state when the power is turned on again after being turned off. For example, when the amount of balls put out during a jackpot game reaches a certain value and a stop preparation state has occurred, if you want to clear the stop preparation state, after turning off the power, clear the stop preparation state when the power is turned on. All you have to do is perform the operation, but the jackpot game that was being executed will be cleared in conjunction with such an operation when the power is turned on. On the other hand, if you want to maintain the stop preparation state, you can perform a power-on operation to maintain the stop preparation state after the power is turned off. It will be restarted. Note that if power-on pattern 5 is selected when the power is turned on, the above-mentioned ball extraction process is only executed and the game does not start, so the stop preparation state should not be cleared (initialized). Maintained.

FIG. 134 is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine when a slight abnormality occurs during the stop preparation state.

First, at timing t1 during a jackpot game, it is determined that the amount of balls put out will reach a specific value by paying out the prize balls based on the ball entering the winning hole, but the main control board 1310 When this is detected, the termination flag is turned ON and the state is shifted to the termination preparation state. It should be noted that before the timing t1 at which the state shifts to the no-stop preparation state, the jackpot game is executed under control to a normal state (a state that is not a no-stop state). The behavior in the normal state (non-stopped state) is as described above.

In addition, in the stop preparation state, the jackpot game that is currently being executed is continued. In addition, in the stop preparation state, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed from timing t1, standby notification is performed using the performance display device 1600 to inform the outside that the amount of balls put out has already reached a specific value. For example, in addition to displaying the display related to the jackpot game that is currently being executed (normal display), the performance display device 1600 displays a standby display indicating that the amount of balls that have been put out has already reached a certain value. I'm trying to display a message that says, "This is the end." In this way, in the no-stop preparation state, advance notice is given to the effect that the game will transition to the no-go state when the jackpot game ends.

On the other hand, with respect to the progress of the jackpot game and other points other than the execution of standby notification, the situation is unchanged from before timing t1, and the behavior in the normal state (non-stopped state) is maintained.

In this example, only the effect display device 1600 is used to execute the standby notification, and the normal operation of the members other than the effect display device 1600 is performed with priority. Thereby, in the termination preparation state, information regarding the jackpot game being executed can be easily grasped.

Next, a case will be described in which a slight abnormality is detected at timing tx during the termination preparation state. When a slight abnormality is detected, an abnormality notification is executed to notify the outside that the abnormality has occurred, and the effect display device 1600 and lamp A (LED mounted on various decorative boards of frame decoration members) are used. , lamp B (LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5), speakers, and external terminal boards perform operations at the time of error occurrence as an abnormality notification. On the other hand, with respect to the progress of the jackpot game and other aspects other than the execution of abnormality notifications, there has been no change from the situation where no minor abnormality was detected before timing tx, and the normal state (non-discontinued state) has not changed. The behavior is assumed to be maintained.

Specifically, regarding the effect display device 1600, lamp A (LED mounted on various decorative boards of the frame decoration member), lamp B (LED mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5), and the speaker, At timing tx, the operation at the time of error occurrence is executed. For example, if the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 is detected as a minor abnormality, the effect display device 1600 displays the message "Door opening error" as error display A, and also displays the current situation. As display C, a message ``The jackpot is over and today is over'' is displayed to indicate that the amount of balls put out has already reached a specific value.

As described above, if a slight abnormality is detected during the preparation state for stopping, the effect display device 1600 displays not only the error display A but also the current status display C, and the amount of balls put out has already reached a specific value. It shows that it has been reached. At this time, if the power is turned off, the detection of a minor abnormality will be resolved, but when the power is turned on again using the power-on patterns 1 and 4 in the limit clear pattern table 4, the power will remain in the shutdown preparation state. When the power is turned on again in turn-on patterns 2 and 3, the stop preparation state is cleared. In this regard, in this example, after the hall manager understands that the amount of balls put out has already reached a certain value and has entered the state of preparation for stopping, it is necessary to select which power-on pattern to turn on the power again. You can decide whether

In addition, during the stop preparation state, the effect display device 1600 displays a message as a standby display that says ``The jackpot is over and today is over'' to indicate that the amount of balls put out has already reached a specific value. However, if a slight abnormality is detected during such a stop preparation state, the effect display device 1600 may display the same data as the standby display as the current status display C. In addition, when displaying the current status display C by reusing the standby display, the current status display C is displayed as the top layer, and the display is controlled so that it can be continuously recognized while abnormality notification is being performed. It is said that This can prevent the current situation display C from becoming unrecognizable.

In addition, in this example, if a slight abnormality occurs during the termination preparation state, or if a severe abnormality described later occurs, the current status display C is executed. The game never ends even if the amount of balls to be played changes after that. Furthermore, the current status display C can be erased, for example, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed until the error display A is ended, or when the administrator operates to resolve the abnormality. This can prevent the current status display C from being displayed more than necessary.

In addition, in this example, when a slight abnormality occurs during the termination preparation state or when a severe abnormality described later occurs, the current situation display C is executed on the effect display device 1600. , If a frequently occurring work abnormality (error) occurs, such as the upper tray becoming full in a conventional type of gaming machine (a gaming machine that pays out prize balls as real balls outside the gaming machine), , the current situation display C is not executed on the effect display device 1600. This can prevent the current status display C from being displayed frequently.

In addition, in this example, when a slight abnormality occurs during the termination preparation state or when a severe abnormality described later occurs, the current situation display C is executed on the effect display device 1600. , even when a ram error occurs, the current status display C is executed on the effect display device 1600, assuming that a serious abnormality has occurred. However, if a ram error occurs, there is a possibility that the memory itself regarding the stop preparation state is abnormal, so the current situation display C may not be executed on the effect display device 1600.

Furthermore, at timing tx, for lamps A and B, the LED lights up or flashes in a single color as an error light emission, and the speaker outputs a voice saying "Door opening error" as an error sound. That's what I do.

Furthermore, the external terminal board outputs a security signal at timing tx. Thereby, when a slight abnormality is detected, a security signal is output to the hall computer, and the hall side can understand that a slight abnormality has occurred.

Further, in this example, the abnormality notification is started at the timing tx, but the abnormality notification is ended after a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed. In other words, regarding the effect display device 1600, lamp A (LED mounted on various decorative boards of the frame decoration member), lamp B (LED mounted on various decorative boards of game board 5), speakers, and external terminal board. , to return to normal operation. However, if it is detected that a minor abnormality, such as the closing of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, has been resolved before the predetermined period of time has elapsed, the abnormality notification is terminated at that point.

Next, at timing tz, it is determined that the jackpot game has ended, but after the jackpot game state ends, the "termination pattern 3" that performs both "stopping the game" and "stopping firing" is applied. state. The behavior in the stopped state is as described above.

Further, after transitioning to the discontinued state, the power is cut off at timing t2, and then the power is turned on again at timing t3. In this example, when the power is turned on again, the limit clear pattern table 4 is used as the limit clear pattern table. Here, the power is turned on again at timing t3. As the power-on pattern, there is a case where power-on patterns 2 and 3 are selected, which clear the ball output amount and the stopped state, and a case where power-on pattern 2 and 3 are selected, and a case where the power is turned on at timing t3. At the point ', the power is turned on again, but the power-on patterns 1 and 4, which clear the amount of balls put out but maintain the stopped state, are selected. However, these behaviors are as explained in FIG. 131.

FIG. 135 is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine when a severe abnormality occurs during the stop preparation state.

First, before the timing tx at which a severe abnormality is detected, the jackpot game is executed with control to the stop preparation state. The behavior in the stop preparation state is as described above.

Here, a case will be described in which a severe abnormality is detected at timing tx during the termination preparation state. If a severe abnormality is detected, it is impossible to shoot game balls, and it is impossible to proceed with the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side. In other words, if a serious abnormality occurs, the jackpot game in progress is stopped.

In addition, when a serious abnormality is detected, an abnormality notification is executed to notify the outside that the abnormality has occurred, and the production display device 1600, lamps A to C, speakers, movable bodies, and external terminal boards are , As an abnormality notification, the operation at the time of error occurrence is executed.

Specifically, regarding the effect display device 1600, lamp A (LED mounted on various decorative boards of the frame decoration member), lamp B (LED mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5), and the speaker, At timing tx, the operation at the time of error occurrence is executed. For example, when magnetism is detected as a severe abnormality, the production display device 1600 displays the message "Magnetic Abnormality" as error display B, and also displays the current status display C as the amount of balls that have already been put out. To indicate that a certain value has been reached, a message is displayed saying, ``The jackpot has ended and today is over.''

As described above, when a severe abnormality is detected during the preparation state for stopping, the production display device 1600 displays not only the error display A but also the current status display C, and the amount of balls put out has already reached a specific value. It shows that it has been reached. At this time, if the power is turned off, the detection of a severe abnormality is resolved, but when the power is turned on again using the power-on patterns 1 and 4 in the limit clear pattern table 4, the power is maintained in the shutdown preparation state. When the power is turned on again in turn-on patterns 2 and 3, the stop preparation state is cleared. In this regard, in this example, after the hall manager understands that the amount of balls put out has already reached a certain value and has entered the state of preparation for stopping, it is necessary to select which power-on pattern to turn on the power again. You can decide whether

In addition, during the stop preparation state, the effect display device 1600 displays a message as a standby display that says ``The jackpot is over and today is over'' to indicate that the amount of balls put out has already reached a specific value. However, if a severe abnormality is detected during such a stop preparation state, the effect display device 1600 may use and display the same data as the standby display as the current status display C. In addition, when displaying the current status display C by reusing the standby display, the current status display C is displayed as the top layer, and the display is controlled so that it can be continuously recognized while abnormality notification is being performed. It is said that This can prevent the current situation display C from becoming unrecognizable.

Further, in the lamps A and B, the LED lights or blinks in a single color as error light emission at timing tx.

In addition, in the lamp C, the function display unit 1400 includes a status display, a normal symbol display, a normal reservation display, a first special symbol display, a first special reservation number display, a second special symbol display, and a second special symbol display. It is equipped with a special reservation number display, a round display, etc., and all of their LEDs are lit. However, as another example, the function display unit 1400 may be provided with an LED dedicated to anomaly notification, and when a severe abnormality is detected, the LED dedicated to the anomaly notification is turned on and the other LEDs are turned off. You may also do so.

Further, the speaker outputs a sound saying "A magnetic abnormality has occurred" as an error sound.

Furthermore, the movable body is placed in an inoperable state in which it does not operate at the timing tx. For example, if the movable body is in operation at timing tx, the movable body is forcibly stopped in the middle of the operation. However, as another example, the movable body may be stopped after the movable body that is not at the initial position is returned to the initial position after the timing tx. As a result, even if the movable body is located in front of the display area of the effect display device 1600 at the timing tx, the movable body returns to the initial position after the timing tx, and the effect display device 1600 executes This makes it difficult to overlook the error display B and current status display C that are being displayed.

Furthermore, the external terminal board outputs a security signal at timing tx. As a result, when a severe abnormality is detected, a security signal is output to the hall computer, and the hall can understand that a severe abnormality has occurred.

Further, if a severe abnormality is detected at timing tx, when the player operates the handle 160, it is impossible to shoot the game ball into the game area 5a.

In addition, if a severe abnormality is detected at timing tx, the number of game balls B that entered the ball entrance (input opening, out opening) (number of balls entered) and the number of balls that are paid out as prize balls will be calculated. The number of game balls B (number of payouts) is not counted. In other words, it is made impossible to calculate the ratio of the number of balls put out to the number of balls entered, and the calculation is made so that it is not reflected in the base value displayed on the base monitor. However, the number of game balls B that entered the ball entrance (input hole, out hole) (number of balls entered) is subject to counting, and by calculating the ratio of the number of balls paid out to the number of balls entered, It may also be reflected in the base value displayed on the base monitor.

In addition, if a severe abnormality is detected at timing tx, a predetermined number of game balls will be paid out as prize balls for those balls that were detected to enter the winning slot before timing tx. This makes it possible to add the number of game balls paid out as prize balls to the number of balls held by the player. Thereby, the player can obtain prize balls for the number of game balls until the amount of balls put out reaches a specific value. On the other hand, at timing tx, if a ball is detected entering the winning hole after a severe abnormality is detected, the predetermined number of game balls will not be paid out as prize balls, and the number of balls held by the player will be There is no need to add to that. However, if a severe abnormality is detected at timing tx, the configuration may be such that the ball entering the winning hole is not detected. Similarly, if the ball entering the winning hole is not detected in the first place, Even if a ball enters a winning hole, a predetermined number of game balls are not paid out as prize balls and are not added to the number of balls held by the player.

Further, in this example, although the abnormality notification is started at the timing tx, the abnormality notification is not ended even if a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed. Therefore, if a serious abnormality occurs, the hall manager must turn off the power to end the abnormality notification, and then turn the power back on to resume playing. I have to.

Next, after detecting a severe abnormality during the termination preparation state, the power is turned off at timing t2 to end the abnormality notification, and then the power is turned on again at timing t3. . In this example, when the power is turned on again, the limit clear pattern table 4 is used as the limit clear pattern table.

First, a case will be described in which the power is turned on again at timing t3, and the power-on patterns 2 and 3, which clear the ball output amount and the stopped state, are selected as the power-on patterns. When power-on patterns 2 and 3 are selected, the gaming state at the time of power-off is cleared (initialized), so information regarding the jackpot game that was being executed is cleared. In addition, the "amount of balls played before the no-stop state starts or after the no-go state starts" and "restrictions on games during the no-stop state" are cleared (initialized), and the no-stop preparation state is also cleared. Cleared (initialized). Therefore, regardless of whether power-on patterns 2 or 3 are selected, the control is performed to the normal state (not the shutdown state) by clearing the shutdown preparation state. In other words, it is possible to restart the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side. However, the jackpot game that was in progress will not be restarted. The behavior in the normal state (non-stopped state) is as described above.

As for the effect display device 1600, lamp A (LED mounted on various decorative boards of the frame decoration member), lamp B (LED mounted on various decorative boards of game board 5), and speakers, at timing t3. , clear notification 2 is being executed. For example, in addition to displaying a predetermined combination of decorative symbols as the initial display, the effect display device 1600 may also display a message such as "Limited The message "Completed" is displayed. This allows the hall manager to confirm that the ball amount and stop preparation status have been cleared when the power is turned on again. However, regarding clear notification 2, when the power is not in the stop preparation state when the power is cut off, there is no need to notify that the stop preparation state has been cleared. The amount may be notified. Regarding the clear notification 2, although a common notification is executed when the discontinued state is cleared and when the discontinued preparation state is cleared, different notifications may be executed.

Further, in the lamps A and B, at timing t3, the LED lights or blinks in red as a clear notification 2.

Furthermore, at timing t3, the speaker outputs a sound saying "restriction has been cleared" as a clear notification 2 to indicate that the ball output amount and the stop preparation state have been cleared.

Further, in this example, the clear notification 2 is started at timing t3, but the clear notification 2 is ended after a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed. In other words, regarding the effect display device 1600, lamp A (LED mounted on various decorative boards of the frame decoration member), lamp B (LED mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5), and speakers, the I'm trying to get it back up and running. However, the normal operation may be started before the clear notification 2 ends. Further, the clear notification 2 displayed on the effect display device 1600 may be continuously displayed even after a predetermined period has elapsed. The clear notification 2 may be erased by an administrator operation. As a result, unless the clear notification 2 is deleted by the administrator's operation, the clear notification 2 remains displayed, making it difficult to commit fraudulent acts.

Next, at timing t3', the power is turned on again, but when power-on patterns 1 and 4 are selected, which clear the amount of balls put out but maintain the stopped state. I will explain about it. When power-on patterns 1 and 4 are selected, the gaming state at the time of power-off is maintained, so information regarding the jackpot game that was being executed is maintained. In addition, the "amount of balls played before the stopped state starts and after the stopped state starts" will be cleared (initialized), while the "restrictions on games during the stopped state" will be maintained. However, the state of preparation for termination is also maintained. Therefore, no matter which of power-on patterns 1 and 4 is selected, the shutdown preparation state is maintained. In other words, in the stop preparation state, the jackpot game that was being executed will be restarted. The behavior in the stop preparation state is as described above.

Regarding the effect display device 1600, lamp A (LED mounted on various decorative boards of the frame decoration member), lamp B (LED mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5), and speakers, at timing t3' So, clear notification 1 is executed. For example, the performance display device 1600 displays, as clear notification 1, a message "The amount of balls put out has been cleared" to indicate that the amount of balls put out has been cleared. This allows the hall manager to confirm that the ball amount has been cleared when the power is turned on again. However, regarding clear notification 1, when the state was stopped when the power was cut off, it may be notified that the state was maintained, and not only that the amount of balls put out was cleared, but also that the amount of balls put out at the time of clearing the number of balls released. The amount may be notified.

Further, in the lamps A and B, at timing t3', the LED lights or blinks in green as clear notification 1.

Further, at timing t3', the speaker outputs a voice message "The amount of balls to be played has been cleared" as a clear notification 1 to indicate that the amount of balls to be played has been cleared.

Further, in this example, clear notification 1 is started at timing t3, but clear notification 1 is ended after a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed. In other words, the performance display device 1600, lamp A (LED mounted on various decorative boards of the frame decoration member), lamp B (LED mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5), and speakers are I'm trying to get it back up and running. However, the normal operation may be started before the clear notification 1 ends.

Specifically, in addition to displaying a display (normal display) regarding the jackpot game that has been restarted, the effect display device 1600 displays a message such as " The message "The jackpot is over and today is over." is displayed. In addition to this, the effect display device 1600 displays a message "If you clear the ram, the state will become normal" to show the hole manager how to clear the stop preparation state as a clearing method display. This allows the hall manager to understand that the termination preparation state cannot be cleared unless the power-on patterns 2 and 3 that involve ram clear are selected when the power is turned on again. However, the clearing method notification may be executed after waiting for the transition from the abort preparation state to the abort state.

In this example, if power-on patterns 1 and 4 are selected when the power is turned on again, after the clear notification 1 ends, the effect display device 1600 displays the normal display (display regarding the restarted jackpot game). Although the normal display and the standby display are displayed, the normal display and the standby display may be executed in parallel with the clear notification 1. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from missing out on getting the balls when restarting the jackpot game.

In addition, in this example, in order to clear the payout amount but maintain the stop preparation state, the standby display notification and clear method notification are executed after clear notification 1 is finished, and the standby display notification and clear method notification are Clear notification 1 is executed with priority. This allows the hall manager to confirm that the ball amount has been cleared when the power is turned on again. In addition, as another example, the standby display notification and the clear method notification may be executed in parallel with the clear notification 1, or the clear notification 1, the standby display notification, and the clear method notification may be alternately executed. good. In addition, when executing a standby display notification or clear method notification in parallel with clear notification 1, clear notification 1 is executed for some of the multiple members, and standby display notification or clear method notification is executed for the remaining members. Alternatively, the clear notification 1 may be executed in a part of the area, and the standby display notification or the clear method notification may be executed in the remaining area, even though the same member is used. Further, even if a standby display notification or a clearing method notification is executed in parallel with clear notification 1, clear notification 1 may end when a predetermined period of time (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed. Further, the clearing method notification may also be terminated after a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed.

FIG. 136 is a specific example of the effect when a slight abnormality occurs during the normal state or the stopped state. In this example, 100000 is set as the above-mentioned "specific value", and restriction pattern 3 is selected as the above-mentioned "restriction pattern". That is, if the restriction pattern 3 is set, when the amount of balls put out reaches a specific value (100,000 shots), the game will be stopped with "game stop" and "shooting stop".

As shown in FIG. 136(A), the effect display device 1600 executes a variable effect (effect based on a variable pattern) corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol, and displays the variation of the decorative pattern in the central area of the effect display device 1600. Displaying. Further, in the upper right area of the effect display device 1600, a variable display of a second decorative pattern is performed. Further, in the lower left area of the effect display device 1600, a hold display is displayed for the amount of time when a game ball enters the first starting port 2003 or the second starting port 2004, but the variable display of the special symbol is on standby.

As shown in FIG. 136(B), when opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 is detected as a slight abnormality during the normal state, the fluctuating display of the decorative pattern is continued, but the effect display device 1600 In the central area, a message "Door opening error. Please call an attendant" is displayed as error display A, indicating that the main body frame 4 is open. In addition, in the upper area of the effect display device 1600, as the current situation display A, "Game limit" indicating the remaining amount of balls to be played until the game is restricted (the remaining amount of balls to be played until the amount of balls to be played reaches a specific value). The message "+42,000 shots remaining" is displayed. The error display A and the current situation display A are displayed in a layer higher than the display of information regarding the game such as decorative symbols. Furthermore, the current status display A is displayed at a position that does not overlap with the game-related information display or the error display A. As a result, when a slight abnormality occurs, it is possible to reliably grasp the remaining amount of balls to be played until the game is restricted.

As shown in FIG. 136(C), when a predetermined error end condition such as closing of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 is satisfied, the error display A and the current situation display A are erased in the effect display device 1600.

As shown in FIG. 136(D), when the amount of balls put out approaches a specific value, for example, when the number of remaining balls until the amount of balls put out reaches the specific value becomes "+500 shots", the effect display device 1600 In the upper area of the box, as a pre-notification operation, a pre-notification display indicating the number of balls remaining until the amount of balls to be played reaches a specific value is displayed, ``+500 shots remaining until game limit''. It should be noted that the advance notice display is displayed at a position that does not overlap with information displays regarding games such as decorative symbols.

As shown in FIG. 136(E), when the amount of balls put out reaches a specific value, the state shifts to a stopped state and the game is restricted, but the effect display device 1600 displays an image corresponding to the stopped state. . Images corresponding to the stopped state include the message ``Playing Restricted'', along with ``Playing is restricted as the daily ball limit of 100,000 has been reached.'', ``Please call the staff.'', and ``Please call the staff.''. The checkout button is valid.'' is displayed. Note that the payment button here refers to the count button switch 180 for executing payment processing. Furthermore, when the amount of balls put out reaches a specific value, the effect display device 1600 displays a stop symbol of the decorative symbol, a stop symbol of the second decorative symbol, a pending display, and a prior notice display. Regarding the information, when the message "Playing Restriction" is displayed after the amount of balls put out reaches a certain value, it will not be displayed (made invisible) and the message will be displayed on the darkened screen. There is. This makes it possible to understand that the amount of balls put out has reached a specific value and the gaming restriction has been implemented, and it can also be understood that the gaming restriction cannot be lifted without the operation of the hall manager. . Furthermore, the player can understand that the number of balls held by the player can be calculated by operating the counting button switch 180.

In the above, the effect display device 1600 displays the stop symbol of the decorative symbol, the stop symbol of the second decorative symbol, the hold display, and the advance notice display before the amount of balls to be dispensed reaches a specific value. Information regarding such games is executed in such a way that all information becomes unrecognizable when the amount of balls put out reaches a specific value. However, when the amount of balls put out reaches a specific value, some of the information regarding the game may be made unrecognizable, and other information may be made recognizable. For example, the advance notice display is information on whether or not to restrict the game, so it is made unrecognizable, and the stop symbol of the decorative symbol, the stop symbol of the second decorative symbol, and the hold display are It may also be made recognizable. Thereby, it is possible to understand under what circumstances the amount of balls put out reaches the specific value even after the amount of balls put out reaches the specific value.

As shown in FIG. 136(F), if opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 is detected as a slight abnormality during the stopped state, the fluctuating display of the decorative pattern is continued, but the effect display device 1600 In the central area, a message "Door opening error. Please call an attendant" is displayed as error display A, indicating that the main body frame 4 is open. In addition, in the upper area of the effect display device 1600, as a current status display B, a "game "Limit has been reached" message is displayed in a specific display area. This specific display area is set as a part of the display area in the effect display device 1600, and is also used for the above-mentioned advance notice display and current status display A, and is a display area that is used to display any game so that the hall manager does not overlook it. It is a fixed area that remains unchanged regardless of the state. These error display A and current status display B are configured to be displayed on a layer higher (on the front side) than the layer that displays other effect images such as the image display corresponding to the discontinued state. In this example, error display A and current status display B are displayed as the top layer. Furthermore, the current status display B is displayed at a position that does not overlap with the image display (message) or error display A corresponding to the aborted state. Thereby, when a slight abnormality occurs, it is possible to reliably know that the game is restricted.

As shown in FIG. 136(G), when a predetermined error end condition such as closing of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 is satisfied, the error display A and the current situation display B are erased in the effect display device 1600.

In this example, in order to satisfy a predetermined clearing condition for ending the halted state, it is necessary to turn on the power again in a predetermined power-on pattern after turning off the power. Here, we will use the limit clear pattern table 4 to select power-on patterns 2 and 3, which clear the gaming state at the time of power-off, and clear the ball output and the stopped state, as the power-on patterns when the power is turned on. A case will be described in which power-on patterns 1 and 4 are selected, in which the gaming state at power-off is maintained, the amount of balls put out is cleared, but the stopped state is maintained.

First, if you select power-on patterns 2 and 3 that clear the game state at the time of power cutoff and clear the ball output and the stopped state when turning the power back on after switching to the stopped state, By clearing the stopped state, the restriction on the game due to the stopped state has been lifted. In addition, information regarding the remaining fluctuation display when it is interrupted at the time of transitioning to the discontinued state and information regarding suspension are retained after the transition to the discontinued state or when the power is cut off, but when the power is turned on again after the power is cut off. Sometimes, by clearing the information regarding the remaining variable display at the time of such interruption and the information regarding the hold, the program is started in a low probability state with no hold. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 136 (H-1), the effect display device 1600 displays an initial image in which there is no pending display and the decorative pattern is stopped at the initial pattern. Further, in the upper area of the performance display device 1600, a message "Restriction cleared" is displayed as a clear notification 2, indicating that the amount of balls to be played and the stopped state have been cleared. This clear notification 2 is displayed in a layer higher than the information display regarding the game such as decorative symbols, and is displayed at a position that does not overlap with the information display regarding the game. Thereby, when the power is turned on again, it is possible to reliably know that the amount of balls put out and the stopped state have been cleared.

On the other hand, if you select power-on patterns 1 and 4, which maintain the gaming state at the time the power was cut off and clear the amount of balls played, but maintain the stopped state when the power is turned back on after the power is turned off after the state has changed to the stopped state. In this case, the restriction on the game in the suspended state has not been lifted. For this reason, the effect display device 1600 displays the message "The amount of balls put out has been cleared" as the clear notification 1, which indicates that the amount of balls put out has been cleared, and then displays the image shown in FIG. 136 (H-2). I'm trying to display it again. In addition, in the upper area of the performance display device 1600, as a clearing method display, a message ``If you clear the ram, the state will become normal'' is displayed for the hall manager, indicating how to clear the stopped state. This clearing method display is displayed in a layer higher than the image display corresponding to the discontinued state, and is displayed at a position that does not overlap with the image display (message) corresponding to the discontinued state. As a result, when the power is turned on again, it is possible to reliably know that it is necessary to turn on the power again with RAM clear in order to release the restrictions on the game.

FIG. 137 shows a specific example of performance when a severe abnormality occurs during the normal state or the discontinued state. In this example, 100000 is set as the above-mentioned "specific value", and restriction pattern 3 is selected as the above-mentioned "restriction pattern". That is, if the restriction pattern 3 is set, when the amount of balls put out reaches a specific value (100,000 shots), the game will be stopped with "game stop" and "shooting stop".

First, a case where a severe abnormality occurs during a normal state will be explained. As shown in FIG. 137(A), the effect display device 1600 executes a variable effect (effect based on a variable pattern) corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol, and displays the variation of the decorative pattern in the central area of the effect display device 1600. Displaying. Further, in the upper right area of the effect display device 1600, a variable display of a second decorative pattern is performed. Further, in the lower left area of the effect display device 1600, a hold display is displayed for the amount of time when a game ball enters the first starting port 2003 or the second starting port 2004, but the variable display of the special symbol is on standby.

As shown in FIG. 137(B), if magnetism is detected as a severe abnormality during the normal state, an error state occurs in which the fluctuating display of decorative symbols is stopped and it is impossible to proceed with the game. , the effect display device 1600 displays the message "Magnetic Abnormality" indicating that magnetism has been detected as error display B, and also displays messages such as "Please call the staff" and "Return to power and limit initialization." ” message is displayed. In addition, when magnetism is detected, the performance display device 1600 displays a stop symbol of the decorative pattern, a stop symbol of the second decorative pattern, and a pending display. Later, when the message "Magnetic Anomaly" is displayed, it is turned off (so that it cannot be seen) and the message is displayed on a darkened screen. Thereby, it is possible to detect magnetism and understand that an error state has occurred. It is also possible to understand that the error state will not be resolved unless the power is turned on again, and that the restrictions on the game will be lifted when the power is turned on again.

In addition, in the upper area of the performance display device 1600, as the current status display A, "Game limit" indicating the remaining amount of balls to be played until the game is restricted (the remaining amount of balls to be played until the amount of balls to be played reaches a specific value). The message "+42,000 shots remaining" is displayed. These error display B and current situation display A are displayed in a layer higher than the information display regarding the game such as decorative symbols. Furthermore, the current status display A is displayed at a position that does not overlap with the error display B (message). As a result, when a serious abnormality is detected, it is possible to reliably grasp the remaining amount of balls to be played before the game is restricted.

In this example, in order to satisfy a predetermined clearing condition for terminating an error state related to a severe abnormality, it is necessary to turn on the power again after turning off the power. Here, we will use the limit clear pattern table 4 to select power-on patterns 2 and 3, which clear the gaming state at the time of power-off, and clear the ball output and the stopped state, as the power-on patterns when the power is turned on. A case will be described in which power-on patterns 1 and 4 are selected, in which the gaming state at power-off is maintained, the amount of balls put out is cleared, but the stopped state is maintained.

First, if you select power-on patterns 2 and 3 that clear the gaming state at the time of power-off and clear the amount of balls put out and the stopped state when turning the power back on after an error condition has occurred, Once the error condition is cleared, it is possible to start playing the game. In addition, information regarding the remaining fluctuating display when interrupted when an error condition occurs, and information regarding suspension, are retained after an error condition occurs or when the power is turned off, but when restarted after the power is turned off. Sometimes, by clearing the information regarding the remaining variable display at the time of such interruption and the information regarding the hold, the program is started in a low probability state with no hold. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 137 (C-1), the effect display device 1600 displays an initial image in which there is no pending display and the decorative pattern is stopped at the initial pattern. Further, in the upper area of the performance display device 1600, a message "Restriction cleared" is displayed as a clear notification 2, indicating that the amount of balls to be played and the stopped state have been cleared. This clear notification 2 is displayed in a layer higher than the information display regarding the game such as decorative symbols, and is displayed at a position that does not overlap with the information display regarding the game. However, in this example, since the stopped state is not reached when the error condition occurs, it is not necessary to display the fact that the stopped state has been cleared as clear notification 2, and it is not necessary to display the fact that the stopped state has been cleared as clear notification 2. It may also be possible to display the effect or the amount of balls that were released at the time of clearing.

Similarly, after an error condition occurs, when the power is turned off and then turned on again, power-on patterns 1 and 4 are selected, which maintain the gaming state at the time of power-off, clear the amount of balls put out, but maintain the stopped state. In this case, the error state is cleared and the game can be started. However, information regarding the remaining fluctuating display when the display is interrupted when an error condition occurs, and information regarding suspension, are retained after an error condition occurs or when the power is turned off, but when the power is turned on again after the power is turned off. Even at any time, by maintaining information regarding the remaining fluctuation display at the time of such interruption and information regarding suspension, it is possible to resume in a state where there is suspension and in the middle of the previous fluctuation. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 137 (C-2), the effect display device 1600 restarts the variable display of the decorative pattern and the variable display of the second decorative pattern. Further, in the upper area of the performance display device 1600, a message "The amount of balls to be released has been cleared" is displayed as a clear notification 1, which indicates that the amount of balls to be released has been cleared. This clear notification 1 is displayed in a layer higher than the information display related to the game such as decorative symbols, and is displayed at a position that does not overlap with the information display related to the game. Thereby, when the power is turned on again, it is possible to reliably know that the amount of balls put out has been cleared. In this example, before clear notification 1 ends, the variable display of the decorative pattern and the variable display of the second decorative pattern are restarted, but after the clear notification 1 is ended, the variable display of the decorative pattern resumes. Alternatively, the variable display of the second decorative pattern may be restarted.

Next, a case will be described in which a severe abnormality occurs during the discontinued state. As shown in FIG. 137(A'), when the amount of balls put out reaches a specific value, the state shifts to a stopped state and the game is restricted, but the effect display device 1600 displays an image corresponding to the stopped state. Ru. The images corresponding to the stopped state include the message ``Playing Restricted'', along with the message ``Playing has been restricted because the daily limit of 100,000 balls has been reached.'', ``Please call the staff.'', `` The checkout button is valid.'' is displayed. Note that the payment button here refers to the count button switch 180 for executing payment processing. Furthermore, when the amount of balls put out reaches a specific value, the effect display device 1600 displays a stop symbol of the decorative symbol, a stop symbol of the second decorative symbol, a pending display, and a prior notice display. Regarding the information, when the message "Playing Restriction" is displayed after the amount of balls put out reaches a certain value, it will not be displayed (made invisible) and the message will be displayed on the darkened screen. There is.

As shown in FIG. 137(B'), when magnetism is detected as a severe abnormality during the stop state, the effect display device 1600 displays an error display B indicating that magnetism has been detected. Along with this message, the following messages are displayed: ``Please call the staff.'' and ``Return the power and the limits will be initialized.'' In addition, when magnetism is detected, the effect display device 1600 displays an image corresponding to the stopped state, but such an image is displayed at the time when the message "Magnetic Abnormality" is displayed after magnetism is detected. , so that it is not displayed (so that it cannot be seen), and a message is displayed on the darkened screen. Thereby, it is possible to detect magnetism and understand that an error state has occurred. In addition, it is possible to understand that the error state will not be resolved unless the power is turned on again, and that the restriction on the game will be lifted when the power is turned on again.

In addition, in the upper area of the performance display device 1600, as the current status display B, "Game "Limit has been reached" message is displayed in a specific display area. This specific display area is set as a part of the display area in the performance display device 1600, and is also used for the above-mentioned advance notice display and current situation display A, and is a display area that is used to display any game so that the hall manager does not overlook it. It is a fixed area that remains unchanged regardless of the state. These error display B and current status display B are configured to be displayed on a layer higher (on the front side) than the layer that displays other effect images such as the image display corresponding to the discontinued state. In this example, error display B and current status display B are displayed as the top layer. Furthermore, the current status display B is displayed at a position that does not overlap with the error display B (message). Thereby, when a serious abnormality occurs, it is possible to reliably know that the game is being restricted.

In this example, in order to satisfy a predetermined clearing condition for terminating an error state related to a severe abnormality, it is necessary to turn on the power again after turning off the power. Here, we will use the limit clear pattern table 4 to select power-on patterns 2 and 3, which clear the gaming state at the time of power-off, and clear the ball output and the stopped state, as the power-on patterns when the power is turned on. A case will be described in which power-on patterns 1 and 4 are selected, in which the gaming state at power-off is maintained, the amount of balls put out is cleared, but the stopped state is maintained.

First, after an error state occurred during the stopped state, power-on patterns 2 and 3 were selected, which clear the gaming state at the time of the power cut and clear the ball output and the stopped state when the power was turned off and turned on again. In this case, the error state is cleared and the discontinued state is also cleared, so that the restriction on the game due to the discontinued state is lifted and the game can be started. In addition, information regarding the remaining fluctuation display when it is interrupted at the time of transitioning to the discontinued state and information regarding suspension are retained after the transition to the discontinued state or when the power is cut off, but when the power is turned on again after the power is cut off. Sometimes, by clearing the information regarding the remaining variable display at the time of such interruption and the information regarding the hold, the program is started in a low probability state with no hold. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 137 (C'-1), the effect display device 1600 displays an initial image in which there is no pending display and the decorative pattern is stopped at the initial pattern. Further, in the upper area of the performance display device 1600, a message "Restriction cleared" is displayed as a clear notification 2, indicating that the amount of balls to be played and the stopped state have been cleared. This clear notification 2 is displayed in a layer higher than the information display regarding the game such as decorative symbols, and is displayed at a position that does not overlap with the information display regarding the game. Thereby, when the power is turned on again, it is possible to reliably know that the amount of balls put out and the stopped state have been cleared.

On the other hand, after an error condition occurs during the stopped state, when the power is turned off and then turned on again, the power-on patterns 1 and 4 maintain the gaming state at the time of the power cut, clear the amount of balls put out, but maintain the stopped state. If you select , the error state is cleared, but the restriction on the game due to the stopped state is not lifted. For this reason, the effect display device 1600 displays the message "The amount of balls put out has been cleared" indicating that the amount of balls put out has been cleared as the clear notification 1, and then displays the image shown in FIG. 137 (C'-2). I am trying to display it again. In addition, in the upper area of the performance display device 1600, as a clearing method display, a message ``If you clear the ram, the state will become normal'' is displayed for the hall manager, indicating how to clear the stopped state. This clearing method display is displayed in a layer higher than the image display corresponding to the discontinued state, and is displayed at a position that does not overlap with the image display (message) corresponding to the discontinued state. As a result, when the power is turned on again, it is possible to reliably know that it is necessary to turn on the power again with RAM clear in order to release the restrictions on the game.

FIG. 138 shows a specific example of the effect when a slight abnormality or a severe abnormality occurs during the termination preparation state. In addition, in this example, when the amount of balls put out reaches a specific value at the timing when a game ball enters the jackpot hole during a jackpot game, the game moves to the stop preparation state, and after the end of the jackpot game, it moves to the stop play state. do. Further, in this example, 100000 is set as the above-mentioned "specific value", and restriction pattern 3 is selected as the above-mentioned "restriction pattern". That is, if the restriction pattern 3 is set, when the amount of balls put out reaches a specific value (100,000 shots), the game will be stopped with "game stop" and "shooting stop". Further, in this example, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot, a 10-round jackpot game is provided in which the jackpot opening 2005 and the accessory winning opening 2006 are opened and closed.

As shown in FIG. 138(A), the effect display device 1600 executes a variable effect (effect based on a variable pattern) corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol, and displays the variation of the decorative pattern in the central area of the effect display device 1600. Displaying. Here, during the "consecutive game mode" in which the high probability state continues depending on the lottery result of the special symbol or by accepting the game ball B into the first V winning hole 2007 or the second V winning hole 2008, etc. When the lottery result of the special symbol becomes a hit, "777" is displayed as a stop symbol of the decorative symbol in the central area of the effect display device 1600. In addition, in the upper right area of the performance display device 1600, a variable display of the second decorative pattern is performed, and when the lottery result of the special pattern becomes a hit, "〇" is displayed as the stop pattern of the second decorative pattern. are doing. Further, in the lower left area of the effect display device 1600, a hold display is displayed for the amount of time when a game ball enters the first starting port 2003 or the second starting port 2004, but the variable display of the special symbol is on standby. In addition, in the lower right area of the effect display device 1600, a message indicating that the “consecutive game mode” is in effect is displayed, and a gaming area 5a on the right side of the effect display device 1600 is displayed during the jackpot game. A ``hit right'' arrow is displayed that instructs the player to aim for the game ball to enter the big winning hole 2005 provided in the game.

In addition, when the amount of balls to be released approaches a specific value, for example, when the number of remaining balls until the amount of balls to be released reaches a specific value becomes "+1400 shots," the upper area of the effect display device 1600 will display a warning in advance. As an operation, an advance notification display indicating the number of balls remaining until the amount of balls to be played reaches a specific value is displayed, ``+1400 shots remaining until game limit''. Note that the advance notice display is displayed at a position that does not overlap with the information display regarding the jackpot game being executed.

As shown in FIG. 138(B), at the start of the jackpot game, the message "Special bonus! Aim for V!" is displayed in the center area of the effect display device 1600, and during the jackpot game, the jackpot 2005 and At the same time as starting the opening/closing of the material winning hole 2006, the player is informed that the game ball should aim to enter the first V winning hole 2007 and the second V winning hole 2008 during the jackpot game.

As shown in FIG. 138(C), due to the payout of prize balls based on the game balls entering the big winning hole 2005 during the jackpot game, the number of remaining balls until the amount of balls to be put out reaches a specific value is "+0". At the time when the ball is released (when transitioning to the stop preparation state), in the upper area of the effect display device 1600, as an operation at the time of advance notification, a "game A pre-announcement message "Remaining until limit + 0 shots" is displayed for a predetermined period of time (5 seconds in this example). Here, "8R" is displayed as the current number of rounds, and "19900 shots GET" is displayed as the total number of prize balls. Then, when a predetermined period of time (5 seconds in this example) has elapsed since the advance notification display "+0 shots left until game limit" is displayed, a standby display shown in FIG. 138(D) is displayed.

In this example, the amount of prize balls paid out when a game ball enters the big prize opening 2005 is reflected in the total number of prize balls displayed on the production display device 1600 and the contents of the advance notice display. However, regarding the total number of prize balls and the contents of the advance notice display, the number of prize balls is not the point at which the game ball enters the big winning hole 2005 when the ball amount reaches a certain value, but the amount of the prize ball is the total amount. The display continues until a predetermined time (5 seconds in this example) has elapsed after being reflected in the number of prize balls and the content of the advance notice display. This prevents the player from missing information regarding whether or not the amount of balls put out has reached a specific value, and it is possible to ensure that the player is aware of the reason why the discontinued state starts thereafter.

In the above, regarding the total number of prize balls and the contents of the advance notice display, the amount of prize balls is reflected in the total number of prize balls and the contents of the advance notice display, not when the amount of balls played reaches a specific value. Although the display continues until the amount of balls released reaches a certain value, the display may end and a standby display may be displayed. As a result, when the amount of balls put out reaches a specific value, the state shifts to the stop preparation state, but at the same time, by displaying a standby display, it is possible to immediately know that the state has shifted to the stop preparation state.

In addition, when the amount of balls put out reaches a certain value, the state moves to a stop preparation state, but since the jackpot game that is currently in progress will continue, it is necessary to The "Right Hit" arrow, which encourages firing, continues to be displayed.

As shown in FIG. 138(D), after transitioning to the stop preparation state, a standby display is displayed in the upper area of the effect display device 1600. Specifically, as a standby display, a message indicating that the amount of balls put out has already reached a certain value is displayed, ``The jackpot is over and today is over.'' Thereby, in the no-stop preparation state, it is possible to understand that when the jackpot game ends, the game will shift to the no-stop state and the game will be restricted. Note that the standby display is displayed at a position that does not overlap with the information display regarding the jackpot game being executed. As a result, it is possible to grasp both the fact that the state has shifted to the stop preparation state and the information regarding the jackpot game that is currently being executed. Here, "9R" is displayed as the current number of rounds, and "19915 GET" is displayed as the total number of prize balls.

As shown in FIG. 138(E), if opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 is detected as a slight abnormality during the stop preparation state, the jackpot game is continued, but the central area of the effect display device 1600 Here, as error display A, a message "Door opening error. Please call an attendant" indicating that the main body frame 4 is open is displayed. In addition, in the upper area of the performance display device 1600, the content of the standby display is continued as the current status display C, and a message saying ``The jackpot is over and today is over'' indicating that the amount of balls put out has already reached a certain value is displayed. These error display A and current status display C are displayed in a higher layer than the information display regarding the jackpot game. Further, the current status display C is displayed at a position that does not overlap with the information display regarding the jackpot game or the error display A (message). Thereby, when a slight abnormality occurs, it is possible to reliably know that the amount of balls put out has already reached a specific value and the game is ready to be stopped.

As shown in FIG. 138(F), when a predetermined error termination condition such as closing of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 is satisfied, the effect display device 1600 erases the error display A, but the current status display C continues to be displayed as a standby display. Here, "10R" is displayed as the current number of rounds, and "20020 shots GET" is displayed as the total number of prize balls.

As shown in FIG. 138(G), at the end of the jackpot game, an ending display accompanying the end of the jackpot game is executed, and in the center area of the effect display device 1600, a message saying “Win completed! Thank you for your hard work! Download special benefits! !” message is displayed. Further, in the lower right area of the effect display area 1600, a code that can be read with a camera is displayed, and by reading the code, it is possible to download special benefits. This special benefit can be obtained only when the amount of balls put out during a jackpot game reaches a certain value, thereby reducing the player's dissatisfaction with the game being restricted due to the game being stopped. be able to. Although the standby display is not displayed at the end of the jackpot game, it may be displayed.

As shown in FIG. 138(H), after the jackpot game ends, the game shifts to a stopped state and the game is restricted, but the performance display device 1600 displays an image corresponding to the stopped state. Images corresponding to the stopped state include the message ``Playing Restricted'', along with ``Playing is restricted as the daily ball limit of 100,000 has been reached.'', ``Please call the staff.'', and ``Please call the staff.''. The checkout button is valid.'' is displayed. Note that the payment button here refers to the count button switch 180 for executing payment processing. In addition, the effect display device 1600 does not display the ending display that accompanies the end of the jackpot game (makes it invisible) and displays the message on the darkened screen at the time when the message "Game Restriction" is displayed. I have to. This makes it possible to understand that the amount of balls put out has reached a specific value and the gaming restriction has been implemented, and it can also be understood that the gaming restriction cannot be lifted without the operation of the hall manager. . Furthermore, the player can understand that the number of balls held by the player can be calculated by operating the counting button switch 180.

However, in the performance display device 1600, the code that was displayed during the ending display accompanying the end of the jackpot game continues to be displayed even after the image corresponding to the stopped state is displayed. Further, the code that was displayed during the ending display accompanying the end of the jackpot game is displayed at a position that does not overlap with the image (message) corresponding to the stopped state. As a result, even after transitioning to the discontinued state, the code can be read without haste, and it is possible to avoid missing out on downloading special benefits.

Next, a case will be described in which a severe abnormality occurs during the termination preparation state. As shown in FIG. 138 (E'), if magnetism is detected as a severe abnormality during preparation for stopping, the jackpot game in progress is stopped and an error state occurs in which it is impossible to proceed with the game. However, the production display device 1600 displays the message "Magnetic Abnormality" indicating that magnetism has been detected as error display B, and also displays messages such as "Please call the staff" and "Recovery by turning the power on again and initializing the restrictions." ” message is displayed. Furthermore, when magnetism is detected, the effect display device 1600 displays information regarding the jackpot game, but regarding the information display regarding such a jackpot game, a message "magnetic abnormality" is displayed after magnetism is detected. At that point, it is turned off (so that it cannot be seen) and a message is displayed on the darkened screen. Thereby, it is possible to detect magnetism and understand that an error state has occurred. In addition, it is possible to understand that the error state will not be resolved unless the power is turned on again, and that the restriction on the game will be lifted when the power is turned on again.

In addition, in the upper area of the performance display device 1600, the content of the standby display is continued as the current status display C, and a message saying ``The jackpot is over and today is over'' indicating that the amount of balls put out has already reached a certain value is displayed. These error display B and current situation display C are displayed in a higher layer than the information display regarding the jackpot game. Furthermore, the current status display C is displayed at a position that does not overlap with the error display B (message). Thereby, when a severe abnormality occurs, it is possible to reliably know that the amount of balls put out has already reached a specific value and the game is ready to be discontinued.

In this example, in order to satisfy a predetermined clearing condition for terminating an error state related to a severe abnormality, it is necessary to turn on the power again after turning off the power. Here, we will use the limit clear pattern table 4 to select power-on patterns 2 and 3, which clear the gaming state at the time of power-off, and clear the ball output and the stopped state, as the power-on patterns when the power is turned on. A case will be explained in which power-on patterns 1 and 4 are selected, in which the gaming state at the time of power-off is maintained, the amount of balls put out is cleared, but the stopped state is maintained.

First, after an error state occurs during the preparation state for stopping, select power-on patterns 2 and 3 that clear the gaming state at the time of power interruption and clear the amount of balls to be played and the stopped state when the power is turned off and then turned on again. In this case, the error state is cleared and it is possible to start the game, but the stoppage preparation state is also cleared, so that the game cannot be restarted as the planned stoppage state after the end of the stoppage preparation state. It does not enforce any restrictions on gaming. In addition, information regarding remaining jackpot games when interrupted when an error condition occurs, and information regarding holds, are retained after an error condition occurs or when the power is turned off, but when restarted after the power is turned off. Sometimes, by clearing the information regarding the remaining jackpot games at the time of such interruption and the information regarding the hold, the game is started in a low probability state with no hold. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 138 (F'-1), the effect display device 1600 displays an initial image in which there is no pending display and the decorative pattern is stopped at the initial pattern. Further, in the upper area of the performance display device 1600, a message "Restriction cleared" is displayed as a clear notification 2, indicating that the ball amount and the stop preparation state have been cleared. This clear notification 2 is displayed in a layer higher than the information display regarding the game such as decorative symbols, and is displayed at a position that does not overlap with the information display regarding the game. As a result, when the power is turned on again, it is possible to reliably know that the ball amount and the stop preparation state have been cleared.

On the other hand, after an error state occurs during the stop preparation state, when the power is turned off and then turned on again, the power-on pattern 1 maintains the gaming state at the time of the power cut, clears the amount of balls put out, but maintains the stop state; If 4 is selected, the error state is cleared and the game can be started, but the stop preparation state is not cleared. In addition, information regarding remaining jackpot games when interrupted when an error condition occurs, and information regarding holds, are retained after an error condition occurs or when the power is turned off, but when restarted after the power is turned off. Even at times, it is possible to resume the interrupted jackpot game by maintaining information regarding the remaining jackpot games at the time of interruption and information regarding the suspension. For this reason, the effect display device 1600 displays the message "The amount of balls put out has been cleared" as the clear notification 1, which indicates that the amount of balls put out has been cleared, and then displays the image shown in FIG. 138 (F'-2). I am trying to display it again. In addition, in the upper area of the performance display device 1600, as a standby display, not only is a message "The jackpot is over and today is over" indicating that the amount of balls put out has already reached a certain value displayed, but also a clearing method display is displayed. ``If you clear the ram, the state will return to normal,'' a message is displayed for hole managers indicating how to clear the stop preparation state. This clearing method display is displayed in a layer higher than the information display regarding the jackpot game, and is displayed at a position that does not overlap with the information display regarding the jackpot game. As a result, when the power is turned on again, it is possible to reliably know that it is necessary to turn on the power again with a ram clear in order to clear the abort preparation state.

(Another example of stopping counter 1)
In the above, for the "stopping counter", if you clear (initialize) "the amount of balls put out before the stoppage state starts or after the stoppage state starts" when the power is turned on, the initial value is set to 0. It is configured such that it is subtracted by the firing of the game ball B and added by the payout of the prize ball. Then, when only the number of shots increases from the time when the stop counter is 0, it is counted in a negative direction from 0. On the other hand, in another example 1, when the "stopping counter" is cleared (initialized) "the amount of balls put out before the stopping state starts or after the stopping state starts" when the power is turned on. , a default value other than 0 (for example, 100000) is set as the initial value. In such a case, the stop counter starts from an initial value of 100,000 when the power is turned on, and is decremented by the firing of the game ball B and incremented by the payout of the prize ball.

Specifically, regarding the amount of balls to be paid A, the starting point is the initial value of 100,000, which is the initial value of the stopping counter, and the value when the stopping counter reaches the maximum value within a period until a predetermined clearing condition is met. , is calculated as the difference between the value at the time when the abort counter becomes the lowest within the period until a predetermined clearing condition is satisfied.

In addition, regarding the ball output amount B, the stopping counter starts from the initial value of 100,000, and the stopping counter becomes the most during the period from the initial value of 100,000 until the predetermined clearing condition is met. It is calculated as the difference between the current value and the current value. In addition, in another example 1, the maximum value of the difference is stored and held as the ball output amounts A and B, and the stored and held ball output amounts A and B are updated by calculating the new maximum value of the difference. This is the same as when the initial value is 0.

In another example 1, when the amount of balls put out (amounts of balls put out A and B) reaches a specific value, the game is stopped and the game is restricted. For example, if 100,000 shots are selected as the specific value, If so, the stopping counter starts from the initial value of 100,000, and when the stopping counter reaches 200,000 by adding +100,000 for the specific value, it is determined that the ball output amount B has reached the specific value. are doing.

Further, in another example 1, the "stopping counter" is configured not only to have the initial value of 100,000 as the starting point, but also to have 0 as the lowest value. In other words, even if only the number of shots is further increased from the time when the stopping counter reaches 0, the count is not counted in the negative direction from 0, and the state of 0 is maintained. As a result, for the ball output amount B, even if only the number of shots increases after the stop counter reaches 0, the ball output amount B is specified from the time when the stop counter reaches 200,000 from the time of 0. Since it is determined that the value has been reached, the ball amount B reaches the specific value earlier than when counting from 0 in the negative direction. In other words, by making it possible for a discontinuance state in which gaming is restricted to occur at an early stage, a large amount of balls may be awarded to a cheater due to fraudulent activities, or a large amount of balls may be given to a cheater due to a bias in the probability of winning or losing. It is possible to prevent the bonus from being given to a regular player.

(Another example of stopping counter 2)
In another example 2, for the "stopping counter", if you clear (initialize) "the amount of balls put out before the stoppage state starts or after the stoppage state starts" when the power is turned on, the initial value The configuration is such that 0 is set and 0 is the lowest value. In such a case, when the power is turned on, the stop counter starts from the initial value of 0, and is subtracted by the firing of game ball B and added by the payout of the prize ball, but when the stop counter reaches 0. Even if only the number of shots increases further, the count is not counted in the negative direction from 0 and the state of 0 is maintained.

Further, in another example 2, the ball output amount C is calculated from the stopping counter. Regarding the ball output amount C, the stopping counter starts from the initial value of 0, and when the stopping counter reaches the maximum value within the period from the initial value of 0 until the predetermined clearing condition is met. It is calculated as the difference between the value of In addition, in another example 2, the maximum value of the difference is stored and held as the ball output amount C, and the stored and held ball output amount C is updated by newly calculating the maximum value of the difference. This is the same as the case where the lowest value = 0 is not provided. When the payout amount C reaches a specific value, the game is stopped and the game is restricted.

In addition, in another example 2, when the amount of balls to be paid C reaches a specific value, the game is stopped and the game is restricted. For example, if 100,000 shots are selected as the specific value, The stopping counter starts from the initial value of 0, and when the stopping counter reaches 100,000 by adding +100,000 for the specific value, it is determined that the ball output amount C has reached the specific value.

In addition, in another example 2, the "stopping counter" is configured not only to have the initial value of 0 as the starting point, but also to set 0 as the lowest value, but for the ball output amount C, Even if only the number of balls fired increases after the stop counter reaches 0, it is determined that the ball output amount C has reached a specific value when the stop counter reaches 100,000 from 0. The ball amount C reaches the specific value earlier than when counting in the negative direction from . In other words, by making it possible for a discontinuance state in which gaming is restricted to occur at an early stage, a large amount of balls may be awarded to a cheater due to fraudulent activities, or a large amount of balls may be given to a cheater due to a bias in the probability of winning or losing. It is possible to prevent the bonus from being given to a regular player.

In addition, regarding the "stopping counter", it is decremented when the game ball B is fired and added when the prize ball is paid out, but the initial value is set to be a value larger than the specific value that causes the game to be stopped and the game is restricted. , may be added by firing the game ball B and subtracted by paying out the prize ball. In such a case, for example, if 100,000 shots are selected as the specific value, the stopping counter will start from the initial value of 100,000, and the specific value +100,000 will be subtracted so that the stopping counter becomes 0. When this happens, it is determined that the amount of balls put out has reached a certain value. In addition, when applied to Example 2, for example, when the power is turned on, the stopping counter starts from the initial value of 100000, and is added by firing the game ball B and subtracted by the payout of the prize ball. Even if only the number of shots is further increased from the time when the stop counter reaches 100,000, the configuration may be such that the state of 100,000 is maintained without counting in the positive direction from 100,000.

(About changes in advance notice display)
In this example, for the "stopping counter", if you clear (initialize) "the amount of balls put out before the stoppage state starts or after the stoppage state starts" when the power is turned on, the initial value will be 0. is set so that it is subtracted when the game ball B is fired and added when the prize ball is paid out. Further, 100,000 shots is selected as the specific value, and when the stop counter reaches 100,000, it is determined that the amount of balls put out has reached the specific value, and the game is restricted by setting the game to a stop state. In addition, before the amount of balls released reaches a specific value, a predetermined value (in this example, the number of remaining balls until the amount of balls released reaches a specific value is 5,000, that is, the number of balls released is 95,000). Until the amount of balls put out reaches a specific value, the performance display device 1600 displays a preliminary notification (in this example, ``Remaining until game limit +〇〇 ”) is displayed. Further, when the advance notification display is performed, the LED of the lamp B blinks for a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds) as advance notification light emission.

Specifically, before the amount of balls put out reaches a specific value on the main control board 1310 side and the game is restricted, the number of balls remaining until the amount of balls put out reaches a specific value is determined on the main control board 1310 side. When a game ball enters a winning hole such as the big winning hole 2005 where the remaining number of balls becomes "+5000 shots," the preliminary flag is turned ON, and the ON information of the preliminary flag is sent to the main control board 1310. The information is sent from the peripheral control board 1510 to the peripheral control board 1510 side. When the peripheral control board 1510 side receives the advance flag ON information, it starts displaying advance notice on the effect display device 1600 (in this example, "remaining until game limit + XX shots"), and the amount of balls to be put out is It continues to run until a certain value is reached. Note that the calculation of the amount of balls to be put out is calculated based on a stop counter that is the difference between the number of shots and the number of payouts on the main control board 1310 side. In other words, regarding the number of balls remaining until the amount of balls put out reaches a certain value, as the number of balls fired increases, the amount of balls put out decreases and the number of remaining balls increases, and as the number of balls put out increases, the amount of balls put out increases and the remaining number of balls increases. The number of pitches will decrease.

When the number of balls remaining until the amount of balls to be put out reaches a certain value is "+5000 shots," the effect display device 1600 starts displaying advance notice, but after that, the amount of balls to be put out decreases and the number of balls remaining is ``+5000 shots.'' As the number of balls increases, the number of remaining balls exceeds "+5000 shots" and the advance notice display ends, and the number of balls remaining increases again and the number of remaining balls decreases, and the number of remaining balls exceeds "+5000 shots". When the pre-notification display is started upon reaching , the pre-flag is frequently switched on the main control board 1310 side, and the ON information of the pre-flag is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 many times. Furthermore, if the advance notification display is displayed or not displayed, it becomes difficult to grasp the gaming status. In this regard, in this example, when the advance notice display is started on the effect display device 1600, even if the number of balls released decreases and the number of remaining balls increases, the predetermined number of remaining balls exceeds "+5000 shots". The advance notification display does not end until the number reaches a numerical value (in this example, the number of balls remaining until the number of balls released reaches a specific value is 5,100, that is, the number of balls released reaches 94,900). That's what I do. This prevents frequent switching of the pre-flag on the main control board 1310 side, suppresses the sending of pre-flag ON information to the peripheral control board 1510 repeatedly, and avoids control burden and control complexity. can do. Further, by displaying the advance notice display as continuously as possible, it is possible to prevent difficulty in grasping the gaming state. In this example, the transition of the advance notice display after the start of the advance notice display will be explained below.

FIG. 139 is a time chart showing the transition of advance notice display after starting advance notice display. In this example, a situation is explained in which the amount of balls put out increases and decreases around 95,000 shots (the remaining number of balls is 5,000 shots).

In (A), when the number of balls being put out increases and reaches 95,000 balls (the remaining number of balls is 5,000 balls), the main control board 1310 sends a pre-notification start command to the peripheral control board 1510. The effect display device 1600 starts displaying "+5000 shots remaining until the game limit" as a prior notice display. At this time, in the lamp B, the LED blinks for a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds) as advance notification light emission.

Then, after starting the advance notification display, when the amount of balls put out increases, a pre-notification update command is sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 every time the amount of balls put out increases by 100, and the effect display device 1600 The content of the advance notice display has been updated. For example, when the amount of balls put out increases by 100, the effect display device 1600 updates the advance notice display to "4,900 shots remaining until the game limit", and when the amount of balls put out further increases by 100, the effect display device 1600, the advance notice display is updated to "+4800 shots remaining until game limit". Here, the display contents of the advance notice display are updated when the number of balls to be put out increases by 100 balls, and the display contents of the advance notice display are not updated when the number of balls to be put out increases by only 1 to 99 balls. This prevents the display contents of the advance notice display from being updated in real time when the amount of balls to be dispensed increases, and the advance notice update command being sent to the peripheral control board 1510 many times. , control burden and control complexity can be avoided. In addition, in lamp B, the LED is set to emit a predetermined warning light only when there are 5,000 balls left until the number of balls thrown out reaches a specific value, that is, when the number of balls thrown out reaches 95,000 balls. The lamp will blink for a period of (for example, 2 seconds), and when the amount of balls to be dispensed increases by 100 and the display contents of the advance notice display are updated, lamp B will not emit any light corresponding to the update. I have to.

In (B), after starting the advance notice display, if the number of balls put out decreases and the number of balls put out falls below 95,000 (the number of remaining balls exceeds 5,000), the main control board 131 The advance notification end command is not sent to the peripheral control board 1510, and the effect display device 1600 continues to display "+5000 shots remaining until game limit" as the advance notification display. Then, as the number of balls put out increased again, the number of balls put out exceeded 95,000 shots (with 5,000 balls remaining), and after that, the number of balls put out decreased, and the number of balls put out fell below 95,000 shots. (the remaining number of balls exceeds 5,000 balls), but when the number of balls released is 95,000 balls (the remaining number of balls is 5,000 balls), the main control board 1310 sends a pre-announcement start command or a pre-notification start command to the peripheral control board 1510. Without transmitting the notification end command, the performance display device 1600 continues to display "+5000 shots remaining until game limit" as a preliminary notification display. This prevents the advance notice start command and the advance notice end command from being sent to the peripheral control board 1510 many times after starting the advance notice display, thereby avoiding control burden and control complexity. Can be done. In addition, although lamp B emits light in response to the pre-notification start command, it does not emit light in response to the pre-notification end command, to prevent external parties from being misled into thinking that something is wrong with the gaming machine. are doing.

In (C), after starting the advance notice display, if the number of balls delivered decreases and reaches 94,900 balls (remaining number of balls is 5,100 balls), the peripheral control from the main control board 1310 A pre-notification end command is sent to the board 1510, and the effect display device 1600 ends the pre-notification display. Here, after starting the advance notice display, the advance notice display ends when the number of balls put out decreases by 100 balls, and the advance notice display does not end even if the number of balls put out decreases by 1 to 99 balls. . In other words, the period after the advance notice display starts until the number of balls put out decreases by 99 is an end suppression period in which the advance notice display does not end even if the number of balls put out falls below 95,000. As a result, after the advance notice display has started, the advance notice display can be continued as much as possible, allowing for a slight decrease in the amount of balls put out, thereby preventing it from becoming difficult to grasp the gaming status. can. In addition, in this example, the "termination suppression period" that allows the continued display of the advance notice display is "until the amount of balls released decreases by 1 to 99", but it is not limited to this. If you set the amount of decrease in the amount of balls put out as appropriate depending on the performance of the gaming machine, such as "until the number of balls put out decreases by 1 to 199" or "until the number of balls put out decreases by 1 to 49", etc. good.

In this example, regarding the operation at the start of the advance notice, the advance notice is displayed using the effect display device 1600 and the advance notice is emitted using the lamp B. However, regarding the operation at the start of the advance notice, The effect display device 1600 may be used to display only the advance notice and not emit the advance notice. As a result, when the amount of balls put out increases or decreases beyond the above-mentioned end suppression period and the advance notification start command is sent several times, lamp B will emit light many times and the game machine will be alerted to the outside as if there is an abnormality. Can prevent misunderstandings.

In (D), when the number of balls being delivered increases again and reaches 95,000 balls (the remaining number of balls is 5,000 balls), the main control board 1310 sends a pre-notification start command to the peripheral control board 1510. is transmitted, and the effect display device 1600 starts displaying "+5000 shots remaining until game limit" as a prior notice display.

In (E), after starting the advance notice display, if the number of balls delivered decreases and reaches 94,900 (the remaining number of balls is 5,100), the main control board 1310 will control the peripheral control. Although the pre-notification termination command is sent to the board 1510, for some reason, such as a temporary power outage or a poor connection between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control board 1510 side It is conceivable that an irregularity may occur in which the advance notice end command cannot be received normally (the advance notice end command is missed on the peripheral control board 1510 side). If such an irregularity occurs, normally, when the number of balls released reaches 94,900 (the remaining number of balls is 5,100), the advance notification end command will be retransmitted, etc. However, in this example, retransmission is not performed at this opportunity, and the effect display device 1600 does not end the advance notice display. In other words, if such an irregularity occurs, even if the number of balls played reaches 94,900 (the remaining number of balls is 5,100) and the timing to end the advance notice display has arrived, the advance notice display will display "Playing Restrictions". "+5000 shots remaining" is displayed continuously. As a result, the advance notification end command is re-sent at unexpected times during the game (for example, when no game balls are fired or when no balls enter the exit slot, etc.), giving the player a sense of discomfort. I am trying to restrain myself from giving.

In (F), in a situation where the above-mentioned irregularity in which the advance notice display does not end occurs, the number of balls put out further decreases, and the number of balls put out reaches 94,800 (with 5,200 balls remaining). In this case, a pre-notification end command is sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, and the effect display device 1600 ends the pre-notification display. In this example, assuming that the advance notification display does not end at the timing when it should, we will not only display the timing when the number of balls released reaches 94,900 (5,100 balls remaining), but also the timing when the number of balls released reaches 94,800 ( Even when the number of remaining balls reaches 5,200 balls) or the amount of balls to be played reaches 94,700 balls (the number of balls remaining: 5,300 balls), a preliminary notification end command is sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 in advance. ing. As a result, even if an irregularity occurs in which the peripheral control board 1510 temporarily cannot receive the advance notice end command and the advance notice display does not end, the advance notice display can be ended at a different timing that does not feel strange. At the same time, it is possible to reliably prevent advance notice display from continuing to be displayed without ending.

In addition, in this example, the trigger for sending the pre-notification end command is "timing when the amount of balls put out reaches 94,900 shots (number of remaining balls is 5,100 balls) - timing when the amount of balls put out reaches 94,500 shots (number of balls remaining)". Although the timing is set in units of 100 shots up to the timing when the number of shots reaches 5,500 shots, the advance notice display may be ended at other timings. For example, when the hall manager performs a termination operation (for example, operating the RAM clear switch 741 or setting key switch while the power is turned on, or opening the main body frame 4 or door frame 3), the pre-announcement termination command is executed. It is also possible to forcibly send the advance notification display to forcefully end the advance notice display at a time when it should have ended.

Furthermore, in this example, the advance notification end command cannot be received normally on the peripheral control board 1510 side due to a temporary power outage or a poor connection between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510. If an irregularity (missing the pre-notification end command on the peripheral control board 1510 side) occurs, a process is performed to preliminarily send the pre-notification end command at another opportunity as described above, but the peripheral control board 1510 side If an irregularity occurs in which the advance notice update command cannot be received normally (the peripheral control board 1510 side misses the advance notice update command), the process of preliminarily transmitting the advance notice update command at another opportunity is not performed. I try not to. For example, after starting the advance notification display, if the number of balls to be played increases by 100 and reaches 95,100 (the remaining number of balls is 4,900), the main control board 1310 sends a message to the peripheral control board 1510. A pre-notification update command is sent, but if an irregularity occurs in which the peripheral control board 1510 cannot receive this pre-notification update command, the effect display device 1600 displays "+5000 shots remaining until game limit" as a pre-notification display. continues to be displayed, and then the number of balls put out increases by another 100 and reaches 95,200 shots (number of remaining balls is 4,800). A pre-notification update command corresponding to the fact that the game limit has been reached is sent to the peripheral control board 1510, and the pre-notification display is updated to "+4800 shots remaining until game limit". This makes it possible for the player to feel as if the amount of balls put out has suddenly increased, and it is possible to improve the game's interest by making use of irregularities. In addition, although lamp B emits light in response to the advance notice start command, it does not emit light in response to the advance notice update command, which prevents external parties from being misled into thinking that something is wrong with the gaming machine. are doing.

Note that due to some abnormality, the advance notification display may not be updated on the peripheral control board 1510 side until the amount of balls put out reaches a specific value, so in such a case, for example, the update operation by the hall manager ( For example, when the power is turned on, the RAM clear switch 741 or setting key switch is operated, or the main body frame 4 or door frame 3 is opened. The advance notice display may be forcibly updated by forcibly transmitting the advance notice update command.

In (G), when the number of balls being delivered increases again and reaches 95,000 balls (the number of remaining balls is 5,000 balls), the main control board 1310 sends a pre-notification start command to the peripheral control board 1510. is transmitted, and the effect display device 1600 starts displaying "+5000 shots remaining until game limit" as a prior notice display.

In (H), after starting the advance notice display, if the number of balls released increases by 100 and reaches 95,100 (remaining number of balls is 4,900), the main control board 1310 controls peripheral control. A advance notice update command is sent to the board 1510, and the effect display device 1600 updates the advance notice display to "+4900 shots remaining until game limit".

In (I), after updating the advance notice display to "4,900 shots remaining until the game limit", the number of balls put out decreased and fell below 95,100 shots (the number of balls remaining was 4,900 shots left). (exceeded), the main control board 1310 does not send a pre-notification demotion command to the peripheral control board 1510, and the production display device 1600 continues to display "+4900 shots remaining until game limit" as a pre-notification display. it's shown. This prevents the advance notice update command and advance notice demotion command from being sent repeatedly to the peripheral control board 1510 after the advance notice display is updated to "+4900 shots remaining until game limit". , control burden and control complexity can be avoided. In addition, in this example, a pre-notification update command is used when the amount of balls put out increases (the number of remaining balls decreases), and a pre-notification demotion command is used when the amount of balls put out decreases (the number of remaining balls increases). and are separate commands, but they may be shared as commands indicating the display contents of the advance notice display.

In (J), after updating the advance notice display to ``4,900 shots remaining until the game limit'', the number of balls put out decreased and fell below 95,000 shots (the number of balls remaining was 5,000 shots). (exceeded), a pre-notification demotion command is sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, and the effect display device 1600 updates the pre-notification display to "+5000 shots remaining until the game limit". . Here, when the number of balls put out is 95,100 (the number of balls remaining is 4,900), the advance notification display is updated to "remaining until the game limit + 4,900 shots", and then when the number of balls put out decreases by 100. If the display contents of the advance notice display are updated and the amount of balls to be released is reduced by 1 to 99, the display contents of the advance notice display are not updated. In other words, after the advance notice display is updated to display "+4,900 shots remaining until the game limit" until the amount of balls to be played decreases by 99, this is a demotion suppression period in which the display contents of the advance notice display are not updated. As a result, after the advance notification display is updated to the display of "+4900 shots remaining until the game limit", the display is continued as much as possible to prevent difficulty in grasping the game status.

In this example, in (G) to (H), as the number of balls released increases, the number of balls delivered shifts from 95,000 shots (number of balls remaining: 5,000 balls) to 95,100 shots (number of balls remaining: 4,900 balls). In the meantime, the performance display device 1600 displays "+5000 shots remaining until the game limit" as a prior notice display, but in (I) to (J), as the amount of balls released decreases, Until the number of balls changes from 95,100 shots (4,900 balls remaining) to 95,000 balls (5,000 balls remaining), the effect display device 1600 displays a pre-announcement message "+4,900 balls remaining until game limit". ” is displayed. In this way, even if the interval of the amount of balls put out is the same, the display contents of the advance notice display can be changed depending on whether the amount of balls put out is increasing or the amount of balls coming out is decreasing. , it is possible to continue displaying the display contents of the advance notification display once displayed as much as possible.

In (K), after updating the advance notice display to ``5,000 shots remaining until the game limit'', the number of balls released reached 94,900 shots (5,100 balls remaining) while the number of balls decreased. In this case, a pre-notification end command is sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, and the effect display device 1600 ends the pre-notification display.

In this example, in (G) to (H), as the number of balls released increases, the number of balls delivered shifts from 95,000 shots (number of balls remaining: 5,000 balls) to 95,100 shots (number of balls remaining: 4,900 balls). Until then, the performance display device 1600 displays "+5,000 shots remaining until the game limit" as a prior notice display, but in (J) to (K), the amount of balls that are released decreases and the number of shots that are released decreases. Until the number of balls changes from 95,000 shots (5,000 balls remaining) to 94,900 balls (5,100 balls remaining), the effect display device 1600 displays a pre-announcement message "+5,000 balls remaining until game limit". ” is displayed. In this way, even if the intervals of the amount of balls put out are different, the display content of the advance notice display is the same depending on whether the amount of balls put out is increasing or the amount of balls coming out is decreasing. The display contents of the advance notice display once displayed can be displayed continuously as much as possible.

In this example, as described above, if a severe abnormality is detected during the execution of the advance notice display, the effect display device 1600 uses and displays the same data as the advance notice display as the current situation display A. However, if a severe abnormality is detected while the advance notice display is ending or demotion is being suppressed, the current status display A can be changed to the current status display while using the same data as the advance notice display. It is desirable that the display contents of display A be controlled so as to show the accurate amount of balls to be played to the hall manager. By doing this, even if an irregular situation occurs, the hall manager can accurately recognize the amount of balls put out through the current situation display A.

Further, in each of the above examples, a message for advance notice display is displayed in a specific display area in the top layer of the effect display device 1600 during the progress of the game, and other effect images are used to display the advance notice display. Although it is assumed that visibility is not obstructed, the predetermined area for displaying adjustment images (for example, images corresponding to volume and light intensity, images related to other adjustments, etc.) that reflect adjustment operations by the player regarding the presentation surface is a specific display area. If the adjustment image is provided at a position overlapping in the front-rear direction with the advance notice display, the visibility of the adjusted image will be obstructed by the advance notice display at least while the advance notice display is being displayed, and there is a possibility that the interest in the game will be reduced. In order to solve this problem, for example, in each of the above examples, the predetermined area for displaying the adjusted image may be provided at a position that does not overlap the specific display area in the front-back direction. Thereby, the visibility of the adjusted image can be ensured even while the advance notification display is being displayed, and it is possible to avoid a decrease in interest in the game. In addition, if a part of the predetermined area for displaying the adjusted image is provided so as to overlap a specific display area in the front-back direction, the adjusted image may be shifted from the advance notice display to at least the extent that the result of the adjustment operation by the player can be confirmed. (For example, if the adjustment image is a level gauge type, display it so that it does not overlap so that you can understand the changes in the level gauge, and if the adjustment image is a numerical type, display it so that it does not overlap so that you can understand which value it is.) It is also possible to display them so that they do not overlap, and in this case as well, it is possible to avoid a decrease in interest in the game.

Further, in each of the above examples, a message for advance notice display is displayed in a specific display area in the top layer of the effect display device 1600 during the progress of the game, and other effect images are used to display the advance notice display. Although it is assumed that visibility is not obstructed, it is desirable that the advance notice display continues to be displayed even after the game enters a standby state in which no game is in progress. This can prevent a new player from starting the game without knowing information regarding the amount of balls to be played, etc. before starting the game. Furthermore, since the advance notice display is displayed on the top layer of the performance display device 1600, it may obstruct the visibility of demonstration images (for example, performance explanations, advertising images, etc.) that are performed in a standby state. Therefore, there is a concern that the needs of players who wish to check demonstration images may not be satisfied. In order to solve this problem, for example, in each of the above examples, the advance notice display in a specific display area is hidden so that it cannot be seen during the whole period or a part of the period when the demonstration image is shown, and at least Resume display of the advance notice display in a specific display area when a new player performs a predetermined operation (for example, contact before operating the handle 160, adjustment operation, or operation of another button, etc.) etc. can be exemplified. This makes it possible to satisfy the needs of players who want to check demonstration images while preventing new players from starting the game without recognizing information regarding the amount of balls to be played and the like before starting the game.

(Modified example of limit clear pattern table 4)
As mentioned above in detail, in the limit clear pattern table 4, no matter which of the power-on patterns 1 to 4 is selected when the power is turned on, "before the aborted state starts or when the aborted state starts" Cleared (initialized) the amount of balls put out since then. Specifically, in the restriction clear pattern table 4, when the power is turned on, only when the gaming state at the time of power-off is cleared (initialized) as in power-on patterns 2 and 3, "restriction on gaming in the suspended state" is set. is cleared (initialized), but along with clearing the amount of balls to be played, the stop preparation state is also cleared (initialized). On the other hand, when the power is turned on, if the gaming state at power-off is maintained as in power-on patterns 1 and 4, the "restriction on gaming during the stopped state" is maintained, but the amount of balls put out is cleared. Despite this, the state of preparation for termination is also maintained. In other words, as with the termination state, it is possible to select whether to maintain or clear the termination preparation state when the power is turned on again after being turned off. For example, if the amount of balls put out during a jackpot game reaches a certain value and a stop preparation state has occurred, and you want to clear the stop preparation state, after turning off the power, you can An operation at power-on may be performed to clear the amount of balls, but in the limit clear pattern table 4, the jackpot game being executed is cleared in accordance with such an operation at power-on. On the other hand, if you want to maintain the state of preparation for stopping, after the power is turned off, you can perform an operation when the power is turned on to maintain the amount of balls put out that satisfies the starting conditions for the preparation for stopping. Accordingly, the jackpot game that was in progress will be restarted.

In this way, in the above-mentioned limit clear pattern table 4, in order to restart the jackpot game that was in progress when the power is turned on, it is necessary to maintain the stop preparation state. Even though the jackpot game that was in progress was restarted, only the stoppage preparation state could not be cleared. In the case of such a configuration, for example, in a situation such as a test firing test during the development stage of a gaming machine, if the amount of balls put out during a jackpot game reaches a specific value and a stop preparation state occurs, the stop state is not started. Even in a situation where it is desired to continue the test firing test, it is not possible to clear only the aborted preparation state, and there is a risk that the subsequent occurrence of the aborted state may hinder the continued implementation of the test firing test. Further, even if an attempt is made to clear the stop preparation state, the jackpot game will also be cleared along with the stop preparation state, and in this case as well, there is a possibility that the continued implementation of the test firing test will be inhibited. In consideration of these circumstances, in this example, we have created a limit clear pattern table for a configuration in which, upon power-on operation, the jackpot game that was in progress before the power was turned off, but only cleared the stop preparation state. A modification of No. 4 will be described below.

FIG. 140 shows a modification of the restriction clear pattern table 4 when the power is turned on. In this example, a limit clear pattern table 4(a) and a limit clear pattern table 4(b) are provided as the limit clear pattern table 4 used when the limit clear pattern selection switch is in the position "4". Depending on whether or not a special external signal is output during the termination preparation state, control is performed to change whether to use the limit clear pattern table 4(a) or the limit clear pattern table 4(b). Then, only if a special external signal is output during the stop preparation state and it is determined that this is the case when the power is turned on, the jackpot game that was being executed before the power was turned off is restarted in accordance with the operation when the power is turned on. However, only the abort preparation state can be cleared. Here, the "special external signal" is one that is output through a specific circuit mounted on the main control board 1310, and by meeting predetermined output requirements, the "special external signal" is output from the main control board 1310 to an external device such as an external test device. Any signal output to the device may be used. In this example, an empty test circuit is set as a specific circuit formed on the main control board 1310, and by detecting that a test electronic component is mounted on the empty test circuit, The configuration is such that a special external signal is always output to external test equipment if test electronic components are mounted on an empty test circuit. Further, the special external signal may be output from the main control board 1310 to the outside via an external terminal board, or may be output directly from the main control board 1310 to the outside without going through an external terminal board. Good too.

FIG. 140(A) shows a modified example of the limit clear pattern table 4 that is selected when the power is cut off under a situation where a special external signal is output during the abort preparation state, and then the power is turned on again. This shows a limit clear pattern table 4(a) which is a table. Note that in this example, prior to various clearing processes during power-on processing, it is determined whether or not a special external signal is output from the main control board 1310, and based on this determination result, the limit clear pattern table is 4(a) and the limit clear pattern table 4(b) are selected.

Power-on pattern 1 of limit clear pattern table 4(a) maintains the gaming state at the time of power-off when the power is turned on, but "before the no-stop state starts or after the no-go state starts." The amount of balls put out has been cleared (initialized). Furthermore, although the "restriction on gaming during the suspension state" is maintained, the suspension preparation state is cleared (initialized). In addition, as a form of notification to the outside, the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5 and the door frame 3 are turned on in green (if the disabled state is maintained) until a predetermined period has elapsed from the time the power is turned on. When the stop preparation state is cleared, the light will be emitted in red), and the speaker will output a voice that says ``The ball output amount has been cleared. The stoppage state is maintained (the stop preparation state has been cleared).'' Then, the effect display device 1600 displays a message image saying "The amount of balls put out has been cleared. The stopping state is maintained (the stopping preparation state has been cleared)" (clear notification 1. Equivalent to a notice of impossibility to proceed). More specifically, if the power is cut off while in the aborted state, a notification that the aborted state has been maintained is notified when the power is turned on, and if the power is cut off while the abort preparation state is in progress, the abort preparation state is notified when the power is turned on. It is notified that the number has been cleared, and in other cases, only the fact that the amount of balls put out has been cleared is notified. Further, when the power is cut off during the aborted state, in addition to these notifications, a clearing method notification indicating a method for clearing the above-mentioned aborted state may be added.

Power-on pattern 2 of the limit clear pattern table 4(a) clears (initializes) the game state at the time of power-off when the power is turned on. The amount of balls put out since the start of the game has also been cleared (initialized). In addition, the "restrictions on gaming during the suspension state" and the suspension preparation state are also cleared (initialized). Specifically, when the game is restricted by the above-mentioned restriction pattern 1, the game is "stopped", but when the stopped state is cleared, the "game stop" is canceled and the game is stopped by the restriction pattern 2. If the game is restricted by , it is "stopped", but when the stopped state is cleared, "stopped firing" is canceled, and if the game is restricted by restriction pattern 3, , "game stop" and "fire stop" have been stopped, but when the stopped state is cleared, "game stop" and "fire stop" are canceled, and in either case, the main control board 1310 side It is now possible to restart the game (main game). In addition, as a form of notification to the outside, the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5 and door frame 3 are made to emit red light from the time the power is turned on until a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and from the speakers. The system outputs a voice that says, "The amount of balls put out and the stopped state (ready to stop) has been cleared.", and the production display device 1600 displays "The amount of balls put out and the stopped state (prepared to stop) have been cleared." This message image is displayed (corresponding to Clear Notification 2). More specifically, if the power is cut off while in the aborted state, a notification that the aborted state has been cleared is sent when the power is turned on, and if the power is cut off while the abort preparation state is in progress, the abort preparation state is notified when the power is turned on. It is notified that the number has been cleared, and in other cases, only the fact that the amount of balls put out has been cleared is notified.

The power-on pattern 3 of the limit clear pattern table 4(a) clears (initializes) the gaming state at power-off when the power is turned on. The amount of balls put out since the start of the game has also been cleared (initialized). Furthermore, the "restrictions on gaming during the suspension state" and the suspension preparation state are also cleared (initialized). In addition, as a form of notification to the outside, the LEDs mounted on the game board 5 and various decorative boards of the door frame 3 are made to emit red light from the time the power is turned on until a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and the speaker The system outputs a voice saying, "The amount of balls put out and the stopped state (ready to stop) have been cleared.", and the production display device 1600 displays "The amount of balls put out and the stopped state (prepared to stop) have been cleared." The message image is displayed. (Equivalent to clear notification 2). More specifically, if the power is cut off during the abort state, a notification that the abort state has been cleared is sent when the power is turned on, and if the power is cut off while the abort preparation state is in progress, the abort preparation state is notified when the power is turned on. It is notified that the game has been cleared, and in other cases, only the fact that the amount of balls put out has been cleared is notified.

The power-on pattern 4 of the limit clear pattern table 4 (a) maintains the gaming state at power-off when the power is turned on, but "before the no-stop state starts or after the no-go state starts." The amount of balls put out has been cleared (initialized). In addition, the "restriction on gaming during the suspension state" is maintained, but the suspension preparation state is cleared (initialized). In addition, as a form of notification to the outside, the LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5 and door frame 3 are turned on in green (if the stopped state is maintained) until a predetermined period of time has passed from the time the power is turned on. When the stop preparation state is cleared, the light is emitted in red), and the speaker outputs a voice that says ``The ball output amount has been cleared. The stoppage state is maintained (the stop preparation state has been cleared).'' Then, the effect display device 1600 displays a message image that says "The amount of balls put out has been cleared. The stopping state has been maintained (the stopping preparation state has been cleared)" (clear notification 1. Equivalent to notification of inability to play). More specifically, if the power is cut off while in the aborted state, a notification that the aborted state has been maintained is notified when the power is turned on, and if the power is cut off while the abort preparation state is in progress, the abort preparation state is notified when the power is turned on. It is notified that the game has been cleared, and in other cases, only the fact that the amount of balls put out has been cleared is notified. Further, when the power is cut off during the aborted state, a clearing method notification indicating a method for clearing the above-mentioned aborted state may be added in addition to these notifications.

The power-on pattern 5 of the limit clear pattern table 4(a) maintains the gaming state at the time of power-off when the power is turned on. The amount of balls played has also been maintained. In addition, the "restrictions on gaming during the suspension state" and the suspension preparation state are also maintained. In addition, as a form of notification to the outside, the LEDs mounted on the game board 5 and various decorative boards of the door frame 3 are made to emit blue light from the time the power is turned on until a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and from the speakers. The system outputs a voice saying "The amount of balls put out and the stopped state (prepared to stop) are maintained.", and the effect display device 1600 displays "The amount of balls put out and the stopped state (prepared to stop) are maintained." .” message image is displayed. More specifically, if the power is cut off while in the aborted state, a notification that the aborted state has been maintained is notified when the power is turned on, and if the power is cut off while the abort preparation state is in progress, the abort preparation state is notified when the power is turned on. It is notified that the game has been cleared, and in other cases, only the fact that the amount of balls put out has been cleared is notified.

In this way, in the limit clear pattern table 4(a) used under the situation where a special external signal is output, when the power is turned on, the gaming state at the time of power-off is maintained as in the power-on patterns 1 and 4. or to clear (initialize) the game state at power-off like in power-on patterns 2 and 3, "before the stop state starts or when the game state is stopped" The amount of balls released since the state started has been cleared (initialized). This makes it possible to clear only the abort preparation state when the power is turned on in situations such as a test-fire test during the development stage of a game machine, and the subsequent occurrence of the abort state inhibits the continued implementation of test-fire tests. You can avoid putting it away. In addition, if power-on pattern 5 is selected when the power is turned on, the above-mentioned ball extraction process is only executed and the game does not start. The amount of balls released since the state started is maintained without being cleared (initialized).

In addition, in the limit clear pattern table 4 (a) used under the situation where a special external signal is output, when the power is turned on, the gaming state at the time of power-off is cleared (initialized) as shown in power-on patterns 2 and 3. ), the ``restrictions on gaming during the suspended state'' are cleared (initialized). On the other hand, when the power is turned on, if the gaming state at power-off is maintained as in power-on patterns 1 and 4, the "restriction on gaming during the stopped state" is maintained. In other words, with regard to "restrictions on gaming during a suspended state," the developer has the choice of whether to maintain or clear the restriction when the power is turned off and then turned on again under conditions such as test firing tests during the development stage of the gaming machine. It is now possible to do so. For example, if a game has already been suspended and you want to cancel the gaming restrictions, all you have to do is turn off the power, then perform the power-on operation to clear the ``gaming restrictions while the game is suspended'', and the game can be canceled. If you wish to maintain the restrictions, all you have to do is turn the power off and then perform an operation when turning on the power to maintain the "restrictions on games in the suspended state." Furthermore, if power-on pattern 5 is selected when the power is turned on, the above-mentioned ball extraction process is only executed and the game does not start, so the "restriction on gaming in the stopped state" is cleared. It is maintained without (initialization).

In addition, in the limit clear pattern table 4 (a) used under the situation where a special external signal is output, when the power is turned on, the gaming state at the time of power-off is cleared (initialized) as shown in power-on patterns 2 and 3. ), in addition to clearing (initializing) "the amount of balls put out before the stoppage state starts and after the start of the stoppage state", you also clear (initialize) the stoppage preparation state. There is. On the other hand, when the power is turned on, even if the gaming state at the time of power-off is maintained as in power-on patterns 1 and 4, the amount of balls put out before the stopped state starts or after the stopped state starts. ” is not only cleared (initialized), but also the abort preparation state is cleared (initialized). This makes it possible to select whether or not to clear the gaming state when clearing the discontinued preparation state in situations such as test firing tests during the development stage of a gaming machine. This makes it possible to create a mode suitable for use in halls, etc.).

FIG. 140(B) shows a modified example of the limit clear pattern table 4 that is selected when the power is cut off in a situation where no special external signal is output during the abort preparation state, and then the power is turned on again. A limit clear pattern table 4(b) which is a table is shown. Note that the power-on patterns 2, 3, and 5 here are the same as those in the above-mentioned restriction clear pattern table 4(a), so the explanation is omitted.

Power-on pattern 1 of limit clear pattern table 4(b) maintains the gaming state at the time of power-off when the power is turned on; The amount of balls put out has been cleared (initialized). In addition, the "restrictions on gaming during the suspension state" and the suspension preparation state are maintained. In addition, as a form of notification to the outside, the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5 and door frame 3 are made to emit green light from the time the power is turned on until a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and from the speakers. The system outputs a voice that says, "The amount of balls put out has been cleared. The stopped state (prepared to play state) is maintained.", and the production display device 1600 displays "The amount of balls put out has been cleared. The stopped state (stopped state) is maintained." The message image "Preparation state) is being maintained" is displayed (corresponding to Clear Notification 1 and Notification of Progress Impossibility). More specifically, if the power is cut off while in the aborted state, a notification that the aborted state has been maintained is notified when the power is turned on, and if the power is cut off while the abort preparation state is in progress, the abort preparation state is notified when the power is turned on. It is notified that the number of balls has been maintained, and in other cases, only the fact that the amount of balls put out has been cleared is notified. Furthermore, if the power is cut off during the suspension state, in addition to these notifications, a clearing method notification indicating a method for clearing the suspension state may be added to the hall manager.

Power-on pattern 4 of limit clear pattern table 4(b) maintains the gaming state at the time of power-off when the power is turned on; The amount of balls put out has been cleared (initialized). Furthermore, the "restrictions on gaming during the suspension state" and the suspension preparation state are maintained. In addition, as a form of notification to the outside, the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5 and door frame 3 are made to emit green light from the time the power is turned on until a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and the speaker The system outputs a voice that says, "The amount of balls put out has been cleared. The stopped state (preparation to stop playing) is maintained.", and the production display device 1600 displays the message "The amount of balls put out has been cleared. The stopped state (stopped preparing state) is maintained." The message image "Preparation state) is being maintained" is displayed (corresponding to clear notification 1, no-play notification). More specifically, if the power is cut off while in the aborted state, a notification that the aborted state has been maintained is notified when the power is turned on, and if the power is cut off while the abort preparation state is in progress, the abort preparation state is notified when the power is turned on. It is notified that the number of balls has been maintained, and in other cases, only the fact that the amount of balls put out has been cleared is notified. Further, if the power is cut off during the halted state, in addition to these notifications, a clearing method notification indicating a method for clearing the halted state may be added to the hall manager.

In this way, in the limit clear pattern table 4(b) used in a situation where no special external signal is output, when the power is turned on, the gaming state at the time of power-off is cleared ( Initialization), in addition to clearing (initialization) the ``amount of balls played before the stoppage state starts and after the start of the stoppage state'', the stoppage preparation state is also cleared (initialization) are doing. On the other hand, when the power is turned on, if the gaming state at the time of power-off is maintained as in power-on patterns 1 and 4, the amount of balls put out before the stopped state starts or after the stopped state starts. '' has been cleared (initialized), but it remains ready to stop without being affected by the clearing of the amount of balls released. For example, if the amount of balls played reaches a certain value during a jackpot game during normal operation (such as operation in an amusement hall) and is not a trial shooting test, and a state of preparation for cancellation occurs, the player's fraudulent activity If a severe abnormality occurs (detection of magnetism, vibration, radio waves, etc.) and you want to resolve the severe abnormality, you can perform power-on operations to eliminate the severe abnormality after turning off the power. Even if power-on patterns 1 and 4 are selected as power-on operations, the abort preparation state is maintained. In other words, if the jackpot game that was in progress is restarted, but the state of preparation for stopping is maintained, the state will shift to the stopping state at the end of the restarted jackpot game. In this way, fraudsters, etc. intentionally create a severe abnormality during the cancellation preparation state to force the hall manager to turn on the power again and clear (initialize) the cancellation preparation state. Although there is a possibility of fraud, in the case of a power-on that contributes to resolving a serious abnormality, avoid unauthorized clearing of the stop preparation state, and end the game when the restarted jackpot game ends. By doing so, such new fraud can be prevented. In this way, the restriction clear pattern table 4(b) used under the situation where no special external signal is output is different from the case where the restriction clear pattern table 4(a) is used, and the restriction clear pattern table 4(b) is used in a situation where the special external signal is not output. (for example, when operating in a game hall).

In addition, in the above example, the special external signal is always output under the condition that the test electronic component is mounted in the vacant test circuit, but if the output time of the special external signal becomes longer than necessary, Another problem is that the control load on the main control board 1310 becomes large. In consideration of these points, the configuration does not always output special external signals when test electronic components are mounted on empty test circuits, but only when necessary when predetermined output start conditions are met. It may also be configured to output a special external signal. This point will be explained below using FIGS. 140(C) and 140(D).

FIG. 141 is a time chart showing that the output of the special external signal is started before the start of the abort preparation state and the abort state. Of these, FIG. 141(A) is a time chart when the power is cut off before the start of the abort preparation state and the abort state, and the power is turned on in the power-on patterns 1 and 4 in the above-mentioned limit clear pattern table 4(a). It is. Moreover, FIG. 141(B) is a time chart when the power is cut off after the start of the termination preparation state and the power is turned on according to the power-on patterns 1 and 4 in the above-mentioned limit clear pattern table 4(a).

First, FIG. 141(A) will be explained. In FIG. 141(A), although a test electronic component is mounted in a vacant test circuit, a special external signal is not output all the time, but at a specific timing before the termination preparation state and the termination state start. At (t1), output of the special external signal is started. The specific timing (t1) in this example is set to be the same timing as the execution condition for the advance notice display described above. That is, as mentioned above, if the number of balls remaining until the amount of balls to be played due to winning in the game progress reaches a specific value is "+1500 shots", a prior notice is displayed in the upper area of the effect display device 1600. As part of the operation, an advance notice is displayed that tells you the number of balls remaining until the amount of balls to be played reaches a certain value, ``1500 shots remaining until game limit'', but the timing of displaying this advance notice is also specified. A special external signal is output when the number of balls remaining until the value is reached is "+1500 shots." Here, it is possible to output a predetermined external signal via an external terminal board at the timing of displaying the advance notification display, so in order to avoid confusion between such a predetermined external signal and a special external signal, in this example, It is preferable that the special external signal is directly output from the main control board 1310 to the outside without going through an external terminal board.

When the output of the special external signal is started at a specific timing (t1), in situations such as a test firing test during the development stage of a gaming machine, the operation of the test equipment etc. that receives the special external signal causes the stop preparation state and It becomes possible to know that the occurrence of a discontinued state is approaching. As a result, the power is turned off (t2) when the output of the special external signal is recognized, and the power is turned on (t3) using the power-on patterns 1 and 4 in the above-mentioned limit clear pattern table 4(a), thereby changing the gaming state. It becomes possible to avoid the occurrence of the abort preparation state and the abort state without clearing (initializing).

Furthermore, after the power is turned on (t3) in the power-on patterns 1 and 4 in the limit clear pattern table 4(a), the output of the special external signal is terminated after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. In this example, the output of the special external signal from the main control board 1310 is determined before the various clearing processes in the power-on process, so this determination determines when the output of the special external signal ends. Any time after it has been done. However, if the output of the special external signal continues for an unnecessarily long time after the power is turned on (t3) in power-on patterns 1 and 4 in the limit clear pattern table 4(a), the abort preparation state and the abort state It is desirable to end the output of the special external signal at a relatively early stage (for example, within 5 seconds) after the power is turned on, since there is a possibility that the occurrence of the error may be mistakenly determined. In addition, if the power is turned off (t2) when the output of the special external signal is recognized, but the power is turned on due to an incorrect power-on pattern and the amount of balls put out is maintained, the special external signal will continue to be output. It is preferable to output a signal. As a result, if a special external signal is output for a long period of time after the power is turned on incorrectly, it can be determined that the amount of balls dispensed has not been cleared (initialized), and the user can be guided to turn off the power again. It becomes possible.

In this way, by configuring the special external signal to be outputtable at a specific timing (t1) before the start of the abort preparation state or the abort state, constant output of the special external signal can be avoided, and the main control board 1310 It becomes possible to suppress the control load. In addition, it is possible to know from the outside at an early stage through a special external signal as well as an advance notification display that the start of the stoppage preparation state or the start of the stoppage state is approaching, making it possible to ensure smooth operations such as test firing tests during the development stage of the game machine. become. In addition, since the main control board 1310 outputs a special external signal to the outside, even if the advance notification display is not completed at the development stage of the gaming machine, as long as a specific timing is set, preparations for cancellation can be made. Since it is possible to know from the outside at an early stage through a special external signal that the state or the start of the discontinued state is approaching, smooth operations such as test firing tests during the development stage of the gaming machine can be achieved.

Next, FIG. 141(B) will be explained. In FIG. 141(B), in a situation where a test electronic component is mounted in a vacant test circuit, output of a special external signal is started at a specific timing (t1) before the start of the abort preparation state, and the abort preparation state is started. Powering down after the condition started.

Specifically, even though test electronic components are mounted in an empty test circuit, the special external signal is not output all the time, but the special external signal is output at a specific timing (t1) before the start of the termination preparation state. Although the output of the external signal has started, the output of the special external signal is continued even after the amount of balls put out reaches a specific value during the jackpot game and a stop preparation state occurs (t2). Here, in the termination preparation state, it is possible to output a predetermined external signal via the external terminal board, so in order to avoid confusion between such a predetermined external signal and a special external signal, in this example, the main control board It is preferable to directly output the special external signal from 1310 to the outside without going through an external terminal board. In addition, in the stop preparation state, as described above, in addition to displaying the display (normal display) related to the jackpot game being executed, the performance display device 1600 also displays a display indicating that the amount of balls put out has already reached a specific value. A standby message is displayed that says ``The jackpot is over and today is over.''

After the amount of balls put out during a jackpot game reaches a specific value and a stop preparation state occurs (t2), when the jackpot game ends, the state shifts to a stoppage state, but even during the stoppage preparation state, special By continuing to output the signal, in situations such as test firing tests during the development stage of a gaming machine, it is possible to know that a discontinued state is approaching due to the operation of test equipment that receives a special external signal. become. As a result, the power is cut off (t3) when the output of the special external signal is recognized during the termination preparation state, and the power is turned on (t4) using the power-on patterns 1 and 4 in the above-mentioned limit clear pattern table 4(a). This makes it possible to clear the no-stop preparation state without clearing (initializing) the gaming state and avoid the occurrence of no-stop state.

Then, when the output of the special external signal is recognized during the termination preparation state, the power is cut off (t3), and when the power is turned on (t4) using the power-on patterns 1 and 4 in the above-mentioned limit clear pattern table 4(a), When clearing the stop preparation state, the jackpot game that was in progress before the power was turned off was not cleared, and after various clearing processes in the process when the power was turned on, the jackpot game that was in progress before the power was turned off was cleared. I'm trying to start playing again. As a result, even if the ball output reaches a certain value during a jackpot game during a test shooting test during the development stage of a gaming machine, and a stop preparation state occurs, it is possible to clear only the stop preparation state. By doing so, the continuous implementation of sight-fire tests will not be hindered.

Furthermore, after the power is turned on (t4) in the power-on patterns 1 and 4 in the limit clear pattern table 4(a), the output of the special external signal is terminated after a predetermined time elapses, as described above. Since it is determined whether or not a special external signal is output from the main control board 1310 prior to various clearing processes during power-on processing, the output end time of the special external signal is determined after this determination is made. Any time is fine.

In this way, by configuring the system to continue outputting the special external signal not only before the start of the stop preparation state but also after the start of the stop preparation state, the standby display can be used to indicate that the start of the stop state is approaching. At the same time, it is possible to grasp the situation from the outside at an early stage through a special external signal, making it possible to smoothly operate test firing tests during the development stage of gaming machines.

Note that the specific timing (t1) does not have to be the same timing as the execution condition for the advance notice display described above, and if it is before the start of the discontinuation preparation state or the discontinuation state, it may be the same timing as the execution condition for the advance notice display. The timing may be before the pre-announcement display, or the timing may be after the execution condition of the advance notice display.

In addition, it is not limited to the embodiments shown in FIGS. 141(A) and 141(B) described above. The output/non-output of the special external signal may be switched in accordance with the ON/OFF operation of the output start switch. Specifically, when the output start switch is turned on during the abort preparation state, specific output requirements are met and a special external signal is output, but when the output start switch is turned on while the abort preparation state is not in the abort preparation state, the abort is After the specific timing (t1) before the start of the preparation state has arrived, the specific output requirements are met and the special external signal is output. Even in such a case, constant output of the special external signal can be avoided, and the control load on the main control board 1310 can be suppressed.

(About subtraction adjustment of ball amount)
As mentioned above in detail, when the amount of balls put out reaches a specific value during a jackpot game (winning game), the game shifts to the stop preparation state, and the jackpot game ends without being in the stop state until the jackpot game ends. By doing so, the system is configured to shift to a discontinued state. For example, when the amount of balls put out reaches a certain value in a round in the middle of a jackpot game, the state does not immediately go into a stoppage state, but shifts to a stoppage preparation state, and when the last round in a jackpot game ends, the state shifts to a stoppage state. are doing. In other words, when the amount of balls put out reaches a specific value during a jackpot game, it is possible to obtain more balls than the specific value.

By the way, "Multiple reservations that are determined to be jackpots are stored, and after the end of the jackpot game due to the expiration of the reservation, the execution of the jackpot game due to the expiration of the reservation is also confirmed (display with high expectations)" By displaying multiple pending displays, players can recognize the occurrence of multiple jackpots. There are situations where the game ball enters the first V winning hole 2007 or the second V winning hole 2008 during a jackpot game In a situation such as "It is certain that the game will move to a high probability state after the game ends," it is certain that the next jackpot can be won even if the jackpot game is in progress. However, even though the next jackpot is confirmed during a jackpot game, if the amount of balls put out during the jackpot game reaches a certain value and the state is in preparation for stopping, when the jackpot game ends In this case, since the game is not allowed to be played due to the game being stopped, it is not possible to obtain the profit associated with the next jackpot, which causes great dissatisfaction among the players. In this example, when the amount of balls put out during a jackpot game reaches a specific value and the state is in preparation for stopping, when the hall manager performs a specific operation, the amount of balls put out (the value of the stopping counter) The following is a configuration that eliminates the stop preparation state by subtracting and adjusting and returning to the state before the amount of balls put out reaches a certain value (normal state), so that the next jackpot can be won after the end of the jackpot game. Explain.

First, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, there is provided a ball output amount subtraction switch for subtracting and adjusting the ball output amount (value of the counter for stopping). This ball payout amount subtraction switch is a working operation part that the player cannot touch (a button that allows switching between the ON state and the OFF state, or a key that allows switching between the ON state and the OFF state by inserting a key). key switch, etc.) on the main control board 1310. When the ball output amount subtraction switch is operated (for example, an operation that switches it to the OFF state after turning it on for 3 seconds or more), the operation signal is input to the main control board 1310, and the current ball output amount is It is possible to subtract a predetermined amount of balls (for example, 1,500 shots) from the amount. In other words, it is possible to subtract a predetermined amount of balls (for example, 1,500 shots) from the value at the time when the stopping counter reaches its maximum value.

In this example, when the amount of balls put out reaches a specific value during a jackpot game and the state shifts to the preparation state for stopping, the operation of the ball amount subtraction switch is enabled during the preparation state for stopping, and the hall manager When the player operates the ball output amount subtraction switch, a predetermined ball output amount (for example, 1500 shots) is subtracted from the current ball output amount so that the ball output amount falls below a specific value. At this time, the termination flag that was turned on at the time of transition to the termination preparation state is turned off, thereby canceling the termination preparation state and returning to the normal state. For example, if 100,000 is set as the "specific value" and the amount of balls put out reaches the specific value (100,000 shots) during a jackpot game, the state will transition to a stop preparation state, but the hall manager operates the ball amount subtraction switch. Then, by subtracting 1,500 balls as the predetermined ball amount, the ball amount becomes 98,500 balls, which is less than the specific value (100,000 balls). Here, when the amount of balls put out is subtracted to be less than a specific value, although the stop preparation state is resolved, the jackpot game being executed and the information for acquiring the next jackpot are not cleared. . Moreover, after subtracting the amount of balls put out so that it is less than a specific value, counting of the amount of balls put out is restarted using the subtracted amount of balls as a starting point.

In this way, even if the amount of balls put out during a jackpot game reaches a specific value and the state is in preparation for stopping, the hall manager can change the preparation state to stop by operating the ball amount subtraction switch. Even after the jackpot game ends, it is possible to continue the game as long as the amount of balls paid does not reach a specific value again. As a result, even if the next jackpot is confirmed during the jackpot game as described above, the game can be continued after the jackpot game ends, so the profit related to the next jackpot can be earned. , players' dissatisfaction can be resolved. Although the game continues after the end of the jackpot game, for example, when the amount of balls put out again reaches a certain value during the next jackpot game, it will move to the stop preparation state, and the game will be restarted when the jackpot game is not in progress. When the amount of balls put out reaches a specific value, the state shifts to a stopped state.

On the other hand, when the ball is not in the preparation state, the operation of the ball output subtraction switch is disabled, and even if the hall manager operates the ball output subtraction switch, the predetermined ball output amount ( For example, 1500 shots) will not be subtracted. Therefore, even if you operate the ball output subtraction switch during the stopped state, the predetermined ball output amount (for example, 1500 balls) will not be subtracted from the current ball output amount, and the ball output amount will be a specific value. Never go below. In other words, the game cannot be restarted because the stopped state is maintained without returning to the normal state. In such a case, it is necessary to turn off the power during the stopped state, and when the power is turned on again, clear the amount of balls put out and also clear the stopped state.

In addition, when you operate the ball output amount subtraction switch while preparing to stop, the predetermined ball output amount (for example, 1500 balls) is subtracted from the current ball output amount, but the amount of balls to be subtracted is equivalent to the amount of balls that can be won in one jackpot game. In this example, the amount of balls that can be won in one jackpot game is approximately 1,500, and the amount of balls that are subtracted when the ball amount subtraction switch is operated is set to 1,500. As a result, if the amount of balls put out during a jackpot game reaches a specific value and the state is in preparation for stopping, if you operate the ball amount subtraction switch during the preparation for stopping, the state will be canceled and the jackpot will be canceled. During the game, the amount of balls put out does not reach a specific value again, and the game does not enter the stop preparation state. That is, even if the next jackpot is confirmed during the above-mentioned jackpot game, the game can be continued after the jackpot game ends, and the profit related to the next jackpot can be obtained. In addition, since the amount of balls subtracted when you operate the ball amount subtraction switch is equivalent to the amount of balls that can be obtained in one jackpot game, in the next jackpot game, the ball amount will be reduced to a specific value again. There is a high possibility that the game will reach the no-stop state and enter the no-stop preparation state, and when the next jackpot game ends, the game will be able to go to the no-stop state and end the game.

Also, when the amount of balls put out during a jackpot game reaches a specific value, the state shifts to the stop preparation state, but after shifting to the stop preparation state, the amount of balls put out (the value of the stop counter) during the jackpot game is counted. It is configured so that it does not. In other words, the amount of balls put out is configured not to exceed a specific value. Therefore, when the ball output amount subtraction switch is operated during the preparation state for stopping, a predetermined ball output amount (for example, 1500 balls) is subtracted from a specific value that is the current ball output amount, and the ball output amount is specified. I try to keep it below the value. However, regarding the amount of balls put out, it may be configured such that the amount of balls put out (value of the stopping counter) during the jackpot game is counted even after transitioning to the stopping preparation state. In other words, the amount of balls put out may be configured to be counted in excess of a specific value. In such a configuration, when the ball output amount subtraction switch is operated during the preparation state for stopping, a predetermined ball output amount (for example, 1500 balls) is subtracted from the current ball output amount that exceeds a specific value, The amount of balls put out is kept below a certain value.

In addition, when the ball output amount subtraction switch is operated during the preparation state for stopping, a predetermined ball amount (for example, 1500 balls) is subtracted from the current ball amount, but as a different example, After the power is turned off during operation, when the ball output subtraction switch is operated when the power is turned on again, a predetermined ball output amount (for example, 1500 balls) is subtracted from the current ball output amount. Good too. In such a configuration, even if the stop preparation state is maintained when the power is turned on again, by operating the ball output amount subtraction switch when the power is turned on again, the current ball amount will be A predetermined amount of balls (for example, 1,500 shots) is subtracted from the number of balls, so that the amount of balls put out is less than a specific value. That is, when the payout amount subtraction switch is operated when the power is turned on again, the jackpot game that was being executed when the power was turned off can be restarted in a state where the stop preparation state has been canceled. In this way, by requiring the power to be turned on and off in order to make the operation of the ball output amount subtraction switch effective, the hall manager can strictly control the cancellation of the stop preparation state.

In addition, it is possible to obtain the next jackpot game by operating the ball output amount subtraction switch during the preparation state for stopping, and when the next jackpot game is executed, the same gaming situation (the next jackpot game) A situation may occur in which the amount of balls put out reaches a specific value during a jackpot game even though the acquisition of the game is confirmed, and the game enters a state where the game is ready to stop. In consideration of such a case, it is preferable not to limit the number of times the ball output amount subtraction switch can be operated (the number of subtractions) during the stop preparation state, so that the operation can be accepted in each stop preparation state. Thereby, even if a similar gaming situation occurs after the operation of the ball output amount subtraction switch, the hall manager can appropriately manage the situation so as not to cause dissatisfaction to the players. However, in order to prevent the ball output amount subtraction switch from being subtracted more than necessary due to multiple operations of the ball output subtraction switch during the preparation state for the first stop, It is desirable that the number of times the quantity subtraction switch is accepted for operation (the number of subtractions) is limited to only one.

In addition, when operating the ball output subtraction switch during the preparation state, the hall manager will have to work, so the player will have to stop playing for a while, but the jackpot game will continue during that time. As a result, players may not be able to obtain balls between operations, which may cause damage to the players. In order to avoid this, for example, when operating the ball output amount subtraction switch during the stop preparation state, control may be performed to stop the progress of games including jackpot games. For example, if the ball output amount is subtracted by turning the ball output amount subtraction switch ON for 3 seconds or more and then switching it to the OFF state, at least the ball output amount subtraction switch is turned ON. An example of this is to stop the progress of games, including jackpot games, while the player is playing. In addition, in order to make the player aware that the jackpot game is not canceled, the progress of the game including the winning game is temporarily stopped while the ball output subtraction switch is in the ON state. It is preferable to make a unique notification corresponding to the information so that the outside can also recognize it.

In addition, the amount of balls that will be subtracted by operating the ball amount subtraction switch during the preparation state is not limited to the above-mentioned ``equivalent to the amount of balls that can be obtained in one jackpot game'', but is based on the game specifications. It may be set as appropriate depending on the situation. For example, if the gameplay is such that four jackpot games are guaranteed to be executed after one jackpot game (for example, the amount of balls put out is 500) (for example, a set of five jackpot games), one By operating the ball payout amount subtraction switch, a value exceeding the payout amount (500 shots) that can be obtained in one jackpot game next time (for example, "2000 balls, which is equivalent to the payout amount that can be obtained in four jackpot games) It may also be possible to subtract the value of This makes it possible to eliminate player dissatisfaction.

(About the transition to a similar state after clearing the stopped state)
As mentioned above in detail, in the limit clear pattern table 4, no matter which of the power-on patterns 1 to 4 is selected when the power is turned on, "before the aborted state starts or when the aborted state starts" Cleared (initialized) the amount of balls put out since then. In addition, in the limit clear pattern table 4, when the power is turned on, only when the gaming state at power-off is cleared (initialized) as in power-on patterns 2 and 3, the "restrictions on gaming during the suspended state" is cleared. (initialized). On the other hand, when the power is turned on, if the gaming state at power-off is maintained as in power-on patterns 1 and 4, the "restriction on gaming during the stopped state" is maintained. In other words, it is possible to select whether to maintain or clear the "restriction on gaming during the suspended state" when the power is turned on again after being turned off. For example, if a game has already been suspended and you want to cancel the gaming restrictions, all you have to do is turn off the power, then perform the power-on operation to clear the ``gaming restrictions while the game is suspended'', and the game can be canceled. If you want to maintain the restrictions, all you have to do is turn off the power and then perform an operation when turning on the power so as to maintain the "restrictions on games in the suspended state."

However, if the hall manager mistakenly performs the power-on operation to clear the "restrictions on games during the canceled state" after turning off the power without realizing that the canceled state has already occurred, Even though the player wants to continue playing the game, there is a possibility that the game will be canceled and the game can be restarted. In this example, when the canceled state has already occurred, when the power is turned on to clear the "restrictions on games during the canceled state", the canceled state is cleared at that point, but it is not immediately The following describes a configuration in which the game is not returned to the normal state, but instead enters a similar state where play is restricted in the same way as the stopped state, and the similar state is continued until the hall manager performs a specific operation. Explain.

First, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, there is provided a stop similar state end switch for ending the similar state. This termination similar state termination switch is a working operation part that the player cannot touch (a button that allows switching between the ON state and the OFF state, or a key that allows switching between the ON state and the OFF state by inserting a key). key switch, etc.) on the main control board 1310. When the termination similar state switch is operated during the termination similar state, the operation signal is input to the main control board 1310, and although the game is restricted in the termination similar state, the termination similar state is canceled and the normal state is returned. , allowing you to resume playing. Note that while the similar state of discontinued state is in effect, the operation of the similar state of discontinued state end switch is enabled; Even if it does, the stopped state will not be resolved. Further, the stop similar state end switch may also be used as the above-mentioned ball output amount subtraction switch.

FIG. 142 is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine when a similar state of stopping occurs after clearing the stopped state when the power is turned on.

First, at timing t1, it is determined that the amount of balls put out reaches a specific value by paying out the prize ball based on the ball entering the winning hole, but when the main control board 1310 detects the ball entering the winning hole. , the stoppage flag is turned ON, and the game has shifted to the "stoppage state" to which restriction pattern 3, which both "stops the game" and "stops shooting", is applied. The behavior in the stopped state is as described above.

Specifically, in the stopped state, it is impossible to fire the game ball, and it is impossible to proceed with the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side. In other words, in the stopped state, no variable display of special symbols or a jackpot game is executed, and even if there is a starting prize, no new variable display of special symbols is started.

Next, after transitioning to the discontinued state, the power is cut off at timing t2, and then the power is turned on again at timing t3. In this example, when the power is turned on again, the limit clear pattern table 4 is used as the limit clear pattern table, and the power-on patterns are power-on patterns 2 and 3 that clear the ball output amount and the stopped state. is selected. For this reason, when the power is turned on again, the gaming state at the time the power was turned off is cleared (initialized), but the amount of balls played before the no-stop state started or after the no-go state started, "Restrictions on gaming during suspension" have also been cleared (initialized).

In this example, when the power is turned on again, the "restrictions on gaming during the suspended state" are cleared (initialized), but the game is not returned to the normal state immediately, but similar to the suspended state, where the game is restricted in the same way as in the suspended state. is moving into the state. In such a state similar to no-stop, it is impossible to shoot the game ball and it is impossible to proceed with the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side, as in the no-stop state. In other words, in the similar state of discontinuance, the variable display of the special symbols and the jackpot game are not executed, and even if there is a starting prize, the variable display of the special symbols will not be newly started. In this way, it is assumed that the hall manager mistakenly performed an operation when the power was turned on to clear the ``restrictions on games during the canceled state'' after the power was turned off, without realizing that the canceled state had already occurred. The hall manager also strictly controls the resumption of play by restricting play in the same way as in the stopped state until the hall manager operates the stop similar state end switch. can do.

In the discontinued similar state, notification is made to the outside in a manner different from that in the discontinued state. Specifically, in a state similar to a stoppage, for example, the effect display device 1600, lamp A (LED mounted on various decorative boards of the frame decoration member), lamp B (LED mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5), etc. The LED (LED) and speaker are used to notify that the game is temporarily restricted until the user operates the similar state termination switch. In this manner, in the similar state of discontinuation, by reporting in a manner different from that in the discontinued state, it is possible to reliably recognize whether the state is in the discontinued state or after the power has been cut off during the discontinued state. In addition, when turning the power back on, the ``amount of balls played before and after the start of the stoppage state'' and ``restrictions on games during the stoppage state'' must be cleared (initialized). It also notifies you of the amount of balls put out and that the no-stop status has been cleared.

Note that the behavior of the discontinued similar state is substantially the same as the behavior of the discontinued state, except for the manner in which it is notified to the outside. Specifically, in a state similar to stopping, the movable body is placed in an inoperable state in which it does not move. In addition, in a state similar to termination, the external terminal board is set to a forced output state in which a security signal is forcibly output even though no abnormality is detected, settings are changed, or settings are not displayed for confirmation. . As a result, in a state similar to a stoppage, a security signal is output to the hall computer, and the hall side can understand that the state has shifted to a state similar to a stoppage.

In addition, in a state similar to stopping, the number of game balls B that entered the ball entrance (input hole, out hole) (number of balls entered) and the number of game balls B that were paid out as prize balls (number of paid out). are not included in the calculation. In other words, it is made impossible to calculate the ratio of the number of balls put out to the number of balls entered, and the calculation is made so that it is not reflected in the base value displayed on the base monitor.

In addition, in the similar state of stopping, even if a ball entering the winning hole is detected, a predetermined number of game balls will not be paid out as prize balls, and will not be added to the number of balls held by the player. However, in a state similar to stopping, the configuration may be such that the ball entering the winning hole is not detected, and even if the ball entering the winning hole is not detected in the first place, even if there is a ball entering the winning hole. , a predetermined number of game balls are not paid out as prize balls, and are not added to the number of balls held by the player. Further, in the similar state where the game is stopped, the period is set such that the number of balls held by the player can be calculated by operating the counting button switch 180.

In addition, in the similar stopped state, no abnormality determination is made as to whether or not an abnormality such as magnetism or vibration is detected. In other words, in the discontinued similar state, even if an abnormality is detected, an abnormality determination is not performed, and therefore an abnormality notification to inform the outside that an abnormality has occurred is not performed. In this way, in the similar state of no-stop, the notification regarding the similar state of no-stop is given priority over the abnormal notification, thereby ensuring that the player and the hall manager are aware that the state has transitioned to the similar state of no-stop. be able to. However, in a state similar to stopping, the configuration may be configured so that abnormalities such as magnetism and vibration are not detected. Similarly, even if an abnormality occurs, it is not possible to detect it in the first place. There is no abnormality notification to be reported.

Next, after transitioning to the discontinued similar state, the discontinued similar state end switch is operated at timing t4. In this example, when the termination similar state end switch is operated during the termination similar state, the termination similar state is canceled and returned to the normal state, and the restriction on the game in the termination similar state is canceled. The behavior in the normal state is as described above.

Specifically, the normal state is a period in which it is possible to shoot game balls and it is possible to proceed with the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side. In other words, in the normal state, unlike in the stopped similar state or the stopped state, when there is a starting winning, the fluctuating display of the special symbol can start, and when the fluctuating display of the special symbol stops displaying at the winning symbol. Then, a normal game can be played in which a jackpot game can be started.

In addition, when turning the power back on, the ``amount of balls played before and after the start of the stoppage state'' and ``restrictions on games during the stoppage state'' must be cleared (initialized). , the player is notified of the amount of balls put out and that the canceled state has been cleared, but such notifications should be executed when the similar canceled state end switch is operated during a similar canceled state and the state returns to normal. You may also do so. As a result, when the power is turned on again, although the amount of balls put out and the stopped state are cleared, the state shifts to a state similar to the stopped state, and the game is restricted in the same way as in the stopped state, which may cause a feeling of discomfort. It can be prevented.

(Regarding visibility of advance notice display and progress impossible display)
In each of the above-mentioned examples, a pre-announcement message is displayed in a specific display area on the top layer of the effect display device 1600 during the progress of the game, and other effect images make it easier to see the advance notice display. However, if a predetermined area for displaying an adjustment image that reflects the player's adjustment operation regarding the production surface (for example, an image corresponding to volume or light intensity, an image related to other adjustments, etc.) is located before or after a specific display area, If they are provided at positions that overlap in the direction, the visibility of the adjusted image will be obstructed by the advance notice display at least while the advance notice display is being displayed, and there is a risk that the interest in the game will be reduced. In such a case, we have mentioned above as an example of hiding the advance notice display in a specific display area so that it cannot be seen, but in the example described below, the advance notice display message is hidden in a specific display area. A configuration will be described in which game information such as an adjusted image is displayed outside a specific display area while being displayed.

FIG. 143 is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine when the advance notice display and the progress impossible display are displayed during the standby state.

First, after the amount of balls remaining until the amount of balls released reaches a certain value (for example, 5000 balls), an advance notice is displayed. Until the amount of balls reaches a specific value, the special symbols are continuously displayed not only during the variable display of the special symbols but also during the non-variable display of the special symbols in the standby state. Further, as described in detail above, the effect display device 1600 displays a message "Remaining until game limit + XX shots" in a specific display area as a prior notice display. This specific display area is set as a part of the display area in the performance display device 1600, and is a display area used to display when the ball amount approaches a specific value. This is a fixed area that does not change even in the gaming state.

Further, the advance notice display and the progress impossible display are displayed in the upper layer of the effect display device 1600. Here, in the effect display device 1600 of this example, it is possible to display a plurality of layers, including at least an upper layer, a middle layer, and a lower layer, in a superimposed manner. The display object in a higher layer in the relationship is displayed closer to the front, so that it can be viewed with priority. As a result, the visibility of the advance notice display and the progress-impossible display displayed on the upper layer is not obstructed by the display objects displayed on the middle layer and the lower layer.

In addition, during the non-fluctuation display of the special symbol, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol will be displayed as a standby display 1 (standby effect 1) until a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after the special symbol is fixed and stopped. However, the stop symbols of the decorative symbols are displayed in a lower layer of the effect display device 1600. Note that the decorative symbols are displayed in the lower layer of the effect display device 1600, regardless of whether the special symbols are being displayed in a variable manner or not. In addition, regarding the predetermined area where the stop symbol of the decorative pattern is displayed in the standby display 1, it is outside the specific display area where the advance notice display is displayed, and it is placed before and after the specific display area. They are placed in positions that do not overlap in any direction. Thereby, even while the advance notification display is being displayed, the visibility of the stop symbols of the decorative symbols can be ensured, and it is possible to grasp that the special symbols are being displayed non-variably. In addition, regarding the predetermined area in the standby display 1 in which the stop pattern of the decorative pattern is displayed, a part may be provided at a position that overlaps with a specific display area in the front and back direction. For example, for the stop pattern of the decorative pattern may be displayed shifted from the advance notification display to such an extent that the stop symbol of the decorative symbol can be confirmed.

Also, while the special symbol is being displayed in a non-variable manner, the volume and light intensity can be adjusted by operating the setting adjustment button 204 in the same way as when the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. An adjustment image corresponding to the volume and light intensity is displayed. Note that the adjustment image is started to be displayed by operating the setting adjustment button 204, and is erased after a certain period of time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed from the start of display. Here, when the setting adjustment button 204 is operated at timing t1 during non-fluctuation display of the special symbol, an adjusted image is displayed. Displayed in layers. In addition, the predetermined area where the adjusted image is displayed will be placed outside the specific display area where the advance notice display is displayed, and at a position that will not overlap with the specific display area in the front and rear directions. It is being Thereby, the visibility of the adjusted image can be ensured even while the advance notification display is being displayed, and it is possible to avoid a decrease in interest in the game. Note that the predetermined area in which the adjusted image is displayed may be provided at a position that partially overlaps a specific display area in the front-back direction.For example, if the adjusted image is of a level gauge type, changes in the level gauge may be provided. At least to the extent that the result of the adjustment operation by the player can be confirmed, such as displaying the adjusted images so that they do not overlap to the extent that they can be understood, and if the adjustment image is a numerical method, displaying the adjusted image so that it does not overlap to the extent that it is possible to understand which value it is. It is also possible to display the information at a different time from the advance notice display.

Furthermore, the advance notice display and the progress-impossible display are not subject to image conversion processing (mosaic processing, grayscale processing, enlargement/reduction processing, etc.) performed by the peripheral control board 1510. In other words, effect images other than the advance notice display and the progress impossible display are subject to image conversion processing performed by the peripheral control board 1510, and the appearance of the effect images is allowed to change as the effect progresses. The advance notification display and the progress-impossible display are not subject to the image conversion processing performed by the peripheral control board 1510, and even if the performance progresses, the aspect of the performance image is not allowed to change. As a result, while the advance notice display and progress impossible display are displayed, the visibility of the advance notice display and progress impossible display does not change, avoiding overlooking information regarding the amount of balls etc. can do.

Next, at timing t3, which is after the end of the variable display of the special symbol, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the special symbol has been finalized and stopped, a demonstration image (for example, an image for explanation of the performance, an image for advertising, etc.) is displayed. Starting a demonstration period to display. This demonstration period ends when the variable display of the special symbols starts. Furthermore, even after the demonstration period begins, advance notices will continue to be displayed. This makes it possible to prevent a new player from starting a game without knowing information regarding the amount of balls to be played, etc., before starting the game.

Furthermore, during the demonstration period, a demonstration image with the following content is displayed as standby display 2 (standby effect 2). Specifically, first, the performance display device 1600 is used to explain the performance of the pachinko machine 1 and display promotional images (movie), and at the end of the process, the logo of the model title of the pachinko machine 1 is displayed. is running. After the logo of the machine title has been displayed, the production display device 1600 displays the logo of the manufacturer that manufactured the pachinko machine 1. After that, the logo of the manufacturer that manufactured the pachinko machine 1 is displayed. ” (e.g., ``Pachinko is meant to be enjoyed in moderation. Be careful not to get addicted to it''). By displaying such a warning message, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming excessively absorbed in the game in subsequent games.

In this example, the above-mentioned standby display 2 is displayed in a lower layer of the effect display device 1600. For example, the predetermined area where the warning message is displayed is outside the specific display area where the advance notice display is displayed, and does not overlap with the specific display area in the front or back direction. located at the location. Thereby, the visibility of the warning message can be ensured even while the advance notice display is being displayed, and it is possible to reliably prevent the player from getting too absorbed in the game. Note that the predetermined area in which the alert message is displayed may be provided at a position where a part of the predetermined area overlaps the specific display area in the front and back direction. Even if the warning message overlaps with a specific display area, the warning message may be displayed vertically or horizontally shifted from the advance notification display to the extent that the content of the warning message can be confirmed. Further, for example, the predetermined area in which the caution message is displayed may be outside the display area where the adjustment image described later will be displayed. Thereby, even when the adjustment image is displayed, the visibility of the warning message can be ensured, and it is possible to reliably prevent the player from becoming too absorbed in the game.

Further, as another example, the above-described standby display 2 may be displayed on a higher layer of the effect display device 1600. In this case, the predetermined area where the alert message is displayed and the specific display area where the advance notice display is displayed will be displayed on the same layer, but the predetermined area and the specific display area will not overlap at all. It is desirable to provide them so that they are shifted vertically or horizontally to prevent this. Thereby, the visibility of the warning message can be ensured even while the advance notice display is being displayed, and it is possible to reliably prevent the player from getting too absorbed in the game. Note that a part of the predetermined area in which the alert message is displayed may be provided so as to overlap with a specific display area. For example, for the alert message, even if the predetermined area and the specific display area overlap, , the warning message may be displayed shifted vertically or horizontally from the advance notice display to such an extent that the content of the alert message can be confirmed.

Furthermore, when the setting adjustment button 204 is operated at timing t4 during the demonstration period, an adjusted image is displayed. It is displayed at. In addition, the predetermined area where the adjusted image is displayed will be placed outside the specific display area where the advance notice display is displayed, and at a position that will not overlap with the specific display area in the front and rear directions. It is being Thereby, the visibility of the adjusted image can be ensured even while the advance notification display is being displayed, and it is possible to avoid a decrease in interest in the game. Note that if the setting adjustment button 204 is operated during the demonstration period, the demonstration period may be ended while continuing the standby state. Notices will continue to be displayed.

Also, during the demonstration period, the movable body provided on the game board 5 may be moved from the initial position to the appearance position and appear in front of the screen of the effect display device 1600; Even if the movable object appears in front of the screen, it is preferable that it not be located in front of the specific display area where the advance notification display is displayed. Thereby, even if the movable body moves during the demonstration period, the visibility of the advance notice display can be ensured.

Next, at timing t6, when the amount of balls put out reaches a specific value and the game is restricted, the standby state is ended and the game shifts to a halt state in which the game cannot proceed. As mentioned above, when the amount of balls that come out reaches a certain value based on the calculation based on the prize balls that are won in each winning hole, the game is stopped and the game is restricted, but in this example, such a restriction on the game is The control is performed not only during the variable display of special symbols or during a winning game, but also during a standby state. As a result, for example, if a game ball fired in the standby state enters the general winning hole 2001, etc., and the amount of balls put out reaches a specific value due to the winning, the game ball can be played even though the game is not in progress. It becomes possible to avoid in advance the stopping state during variable display of special symbols or winning games by executing the restriction and directly transitioning from the standby state to the stopped state.

When the standby state immediately shifts to the stopped state, the effect display device 1600 displays a progress impossible display as an image corresponding to the stopped state. Indications of not being able to proceed include the message "Playing Restricted", along with the following: "Playing has been restricted as the daily ball limit of XX balls has been reached", "Please call the staff", and "Payment". The button is valid.'' message is displayed. Further, as described above, the display that progress is impossible is displayed in the upper layer of the effect display device 1600. As a result, the visibility of the progress-impossible display is not obstructed, and it is possible to understand that the amount of balls put out has reached a specific value and the game is restricted.

Further, regarding the progress-impossible display in this example, a message is displayed on a screen consisting of an opaque darkened display (for example, a black background image) in the upper layer of the effect display device 1600. This blackout display is performed on substantially the entire surface of the effect display device 1600. As a result, the screen displayed in a layer lower than the upper layer is not visible due to the dark display in the upper layer. Specifically, at timing t6, the demonstration image as standby display 2 continues to be displayed in the lower layer of the effect display device 1600 even after transitioning to the discontinued state. Since the progress display is displayed using substantially the entire surface of the effect display device 1600 in the upper layer, the demonstration image is not visible. As a result, after transitioning to the stopped state, the player does not realize that it is a demonstration period while the progress impossible display is displayed, and the amount of balls put out reaches a certain value and the game is restricted. You can clearly understand the meaning. In addition, after transitioning to the discontinued state, regardless of whether or not a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed in the standby state in which special symbols are not displayed in a variable manner, the demonstration image is not displayed in the lower layer of the effect display device 1600 in the first place. You may forcefully terminate it so that it does not continue to be displayed.

Furthermore, if the setting adjustment button 204 is operated at timing t7 while the progress impossible display is being displayed, the operation of the setting adjustment button 204 itself can be accepted, and the adjustment is made in the intermediate layer of the effect display device 1600. Although the image is displayed, the adjustment image is not visible because a progress display is displayed using substantially the entire surface of the effect display device 1600 in the upper layer of the effect display device 1600. Note that while the progress-impossible display is displayed, the adjustment image is not displayed, but the volume and light amount can be adjusted internally by operating the setting adjustment button 204. However, while the progress-impossible display is displayed, controls based on the aborted state are executed with priority as controls related to sound and light emission, and adjustments to the volume and light intensity made by operating the setting adjustment button 204 are not reflected. It has become. In addition, as another example, adjustments to the volume or light intensity that are made by operating the setting adjustment button 204 while the progress-impossible display is displayed may be reflected. Except for this, adjustments to volume and light intensity may be reflected.

Furthermore, in this example, even after transitioning to the aborted state at timing t6, the demonstration image as standby display 2 continues to be displayed in the lower layer of the effect display device 1600, but the progress display is disabled. If the setting adjustment button 204 is operated during display, the demonstration image continuing in the lower layer may be terminated. Thereby, the control load on the peripheral control board 1510 can be reduced. Note that the conditions for terminating the demonstration image that continues in the lower layer are not limited to the operation of the setting adjustment button 204, but also the operation of the first effect button 251, the second effect button 252, or the operation of the handle 160. Good too. In addition, if the settings adjustment button 204, first effect button 251, second effect button 252, or handle 160 is operated while the progress impossible display is displayed (the demonstration image that is continuing in the lower layer is terminated) (when a predetermined operation is performed that is a condition for the operation to be performed), it is desirable not to perform any notification such as a dedicated sound, light emission, display, etc. in response to the predetermined operation. In other words, if a special sound, light emission, display, etc. is used to notify each operation, there is a risk that players may misunderstand that they can play the game. Such misunderstandings can be prevented by not providing any special notification such as sound, light emission, or display depending on the situation. In addition, in the case where the type of gaming machine is the so-called enclosed gaming machine or managed gaming machine described above, the setting adjustment button 204, the first production button 251, the second production button 252, or the handle 160 may be operated. Although there is no special sound, light emission, display, etc., for the operation of the counting button switch 180, there is a special sound and light emission corresponding to the operation, in order to clarify the guidance regarding the normal end of the game. , display, etc. may be performed.

Next, the notification mode regarding light emission and sound during execution of the discontinued state will be explained using FIG. 143. In this example, when transitioning to the discontinued state, not only the effect display device 1600 but also a notification member other than the effect display device 1600 is used to notify the user in an emphasized manner so as to actively notify the outside that the state has transitioned to the discontinued state. However, unless the discontinued state is resolved, if the notification is continued in this emphasized manner, there is a risk that surrounding players may be hindered from playing the game. Here, in order to eliminate such concerns, a configuration will be described below in which control is performed to change the notification regarding light emission and sound in a unique manner during execution of the discontinued state.

First, at timing t6, when the amount of balls put out reaches a specific value and the game is restricted, the game shifts to a stopped state in which it is impossible to proceed, and the effect display device 1600 displays an image corresponding to the stopped state. , substantially the entire surface of the effect display device 1600 is used to display an indication that progress is not possible. At this time, lamp A (LED mounted on various decorative boards of the frame decoration member), lamp B (LED mounted on various decorative boards of game board 5), and speakers perform operations when progress is not possible. Accordingly, as notification mode A, notification in an emphasized mode consisting of a predetermined specific light amount (for example, maximum light amount) and a predetermined specific volume (for example, maximum volume) is set by pressing the setting adjustment button 204. It is forcibly executed regardless of the settings made by the operation. More specifically, lamp A (LED mounted on various decorative boards of the frame decoration member) and lamp B (LED mounted on various decorative boards of game board 5) emit white monochrome light. blinks or lights up at a specific amount of light (for example, the maximum amount of light), and the speaker plays a voice saying ``Playing is being restricted because the daily ball limit has been reached'' at a specific volume (for example, the maximum amount of light). It is outputting. Thereby, it is possible to clearly inform the hall manager that the state has shifted to the discontinued state. Note that it is preferable that the notification in an emphasized manner related to the aborted state be set in a manner different from the manner of notification performed in the event of other errors such as an abnormality.

Then, at timing t8 when a predetermined period (for example, 15 seconds) has elapsed after starting the notification in the emphasized mode as the notification mode A, the effect display device 1600 uses substantially the entire surface of the effect display device 1600. However, the lamp A (LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the frame decoration member), lamp B (LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5), and speakers do not notify the user. As mode B, notification has been shifted to a suppressed mode in which the amount of light and sound volume are suppressed. Specifically, for lamp A (LED mounted on various decorative boards of the frame decoration member) and lamp B (LED mounted on various decorative boards of game board 5), the LEDs continue to emit white monochrome light. However, the speaker should not blink or turn on at a specific light intensity (for example, the maximum light intensity) (it should blink or turn on at a lower light intensity than the specific light intensity), and the speaker should not display the "1 day's ball output". The system does not output the voice message "The game is being restricted because the limit has been reached," thereby creating a silent state (inaudible state) in which no sound can be heard. Thereby, even if the game is stopped, the notification in an emphasized manner can be terminated, and it is possible to prevent surrounding players from interfering with the game. Furthermore, it is possible to avoid excessive consumption of power by a gaming machine that is in a discontinued state and is no longer played.

Note that the suppression mode may be one that suppresses the amount of light and sound volume more than the emphasis mode. For example, lamp A (LED mounted on various decorative boards of the frame decoration member), lamp B (on the game board 5), etc. Regarding the LEDs (mounted on various decorative boards), the emphasis mode means changing the emission color pattern so that the LED flashes or lights up with multiple colors, or emitting from a speaker at a volume lower than a certain level. The volume may be set to output a voice saying "Playing is restricted because the daily ball limit has been reached" or predetermined BGM. By doing so, even if a game machine is discontinued and no longer played, the decorative effect can be maintained and the game machine can play a role in enlivening the entire game hall. It should be noted that decorative effects are unnecessary for game machines that are no longer played due to suspension, and if further energy saving effects are desired, the amount of light and sound volume may be completely suppressed, for example. , Regarding the effect display device 1600, although the progress display is maintained using substantially the entire surface of the effect display device 1600, lamp A (LED mounted on various decorative boards of the frame decoration member), lamp B (game board 5 (LEDs mounted on various decorative boards) may be turned off, and further may be set to a silent state (inaudible state) in which no sound can be heard from the speaker. Further, a predetermined suppression mode selection switch may be provided, and the setting of the suppression mode may be changed (selected) by the administrator's operation of the suppression mode selection switch.

Further, if the setting adjustment button 204 is operated at timing t9 after the notification in the suppression mode as the notification mode B is started, the effect display device 1600 maintains the progress impossible display, For lamp A (LED mounted on various decorative boards of the frame decoration member), lamp B (LED mounted on various decorative boards of game board 5), and speakers, the amount of light and volume are emphasized as notification mode A. The notification has been shifted to be performed again in an emphasized manner. Similarly, when the handle 160 is touched and the handle touch sensor 162 detects the player's touch, lamp A (LED mounted on various decorative boards of the frame decoration member), lamp B (game As for the LEDs (LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the panel 5) and speakers, the system has shifted to notification mode A in which notification is performed again in an emphasized mode that emphasizes the amount of light and volume. As a result, even if a new player attempts to start a game without being aware that the game is in a discontinued state, the notification is shifted to an emphasized mode and the player can be made aware of the fact that the game is in a discontinued state. Note that even if the rotation operation is performed while touching the handle 160, if the game is restricted by the above-mentioned restriction pattern 3, the game area will be closed because the game is stopped and the firing is stopped during the stopped state. The game ball is not fired towards 5a.

Further, at timing t10 when a predetermined period (for example, 15 seconds) has elapsed after restarting the notification in the emphasized mode as the notification mode A, the effect display device 1600 maintains the progress-impossible display; Regarding lamp A (LED mounted on various decorative boards of the frame decoration member), lamp B (LED mounted on various decorative boards of game board 5), and speakers, the light intensity and volume are suppressed as notification mode B. The notification has been shifted to be executed again in the suppressed mode. As a result, even if the setting adjustment button 204 is accidentally operated or the handle 160 is touched, the notification in an emphasized manner is terminated, thereby preventing surrounding players from interfering with the game. Can be done. In this example, the time required to shift from notification mode A (emphasis mode) to notification mode B (suppression mode) is set to the same predetermined time period from timing t6 to timing t8 and from timing t9 to timing t10. Although the time (15 seconds) is used, the time from timing t6 to timing t8 and the time from timing t9 to timing t10 may be different times. For example, it is desirable to set the time from timing t6 to timing t8 to a relatively long time (15 seconds) because the purpose is to inform the surroundings, while the time from timing t9 to timing t10 is set to a relatively long time (15 seconds). For example, it may be set to a shorter time (for example, 5 seconds) than the timings t6 to t8 in order to ensure that new players are in a discontinued state and to expand the energy saving period.

Further, the predetermined condition for shifting from the notification mode A (emphasis mode) to the notification mode B (suppression mode) is not limited to the elapse of the above-mentioned predetermined time, but may also be an operation by an administrator, etc. For example, a predetermined suppression mode setting switch may be provided so that notification mode B (suppression mode) can be forcibly changed by the administrator's operation of the suppression mode setting switch during notification mode A (emphasis mode).

As mentioned above, when a predetermined condition such as a predetermined period of time has passed during execution of the stop state, lamp A (LED mounted on various decorative boards of the frame decoration member), lamp B (game board 5 Regarding the LEDs (LEDs) and speakers mounted on various decorative boards, the notification mode is changed. On the other hand, in lamp C, the function display unit 1400 includes a status display, a normal symbol display, a normal reservation display, a first special symbol display, a first special reservation number display, a second special symbol display, It is equipped with a second special reservation number display, a round display, etc., but all of these LEDs are lit during the suspension state, so that the notification mode does not change even if a predetermined condition is met. . As a result, even if there is a member whose notification mode has changed, it can be determined by the notification using the lamp C that the discontinued state has not been resolved.

Furthermore, at timing t6, notification mode A is executed immediately after transition to the aborted state, and at timing t10, notification mode A is executed due to operation of setting adjustment button 204 or contact with handle 160. In both cases, the same notification is executed in an emphasized manner. This makes it possible to standardize control programs.

As another example, if the setting adjustment button 204 is operated or the handle 160 is touched at timing t10, the lamp A (LED mounted on various decorative boards of the frame decoration member), Regarding the lamp B (LED mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5) and speakers, notification mode C may be used to shift to a mode other than notification mode A and notification mode B. . Even with such a configuration, when a new player attempts to start a game without being aware that the game has been discontinued, the notification mode may shift to a mode other than notification mode A or notification mode B. , it is possible to make the user aware that it is in a discontinued state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 143, a description will be given of whether or not the handle contact effect can be executed during the non-variable display of the special symbol (in the standby state). In this example, when the handle 160 is newly touched while the special symbols are being displayed in a non-variable manner, a handle contact effect can be executed, thereby increasing the interest of starting the game.

First, while the special symbol is being displayed in a non-changing state (standby state) in a state where the special symbol is not in a stopped state, regardless of whether it is during the demonstration period or not, if there is a new contact with the handle 160, the handle contact effect will be displayed. is set as the executable period. For example, if there is a new contact with the handle 160 at timing t1 while the advance notification display is being displayed, the handle contact effect is started and executed for a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds). ing. In this handle contact effect, the effect display device 1600 is used to display a contact-only image corresponding to the contact with the handle 160 (for example, a video display of a specific character to give an impression of the start of the game, etc.). (LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the frame decoration member), lamp B (LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5), and speakers also undergo specific production processing ( For example, it is possible to execute sounds, light emission, etc. that give an impression that the game has started. Note that the contact-only image corresponding to the contact with the handle 160 is displayed outside the specific display area where the advance notification display is displayed, and in the lower layer described above.

On the other hand, the period during which the progress impossible display is displayed in the stopped state is set as a period in which the handle contact effect cannot be performed if the handle 160 is newly touched. In other words, even if there is a new contact with the handle 160 while the progress impossible display is being displayed, the effect display device 1600 does not display the contact-specific image corresponding to the contact with the handle 160, and the handle contact effect Execution is restricted. As a result, even if a new player attempts to start a game without recognizing that the game is in a discontinued state, the normal handle contact performance will not be executed. That is, the fact that the normal handle contact effect is not performed can make the user aware that the discontinued state is in effect. As mentioned above, since the contact image is displayed in the lower layer, in order to avoid complicating the control depending on whether the contact image is displayed or not, the display of the progress-impossible display is When there is a new contact with the handle 160, a contact-specific image may be displayed on the lower layer. Even if the contact-only image is displayed on the lower layer, if the progress display is displayed using substantially the entire surface of the effect display device 1600 in the upper layer of the effect display device 1600, the player cannot display the contact-specific image. The user can be made aware of the discontinued state by not being able to visually recognize the handle and not performing the normal handle contact effect. Note that even if the rotation operation is performed while touching the handle 160, if the game is restricted by the above-mentioned restriction pattern 3, the game area will be closed because the game is stopped and the firing is stopped during the stopped state. The game ball is not fired towards 5a.

Further, as described above in detail, if the handle 160 is newly touched while the progress impossible display is being displayed, lamp A (LED mounted on various decorative boards of the frame decoration member), lamp B ( Regarding the LEDs (LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5) and speakers, it is possible to change notification mode B to notification mode A (as a separate example, notification mode C), and shift to notification mode in an emphasized mode. are doing. As a result, even if a new player attempts to start a game without recognizing that the game is in a discontinued state, the notification can be executed in an emphasized manner to make the player aware that the game is in a discontinued state.

In addition, if there is a new contact with the handle 160 at timing t5 while the advance notification display is being displayed, the handle contact effect is started, but at timing t6 before the handle contact effect ends. At this point, when the amount of balls put out reaches a specific value and the game enters a stop state, the handle contact performance is terminated midway through execution, and is not executed to the end of the performance. That is, after transitioning to the stop state, the contact-only image corresponding to the contact with the handle 160 is made difficult to view. As a result, even if the player is paying attention to the handle contact effect, the player can be made aware that the game has shifted to a stopped state and the game cannot be continued.

In addition, in this example, data transfer from the game machine side to the game ball lending device 8 can be accepted during the stoppage state, but data transfer from the game machine side to the game ball lending device 8 can be accepted, but it is not possible to add the number of balls normally held by a new player, or to transfer data from the game ball lending device 8 to the game ball lending device 8. Data transfer from the game machine to the game machine is not accepted, making it impossible for new players to start playing. If a new player tries to add up the number of balls he or she normally has (ball lending operation), a notification is given in a predetermined notification format. For example, in the same way as when the handle 160 is newly touched while the progress impossible display is being displayed, lamp A (LED mounted on various decorative boards of the frame decoration member), lamp B (various decorations of the game board 5), etc. Regarding the LED (LED mounted on the board) and the speaker, the notification mode B is changed to the notification mode A (as another example, the notification mode C), and the notification is shifted to an emphasized mode. As a result, even if a new player attempts to start a game without recognizing that the game is in a suspended state, the normal number of balls held will not be added during the ball lending operation, preventing the player from starting the game. By performing the notification in an emphasized manner, it is possible to make the user aware of the discontinued state. In addition, if you want to disable the addition of the normal number of balls held by a new player or the data transfer from the game ball lending device 8 during the suspension state, the display mode of the number of balls held display section 140 can be changed to For example, it is preferable to perform control in a non-acceptable mode corresponding to a discontinued state such as "EEEE", and to notify that fact in advance.

As another example, it may be possible to accept addition of the number of balls normally held by a new player or data transfer from the game ball lending device 8 to the gaming machine side during the stopped state. Even in such a case, if a new player tries to add up the number of balls he or she normally owns (ball lending operation), the player is notified in a predetermined notification format. For example, in the same way as when the handle 160 is newly touched while the progress impossible display is being displayed, lamp A (LED mounted on various decorative boards of the frame decoration member), lamp B (various decorations of the game board 5), etc. Regarding the LED (LED mounted on the board) and the speaker, the notification mode B is changed to the notification mode A (as another example, the notification mode C), and the notification is shifted to an emphasized mode. As a result, when a new player attempts to start a game without being aware that the game is in a suspended state, the normal number of balls held will be added during the ball lending operation, but the notification will be notified in an emphasized manner. , it is possible to make the user aware that it is in a discontinued state.

In addition, as another example, during non-variable display of special symbols (standby state), the movable body provided on the game board 5 is moved from the initial position to the appearance position at a predetermined time within the demonstration period, and the effect display device 1600 The movable body may be made to wait in front of the screen for a predetermined operation period (after the operation period has elapsed, the movable body is returned to the initial position from the appearance position), so as to perform a so-called "customer attracting operation". Similarly to the above-mentioned handle contact performance, some of these customer attraction actions may be limited. For example, if it is set in advance to move the movable body provided on the game board 5 from the initial position to the appearance position (attraction operation) at timing t5 while the advance notice display is being displayed, the timing The operation to attract customers is performed over a predetermined operation period from t5, but at timing t6, which is before the operation period has elapsed, when the amount of balls put out reaches a specific value and shifts to the discontinued state, in the middle of the operation period. When the event ends, the movable body is forcibly returned from the appearance position to the initial position, thereby shortening the customer attraction operation. In other words, after transitioning to the discontinued state, the customer attraction operation is not performed. Thereby, even if the customer attraction operation is being executed, the player can be made aware that the game has shifted to a discontinued state and the game cannot be continued.

Next, whether or not a performance change operation can be accepted will be explained using FIG. 143. In this example, when the setting adjustment button 204 is pressed and held while the special symbols are being displayed in a variable manner, while the special symbols are being displayed in a non-variable manner, and in a winning game (during a jackpot game), the " When the operation of the first performance button 251 or the second performance button 252 is requested in the subsequent performance, an auto button function is enabled that assumes that the first performance button 251 or the second performance button 252 has been operated even if the first performance button 251 or the second performance button 252 is not operated. In order to provide a gaming environment that meets the needs of the player, it is possible to change to the ``auto button mode'' to enable 3D image display on the effect display device 1600 and to the ``3D display mode to enable 3D image display on the effect display device 1600.'' There is. Note that if the setting adjustment button 204 is pressed and held again after changing to auto button mode or 3D display mode, the change is canceled and the mode is changed to normal mode. There is.

First, as an example, a case will be described in which the setting adjustment button 204 is pressed for a long time while the special symbol is being displayed non-variably in a non-stop state. While the special symbol is being displayed non-variably in a non-stop state, regardless of whether it is during the demonstration period or not, the reception of long-press operations on the setting adjustment button 204 is enabled, and changes to auto button mode and 3D display are enabled. It is possible to change the mode. For example, if a long press operation on the setting adjustment button 204 is started at timing t1 while the advance notification display is being displayed, the effect display device 1600 displays a reception message consisting of a corresponding image and sound while accepting the long press operation. An effect (for example, a display or sound such as "If you press and hold for 5 seconds, the mode will change to auto button mode and 3D display mode") is executed. Then, at timing t2, when the period of long press operation of the setting adjustment button 204 reaches a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds), the effect display device changes to the auto button mode or the 3D display mode. In step 1600, a reception effect consisting of an image and sound corresponding to the reception of the long press operation (for example, a display and sound such as "The mode has been changed to auto button mode and 3D display mode") is executed. Note that the image display of the currently accepted performance and the accepted performance is displayed outside the specific display area where the advance notification display is displayed, and in the middle layer of the performance display device 1600.

Also, although not shown, when the setting adjustment button 204 is pressed and held while the special symbol is being displayed in a non-stop state or during a winning game (during a jackpot game), the special symbol is displayed non-variably. In the same manner as in the middle, the reception of the long press operation of the setting adjustment button 204 is enabled, it is possible to change to auto button mode and change to 3D display mode, and it is also possible to execute the reception performance and reception completion performance. is controlled. In addition, if the setting adjustment button 204 is pressed and held while a special symbol is being displayed in a fluctuating manner, it will not be limited to the time when the special symbol is being fluctuated, but after the fluctuating display of that special symbol is finished or the next time the special symbol will be fluctuating. It is possible to continue accepting the long press operation after the start of the display, so that the long press operation is not forcibly canceled in the middle when the variable display of the special symbol ends.

In addition, after changing to auto button mode or changing to 3D display mode during a variable display of special symbols, non-variable display of special symbols, or during a winning game (during a jackpot game), in subsequent productions. In addition to changing the settings to be compatible with auto button mode and 3D display mode, I am running a setting effect (setting image) that indicates that auto button mode and 3D display mode are set, but the screen does not appear in that state. When the amount of balls reaches a specific value and shifts to a stop state, the change to auto button mode or change to 3D display mode is forcibly canceled, and subsequent execution of the setting effect (image being set) is restricted. In other words, when the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value and the state shifts to the stopped state, the set auto button mode and 3D display mode are forcibly canceled without any operation on the setting adjustment button 204, and the mode is changed to either mode. The above-mentioned display indicating that progress is not possible will be executed in a normal manner that is not supported by the above-mentioned system. Also, regarding the effect being set (image being set), similar to the image of the effect being accepted and the effect already accepted, the effect is outside the specific display area where the unplayable display is displayed, and is within the effect display device 1600. displayed in the top layer. As a result, it is possible to avoid displaying an inability to progress in a 3D display, etc., and also to prevent the inability to progress display from being difficult to see in the setting effect (setting image), and to avoid causing discomfort or discomfort to the player. It is possible to appropriately notify the discontinued state without giving a feeling of disgust.

Next, during the variable display of special symbols, non-variable display of special symbols, or during a winning game (during a jackpot game), press the setting adjustment button 204 to change to auto button mode or 3D display mode. A case will be explained in which the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value while the pushing operation is in progress. Using FIG. 143 to explain the non-variable display of special symbols in a state that is not in a stopped state, the user presses and holds the setting adjustment button 204 to change to auto button mode or 3D display mode. If the ball output reaches a specific value at timing t6 (for example, when the setting adjustment button 204 is held down for 3 seconds) and the state shifts to a stop state, the settings will be adjusted at timing t6. Continued acceptance of the long-press operation of the button 204 is blocked, and subsequent operation acceptance is forcibly disabled. In addition, if a production that is currently being accepted or a production that has been accepted is in the process of being executed and the amount of balls produced reaches a certain value and shifts to a discontinued state, the production is forcibly terminated at the moment the production transitions to a discontinued state. . In other words, even if the setting adjustment button 204 is held down for 5 seconds or more after that, the setting is restricted so that the change to the auto button mode or the 3D display mode is not performed. As a result, even if there is a long-press operation on the setting adjustment button 204 before shifting to the discontinued state, if the state shifts to the discontinued state during the long-press operation, the reception will be accepted after shifting to the discontinued state. To appropriately notify a discontinued state without causing discomfort or disgust to a player without executing any of the medium performance, accepted performance, and setting performance.

On the other hand, while the progress impossible display is being displayed in the stopped state, reception of long-press operations on the setting adjustment button 204 is disabled, and changes to auto button mode or 3D display mode are restricted. . In other words, even if there is a long-press operation on the setting adjustment button 204 while the progress impossible display is displayed, the effect display device 1600 limits the execution of the accepting effect, accepted effect, and setting effect. . As a result, even if a new player presses and holds the setting adjustment button 204 without realizing that the player is in a discontinued state, notification regarding the change to auto button mode or change to 3D display mode will not be executed. , it is possible to avoid misunderstanding that the game is possible.

In addition, the setting adjustment button 204 is used to cancel the already set auto button mode or cancel the 3D display mode during a variable display of special symbols, a non-variable display of special symbols, or during a winning game (during a jackpot game). If the amount of balls delivered reaches a specific value while the button is being pressed for a long time, the following control is performed. That is, at timing t6, when the setting adjustment button 204 is being held down to cancel the auto button mode or the 3D display mode (for example, the setting adjustment button 204 is held down for 3 seconds). state), when the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value and shifts to the stopped state, at timing t6, the continued reception of the long press operation of the setting adjustment button 204 is blocked, and subsequent operation reception is performed in the same way as above. Forced to disable it. In addition, if a production that is currently being accepted or a production that has been accepted is in the middle of its execution and the amount of balls produced reaches a certain value and shifts to a discontinued state, the production will be forcibly terminated when the production transitions to a discontinued state in the same manner as above. That's what I do. However, if the amount of balls delivered reaches a specific value while the setting adjustment button 204 is being held down in order to cancel the already set auto button mode or cancel the 3D display mode, Even if the continued reception of the long-press operation of the setting adjustment button 204 is blocked, the automatic button mode or the 3D display mode is controlled to be canceled based on the amount of balls coming out reaching a specific value. In other words, if there is a long press operation (operation for canceling) on the setting adjustment button 204 before shifting to the discontinued state, the discontinued state will be changed by shifting to the discontinued state during the long press operation. After transitioning to , none of the accepting presentation, accepted presentation, and setting presentation will be executed, but the auto button mode and 3D display mode will be forcibly canceled. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the notification of the discontinued state from being distorted in a manner reflecting a special mode, and to avoid giving the player a feeling of discomfort or disgust.

In addition, as described above in detail, if the setting adjustment button 204 is operated (long press operation) while the progress impossible display is displayed, the lamp A (LED mounted on various decorative boards of the frame decoration member) , lamp B (LED mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5), and speakers can be changed from notification mode B to notification mode A (as another example, notification mode C). We are now transitioning to notifications. As a result, even if a new player presses and holds the setting adjustment button 204 without realizing that the player is in a discontinued state, it is possible to notify the player in an emphasized manner and make him/her aware that the player is in a discontinued state. can.

Furthermore, if you start pressing and holding the setting adjustment button 204 at timing t5 while the advance notification display is being displayed, the effect display device 1600 displays an image of the effect currently being accepted, but the setting adjustment button 204 At timing t6, which is before the long press period reaches a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds), when the amount of balls released reaches a specific value and the state shifts to the stopped state, the display of the image of the receiving effect will be stopped. It ends midway and prevents the display of the image during reception from being executed to the end. In other words, after transitioning to the discontinued state, the display of the image of the currently accepting performance is made invisible. In addition, after transitioning to the discontinued state, reception of long-press operations on the setting adjustment button 204 is disabled, so even if the long-press operation has been continued before shifting to the discontinued state, the duration of the long-press operation will be disabled. At timing t7 when the has reached a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds), the effect display device 1600 displays the image of the accepted effect without changing to the auto button mode or changing to the 3D display mode. There's nothing to do. As a result, even if the user continues to press and hold the setting adjustment button 204, the player can be made aware that the game will be stopped and the game cannot be continued.

In addition, when the amount of balls put out during a jackpot game reaches a specific value and shifts to the stop preparation state, unlike when the progress impossible display is displayed in the stop state, the reception of the long press operation of the setting adjustment button 204 is enabled, It is possible to change to auto button mode or 3D display mode. Therefore, if you start pressing and holding the setting adjustment button 204 while the advance notification display is displayed, and the transition to the termination preparation state occurs before the period of pressing and holding reaches a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds), does not end the reception performance mid-way through execution, and if the long-press operation reaches a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) after transitioning to the abort preparation state, it will change to the auto button or change to 3D display. The effect display device 1600 displays the image of the accepted effect. As a result, when the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value during a long-press operation of the setting adjustment button 204, it is possible to determine whether the state has shifted to the stop-start state or the stop-start preparation state, and the state has shifted to the stop-start preparation state. Later, by executing the corresponding performance, it is possible to play a game that meets the player's needs.

In addition, in the above description, changing to other modes such as auto button mode and 3D display mode by pressing and holding the setting adjustment button 204 was exemplified, but other modes that can be changed by pressing and holding the setting adjustment button 204 are these. It is not limited to modes. For example, the other mode may be a change to "another performance mode in which the preview performance and the reach performance are executed in different ways." In addition, although the example has been shown in which changing to another mode is performed by pressing and holding the settings adjustment button 204, the player operation that triggers the change to another mode is not limited to pressing and holding the settings adjustment button 204. It may also be a short press operation on the adjustment button 204 or another button.

In addition, the timing to reflect changes to other modes such as auto button mode or 3D display mode is not limited to the above example. For example, the change may be suspended until the next special symbol starts changing, and Changes to other modes may be reflected upon the start of the change. In such a case, the amount of balls released reaches a certain value between the time the change to another mode is put on hold and the start of the next special symbol fluctuation, and the state is stopped, causing the next special symbol fluctuation to start itself. Since this is not executed, it is possible to disable reflection of changes to other modes, and it is possible to obtain the same effect as described above. In addition, in such a case, the control load on the peripheral control board 1510 can be reduced by erasing information regarding the pending change to another mode when the amount of balls put out reaches a specific value and the game is stopped. It can be reduced.

[Other modifications of side unit]
Next, another form of side unit 2800H that is different from the above will be described with reference mainly to FIGS. 144 to 146 and the like. FIG. 144 is a schematic perspective view showing the back side of a side unit 2800H of still another form. FIG. 145 is an enlarged side view of the vicinity of the magnetic sensor 1030H shown in FIG. 144. FIG. 146 is an enlarged plan view showing the vicinity of the ball sensor 2815H shown in FIG. 144. Here, the same components as the side unit 2800 and the side units 2800B to 2800G described above are given the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

The side unit 2800H extends along the inner rail 1002 to the left of the starting port unit 2100 in the game area 5a where the game ball B is driven by the player operating the handle 160. In addition, the side unit 2800H includes a plurality of (in this embodiment, three) general winning holes 2001 that are always open to receive game balls B.

The side unit 2800H of this embodiment includes a unit main body 2810A that is attached from the front to a flat panel board 1110 in which the obstacle nails are planted in the game panel 1100, and a unit cover 2820 that is attached to the rear side of the unit main body 2810A. An LED board provided between the unit main body 2810A and the unit cover 2820, a magnetic sensor 1030H that detects illegal magnetism (magnetic field lines) near the general winning opening 2001, and a magnetic sensor 1030H that is accepted into the general winning opening 2001 and passes through the passage exit 2812b. It further includes a ball sensor 2815H that detects the ejected game ball B.

In addition to the LED board, a magnetic sensor 1030H and a ball sensor 2815H are provided between the unit main body 2810A and the unit cover 2820 (not shown in FIG. 144). The unit main body 2810A and the unit cover 2820 are made of transparent synthetic resin, and for example, the LED board, magnetic sensor 1030H, ball sensor 2815H, etc. are visible from the outside of the unit.

The LED board of the side unit 2800H is provided with a plurality of LEDs on the front mounting surface facing the player, and a socket for a connection connector is provided on the back mounting surface opposite to the front mounting surface. A pin of the connection connector provided at one end of the sub-wiring 2805a is inserted into the socket of the connection connector, and the other end of the sub-wiring 2805a is connected to the peripheral control board 1510. That is, the LED board of side unit 2800H is connected to peripheral control board 1510 via sub-wiring 2805a.

The sub-wiring 2805a is, for example, an electric wire covered with an insulator and a protective coating, and in this embodiment, the LED board and the peripheral control board 1510 are connected via three sub-wirings 2805a. Specifically, the three sub-wirings 2805a extending from the LED board extend to the outside of the side unit 2800H through an opening (not shown) formed at the rear of the unit cover 2820, and are connected to the peripheral control board 1510. There is. Furthermore, the three sub-wirings 2805a extending to the outside of the side unit 2800H are pulled out to the rear of the side unit 2800H so as to bypass the rear of the ball sensor 2815H and the magnetic sensor 1030H, and then directed toward the starting port unit 2100. and is routed toward the center of the gaming machine 1 (leftward in the drawing).

As shown in FIG. 77(f), the magnetic sensor 1030H includes a sensor body 1031 for detecting magnetism, a sensor substrate 1032 with a white surface on which the sensor body 1031 is mounted, the sensor substrate 1032, and the sensor. The sensor case 1033 covers the main body 1031. In addition to the sensor body 1031, the sensor board 1032 includes an IC, a transistor, a resistor, a diode, a socket for a connection connector 1032H, and the like. A pin of the connecting connector 1032H provided at one end of the main wiring 2805b is inserted into the socket of the connecting connector 1032H, and the other end of the main wiring 2805b is connected to the main control board 1310. That is, the sensor board 1032 is connected to the main control board 1310 via the main wiring 2805b.

The main wiring 2805b is, for example, an electric wire covered with an insulator and a protective coating, and in this embodiment, the magnetic sensor 1030H and the main control board 1310 are connected via two main wirings 2805b. Specifically, the pins of the connection connector 1032H provided at one end of two main wirings 2805b extending from the main control board 1310 connect to the sensor board 1032 through an opening (not shown) formed in the rear part of the unit cover 2820. It is inserted into the socket of the connection connector 1032H mounted on the. Further, the two main wirings 2805b extending rearward from the magnetic sensor 1030H are folded back so as to bypass the magnetic sensor 1030H, and extend forward on the side of the magnetic sensor 1030H toward the starting port unit 2100 of the gaming machine. 1 (leftward in the drawing). Note that a portion of the pin of the connecting connector 1032H inserted into the socket of the connecting connector 1032H protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the unit cover 2820 through the opening of the unit cover 2820.

The ball sensor 2815H includes, for example, "a photosensor having a light emitting part and a light receiving part", "a dielectric sensor that detects changes in induced current", "a contact sensor that detects contact with a game ball", and "a sensor that detects changes in magnetism". Either one of a "magnetic sensor that detects a change in electrostatic capacitance" and a "capacitance sensor that detects a change in electrostatic capacitance" may be employed. Further, the ball sensor 2815H has a sensor board, and a socket for the connection connector 2815Ha is mounted on the sensor board. A pin of the connection connector 2815Ha provided at one end of the main wiring 2805c is inserted into the socket of the connection connector 2815Ha, and the other end of the main wiring 2805c is connected to the main control board 1310. That is, the ball sensor 2815H is connected to the main control board 1310 via the main wiring 2805c.

The main wiring 2805c is, for example, an electric wire covered with an insulator and a protective coating, and in this embodiment, the ball sensor 2815H and the main control board 1310 are connected via two main wirings 2805c. Specifically, the pin of the connection connector 2815Ha provided at one end of the two main wires 2805b is inserted into the socket of the connection connector 2815Ha provided on the ball sensor 2815. The two main wirings 2805c are pulled out to the side of the ball sensor 2815H (right side in the figure) through an opening formed in the side of the unit cover 2820, and then connected to the ball sensor 2815H and the magnetic sensor 1030H. It is turned back toward the starting port unit 2100 and routed toward the center of the gaming machine 1 (leftward in the figure) so as to bypass the rear. Note that the pins of the connection connector 2815Ha inserted into the socket of the connection connector 2815Ha are located inside the unit cover 2820, unlike the pins of the connection connector 1032H described above, and are inserted into the unit through the opening of the unit cover 2820. It does not protrude outward from the cover 2820.

In the side unit 2800H of this embodiment, the game ball B received in the general winning hole 2001 is sent to the ball path 2812a behind the front surface of the panel board 1110 by the ball receiving part 2811b forming the general winning hole 2001. The ball is guided and flows down along the surface of the panel board 1110 within the thickness of the panel board 1110 by the ball passage 2812a, and is detected by the ball sensor 2815H after being discharged from the passage outlet 2812b that opens toward the rear. . Further, in the side unit 2800H of this embodiment, for example, when a magnet is brought close to the side unit 2800H for the purpose of fraud against the general winning hole 2001, the magnet is detected by the magnetic sensor 1030H.

Furthermore, after the above-described main wirings 2805b, 2805c and sub-wirings 2805a join together along the route in which the wirings extend, they are gathered into a bundle by a binding member 2820g such as a binding band, and then attached to the unit cover 2820. It may be fixed to the unit cover 2820 through the formed opening 2820f, and for example, the pins of the connection connector can be prevented from coming out of the sockets of the connection connector by external force acting directly on each wiring. can be suppressed. In addition, each wire extends on a plane along the back or side surface of the unit cover 2820, and is then bundled into a bundle by the binding member 2820g. It is possible to further prevent the pin from coming out of the socket of the connection connector.

Here, electronic components such as the above-mentioned magnetic sensor 1030H and ball sensor 2815H may be replaced with normal electronic components when a problem such as damage occurs, and during such work, A pin of a connector provided on a wiring may be repeatedly inserted into and removed from a socket of a connector provided on an electronic component. In such a case, the fit between the socket of the connector on the electronic component side and the pin of the connector on the wiring side becomes weak, and external forces such as vibrations applied to the game machine may cause the socket of the connector on the electronic component side to become loose. There is a risk that the pins of the wiring connector may come off. Furthermore, if a pin of a connector for connecting wiring is pulled out from a socket of a connector for connecting an electronic component, a problem may occur in the performance or the game, and there is a risk that the game player's interest in the game may be reduced.

[How the wiring contacts the pins of the connection connector]
As mainly shown in FIG. 145, in the side unit 2800H, the two main wires 2805c extending from the ball sensor 2815H come into contact with the pins of the connection connector 1032H inserted into the socket of the connection connector 1032H of the magnetic sensor 1030H. It is arranged like this. Specifically, at least a portion of the pins of the connection connector 1032H protrude to the outside of the unit cover 2820 that houses the magnetic sensor 1030H in a state where it is inserted into the socket of the connection connector 1032H. On the other hand, two main wires 2805c extending from the ball sensor 2815H and arranged outside the unit cover 2820 are connected to the outside of the pins of the connection connector 1032H so as to sandwich the two main wires 2805b extending from the magnetic sensor 1030H. It is provided so as to be in contact with the top.

In the side unit 2800H of this embodiment, the main wiring 2805c extending from the ball sensor 2815H is arranged so as to come into contact with the pin of the connection connector 1032H inserted into the magnetic sensor 1030H, so that the pin of the connection connector 1032H is connected. Even if an external force is applied to the pins of the connector 1032H that would cause them to come out of the socket of the connector 1032H, the two main wires 2805c that come into contact with the pins of the connector 1032H will cause the socket of the connector 1032H to close. It is possible to suppress the pins of the connecting connector 1032H from coming out from the pins, and in turn, it is possible to suppress problems that occur in the performance or the game, and to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game.

Note that in the side unit 2800H of this embodiment, there are two main wires 2805c extending from the ball sensor 2815H, which is the same number as the number of main wires 2805b provided with pins of the connection connector 1032 inserted into the magnetic sensor 1030H. Although a certain embodiment is shown, it is preferable that the number of main wirings 2805c extending from the ball sensor 2815H is greater than the number of main wirings 2805b provided with pins of the connection connector 1032 inserted into the magnetic sensor 1030H. , many main wires 2805c extending from the ball sensor 2815H are arranged so as to come into contact with the pins of the connection connector 1032H inserted into the magnetic sensor 1030H, so the pins of the connection connector 1032H come out from the socket of the connection connector 1032H. This can be further suppressed.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the two main wires 2805c extending from the ball sensor 2815H are arranged so as to sandwich the two main wires 2805b extending from the magnetic sensor 1030H, but the two main wires 2805c extending from the ball sensor 2815H are 2805c may be arranged so as to come into contact with the pin of the connection connector 1032H on either side of the two main wirings 2805b extending from the magnetic sensor 1030H, and the connection connector 2805c may be placed in contact with the pin of the connection connector 1032H from the socket of the connection connector 1032H. It is possible to prevent the pin from coming out.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, in the side unit 2800H, the magnetic sensor 1030H is provided with a socket for the connection connector 1032, and the main wiring 2805b is provided with a pin of the connection connector 1032. An embodiment may be adopted in which the pins of the connector 1032 are provided and the main wiring 2805b is provided with a socket of the connecting connector 1032. In this embodiment, the two main wirings 2805c extending from the ball sensor 2815H are connected to the main wiring 2805b. By being provided so as to come into contact with the socket of the connector 1032H, it is possible to suppress the pins of the connecting connector 1032H from coming out from the socket of the connecting connector 1032H.

Furthermore, it is desirable that the main wiring 2805c connecting the ball sensor 2815H and the main control board 1310 has a different surface color from the main wiring 2805b connecting the magnetic sensor 1030H and the main control board 1310. In this embodiment, the main wiring 2805c connected to the ball sensor 2815H has a bright surface color such as white, yellow, pink, or light blue, and the main wiring 2805b connected to the magnetic sensor 1030H has a black or brown surface color. It has a dark surface color such as dark blue or navy blue. Because the surface color of the main wiring 2805b and the surface color of the main wiring 2805c are different, any main wiring can be connected to the main wiring 2805b connected to the magnetic sensor 1030H, especially in a position where the main wiring 2805b and the main wiring 2805c are provided side by side. It is possible to easily visually recognize whether it is the main wiring 2805c connected to the ball sensor 2815H or the main wiring 2805c connected to the ball sensor 2815H, for example, making it easier to replace the magnetic sensor 1030H and the ball sensor 2815H. Note that the main wiring 2805c connected to the ball sensor 2815H may have a dark surface color, and the main wiring 2805b connected to the magnetic sensor 1030H may have a light surface color.

In the present embodiment, in the side unit 2800H, the wiring that contacts the pin of the connection connector 1032H inserted into the socket of the connection connector 1032H of the magnetic sensor 1030H is the main wire that connects the ball sensor 2815H and the main control board 1310. Although the wiring 2805c is shown in the embodiment, the wiring that comes into contact with the pin of the connection connector 1032H inserted into the socket of the connection connector 1032H of the magnetic sensor 1030H is, for example, three sub-wires extending from the LED board of the side unit 2800H. The three sub-wirings 2805a are provided so as to contact the pins of the connecting connector 1032H, thereby suppressing the pins of the connecting connector 1032H from coming out from the sockets of the connecting connector 1032H. be able to.

Further, in this embodiment, in the side unit 2800H, the main wiring 2805c of the ball sensor 2815H comes into contact with the pin of the connection connector 1032H that is inserted into the socket of the connection connector 1032H of the magnetic sensor 1030H connected to the main control board 1310. Although the embodiment is shown, instead of the magnetic sensor 1030H connected to the main control board 1310, the LED board of the side unit 2800 connected to the peripheral control board 1510 via the sub-wiring 2805a may be used. When the main wiring 2805c comes into contact with the pin of the connection connector inserted into the socket of the connection connector provided on the LED board, the pin of the connection connector comes out from the socket of the connection connector provided on the LED board. This can be suppressed. Further, another sub-wiring that connects other electronic components and the peripheral control board 1510 may come into contact with the pins of the connection connector inserted into the sockets of the connection connector provided on the LED board. When another sub-wiring comes into contact with the pin of the connecting connector inserted into the socket of the connecting connector provided on the LED board, the pin of the connecting connector is removed from the socket of the connecting connector provided on the LED board. It is possible to prevent it from coming off.

[A mode in which other wires come into contact with the wires extending from the pins of the connection connector]
As mainly shown in FIG. 146, in the side unit 2800H, the three sub-wirings 2805a extending from the LED board of the side unit 2800H are connected to the pins of the connection connector 2815Ha inserted into the socket of the connection connector 2815Ha of the ball sensor 2815H. The pins of the connecting connector 2815Ha are prevented from coming out from the socket of the connecting connector 2815Ha of the ball sensor 2815H.

Specifically, the pins of the connecting connector 2815Ha are located inside the unit cover 2820 that houses the ball sensor 2815H when inserted into the socket of the connecting connector 2815Ha, and the two pins extending from the pins of the connecting connector 2815Ha The main wiring 2805c extends from the opening of the unit cover 2820 to the outside of the side unit 2800H. These two main wirings 2805c extend from the pins of the connection connector 2815Ha to the outside of the unit cover 2820 along the insertion and removal direction of the pins of the connection connector 2815Ha, and are then bent along the surface of the unit cover 2820. and extends in the direction of connection with the main control board 1310.

On the other hand, the three sub-wirings 2805a are provided so as to contact two main wirings 2805c that are bent along the surface of the unit cover 2820 outside the unit cover 2820 from outside the curved arc. Note that these three sub-wirings 2805a and two main wirings 2805c are bundled by a binding member 2820g such as a cable tie after the three sub-wirings 2805a abut against the two main wirings 2805c. The pins of the connection connector may be connected together and fixed to the unit cover 2820 through an opening 2820f formed in the unit cover 2820. For example, the pins of the connection connector may be It is possible to prevent the connection connector from coming out of the socket.

In the side unit 2800H of this embodiment, three sub-wirings 2805a extending from the LED board are provided so as to come into contact with two main wirings 2805c extending from the pins of the connection connector 2815Ha inserted into the ball sensor 2815H. Therefore, even if an external force is applied to the pins of the connecting connector 2815Ha that causes the pins of the connecting connector 2815Ha to come out of the sockets of the connecting connector 2815Ha, the two main pins extending from the pins of the connecting connector 2815Ha The three sub-wirings 2805a that come into contact with the wiring 2805c can prevent the pins of the connecting connector 2815Ha from coming out from the sockets of the connecting connector 2815Ha, thereby suppressing problems that occur in the performance or the game, and suppressing a decrease in the interest in the game. can do.

In addition, in the side unit 2800H of this embodiment, there are three sub-wirings 2805a extending from the LED board of the side unit 2800H, and the number of main wirings 2805c provided with pins of the connection connector 2815Ha inserted into the ball sensor 2815H. The number of sub-wirings 2805a extending from the LED board of the side unit 2800H is the same as or less than the number of main wirings 2805c provided with pins of the connection connector 2815Ha inserted into the ball sensor 2815H. This can prevent the pins of the connecting connector 2805Ha from coming out from the sockets of the connecting connector 2805Ha.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the side unit 2800H, the ball sensor 2815H is provided with a socket for the connection connector 2805Ha, and the main wiring 2805c is provided with a pin of the connection connector 2805Ha. A mode may be adopted in which a pin of the connector 2805Ha is provided and a socket of the connection connector 2805Ha is provided in the main wiring 2805c, and it is possible to prevent the pin of the connection connector 2805Ha from coming out from the socket of the connection connector 2805Ha. .

Furthermore, it is desirable that the main wiring 2805c connecting the ball sensor 2815H and the main control board 1310 has a different surface color from the sub wiring 2805a connecting the LED board of the side unit 2800 and the peripheral control board 1510. In this embodiment, the main wiring 2805c has a light surface color such as white, yellow, pink, or light blue, and the sub wiring 2805a has a dark surface color such as black, brown, or navy blue. Since the surface color of the main wiring 2805c and the sub-wiring 2805a are different, it is difficult to determine whether a given main wiring is the main wiring 2805c or the sub-wiring 2805a, especially in a position where the main wiring 2805b and the sub-wiring 2805a are provided side by side. It is possible to easily visually confirm whether the ball sensor 2815H and the LED board of the side unit 2800 are present. Note that the main wiring 2805c may have a dark surface color, and the sub wiring 2805a may have a light surface color. Furthermore, the main wiring 2805c and the sub-wiring 2805a have different diameters from the viewpoint that it is easy to visually recognize whether a given main wiring is the main wiring 2805c or the sub-wiring 2805a. However, from the viewpoint of the importance of each wiring, it is desirable that the diameter of the main wiring 2805c is larger than the diameter of the sub-wiring 2805a.

Further, in this embodiment, in the side unit 2800H, a mode has been shown in which the sub wiring 2805a extending from the LED board of the side unit 2800H comes into contact with the two main wirings 2805c extending from the ball sensor 2815H. The wires that come into contact with the main wires 2805c may be, for example, two main wires 2805b that connect the magnetic sensor 1030H and the main control board 1310, and the two main wires 2805b are connected to the two main wires 2805c. By being provided so as to come into contact with the connecting connector 2805Ha, it is possible to suppress the pin of the connecting connector 2805Ha from coming out from the socket of the connecting connector 2805Ha.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, in the side unit 2800H, the sub-wiring 2805a extending from the LED board of the side unit 2800H comes into contact with the two main wirings 2805c connecting the ball sensor 2815H and the main control board 1310. In place of the ball sensor 2815H, another LED board of the side unit 2800 connected to the peripheral control board 1510 via a sub-wiring may be adopted, and the sub-wiring 2805a extending from the LED board may be connected to the other LED. By coming into contact with the sub-wirings extending from the board, it is possible to prevent the pins of the connection connector from coming out of the sockets of the connection connectors provided on other LED boards. Alternatively, the two main wirings extending from the magnetic sensor 1030H or the ball sensor 2815H may be brought into contact with the sub-wirings extending from another LED board, and the sockets of the connection connectors provided on the other LED boards may be brought into contact with the sub-wirings extending from the other LED board. It is possible to prevent the pins of the connection connector from coming out.

In addition, in this embodiment, as the configuration of the side unit 2800H, a mode in which the wiring comes into contact with the pin of the connection connector, and a mode in which other wiring comes into contact with the wiring extending from the pin of the connection connector are shown. Embodiments may also be implemented with other units having multiple electronic components connected by wires, such as, for example, starting port unit 2100 having a ball sensor or magnetic sensor. In addition, if it is difficult to route each wiring even in a unit that has only one electronic component connected by wiring or a unit that has multiple electronic components, for example, use wiring that extends from another unit. In this case, it is possible to implement a mode in which the wiring is brought into contact with the pin of the connection connector, and a mode in which the wire is brought into contact with the wire extending from the pin of the connection connector.

In the above-mentioned mode in which the wiring comes into contact with the pin of the connection connector, and in the mode in which other wiring comes into contact with the wiring extending from the pin of the connection connector, the type of signal transmitted via the wiring extending from the pin of the connection connector It is desirable that the type of the signal transmitted through the wiring that suppresses the pins of the connection connector from coming out are different types of signals.

Specifically, in this embodiment, the two main wires 2805c extending from the ball sensor 2815H are arranged so as to come into contact with the pins of the connection connector 1032H inserted into the socket of the connection connector 1032H of the magnetic sensor 1030H. However, the signal when the ball sensor 2815H detects the game ball B changes instantaneously as the game ball B passes, whereas the signal when the magnetic sensor 1030H detects magnetism is Maintains the changed state while detecting magnetism. In this way, when using wiring that transmits different types of signals, and when the wiring is arranged in parallel and transmits a large current signal, it is necessary to consider noise that affects each other. Conventionally, from the viewpoint of fraud prevention, the magnetic sensor 1030H is provided close to the ball sensor 2815H, and the wires extending from the magnetic sensor 1030H and the wires extending from the ball sensor 2815H are wires that transmit relatively small current signals. Therefore, in the mode in which the wiring contacts the pins of the connection connector 1032H described above, for example, there is no need to use special wiring that takes into account the influence of noise, and, for example, a new method that prevents the pins of the connection connector 1032H from coming off. It is possible to prevent the pins of the connecting connector 1032H inserted into the socket of the connecting connector 1032H from coming off without providing any additional members, and it is also possible to suppress a decrease in productivity.

In addition, even in a case where other wiring comes into contact with the wiring extending from the pin of the connection connector 1032H, for example, it is possible to remove the pin of the connection connector 1032H without using special wiring in consideration of the influence of noise. It is possible to prevent the pins of the connection connector 1032H inserted into the socket of the connection connector 1032H from coming off without providing a new member for suppressing the problem, and it is also possible to suppress a decrease in productivity.

In addition, in the mode in which the wiring contacts the pin of the above-mentioned connection connector, and in the mode in which other wiring contacts the wiring extending from the pin of the connection connector, the pin connected to the magnetic sensor 1030H, the wiring extending from the ball sensor 2815H. , wiring extending from the LED board, etc., but in an aspect where the wiring comes into contact with the pin of the connecting connector, and an aspect where another wiring comes into contact with the wiring extending from the pin of the connecting connector, for example, a movable decorative body Unless it transmits a large current signal, such as a pin connected to the drive motor that moves the drive motor or wiring extending from the drive motor, it is connected to a mechanical sensor (contact type) that detects the operation of the production button of the production operation unit 250. Pins and wiring connected to a distance sensor (infrared sensor) that non-contact detects the player's movement, or pins and wiring connected to a photo sensor that detects the origin position of a movable decoration. Wiring etc. can also be used.

[Modified example of starting port unit]
Next, a starting port unit 2100A having a different form from the above will be described with reference mainly to FIGS. 147 to 149 and the like. FIG. 147 is a schematic perspective view showing the back side of a starting port unit 2100A of a different form. FIG. 148 is an enlarged rear view of the vicinity of the second starting port sensor 2401A shown in FIG. 147. FIG. 149 is a schematic rear view showing another aspect of the main wiring. Here, the same components as those of the above-mentioned starting port unit 2100 are given the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

The starting port unit 2100A is attached to the lower center of the game area 5a and to the right of the side unit 2800H in the game area 5a where the game ball B is driven by the player operating the handle 160. The starting port unit 2100A has one starting port 2003A that is always open upward with a width that can accept only one game ball B, and the game balls B received in the starting port 2003A are branched in order from side to side. and a unit body 2115 that accommodates the branch portion 2111 and forms a passage for the game ball B received in the starting port 2003A.

In addition to the branch portion 2111, the unit main body 2115 houses a first starting port sensor 2112, a second starting port sensor 2113, and a magnetic sensor 2114, which will be described later. The unit main body 2115 is made of transparent synthetic resin, and the first starting port sensor 2112, the second starting port sensor 2113, the magnetic sensor 2114, etc. are visible from the outside of the unit main body 2115. In addition, inside the unit body 2115, there is a passageway that guides the game ball B received in the starting port 2003A to the branching part 2111, and a game ball branched to the left in front view (right in the figure) by the branching part 2111. After guiding B to the first starting port sensor 2112, the game is branched to the left side (right side in the figure) and the branching part 2111 to the right side (left side in the figure) for discharging to the outside of the unit main body 2115. A right-hand (left-hand side in the figure) passage is formed that guides the ball B to the second starting port sensor 2113 and then discharges it to the outside of the unit main body 2115.

The starting port unit 2100A has a first starting port sensor 2112 that detects the game ball B branched to the right in the drawing by the branching part 2111, and a first starting port sensor 2112 that detects the game ball B branched to the left in the drawing by the branching part 2111. It further includes a second starting port sensor 2113 and a magnetic sensor 2114 that can detect magnetism near the starting port 2003A.

When a game ball B is detected by the first starting port sensor 2112, a privilege is given in which a predetermined number of game balls B are added to the number of balls held, and a state in which a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the first In a state in which the number of reserved special symbols is less than 4), a first special symbol lottery is executed that enables generation of an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player. Similarly, when a game ball B is detected by the second starting port sensor 2113, a privilege is given in which a predetermined number of game balls B are added to the number of balls held, and a state where a predetermined condition is satisfied (e.g. , the number of pending second special symbols is less than 4), a second special symbol lottery is executed that enables generation of an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player. Further, the magnetic sensor 2114 detects irregular magnetism (lines of magnetic force) near the starting port 2003A.

The starting port unit 2100A includes a connecting means 2116 that connects each of the first starting port sensor 2112, the second starting port sensor 2113, and the magnetic sensor 2114 to the main control board 1310. Note that the respective detection signals from the first starting port sensor 2112 and the second starting port sensor 2113 are directly input to the main control board 1310 without going through another board such as a relay board, and are input to the main control input circuit. The signal is inputted to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU via the input terminal.

The connecting means 2116 connects two main wirings 2116a arranged between the first starting port sensor 2112 and the main control board 1310, a pin of a connecting connector 2116b attached to the end of the main wiring 2116a, and a first It has a socket for a connection connector 2116b attached to the starting port sensor 2112. In addition, the connection means 2116 connects two main wirings 2116c arranged between the second starting port sensor 2113 and the main control board 1310, a pin of a connecting connector attached to the end of the main wiring 2116c, and a second The socket of the connection connector attached to the secondary start port sensor 2112, the two main wirings 2116d arranged between the magnetic sensor 2114 and the main control board 1310, and the connection attached to the end of the main wiring 2116d. and a socket of the connection connector 2116e attached to the magnetic sensor 2114.

Each of the main wirings 2116a, 2116c, and 2116d is, for example, an electric wire covered with an insulator and a protective coating, and is routed along a substantially groove-shaped wiring path 2115a formed on the back surface of the unit body 2115. Note that after the main wirings 2116a, 2116c, and 2116d join together in the wiring path 2115a, the main wirings 2116a, 2116c, and 2116d are bundled together using a binding member such as a cable tie, and fixed to the unit body 2115. For example, it is possible to prevent the pins of the connection connector from coming out of the sockets of the connection connector due to an external force that directly acts on each of the main wirings 2116a, 2116c, and 2116d.

The wiring route 2115a of the unit main body 2115 includes a first starting port sensor 2112, a second starting port sensor 2113, a magnetic sensor 2114, a path for guiding the game ball B to the branching part 2111, and a path for guiding the game ball B to the first starting port sensor 2112. It is formed on the back side of the passage unit main body 2115 so as to bypass the passage guiding the game ball B to the second starting port sensor 2113 and the passage guiding the game ball B to the second starting port sensor 2113. The wiring path 2115a is formed in a substantially groove shape on the back surface of the unit main body 2115, and each of the main wirings 2116a, 2116c, and 2116d is routed along the wiring path 2115a inside the back surface of the unit main body 2115. There is. The unit main body 2115 further includes a wall-shaped contact member 2115b that forms a part of the side wall portion of the substantially groove-shaped wiring path 2115a in the vicinity of the first starting port sensor 2112.

[Contact member that acts on the bent part of the wiring]
As shown in FIG. 148, the main wiring 2116a is connected to the main control board from the pin of the connecting connector 2116e inserted into the socket of the connecting connector 2116e of the first starting port sensor 2112 via the wiring path 2115a of the unit main body 2115. It extends towards 1310. Specifically, the main wiring 2116a has a bent portion 2116a1 that is bent in a direction different from the insertion/removal direction of the connection connector 2116e in the vicinity of the first starting port sensor 2112, and the bent portion 2116a1 is located at the end of the main wiring 2116a. It is formed toward the wiring path 2115a from the pin of the connector 2116e provided in the section.

The contact member 2115b formed on the unit main body 2115 acts on the bent portion 2116a1 of the main wiring 2116a, and connects the socket of the connection connector 2116e provided in the first starting port sensor 2112 to the connection connector 2116e provided in the main wiring 2116a. It is possible to prevent the pins of the connector 2116e from coming off, which in turn suppresses problems that occur in performances or games, and suppresses a decrease in interest in the game. Specifically, the contact member 2115b formed on the unit main body 2115 contacts the bent portion 2116a1 of the main wiring 2116a extending along the wiring path 2116a from the outside in the radial direction of the bent portion 22116a1, and connects the connecting connector. Even if an external force is applied to the pin of the connecting connector 2116e that causes the pin of the connecting connector 2116e to come out of the socket of the connecting connector 2116e, the contact member 2115b comes into contact with the bent part 2116a1 of the main wiring 2116a, so the connecting External force applied to the pins of the connector 2116e is absorbed by the bending of the bent portion 2116a1 of the main wiring 2116a, and it is possible to prevent the pins of the connecting connector 2116e from coming out from the sockets of the connecting connector 2116e.

Further, it is more preferable that the bent portion 21126a1 is pressed into contact with the contact member 2115b, and the deformation of the bent portion 2116a1 increases the contact area with the contact member 2115b, and the external force applied to the pin of the connection connector 2116e is transferred to the main wiring 2116a. This is further absorbed by the bending portion 2116a1, and it is possible to suppress the pin of the connecting connector 2116e from coming out from the socket of the connecting connector 2116e.

Note that in this embodiment, a mode has been described in which the contact member 2115b formed on the unit body 2115 contacts the bent portion 2116a1 of the main wiring 2116a extending along the wiring route 2116a from the outside in the radial direction of the bent portion 2116a1. , the contact member 2115b formed on the unit main body 2115 may be in a mode in which it is close to the bent portion 2116a1 of the main wiring 2116a extending along the wiring path 2116a on the outside in the radial direction of the bent portion 2116a1, and the contact member 2115b is formed in the unit body 2115. Even if an external force is applied to the pin of the connecting connector 2116e that causes the pin of the connecting connector 2116e to come out of the socket of the connecting connector 2116e, the contact member 2115b is close to the bent portion 2116a1 of the main wiring 2116a, so the connecting The bending part 2116a1 of the main wiring 2116a and the contact member 2115b come into contact with each other due to the external force applied to the pin of the connector 2116e, and the external force applied to the pin of the connecting connector 2116e is absorbed by the bending part 2116a1 of the main wiring 2116a, and the connecting connector It is possible to prevent the pins of the connection connector 2116e from coming out from the socket of the connector 2116e.

Further, in this embodiment, the contact member 2115b formed on the unit main body 2115 is not located in the direction in which the pins of the connector 2116e for connecting the main wiring 2116a are inserted and removed. Therefore, when the pins of the connector 2116e of the main wiring 2116a are inserted into and removed from the socket of the connector 2116e of the first starting port sensor 2112, it is possible to prevent the pins of the connector 2116e from coming into contact with the contact member 2115b. , the pin of the connector 2116e for connection of the main wiring 2116a can be easily inserted and removed from the socket of the connector 2116e for connection of the first starting port sensor 2112.

Further, in this embodiment, after the main wirings 2116a, 2116c, and 2116d join together in the wiring route 2115a, the main wirings 2116a, 2116c, and 2116d are bundled together using a binding member such as a binding band, and are assembled into a unit. Although the manner in which the main wirings 2116a, 2116c, and 2116d are fixed to the main body 2115 is shown, when a plurality of each of the main wirings 2116a, 2116c, and 2116d are provided, after at least a portion of each of the main wirings 2116a, 2116c, and 2116d join together, Alternatively, each main wiring 2116a, 2116c, 2116d may be bundled with a binding member such as a binding band and fixed to the unit main body 2115. It may be fixed to 2115.

Further, in this embodiment, a mode in which the contact member 2115b is formed in the unit main body 2115 has been described, but the contact member 2115b is such that the starting port unit 2100A 1110), it may be provided on the game board 5 so as to act on the bent portion 2116a1 of the main wiring 2116a.

Specifically, a contact portion corresponding to the contact member 2115b acting on the bent portion 2116a1 of the main wiring 2116a is formed at the right end portion of the side unit 2800H adjacent to the left side of the starting port unit 2100A. Alternatively, a contact portion corresponding to the contact member 2215b acting on the bent portion 2116a1 of the main wiring 2116a may be provided on the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100, or it may be attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100. The back unit 3000 may be provided with a contact portion corresponding to the contact member 2215b that acts on the bent portion 2116a1 of the main wiring 2116a, and the main It is possible to prevent the pins of the connection connector 2116e provided on the wiring 2116a from coming out, and in turn, it is possible to suppress problems occurring in the performance or the game, and to suppress a decrease in interest in the game. Note that the mode in which the contact member 2115b is formed on the unit main body 2115 has a wider range in which the contact member 2115b can be formed, compared to the mode in which the contact member 2115b is formed outside the starting port unit 2100A. Excellent design ease when forming. On the other hand, the mode in which the contact member 2115b is formed outside the starting port unit 2100A eliminates the need to newly form the contact member 2115b, compared to the mode in which the contact member 2115b is formed in the unit body 2115, and The member 2115b is easily formed.

Further, in this embodiment, a mode has been described in which the contact member 211 acts on the bent portion 2116a1 of the main wiring 2116a of the starting port unit 2100A, but this mode includes, for example, an LED board, a magnetic sensor 1030H, and a ball sensor 2815H. In other units such as the side unit 2800H, the contact member may act on the bent portion of the main wiring or sub-wiring, and the contact member may act on the bent portion of the main wiring or sub-wiring from the socket of the connection connector provided on the electronic component to the main wiring or sub-wiring. It is possible to suppress the pins of the provided connection connector from coming off, and in turn, it is possible to suppress problems that occur in performances or games, and to suppress a decline in game interest.

[Contact member that acts on the detour section of the wiring]
As shown in FIG. 149, the main wiring 2116a of this embodiment connects the main control board 1316 to the pin of the connection connector 2116e inserted into the socket of the connection connector 2116e provided in the first starting port sensor 2112. It has a detour portion 2116a2 that is detoured in a direction different from the direction toward the main control board 1310 (in the present embodiment, the opposite direction) and then changed to the connection direction with the main control board 1310.

The contact member 2115c formed on the unit body 2115 acts on the detour portion 2116a2 of the main wiring 2116a, and connects the socket of the connection connector 2116e provided in the first starting port sensor 2112 to the connection connector 2116e provided in the main wiring 2116a. It is possible to prevent the pins of the connector 2116e from coming off, which in turn suppresses problems that occur in performances or games, and suppresses a decrease in interest in the game. Specifically, the contact member 2115c formed on the unit main body 2115 contacts the detour portion 2116a2 of the main wiring 2116a from the outside in the radial direction of the detour portion 22116a2, and the pin of the connection connector 2116e contacts the detour portion 2116a2 of the main wiring 2116a from the outside in the radial direction of the detour portion 22116a2. Even if an external force is applied to the pin of the connecting connector 2116e that causes the connector 2116e to come out of the socket, the contact member 2115c contacts the detour portion 2116a2 of the main wiring 2116a, so the external force applied to the pin of the connecting connector 2116e is absorbed by the deflection of the detour portion 2116a2 of the main wiring 2116a, and it is possible to suppress the pin of the connecting connector 2116e from coming out from the socket of the connecting connector 2116e.

Further, it is more preferable that the detour portion 21126a2 is pressed into contact with the contact member 2115c, and the deformation of the detour portion 2116a2 increases the contact area with the contact member 2115c, and the external force applied to the pin of the connection connector 2116e is applied to the main wiring 2116a. This is further absorbed by the deflection of the detour portion 2116a2, and it is possible to suppress the pin of the connecting connector 2116e from coming out from the socket of the connecting connector 2116e.

Note that this embodiment shows a mode in which the contact member 2115c formed on the unit main body 2115 contacts the detour portion 2116a2 of the main wiring 2116a extending along the wiring route 2116a from the outside in the radial direction of the detour portion 2116a2. However, the contact member 2115c formed on the unit main body 2115 may be in a form that is close to the detour portion 2116a2 of the main wiring 2116a on the outside of the detour portion 2116a2 in the radial direction, and the pin of the connection connector 2116e is connected to the detour portion 2116a2 of the main wiring 2116a. Even if an external force that causes the connector 2116e to come out of the socket is applied to the pins of the connecting connector 2116e, the contact member 2115c is close to the detour portion 2116a2 of the main wiring 2116a, so that the force is applied to the pins of the connecting connector 2116e. The detour portion 2116a2 of the main wiring 2116a and the contact member 2115c come into contact with each other due to an external force, and the external force applied to the pin of the connection connector 2116e is absorbed by the deflection of the detour portion 2116a2 of the main wiring 2116a, and the connection is removed from the socket of the connection connector 2116e. It is possible to prevent the pins of the connector 2116e from coming off.

Further, in this embodiment, the contact member 2115c formed on the unit main body 2115 is not located in the direction in which the pins of the connector 2116e for connecting the main wiring 2116a are inserted and removed. Therefore, when the pins of the connector 2116e of the main wiring 2116a are inserted into and removed from the socket of the connector 2116e of the first starting port sensor 2112, it is possible to prevent the pins of the connector 2116e from coming into contact with the contact member 2115c. , the pin of the connector 2116e for connection of the main wiring 2116a can be easily inserted and removed from the socket of the connector 2116e for connection of the first starting port sensor 2112.

Further, in this embodiment, after the main wirings 2116a, 2116c, and 2116d join together in the wiring route 2115a, the main wirings 2116a, 2116c, and 2116d are bundled together using a binding member such as a binding band, and are assembled into a unit. Although the manner in which the main wirings 2116a, 2116c, and 2116d are fixed to the main body 2115 has been described, when a plurality of each of the main wirings 2116a, 2116c, and 2116d are provided, after at least a portion of each of the main wirings 2116a, 2116c, and 2116d join together, Alternatively, each main wiring 2116a, 2116c, and 2116d may be bundled with a binding member such as a binding band and fixed to the unit main body 2115. It may be fixed to 2115.

Further, in this embodiment, a mode in which the contact member 2115c is formed in the unit main body 2115 has been shown, but the contact member 2115c is such that the starting port unit 2100A 1110), it may be provided on the game board 5 so as to act on the detour portion 2116a2 of the main wiring 2116a.

Specifically, a contact portion corresponding to the contact member 2215c that acts on the detour portion 2116a2 of the main wiring 2116a is formed at the right end of the side unit 2800H adjacent to the left side of the starting port unit 2100A. Alternatively, a contact portion corresponding to the contact member 2115c that acts on the detour portion 2116a2 of the main wiring 2116a may be provided on the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100, or a back panel attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 may be provided. The unit 3000 may be provided with a contact portion corresponding to the contact member 2115c that acts on the detour portion 2116a2 of the main wiring 2116a, and the main wiring is connected from the socket of the connection connector 2116e provided in the first starting port sensor 2112. It is possible to prevent the pins of the connecting connector 2116e provided in the connector 2116a from coming out, and in turn, it is possible to suppress problems occurring in the performance or the game, and to suppress a decrease in interest in the game. Note that the mode in which the contact member 2115c is formed on the unit main body 2115 has a wider range in which the contact member 2115c can be formed, compared to the mode in which the contact member 2115c is formed outside the starting port unit 2100A. Excellent design ease when forming. On the other hand, the mode in which the contact member 2115c is formed outside the starting port unit 2100A eliminates the need to newly form the contact member 2115c, compared to the mode in which the contact member 2115c is formed in the unit body 2115, and The member 2115c is easily formed.

In addition, in the above-mentioned mode in which the wiring extending from the connecting member inserted into the connected member of one electronic component acts on the connecting member inserted into the connected member of the other electronic component or the wiring extending from the connecting member, For example, in a unit such as the starting port unit 2100A, it is difficult to prevent the connecting member inserted into the connected member of the electronic component located at the end of the wiring path from coming off, but In the aspect of the contact member that acts on the detour, for example, in a unit such as the starting port unit 2100A, even if the connection member is inserted into the connected member of the electronic component located at the end of the wiring route, the contact member acts on the detour. Pull-out can be suitably suppressed.

[Handling of base value in base monitor]
Next, the base monitor of the pachinko machine 1 of the fifth embodiment will be explained. In the other embodiments described above, the base monitor (four 7-segment LEDs) is arranged on the main control board 1310, but in the fifth embodiment, the base monitor is arranged on the frame control board 740. It is assumed that there is. Note that the basic configuration of the base monitor, such as having four 7-segment LEDs, is common to other embodiments.

In this example, the frame control board 740 rather than the main control board 1310 manages (calculates and holds) the base value displayed on the base monitor. First, the frame control board 740 determines the number of game balls B that have entered the ball entry opening (winning opening, out opening) provided in the gaming area 5a that is divided and formed on the gaming board 5 (the number of entering balls), that is, the number of balls that have entered the game The number of game balls B discharged from the area 5a is counted. Specifically, the number of game balls B that entered the winning hole, which is the target for paying out prize balls by entering, is the number of game balls B detected by the safe ball sensor 606 and the number of game balls B that entered the winning hole. As the number of game balls B that entered the out port to collect the game balls B that did not hit, the total number of game balls B detected by the out ball sensor 605 is counted as the number of balls that entered. There is. These safe ball sensor 606 and out ball sensor 605 are connected to a frame control board 740.

In addition, the main control board 1310 determines the number of the predetermined number of game balls B when it is detected by the detection sensor corresponding to the winning hole that is the target for paying out (giving) prize balls by entering the ball. It is sent to the frame control board 740 as a command. For example, when a game ball B enters the general winning hole 2001, ten game balls B are paid out, and when a game ball B enters the normal winning hole 2002, one game ball B is paid out and the first game ball B is paid out. When the game ball B enters the starting hole 2003 or the second starting hole 2004, three game balls B are paid out, and when the game ball B enters the big winning hole 2005 or the accessory winning hole 2006, ten game balls B are paid out. It is predetermined in advance to pay out game balls B of . Then, based on receiving the prize ball command, the frame control board 740 controls the number of game balls B (hereinafter referred to as the number of paid out balls) that are paid out (given) as prize balls by entering the winning hole. are being counted. In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, since actual balls are not paid out, based on the frame control board 740 receiving the prize ball command, the number of game balls B to be paid out (given) as prize balls is determined. The number of balls is added to the number of balls held by the player.

Then, the frame control board 740 calculates the ratio of the number of balls paid out to the number of balls entered, and stores the calculation result as a base value in a specific area of the built-in RAM, which is also arranged in the frame control board 740. I am trying to display it on the base monitor. The formula for calculating the ratio of the number of balls put out to the number of balls entered is base value=(number of balls put out/number of balls entered)×100. For example, if the ratio of the number of balls paid out to the number of balls entered is too high, there is a possibility that balls are entering only the winning holes where prize balls are paid out by entering the ball. By monitoring the information displayed on the base monitor, it is possible to determine whether or not a ball is being entered into the winning slot due to fraudulent activity.

In addition, regarding the base value, every time the number of game balls B that entered the ball entrance (input hole, out hole) (number of balls entered) reaches 60,000 balls, the number of payouts for the number of balls entered will be increased. The ratio is calculated, and the calculation result of the ratio of the number of balls put out to the number of balls entered which has become old is stored as a history up to a predetermined number of calculation results. Specifically, in addition to the current base value BL until the number of game balls B entering the ball entrance (input opening, out opening) reaches 60,000 balls, the previous base value BL Three sections, the value B1, the base value B2 of the time before the previous one, and the base value B3 of the time two before the previous time, are stored as a history. As for the base value, each time the number of game balls B that entered the ball entrance (input opening, out opening) reaches 60,000 balls, the current base value BL, the previous base The value B1 and the base value B2 from the time before the previous time are transferred to the base value B1 from the previous time, the base value B2 from the time from the time before the previous time, and the base value B3 from the time from the time before the last time, and the original base value B3 is discarded. In addition, the base monitor switches and displays the current base value BL, the previous base value B1, the base value B2 before the previous time, and the base value B3 the time before the previous time at regular intervals (for example, 3 seconds). ing. In addition, in the base monitor, two of the four 7-segment LEDs are used to indicate which interval the base value is, and the other two 7-segment LEDs are used to indicate the interval being displayed. The corresponding base value (calculation result of the ratio of the number of balls paid out to the number of balls entered) is displayed. In addition, the base monitor is a 7-segment LED with a decimal point (so-called dot), and there is a line between the 7-segment LED indicating the base value section and the 7-segment LED indicating the base value corresponding to the section being displayed. is trying to light up the dot. For example, when displaying the current base value BL, the previous base value B1, the base value B2 before the previous time, and the base value B3 the time before the previous time, "BL.21" and "B1" are displayed on four 7-segment LEDs. .19'', ``B2.17'', ``B3.20'', etc. are switched and displayed at regular intervals (for example, every 3 seconds). In this way, in this embodiment, by providing the control for managing the base value on the main body frame 4 side (frame control board 740) rather than on the game board 5 side (main control board 1310), the main control board in the game board 5 It becomes possible to reduce the processing load of 1310. In addition, by providing the base monitor (four 7-segment LEDs) on the main body frame 4 side (frame control board 740) instead of on the game board 5 side (main control board 1310), the game board 5 can be replaced with respect to the main body frame 4. In this case, the base monitor on the main body frame 4 side can be used, and the cost of the game board 5 can be reduced.

By the way, when a base monitor is provided on the main control board 1310 provided on the game board 5 and the base value displayed on the base monitor is managed by the main control board 1310 as in the past, the main control board 1310 When the game board 5 is replaced with respect to the game board 4, after that, the base value is newly managed from the initial state on the main control board 1310 side of the game board 5 after the replacement. However, as in this embodiment, when a base monitor is provided on the frame control board 740 provided in the main body frame 4 and the base value displayed on the base monitor is managed by the frame control board 740, Even if the game board 5 is replaced with the main body frame 4, the frame control board 740 provided on the main body frame 4 will not be replaced. There is a possibility that part of the base value information will be reflected in the game board 5 after replacement, and there is a problem in that the reliability and convenience when replacing the game board 5 will be reduced. For example, if the base value on the game board 5 before replacement, such as past base values B1 to B3 managed by the frame control board 740, is transmitted to the game board 5 after replacement, the base value on the game board 5 after replacement The reliability of the content of the value is lost. In this example, when the base value displayed on the base monitor is managed by the frame control board 740, a method for avoiding a decrease in reliability and convenience when replacing the game board 5 will be described below.

In this example, in the main control board 1310, a CPU number (unique information) unique to the CPU (main control MPU) is stored in advance. This CPU number is assigned a unique CPU number to each main control board 1310 even if it is a game board 5 of the same series, and cannot be rewritten even using an external device. Furthermore, the frame control board 740 receives the CPU number from the main control board 1310 and stores it in the RAM built into the frame control board 740. The CPU number stored in this frame control board 740 is maintained without being cleared (initialized) even if the power is turned on or off or the RAM clear switch 741 is operated when the power is turned on. Similarly, the base value stored in the frame control board 740 is maintained without being cleared (initialized) even if the power is turned on or off or the RAM clear switch 741 is operated when the power is turned on. There is. Then, when the frame control board 740 receives the CPU number from the main control board 1310, the frame control board 740 determines whether or not the CPU number matches the CPU number stored in the frame control board 740. Based on the determination result, it is determined whether or not to clear (initialize) the base value stored in the frame control board 740.

Specifically, if the frame control board 740 determines that the CPU number received from the main control board 1310 matches the CPU number stored in the frame control board 740, the main frame 4 It is determined that the game board 5 has not been replaced, and the base value stored in the frame control board 740 is maintained without being cleared. More specifically, all of the current base value BL, the previous base value B1, the base value B2 from the time before the previous time, and the base value B3 from the time before the previous time, which are stored as base values, are maintained. As a result, if the power is turned on with the same game board 5 attached, or if the game board A attached to the main body frame 4 as the game board 5 is removed while the power is turned off, then the game board A is reinstalled. In situations where the game board has not been replaced with another game board between the previous power-on and the current power-on, such as when the power is turned on with , the base value will not be cleared unintentionally, and the base value can be continuously transmitted.

On the other hand, if the frame control board 740 determines that the CPU number received from the main control board 1310 and the CPU number stored in the frame control board 740 do not match, then It is determined that the game board 5 has been replaced, and the base value stored in the frame control board 740 is cleared (set to the initial state). For example, if game board A installed on main body frame 4 as game board 5 is removed and game board B with a different CPU number is installed afterwards, the base value stored in frame control board 740 is I'm trying to clear it. More specifically, all of the current base value BL, the previous base value B1, the base value B2 from the time before the previous time, and the base value B3 from the time before the previous time, which are stored as base values, are cleared. As a result, after replacing the game board 5, the base value of the game board 5 before the replacement is not transmitted, and the new base value is counted from the state where the base value has been initialized. The base value on the game board 5 can be transmitted correctly. In other words, even if the game board 5 is replaced, there is no possibility that part of the base value information of the game board 5 before the replacement will be reflected in the game board 5 after the replacement, and when the game board 5 is replaced, Deterioration in reliability and convenience can be avoided.

Note that when replacing the game board 5, whether the game board 5 is replaced with a game board 5 that corresponds to the same model series or a game board 5 that corresponds to a different model series, the game board 5 is equipped with a Since the main control board 1310 is changed, the frame control board 740 determines that the CPU number received from the main control board 1310 and the CPU number stored in the frame control board 740 do not match. becomes.

Furthermore, if the frame control board 740 determines that the CPU number received from the main control board 1310 and the CPU number stored in the frame control board 740 do not match, the CPU number stored in the frame control board 740 is In addition to clearing the current base value, the received CPU number is newly stored in the RAM built into the frame control board 740. In this example, the number of CPU numbers that can be stored in the RAM of the frame control board 740 is "1", and the CPU number received from the main control board 1310 and the CPU number stored in the frame control board 740, If it is determined that they do not match, in addition to clearing the base value stored in the frame control board 740, the received CPU number is overwritten in the RAM built in the frame control board 740. I try to make new memories in form. This eliminates the need for processing to clear the CPU number and simplifies control. In addition, as an example different from this example, the number of CPU numbers that can be stored in the RAM of the frame control board 740 may be set to "multiple (for example, 2)", and in such a case, if the CPU number is removed for maintenance etc. Even if the game board 5 is mistakenly attached to another body frame 4, it can be ensured that the base value will not be cleared, and convenience can be improved. However, if the number of CPU numbers that can be stored in the RAM of the frame control board 740 is set to "multiple (for example, 2)", some of the stored CPU numbers may be Alternatively, it is desirable to provide a separate process to clear all of them arbitrarily.

Further, in this example, the following control is performed when the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 is removed while the power is turned on. That is, at the time when the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 is removed while the power is turned on, the frame control board 740 does not receive the CPU number, and at this timing, the CPU number stored in the frame control board 740 The CPU number and base value stored in the frame control board 740 are maintained without being cleared. For this reason, for example, if the game board A mounted on the main body frame 4 as the game board 5 is removed from the main body frame 4 for some reason while the power is turned on (while the main body frame 4 is still energized), Even if the power supply to the game board 5 is cut off, etc.), the frame control board 740 will not receive the CPU number, and the CPU number and base value stored in the frame control board 740 will be cleared. It can be maintained without any problems. Thereby, even if the game board 5 is unintentionally removed, the base value can be counted continuously from the state where the base value is maintained.

In addition, when the game board A mounted on the main body frame 4 as the game board 5 is detached from the main body frame 4 for some reason while the power is turned on, and then the game board A is reinstalled on the main body frame 4 ( When the power supply to the game board 5 is restarted while the power supply to the main body frame 4 continues), the CPU number will be transmitted again from the main control board 1310. However, when the frame control board 740 receives the CPU number transmitted again from the main control board 1310 (from the frame control board 740 side, when receiving the second CPU number after power-on), the frame control board The determination as to whether or not the CPU number received by the frame control board 740 matches the CPU number stored in the frame control board 740 is not re-executed. As a result, if the game board 5 is unintentionally removed and the same game board 5 is subsequently reinstalled, the CPU number and base value stored in the frame control board 740 will be cleared. The base value can be counted continuously from the state where the base value is maintained. As another example, when the frame control board 740 receives the CPU number transmitted again from the main control board 1310 (from the frame control board 740 side, when the second CPU number is received after the power is turned on), The determination as to whether or not the CPU number received by the frame control board 740 and the CPU number stored in the frame control board 740 match may be re-executed on the frame control board 740 side. Even when the determination is re-executed in this way, if the re-executed determination result is "match", the CPU number and base value stored in the frame control board 740 are not cleared and are maintained. By doing so, the base value can be counted continuously from the state where the base value is maintained.

In addition, in this example, the number of CPU numbers that can be stored in the RAM of the frame control board 740 is "1", so for example, when the power is turned on, a game board 5 mounted on the main body frame 4 If game board A is removed, then game board B is installed and removed, and game board A is installed again, the CPU number received from the main control board 1310 and the frame control board 740 at the time of installing game board B. It is determined that the CPU number stored in the frame control board 740 does not match, and the base value stored in the frame control board 740 is cleared. In other words, if multiple different CPU numbers are received on the frame control board 740 side while the power is turned on, an obvious abnormality or fraud can be foreseen. Even if the game board A is not installed immediately before, the base value at the time when the game board A was first installed is not maintained.

(When replacing game board A1 with game board A2)
FIG. 150 is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine when the game board A1 is replaced with the game board A2 when the power is cut off. Here, before the power is cut off at timing t1, the game board A1 is attached to the main body frame 4, and after the power is cut off at the timing t1, the game board A1 is replaced with the game board A2, A case where the frame control board 740 determines that the CPU number received from the main control board 1310 and the CPU number stored in the frame control board 740 do not match when the power is turned on at timing t2 will be explained. are doing. In addition, in this example, when replacing the game board 5, a case is explained in which the game board A2 is replaced with a game board A2 that corresponds to the same model series as the game board A1, but if the game board A2 is of a different model series than the game board A1 Even if the game board B is replaced with one corresponding to Based on the judgment, they show the same behavior.

As shown in FIG. 150, before the power is cut off at timing t1, the game board A1 is attached to the main body frame 4, and the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side is started. This is the period in which this is possible. In other words, when the game board A1 is attached to the main body frame 4, when there is a winning start, the variable display of the special symbol can be started, and the variable display of the special symbol stops at the winning symbol. When the player wins, the player can play a normal game in which a jackpot game can be started.

In addition, the detection sensors corresponding to the various winning holes are enabled, and it is possible to pay out (give) prize balls by entering the ball. In addition, when collecting the game ball B that entered the various winning openings, it is detected by the safe ball sensor 606, and when collecting the gaming ball B that entered the out opening without entering the various winning openings. The safe ball sensor 606 and the out ball sensor 605 are set to be effective. As described above in detail, the information detected by these detection sensors is used to calculate the base value displayed on the base monitor.

In addition, as for the production display device 1600, as a normal operation, when the variable display of special symbols is not executed, a standby production (for example, a demonstration production) in a state of waiting for the variable display of special symbols to start. ), and when the variable display of the special symbol is being executed, the peripheral control board 1510 responds to the variable performance (performance based on the variable pattern) based on receiving the variable pattern command. I am trying to perform the actions that I want to do. For example, when the peripheral control board 1510 receives a variable pattern command, the effect display device 1600 executes an effect display (for example, a reach effect) that includes a variable display of decorative symbols.

In addition, it is possible to output predetermined signals to the hall computer from the external terminal board (gaming ball lending device connection terminal board 765), and by receiving these signals at the hall computer, the hall side can also output signals. The behavior of the pachinko machine 1 can be grasped. For example, when there is a starting winning, when the variable display of special symbols stops displaying at the winning symbol and a jackpot game is being executed, when an abnormality is detected, the corresponding signals are output. .

Further, before the timing t1, when the player operates the handle 195, it is possible to shoot the game ball to the game area 5a.

Furthermore, before timing t1, the frame control board 740 receives the CPU number from the main control board 1310 of the game board A1, and stores it in the RAM built in the frame control board 740. The CPU numbers stored in this frame control board 740 are maintained without being cleared by a predetermined backup power source (not shown) even after the power is cut off at timing t1, and are maintained from game board A1 to game board A2. Even when the power is turned on at timing t2, which will be described later, after replacing the flag, it is held without being cleared.

Also, before timing t1, the frame control board 740 calculates the ratio of the number of balls paid out to the number of balls entered, stores the calculation result as a base value in a specific area of the built-in RAM, and It is displayed on a base monitor provided on the control board 740. In other words, before the power is cut off at timing t1, the number of game balls B that entered the ball entrance (input port, out port) (number of entered balls), and the number of game balls B that were paid out as prize balls. It is possible to count the number of balls (number of balls put out) and calculate the ratio of the number of balls put out to the number of balls entered, and this can be reflected in the base value displayed on the base monitor. This base value is maintained without being cleared even after the power is turned off at timing t1, and it is not cleared even when the power is turned on at timing t2, which will be described later, after replacing game board A1 with game board A2. I try to keep it without worrying about it.

Furthermore, before the timing t1, when the frame control board 740 detects the ball entering the winning hole, it is possible to pay out a predetermined number of game balls as prize balls, and the game ball that is paid out as the prize ball The number of balls can be added to the number of balls held by the player or the number of balls held by the player X. The number of balls held and the number of balls X held are maintained without being cleared by a predetermined backup power source (not shown) even after the power is cut off at timing t1, and game board A1 is replaced with game board A2. Even when the power is turned on at timing t2, which will be described later, the data is held without being cleared. Furthermore, after turning on the power at timing t2, the frame control board 740 allows the number of balls held to be calculated by operating the counting button switch 180.

Next, after cutting off the power at timing t1, the game board A1 is replaced with the game board A2. Then, with the game board A2 mounted on the main body frame 4, the power is turned on at timing t2.

First, at timing t2 when the power is turned on, the main control board 1310 transmits the CPU number to the frame control board 740, and the frame control board 740 stores the received CPU number and the frame control board 740. It is determined whether or not the current CPU number and the current CPU number match. Here, since the game board A1 is replaced with the game board A2 before the power is turned on at timing t2, the frame control board 740 uses the CPU number received from the main control board 1310 and the frame control board It is determined that the CPU numbers stored in the frame control board 740 do not match, and the base value stored in the frame control board 740 is cleared based on the determination result.

Here, the timing at which the CPU number is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the frame control board 740 is a predetermined specific timing t2 immediately after power is turned on. That is, when the specific timing t2 immediately after power-on arrives, the frame control board 740 receives the CPU number, and checks whether the CPU number matches the CPU number stored in the frame control board 740. Judging. Further, the specific timing t2 is the same timing regardless of the power-on pattern to be described later. For example, when ram clear is executed by operating the RAM clear switch 741 when the power is turned on with ram clear, If you want to clear the number of balls you have by operating the ball count memory/display clear switch 743 when you turn on the power before starting to clear the ram, operate the ball removal switch 742 before you start clearing the number of balls you have and when you turn on the power. When starting the ball removal mode, a state in which settings can be changed (change permission state) is started by operating the RAM clear switch 741 and the setting key switch when the power is turned on before starting the ball removal mode. In some cases, it is possible to prevent the control from becoming complicated by setting it before the start of the change permission state.

As another example, the timing for transmitting the CPU number from the main control board 1310 to the frame control board 740 may be determined at a predetermined specific timing t2 immediately after power is turned on, or at a timing when the CPU number is transmitted on the frame control board 740 side. For confirmation, the CPU number may be transmitted again from the main control board 1310 to the frame control board 740 after the specific timing t2. Then, when the frame control board 740 receives the CPU number transmitted again from the main control board 1310 (from the frame control board 740 side, when the CPU number is received for the second time after the power is turned on), the frame control board 740 The frame control board 740 may re-execute whether or not the received CPU number matches the CPU number stored in the frame control board 740. Even when the determination is re-executed in this way, if the re-executed determination result is "match", the CPU number and base value stored in the frame control board 740 are not cleared and are maintained. I try to do that. On the other hand, if the re-executed determination result is "inconsistency", an obvious abnormality or fraud can be foreseen, so the CPU number and base value stored in the frame control board 740 are cleared. .

Further, after the power is turned on at timing t2, the game board A2 is attached to the main body frame 4, and the period is set such that the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side can be played. In other words, when the game board A2 is attached to the main body frame 4, when there is a winning start, the variable display of the special symbol can be started, and the variable display of the special symbol stops at the winning symbol. When the player wins, the player can play a normal game in which a jackpot game can be started.

In addition, the detection sensors corresponding to the various winning holes are enabled, and it is possible to pay out (give) prize balls by entering the ball. In addition, when collecting the game ball B that entered the various winning openings, it is detected by the safe ball sensor 606, and when collecting the gaming ball B that entered the out opening without entering the various winning openings. The safe ball sensor 606 and the out ball sensor 605 are configured to be detected by the out ball sensor 605. As described above in detail, the information detected by these detection sensors is used to calculate the base value displayed on the base monitor.

Furthermore, the effect display device 1600 is configured to perform a display corresponding to clearing the base value stored in the frame control board 740 at timing t2. Such a display is executed for a predetermined period of time, and after the predetermined period has elapsed, as a normal operation, for example, when the peripheral control board 1510 receives a variation pattern command, a variation display of a decorative pattern is included. A performance display (for example, a reach performance) is executed. However, until the predetermined period elapses, a display corresponding to the clearing of the base value stored in the frame control board 740, a performance display including a fluctuating display of decorative symbols (for example, a reach performance), etc. The normal operation and the normal operation may be executed at the same time.

Furthermore, at timing t2, the external terminal board outputs a security signal in response to clearing the base value stored in the frame control board 740. This security signal is output when an abnormality is detected, the setting value is changed, or the setting value is being confirmed.The same security signal is output even when the base value is cleared. . In other words, when the base value is cleared, a forced output state is set in which a security signal is forcibly output even though an abnormality is not detected, a setting value is not changed, or a setting value confirmation display is not in progress. Thereby, when the base value is cleared, a security signal is output to the hall computer, and the hall side can understand that the base value has been cleared. In addition, regarding the security signal, the output is stopped when the number of game balls B that entered the ball entry opening (winning opening, out opening) (number of entering balls) reaches 300 balls at timing t3, which will be described later. However, as another example, regardless of whether the number of game balls B that entered the ball entrance (input hole, out hole) reaches 300 balls, timing t3 The output may be stopped at a predetermined time such as before or after timing t3. In addition, if the security signal is stopped before the number of game balls B entering the ball entrance (input opening, out exit) reaches 300 balls, the security signal will not be activated after the stoppage. The security signal may be output again based on other conditions that should be output (detection of an abnormality, etc.), and by doing so, new fraudulent activity (for example, entering the ball It is also possible to improve the accuracy of monitoring (e.g., fraudulent acts of illegally entering balls during the period before the number of game balls B entered (input, out opening) reaches 300 balls). .

In addition, in this example, in addition to the security signal, the external terminal board outputs various signals informing the hall computer of the game status, ball entry into the winning hole, payout of the prize ball, etc., but at timing t3. It is possible to output these signals not only after the output of security signals is stopped at , but also during the period from timing t2 to t3.

Furthermore, after the power is turned on at timing t2, when the player operates the handle 195, it is possible to shoot the game ball into the game area 5a.

Furthermore, at timing t2, the frame control board 740 receives the CPU number from the main control board 1310 of the replaced game board A2, and stores the received CPU number of the game board A2 and the frame control board 740. By determining that the received CPU number of game board A1 does not match, the received CPU number of game board A2 is newly stored in the RAM built in the frame control board 740. There is.

Furthermore, at timing t2, the frame control board 740 receives the CPU number from the main control board 1310 of the replaced game board A2, and stores the received CPU number of the game board A2 and the frame control board 740. The base value stored in the frame control board 740 is cleared by determining that the CPU numbers of the game board A1 and the CPU number of the game board A1 do not match. More specifically, all of the current base value BL, the previous base value B1, the base value B2 from the time before the previous time, and the base value B3 from the time before the previous time, which are stored as base values, are cleared. As a result, after replacing the game board A2, the base value of the game board A1 before the replacement is not transmitted, and the new base value is counted from the state where the base value has been initialized. The base value on the game board A2 can be transmitted correctly.

Further, at timing t2, the frame control board 740 has cleared the base value stored in the frame control board 740, but after timing t2, the frame control board 740 clears at least the ball entrance The number of game balls B that entered the ball entrance (opening, out opening) (number of balls entered) is counted, and the number of game balls B that entered the entrance opening (winning opening, out opening) (number of entering balls) is counted. ) is monitoring whether or not it reaches 300 pitches. Then, from the time when the power is turned on at timing t2 until the number of balls B (entering ball number) that enters the ball entry hole (winning hole, out hole) reaches 300 balls at timing t3, Although we count the number of game balls B that entered the ball entrance (input hole, out hole) (number of entered balls) and the number of game balls B that were paid out as prize balls (number of paid out balls), the number of balls entered It is not included in the calculation of the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of payouts, and is not reflected in the base value displayed on the base monitor. The details of this will be described later.

Then, after the number of balls (entering balls) of game balls B that entered the ball entry opening (winning opening, out opening) at timing t3 reaches 300 balls, the game ball B enters the entrance opening (winning opening, out opening). It is possible to count the number of game balls B that have entered (the number of balls entered) and the number of game balls B that are paid out as prize balls (the number of balls paid out), and to calculate the ratio of the number of balls paid out to the number of balls entered. , it is possible to reflect this in the base value displayed on the base monitor.

Also, during the period from timing t1 to t2, game board A1 is replaced with game board A2, but at timing t2, the number of balls held and the number of balls held are kept without being cleared. . Then, after turning on the power at timing t2, the frame control board 740 makes it possible to pay out a predetermined number of game balls as prize balls when it detects a ball entering the winning hole. It is possible to add the number of game balls held by the player to the number of balls held by the player or the number of balls held by the player X. Furthermore, after turning on the power at timing t2, the frame control board 740 allows the number of balls held to be calculated by operating the counting button switch 180.

(When installing and removing game board A1)
FIG. 151 is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine when the game board A1 is attached and detached when the power is cut off. Here, before the power is cut off at timing t1, the game board A1 is attached to the main body frame 4, and after the power is cut off at timing t1, the game board A1 is temporarily removed for inspection etc. After that, when the game board A1 is installed again and the power is turned on at timing t2, the CPU number received from the main control board 1310 and the CPU number stored in the frame control board 740 are confirmed in the frame control board 740. This section describes the case where it is determined that they match. Note that, in this example, the behavior before the power is cut off at timing t1 is the same as that in FIG. 150, so the explanation is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 151, after the power is cut off at timing t1, the game board A1 is temporarily removed for inspection, etc., and then the game board A1 is installed again. Then, with the game board A1 mounted on the main body frame 4, the power is turned on at timing t2.

First, at timing t2 when the power is turned on, the main control board 1310 transmits the CPU number to the frame control board 740, and the frame control board 740 stores the received CPU number and the frame control board 740. It is determined whether or not the current CPU number and the current CPU number match. Here, since the game board A1 is installed again before the power is turned on at timing t2, the frame control board 740 stores the CPU number received from the main control board 1310 and the frame control board 740. The base value stored in the frame control board 740 is maintained based on the determination result.

Further, after the power is turned on at timing t2, the game board A1 is attached to the main body frame 4, and the period is set such that the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side can be played. In other words, when the game board A1 is attached to the main body frame 4, when there is a winning start, the variable display of the special symbol can be started, and the variable display of the special symbol stops at the winning symbol. When the player wins, the player can play a normal game in which a jackpot game can be started.

In addition, the detection sensors corresponding to the various winning holes are enabled, and it is possible to pay out (give) prize balls by entering the ball. In addition, when collecting the game ball B that entered the various winning openings, it is detected by the safe ball sensor 606, and when collecting the gaming ball B that entered the out opening without entering the various winning openings. The safe ball sensor 606 and the out ball sensor 605 are configured to be detected by the out ball sensor 605. As described above in detail, the information detected by these detection sensors is used to calculate the base value displayed on the base monitor.

Furthermore, the effect display device 1600 is configured to perform a display corresponding to maintaining the base value stored in the frame control board 740 at timing t2. Such a display is executed for a predetermined period of time, and after the predetermined period has elapsed, as a normal operation, for example, when the peripheral control board 1510 receives a variation pattern command, a variation display of a decorative pattern is included. A performance display (for example, a reach performance) is executed. However, until the predetermined period elapses, a display corresponding to the maintenance of the base value stored in the frame control board 740, a performance display including a display of fluctuating decorative symbols (for example, a reach performance), etc. The normal operation and the normal operation may be executed at the same time.

Furthermore, since the base value stored in the frame control board 740 has not been cleared at timing t2, no security signal is output from the external terminal board. After turning on the power at timing t2, it is possible to output various signals that convey the game status, ball entry into the winning hole, payout of the prize ball, etc.

As another example, a security signal may be output from the external terminal board at timing t2 in response to maintaining the base value stored in the frame control board 740. This security signal is output when an abnormality is detected, the setting value is changed, or the setting value is being displayed for confirmation.The same security signal is output even when the base value is maintained. . In other words, when the base value is maintained, the forced output state is set in which the security signal is forcibly output even though no abnormality is detected, the setting value is not changed, or the setting value confirmation display is not in progress. Thereby, when the base value is maintained, a security signal is output to the hall computer, and the hall side can understand that the base value has been maintained. In addition, regarding the security signal, the output is stopped when the number of game balls B that entered the ball entry opening (winning opening, out opening) (number of entering balls) reaches 300 balls at timing t3, which will be described later. Alternatively, the output may be stopped before timing t3.

Further, after the power is turned on at timing t2, when the player operates the handle 195, it is possible to shoot the game ball to the game area 5a.

Furthermore, at timing t2, the frame control board 740 receives the CPU number from the main control board 1310 of the reattached game board A1, and stores the received CPU number of the game board A1 and the frame control board 740. The CPU number of the game board A1 stored in the frame control board 740 is maintained by determining that the CPU number of the game board A1 matches the CPU number of the game board A1 stored in the frame control board 740.

Furthermore, at timing t2, the frame control board 740 receives the CPU number from the main control board 1310 of the reattached game board A1, and stores the received CPU number of the game board A1 and the frame control board 740. The base value stored in the frame control board 740 is maintained by determining that the CPU numbers of the game board A1 and the CPU number of the game board A1 that are currently in use match. More specifically, all of the current base value BL, the previous base value B1, the base value B2 from the time before the previous time, and the base value B3 from the time before the previous time, which are stored as base values, are maintained. As a result, for the game board A1 that has been reattached, the base value continues to be counted from the state where the base value is maintained, and the base value can be transmitted correctly.

Further, at timing t2, the frame control board 740 maintains the base value stored in the frame control board 740, but after timing t2, the frame control board 740 maintains the base value stored in the frame control board 740. The number of game balls B that entered the ball entrance (opening, out opening) (number of balls entered) is counted, and the number of game balls B that entered the entrance opening (winning opening, out opening) (number of entering balls) is counted. ) is monitoring whether or not it reaches 300 pitches. Then, from the time when the power is turned on at timing t2 until the number of balls B (entering ball number) that enters the ball entry hole (winning hole, out hole) reaches 300 balls at timing t3, Although we count the number of game balls B that entered the ball entrance (input hole, out hole) (number of entered balls) and the number of game balls B that were paid out as prize balls (number of paid out balls), the number of balls entered It is not included in the calculation of the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of payouts, and is not reflected in the base value displayed on the base monitor.

Then, after the number of balls (entering ball number) of game balls B that entered the ball entry hole (winning hole, out hole) at timing t3 reaches 300 balls, the game ball B enters the ball entering hole (winning hole, out hole). It is possible to count the number of game balls B that have entered (the number of balls entered) and the number of game balls B that are paid out as prize balls (the number of balls paid out), and to calculate the ratio of the number of balls paid out to the number of balls entered. , it is possible to reflect this in the base value displayed on the base monitor.

In addition, during the period from timing t1 to t2, the game board A1 was removed for inspection, etc., and then the game board A1 was reinstalled, but as of timing t2, the number of balls held and the number of balls X held, I try to keep it without clearing it. Then, after turning on the power at timing t2, the frame control board 740 makes it possible to pay out a predetermined number of game balls as prize balls when it detects a ball entering the winning hole, and pays out a predetermined number of game balls as prize balls. It is possible to add the number of game balls held by the player to the number of balls held by the player or the number of balls held by the player X. Furthermore, after turning on the power at timing t2, the frame control board 740 allows the number of balls held to be calculated by operating the counting button switch 180.

[About the allowable period for replenishment of enclosed balls]
In this example, the number of game balls B that entered the ball entry opening (winning opening, out opening) (the number of balls entered) is calculated from the time when the power is turned on at timing t2 to the ball entry opening (winning entrance) at timing t3. Until the number of game balls B entered (input, out port) reaches 300 balls, the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered will not be calculated and will be displayed on the base monitor. The reason for this is explained below.

As described above in detail, in this example, a large number (for example, 40 to 60) of game balls B are stored in a line in the circulation path R of the main body frame 4, and are circulated inside. That's what I do. Then, in the three seals of the gauge part 620 and the enclosed ball amount detection process, it is possible to check whether the amount of enclosed game balls B (number of balls) is an appropriate amount. Specifically, in the ball storage passage 604 of the circulating ball path unit 600, when the rear end of the game balls B lined up in a row is located between the circulating ball shortage sensor 621 and the circulating ball excess sensor 622. In this case, the circulating ball shortage sensor 621 is ON and the circulating ball excess sensor 622 is OFF, and it is determined that the amount of game balls B is an appropriate amount. In addition, when the rear end of the game balls B lined up in a row in the ball storage passage 604 is located downstream of the circulating ball shortage sensor 621, the circulating ball shortage sensor 621 is OFF and the circulating ball excess sensor 622 is OFF, and it is determined that the amount of game balls B is too small. In addition, if the rear end of the game balls B lined up in a line in the ball storage passage 604 is located beyond the circulating ball shortage sensor 621 and the circulating ball excess sensor 622 and upstream of the circulating ball excess sensor 622, , the circulating ball shortage sensor 621 is ON and the circulating ball excess sensor 622 is ON, and it is determined that the amount of game balls B is excessive.

If there are no game balls B or the amount of game balls B is too small in the circulation route R of the main body frame 4, it is necessary to replenish the game balls B. Game balls B can be replenished through 1008 and the winning openings (general winning opening 2001, first starting opening 2003, second starting opening 2004, big winning opening 2005). Note that when the game board 5 is removed from the main body frame 4, the out ball socket 600a and the safe ball socket 600b are exposed, and the out ball socket 600a and the safe ball socket 600b are exposed. Through this, game balls B can be replenished.

On the other hand, if there is an excessive amount of game balls B in the circulation path R of the main body frame 4 and you want to discharge the game balls B to the outside, pull the ball extraction shutter 615 toward you to open the ball extraction port 613p. Then, by turning on the power with the ball ejecting switch 742 provided on the frame control board 740 turned on, the game ball B can be ejected into the ball receiving tray 720.

By the way, the frame control board 740 controls the number of game balls B that have entered the ball entrance (input hole, out hole) (number of balls entered) and the number of game balls B that are paid out as prize balls (number of paid out balls). However, when the hall manager replenishes game balls B through the out port 1008 or the winning port, if the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered is calculated, it will be reflected in the base value. The base value ends up including ball entry information that is not related to the game.

In this regard, in this example, from the time when the power is turned on at timing t2 in FIG. 150 or FIG. ) until it reaches 300 balls, the number of game balls B that entered the entrance (input opening, out opening) (number of balls entered) is subject to calculation of the ratio of the number of balls paid out to the number of balls entered. Instead, it is not reflected in the base value. In other words, until the number of balls (entering ball number) of the game balls B that entered the ball entry port (winning port, out port) at timing t3 reaches 300 balls, the game ball B enters the ball entry port (winning port, out port) at timing t3 and reaches 300 balls. Even if game balls B are replenished, the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered is not calculated and is not reflected in the base value. As a result, even if game balls B are replenished through the out hole 1008 or the winning hole, it is possible to avoid the base value being calculated by including ball entering information that is not involved in the game, and It is possible to maintain an appropriate base value that does not include information on entering the ball. The above-mentioned "300 balls" are managed by the frame control board 740, and the game balls B replenished from the out port 1008 are detected (counted) by the out ball sensor 605 provided on the main body frame 4 side. Regarding the game balls B replenished from the winning holes such as the general winning hole 2001, the normal winning hole 2002, the first starting hole 2003, the second starting hole 2004, the big winning hole 2005, and the accessory winning hole 2006, the main body frame 4 It is detected (counted) by a safe ball sensor 606 provided on the side.

In the above, as a period that is not reflected in the base value, from the time when the power is turned on at timing t2, the number of game balls B that entered the ball entry opening (winning opening, out opening) at timing t3 (number of entering balls) is However, the number of game balls B (entering ball number) is based on the number of balls that can be stored in the circulation path R in the main body frame 4 (40 to 60 balls). In other words, the number of game balls B can be replenished via the out hole 1008 or the winning hole. As a result, even if game balls B are replenished through the out port 1008 or the winning port from a state where there are no game balls B in the circulation path R in the main body frame 4, the base value will not be involved in those games. It is possible to not include ball entry information.

In addition, in this example, between the out opening 1008 and the winning opening, the opening of the out opening 1008 is larger, making it easier for the game ball B to enter. Also, regarding the period from when the power is turned on at timing t2 to when the number of game balls B entering the ball entrance (winning hole, out hole) reaches 300 balls at timing t3. is a period in which the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side can be progressed, and when the game ball B enters the winning hole, the variable display of the special symbol starts and the payout of the prize ball ( grant) will be carried out. Therefore, when the hall manager replenishes the game balls B, it is preferable to replenish the game balls B through the out port 1008 between the out port 1008 and the winning hole.

In addition, in this example, as a period that is not reflected in the base value, the number of balls B (entering ball The game balls B are replenished through the out port 1008 and the winning port immediately after the hall manager turns on the power. However, as another example, there may be a button on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 that cannot be touched by the player (a button that allows switching between the ON and OFF states, or a key inserted to switch between the ON and OFF states). A replenishment permission switch is provided as a key switch that enables switching between Until the number of pitches (number of balls entered) reaches 300 balls, even if game balls B are replenished through the out port 1008 or the winning port, the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered will not be calculated. , it may not be reflected in the base value. Thereby, even if the power is not turned on, the hall manager can replenish the game balls B through the out port 1008 or the winning port as appropriate.

In addition, in this example, from the time when the power is turned on at timing t2, the number of game balls B that entered the ball entry opening (winning opening, out opening) reaches 300 balls at timing t3. Until then, the base value is not displayed on the base monitor, and a special display is displayed in response to clearing the base value stored in the frame control board 740. At this time, as described above in detail, during the period from timing t2 to t3, for example, when the game ball B is detected by the out ball sensor 605 or the safe ball sensor 606, which of the four 7-segment LEDs on the base monitor Alternatively, "8." may be displayed for a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.5 seconds). As a result, during the period from timing t2 to t3, the hall manager can check from the back side of the pachinko machine 1 whether or not the game ball B is illegally entered into the out opening 1008 or the winning opening by the display on the base monitor. allows for monitoring.

Further, in this example, the game balls B collected in the out port 1008 are detected (counted) by the out ball sensor 605 provided on the main body frame 4 side, and are detected (counted) by the general winning port 2001, the normal winning port 2002, the The game ball B that enters the winning openings such as the starting opening 2003, the second starting opening 2004, the big winning opening 2005, and the accessory winning opening 2006 is detected by the safe ball sensor 606 provided on the main body frame 4 side ( However, these sensors may be provided on the game board 5 side. In addition, a passage is formed so that the game balls B collected at the out port 1008 and the game balls B that have entered the various winning openings merge, and one sensor is provided on the passage. The number of game balls B that have entered the ball entry opening (winning opening, out opening) (number of entering balls) may be counted by detection by two sensors.

In addition, in this example, from the time when the power is turned on at timing t2, the number of game balls B that entered the ball entry slot (winning slot, out slot) reaches 300 balls at timing t3. Until then, the base monitor does not display the base value. In addition to this, for more details, see above: ``Every time the number of game balls B that entered the ball entry opening (winning opening, out opening) reaches 60,000 balls, the number of new balls entering the ball will increase. For example, from the time of calculating the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of newly entered balls, at least the number of game balls B that entered the ball entry opening (winning opening, out opening). Until the (number of balls entered) reaches 1,000 balls, the execution of the display regarding the ratio of the number of payouts to the new number of balls entered may be restricted.'' However, such period , the base value is not displayed on the base monitor, but the number of game balls B that entered the entrance (input opening, out opening) (number of balls entered) is the number of balls paid out relative to the number of balls entered. The percentage is subject to calculation. For this reason, during such a period, if game balls B are replenished via the out port 1008 or the winning port, the base value will include entry ball information that is not related to the game, and the game balls B will be refilled. Not suitable for the period. For this reason, from the time when the ratio of the number of balls paid out to the number of balls newly entered is calculated, at least the number of game balls B that entered the ball entry opening (winning opening, out opening) (number of entering balls) reaches 1000 balls. Until then, a notification may be made to inform the administrator that this is an inappropriate period for replenishing the game balls B. For example, the base monitor may not display the base value, but may display a special display in response to the fact that it is an inappropriate period for replenishing the game balls B.

In the above, if the base value stored in the frame control board 740 is cleared when the power is turned on, calculation of a new base value for every 60,000 balls is started, but when the power is turned on, After that, until the number of game balls B entering the ball entrance (input hole, out hole) reaches 300 balls, the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered is subject to calculation. Instead, the ratio of the number of balls put out to the number of balls entered is subject to calculation after the number of balls exceeds 300. Specifically, from the time the power is turned on until the number of game balls B that have entered the ball entrance (winning hole, out hole) reaches 300 balls, the "entering" The ratio of the number of balls put out to the number of pitches is not calculated, and the base value is not displayed on the base monitor. The ratio of the number of payouts is calculated, and the base value is not displayed on the base monitor. By changing the display mode displayed on the base monitor according to these states, the hall manager can determine which state the hall is in.

Further, in this example, the pachinko machine 1 in which the game balls B circulate within the circulation path R in the main body frame 4 is adopted, but in the case of a pachinko machine in which the game balls B are supplied from outside such as a game island, is from the time when the power is turned on at timing t2 until the number of game balls B that entered the ball entry opening (winning opening, out opening) reaches 300 balls at timing t3. The number of game balls B that entered the ball entrance (input hole, out hole) (number of balls entered) may be subject to calculation of the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered, and may be reflected in the base value. .

[About pitch count memory/display clear switch operation]
Next, the handling of the number of pitches held by operating the pitch count memory/display clear switch 743 will be explained. First, the door frame 3 is provided with a counting button switch 180 that can be operated by the player. As mentioned above in detail, by pressing the counting button switch 180 when there are balls in hand (number of balls in hand > 0), information regarding the number of balls in hand can be sent to the game ball lending device 8 and payment can be made. . The number of balls held is stored in the RAM built into the frame control board 740.

By the way, to check the operation of the pachinko machine 1, for example, when the hall manager inserts the game ball B into the winning hole and checks whether the game progresses normally, the game ball B is paid out (granted). However, since this number of balls is not given to the player, there is no way to calculate the number of balls that the player has by operating the counting button switch 180. , it is desirable to allow the hall manager to clear it. In this regard, in this example, the frame control board 740 is provided with a pitch count memory/display clear switch 743 that can be operated by the hall manager. By operating the pitch count memory/display clear switch 743 when the power is turned on, the number of pitches held stored in the frame control board 740 can be cleared. In other words, it is possible to select whether to maintain or clear the number of pitches stored in the frame control board 740 depending on whether or not the pitch number memory/display clear switch 743 is operated when the power is turned on after the power is turned off. By doing so, it is possible to improve convenience.

FIG. 152 is an enlarged view of the frame control board.

As shown in FIG. 152, the frame control board 740 includes, from the left, a RAM clear switch 741 for erasing information stored in the RAM (RAM clear), a RAM clear switch 741 for erasing information stored in the RAM, and a player's ball held in the RAM, etc. A ball number memory/display clear switch 743 for clearing the number and display on the ball number display section 140 of the door frame 3, and a ball outlet 613p of the circulating ball path unit 600 to circulate the enclosed game balls B. A ball removal switch 742 is provided for use in removing the ball from the ball to the outside (ball receiving tray 720). These switches are provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 and can be operated by the hall manager.

Further, the RAM clear switch 741, pitch count memory/display clear switch 743, and ball removal switch 742 are provided adjacent to each other to the extent that a plurality of switches can be operated with one hand. Further, the power switch 751 is provided on the power supply board 750, and the power switch 751 is also provided with a RAM clear switch 741, a ball count memory/display clear switch 743, and a ball removal switch, which are provided on the frame control board 740. 742. Therefore, when the power is turned on, a desired switch among the RAM clear switch 741, pitch count memory/display clear switch 743, and ball removal switch 742 can be easily operated.

FIG. 153 is a table showing conditions for clearing the number of balls held. In this example, it is possible to change the combination of the RAM clear switch 741, pitch count memory/display clear switch 743, and ball removal switch 742 that are turned ON as the mode of operation when the power is turned on. Eight types of power-on patterns are provided. Among these, when the pitch count memory/display clear switch 743 is turned on when the power is turned on, the number of pitches held is cleared.

Here, the frame control board 740 stores the number of balls held in the RAM, and maintains (backs up) the number of balls held when the power is cut off. In addition, when the frame control board 740 detects a RAM error such as an abnormal value being included in the RAM, it stores it in the RAM as error information A, such as "Out of launch balls", "Out of lifting entrance balls", " When an error other than a RAM error such as "lifting ball gummy error", "too many game balls", or "too many game balls" is detected, it is stored in the RAM as error information B. Of these, error information A is maintained (backed up) when the power is turned off, but error information B is not maintained (backed up). Furthermore, when detecting various errors, the frame control board 740 stores error signals related to error information A and error information B in the RAM. Among these, the error signal related to error information A is maintained (backed up) when the power is turned off, but the error signal related to error information B is not maintained (backed up). The error signal stored in the frame control board 740 is output to the game ball rental device 8 via the game ball rental device connection terminal board 765, and is further output to the game ball rental device 8 via the game ball rental device 8. This is to output to an external device such as a hall computer.

Power-on pattern A is a case where none of the RAM clear switch 741, ball count memory/display clear switch 743, and ball removal switch 742 are turned on when the power is turned on (when the power switch 751 is operated), and the frame control board The number of pitches stored in the 740 is maintained. Further, while error information A and error signals related to error information A are maintained, error information B and error signals related to error information B are cleared. In other words, when a RAM error is detected, the error information A is maintained even after the power is turned off and turned on, so that it is understood that the RAM error continues, and the error signal related to the error information A is sent to the outside. Outputting to the device. In addition, as a mode of notification to the outside, the LEDs mounted on the game board 5 and various decorative boards of the door frame 3 are made to emit blue light from the time the power is turned on, and the speaker is used to say "The number of balls held is maintained. "The number of balls held is maintained." is output, and the effect display device 1600 also displays a message image "The number of balls held is maintained." In this way, the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5 and the door frame 3 emit blue light, which corresponds to the normal power-on without any switches being turned on. are doing.

Power-on pattern B is a case where the RAM clear switch 741 among the RAM clear switch 741, pitch count memory/display clear switch 743, and ball removal switch 742 is turned on when the power is turned on, and is stored in the frame control board 740. He maintains the number of pitches he has. Further, error information A and error signals related to error information A are cleared, and error information B and error signals related to error information B are also cleared. In other words, even if a RAM error is detected, by turning on the RAM clear switch 741 after turning off the power, the RAM error will be resolved and error information A and error signals related to error information A will be cleared. I am planning to do so. In addition, as a form of notification to the outside, when the power is turned on, the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5 and the door frame 3 are made to emit yellow light, and the speaker is emitted with the message "The number of balls held is maintained. "The number of balls held is maintained." is output, and the effect display device 1600 also displays a message image "The number of balls held is maintained." In this way, the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5 and the door frame 3 emit yellow light, which corresponds to the ON operation of the RAM clear switch 741.

Power-on pattern C is a case where the pitch count memory/display clear switch 743 is turned on among the RAM clear switch 741, pitch count memory/display clear switch 743, and ball removal switch 742 when the power is turned on, and the frame control The number of balls stored on the board 740 has been cleared. Further, while error information A and error signals related to error information A are maintained, error information B and error signals related to error information B are cleared. In other words, when a RAM error is detected, the error information A is maintained even after the power is turned off and turned on, so that it is understood that the RAM error continues, and the error signal related to the error information A is sent to the outside. Outputting to the device. In addition, as a notification mode for informing the outside world, from the time the power is turned on, the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5 and door frame 3 are made to emit red light, and the speaker emits the message "The number of balls held has been cleared. .'' is output, and the effect display device 1600 also displays a message image saying ``The number of balls held has been cleared.''. In this way, the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5 and the door frame 3 emit red light, which corresponds to the ON operation of the ball count memory/display clear switch 743. . Note that if the power is cut off in a situation where the number of pitches held is not stored in the frame control board 740, and the number of pitches memory/display clear switch 743 is turned on the next time the power is turned on, the number of pitches held will not be stored. The same processing is performed as when the controller is in use, and this avoids complicating the control.

Power-on pattern D is a case where the RAM clear switch 741, the pitch count memory/display clear switch 743, and the pitch count memory/display clear switch 743 are turned on among the RAM clear switch 741, pitch count memory/display clear switch 743, and ball removal switch 742 when the power is turned on. , and the number of balls stored in the frame control board 740 is cleared. Further, error information A and error signals related to error information A are cleared, and error information B and error signals related to error information B are also cleared. In other words, even if a RAM error is detected, by turning on the RAM clear switch 741 after turning off the power, the RAM error will be resolved and error information A and error signals related to error information A will be cleared. I am planning to do so. In addition, as a form of notification to the outside, from the time the power is turned on, the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5 and door frame 3 flash and emit red and yellow alternately, and the speaker emits the message "You have a ball." The number of balls held has been cleared.'' is outputted, and the effect display device 1600 is also configured to display a message image saying ``The number of balls held has been cleared.'' In this way, the RAM clear switch 741 and ball count memory/display clear switch 743 are turned ON by flashing the LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5 and the door frame 3 alternately in red and yellow. It is possible to notify that the

Power-on pattern E is a case where the ball removal switch 742 is turned on among the RAM clear switch 741, pitch count memory/display clear switch 743, and ball removal switch 742 when the power is turned on, and is stored in the frame control board 740. He maintains the number of pitches he has. Further, while error information A and error signals related to error information A are maintained, error information B and error signals related to error information B are cleared. In other words, when a RAM error is detected, the error information A is maintained even after the power is turned off and turned on, so that it is understood that the RAM error continues, and the error signal related to the error information A is sent to the outside. Outputting to the device. In addition, as a form of notification to the outside, the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5 and door frame 3 are made to emit green light from the time the power is turned on, and the speaker is emitted with the message "The number of balls held is maintained. "The number of balls held is maintained." is output, and the effect display device 1600 also displays a message image "The number of balls held is maintained." In this way, the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5 and the door frame 3 emit green light, which corresponds to the ON operation of the bulb removal switch 742. When the ball extraction switch 742 is turned on, the ball extraction process described above is executed and the enclosed game balls B are transferred from the ball extraction port 613p of the circulating ball path unit 600 to the outside (ball receiving tray 720). It can be removed. Note that the ball removal process performed by turning on the ball removal switch 742 is not executed in a situation where the number of balls held is stored in the frame control board 740, but in a situation where the number of balls held is not stored in the frame control board 740. (The number of balls held is 0). For this reason, the above-mentioned notification "The number of balls held is maintained" will essentially be a notification indicating that the number of balls held is 0 if the ball removal process is executed, and if the ball removal process is not performed, the notification will actually indicate that the number of balls held is 0. This is actually a notification indicating that the number of balls held is 1 or more. In addition, in such a case, as a form of notification to the outside, the speaker outputs a voice saying "Ball removal has been disabled," and the effect display device 1600 also displays "Ball removal has been disabled." You may also display a message image saying,

Power-on pattern F is a case where the RAM clear switch 741, the ball count memory/display clear switch 743, and the ball removal switch 742 are turned on when the ball removal switch 742 and the RAM clear switch 741 are turned on when the power is turned on. The number of balls stored in the control board 740 is maintained. Further, error information A and error signals related to error information A are cleared, and error information B and error signals related to error information B are also cleared. In other words, even if a RAM error is detected, by turning on the RAM clear switch 741 after turning off the power, the RAM error will be resolved and error information A and error signals related to error information A will be cleared. I am planning to do so. In addition, as a form of notification to the outside, from the time the power is turned on, the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5 and the door frame 3 flash and emit alternately in green and yellow, and the speaker emits the message "You have a ball." The number of balls held is maintained.'' is outputted, and the effect display device 1600 also displays a message image saying ``The number of balls held is maintained.'' In this way, the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5 and the door frame 3 flash and emit light alternately in green and yellow to notify that the ball removal switch 742 and the RAM clear switch 741 have been turned on. can do. When the ball removal switch 742 and the RAM clear switch 741 are turned ON, after the RAM clear is executed, the ball removal process described above is executed and the enclosed game ball B is removed from the circulation ball path unit 600. It can be pulled out from the port 613p to the outside (ball receiving tray 720). Note that the ball removal process may be executed at the same time as the ram clearing. As described above, the ball removal process performed by turning on the ball removal switch 742 is not executed in a situation where the number of balls held is stored in the frame control board 740, and the number of balls held is stored in the frame control board 740. This is executed only in situations where no pitches are being played (the number of balls held is 0). Therefore, in the case of power-on pattern F, and under the condition that the number of balls held is stored in the frame control board 740, the ball removal process is not executed (the ON operation of the ball removal switch 742 is disabled), Only RAM clearing by turning on the RAM clear switch 741 will be executed. In addition, in such a case, as a form of notification to the outside, the speaker outputs a voice saying "Ball removal has been disabled," and the effect display device 1600 also displays "Ball removal has been disabled." You may also display a message image saying,

Power-on pattern G is a case where the ball removal switch 742 and the pitch count memory/display clear switch 743 are turned on among the RAM clear switch 741, pitch count memory/display clear switch 743, and ball removal switch 742 when the power is turned on. , and the number of balls stored in the frame control board 740 is cleared. Further, while error information A and error signals related to error information A are maintained, error information B and error signals related to error information B are cleared. In other words, when a RAM error is detected, the error information A is maintained even after the power is turned off and turned on, so that it is understood that the RAM error continues, and the error signal related to the error information A is sent to the outside. Outputting to the device. In addition, as a notification mode for informing the outside world, when the power is turned on, the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5 and the door frame 3 are made to emit red light, and the speaker emits the message "The number of balls held has been cleared. .'' is output, and the effect display device 1600 also displays a message image saying ``The number of balls held has been cleared.''. In this way, the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5 and the door frame 3 emit red light, which corresponds to turning on the ball count memory/display clear switch 743. . When the ball removal switch 742 and pitch count memory/display clear switch 743 are turned on, priority is given to clearing the number of balls held, regardless of whether there are any balls in hand, and the above-mentioned ball removal processing is performed. Not executed. In other words, when the pitch count memory/display clear switch 743 is turned ON, the ON operation of the ball removal switch 742 is invalidated, and the light is not emitted in green, which corresponds to the ON operation of the ball removal switch 742. . In such a case, as a form of notification to the outside, the speaker outputs a voice saying "Ball removal has been disabled", and the effect display device 1600 also displays the message "Ball removal has been disabled." .'' may be displayed.

Power-on pattern H is a case where the RAM clear switch 741, pitch count memory/display clear switch 743, and ball extraction switch 742 are all turned on when the power is turned on, and the number of balls stored in the frame control board 740 is clearing the numbers. Further, error information A and error signals related to error information A are cleared, and error information B and error signals related to error information B are also cleared. In other words, even if a RAM error is detected, by turning on the RAM clear switch 741 after turning off the power, the RAM error will be resolved and error information A and error signals related to error information A will be cleared. I am planning to do so. In addition, as a form of notification to the outside world, from the time the power is turned on, the LEDs mounted on the game board 5 and the various decorative boards of the door frame 3 flash alternately in red and yellow, and the speaker emits the message "You have a ball." The number of balls held has been cleared.'' is outputted, and the effect display device 1600 is also configured to display a message image saying ``The number of balls held has been cleared.'' In this way, the RAM clear switch 741 and ball count memory/display clear switch 743 are turned on by flashing the LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5 and the door frame 3 alternately in red and yellow. It is possible to notify that the When the ball removal switch 742 and pitch count memory/display clear switch 743 are turned on, priority is given to clearing the number of balls held, regardless of whether there are any balls in hand, and the above-mentioned ball removal processing is performed. Not executed. In other words, when the pitch count memory/display clear switch 743 is turned ON, the ON operation of the ball removal switch 742 is invalidated, and the light is not emitted in green, which corresponds to the ON operation of the ball removal switch 742. . In such a case, as a form of notification to the outside, the speaker outputs a voice saying "Ball removal has been disabled", and the effect display device 1600 also displays the message "Ball removal has been disabled." .'' may be displayed.

Regarding the power-on patterns G and H described above, the ball removal switch 742 and the pitch count memory/display clear switch 743 are turned ON, but priority is given to clearing the number of balls held, regardless of whether there are any balls held. However, the above-mentioned ball removal process was not performed. This means that when the ball extraction process is executed and the enclosed game ball B is extracted from the ball extraction port 613p of the circulation ball path unit 600 to the outside (ball receiving tray 720), even if there are balls in hand, the game ball Since it is not possible to play the game by firing B, priority is given to clearing the number of balls held.

In addition, in the above, when the ball removal switch 742 and the pitch count memory/display clear switch 743 are turned on, priority is given to clearing the number of balls held, regardless of whether or not there are balls in hand, and the above-mentioned ball removal processing is performed. Although this is not executed, the ball removal process may be executed. Such another example will be described below as power-on patterns G' and H'.

In the power-on pattern G', when the power is turned on, among the RAM clear switch 741, pitch count memory/display clear switch 743, and ball removal switch 742, the ball removal switch 742 and the pitch count memory/display clear switch 743 are turned on. In this case, the number of balls stored in the frame control board 740 has been cleared. Further, while error information A and error signals related to error information A are maintained, error information B and error signals related to error information B are cleared. In other words, when a RAM error is detected, the error information A is maintained even after the power is turned off and turned on, so that it is understood that the RAM error continues, and the error signal related to the error information A is sent to the outside. Outputting to the device. In addition, as a form of notification to the outside, from the time the power is turned on, the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5 and door frame 3 flash and emit alternately in green and red, and the speaker emits the message "You have a ball." The number of balls held has been cleared.'' is outputted, and the effect display device 1600 is also configured to display a message image saying ``The number of balls held has been cleared.'' In this way, by alternately flashing and emitting the LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5 and the door frame 3 in green and red, the ball removal switch 742 and ball count memory/display clear switch 743 are turned on. It is possible to notify that the When the ball removal switch 742 and pitch count memory/display clear switch 743 are turned on, the ball removal process described above is executed after clearing the number of balls held, regardless of whether there are any balls in hand. The played and enclosed game balls B can be pulled out from the ball outlet 613p of the circulation ball path unit 600 to the outside (ball receiving tray 720).

The power-on pattern H' is a case where the RAM clear switch 741, pitch count memory/display clear switch 743, and ball removal switch 742 are all turned ON when the power is turned on, and the power-on pattern H' is the case where the RAM clear switch 741, pitch count memory/display clear switch 743, and ball removal switch 742 are all turned on. Cleared the pitch count. Further, error information A and error signals related to error information A are cleared, and error information B and error signals related to error information B are also cleared. In other words, even if a RAM error is detected, by turning on the RAM clear switch 741 after turning off the power, the RAM error will be resolved and error information A and error signals related to error information A will be cleared. I am planning to do so. In addition, as a mode of notification to the outside, from the time the power is turned on, the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5 and door frame 3 flash and emit alternately in red, green, and yellow, and the speaker emits "" The number of balls held has been cleared.'' is outputted, and the effect display device 1600 also displays a message image saying ``The number of balls held has been cleared.'' In this way, by flashing the LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5 and the door frame 3 alternately in red and yellow, the RAM clear switch 741, ball count memory/display clear switch 743, and ball removal are activated. It is possible to notify that all of the switches 742 have been turned on. When the ball removal switch 742 and pitch count memory/display clear switch 743 are turned on, the ball removal process described above is executed after clearing the number of balls held, regardless of whether there are any balls in hand. The played and enclosed game balls B can be pulled out from the ball outlet 613p of the circulation ball path unit 600 to the outside (ball receiving tray 720).

Regarding the power-on patterns G' and H' described above, when the ball removal switch 742 and the pitch count memory/display clear switch 743 are turned ON, the number of balls held is cleared regardless of whether there are any balls held. After the execution, the above-mentioned ball removal process is executed. As a result, when the ball extraction process is executed and the enclosed game ball B is extracted from the ball extraction port 613p of the circulating ball path unit 600 to the outside (ball receiving tray 720), there are no balls left, and the game ball B is forcibly removed. It is possible to put the ball B in a state where it cannot be fired.

[About counting button switch operation]
Next, the calculation of the number of balls held by operating the counting button switch 180 will be explained. First, the door frame 3 is provided with a counting button switch 180 that can be operated by the player. Then, by pressing the count button switch 180 in a state where there are balls in hand (number of balls in hand>0), information regarding the number of balls in hand can be sent to the game ball lending device 8 for payment. The number of balls held is stored in the RAM built into the frame control board 740.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the handle touch sensor 162 detects the player's contact with the handle 160, and the handle 160 is rotated when the handle touch sensor 162 detects the player's touch. Then, the detection by the handle rotation sensor 163 is accepted, and the drive of the firing solenoid 553 is controlled with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 160, so that the game ball B can be hit. When the game ball B on the ball launch pad 552b is launched, the launch subtraction sensor 554 detects that the game ball B is launched from the ball launch pad 552b, and the number of balls held by the player is reduced to one. I'm trying to subtract it. However, after the drive of the firing solenoid 553 is controlled and until the firing subtraction sensor 554 detects that the game ball B has been fired from the ball launching pad 552b, the counting button switch 180 is operated and all balls are fired. When the number of balls is settled, the number of balls in possession becomes zero, and when the firing subtraction sensor 554 detects this, the number of balls in possession cannot be subtracted by one, resulting in a problem.

In addition, the game ball B that was not hit into the game area 5a of the game board 5 even though it was fired from the ball launch unit 550 (ball launch pad 552b) is collected as a foul ball by the foul unit 570 and then is a foul ball. It is detected by a sensor 607, and one ball is added to the number of balls held by the player. However, if the counting button switch 180 is operated and the number of balls held is calculated between the time the game ball B is fired from the ball launcher 552b and the time when the foul ball sensor 607 detects it as a foul ball, After the number of balls in possession is calculated, the number of balls in possession becomes 1, and the calculation operation by the player becomes complicated. In this regard, in this example, not only while the handle touch sensor 162 detects contact with the handle 160, but also until a predetermined time (for example, 1200 ms) has elapsed after the contact with the handle 160 is not detected. During this period, and until a predetermined period of time (for example, 1200 ms) has elapsed after the firing subtraction sensor 554 detects that the game ball B has been fired from the ball launching pad 552b, the number of balls held can be adjusted. Counting is prohibited. After the counting prohibition state is released, the control is controlled to a counting permission state in which the number of balls held can be settled. As a result, from the time when the drive of the firing solenoid 553 is controlled until the firing subtraction sensor 554 detects that the game ball B has been fired from the ball launching pad 552b, the counting is prohibited. Therefore, even if the counting button switch 180 is operated, the number of balls held will not be calculated, and problems in counting the number of balls held can be prevented. In addition, in this example, it is set to be longer than "the longest time from the ball launcher 552b until it is detected by the foul ball sensor 607" when a foul ball occurs after the game ball B is launched from the ball launcher 552b. The above-mentioned predetermined time (1200 ms) is set. Therefore, even if a foul ball occurs after the game ball B is launched from the ball launcher 552b, the counting button switch 180 is not operated because the counting is prohibited at the time the foul ball occurs. Even if the number of balls held is not calculated, it is possible to prevent the number of balls held from increasing by one after the number of balls held is settled. With these, it is possible to improve the reliability of calculating the number of balls held.

FIG. 154 is a time chart showing the establishment of conditions for the occurrence of a counting permission state in which the number of balls held can be settled. First, after the firing subtraction sensor 554 detects that the game ball B has been fired from the ball launching pad 552b, the handle touch sensor 162 does not detect any contact with the handle 160, and then a predetermined period of time (for example, 1200 ms) elapses. A case where the condition for generating the counting permission state is satisfied as the time passes will be described with reference to FIG. 154(A).

First, when the handle touch sensor 162 detects a contact (touch) on the handle 160 by the player, it turns on. When the handle 160 is rotated while the handle touch sensor 162 is detecting the player's contact, the detection by the handle rotation sensor 163 is accepted, and the game ball B is The firing solenoid 553 is turned on at timing t1 so as to cause the firing solenoid to be fired. Then, when the firing solenoid 553 is turned ON at timing t1, the game ball B on the ball launching pad 552b is fired, but when the firing subtraction sensor 554 detects that the game ball B is fired from the ball launching pad 552b. , the firing subtraction sensor 554 is turned off at timing t2. At timing t2 when the firing subtraction sensor 554 is turned off, the number of balls held by the player is subtracted by one. Then, when the firing subtraction sensor 554 is turned OFF at timing t2, the game ball B is supplied to the ball launching pad 552b, and the firing subtraction sensor 554 is turned ON again.

Here, the frame control board 740 controls the number of balls held while the handle touch sensor 162 is turned on, and from when the handle touch sensor 162 is turned off until 1200 ms has passed since the handle touch sensor 162 is turned off. The system is controlled to a counting prohibition state that prohibits payment. On the other hand, when the handle touch sensor 162 remains OFF for 1200 ms after being turned OFF, the control is set to a counting permission state in which the number of balls held can be calculated. In other words, if the handle touch sensor 162 is turned ON less than 1200 ms after being turned OFF, the counting prohibition state continues. However, in order to start the counting permission state, the firing subtraction sensor 554 must not turn from ON to OFF (ball launcher The condition is that the firing subtraction sensor 554 does not detect that the game ball B is fired from the ball 552b.

Furthermore, the frame control board 740 controls the ball to be in a count prohibition state in which calculation of the number of balls held is prohibited until 1200 ms has elapsed since the firing subtraction sensor 554 was turned off. On the other hand, when 1200 ms has elapsed since the firing subtraction sensor 554 was turned off, the control is set to a counting permission state in which the number of balls held can be calculated. In other words, if the firing subtraction sensor 554 turns OFF again from ON within 1200 ms after turning OFF, the counting prohibition state continues. However, in order to start the counting permission state, the handle touch sensor 162 must not be turned ON (no contact with the handle 160 must be detected) until 1200 ms has elapsed after the firing subtraction sensor 554 turned OFF. ) is the condition.

Furthermore, if the handle 160 continues to be rotated while the handle touch sensor 162 detects the player's contact, the game balls B will be fired at intervals of 600 ms. In contrast, in this example, during the period from when the handle touch sensor 162 is turned OFF until 1200 ms has elapsed while it remains OFF, or from the time the firing subtraction sensor 554 has been turned OFF until 1200 ms has elapsed, Although the count is controlled to be prohibited, this 1200 ms is set to be longer than 600 ms, which is the firing interval of the game ball B. In other words, during the period from when the handle touch sensor 162 is turned OFF until 1,200 ms has elapsed while it remains OFF, or from the time when the firing subtraction sensor 554 has been turned OFF until 1,200 ms have elapsed, the game ball B cannot be fired. The system monitors whether or not the game ball B has completely stopped, and waits for a judgment that the firing of game balls B has completely stopped before shifting to a counting permission state.

Then, when the firing solenoid 553 is turned ON at timing t3, the game ball B on the ball launching pad 552b is fired, but when the firing subtraction sensor 554 detects that the game ball B is fired from the ball launching pad 552b. , the firing subtraction sensor 554 is turned off at timing t4. At timing t4 when the firing subtraction sensor 554 is turned off, the number of balls held by the player is subtracted by one. Then, when the firing subtraction sensor 554 turns OFF at timing t4, the game ball B is supplied to the ball launching pad 552b, and the firing subtraction sensor 554 turns ON again, but after the firing subtraction sensor 554 turns OFF at timing t4. By stopping contact with the handle 160, the handle touch sensor 162 is turned off at timing t5. Then, after 1200 ms has passed since the handle touch sensor 162 was turned OFF at timing t5, the counting permission flag is turned ON at timing t6, and the control is controlled to a counting permission state in which the number of balls held can be settled. However, after the handle touch sensor 162 turns OFF at timing t5, the firing subtraction sensor 554 does not turn from ON to OFF (the firing subtraction sensor 554 detects that the game ball B is fired from the ball launching pad 552b). (Not done).

In the counting permission state, when a touch to the handle 160 is detected and the handle touch sensor 162 is turned ON, the counting permission flag is turned OFF and control is again made to the counting prohibition state.

In the above, the counting is prohibited during the period from when the firing solenoid 553 is controlled to when the firing subtraction sensor 554 detects that the game ball B has been fired from the ball launching pad 552b. Therefore, even if the counting button switch 180 is operated, the number of balls held will not be calculated, and problems in counting the number of balls held can be prevented. In addition, in this example, it is set to be longer than "the longest time from the ball launcher 552b until it is detected by the foul ball sensor 607" when a foul ball occurs after the game ball B is launched from the ball launcher 552b. 1200 ms is set as the above-mentioned predetermined time. Therefore, even if a foul ball occurs after the game ball B is launched from the ball launcher 552b, the counting button switch 180 is not operated because the counting is prohibited at the time the foul ball occurs. Even if the number of balls held is not calculated, it is possible to prevent the number of balls held from increasing by one after the number of balls held is settled.

Furthermore, as described above, the handle 160 is provided with a firing stop switch 161 that stops driving the firing solenoid 553 when pressed by the player. Even if the firing stop switch 161 is operated during detection, the ON detection of the handle touch sensor 162 is continued, and is treated as a period in which the handle touch sensor 162 is ON. Thereby, it is possible to control the above-mentioned counting prohibition state including the period during which the firing stop switch 161 is operated during a series of firing operations, and it is possible to achieve the same effect as described above. Furthermore, if only the firing stop switch 161 is operated while the handle touch sensor 162 does not detect any contact by the player, the player does not intend to fire (unintentionally touching the firing stop switch 161). This is treated as a period in which the handle touch sensor 162 is turned off. As a result, it is possible to control the above-mentioned counting permission state including the period when only the firing stop switch 161 is operated without a series of firing operations, and it is possible to achieve the same effect as described above. As another example, if the firing stop switch 161 is operated while the handle touch sensor 162 is detecting the player's contact, the handle touch sensor 162 is turned from ON to OFF, and the handle touch sensor 162 is turned OFF. It may also be processed as a period during which As a result, even if you wish to temporarily calculate the number of balls you have while continuing to operate the handle 160 (without changing the amount of rotation of the handle 160), it is possible to shift to the counting permission state described above. It is possible to improve convenience in accordance with the needs of players.

In this example, the number of balls held is not calculated while the handle touch sensor 162 is turned on and during the period from when the handle touch sensor 162 is turned off until 1200 ms has passed since the handle touch sensor 162 was turned off. Counting is prohibited, but while the handle rotation sensor 163, which detects rotation of the handle 160 instead of the handle touch sensor 162, is ON, and when the handle rotation sensor 163 is OFF. The measurement may be prohibited during the period from 1200 ms remaining OFF. Even in such a case, similar effects can be achieved.

Next, before the firing subtraction sensor 554 detects that the game ball B has been fired from the ball launching pad 552b, the handle touch sensor 162 does not detect the contact with the handle 160, and the firing subtraction sensor 554 detects A case where the condition for generating the counting permission state is satisfied after a predetermined time (for example, 1200 ms) has passed will be described with reference to FIG. 154(B).

First, when the handle touch sensor 162 detects a contact (touch) on the handle 160 by the player, it turns on. When the handle 160 is rotated while the handle touch sensor 162 is detecting the player's contact, the detection by the handle rotation sensor 163 is accepted, and the game ball B is The firing solenoid 553 is turned on at timing t1 so as to cause the firing solenoid to be fired. Then, when the firing solenoid 553 is turned ON at timing t1, the game ball B on the ball launching pad 552b is fired, but when the firing subtraction sensor 554 detects that the game ball B is fired from the ball launching pad 552b. , the firing subtraction sensor 554 is turned off at timing t3. At timing t3 when the firing subtraction sensor 554 is turned off, the number of balls held by the player is subtracted by one.

Then, by stopping contact with the handle 160 from when the firing solenoid 553 is turned ON at timing t1 until when the firing subtraction sensor 554 is turned OFF at timing t3, the handle touch sensor 162 is turned OFF at timing t2. become. Then, after the firing subtraction sensor 554 turns OFF at timing t3, when 1200 ms passes without the firing subtraction sensor 554 turning from ON to OFF again, the counting permission flag is turned ON at timing t4, and the number of balls held can be calculated. It is controlled to allow counting. However, after the firing subtraction sensor 554 is turned off at timing t3, the handle touch sensor 162 is not turned on (it does not detect contact with the handle 160).

Note that the handle touch sensor 162 is not turned on after the firing subtraction sensor 554 is turned off at timing t3, but if the handle touch sensor 162 is turned on before 1200 ms elapses at timing t4, It is assumed that the 1200 ms counting is completed. At this time, at timing t4, the counting permission state is not controlled. However, if the contact with the handle 160 is less than 4 ms and the ON state of the handle touch sensor 162 is less than 4 ms, counting is continued for 1200 ms, and control is made to enable counting at timing t4. In addition, even if the handle touch sensor 162 is turned ON by detecting contact with the handle 160 in the counting permission state, if the ON state of the handle touch sensor 162 is less than 4 ms, the counting permission flag is turned ON. It remains in the counting permission state. In this way, there is a possibility that the player unintentionally touched the handle 160 when the player touched the handle 160 for a short period of time, and such short-term contact is excluded.

In this example, the counting prohibition state that prohibits the calculation of the number of balls held is controlled until 1200 ms elapses after the firing subtraction sensor 554 is turned OFF, but when the firing subtraction sensor 554 is turned OFF After that, the game ball B is supplied to the ball launch pad 552b, and the measurement prohibition state may be controlled until 1200 ms elapses after the launch subtraction sensor 554 is turned ON again. Even in such a case, similar effects can be achieved.

Next, regarding the number of balls held, in the counting permission state, when there are balls held (number of balls held>0), by pressing the counting button switch 180, information regarding the number of balls held is transmitted to the game ball lending device 8. You can send the payment to . At this time, the number of balls to be calculated differs depending on whether the counting button switch 180 is operated by a short press or a long press. Specifically, if the count button switch 180 is pressed for less than 500 ms, it is determined that the press is short, and control is performed so that one ball out of the number of balls held is counted. On the other hand, if the count button switch 180 is pressed for 500 ms or more, it is determined that the count button switch 180 has been pressed for a long time, and control is performed so that 250 balls out of the number of balls held are counted. However, if the number of balls held is less than 250 and the button is pressed for 500 ms or more, the control is such that all balls held are settled. Thereby, when calculating the number of balls held, the calculation can be completed as quickly as possible, and convenience can be improved.

FIG. 155 is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine when the count button switch is operated. First, the case where there is a short press of the counting button switch 180 will be described with reference to FIG. 155(A).

First, when the counting button switch 180 is operated in the counting permission state, the counting button switch 180 is turned on. If the pressing time of the counting button switch 180 is less than 500 ms, it is determined that it is a short press, and after the pressing of the counting button switch 180 is stopped, control is performed to settle one ball out of the number of balls held. are doing. Further, the game ball B cannot be fired by operating the handle 160 from the time the counting button switch 180 is started to be pressed until the number of balls held is completed for one. In this way, by disabling the firing of the game ball B while calculating the number of balls held, the firing subtraction sensor 554 detects that the game ball B is fired from the ball launcher 552b, and the number of balls held is Since there is no need to subtract the number of balls, it is possible to prevent a problem from occurring in counting the number of balls held.

In addition, if the counting button switch 180 is pressed twice in a row for less than 500 ms, two out of the number of balls will be settled after the first press is stopped. is controlled. In this case, the second press is made after the first press is stopped, but before the calculation of one ball is completed, and the process continues from the first calculation. , I am trying to make a second payment. Further, from the time when the count button switch 180 is pressed for the first time until the total number of balls (two balls) has been settled, it is impossible to fire the game balls B by operating the handle 160.

Next, a case where the count button switch 180 is pressed for a long time will be described with reference to FIG. 155(B).

First, when the counting button switch 180 is operated in the counting permission state, the counting button switch 180 is turned on. If the count button switch 180 is pressed for 500 ms or more, it is determined that the count button switch 180 has been pressed for a long time, and control is performed so that 250 balls out of the number of balls held are settled at that time. Further, the game ball B cannot be fired by operating the handle 160 from the time the count button switch 180 is started to be pressed until the total number of balls (250 balls) has been settled. In this way, by disabling the firing of the game ball B while calculating the number of balls held, the firing subtraction sensor 554 detects that the game ball B is fired from the ball launcher 552b, and the number of balls held is Since there is no need to subtract the number of balls, it is possible to prevent a problem from occurring in counting the number of balls held.

In addition, if the count button switch 180 is pressed for 500ms or more, it is determined that the count button switch 180 has been pressed for a long time at the time of 500ms, and control is performed to calculate 250 balls out of the number of balls held at that time, and then Every time the button is pressed continuously for 300 ms, it is determined that the button has been pressed for a long time, and 250 payments are made one after another, starting from the first 250 payments. In this way, by setting the second and subsequent long-press determinations to 300 ms, which is shorter than the first long-press determination, it is possible to settle the balance so that the number of balls in possession approaches zero in a short time. In addition, the game ball B cannot be fired by operating the handle 160 during the period from when the count button switch 180 is pressed until the total number of balls (250 balls) is completed for the number of times the count button switch 180 is pressed and held. ing.

In addition, in this example, the firing of game balls B by operating the handle 160 is disabled from the time when the counting button switch 180 is started to be pressed until the calculation of the number of balls held corresponding to the time when the button switch 180 is pressed is completed. However, the firing of game balls B by operating the handle 160 may be disabled only during the period from when the calculation of the number of balls held corresponding to the pressing time of the counting button switch 180 is started until it is completed. Even in such a case, similar effects can be achieved.

Further, if the pressing time of the counting button switch 180 is less than 500 ms, it is determined that the pressing is short, and after the pressing of the counting button switch 180 is stopped, a sound "beep" is output from the speaker. Furthermore, if the count button switch 180 is pressed for 500 ms or more, it is determined that the count button switch 180 has been pressed for a long time, and a voice saying "Calling out balls held" is output from the speaker. Then, if it is determined that the button has been pressed for a long time after 500ms, and the button is continued to be pressed, the speaker will repeatedly say "Calling out the balls you have" until the calculation of the number of balls you have is completed. ing. In this way, by changing the output sound from the speaker depending on whether the count button switch 180 is pressed for a short time or for a long time, the number of balls held can be calculated by one ball or 250 balls. You can clearly understand what is going on.

Further, although details will be described later, in this example, even when the game board 5 is removed from the main body frame 4, it is possible to calculate the number of balls held by operating the counting button switch 180. On the other hand, the sound output when the counting button switch 180 is pressed briefly or long is controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the operation information transmitted from the frame control board 740 to the peripheral control board 1510. be exposed. Therefore, when the game board 5 is removed from the main body frame 4, the peripheral control board 1510 is not activated, so it is impossible to output sound when the count button switch 180 is pressed for a short time or long. It ends up. Therefore, in this example, when the counting button switch 180 is pressed for a short time or for a long time, a notification is also given on the frame control board 740 side, in addition to the notification on the peripheral control board 1510 side.

That is, the counting button switch 180 of this example has a built-in LED, and the frame control board 740 controls the LED of the counting button switch 180 to emit light. The color of the emitted light from the counting button switch 180 indicates whether or not the number of balls held can be calculated and the status of the calculation. Specifically, the counting button switch 180 emits blue light when the number of balls held is zero, and it emits red light when the counting button switch 180 is turned on when there are balls held (number of balls held > 0). It emits light, and when there are balls in hand (number of balls held>0) and the counting button switch 180 is not turned on, the light is emitted in green. Thereby, it is possible to intuitively grasp whether or not there is a number of balls that can be settled, and whether or not the number of balls in possession is being settled. In addition, when there are balls in hand (number of balls > 0) and the counting button switch 180 is not turned on, when the counting button switch 180 is pressed briefly, a single green light is emitted (for example, it lights up and turns off in 1 second). When the counting button switch 180 is pressed for a long time, it emits green light multiple times (for example, a light emitting mode in which the light is repeatedly turned on and off for 1 second). Therefore, even when the game board 5 is removed from the main body frame 4, it is possible to clearly understand whether the number of balls held is 1 or 250 using the counting button switch 180 itself. can do. As described in detail above, even if you turn on the counting button switch 180 while counting is prohibited, the number of balls you have will not be calculated. It is determined that the count button switch 180 is turned on in red.

The light emitted from the counting button switch 180 described above is configured so that the color of the emitted light is reflected by surrounding members. Specifically, the standing wall behind the count button switch 180 is made of white so that the emitted light color is reflected. This allows the hall manager to check the color of the emitted light from the counting button switch 180 even from a distance, and to monitor whether or not there is any fraud regarding the payment of balls. In this example, the counting button switch 180 has a built-in LED, but the LED is provided near the counting button switch 180, and the emitted color of the LED indicates whether or not the number of balls held can be calculated. You can.

Further, the door frame 3 is provided with a ball count display section 140 that displays the number of balls held. When calculating the number of balls held by pressing the count button switch 180, the number of balls displayed on the number display section 140 is subtracted from the number of balls held. The ball count display section 140 is composed of a 6-digit, 7-segment LED. In other words, the ball count display section 140 can display up to six digits as the number of balls held.

In addition, when the ball extraction switch 742 is turned on when the power is turned on, the ball extraction process described above is executed and the enclosed game balls B are removed from the ball extraction port 613p of the circulation ball path unit 600 to the outside (ball receiving tray). 720), but during the ball removal process, the number of balls held is not displayed on the number of balls display section 140, but a special display of "-" is executed. During the ball extraction process, although the firing of game balls B is not stopped, the game is stopped and, for example, even if there is a starting prize, no game balls will be paid out, and the lottery and fluctuations related to special symbols will not be paid out. The game is in a state where normal games cannot be played, such as no display. Furthermore, when the ball removal switch 742 is turned ON and the power is turned on, the ball removal process is started on the condition that the number of balls held is zero. For this reason, during the ball removal process, the number of balls held is zero, and the problem caused by not displaying the number of balls held on the number of balls display section 140 does not occur.

In addition, when an error occurs, the ball possession display unit 140 continues to display the number of balls held, but does not display an error. This allows you to check the number of balls you have even if an error is occurring. However, if an error that stops the game occurs, the number of balls held may not be displayed on the number of balls display section 140, but an error display may be executed. When such an error occurs, the game is not only stopped, but also the ON operation of the counting button switch 180 is disabled, making it impossible to calculate the number of balls held. In other words, if an error that stops the game occurs, the ON operation of the counting button switch 180 is invalid, so there is no need to check the number of balls you have, and the number of balls you have is displayed on the number of balls display section 140. This prevents any harm from not doing so.

Specifically, if a magnetic sensor, radio wave sensor, vibration sensor, etc. detects fraudulent activity, or if a RAM error such as an abnormal value is detected in RAM is detected, an error that stops the game will occur. It is determined that this is the case, and an error display is executed on the ball count display section 140, and the ON operation of the counting button switch 180 is disabled. However, if a fraudulent act is detected, the error display section 140 does not display an error and the ON operation of the counting button switch 180 is enabled, whereas if a RAM error is detected, An error display may be displayed on the pitch count display section 140, and the ON operation of the counting button switch 180 may be invalidated. Thereby, when an error display is executed on the number of balls display section 140, it is possible to understand that a RAM error has been detected. In addition, when a RAM error is detected, the error display is not displayed on the number of balls held display section 140, and the ON operation of the counting button switch 180 is enabled. An error display may be displayed on the pitch count display section 140, and the ON operation of the counting button switch 180 may be invalidated. Thereby, when a fraudulent act is detected, it is possible to prevent the number of balls that may have been awarded due to the fraudulent act from being settled.

Furthermore, when the counting button switch 180 is turned on, the frame control board 740 sends information regarding the number of balls held to the game ball lending device 8 for payment, but the connection with the game ball lending device 8 is not possible. When not connected, the ON operation of the count button switch 180 is disabled. When such a disconnection error with the game ball lending device 8 occurs, error information is transmitted from the frame control board 740 to the main control board 1310, and the game is stopped. Furthermore, when the frame control board 740 is not connected to the main control board 1310, the ON operation of the counting button switch 180 is disabled. If such a disconnection error with the main control board 1310 occurs, the game is stopped and an error display is performed on the base monitor. Further, the base monitor is composed of four 7-segment LEDs, and when a disconnection error with the main control board 1310 occurs, the base value being displayed is switched to an error display. Note that the number of 7-segment LEDs in the base monitor may be increased so that when a disconnection error with the main control board 1310 occurs, the base value being displayed and the error display can be displayed at the same time. For example, when increasing the number of 7-segment LEDs on the base monitor, it is possible to use the same number of 6-digit 7-segment LEDs as the number of balls display section 140, so that the frame control board 740 can be used as the base monitor. It is now possible to perform similar displays (for example, display of the number of balls held, error display, display indicating ball removal processing, etc.) between the ball count display section 140 and the number of balls held, and the front side of the pachinko machine 1. It is now possible to check the same display from both the front and rear sides, and can be used as a replacement in the event of a failure in either.

[About the operation of the ball release switch]
Next, the ejection of the game ball B to the outside by operating the ball removal switch 742 will be explained. First, the ball removal switch 742 is provided on the frame control board 740. If the ball removal switch 742 is turned on when the power is turned on, the above-mentioned ball removal process is executed, but when the ball removal switch 742 is turned on and the power is turned on, the number of balls held is zero. The ball removal process is started on certain conditions. During this ball extraction process, the game ball B enclosed in the circulation path R of the main body frame 4 can be extracted from the ball extraction port 613p of the circulation ball path unit 600 to the outside (ball receiving tray 720). Also, during the ball extraction process, although the firing of game balls B is not stopped, the game is stopped and, for example, even if there is a starting prize, no game balls are paid out, and the lottery and fluctuations related to special symbols are not paid out. The game is in a state where normal games cannot be played, such as no display.

Specifically, during the ball removal process, the game is controlled to a special mode in which the game ball B can be fired even though the number of balls held is zero. In such a special mode, it is possible to fire the game ball B from above the ball launch pad 552b, and the game ball B launched from the ball launch pad 552b can be fouled by opening the door frame 3. Since the shutter 571 is in the closed position, the foul ball is sent to the circulating ball path unit 600 as a foul ball without being ejected from the foul unit 570 to the outside. Thereby, even though the number of balls held is zero, it is possible to make a state in which there is no game ball B on the ball launch pad 552b. In addition, although it is possible to fire the game ball B during the ball removal process, since the game is stopped, the ball removal work of the hall manager is not obstructed during the ball removal process, which increases convenience. It is possible to improve the

FIG. 156 is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine when it shifts to the ball extraction state when the power is turned on. Here, a case will be described in which, after the power is cut off at timing t1, the bulb removal switch 742 is turned on without turning on the RAM clear switch 743 when the power is turned on at timing t2, and the state shifts to the ball removal state. .

Furthermore, the frame control board 740 is capable of detecting errors in the circulation system and errors other than circulation. Errors in the circulation system include lifting-related errors such as "lifting ball gummy error", circulation system errors A including door opening errors, "out of lifting entrance ball", "out of launching ball", and " This makes it possible to detect errors B in the circulation system, including errors related to the amount of enclosed balls, such as "too many game balls" and "too many game balls." Further, as errors other than circulation, errors C other than circulation including a communication error with the main control board 1310 can be detected.

As shown in FIG. 156, before the power is cut off at timing t1, there is a period in which the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side can be played. In other words, in a normal state, when there is a starting prize, the variable display of the special symbol can be started, and when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped and displayed at the winning symbol, the jackpot game can be started. You can play the normal game.

In addition, the detection sensors corresponding to the various winning holes are enabled, and it is possible to start the variable display of special symbols and pay out (give) prize balls by entering the ball.

Furthermore, before timing t1, the frame control board 740 makes it possible to determine whether or not errors A and B in the circulation system and error C other than circulation are detected. If it is determined that errors A and B in the circulation system and errors C other than circulation have been detected, an abnormality notification is executed using the effect display device 1600, lamps A and B, speakers, etc. I have to. Among these, if it is determined that error A in the circulation system has been detected, when the power is turned off at timing t1 or when the power is turned on at timing t2, which will be described later, the error A in the circulation system will be detected. I'm trying to clear the information. On the other hand, if it is determined that a circulation system error B or a non-circulation error C is detected, the determination result is stored in the RAM of the frame control board 740, and after the power is turned off at timing t1. However, when the power is turned on at timing t2, which will be described later, whether to hold or clear the RAM clear switch 743 is determined depending on whether or not the RAM clear switch 743 is operated. There is.

In addition, the effect display device 1600, lamp A (LED mounted on various decorative boards of the frame decoration member), lamp B (LED mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5), lamp C (function display unit 1400), lamp B (LED mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5), The normal operation of the LED (LED mounted on the light emitting board), the speaker, and the movable body is performed before timing t1. Note that while the lamp C is controlled by the main control board 1310, the other members are controlled by the peripheral control board 1510. Here, regarding the lamp C, a plurality of LEDs in the function display unit 1400 are made to light up or blink as the game progresses. On the other hand, for the members whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510, when the variable display of the special symbol is not executed, a standby effect (for example, a demonstration When the variable display of the special symbol is being executed, the peripheral control board 1510 executes the operation corresponding to the variable display (effect based on the variable pattern) based on the reception of the variable pattern command. The corresponding action is executed. For example, when the peripheral control board 1510 receives a variable pattern command, the effect display device 1600 executes an effect display (for example, a reach effect) including a variable display of decorative symbols, and the effect display device 1600 executes an effect display (for example, a reach effect), etc. The LED lights up or flashes in conjunction with the performance display executed by the performance display device 1600, and the speaker outputs audio in conjunction with the performance display performed by the performance display device 1600. A predetermined operation is performed in conjunction with the effect display executed by the effect display device 1600.

Furthermore, it is possible to output predetermined signals to the hall computer from the external terminal board, and by receiving these signals at the hall computer, the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 can be grasped on the hall side as well. ing. For example, when there is a starting winning, when the variable display of special symbols stops displaying at the winning symbol and a jackpot game is being executed, when an abnormality is detected, the corresponding signals are output. .

Further, before the timing t1, when the player operates the handle 195, it is possible to shoot the game ball to the game area 5a.

In addition, the base monitor shows the number of game balls B that entered the ball entrance (input hole, out hole) (number of balls entered), and the number of game balls B that were paid out as prize balls (number of paid out balls). is counted, the ratio of the number of balls put out to the number of balls entered is calculated, and the calculation result is displayed as a base value, but such calculations can be performed before timing t1. This base value is held without being cleared even after the power is turned off at timing t1, and is held without being cleared even when the power is turned on at timing t2, which will be described later.

Furthermore, before the timing t1, when the frame control board 740 detects the ball entering the winning hole, it is possible to pay out a predetermined number of game balls as prize balls, and the game ball that is paid out as the prize ball It is possible to add the number of balls to the player's number of balls or the number of balls X that the player has. Regarding the number of balls held and the number of balls held I have to. Furthermore, before timing t1, the frame control board 740 allows the number of balls held to be calculated by operating the counting button switch 180.

Next, after the power is cut off at timing t1, the ball removal switch 742 is turned on at timing t2 when the power is turned on, thereby turning on the ball removal flag and transitioning to the ball removal state. Here, at timing t2 when the ball removal switch 742 is turned on and the power is turned on, it is determined whether or not the number of balls held is zero, and only when the number of balls held is zero, the ball removal state is entered. It is transitioning. In the ball extraction state, the above-mentioned ball extraction process is executed, and the game ball B enclosed in the circulation path R of the main body frame 4 is transferred from the ball extraction port 613p of the circulation ball path unit 600 to the outside (ball receiving tray). 720). Furthermore, at timing t2, the RAM clear switch 743 is not turned on, and the RAM clear flag is turned off.

First, after transitioning to the ball extraction state at timing t2, there is a game restriction period in which the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side cannot be progressed, although the game ball B can be fired. That is, after the power is cut off at timing t1, the variable display of the special symbols and the jackpot game are not executed, and even if there is a starting prize, the variable display of the special symbols is not newly started.

In addition, the detection sensors corresponding to the various winning holes are disabled, making it impossible to start the variable display of special symbols or pay out (give) prize balls due to ball entry. As a result, in the ball-less state, the game is stopped and, for example, even if there is a starting prize, there is no payout of game balls, no lottery or variable display regarding special symbols, etc., and the normal game is continued. It is possible to prevent the number of balls from increasing or decreasing from occurring.

Further, after transitioning to the state without a bulb at timing t2, the frame control board 740 determines whether or not errors A and B in the circulation system and error C other than circulation are detected, and detects error A in the circulation system. This makes it possible to determine whether or not it has been detected. On the other hand, it is disabled to determine whether or not a circulation system error B or a non-circulation error C is detected. Here, among errors A in the circulation system, lifting-related errors such as "lifting ball gag error" are related to the operation of the lifting motor 664, although the lifting motor 664 operates when the ball is pulled out. If the lifting motor 664 operates while the above abnormality is still occurring, there is a possibility that the lifting motor 664 etc. will be damaged. By making such a determination possible, damage to the lifting motor 664 etc. can be prevented. can do. Furthermore, among the circulation system errors A, regarding the door opening error, there is a possibility that the door frame 3 may be opened when a ball is pulled out and tampering with the game board 5, etc. may be carried out, and such a determination can be made. By doing so, fraud can be prevented. In addition, as circulation system error B, errors related to the amount of enclosed balls, such as "out of balls at the lifting entrance", "out of balls at the launch ball", "too few game balls", and "too many game balls", can be detected when a ball is removed. When game balls B are pulled out to the outside (ball receiving tray 720), the number of enclosed game balls B decreases, and by disabling such determination, game balls B can be pulled out smoothly. . In addition, as for error C other than circulation, regarding communication errors with the main control board 1310, by disabling such determination, even if the connection between the game board 5 and the main control board 1310 is disconnected. , making it possible for a ball-out condition to occur.

If it is determined that an error A in the circulation system has been detected, an abnormality notification is performed using the effect display device 1600, lamps A and B, speakers, etc. Here, if it is determined that a circulatory system error A has been detected, the circulatory system error will occur when the power is turned off at timing t3, which will be described later, or when the power is turned on at timing t4, which will be described later. Information regarding A has been cleared.

Note that if it is determined that error A in the circulatory system has been detected before timing t1, the circulatory system is The information regarding error A is cleared. However, if the circulatory system error A has not been resolved at timing t2, it is determined that the circulatory system error A has been detected again, and an abnormality notification is executed. Further, if it is determined that a circulation system error B or a non-circulation error C is detected before timing t1, the determination result is stored in the RAM of the frame control board 740, and the timing If the RAM clear switch 743 is not operated when the power is turned on at t2, the information regarding the circulation system error B and the non-circulation error C is held without being cleared. However, in the state where the ball is removed, abnormality notification is not performed based on the storage of such determination results.

In addition, the effect display device 1600, lamp A (LED mounted on various decorative boards of the frame decoration member), lamp B (LED mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5), lamp C (function display unit 1400), lamp B (LED mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5), Regarding the LED (LED mounted on the light emitting board), the speaker, and the movable body, the operation for the bulb removal state is performed at timing t2. Specifically, the effect display device 1600 displays a message "A ball is being removed" as the ball is being removed. Furthermore, the lamps A and B are designed to emit green light for the bulb removal state (see power-on pattern F in FIG. 152). Regarding the lamp C, all LEDs in the function display unit 1400 are turned on, including the symbol LED that indicates the variation display of the special symbol and the variation result, and the status LED that indicates the gaming state. Further, the speaker outputs a sound saying "The ball is being removed" as a sound for the ball being removed.

In the above, the effect display device 1600, lamp A (LED mounted on various decorative boards of the frame decoration member), lamp B (LED mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5), and speakers are not bulb-free. During the state operation, the volume and light amount are kept constant at maximum output, so that even if the setting adjustment button 204 is operated, the volume and light amount do not change. In this way, by setting the volume and light intensity to the maximum output, it becomes easier to notice the occurrence of a bulb-out condition, and it is possible to prevent an illegal attempt to cause a bulb-out condition. Further, when the setting adjustment button 204 is operated, it is possible to accept the operation and adjust the volume and light intensity internally, but the operation is not reflected in the volume and light intensity that are being executed. Such internally adjusted volume and light intensity will be reflected in the running volume and light intensity based on the internally adjusted volume and light intensity when normal operation is restored. It happens. Incidentally, when the setting adjustment button 204 is operated during the operation for the ball removal state, the operation itself may not be accepted. Further, the effect display device 1600 may be configured such that the amount of light changes when the setting adjustment button 204 is operated.

Moreover, after transitioning to the ball extraction state at timing t2, the movable body is prevented from operating. Note that when the power is normally turned on, the movable body performs an initial operation to check whether the movable body operates normally and to adjust it to the initial position. Since the movable body does not operate during this time, the movable body does not perform the initial movement when transitioning to the ball extraction state. In other words, if the movable body is not at the initial position when transitioning to the ball removal state, it remains stopped at that position during the ball removal state.

Further, after transitioning to the bulb removal state at timing t2, a forced output state is set in which a security signal is forcibly output from the external terminal board. Thereby, when the ball is out, a security signal is output to the hole computer, and the hole side can know that the ball is out.

Further, after shifting to the ball extraction state at timing t2, when the hall manager operates the handle 195, the game ball B can be launched. In addition, in the ball release state, it is possible to launch the game ball B, but with the door frame 3 open, the foul shutter 571 is in the closed position, and the game ball B can be launched from above the ball launcher 552b. When the ball is fired, the ball is sent to the circulating ball path unit 600 as a foul ball without being ejected from the foul unit 570 to the outside. Thereby, it is possible to create a state in which there is no game ball B on the ball launch pad 552b. In addition, in this example, in the ball extraction state, in order to make the game ball B disappear on the ball launcher 552b, the hall manager needs to operate the handle 195 to fire the game ball B. The game ball B may be automatically launched without the operation 195.

In addition, after transitioning to the ball withdrawal state at timing t2, the number of game balls B that entered the ball entrance (input hole, out hole) (number of entered balls) and the number of game balls B that were paid out as prize balls. The number of pitches (number of balls put out) is not counted. In other words, calculations regarding the ratio of the number of balls paid out to the number of balls entered are made impossible, and are not reflected in the base value. However, after transitioning to the ball removal state at timing t2, the base value before timing t1 is held without being cleared. Further, while the ball is being removed, the base value is not displayed on the base monitor, and a special display of "-" is performed in response to the ball being removed.

In addition, after transitioning to the ball withdrawal state at timing t2, since the ball entering the winning hole is not detected, the predetermined number of game balls are not paid out as prize balls, and the number of balls held by the player and the number of balls held by the player are There is no addition to the number X. However, after transitioning to the ball removal state at timing t2, the number of balls held and the number X of balls held before timing t1 are held without being cleared. Furthermore, while the ball is out, the ball count display section 140 does not display the number of balls held, and a special display of "-" is performed in response to the ball out situation. Furthermore, while the ball is out, the frame control board 740 makes it impossible to calculate the number of balls held by operating the counting button switch 180. Therefore, while the player is out of balls, there is no increase or decrease in the number of balls held, and the adverse effects of not displaying the number of balls held on the number display section 140 of balls held do not occur.

Next, after cutting off the power at timing t3, at timing t4, when the power was turned on, the bulb removal switch 742 was not turned ON, the bulb removal flag was turned OFF, and the RAM clear switch 743 was not turned ON. The RAM clear flag is turned OFF. As a result, after the power is turned on at timing t4, the normal state is maintained as before the power is turned off at timing t1.

In addition, in the ball removal state, the game balls B are removed from the circulation path R to the ball receiving tray 720, and if there are no or few game balls B in the circulation path R, the power is turned on at timing t4. Later, it is necessary to replenish the game balls B through the out ball socket 600a and the safe ball socket 600b.

Furthermore, if it is determined that error A in the circulatory system has been detected before timing t3, the circulatory system The information regarding error A is cleared. However, if the circulatory system error A has not been resolved at timing t4, it is determined that the circulatory system error A has been detected again, and an abnormality notification is executed. Further, if it is determined that a circulation system error B or a non-circulation error C is detected before timing t1, the determination result is stored in the RAM of the frame control board 740, and the timing If the RAM clear switch 743 is not operated when the power is turned on at t2, the information regarding the circulation system error B and the non-circulation error C is held without being cleared. Information regarding such circulation system error B and non-circulation error C may not be cleared if the RAM clear switch 743 is not operated when the power is turned on at timing t4 after the power is turned off at timing t3. I try to keep it. After the power is turned on at timing t4, abnormality notification is executed based on the storage of such determination results.

Further, after the power is turned on at timing t4, the movable body performs an initial operation to check whether the movable body operates normally and to adjust it to the initial position.

FIG. 157 is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine when the pachinko machine shifts to the ball extraction state when the power is turned on. Here, a case will be described in which, after the power is cut off at timing t1, the RAM clear switch 743 is turned on at timing t2, and the ball removal switch 742 is turned on, thereby transitioning to the ball removal state. Note that the process before the power is cut off at timing t1 is the same as that in FIG. 156, so the description will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 157, after the power is cut off at timing t1, the ball removal flag is turned on by turning on the ball removal switch 742 at timing t2 when the power is turned on, and the ball removal state is entered. In this ball extraction state, the above-mentioned ball extraction process is executed, and the game ball B enclosed in the circulation path R of the main body frame 4 is transferred from the ball extraction port 613p of the circulation ball path unit 600 to the outside (ball receiving tray 720 ). Furthermore, at timing t2, the RAM clear flag is turned on by turning on the RAM clear switch 743.

First, after transitioning to the ball extraction state at timing t2, there is a game restriction period in which the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side cannot be progressed, although the game ball B can be fired. That is, after the power is cut off at timing t1, the variable display of the special symbols and the jackpot game are not executed, and even if there is a starting prize, the variable display of the special symbols is not newly started.

In addition, the detection sensors corresponding to the various winning holes are disabled, making it impossible to start the variable display of special symbols or pay out (give) prize balls due to ball entry. As a result, in the ball-less state, the game is stopped and, for example, even if there is a starting prize, there is no payout of game balls, no lottery or variable display regarding special symbols, etc., and the normal game is continued. It is possible to prevent the number of balls from increasing or decreasing from occurring.

Further, after transitioning to the state without a bulb at timing t2, the frame control board 740 determines whether or not errors A and B in the circulation system and error C other than circulation are detected, and detects error A in the circulation system. This makes it possible to determine whether or not it has been detected. On the other hand, it is disabled to determine whether or not a circulation system error B or a non-circulation error C is detected. Here, among errors A in the circulation system, lifting-related errors such as "lifting ball gag error" are related to the operation of the lifting motor 664, although the lifting motor 664 operates when the ball is pulled out. If the lifting motor 664 operates while the above abnormality is still occurring, there is a possibility that the lifting motor 664 etc. will be damaged. By making such a determination possible, damage to the lifting motor 664 etc. can be prevented. can do. Furthermore, among the circulation system errors A, regarding the door opening error, there is a possibility that the door frame 3 may be opened when a ball is pulled out and tampering with the game board 5, etc. may be carried out, and such a determination can be made. By doing so, fraud can be prevented. In addition, as circulation system error B, errors related to the amount of enclosed balls, such as "out of balls at the lifting entrance", "out of balls at the launch ball", "too few game balls", and "too many game balls", can be detected when a ball is removed. When game balls B are pulled out to the outside (ball receiving tray 720), the number of enclosed game balls B decreases, and by disabling such determination, game balls B can be pulled out smoothly. . In addition, as for error C other than circulation, regarding communication errors with the main control board 1310, by disabling such determination, even if the connection between the game board 5 and the main control board 1310 is disconnected. , making it possible for a ball-out condition to occur.

If it is determined that an error A in the circulation system has been detected, an abnormality notification is performed using the effect display device 1600, lamps A and B, speakers, etc. Here, if it is determined that a circulatory system error A has been detected, the circulatory system error will occur when the power is turned off at timing t3, which will be described later, or when the power is turned on at timing t4, which will be described later. Information regarding A has been cleared.

Note that if it is determined that the circulatory system error A has been detected before timing t1, the circulatory system will be shut down when the power is turned off at timing t1 or when the power is turned on at timing t2 The information regarding error A is cleared. However, if the circulatory system error A has not been resolved at timing t2, it is determined that the circulatory system error A has been detected again, and an abnormality notification is executed. Furthermore, if it is determined that a circulation system error B or a non-circulation error C is detected before timing t1, the determination result is stored in the RAM of the frame control board 740; When the RAM clear switch 743 is operated at timing t2 when the power is turned on, information regarding the circulation system error B and the non-circulation error C is cleared.

In addition, the effect display device 1600, lamp A (LED mounted on various decorative boards of the frame decoration member), lamp B (LED mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5), lamp C (function display unit 1400), lamp B (LED mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5), Regarding the LED mounted on the light emitting board), the speaker, and the movable body, at timing t2, the operation for the bulb removal state and the operation for the ram clear state are performed together. Specifically, the performance display device 1600 displays messages such as "Ball removed state is occurring" and "Ram cleared" as the ball removed state display and the ram clear display. Furthermore, the lamps A and B are designed to flash alternately in green and yellow to emit light for the bulb removal state and for the ram clear state (see power-on pattern G in FIG. 152). Regarding the lamp C, all LEDs in the function display unit 1400 are turned on, including the symbol LED that indicates the variation display of the special symbol and the variation result, and the status LED that indicates the gaming state. Furthermore, the speaker outputs voices such as ``Ball removed condition is occurring'' and ``Ram cleared'' as sounds for the bulb removed state and sounds for the ram cleared state.

In the above, the effect display device 1600, lamp A (LED mounted on various decorative boards of the frame decoration member), lamp B (LED mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5), and speakers are bulb-free. During the state operation and the RAM clear state operation, the volume and light amount are kept constant at the maximum output so that the volume and light amount do not change even if the setting adjustment button 204 is operated. In this way, by setting the volume and light intensity to the maximum output, it becomes easier to notice the occurrence of a bulb-out condition or ram clear, and it is possible to prevent attempts to illegally cause a bulb-out condition or ram clear. Further, when the setting adjustment button 204 is operated, although it is possible to accept the operation and adjust the volume and light intensity internally, it is configured so that the operation is not reflected in the volume and light intensity during execution. Such internally adjusted volume and light intensity will be reflected in the running volume and light intensity based on the internally adjusted volume and light intensity when normal operation is restored. It happens. Incidentally, when the setting adjustment button 204 is operated during the operation for the ball removal state, the operation itself may not be accepted. Furthermore, the effect display device 1600 may be configured such that the amount of light changes when the setting adjustment button 204 is operated.

Moreover, after transitioning to the ball extraction state at timing t2, the movable body is prevented from operating. Note that when the power is normally turned on, the movable body performs an initial operation to check whether the movable body operates normally and to adjust it to the initial position. Since the movable body does not operate during this time, the movable body does not perform the initial movement when transitioning to the ball extraction state. In other words, if the movable body is not at the initial position when transitioning to the ball removal state, it remains stopped at that position during the ball removal state.

Further, after transitioning to the bulb removal state at timing t2, a forced output state is set in which a security signal is forcibly output from the external terminal board. Thereby, when the ball is out, a security signal is output to the hole computer, and the hole side can know that the ball is out.

Further, after shifting to the ball extraction state at timing t2, when the hall manager operates the handle 195, the game ball B can be launched. In addition, in the ball release state, it is possible to launch the game ball B, but with the door frame 3 open, the foul shutter 571 is in the closed position, and the game ball B can be launched from above the ball launcher 552b. When the ball is fired, the ball is sent to the circulating ball path unit 600 as a foul ball without being ejected from the foul unit 570 to the outside. Thereby, it is possible to make a state in which there is no game ball B on the ball launch pad 552b. In addition, in this example, in the ball extraction state, in order to make the game ball B disappear on the ball launcher 552b, the hall manager needs to operate the handle 195 to fire the game ball B. The game ball B may be automatically launched without the operation 195.

In addition, after transitioning to the ball withdrawal state at timing t2, the number of game balls B that entered the ball entrance (input hole, out hole) (number of entered balls) and the number of game balls B paid out as prize balls are calculated. The number of pitches (number of balls put out) is not counted. In other words, calculations regarding the ratio of the number of balls paid out to the number of balls entered are made impossible, and are not reflected in the base value. However, after transitioning to the ball extraction state at timing t2, the base value before timing t1 is held without being cleared. Further, while the ball is being removed, the base value is not displayed on the base monitor, and a special display of "-" is performed in response to the ball being removed.

In addition, after transitioning to the ball withdrawal state at timing t2, since the ball entering the winning hole is not detected, the predetermined number of game balls are not paid out as prize balls, and the number of balls held by the player and the number of balls held by the player are There is no addition to the number X. However, after transitioning to the ball removal state at timing t2, the number of balls held and the number X of balls held before timing t1 are held without being cleared. Furthermore, while the ball is out, the ball count display section 140 does not display the number of balls held, and a special display of "-" is performed in response to the ball out situation. Furthermore, while the ball is out, the frame control board 740 makes it impossible to calculate the number of balls held by operating the counting button switch 180. Therefore, while the player is out of balls, there is no increase or decrease in the number of balls held, and the adverse effects of not displaying the number of balls held on the number display section 140 of balls held do not occur.

Next, after cutting off the power at timing t3, at timing t4, when the power was turned on, the bulb removal switch 742 was not turned ON, the bulb removal flag was turned OFF, and the RAM clear switch 743 was not turned ON. The RAM clear flag is turned OFF. As a result, after the power is turned on at timing 4, the normal state is maintained as before the power is turned off at timing t1.

In addition, in the ball removal state, the game balls B are removed from the circulation path R to the ball receiving tray 720, and if there are no or few game balls B in the circulation path R, the power is turned on at timing t4. Later, it is necessary to replenish the game balls B through the out ball socket 600a and the safe ball socket 600b.

Furthermore, if it is determined that error A in the circulatory system has been detected before timing t3, the circulatory system The information regarding error A is cleared. However, if the circulatory system error A has not been resolved at timing t4, it is determined that the circulatory system error A has been detected again, and an abnormality notification is executed. Furthermore, if it is determined that a circulation system error B or a non-circulation error C is detected before timing t1, the determination result is stored in the RAM of the frame control board 740; When the RAM clear switch 743 is operated at timing t2 when the power is turned on, information regarding the circulation system error B and the non-circulation error C is cleared. Therefore, after the power is turned on at timing t4, information regarding the circulation system error B and the non-circulation error C before timing t1 is not held.

Further, after the power is turned on at timing t4, the movable body performs an initial operation to check whether the movable body operates normally and to adjust it to the initial position.

In this example, when the ball removal switch 742 is turned ON and the power is turned on, the ball removal state is set on the condition that the number of balls held is zero. While the ball-less state is occurring, it is impossible to calculate the number of balls held by operating the counting button switch 180, but before transitioning to the ball-less state, the number of balls held is set to zero. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a problem from occurring due to the inability to calculate the number of balls held while the player is out of balls.

In addition, in this example, from when the ball ejecting switch 742 is turned ON when the power is turned on until the power is turned off, the above-mentioned ball ejecting process is executed, and the game balls B are transferred from the circulation path R to the ball receiving tray 720. The lifting motor 664 remains in operation in order to remove the In this regard, regarding the operation of the lifting motor 664, after turning on the ball removal switch 742 when the power is turned on, for example, when 300 game balls B (a specific number) have circulated, or for 10 minutes (a specific time ), the operation may be stopped and the ball extraction state may be terminated. Regarding this specific number and specific time, it is possible to pull out all of the number of game balls B (40 to 60) stored in the circulation route R from the circulation route R to the ball receiving tray 720. It is set so that Thereby, the lifting motor 664 does not remain in an operating state after the start of the ball extraction state, and it is possible to prevent a failure from occurring due to long-term operation. In addition, even after the operation of the lifting motor 664 is stopped, the game cannot be started in the same way as in the ball removal state, and in order to start the game, it is necessary to turn off the power and then turn it on again. There is. Thereby, even after the operation of the lifting motor 664 is stopped, it is possible to know that the ball has been removed. However, after the operation of the lift motor 664 is stopped, the game may be started without having to turn on the power again after cutting off the power.

In addition, in this example, turning on the ball removal switch 742 when the power is turned on shifts to the ball removal state, but if the ball removal switch 742 is turned on during normal operation, the number of balls held will be displayed on the base monitor. is displayed. As a result, the number of balls held can be checked from the back side of the pachinko machine 1 by the number of balls displayed on the base monitor, without checking the number of balls displayed on the number display section 140. can. The base monitor in this example is composed of four 7-segment LEDs, and like the ball count display section 140, it is composed of 6-digit 7-segment LEDs, and all display the number of balls with the same number of digits. (6 digits) is preferable.

Further, in this example, in addition to displaying the base value on the base monitor, when the ball removal switch 742 is turned on during normal times, the number of balls held is displayed on the base monitor. In addition to this, the base value is not displayed on the base monitor while the ball is out, and a special display of "-" is performed in response to the ball out condition. In addition, when the frame control board 740 detects errors A and B in the circulation system or errors C other than circulation in the abnormality judgment on the frame control board 740, the base monitor does not display the base value and displays an error code indicating the type of abnormality. it's shown. The priority order of such displays is as follows: display when a ball is being missed > display of number of balls held > display of error code > base value. For this reason, in this example, it is possible to determine whether or not circulatory system error A has been detected, for example, when a bulb is removed, but even if such an abnormality occurs, the base monitor Instead of displaying an error code, a message is displayed when the ball is being pulled out. As another example, if a circulatory system error A occurs while a ball is being removed, an error code will be displayed on the base monitor, and if a circulatory system error A occurs while a ball is being removed. You may also be notified of this. In this case, for example, a display indicating that the ball is being pulled out and an error code may be alternately displayed. Further, even if the ball removal switch 742 is turned on while the ball removal condition is occurring, the number of balls held is not displayed on the base monitor, and the display during the ball removal condition is executed. Thereby, it is possible to reliably notify that the ball is being thrown out.

[About the magnetic sensor that covers the area around the foul ball sensor]
In the above embodiment, the game ball B used in the pachinko machine 1 is not limited to using a stainless steel ball made of stainless steel, but iron ball SB is used as the game ball B as in the past. It states that you may do so. In this way, when using the iron ball SB as the game ball B, fraud using the magnet M (so-called magnetism) becomes possible, so a conventional magnet sensor (magnetic sensor 1030)/ Fraud detection using radio wave sensors is required. In addition, since there is a possibility that fraudulent acts may be carried out on the circulation route of game balls B on the main body frame 4 side, there are also sensors around the circulation route, especially sensors (launching A magnetic sensor (magnetic sensor 1030) that covers the surroundings of the subtraction sensor 554, foul ball sensor 607, firing front sensor 704, etc.) is required.

In this example, a plurality of magnetic sensors 1030 are provided in the pachinko machine 1, and the magnetic sensors 1030 include a magnetic sensor 1030a provided on the game board 5 side, and a magnetic sensor 1030b provided on the main body frame 4 side. The case where and is provided will be explained. Here, the magnetic sensor 1030a and the magnetic sensor 1030b have the same configuration as the magnetic sensor 1030 described above. For example, the magnetic sensor 1030a and the magnetic sensor 1030b are rectangular in plan view, and are formed in the shape of a rectangular parallelepiped with a height lower than the length of the short side of the rectangle, and are shaped like a gourd made by combining two spheres with a diameter of about 10 cm. It has the same configuration as the magnetic sensor 1030 described above in that it has a detection area DA of .

First, regarding the magnetic sensor 1030a provided on the game board 5 side, it is provided so as to cover various winning openings, and for example, by being provided near the first starting opening 2003, This makes it possible to detect illegal magnetism. Such a magnetic sensor 1030a is connected to the main control board 1310 on the game board 5 side, and the main control board 1310 executes a determination as to whether or not magnetism is detected by the magnetic sensor 1030a.

FIG. 158 is a diagram in which a magnetic sensor is provided around a foul ball sensor. As shown in FIG. 158, the magnetic sensor 1030b provided on the main body frame 4 side is provided so as to cover at least the vicinity of the foul ball sensor 607, and is designed to prevent the detection of unauthorized magnetism toward the foul ball sensor 607. making it possible. Such a magnetic sensor 1030b is connected to the frame control board 740 on the main body frame 4 side, and the frame control board 740 executes a determination as to whether or not magnetism is detected by the magnetic sensor 1030b.

By the way, in the case of the pachinko machine 1 having the circulation route R in the main body frame 4 (gaming machine frame), the area around the foul ball sensor 607 in the circulation ball route unit 600 is particularly susceptible to fraud. First, when the firing subtraction sensor 554 detects that the game ball B is fired from the ball launching pad 552b, the number of balls held by the player is subtracted by one, while the ball is launched from the foul unit 570 to the outside. If the foul ball sensor 607 detects that the ball was sent to the circulation ball path unit 600 as a foul ball without any error, it adds one to the number of balls held by the player. For this reason, for example, it is possible to commit fraud such as attracting the game ball B fired from the ball launcher 552b with the magnet M, guiding it to the foul ball sensor 607, causing it to be detected many times, and adding up the number of balls held. is possible. In addition, if the game ball B that has fallen (supplied) from the ball feeding unit 700 is attracted by the magnet M before being detected by the firing subtraction sensor 554 and thrown into the foul ball sensor 607, the number of balls held will not be subtracted. It is possible to cheat by adding the amount to In this regard, in this example, the magnetic sensor 1030b is provided so as to cover the area around the foul ball sensor 607, so that it detects illegal magnetism toward the foul ball sensor 607 and attempts to illegally add up the number of balls held. can be prevented. This makes it possible to improve reliability regarding the number of balls held.

FIG. 159 is a time chart showing the behavior of a pachinko machine when magnetism is detected by a magnetic sensor. First, a case where magnetism is detected by the magnetic sensor 1030a provided on the game board 5 side will be described with reference to FIG. 159(A).

As shown in FIG. 159(A), when the magnetic sensor 1030a provided on the game board 5 side detects magnetism at timing t1, the magnetic sensor 1030a is executing magnetic anomaly notification A to notify that magnetic field has been detected. Furthermore, it is possible to add to the number of balls held by the frame control board 740 and to settle the number of balls held.

Specifically, when the magnetic sensor 1030a detects magnetism at timing t1, the main control board 1310 sets this as a period in which the game (main game) can proceed. In other words, even if a magnetic abnormality occurs in the winning hole, the fluctuating display of the special symbol can be started when there is a starting winning, and when the fluctuating display of the special symbol stops displaying at the winning symbol. Then, a normal game can be played in which a jackpot game can be started. In addition, the detection sensors corresponding to the various winning holes are enabled, and it is possible to start the variable display of special symbols and pay out (give) prize balls by entering the ball.

Further, when the magnetic sensor 1030a detects magnetism at timing t1, the peripheral control board 1510 uses the effect display device 1600, lamps, speakers, etc. to send a magnetic abnormality alarm A that notifies that the magnetic sensor 1030a has detected magnetism. is running. Thereby, it is possible to grasp that the magnetic sensor 1030a has detected magnetism, and to confirm whether or not fraudulent activity is occurring.

Furthermore, when the magnetic sensor 1030a detects magnetism at timing t1, a security signal is output from the external terminal board. Thereby, when the magnetic sensor 1030a detects magnetism, a security signal is output to the hall computer, and the hall side can know that the magnetic sensor 1030a has detected magnetism.

Further, when the magnetic sensor 1030a detects magnetism at timing t1, the frame control board 740 allows the game ball to be launched into the game area 5a when the player operates the handle 195. In addition, when the frame control board 740 detects a ball entering the prize opening, it is possible to pay out a predetermined number of game balls as prize balls, and to pay out a predetermined number of game balls as prize balls by the number of game balls that are paid out as prize balls. It is possible to add the number of balls held by the player or the number of balls held by the player X. Furthermore, the frame control board 740 allows the number of balls held to be calculated by operating the counting button switch 180.

In this example, the magnetic abnormality notification A is assumed to end when a predetermined time (for example, 3 minutes) has elapsed since the magnetic sensor 1030a detected magnetism at timing t1. However, as another example, the magnetic abnormality notification A may be terminated by turning on the power again after turning off the power. This makes it possible to reliably recognize that the magnetic sensor 1030a has detected magnetism.

In addition, in this example, when the magnetic sensor 1030a detects magnetism at timing t1, the main control board 1310 sets the period in which the game (main game) can be progressed; It may also be a period during which it is impossible to do so. At this time, the detection sensors corresponding to the various winning holes are disabled, making it impossible to start the variable display of special symbols or pay out (give) prize balls due to ball entry. Thereby, after the magnetic sensor 1030a detects magnetism, it is possible to prevent illegal games from being played until it is confirmed whether or not illegal acts are being performed.

Next, a case where magnetism is detected by the magnetic sensor 1030b provided on the main body frame 4 side will be described with reference to FIG. 159(B).

As shown in FIG. 159(B), when the magnetic sensor 1030b provided on the main body frame 4 side detects magnetism at timing t1, the magnetic sensor 1030b is executing magnetic anomaly notification B to notify that magnetic field has been detected. On the other hand, although the frame control board 740 allows the game ball B to be fired and added to the number of balls held, it is disabled to calculate the number of balls held.

Specifically, when the magnetic sensor 1030b detects magnetism at timing t1, the main control board 1310 sets this as a period in which the game (main game) can proceed. In other words, even if a magnetic abnormality occurs with respect to the foul ball sensor 607, the variable display of the special symbol can be started when there is a winning start, and the variable display of the special symbol will stop and display at the winning symbol. A normal game can be played in which a jackpot game can be started when the player wins the game. In addition, the detection sensors corresponding to the various winning holes are enabled, and it is possible to start the variable display of special symbols and pay out (give) prize balls by entering the ball.

Further, when the magnetic sensor 1030b detects magnetism at timing t1, the peripheral control board 1510 uses the effect display device 1600, lamps, speakers, etc. to send a magnetic abnormality alarm B that notifies that the magnetic sensor 1030a has detected magnetism. is running. Thereby, it is possible to grasp that the magnetic sensor 1030b has detected magnetism, and to confirm whether or not fraudulent activity is being performed. Further, by changing the magnetic abnormality notification depending on whether the magnetic sensor 1030a or the magnetic sensor 1030b detects the magnetism, it is possible to know in which region the magnetism is detected.

Furthermore, when the magnetic sensor 1030b detects magnetism at timing t1, a security signal is output from the external terminal board. Thereby, when the magnetic sensor 1030b detects magnetism, a security signal is output to the hall computer, and the hall side can know that the magnetic sensor 1030b has detected magnetism.

Further, when the magnetic sensor 1030b detects magnetism at timing t1, the frame control board 740 allows the game ball to be launched into the game area 5a when the player operates the handle 195. In addition, when the frame control board 740 detects a ball entering the prize opening, it is possible to pay out a predetermined number of game balls as prize balls, and the number of game balls paid out as prize balls is equal to the number of game balls paid out as prize balls. It is possible to add the number of balls held by the player or the number of balls held by the player X.

Furthermore, when the magnetic sensor 1030b detects magnetism at timing t1, the frame control board 740 makes it impossible to calculate the number of balls held by operating the counting button switch 180. In this way, if magnetism is detected for the foul ball sensor 607, it is possible to increase or decrease the number of balls held, but it is not possible to calculate the number of balls held, so it is possible to determine whether the number of balls held has been added fraudulently. Until this is confirmed, attempts to fraudulently calculate the number of balls held can be prevented.

In this example, the magnetic abnormality notification B is assumed to end when a predetermined time (for example, 3 minutes) has elapsed since the magnetic sensor 1030b detected magnetism at timing t1. However, as another example, the magnetic anomaly notification B may be terminated by turning on the power again after turning off the power. This makes it possible to reliably recognize that the magnetic sensor 1030b has detected magnetism. Further, the members used for the notification may be different between when the magnetic abnormality notification A is executed and when the magnetic abnormality notification B is executed, and the conditions for terminating the notification may be different.

In addition, in this example, when the magnetic sensor 1030b detects magnetism at timing t1, the main control board 1310 sets the period in which the game (main game) can be progressed; It may also be a period during which it is impossible to do so. At this time, the detection sensors corresponding to the various winning holes are disabled, making it impossible to start the variable display of special symbols or pay out (give) prize balls due to ball entry. Thereby, after the magnetic sensor 1030b detects magnetism, it is possible to prevent illegal games from being played until it is confirmed whether or not illegal acts are being performed.

As described above, when the magnetic sensor 1030a on the game board 5 side detects magnetism, the magnetic abnormality notification A is executed, but during the execution of the magnetic abnormality notification A, the game ( It is possible to implement restrictions corresponding to the magnetic sensor 1030a on the game board 5 side, such as creating a period during which it is impossible to proceed with the main game. On the other hand, when the magnetic sensor 1030b on the main body frame 4 side detects magnetism, magnetic abnormality notification B is executed, but while magnetic abnormality notification B is being executed, it is impossible to calculate the number of balls held, etc. , it is possible to execute a restriction corresponding to the magnetic sensor 1030b on the main body frame 4 side. When the magnetic sensor 1030b on the main body frame 4 side detects magnetism while the magnetic abnormality notification A is being executed, in addition to the restriction corresponding to the magnetic sensor 1030a on the game board 5 side, the magnetic sensor 1030b on the main body frame 4 side A restriction corresponding to sensor 1030b is implemented. On the other hand, when the magnetic sensor 1030a on the game board 5 side detects magnetism while the magnetic abnormality notification B is being executed, in addition to the restriction corresponding to the magnetic sensor 1030b on the main body frame 4 side, the magnetic Restrictions corresponding to sensor 1030a are implemented. In this way, even if one magnetic sensor detects magnetism and then the other magnetic sensor detects magnetism, the restrictions that are already in place will not be relaxed, which will serve as a deterrent against fraud. can do.

Note that the restriction corresponding to the magnetic sensor 1030b on the main body frame 4 side may be configured to be executed with priority over the restriction corresponding to the magnetic sensor 1030a on the game board 5 side. That is, when the magnetic sensor 1030b on the main body frame 4 side detects magnetism while the magnetic abnormality notification A is being executed, the restriction corresponding to the magnetic sensor 1030a on the game board 5 side is terminated, and the restriction corresponding to the magnetic sensor 1030a on the main body frame 4 side is terminated. The restriction is switched to one corresponding to the magnetic sensor 1030b. On the other hand, when the magnetic sensor 1030a on the game board 5 side detects magnetism while the magnetic abnormality notification B is being executed, the restriction corresponding to the magnetic sensor 1030b on the main body frame 4 side is continued and the game board 5 The restriction corresponding to the side magnetic sensor 1030a is not newly executed. In this way, even if one magnetic sensor detects magnetism and then the other magnetic sensor detects magnetism, priority is given to the restriction corresponding to the magnetic sensor 1030b on the main body frame 4 side, so the foul Fraudulent acts such as using the magnet M around the ball sensor 607 can be reliably prevented.

[About the behavior when operating various switches when the game board is not installed]
Next, in a situation where the game board 5 is not attached to the main body frame 4, the RAM clear switch 741, ball count memory/display clear switch 743, and ball removal switch 742 provided on the frame control board 740 of the main body frame 4 are We will explain what happens when you operate . As mentioned above in detail, the frame control board 740 includes a RAM clear switch 741 for erasing information stored in the RAM (RAM clear), and a RAM clear switch 741 for clearing the number of balls held by the player stored in the RAM, etc. A ball count memory/display clear switch 743 is used to clear the display on the ball count display section 140 of the door frame 3, and the enclosed game balls B are transferred from the ball outlet 613p of the circulation ball path unit 600 to the outside (ball holder). A ball removal switch 742 is provided for use in removing the ball to the tray 720). These switches are provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 and can be operated by the hall manager.

By the way, the RAM clear switch 741, ball count memory/display clear switch 743, and ball removal switch 742 must be turned on when the power is turned on. It is assumed that it is installed. However, in a situation where the game board 5 is installed, it may be difficult to perform maintenance on the main body frame 4 side, so in a situation where the game board 5 is not installed, it is necessary to disable the ON operation of these switches. In this case, maintenance on the main body frame 4 side cannot be performed sufficiently, and there is a possibility that the reliability and convenience of the pachinko machine 1 will be reduced. For example, in a situation where the game board 5 is not installed, if the ON operation of the ball removal switch 742 is disabled, the game ball B enclosed in the circulation path R is removed to the outside (ball receiving tray 720). Therefore, it may become difficult to inspect the inside of the circulation route R. In addition, if for some reason the power to the game board 5 is cut off while the main body frame 4 continues to be energized, the situation will be the same as if the game board 5 was not attached. If the ON operation of these switches is disabled, sufficient maintenance on the main body frame 4 side cannot be performed, and there is a risk that the reliability and convenience of the Pachinko machine 1 will be reduced. In this regard, in this example, in a situation where the game board 5 is not installed or a situation where the power supply to the game board 5 is cut off while the main body frame 4 continues to be energized, the RAM clear switch 741, the number of balls By enabling the ON operation of the memory/display clear switch 743 and the bulb removal switch 742, maintenance on the main body frame 4 side can be sufficiently performed, and reliability and convenience can be improved. For example, in a situation where the game board 5 is not installed, if the ball removal switch 742 is turned ON when the power is turned on, the game ball B enclosed in the circulation path R is removed to the outside (ball receiving tray 720). This makes it easy to inspect the inside of the circulation route R.

FIG. 160 is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine when various switches are operated when the power is turned on without a game board attached.

FIG. 160(A) shows a case where the RAM clear switch 741 is turned on at timing t1 when the power is turned on in a situation where the game board 5 is not installed. When the RAM clear switch 741 is turned on at timing t1 when the power is turned on, the ON operation of the RAM clear switch 741 is validated and the information stored in the RAM of the frame control board 740 is cleared. In other words, the ON operation of the RAM clear switch 741 is valid regardless of whether or not the game board 5 is attached when the power is turned on. This makes it possible to clear the information stored in the RAM of the frame control board 740 even if the game board 5 is not installed when the power is turned on or the game board 5 is not energized when the power is turned on. After the game board 5 is installed, it is possible to prevent illegal games from being played based on the information before the game board 5 is installed.

Further, among the information stored in the RAM of the frame control board 740, the number of balls held is not cleared and held even if the RAM clear switch 741 is turned on at timing t1 when the power is turned on. The number of balls held can be displayed on the number of balls display section 140 regardless of whether or not the game board 5 is attached when the power is turned on. The number of pitches held can be cleared by turning on the RAM clear switch 741 and the pitch number memory/display clear switch 743 at the same time as the power is turned on at timing t1.

FIG. 160(B) shows a case where the ball count memory/display clear switch 743 is turned on at timing t1 when the power is turned on in a situation where the game board 5 is not installed. If the pitch count memory/display clear switch 743 is turned ON at timing t1 when the power is turned on, the ON operation of the pitch count memory/display clear switch 743 is enabled, and the pitch count memory/display clear switch 743 is turned on and the pitch memory/display clear switch 743 is turned on. Cleared the pitch count. In other words, the pitch number memory/display clear switch 743 makes the ON operation of the pitch number memory/display clear switch 743 valid regardless of whether or not the game board 5 is attached when the power is turned on. As a result, even if the game board 5 is not installed when the power is turned on or the game board 5 is not energized when the power is turned on, the administrator can clear the number of balls held, and the game board 5 This prevents fraudulent calculation of the number of balls held by the player when the player is not connected to the game board 5 or when the game board 5 is not energized when the power is turned on. You can clear the remaining balls, etc.).

FIG. 160(C) shows a case where the ball removal switch 742 is turned on at timing t1 when the power is turned on in a situation where the game board 5 is not installed. When the ball ejecting switch 742 is turned ON at timing t1 when the power is turned on, the ON operation of the ball ejecting switch 742 is made valid, the state shifts to the ball ejecting state, and the game ball B enclosed in the circulation route R is turned on. This allows the ball to be pulled out from the ball outlet 613p of the circulation ball path unit 600 to the outside (ball receiving tray 720). In other words, the ON operation of the ball removal switch 742 is valid regardless of whether or not the game board 5 is attached when the power is turned on. As a result, even if the game board 5 is not installed when the power is turned on or the game board 5 is not energized when the power is turned on, the state shifts to the ball removal state and the game enclosed in the circulation path R The ball B can be taken out to the outside (ball receiving tray 720), and the inside of the circulation route R can be inspected easily.

In addition, during the ball extraction state, if the game board 5 is attached, it is possible to fire the game ball B, but if the game board 5 is not attached or when the power is turned on, the game board 5 is energized. This makes it possible to shoot the game ball B even in a situation where the game ball B is not released. Specifically, in the ball extraction state, the foul shutter 571 is in the closed position by opening the door frame 3, and when the game ball B is launched from the ball launcher 552b, the foul unit 570, the ball is sent to the circulation ball path unit 600 as a foul ball without being launched to the outside. Thereby, even if the game board 5 is not mounted, it is possible to make the game ball B absent on the ball launch pad 552b.

In this example, as a configuration related to the handle 160, a firing control unit is provided that detects the handle touch sensor 162 and the handle rotation sensor 163 and controls the drive of the firing solenoid 553, and the firing control unit is connected to the frame control board. 740. Further, the firing control unit outputs a detection signal to the main control board 1310 and the frame control board 740 when the handle touch sensor 162 detects the player's touch on the handle 160. Then, the main control board 1310 outputs a launch permission signal to the launch control unit when the detection signal is input, and similarly, the frame control board 740 outputs a launch permission signal to the launch control unit when the detection signal is input. It is outputting a launch permission signal to the The launch control unit then detects rotation of the handle 160 by the handle rotation sensor 163 during a period when both the launch permission signal from the main control board 1310 and the launch permission signal from the frame control board 740 are input. At times, the drive of the firing solenoid 553 is controlled to fire the game ball B. In addition, in the main control board 1310, when an error such as stopping the game occurs, a firing permission signal is not outputted to the firing control section, and firing of the game ball B is not permitted. Similarly, in the frame control board 740, when an error related to frame control occurs, a launch permission signal is not output to the launch control unit, and the launch of the game ball B is not permitted.

In the above configuration, when the game board 5 is not installed or the game board 5 is not energized when the power is turned on, the main control board 1310 is not connected and the main control board 1310 outputs a firing permission signal. Can not do it. However, since the firing permission signal from the frame control board 740 can be output, in this example, when the game board 5 is not installed and the ball ejecting switch 742 is turned on when the power is turned on at timing t1, The firing of the game ball B is permitted only by outputting the firing permission signal from the frame control board 740. As a result, even if the game board 5 is not installed or the game board 5 is not energized when the power is turned on, it is possible to launch the game ball B, and there is no game ball B on the ball launcher 552b. can be in a state. As another example, in a situation where the game board 5 is not installed, instead of the firing permission signal from the main control board 1310, the frame control board 740 may output a firing permission signal for the ball extraction state. good. In this case, the firing control unit receives both the firing permission signal from the frame control board 740 and the firing permission signal for the ball extraction state from the frame control board 740. During the period, when the handle rotation sensor 163 detects the rotation of the handle 160, the drive of the firing solenoid 553 is controlled to fire the game ball B. As a result, as described above, even if the game board 5 is not installed or the game board 5 is not energized when the power is turned on, it is possible to launch the game ball B, and the game ball B can be launched onto the ball launch pad 552b. It is possible to create a state in which there is no game ball B.

Further, FIG. 160(D) shows a case where the counting button switch 180 is turned on at timing t1 in a situation where the game board 5 is not installed or in a situation where the game board 5 is not energized after the power is turned on. When the counting button switch 180 is turned ON at timing t1, the ON operation of the counting button switch 180 is made valid, and control is made to a counting permission state in which the number of balls held can be settled. That is, in a situation where the game board 5 is not installed or a situation where the game board 5 is not energized after the power is turned on, the ON operation of the counting button switch 180 is valid. As a result, even if the game board 5 is not installed or the game board 5 is not energized after the power is turned on, the number of balls held can be calculated, and any disadvantage to the player can be prevented. can do.

Note that the counting button switch 180 may be configured as follows as another example depending on the situation when performing maintenance of the main body frame 4.

That is, FIG. 160 (D') shows a case where the counting button switch 180 is turned on after the power is turned on at timing t1 in a situation where the game board 5 is not attached. When the counting button switch 180 is turned ON after the power is turned on at timing t1, the ON operation of the counting button switch 180 is invalidated, and control is performed to a counting prohibited state in which calculation of the number of balls held is prohibited. In other words, if the game board 5 is installed when the power is turned on, the subsequent ON operation of the counting button switch 180 is valid, whereas if the game board 5 is not installed when the power is turned on, the subsequent ON operation of the counting button switch 180 is valid. The ON operation of the counting button switch 180 is disabled. This makes it possible to prevent the number of balls held from being fraudulently calculated while the hall manager is inspecting the game board 5 in a situation where the game board 5 is not installed.

Further, FIG. 160(E) shows a situation in which the game board 5 is installed, and after the power is turned on at timing t1, the game board 5 is removed from the main body frame 4, and the game board 5 is not installed. This is a case where the counting button switch 180 is turned on at timing t2. When the count button switch 180 is turned ON at timing t2, the ON operation of the count button switch 180 is made valid, and control is performed to allow counting in which the number of balls held can be settled. In other words, if the game board 5 is not installed when the power is turned on, the subsequent ON operation of the counting button switch 180 will be invalidated, whereas if the game board 5 is installed when the power is turned on, but the game board 5 is not installed after that. When the board 5 is removed, the ON operation of the counting button switch 180 is valid in a situation where the game board 5 is not attached. As a result, even if a hall manager removes the game board 5 for inspection while the player is playing a game while the game board 5 is attached, the number of balls held can still be calculated. This makes it possible to prevent disadvantages to players.

In addition, when the game board 5 is installed, if the RAM clear switch 741, pitch count memory/display clear switch 743, and ball removal switch 742 are turned on when the power is turned on, or when the counting button switch 180 is turned on after the power is turned on. When operated, the peripheral control board 1510 on the side of the game board 5 uses a member that instructs the operation to display messages indicating that the ram has been cleared, that the number of balls in possession has been cleared, that a state of missing balls has occurred, and that the number of balls in possession has been cleared. A notification is sent to notify that the payment has been made. Here, the members for which the peripheral control board 1510 gives operation instructions include the effect display device 1600, LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5 and the door frame 3, speakers, and the like. However, in a situation where the game board 5 is not installed, even if various switches are turned on, the peripheral control board 1510 cannot perform notification using the members that instruct the operation, and neither of these situations occurs. The problem is that it becomes difficult to know what is going on.

In this regard, in this example, when the RAM clear switch 741, pitch count memory/display clear switch 743, and ball removal switch 742 are turned on when the power is turned on, or when the counting button switch 180 is turned on after the power is turned on, In addition to the members that the peripheral control board 1510 on the game board 5 side instructs to operate, the frame control board 740 on the main body frame 4 side uses members to instruct the actions, respectively, to indicate that the ram has been cleared, the number of balls held has been cleared, etc. Notifications are made to the effect that a ball-less situation has occurred and to the effect that the number of balls held has been calculated. Here, the members for which the frame control board 740 instructs the operation include the base monitor, the ball count display section 140, the LED built in the counting button switch 180, and the like. For example, when the RAM clear switch 741, pitch count memory/display clear switch 743, and ball removal switch 742 are turned on when the power is turned on, the corresponding displays are executed on the pitch count display section 140. Further, when the bulb removal switch 742 is turned on when the power is turned on, a display indicating that the bulb removal condition is occurring is also displayed on the base monitor. Further, the LED of the counting button switch 180 is designed to indicate whether or not the number of balls held can be settled, and the status of settlement according to the operation of the counting button switch 180. Therefore, even in a situation where the game board 5 is not installed, when various switches are turned on, the frame control board 740 can issue notifications using members that command the operation. It becomes clear whether a situation has occurred, and confusion for the hall manager can be avoided.

Although the present invention has been described above with reference to preferred embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various improvements can be made without departing from the gist of the present invention, as shown below. and design changes are possible.

In other words, in the above embodiment, the gaming machine is applied to the pachinko machine 1 or the slot machine, but the invention is not limited to this, and the game machine may be a pachislot machine or a game that is a combination of a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine. The present invention may also be applied to other machines, and even in this case, the same effects as described above can be achieved.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 is applied to a so-called enclosed type game machine in which the player does not touch the game ball B, or a game machine called a managed game machine. The present invention is not limited to, and may be applied to a gaming machine in which a player can touch the game ball B, and even in this case, the same effects as described above can be achieved. In this gaming machine, for example, a game ball stored in a tray of a door frame is driven into a game area of a game board by a player's operation, and the driven game ball is placed within the game area. An example of such a pachinko machine is a pachinko machine that pays out a predetermined number of game balls corresponding to the winning hole into a tray in a door frame when the game balls are accepted into the winning hole.

1 Pachinko machine 2 Outer frame 3 Door frame 4 Main body frame 5 Game board 5a Game area 100 Door frame body 102 Projection 102a Guide surface 550 Ball firing unit (ball firing means)
570 foul unit (ball circulation means)
600 Circulating ball path unit (ball circulating means)
650 Ball lifting unit (ball circulation means)
681 Kuma cassette (removable unit)
681b Connection hole 681c Positioning hole 686 Kuma motor base (locking means, locking piece)
686b Locating pin (insert)
692 Rotating connection part (insert body)
693 Cassette pressing piece (pressing piece)
694 Nailatch (fixing means)
695 Spring 700 Ball feeding unit (ball circulating means)

Claims (1)

A game board having a plurality of winning holes is provided, a symbol variation game is performed based on a ball entering a starting hole provided on the game board, and a predetermined winning game is executed when the result of the symbol variation game is a win. In gaming machines,
a prize ball awarding means for awarding a prize ball based on winnings in the entry prize slot;
difference ball determination means for determining whether or not the difference ball number for a predetermined period has reached a specific value;
a game control means for controlling the progress of the game;
a notification means for making a predetermined notification;
Prepare,
The difference ball is the difference between a first count value counted based on the game balls consumed in the game and a second count value counted based on the prize balls,
The specific value is a value preset based on a difference when at least the second count value is larger than the first count value,
The game control means controls subsequent games in a suppressed manner when the difference ball determining means determines that the difference ball has reached the specific value,
When the difference ball reaches the specific value and is controlled in the suppression mode, it is possible to perform post-suppression notification regarding the fact that the ball is controlled in the suppression mode,
A gaming machine characterized in that the post-suppression notification changes a notification mode when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

Images